Мануал ниссан ноут е пауэр

Описание: Описание конструкции кузова (размеры, геометрия, развал, схождение), примеры правки кузова. Расшифровка номера кузова, силовой установки, краски. Список устанавливаемого оборудования. Описание электрооборудование e-power. Проверка напряжения высоковольтной цепи. Отключение высоковольтной батареи.
Книга будет полезна обладателям автомобиля Nissan Note E-Power в кузове SHE12 и HE12.

Год выпуска: 2019
Жанр: Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и ТО
Формат: PDF
Количество страниц: 147
Качество: Распознанный текст с ошибками (OCR)
Язык авто-книги : Японский

Внимание! Нажимая на ссылку «скачать» Вы обязуетесь, после ознакомления, удалить скаченный файл со своего компьютера.
Всё содержимое сайта autosoftos.com взято из свободных источников, и также свободно распространяется.
Если это Вы являетесь автором данного материала, то, пожалуйста, свяжитесь с нами, для того чтобы обеспечить пользователям, приятную и удобную альтернативу, после ознакомления, покупки качественного «оригинала» непосредственно от издателя. Администрация сайта не несёт никакой ответственности за противоправные действия, и какой либо ущерб, понесённый правообладателями.

Название: Автомобиль Nissan Note E-Power Four
Автор: Коллектив авторов
Издательство: Cognivision
Жанр: Руководство по эксплуатации, ремонту и ТО
Год издания: 2019
Страниц: 147
Язык: Японский
Формат: PDF
Размер: 101 Мб

Описание конструкции кузова (размеры, геометрия, развал, схождение), примеры правки кузова. Расшифровка номера кузова, силовой установки, краски. Список устанавливаемого оборудования. Описание электрооборудование e-power. Проверка напряжения высоковольтной цепи. Отключение высоковольтной батареи.
Книга будет полезна обладателям автомобиля Nissan Note E-Power в кузове SHE12 и HE12.

ENGINE

SECTION

ACC

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

A

ACC

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 3
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM …………… 3

Removal and Installation …………………………………… 3
Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 3

F

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………. 5

G

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………… 5

H

Accelerator Control …………………………………………… 5

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 3

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ACC-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009452281

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

ACC-2

2014 Note

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015312

ACC

C

D

E

F

G
JSBIA1087GB

1.

Accelerator pedal

2. Brake pedal bracket

A.

H

Locating hook

B. Locating pin

I

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009443948

REMOVAL
1.
2.

J

Disconnect harness connector (A) from the accelerator pedal.
Remove bolts (B) and accelerator pedal (1).
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble accelerator pedal.
• Do not drop or impact accelerator pedal.
• Do not expose accelerator pedal to water.

K

L

M
ALBIA1149ZZ

INSTALLATION

N

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Insert locating pin into brake pedal bracket to position accelerator pedal.
• Perform accelerator pedal inspection. Refer to ACC-3, «Inspection».

Inspection

O
INFOID:0000000009443949

P

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Revision: April 2013

ACC-3

2014 Note

ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Accelerator pedal stroke (A) : Refer to ACC-5, «Accelerator Control».

ALBIA1151ZZ

• Check the accelerator pedal height.
Accelerator pedal height

: Refer to ACC-5, «Accelerator Control».

CAUTION:
• Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected,
perform “ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING”. Refer to EC-113, «Work Procedure».
• The accelerator pedal should return smoothly to the fully released position.

Revision: April 2013

ACC-4

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control

INFOID:0000000009443950

ACC

Unit: mm (in)

C

D

E

ALBIA1151ZZ

Accelerator pedal stroke (A)

49.8 — 52.6 (1.96 — 2.07)

Accelerator pedal height

113.0 — 123.0 (4.45 — 4.84)

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ACC-5

2014 Note

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

SECTION

AV

AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 23

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 5
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 5

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….23

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 25

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 5
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 5

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 25

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 6

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ………………………….. 26

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 6
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 6
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 7
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 7
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 7
Audio unit ………………………………………………………… 7
Speaker …………………………………………………………… 7
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder
…… 8

AUDIO UNIT ………………………………………………………25
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure …………………..25
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..26
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..28

AUDIO SYSTEM ……………………………………….. 30

I

J

K

Symptom Table ……………………………………………….30

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION …………… 32
Description ………………………………………………………32

L

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 33

System Description …………………………………………. 10

Exploded View …………………………………………………33
Removal and Installation …………………………………..33

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) …………….11
Diagnosis Description ……………………………………… 11
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………… 11

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ………………………….. 34

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 14

REAR DOOR SPEAKER ……………………………. 35

M

AV

Removal and Installation …………………………………..34
O

Removal and Installation …………………………………..35

Reference Value …………………………………………….. 14

ROD ANTENNA ………………………………………… 36

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 16

Exploded View …………………………………………………36
Removal and Installation …………………………………..36

BASE AUDIO ……………………………………………..16

ANTENNA FEEDER …………………………………… 37

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 23
Revision: April 2013

H

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 30

AUDIO UNIT ……………………………………………… 33

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 16

G

REAR DOOR SPEAKER ……………………………. 28

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….10

AUDIO UNIT ……………………………………………….14

F

AV-1

Feeder Layout …………………………………………………37

DISPLAY AUDIO
2014 Note

P

PRECAUTION ……………………………………… 38

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ….. 72

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………. 38

AUDIO UNIT …………………………………………………….. 72
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ………………….. 72

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ……………………………………………………….. 38
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ……………………… 38
Precaution for Harness Repair …………………………. 38
Precaution for Work ………………………………………… 39

PREPARATION ……………………………………. 40
PREPARATION …………………………………………. 40
Special Service Tools ……………………………………… 40
Commercial Service Tools ……………………………….. 40

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………. 41
COMPONENT PARTS ………………………………… 41
Component Parts Location ………………………………. 41
Audio Unit ……………………………………………………… 42
Speaker ………………………………………………………… 42
USB Interface ………………………………………………… 42
Bluetooth Control Unit …………………………………….. 43
Bluetooth Antenna ………………………………………….. 43
Steering Switch ………………………………………………. 43
Microphone ……………………………………………………. 43
Rear View Camera …………………………………………. 44
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder
… 44

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ………………………… 72
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure …………………………………………………………… 72

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER …………………………… 74
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 74

REAR DOOR SPEAKER …………………………….. 76
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 76

BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT …….. 78
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 78

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT… 80
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 80

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT …………………………………………………………. 81
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 81

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ……………….. 83
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 83

STEERING SWITCH …………………………………… 85
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 85

USB CONNECTOR ……………………………………. 87

SYSTEM ……………………………………………………. 46

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 87

System Description …………………………………………. 46

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 88

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) …………… 48
Description …………………………………………………….. 48
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………… 48

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT) ………………………………………………. 53

AUDIO SYSTEM ………………………………………… 88
Symptom Table ………………………………………………. 88

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ……………. 91
Description …………………………………………………….. 91

Diagnosis Description ……………………………………… 53
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 53

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 93

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 54

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 93
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 93

AUDIO UNIT ……………………………………………… 54
Reference Value …………………………………………….. 54

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT …………………. 57
Reference Value …………………………………………….. 57

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………. 59
DISPLAY AUDIO ……………………………………….. 59
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 59

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 70
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ……… 70
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 70

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 72
Revision: April 2013

AUDIO UNIT ……………………………………………… 93

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER …………………………… 94
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 94

REAR DOOR SPEAKER …………………………….. 95
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 95

USB INTERFACE ………………………………………. 96
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 96

REAR VIEW CAMERA ……………………………….. 97
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 97

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT …………………. 98
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 98

BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA ………………………….. 99

AV-2

2014 Note

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 99

NAVIGATION SYSTEM ……………………………. 121
Wiring Diagram ……………………………………………… 121

STEERING SWITCH …………………………………. 100
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 100

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………… 132

MICROPHONE …………………………………………. 101

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …… 132

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 101

ROD ANTENNA ……………………………………….. 102
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 102
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 102

ANTENNA FEEDER ………………………………….. 103
Feeder Layout ………………………………………………. 103

NAVIGATION
PRECAUTION …………………………………….. 104
PRECAUTIONS ………………………………………… 104
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ……………………………………………………… 104
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis …………………….. 104
Precaution for Harness Repair ………………………… 104
Precaution for Work ………………………………………. 105

PREPARATION ………………………………….. 106
PREPARATION ………………………………………… 106
Special Service Tools …………………………………….. 106
Commercial Service Tools ……………………………… 106

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………… 107

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ……………. 134
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT ……………………………………………… 134
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT : Description …………………………. 134
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ………………….. 134
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) …………… 134
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description ……………………………………………………….. 135
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
Procedure …………………………………………………….. 135
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List ………………………………………………… 136

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ………………….. 137
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 137
Diagnosis Procedure …………………………………….. 137
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 138
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 139

U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………. 140

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 140

U122F AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………. 141
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 141

U1244 GPS ANTENNA …………………………….. 142
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 142
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 142

L

M

U1263 USB ……………………………………………… 143 AV

System Description ……………………………………….. 111

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 143
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 143

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 115

U1264 ANTENNA AMP. ……………………………. 144

O

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 144
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 144

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ……………. 145
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 145
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 145

AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………………….. 117
Reference Value …………………………………………… 117
DTC Index ……………………………………………………. 120

U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT ……………………… 146

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………… 121

U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT ……………………… 147

Revision: April 2013

D

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ………………….. 138

Component Parts Location ……………………………… 107
AV Control Unit …………………………………………….. 107
Speaker ……………………………………………………….. 108
USB Interface and AUX In Jack ………………………. 108
Steering Switch …………………………………………….. 109
Microphone ………………………………………………….. 109
Rear View Camera ………………………………………… 109
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder
.. 109
GPS Antenna ……………………………………………….. 110
SD Card ………………………………………………………. 110

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………… 117

C

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………. 137

U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………. 139

Description …………………………………………………… 115
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………. 115
CONSULT Function ………………………………………. 116

B

Work Flow …………………………………………………….. 132

COMPONENT PARTS ………………………………. 107

SYSTEM ………………………………………………….. 111

A

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 146

AV-3

2014 Note

P

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..147

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………… 166

U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………. 148

MULTI AV SYSTEM ………………………………….. 166

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..148

U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………. 149
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..149

U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ………….. 150
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..150
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………150

U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE ………….. 151

Symptom Table …………………………………………….. 166

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION …………… 169
Description …………………………………………………… 169

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 178
AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………………….. 178
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 178

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..151
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………151

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ………………………….. 179

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ……………………….. 152

REAR DOOR SPEAKER ……………………………. 180

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..152

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 180

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT … 153

USB INTERFACE ……………………………………… 181

AV CONTROL UNIT ………………………………………….153
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ……….153

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER …………………………. 154
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………154

REAR DOOR SPEAKER …………………………… 156
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………156

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 179

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 181

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ………………………….. 182
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 182

STEERING SWITCH ………………………………….. 183
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 183

MICROPHONE …………………………………………. 184
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 184

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ……………………………………………………….. 158

REAR VIEW CAMERA ………………………………. 185

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………158

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 185

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ……………… 160

GPS ANTENNA ………………………………………… 186

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………160

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 186

STEERING SWITCH …………………………………. 162

ROD ANTENNA ………………………………………… 187

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………162

Exploded View ……………………………………………… 187
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 187

USB CONNECTOR …………………………………… 164
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………164

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK …………………………. 165

ANTENNA FEEDER ………………………………….. 188
Feeder Layout ………………………………………………. 188

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………165

Revision: April 2013

AV-4

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[BASE AUDIO]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009640319

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009640320

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component K
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
L
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
M
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
AV
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
O
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
P

Revision: April 2013

AV-5

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[BASE AUDIO]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640321

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640322

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

AV-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009509282

B

C

D

E

F
AWNIA3058ZZ

No.

Component

1.

Rod antenna

2.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

3.

Rear door speaker RH

4.

Front door speaker RH

5.

Front door speaker LH

6.

Rear door speaker LH

7.

Audio unit

G

Function
Refer to AV-8, «Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder».

H

Refer to AV-7, «Speaker».

I

Refer to AV-7, «Audio unit».

J

Audio unit

INFOID:0000000009509278

K

DESCRIPTION
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD player, and auxiliary input jack
are integrated into the audio unit.
• The audio unit supports CD-R/CD-RW and provides the playback
of MP3/WMA music files.

L

M

AV
JSNIA5416ZZ

Speaker

INFOID:0000000009509279

O

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-7

P

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and
low range sounds.

[BASE AUDIO]

JPNIA1454ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear doors.
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and
low range sounds.

JPNIA1454ZZ

Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder

INFOID:0000000009509280

RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into
the antenna base.

AWNIA3059GB

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

Revision: April 2013

AV-8

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
AWNIA3114ZZ

1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M106

3.

M351

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-9

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
System Description

INFOID:0000000009460105

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ALNIA1522GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Antenna amp.
• Rod antenna
When the audio system is on, AM/FM signals received by the rod antenna are amplified by the antenna amp.
and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the front door speakers and rear door
speakers.
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.

SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner’s Manual for operating instructions.

Revision: April 2013

AV-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)

A

Diagnosis Description

INFOID:0000000009460106

The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode

B

Description

Hardware/Software Versions

The following information is available for the audio unit:
• hardware version.
• software version.
• EQ pin info.

Speaker Channel Check

The connection of the speakers to the audio unit can be confirmed.

Communication Diagnosis

The AV communication (M-CAN) message history can be monitored.

On Board Diagnosis Function

C

D

INFOID:0000000009460107

E

METHOD OF STARTING
F

Hardware/Software Versions and Speaker Channel Check
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the preset 1 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise 30 clicks or more.

G

H

I

AWNIA3042ZZ

4.

Initially, all display segments will be illuminated.

J

K

L

M

ALNIA1382GB

5.

AV

To exit hardware/software versions and speaker channel check, turn the ignition OFF.

Communication Diagnosis
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-11

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
3. While pressing the preset 6 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise 30 clicks or more.

[BASE AUDIO]

ALNIA1516ZZ

4.

Initially, the communication diagnosis mode is displayed.

ALNIA1387GB

5.

To exit communication diagnosis, turn the ignition OFF.

SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
Hardware/Software Versions
1. Press the DISP button to enter versions display, and the audio
head unit software version is displayed.

ALNIA1383GB

2. With each additional press of the DISP button, the following information is available:
HARD V###### (hardware version)
EEP V###### (EEPROM version)
@@@@ EQ1-4 # (EQ pin info)
If an EQ error is present, INVALID EQ is displayed
3. Hold the DISP button down to return to all display segments screen.
Speaker Channel Check

Revision: April 2013

AV-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
1. Press the RPT/DRM button to enter speaker channel check, and
the front left tweeter (front tweeter LH) is displayed.

[BASE AUDIO]
A

B

C
ALNIA1384GB

D

2.
3.

With each additional press of the RPT/DRM button, the following information is available:
FR RIGHT TWEETER (front tweeter RH)
FR RIGHT (front door speaker RH)
RR RIGHT (rear speaker RH)
RR LEFT (rear speaker LH)
FR LEFT (front door speaker LH)
Hold the RPT/DRM button down to return to all display segments screen.

E

F

Communication Diagnosis
1. Press the DISP button, and the M-CAN message transmission
error history screen is displayed.

G

H

I

ALNIA1386GB

2.
3.
4.

5.

J

Press the DISP button again, and the TEL $$ nn (CMF message reception error history from M-CAN TEL)
screen is displayed.
K
Press the DISP button again, and the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication history) screen is displayed. To retain the M-CAN message communication history and return to the communication diagnosis mode screen, press the DISP button.
L
To proceed to the M-CAN message communication history deletion screen, press the SEEK/TRACK
button. The REC DEL-NO? (selection of M-CAN message communication history deletion) screen is displayed. To cancel M-CAN message communication history deletion, wait 6 seconds and you will be
returned to the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication history) screen. To proceed M
with M-CAN message communication history deletion, press the SEEK/TRACK
button again.
The REC [email protected] (selection of M-CAN message communication history deletion) screen is displayed. To cancel M-CAN message communication history deletion, press the SEEK/TRACK
button AV
and you will be returned to the REC DEL-NO? (selection of M-CAN message communication history deletion) screen. To proceed with M-CAN message communication history deletion, wait 6 seconds and the
communication history deletion will be executed. After the communication history deletion has been executed, you will be returned to the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication history) O
screen. To return to the communication diagnosis mode screen, press the DISP button.
P

Revision: April 2013

AV-13

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[BASE AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009460110

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA3055ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
(Wire color)

Description

Condition

+

–

Signal name

Input/
Output

2
(GR)

3
(P)

Sound signal front speaker
LH

Output

Ignition
switch

ON

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

Sound output.

SKIA0177E

4
(W)

5
(R)

Sound signal rear speaker
LH

Output

ON

Sound output.

SKIA0177E

7
(W)

Ground

ACC power supply

Input

ACC

9
(LG/R)

Ground

Illumination control signal

Input

ON

Headlamps ON.

11
(O)

12
(V)

Output

ON

Sound output.

Sound signal front speaker
RH

—

Battery voltage
Battery voltage

SKIA0177E

Revision: April 2013

AV-14

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[BASE AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

Description

–

Signal name

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

A

B

13
(L)

14
(Y)

Sound signal rear speaker
RH

Output

ON

C

Sound output.

SKIA0177E

D

E
18
(LG)

Ground

Vehicle speed signal

Input

ON

When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH).

F
JSNIA0012GB

19
(Y)

Ground

Battery power supply

21
(B/W)

Ground

23
(B)

Input

OFF

—

Battery voltage

EQ1 Ground

—

ON

—

0V

Ground

EQ3 Ground

—

ON

—

0V

37
(B)

Ground

Antenna amp. ON signal

Output

ON

Audio unit ON, AM or FM
selected.

Battery voltage

38
(B)

Ground

AM/FM antenna signal

Input

ON

Audio unit ON, AM or FM
selected.

5.0 V

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-15

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
BASE AUDIO
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009460112

AANWA0858GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-16

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1704GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-17

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1705GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-18

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1706GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-19

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1707GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-20

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1708GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-21

2014 Note

BASE AUDIO
[BASE AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1709GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-22

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[BASE AUDIO]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009460113

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

AWNIA2404GB

M

DETAILED FLOW

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

AV

Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
O

>> GO TO 2.

2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-30, «Symptom Table».
>> GO TO 3.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
Revision: April 2013

AV-23

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[BASE AUDIO]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 5.

5.FINAL CHECK

Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Was the repair confirmed?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

Revision: April 2013

AV-24

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[BASE AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AUDIO UNIT

B

AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460114

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-16, «Wiring Diagram».
D

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

E
Terminal No.

Signal name

Fuse No.

7

ACC power supply

18 (10A)

19

Battery power supply

29 (15A)

F

Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

H

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M43.
Check voltage between audio unit connector M43 and ground.

I

Audio unit
Connector

Ground

Terminal
7

M43

—

19

Condition
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: OFF

Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

K

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

L

1.
2.
3.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M101.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M101 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector
M101

Ground

Terminal

Continuity

AV

21

—

23

Yes

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-25

P

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460116

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-16, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Audio unit
Connector

Front door speaker
Terminal

Connector

2

11

3.

2
1

D112 (RH)

12

Continuity

1

D12 (LH)

3

M43

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

2
3

M43

11
12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push audio unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M43.
Audio unit connector M43
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-26

Reference value

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2

3

11

12

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-34, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-33, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-27

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460118

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-16, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Audio unit
Connector

Rear door speaker
Terminal

Connector

4

13

3.

2
1

D307 (RH)

14

Continuity

1

D207 (LH)

5

M43

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

4
5

M43

13
14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push audio unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M43.
Audio unit connector M43
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-28

Reference value

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4

5

13

14

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-35, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-33, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-29

2014 Note

AUDIO SYSTEM
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009460123

RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms
The disk cannot be removed.

Check items
Audio unit

No sound from all speakers.

• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-16, «Wiring Diagram».
• Audio unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-25, «AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».

Only a certain speaker (front door speaker
LH, front door speaker RH, rear door
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH) does
not output sound.

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-26, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front door
speaker).
— AV-28, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear door
speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-34, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-35, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-11, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise comes out from all speakers.

Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-11, «On Board Diagnosis Function».

Noise comes out only from a certain speaker (front door speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, rear door
speaker RH).

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-26, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front door
speaker).
— AV-28, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear door
speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and looseness).
Refer to:
— AV-34, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-35, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-11, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise is mixed with radio only (when the vehicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
roads)

Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-37, «Feeder Layout».

No sound comes out or the level of the
sound is low.

Noise is mixed with audio.

Revision: April 2013

Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-11, «On Board Diagnosis Function».

AV-30

2014 Note

AUDIO SYSTEM
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptoms

Check items

Probable malfunction location

No radio reception or poor reception.

• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc• Any radio station cannot be received or
tion.
poor reception is caused even after movRefer to AV-14, «Reference Value».
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no obRefer to AV-37, «Feeder Layout».
stacles generating external noises).

Buzz/rattle sound from speaker

The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usually something nearby the speaker is causing the buzz/rattle.

Refer to «SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS» in the appropriate interior trim section.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-31

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[BASE AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description

INFOID:0000000009460124

RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.

Possible cause

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.

The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.

• Ignition components
• Fuel pump condenser

A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches.

• Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction

The noise occurs when various motors are operating.

• Motor case ground
• Motor

The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.

• Rear defogger coil malfunction
• Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line

A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
it is vibrating excessively.

• Ground wire of body parts
• Ground due to improper part installation
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

Revision: April 2013

AV-32

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[BASE AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009640309

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWNIA3121ZZ

1. Audio unit bracket (LH)

2.

Audio unit

3.

Audio unit bracket (RH)

L

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640310

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

K

M

Remove the negative battery cable. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the audio unit screws.
Partially remove the audio unit to gain access to the harness connectors.
Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
Remove the audio unit bracket screws from each side of the audio unit (if necessary).

AV

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

P

AV-33

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640311

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker.
Remove the front door speaker screws (A).
Remove the front door speaker (1).

AWNIA3062ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-34

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[BASE AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640312

REMOVAL

B

1.
2.
3.
4.

C

Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker.
Remove the rear door speaker screws (A).
Remove the rear door speaker (1).

D

E

F
AWNIA3089ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-35

2014 Note

ROD ANTENNA
[BASE AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ROD ANTENNA
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009667865

AWNIA3124ZZ

1. Antenna rod

2. Antenna base

A. Antenna nut

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009667866

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Lower the rear portion of the headlining. Refer to INT-29, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the antenna (satellite radio model shown).
Remove the antenna nut (A) and remove the antenna.

AWNIA3115ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
If the antenna nut is tightened looser than the specified torque this will lower the sensitivity of the
antenna. If the antenna nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque this will deform the roof
panel.

Revision: April 2013

AV-36

2014 Note

ANTENNA FEEDER
[BASE AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ANTENNA FEEDER

A

Feeder Layout

INFOID:0000000009460134

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWNIA3114ZZ

1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M106

3.

M351

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-37

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009640323

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009640324

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.

Precaution for Harness Repair

INFOID:0000000009640325

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: April 2013

AV-38

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

[DISPLAY AUDIO]
A

B

C
PKIA0307E

D

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009640326

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-39

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640327

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640328

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

AV-40

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009509283

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWNIA3091ZZ

A. Luggage side lower finisher (RH) removed
No.

B. Front of headliner

Rod antenna

2.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

C. Center of back door

L

Component

1.

Function
Refer to AV-44, «Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder».

3.

Rear door speaker RH

4.

Front door speaker RH

5.

Front door speaker LH

6.

Rear door speaker LH

7.

Audio unit

Refer to AV-42, «Audio Unit».

8.

Steering wheel audio control switches

Refer to AV-43, «Steering Switch».

9.

USB interface

Refer to AV-42, «USB Interface».

10.

Bluetooth® control unit

Refer to AV-43, «Bluetooth Control Unit».

11.

Bluetooth® antenna

Refer to AV-43, «Bluetooth Antenna».

12.

Microphone

Refer to AV-43, «Microphone».

13.

Rear view camera

Refer to AV-44, «Rear View Camera».

Revision: April 2013

K

M

AV
Refer to AV-42, «Speaker».

O

AV-41

P

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Audio Unit

INFOID:0000000009509284

Description
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive, auxiliary input jack, and
camera controller are integrated into the audio unit.
• The display can show audio status and rear view monitor images.
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the
separate USB connector.

JSNIA4722ZZ

Speaker

INFOID:0000000009509285

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors.
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and
low range sounds.

JPNIA1454ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear doors.
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and
low range sounds.

JPNIA1454ZZ

USB Interface

INFOID:0000000009509289

• USB Interface is installed in the console.
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the audio unit.

JPNIA1447ZZ

Revision: April 2013

AV-42

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Bluetooth Control Unit

INFOID:0000000009509286

A

• Inputs the TEL voice signal from Bluetooth® antenna and outputs it
to the audio unit
• Connected to the audio unit via AV communication.

B

C

D
JSNIA4236ZZ

Bluetooth Antenna

INFOID:0000000009509287

Receives the TEL voice signal from cellular phone and outputs it to
the Bluetooth® control unit.

E

F

G

H
JSNIA4237ZZ

Steering Switch

INFOID:0000000009509290

• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
• Switch is connected to the Bluetooth® control unit.

I

J

K

L
JSNIA4329ZZ

Microphone

INFOID:0000000009509288

• The microphone is installed in the roof in front of the map lamp
assembly.
• Power is supplied from the Bluetooth® control unit.

M

AV

O

P
JPNIA1448ZZ

Revision: April 2013

AV-43

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Rear View Camera

INFOID:0000000009509293

• The rear view camera is installed to the back door finisher.
• Power is supplied from the audio unit.

JPNIA1452ZZ

Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder

INFOID:0000000009509291

RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into
the antenna base.

AWNIA3059GB

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

AWNIA3114ZZ

Revision: April 2013

AV-44

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M108

3.

M351

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-45

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
System Description

INFOID:0000000009460150

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA3105GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Steering switches
• USB interface
• Antenna amp.
• Rod antenna
When the audio system is on, AM/FM signals received by the rod antenna are amplified by the antenna amp.
and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the front door speakers and rear door
speakers.
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth® control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone
calls can be sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth®
control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth® control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired
with the Bluetooth® control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to
the cellular telephone operating manual.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
Bluetooth® Control Unit

When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth® control unit will power up. During power up,
the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 seconds. If a phone is present in the vehicle and paired with the Bluetooth® control unit, Nissan Voice Recognition
will then become active. Bluetooth® telephone functions can be turned off using the Nissan Voice Recognition
system.
Revision: April 2013

AV-46

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Steering Switches
When buttons on the steering switches are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio control switch circuit changes, depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth® control unit uses this signal to perform
various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switches:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls

A

B

C

Microphone

The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth®
control unit. The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.

D

Audio Unit

The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.

E

SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner’s Manual for operating instructions.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-47

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
Description

INFOID:0000000009460151

The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode
Self Diagnosis

Confirmation/
Adjustment

Description
• Audio unit diagnosis.
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.

Display Diagnosis

The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar
display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale display.

Vehicle Signals

Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, lights, reverse,
EQ pin, destination and camera type.

Speaker Test

The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.

Error History

The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are
displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.

Camera System

Displayed but not used.

AV COMM Diagnosis

The communication condition of each unit of display audio system can be
monitored.

Delete Unit Connection Log

Erase the connection history of unit and error history.

Initialize Setting

Initializes the audio unit memory.

On Board Diagnosis Function

INFOID:0000000009460152

METHOD OF STARTING
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition ON.
Turn the audio system OFF.
While pressing the preset 1 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. Shifting
from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing
BACK button.

AWNIA3086ZZ

4.

The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diagnosis or Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.

JSNIA0138GB

SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE
Audio Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Select Self Diagnosis.

Revision: April 2013

AV-48

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
[DISPLAY AUDIO]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis.
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection lines are color coded
according to the diagnostic results.

A

B

C

D
AWNIA2832GB

E
Diagnosis results

Unit

Normal

Connection line

Green

Green

Connection malfunction

Gray

Yellow

Unit malfunction 1

Red

Green

F

1: Control unit (audio unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace audio unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is audio unit internal
error. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray.

4.

G

H

Comments of self diagnosis results can be viewed in the diagnosis result screen.
I

J

K
JSNIA1870ZZ

Audio Unit Self Diagnosis Results

L
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red

Screen switch

Control unit

Description

Possible cause

Malfunction is detected in audio unit power
supply and ground circuits.

• Audio unit power supply or ground circuits.
Refer to AV-72, «AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».
• If no malfunction is detected in audio unit
power supply and ground circuits, replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-49

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow
Area with yellow connection lines

Description
When one of the following is detected:

Control unit ⇔ BT HF Unit

• malfunction is detected in Bluetooth®
control unit power supply and ground circuits.
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between audio unit and
Bluetooth® control unit.

Possible cause
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
ground circuits.
Refer to AV-72, «BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».
• AV communication circuits between audio unit and Bluetooth® control unit.

Audio Unit Confirmation/Adjustment
1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.
2. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to
display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK
switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.

AWNIA2631GB

Display Diagnosis

AWNIA2632GB

Vehicle Signals

Revision: April 2013

AV-50

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.

[DISPLAY AUDIO]
A

B

C
AWNIA2633GB

D

Speaker Test
Select Speaker Test to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press
Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones.

E

F

G
AWNIA2634GB

Error History
The self diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self Diagnosis is
selected until the self diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self diagnosis start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
on the error item.

H

I

J

Count up method A

• The counter is set to 40 if an error occurs. 1 is subtracted from the counter if the condition is normal at a next
ignition ON cycle.
• The counter lower limit is 1. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch.
Count up method B

• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the Delete log switch.
Display type of occurrence
frequency

K

L

M

Error history display item

Count up method A

AV communication line, control unit (AV)

Count up method B

Other than the above

AV

O

Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items

Revision: April 2013

AV-51

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Error item
CONTROL UNIT (AV)

Description
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
malfunction is detected.
When one of the following is detected:

AV COMM CIRCUIT

• malfunction is detected in Bluetooth®
control unit power supply and ground circuits.
• malfunction is detected in AV communication circuits between audio unit and
Bluetooth® control unit.

Possible cause
Replace the audio unit if the malfunction
occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation»
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
ground circuits.
Refer to AV-72, «BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».
• AV communication circuits between audio unit and Bluetooth® control unit.

AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between audio unit (master
unit) and Bluetooth® control unit.
• The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected
in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases
by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Status
(Current)

Counter
(Past)

BUS OFF

OK / ???

OK / 0 – 39

C Rx(BTHF-H/U)

OK / ???

OK / 0 – 39

Items

AWNIA2833GB

NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the
audio unit memory (clears the records of the unit that has been
removed).

AWNIA2637GB

Initialize Settings
Deletes data stored from the audio unit.

JSNIA0155GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-52

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
Diagnosis Description

A
INFOID:0000000009460153

The Bluetooth® control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the technician using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis.

B

Bluetooth® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS

C

• Internal control unit failure
• Bluetooth® antenna connection open or shorted
•
•
•
•

Steering wheel audio control switches [
(PHONE/SEND),
Vehicle speed pulse count
Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
Bluetooth® inquiry check

D

(PHONE/END)] stuck closed

E

OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON.
Wait for the Bluetooth® system to complete initialization. This may take up to 20 seconds.

F

3.

Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch
(PHONE/SEND) button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth®
system will begin to play a verbal prompt.

G

H

I
AWNIA3082ZZ

4.

5.

6.
7.

J

While the prompt is playing, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch
(PHONE/END) button until you hear the
“Diagnostics mode” prompt. The Bluetooth® system will sound a
5-second beep.
While the beep is sounding, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch
(PHONE/END) button again until you
hear prompts.
The Bluetooth® system has now entered into the diagnostic
mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the
technician. Refer to AV-53, «Work Flow».
After the failure records are reported, an interactive microphone
test will be performed. Follow the voice prompt. If the microphone test fails, refer to AV-53, «Work Flow».

K

L

M
AWNIA3083ZZ

AV

Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009460154

O
Failure Message

Action

“Internal failure”

Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, «Removal and Installation».

“Bluetooth® antenna open”

1.

Inspect harness connection.

“Bluetooth® antenna shorted”

2.

Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-99, «Removal and Installation».

“Phone/Send for Hands Free System is stuck”

Check steering wheel audio control switches. Refer to AV-85, «Diagnosis Procedure».

“Phone/End for the Hands Free System is stuck”
“Microphone test” (failed interactive test)

Revision: April 2013

1.
2.

Inspect harness between Bluetooth® control unit and microphone.
Replace microphone. Refer to AV-101, «Removal and Installation» .

AV-53

2014 Note

P

AUDIO UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009460155

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA3056ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

–

2
(GR)

3
(P)

Description
Signal name

Sound signal front door
speaker LH

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Output

ON

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

Sound output

SKIB3609E

4
(W)

5
(R)

Sound signal rear door
speaker LH

Output

ON

Sound output

SKIB3609E

Press SOURCE switch
6
(BR)

15
(GR)

Steering switch signal A

Input

ON

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

2.0V

Press

switch

Except above
7
(W)

Ground

ACC power supply

Input

ACC

9
(LG/R)

Ground

Illumination control signal

Input

ON

Revision: April 2013

0V

3.0V
5.0V

—

Battery voltage

Headlamps ON

Battery voltage

AV-54

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

Description

–

Signal name

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

A

B

11
(O)

12
(V)

Sound signal front door
speaker RH

Output

ON

C

Sound output

SKIB3609E

D

E
13
(L)

14
(Y)

Sound signal rear door
speaker RH

Output

ON

Sound output

F
SKIB3609E

16
(V)

15
(GR)

Steering switch signal B

Input

ON

Press

switch

0V

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

Except above

G

2.0V

H

5.0V

I
18
(LG)

Ground

Vehicle speed signal

Input

ON

When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)

J
JSNIA0012GB

19
(Y)

Ground

Battery power supply

20
(B/W)

Ground

Ground

25
(G)

24
(R)

TEL voice signal

Input

OFF

—

Battery voltage

—

ON

—

0V

Input

ON

L

M

During voice guide output
with

K

switch pressed.

AV
SKIB3609E

26
(Shield)

—

TEL voice signal shield

—

—

—

—

31
(SB)

—

AV communication (H)

Input/
Output

—

—

—

32
(LG)

—

AV communication (L)

Input/
Output

—

—

—

33
(B)

Ground

Camera ground

—

ON

—

0V

34
(L)

Ground

Camera power supply

Output

ON

Revision: April 2013

Camera image displayed
Except for above

AV-55

O

P

6.0 V
0V

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

–

35
(Y)

36
(Shield)

Description
Signal name

Camera image signal

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Input

ON

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

Camera image displayed

SKIB2251J

44
(B)

Ground

Camera detection

—

ON

—

0V

46
(B)

Ground

EQ02 Ground

—

ON

—

0V

48
(B/W)

Ground

EQ04 Ground

—

ON

—

0V

50
(Y)

Ground

53
(W)

—

V BUS signal

—

54
(G)

—

USB ground

55
(L)

—

56
(R)

Reverse signal

Input

ON

Selector lever in R (reverse)

Battery voltage

Selector lever in any position other than R (reverse)

0V

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

USB D+ signal

—

—

—

—

—

USB D− signal

—

—

—

—

57
(Shield)

—

USB shield

—

—

—

—

58
(B)

Ground

Antenna amp. ON signal

Output

ON

Audio unit ON, FM-AM selected.

Battery voltage

59
(B)

Ground

AM/FM antenna signal

Input

ON

Audio unit ON, FM-AM selected.

5.0 V

Revision: April 2013

AV-56

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT

A

Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009460156

TERMINAL LAYOUT

B

C

D

AWNIA3057ZZ

E

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
(wire color)

Description

Condition

F
Reference value
(Approx.)

Input/
output

Ignition
switch

Operation

Battery power

Input

OFF

–

Battery voltage

Ground

ACC power

Input

ACC

–

Battery voltage

3
(O)

Ground

IGN power

Input

ON

–

Battery voltage

4
(B)

Ground

Ground

–

ON

–

0V

7
(P)

8
(Shield)

MIC in signal

Input

–

–

–

+

–

1
(Y/G)

Ground

2
(L/Y)

Signal name

G

H

I

J

K
9
(W)

10
(B)

Audio out

Output

ACC
or
ON

Bluetooth® control unit
sends audio signal

L
SKIB3609E

Press SOURCE switch
12
(R)

14
(G)

LAD IN 1

Input

ON

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

2.0V

Press

switch

Except above

13
(P)

14
(G)

LAD IN 2

Input

ON

0V

Press

switch

1.0V

Except above

Revision: April 2013

5.0V

switch

switch

AV-57

AV

3.0V

Press

Press

M

0V

O

P

2.0V
5.0V

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(wire color)
+

Description

–

Signal name

Condition
Input/
output

Ignition
switch

Operation
Press SOURCE switch

17
(BR)

19
(GR)

LAD OUT 1

Output

ON

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

2.0V

switch

Except above

19
(GR)

LAD OUT 2

Output

ON

0V

Press

Press

18
(V)

Reference value
(Approx.)

3.0V
5.0V

Press

switch

0V

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

Except above

2.0V
5.0V

20
(B)

Ground

CONT1 Ground

–

ON

–

0V

22
(B)

Ground

CONT3 Ground

–

ON

–

0V

23
(B)

Ground

CONT4 Ground

–

ON

–

0V

24
(B)

Ground

CONT5 Ground

–

ON

–

0V

27
(B)

Ground

CONT6 Ground

–

ON

–

0V

28
(Y)

Ground

Vehicle speed signal (2pulse)

Input

ON

When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)

PKIA1935E

29
(L)

Ground

33
(SB)

–

34
(LG)

Microphone power

Output

ON

–

5V

AV communication (H)

–

–

–

—

–

AV communication (L)

–

–

–

—

37
(LG)

–

AV communication jumper
(H)

–

–

–

—

38
(LG)

–

AV communication jumper
(H)

–

–

–

—

39
(SB)

–

AV communication jumper
(L)

–

–

–

—

40
(SB)

–

AV communication jumper
(L)

–

–

–

—

41
(B)

–

Bluetooth® antenna

–

–

–

—

42
(Shield)

–

Shield

–

–

–

—

Revision: April 2013

AV-58

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

DISPLAY AUDIO
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009460157

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

AANWA0859GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-59

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANWA0860GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-60

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1710GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-61

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1711GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-62

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1712GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-63

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1713GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-64

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1714GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-65

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1715GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-66

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1716GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-67

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1717GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-68

2014 Note

DISPLAY AUDIO
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1718GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-69

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009460158

OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWNIA2404GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2.

2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-88, «Symptom Table».
>> GO TO 3.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
Revision: April 2013

AV-70

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

A

4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.

B

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.

C

>> GO TO 5.

5.FINAL CHECK

D

Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Was the repair confirmed?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-71

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460159

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

Fuse No.

7

ACC power supply

18 (10A)

19

Battery power supply

29 (15A)

Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M45.
Check voltage between audio unit connector M45 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Ground

Terminal
7

M45

—

19

Condition
Ignition switch: ON
Ignition switch: OFF

Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M40.
Check continuity between audio unit connectors and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

M45

20
44

M40

46

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

48

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure

Revision: April 2013

AV-72

INFOID:0000000009460160

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

A

1.CHECK FUSE
B

Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

Fuse No.

1

Battery power supply

29 (15A)

2

ACC power supply

17 (10A)

3

Ignition signal

5 (10A)

C

D

Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

E

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Ground

Terminal
1

B33

Condition

F

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ignition switch: OFF

2

—

3

Ignition switch: ACC

H
Battery voltage

Ignition switch: ON

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

G

Ground

Terminal

K
Continuity

L

4
20
B33

M

22

—

23

Yes

AV

24
27

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-73

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460161

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Audio unit
Connector

Front door speaker
Terminal

Connector

2

11

3.

2
1

D112 (RH)

12

Continuity

1

D12 (LH)

3

M45

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

2
3

M45

11
12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push audio unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M45.
Audio unit connector M45
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-74

Reference value

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2

3

11

12

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-94, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-75

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460163

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Audio unit
Connector

Rear speaker
Terminal

Connector

4

13

3.

2
1

D307 (RH)

14

Continuity

1

D207 (LH)

5

M45

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

4
5

M45

13
14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push audio unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M45.
Audio unit connector M45
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-76

Reference value

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4

5

13

14

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-95, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-77

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460164

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Bluetooth® control unit

Audio unit

4.

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M40

25

B33

9

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

M40

25

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

2.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Bluetooth® control unit

Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M40

24

B33

10

Continuity
Yes

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Press
switch.
Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M40.

Revision: April 2013

AV-78

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

Audio unit connector M40
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

25

24

Condition

Reference value

B

C

During voice guide output with
switch pressed.

D
SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-79

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460165

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Terminals

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

20
22
B33

23
24
27

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-80

2014 Note

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009592936

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check voltage between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit

D

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M40

50

Condition

(−)

Selector lever in R (reverse)

—

Voltage
(Approx.)

E

F
Battery Voltage

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

G

2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

H

1.
2.
3.

I

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501.
Audio unit

4.

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M40

34

D501

2

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and ground.

K

Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

M40

34

Continuity

Ground

M

3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

AV

Connect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check voltage between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit

O

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M40

34

(−)
—

Condition

Selector lever is in “R”.

Voltage
(Approx.)
6.0 V

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

L

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
1.
2.
3.
4.

J

AV-81

2014 Note

P

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501.
Audio unit

4.

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M40

35

D501

4

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector

Terminal

M40

35

Continuity

Ground

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501.
Audio unit

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M40

33

D501

1

Continuity
Yes

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check signal between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M40

35

(−)

—

Condition

Reference value

Camera image displayed.

SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-97, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

AV-82

2014 Note

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460166

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15.
Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

E

Microphone

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

7
B33

R15

F

2

29

4.

Continuity

1

8

Yes

4

G

Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Terminal
7

B33

D

29

Ground

Continuity

—

No

H

I

Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors.

J

2.CHECK MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.

K

Connect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between microphone connector R15 and ground.
Microphone

L

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

R15

4

(-)

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

5V

M

AV

Is the voltage reading as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

O

Check signal between terminals of Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
P

Revision: April 2013

AV-83

2014 Note

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Bluetooth® control unit connector B33
(+)

(-)

Terminal

Terminal

7

8

Condition

Reference value

Speak into microphone.

PKIB5037J

Were voltage readings as specified?
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-101, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

AV-84

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

STEERING SWITCH

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460167

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch connector M88.
Check resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M88.
Combination switch connector M88
Terminal

Resistance Ω
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

Depress SOURCE switch.
14
17

15

E

1

Depress

switch.

121

Depress

switch.

321

Depress

switch.

723

Depress

switch.

1

Depress

switch.

121

Depress

G

H

I

321

switch.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-100, «Removal and Installation».

J

2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION SWITCH
1.
2.

F

Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and combination switch connector M30.
Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and combination switch connector M30.

K

L
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Combination switch

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

12
B33

M

24

13

M30

31

14

3.

Continuity

Yes

33

AV

Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
O

Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

12
B33

P

13
14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: April 2013

AV-85

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M88 and M30.
Combination switch
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

14
M88

Continuity

24

15

M30

31

17

Yes

33

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».

4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND AUDIO UNIT
1.
2.

Disconnect audio unit connector M45.
Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and audio unit connector M45.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Audio unit

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

17
B33

6

18

M45

16

19

3.

Continuity

Yes

15
®

Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit connector B33 and ground.
Bluetooth® control unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

17
B33

18
19

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-86

2014 Note

USB CONNECTOR
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

USB CONNECTOR

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460168

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and USB interface connector M72.
Check continuity between audio unit connector M44 and USB interface connector M72.
Audio unit
Connector

USB interface
Terminal

M44

4.

Connector

Terminal

53

4

54

1

55

M72

2

56

3

57

5

D

Continuity

F
Yes

G

Check continuity between audio unit connector M44 and ground.
Audio unit
Connector
M44

—

Terminal

E

H
Continuity

I

53

Ground

55

No

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-96, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-87

2014 Note

AUDIO SYSTEM
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009460169

RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms
The disk cannot be removed.

Check items
Audio unit

No sound from all speakers.

• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-59, «Wiring Diagram».
• Audio unit power supply and ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-72, «AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».

Only a certain speaker (front door speaker
LH, front door speaker RH, rear door
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH) does
not output sound.

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-74, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front door
speaker).
— AV-76, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear door
speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-94, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-95, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-48, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise comes out from all speakers.

Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-48, «On Board Diagnosis Function».

Noise comes out only from a certain speaker (front door speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, rear door
speaker RH).

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-74, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front door
speaker).
— AV-76, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear door
speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and looseness).
Refer to:
— AV-94, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-95, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-48, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise is mixed with radio only (when the vehicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
roads)

Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-103, «Feeder Layout».

No sound comes out or the level of the
sound is low.

Noise is mixed with audio.

Revision: April 2013

Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-48, «On Board Diagnosis Function».

AV-88

2014 Note

AUDIO SYSTEM
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptoms

Check items

Probable malfunction location

No radio reception or poor reception.

• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc• Any radio station cannot be received or
tion.
poor reception is caused even after movRefer to AV-54, «Reference Value».
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no obRefer to AV-103, «Feeder Layout».
stacles generating external noises).

Buzz/rattle sound from speaker

The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usually something nearby the speaker is causing the buzz/rattle.

Refer to «SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS» in the appropriate interior trim section.

A

B

C

D

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehicle or the cellular phone.

E

F

Check Compatibility

1.
2.
3.

4.
a.
b.

c.
d.

Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
Symptoms

Check items

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (no connection is displayed on the display at the guide).

Repeat the registration of cellular phone.

Hands-free phone cannot be established.

• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established.
• Hands-free phone operation can be performed, however, voice between each
other cannot be heard during the conversation.

The other party’s voice cannot be heard by
hands-free phone.

Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspection & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.

Originating sound is not heard by the other
party with hands-free phone communication.

Sound operation function is normal.

Revision: April 2013

Probable malfunction location

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

Sound operation function does not work.

AV-89

Malfunction in audio unit.
Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, «Removal and Installation».

O

P

Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-83, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2014 Note

AUDIO SYSTEM
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptoms

Check items

Probable malfunction location

• The voice recognition can be controlled.
• Steering switch’s

,

switch works, but
The system cannot be operated.

Steering switch’s

, and

does not work.
,

,

, and

switches do not work.
All steering switches do not work.

Steering switch malfunction.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-100,
«Removal and Installation».
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-85, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-85, «Diagnosis Procedure».

RELATED TO REAR VIEW CAMERA
Symptoms

Rear view camera is inoperative.

Revision: April 2013

Check items

Probable malfunction location

Reverse signal circuit malfunction.

Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
BCM and audio unit.
Refer to AV-81, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Camera image signal circuit malfunction.

Camera image signal circuit malfunction
between rear view camera and audio unit.
Refer to AV-81, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Rear view camera malfunction.

Replace rear view camera.
Refer to AV-97, «Removal and Installation».

AV-90

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009460170

RELATED TO NOISE

B

The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.

C

D

E

F

Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.

The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.

G

Possible cause
• Ignition components

H

• Fuel pump condenser

A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches.

• Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction

The noise occurs when various motors are operating.

• Motor case ground
• Motor

I

The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.

• Rear defogger coil malfunction
• Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line

A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
it is vibrating excessively.

• Ground wire of body parts
• Ground due to improper part installation
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
Cause and Counter measure

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is
displayed on the display at the guide).

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized
by the in-vehicle phone module.
Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compatibility)” in AV-88, «Symptom Table».
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
• The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

Revision: April 2013

K

L

Symptom

Cannot use hands-free phone.

J

AV-91

2014 Note

M

AV

O

P

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Cause and Counter measure

The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.

Poor sound quality.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

Revision: April 2013

AV-92

2014 Note

AUDIO UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

AUDIO UNIT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009640329

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWNIA3125ZZ

1.

Audio unit bracket (LH)

2.

Audio unit

3.

Audio unit bracket (RH)

L

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640330

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

K

M

Remove the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the audio unit screws.
Partially remove the audio unit to gain access to the harness connectors.
Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
Remove the audio unit bracket screws from each side of the audio unit (if necessary).

AV

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

P

AV-93

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640331

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker.
Remove the front door speaker screws (A).
Remove the front door speaker (1).

AWNIA3062ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-94

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640332

REMOVAL

B

1.
2.
3.
4.

C

Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker.
Remove the rear door speaker screws (A).
Remove the rear door speaker (1).

D

E

F
AWNIA3089ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-95

2014 Note

USB INTERFACE
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

USB INTERFACE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640333

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Release the pawls (A) from the back of the center console
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the USB interface
(1).

AWNIA3069ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-96

2014 Note

REAR VIEW CAMERA
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR VIEW CAMERA

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640334

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from rear view camera.
Remove the nuts (A) from the rear view camera and remove.

C

D

E

F
AWNIA3070ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-97

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640335

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove the luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-32, «LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the Bluetooth® control unit.
Remove the Bluetooth® antenna screws (A) and the Bluetooth®
antenna (1).

AWNIA3095ZZ

4.

Remove the Bluetooth® control unit bracket screws (A) and the
Bluetooth® control unit (1).

AWNIA3122ZZ

5.

Remove the Bluetooth® control unit screws (A) and separate
the Bluetooth® control unit (1) from the bracket (2).

AWNIA3097ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-98

2014 Note

BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640336

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove the luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-32, «LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the Bluetooth® antenna harness connector from the Bluetooth® control unit.
Remove the Bluetooth® antenna screws (A) and the Bluetooth®
antenna (1).

C

D

E

F
AWNIA3095ZZ

G

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-99

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640337

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the steering wheel rear finisher (1) by releasing pawls
(A).

AWNIA3063ZZ

3.

Remove the steering wheel audio control switch screws (A) from
the back of the steering wheel.

AWNIA3064ZZ

4.

Remove the steering wheel audio control switches from the steering wheel.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-100

2014 Note

MICROPHONE
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

MICROPHONE

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640338

REMOVAL
1.
2.

B

Remove the microphone from the headlining by releasing pawls using a suitable tool.
Disconnect the harness connector from microphone and remove.

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-101

2014 Note

ROD ANTENNA
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ROD ANTENNA
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009667930

AWNIA3124ZZ

1. Antenna rod

2. Antenna base

A. Antenna nut

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009667931

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Lower the rear portion of the headlining. Refer to INT-29, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the antenna (satellite radio model shown).
Remove the antenna nut (A) and remove the antenna.

AWNIA3115ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
If the antenna nut is tightened looser than the specified torque this will lower the sensitivity of the
antenna. If the antenna nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque this will deform the roof
panel.

Revision: April 2013

AV-102

2014 Note

ANTENNA FEEDER
[DISPLAY AUDIO]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ANTENNA FEEDER

A

Feeder Layout

INFOID:0000000009460183

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWNIA3114ZZ

1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M108

3.

M351

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-103

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[NAVIGATION]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009640342

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009640343

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.

Precaution for Harness Repair

INFOID:0000000009640344

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

Revision: April 2013

AV-104

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

[NAVIGATION]
A

B

C
PKIA0307E

D

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009640345

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-105

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[NAVIGATION]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640346

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009640347

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

AV-106

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009509296

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWNIA3092ZZ

A. Front of headliner

K

B. Center of back door

L
No.

Component

Function

1.

Rod antenna

2.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

3.

Rear door speaker RH

4.

Front door speaker RH

5.

Front door speaker LH

6.

Rear door speaker LH

7.

AV control unit

Refer to AV-107, «AV Control Unit».

8.

GPS antenna

Refer to AV-110, «GPS Antenna».

9.

Steering wheel audio control switches

Refer to AV-109, «Steering Switch».

10.

USB interface and AUX in jack

Refer to AV-108, «USB Interface and AUX In Jack».

11.

Microphone

Refer to AV-109, «Microphone».

12.

Rear view camera

Refer to AV-109, «Rear View Camera».

Refer to AV-109, «Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder».

AV

Refer to AV-108, «Speaker».

AV Control Unit

O

P

INFOID:0000000009606268

Description
Revision: April 2013

AV-107

M

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• A 5.8-inch QVGA display, an AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD
drive, audio amplifier, Bluetooth® module, USB interface, camera
controller and navigation unit are integrated into the AV control
unit.
• The 5.8-inch display is a high resolution monitor that includes
touch panel functions.
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the
separate USB interface.

[NAVIGATION]

ALNIA1524ZZ

Speaker

INFOID:0000000009606269

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high, mid
and low range sounds.

JPNIA1454ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear doors.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high, mid
and low range sounds.

JPNIA1454ZZ

USB Interface and AUX In Jack

INFOID:0000000009606270

• USB Interface and AUX in jack is installed in the console.
• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interface.
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
through the AUX in jack.

ALNIA1523ZZ

Revision: April 2013

AV-108

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Steering Switch

INFOID:0000000009606271

A

• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
• Switch is connected to the AV control unit.
B

C

D
JSNIA4329ZZ

Microphone

INFOID:0000000009606272

• The microphone is installed in the roof in front of the map lamp
assembly.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.

E

F

G

H
JPNIA1448ZZ

Rear View Camera

INFOID:0000000009606273

• The rear view camera is installed to the back door finisher.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.

I

J

K

L
JPNIA1452ZZ

Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder

INFOID:0000000009606274

M

RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into AV
the antenna base.
O

P

AWNIA3059GB

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

Revision: April 2013

AV-109

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

AWNIA3114ZZ

1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M73

GPS Antenna

3.

M351

INFOID:0000000009509301

• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.

JSNIA3303ZZ

SD Card

INFOID:0000000009509305

• Map data is memorized in the SD card.
• Map data is sent to the AV control unit from the SD slot.

Revision: April 2013

AV-110

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

System Description

INFOID:0000000009460258

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWNIA3101GB

AUDIO SYSTEM

H

Refer to Owner’s Manual for navigation and audio system operating instructions.
Audio function and display are built into AV control unit.
This navigation has the following functions.
• Map data on SD-card
• Full support for playback of music from iPod® and USB device
• High resolution color 5.8-inch display with touch panel function
• FM/AM twin digital tuner
• USB mass storage connection
• Hands-free phone system
iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

I

J

K

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Description
• The navigation system can be operated by control panel of the AV control unit and display (touch panel) of
the AV control unit.
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from AV control unit to front tweeters.
• AV control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehicle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from map SD-card. The vehicle location is displayed
on the AV control unit.

L

M

POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE
AV
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle’s current position according to the following three
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor
O
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor)
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD-card (map-matching), and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate P
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by
map-matching.

Revision: April 2013

AV-111

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance correction function has been adopted.
• Travel direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS information). They have both advantages and disadvantages.
Type

Advantage

[NAVIGATION]

SEL684V

Disadvantage

Gyroscope
(angular velocity sensor)

Can detect the vehicle’s turning angle quite
accurately.

Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is
driven for long distances without stopping.

GPS antenna
(GPS information)

Can detect the vehicle’s travel direction
(North/South/East/West).

Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
speed is low.

More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from map
SD-card.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD-card.

SEL685V

The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be corrected manually.
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repositioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
Routes are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and configuration of the road.
SEL686V

Revision: April 2013

AV-112

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD-card,
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD-card is limited. Therefore, correction by
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.

[NAVIGATION]

GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satellites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile).
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional positioning). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional positioning). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
vehicle.

A

B

C
SKIA0613E

D

E

F

G

SEL526V

Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:
• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimensional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.

H

I

J

K

L

REAR VIEW MONITOR

M
Camera Image Operation Principle
• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the AV control unit.
• The AV control unit combines a warning message and fixed guide lines with an image received from the rear AV
view camera.

USB INTERFACE
• iPod® or music files in USB memory can be played.
• Sound signals are transmitted from USB interface to the AV control unit and output to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB interface.

AUX IN JACK
• Sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device to the AUX in jack.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via AV control unit.

SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
• Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer.
Revision: April 2013

AV-113

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• Bluetooth® control is built into AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and AV control unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the AV control unit and output to the front speakers when operating
the cellular phone.
When A Call Is Originated
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal.
• Voice sound is then heard at the other party.
When Receiving A Call
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party.
• TEL voice signal is input to AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output to front speakers.

Revision: April 2013

AV-114

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009460259

The AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode

Item

Content

—

Version data of the AV control unit is displayed.

Touch Display Calibration

—

Allows correction of the position detection accuracy of the touch panel.

FM monitor

—

AM monitor

—

Monitors the dynamic values of the current tuner

XM monitor

—

Version data is displayed.

E

Current status is displayed.

F

Version
User Configuration

B

Radio

XM functions

Running System Status

•
•
•
•
•

Clear XM Chipset NVM
Reset All XM Settings
Clear IGS
XM CBM Debug Mode
External Diag Mode

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

SD card slot Access
Power Supply
Speed Signal
Direction Signal
Illumination Signal
GPS Antenna
GPS Tracking
Satellites Visible
Satellites Tracked
Microphone Current
Steering wheel key
Radio Antenna
USB Device

C

D

G

H
The current system status is displayed.

I

J

• iPod® firmware version

System State
Speaker Test 4kHz

—

This activates a sequence of test tone
outputs to the audio circuits one after the
other for 1 second.

—

This provides a test sequence where
test displays (plain colored display: e.g.
white, black, red, blue, green) are shown
one after the other.
The respective color is shown for an indicated period of time (parameter). After
the display test, the design of the display
previously available is stored. While the
screen shows a plain colored display, a
pixel malfunction may be detected.

AV

A system self test is executed and the
results are stored into the error memory.

O

Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not
display anything.

P

Speaker Test 100Hz

Display-Test

Self Test

•
•
•
•
•

SD Card Access
BT Module Access
Radio Antenna
GPS Antenna
XM Antenna

On Board Diagnosis Function

INFOID:0000000009460260

METHOD OF STARTING
1.
2.

Turn the ignition ON.
Turn the audio system OFF.

Revision: April 2013

AV-115

2014 Note

K

L

M

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
[NAVIGATION]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
3. While pressing the SETUP button, turn the TUNE-SCROLL dial
counterclockwise 3 or more clicks, then clockwise 3 or more
clicks, then counterclockwise 3 or more clicks. Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing
button.

ALNIA1473ZZ

4.

The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Version,
User Config, Radio, System State or Self Test can be selected.

ALNIA1378ZZ

CONSULT Function

INFOID:0000000009460261

CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Ecu Identification

The AV control unit part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.

CAN Diag Support Mntr

• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-120, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
line.

ILLUM SIG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of illumination signal for the AV control unit.

IGN SIG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of ignition signal.

REV SIG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.

CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description».

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-12, «CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor».
Revision: April 2013

AV-116

2014 Note

AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009460262

B

TERMINAL LAYOUT
C

D

E
AWNIA3087ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

F

Terminal
(Wire color)
+

Description

–

Signal name

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

G

H
2
(GR)

3
(P)

Sound signal front speaker
LH

Output

ON

I

Sound output

SKIB3609E

4
(W)

5
(R)

Sound signal rear speaker
LH

J

K
Output

ON

Sound output

L
SKIB3609E

Press SOURCE switch
6
(SB)

15
(G)

Steering switch signal A

Input

ON

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

2.0V

Press

switch

Except above
7
(W)

Ground

8
(L)

—

CAN (H)

9
(LG/R)

44
(B)

Illumination control signal

ACC power supply

Revision: April 2013

0V

M

AV

3.0V
5.0V

Input

ACC

—

Battery voltage

Input/
Output

—

—

—

Input

ON

Headlamps ON

O

P

AV-117

Battery voltage

2014 Note

AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)

Description

Condition

+

–

Signal name

Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

11
(O)

12
(V)

Sound signal front speaker
RH

Output

ON

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

Sound output

SKIB3609E

13
(L)

14
(Y)

Sound signal rear speaker
RH

Output

ON

Sound output

SKIB3609E

16
(V)

15
(G)

Steering switch signal B

Input

ON

Press

switch

0V

Press

switch

1.0V

Press

switch

Except above
17
(P)

—

18
(LG)

Ground

CAN (L)

Vehicle speed signal

Input/
Output

—

—

Input

ON

When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)

2.0V
5.0V
—

JSNIA0012GB

19
(Y)

Ground

Battery power supply

20
(B/W)

Ground

Ground

23
(R)

—

28
(Y)

Ground

30
(Y)

Ground

MR output

Reverse signal

AUX jack audio signal LH

Input

OFF

—

Battery voltage

—

ON

—

0V

Output

—

—

—

Input

Input

ON

ON

Selector lever in R (reverse)
Selector lever in any position other than R (reverse)

Battery voltage
0V

Recieved audio signal
(AUX input)

SKIB3609E

31
(G)

Ground

AUX ground

Revision: April 2013

—

ON

AV-118

—

0V

2014 Note

AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

Description

–

Signal name

Condition
Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Operation

Reference value
(Approx.)

A

B

32
(L)

Ground

AUX jack audio signal RH

Input

ON

Recieved audio signal
(AUX input)

C

SKIB3609E

33
(B)

Ground

Camera ground

—

ON

—

D

0V

E

34
(L)

Ground

Camera image signal

Input

ON

When camera image is displayed

F

SKIB2251J

35
(Shield)

—

36
(Y)

Ground

37
(O)

Ground

42
(L)

—

43
(P)

41
(Shield)

Camera image signal
shield
Camera power supply

—

Output

—

—

—

ON

When camera image is displayed

6.0 V

Except for above

G

H
0V

I

Ignition power supply

Input

ON

—

Battery voltage

MIC VCC

Input

ON

—

—

ON

While speaking into microphone.

J

K
Microphone signal

Input

L
SKIB3609E

53
(W)

—

V BUS signal

—

—

—

—

54
(G)

—

USB ground

—

—

—

—

55
(L)

—

USB D+ signal

—

—

—

—

56
(R)

—

USB D− signal

—

—

—

—

57
(Shield)

—

USB shield

—

—

—

—

58
(B)

Ground

Antenna amp. ON signal

Output

ON

—

Battery voltage

59
(B)

Ground

AM-FM main antenna

Input

ON

—

5.0 V

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-119

2014 Note

AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
(Wire color)
+

–

61
(B)

Ground

62
(Shield)

—

Description

Condition

Reference value
(Approx.)

Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Operation

GPS antenna signal

Input

ON

—

5.0 V

GPS antenna shield

—

—

—

—

Signal name

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009460263

CONSULT Display

Reference Page

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT

AV-137, «DTC Logic»

U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

AV-138, «DTC Logic»

U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE

AV-139, «DTC Logic»

U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION

AV-140, «DTC Logic»

U122F: Digital broadcasting connection error

AV-141, «DTC Logic»

U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN

AV-142, «DTC Logic»

U1263: USB OVERCURRENT

AV-143, «DTC Logic»

U1264: ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL

AV-144, «DTC Logic»

U12AA: Configuration Error

AV-145, «DTC Logic»

U12AC: Display Temperature too High

AV-146, «DTC Logic»

U12AD: ECU Temperature too High

AV-147, «DTC Logic»

U12AE: Internal Amplifier temperature Warning

AV-148, «DTC Logic»

U12AF: CD Mechanism Temperature Warning

AV-149, «DTC Logic»

U12B0: Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > 20s

AV-150, «DTC Logic»

U12B1: Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V for 20s

AV-151, «DTC Logic»

U1310: CONTROL UNIT (AV)

AV-152, «DTC Logic»

Revision: April 2013

AV-120

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009460264

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

AANWA0861GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-121

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANWA0862GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-122

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1720GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-123

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1721GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-124

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1722GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-125

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1723GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-126

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1724GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-127

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1725GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-128

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1726GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-129

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1727GB

Revision: April 2013

AV-130

2014 Note

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O
AANIA1728GB

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-131

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[NAVIGATION]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009460265

OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWNIA2982GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2.

2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1.

Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.

Revision: April 2013

AV-132

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[NAVIGATION]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Are any DTCs displayed?
YES >> Refer to AV-120, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

A

4.PERFORM SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

B

Refer to AV-166, «Symptom Table».
C

>> GO TO 5

5.FINAL CHECK

D

Refer to symptom described by the customer in step 1.
Is the symptom still present?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-133

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
[NAVIGATION]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000009460266

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replacing AV control unit.

AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000009460267

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
-CONSULT
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replacing AV control unit.
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
>> GO TO 3.

3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
Enter «Re/Programming, Configuration».
If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an «Operation Log Selection» screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the «Saved Data List» and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure».
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select «After Replace ECU» or «Manual Configuration» to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure».
1.
2.

>> GO TO 4.

4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines) are normal.
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Revision: April 2013

AV-134

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
[NAVIGATION]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description

INFOID:0000000009460268

A

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows:
Function

B

Description

«Before Replace ECU»

• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.

«After Replace ECU»

Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.

«Select Saved Data List»

Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

C

D

CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU»
with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU» in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU», incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU» except for new AV control unit.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure

E

F

INFOID:0000000009460269

G

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit.

H

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.
When writing manually>>GO TO 3.

I

2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”

CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.

J

K

>> Work End.

3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”

L

CONSULT
Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-136, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL M
UNIT) : Configuration List».
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
AV
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
O
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated configuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized.
P
5. When «Completed», select «End».

1.
2.

>> GO TO 4.

4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.

Revision: April 2013

AV-135

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
[NAVIGATION]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List

INFOID:0000000009460270

CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
MANUAL SETTING ITEM
Items

Setting value

SOUND SYSTEM

BASE ⇔ BOSE

CAMERA SYSTEM

NONE/AVM ⇔ REAR CAMERA

⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

Revision: April 2013

AV-136

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460271

B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

DTC Detection Condition
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or
more.

Diagnosis Procedure

C

Possible Cause
CAN communication system.

D
INFOID:0000000009460272

E

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-137

2014 Note

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460273

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

Revision: April 2013

DTC Detection Condition
Error during CAN controller hardware initialization (VCAN).

AV-138

Possible Cause
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction occurs constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

2014 Note

U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460274

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
BLUETOOTH MODULE
[U1217]

B
DTC Detection Condition
Connection failure to the internal Blueooth® sub
unit is detected.

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-139

2014 Note

U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460275

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
iPod CERTIFICATION
[U1229]

Revision: April 2013

DTC Detection Condition
iPod authentication chip error.

AV-140

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

2014 Note

U122F AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U122F AV CONTROL UNIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460276

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Digital broadcasting connection
error
[U122F]

Communication error with digital audio broadcast
module internal to AV control unit.

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-141

2014 Note

U1244 GPS ANTENNA
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1244 GPS ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460277

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
GPS ANTENNA CONN
[U1244]

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

Open or short to ground is detected in GPS antenna connection.

• GPS antenna disconnection.
• Open or short to ground in GPS antenna signal
circuit.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460278

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.GPS ANTENNA INSPECTION
Visually inspect the GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-186, «Removal and Installation».
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect AV control unit connector M80.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between AV control unit connector M80 and ground.
AV control unit

Ground

Connector

Terminal

M80

61

—

Voltage
5.0 V

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-186, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

AV-142

2014 Note

U1263 USB
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1263 USB

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460281

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
USB OVERCURRENT
[U1263]

B
DTC Detection Condition
Overcurrent in USB harness is detected.

Possible Cause
• Device connected to USB interface.
• Harness between the AV control unit and USB
interface.

C

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. If there is a device connected to the USB interface, disconnect it.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Is DTC U1263 displayed?
YES >> Refer to AV-143, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Diagnosis Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009460282

G

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS
Visually inspect USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, «Removal and Installation».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, «Removal and Installation».

H

Check USB interface harness. Refer to AV-164, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, «Removal and Installation».

J

I

2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-143

2014 Note

U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460283

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL
[U1264]

Possible Cause
• Antenna amp. disconnection.
• Open or short to ground in antenna amp. ON
signal circuit.

Open or short to ground is detected in Antenna
amp. connection.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460284

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.ANTENNA AMP. INSPECTION
Visually inspect the antenna base (antenna amp.) and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-188, «Feeder Layout».
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

2.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA BASE

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M73 and antenna base connector M351.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M73 and antenna base connector M351.
AV control unit

4.

Antenna base

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M73

58

M351

1

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M73 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal

M73

58

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE

1.
2.
3.

Connect AV control unit connector M73.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between AV control unit connector M73 and ground.
AV control unit

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M73

58

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-187, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

AV-144

2014 Note

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460285

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display
Configuration Error
[U12AA]

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

AV control unit is not properly configured or configuration is corrupt.

Configuration data needs to be written.
Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460286

1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION

C

D

E

When U12AA is detected, configuration data must be written.
>> Write configuration data with CONSULT. Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Work Procedure».

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-145

2014 Note

U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460287

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
Display Temperature too High
[U12AC]

Revision: April 2013

DTC Detection Condition
Display temperature has exceeded maximum
temperature. Display is switched OFF to avoid irreversible damage.

AV-146

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

2014 Note

U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460288

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
ECU Temperature too High
[U12AD]

B
DTC Detection Condition
AV control unit temperature has exceeded maximum temperature.

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-147

2014 Note

U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460289

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
Internal Amplifier temperature
Warning
[U12AE]

Revision: April 2013

DTC Detection Condition
Internal amplifier temperature has exceeded
maximum temperature.

AV-148

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

2014 Note

U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460290

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CD Mechanism Temperature
Warning
[U12AF]

B
DTC Detection Condition
CD drive temperature has exceeded maximum
temperature. CD drive is switched OFF to avoid
irreversible damage.

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-149

2014 Note

U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460291

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

Supply Voltage Goes below 9V
> 20s
[U12B0]

AV control unit supply voltage exceeds lower limits.

• Charging system malfunction.
• AV control unit power supply or ground circuits.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460292

1.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM
Check the vehicle charging system. Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or
CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning components.

2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS

Perform the AV control unit power supply and ground circuit diagnosis procedure. Refer to AV-153, «AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-150

2014 Note

U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460293

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display
Supply Voltage Goes High >
16V for 20s
[U12B1]

DTC Detection Condition
AV control unit supply voltage exceeds upper limits.

Diagnosis Procedure

Possible Cause

C
Charging system malfunction.

INFOID:0000000009460294

D

E

1.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM
Check the vehicle charging system. Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or
CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning components.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-151

2014 Note

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460295

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
[U1310]

Revision: April 2013

DTC Detection Condition
Error during CAN controller hardware initialization (MCAN).

AV-152

Possible Cause
Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
constantly.
Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

A

AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460296

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

B

C

1.CHECK FUSE
D

Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

Fuse No.

7

ACC power supply

18 (10A)

19

Battery power supply

29 (15A)

37

Ignition power supply

5 (10A)

E

F

Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connectors M70 and M71.
Check voltage between AV control unit connectors M70 and M71 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Ground

Terminal
19

M70

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ignition switch: OFF

7

M71

Condition

H

—

37

Ignition switch: ON

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

K

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

I

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal

M70

20

M

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

AV

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-153

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460297

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
AV control unit
Connector

Front door speaker
Terminal

Connector

2

11

3.

2
1

D112 (RH)

12

Continuity

1

D12 (LH)

3

M70

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

2
3

M70

11
12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push AV control unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M70.
AV control unit connector M70
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-154

Reference value

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2

3

11

12

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-179, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-155

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460299

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminals or connectors.

2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
AV control unit
Connector

Rear door speaker
Terminal

Connector

4

13

3.

2
1

D307 (RH)

14

Continuity

1

D207 (LH)

5

M70

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

4
5

M70

13
14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Turn ignition switch to ACC.
Push AV control unit POWER switch.
Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M70.
AV control unit connector M70
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

Revision: April 2013

Condition

AV-156

Reference value

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4

5

13

14

A
Audio signal output

B
SKIB3609E

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-180, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-157

2014 Note

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460300

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check voltage between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
AV control unit

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M71

34

Condition

(−)

Selector lever in R (reverse)

—

Voltage
(Approx.)

Battery Voltage

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
AV control unit

4.

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M71

34

D501

2

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal

M71

34

Continuity

Ground

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check voltage between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
AV control unit

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M71

36

(−)
—

Condition

Selector lever is in “R”.

Voltage
(Approx.)
6.0 V

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

AV-158

2014 Note

REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
AV control unit

4.

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M71

36

D501

4

Continuity

M71

36

C

D

AV control unit
Terminal

B

Yes

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.

Connector

A

Continuity

Ground

E
No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

F

5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

G

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
AV control unit

Rear view camera

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M71

33

D501

1

Continuity

H

Yes

I

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL

J

1.
2.
3.
4.

K

Connect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
Check signal between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
AV control unit

L

Ground

(+)
Connector

Terminal

M71

33

(−)

—

Condition

Reference value

M

AV

Camera image displayed.

O
SKIB2251J

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-185, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

AV-159

P

2014 Note

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460301

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and microphone connector R15.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and microphone connector R15.
AV control unit
Connector

Microphone
Terminal

Connector

41
M71

2

42

R15

4

43

4.

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

1

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector

Terminal
42

M71

43

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

2.CHECK MICROPHONE VCC VOLTAGE

1.
2.
3.

Connect AV control unit connector M71.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between terminals of AV control unit connector M71.
AV control unit connector M71
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

42

41

Voltage
(Approx.)
5.0 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connect microphone connector.
Check signal between terminals of AV control unit connector M71.

Revision: April 2013

AV-160

2014 Note

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

AV control unit connector M71
(+)

(−)

Terminal

Terminal

43

41

Condition

Reference value

B

C

Speak into microphone.

D
PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-184, «Removal and Installation».

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-161

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

STEERING SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460302

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch connector M88.
Check resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M88.
Combination switch connector M88
Terminal

Resistance Ω
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

Depress SOURCE switch.
14
17

15

1

Depress

switch.

121

Depress

switch.

321

Depress

switch.

723

Depress

switch.

1

Depress

switch.

121

Depress

321

switch.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-183, «Removal and Installation».

2.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH

Check continuity between combination switch connectors M88 and M30.
Combination switch
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

14
M88

15

Continuity

24
M30

31

17

Yes

33

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND AV CONTROL UNIT

1.
2.

Disconnect AV control unit connector M70.
Check continuity between combination switch connector M30 and AV control unit connector M70.
Combination switch

AV control unit

Connector

Terminal

M30

31

Connector

Terminal

M70

16

24

6

33

Revision: April 2013

Continuity

Yes

15

AV-162

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between combination switch connector M30 and ground.

[NAVIGATION]
A

Combination switch
Connector

Ground

Terminal

Continuity

B

24
M30

31

—

No

33

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-163

2014 Note

USB CONNECTOR
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

USB CONNECTOR
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460303

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M76 and USB interface connector M72.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M76 and USB interface connector M72.
AV control unit
Connector

USB interface
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

53

4

54
M76

4.

Continuity

1

55

M72

2

56

3

57

5

Yes

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M76 and ground.
AV control unit
Connector
M76

Terminal
53
55

—

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-181, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

AV-164

2014 Note

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
[NAVIGATION]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460304

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK AUX JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and AUX jack connector M23.
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and AUX jack connector M23.
AV control unit
Connector

AUX jack
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

30
M71

Continuity

1

31

M23

3

32

4.

D

Yes

AV control unit

M71

F

4

Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.

Connector

E

Terminal
30
32

G

—

Continuity

Ground

No

H

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the AUX jack. Refer to AV-182, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-165

2014 Note

MULTI AV SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009460305

RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms
The disk cannot be removed.

Check items
AV control unit

No sound from all speakers.

• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-121, «Wiring Diagram».
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-153, «AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure».

Only a certain speaker (front door speaker
LH, front door speaker RH, rear door
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH) does
not output sound.

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-154, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front
door speaker).
— AV-156, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-179, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-180, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-115, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise comes out from all speakers.

Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-115, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise comes out only from a certain speaker (front door speaker LH, front door speaker RH, rear door speaker LH, rear door
speaker RH).

• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
— AV-154, «Diagnosis Procedure» (front
door speaker).
— AV-156, «Diagnosis Procedure» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and looseness).
Refer to:
— AV-179, «Removal and Installation» (front
door speaker).
— AV-180, «Removal and Installation» (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-115, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Noise is mixed with radio only (when the vehicle hits a bump or while driving over bad
roads)

Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-188, «Feeder Layout».

No sound comes out or the level of the
sound is low.

Noise is mixed with audio.

Revision: April 2013

Probable malfunction location
Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-115, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

AV-166

2014 Note

MULTI AV SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptoms

Check items

Probable malfunction location

No radio reception or poor reception.

• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc• Any radio station cannot be received or
tion.
poor reception is caused even after movRefer to AV-144, «Diagnosis Procedure».
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or
antenna feeder.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no obRefer to AV-188, «Feeder Layout».
stacles generating external noises).

Buzz/rattle sound from speaker

The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usually something nearby the speaker is causing the buzz/rattle.

Refer to «SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS» in the appropriate interior trim section.

A

B

C

D

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehicle or the cellular phone.

E

F

Check Compatibility

1.
2.
3.

4.
a.
b.

c.
d.

Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
Symptoms

Check items

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (no connection is displayed on the display at the guide).

Repeat the registration of cellular phone.

Hands-free phone cannot be established.

• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established.
• Hands-free phone operation can be performed, however, voice between each
other cannot be heard during the conversation.

The other party’s voice cannot be heard by
hands-free phone.

Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspection & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.

Originating sound is not heard by the other
party with hands-free phone communication.

Sound operation function is normal.

Revision: April 2013

Probable malfunction location

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

Sound operation function does not work.

AV-167

Malfunction in AV control unit.
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178,
«Removal and Installation».

O

P

Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-160, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2014 Note

MULTI AV SYSTEM
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptoms

Check items

Probable malfunction location

• The voice recognition can be controlled.
• Steering switch’s

,

switch works, but
The system cannot be operated.

Steering switch’s

, and

does not work.
,

,

, and

switches do not work.
All steering switches do not work.

Steering switch malfunction.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-183,
«Removal and Installation».
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-162, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-162, «Diagnosis Procedure».

RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Symptoms

Navigation system is inoperative.

Check items

Probable malfunction location

Navigation malfunction.

• Malfunction in SD card.
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Refer to AV-115, «On Board Diagnosis
Function».

Steering switches malfunction.

Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-162, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Voice activated control malfunction.

Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-160, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-162, «Diagnosis Procedure».

RELATED TO REAR VIEW CAMERA
Symptoms

Rear view camera is inoperative.

Revision: April 2013

Check items

Probable malfunction location

Reverse signal circuit malfunction.

Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
BCM and AV control unit.
Refer to AV-158, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Camera image signal circuit malfunction.

Camera image signal circuit malfunction
between rear view camera and AV control
unit.
Refer to AV-158, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Rear view camera malfunction.

Replace rear view camera.
Refer to AV-185, «Removal and Installation».

AV-168

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009460306

RELATED TO NOISE

B

The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.

C

D

E

F

Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition
Occurs only when engine is ON.

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.

The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump.
Noise only occurs when various
electrical components are operating.

G

Possible cause
• Ignition components

H

• Fuel pump condenser

A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches.

• Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunction

The noise occurs when various motors are operating.

• Motor case ground
• Motor

The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions.

• Rear defogger coil malfunction
• Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line

A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
it is vibrating excessively.

• Ground wire of body parts
• Ground due to improper part installation
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

K

Cause and Counter measure

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is
displayed on the display at the guide).

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized
by the in-vehicle phone module.
Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compatibility)” in AV-166, «Symptom Table».
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
• The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

Revision: April 2013

J

L

Symptom

Cannot use hands-free phone.

I

AV-169

2014 Note

M

AV

O

P

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Cause and Counter measure

The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.

Poor sound quality.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Basic Operation
Symptom

Cause

Remedy

No image is shown.

Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK
side.

Adjust the display brightness.

No guide sound is heard.
Audio guide volume is too low or
too high.

Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX.

Adjust the audio guide volume.

Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is
driving on a dark pink route.

System is not malfunctioning.

Screen is too dark.
Motion of the image is too slow.

Temperature inside the vehicle is low.

Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
reaches the proper temperature.

Small black or bright spots appear
on the screen.

Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit).

System is not malfunction.

Vehicle Mark
Symptom

Cause

Remedy

Map screen and BIRDVIEW™
Name of the place vary with the
screen.

Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some
cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.

System is not malfunctioning.

Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly.

Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its
ignition switch is turned to OFF.

Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition.

Screen will not switch to nighttime
mode after the lighting switch is
turned ON.

The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH
SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function.

Perform screen dimming and select the
nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.

Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel.

Current location is not displayed.

Press “MAP” button to display the current location.

Vehicle mark will not be shown.

Current location is not displayed.

Press “MAP” button to display the current location.

Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite
mark) on the map screen stays
gray.

GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the vehicle is in or behind a building.

Move the vehicle out to an open space.

GPS satellite signal cannot be received because
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument panel.

Do not place anything on top of the meter display (instrument panel).

GPS satellites are not visible from current location.

Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle.

Revision: April 2013

AV-170

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Vehicle location accuracy is low.

Cause

Remedy

Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the
map screen stays gray.

Current location is not determined.

Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle.

Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and
the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
advancement or retard still occur, perform
the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
function.

Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is
always deviated to the same position.)

As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
released once a year.

A

B

C

D

Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set
Symptom

Cause

E

Remedy

Destination cannot be set.

Destination to be set is on an expressway.

Set the destination on an ordinary road.

Passing point is not searched
when re-searching the route.

The vehicle has already passed the passing point,
or the system judged so.

To include the passing points that have been
passed into the route again, set the route
again.

Route information will not be displayed.

Route searching has not been done.

Set the destination and perform route
searching.

Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.

Drive on the recommended route.

Route guide is turned OFF.

Turn route guide ON.

Route information is not available on the dark pink
route.

System is not malfunctioning.

After the route searching, no guide
sign will appear as the vehicle
goes near the entrance/exit to the
toll road.

Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route.
(On the display, only guide signs related to the recommended route will be shown.)

Drive on the recommended route.

Automatic route searching is not
possible.

Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no
recommended route is available.

Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search
the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.

Performed automatic detour
search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that of
the previous search.

Performed search with every conditions considered. However, the result is the same as that of the
previous search.

System is not malfunctioning.

Passing points cannot be set.

More than five passing points were set.

Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.

When setting the route, the starting
point cannot be selected.

The current vehicle location is always set as the
starting point of a route.

System is not malfunctioning.

Some menu items cannot be selected.

The vehicle is being driven.

Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then operate the system.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

Voice Guide
O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-171

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Voice guide will not operate.

Voice guide does not match the actual road pattern.

Cause

Remedy

Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.

System is not malfunctioning.

The vehicle is not on the recommended route.

Return to the recommended route or research the route.

Voice guide is turned OFF.

Turn voice guide ON.

Route guide is turned OFF.

Turn route guide ON.

Voice guide may vary with the direction to which
the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road to
other roads.

Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.

Cause

Remedy

No road to be searched is found around the destination.

Find wider road (orange road or wider) nearby and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direction when there are separate up and down
roads.

Starting point and the destination are too close.

Set the destination at more distant point.

Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/
time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination.

Turn the time-regulating search conditions
OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
search conditions OFF.

In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not

System is not malfunctioning.

Route Search
Symptom
No route is shown.

Indicated route is intermittent.

used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the
recommended route, it is deleted
from the screen.

A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing
point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.)

System is not malfunctioning.

Detouring route is recommended.

In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour
route may be recommended.

Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
route).

A detour route may be shown when some traffic
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area
around the starting point or the destination.

Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route of
your choice.

In the area where highways (gray routes) are
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.

System is not malfunctioning.

Landmarks on the map do not
match the actual ones.

This can be happen due to omission or error in
the map data.

As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.

Recommended route is far from
the starting point, passing points,
and destination.

Starting point, passing points, and destination of
the route guide were set far from the desired
points because route searching data around
these area were not stored.

Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
the recommended route.

NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)

Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

Revision: April 2013

AV-172

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Vehicle’s travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle’s current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
SEL698V

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-173

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Cause (condition)

–: While driving ooo: Display

Driving condition

Remarks (correction, etc.)

Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
ELK0192D

Spiral roads
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D

Straight roads

Road configuration

When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and distance errors may accumulate. As a result,
the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location when the vehicle is turned at a
corner.
ELK0194D

Zigzag roads
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.

If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.

ELK0195D

Roads laid out in a grid pattern
When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0196D

Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel
(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
ELK0197D

Revision: April 2013

AV-174

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Cause (condition)

–: While driving ooo: Display

In a parking lot

SEL709V

Turntable

Driving condition

Remarks (correction, etc.)

When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.

B

C

D

When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Therefore, the displayed direction may be
wrong and the correct road may not be easily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.

Place

E

F

SEL710V

Slippery roads

On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.

Slopes

When parking in sloped garages, when
travelling on banked roads, or in other cases where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.

Road not displayed on the map screen

If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.

Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)

G

H

I

When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.

J

K

SEL699V

Map data

A

If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road.

L

M

ELK0201D

Vehicle

Use of tire chains

When tire chains are used, the mileage is
not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct road.

Drive the vehicle for a while. If
the distance still deviates, adjust it by using the distance adjustment function. (If the tire
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-175

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Cause (condition)

–: While driving ooo: Display

Just after the engine is started

Continuous driving without stopping
Precautions
for driving
Abusive driving

Driving condition

Remarks (correction, etc.)

If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
speed sensor) correction is not completed,
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.

Wait for a short while before
driving after starting the engine.

When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and
the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.

Stop and adjust the orientation.

Spinning the wheels or engaging in other
kinds of abusive driving may result in the
system being unable perform correct detection, and may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road.

If after travelling about 10 km (6
miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.

If the accuracy of location settings is poor,
accuracy may be reduced when the correct
road cannot be found, particularly in places
where there are many roads.

Enter in the road displayed on
the screen with an accuracy of
approx. 1mm.
Caution: Whenever possible,
use detailed map for the correction.

If the accuracy of location settings during
correction is poor, accuracy may be reduced afterwards.

Perform direction correction.

Position correction accuracy

How to correct location

SEL701V

Direction when location is corrected

SEL702V

Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow
• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
• When location correction has not been done
— If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

Revision: April 2013

AV-176

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[NAVIGATION]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
— Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location.
• When map matching has been done
— If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
— If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measurements, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.

A

B

C

D

Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehicle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.

E

Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.

F

When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-177

2014 Note

AV CONTROL UNIT
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AV CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640348

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Perform read configuration using CONSULT. Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) :
Description».
Remove the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the AV control unit screws (A) and partially remove the
AV control unit (1).

AWNIA3071ZZ

AWNIA3072ZZ

5.
6.

Disconnect the harness connectors from the AV control unit and remove.
Remove the AV control unit bracket screws (A) and the AV control unit bracket (1) from each side of the AV control unit (if necessary).

AWNIA3073ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Perform AV control unit configuration after replacement. Refer to AV-135, «CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Work Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

AV-178

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640349

REMOVAL

B

1.
2.
3.
4.

C

Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker.
Remove the front door speaker screws (A).
Remove the front door speaker (1).

D

E

F
AWNIA3062ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-179

2014 Note

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640350

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker.
Remove the rear door speaker screws (A).
Remove the rear door speaker (1).

AWNIA3089ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-180

2014 Note

USB INTERFACE
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

USB INTERFACE

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640351

REMOVAL
1.
2.

B

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Release the pawls (A) from the back of the center console
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the USB interface
(1).

C

D

E

AWNIA3069ZZ

F

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-181

2014 Note

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009647057

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Release the pawls (A) from the back of the center console
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the auxiliary input
jack (1).

AWNIA3069ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-182

2014 Note

STEERING SWITCH
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING SWITCH

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640352

REMOVAL
1.
2.

B

Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the steering wheel rear finisher (1) by releasing pawls
(A).

C

D

E

AWNIA3063ZZ

3.

Remove the steering wheel audio control switch screws (A) from
the back of the steering wheel.

F

G

H

I
AWNIA3064ZZ

4.

J

Remove the steering wheel audio control switches from the steering wheel.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-183

2014 Note

MICROPHONE
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640353

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the microphone from the headlining by releasing pawls using a suitable tool.
Disconnect the harness connector from microphone and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-184

2014 Note

REAR VIEW CAMERA
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR VIEW CAMERA

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640356

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from rear view camera.
Remove the nuts (A) from the rear view camera and remove.

C

D

E

F
AWNIA3070ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

AV

O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-185

2014 Note

GPS ANTENNA
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009640358

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the AV control unit in order to disconnect the GPS antenna harness connector. Refer to AV-178,
«Removal and Installation».
Remove the GPS antenna screw (A) from the GPS antenna.
Disconnect the harness clip (B) and remove the GPS antenna.

AWNIA3076ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

AV-186

2014 Note

ROD ANTENNA
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ROD ANTENNA

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009667932

B

C

D

E

F
AWNIA3124ZZ

1. Antenna rod

2. Antenna base

G

A. Antenna nut

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009667933

H

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Lower the rear portion of the headlining. Refer to INT-29, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the antenna (satellite radio model shown).
Remove the antenna nut (A) and remove the antenna.

I

J

K

L
AWNIA3115ZZ

M

INSTALLATION

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
AV
If the antenna nut is tightened looser than the specified torque this will lower the sensitivity of the
antenna. If the antenna nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque this will deform the roof
panel.
O

P

Revision: April 2013

AV-187

2014 Note

ANTENNA FEEDER
[NAVIGATION]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ANTENNA FEEDER
Feeder Layout

INFOID:0000000009460322

AWNIA3114ZZ

1.

Antenna base (antenna amp.)

2.

Rod Antenna

4.

M67, M350

5.

M73

Revision: April 2013

AV-188

3.

M351

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

BCS

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM DOOR LOCK) ………………………………………………….17

F

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

REAR DEFOGGER …………………………………………….17
REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM REAR DEFOGGER) …………………………………………17

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4

BUZZER ……………………………………………………………18
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BUZZER)….18

H

INT LAMP ………………………………………………………….18
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — INT
LAMP) …………………………………………………………….18

I

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………………. 4
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location …………………………………………………………… 4
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ……… 4
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4

HEADLAMP ………………………………………………………19
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — HEAD
LAMP) …………………………………………………………….19

G

J

K

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 5

WIPER ………………………………………………………………20
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM — WIPER) …….20

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………………. 5
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description…… 5
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ………………… 6

FLASHER ………………………………………………………….20
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM — FLASHER) ………………………………………………………………..21

L

COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ……….. 7
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………… 7

AIR CONDITIONER ……………………………………………21
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) ………………………………………..21

BCS

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ……………………………….. 12
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description…. 13

INTELLIGENT KEY …………………………………………….21
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) …………………………………………21

N

COMB SW …………………………………………………………23
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMB
SW) ………………………………………………………………..23

O

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ……. 13
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………. 13

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….16
COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………… 16
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) …………………………………………….. 16
DOOR LOCK ……………………………………………………. 16

Revision: April 2013

BCM …………………………………………………………………24
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM — BCM) ……………24
IMMU ………………………………………………………………..24
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM — IMMU) …………24
BATTERY SAVER ……………………………………………..25

BCS-1

2014 Note

P

BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) …………………………………………. 25

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS …………………… 57

THEFT ALM …………………………………………………….. 26
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM THEFT) …………………………………………………………. 26

Description …………………………………………………….. 57
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 57
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 57

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ………………………. 57

RETAINED PWR ………………………………………………. 26
RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM RETAINED PWR) …………………………………………… 26

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ……………………. 58

SIGNAL BUFFER ……………………………………………… 27
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM SIGNAL BUFFER) ………………………………………….. 27

U0415 VEHICLE SPEED …………………………….. 59

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 58
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 58
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 59
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 59

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 28

B2562 LOW VOLTAGE ………………………………. 60

BCM …………………………………………………………. 28

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 60
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 60

Reference Value …………………………………………….. 28
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………… 44
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ………………………… 46
DTC Index …………………………………………………….. 46

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………. 48
BCM …………………………………………………………. 48
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 48

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ….. 61
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 61

COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ……. 62
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 62

COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT … 64
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 64

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 54

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 66

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ………………. 54

COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ……………………………………………………….. 66

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) …………………………………….. 54
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description ……………….. 54
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure ………… 54
CONFIGURATION (BCM) ………………………………….. 55
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description …………….. 55
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure ……… 55
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list …….. 56

Revision: April 2013

Symptom Table ………………………………………………. 66

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 67
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ……………… 67
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 67

COMBINATION SWITCH ……………………………. 68
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 68

BCS-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009447002

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009567507

AWMIA1424ZZ

1.

BCM

A.

View with instrument panel removed

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000009567509

AWMIA1437ZZ

1

Combination meter
2
Refer to MWI-5, «METER SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location».

Revision: April 2013

IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-4, «Component Parts
Location».

BCS-4

3

BCM
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location».

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567510

B

OUTLINE
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to
the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor.
• BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light,
turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving control function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF.
• BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT and various settings.

BCM CONTROL FUNCTION LIST
System

Reference

Combination switch reading system
Signal buffer system

BCS-13, «SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description»

Power consumption control system

BCS-13, «POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description»

Headlamp system

EXL-8, «HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description»

Daytime light system

EXL-9, «DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description»

Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system

EXL-10, «TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description»

Parking, license plate and tail lamps system

EXL-10, «PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description»

Front fog lamp system

EXL-12, «FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description»

Exterior lamp battery saver system

EXL-13, «EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description»

Interior room lamp control system

INL-7, «INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description»

Interior room lamp battery saver system

INL-7, «INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description»

Front wiper and washer system

WW-8, «FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Description»

Rear wiper and washer system

WW-11, «REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Description»

Rear window defogger system

DEF-5, «System Description»

Manual air conditioning system

HAC-13, «System Description»

Warning chime system

WCS-5, «WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description»

Power door lock system

DLK-17, «System Description»

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS)

SEC-13, «NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Description»

Vehicle security system

SEC-15, «VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Description»

BCS-5

D

E

F

BCS-7, «COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM :
System Description»

Revision: April 2013

C

2014 Note

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System

Intelligent Key system/engine start system

Reference
Door lock function

DLK-20, «DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description»

Warning function

DLK-24, «WARNING FUNCTION : System Description»

Key reminder function

DLK-24, «KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description»

Engine start function

SEC-10, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START
FUNCTION : System Description»

Power window system

PWC-7, «System Description»

RAP (retained accessory power) system

BCS-26, «RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM — RETAINED PWR)»

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009654074

BCM performs fail-safe control when the following DTCs are detected.
CONSULT Display

Fail-safe

Cancellation

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

B2195: ANTI SCANNING

Inhibit engine cranking

Ignition switch ON → OFF

B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED

—

When the following CAN signal status (vehicle speed signal) becomes
consistent
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• Vehicle speed signal (Meter)

B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL

—

500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent
• Park position switch signal
• P range signal (CAN)

—

5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch is in the ON position
• Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or except P position (9 – 16 V)
• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or except P position (9 – 16 V)
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— Park position switch signal: P position (release selector button) (0 –
1.5 V)
— P/N position signal: P or N positions (9 – 16 V)

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: P or N position (9 – 16 V)
— Shift position signal (CAN): P or N position
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
— Shift position signal (CAN): Except P and N position

B2602: SHIFT P DIAG

B2603: SHIFT POSITION

B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN

Revision: April 2013

BCS-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT Display

B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM

Fail-safe

Cancellation

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: P or N position (9 – 16 V)

A

B

C

Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN)

Inhibit engine cranking

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON

B26F2: IGN RELAY ON

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF

G

B26F3: START CONT RLY ON

B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON

H

B26F7: BCM

Inhibit engine cranking
by Intelligent Key system

When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally

B2608: STARTER RELAY

B260F: ECM CAN COMM

B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF

U0415: VDC CAN CIR2

—

When vehicle speed signal (Meter) (CAN) is received normally

COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567512

D

E

F

I

J

K

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Combination Switch Circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)

L

BCS

N

O

P

AWMIA1427GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-7

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination Switch Circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)

AWMIA1428GB

OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.
• BCM has a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 — 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 — 5). It reads a
maximum of 20 switch states.

COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX (WITH VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)
Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)

AWMIA1429GB

Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list

System

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

OUTPUT 1

—

FR WASHER

FR WIPER LOW

TURN LH

TURN RH

OUTPUT 2

FR WIPER HI

—

FR WIPER INT

PASSING

HEADLAMP 1

OUTPUT 3

INT VOLUME 1

RR WASHER

—

HEADLAMP 2

HI BEAM

OUTPUT 4

RR WIPER INT

INT VOLUME 3

—

—

TAIL LAMP

OUTPUT 5

INT VOLUME 2

RR WIPER ON

—

FR FOG

—

COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX (WITHOUT VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)

Revision: April 2013

BCS-8

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination Switch Circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
A

B

C

D

E

AWMIA1430GB

F

Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list

System

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

OUTPUT 1

—

FR WASHER

FR WIPER LOW

TURN LH

TURN RH

OUTPUT 2

FR WIPER HI

—

FR WIPER INT

PASSING

HEADLAMP 1

OUTPUT 3

—

—

—

HEADLAMP 2

HI BEAM

OUTPUT 4

—

—

—

—

TAIL LAMP

OUTPUT 5

—

—

—

—

—

G

H

I

COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Description
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms intervals normally.

J

K

L

BCS

N

JPMIA0609GB

NOTE:
BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms intervals when BCM is controlled at low power
consumption control mode.
• BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch.
— It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5, and outputs
voltage waveform.
— The voltage waveform of OUTPUT corresponding to the formed circuit is input into the interface on INPUT
side if any (1 or more) switches are ON.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-9

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
— It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch.

JMMIA0326GB

Operation Example
In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced
as follows: INPUT 1 — 5 to “1 — 5” and OUTPUT 1 — 5 to “A — E”.
Example 1: When a switch (TAIL LAMP) is turned ON

• The circuit between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 is formed when the TAIL LAMP switch is turned ON.

Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)

AWMIA1431GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination switch circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
A

B

C

D

E

AWMIA1432GB

• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5D” when the signal of OUTPUT 4 is input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TAIL LAMP switch is ON when the signal “5D” is detected.

F

G

Example 2: When some switches (TURN RH, TAIL LAMP) are turned ON

• The circuits between OUTPUT 1 and INPUT 5 and between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 are formed when the
TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are turned ON.
H

Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)

I

J

K

L

BCS
AWMIA1433GB

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-11

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination switch circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)

AWMIA1434GB

• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5AD” when the signals of OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 4 are
input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are ON when the signal “5AD” is detected.

WIPER INTERMITTENT DIAL POSITION (WITH VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)
BCM judges the wiper intermittent dial 1 — 7 by the status of INT VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
Switch status

Wiper intermittent
dial position

INT VOLUME 1

INT VOLUME 2

INT VOLUME 3

1

ON

ON

ON

2

ON

ON

OFF

3

ON

OFF

OFF

4

OFF

OFF

OFF

5

OFF

OFF

ON

6

OFF

ON

ON

7

OFF

ON

OFF

NOTE:
For details of wiper intermittent dial position, refer to WW-8, «FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description».

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

BCS-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567514

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

D

E

AWMIA1275GB

F

OUTLINE
BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit.

Signal transmission function list
Signal name

Input

Output

Description

• Ignition switch ON signal
• Ignition switch signal

Engine switch (push switch)

IPDM E/R (CAN)

Inputs the push-button ignition
switch (push switch) signal and
transmits the ignition switch status judged with BCM via CAN
communication.

Door switch signal

Any door switch

• Combination meter (CAN)
• IPDM E/R (CAN)

Inputs the door switch signal
and transmits it via CAN communication.

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

G

H

I

J

K
INFOID:0000000009567516

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

L

BCS

N

O

P
ALCIA0030GB

OUTLINE
• BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the
vehicle status.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-13

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep
request to each unit (IPDM E/R and combination meter) that operates with the ignition switch OFF.
Normal mode (wake-up)

— CAN communication is normally performed with other units
— Each control with BCM is operating properly
CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep)

— CAN transmission is stopped
— Control with BCM only is operating

Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep)

— Low power consumption control is active
— CAN transmission is stopped

LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM
BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode.
• The reading interval of each switch changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval.

Sleep mode activation
• BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R and combination meter via CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are fulfilled.
• Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wakeup signal. BCM is in CAN communication sleep mode.
• BCM is in the low power consumption mode and performs the low power consumption control when all of the
BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition.
Sleep condition

CAN sleep condition
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units
Ignition switch: OFF
Vehicle security system alarm: No operation
Warning lamp: Not operation
Intelligent Key system buzzer: No operation
Brake switch: OFF
Turn signal indicator lamp: No operation
Exterior lamp: OFF
Door lock status: No change
CONSULT communication status: No communication
Meter display signal: Non-transmission
Door switch status: No change
Rear window defogger: OFF

BCM sleep condition

•
•
•
•
•

Interior room lamp battery saver: Time out
RAP system: OFF
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) illumination: OFF
NATS: No operation
Remote keyless entry receiver communication status: No communication

Wake-up operation
• BCM changes from the low power consumption mode to the CAN communication sleep mode when the any
of the BCM wake-up conditions are fulfilled. Only the control with BCM is activated.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any of the CAN wake-up conditions
are fulfilled. It changes from the low power consumption mode or the CAN communication sleep mode to the
normal mode.
• Each unit starts the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. In addition, the combination meter transmits the wake up signal to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-14

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BCM wake-up condition

•
•
•
•

CAN wake-up condition

Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch): Lock or unlock
Door lock switch: OFF→ON
Door unlock switch: OFF→ON
Remote keyless entry receiver: Receiving valid keyfob

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units
Push-button ignition switch (push switch): OFF→ON
Hazard switch: OFF→ON
PASSING switch: OFF→ON, ON→OFF
TAIL LAMP switch: OFF→ON
Driver door switch: OFF→ON, ON→OFF
Passenger door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Driver door request switch: OFF→ON
Passenger door request switch: OFF→ON
Stop lamp switch 2 signal: ON
Remote keyless entry receiver: Receiving valid keyfob

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009567517

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

DOOR LOCK

Revision: April 2013

BCS-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)

INFOID:0000000009567518

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]
REQ SW-DR [On/Off]

B

Description
Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door request switch.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

C

D

E

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

F

G

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
DOOR LOCK

Description

H

This test is able to check door lock operation [OTR ULK/AS UNLK/DR UNLK/ALL UNLK/ALL
LOCK].

WORK SUPPORT

I

Support Item
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET

AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK
SELECT

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT

AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK
SELECT

Setting

Description

J

On*

Automatic door locks function ON.

Off

Automatic door locks function OFF.

Lock/Unlock*

Automatic door locks function operates in lock and unlock.

Lock Only

Automatic door locks function operates in lock only.

Unlock Only

Automatic door locks function operates in unlock only.

Off

Automatic door locks function OFF.

P RANGE

Doors lock automatically when shifted out of Park (P).

VH SPD*

Doors lock automatically when vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 mph).

MODE6*

Drivers door unlocks automatically when key is removed.

MODE5

Drivers door unlocks automatically when shifted into Park (P).

MODE4

Drivers door unlocks automatically when ignition is switched from ON to OFF.

MODE3

Doors unlock automatically when key is removed.

K

L

MODE2

Doors unlock automatically when shifted into Park (P).

MODE1

Doors unlock automatically when ignition is switched from ON to OFF.

BCS

N

O

*: Initial setting

REAR DEFOGGER

P

REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM — REAR DEFOGGER)

INFOID:0000000009567519

DATA MONITOR

Revision: April 2013

BCS-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

REAR DEF SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear window defogger switch.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
REAR DEFOGGER

Description
This test is able to check rear window defogger operation [Off/On].

BUZZER
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BUZZER)

INFOID:0000000009567520

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

PUSH -SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of combination switch.

FR FOG SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front fog lamp switch.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
LIGHT WARN ALM

Description
This test is able to check light warning chime operation [On/Off].

INT LAMP
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — INT LAMP)

INFOID:0000000009567521

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH -SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ACTIVE TEST
A
Test Item
INT LAMP

Description
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].

B

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET

SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON

ROOM LAMP TIMER SET

Setting

Description

C

MODE 2

Interior room lamp timer activates with all doors.

MODE 1*

Interior room lamp timer activates with the driver door only.

On*

Interior room lamp timer function ON.

Off

D

Interior room lamp timer function OFF.

MODE 4

30 sec.

MODE 3*

15 sec.

MODE 2

7.5 sec.

Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time).

E

F

*: Initial setting

HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — HEAD LAMP)

INFOID:0000000009567522

G

DATA MONITOR
H
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run]

Indicates engine status received from ECM on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

I

TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]

J

TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]
HI BEAM SW [On/Off]
HEAD LAMP SW 1 [On/Off]

K

Indicates condition of combination switch.

HEAD LAMP SW 2 [On/Off]

L

PASSING SW [On/Off]
FR FOG SW [On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

BCS

N

ACTIVE TEST

O

Test Item

Description

P

FR FOG LAMP

This test is able to check front fog lamp operation [On/Off].

HEAD LAMP

This test is able to check head lamp operation [Hi/Low/Off].

ILL DIM SIGNAL

This test is able to check head lamp illumination dimming operation [On/Off].

TAIL LAMP

This test is able to check tail lamp operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT

Revision: April 2013

BCS-19

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Support Item
BATTERY SAVER SET

ILL DELAY SET

Setting

Description

On*

Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.

Off

Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.

MODE 8

180 sec.

MODE 7

150 sec.

MODE 6

120 sec.

MODE 4

60 sec.

MODE 5

90 sec.

MODE 3

30 sec.

MODE 2

OFF

MODE 1*

45 sec.

Sets delay timer function operation time
(All doors closed).

*: Initial setting

WIPER
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM — WIPER)

INFOID:0000000009567523

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

FR WIPER HI [On/Off]
FR WIPER LOW [On/Off]
FR WASHER SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of wiper operation of combination switch.

FR WIPER INT [On/Off]
FR WIPER STOP [On/Off]

Indicates front wiper auto stop signal received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication
line.

INT VOLUME [1 − 7]

Indicates condition of intermittent wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WIPER ON [On/Off]
RR WIPER INT [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WASHER SW [On/Off]
RR WIPER STOP [On/Off]

Indicates rear wiper motor auto stop input from rear wiper motor.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item

Description

FR WIPER

This test is able to check front wiper operation [INT/Lo/Hi/Off].

RR WIPER

This test is able to check rear wiper operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
WIPER SPEED SETTING

Setting

Description

On

Front wiper intermittent time linked with vehicle speed and wiper dial position.

Off*

Front wiper intermittent time linked with wiper dial position.

* : Initial setting

FLASHER

Revision: April 2013

BCS-20

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM — FLASHER)

INFOID:0000000009567524

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]
REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]

B

Description

C

D

Indicates condition of turn signal function of combination switch.

HAZARD SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of hazard switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

E

ACTIVE TEST

F

Test Item
FLASHER

Description
This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [Off/LH/RH].

G

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item

H

Setting

Description

Lock/Unlock*

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked with
Intelligent Key.

Unlock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent
Key.

Lock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent
Key.

Off

No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked
with Intelligent Key.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

I

J

K

* : Initial setting

AIR CONDITIONER
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM — AIR CONDITIONER)

INFOID:0000000009567525

L

DATA MONITOR
BCS
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

FAN ON SIG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of fan switch.

AIR COND SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of A/C switch.

N

INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)

O
INFOID:0000000009567526

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

P

Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Main

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-21

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]
REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

Main
×

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Description
Indicates condition of back door request switch.
Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

BRAKE SW 1 [On/Off]

×

CLUTCH SW [On/Off]

×

BRAKE SW 2 [On/Off]

Indicates condition of brake switch.
Indicates condition of clutch interlock switch.
Indicates condition of brake switch.

DETE/CANCL SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) position.

SFT PN/N SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

PUSH SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch received from IPDM E/R on
CAN communication line.

IGN RLY1 -F/B [On/Off]

Indicates condition of ignition relay 1 received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

DETE SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of detent switch received from TCM on CAN communication
line.

SFT PN -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT P -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT N -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of N (neutral) position from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Start/Crank/Run]

×

Indicates condition of engine state from ECM on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 1 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 2 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on
CAN communication line.

DOOR STAT -DR [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of driver side door status.

DOOR STAT -AS [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of passenger side door status.

ID OK FLAG [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of Intelligent Key ID.

PRMT ENG STRT [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of engine start possibility.

RKE OPE COUN1 [0-19]

×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.

RKE OPE COUN2 [0-19]

×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-MODE CHG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of mode change signal from Intelligent Key.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item

Description

INSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check combination meter warning chime operation [Take Out/Knob/Key/
Off].

LCD

This test is able to check combination meter display information [Off/LK WN/OUTKEY/NO
KY/BATT/INSRT/SFT P/ROTAT/ID NG/B&P I/B&P N].

BATTERY SAVER

This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].

ENGINE SW ILLUMI

This test is able to check push-button ignition switch START indicator operation [On/Off].

PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR

This test is able to check back door lock actuator operation [On/Off].

INT LAMP

This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].

INDICATOR

This test is able to check combination meter warning lamp operation [KEY ON/KEY IND/Off].

FLASHER

This test is able to check hazard lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

Revision: April 2013

BCS-22

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test Item

Description

OUTSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation [On/Off].

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

P RANGE

This test is able to check CVT shift selector illumination operation [On/Off].

A

B

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY

ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI

ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK

ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK

HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK

Setting

C

Description

On*

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key ON.

Off

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key OFF.

On*

Anti lock out setting ON.

Off

Anti lock out setting OFF.

Off

No buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

On*

Buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

Horn Chirp

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Buzzer*

Buzzer reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

No reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

On*

No horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

Lock/Unlock*

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Unlock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Lock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Off

No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

D

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS

—

This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis.

CONFIRM KEY FOB ID

—

Intelligent Key ID code can be checked.

Start

100 msec

AUTO LOCK SET

200 msec

H

I

J

L
—

On*

Intelligent Key low battery warning ON.

Off

Intelligent Key low battery warning OFF.

MODE7

5 min

MODE6

4 min

MODE5

3 min

MODE4

2 min

MODE3*

1 min

MODE2

30 sec

MODE1

Off

BCS

N
Auto door lock time setting.

O

P

*: Initial Setting

COMB SW
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMB SW)

INFOID:0000000009567527

DATA MONITOR
Revision: April 2013

G

Starter motor operation duration time setting.

End
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN

F

K

70 msec
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT

E

BCS-23

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

FR WIPER HI [On/Off]
FR WIPER LOW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of wiper operation of combination switch.

FR WASHER SW [On/Off]
FR WIPER INT [On/Off]
INT VOLUME [1 — 7]

Indicates condition of intermittent wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WIPER ON [On/Off]
RR WIPER INT [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WASHER SW [On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]

Indicates condition of right turn signal operation of combination switch.

TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]

Indicates condition of left turn signal operation of combination switch.

TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of tail lamp switch operation of combination switch.

HI BEAM SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of Hi beam switch operation of combination switch.

HEAD LAMP SW 1 [On/Off]

Indicates condition of head lamp switch 1 operation of combination switch.

HEAD LAMP SW 2 [On/Off]

Indicates condition of head lamp switch 2 operation of combination switch.

PASSING SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of passing switch operation of combination switch.

FR FOG SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front fog lamp switch operation of combination switch.

BCM
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM — BCM)

INFOID:0000000009567528

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The BCM part number is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
RESET SETTING VALUE

Setting

Description

Reset

Returns BCM to initial value in factory shipment.

Cancel

Cancels the reset function.

CONFIGURATION
Refer to BCS-55, «CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description».

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-11, «CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT».

IMMU

IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM — IMMU)

INFOID:0000000009567529

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR

Revision: April 2013

BCS-24

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

A

CONFIRM ID ALL [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID4 [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID3 [Yet/DONE]

B

Switches to DONE when an Intelligent Key is registered.

CONFIRM ID2 [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID1 [Yet/DONE]

C

TP 4 [Yet/DONE]
TP 3 [Yet/DONE]
TP 2 [Yet/DONE]

DONE indicates the number of Intelligent Key ID which has been registered.

D

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

E

TP 1 [Yet/DONE]
PUSH SW [On/Off]

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
THEFT IND

F

Description
This test is able to check security indicator operation [On/Off].

BATTERY SAVER

G

BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BATTERY SAVER)

INFOID:0000000009567530

H

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

I

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

J

K

L

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

BCS

N

O

ACTIVE TEST
Test item
BATTERY SAVER

Description

P

This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
BATTERY SAVER SET

Revision: April 2013

Setting

Description

ON*

Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.

OFF

Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.

BCS-25

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Support Item

Setting

ROOM LAMP TIMER SET

Description

MODE 3*

10 min.

MODE 2

60 min.

MODE 1

15 min.

Sets interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time.

*: Initial setting

THEFT ALM
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM — THEFT)

INFOID:0000000009567532

DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door request switch.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item

Description

VEHICLE SECURITY HORN

This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation [On].

FLASHER

This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

THEFT IND

This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation [On/Off].

HEADLAMP(HI)

This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation [On].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item

Setting

THEFT ALM TRG
SECURITY ALARM SET

—

Description
Displays status of components that can trigger the theft alarm.

On

Security alarm ON.

Off

Security alarm OFF.

RETAINED PWR
RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM — RETAINED PWR)

INFOID:0000000009567533

DATA MONITOR

Revision: April 2013

BCS-26

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

A

B

SIGNAL BUFFER
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM — SIGNAL BUFFER)

INFOID:0000000009567534

C

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]
PUSH SW [On/Off]

D

Description
Indicates condition of the push-button ignition switch.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-27

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009567536

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item
AIR COND SW

BRAKE SW 1

BRAKE SW2

CDL LOCK SW

CDL UNLOCK SW

CONFRM ID ALL

CONFIRM ID4

CONFIRM ID3

CONFIRM ID2

CONFIRM ID1

DETE SW -IPDM

DETE/CANCL SW

DOOR STAT-AS

DOOR STAT-DR

DOOR SW-AS

DOOR SW-BK

DOOR SW-DR

DOOR SW-RL

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Value/Status

A/C switch OFF

Off

A/C switch ON

On

When the brake pedal is released

On

When the brake pedal is depressed

Off

Brake pedal released

Off

Brake pedal depressed

On

Door lock/unlock switch does not operate

Off

Press door lock/unlock switch to the LOCK side

On

Door lock/unlock switch does not operate

Off

Press door lock/unlock switch to the UNLOCK side

On

The key ID does not match any key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID matches any key ID registered to BCM.

DONE

The key ID does not match the fourth key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID matches the fourth key ID registered to BCM.

DONE

The key ID does not match the third key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID matches the third key ID registered to BCM.

DONE

The key ID does not match the second key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID matches the second key ID registered to BCM.

DONE

The key ID does not match the first key ID registered to BCM.

Yet

The key ID matches the first key ID registered to BCM.

DONE

When selector lever is in P position

Off

When selector lever is in any position other than P

On

When selector lever is in P position

Off

When selector lever is in any position other than P

On

Passenger door LOCK status

LOCK

Passenger door UNLOCK status

UNLK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (5 seconds)

READY

Driver door LOCK status

LOCK

Driver door UNLOCK status

UNLK

Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (5 seconds)

READY

Front door RH closed

Off

Front door RH opened

On

Back door closed

Off

Back door opened

On

Front door LH closed

Off

Front door LH opened

On

Rear door LH closed

Off

Rear door LH opened

On

BCS-28

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
DOOR SW-RR

ENGINE STATE

FAN ON SIG

FR FOG SW

FR WASHER SW

FR WIPER LOW

FR WIPER HI

FR WIPER INT

FR WIPER STOP

HAZARD SW

HEAD LAMP SW 1

HEAD LAMP SW 2

HI BEAM SW

ID OK FLAG

IGN RLY1 F/B
INT VOLUME
KEY CYL LK-SW

KEY CYL UN-SW

PASSING SW

PRMT ENG STRT

PUSH SW

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Value/Status

Rear door RH closed

Off

Rear door RH opened

On

Engine stopped

Stop

While the engine stalls

Stall

At engine cranking

Crank

Engine running

Run

Blower motor fan switch OFF

Off

Blower motor fan switch ON

On

Front fog lamp switch OFF

Off

Front fog lamp switch ON

On

Front washer switch OFF

Off

Front washer switch ON

On

Front wiper switch OFF

Off

Front wiper switch LO

On

Front wiper switch OFF

Off

Front wiper switch HI

On

Front wiper switch OFF

Off

Front wiper switch INT

On

Any position other than front wiper stop position

Off

Front wiper stop position

On

When hazard switch is not pressed

Off

When hazard switch is pressed

On

Headlamp switch OFF

Off

Headlamp switch 1st

On

Headlamp switch OFF

Off

Headlamp switch 1st

On

High beam switch OFF

Off

High beam switch HI

On

Ignition switch ACC or ON

Reset

Ignition switch OFF

Set

Ignition switch OFF or ACC

Off

Ignition switch ON

On

Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 — 7

1-7

Door key cylinder LOCK position

Off

Door key cylinder other than LOCK position

On

Door key cylinder UNLOCK position

Off

Door key cylinder other than UNLOCK position

On

Other than lighting switch PASS

Off

Lighting switch PASS

On

When the engine start is prohibited

Reset

When the engine start is permitted

Set

Return ignition switch to LOCK position

Off

Press ignition switch

On

BCS-29

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
PUSH SW-IPDM

REAR DEF SW

Condition

Value/Status

When engine switch (push switch) is not pressed

Off

When engine switch (push switch) is pressed

On

Rear window defogger switch OFF

Off

Rear window defogger switch ON

On

When passenger door request switch is not pressed

Off

When passenger door request switch is pressed

On

When back door request switch is not pressed

Off

When back door request switch is pressed

On

When driver door request switch is not pressed

Off

When driver door request switch is pressed

On

When LOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed

Off

When LOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed

On

When LOCK/UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed and
held simultaneously

Off

When LOCK/UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed and held
simultaneously

On

RKE OPE COUN1

Operation frequency of Intelligent Key

0-19

RKE OPE COUN2

Operation frequency of Intelligent Key

0-19

When UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed

Off

When UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed

On

Rear washer switch OFF

Off

Rear washer switch ON

On

REQ SW-AS

REQ SW-BD/TR

REQ SW-DR

RKE-LOCK

RKE-MODE CHG

RKE-UNLOCK

RR WASHER SW

RR WIPER INT

RR WIPER ON

RR WIPER STOP

SFT N-MET

SFT P-MET

SFT PN -IPDM

SFT PN/N SW

TAIL LAMP SW

TP 4

TP 3

TP 2

Revision: April 2013

Rear wiper switch OFF

Off

Rear wiper switch INT

On

Rear wiper switch OFF

Off

Rear wiper switch ON

On

Any position other than rear wiper stop position

Off

Rear wiper stop position

On

When selector lever is in any position other than N

Off

When selector lever is in N position

On

When selector lever is in any position other than P

Off

When selector lever is in P position

On

When selector lever is in any position other than P or N

Off

When selector lever is in P or N position

On

When selector lever is in any position other than P or N

Off

When selector lever is in P or N position

On

Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND

Off

Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND

On

The ID of fourth key is not registered to BCM

Yet

The ID of fourth key is registered to BCM

DONE

The ID of third key is not registered to BCM

Yet

The ID of third key is registered to BCM

DONE

The ID of second key is not registered to BCM

Yet

The ID of second key is registered to BCM

DONE

BCS-30

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item

Condition

Value/Status

The ID of first key is not registered to BCM

Yet

The ID of first key is registered to BCM

DONE

Turn signal switch OFF

Off

Turn signal switch LH

On

Turn signal switch OFF

Off

Turn signal switch RH

On

Driver door UNLOCK status

Off

Driver door LOCK status

On

VEH SPEED 1

While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading

mph, km/h

VEH SPEED 2

While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading

mph, km/h

TP 1

TURN SIGNAL L

TURN SIGNAL R

UNLK SEN-DR

A

B

C

D

E

TERMINAL LAYOUT

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

JMMIA1063ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Revision: April 2013

BCS-31

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

−

1
(GR)

Ground

Description
Signal name
Rear window
defogger relay
control

Condition

Input/
Output
Input

Rear window
defogger switch

Value
(Approx.)

OFF

Battery voltage

ON

0 – 0.5 V

OFF

0V

TURN RH
HEADLAMP 1
2
(BR)

Ground

INPUT 5 signal

Input

Combination
switch

HI BEAM

TAIL LAMP
PKIB4958J

1.0 V
OFF

0V

TURN LH
PASSING
3
(Y)

Ground

INPUT 4 signal

Input

Combination
switch

HEADLAMP 2

FR FOG
PKIB4958J

1.0 V
OFF

0V

FR WIPER LO

4
(L)

Ground

INPUT 3 signal

Input

Combination
switch

FR WIPER INT
(any intermittent position)
PKIB4958J

1.0 V
OFF

0V

FR WASHER
Wiper intermittent dial 1
5
(G)

Ground

INPUT 2 signal

Input

Combination
switch

Wiper intermittent dial 5

Wiper intermittent dial 6
PKIB4958J

1.0 V
OFF

0V

FR WIPER HI
Wiper intermittent dial 1
6
(R)

Ground

INPUT 1 signal

Input

Combination
switch

Wiper intermittent dial 2
Wiper intermittent dial 3
Wiper intermittent dial 6
Wiper intermittent dial 7

Revision: April 2013

BCS-32

PKIB4958J

1.0 V

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

A

B

7
(W)

Ground

Key cylinder unlock
sw signal

Input

Key cylinder
switch

N position

C

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
UNLOCK position

D

0V

E

8
(GR)

Ground

Key cylinder lock sw
signal

Input

Key cylinder
switch

N position

F

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V

9
(LG)

Ground

Stop lamp switch 1

Input

Stop lamp
switch

LOCK position

0V

OFF (Brake pedal
released)

0V

ON (Brake pedal
depressed)

Battery voltage

G

H

I

J
12
(GR)

Ground

Central door lock sw
signal

Input

Door lock and
unlock switch

NEUTRAL position

K
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 — 1.5 V
LOCK position

0V

L

BCS
13
(BR)

Ground

Central door unlock
sw signal

Input

Door lock and
unlock switch

NEUTRAL position

N
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 — 1.5 V
UNLOCK position

0V

O

P
15
(G)

Ground

Rear defogger
switch signal

Input

Rear window
defogger switch

Not pressed

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 — 1.5 V
Pressed

Revision: April 2013

BCS-33

0V

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description
Signal name

+

−

18
(V)

Ground

Keyless tuner
ground

19
(LG)

Ground

Keyless tuner power
supply

Condition

Input/
Output
Input

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Value
(Approx.)
0V

Push-button ignition switch OFF

JMKIA3838GB

Push-button ignition switch ACC or ON

5V

Waiting

20
(G)

Ground

Keyless tuner signal

Input

Push-button ignition switch
OFF

JMKIA3838GB

When operating either
button on Intelligent Key

JMKIA3841GB

21
(P)

Ground

Immobilizer one way
communication
(CLOCK) signal

Input/
Output

Intelligent Key
battery is removed

Brake pedal depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each
time when brake pedal is
depressed
JMKIA6232JP

Brake pedal released

Battery voltage

Waiting

22
(W)

Ground

Keyless tuner RSSI
signal

Input

Push-button ignition switch
OFF

JMKIA5952GB

When pressing and holding either button on Intelligent Key

JMKIA5953GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-34

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

ON

23
(R/Y)

Ground

Security indicator
output

Output

Security indicator lamp

Value
(Approx.)

A

0 – 0.5 V

B

C

Blinking (push-button ignition switch OFF)

D
JPMIA0590GB

12.0 V
OFF

25
(LG)

Ground

Immobilizer two way
communication signal

Input/
Output

During waiting

Battery voltage

Brake pedal depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each
time when brake pedal is
depressed

E

F

G
JMKIA6233JP

27
(W)

Ground

Air con sw signal

Input

Push-button ignition switch ON
and blower fan
switch ON

Brake pedal released

Battery voltage

A/C switch OFF

Battery voltage

A/C switch ON

0V

OFF

0V

H

I

J
28
(SB)

Ground

Blower fan sw signal

Input

Fan switch

ON

K
PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
29
(O)

Ground

Hazard sw signal

Input

Hazard switch

OFF

Battery voltage

ON

0 – 1.5 V

L

BCS

31
(Y)

Ground

Driver door lock status

Input

Front door LH

N

LOCK status

JPMIA0011GB

O

11.8V
UNLOCK status

0V

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-35

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

OFF

PKIB4960J

32
(P)

Ground

OUTPUT 5

Output

Combination
switch

7.0 — 8.0 V
FR FOG
Wiper intermittent dial 1
Wiper intermittent dial 2
Wiper intermittent dial 6
Wiper intermittent dial 7

PKIB4956J

1.0 V

OFF

PKIB4960J

33
(V)

Ground

OUTPUT 4

Output

Combination
switch

7.0 — 8.0 V
TAIL LAMP
Wiper intermittent dial 1
Wiper intermittent dial 5

Wiper intermittent dial 6
PKIB4958J

1.2 V

OFF

PKIB4960J

34
(W)

Ground

OUTPUT 3

Output

Combination
switch

7.0 — 8.0 V
HEADLAMP 2
HI BEAM
Wiper intermittent dial 1
Wiper intermittent dial 2
Wiper intermittent dial 3

PKIB4958J

1.2 V

Revision: April 2013

BCS-36

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

A

B

OFF

C

PKIB4960J

35
(GR)

Ground

OUTPUT 2

Output

Combination
switch

7.0 — 8.0 V

D

HEADLAMP 1
PASSING

E

FR WIPER HI

F

FR WIPER INT
(any intermittent position)
PKIB4958J

1.2 V

G

H

OFF

PKIB4960J

36
(LG)

Ground

OUTPUT 1

Output

Combination
switch

I

7.0 — 8.0 V
TURN RH

J

TURN LH
FR WIPER LO

K
FR WASHER
PKIB4958J

1.2 V
P (Park) position

0 – 1.5 V

37
(R)

Ground

Park position switch
signal

39
(L)

Ground

CAN-H

Input/
Output

—

—

40
(P)

Ground

CAN-L

Input/
Output

—

—

Input

Selector lever

Any position other than P
(Park)

L

Battery voltage

BCS

N

O

43
(P)

Ground

Door switch (Back)
signal

Input

Back door
switch

OFF (back door closed)

P
PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
ON (back door open)

Revision: April 2013

BCS-37

0V

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
44
(LG)

45
(O)

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Ground

Rear wiper autostop
switch

Input

Push-button ignition switch ON

Ground

Door switch (AS)
signal

Input

Front door
switch RH

Value
(Approx.)

Rear wiper stop position

Battery voltage

Any position other than
rear wiper stop position

0V

OFF (front RH door
closed)

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
ON (front RH door open)

46
(BR)

Ground

Door switch (RR)
signal

Input

Rear door
switch RH

0V

OFF (rear RH door
closed)

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
ON (rear RH door open)

47
(SB)

Ground

Door switch (DR)
signal

Input

Front door
switch LH

0V

OFF (front LH door
closed)

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
ON (front LH door open)

48
(W)

Ground

Door switch (RL)
signal

Input

Rear door
switch LH

0V

OFF (rear LH door closed)

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V
ON (rear LH door open)
49
(L)

Ground

Cargo lamp control

50
(G)

Ground

Door unlock output
(back)

Output

51
(W)

Ground

Request sw (back
door) signal

Input

54
(R)

Ground

Rear wiper output

Revision: April 2013

Output

Back door is closed (cargo lamp turns OFF)

Battery voltage

Back door is opened (cargo lamp turns ON)

0–1V

Back door

UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
Actuator is not activated

Output

0V

Back door request switch
Rear wiper

ON (Pressed)
OFF (Not pressed)

Battery voltage
0V
0 – 1.5 V
Battery voltage

OFF (stopped)

0V

ON (activated)

Battery voltage

BCS-38

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

55
(G)

Ground

56
(W)

Door unlock output
(RR, RL)

Output

Ground

Battery saver output

Output

57
(Y)

Ground

Battery power supply

Input

58
(O)

—

Air bag deployment
information

Input

59
(G)

Ground

Door unlock output
(AS)

Condition

Input/
Output

Output

Rear doors

UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)

Value
(Approx.)

A

Battery voltage

B

Actuator is not activated

0V

Interior room lamp battery saver timed out

0V

C

Except when interior room lamp battery saver timed out

Battery voltage

Push-button ignition switch OFF

Battery voltage

—

Front RH door

—

—

UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)

Battery voltage

D

E

Actuator is not activated

0V

Turn signal switch OFF

0V

F

G
60
(V)

Ground

Flasher output
(LEFT)

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Turn signal switch LH

H
PKIC6370E

6.5 V
Turn signal switch OFF

I

0V

J
61
(W)

Ground

Flasher output
(RIGHT)

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Turn signal switch RH

K
PKIC6370E

6.5 V
63
(R)
65
(SB)

Ground

Ground

Room lamp control

Door lock output

Output

Output

Interior room
lamp

All doors

Battery voltage

ON

0 – 1.0 V

LOCK (Actuator is activated)
Actuator is not activated

66
(G)

Ground

67
(B)

L

OFF

UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)

Battery voltage
0V

N

Battery voltage

Door unlock output
(DR)

Output

Ground

Ground

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

0V

68
(L)

Ground

Power window power supply (IGN)

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

70
(G)

Ground

Battery power supply

Input

Push-button ignition switch OFF

Battery voltage

75
(GR)

Ground

Request sw (DR)
signal

Input

Driver door request switch

Revision: April 2013

Front LH door

Actuator is not activated

ON (Pressed)
OFF (Not pressed)

BCS-39

BCS

0V

O

0 – 1.5 V
Battery voltage

2014 Note

P

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

−

76
(L)

Ground

Description
Signal name
Engine start sw

Condition

Input/
Output
Input

Push-button ignition switch

START pressed
Not pressed

Value
(Approx.)
0 – 1.5 V
Battery voltage

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

78
(P)

Ground

Door antenna (DR) +

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON
Driver door request switch
pressed

JMKIA5954GB

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

79
(V)

Ground

Door antenna (DR) —

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON
Driver door request switch
pressed

JMKIA5954GB

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

80
(LG)

Ground

Door antenna (AS) +

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON
Passenger door
request switch
pressed

JMKIA5954GB

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-40

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

A

B
Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

81
(Y)

Ground

Door antenna (AS) —

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON
Passenger door
request switch
pressed

C

JMKIA5954GB

D

E
Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

F
JMKIA5955GB

G

H

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

82
(W)

Ground

Outside key antenna
(rear bumper) +

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON
Back door request switch
pressed

JMKIA5954GB

I

J
Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

K
JMKIA5955GB

L

BCS
Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

83
(B)

Ground

Outside key antenna
(rear bumper) —

Output

When the back
door request
switch is operated with pushbutton ignition
switch ON

N
JMKIA5954GB

O

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

P

JMKIA5955GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-41

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

84
(P)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(instrument center) +

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

85
(L)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(instrument center) —

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

86
(G)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(console) +

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-42

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description
Signal name

−

Condition

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

A

B
Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

C

JMKIA5951GB

87
(R)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(console) —

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

D

E
Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

F
JMKIA3839GB

G

H

Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

88
(V)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(trunk room) +

Output

I

Push-button ignition switch ON

J
Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

K
JMKIA3839GB

L

BCS
Intelligent Key not in antenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)

N
JMKIA5951GB

89
(LG)

Ground

Inside key antenna
(trunk room) —

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

O

Intelligent Key in antenna
detection area
(80 cm or less)

P

JMKIA3839GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-43

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description
Signal name

Input/
Output

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

+

−

90
(W)

Push-button ignition
switch illumination
power supply

Battery voltage

Output

Push-button ignition switch illumination

ON

Ground

OFF

0 – 1.5 V

91
(V)

Ground

ACC/ON indicator
lamp

Output

Push-button ignition switch

OFF

Battery voltage

ACC or ON

0 – 1.5 V

93
(R)

Ground

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Output

Intelligent Key
warning buzzer

Sounding

0 – 1.5 V

96
(SB)

Ground

Accessory relay
control

Output

Ignition Pushbutton switch

OFF

Battery voltage
0 – 0.5 V

ACC or ON

Battery voltage

Selector lever in P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position

Battery voltage

Selector lever not in P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position

0 – 0.5 V

97
(R/Y)

Ground

98
(O)

Ground

Ignition relay (IPDM
E/R) control

Output

Push-button ignition switch

OFF or ACC
ON

0 – 0.5 V

99
(GR)

Ground

Ignition relay (F/B)
control

Output

Push-button ignition switch

OFF or ACC

0 – 0.5 V

100
(L)

Ground

Request sw (AS)
signal

Input

Passenger door
request switch

ON (Pressed)

Ground

Clutch interlock
switch

Input

Clutch interlock
switch

101
(V)

102
(BR)

Ground

Starter relay control

P/N position

Output

Input

Push-button ignition switch ON

Not sounding

Selector lever

Battery voltage

ON

Battery voltage
0 – 1.5 V

OFF (Not pressed)

Battery voltage

OFF (clutch pedal is not
depressed)

0V

ON (clutch pedal is depressed)

Battery voltage

Selector lever in P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position

Battery voltage

Selector lever not in P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position

0 – 1.5 V

Ground

CVT shift selector
(park position
switch) power supply

Output

Push-button ignition switch ON

9 – 16 V

105
(SB)

Ground

Stop lamp switch 2

Input

Push-button ignition switch OFF

Battery voltage

106
(Y)

Ground

Blower relay control

Output

104
(V)

Push-button ignition switch

OFF or ACC

0 – 0.5 V

ON

Battery voltage

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009567537

BCM performs fail-safe control when the following DTCs are detected.
CONSULT Display

Fail-safe

Cancellation

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

B2195: ANTI SCANNING

Inhibit engine cranking

Ignition switch ON → OFF

B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP

Inhibit engine cranking

Erase DTC

Revision: April 2013

BCS-44

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
CONSULT Display

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED

B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL

B2602: SHIFT P DIAG

B2603: SHIFT POSITION

B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN

B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM

Fail-safe

Cancellation

—

When the following CAN signal status (vehicle speed signal) becomes
consistent
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• Vehicle speed signal (Meter)

—

500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent
• Park position switch signal
• P range signal (CAN)

—

5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch is in the ON position
• Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or except P position (9 – 16 V)
• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or except P position (9 – 16 V)
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— Park position switch signal: P position (release selector button) (0 –
1.5 V)
— P/N position signal: P or N positions (9 – 16 V)

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: P or N position (9 – 16 V)
— Shift position signal (CAN): P or N position
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
— Shift position signal (CAN): Except P and N position

—

500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
• Status 2
— Ignition switch is in the ON position
— P/N position signal: P or N position (9 – 16 V)

Inhibit engine cranking

500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN)

Inhibit engine cranking

When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON

B26F2: IGN RELAY ON

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF

B26F3: START CONT RLY ON

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF

B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF

Inhibit engine cranking

When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON

B2608: STARTER RELAY

B260F: ECM CAN COMM

B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF

Revision: April 2013

BCS-45

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

2014 Note

O

P

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
CONSULT Display

Fail-safe
Inhibit engine cranking
by Intelligent Key system

B26F7: BCM
U0415: VDC CAN CIR2

—

Cancellation
When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
When vehicle speed signal (Meter) (CAN) is received normally

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

INFOID:0000000009567538

If more than one DTC is displayed at the same time, perform inspections based on the following priority chart.
Priority

DTC

1

B2562: LOW VOLTAGE

2

• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

3

•
•
•
•

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
B2195: ANTI SCANNING
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP

4

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

B2555: STOP LAMP CIRCUIT
B2556: ENG START SW
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED
B2562: LOW VOLTAGE
B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL
B2602: SHIFT P DIAG
B2603: SHIFT POSITION
B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN
B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM
B2608: STARTER RELAY
B260F: ECM CAN COMM
B2614: ACC RELAY REQ FB
B2615: IGN RELAY3 REQ FB
B2616: IGN RELAY2 REQ FB
B2618: IGN RELAY1 REQ FB
B261A: ENGINE SW
B261F: ASCD CANCEL SW
B2620: NEUTRAL SW
B26E8: CLUTCH SW
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
B26F6: BCM
B26F7: BCM
B26FB: CLUTCH SWITCH
B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION
U0415: VDC CAN CIR2

5

• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA 1
• B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA 2
• B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA 3

6

• B2626: OUTSIDE 1 ANTENNA
• B2627: OUTSIDE 2 ANTENNA
• B2628: OUTSIDE 3 ANTENNA

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009567539

NOTE:
The details of time display are as follows.
• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.
• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.
IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-46

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Fail-safe

Freeze Frame Data
•Vehicle Speed
•Odo/Trip Meter
•Vehicle Condition

Intelligent Key
warning lamp ON

Reference page

No DTC is detected.
further testing
may be required.

—

—

—

—

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT

—

—

—

BCS-57

U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

—

—

—

BCS-58

U0415: VDC CAN CIR2

×

—

×

BCS-59

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM

×

—

—

SEC-65

B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM

×

—

—

SEC-66

B2195: ANTI SCANNING

×

—

—

SEC-67

B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP

×

—

—

SEC-68

B2555: STOP LAMP CIRCUIT

—

×

×

SEC-71

B2556: ENG START SW

—

×

×

SEC-74

B2557: VEHICLE SPEED

×

×

×

SEC-76

B2562: LOW VOLTAGE

—

×

—

BCS-60

B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL

×

×

×

SEC-77

B2602: SHIFT P DIAG

×

×

×

SEC-79

B2603: SHIFT POSITION

×

×

×

SEC-82

B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN

×

×

×

SEC-86

B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM

×

×

×

SEC-89

B2608: STARTER RELAY

×

×

×

SEC-91

B260F: ECM CAN COMM

×

×

×

SEC-93

B2614: ACC RELAY REQ FB

—

×

×

PCS-53

B2615: IGN RELAY3 REQ FB

—

×

×

PCS-55

B2616: IGN RELAY2 REQ FB

—

×

×

PCS-57

B2618: IGN RELAY1 REQ FB

—

×

×

PCS-59

B261A: ENGINE SW

—

×

×

PCS-61

B261F: ASCD CANCEL SW

—

×

×

SEC-94

B2620: NEUTRAL SW

—

×

×

SEC-97

B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA 1

—

×

—

DLK-54

B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA 2

—

×

—

DLK-56

B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA 3

—

×

—

DLK-58

B2626: OUTSIDE 1 ANTENNA

—

×

—

DLK-60

B2627: OUTSIDE 2 ANTENNA

—

×

—

DLK-62

B2628: OUTSIDE 3 ANTENNA

—

×

—

DLK-64

B26E8: CLUTCH SW

×

×

×

SEC-100

B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF

×

×

×

PCS-63

B26F2: IGN RELAY ON

×

×

×

PCS-65

B26F3: START CONT RLY ON

×

×

×

SEC-103

B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF

×

×

×

SEC-104

B26F6: BCM

—

×

×

PCS-67

B26F7: BCM

×

×

×

SEC-105

B26FB: CLUTCH SWITCH

—

×

×

SEC-106

B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION

—

×

×

SEC-107

CONSULT display

Revision: April 2013

BCS-47

2014 Note

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
BCM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567540

AAMWA0775GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-48

2014 Note

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O
AAMWA0776GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-49

2014 Note

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0777GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-50

2014 Note

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O
AAMIA1688GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-51

2014 Note

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1689GB

Revision: April 2013

BCS-52

2014 Note

BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O
AAMIA1690GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-53

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM)
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description
INFOID:0000000009567541

BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replacing BCM.

AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
• When replacing BCM, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
— Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
— If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
— Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS).

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567542

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
Enter «Re/Programming, Configuration» and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the «After Replace ECU» or «Manual Configuration» after replacing BCM.
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE BCM

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
>> GO TO 3.

3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
Enter «Re/Programming, Configuration».
If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an «Operation Log Selection» screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the «Saved Data List» and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to BCS-54, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) :
Work Procedure».
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select «After Replace ECU» or «Manual Configuration» to write vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-54, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure».
1.
2.

>> GO TO 4.

4.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS)
Perform BCM initialization. (NATS)

Revision: April 2013

BCS-54

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (BCM)

A

CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description

INFOID:0000000009567543

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing BCM.
Configuration has three functions as follows:
Function

C

Description

«Before Replace ECU»

• Reads the vehicle configuration of current BCM.
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.

«After Replace ECU»

Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.

«Select Saved Data List»

Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

B

D

CAUTION:
• When replacing BCM, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU» with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU» in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU», incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or «After Replace ECU» except for new BCM.

E

CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure

G

INFOID:0000000009567544

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

F

H

CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of BCM.

I

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.
When writing manually>>GO TO 3.

2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”

J

CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.

K

L

>> Work End.

3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT
BCS
Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to BCS-56, «CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list».
N
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
O
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con- P
figuration of brand new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is
set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
5. When «Completed», select «End».
1.
2.

>> GO TO 4.

4.OPERATION CHECK
Revision: April 2013

BCS-55

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Confirm that each function controlled by BCM operates normally.
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list

INFOID:0000000009567545

CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
SETTING ITEM
Items

Setting value

TRANSMISSION

AT with ABS ⇔ MT with ABS

BLOWE FAN SIG

MODE1 ⇔ MODE2

⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

Revision: April 2013

BCS-56

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009567546

B

INFOID:0000000009567547

C

Refer to LAN-6, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description».

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
U1000 can be set if a module harness was disconnected and reconnected, perhaps during a repair. Confirm
that there are actual CAN diagnostic symptoms and a present DTC by performing the Self Diagnostic Result
procedure.
CONSULT Display

CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

DTC Detection Condition

When any listed module cannot communicate
with CAN communication signal continuously for
2 seconds or more with ignition switch ON

Diagnosis Procedure

D

E

Possible Cause
In CAN communication system, any item (or
items) of the following listed below is malfunctioning.
• Transmission
• Receiving (ECM)
• Receiving (ABS)
• Receiving (METER/M&A)
• Receiving (TCM)
• Receiving (IPDM E/R)

F

G

H

INFOID:0000000009567548

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

I

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.
2. Check “SELF- DIAG RESULTS”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Perform CAN Diagnosis as described in DIAGNOSIS section of CONSULT Operation Manual.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-57

2014 Note

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567549

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

DTC Detection Condition
BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction.

Possible Cause
BCM

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567550

1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM.
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

BCS-58

2014 Note

U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0415 VEHICLE SPEED

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567551

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC U0415 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC U0415 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

C

CONSULT Display
VDC CAN CIR2
[U0415]

DTC Detection Condition
When the vehicle speed signal received from the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) remains abnormal for 2 seconds or more.

D

Probable Cause
• ABS system
• Combination meter system
• CAN bus harness

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. DTC CONFIRMATION

F

1.
2.
3.

G

Erase the DTC.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT, after the ignition switch has been turned ON for 2
seconds or more.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567552

1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of ABS with CONSULT. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND

H

I

J

K

CIRCUIT
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power and ground. Refer to BRC-42, «Diagnosis Proce- L
dure».
Is the inspection result normal?
BCS
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. COMBINATION METER SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of METER M&A with CONSULT. Refer to MWI-15, «CONSULT Function».
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-59

2014 Note

B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567553

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
LOW VOLTAGE
[B2562]

DTC Detection Condition
When the power supply voltage to BCM remains
less than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or more

Possible Cause
• Harness or connector (power supply circuit)
• Vehicle battery

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. DTC CONFIRMATION
1.
2.
3.

Erase DTC.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Perform the Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT, after the ignition switch has been turned ON
for 120 seconds or more.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567554

1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE
Check battery voltage.
Is battery voltage less than 8.8V?
YES >> Charge battery and retest. Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or
CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. BCM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT. Refer to BCS-24, «BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM BCM)».
Is DTC B2562 CRNT?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

BCS-60

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567555

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.

D
Terminal No.

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.
12 (10A)

Battery power supply

70

E

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

G

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.

H

BCM
Connector

Terminal
57

M99

70

Ground

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

J

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

K

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

I

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

L

BCS

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-61

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567556

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK INPUT 1 — 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check continuity between BCM connector and combination switch connector.
Combination switch
signal

BCM

Combination switch

Connector

Terminal

INPUT 1

Terminal

36

INPUT 2
INPUT 3

Connector

11

35
M18

Continuity

9

34

M28

7

INPUT 4

33

10

INPUT 5

32

13

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors.

2.CHECK INPUT 1 — 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

Check for continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Combination switch
signal

BCM
Connector

INPUT 1

36

INPUT 2

35

INPUT 3

M18

Continuity

Terminal

34

INPUT 4

33

INPUT 5

32

Ground
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1.
2.

Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-62

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A

Terminals
(+)

BCM signal

(−)

BCM
Connector

OUTPUT 1

36
35
M18

B

Terminal

OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3

Voltage

34

OUTPUT 4

33

OUTPUT 5

32

C

Ground
Refer to BCS-28, «Reference Value».

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-68, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-63

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567557

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 — 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check continuity between BCM connector and combination switch connector.
Combination switch
signal

BCM

Combination switch

Connector

Terminal

OUTPUT 1

Terminal

6

OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3

Connector

12

5
M18

Continuity

14

4

M28

5

OUTPUT 4

3

2

OUTPUT 5

2

8

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connectors.

2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 — 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

Check for continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Combination switch
signal

BCM
Connector

OUTPUT 1

6

OUTPUT 2

5

OUTPUT 3

M18

Continuity

Terminal

4

OUTPUT 4

3

OUTPUT 5

2

Ground
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.

Connect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunctioning.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

BCS-64

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A

Terminals
(+)

BCM signal

(−)

BCM
Connector

6

INPUT 2

5
M18

B

Terminal

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

Voltage

4

INPUT 4

3

INPUT 5

2

C

Ground
Refer to BCS-28, «Reference Value».

D

Is the inspection result normal?
Yes
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
No
>> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-68, «Removal and Installation».

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-65

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
1.
2.

INFOID:0000000009567558

Perform the data monitor of CONSULT to check for any malfunctioning item.
Check the malfunction combinations.
Malfunction item: ×

×

B

×
×

E

×
×
×
×

×

×

FR FOG SW

PASSING SW

HEAD LAMP SW 2

HEAD LAMP SW 1

HI BEAM SW

TURN SIGNAL L

×
×

×
×

×

×

×

G

×
×

×

×

×
×

I
×

J

3.

TAIL LAMP SW

TURN SIGNAL R

RR WASHER SW

RR WIPER INT

×
×

D

H

×
×

C

F

RR WIPER ON

×

INT VOLUME

×

FR WIPER INT

FR WASHER SW

A

FR WIPER LOW

Malfunction combination

FR WIPER HI

Data monitor item

×
×

×

×

×

×

K

All Items

L

If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K

Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part.
Malfunction
combination

Malfunctioning part

Repair or replace

A

Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit

B

Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit

C

Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit

D

Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit

E

Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit

F

Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit

G

Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit

H

Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit

I

Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit

J

Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit

K

BCM

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

L

Combination switch

Replace the combination switch.

Revision: April 2013

Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning
part. Refer to BCS-62, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-64, «Diagnosis Procedure».

BCS-66

2014 Note

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009447118

B

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before replacing BCM, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-55, «CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description».
1. Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
2. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
3. Remove screws (A) and remove the BCM (1) from the steering
member and position aside.
: Front
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the BCM.
5. Remove relays from relay bracket.
6. Remove relay bracket from BCM to transfer to new BCM.

C

D

E

F

G

ALMIA0656ZZ

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Perform “CONFIGURATION (BCM)” when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-54, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description».
• Make sure to perform the system initialization (NATS) when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-54, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure».
• When replacing BCM, if new BCM does not come with keyfobs attached, all existing keyfobs must be
re-registered.

I

J

K

L

BCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BCS-67

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COMBINATION SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009447322

CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not use air or electric tools when removing or installing the combination switch.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove the steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate steering wheel clockwise to access first combination
switch screw (A) and remove.

ALMIA0648ZZ

4.
5.

Rotate steering wheel counter-clockwise to access second combination switch screw (A) and remove.
Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the combination
switch (1) and remove.

ALMIA0649ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
• In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset with the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory with CONSULT.
• If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to BCS-54, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work
Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

BCS-68

2014 Note

BRAKES

SECTION

BR

BRAKE SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover…… 3
Precaution for Brake System ……………………………… 3

DISC ROTOR …………………………………………………….15
DISC ROTOR : Inspection …………………………………15

REAR DRUM BRAKE ………………………………… 17
BRAKE LINING ………………………………………………….17
BRAKE LINING : Inspection ………………………………17
BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing …………………….17

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 5

BRAKE DRUM …………………………………………………..17
BRAKE DRUM : Inspection ……………………………….17

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 5

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 19

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 5
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 5

BRAKE PEDAL …………………………………………. 19
Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..20

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 7
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 7
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 7

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 8
BRAKE PEDAL …………………………………………… 8
Inspection and Adjustment …………………………………. 8

BRAKE FLUID …………………………………………….11

BRAKE PIPING …………………………………………. 21
FRONT ……………………………………………………………..21
FRONT : Exploded View …………………………………..21
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping …………………………………22
FRONT : Removal and Installation ……………………..22
FRONT : Inspection ………………………………………….23

Inspection ………………………………………………………. 11
Draining …………………………………………………………. 11
Refilling …………………………………………………………. 11
Bleeding Brake System ……………………………………. 12

REAR ……………………………………………………………….23
REAR : Exploded View ……………………………………..24
REAR : Hydraulic Piping ……………………………………24
REAR : Removal and Installation ……………………….25
REAR : Inspection ……………………………………………25

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ……………………….13

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER …………………….. 27

Inspection ………………………………………………………. 13

Exploded View …………………………………………………27
Removal and Installation …………………………………..27
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….28
Inspection ……………………………………………………….28

BRAKE BOOSTER ……………………………………..14
Inspection ………………………………………………………. 14

FRONT DISC BRAKE ………………………………….15

BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE …….. 30

BRAKE PAD …………………………………………………….. 15
BRAKE PAD : Inspection …………………………………. 15
BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing ……………………….. 15

Revision: April 2013

BR-1

Exploded View …………………………………………………30
Removal and installation …………………………………..30
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..31

2014 Note

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

VACUUM LINES ………………………………………… 32

REAR DRUM BRAKE ………………………………… 40

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 32
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 32
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 32

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 40
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 40
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………… 42
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………….. 42

FRONT DISC BRAKE …………………………………. 34
BRAKE PAD ……………………………………………………. 34
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ………………………….. 34
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation …………….. 34
BRAKE PAD : Inspection …………………………………. 35
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ………………………….. 35
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View … 35
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………….. 36
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ………………………………………………………. 37

Revision: April 2013

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 44
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 44
General Specifications …………………………………….. 44
Brake Pedal …………………………………………………… 44
Check Valve …………………………………………………… 44
Brake Booster ………………………………………………… 44
Front Disc Brake …………………………………………….. 44
Rear Drum Brake ……………………………………………. 45

BR-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009578746

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
BR
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
G

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009364984

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. to prevent damage to
windshield.

H

I

J

K

L

M
PIIB3706J

Precaution for Brake System

INFOID:0000000009364985

WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, inspect the
brake pedal height and play. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the brake caliper and other components.
• Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
Revision: April 2013

BR-3

2014 Note

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B).
• Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is
detected, replace part with a new one.
• Always connect the battery terminals when moving the vehicle.
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
disc brake rotors, after replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
— Front brake pad: Refer to BR-15, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».
— Front disc brake rotor: Refer to BR-15, «DISC ROTOR : Inspection».
— Rear brake lining: refer to BR-17, «BRAKE LINING : Inspection».
— Rear brake drum: BR-17, «BRAKE DRUM : Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

BR-4

JPFIA0001ZZ

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009364986

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46532)
Brake height tool

Measuring brake pedal height

C

D

E
LFIA0227E

38-PFM92-GYX/5
( — )
On-car brake lathe

BR

Turning disc brake rotors

G

H
ALFIA0092ZZ

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009364987

I
Tool name

Description

1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench

Removing and installing brake pipe and
hose flare nuts
a:10 mm (0.39 in) / 12 mm (0.47 in)

J

K

L

NT360

Vacuum pump

• Air tight
• Inspection of check valve

M

N
ZZC1313D

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-5

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name

Description

Brake caliper wrench (front)

Return the piston

NNFIA0040ZZ

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

BR-6

2014 Note

Symptom
BRAKE

Revision: April 2013
Noise
×
×
×

Shake
×

Shimmy, Shudder
×
×

BR-7
×
×
×
×
×
×

×
×
×

×
×
×

STEERING

×

DRIVE SHAFT

×
×

ST-7 (steering system)

FAX-6 (front axle)

WT-4 (wheel and tire)

WT-5 (wheel and tire)

FAX-6 (front axle)
RAX-4 (rear axle)
FSU-5 (front suspension)
RSU-4 (rear suspension)

BR-17

BR-15

BR-15, BR-17

BR-15, BR-17

BR-15

BR-15

BR-15, BR-17

BR-15

BR-15

BR-15, BR-17

NVH Troubleshooting Chart

×

×

ROAD WHEEL

×

TIRE

×

AXLE AND SUSPENSION

Drum out of round

Rotor thickness variation

Rotor or drum rust

Rotor or drum deflection

Rotor deformation

Rotor runout

Rotor or drum damage

Rotor imbalance

Shims damaged

Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
Pads or lining uneven wear

BR-15, BR-17

Reference page

Pads or lining damaged

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
A

INFOID:0000000009364988

×

×

2014 Note

B

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

×: Applicable

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009364989

INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height
Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1) and the
brake pedal upper surface.

Brake pedal height

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.

JPFIA0065ZZ

Stop Lamp Switch
Check the clearance (C) between the brake pedal (1) and the stop
lamp switch (2) threaded end.

Clearance

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.

JPFIA0866ZZ

ASCD Cancel Switch (if equipped)
Check the clearance (C) between the brake pedal (1) and the ASCD
cancel switch (2) threaded end.

Clearance

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.

JPFIA0866ZZ

Brake Pedal Play
Press the brake pedal. Check that brake pedal play does not exist.
Depressed Brake Pedal Height

Revision: April 2013

BR-8

2014 Note

BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake
pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N
(50.0 kg-f, 110.2 lb-f) while turning engine ON.
Depressed brake
pedal height

A

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

B

CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.

C
JPFIA0068ZZ

D

ADJUSTMENT
Brake Pedal Height

1.
2.
3.
4.
a.

E

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch.
Loosen the stop lamp switch 45° counterclockwise.
Adjust the brake pedal height with the following procedure.
Loosen the input rod lock nut (1).
CAUTION:
The threaded end of the input rod (2) must project to the
inner side (L) of the clevis (3).

BR

G

H

I
JPFIA0003ZZ

b.

Brake pedal
height
c.
5.

J

Rotate the input rod, adjust the brake pedal to the specified
height (H1).

K

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

Tighten the lock nut. Refer to BR-30, «Exploded View».
Check the brake pedal play.

L

JPFIA0279ZZ

M

Stop Lamp Switch

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch.
Loosen the stop lamp switch 45° counterclockwise.
Press-fit the stop lamp switch (2) until the stop lamp switch hits
the brake pedal (1) then tighten 45° clockwise while pulling the
brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal and stop lamp
switch threaded and must be the specified value.
Clearance

N

O

P

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

• The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0866ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BR-9

2014 Note

BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
ASCD Cancel Switch (if equipped)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD cancel switch.
Loosen the ASCD cancel switch 45° counterclockwise.
Press-fit the ASCD cancel switch (2) until the ASCD cancel
switch hits the brake pedal (1) then tighten 45° clockwise while
pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal and ASCD cancel switch threaded and must be the specified value.
Clearance

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Pedal».

• The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0866ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BR-10

2014 Note

BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

BRAKE FLUID

A

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364990

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

B

• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified
range between the MAX – MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any brake fluid leaks around the reservoir tank.
• Check the brake system for any leaks if the fluid level is extremely
low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leaks if the warning lamp remains
illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
• Check the reservoir tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust)
and oils other than brake fluid.

C

D

E
JPFIA0007ZZ

BRAKE LINE
1.
2.

BR

Check brake tubes and hoses for cracks, deterioration or other
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part
if any brake fluid leaks are present.

G

H

I
SBR389C

Draining

INFOID:0000000009364991

CAUTION:
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing work.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradually discharge brake fluid.

J

K

L

M

N

BRA0007D

Refilling

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing work.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Monitor the brake fluid level in the reservoir while performing the air bleeding procedure.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
Revision: April 2013

O

INFOID:0000000009364992

BR-11

2014 Note

P

BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and
refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the
full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at
intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged.
Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed.
Repeat the same work on each wheel.
3. Perform the air bleeding procedure. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding
Brake System».
PFIA0403J

Bleeding Brake System

INFOID:0000000009364993

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake: Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
• Rear drum brake: Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 in the following order: Front (RH) brake → front (LH) brake → rear (RH) brake → rear
(LH) brake.
7. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR11, «Inspection».
8. Add brake fluid as necessary to keep the brake fluid level within the specified range. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
9. Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to
BR-8, «Inspection and Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

BR-12

2014 Note

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

A

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364994

FLUID LEAKS

B

Check for brake fluid leaks from the master cylinder, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections.
C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-13

2014 Note

BRAKE BOOSTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364995

OPERATION
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a
normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.

AIR TIGHT
1.

2.

Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Then
depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more.

Revision: April 2013

BR-14

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

FRONT DISC BRAKE

A

BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364996

B

INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness

C

: Refer to BR-15, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».

D

E

BRA0010D

BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing

BR

INFOID:0000000009671178

BRAKE BURNISHING
Burnish contact surfaces between disc brake rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after
refinishing disc brake rotors, replacing disc brake rotors, replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very
low mileage:
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake pedal does not operate firmly/securely until pads and
disc brake rotor are securely seated.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake pedal for a few minutes to cool the brakes.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc brake rotor are securely seated.

DISC ROTOR

G

H

I

J

K

DISC ROTOR : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364997

L

INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc brake rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer
to BR-15, «DISC ROTOR : Inspection».

M

Runout

1.
2.
3.

N

Secure the disc brake rotor to the wheel hub with wheel nuts (2
points at least).
Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to FAX-7, «Inspection».
Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.

O

P

Runout
4.
5.

: Refer to BR-44, «Front Disc Brake».

Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc brake rotor-to-wheel hub installation position by one
BRA0013D
hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
Refinish or replace the disc brake rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above
operation.

Revision: April 2013

BR-15

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
CAUTION:
If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc brake rotor. Refer
to BR-36, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-44, «Front Disc Brake».

Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc brake rotor using a micrometer.
Replace the disc brake rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Refer to BR-44, «Front Disc Brake».

Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-44, «Front
Disc Brake».
Thickness variation (mea- : Refer to BR-44, «Front
sured at 8 positions)
Disc Brake».

SBR020B

Revision: April 2013

BR-16

2014 Note

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

REAR DRUM BRAKE

A

BRAKE LINING
BRAKE LINING : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364998

B

INSPECTION
Brake Lining

1.
2.

C

Remove plug from back plate. Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
Check brake lining wear thickness (A) from an inspection hole
on back plate. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness

D

: Refer to BR-45, «Rear Drum Brake».
E

BR

G

H

I

J
JSFIA1039ZZ

BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing

INFOID:0000000009671191

K

BRAKE BURNISHING
Burnish contact surfaces between brake lining and brake drum according to the following procedure after
refinishing brake drum, replacing brake drum, replacing brake lining, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage:
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake pedal does not operate firmly/securely until brake lining and brake drum are securely seated.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake pedal for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until brake lining and brake drum are securely seated.

BRAKE DRUM
BRAKE DRUM : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009364999

INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of brake drum for uneven wear, cracks and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to
BR-40, «Removal and Installation».
NOTE:
• Make sure the parking brake control is fully released prior to removal of the brake drum.

Revision: April 2013

BR-17

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• The rear wheel hub is part of the brake drum.
Brake Drum Inner Diameter
Check inner diameter (B) of the brake drum.

Inner diameter : Refer to BR-45, «Rear Drum Brake».

JPFIA0113ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BR-18

2014 Note

BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365000

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

AWFIA0875GB

1.

Snap pin

2.

Brake pedal

3.

Brake pedal pad

4.

Stop lamp switch

5.

Clip

6.

Clevis pin

7.

ASCD cancel switch (if equipped)

K

NOTE:
The CVT brake pedal is shown. The M/T brake pedal is similar.

Removal and Installation

L
INFOID:0000000009365001

M

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove knee bolster. Refer to IP-14, «Exploded View».
Disconnect the harness connector from the stop lamp switch.
Disconnect the harness connector from the ASCD cancel switch (if equipped).
Disconnect the harness connector from the accelerator pedal. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to
ACC-3, «Removal and Installation».
6. Separate the harness from brake pedal.
7. Rotate the stop lamp switch counter clockwise to remove.
8. Rotate the ASCD cancel switch (if equipped) counter clockwise to remove.
9. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis.
10. Disconnect the power steering harness connector and position it aside.
11. Remove the brake pedal.
CAUTION:
Support the brake booster and master cylinder to prevent contact with other components.
Revision: April 2013

J

BR-19

2014 Note

N

O

P

BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
12. Perform the inspection after removal. Refer to BR-20, «Inspection and Adjustment».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the brake pedal if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
already applied)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
• Perform the adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-20, «Inspection and Adjustment».

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009365002

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check the brake pedal for damage and cracks on the welded parts, and replace the brake pedal if necessary.

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR8, «Inspection and Adjustment».
• Perform the accelerator pedal released position learning procedure. Refer to EC-113, «Work Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

BR-20

2014 Note

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BRAKE PIPING

A

FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365003

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

ALFIA0217GB

Revision: April 2013

BR-21

2014 Note

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.

Master cylinder brake tube (second- 2.
ary)

Master cylinder brake tube (primary) 3.

ABS actuator to brake tube connector (LH)

4.

ABS actuator to brake tube connec- 5.
tor (RH)

Brake tube connector

6.

Front brake tube (RH)

7.

Front brake tube (LH)

Brake master cylinder

9.

Brake booster

8.

10. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

11. Lock plate

12. Front brake hose

13. Copper sealing washer

A.

B.

To front brake hose

To rear brake tube

Front

FRONT : Hydraulic Piping

INFOID:0000000009365004

AWFIA0818GB

1.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

2.

Front disc brake

3.

Brake master cylinder

4.

Brake booster

5.

Brake tube connector

6.

Rear drum brake

A.

Brake tube

B.

Brake hose

Flare nut

Union bolt

CAUTION:
• All hoses and tubes must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
• Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering clockwise and counterclockwise.
• The brake system is an important safety system. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble
the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary.
• Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
• When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets in.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.

FRONT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365005

CAUTION:
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

BR-22

2014 Note

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose, and remove the
brake tube.
CAUTION:
• Do not scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Do not bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes.
3. Remove the union bolt, the copper sealing washers, and the brake hose from the brake caliper.
4. Remove the lock plate and brake hose.

A

B

C

INSTALLATION
1.

Assemble the union bolt (A) and the copper sealing washers (1)
to the brake hose and install it to the caliper. Align the brake
hose L-pin with the brake caliper hole, and tighten the union bolt
(A) to the specified torque. Refer to BR-21, «FRONT : Exploded
View».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper sealing washers.

D

E

BR

AWFIA0795ZZ

2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Install the brake tube to the brake hose, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate
further, and secure the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate.
CAUTION:
• Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Make sure that interference does not exist between the brake hoses and other parts when turning the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise.
Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-23, «FRONT : Inspection».

FRONT : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009365006

G

H

I

J

K

L

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.

2.

Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interference with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections.
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80.1 kg-f, 176.5 lb-f) and hold down the brake pedal for
approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leaks.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leaks are present.

REAR

Revision: April 2013

BR-23

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365007

AWFIA0820GB

1.

Rear brake tube (RH)

2.

Rear brake tube (LH)

3.

Lock plate

4.

Rear brake hose

5.

Wheel cylinder brake tube

A.

To rear brake hose

B.

To brake tube connector

Front

REAR : Hydraulic Piping

INFOID:0000000009365008

AWFIA0818GB

Revision: April 2013

BR-24

2014 Note

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

2.

Front disc brake

3.

Brake master cylinder

4.

Brake booster

5.

Brake tube connector

6.

Rear drum brake

A.

Brake tube

B.

Brake hose

: Flare nut

A

B

Union bolt

CAUTION:
• All hoses and tubes must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
• Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering clockwise and counterclockwise.
• The brake system is an important safety system. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble
the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary.
• Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
• When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets in.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.

REAR : Removal and Installation

C

D

E

INFOID:0000000009365009

CAUTION:
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

BR

G

H

REMOVAL
1.
2.

3.
4.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the brake hose.
CAUTION:
• Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tube.
• Do not bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and brake tubes.
Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose from the vehicle.
Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the wheel cylinder.
Remove the brake tube.

I

J

K

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder. Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not
rotate further.
Connect the brake hose to the brake tube. Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate
further. Secure the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate.
CAUTION:
• Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Make sure that interference does not exist between the brake hoses and other parts when the
suspension moves.
Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench. Refer to BR-24, «REAR :
Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tube.
Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-25, «REAR : Inspection».

REAR : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009365010

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

BR-25

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness
at connections.
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80.1 kg-f, 176.5 lb-f) and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leaks.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leaks are present.

Revision: April 2013

BR-26

2014 Note

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365011

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I
AWFIA1021ZZ

1.

Reservoir cap

2.

Brake fluid strainer

3.

Reservoir tank

4.

Grommet

5.

Brake master cylinder

6.

Brake fluid level switch

7.

O-ring

Apply brake fluid

Removal and Installation

J

PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or
silicone-based grease
INFOID:0000000009365012

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• Do not scratch the piston of brake master cylinder when installing/removing because the piston is
exposed. Check for any dust on the piston, and wash with brake fluid if needed.
• Hold the brake master cylinder when handing the brake master cylinder. Do not hold the piston
because the piston might become detached if pulled strongly.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

4.
5.
6.

Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-70, «Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)».
Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Position the IPDM E/R aside to obtain access to the brake master cylinder. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal
and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the brake fluid level switch.
Disconnect the brake tubes from the brake master cylinder using a flare nut wrench.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tubes.
Remove nuts and brake master cylinder.

Revision: April 2013

L

M

N

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

K

BR-27

2014 Note

P

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• Do not bend sharply, twist, or strongly pull out the brake tubes.
• Do not depress the brake pedal after the brake master cylinder is removed.
• The piston of the brake master cylinder is exposed. Do not damage it when removing the brake
master cylinder.
7. Remove and discard the O-ring.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the seal.
• Do not reuse the O-ring.
• Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with new brake fluid
if necessary.
• Check that all brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank and reservoir tank.
• Apply silicone grease to the brake booster (A) as shown when
installing the brake master cylinder to the brake booster.

JPFIA0013ZZ

• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the brake master cylinder by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench. Refer to BR-21, «FRONT : Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tubes.
• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-28, «Inspection».

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009365013

DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble the brake master cylinder.
• Remove the reservoir tank only when necessary.
Remove the reservoir tank and grommets from the brake master cylinder.

ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Do not use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and
assembly process.
• Do not drop the parts. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommets and install on brake master cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the grommets.
2. Install the reservoir tank to the brake master cylinder.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009365014

INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

BR-28

2014 Note

BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BR-13, «Inspection».
A

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the brake master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection.
• Check for fluid leaks from connections. Refer to BR-23, «FRONT : Inspection».
CAUTION:
If fluid leaks are present, retighten connections to the specified torque. Refer to BR-21, «FRONT :
Exploded View». Replace components if necessary.

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-29

2014 Note

BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365015

AWFIA1022ZZ

1.

Brake master cylinder

2.

Check valve

3.

Brake booster

4.

Lock nut

5.

Clevis

6.

Gasket

Removal and installation

INFOID:0000000009365016

CAUTION:
Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-27, «Removal and Installation».
Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-70, «Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)».
Remove ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Remove TCM (if equipped). Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
Remove vacuum hose from check valve. Refer to BR-32, «Exploded View».
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove knee bolster. Refer to IP-14, «Exploded View».
Remove the snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2). Refer to BR-19,
«Exploded View».
9. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal. Refer to BR19, «Exploded View».
10. Remove brake booster from dash panel on engine room side.
CAUTION:
Do not deform or bend the brake tubes.
NOTE:
If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake
booster.
11. Remove check valve from brake booster.
12. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-31, «Inspection and Adjustment».

JPFIA0019ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not reuse the gasket.
Revision: April 2013

BR-30

2014 Note

BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads.
• Check that all brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Set check valve angle (A) as shown.
Check valve angle

: 45°

A

B

C

• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Perform the inspection after installation. Adjust the brake pedal
height and play if necessary. Refer to BR-8, «Inspection and
Adjustment».

D

E
JPFIA0871ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009365017

BR

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check Valve Vacuum Inspection

1.

G

Check the vacuum using a suitable tool.
When connected to the booster side
When connected to the vacuum hose side

2.

: Refer to BR-44, «Check Valve».
: Refer to BR-44, «Check Valve».

H

If the vacuum still cannot be maintained, replace the check valve.
I

Input Rod Length Inspection

1.

Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the specified length (A).
Input rod
length

2.

J

: Refer to BR-44, «Brake Booster».
K

Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to BR-30,
«Exploded View».

L
JPFIA0238ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

M

Inspect the brake booster operation. Refer to BR-14, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement is not the standard. Refer to BR-8,
«Inspection and Adjustment».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-31

2014 Note

VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

VACUUM LINES
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365018

JSFIA0997ZZ

1.

Clamp

2.

Vacuum hose

3.

Vacuum piping

A.

To brake booster

B.

Paint mark

C.

To intake manifold

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365019

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert until tip reaches the back-end
of length (A) or further as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
Length

: 24 mm (0.94 in) or more

— Face the paint mark of vacuum hose (intake manifold side) upward
to assemble.
— Face the other paint marks of vacuum hose to the vehicle front
side to assemble.
JPFIA0023ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009365020

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Appearance

Revision: April 2013

BR-32

2014 Note

VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
A

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-33

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365021

AWFIA1020ZZ

1.

Cylinder body

2.

Inner shim

3.

Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)

4.

Pad return spring

5.

Pad retainer

6.

Torque member

7.

Outer pad

8.

Outer shim

Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent.

BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365022

WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While removing caliper, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
• It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of front disc brake caliper. In this case, hang front disc brake caliper with a wire so as
not to stretch brake hose.
• Do not damage piston boot.
• Keep disc brake rotor and brake pads free from brake fluid and grease.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Remove the front wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove sliding pin bolts.
Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire in a position so that the brake hose will not stretch. Then
remove the pad return springs, brake pads, shims and pad retainers from the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Do not deform the pad return springs or pad retainers when servicing the brake pads.
• Note the position of the brake pads during removal to aid installation.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».

INSTALLATION
1.

Install the pad retainers to the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Install the pad retainers so that they will not be lifted up from the torque member.
• Do not deform the pad retainers.

Revision: April 2013

BR-34

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the to the mating surfaces between the shims and the brake
A
pads.
Install the brake pads and shims to the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Replace the brake pads and shims if they have been dropped or sustained and impact.
B
• If any shim is damaged by corrosion, replace it.
• Always replace shims and brake pads as a set.
Install the pad return springs to the brake pads.
C
CAUTION:
• Do not deform the pad return springs.
• Correctly insert the pad return spring into the pad return spring hole on the brake pad.
D
Install cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION:
When installing new brake pads, check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake
E
fluid returns to the reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to press piston into the cylinder body.
Install the sliding pin bolts and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to BR-34, «BRAKE PAD : Exploded BR
View».
Depress the brake pedal several times to verify that brake drag does not exist for the front disc brake.
Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».
G
Install the front wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».
H

BRAKE PAD : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009365023

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

I

If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.

Check drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below:
Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-34, «BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation».
Press the piston.
Install brake pads. Refer to BR-34, «BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation».
Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
Check drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-37, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly».
Burnish the brake pads and disc brake rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
disc brake rotors, after replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-15,
«BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing».

J

K

L

M

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365024

N

REMOVAL
O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-35

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

JPFIA0510GB

1. Brake caliper

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365025

WARNING:
Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While removing caliper, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
• Do not damage piston boot.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
off immediately and wash with water if brake fluid spills on painted surfaces.
• Keep disc brake rotor free from brake fluid.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front wheel and tire using power tool.
Remove union bolt and disconnect brake hose from brake caliper. Discard the copper sealing washers.
Remove bolts and torque member including brake caliper.
Remove disc brake rotor. If reusing the disc brake rotor, apply matching marks on the wheel hub and disc
brake rotor to aid installation.
CAUTION:
Put matching marks on the wheel hub and disc brake rotor, if it is necessary to remove disc brake
rotor.

INSTALLATION
1.

2.

Install disc brake rotor, align the matching marks if installing the original disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
• Replace the disc brake rotor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Align the marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub at the time of installation when reusing disc
brake rotor.
Install the torque member including brake caliper to the steering knuckle and tighten the torque member
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Replace the torque member if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.

Revision: April 2013

BR-36

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and torque
member, and bolts.
3. Install brake hose to brake caliper with new copper sealing
washers (1). Tighten union bolt (A) to the specified torque. Refer
to BR-21, «FRONT : Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse copper sealing washers.

A

B

C

D
AWFIA0795ZZ

4.
5.
6.

Refill reservoir tank with new brake fluid and bleed air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to BR-12, E
«Bleeding Brake System».
Install the front wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».
BR

BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009365026

G

DISASSEMBLY

H

I

J

K

L
AWFIA1018ZZ

M
1.

Cap

4.

Piston seal

5.

Piston

6.

Piston boot

7.

Sliding pin

8.

Sliding pin boot

9.

Bushing

10. Torque member

2.

Bleeder valve

Apply Syntheso® GLK 1 grease or
equivalent.

3.

Cylinder body

N

Apply clean brake fluid

WARNING:
Clean dust on brake caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION:
• While removing brake caliper, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
• Do not damage the piston boot.
NOTE:
• The front brake caliper (LH) is shown. The front brake caliper (RH) is similar.
• Do not remove the pad return springs, brake pads, and pad retainers from the torque member when disassembling and assembling the brake caliper.

DISASSEMBLY
Revision: April 2013

BR-37

2014 Note

O

P

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove the sliding pin bolts and the cylinder body from the torque member.
2. Remove the sliding pins and the sliding pin boots.
3. Remove the bushing from the sliding pin.
4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot.
WARNING:
Do not get fingers caught between the piston and wooden
block.

MAA0272D

5.
6.
7.

Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
Remove bleeder valve and cap.
Perform inspection after disassembly.

JPFIA0738ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Brake Caliper
Check the inner wall of brake caliper for corrosion, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
CAUTION:
Clean the brake caliper using new brake fluid. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member
Check torque member for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Piston
Check the piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
CAUTION:
The piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, Sliding Pin Boot
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boots for wear, damage, and cracks. Replace as necessary.

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.

Install bleeder valve and cap.
Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal (1), and install to
groove in cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seal.

JPFIA0039ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BR-38

2014 Note

FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Apply Syntheso® GLK 1 grease or equivalent to piston boot (1).
Cover the piston (2) end with new piston boot, and then install
cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston boot.

A

B

C
JPFIA0739ZZ

4.

D

Push piston (1) into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot
(2) piston-side lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.

E

BR

G
JPFIA0034ZZ

5.
6.

Apply rubber grease to the mating surfaces (A) of the sliding pin
(1) and the bushing (2).
Install the bushing to the sliding pin.

H

I

J

JPFIA0836ZZ

7.
8.

Apply rubber grease to the mating surfaces of the sliding pins
(1) and the sliding pin boots (2).
Install the sliding pins and sliding pin boots to the torque member (3).

K

L

M

N
JPFIA0837ZZ

9.

Install the cylinder body to the torque member with the sliding pin bolts. Refer to BR-34, «BRAKE PAD :
Exploded View».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-39

2014 Note

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DRUM BRAKE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365027

AWFIA1019ZZ

1.

Shoe hold pin

2.

Back plate

3.

Plug

4.

Brake shoe

5.

Retainer

6.

Upper spring

7.

Adjuster

8.

Return spring

9.

Brake drum

10. Boot

11. Piston

12.

Piston cup

13. Spring

14. Wheel cylinder

15.

Bleeder valve

16. Cap
1: Apply Syntheso® GLEP1 grease or equivalent.
2: Apply Molyguard GS 2039 grease or equivalent.
: Apply clean brake fluid

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365028

WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Do not depress the brake pedal while removing the brake drum because the pistons may pop out.
Revision: April 2013

BR-40

2014 Note

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not drop the removed parts.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on the brake drum.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

3.

4.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Remove the brake drum. Refer to RAX-6, «Removal and Installation».
NOTE:
• Make sure the parking brake is fully released prior to removal of the brake drum.
• The rear wheel hub is part of the brake drum.
Remove the retainers (1) by pushing them inward toward the
vehicle and rotating. This will release the shoe hold pins, brake
shoes, each retainer, and adjuster.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the wheel cylinder boots.
Disconnect the parking brake cable from operating lever.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the operating lever.

A

B

C

D

E

BR

G
JSFIA0636ZZ

5.
6.
a.
b.
7.

H

Disassemble the brake shoes, each spring, and adjuster.
Remove the wheel cylinder using the following procedure:
Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder.
Remove the two bolts and wheel cylinder from back plate.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection
and Adjustment».

I

J

JSFIA1056ZZ

K

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Replace the parts if they have been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Do not damage the wheel cylinder.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
Installation is in the reverse of removal.
• Check the difference between left and right adjuster.
: Front

L

M

N
Adjuster

Direction

Left side

Left screw

Right side

Right screw

O

• Shorten the length of the adjuster by rotating it.
• For grease type and placement, refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».

P
JPFIA0904ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BR-41

2014 Note

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check drum brake components for proper installation.
• Check the brake shoe linings and brake drum inner surface for
grease. Make sure that grease does not contact the lining material
or drum inner surface.
• Perform the air bleeding after installing a new or rebuilt wheel cylinder. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
• Step on the brake pedal several times after installing the brake
drum.
• Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection and Adjustment».
JSFIA0637ZZ

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009365029

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.

3.
4.

Remove boots from wheel cylinder. Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
Remove pistons, piston cups and spring from wheel cylinder.
CAUTION:
Pull the pistons out from the wheel cylinder to prevent the wheel cylinder inner wall from being
damaged.
Remove piston cups from pistons.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection and Adjustment».

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

Apply clean brake fluid to the new piston cups (1) and pistons
(3).
Apply Syntheso® GLEP1 grease or equivalent to boots (2).
Install piston cups and new boots to pistons (3).
CAUTION:
• Do not mistake the direction of pistons.
• Do not reuse piston cups and boots.
Apply clean brake fluid to wheel cylinder inner wall, and install
spring and pistons into wheel cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the wheel cylinder inner wall.
Install boots to wheel cylinder. Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
Perform inspection after assembly. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection and Adjustment».

Inspection and Adjustment

JPFIA0915ZZ

INFOID:0000000009365030

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the brake shoe lining for excessive wear, damage, and peeling.
• Check each spring for settling, excessive wear, damage, and rust.
• Check the adjuster for smoothness, and check it for excessive wear, damage, and rust.
• Check the back plate for damage, cracks, and deformation.
• Check the wheel cylinder for cracks, damage, and leaks.
• Visually check the brake drum for excessive wear, cracks, and damage.

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the wheel cylinder inner wall for excessive wear, cracks, and damage.
• Check the pistons for excessive wear and damage.

INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
Check that the pistons move smoothly.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.

Check that the drum brake component parts are installed properly.

Revision: April 2013

BR-42

2014 Note

REAR DRUM BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Rotate the brake drum and check that there is no drag. Perform the following procedure if necessary:
a. Remove the brake shoes. Refer to BR-40, «Removal and Installation».
b. Push the pistons.
CAUTION:
Push both side of the piston simultaneously.
c. Install the brake shoes. Refer to BR-40, «Removal and Installation».
3. Inspect and adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».
4. Check drag of rear drum brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the wheel cylinder and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-42, «Disassembly and Assembly».
5. Perform brake burnishing. Refer to BR-17, «BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing».

A

B

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-43

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

INFOID:0000000009365031

Unit: mm (in)

Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake

54.025 (2.13)

Pad length × width × thickness

115.0 × 42.0 × 9.0 (4.53 × 1.654 × 0.354)

Rotor outer diameter × thickness

260 × 22.0 (10.24 × 0.87)

Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake

19.05 (3/4)
Trailing: 172 × 37 × 4.8 (6.77 × 1.46 × 0.19)
Leading: 155 × 37 × 4.8 (6.10 ×1.46 × 0.19)

Lining length × width × thickness
Drum inner diameter — new

203.2 (8.00)

Master cylinder

Cylinder bore diameter

22.23 (0.875)

Control valve

Valve type

Brake booster

Diaphragm diameter

Electric brake force distribution
255 (10)

Recommended brake fluid

Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

Brake Pedal

INFOID:0000000009365032

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard
158 ±5 (6.22 ±0.20)

Brake pedal height
Clearance between brake pedal lever and the stop lamp switch threaded end

0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)

Brake pedal full stroke

128 (5.04)

Check Valve

INFOID:0000000009641742

Vacuum applied at intake manifold side.

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg)

Vacuum leakage
[at vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) applied at
booster side.]

Within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds.

Brake Booster

INFOID:0000000009365033

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard

Input rod length

125 (4.92)

Front Disc Brake

INFOID:0000000009365034

Unit: mm (in)

Item
Brake pad

Disc rotor

Revision: April 2013

Limit

Wear thickness

2.0 (0.08)

Wear thickness

20.0 (0.787)

Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions)

0.013 (0.001)

Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)

0.055 (0.002)

BR-44

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Rear Drum Brake

INFOID:0000000009365035

A
Unit: mm (in)

Item
Brake lining

Wear thickness

Brake drum

Wear inner diameter- maximum

Limit

B

1.0 (0.04)
204.2 (8.04)

C

D

E

BR

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BR-45

2014 Note

BRAKES

SECTION

BRC

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 22 BRC

ABS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Brake System ……………………………… 3
Precaution for Brake Control System …………………… 4
Precaution for Harness Repair ……………………………. 4

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 5

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) ……………………………………… 22
Reference Value ………………………………………………22
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………….24
DTC Inspection Priority Chart …………………………….25
DTC Index ………………………………………………………26

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………… 27

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 34
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 34

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 6

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….34
Diagnostic Work Sheet ……………………………………..35

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 6

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 36

ABS …………………………………………………………………… 9
ABS : System Diagram ……………………………………… 9
ABS : System Description ………………………………….. 9
ABS : ABS Function ………………………………………… 14
ABS : EBD Function ………………………………………… 15
ABS : Fail-safe ……………………………………………….. 16

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ……..19
CONSULT Function (ABS) ……………………………….. 19

Revision: April 2013

I

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..27

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 5
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 5

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 9

H

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 27

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 5

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 6
Component Description ……………………………………… 7
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ……….. 7
Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor ………………………… 7
Stop Lamp Switch …………………………………………….. 8
Brake Fluid Level Switch ……………………………………. 8
Parking Brake Switch ………………………………………… 8

G

J

K

L

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR …………………………………………………………. 36
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….36
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..36

M

C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR …………………………………………………………. 40

N

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….40
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..40

C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM …….. 42
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….42
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..42

C1110 CONTROL FAILURE ……………………….. 44
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….44
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..44

C1111 PUMP MOTOR ……………………………….. 45
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….45

BRC-1

2014 Note

O

P

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 45

C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]… 47
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 47
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 47

C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE
SYSTEM ……………………………………………………. 49
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 49
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 49

C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT
VALVE SYSTEM ………………………………………… 51
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 51
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 51

C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL …………………………….. 53

EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION
FREQUENCY …………………………………………….. 63
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 63

UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION ……………… 64
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 64

THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG …………… 65
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 65

ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ………. 66
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 66

PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION
SOUND OCCURS ………………………………………. 67
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 67

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 53
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 53

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ……………. 68

C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM …………… 54

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 69

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 54
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 54

WHEEL SENSOR ………………………………………. 69

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ………………………. 56
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 56
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 56

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ……………………. 57
Description …………………………………………………….. 57
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 57
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 57

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ………………………… 58
Component Function Check …………………………….. 58
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 58
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 59

ABS WARNING LAMP ……………………………….. 60
Component Function Check …………………………….. 60
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 60

BRAKE WARNING LAMP …………………………… 61

Description …………………………………………………….. 68

FRONT WHEEL SENSOR …………………………………. 69
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ……….. 69
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………….. 69
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ……………………………………. 70
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View …………. 70
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………….. 70

SENSOR ROTOR ………………………………………. 72
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR …………………………………. 72
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………….. 72
REAR SENSOR ROTOR ……………………………………. 72
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………….. 72

Component Function Check …………………………….. 61
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 61

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) ………………………………………. 73

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 62

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 73
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 73

ABS ………………………………………………………….. 62
Symptom Table ……………………………………………… 62

Revision: April 2013

BRC-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009619483

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
D
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
BRC
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
G

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Brake System

INFOID:0000000009619484

WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake using a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow by
compressed air.
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each
item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value.
• Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B).
• Always connect the battery terminal when moving the vehicle.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work.
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.

JPFIA0001ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BRC-3

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]

< PRECAUTION >

Precaution for Brake Control System

INFOID:0000000009619485

• Just after starting vehicle after ignition switch is ON, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noise may
be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal condition.
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnostic
servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level and oil
leaks.
• If tire size and type are used in an improper combination or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• ABS might be out of order or malfunctions by putting a radio (wiring inclusive), an antenna and a lead-in wire
near the control unit.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
— When replacing the following parts with parts other than genuine parts or making modifications: Suspensionrelated parts (shock absorber, spring, bushing, etc.), tires, wheels (other than specified sizes), brake-related
parts (pad, rotor, caliper, etc.), engine-related parts (muffler, ECM, etc.) and body reinforcement-related parts
(roll bar, tower bar, etc.).
— When driving with worn or deteriorated suspension, tires and brake-related parts.

Precaution for Harness Repair

INFOID:0000000009619486

• Solder the repair part, and wrap it with tape. [Twisted wire fray
must be 110 mm (4.33 in) or less.]

SKIB8766E

• Do not bypass the repair point with wire. (If it is bypassed, the turnout point cannot be separated and the twisted wire characteristics
are lost.)

SKIB8767E

Revision: April 2013

BRC-4

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[ABS]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009619487

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV991J0080
(J-45741)
ABS active wheel sensor tester

Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors

C

D

E
WFIA0101E

BRC

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009619488

G

Tool name

Description

1. Flare nut crowfoot
2. Torque wrench

Removing and installing brake piping
a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)

H

I
S-NT360

Power Tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

J

K

L

PIIB1407E

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-5

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009365049

ALFIA0360ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BRC-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A

Parking brake switch
(view with console removed)

B

Combination meter

C

IPDM E/R

D

Brake fluid level switch
(view with IPDM E/R removed)

E

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

F

Front wheel sensor

G

Stop lamp switch

H

Rear wheel sensor

Component Description

A

B
INFOID:0000000009365050

C
No.

Component

Reference/Function

1

Parking brake switch

BRC-8, «Parking Brake Switch»

2

Combination meter

MWI-6, «METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter»

3

IPDM E/R

PCS-4, «Component Parts Location»

4

Brake fluid level switch

BRC-8, «Brake Fluid Level Switch»

5

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

BRC-7, «ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)»

6

Front wheel speed sensor

BRC-7, «Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor»

7

Stop lamp switch

BRC-8, «Stop Lamp Switch»

8

Rear wheel speed sensor

BRC-7, «Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor»

ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)

D

E

BRC

G
INFOID:0000000009365051

Electric unit (control unit) is integrated with actuator and comprehensively controls ABS function and EBD
function.

ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

H

I

• Brake fluid pressure is controlled according to signals from each sensor.
• If malfunction is detected, the system enters fail-safe mode.

ACTUATOR

J

The following components are integrated with ABS actuator.
Pump
Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.

K

Motor
Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Motor Relay
Operates the motor ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Actuator Relay (Main Relay)
Operates each valve ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
ABS IN Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according to signals from control unit.

L

M

N

ABS OUT Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according to signals from control unit.
Return Check Valve
Returns the brake fluid from brake caliper and wheel cylinder to master cylinder by bypassing orifice of each
valve when brake is released.
Reservoir
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from brake caliper, so that pressure efficiently decreases when
decreasing pressure of brake caliper and wheel cylinder.

Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor

INFOID:0000000009365052

NOTE:
• Wheel sensor of front wheel is installed on steering knuckle.
Revision: April 2013

BRC-7

2014 Note

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Sensor rotor of front wheel is integrated in wheel hub assembly.
• Wheel sensor of rear wheel is installed on back plate of rear brake.
• Sensor rotor of rear wheel is installed on rear brake drum.
• Never measure resistance and voltage value using a tester because sensor is active sensor.
• Downsize and weight reduction is aimed. IC for detection portion
and magnet for sensor rotor are adopted.
• Power supply is supplied to detection portion so that magnetic field
line is read. Magnetic field that is detected is converted to current
signal.
• When sensor rotor rotates, magnetic field changes. Magnetic field
change is converted to current signals (rectangular wave) and is
transmitted to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Change
of magnetic field is proportional to wheel speed.

[ABS]

JPFIC0131GB

Stop Lamp Switch

INFOID:0000000009365053

Detects the operation status of brake pedal and transmits converted electric signal to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

Brake Fluid Level Switch

INFOID:0000000009365056

Detects the brake fluid level in reservoir tank and transmits converted electric signal from combination meter to
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

Parking Brake Switch

INFOID:0000000009365057

Detects the operation status of parking brake switch and transmits converted electric signal from combination
meter to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-8

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

ABS
ABS : System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009365058

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I
ALFIA0392GB

ABS : System Description

INFOID:0000000009365059

• The system switches fluid pressure of each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder to increase, to hold, or to
decrease according to signals from control unit in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). This control
system is applied to ABS and EBD functions.
• Fail-safe function is available for each function and is activated by each function when system malfunction
occurs.

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL

J

K

L

Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
Component

Combination meter

M

Signal description
Transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• Brake fluid level switch signal
• Parking brake switch signal
Receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal
• Brake warning lamp signal

VALVE OPERATION (ABS AND EBD FUNCTIONS)
The control unit built into the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) controls fluid pressure of the brake
calipers by operating each valve.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-9

2014 Note

N

O

P

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Brake Pedal Applied or ABS Function Operating (Pressure Increases)

JSFIA0679GB

Name

Not activated

During pressure increases

Cut valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Cut valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Suction valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Suction valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

ABS IN valve

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

ABS OUT valve

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

—

Pressure increases

Each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder
(fluid pressure)

Front RH brake caliper

• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake caliper from
the master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS
OUT valve is closed.
Front LH brake caliper

• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake caliper from
the master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS
OUT valve is closed.
Rear RH wheel cylinder

• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH wheel cylinder from
the master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS
OUT valve is closed.
Rear LH wheel cylinder

• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH wheel cylinder from
the master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS
OUT valve is closed.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ABS Function Starts Operating (Pressure Holds)

A

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H
JSFIA0680GB

Name

Not activated

During pressure holds

Cut valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Cut valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Suction valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Suction valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

ABS IN valve

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is supplied (close)

ABS OUT valve

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

—

Pressure holds

Each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder
(fluid pressure)

I

J

K

L
Front RH brake caliper

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front RH brake caliper, master cylinder, and
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front RH brake caliper.

M

Front LH brake caliper

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front LH brake caliper, master cylinder, and
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front LH brake caliper.
Rear RH wheel cylinder

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear RH wheel cylinder, master cylinder, and
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear RH wheel cylinder.
Rear LH wheel cylinder

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear LH wheel cylinder, master cylinder, and
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear LH wheel cylinder.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-11

2014 Note

N

O

P

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ABS Function Operating (Pressure Decreases)

JSFIA0681GB

Name

Not activated

During pressure decreases

Cut valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Cut valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Suction valve 1

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Suction valve 2

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is not supplied (close)

ABS IN valve

Power supply is not supplied (open)

Power supply is supplied (close)

ABS OUT valve

Power supply is not supplied (close)

Power supply is supplied (open)

—

Pressure decreases

Each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder
(fluid pressure)

Front RH brake caliper

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front RH
brake caliper is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
sent to the master cylinder by the pump.
Front LH brake caliper

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front LH
brake caliper is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
sent to the master cylinder by the pump.
Rear RH wheel cylinder

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear RH
wheel cylinder is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
sent to the master cylinder by the pump.
Rear LH wheel cylinder

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear LH
wheel cylinder is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
sent to the master cylinder by the pump.
Component Parts and Function

Revision: April 2013

BRC-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Component

Function

A

Pump

Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.

Motor

Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).

ABS IN valve

Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according to signals from control unit.

ABS OUT valve

Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according to signals from control unit.

Return check valve

Returns the brake fluid from brake caliper and wheel cylinder to master cylinder by bypassing orifice
of each valve when brake is released.

Reservoir

Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from brake caliper, so that pressure efficiently decreases when decreasing pressure of brake caliper and wheel cylinder.

B

C

D

CONDITIONS FOR WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION
Turns ON when ignition switch turns ON and turns OFF when the system is normal, for bulb check purposes.
E
Condition (status)

ABS warning lamp

Brake warning lamp

Ignition switch OFF

OFF

OFF

For approx. 1 second after the ignition switch
is turned ON

ON

ON

Approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON (when the system is in normal operation)

OFF

OFF

After engine starts

OFF

OFF

When parking brake operates (parking brake
switch ON)

OFF

ON

When brake fluid is less than the specified
level (brake fluid level switch ON)

OFF

ON

ABS function is malfunctioning

ON

OFF

EBD function is malfunctioning

ON

ON

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-13

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ABS : ABS Function

INFOID:0000000009365062

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWFIA0808GB

• By preventing wheel lock through brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is electronically controlled by
detecting wheel speed during braking, stability during emergency braking is improved so that obstacles can
be easily bypassed by steering operation.
• During braking, control units calculate wheel speed and pseudo-vehicle speed, and transmit pressure
increase, hold or decrease signals to actuator portion according to wheel slip status.
• The following effects are obtained by preventing wheel lock during
braking.
— Vehicle tail slip is prevented during braking when driving straight.
— Understeer and oversteer tendencies are moderated during braking while cornering.
— Obstacles may be easily bypassed by steering operation during
braking.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in ABS
function, the control is suspended for ABS function. However, EBD
function operates normally. Refer to BRC-16, «ABS : Fail-safe».

JPFIC0140GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL
Revision: April 2013

BRC-14

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
A
Component
Combination meter

Signal description
Receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS warning lamp signal

ABS : EBD Function

INFOID:0000000009667732

B

C

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

AWFIA0808GB

• By preventing rear wheel slip increase through rear wheel brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is
electronically controlled when slight skip on front and rear wheels are detected during braking, stability during braking is improved.
• EBD function is expanded and developed from conventional ABS function and corrects rear wheel brake
force to appropriate level by electronic control according to load weight (number of passengers).

K

L

M

N

O
JPFIC0142GB

Revision: April 2013

BRC-15

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• During braking, control unit portion compares slight slip on front
and rear wheels by wheel speed sensor signal, transmits drive signal to actuator portion when rear wheel slip exceeds front wheel
slip for the specified value or more, and controls rear wheel brake
force (brake fluid pressure) so that increase of rear wheel slip is
prevented and slips on front wheel and rear wheel are nearly
equalized. ABS control is applied when slip on each wheel
increases and wheel speed is the threshold value of ABS control or
less.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in EBD
function, the control is suspended for ABS function and EBD function. Refer to BRC-24, «Fail-safe».

JPFIC0143GB

INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
Component
Combination meter

Signal description
Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication.
• Brake warning lamp signal

ABS : Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009365064

ABS FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS functions. However, EBD functions operate normally.

EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS and EBD functions.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-16

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC

Malfunction detected condition

C1101

When an open circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.

C1102

When an open circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.

C1103

When an open circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.

C1104

When an open circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.

C1105

• When a short circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear RH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage
• When distance between rear RH wheel sensor and rear RH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of rear RH wheel sensor or rear RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

C1106

• When a short circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear LH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Rear LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear LH wheel sensor power
supply voltage
• When distance between rear LH wheel sensor and rear LH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of rear LH wheel sensor or rear LH wheel sensor rotor is not normal.

C1107

C1108

Fail-safe condition

B

C

D

E

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD (only when both rear wheels
are malfunctioning)

• When a short circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front RH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Front RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front RH wheel sensor
power supply voltage
• When distance between front RH wheel sensor and front RH wheel sensor rotor
is large.
• When installation of front RH wheel sensor or front RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

BRC

G

H

I

• When a short circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front LH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage
• When distance between front LH wheel sensor and front LH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of front LH wheel sensor or front LH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

J

K

C1109

• When ignition power supply voltage is in following state.
— Ignition power supply voltage: 10 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage.
— Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage.

C1110

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).

C1111

When a malfunction is detected in motor or motor relay.

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS

When difference in wheel speed between any wheel and others is detected when
the vehicle is driven, because of installation of tires other than specified.

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

C1115

A

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-17

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC

Malfunction detected condition

C1120

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN valve.

C1121

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT valve.

C1122

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN valve.

C1123

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT valve.

C1124

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN valve.

C1125

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT valve.

C1126

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN valve.

C1127

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT valve.

C1130

When a CAN signal malfunction is detected.

C1140

When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.

U1000

When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for 2
seconds or more.

U1010

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit).

Revision: April 2013

BRC-18

Fail-safe condition

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
CONSULT Function (ABS)

INFOID:0000000009365065

A

B

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the following direct diagnostic modes.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

C

Description

ECU identification

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) activates outputs to test components.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION

D

E

BRC

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
G

Operation Procedure

1.

Before performing the self-diagnosis, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for
approximately 1 minute.

How To Erase Self Diagnostic Result

1.

After erasing DTC memory, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately
1 minute as the final inspection, and make sure that the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp turn
OFF.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicable diagnosis.
NOTE:
• When the wheel sensor malfunctions, after inspecting the wheel sensor system, the ABS warning lamp
and brake warning lamp will not turn OFF even when the system is normal, unless the vehicle is driven
at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
• Brake warning lamp will turn ON in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid
level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient).

Display Item List
Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».

H

I

J

K

L

DATA MONITOR
M

Item
(Unit)

Data monitor item selection

N

Remarks

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

MAIN
SIGNALS

SELECTION
FROM MENU

FR LH SENSOR
(km/h, mph)

×

×

×

Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by front wheel
sensor LH signal is displayed.

FR RH SENSOR
(km/h, mph)

×

×

×

Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by front wheel
sensor RH signal is displayed.

RR LH SENSOR
(km/h, mph)

×

×

×

Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by rear wheel
sensor LH signal is displayed.

RR RH SENSOR
(km/h, mph)

×

×

×

Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by rear wheel
sensor RH signal is displayed.

FR RH IN SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Front RH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-19

2014 Note

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item
(Unit)

Data monitor item selection
Remarks

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

MAIN
SIGNALS

SELECTION
FROM MENU

FR RH OUT SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

FR LH IN SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Front LH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

FR LH OUT SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

RR RH IN SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

RR RH OUT SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

RR LH IN SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

RR LH OUT SOL
(On/Off)

–

×

×

Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.

EBD WARN LAMP
(On/Off)

–

–

×

Brake warning lamp (On/Off) status is displayed.

STOP LAMP SW
(On/Off)

×

×

×

Stop lamp switch (On/Off) status is displayed.

MOTOR RELAY
(On/Off)

–

×

×

ABS motor relay signal (On/Off) status is displayed.

ACTUATOR RLY
(On/Off)

–

×

×

ABS actuator relay signal (On/Off) status is displayed.

ABS WARN LAMP
(On/Off)

–

×

×

ABS warning lamp (On/Off) status is displayed.

BATTERY VOLT
(V)

×

×

×

Voltage (V) supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) is displayed.

ENGINE SPEED

×

×

×

Engine speed status is displayed.

EBD SIGNAL
(On/Off)

–

–

×

EBD operation (On/Off) status is displayed.

ABS SIGNAL
(On/Off)

–

–

×

ABS operation (On/Off) status is displayed.

EBD FAIL SIG
(On/Off)

–

–

×

EBD fail signal (On/Off) status is displayed.

ABS FAIL SIG
(On/Off)

–

–

×

ABS fail signal (On/Off) status is displayed.

CRANKING SIG
(On/Off)

–

–

×

The input state of the key SW START position signal
is displayed.

×: Applicable
–: Not applicable

ACTIVE TEST MODE
CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving vehicle.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system.
• The active test cannot be performed with the ABS warning lamp or brake warning lamp on.
• ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp turn on during active test.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depression amount will change. This is
normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed 10 seconds after operation start.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, touch BACK.
Test Item

Revision: April 2013

BRC-20

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
[ABS]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ABS SOLENOID VALVE

• Select “Up”, “Keep” and “Down”. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in
the table below.
Test item

Display (Note)

Display item

FR RH SOL

FR LH SOL

RR RH SOL

RR LH SOL

Up

Keep

Down

FR RH IN SOL

Off

On

On

FR RH OUT SOL

Off

Off

On*

FR LH IN SOL

Off

On

On

FR LH OUT SOL

Off

Off

On*

RR RH IN SOL

Off

On

On

RR RH OUT SOL

Off

Off

On*

RR LH IN SOL

Off

On

On

RR LH OUT SOL

Off

Off

On*

A

B

C

D

E

*: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the select, and then Off.

BRC

NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
operation for checking.

G

ABS MOTOR

• Select “On” and “Off”. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
Test item

ABS MOTOR

Display item

H

Display
On

Off

MOTOR RELAY

On

Off

ACTUATOR RLY (Note)

On

On

I

NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
operation for checking.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-21

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009365066

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short-circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item

Display content

FR LH SENSOR

Wheel speed

FR RH SENSOR

Wheel speed

RR LH SENSOR

Wheel speed

RR RH SENSOR

Wheel speed

FR RH IN SOL

FR RH OUT SOL

FR LH IN SOL

FR LH OUT SOL

RR RH IN SOL

Condition

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Revision: April 2013

Reference value in
normal operation

0 [km/h, mph]

Vehicle stopped

Nearly matches the speed meter display
(± 10% or less)

Vehicle running
(Note 1)

0 [km/h, mph]

Vehicle stopped

Nearly matches the speed meter display
(± 10% or less)

Vehicle running
(Note 1)

0 [km/h, mph]

Vehicle stopped

Nearly matches the speed meter display
(± 10% or less)

Vehicle running
(Note 1)

0 [km/h, mph]

Vehicle stopped

Nearly matches the speed meter display
(± 10% or less)

Vehicle running
(Note 1)

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

BRC-22

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Data monitor
Monitor item

RR RH OUT SOL

RR LH IN SOL

RR LH OUT SOL

Display content

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

Operation status of all solenoid valves

EBD WARN LAMP

EBD warning lamp
(Note 2)

STOP LAMP SW

Brake pedal operation

MOTOR RELAY

Motor and motor relay operation

ACTUATOR RLY

Actuator relay operation

ABS WARN LAMP

ABS warning lamp
(Note 2)

BATTERY VOLT

Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)

ENGINE SPEED

Engine speed status

Reference value in
normal operation

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

B

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

C

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

D

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)

On

When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON)

Off

When EBD warning lamp is ON

On

When EBD warning lamp is OFF

Off

When brake pedal is depressed

On

When brake pedal is not depressed

Off

When the motor relay and motor are operating

On

When the motor relay and motor are not
operating

Off

When the actuator relay is operating

On

When the actuator relay is not operating

Off

When ABS warning lamp is ON

On

When ABS warning lamp is OFF

Off

Ignition switch ON
Engine stopped
Engine running

EBD SIGNAL

ABS SIGNAL

EBD operation

ABS operation

EBD FAIL SIG

EBD fail-safe signal

ABS FAIL SIG

ABS fail-safe signal

CRANKING SIG

Crank operation

10 – 16 V

BRC

H

I

J

K

L

0 RPM
Almost same reading as tachometer

EBD is active

On

EBD is inactive

Off

ABS is active

On

ABS is inactive

Off

In EBD fail-safe

On

EBD is normal

Off

In ABS fail-safe

On

ABS is normal

Off

Crank is active

On

Crank is inactive

Off

Note 2: On and off timing for warning lamps and indicator lamps.
• Refer to BRC-14, «ABS : ABS Function».

BRC-23

E

G

Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.

Revision: April 2013

A

Condition

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
• Refer to BRC-15, «ABS : EBD Function».

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009365067

ABS FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS functions. However, EBD functions operate normally.

EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system
[ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS and EBD functions.
DTC

Malfunction detected condition

C1101

When an open circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.

C1102

When an open circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.

C1103

When an open circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.

C1104

When an open circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.

C1105

• When a short circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear RH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage
• When distance between rear RH wheel sensor and rear RH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of rear RH wheel sensor or rear RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

C1106

• When a short circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear LH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Rear LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear LH wheel sensor power
supply voltage
• When distance between rear LH wheel sensor and rear LH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of rear LH wheel sensor or rear LH wheel sensor rotor is not normal.

C1107

• When a short circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front RH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Front RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front RH wheel sensor
power supply voltage
• When distance between front RH wheel sensor and front RH wheel sensor rotor
is large.
• When installation of front RH wheel sensor or front RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

C1108

• When a short circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front LH wheel sensor is in following state.
— Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage
• When distance between front LH wheel sensor and front LH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of front LH wheel sensor or front LH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.

C1109

• When ignition power supply voltage is in following state.
— Ignition power supply voltage: 10 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage.
— Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage.

C1110

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).

C1111

When there is a failure on the pump motor

C1115

When difference in wheel speed between any wheel and others is detected when
the vehicle is driven, because of installation of tires other than specified.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-24

Fail-safe condition

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD (only when both rear wheels
are malfunctioning)

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD
The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC

Malfunction detected condition

C1120

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN valve.

C1121

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT valve.

C1122

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN valve.

C1123

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT valve.

C1124

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN valve.

C1125

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT valve.

C1126

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN valve.

C1127

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT valve.

C1130

When a CAN signal malfunction is detected..

Fail-safe condition

The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.

U1000

When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for 2
seconds or more.

U1010

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator
and electrical unit (control unit).

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

B

C

D
The following functions are suspended:
• ABS
• EBD

C1140

A

E

BRC

G
INFOID:0000000009365068

When multiple DTCs are displayed simultaneously, check each one using the following priority list.
Priority

H

Detected item (DTC)

1

• U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1010 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

2

• C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE

3

• C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1
• C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL

4

• C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL]
• C1111 PUMP MOTOR
• C1140 ACTUATOR RLY

5

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

I

J

K

C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1
C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1
C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1
C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1
C1105 RR RH SENSOR-2
C1106 RR LH SENSOR-2
C1107 FR RH SENSOR-2
C1108 FR LH SENSOR-2
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL
C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL

Revision: April 2013

BRC-25

L

M

N

O

P

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009365069

DTC

Items (CONSULT screen terms)

Reference

C1101

RR RH SENSOR-1

C1102

RR LH SENSOR-1

C1103

FR RH SENSOR-1

C1104

FR LH SENSOR-1

C1105

RR RH SENSOR-2

C1106

RR LH SENSOR-2

C1107

FR RH SENSOR-2

C1108

FR LH SENSOR-2

C1109

BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL]

BRC-42, «DTC Logic»

C1110

CONTROLLER FAILURE

BRC-44, «DTC Logic»

C1111

PUMP MOTOR

BRC-45, «DTC Logic»

C1115

ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]

BRC-47, «DTC Logic»

C1120

FR LH IN ABS SOL

BRC-49, «DTC Logic»

C1121

FR LH OUT ABS SOL

BRC-51, «DTC Logic»

C1122

FR RH IN ABS SOL

BRC-49, «DTC Logic»

C1123

FR RH OUT ABS SOL

BRC-51, «DTC Logic»

C1124

RR LH IN ABS SOL

BRC-49, «DTC Logic»

C1125

RR LH OUT ABS SOL

BRC-51, «DTC Logic»

C1126

RR RH IN ABS SOL

BRC-49, «DTC Logic»

C1127

RR RH OUT ABS SOL

BRC-51, «DTC Logic»

C1130

ENGINE SIGNAL 1

BRC-53, «DTC Logic»

C1140

ACTUATOR RLY

BRC-54, «DTC Logic»

U1000

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

BRC-56, «DTC Logic»

U1010

CONTROL UNIT [CAN]

BRC-57, «DTC Logic»

Revision: April 2013

BRC-26

BRC-36, «DTC Logic»

BRC-40, «DTC Logic»

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009365070

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

AAFWA0103GB

Revision: April 2013

BRC-27

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAFWA0104GB

Revision: April 2013

BRC-28

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAFIA0166GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-29

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAFIA0167GB

Revision: April 2013

BRC-30

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAFIA0168GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-31

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAFIA0169GB

Revision: April 2013

BRC-32

2014 Note

BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
[ABS]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAFIA0170GB

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-33

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[ABS]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009365071

OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWFIA0208GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.COLLECT INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnostic worksheet. Refer to BRC-35, «Diagnostic Work Sheet».
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».
Are any DTCs displayed?
YES >> Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK SYMPTOM OPERATING CONDITION

Check that the symptom is a normal operating condition. Refer to BRC-68, «Description».
Is the symptom a normal operating condition?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK WARNING AND INDICATOR LAMPS OPERATION

Check ABS and brake warning lamps. Refer to MWI-7, «METER SYSTEM : System Description».
Revision: April 2013

BRC-34

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[ABS]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Is ON/OFF timing normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Perform warning lamp diagnosis. Refer to BRC-60, «Component Function Check» (ABS warning
lamp), BRC-61, «Component Function Check» (brake warning lamp).

5.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS APPLICABLE TO THE SYMPTOM

A

B

Perform diagnosis applicable to the symptom. Refer to BRC-62, «Symptom Table».
C

>> GO TO 6.

6.FINAL CHECK

Perform self diagnostic result again, and check that the malfunction is repaired. After checking, erase the self
diagnosis memory. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».

D

E

>> Inspection End.

Diagnostic Work Sheet

INFOID:0000000009365072

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

SFIA3265E

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-35

2014 Note

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549271

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1101

C1102

C1103

C1104

Display Item

Malfunction detected condition

RR RH SENSOR-1

• When power supply voltage of rear wheel sensor
RH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in rear
wheel sensor RH circuit.

RR LH SENSOR-1

• When power supply voltage of rear wheel sensor
LH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in rear
wheel sensor LH circuit.

FR RH SENSOR-1

• When power supply voltage of front wheel sensor
RH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in front
wheel sensor RH circuit.

FR LH SENSOR-1

• When power supply voltage of front wheel sensor
LH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in front
wheel sensor LH circuit.

Possible causes

• Harness or connector
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 21 km/h (13 MPH) or more for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Perform self-diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1101, C1102, C1103 or C1104 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-36, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549272

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONFIRM DTC
With CONSULT
1. Perform self-diagnostic result of ABS and record all active DTCs.
2. Clear all DTCs.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to BRC-36, «DTC Logic».
Does DTC C1101, C1102, C1103 or C1104 reset?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

2.INSPECT WHEEL SENSOR

Inspect the suspect wheel sensor for damage or deformation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

3.HARNESS AND CONNECTOR INSPECTION
Revision: April 2013

BRC-36

2014 Note

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor connector of
suspect wheel.
2. Check harness, connectors and terminals for corrosion, deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

A

B

C

1.
2.

Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
D
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel E
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash ON and OFF to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
BRC
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa- G
tion» or BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation».

5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel and ground.

I

Wheel Sensor
Wheel

Connector

Front LH

E51

Front RH

E52

Rear LH

B22

Rear RH

B35

Terminal

Ground

Voltage

J

1
2
1
2
1

K
—

0V

2

L

1
2

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

N

6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel and ground.
Wheel Sensor
Wheel

Revision: April 2013

Connector

H

Terminal

BRC-37

Ground

Continuity

2014 Note

O

P

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Front LH

E51

Front RH

E52

Rear LH

B22

Rear RH

B35

1
2
1
2

—

1

No

2
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

7.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS
Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel.
Wheel Sensor
Wheel

Connector

Front LH

E51

Front RH

E52

Rear LH

B22

Rear RH

B35

(+)

(-)

Terminal

Terminal

1

2

Continuity

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

8.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E33 and harness
connector of suspect wheel sensor.
Wheel sensor

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

Connector

37

Front LH

E51

36
26

Front RH
E33
Rear LH

Rear RH

Wheel sensor

E52

27
30

B22

29
33

B35

34

Continuity
Terminal
1
2
1
2

Yes

1
2
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

9.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E33 terminal and
ground.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-38

2014 Note

C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

6

Ground

—

Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

Ignition switch OFF

0V

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Check the following:
• 10A fuse No. 50 located in the IPDM E/R
• Harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and IPDM E/R

C

1.
2.

E

D

10.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals and
ground.

BRC
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

Continuity

Ground

Yes

G

13

E33

—

38

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

H

11.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE

I

1.
2.
3.

J

Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between suspect wheel sensor harness connector terminals.
Wheel Sensor
Wheel

Connector

Front LH

E51

Front RH

E52

Rear LH

B22

Rear RH

B35

(+)

(-)

Terminal

1

Terminal

Voltage
(Approx.)

K

2

Battery voltage

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation»
or BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation». Then, GO TO 12.
NO
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».

12.CONFIRM REPAIR

With CONSULT
1. Clear all DTCs.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to BRC-36, «DTC Logic».
Does DTC C1105, C1106, C1107 or C1108 reset?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-39

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549273

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1105

C1106

C1107

C1108

Display Item

Malfunction detected condition

RR RH SENSOR-2

• When distance between rear wheel sensor RH and
rear wheel sensor RH rotor is large.
• When installation of rear wheel sensor RH or rear
wheel sensor RH rotor is not normal.

RR LH SENSOR-2

• When distance between rear wheel sensor LH and
rear wheel sensor LH rotor is large.
• When installation of rear wheel sensor LH or rear
wheel sensor LH rotor is not normal.

FR RH SENSOR-2

• When distance between front wheel sensor RH
and front wheel sensor RH rotor is large.
• When installation of front wheel sensor RH or front
wheel sensor RH rotor is not normal.

FR LH SENSOR-2

• When distance between front wheel sensor LH and
front wheel sensor LH rotor is large.
• When installation of front wheel sensor LH or front
wheel sensor LH rotor is not normal.

Possible causes

• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Sensor rotor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 21 km/h (13 MPH) or more for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Perform self-diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1105, C1106, C1107 or C1108 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-40, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549274

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONFIRM DTC
With CONSULT
1. Perform self-diagnostic result of ABS and record all active DTCs.
2. Clear all DTCs.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to BRC-36, «DTC Logic».
Does DTC C1105, C1106, C1107 or C1108 reset?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE AND TIRE WEAR

Check tires for excessive wear and proper inflation. Refer to WT-4, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR

Check wheel sensor for the following:
• Proper installation
Revision: April 2013

BRC-40

2014 Note

C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Physical damage
• Contamination
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

A

B

4.CHECK SENSOR ROTOR

Check sensor rotor for the following:
• Contamination
• Physical damage (missing teeth, cracks, etc.)
• Foreign material
• Looseness
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation» or BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation». Then, GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

5.CONFIRM REPAIR

With CONSULT
1. Clear all DTCs.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to BRC-36, «DTC Logic».
Does DTC C1105, C1106, C1107 or C1108 reset?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Inspection End.

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-41

2014 Note

C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365081

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1109

Display Item

BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]

Malfunction detected condition

• When ignition voltage is 10 V or less.
• When ignition voltage is 16 V or more.

Possible causes
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Fuse
• Ignition power supply system
• Battery

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1109 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365082

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
3. Check connectors and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 28 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

6

Ground

—

Condition

Voltage

Ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

Ignition switch OFF

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-42

2014 Note

C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector
E33

Terminal
13
38

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-43

2014 Note

C1110 CONTROL FAILURE
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1110 CONTROL FAILURE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365083

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1110

Display item
CONTROLLER FAILURE

Malfunction detected condition

Possible cause

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit).

• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
EMERGENCY BRAKE
VARIANT CODING

Is above displayed on the self-diagnosis display?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-44, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365084

1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
CAUTION:
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) when self diagnostic result shows items other
than those applicable.
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

BRC-44

2014 Note

C1111 PUMP MOTOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1111 PUMP MOTOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365085

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1111

B

Display Item

PUMP MOTOR

Malfunction detected condition

Possible causes

• When a malfunction is detected in motor or motor
relay.
• When a low pressure malfunction is detected in accumulator.

• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system
• Motor/accumulator assembly

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

D

E

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Depress brake pedal 20 times or more.
3. Start the engine and wait for 3 minutes or more.
4. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1111 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-45, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

BRC

G

H

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365086

I

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».
J

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
3. Check connectors and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

K

L

2.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 1 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

1

—

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

BRC-45

N

O

P

3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT

Revision: April 2013

M

2014 Note

C1111 PUMP MOTOR
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector
E33

Terminal
13
38

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-46

2014 Note

C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365087

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1115

B

Display Item

ABS SENSOR
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL]

Malfunction detected condition
When difference in wheel speed between any wheel
and others is detected while the vehicle is driven, because of installation of tires other than specified.

Possible causes
•
•
•
•

Harness or connector
Wheel sensor
Sensor rotor
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

E

With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1115 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-47, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

BRC

G

INFOID:0000000009365088

H

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».
I

CAUTION:
Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

J

1.

Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor connector of
wheel with DTC.
2. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

K

L

2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation» (front) or BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation» (rear).

3.CHECK TIRES

Check the inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

BRC-47

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Adjust tire pressure, or replace tire(s).

4.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between wheel sensor connector terminals and ground of wheel with DTC.
Wheel Sensor
Wheel

Connector

Front LH

E51

Front RH

E52

Rear LH

B22

Rear RH

B35

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

—

No

1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor connector of wheel with DTC.
Wheel sensor

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

E51

36
26

Front RH
E33

Rear RH

Connector

37

Front LH

Rear LH

Terminal

Wheel sensor

E52

27
30

B22

29
33

B35

34

Continuity
Terminal
1
2
1
2

Yes

1
2
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair the circuit.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-48

2014 Note

C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365091

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Display Item

Malfunction detected condition

C1120

FR LH IN ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN
valve.

C1122

FR RH IN ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN
valve.

C1124

RR LH IN ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN
valve.

C1126

RR RH IN ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN
valve.

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

BRC

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1120, C1122, C1124 or C1126 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-49, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

H

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365092

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

I

J

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
3. Check connector and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

L

2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

M

Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 25 and ground.
N
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

25

—

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

P

3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-49

O

2014 Note

C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector
E33

Terminal
13
38

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-50

2014 Note

C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365093

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Display Item

Malfunction detected condition

C1121

FR LH OUT ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT
valve.

C1123

FR RH OUT ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT
valve.

C1125

RR LH OUT ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT
valve.

C1127

RR RH OUT ABS SOL

When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT
valve.

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

BRC

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1121, C1123, C1125 or C1127 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-51, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

H

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365094

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

I

J

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
3. Check connector and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

L

2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

M

Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 25 and ground.
N
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

25

—

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

P

3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-51

O

2014 Note

C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector
E33

Terminal
13
38

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-52

2014 Note

C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365095

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1130

B

Display Item

ENGINE SIGNAL 1

Malfunction detected condition

Possible causes

When a CAN signal malfunction is detected in ECM
system.

• ECM
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• CAN communication line

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

E

With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1130 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-53, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

BRC

G
INFOID:0000000009365096

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR ENGINE SYSTEM

H

With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».
Are any ECM DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

I

2.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
With CONSULT.
1. Perform self diagnostic result and erase DTCs.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Start engine and drive vehicle for a short period of time.
4. Check that malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns OFF.
5. Stop vehicle and perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1130 detected?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Check pin terminals and connection of connectors for abnormal conditions. Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-53

2014 Note

C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365097

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1140

Display Item

ACTUATOR RLY

Malfunction detected condition

When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.

Possible causes
• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1140 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-54, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365098

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
3. Check connector and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) BATTERY POWER SUPPLY

Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 25 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector

Terminal

E33

25

—

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

3.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Connector
E33

Revision: April 2013

Terminal
13
38

BRC-54

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

2014 Note

C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
[ABS]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

A

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-55

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009365112

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000

Display Item
CAN COMM CIRCUIT

Malfunction detected condition

Possible causes

When CAN communication signal is not continuously
received for 2 seconds or more

CAN communication system malfunction

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365113

1.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

BRC-56

2014 Note

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009452284

Initial diagnosis of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

B

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009452285

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Items
(CONSULT screen terms)

DTC

U1010

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

DTC detection condition

Possible cause

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).

ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

BRC

With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC U1010 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-57, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

G

H
INFOID:0000000009452286

1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

I

Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
J

>> Inspection End.
K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-57

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009365116

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION
Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when parking brake is actuated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365117

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
3. Check connectors and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-59, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT.
Connect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
In “DATA MONITOR” select “PARK BRAKE SW” and check parking brake switch signal.
Condition

DATA MONITOR

Actuate parking brake

On

Release parking brake

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to BRC-34, «Work Flow».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
Check continuity between combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector M17 terminal
1.
Combination meter

4.

Parking brake switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M24

10

M17

1

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between combination meter connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-58

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

Combination meter
Connector

Terminal

M24

10

—

Continuity

Ground

No

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Component Inspection

C
INFOID:0000000009365118

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

D

1.
2.
3.

E

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect parking brake switch connector.
Check continuity between parking brake switch terminal 1 and ground.

Parking brake switch terminal

—

1

Ground

Condition

Continuity

Parking brake actuated

Yes

Parking brake released

No

BRC

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-59

2014 Note

ABS WARNING LAMP
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS WARNING LAMP
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009365122

1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP FUNCTION
Check that ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch
is turned ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365123

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check if indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-7, «METER SYSTEM : System Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

BRC-60

2014 Note

BRAKE WARNING LAMP
[ABS]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BRAKE WARNING LAMP

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009365124

1.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LAMP FUNCTION (1)

B

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approximately 2 seconds after ignition
switch is turned ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

2.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LAMP FUNCTION (2)

D

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when parking brake is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check parking brake switch system. Refer to BRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365125

1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

BRC

G

With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK COMBINATION METER

I

Check if indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-7, «METER SYSTEM : System Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-61

2014 Note

ABS
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
ABS
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009365130

If ABS warning lamp turns ON, perform self-diagnosis.
Symptom

Check item

Reference

Brake force distribution
Excessive ABS function operation frequency

Looseness of front and rear axle

BRC-63, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Wheel sensor and rotor system
Unexpected pedal reaction

Brake pedal stroke
Make sure the braking force is sufficient when the ABS is not operating.

BRC-64, «Diagnosis Procedure»

The braking distance is long

Check stopping distance when the ABS is not operating.

BRC-65, «Diagnosis Procedure»

ABS function does not operate (Note 1)

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

BRC-66, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Pedal vibration or ABS operation sound
occurs (Note 2)

Brake pedal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

BRC-67, «Diagnosis Procedure»

NOTE:
• 1: The ABS does not operate when the speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
• 2: Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly depressed (just place a foot on it).
However, this is normal.
— When shifting gears
— When driving on slippery road
— During cornering at high speed
— When passing over bumps or grooves [approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
— When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher]

Revision: April 2013

BRC-62

2014 Note

EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009365131

1.CHECK START

B

Check front and rear brake force distribution using a brake tester.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check brake system.

C

2.CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE

D

Make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. Refer to front: FSU-6, «Inspection», rear:
RSU-5, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

E

BRC

Check the following:
• Wheel sensor installation for damage
• Sensor rotor installation for damage
• Wheel sensor connector
• Wheel sensor harness
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> • Replace wheel sensor BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation» (front)
or BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation» (rear).
• Replace sensor rotor BRC-72, «FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation» (front) or
BRC-72, «REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation» (rear).
• Repair harness.

4.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY

Make sure that the ABS warning lamp is turned off after the ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-63

2014 Note

UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365132

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-8, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Is the stroke too big?
YES >> • Bleed air from brake line and hose. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
• Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system
fluid leakage, etc. Refer to brake pedal: BR-8, «Inspection and Adjustment» or brake booster
assembly BR-14, «Inspection».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ABS FUNCTION

1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS.
2. Check if braking force is normal in this condition.
3. Reconnect connector after inspection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check brake system.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-64

2014 Note

THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009365133

CAUTION:
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer with the ABS operating than when
the ABS is not operating.

1.CHECK ABS FUNCTION

B

C

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS.
3. Check stopping distance.
4. After inspection, reconnect connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check brake system.

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-65

2014 Note

ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009365134

CAUTION:
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or lower.

1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY

Make sure that the ABS warning lamp turns OFF after ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».

Revision: April 2013

BRC-66

2014 Note

PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009365135

CAUTION:
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
• When shifting gears
• When driving on slippery road
• During cornering at high speed
• When passing over bumps or grooves [approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
• When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher]

1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1

Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspect the brake pedal.

B

C

D

E

BRC

2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2

Check that there are ABS operation noises when the engine is started.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT Function (ABS)».

G

3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3

H

Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NO
>> Inspection End.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-67

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[ABS]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description

INFOID:0000000009365137

Symptom

Result

Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and operation noises occur when ABS is activated.
Stopping distance is longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
The brake pedal vibrates and motor operation noises occur from the engine room after the engine starts and
just after the vehicle starts.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-68

This is a normal condition due to the ABS activation.
This is normal, and it is
caused by the ABS operation check.

2014 Note

WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

B

FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009619489

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I

J
AWFIA0865GB

1.

Front wheel sensor

2.

Harness connector

Front

FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation

K
INFOID:0000000009619490

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage front wheel sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the front wheel hub, first remove the front wheel sensor from the steering knuckle.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the front wheel sensor, making the front wheel sensor inoperative.
• Pull out the front wheel sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the front
wheel sensor harness.
• Before installation, check if foreign objects, such as iron fragments, are adhered to the pick-up part
of the front wheel sensor or to the inside of the hole in the steering knuckle for the front wheel sensor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the sensor rotor. Fix as necessary and then
install the front wheel sensor.

L

M

N

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the front wheel sensor.
Remove bolt and front wheel sensor from steering knuckle.
Release front wheel sensor harness clips from the vehicle.

P

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.
Revision: April 2013

BRC-69

2014 Note

WHEEL SENSOR
[ABS]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Do not twist front wheel sensor harness when installing front
wheel sensor. Check that grommet (2) is fully inserted to
bracket (1). Check that front wheel sensor harness is not
twisted after installation.

JPFIC0209ZZ

REAR WHEEL SENSOR
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009619491

AWFIA0866GB

1.

Rear wheel sensor

2.

Harness connector

REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation

Front
INFOID:0000000009619492

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage rear wheel sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the rear wheel hub, first remove the rear wheel sensor from the back plate. Failure to
do so may result in damage to the rear wheel sensor, making the rear wheel sensor inoperative.
• Pull out the rear wheel sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the rear
wheel sensor harness.
• Before installation, check if foreign objects, such as iron fragments, are adhered to the pick-up part
of the rear wheel sensor or to the inside of the hole in the back plate for the rear wheel sensor, or if a
foreign object is caught in the surface of the sensor rotor. Fix as necessary and then install the rear
wheel sensor.

REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

BRC-70

2014 Note

WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove bolts (A) and support bracket (1) (LH side only).

[ABS]
A

B

C
ALFIA0391ZZ

2.
3.
4.

D

Disconnect the harness connector from the rear wheel sensor.
Release rear wheel sensor harness clips from the vehicle.
Remove bolts and rear wheel sensor from back plate.

E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not twist rear wheel sensor harness when installing rear
wheel sensor. Check that grommet (2) is fully inserted to
bracket (1). Check that rear wheel sensor harness is not twisted
after installation.

BRC

G

H

I
JPFIC0209ZZ

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-71

2014 Note

SENSOR ROTOR
[ABS]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619493

REMOVAL
Remove sensor rotor from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-9, «Exploded View».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

REAR SENSOR ROTOR

REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619494

REMOVAL
Remove sensor rotor from brake drum. Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse rear sensor rotor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-72

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
[ABS]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Exploded View

A
INFOID:0000000009619495

B

C

D

E

BRC

G

H

I
AWFIA1025ZZ

1.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

2.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector

3.

Bracket

4.

Bushing

5.

Insulating clip

6.

Bolt

J

A.

To master cylinder secondary side

B.

To rear brake tube (RH)

C.

To front brake tube (LH)

D.

To front brake tube (RH)

E.

To rear brake tube (LH)

F.

To master cylinder primary side

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619496

K

L

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal.
• Do not remove acuator by holding harness.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
2. Disconnect vacuum hose from intake manifold. Refer to BR-32, «Exploded View».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRC-73

2014 Note

ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove ground harness bolt (A) and ground harness from radiator core support.

[ABS]

ALKIA3174ZZ

4.

Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.
5. Remove low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-27, «LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and
Installation».
6. Loosen flare nut from brake tubes using a flare nut wrench, then remove brake tubes from ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-21, «FRONT : Exploded View».
7. Disconnect the harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
8. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) bracket bolts.
9. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket as an assembly.
10. Remove bracket and bushing from ABS actuator and electric unit (if necessary).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Bleed the brake system. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
CAUTION:
• Replace the ABS actuator and electric until (control unit) if it has been dropped or sustained an
impact.
• Do not install actuator by holding harness.
• After installing harness connector in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure harness connector is securely locked.

Revision: April 2013

BRC-74

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

BRM

BODY REPAIR

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
VEHICLE INFORMATION ……………………….. 2
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ………………… 2
Body Exterior Paint Color ………………………………… 2

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………. 4

F

BODY ALIGNMENT ……………………………………. 4

G

Body Center Marks …………………………………………. 4
Description ………………………………………………………. 5
Engine Compartment ……………………………………….. 5
Underbody ………………………………………………………. 7
Passenger Compartment ………………………………….10
Rear End Panel ……………………………………………….11

H

I

J

BRM

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRM-1

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >

VEHICLE INFORMATION
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color

INFOID:0000000009654082

AWKIA2519ZZ

Component

Color code

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

Description

Blue

Green

White

Black

Silver

Gray

Red

Blue

Paint type

M

M

3P

2S

M

M

M

M

t

t

t

t

t

t

t

t

1

Door outside handles

Body color

Hard clear coat

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

2

Fuel filler lid

Body color

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

3

Back door outer finisher

Body color

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

4

Rear bumper fascia

Body color

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

5

Door mirror

Body color

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

Black

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

6

Front bumper fascia

Body color

B17

FAK

QAC

KH3

K23

K36

NAC

RBE

7

Front grille

Black

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

KH3

M = Metallic, 2S = Solid and Clear, 3P = 3-Stage pearl, t = Primerless Diamond Clear coat.

Revision: April 2013

BRM-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009654083

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

BRM

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRM-3

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
BODY ALIGNMENT
Body Center Marks

INFOID:0000000009654084

A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.

AWKIA2546ZZ

Front

Point

Portion

Mark

A

Cowl top extension

Hole

B

Front roof position mark for alignment

Raised dimple

C

Rear roof position mark for alignment

Raised dimple

D

Rear panel upper

Cut out

Revision: April 2013

BRM-4

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Description

INFOID:0000000009654085

A

• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.
• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself
to make sure there is no free play.
• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side
is symmetrically the same value.
• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of ″X″, ″Y″
and ″Z″.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
PIIA0104E

Engine Compartment

INFOID:0000000009654086

I

MEASUREMENTS
J

BRM

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRM-5

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

ALKIA3123ZZ

Unit: mm (in)

Position

Description

Measurement

A.

Center of rear hood hinge hole to center of rear hood hinge hole 12 (0.47)

1407.0 (55.39)

B.

Center shock hole to the center of the shock hole 52 (2.05)

1132.0 (44.57)

C.

Center of front shock tower hole to the center of the front shock tower hole 12 (0.47)

1228.0 (48.35)

D.

Hole for hood locator to the hole for hood locator 12 (0.47)

1346.0 (53.99)

E.

Rear hole for radiator support to rear hole for radiator support 7 (0.28)

893.0 (35.16)

Revision: April 2013

BRM-6

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
F.

Upper hole for front bumper reinforcement to upper hole front bumper reinforcement 8.2 (0.32)

948.0 (37.32)

G.

Lower hole front radiator support to lower hole front lower radiator support 11 (0.43)

987.0 (38.86)

H.

Rear hinge hole 12 (0.47) to front hole upper radiator support 12 (0.47)

1312.0 (51.65)

J.

Rear hinge hole 12 (0.47) to hood locator hole 7 (0.28)

345.0 (13.58)

Underbody

A

B

INFOID:0000000009654087

MEASUREMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

BRM

L

M

N

O

P

ALKIA3128ZZ

Revision: April 2013

BRM-7

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Unit:mm (in)

Front

LH side

Points

Measurement

Points

Measurement

A-a

904.0 (35.59)

B-b

820.0 (32.28)

C-c

797.0 (31.38).

D-d

1134.0 (44.65)

E-e

797.0 (31.38)

F-f

1220.0 (48.03)

G-g

746.0 (29.37)

H-h

951.0 (37.44)

J-j

952.0 (37.48)

A-b*

1835.5 (72.26)

A-c*

1192.2 (46.94)

A-d*

1619.6 (63.76)

A-e*

1665.0 (65.55)

E-f*

1362.1 (53.63)

F-g*

1038.5 (40.89)

F-h*

1214.5 (47.81)

F-j*

1379.2 (54.30)

Revision: April 2013

BRM-8

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
MEASURMENT POINTS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

BRM

L

M

N
AWKIA2547ZZ

O

Front
Unit: mm (in)

Coordinates

Points

X

Y

Z

A, a

± 299.0 (±11.77)

±±452.0 (17.80)

293.6 (11.56)

B, b

1305.0 (51.38)

± 410.0 (16.14)

63.0 (2.48)

Remarks

P

Hole 16.0 (0.63)
Hole 14.0X12.0 (0.55X0.47)

C, c

507.0 (19.96)

± 398.5 (15.69)

73.5 (2.89)

Hole 14.0X12.0 (0.55X0.47)

D, d

950.0 (37.40)

± 567.0 (22.32)

136.0 (5.35)

Hole 12.0 (0.47)

E, e

1107.0 (43.58)

± 398.5 (15.69)

25.0 (0.98)

Hole 12.0 (0.47)

Revision: April 2013

BRM-9

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Coordinates

Points

Remarks

X

Y

Z

F, f

2022.5 (79.63)

± 610.0 (24.02)

32.8 (1.29)

Hole 16.0 (0.63)

G, g

2305.0 (90.75)

± 373.0 (14.69)

213.0 (8.39)

Hole 16.0 (0.63)

H, h

2535.0 (99.80)

± 475.5 (18.72)

217.5 (8.56)

Hole 18.0×16.0 (0.71×0.63)

J, j

2850.0 (112.20)

± 476.0 (18.74)

227.5 (8.96)

Hole 18.0×16.0 (0.71×0.63)

Passenger Compartment

INFOID:0000000009654088

MEASURMENTS

ALKIA3130ZZ

Unit: mm (in)

Position

Description

Measurement

A.

Front door upper hinge forward bolt hole to rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole.

1166.4 (45.92)

B.

Front door upper hinge forward bolt hole to rear door lower hinge rear bolt hole.

1189.9 (46.85)

C.

Front door lower hinge forward bolt hole to rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole.

1219.7 (48.02)

D.

Front door lower hinge forward bolt hole to rear door lower hinge rear bolt hole.

1142.0 (44.96)

E.

Rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole to rear door body side upper notch.

755.7 (29.75)

F.

Rear door upper hinge upper bolt to rear door body side lower notch.

681.5 (26.83)

G.

Rear door lower hinge rear hole to rear door upper body side notch.

844.3 (33.24)

H.

Rear door rear hinge hole to rear door lower body side notch.

620.5 (24.43)

The vehicle is symmetrically identical dimensions on both LH and RH sides of the vehicle.

Revision: April 2013

BRM-10

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Rear End Panel

INFOID:0000000009654089

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ALKIA3132ZZ

Unit: mm (in)

Point

Measurement

Point

A-D

853.7 (33.61)

A — C*

871.0 (34.29)

C* — b*

1121.7 (44.16)

C-c

1055.0 (41.5)

I

Measurement

J

* The vehicle is symmetrically identical dimensions on both RH and LH sides of the vehicle.

BRM

MEASUREMENT POINTS

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

BRM-11

2014 Note

BODY ALIGNMENT
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

ALKIA3133ZZ

Front

Point

Description

Point

Description

A.

Roof flange end of center positioning mark

B.

Back pillar main joggle

C.

Upper rear panel joggle

D.

Edge of rear panel between back door striker installing
holes

Revision: April 2013

BRM-12

2014 Note

CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE

SECTION

CCS

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
ASCD

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 3

F

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) ……………………………………………………… 3

G

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

Information ………………………………………………………. 3

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

CCS

P

Revision: April 2013

CCS-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[ASCD]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009474426

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

CCS-2

2014 Note

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[ASCD]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Information

INFOID:0000000009472909

Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) system is controlled by ECM.
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-34, «AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) : System Description».

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

CCS

P

Revision: April 2013

CCS-3

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

CHG

CHARGING SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 17

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ………………………………. 17

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

Description ………………………………………………………17
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..17

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) …………………… 18
Description ………………………………………………………18
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..18

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ………………… 20
Description ………………………………………………………20
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..20

S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ………………………………. 21

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4

Description ………………………………………………………21
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..21

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 5

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 22

System Description …………………………………………… 5

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 6
CHARGING SYSTEM …………………………………… 6
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………… 6

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 10
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ………10

Symptom Table ……………………………………………….22

H

I

J

K

L

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 23
GENERATOR ……………………………………………. 23 CHG
Exploded View …………………………………………………23
Removal and Installation …………………………………..23

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 25

CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ………………………………………………….16

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 25

Revision: April 2013

G

CHARGING SYSTEM ………………………………… 22

Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI) …… 10
Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)…. 13

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 16

F

Generator ……………………………………………………….25

CHG-1

2014 Note

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009385608

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009385609

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(—) Model GR8-1200 NI
Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station

Tests batteries, starting and charging systems and charges batteries.
Operating instructions, refer to diagnostic station instruction manual.

C

D

E
AWIIA1239ZZ

—
(—) Model EXP-800 NI
Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer

Tests batteries and charging systems.
Operating instructions, refer to diagnostic analyzer instruction manual.

F

G

H
JSMIA0806ZZ

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009385610

I
Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

J

K

L

PIIB1407E

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009014841

ALMIA0653GB

A. Inside motor room (right)
No.

1.

2.

B. Combination meter

Component part

Generator

”B” terminal

Refer to: CHG-17, «Description».

”S” terminal

Refer to: CHG-21, «Description».

”L” terminal

Refer to: CHG-18, «Description».

Combination meter (Charge warning lamp)

Revision: April 2013

Description

The IC voltage regulator warning function activates to illuminate
the charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur
while generator is operating:
• Excessive voltage is produced.
• No voltage is produced.

CHG-4

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

System Description

INFOID:0000000009446803

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ALMIA0652GB

The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle’s electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-5

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009014843

AAMWA0758GB

Revision: April 2013

CHG-6

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O
AAMIA1655GB

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-7

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1656GB

Revision: April 2013

CHG-8

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O
AAMIA1657GB

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-9

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)

INFOID:0000000009446782

CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS WITH EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI
To test the charging system, use the following special service tools:
• EXP-800 NI Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer
• GR8-1200 NI Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station
NOTE:
Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for proper charging system diagnosis procedures.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
OVERALL SEQUENCE
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O
AWMIA1202GB

DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, stater and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.

1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-16, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

CHG-11

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 2.

2.DIAGNOSIS WITH EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI
Perform the charging system test using Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI or
Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer EXP-800 NI. Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for proper
testing procedures.
Test result
NO PROBLEMS>>Charging system is normal and will also show “DIODE RIPPLE” test result.
NO VOLTAGE>>GO TO 3.
LOW VOLTAGE>>GO TO 11.
HIGH VOLTAGE>>GO TO 13.
EXCESSIVE RIPPLE, OPEN PHASE, OPEN DIODE or SHORTED DIODE>>Replace the generator. Refer
to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation». Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Multitasking
battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI or Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer
EXP-800 NI to confirm repair.

3.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON)

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) INSPECTION

Check “L” terminal circuit (open). Refer to CHG-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

5.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)

Start the engine and run it at idle.
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION

Check “L” terminal circuit (short). Refer to CHG-20, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

7.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

8.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 3,000 RPM)

Increase and maintain the engine speed at 3,000 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp remain off?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

9.INSPECTION OF GENERATOR PULLEY

Check generator pulley. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
Is generator pulley normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

CHG-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
NO
>> Repair as needed.

10.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

A

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-17, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

B

11.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

C

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-17, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

D

12.INSPECTION OF GENERATOR PULLEY

E

Check generator pulley. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
Is generator pulley normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

F

13.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

G

Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)

H
INFOID:0000000009446783

I

OVERALL SEQUENCE
Before performing a generator test, make sure that the battery is fully charged. A 30-volt voltmeter and suitable test probes are necessary for the test.
• Before starting, inspect the fusible link.

J

K

L

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Use fully charged battery.

ALMIA0657GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-16, «Diagnosis Procedure».
>> GO TO 2.

2.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON)
When ignition switch is turned ON.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

3.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)

Start the engine and run it at idle
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 2,500 RPM)

Increase and maintain the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
Revision: April 2013

CHG-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Inspection End.

A

5.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION
Check terminal “L” circuit for (short). Refer to CHG-20, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

B

C

6.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check terminal “S” circuit. Refer to CHG-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

D

7.MEASURE “B” TERMINAL VOLTAGE

E

Start engine. With engine running at 2,500 rpm, measure “B” terminal voltage.
What voltage does the measurement result show?
Less than 13.0 V>>GO TO 8.
More than 16.0 V>>Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».

F

8.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

G

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-17, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

H

9.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON)

I

1. Disconnect generator connector and apply ground to “L” terminal.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 10.

J

10.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)

K

Check “L” terminal circuit (OPEN). Refer to CHG-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
L

>> Repair as needed.
CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-15

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >

CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009446787

1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION
Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair battery terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for
proper testing procedures.

2.CHECK FUSE

Check for blown fuse and fusible link.
Unit

Power source (Power supply terminals)

Fuse or Fusible Link

Battery (terminal 3)

Fuse 24

Battery (terminal 1)

Fusible Link A

Ignition switch ON (terminal 2)

Fuse 3

Generator
Combination meter

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.

3.CHECK GENERATOR GROUND TERMINAL CONNECTION

Check if connector F4 terminal 5 is clean.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair connection.

4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION

Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-16

2014 Note

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009446807

B

“B” terminal circuit supplies power to charge the battery and to operate the vehicles electrical system.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009446808

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, «Wiring Diagram».

D

1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION

E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair terminal “B” connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using the EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for
proper testing procedures.

F

G

2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

H

Check voltage between generator “B” terminal and ground.
(+)
Generator
Connector

Terminal

F2

1

(-)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

I

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness for open between generator and fusible link.

K

1.
2.

L

3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)

Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.
Check voltage between battery positive terminal and generator connector “B” terminal.
(+)
(-)

Voltage
(Approx.)

CHG

Battery positive terminal

Less than 0.2V

N

Generator
Connector

Terminal

F2

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)»
or CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> Check harness between battery and generator for continuity.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-17

2014 Note

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
Description

INFOID:0000000009446809

The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp turns OFF. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009446810

Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check if “L” terminal is clean and tight.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for proper
testing procedures.

2.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the generator connector.
Apply ground to generator harness connector terminal.
Check condition of the charge warning lamp with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Generator

Condition

Connector

Terminal

F1

2

Ground

Ignition switch position

Charge warning lamp

ON

Illuminate

Does it illuminate?
YES >> “L” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or
CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Disconnect the combination meter connector.
Check continuity between generator harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Generator

Combination meter

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F1

2

M24

38

Continuity
Yes

is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.

4.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-18

2014 Note

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A

(+)
Combination meter
Connector
M24

(-)

Condition

Ground

When the ignition
switch is in ON position

Voltage
(Approx.)

Terminal
28

B
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-19

2014 Note

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
Description

INFOID:0000000009446811

The terminal “L” circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp turns off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009446812

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to CHG-6, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect generator connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
Does charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Disconnect generator connector.
Check continuity between the generator harness connector and ground.
Generator
Connector

Terminal

F1

2

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-20

2014 Note

S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

S TERMINAL CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009446813

The output voltage of the generator is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal “S” detecting the input voltage
from battery.
The “S” terminal circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the generator output voltage with the IC voltage
regulator.

Diagnosis Procedure

B

C

INFOID:0000000009446814

D

Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION

E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “S” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for
proper testing procedures.

2.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

F

G

H

Check voltage between generator harness connector and ground.
(+)
Generator
Connector

Terminal

F1

3

(-)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)» or CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> Check harness for open between generator and fuse.

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-21

2014 Note

CHARGING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009014847

Symptom

Reference

Battery discharged
The charge warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition
switch is set to ON.
The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine
starts.

Refer to CHG-10, «Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)»
or CHG-13, «Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)».

The charging warning lamp turns ON when increasing the engine
speed.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-22

2014 Note

GENERATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

GENERATOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385611

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
AWGIA0293ZZ

1.

Generator bracket

2.

Tensioner Idler pulley

4.

“B” terminal harness

5.

Generator harness connector

Removal and Installation

3.

Generator

I
INFOID:0000000009385612

J

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
Remove the radiator core support upper. DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal K
and Installation».
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-24, «Exploded View».
L
Disconnect generator harness connector.
Remove “B” terminal nut and disconnect “B” terminal harness.
Remove the generator bolts.
CHG
Remove the generator.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage surrounding parts when removing generator from the vehicle.
N
Remove bolts and remove generator bracket if necessary.

INSTALLATION
1.
a.
b.
c.

Install the generator bracket (if removed), using the following
procedure.
Temporarily tighten bolt (1).
Temporarily tighten bolt (2).
Tighten bolts to specification in numerical order as shown.

O

P

JMMIA0463ZZ

Revision: April 2013

CHG-23

2014 Note

GENERATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2.
a.
b.
c.

Install the generator using the following procedure.
Temporarily tighten the generator bolts in order from the lower to the upper.
Tighten the generator bolts to the specification starting with the top bolt.
Install “B” terminal harness and «B» terminal nut.
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten «B» terminal nut carefully.
Installation of the remaining components is the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

CHG-24

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Generator

INFOID:0000000009385613

Model*

A002TJ1791ZC

Manufacturer

Mitsubishi

Nominal rating

13.5V — 110A

Ground polarity

Negative

Minimum revolution under no-load

1,000 rpm

C

D

More than 27A/1,300 rpm
More than 95A/2,500 rpm
More than 116A/5,000 rpm

Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied)

B

E

* : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

CHG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CHG-25

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SECTION

CL

CLUTCH

A

B

C

CL

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..11

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER …………………… 12

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
General Precautions …………………………………………. 2

Exploded View …………………………………………………12
Removal and Installation …………………………………..12
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..13

CLUTCH PIPING ……………………………………….. 14

Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 3

Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Hydraulic Layout ………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..15

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 4

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …… 16

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 4

CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) ……. 16

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

Exploded View …………………………………………………16
Removal and Installation …………………………………..16
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………..17

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 5
CLUTCH PEDAL …………………………………………. 5

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER ………… 18
Exploded View …………………………………………………18
Removal and Installation …………………………………..18
Inspection ……………………………………………………….19

Inspection and Adjustment …………………………………. 5

CLUTCH FLUID …………………………………………… 6
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 6
Draining …………………………………………………………… 6
Refilling …………………………………………………………… 7
Air Bleeding ……………………………………………………… 8

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 10

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 21
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 21

CLUTCH PEDAL …………………………………………10
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 10
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 10

General Specifications ………………………………………21
Clutch Pedal ……………………………………………………21
Clutch Disc ……………………………………………………..21
Clutch Cover ……………………………………………………21

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009578850

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

General Precautions

INFOID:0000000009417548

WARNING:
After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not use compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Always use recommended clutch fluid. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
• Keep painted surface on the body and other parts free of clutch fluid. If fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the affected area with water.
• Do not use mineral oils, such as gasoline or kerosene. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
• Do not reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
when removing transaxle assembly. At this time, dust on the sliding parts may damage the seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-16, «Removal and Installation».
• Do not disassemble clutch master cylinder and CSC.

Revision: April 2013

CL-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009417550

Tool name

Description

Clutch aligner

Installing clutch disc

B

C

CL

E
MCIB0404E

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

F

G
PIIB1407E

ST20050240
( — )
Diaphragm adjusting wrench

Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring lever

H

I

J

ZZA0508D

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-3

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009417551

CL-18
FLYWHEEL (Distortion)

2

PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion)

2

DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Out of tip alignment)

2

DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged)

2

CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease)

CL-19
CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned)

2

4

5

2

2
1

Clutch slips

1

Clutch does not disengage

1

Revision: April 2013

CLUTCH DISC (Hardened)

Clutch noisy

CLUTCH DISC (Worn out)

Symptom

1

2

CLUTCH DISC (Oily)

Clutch pedal spongy

CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken)

CL-17
CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) (Worn, dirty or damaged)

1

CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive)

EM-85
ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose)

Clutch grabs/chatters

CLUTCH DISC (Out of true)

CL-8
CLUTCH LINE (Air in line)

SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause)

CL-5

Reference page

CLUTCH PEDAL (Inspection and adjustment)

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

2

3

CL-4

3

3

3

3

3

3
3

4

4

5

2014 Note

CLUTCH PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

CLUTCH PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009417552

1.

Check to see if the master cylinder rod end (
should not be bound by the clutch pedal.

a.

If the master cylinder rod end ( ) does not move freely, remove
the master cylinder rod end ( ) and check for deformation or
damage on the master cylinder rod end ( ). Leave the master
cylinder rod end ( ) removed.

B

) moves freely. It
C

CL

E
PCIB1491E

2.
a.
b.
3.

Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement.
With the master cylinder rod end removed, manually move the pedal up and down to determine if it moves
freely.
If any sticking is noted, replace the clutch pedal assembly. Re-verify that the master cylinder rod end
moves freely.

G

H

Adjust clutch interlock switch (1) position so that clearance
between clutch pedal (2) and thread end of clutch interlock
switch (1), with clutch pedal fully depressed, is within specification (C).
Clearance (C)

F

I

: Refer to CL-21, «Clutch Pedal».
J

K

L

M

N
PCIB1493E

4.
a.
b.

Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch pedal and CSC (Concentric
Slave Cylinder) for sticking or binding.
If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related parts as necessary.
If any hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-8, «Air
Bleeding».

Revision: April 2013

CL-5

2014 Note

O

P

CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

CLUTCH FLUID
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417553

CLUTCH FLUID LEAKS
• Check clutch line for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
• Check for clutch fluid leaks by fully depressing clutch pedal while engine is running.
CAUTION:
If leaks occur around connections, reinstall the lines or replace damaged parts, if necessary.

CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL
• Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the
specified range, between the MAX and MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any clutch fluid leaks around the reservoir tank.
• Check the clutch system for any leaks if the clutch fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).

JPFIA0007ZZ

Draining

INFOID:0000000009417554

CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).

JPDIB0144ZZ

2.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.

PCIB1495E

Revision: April 2013

CL-6

2014 Note

CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown.
(2)

A

: Bleeding connector

B

Dimension (A)

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

CAUTION:
Do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.

C
JPDIB0147ZZ

4.

Depress clutch pedal to gradually discharge clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
bleeding connector.

Refilling

CL

E

INFOID:0000000009417555

CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in reservoir tank and then fill with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).

F

G

H

I

J

JPDIB0144ZZ

3.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.

K

L

M

N
PCIB1495E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-7

2014 Note

CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown.
(2)

: Bleeding connector

Dimension (A)

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

JPDIB0147ZZ

5.

6.
7.
8.

Slowly depress clutch pedal to the full stroke position and then release the pedal.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
bleeding connector.
Repeat step 5 at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new clutch fluid is discharged.
CAUTION:
Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions while clutch pedal is depressed.
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-8, «Air Bleeding».

Air Bleeding

INFOID:0000000009417556

CAUTION:
• Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
• Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
1. Fill reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).
3. Depress and release the clutch pedal slowly and fully 15 times
at an interval of 2 to 3 seconds and release the clutch pedal.

JPDIB0144ZZ

4.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.

PCIB1495E

Revision: April 2013

CL-8

2014 Note

CLUTCH FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
5. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown and immediately depress the clutch
pedal and hold it, to bleed the air from the system.
(2)

: Bleeding connector

Dimension (A)

B

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A

C
JPDIB0147ZZ

Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions.
Release clutch pedal and wait for 5 seconds.
Repeat steps 3 to 7 until no bubbles are observed in the clutch fluid.
Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer
to CL-6, «Inspection».

CL

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-9

2014 Note

CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CLUTCH PEDAL
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417557

AWDIA0944GB

1.

Clutch pedal

2.

Pedal stopper rubber

3.

Pedal pad

4.

Clutch interlock switch

5.

Clip

6.

ASCD cancel switch

7.

Clip

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417558

REMOVAL
1.

Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».

2.

Disconnect master cylinder rod end (

) from clutch pedal.

PCIB1491E

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Disconnect ASCD cancel switch and clutch interlock switch harness connector
Remove harness clip from clutch pedal.
Remove clutch pedal nuts and remove clutch pedal.
Remove pedal pad from clutch pedal.
Remove clutch interlock switch and clip from clutch pedal.
Remove pedal stopper rubber from clutch pedal using a suitable tool.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Press master cylinder rod end into clutch pedal until it stops.
Revision: April 2013

CL-10

2014 Note

CLUTCH PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009417559

A

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check clutch pedal for bend, damage, or a cracked weld. If bend, damage, or a cracked weld is found,
replace clutch pedal.
• Check pedal stopper rubber. If damage or deformation is found, replace pedal stopper rubber.
• Check pedal pad. If wear or damage is found, replace pedal pad.

B

C

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspect the clutch interlock switch position and adjust as necessary. Refer to CL-5, «Inspection and Adjustment».

CL

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-11

2014 Note

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417560

JPDIB0222ZZ

1.

Reservoir hose

2.

Master cylinder

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417561

CAUTION:
• Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
• Do not disassemble clutch master cylinder.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove battery. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Remove IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Remove ECM bracket nuts (A).
: Front

JPDIB0233ZZ

Revision: April 2013

CL-12

2014 Note

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5.
6.

Remove master cylinder rod end ( ) from clutch pedal.
Use one of the following methods to remove reservoir hose from
master cylinder.
• Drain clutch fluid from reservoir tank and remove reservoir
hose. Refer to CL-6, «Draining».
• Remove hose from master cylinder.

A

B

C
PCIB1491E

7.
8.

CL

Pull up the lock pin (1) from connector of master cylinder (2) and
separate clutch tube (3).
Rotate master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees and then
remove master cylinder from the vehicle.

E

F

G
JPDIB0169ZZ

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. With the nipple (1) rotated clockwise by 45 degrees, insert clutch
master cylinder into the mounting hole. Rotate the clutch master
cylinder counterclockwise by 45 degrees (A) as shown to secure
it. At this time, nipple is in the upward (B).
2. Install master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal.
CAUTION:
Press master cylinder rod end into clutch pedal until it
stops.
3. Install reservoir hose to master cylinder.
4. Press down the lock pin into connector of master cylinder until it
JPDIB0114ZZ
stops.
5. Install clutch tube into connector of master cylinder until it stops.
6. Fill with clutch fluid and bleed clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, «Refilling».
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

Inspection and Adjustment

H

I

J

K

L

M

INFOID:0000000009417562

N

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for clutch fluid leaks and check the fluid level. Refer to CL-6, «Inspection».
O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-13

2014 Note

CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CLUTCH PIPING
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417563

JPDIB0181ZZ

1.

CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder)

2.

Clip

3.

Clutch tube

4.

Clutch damper

5.

Bracket

6.

Master cylinder

Hydraulic Layout

INFOID:0000000009417564

PCIB1499E

1.

Clutch tube

2.

Lock pin

3.

CSC (concentric slave cylinder)

4.

Clutch damper

5.

Master cylinder

6.

Clutch pedal

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417565

CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
Revision: April 2013

CL-14

2014 Note

CLUTCH PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
2. Use one of the following methods to remove hose from clutch master cylinder.
• Drain clutch fluid from reservoir tank and remove hose. Refer to CL-6, «Draining».
• Remove hose from clutch master cylinder.
3. Remove clutch tube lock pin from clutch master cylinder.
4. Remove clutch tube lock pin at clutch housing.
5. Remove clutch tube lock pins (2) from clutch damper (3).
6. Remove clutch tube (1) from clutch damper (3).
7. Remove clutch damper (3) from bracket (4).

A

B

C

CL

E

F
WCIA0597E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch tube.
• Insert each clutch tube into the CSC bleeding connector, the clutch damper connector, and the clutch master
cylinder connector until it contacts the end of each connector.
• Install each lock pin into the clutch damper connector and the clutch master cylinder connector until it contacts the end of each connector.
• After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-8, «Air Bleeding».

Inspection and Adjustment

G

H

I

INFOID:0000000009417566

J

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the clutch tube has cracks or damage, replace it with a new
one.
• Check the O-ring of the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the O-ring of the clutch tube has cracks or
damage, replace clutch tube with a new one.
• Check the clutch damper for cracks and damage. If the clutch damper has cracks or damage, replace it with
a new one.

K

L

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for clutch fluid leaks and check the clutch fluid level. Refer to CL-6, «Inspection».
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-15

2014 Note

CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417567

JPDIB0146GB

1.

Transaxle assembly

2.

CSC (concentric slave cylinder)

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417568

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC (concentric slave cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
when removing transaxle assembly. At this time, dust on the sliding parts may damage the seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leaks.
• Do not disassemble CSC.
• Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove engine transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, «Removal and Installation».
Remove CSC bolts and the CSC from clutch housing.

PCIB1498E

INSTALLATION
1.

Install CSC to clutch housing and then tighten CSC bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC.

Revision: April 2013

CL-16

2014 Note

CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not insert and operate CSC when transaxle is removed. Piston and stopper of CSC components may fall off.
2. Install engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, «Removal and Installation».

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009417569

A

B

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for clutch fluid leaks and clutch fluid level. Refer to CL-6, «Inspection».

C

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-8, «Air Bleeding».

CL

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-17

2014 Note

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417570

AWDIA0948GB

1.

Flywheel

2.

Clutch disc

3.

Clutch cover

4.

Input shaft

A.

First step

B.

Final step

: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417571

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC (concentric slave cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
when removing transaxle assembly. At this time, dust on the sliding parts may damage the seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leaks.
• Do not allow any grease to contact the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface and flywheel surface.
• Do not clean clutch disc using solvent.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, «Removal and Installation».
Loosen clutch cover bolts evenly. Then remove clutch cover and clutch disc.

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Clean clutch disc and input shaft splines to remove grease and dust caused by abrasion.
Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and input shaft splines.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise, noise, poor disengagement, or damage
to the clutch may result. Excessive grease may cause slip or shudder. If grease adheres to seal of
CSC, it may cause clutch fluid leaks. Wipe off excess grease. Wipe off any grease oozing from the
parts.

Revision: April 2013

CL-18

2014 Note

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Install clutch disc, using suitable tool (A).
4. Install clutch cover and then temporarily tighten clutch cover
bolts.
5. Tighten clutch cover bolts to the specified torque evenly in two
steps in the numerical order as shown.
6. Install engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23,
«Removal and Installation».

A

B

C
PCIB1503E

CL

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417572

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

E

Clutch Disc
• Measure clutch facing runout. If it is outside the specification,
replace clutch disc.

F

Runout limit/diameter of the area
to be measured

: Refer to CL-21,
«Clutch Disc».

G

• Measure spline backlash at outer edge of clutch disc. If it is outside
the specification, replace clutch disc.
Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc)

H

: Refer to CL-21,
«Clutch Disc».
SCL221

I

• Measure the depth (A) to clutch disc facing rivet heads, using suitable tool. If it exceeds the allowable wear limit, replace clutch disc.
Facing wear limit (depth to the
rivet head) (A)

J

: Refer to CL-21,
«Clutch Disc».

K

L
JPDIB0026ZZ

Clutch Cover
• Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or damage. If wear or damage is found, replace clutch cover.
NOTE:
• Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet using suitable tool.
• Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down.
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface,
repair the surface with sandpaper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace clutch cover.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

M

N

O

Clutch Cover
P

Revision: April 2013

CL-19

2014 Note

CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check diaphragm spring levers for unevenness with the clutch cover
installed on the engine. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust diaphragm spring lever height, using suitable tool (A).
Tolerance for diaphragm spring
lever unevenness

: Refer to CL-21,
«Clutch Cover».

JPDIB0160ZZ

Revision: April 2013

CL-20

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

INFOID:0000000009417573

B

Unit: mm (in)

Engine type

HR16DE

Type of clutch control

Hydraulic

Clutch disc

Facing size (Outer dia. × Inner dia. × Thickness)

Recommended clutch fluid

C

200 × 140 × 3.1 (7.87 × 5.51 × 0.122)
Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

Clutch Pedal

CL

INFOID:0000000009417574

Unit: mm (in)

Engine type

E

HR16DE

Clearance between clutch pedal and clutch interlock switch
threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed.

F

0.2 – 1.96 (0.01 – 0.08)

Clutch Disc

INFOID:0000000009417575

G

Unit: mm (in)

Engine type

HR16DE

Clutch facing runout limit / diameter of the area to be measured

H

1.0 (0.039) / 190 (7.48) dia.

Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc)

0.8 (0.031)

Clutch facing wear limit (depth to the rivet head)

0.3 (0.012)

Clutch Cover

I
INFOID:0000000009417576

Unit: mm (in)

Engine type

J

HR16DE

Tolerance for diaphragm spring lever unevenness

0.7 (0.028) or less

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CL-21

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

CO

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

A

CO

C

D

E

CONTENTS
HR16DE
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

RADIATOR CAP ………………………………………………..12
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection …………………………….12
RADIATOR ………………………………………………………..12
RADIATOR : Inspection …………………………………….12

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 14

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

RADIATOR ……………………………………………….. 14

F

G

H

I

COOLING FAN ………………………………………….. 17

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………17
Removal and Installation …………………………………..17
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….18

DESCRIPTION ……………………………………………. 4

WATER PUMP ………………………………………….. 19

J

Engine Cooling System ……………………………………… 4
Engine Cooling System Schematic ……………………… 5

Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19

K

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 6

THERMOSTAT ………………………………………….. 21

L

Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS ……………… 6
Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………………….. 6

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 8
ENGINE COOLANT …………………………………….. 8

WATER OUTLET ………………………………………. 24

M

Exploded View …………………………………………………24
Removal and Installation …………………………………..25

Inspection ………………………………………………………… 8
Draining Engine Coolant ……………………………………. 8
Refilling …………………………………………………………… 9
Flushing Cooling System …………………………………. 11

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 26

RADIATOR …………………………………………………12

Standard and Limit …………………………………………..26

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 26

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009515764

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

CO-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009444910

CO

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV991J0070
(J-45695)
Coolant refill tool

Refilling engine cooling system

C

D

E
LMA053

EG17650301
(J-33984-A)
Radiator cap tester adapter

Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)

F

G

H
S-NT564

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009444911

I
Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

J

K

L

PIIB1407E

Radiator cap tester

Checking radiator and radiator cap

M

N
PBIC1982E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-3

2014 Note

DESCRIPTION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System

INFOID:0000000009444912

M/T models

JSBIA1096GB

CVT models

JSBIA1297GB

Revision: April 2013

CO-4

2014 Note

DESCRIPTION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Engine Cooling System Schematic

INFOID:0000000009444913

A

M/T models
CO

C

D

E

F

G

H

AWBIA1141GB

CVT models

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P
AWBIA1142GB

Revision: April 2013

CO-5

2014 Note

OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009444914

Symptom

Poor heat transfer

Check items

Water pump malfunction

Worn or loose drive belt

Thermostat stuck closed

Thermostat

Damaged fins

Dust contamination or paper clogging

—

Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube

Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)

Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow

High resistance to fan rotation

Fan assembly

—

Damaged fan blades

Cooling system parts
malfunction

Damaged radiator shroud

—

Radiator shroud

—

Improper engine coolant
mixture ratio

—

Engine coolant viscosity

—

Poor engine coolant quality

—

Periodic maintenance

—

Cooling hose
Water pump
Radiator cap
Engine coolant leaks

Loose clamp
Cracked hose
Poor sealing
Loose
Poor sealing
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting

Insufficient engine coolant
Radiator

Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core

Reservoir tank
Overflowing reservoir tank

Revision: April 2013

CO-6

Exhaust gas leaking into
cooling system

Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration

2014 Note

OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving

Driving in low gear for extended time

A

CO

Driving at extremely high
speed
—

Overload on engine

Installed improper size
wheels and tires

Except cooling system
parts malfunction

C

Power train system malfunction
—

D

Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing

Blocked or restricted air
flow

Blocked bumper

Installed front bumper fascia cover

Blocked radiator grille

Mud contamination or paper
clogging

E

—

F

Blocked radiator
Blocked condenser

Blocked air flow

G

Installed large fog lamp

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-7

2014 Note

ENGINE COOLANT
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009444915

CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
Check hoses for the following:
• Improper attachment
• Leaks
• Cracks
• Damage
• Loose connections
• Chafing
• Deterioration

CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
• Check that the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the
MAX (A) to MIN (B) range when the engine is cool.
• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.
CAUTION:
Refill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant or
equivalent. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

JPBIA0102ZZ

CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
To check for leaks, apply pressure to the cooling system using suitable tool (A) and Tool (B).
Tool number (B)

: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)

Testing pressure

: Refer to CO-8, «Inspection».

PBIC5121J

Draining Engine Coolant

INFOID:0000000009515750

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
1. Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

CO-8

2014 Note

ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Connect a suitable hose to the radiator drain plug.
• Use a suitable hose with the dimensions as shown.
Diameter (A)
Length (B)

[HR16DE]
A

: 0.8 mm (0.31 in)
: 300 mm (11.81 in)

CO

C
JPBIA4770ZZ

3.

D

Open radiator drain plug (A) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
(A): Suitable hose
: Front
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.

E

F

G
ALBIA1140ZZ

4.
5.
6.

It is necessary to drain the cylinder block when draining all of engine coolant in the system. To drain the
cylinder block, open the water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated,
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, «Flushing Cooling System».

Refilling
1.

INFOID:0000000009509400

Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total
system drain or for engine removal or repair.
• The radiator must be completely empty of engine coolant and water.
• Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

H

I

J

K

L

Radiator drain plug
2.
3.

: Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».

If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-9

2014 Note

ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number
5.

: KV991J0070 (J-45695)

Insert the refill hose into the engine coolant mixture container
that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the
closed position.
• Use recommended engine coolant or equivalent.
Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir tank)

6.

8.

: 549 — 824 kPa (5.6 — 8.4 kg/cm2,
80 — 119 psi)

10.

11.
12.
13.

LLIA0058E

CAUTION:
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Engine coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill
hose is full of engine coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, use the vacuum specifications based on the altitude
above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 — 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)

9.

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and
Lubricants».

CAUTION:
Do not use any cooling system additives such as radiator
sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause
damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure

7.

[HR16DE]

Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 — 25 inches of vacuum

LLIA0057E

When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 — 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
Place the engine coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the engine coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the engine coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn
into the cooling system.
Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
Install the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

CO-10

2014 Note

ENGINE COOLANT
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

Flushing Cooling System
1.

3.
4.

A

Install radiator drain plug and reservoir tank, if removed.
Radiator drain plug

2.

INFOID:0000000009509391

: Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».

CO

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plugs on cylinder block were removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded
View».
Remove air duct from between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-26,
«Removal and Installation».
Disconnect heater hose (1) at location ( ) as shown.
• Position heater hose as high as possible.
: Front

C

D

E

F

G
JSBIA0616ZZ

5.

Fill radiator until engine coolant flows out of the disconnected heater hose and then reconnect the heater
hose.
6. Finish filling the engine and reservoir tank with water and reinstall the radiator cap.
7. Install air duct in between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-26, «Removal
and Installation».
8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-11

2014 Note

RADIATOR
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009444919

• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.
(B)

: Metal plunger

— Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the
edge of the black rubber gasket.
— Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy
residue or foreign material.
JPBIA0108ZZ

• Pull negative-pressure valve to open it, and check that it closes
completely when released.
— Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
— Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.

SMA967B

• Check radiator cap relief pressure using suitable tool (A) and Tool
(B).
Tool number

: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)

Standard and Limit

: Refer to CO-26, «Standard and
Limit».

— When connecting the radiator cap to Tool (B), apply water or
engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
— Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negativepressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the standard values.

PBIC5122J

RADIATOR

RADIATOR : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009509402

Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts in order to access the radiator core. Then tape harness and harness connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Spray water to the back side of the radiator core using a side to side motion from the top down.
2. Stop spraying when debris no longer flows from radiator.
3. Blow air into the back side of radiator core using side to side motion from the top down.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81
in).
4. Continue to blow air until no water sprays out.
Revision: April 2013

CO-12

2014 Note

RADIATOR
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
5. Check for engine coolant leaks. Repair if necessary.

[HR16DE]
A

CO

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-13

2014 Note

RADIATOR
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RADIATOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444921

AWBIA1144GB

1.

Reservoir tank hose

2.

Reservoir tank cap

3.

Reservoir tank

4.

Mounting rubber (lower)

5.

O-ring

6.

Drain plug

7.

Radiator

8.

Cooling fan assembly

9.

Clamp

10. Radiator hose (lower)

11. Clamp

13. Radiator hose to water outlet (upper) 14. Radiator cap adapter

12. Oil cooler hose
15. Radiator cap

16. Radiator cap adapter bracket

17. Clamp

18. Radiator hose (upper) to radiator

19. Mounting rubber (upper)

20. CVT cooler hose

21. Clamp

21. Clamp

22. Clamp

23. CVT cooler hose

24. Clamp

A.

B.

C.

To water inlet

To water outlet

To oil cooler

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444922

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
Revision: April 2013

CO-14

2014 Note

RADIATOR
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
A
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
CO
3. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
4. Remove radiator hose (lower).
C
5. Remove radiator hose (upper) from water outlet.
6. Remove the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
7. Remove the front grille. Refer toEXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
D
8. Disconnect reservoir tank hose, and remove reservoir tank.
9. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor, and move harness aside.
10. Remove radiator core support (upper). Refer to DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
E
Removal and Installation».
11. Remove the condenser bolts and place aside. Refer to HA-29, «Exploded View».
12. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator.
F
13. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-17, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the radiator.
G
14. Disconnect CVT cooler lines.
15. Remove the radiator from bottom of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
H
When removing, do not damage or scratch radiator core or A/C condenser.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
• Insert the radiator hose (1) all the way to the stopper (2) or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper) as
shown.

I

J

K

L

M
JPBIA4294GB

1.

Radiator hose

2.

Stopper

A.

Radiator side

B.

Engine side

N

• The correct orientation of the hose clamps are as shown.
O
Radiator hose
Radiator hose (upper)

Radiator hose (lower)

Hose end

Paint mark

Position of hose clamp*

Radiator side

Upper

A

Engine side

Upper

B

Radiator side

Lower

C

Engine side

Upper

D

P

*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position for each hose clamp tab.

Revision: April 2013

CO-15

2014 Note

RADIATOR
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

JSBIA1299ZZ

A.

View A

B.

View B

C.

View C

D

View D

E.

View E

f.

45°

: Vehicle upper

• The angle (b) created by the hose clamp pawl and the specified
line (A) must be within ±30° as shown.

JPBIA4295ZZ

• To install hose clamps (1), check that the dimension (A) from the
end of the hose clamp on the radiator hose to the hose clamp is
within the reference value.
Dimension (A)

: 3 – 7 mm (0.12 – 0.28 in)

CAUTION:
• When installing do not damage or scratch radiator core or A/C
condenser.
• Replace water hose clamp if it is removed.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN bolts for the cooling fan assembly
and strictly follow the tightening torque. Over tightening may
damage the radiator.

JPBIA3527ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-8, «Inspection».
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually inspect for engine coolant leaks. Repair as necessary.

Revision: April 2013

CO-16

2014 Note

COOLING FAN
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COOLING FAN

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444923

CO

C

D

E

F

G
AWBIA1140GB

1.

Fan shroud

2.

Fan motor

A.

Cooling fan nut

L.

Genuine NISSAN high strength locking sealant

Removal and Installation

3.

Cooling fan

H

INFOID:0000000009444924

I

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
2. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
3. Remove the front grille. Refer toEXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
4. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
5. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor, and move harness aside.
6. Remove radiator core support (upper). Refer to DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
Removal and Installation».
7. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-17, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the radiator.

J

REMOVAL

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Only use Genuine NISSAN parts for the fan shroud bolt.
NOTE:
Cooling fan assembly is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-35, «COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description».
Revision: April 2013

CO-17

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

COOLING FAN
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009444925

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.

Remove cooling fan nut, and then remove the cooling fan.
Remove fan motor.

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cooling fan and shroud
Inspect cooling fan and shroud for nicks, cracks, breaks and warping. Replace if necessary.

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Genuine NISSAN high strength thread locking sealant on fan motor shaft.

Revision: April 2013

CO-18

2014 Note

WATER PUMP
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WATER PUMP

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444926

CO

C

D

E

F

G
JPBIA4104GB

1.

Gasket

2.

Water pump

3.

Water pump pulley

Removal and Installation

H
INFOID:0000000009444927

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove front wheel and tire (RH) using power tool. Refer to WT-5, «Adjustment».
Remove front fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Loosen water pump pulley bolts before loosening belt tension of drive belt.
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
Remove water pump pulley.
Remove water pump.
• Loosen water pump bolts in reverse order as shown.
• Engine coolant will leak from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow water pump vane to contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and must be
replaced as an assembly.

L

M

N

O

P

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

CO-19

J

K

KBIA3393J

Revision: April 2013

I

2014 Note

WATER PUMP
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Visually check for significant dirt or rust on the water pump body
and vane (A) and replace as necessary.
• Check that the vane shaft turns smoothly by hand and is not
excessively loose.
• Replace the water pump assembly if the water pump does not perform properly.

PBIC3808E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten water pump bolts in order as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow the water pump vane to contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as
an assembly.
• Do not reuse gasket.
• Sealing surface must be clean and free of dents or flaws.

KBIA3393J

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids, including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item
Engine coolant
Engine oil

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Level

Leaks

Level

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

CO-20

2014 Note

THERMOSTAT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

THERMOSTAT

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444928

CO

C

D

E

F

G
PBIC3810E

1.

Radiator hose (lower)

2.

Water inlet

4.

Thermostat

A.

To radiator

3.

Rubber ring

Removal and Installation

H
INFOID:0000000009444929

I

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.

J

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.
4.

K

Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet. Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Remove water inlet, thermostat, and rubber ring.
NOTE:
Engine coolant will leak from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.

L

M

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

N

Thermostat
• Place a thread (A) so that it is caught in the valves of thermostat
(1). Immerse fully in a container (B) filled with water. Heat while
stirring.
• The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and falls from the thread.
• Continue heating. Check the full open valve lift amount.
• After checking the maximum valve lift amount, lower the water
temperature and check the valve closing temperature.

Standard: Refer to CO-26, «Standard and
Limit».

O

P

PBIC3314J

• If out of the standard specification range, replace the thermostat.
Revision: April 2013

CO-21

2014 Note

THERMOSTAT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Thermostat
• Install thermostat making sure rubber ring (1) groove fits securely
to thermostat flange (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse rubber ring.

JPBIA4229ZZ

• Install thermostat (2) into the cylinder block (1) with jiggle valve (A)
facing upward.

PBIC3812E

Water Inlet
After installation, attach the water inlet clip (A) on the oil level gauge
guide (1) positioned at location (B) as shown.

PBIC3755E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids, including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:

Revision: April 2013

CO-22

2014 Note

THERMOSTAT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Exhaust gas

A

CO

C

D

*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

CO-23

2014 Note

WATER OUTLET
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WATER OUTLET
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444930

M/T model

AWBIA1582ZZ

1.

Engine coolant temperature sensor

2.

Clamp

3.

Gasket

4.

Clamp

5.

Bracket

6.

Clamp

7.

Water outlet

8.

Clamp

9.

Clamp

A.

From electric throttle control actuator B.

To radiator

C.

From heater core

To heater core

To electric throttle control actuator

D.

To heater core

D.

E.

Front

CVT model

AWBIA1583ZZ

1.

Engine coolant temperature sensor

2.

Clamp

3.

4.

Clamp

5.

Bracket

6.

Gasket
Clamp

7.

Water outlet

8.

Clamp

9.

Clamp

10. Clamp

A.

From electric throttle control actuator B.

To radiator

C.

To heater core / CVT oil warmer

D.

To CVT oil warmer

To heater core

F.

To electric throttle control actuator

Revision: April 2013

E.

Front

CO-24

2014 Note

WATER OUTLET
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444931

A
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a CO
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spillC
ing.

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove air ducts and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect radiator hose (upper). Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Disconnect harness connector from engine coolant temperature sensor.
Disconnect water hoses and heater hoses from water outlet.
Remove water outlet.
Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from water outlet, if necessary.

D

E

F

G

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

H

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids, including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

CO-25

2014 Note

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit

INFOID:0000000009444932

Engine coolant capacity (approximate)
Unit:

Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)*
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level)

(US qt, Imp qt)

CVT models

7.3 (7-3/4, 6-3/8)

M/T models

6.7 (7-1/8, 5-7/8)
0.7 (3/4, 5/8)

*: Includes reservoir amount.

Radiator
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Cap relief pressure

Standard

88 (0.90, 12.8)

Radiator leak test pressure

156 (1.59, 22.6)

Thermostat
Standard

Valve opening temperature

80.5 — 83.5°C (177 — 182°F)

Maximum valve lift

8.0 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F)

Valve closing temperature

Revision: April 2013

77°C (171°F)

CO-26

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

DEF

DEFOGGER

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 16

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ……….. 16

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

Description ………………………………………………………16
Component Function Check ………………………………16
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..16
Component Inspection ………………………………………17

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 3
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 3
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 3
Rear window defogger ………………………………………. 4

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 5
System Description …………………………………………… 5

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….. 6
COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………….. 6
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ………………………………………………. 6

Description ………………………………………………………18
Component Function Check ………………………………18
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..18
Component Inspection ………………………………………19

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …………………….. 20
Description ………………………………………………………20
Component Function Check ………………………………20
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..20
Component Inspection ………………………………………21

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 22

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION …………… 8

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..22

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………. 8

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 9
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM …………. 9
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………… 9

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 13
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……..13
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 13

Revision: April 2013

G

H

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY …………. 18

REAR DEFOGGER …………………………………………….. 6
REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM REAR DEFOGGER) …………………………………………. 7

BCM …………………………………………………………… 8

F

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT
OPERATE ………………………………………………… 22
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES
NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OPERATES ………………………………………. 23
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..23

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 24
FILAMENT ………………………………………………… 24
Inspection and Repair ……………………………………….24

CONDENSER ……………………………………………. 26
Removal and Installation …………………………………..26

DEF-1

2014 Note

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009500279

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

DEF-2

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009477885

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M
ALLIA1294ZZ

A.

Center of instrument panel

No.

B.

Left side of instrument panel

Component

C.

Back door lower finisher inside

Function

1.

BCM

• Operates the rear window defogger with the operation of rear window defogger switch.
• Performs the timer control of rear window defogger.
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

2.

Rear window defogger

Refer to DEF-4, «Rear window defogger».

3.

Front air control (rear window
defogger switch)

• The rear window defogger switch is turned ON.
• Turns the indicator lamp ON when detecting the operation of rear window defogger.

4.

Rear window defogger relay

Operates the rear window defogger with the control signal from BCM.

5.

Condenser

Removes the noise that is generated when the rear window defogger turns ON/OFF.

Revision: April 2013

N

DEF-3

2014 Note

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Rear window defogger

INFOID:0000000009499782

Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up.

JMLIA2595GB

Revision: April 2013

DEF-4

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

System Description

INFOID:0000000009477888

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

B

C

D

E

F

G
ALLIA1291GB

Operation Description
• When rear window defogger switch is turned ON while ignition switch is ON, the front air control (rear window defogger switch) transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM.
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON when rear window defogger switch signal is received.
• Rear window defogger are supplied with power and operate when rear window defogger relay turns ON.
• Rear window defogger ON is displayed when front air control receives signals.

Timer function
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch
is turned ON while ignition switch is ON. It makes rear window defogger operate.
• Timer is canceled after pressing rear window defogger switch again during timer operation. Then BCM turns
rear window defogger relay OFF. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation, if the ignition switch
is turned OFF.

H

I

J

K

DEF

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Switch

Input signal to BCM

Rear window defogger switch

Defogger switch signal

Ignition switch

Ignition signal

BCM function

Actuator

Rear window defogger control

Rear window defogger

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-5

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009567628

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

Revision: April 2013

DEF-6

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM — REAR DEFOGGER)

INFOID:0000000009567629

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

B

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

REAR DEF SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear window defogger switch.

C

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
REAR DEFOGGER

Description

D

This test is able to check rear window defogger operation [Off/On].

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-7

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009477893

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

DEF-8

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009477894

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

AALWA0623GB

Revision: April 2013

DEF-9

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1366GB

Revision: April 2013

DEF-10

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O
AALIA1367GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-11

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1368GB

Revision: April 2013

DEF-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009477895

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

JMKIA0101GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

DEF-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2

2. CHECK DTC

1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out with CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5

3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5

4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6

5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart» and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included in Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirmation Procedure.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 8
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

Perform DEF-13, «Work Flow».
>> GO TO 7

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
Detect malfunctioning system according to DEF-5, «System Description» based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 8
Revision: April 2013

DEF-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also
required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 9
NO
>> Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT.

A

B

C

9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.

D

E

>> GO TO 10

10. FINAL CHECK

F

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check
again, and then check that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected.
Does the symptom reappear?
YES (DTC is detected)>>GO TO 8
YES (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-15

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Description

INFOID:0000000009477896

• The rear window defogger is operated by pressing the rear window defogger switch ON.
• The indicator lamp in the rear window defogger switch illuminates while the rear window defogger is ON.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477897

1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger illuminates with rear window defogger switch ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-16, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK REAR DEFOGGER ON STATUS

1.
2.

Using CONSULT, select “BCM (REAR DEFOGGER)”, then “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “REAR DEF SW” and monitor while pressing the rear DEF switch ON and OFF.
Monitored Item
REAR DEF SW

Condition

Status

Rear DEF switch ON (LED ON)

On

Rear DEF switch OFF (LED OFF)

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-16, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477898

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DEF-9, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

10

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front air control harness connector.
BCM

Front air control

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M18

15

M33

10

Revision: April 2013

DEF-16

Continuity
Yes

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
A
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M18

15

Continuity

Ground

B

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

C

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

D

Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground.
Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

8

Continuity

Ground

E

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

G

Refer to DEF-17, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

H

INFOID:0000000009477899

I

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between front air control terminals.

K

Front air control

Condition

Terminal
10

J

8

Rear window defogger switch

Continuity
Pressed

Yes

Released

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

DEF

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-17

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Description

INFOID:0000000009477900

Power is supplied to the rear window defogger with BCM control.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477901

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check that an operation noise of rear window defogger relay can be heard when turning the rear window
defogger switch ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger relay function is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-18, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477902

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DEF-9, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect rear window defogger relay connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear window defogger relay
Connector

Terminal

M14

1

(−)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUSE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10A fuse (No. 5).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —
«.
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.

3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear window defogger relay harness connector.
BCM

4.

Rear window defogger relay

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M18

1

M14

2

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DEF-18

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M18

1

Ground

Continuity
No

A

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

C

4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Refer to DEF-19, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.

D

E

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009477903

F

Check continuity between terminal 3 and 5.
Terminal

Condition

Continuity

3 and 5

12 V direct current supply between terminal 1
and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

G

H

I
SEF497Y

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-19

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009477904

Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the rear window
from fogging up.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477905

1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Check that the heating wire of rear window defogger is heated when turning the rear window defogger switch
ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-20, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477906

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DEF-9, «Wiring Diagram».

1. CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) are blown.
COMPONENT PARTS

AMPERE

FUSE NO.

Fuse block (J/B)

20A

11

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.

2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Rear window
defogger relay
connector

Terminal

M14

5

(–)

Condition of rear
window defogger
switch

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

ON

Battery voltage

OFF

0

Ground

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Check the following:
• Rear window defogger relay.
• Battery power supply circuit.

3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DEF-20

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A

Terminals
(+)
Rear window
defogger
connector

Terminal

B50

1

(–)

Condition of rear
window
defogger switch

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

ON

Battery voltage

OFF

0

Ground

B

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> GO TO 5

D

4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

E

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger.
Check continuity between rear window defogger connector and ground.

F
Rear window defogger connector

Terminal

B51

2

Ground

Continuity
Yes

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

H

5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay connector and condenser connector.
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector and condenser connector.

I

J

Rear window
defogger relay
connector

Terminal

Condenser connector

Terminal

Continuity

M14

5

B42

1

Yes

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace condenser. Refer to DEF-26, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace or repair harness.

DEF

6. CHECK FILAMENT

Check filament.
Refer to DEF-21, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair filament. Refer to DEF-24, «Inspection and Repair».

Component Inspection

M

N
INFOID:0000000009477907

O

1. CHECK FILAMENT
Check the filament for damage or open circuits.
Refer to DEF-24, «Inspection and Repair».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair filament. Refer to DEF-24, «Inspection and Repair».

Revision: April 2013

DEF-21

P

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477916

1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Check rear window defogger switch.
Refer to DEF-16, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-18, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check rear window defogger power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to DEF-20, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

DEF-22

2014 Note

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER OPERATES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OPERATES
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477921

1. CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH)
Check that the front air control (rear window defogger switch) is operating normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Refer to DEF-16, «Diagnosis Procedure».

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

DEF

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-23

2014 Note

FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FILAMENT
Inspection and Repair

INFOID:0000000009500277

INSPECTION
1.

When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.

SEL122R

2.

Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.

SEL263

3.
4.

If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.

SEL265

REPAIR
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)

Revision: April 2013

DEF-24

2014 Note

FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth

A

B

REPAIRING PROCEDURE

1.
2.

3.

Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
NOTE:
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.

C

D

E
PIIA0215E

F

4.

After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
CAUTION:
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.

G

H

I
SEL012D

5.

J

Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
NOTE:
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.

K

DEF

SEL013D

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DEF-25

2014 Note

CONDENSER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CONDENSER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009500278

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors (B), from the condenser (1).
: Front
Remove the condenser bolt (A) and the condenser (1).

ALLIA1295ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DEF-26

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

DLK

DOOR & LOCK

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 6
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 6
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ………………….. 6
Precaution for Servicing Doors and Locks ……………. 6

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 8
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 8
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 8
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 8

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 10
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………10
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ……………………………………… 10
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ……………………………………………………………….. 10
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center) …………………………………………….. 12
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna
(Console) ……………………………………………………….. 13
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna
(Trunk Room) …………………………………………………. 13
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna
(Rear Bumper) ……………………………………………….. 13
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna
(Driver Side) …………………………………………………… 13
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna
(Passenger Side) ……………………………………………. 14
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) ……………………………………………… 14
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote Keyless Entry
Receiver ………………………………………………………… 14
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning
Buzzer …………………………………………………………… 14
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly …………………………………………………………………. 15

Revision: April 2013

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock
Switch …………………………………………………………….15
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request
Switch (Driver Side) ………………………………………….15
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request
Switch (Passenger Side) …………………………………..15
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch …………………16
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Request
Switch …………………………………………………………….16

SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) …. 17
System Diagram ………………………………………………17
System Description …………………………………………..17

F

G

H

I

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ……… 19

J

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ………………………………19
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………………19

DLK

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ……………………………………20
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ….20

L

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ………………22
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description ………………………………………………..22

M

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ………………………………23
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description …………………………………………………………………24

N

WARNING FUNCTION ……………………………………….24
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ……….24

O

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 27
BCM …………………………………………………………. 27
List of ECU Reference ………………………………………27

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 28
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM …………………………… 28
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ………………………….28

DLK-1

2014 Note

P

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram
… 28
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM …………………………….. 36
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram ….. 37

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 51
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW …….. 51
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 51

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 54
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA …………………………… 54
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 54
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 54

BACK DOOR : Description ………………………………. 72
BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ……… 72
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure …………………. 73

BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY ……. 75
Description …………………………………………………….. 75
Component Function Check …………………………….. 75
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 75
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 76

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH …………. 78
Component Function Check ……………………………. 78
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 78
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 79

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH …………………………. 80

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 56
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 56

Component Function Check ……………………………. 80
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 80
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 81

B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA …………………………… 58

BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ………………. 82

B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA …………………………… 56

B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ……………………….. 60

Description …………………………………………………….. 82
Component Function Check ……………………………. 82
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 82
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 83

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 60
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 60

DOOR SWITCH …………………………………………. 84

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 58
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 58

B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ……………………….. 62
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 62
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 62

B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ……………………….. 64
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 64
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 64

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ….. 66

Component Function Check ……………………………. 84
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 84
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 85

HAZARD FUNCTION …………………………………. 87
Component Function Check ……………………………. 87
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 87

INTELLIGENT KEY ……………………………………. 88

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 66

Component Function Check ……………………………. 88
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 88

COMBINATION METER BUZZER ……………….. 67

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ……… 89

Component Function Check …………………………… 67
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 67

Component Function Check ……………………………. 89
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 89

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ………………………….. 68

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 93

DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………… 68
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check …….. 68
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ……………….. 68

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH …………. 93

PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………… 69
PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check …………………………… 69
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ……….. 69
REAR LH …………………………………………………………. 70
REAR LH : Component Function Check …………… 70
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ………………………. 70
REAR RH ………………………………………………………… 71
REAR RH : Component Function Check ………….. 71
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………… 71
BACK DOOR ……………………………………………………. 72

Revision: April 2013

ALL DOOR ………………………………………………………. 93
ALL DOOR : Description ………………………………….. 93
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………. 93
DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………… 93
DRIVER SIDE : Description ……………………………… 93
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ………………… 93
PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………… 93
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ……………………… 94
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ………… 94
REAR LH …………………………………………………………. 94
REAR LH : Description ……………………………………. 94

DLK-2

2014 Note

REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ………………………. 94
REAR RH …………………………………………………………. 94
REAR RH : Description ……………………………………. 94
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ………………………. 94

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR
KEY CYLINDER ………………………………………….96
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 96

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH …………………………..97
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES …………………….. 97
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description…. 97
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis
Procedure ………………………………………………………. 97
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH …………… 97
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description …………………………………………………………. 98
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………………… 98
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH …… 98
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
Description …………………………………………………….. 98
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 98

ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE …….. 107
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 107

TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ………………………………………………………… 108
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 108

INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ………………………. 109

A

B

C

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 109

DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
NOT OPERATE ……………………………………….. 110

D

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 110

KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE …. 111

E

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 111

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES …………………………………………………… 112
Work Flow …………………………………………………….. 112
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ……… 113
Diagnostic Worksheet …………………………………….. 116

F

G

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 118
HOOD …………………………………………………….. 118

H

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 118
HOOD ASSEMBLY ………………………………………….. 118
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ….. 118
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment …………………….. 119

I

HOOD HINGE …………………………………………………. 120
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation …………. 120

J

DLK

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 100

HOOD SUPPORT ROD ……………………………………. 121
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………………. 121

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ………………………………………………… 101

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT …………………… 122

L

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY …………………………………………99
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 99

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
DOES NOT OPERATE ………………………………. 100

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 101

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ………….. 102
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 102

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES
NOT OPERATE ………………………………………… 103
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 103

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE …………………………………………………….. 104
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 104

OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE …………………………………………………….. 105
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 105

P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE …………………………………………………………. 106
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 106

Revision: April 2013

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 122
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER ………………. 122
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal
and Installation ……………………………………………… 122

M

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER ……………… 123
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER : Removal
and Installation ……………………………………………… 123

N

FRONT FENDER ……………………………………… 125

O

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 125
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 125

FRONT DOOR …………………………………………. 127
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 127
DOOR ASSEMBLY ………………………………………….. 127
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ….. 127
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment …………………….. 128
DOOR STRIKER ……………………………………………… 129

DLK-3

2014 Note

P

DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ………129
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment …………………………129

FRONT DOOR LOCK ………………………………… 145

DOOR HINGE …………………………………………………..130
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ………….130

DOOR LOCK ………………………………………………….. 145
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ………….. 145

DOOR CHECK LINK …………………………………………130
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..130

INSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………….. 146
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …….. 146

REAR DOOR …………………………………………… 131

OUTSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………. 147
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …. 147

Exploded View ……………………………………………….131
DOOR ASSEMBLY …………………………………………..131
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation …..131
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ……………………..133
DOOR STRIKER ………………………………………………134
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ………134
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment …………………………134
DOOR HINGE …………………………………………………..134
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ………….134
DOOR CHECK LINK …………………………………………135
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..135

BACK DOOR …………………………………………… 136
Exploded View ……………………………………………….136
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY …………………………………136
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………….136
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment …………….138
BACK DOOR STRIKER …………………………………….139
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………….139
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment ……………….139
BACK DOOR HINGE ………………………………………..140
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ..140
BACK DOOR STAY ………………………………………….140
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation ….140
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal …………………………140
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ………………………..141
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
Installation …………………………………………………….141

HOOD LOCK …………………………………………… 142
Exploded View ……………………………………………….142
HOOD LOCK ……………………………………………………142
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ……………142
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ………………………………..143
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE ……………………….143
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE : Removal and
Installation …………………………………………………….143
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE ……………………..144
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE : Removal and
Installation …………………………………………………….144

Revision: April 2013

Exploded View ……………………………………………… 145

REAR DOOR LOCK ………………………………….. 149
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 149
DOOR LOCK ………………………………………………….. 149
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ………….. 149
INSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………….. 150
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …….. 150
OUTSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………. 151
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …. 151

BACK DOOR LOCK ………………………………….. 153
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 153
BACK DOOR LOCK ………………………………………… 153
BACK DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation … 153
OUTSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………. 153
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …. 153
EMERGENCY LEVER ……………………………………… 154
EMERGENCY LEVER : Removal and Installation. 154

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ………………………. 155
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 155
FUEL FILLER LID …………………………………………… 155
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ……. 155
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ………………………. 156
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
Installation ……………………………………………………. 156
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK …………………………………. 156
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………… 157

DOOR SWITCH ………………………………………… 158
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 158

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA …………………………….. 159
INSTRUMENT CENTER …………………………………… 159
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………… 159
CONSOLE ……………………………………………………… 159
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation ……………… 159
LUGGAGE ROOM …………………………………………… 159
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation …… 159

DLK-4

2014 Note

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA …………………………. 161

PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation …. 162

OUTSIDE HANDLE …………………………………………. 161
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation …. 161

BACK DOOR ………………………………………………….. 162
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation …………… 162

REAR BUMPER ……………………………………………… 161
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ……… 161

INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ……. 163

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ………………………… 162

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ……. 164

DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………. 162
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation …………. 162
PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………. 162

A

B

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 163
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 164

C

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ………………….. 165
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 165

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-5

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009499759

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009486703

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. to prevent damage to
the windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precaution for Servicing Doors and Locks

INFOID:0000000009486704

WARNING:
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should
contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use,
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operation.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-6

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-7

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009486705

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairing the cause of noise

ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-43241)
Remote Keyless Entry
Tester

Used to test keyfobs

LEL946A

—
(J-50190)
Signal Tech II

• Check Intelligent Key relative signal
strength
• Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna
signal strength

ALEIA0131ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

Revision: April 2013

INFOID:0000000009486706

DLK-8

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

A

B

C
SIIA0995E

( — )
Power Tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

D

E

PIIB1407E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-9

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009015758

ALKIA3191ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-10

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A.

View with instrument panel assembly B.
removed

View with glove box door removed

C.

View with front grill removed

D.

View of LH door. (RH similar)

E.

View of LH door switch (RH similar)

F.

View with rear bumper cover removed

G.

View from rear of vehicle

H.

View with rear seat cushion removed I.

No.

1.

2.

3.

Component

View with center console removed
Function

Push-button ignition switch

Push-button ignition switch has push switch inside
which detects that push-button ignition switch is
pressed, and then transmits ON/OFF signal to
BCM. BCM changes the ignition switch position with
the operation of push-button ignition switch. BCM
maintains the ignition switch position status while
push-button ignition switch is not operated.

BCM

BCM controls INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (ENGINE START FUNCTION), NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS [NVIS (NATS)] and
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.
BCM performs the ID verification between BCM and
Intelligent Key when the Intelligent Key is carried
into the detection area of inside key antenna, and
push-button ignition switch is pressed. If the ID verification result is OK, ignition switch operation is
available.
Then, when the ignition switch is turned ON, BCM
performs ID verification between BCM and ECM. If
the ID verification result is OK, ECM can start engine.
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location» for detailed installation
location.

Main power window and door lock/unlock switch

Door lock and unlock switch is integrated into the
power window main switch.
Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock operation signal to BCM.
Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Main Switch».

5.

Front door lock assembly LH

Door key cylinder switch is integrated into front door
lock assembly (driver side).
Door key cylinder switch detects door LOCK/UNLOCK operation using mechanical key, and then
transmits the operation signal to BCM.
Refer to DLK-14, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front
Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)».

6.

Rear door lock actuator LH

Rear door lock actuator locks/unlocks the rear door
latch assembly.

7.

Back door lock actuator

Back door lock actuator locks/unlocks the back door
latch assembly.

4.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-11

B

C

Combination meter transmits the vehicle speed signal to BCM via CAN communication.
BCM also receives the vehicle speed signal from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication. BCM compares both signals to detect the vehicle speed.
Security indicator lamp is located on combination
meter.
Security indicator lamp blinks when ignition switch
is in any position other than ON to warn that NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS
[NVIS (NATS)] is on board.
Refer to MWI-6, «METER SYSTEM : Combination
Meter».

Combination meter

A

2014 Note

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

Inside key antenna (instrument center)

Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects
whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not,
and then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-12, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside
Key Antenna (Instrument Center)».

Remote keyless entry receiver

Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signal and key ID signal of Intelligent Key,
and them transmits them to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-14, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote
Keyless Entry Receiver».

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who
is outside the vehicle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate
operation.
Refer to DLK-14, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer».

11.

Outside key antenna LH

Outside key antenna (LH) detects whether Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle or not, and then
transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside
Key Antenna (Driver Side)».

12.

Door request switch

Door request switch transmits door lock/unlock request signal to the BCM.

13.

Door switch

Door switch detects door open/close condition and
then transmits ON/OFF signal to BCM.

14.

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Outside key antenna (Rear bumper) detects whether Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle or not, and
then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside
Key Antenna (Rear Bumper)».

15.

Back door request switch

Back door request switch transmits door lock/unlock
request signal to the BCM.

Inside key antenna (trunk room)

Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and then
transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside
Key Antenna (Trunk Room)».

Inside key antenna (console)

Inside key antenna (console) detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and then
transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside
Key Antenna (Console)».

8.

9.

10.

16.

17.

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center)

INFOID:0000000009516557

• Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects that Intelligent Key
is within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed in the rear of
cluster lid C of instrument center.

JMKIA8646ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-12

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Console)

INFOID:0000000009516558

A

• Inside key antenna (console) detects that Intelligent Key is within
the inside detection area, and then transmits detection status to
BCM.
• Inside key antenna (console) is installed underneath the center
console.

B

C

D
JMKIA8646ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room)

INFOID:0000000009516559

• Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (trunk room) is installed under the rear seat
cushion.

E

F

G

H
JMKIA8646ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Rear Bumper)

INFOID:0000000009516560

• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of rear
bumper.

I

J

DLK

L
JMKIA8646ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Driver Side)

INFOID:0000000009516561

• Outside key antenna (driver side) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) is installed in driver side outside
handle.

M

N

O

P
JMKIA8648ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-13

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Passenger Side)

INFOID:0000000009516562

• Outside key antenna (passenger side) detects that Intelligent Key
is within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to
Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (passenger side) is installed in driver side
outside handle.

JMKIA8648ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)

INFOID:0000000009516563

• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are Integrated in driver door
lock assembly.
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks driver door.
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sensor. Unlock sensor transmits lock/unlock status of driver seat to
BCM.

JMKIA8649ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote Keyless Entry Receiver

INFOID:0000000009516564

• Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signal
and key ID signal of Intelligent Key, and then transmits them to
BCM.
• Remote keyless entry receiver is installed in the rear of glove box
lid.

JMKIA8647ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer

INFOID:0000000009516565

• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehicle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate operation.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
bumper and underneath headlight RH.

JMKIA8650ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-14

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly

INFOID:0000000009516566

A

• Back door lock assembly lock assembly integrates door lock actuator and back door latch.
• Door lock actuator locks/unlocks the back door according to the
door lock/unlock signal from BCM.

B

C

D
JMKIA8651ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch

INFOID:0000000009516567

• Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock signal
operation to BCM.
• Door lock and unlock switch (1) is integrated in the power window
main switch and front power window switch (passenger side).

E

F

G

H
JMKIA9352ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request Switch (Driver Side)

INFOID:0000000009516568

• Front door request switch (driver side) transmits door request
switch signal to BCM.
• Front door request switch (driver side) (1) is integrated in driver
side outside handle.

I

J

DLK

L
JMKIA9353ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request Switch (Passenger Side)

INFOID:0000000009516569

• Front door request switch (passenger side) transmits door request
switch signal to BCM.
• Front door request switch (passenger side) (1) is integrated in passenger side outside handle.

M

N

O

P
JMKIA9353ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-15

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch

INFOID:0000000009516570

Door switch detects open/close status of door and transmits door
switch signal to BCM.

JMKIA6526ZZ

DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Request Switch

INFOID:0000000009516571

• Back door request switch transmits back door request switch signal to BCM.
• Back door request switch (1) is integrated in outside handle (back
door).

ALKIA3192ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-16

2014 Note

SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)

A

System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009516451

B

C

D

E

ALKIA3193GB

System Description
Input
Door lock/unlock switch
Door key cylinder switch
Each door switch

INFOID:0000000009516452

G
Single

Function

Door lock/unlock signal

Actuator

H

Door lock function

Door open/close signal

Key reminder function

Warning buzzer signal
Combination meter.

F

• Each door lock actuator

Automatic door lock/unlock
function

Vehicle speed signal

I

J

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
• The door lock and unlock switch (driver side) is built into power window main switch.
• The door lock and unlock switch (passenger side) is on door trim.
DLK
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
L
unlocked.
Door Key Cylinder
• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock door lock
actuator of all doors.
• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the
driver side door lock actuator; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within 60 seconds after the first unlock operation
unlocks all of the other doors. — (SELECTIVE UNLOCK OPERATION)
Selective unlock operation mode can be changed using “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to BCS-17, «DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)».

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (LOCK OPERATION)

M

N

O

The automatic door locks function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift position.
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock*1
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
If a door is opened and closed at any time during one ignition cycle (OFF → ON), even after initial auto door
lock operation has taken place, the BCM will re-lock all doors when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15
MPH) or more again.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-17

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Setting change of Automatic Door Locks (LOCK) Function
The LOCK operation setting of the automatic door locks function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door locks (LOCK) function and the type selection of the automatic
door locks (LOCK) function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. Refer to BCS-17,
«DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)».
Without CONSULT
The automatic door locks (LOCK) function can be switched ON/OFF by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON.
4. The switching is completed when the hazard lamp blinks.

5.

OFF → ON

: 2 blinks

ON → OFF

: 1 blink

The ignition switch must be turned OFF and ON again between each setting change.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (UNLOCK OPERATION)
The automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position
or shift position.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock*1
All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the power supply position is
changed from ignition switch ON to OFF.
Setting change of Automatic Door Locks (UNLOCK) Function
The UNLOCK operation setting of the automatic door locks function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function and the type selection of the automatic
door locks (UNLOCK) function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. Refer to BCS17, «DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)».
Without CONSULT
The automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function can be switched ON/OFF by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is completed when the hazard lamp blinks.

5.
*1

OFF → ON

: 2 blinks

ON → OFF

: 1 blink

The ignition switch must be turned OFF and ON again between each setting change.

: This function is set to ON before delivery.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-18

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)

A

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009516518

B

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

ALKIA3194GB

M

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verification using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT.
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.
Function

Description

Refer

Door lock

Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the request switch

DLK-20

Remote keyless entry

Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Intelligent Key

DLK-22

Revision: April 2013

DLK-19

2014 Note

N

O

P

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Function

Description

Refer

Key reminder

The key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with the key left
inside the vehicle

DLK-24

Warning

If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key system is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver

DLK-24

Engine start

The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key

DLK-19

Interior room lamp control

Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state

INL-7

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description

INFOID:0000000009516519

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMKIA6137GB

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION
When pressing the request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent Key.

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal and operates each door lock actuator. At the same time, BCM blinks
hazard warning lamp (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock:
2 times) as a reminder.

OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the door request switch is
operated.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-20

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Each request switch operation

Operation condition

Lock

•
•
•
•
•

All doors are closed
Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
P position warning is not activated

Unlock

•
•
•
•

All doors are closed
Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *

A

B

C

*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.

Door lock function can be changed using “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to
BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

D

E

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver, passenger door handles (1). However, this operating range
depends on the ambient conditions.

F

G

H
JMKIA4881ZZ

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION

I

For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelligent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by operation of
each door request switch.

J

How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

DLK

AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.
Operating condition

• Door switch is ON (door is open)
• BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed

L

M

Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to BCS21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

N

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-21

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)

×

×

Auto door lock function

×
×

Hazard and buzzer reminder function
×

×

×

×

×

×

Combination meter

×

Push-button ignition switch

Outside key antenna

×

Hazard warning lamp

Inside key antenna

×

BCM

Door lock actuator

×

CAN communication system

Door request switch

×

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Door switch

Door lock/unlock function

Remote keyless entry receiver

Door lock function

Intelligent Key

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

×

×

×

×

×

×

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description

INFOID:0000000009516520

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ALKIA3195GB

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY OPERATION
The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry system controls operation of the following items.
• Auto door lock
• Door lock/unlock
• Hazard and buzzer reminder

OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable range may differ according to surroundings.

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator and operates each door lock actuator,
when key ID matches. At the same time, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times)
and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) as a reminder.

OPERATION CONDITION

Revision: April 2013

DLK-22

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Remote controller operation

Operation condition

Lock

• All door are closed
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
• P position warning is not activated

Unlock

• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• P position warning is not activated

A

B

C

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelligent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by each remote
controller button operation of Intelligent Key.
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

D

E

AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate.
Operating condition

• Door switch is ON (door is open)
• BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed

F

G

Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to BCS21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

H

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Hazard and buzzer reminder function

×

×

Auto door lock function

×

×

×

×

×

L

×
×

×

×

Horn

×

DLK
IPDM E/R

×

Hazard warning lamp

Push-button ignition switch

×

Combination meter

Door lock actuator

×

J

BCM

Door switch

×

CAN communication system

Remote keyless entry receiver

Door lock/unlock function by remote control button

Remote keyless entry functions

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Intelligent Key

I

×

×

M

×

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-23

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description

INFOID:0000000009516521

System Diagram

ALKIA3196GB

BASIC OPERATION
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
Key reminder function

Operation condition

Operation

Driver side door closed*

Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
• Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state

All doors unlock

Door is open or closed

Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
• Door lock/unlock switch or driver side door lock knob are operated
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
• Any door is opened
• All doors are locked.

• All doors unlock
• Honk Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Back door is closed

Right after Back door is closed under the following conditions
• Intelligent Key is inside luggage room
• All doors are closed
• All doors are locked

• Back door open
• Honk Intelligent Key warning buzzer

*:When closing the door if something comes into contact with the door lock switch it might activate the door locks accidentally, but the
unlock operation will override this.

NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.

WARNING FUNCTION

WARNING FUNCTION : System Description

INFOID:0000000009516522

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
warnings using combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, combination meter buzzer, KEY warning lamp,
shift P warning lamp and engine start operation indicator lamp.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• OFF position warning
• P position warning
• ACC warning
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning
• Engine start information
Revision: April 2013

DLK-24

2014 Note

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID warning

A

OPERATION CONDITION
Operation condition of warning and information is as per the following table.
Warning/Information functions

B

Operation procedure

Intelligent Key system malfunction

A malfunction is detected on BCM and key warning lamp turns ON

OFF position warning

When condition A, B or condition C is satisfied
• Condition A
— Ignition switch: ACC position
— Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
• Condition B
— Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF while door is open
• Condition C
— Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the
Intelligent Key battery is discharged)
— Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)

E

F

• Shift position: Other than P
• Engine is stopped (Ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF)

For external

• P position warning (For internal) operates
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close)
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected inside the vehicle

G

• After P position warning operates, or when ignition switch is turned ON
immediately after P position warning operates
• Ignition switch: ACC

H

Door status changes
from open to close

• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door status changes from open to close)
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle

I

Door status is open

• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
• Door switch: ON (Door is open)
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key
ID verification for 5 seconds

J

Push button-ignition
switch operation

• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK position
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle

ACC warning

Door lock operation warning

DLK

Door lock operation is requested while door lock operation condition of
door request switch is not satisfied

Ignition switch is ON position

• Ignition switch: ON position
• Shift position: P
• Engine is stopped

Ignition switch is other
than ON position

• Ignition switch: Other than ON
• Shift position: P
• Intelligent Key is in the passenger room after driver door is opened and
closed

Ignition switch is ON position to OFF position

• Ignition switch: ON position to OFF position
• Shift position: P position
NOTE:
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF,
when ignition switch is turned to the ON position from the OFF position. Engine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of driver
door is detected again.

Engine start information

Intelligent Key low battery warning
Key ID warning

• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle

WARNING METHOD
The following table shows the alarm or warning methods with chime.

DLK-25

L

M

BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned
ON

Revision: April 2013

D

For internal
P position warning

Take away warning

C

2014 Note

N

O

P

SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Shift P
warning
lamp

Combination
meter buzzer

Intelligent
Key warning buzzer

Indicate

—

—

—

—

For internal

—

—

Activate

—

—

For external

—

—

—

Activate

—

Indicate

Activate

—

—

—

—

Active

—

—

Activate

—

—

—

Activate

Activate

—

—

—

—

—

—

Activate

—

—

Warning/Information functions

Intelligent Key system malfunction
OFF position warning

P position warning

For internal
For external

ACC warning

Blink (yellow)
—

Door is open to close
Take away warning

Warning chime

“KEY” warning
lamp

Door is open

Blink (yellow)

Push-ignition switch operation

Engine start
operation indicator lamp

Door lock operation warning

—

—

—

Activate

—

Engine start information

—

—

—

—

Indicate

Intelligent Key low battery warning

Blink (green)

—

—

—

—

Key ID warning

Blink (yellow)

—

—

—

—

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS

OFF position warning

For internal

×

For external

×

×

×

×

×

“KEY” warning lamp

×

Engine start operation indicator lamp

×

Shift P warning lamp

BCM

Intelligent Key system malfunction

CAN communication system

Combination meter buzzer

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

Outside key antenna

Inside key antenna

Door request switch

Door switch

Intelligent Key

Function

Push-button ignition switch

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

×

×

P position warning

×

×

×

×

ACC warning

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Take away warning

Door is open or close

×

×

×

Door is open

×

×

×

Push-button ignition
switch operation

×

Door lock operation warning

×

Key ID warning
Engine start information

×

Intelligent Key low battery warning

×

Revision: April 2013

×

×

×
×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DLK-26

×

×
×
×

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009015761

ECU

Reference

C

BCS-28, «Reference Value»
BCM

B

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»

D

BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-27

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567506

AAKWA0643GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-28

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKWA0644GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-29

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1294GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-30

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1295GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-31

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1296GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-32

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1297GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-33

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1298GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-34

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1299GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-35

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1300GB

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

DLK-36

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567505

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

AAKWA0636GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-37

2014 Note

P

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKWA0637GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-38

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKWA0638GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-39

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKWA0639GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-40

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1277GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-41

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1278GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-42

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1279GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-43

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1280GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-44

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1281GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-45

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1282GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-46

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1283GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-47

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1284GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-48

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1285GB

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-49

2014 Note

DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABKIA4627GB

Revision: April 2013

DLK-50

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009015763

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

DLK-51

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.

Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart» and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident.

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: April 2013

DLK-52

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident.

A

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

B

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.

C

D

>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-53

2014 Note

B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515834

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B2621

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

INSIDE ANTENNA 1

An excessive high or low voltage from inside antenna (instrument center) is sent to BCM

• Inside key antenna (instrument
center)
• Between BCM Inside key antenna
(instrument center)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS) on WORK SUPPORT of INTELLIGENT KEY.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-54, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515835

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

84
85

JMKIA3839GB

Ground

When Intelligent Key is not in the
antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-54

2014 Note

B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
connector.
BCM
Connector

Inside key antenna (instrument center)
Terminal
84

M98

4.

Connector

1

M95

85

Continuity

Terminal

B

C

Yes

2

D

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

No

85

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

G

3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2

H

Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

I

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

E

Ground

84

M98

1.
2.
3.
4.

A

Condition

J

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

DLK

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

84
85

L

JMKIA3839GB

Ground

M

N
When Intelligent Key is not in the
antenna detection area

O
JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). Refer to DLK-159, «INSTRUMENT CENTER :
Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-55

2014 Note

P

B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515836

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

B2622

INSIDE ANTENNA 2

An excessive high or low voltage from inside antenna (console) is sent to BCM

• Inside key antenna (console)
• Between BCM Inside key antenna
(console)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS) on WORK SUPPORT of INTELLIGENT KEY.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-56, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515837

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

86
87

JMKIA3839GB

Ground

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-56

2014 Note

B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (console) harness connector.
A
BCM
Connector

Inside key antenna (console)
Terminal
86

M98

4.

Connector

B

1

M89

87

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

2

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

C

BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

M98

D

Ground

86

No

87

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

Replace inside key antenna (console). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

G

H

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

I

Terminal

J
When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

86
87

DLK
JMKIA3839GB

Ground

L

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area

M

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console). Refer to DLK-159, «CONSOLE : Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-57

2014 Note

B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515838

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

B2623

INSIDE ANTENNA 3

An excessive high or low voltage from inside antenna (trunk room) is sent to BCM

• Inside key antenna (trunk room)
• Between BCM Inside key antenna
(trunk room)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS) on WORK SUPPORT of INTELLIGENT KEY.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inside key antenna (trunk room) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515839

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

88
89

JMKIA3839GB

Ground

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-58

2014 Note

B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) harness connector.
BCM
Connector

Inside key antenna (trunk room)
Terminal
88

M98

4.

Connector

1

B48

89

Continuity

Terminal

C

BCM

Continuity

Terminal

No

89

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

G

Replace inside key antenna (trunk room). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

H

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

D

Ground

88

M98

B

Yes

2

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Connector

A

Condition

I

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

J
When Intelligent Key is in the antenna detection area

M98

88
89

DLK

JMKIA3839GB

Ground

L

M

When Intelligent Key is not in the antenna detection area

N
JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (trunk room). Refer to DLK-159, «LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and
Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-59

2014 Note

B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515840

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

B2626

OUTSIDE ANTENNA
1

An excessive high or low voltage from outside key
antenna (LH) is sent to BCM

• Outside key antenna (LH)
• Between BCM Outside key antenna (LH)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Outside key antenna (LH) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515841

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

78
79

Ground

When the driver door
request switch is operated with ignition
switch OFF

When Intelligent
Key is in the antenna detection
area (The distance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
cm or less)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection area (The
distance between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

JMKIA5955GB

JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (LH) connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (LH) harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-60

2014 Note

B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM

Outside key antenna (LH)

Connector

Terminal
78

M98

4.

Connector

1

D6

79

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

2

B

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
C

BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

78

M98

D

No

79

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

E

3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

A

F

Replace outside key antenna (LH). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (LH) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

G

(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

H

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

78
79

Ground

When the driver
door request switch
is operated with ignition switch OFF

When Intelligent
Key is in the antenna detection
area (The distance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
cm or less)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection area (The
distance between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

I

J

JMKIA5955GB

DLK

L

M
JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (LH). Refer to DLK-161, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-61

2014 Note

B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515842

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

B2627

OUTSIDE ANTENNA
2

An excessive high or low voltage from outside key
antenna (RH) is sent to BCM

• Outside key antenna (RH)
• Between BCM Outside key antenna (RH)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-62, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Outside key antenna (RH) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515843

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

80
81

Ground

When the passenger
side door request
switch is operated
with ignition switch
OFF

When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection area
(The distance
between Intelligent Key and
antenna: 80 cm
or less)
When Intelligent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

JMKIA5955GB

JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (RH) connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (RH) harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-62

2014 Note

B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM

Outside key antenna (RH)

Connector

Terminal
80

M98

4.

Connector

1

D106

81

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

2

B

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
C

BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

80

M98

D

No

81

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

E

3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

A

F

Replace outside key antenna (RH). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (RH) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

G

(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

H

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

80
81

Ground

When the passenger
side door request
switch is operated with
ignition switch OFF

When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection area
(The distance
between Intelligent Key and
antenna: 80 cm
or less)
When Intelligent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

I

J

JMKIA5955GB

DLK

L

M
JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (RH). Refer to DLK-161, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-63

2014 Note

B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009515844

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

CONSULT display
description

DTC detecting condition

B2628

OUTSIDE ANTENNA
3

An excessive high or low voltage from outside key
antenna (rear bumper) is sent to BCM

Possible cause
• Outside key antenna (rear
bumper)
• Between BCM – Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-64, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is OK.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515845

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

82,83

Ground

When the back
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch OFF

When Intelligent
Key is in the antenna detection
area (The distance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
cm or less)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection area (The
distance between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

JMKIA5955GB

JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-64

2014 Note

B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness connector.
BCM
Connector

Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
Terminal
82

M98

4.

Connector

1

B49

83

Continuity

Terminal

C

BCM
Continuity

Terminal

No

83

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

D

Ground

82

M98

B

Yes

2

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Connector

A

Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

G

H

(+)
BCM
Connector

M98

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

I

Terminal

82,83

Ground

When the back
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch OFF

When Intelligent
Key is in the antenna detection
area (The distance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
cm or less)
When Intelligent
Key is not in the
antenna detection area (The
distance between Intelligent Key and
antenna: Approx. 2 m)

J

DLK
JMKIA5955GB

L

M

JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). Refer to DLK-161, «REAR BUMPER : Removal and
Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-65

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567651

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.
12 (10A)

Battery power supply

70

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal
57

M99

70

Ground

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-66

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

COMBINATION METER BUZZER

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515847

1.CHECK FUNCTION

B

1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select INSIDE BUZZER in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch Key, Knob or Take Out to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
Yes
>> Combination meter buzzer is OK.
No
>> Refer to DLK-67, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

C

D
INFOID:0000000009515848

1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT

E

Refer to WCS-28, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

G

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
H

>> Inspection End.

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-67

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515849

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select DOOR LOCK in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch ALL LOCK or ALL UNLK to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-68, «DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure».

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515850

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door lock actuator LH connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door lock actuator
LH
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
1

D14

Ground

2

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock

12 V

Unlock

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock actuator LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator LH harness connector.
BCM
Connector

Front door lock actuator LH
Terminal
66

M99

3.

Connector

Terminal
1

D14

65

2

Continuity

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

M99

Ground

65

No

66

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-68

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
65

M99

Ground

66

Door lock and unlock switch

A

B

Lock

12 V

Unlock

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

C

PASSENGER SIDE

D

PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515851

1.CHECK FUNCTION

E

1. Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select DOOR LOCK in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch ALL LOCK or ALL UNLK to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-69, «PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure».

F

G

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515852

H

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL

I

1.
2.
3.

J

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door lock actuator RH connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door lock actuator
RH
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
2

D114

Ground

1

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock
Unlock

L
12 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock actuator (RH).
NO
>> GO TO 2.

M

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Connector
M99

3.

N

Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuators.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator RH harness connector.
BCM

Front door lock actuator RH
Terminal
65
59

Connector
D114

Terminal
2
1

DLK-69

O

Continuity

P
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DLK

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

65

M99

No

59

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
65

M99

59

Ground

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock
Unlock

12 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

REAR LH

REAR LH : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515853

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select DOOR LOCK in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch ALL LOCK or ALL UNLK to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-71, «REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure».

REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515854

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH connector.
Check voltage between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear door lock actuator LH
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

D205

1
2

Ground

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock
Unlock

12 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock actuator LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1.

Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connectors.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-70

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
A
BCM
Connector

Rear door lock actuator LH
Terminal
65

M99

3.

Connector

Terminal
1

D205

55

2

Continuity

B
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

C

BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

M99

D

Ground

65

No

55

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

F

Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.

G

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

H

Terminal

M99

65
55

Ground

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock
Unlock

12 V

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

J

REAR RH

REAR RH : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515855

1.CHECK FUNCTION

L

1. Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select DOOR LOCK in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch ALL LOCK or ALL UNLK to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-71, «REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure».

REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure

DLK

M

N
INFOID:0000000009515856

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

O

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH connector.
Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-71

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
Rear door lock actuator RH
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
2

D305

Ground

1

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock

12 V

Unlock

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock actuator RH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
BCM
Connector

Rear door lock actuator RH
Terminal
65

M99

3.

Connector

Terminal
2

D305

55

1

Continuity

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

65

M99

No

55

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

M99

65
55

Ground

Door lock and unlock switch

Lock
Unlock

12 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

BACK DOOR

BACK DOOR : Description

INFOID:0000000009519658

Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM.

BACK DOOR : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009519659

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Use CONSULT to perform Active Test (“DOOR LOCK”).
2. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

DLK-72

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Back door lock actuator is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-73, «BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure».

A

BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009519660

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL

C

1.
2.
3.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door lock actuator connector.
Check voltage between back door lock actuator harness connector and ground.
(+)
Back door lock actuator
Connector

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

1

D505

Ground

2

Door lock and unlock switch

Unlock

0 → Battery voltage → 0

Lock

0 → Battery voltage → 0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock actuator. Refer to DLK-153, «Exploded View».
NO-1 >> GO TO 2 (lock signal).
NO-2 >> GO TO 3 (unlock signal).

H

Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock actuator harness connector.
BCM

3.

I

Back door lock actuator

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M99

65

D505

2

Continuity
Yes

Connector

Terminal

M99

65

Continuity

Ground

No

M

3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR UNLOCK CIRCUIT

Disconnect back door lock actuator relay connector.
Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and back door lock actuator
harness connector.
Back door lock actuator relay

Back door lock actuator

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M41

3

D505

1

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

M41

3

Ground

Continuity
No

DLK-73

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

N

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Back door lock actuator relay

DLK

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.

J

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM

1.
2.

F

G

2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Terminal

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident»
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-74

2014 Note

BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009519998

Controls back door lock actuator lock/unlock operation.

B

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009519999

1.CHECK FUNCTION

C

1. Use CONSULT to perform Active Test (“DOOR LOCK”).
2. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Back door lock actuator relay is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-75, «Diagnosis Procedure».

D

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009520000

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

F

1.CHECK FUSE

G

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10 A fuse, [No. 8, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.

H

2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.

I

Remove back door lock actuator relay.
Check voltage between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and ground.

J

(+)
Back door lock actuator relay
Connector

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

(–)

DLK

Terminal
1

M41

Ground

5

Battery voltage

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

M

3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.

Install the back door lock actuator relay.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

N

(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M100

50

Ground

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Door lock and unlock switch

LOCK

Battery voltage

UNLOCK

0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 (when voltage is fixed at 12V)>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO-2 (when voltage is fixed at 0V)>>GO TO 4.

4.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY CIRCUIT 1
Revision: April 2013

DLK-75

2014 Note

O

P

BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

50

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY CIRCUIT 2
1.
2.

Remove back door lock actuator relay.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock actuator relay harness connector.
Back door lock actuator relay

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M41

2

M100

50

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Back door lock actuator relay
Connector

Terminal

M41

2

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock actuator relay.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and ground.
Back door lock actuator relay
Connector

Terminal

M41

4

Ground

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY

Check back door lock actuator relay.Refer to DLK-76, «Component Inspection»
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace back door lock actuator relay.

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident»
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009520001

1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove back door lock actuator relay.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-76

2014 Note

BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay terminals.
A
Back door lock actuator relay

Condition

Continuity

B

Terminal
4
3
5

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

No

No current supply

Yes

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

C

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace back door lock actuator relay.

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-77

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515857

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
Select CDL LOCK SW, CDL UNLOCK SW in DATA MONITOR mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item

Condition

CDL LOCK SW
Main power window and door
lock/unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW

Status

LOCK

ON

UNLOCK

OFF

LOCK

OFF

UNLOCK

ON

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Main power window and door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-78, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515858

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, «POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Check signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch harness connector and ground
using oscilloscope.
(+)
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Connector

Terminal

D7

6

D8

18

Signal
(Reference value)

(–)

Ground

JPMIA0012GB

1.0 — 1.5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch
harness connector.
BCM
Connector
M18

3.

Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

12

D8

18

13

D7

6

Continuity

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-78

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

12

M18

A

No

13

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

C

3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND

Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch harness connector and ground.
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch
Connector

Terminal

D8

17

Ground

Continuity

D

E

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH

G

Refer to DLK-79, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

H

I

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
J

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515859

1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminals.
Condition

Terminal

17
18

L

M

Main power window and door lock/unlock switch

6

Main power window
and door lock/ unlock
switch

Continuity

LOCK

No

UNLOCK

Yes

LOCK

Yes

UNLOCK

No

DLK-79

N

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK

2014 Note

P

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515860

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of CM using CONSULT.
Select REQ SW-DR, REQ SW-AS in DATA MONITOR mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item

Condition

REQ SW -DR

Door request switch LH

REQ SW -AS

Door request switch RH

Status
Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front door request switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-80, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515861

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
Check voltage between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door request switch
Connector

(–)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

12 V

Terminal

Left side

D17

Right side

D113

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
Front door request switch
Connector

3.

Left side

D17

Right side

D113

BCM
Terminal

Connector

1

M98

Terminal

Continuity

75

Yes

100

Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
Front door request switch
Connector

Terminal

Left side

D17

Right side

D113

1

Continuity
Ground
No

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

DLK-80

2014 Note

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

A

3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
Front door request switch
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Left side

D17

Right side

D113

B

C

Ground

2

Yes

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

E

Refer to DLK-81, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.

F

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

G

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
H

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515862

I

1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals.
Front door request switch

Condition

Terminal
1

2

Door request switch

J

Continuity

Pressed

Yes

Released

No

DLK

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch. Refer to DLK-147, «OUTSIDE HANDLE :
Removal and Installation».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-81

2014 Note

BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Description

INFOID:0000000009519952

Transmits lock/unlock operation to BCM.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009519953

1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check (“REQSW-BD/TR”) in “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT.
Monitor item

Condition

REQSW-BD/TR

Back door request switch

Status

Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-82, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009519954

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door request switch connector.
Check voltage between back door request switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Back door request switch
Connector

Terminal

D506

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door request switch harness connector.
BCM

3.

Back door request switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M100

51

D506

1

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

51

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between back door request switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-82

2014 Note

BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Back door request switch
Connector

Terminal

D506

2

Continuity

Ground

Yes

A

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

C

4.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-83, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace back door request switch. Refer to DLK-153, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

D

E

F

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009519955

1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

G

H

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect back door request switch connector.
Check continuity between back door request switch terminals.

I
Back door request switch

Condition

Terminal
1

2

Back door request switch

Continuity
Pressed

Yes

Released

No

J

Is the inspection result normal?
DLK
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace back door request switch. Refer to DLK-153, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-83

2014 Note

DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515863

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
Select DOOR SW-DR, DOOR SW-AS, DOOR SW-RL and DOOR SW-RR in DATA MONITOR mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item

Condition

DOOR SW-DR

Front door LH

DOOR SW-AS

Front door RH

DOOR SW-RL

Rear door LH

DOOR SW-RR

Rear door RH

Status

Open

ON

Closed

OFF

Open

ON

Closed

OFF

Open

ON

Closed

OFF

Open

ON

Closed

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door switch is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-84, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515864

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
Door switch
Connector

(–)

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

Front door switch
LH

B8

3

Front door switch
RH

B16

3

Rear door switch
LH

B6

3

Rear door switch
RH

B17

3

Ground

PKIB4960J

7.0 — 8.0 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-84

2014 Note

DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Door switch

BCM

Connector

3.

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

Front door switch
LH

B8

Front door switch
RH

B16

Rear door switch
LH

B6

48

Rear door switch
RH

B17

46

Continuity

47

A

B

45
3

M100

Yes

C

D

Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.
Door switch
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Front door switch LH

B8

Front door switch RH

B16

Rear door switch LH

B6

Rear door switch RH

B17

Ground

E

F

3

No

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

H

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Refer to DLK-85, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning door switch. Refer to DLK-158, «Removal and Installation».

I

J

4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

DLK

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515865

L

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
Check continuity between door switch terminals.

N
Door switch

Condition

Terminal

Continuity

Front door switch
LH

Pressed

No

Released

Yes

Front door switch
RH

Pressed

No

Released

Yes

Pressed

No

Released

Yes

Pressed

No

Released

Yes

3
Rear door switch
LH

Ground part of door
switch

Door switch

Rear door switch
RH

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

DLK-85

2014 Note

O

P

DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace malfunction door switch. Refer to DLK-158, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-86

2014 Note

HAZARD FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

HAZARD FUNCTION

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515866

1.CHECK FUNCTION

B

1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select FLASHER in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch LH or RH to check that it works normally.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-87, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

C

D
INFOID:0000000009515867

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT

E

Refer to DLK-87, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

G

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
H

>> Inspection End.

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-87

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

INTELLIGENT KEY
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515868

NOTE:
The Signal Tech II Tool (J-50190) can be used to perform the following functions. Refer to the Signal Tech II
User Guide for additional information.
• Check Intelligent Key relative signal strength.
• Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna signal strength.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item
RKE OPE COUN1

Condition
Check that the numerical value is changing while operating on the Intelligent Key.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-88, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515869

NOTE:
The Signal Tech II Tool (J-50190) can be used to perform the following functions. Refer to the Signal Tech II
User Guide for additional information.
• Check Intelligent Key relative signal strength.
• Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna signal strength.

1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-165, «Removal
and Installation».
Standard

: Approx. 2.5 — 3.0V

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key.
NO
>> Replace Intelligent Key battery.
OCC0607D

Revision: April 2013

DLK-88

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009515872

1.CHECK FUNCTION

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item

Condition

RKE OPE COUN1

D

Checks whether value changes when operating Intelligent Key

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-89, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009515874

F

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram».

G

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER OUTPUT SIGNAL

H

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground with oscilloscope.
I
Terminals
(+)
Remote keyless entry
receiver connector

Terminal

(–)

Condition

J

Signal
(Reference value)

DLK

L

Waiting
(All doors closed)

M90

2

M

JMKIA0064GB

Ground

N
When signal is received
(All doors closed)

O
JMKIA0065GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7
NO
>> GO TO 2

P

2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.

Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground with oscilloscope.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-89

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Terminals
(+)
Remote keyless
entry receiver
connector

Terminal

M90

4

Signal
(Reference value)

(–)

Ground

JMKIA0064GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> GO TO 3

3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.

BCM connector

Terminal

Remote keyless entry
receiver
connector

Terminal

Continuity

M18

19

M90

4

Yes

3.

Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM connector

Terminal

M18

19

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Reconnect BCM, GO TO 4
NO
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver.

4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground.
Remote keyless entry
receiver
connector

Terminal

M90

1

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6
NO
>> GO TO 5

5.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 2

Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
BCM
connector

Terminal

Remote keyless entry
receiver
connector

Terminal

Continuity

M18

18

M90

1

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6
Revision: April 2013

DLK-90

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver.

6.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 3
1.

A

Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
B

2.

BCM
connector

Terminal

Remote keyless entry
receiver
connector

M18

20

M90

Terminal

Continuity

2

Yes

C

Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
D
BCM connector

Terminal

M18

20

Ground

Continuity
No

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7
NO
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry.

7.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
BCM

3.

F

Remote keyless entry receiver

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M18

22

M90

3

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

M18

22

Ground

H

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM

G

I
Continuity

J

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8
NO
>> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry.

DLK

8.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL
1.
2.

Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-91

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
Remote keyless entry receiver
Connector

(–)

Condition

Signal
(Reference value)

Terminal

During waiting

M90

3

JMKIA5952GB

Ground

When pressing
and holding either
button on Intelligent Key
JMKIA5953GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-164, «Removal and Installation».

9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-92

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description

INFOID:0000000009516182

A

B

C

All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516183

D

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-78, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

E

Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-145, «DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

G

F

2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

H

3.REPLACE BCM

I

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

J

DRIVER SIDE

DLK

DRIVER SIDE : Description

INFOID:0000000009516184

L

Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516185

M

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-68, «DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

N

O

2.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

P

PASSENGER SIDE

Revision: April 2013

DLK-93

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

PASSENGER SIDE : Description

INFOID:0000000009516186

Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516187

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-69, «PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

REAR LH

REAR LH : Description

INFOID:0000000009516188

Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516189

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-70, «REAR LH : Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

REAR RH

REAR RH : Description

INFOID:0000000009516190

Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.

REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516191

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check rear door lock assembly RH.
Refer to DLK-71, «REAR RH : Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.REPLACE BCM

1.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-94

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-95

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516192

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-78, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR

Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-78, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-96

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description

INFOID:0000000009516193

A

B

All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.

ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516194

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-17, «System Description».

D

E

2.CHECK LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Set “ON” in “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”.

F

G

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

H

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

I

J

4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, «DTC Logic».
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, «DTC Logic».
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DLK

L

5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

M

Check outside key antenna.
• Driver side: Refer to DLK-60, «DTC Logic».
• Passenger side: Refer to DLK-62, «DTC Logic».
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-64, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

N

O

6.REPLACE BCM

P

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Revision: April 2013

C

DLK-97

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description

INFOID:0000000009516195

All doors do not lock/unlock using driver side door request switch.

DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516196

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Check driver side door request switch.
Refer to DLK-80, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Check outside key antenna (driver side).
Refer to DLK-60, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description

INFOID:0000000009516197

All doors do not lock/unlock using passenger side door request switch.

PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516198

1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Check passenger side door request switch.
Refer to DLK-80, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Check outside key antenna (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-62, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-98

2014 Note

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516199

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION

B

Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-78, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER

D

Check remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to DLK-89, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

E

3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY

F

Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-88, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

G

H

4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

I

J

5.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-99

2014 Note

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516204

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with driver side door lock knob and door key cylinder?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-78, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-100

2014 Note

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516205

1.CHECK AUTO LOCK SET SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select AUTO LOCK SET in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check AUTO LOCK SET setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Set MODE 2, MODE 3, MODE 4, MODE 5, MODE 6 or MODE 7 in AUTO LOCK SET.

D

2.REPLACE BCM

E

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-101

2014 Note

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516206

1.CHECK AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.

Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
Select AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-17, «DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Set Lock Only or Lock/Unlock in WORK SUPPORT.

2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

1.
2.
3.

Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
Select AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-17, «DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM — DOOR LOCK)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Set VH SPD in AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-102

2014 Note

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516208

1.CHECK HAZARD ANSWER BACK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select HAZARD ANSWER BACK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check the HAZARD ANSWER BACK setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Set the Lock Only, Unlock Only or Lock/Unlock in HAZARD ANSWER BACK.

D

2.CHECK ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

E

1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check the ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Set the Horn Chirp or Buzzer in ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK.

F

G

3.CHECK ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check the ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Set the On in ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK.

H

I

J

4.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION

Check hazard function.
Refer to DLK-87, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

DLK

L

5.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-103

2014 Note

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516209

1.CHECK ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
Select ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Set On in ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI.

2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, «DTC Logic».
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, «DTC Logic».
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR

Check unlock sensor.
Refer to DLK-78, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-104

2014 Note

OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516210

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

C

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

D

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

E

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

F

Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

G

4.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER

H

Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to DLK-67, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

I

5.REPLACE BCM

J

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-105

2014 Note

P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516211

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM
Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER

Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to DLK-67, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-106

2014 Note

ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516212

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

C

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

D

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

E

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER

F

Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to DLK-67, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

G

4.REPLACE BCM

H

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-107

2014 Note

TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516213

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM
Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, «DTC Logic».
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, «DTC Logic».
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-58, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER

Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to DLK-67, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

6.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-108

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A

INFOID:0000000009516214

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

C

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

D

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

E

3.CHECK LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

F

1.
2.
3.

Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM.
Select LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN in WORK SUPPORT mode.
Check LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Set ON in LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN.

G

H

4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY

Check Intelligent key.
Refer to DLK-88, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

I

J

5.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

DLK

Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, «DTC Logic».
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, «DTC Logic».
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

L

M

6.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-109

2014 Note

DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009516215

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Check door lock function.
Does door lock/unlock using door request switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-80, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER

Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-67, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE BCM

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-110

2014 Note

KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009516216

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

C

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

D

Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.

E

3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY

F

Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-88, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

G

4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

H

Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, «DTC Logic».
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, «DTC Logic».
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

I

J

5.REPLACE BCM

DLK

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-111

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671276

SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to DLK-116, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate
the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-112

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

A

B

C

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS

D

After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

E

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-113, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

F

G

H

I

J

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
DLK
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
L
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
M
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
N
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
O
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671277

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.

INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
Revision: April 2013

DLK-113

2014 Note

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-114

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
A

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-115

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671278

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

DLK-116

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O
LAIA0071E

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-117

2014 Note

HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HOOD
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567329

AWKIA2564ZZ

1.

Hood

2.

Bumper rubber (hood side)

3.

Hood insulator (if equipped)

4.

Hood rod clamp

5.

Bumper rubber (body side)

6.

Hood rod grommet

7.

Hood hinge (LH)

8.

Hood support rod

9.

Hood hinge (RH)

A.

Hood insulator clip

HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567330

CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing hood assembly due to its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloths to protect surrounding components from damage during removal
and installation of hood assembly.

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.

Support hood assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported properly when removing hood assembly.
Remove hood hinge nuts and hood assembly.
Remove clips and hood insulator (if necessary) (if equipped).

INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

DLK-118

2014 Note

HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Before installing hood assembly, apply anticorrosive agent to the surface of hood hinge.
• After installation, perform the hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, «HOOD
ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of hood hinge nuts.

HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment

A

B

INFOID:0000000009567331

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M
AWKIA2565ZZ

1.

N

Hood assembly

2.

Bumper rubber (body side)

3.

Hood hinge (LH)

4.

Hood lock

5.

Front grille finisher

6.

Front combination lamp

7.

Front fender

O

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment procedure.
Unit: mm (in)

Section

Item

A–A

B–B

Revision: April 2013

Measurement

Standard

Parallelism

Equality

D

Clearance

4.4 ± 2.0 (0.17 ± 0.08)

2.0 (0.08)

—

E

Surface height

-0.5 +2.0, -1.5 (0.02 +0.08, -0.06)

2.0 (0.08)

—

F

Clearance

4.0 ± 2.0 (0.16 ± 0.08)

2.0 (0.08)

3.0 (0.12)

G

Surface height

—

—

—

DLK-119

2014 Note

P

HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Section

Item

Measurement

Standard

Parallelism

Equality

H

Clearance

3.5 ± 1.0 (0.14 ± 0.04)

1.5 (0.06)

1.5 (0.06)

J

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06)

1.5 (0.06)

1.5 (0.06)

C–C

CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Loosen hood hinge nuts and bolts.
Loosen hood lock assembly bolts.
Adjust the hood lock assembly so the clearance measurements are within the specifications provided.
Tighten hood hinge nuts and bolts to specified torque.
Tighten hood lock assembly bolts to specified torque.

HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Loosen hood lock assembly bolts.
Adjust the surface height of hood assembly to front upper grille, front fender and front combination lamp to
the specified values by rotating hood bumper rubber.
Temporarily tighten hood lock assembly bolts.
Adjust (A) as shown to the following value with hood’s own weight by dropping it from approximately 200
mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing hood lightly [approximately 29 N (3.0 kg, 6.5 lb)].

ALKIA3162ZZ

5.

1.

Hood striker

A.

20.0 mm (0.79 in)

2.

Secondary latch

3.

Primary latch

After adjustment, tighten hood lock assembly bolts to specified torque.

HOOD HINGE
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567332

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-118, «HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-125, «Removal and Installation».
Remove cowl top side cover. Refer to EXT-22, «Exploded View».
Remove hood hinge bolts and hood hinge.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface of the vehicle.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-120

2014 Note

HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check hood hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

A

B

C
JMKIA7995ZZ

HOOD SUPPORT ROD

D

HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567333

E

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.

Support hood assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported properly when removing hood support
rod.
Rotate and remove hood support rod from grommet.
Release tab and remove grommet from hood hinge (if necessary).

INSTALLATION

F

G

H

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-121

2014 Note

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567334

ALKIA3172ZZ

1.

Upper air guide

2.

Air guide (RH)

3.

Front bumper reinforcement

4.

Lower air guide

5.

Air guide (LH)

6.

Radiator core lower support

7.

Lower grommet

8.

Upper grommet

9.

Radiator core upper support

Clip

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567335

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove ground harness bolt (A).

ALKIA3174ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-122

2014 Note

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove washer tube inlet clip (A).
A

B

C
AWKIA2567ZZ

4.

D

Remove radiator cap adapter bracket bolt (A) and radiator reservoir tank bolt (B).

E

F

G
JMKIA8027ZZ

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Remove horn. Refer to HRN-6, «Removal and Installation».
Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-19, «Removal and Installation».
Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-142, «HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation».
Release hood lock release cable clips from radiator core support upper using a suitable tool.
Remove upper air guide. Refer to DLK-122, «Exploded View».
Remove air guide (LH/RH). Refer to DLK-122, «Exploded View».
Release all harness connector clips from radiator core support upper using a suitable tool.
Remove bolts (A) and radiator core support upper.

H

I

J

DLK

L

M
AWKIA2568ZZ

N

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, «HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».

O

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER : Removal and Installation

P
INFOID:0000000009567336

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
Removal and Installation».
Reposition the radiator and condenser.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-123

2014 Note

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Using a suitable tool (A), suspend radiator and condenser to
prevent them from falling.
CAUTION:
Use care to avoid damaging radiator and condenser.

JMKIA8030ZZ

4.

Remove bolts (A) and radiator core support lower (1).

ALKIA3181ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-124

2014 Note

FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT FENDER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567337

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK

L
AWKIA2569ZZ

1.

Front fender

4.

Front fender stiffener

2.

Cowl top side cover
Pawl

3.

Front fender insulator

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567338

CAUTION:
Use a shop cloths to protect the body from being damaged during removal and installation.
Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-108, «Removal and Installation».
Remove cowl top side cover. Refer to DLK-125, «Exploded View».
Remove front fender bolts.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-125

N

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

M

Clip

P

2014 Note

FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove front fender stiffener (2) by carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) away from body.
: Front
CAUTION:
Use care when removing the front fender. The front fender
stiffener foam adheres the front fender to the body. Carefully release the stiffener foam or damage to front fender
may occur.

JMKIA5633ZZ

5.

Remove front fender.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of front fender bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following components as necessary:
— Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-119, «HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
— Front door assembly: Refer to DLK-128, «DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-126

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567339

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
AWKIA2492ZZ

1.

Inside seal

2.

Door sash front tape

3.

Grommet (driver side only)

4.

Door upper hinge

5.

Door lower hinge

6.

Door check link

7.

Front door panel

8.

Lower grommet

9.

Upper grommet

10. Door striker

11. Body panel plug

DLK

L

12. Door sash rear tape

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567340

CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing front door due to its heavy weight
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support the door using a suitable tool.
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three
minutes.

M

N

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the battery positive and negative terminals and wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove dash side finisher. Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the front door.
Remove door check link bolt (body side).
Remove door hinge nuts (door side) and front door assembly.

INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

DLK-127

2014 Note

P

FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the front door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-128, «DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the door hinge mating surface.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

JMKIA8072ZZ

DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009567341

AWKIA2493ZZ

1.

Front fender

4.

Body side outer

5.

Door striker

6.

Striker bolt

7.

Front door hinge

8.

Rear door upper hinge

9.

Rear door lower hinge

Revision: April 2013

2.

Front door

DLK-128

3.

Rear door

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment procedure.

A

Unit: mm (in)

Section
A–A

B–B

C–C

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

B

Measurement

Standard

Clearance

4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)

Clearance

4.6 ± 2.0 (0.18 ± 0.08)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06)

Clearance

4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)

Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-125, «Removal and Installation».
Loosen front door hinge nuts (door side).
Adjust the surface height of front door according to the specifications provided.
Temporarily tighten front door hinge nuts (door side).
Loosen front door hinge bolts (body side).
Raise or lower the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the specifications provided.
After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose
grease.
Install front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-125, «Removal and Installation».

DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567342

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

REMOVAL
Remove bolts and door striker.

DLK

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door striker bolts.
• Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-127, «Exploded View».
• After installation, check front door open/close operation. If necessary, perform the door striker
adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-129, «DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment».

DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment

M

INFOID:0000000009567343

N

DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.

L

Loosen door striker bolts
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with front door lock
insertion direction.

O

P

PIIB2804J

Revision: April 2013

DLK-129

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3.

Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-127, «Exploded View».

DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567344

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-125, «Removal and Installation».
Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-127, «DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Remove front door hinge bolts (body side) and front door hinge.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the front door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-128, «DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

JMKIA8072ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567345

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front door speaker. Refer to AV-34, «Removal and Installation» (BASE AUDIO), AV-94, «Removal
and Installation» (DISPLAY AUDIO) or AV-179, «Removal and Installation» (NAVIGATION).
Remove door check link bolt (body side).
Remove door check link bolts (door side) and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door check link rotating point for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply a multi-purpose grease.

JMKIA8074ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-130

2014 Note

REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567346

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
AWKIA2570ZZ

1.

Door sash rear tape

2.

Inside seal

3.

4.

Door upper hinge

5.

Door lower hinge

6.

Door check link

7.

Rear door panel

8.

Door striker

9.

Grommet

DLK

Door sash front tape

L

10. Body panel plug

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567347

CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing rear door due to its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door using a suitable tool.

N

REMOVAL
1.

M

O

Remove rear door harness grommet (1) from body side outer
(2), then pull out rear door harness.

P

JMKIA8083ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-131

2014 Note

REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2.

Disconnect the harness connector (A) from rear door.

JMKIA8084ZZ

3.
4.

Remove door check link bolt (body side).
Remove door hinge nuts (door side) and rear door assembly.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the rear door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-133, «DOOR ASSEMBLY
: Adjustment».
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of door hinge nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

JMKIA8072ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-132

2014 Note

REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009567348

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

DLK
AWKIA2493ZZ

L
1.

Front fender

2.

Front door

3.

Rear door

4.

Body side outer

5.

Door striker

6.

Striker bolt

7.

Front door hinge

8.

Rear door upper hinge

9.

Rear door lower hinge

M

Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment procedure.

N

Unit: mm (in)

Section
A–A

B–B

C–C

1.

Measurement

Standard

Clearance

4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)

Clearance

4.6 ± 2.0 (0.18 ± 0.08)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06)

Clearance

4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)

Surface height

0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)

Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-133

2014 Note

O

P

REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Loosen door hinge nuts (door side).
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the specifications provided.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge nuts (door side).
5. Loosen door hinge nuts and bolts (body side).
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the specifications provided.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of hinge bolts and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose
grease.
8. Install center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation».

DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567349

REMOVAL
Remove bolts and rear door striker.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door striker bolts.
• Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-131, «Exploded View».
• After installation, check front door open/close operation. If necessary, adjust the door striker. Refer
to DLK-134, «DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment».

DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009567350

DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.

Loosen door striker bolts.
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with rear door lock
insertion direction.

PIIB2804J

3.

Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-131, «Exploded View».

DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567351

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-131, «DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
Remove rear door hinge bolts and nuts (body side) and rear door hinge.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

DLK-134

2014 Note

REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the door hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the rear door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-133, «DOOR ASSEMBLY
: Adjustment».
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of door hinge bolts and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

A

B

C

D

JMKIA8072ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567352

E

F

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove rear door speaker. Refer to AV-35, «Removal and Installation» (BASE AUDIO), AV-95, «Removal
and Installation» (DISPLAY AUDIO) or AV-180, «Removal and Installation» (NAVIGATION).
Remove door check link bolt (body side).
Remove door check link bolts (door side) and remove.

G

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check rear door open/close operation.
• Check door check link rotating point for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

I

J

DLK

L
JMKIA8074ZZ

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-135

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567353

AWKIA2571ZZ

1.

Back door hinge (RH)

4.

Back door stay stud ball (RH)

5.

Back door stay (LH)

6.

Back door stay stud ball (LH)

7.

Bumper rubber seal

8.

Bumper rubber

9.

Spacer

10. Back door outer finisher

2.

Back door hinge (LH)

3.

Back door stay (RH)

11. Back door assembly

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567354

CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing the back door due to its heavy weight.
• Use shop cloths to protect surrounding components from damage during removal and installation of
back door.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove back door stay (LH/RH). Refer to DLK-140, «BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-136

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove back door harness grommet (1), then pull harness from
the back door.

A

B

C
ALKIA3187ZZ

4.
5.

D

Disconnect washer tube from rear wiper.
Remove washer tube grommet (1), then pull washer tube from
the back door.

E

F

G
ALKIA3188ZZ

6.

7.

Support the back door assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if back door assembly is not supported properly when removing the back
door spindle unit.
Remove back door hinge nuts (door side) and remove.

H

I

J

INSTALLATION

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
DLK
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface between hinge and door side.
• When reusing stud ball, always apply locking sealant before installing stud ball to back door.
• After installation, perform the back door assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-138, «BACK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-137

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009567355

AWKIA2495ZZ

1.

Back door panel

2.

Roof panel

3.

Rear combination lamp

4.

Rear bumper fascia

5.

Back door hinge

6.

Bumper rubber

7.

Bolt

8.

Back door striker

Revision: April 2013

DLK-138

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by visual inspection and tactile
feel. If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment
procedure.

A

Unit: mm (in)

Portion

Section

Back door panel – Roof panel

A–A

Rear combination lamp – Back door panel

Rear bumper fascia – Back-door panel

B–B

C–C
D–D

B

Item

Measurement

Standard

H

Clearance

6.0 ± 1.0 (0.24 ± 0.04)

I

Surface height

0.0 +0.5, -1.5 (0.00 +0.02, -0.06)

J

Clearance

5.0 ± 2.0 (0.20 ± 0.08)

K

Surface height

-2.0 ± 2.0 (-0.08 ± 0.08)

L

Clearance

5.0 ± 2.0 (0.20 ± 0.08)

M

Surface height

0.0 +0.5, -2.0 (0.0 +0.02, -0.08)

M

Clearance

7.0 ± 2.0 (0.28 ± 0.08)

1.
2.

Loosen back door hinge nuts (door side).
Lift up back door approximately 100 – 150 mm (3.94 – 5.91 in) height then close it lightly and check that it
is engaged firmly with back door closed.
3. Check the clearance and surface height and adjust back door as necessary.
4. Tighten back door hinge nuts to specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check back door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of rear door hinge bolts and nuts.

C

D

E

F

G

H

BACK DOOR STRIKER

BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567356

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.

J

Remove back door kicking plate using a suitable tool.
Remove bolts and back door striker.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse back door striker bolts.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the back door assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-138, «BACK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».

BACK DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009567357

DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.

DLK

L

M

N

Loosen door striker bolts.
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door
lock insertion direction.

O

P

PIIB2804J

3.

Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-136, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

DLK-139

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567358

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-136, «BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Partially remove back door weatherstrip. Refer to DLK-141, «BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal
and Installation».
Remove back door hinge nuts and bolts (body side) and then remove back door hinge.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface between hinge and body side.
• After installation, perform the back door assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-138, «BACK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».

BACK DOOR STAY

BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567359

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.

Support the back door with a suitable tool too prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Body injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
Remove the metal clip (3) located on the connection between
the back door stay (1) and the stud ball (2) (back door side) by
using a flat blade screwdriver (A).
Remove the back door stay (back door side).

JMKIA2255ZZ

4.

In the same way, remove the back door stay from the body side.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check the back door open/close operation after installation.

BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal

INFOID:0000000009567360

BACK DOOR STAY DISPOSAL
WARNING:
When performing disposal procedure, wear protective gloves and glasses.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-140

2014 Note

BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Secure back door stay (1) using a vice (C).
CAUTION:
When cutting back door stay, always cover suitable tool (A)
using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering metal fragments
or oil.

A

B

C
JMKIA3336ZZ

2.

D

Slowly cut a hole in back door stay and drain the gas using a
hacksaw at position (B) as shown.
A: 20 mm (0.79 in)

E

F

G
JMKIA5421ZZ

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP

H

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567361

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Support back door using a suitable tool.
Carefully remove back door weather-strip from opening door joint.

J

INSTALLATION
1.

Beginning with upper section, align weather-strip mark with vehicle center position mark and install
DLK
weather strip to the vehicle.
2. For the lower section, align weather-strip seam with center of back door striker.
NOTE:
L
Pull weather-strip gently to make sure that there are no loose sections.
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-141

2014 Note

HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HOOD LOCK
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567362

AWKIA2572ZZ

1.

Hood lock/fuel filler lid release handle

A.

Clip

2.

Hood lock assembly

3.

Hood lock release cable assembly

HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567363

REMOVAL
1.

Remove hood lock bolts (A).

ALKIA3190ZZ

2.
3.

Disconnect the harness connector from the hood lock assembly (if equipped).
Disconnect hood lock release cable (2) from hood lock (1) and
remove.

AWKIA2497ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: April 2013

DLK-142

2014 Note

HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, «HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment».
• After adjustment, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-143, «HOOD LOCK : Inspection».

HOOD LOCK : Inspection

A

B

INFOID:0000000009567364

HOOD LOCK INSPECTION

C

NOTE:
If hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. Refer to DLK-142, «HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation».
1. Check that secondary latch is properly engage with secondary striker with hoods own weight.
2. While operating hood lock release lever, carefully check that the front end of hood assembly is raised by
approximately 20.0 mm (0.79 in). Also check that hood lock release lever returns to original position.
3. Check that hood lock release lever operates at 49 N (5.0 kg-m, 11.0 ft-lb) or below.
4. Install so that static closing force of hood is 315-490 N (32.1-50.0 kg-m, 70.8-110.2 ft-lb).
5. Check hood lock assembly lubrication condition. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

D

E

F

HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567365

G

REMOVAL
1.
2.

H

Disconnect hood lock release cable from hood lock. Refer to DLK-142, «Exploded View».
Remove radiator cap adapter bracket bolt (A) and radiator reservoir tank bolt (B).

I

J

DLK
JMKIA8027ZZ

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Release hood lock control cable clips using a suitable tool.
Remove hood lock/fuel filler door release handle. Refer to DLK-144, «HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE :
Removal and Installation».
Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation»
Remove grommet on the lower dash and pull the hood lock release cable into the passenger compartment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, be careful not to damage (peel) the outside of the hood lock release cable.

M

N

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend cable too much, keep the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more.
• Check that hood lock release cable is properly engaged with hood lock.

Revision: April 2013

L

DLK-143

P

2014 Note

HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark).

PIIB5801E

HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567366

REMOVAL
1.

Remove hood lock/fuel filler door release handle bolts (A).

AWKIA2498ZZ

2.

Disconnect hood lock release cable from hood lock/fuel filler door release handle and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-144

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR LOCK

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567367

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2573ZZ

1.

Key cylinder (driver side)

2.

Outside handle bracket

3.

Outside handle escutcheon
(passenger side)

4.

Front gasket

5.

Outside handle

6.

Inside handle

7.

Door lock

8.

Key cylinder rod (driver side)

9.

Rear gasket

A.

Clip

B.

Bolt

J

DLK

Pawl

DOOR LOCK

L

DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567368

M

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-146, «INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-147, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the door lock actuator.
Remove front door glass rear run. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
Remove bolts and door lock.

N

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door lock bolts.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle and outside handle bracket.
• When installing key cylinder on front door, be sure to rotate key cylinder rod holder until a click is
felt.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-145

2014 Note

P

FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check door lock for poor lubrication. Apply a suitable multipurpose grease to door lock if necessary.

JMKIA8077ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567369

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Partially remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
Release lock knob (2) and inside handle cable (3) from clip (1)
using a suitable tool.

JMKIA8078ZZ

4.
5.

Remove inside handle bolt.
Release inside handle (1) from door panel using a suitable tool
and remove.
: Pawl

AWKIA2500ZZ

6.

Release inside handle cable (3) and lock cable (2) from inside
handle (1) and remove.

JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

DLK-146

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.

A

OUTSIDE HANDLE

OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567370

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Partially remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
Open rod holder (1) by pulling downward and separate key rod
(3) from door lock assembly (2) (driver side only).

C

D

E

F
JMKIA8080ZZ

4.

G

Release outside handle cable (1) from cable clip (A).

H

I

J
AWKIA2574ZZ

5.

Remove door grommet (1) and bolt from grommet hole (2).

DLK

L

M

JMKIA5888ZZ

6.

While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutcheon.

N

O

P

JMKIA0560ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-147

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle.

JMKIA0524ZZ

8. Disconnect the harness connectors from the outside handle and remove.
9. Remove front gasket and rear gasket.
10. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
: Front

JMKIA5890ZZ

11. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2) as shown.

JMKIA5891ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-148

2014 Note

REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR LOCK

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567371

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2575ZZ

1.

Outside handle bracket

2.

Outside handle escutcheon

3.

Front gasket

4.

Outside handle

5.

Inside handle

6.

Door lock

7.

Door lock

A.

Clip

B.

Bolt

J

DLK

Pawl

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567372

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

L

M

Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-150, «INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-151, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove bolts (A) from rear door glass rear run (1).

N

O

P

JMKIA8086ZZ

4.
5.

Disconnect the harness connector from door lock actuator.
Remove bolts and door lock.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-149

2014 Note

REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door lock assembly bolts.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with inside handle and outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. If necessary,
apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.

JMKIA8087ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567373

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove upper portion of vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, «Exploded View».
Release lock knob (2) and inside handle cable (3) from clip (1)
using a suitable tool.

JMKIA5704ZZ

4.
5.

Remove inside handle bolt.
Release inside handle (1) from door panel using a suitable tool
and remove.
: Pawl

AWKIA2500ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-150

2014 Note

REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Release inside handle cable (3) and lock cable (2) from inside
handle (1) and remove.

A

B

C
JMKIA5885ZZ

D

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.

E

OUTSIDE HANDLE

F

OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567374

G

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-150, «INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation»
Remove door grommet and bolt from grommet hole.

H

I

J

JMKIA1467ZZ

3.

While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutcheon.

DLK

L

M

N
JMKIA5342ZZ

4.

O

While pulling outside handle (1), slide towards rear of vehicle to
remove.

P

JMKIA0524ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-151

2014 Note

REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5.
6.

Remove front gasket and rear gasket.
Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
: Front

JMKIA5890ZZ

7.

Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2) as shown.

JMKIA5891ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-152

2014 Note

BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR LOCK

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671215

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWKIA2578ZZ

1.

Outside handle

2.

Back door lock cable

4.

Back door lock

5.

Door striker

3.

Back door lock actuator

H

BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation

I
INFOID:0000000009567376

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

J
Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
DLK
Disconnect lock rod from key cylinder (if equipped).
Disconnect the harness connectors from the back door lock.
L
Disconnect door lock cable from handle.
Remove back door lock bolts and back door lock.

INSTALLATION

M

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Tighten back door bolts to specification.
• After installation, check back door open/close and lock/unlock operation.

N

OUTSIDE HANDLE

OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567377

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
Release the back door lock cable from the outside handle.
Remove outside handle bolts and outside handle.

P

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Tighten outside handle bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-153, «Exploded View».
Revision: April 2013

DLK-153

2014 Note

BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• After installation, check back door open/close and lock/unlock operation.

EMERGENCY LEVER

EMERGENCY LEVER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567378

UNLOCK PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If back door lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, perform the following procedure to unlock back door assembly.
From inside the vehicle, using a suitable tool, rotate the emergency
lever (1) in a clockwise direction to unlock the back door assembly.

AWKIA2577ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-154

2014 Note

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567379

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2582ZZ

1.

Fuel filler lid lock release cable

2.

Fuel filler lid lock

3.

Fuel filler lid bumper

4.

Fuel filler lid spring

5.

Fuel filler lid

A.

Clip

B.

Cable protector

J

Pawl

DLK

FUEL FILLER LID
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567380

L

REMOVAL
1.

Remove fuel cap pin (1).

M

N

O

ALKIA3198ZZ

Revision: April 2013

DLK-155

2014 Note

P

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove fuel filler lid screws (A) and fuel filler lid (1).

ALKIA3199ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close and lock/unlock operation.

FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE

FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567381

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove hood lock/fuel filler lid lock release handle. Refer to DLK-144, «HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from hood lock/fuel
filler lid lock release handle (1).

JMKIA7999ZZ

3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-32, «LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (1) by pulling downward
and then sliding cable end to the side to remove from fuel filler
lid lock assembly (2).

JMKIA8139ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.

FUEL FILLER LID LOCK
Revision: April 2013

DLK-156

2014 Note

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567382

A

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Fully open fuel filler lid.
Remove luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-32, «LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the fuel filler lid lock assemby.
Release pawls (A) and remove fuel filler lid lock assembly (1).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gasket (2) when removing.

B

C

D

E

F
JMKIA8138ZZ

5.

Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (1) by pulling downward
and then sliding cable end to the side to remove from fuel filler
lid lock assembly (2).

G

H

I

JMKIA8139ZZ

J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-157

2014 Note

DOOR SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567383

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the door switch bolt (A).
Disconnect the harness connector and remove door switch (1).

JMKIA2173ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-158

2014 Note

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA

A

INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567384

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove center console lower. Refer to IP-20, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (instrument center).
Remove screws (A) and the inside key antenna (instrument center) (1).

C

D

E

F
JMKIA7948ZZ

INSTALLATION

G

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

CONSOLE

H

CONSOLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567385

REMOVAL

I

1.
2.
3.

J

Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (console).
Release clips (A) and remove inside key antenna (console) (1).

DLK

L

JMKIA7950ZZ

M

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

N

LUGGAGE ROOM

LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567386

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (luggage room).

Revision: April 2013

DLK-159

P

2014 Note

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Release clips (A) and remove inside key antenna (luggage
room) (1).

ALKIA3208ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-160

2014 Note

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA

A

OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567387

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-147, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove screw (1) and outside handle finisher (1) from outside
handle (2).

C

D

E

F
ALKIA3209ZZ

3.

Remove outside key antenna (outside handle) (1) from outside
handle (2).

G

H

I

ALKIA3210ZZ

INSTALLATION

J

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

REAR BUMPER

DLK

REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567388

L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove the rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the outside key antenna (rear bumper)
Release clips (A) and remove outside key antenna (rear
bumper) (1).

M

N

O

P
JMKIA7952ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-161

2014 Note

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009671358

The door request switch (driver side) is serviced as an assembly with the outside handle. Refer to DLK-147,
«OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».

PASSENGER SIDE

PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009671359

The door request switch (passenger side) is serviced as an assembly with the outside handle. Refer to DLK147, «OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation».

BACK DOOR

BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009671360

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
Remove screws (A) and back door request switch (1) from back
door outer finisher (2).

AWKIA2584ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-162

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Removal and Installation

A
INFOID:0000000009567389

REMOVAL
1.
2.

B

Remove front combination lamp (LH). Refer to EXL-108, «Removal and Installation»
Remove bolt (A) and Intelligent Key warning buzzer (1).

C

D

E

JMKIA7949ZZ

INSTALLATION

F

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

H

I

J

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-163

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567390

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».
Remove remote keyless entry receiver bolt (A).
Disconnect the harness connector and remove remote keyless
entry receiver (1)

JMKIA7947ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

DLK-164

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

A

Removal and Installation
1.
2.

INFOID:0000000009567391

Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key.
Insert a suitable tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and rotate it to separate the upper part from the lower
part.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry.

B

C

D

E
PIIB6221E

3.

Replace the battery with new one.
Battery replacement

4.

F

:Coin-type lithium battery
(CR2025)

G

Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact area.
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.

H

I

J
PIIB6222E

DLK

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

DLK-165

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

EC

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

A

EC

C

D

E

CONTENTS
HR16DE

Fuel Pump ………………………………………………………19
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 ………………………………….20
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ……………………….20
Ignition Coil With Power Transistor …………………….20
Intake Air Temperature Sensor ………………………….21
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ………..21
Knock Sensor ………………………………………………….21
Mass Air Flow Sensor ……………………………………….22
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor ……………………………..22
Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch….22
Throttle Control Motor ……………………………………….22
Throttle Control Motor Relay ……………………………..22
Throttle Position Sensor ……………………………………23

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 6
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 6
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine
and CVT ………………………………………………………….. 6
General Precautions …………………………………………. 7

PREPARATION ……………………………………. 10
PREPARATION …………………………………………..10
Special Service Tools ………………………………………. 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 11
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………11
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………….. 11
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location ……………………………… 11
ECM ……………………………………………………………… 15
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor …………………….. 15
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 ……………………………………. 15
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater …………………………. 15
ASCD Steering Switch …………………………………….. 16
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ………………….. 16
Clutch Pedal Position Switch ……………………………. 16
Cooling Fan ……………………………………………………. 16
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) …………………….. 17
Electric Throttle Control Actuator ………………………. 17
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor …………………. 17
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor ……………………………… 18
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor ………………………… 18
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid
Valve …………………………………………………………….. 18
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor ……. 19
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve …….. 19
Fuel Injector …………………………………………………… 19

Revision: April 2013

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS ………………23
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp ………………………………23
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) …………………………….24

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ………………… 26
Positive Crankcase Ventilation …………………………..26

SYSTEM …………………………………………………… 27
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………………..27
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………………27
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail Safe …………..28

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM …………….29
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description ………………………………………………..30

O

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ……………………………32
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System Description ………………………………………………………….32

P

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL …………………..33
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System
Description ………………………………………………………33
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)….33

EC-1

2014 Note

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description ………………………………… 34
CAN COMMUNICATION ……………………………………. 34
CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description …… 34
COOLING FAN CONTROL ………………………………… 34
COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description… 35

Test Value and Test Limit ………………………………… 78

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………… 86
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………… 86
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 86

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………… 107

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ………………….. 35
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System
Description …………………………………………………….. 36

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 107

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL …………………… 36
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description ………………………………………………………… 37

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
ECM ………………………………………………………… 111

EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL ……………….. 37
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System
Description …………………………………………………….. 38
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ………………………………………. 38
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE : System Description ……… 38
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ………………….. 39
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning
lamps/Indicator lamps ……………………………………… 39

OPERATION ……………………………………………… 40
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)… 40
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Switch Name and Function ……………………… 40

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ….. 42
Diagnosis Description ……………………………………… 42
GST (Generic Scan Tool) ………………………………… 42

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM) ………………………. 43
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION ………………………………. 43
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1st Trip Detection
Logic and Two Trip Detection Logic ………………….. 43
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze
Frame Data ……………………………………………………. 43
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System ….. 44
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern ……. 47
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness
Test (SRT) Code ……………………………………………. 48
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ……………………………………………….. 49
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………… 49
CONSULT Function ………………………………………… 53

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 62
ECM …………………………………………………………. 62
Reference Value …………………………………………….. 62
Fail Safe ……………………………………………………….. 73
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ………………………… 74
DTC Index …………………………………………………….. 76

Revision: April 2013

Work Flow ……………………………………………………. 107
Diagnostic Work Sheet ………………………………….. 109

Description …………………………………………………… 111
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 111

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING ………………………………………. 113
Description …………………………………………………… 113
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 113

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING ………………………………………………. 114
Description …………………………………………………… 114
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 114

IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ………………….. 115
Description …………………………………………………… 115
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 115

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR …………………………………………………….. 117
Description …………………………………………………… 117
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 117

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………………. 118
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 118

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK ………………………… 122
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 122

HOW TO SET SRT CODE ………………………….. 124
Description …………………………………………………… 124
SRT Set Driving Pattern …………………………………. 125
Work Procedure ……………………………………………. 127

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ………………….. 129
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION
VALUE …………………………………………………….. 129
Description …………………………………………………… 129
Component Function Check …………………………… 129
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 130

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 137
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 137

U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………… 140
DTC Description ……………………………………………. 140
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 140

EC-2

2014 Note

U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………… 141

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 174

Description …………………………………………………… 141
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 141
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 141

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 ……………………………… 176

P0011 IVT CONTROL ……………………………….. 142
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 142
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 143
Component Inspection …………………………………… 144

P0014 EVT CONTROL ………………………………. 146

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 176
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 177

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 149
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 149
Component Inspection …………………………………… 150

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 179
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 180
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 183
Component Function Check ……………………………. 184
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 185
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 186

P0138 HO2S2 ………………………………………….. 188

P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE …. 155
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 155
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 155
Component Inspection …………………………………… 156

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR …………………….. 158
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 158
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 158
Component Inspection …………………………………… 160

P0139 HO2S2 ………………………………………….. 196

G

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 196
Component Function Check ……………………………. 197
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 198
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 199

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION ………………………………………………………. 201

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION ………………………………………………………. 205
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 205
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 206

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ……………………………….. 170
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 170
Component Function Check ……………………………. 171
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 171

J

K

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 209
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 210
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 210

L

P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR ……………………. 211

M

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 211
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 211
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 212

N

P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ………………………. 213
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 213
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 213
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 214

O

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE ……………………………………………………….. 216

P

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 216
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 217

P0327, P0328 KS …………………………………….. 222

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ……………………………….. 173
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 173

Revision: April 2013

I

P0196 EOT SENSOR ……………………………….. 209

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ……………………….. 167
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 167
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 167
Component Inspection …………………………………… 168

H

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 201
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 202

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ……………………… 165
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 165
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 165
Component Inspection …………………………………… 166

E

F

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ………………………. 163
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 163
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 163
Component Inspection …………………………………… 164

D

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 188
Component Function Check ……………………………. 190
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 191
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 193

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ….. 153
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 153
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 153
Component Inspection …………………………………… 154

C

P0137 HO2S2 ………………………………………….. 183

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ………………….. 151
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 151
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 151
Component Inspection …………………………………… 152

EC

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1 ……………………………… 179

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 146
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 147
Component Inspection …………………………………… 148

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ……… 149

A

EC-3

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 222
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 222

2014 Note

Component Inspection …………………………………….223

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ……………………… 224
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..224
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………224
Component Inspection …………………………………….226

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) …………………. 228
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..228
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………228
Component Inspection …………………………………….230

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 232
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..232
Component Function Check …………………………….233
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………234

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ………………….. 237
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..237
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………237
Component Inspection …………………………………….238

P0500 VSS ………………………………………………. 240
Description …………………………………………………….240
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..240
Component Function Check …………………………….241
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………241

P0520 EOP SENSOR ……………………………….. 242
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..242
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………242
Component Inspection …………………………………….243

P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ……………….. 244
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..244
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………245
Component Inspection …………………………………….246

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY …………………… 247
Description …………………………………………………….247
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..247
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………247

P0605 ECM ……………………………………………… 249
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..249
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………249

P0607 ECM ……………………………………………… 251
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..251
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………251

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY …………….. 252
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..252
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………252

P0850 PNP SWITCH ………………………………… 254
Description …………………………………………………….254
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..254
Component Function Check …………………………….255
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………255

Revision: April 2013

P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR .. 257
DTC Description ……………………………………………. 257
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 257
Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve Timing
Control Position Sensor) ………………………………… 259

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ……… 260
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 260
Component Function Check …………………………… 260
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 261

P1225 TP SENSOR …………………………………… 263
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 263
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 263

P1226 TP SENSOR …………………………………… 264
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 264
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 264

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ……………… 265
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 265
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 265
Component Inspection …………………………………… 267

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH …………………… 268
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 268
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 269
Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position
Switch) ………………………………………………………… 271
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) ………. 272

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ……. 273
Description …………………………………………………… 273
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 273
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 273

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR ………………….. 275
Description …………………………………………………… 275
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 275
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 275

P1720 VSS ……………………………………………….. 276
Description …………………………………………………… 276
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 276
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 276

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH …………………………….. 278
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 278
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 278
Component Inspection …………………………………… 279

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY …………………………………………….. 280
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 280
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 280

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
FUNCTION ……………………………………………….. 283
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 283
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 283
Component Inspection …………………………………… 286

EC-4

2014 Note

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ………. 287

Component Inspection ……………………………………. 315

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 287
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 287
Component Inspection …………………………………… 288

FUEL PUMP ……………………………………………. 316

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR ……………………………………………… 289
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 289
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 289

Component Function Check ……………………………. 316
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 316
Component Inspection ……………………………………. 318
Component Function Check ……………………………. 319
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 319
Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power
Transistor) ……………………………………………………. 322
Component Inspection (Condenser) …………………. 323
Component Function Check ……………………………. 324
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 324

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ………. 325

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 327

G

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS … 327
Symptom Table …………………………………………….. 327

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 300
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 300
Component Inspection …………………………………… 302

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION …………. 333

Component Function Check ……………………………. 304
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 304
Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position
Switch) ………………………………………………………… 305

ASCD INDICATOR ……………………………………. 306

E

F

P2138 APP SENSOR ………………………………… 300

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH …………… 304

D

Component Function Check ……………………………. 325
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 325

P2135 TP SENSOR …………………………………… 297
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 297
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 297
Component Inspection …………………………………… 298

C

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ………….. 324

P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ……………………… 294
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 294
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 294
Component Inspection …………………………………… 296

EC

IGNITION SIGNAL …………………………………… 319

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ……………………… 291
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 291
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 291
Component Inspection …………………………………… 292

A

H

Description ……………………………………………………. 333

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………. 334
IDLE SPEED …………………………………………… 334
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 334

I

J

IGNITION TIMING ……………………………………. 335
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 335

K

Component Function Check ……………………………. 306
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 306

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM …………. 336

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH …………. 307

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ……. 337

Component Function Check ……………………………. 307
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 307
Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position
Switch) ………………………………………………………… 308

Inspection …………………………………………………….. 337

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 338

COOLING FAN …………………………………………. 309

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 338
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 338

N

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 339

O

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………… 339

P

Component Function Check ……………………………. 309
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 309
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) ……… 310
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) ……… 311

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ……………………. 312
Description …………………………………………………… 312
Component Function Check ……………………………. 312
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 312

Inspection …………………………………………………….. 336

M

ECM ……………………………………………………….. 338

FUEL INJECTOR ……………………………………… 314
Component Function Check ……………………………. 314
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 314

Revision: April 2013

L

EC-5

Idle Speed ……………………………………………………. 339
Ignition Timing ………………………………………………. 339
Calculated Load Value …………………………………… 339
Mass Air Flow Sensor …………………………………….. 339

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009582464

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CVT

INFOID:0000000009022412

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to GI-3, «Contents».
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Revision: April 2013

EC-6

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]

< PRECAUTION >

General Precautions

INFOID:0000000009022413

A

• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable.

EC

C

D
SEF289H

• Do not disassemble ECM.
• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. So,
engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
— Diagnostic trouble codes
— 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
— Freeze frame data
— 1st trip freeze frame data
— System readiness test (SRT) codes
— Test values
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-62, «Reference Value».
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).

E

F

G

PBIA9222J

I

J

K

L
PBIB0090E

M

N

O

P
MEF040D

Revision: April 2013

EC-7

H

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function
Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE if the repair is completed. The Component
Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.

[HR16DE]

JSBIA1315ZZ

• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow
the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.

SEF348N

• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.

SEF709Y

Revision: April 2013

EC-8

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
— Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units.
— Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
— Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
ratio can be kept smaller.
— Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.

[HR16DE]
A

EC

C
SEF708Y

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-9

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009022414

Tool number
Tool name

Description

KV10118400
Fuel tube adapter

Measuring fuel pressure

PBIB3043E

KV10120000
Fuel tube adapter

JSBIA0410ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EC-10

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

EC

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009022415

ENGINE ROOM COMPARTMENT

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
ALBIA1138ZZ

No.

Component

L

Function

ECM

EC-15, «ECM»

IPDM E/R

IPDM E/R control the internal relays and the actuators.
When CAN communication with ECM is impossible, IPDM E/R
performs fail-safe control.
PCS-4, «Component Parts Location».

Mass air flow sensor
(with intake air temperature sensor)

EC-21, «Knock Sensor»

Electric throttle control actuator
EC-17, «Electric Throttle Control Actuator»
(with built in throttle position sensor and throttle control motor)
EC-18, «EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve»

Cooling fan motor

EC-16, «Cooling Fan»

Refrigerant pressure sensor

HA-11, «Component Parts Location»

P

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

EC-11

N

O

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

Revision: April 2013

M

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

JSBIA0592ZZ

Engine front right side

No.

Left view of the engine

Engine rear right side

Component

Function

Ignition coil No.4
(with power transistor)

EC-20, «Ignition Coil With Power Transistor»

Ignition coil No.3
(with power transistor)

EC-20, «Ignition Coil With Power Transistor»

Ignition coil No.2
(with power transistor)

EC-20, «Ignition Coil With Power Transistor»

Ignition coil No.1
(with power transistor)

EC-20, «Ignition Coil With Power Transistor»

PCV valve

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to
conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

EC-21, «Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve»

Engine oil pressure sensor

EC-18, «Engine Oil Pressure Sensor»

Engine oil temperature sensor

EC-18, «Engine Oil Temperature Sensor»

Knock sensor

EC-21, «Knock Sensor»

Engine coolant temperature sensor

EC-17, «Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor»

Camshaft position sensor

EC-16, «Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)»

Exhaust valve timing control position sensor

EC-19, «Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor»

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

EC-19, «Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve»

Fuel injector No.1 (Front)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Revision: April 2013

EC-12

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

A

Fuel injector No.1 (Rear)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.2 (Front)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.2 (Rear)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.3 (Front)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.3 (Rear)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.4 (Front)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Fuel injector No.4 (Rear)

EC-19, «Fuel Injector»

Crankshaft position sensor

EC-17, «Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)»

EC

C

D

EXHAUST COMPARTMENT

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
JSBIA0593ZZ

No.

Component

M

Function

A/F sensor 1

EC-15, «Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1»

Heated oxygen sensor 2

EC-20, «Heated Oxygen Sensor 2»

N

BODY COMPARTMENT
O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-13

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ALBIA1139ZZ

Left center side of undercarriage (fuel tank)
No.

IPDM E/R area

Component

Brake pedal area

Function

ASCD steering switch

EC-16, «ASCD Steering Switch»

Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump

EC-19, «Fuel Pump»

EVAP canister

EC-36, «EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Description»

Brake pedal position switch

EC-22, «Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch»

Stop lamp switch

EC-22, «Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch»

Clutch pedal position switch (M/T models)

EC-16, «Clutch Pedal Position Switch»

Accelerator pedal position switch

EC-15, «Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor»

Revision: April 2013

EC-14

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ECM

INFOID:0000000009022416

A

The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
EC

C

D
PBIA9222J

Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022417

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM.
The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.

Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1

E

F

G

H
PBIB1741E

INFOID:0000000009022418

The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an electrode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocarbon density in rich.

I

J

K

L
JMBIA0112GB

M

Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C
(1,472°F).

N

O

P
PBIB3354E

Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater

INFOID:0000000009022419

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Revision: April 2013

EC-15

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Sensor

Input Signal to ECM

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

ECM function

Actuator

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater

The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element within the specified range.

ASCD Steering Switch

INFOID:0000000009509471

ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-34, «AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description» for the ASCD function.

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)

INFOID:0000000009022421

The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of
intake camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.

PBIA9209J

JPBIA5503GB

Clutch Pedal Position Switch

INFOID:0000000009509475

When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal position switch turns OFF and the clutch pedal position
switch signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM judges the clutch pedal conditions via the signal (ON or OFF).

Cooling Fan

INFOID:0000000009022422

Cooling fan operates at low and high speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor.
Refer to EC-35, «COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description» for cooling fan operation.

Revision: April 2013

EC-16

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)

INFOID:0000000009022423

A

The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder
block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.

EC

C

D
PBIA9209J

E

F

G

H

JPBIA5503GB

Electric Throttle Control Actuator

INFOID:0000000009022424

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor.

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

I

J

INFOID:0000000009022425

K

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine
coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.

L

M

SEF594K

O

Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)]

Voltage* (V)

Resistance (kΩ)

–10 (14)

4.4

7.0 — 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.10 — 2.90

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 — 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 — 0.260

P

SEF012P

Revision: April 2013

N

EC-17

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022426

The engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor is detects engine oil pressure
and transmits a voltage signal to the ECM.

JSBIA0292ZZ

Engine Oil Temperature Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022427

The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.

SEF594K

Engine oil temperature [°C (°F)]

Voltage* (V)

Resistance (kΩ)

–10 (14)

4.4

7.0 — 11.4

20 (68)

3.5

2.10 — 2.90

50 (122)

2.2

0.68 — 1.00

90 (194)

0.9

0.236 — 0.260

110 (230)

0.6

0.143 — 0.153

*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals.

EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve

SEF012P

INFOID:0000000009022428

The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.

JSBIA0651ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EC-18

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022429

A

Exhaust valve timing control position sensor detects the protrusion of
the signal plate installed to the exhaust camshaft front end.
This sensor signal is used for sensing a position of the exhaust camshaft.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.

EC

C

D
PBIA9209J

Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009022430

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through exhaust valve timing control
unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width retards valve angle.
The shorter pulse width advances valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the exhaust valve angle at the control
position.

E

F

G

H
JSBIA0652ZZ

Fuel Injector

INFOID:0000000009022431

The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.

I

J

K

L
JSBIA0742ZZ

Fuel Pump

INFOID:0000000009022432

Sensor

Input signal to ECM

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

Engine speed*

Battery

Battery voltage*

ECM function
Fuel pump control

Actuator
Fuel pump relay
↓
Fuel pump

M

N

O

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

The ECM activates the fuel pump for a few seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.

Revision: April 2013

EC-19

2014 Note

P

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Condition

Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON.

Operates for 1 second.

Engine running and cranking

Operates.

When engine is stopped

Stops in 1.5 seconds.

Except as shown above

Stops.

Heated Oxygen Sensor 2

INFOID:0000000009022433

The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),
monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R

Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater

INFOID:0000000009022434

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor

Input signal to ECM

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed

Engine coolant temperature sensor

Engine coolant temperature

Mass air flow sensor

Amount of intake air

ECM function

Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control

Actuator

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.

OPERATION
Engine speed

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 rpm

OFF

Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load

ON

Ignition Coil With Power Transistor

INFOID:0000000009022435

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.

Revision: April 2013

EC-20

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Intake Air Temperature Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022436

A

The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.

EC

C

D
PBIA9559J

E

Intake air temperature [°C (°F)]

Voltage* (V)

Resistance (kΩ)

25 (77)

3.3

1.800 — 2.200

80 (176)

1.2

0.283 — 0.359

F

G

SEF012P

Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve

H

INFOID:0000000009022437

I

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.

J

K

L
PBIB1842E

Knock Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022438

M

The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.

N

O

P
JSBIA0284ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EC-21

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Mass Air Flow Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022440

The mass air flow sensor
is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J

Refrigerant Pressure Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022442

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.

PBIB2657E

Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch

INFOID:0000000009022443

Stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch are installed to brake pedal bracket.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
Brake pedal

Brake pedal position switch

Stop lamp switch

Released

ON

OFF

Depressed

OFF

ON

Throttle Control Motor

INFOID:0000000009022444

The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor.

Throttle Control Motor Relay

INFOID:0000000009022445

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.

Revision: April 2013

EC-22

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Throttle Position Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022446

A

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and controls the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor.

EC

C

D
PBIB0145E

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS

E

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
INFOID:0000000009022441

F

DESIGN/PURPOSE
When engine oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure warning
lamp informs the driver of low oil pressure to prevent damage to the
engine.

G

H

I
JPNIA1881ZZ

BULB CHECK

J

Not applicable

OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIGNAL

K

For the operation for CAN communications blackout or abnormal signal reception, refer to MWI-19, «Fail-safe».

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

L

M

N

JSBIA2846GB

SIGNAL PATH
ECM calculates an engine oil pressure according to a signal transmitted from the engine oil pressure sensor.
When the engine oil pressure is low, ECM transmits the engine oil pressure warning lamp signal to combination meter via CAN communication. Then the engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates.

SHUTOFF CONDITION
When any of the following conditions is satisfied:
• Ignition switch: OFF
• Engine oil pressure is the specified value or more.

LIGHTING CONDITION
Revision: April 2013

EC-23

2014 Note

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When any of the following conditions is satisfied:
• Ignition switch: ON
• Engine oil pressure is less than specified value.

TIMING CHART

JPBIA6026GB

WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
INFOID:0000000009022439

DESIGN/PURPOSE
When a malfunction which increases exhaust gases is detected, ECM turns ON MIL and informs the driver of
the necessity of inspection and repair.
When a malfunction which causes damage to the catalyst is
detected, ECM immediately blinks MIL to alert the driver.

JSBIA1315ZZ

BULB CHECK
The bulb turns ON after turning ON the ignition switch (engine stop) and turns OFF after restarting the engine.

OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIGNAL
For the operation for CAN communication blackout in the combination meter, refer to MWI-19, «Fail-safe».

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JPBIA6021GB

SIGNAL PATH
Revision: April 2013

EC-24

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• When the lighting conditions of the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) are satisfied, ECM transmits a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• The combination meter turns ON or blinks the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), according to a signal
received from ECM.

LIGHTING CONDITION

A

EC

When all of the following conditions are satisfied:
• Ignition switch: ON
• DTC which influences on exhaust gasses is judged.
For DTCs that the malfunction indicator lamp turns ON and the number of DTC diagnosis trips, refer to EC-76,
«DTC Index».

C

SHUTOFF CONDITION

D

When any of the following conditions is satisfied:
• Ignition switch: OFF
• Erase DTC
NOTE:
For the conditions of erasing DTC, refer to EC-43, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze Frame
Data».

E

F

TIMING CHART

G

H

I

J

JPBIA6022GB

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-25

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation

INFOID:0000000009022447

PBIB2962E

This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions.

PBIB1588E

Revision: April 2013

EC-26

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022448

EC

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

JPBIA5483GB

NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

EC-27

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Buttery current sensor is not apply.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls the engine by various functions.
Function

Reference

Fuel injection control

EC-30, «MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description»

Electric ignition control

EC-32, «ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System Description»

Intake valve timing control

EC-37, «INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description»

Exhaust valve timing control

EC-38, «EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description»

Engine protection control (Low engine oil pressure)

EC-38, «ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE
OIL PRESSURE : System Description»

Air conditioning cut control

EC-33, «AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Description»

Cooling fan control

EC-35, «COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description»

Evaporative emission

EC-36, «EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Description»

Warning/Indicator/Chime control

EC-39, «WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning lamps/Indicator lamps»

CAN communication

EC-34, «CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description»

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail Safe

INFOID:0000000009582428

NON DTC RELATED ITEM
Detected
items

Engine operating condition
in fail-safe mode

Malfunction
indicator
lamp circuit

Engine speed will not rise
more than 2,500 rpm due
to the fuel cut

Remarks

Reference page

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open
by means of operating fail safe function.
The fail safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

EC-324, «Component Function
Check»

DTC RELATED ITEM
DTC No.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail safe mode

P0011

Intake valve timing control

The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.

P0014

Exhaust valve timing control

The signal is not energized to the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.

P0102
P0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

Revision: April 2013

EC-28

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC No.
P0117
P0118

Detected items
Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit

Engine operating condition in fail safe mode
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following conditions.
CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT display)

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START

40°C (104°F)

Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting

80°C (176°F)
40 — 80°C (104 — 176°F)
(Depends on the time)

Except as shown above

A

EC

C

When the fail safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.

D

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

E

Exhaust valve timing control does not function.

F

P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135

Throttle position sensor

P0197
P0198

Engine oil temperature sensor

P0500

Vehicle speed sensor

The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running.

P0605

ECM

(When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

G

P0643

Sensor power supply

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

H

P1805

Brake switch

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition

I

Driving condition

When engine is idling

Normal

When accelerating

Poor acceleration

J

P2100
P2103

Throttle control motor relay

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2101

Electric throttle control function

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2118

Throttle control motor

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2119

Electric throttle control actuator

(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.

M

(When throttle valve opening angle in fail safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.

N

(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in the Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Revision: April 2013

EC-29

2014 Note

K

L

O

P

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022451

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSBIA3075GB

*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor, camshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor.

VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below.

•
•
•
•
•
•

During warm-up
When starting the engine
During acceleration
Hot-engine operation
When selector lever position is changed from N to D (CVT models)
High-load, high-speed operation

• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation

Revision: April 2013

EC-30

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)

[HR16DE]
A

EC

C
PBIB2793E

The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for drive ability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-15, «Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1». This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal airfuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
— Deceleration and acceleration
— High-load, high-speed operation
— Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
— Insufficient activation of heated sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
— High engine coolant temperature
— During warm-up
— After shifting from N to D (CVT models)
— When starting the engine

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes “short-term fuel trim” and “long-term fuel trim”.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the “short-term fuel trim” from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-31

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
FUEL INJECTION TIMING

SEF337W

Two types of systems are used.
• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals
of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail safe system (CPU) is operating.

FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022452

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSBIA3076GB

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 — 3 — 4 — 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
Revision: April 2013

EC-32

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022453

A

EC

C

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D

E

F

G

H

I

J

JSBIA3077GB

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

K

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

L

M

N

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-33

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description

INFOID:0000000009509477

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSBIA3607GB

*1: M/T models
*2: CVT models

BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
• Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can be set the vehicle speed in the set speed range.
• ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
• Operation status of ASCD is indicated in combination meter.
• If any malfunction occurs in the ASCD system, it automatically deactivates the ASCD control.
Refer to EC-40, «AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Switch Name and Function» for ASCD
operating instructions.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

CAN COMMUNICATION

CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022454

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-29, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart», about CAN communication for detail.

COOLING FAN CONTROL

Revision: April 2013

EC-34

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022455

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC

C

D

E

F
JSBIA3078GB

*: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

G

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed corresponding to vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, air conditioner ON signal. Then control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].

H

Cooling Fan Operation
I

J

K

L

M
PBIB2483E

N

Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan speed

O

Cooling fan relay
1

2

3

Stop (OFF)

OFF

OFF

OFF

Low (LOW)

ON

OFF

OFF

High (HI)

ON

ON

ON

P

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

EC-35

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022456

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSBIA0114GB

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PBIB3039E

The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL

Revision: April 2013

EC-36

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022457

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC

C

D

E

JSBIA3079GB

F

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

G

H

I

J

K

JPBIA4884GB

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing (IVT) control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open
timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-37

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009022458

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSBIA3080GB

*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

JPBIA4886GB

This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the exhaust
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed and engine oil temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the exhaust valve timing (EVT) control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the exhaust valve
to increase engine torque and output in a range of high engine speed.

ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE : System De-

Revision: April 2013

EC-38

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

scription

INFOID:0000000009022460

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC

C

D
JSBIA0704GB

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor

E

Input signal to ECM

Engine oil pressure sensor

Engine pressure

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Engine speed

ECM function
Engine protection control
• Oil pressure warning lamp signal

Actuator
Combination meter
• Oil pressure warning lamp

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine protection control at low engine oil pressure warns the driver of a decrease in engine oil pressure by the oil pressure warning lamp a before the engine becomes damaged.
• When detecting a decrease in engine oil pressure at an engine speed less than 1,000 rpm, ECM transmits
an oil pressure warning lamp signal to the combination meter. The combination meter turns ON the oil pressure warning lamp, according to the signal.
Decrease in engine
oil pressure
Detection

Combination meter

Engine speed

F

G

H

I

Oil pressure warning lamp

Less than 1,000 rpm

ON*

1,000 rpm or more

ON

J

*: When detecting a normal engine oil pressure, ECM turns OFF the oil pressure warning lamp.

WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST

K

WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning lamps/Indicator lamps

INFOID:0000000009022461

L

Regarding the arrangement. Refer to MWI-6, «METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter».

Name

Design

Arrangement/Function

Engine oil pressure warning
lamp

Regarding the function. Refer to EC-23, «WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp».

M

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Regarding the function. Refer to EC-24, «WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR
LAMPS : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-39

2014 Note

OPERATION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

OPERATION
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Switch Name and Function
INFOID:0000000009582728

SWITCHES AND INDICATORS

JPBIA5485ZZ

CRUISE indicator

SET indicator

CANCEL switch

ACCEL/RES switch

COAST/SET switch

ASCD MAIN switch

On the combination meter
(Information display)

On the steering wheel

SET SPEED RANGE
ASCD system can be set the following vehicle speed.
Minimum speed (Approx.)
30 km/h (19 MPH)

Maximum speed (Approx.)
170 km/h (105 MPH)

SWITCH OPERATION
Item

Function

CANCEL switch

Cancels the cruise control driving.

ACCEL/RES switch
(ACCELERATE/RESUME)

• Resumes the set speed.
• Increases speed incrementally during cruise control driving.

COAST/SET switch

• Sets desired cruise speed.
• Decreases speed incrementally during cruise control driving.

ASCD MAIN switch

Master switch to activate the ASCD system.

SET OPERATION
Press ASCD MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) and 170 km/h (105
MPH), press COAST/SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)

ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the ACCEL/RES switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is
released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to neutral position. (M/T models)
• Selector lever is changed to N, P or R position (CVT models)
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
Revision: April 2013

EC-40

2014 Note

OPERATION
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform A
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE indicator may
blink slowly.
EC
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE indicator will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/− switch or RES/+ switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET indicator will blink quickly.
• Speed limiter MAIN switch is pressed.(Set speed is cleared.)
C
• ASCD MAIN switch is pressed.(Set speed is cleared.)

COAST OPERATION
When the COAST/SET switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.

RESUME OPERATION
When the ACCEL/RES switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed,
vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following
conditions.
• Brake pedal is released
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• Selector lever is in other than P and N positions (CVT models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) and less than 170 km/h (105 MPH)

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-41

2014 Note

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description

INFOID:0000000009022462

This system is an on board diagnostic system that records exhaust emission-related diagnostic information
and detects a sensors/actuator-related malfunction. A malfunction is indicated by the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) and stored in ECU memory as a DTC. The diagnostic information can be obtained with the diagnostic tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).

GST (Generic Scan Tool)

INFOID:0000000009022463

When GST is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the
control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to EC-42, «Diagnosis Description».
NOTE:
Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.

Revision: April 2013

EC-42

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)

A

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1st Trip Detection Logic and Two Trip Detection Logic
INFOID:0000000009022464

When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time when the DTC is stored.
<2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink
the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.

EC

C

D

×: Applicable —: Not applicable

MIL
Items

DTC

1st trip

2nd trip

1st trip DTC

Blinking

Illuminated

Blinking

Illuminated

1st trip
displaying

2nd trip
displaying

1st trip
displaying

Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 – P0308 is
being detected

×

—

—

—

—

—

×

—

Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 – P0308 is
being detected

—

—

×

—

—

×

—

—

One trip detection diagnoses (Refer
to EC-76, «DTC Index».)

—

×

—

—

×

—

—

—

Except above

—

—

—

×

—

×

×

—

E

2nd trip
displaying

F

G

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze Frame Data

INFOID:0000000009022465

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

H

I

J

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-76, «DTC Index». These items are required
by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illuminating the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-107, «Work Flow». Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.

M

FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

P

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen.
Revision: April 2013

EC-43

2014 Note

K

L

N

O

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1

Items
Freeze frame data

2
3

Misfire — DTC: P0300 – P0308
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
Except the above items

1st trip freeze frame data

For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System

INFOID:0000000009022466

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on.
• The MIL will turn OFF after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.

COUNTER SYSTEM CHART
Items
MIL (turns OFF)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display)
1st Trip DTC (clear)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear)

Fuel Injection System

Misfire

Other

3 (pattern B)

3 (pattern B)

3 (pattern B)

80 (pattern C)

80 (pattern C)

40 (pattern A)

1 (pattern C), *1

1 (pattern C), *1

1 (pattern B)

*1, *2

*1, *2

1 (pattern B)

For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR
DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
• *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
• *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.

Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire ”, “Fuel Injection System”
Revision: April 2013

EC-44

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
JMBIA1417GB

*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL
will light up.

*2: MIL will turn OFF after vehicle is driv- *3: When the same malfunction is deen 3 times (pattern B) without any
tected in two consecutive trips, the
malfunctions.
DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for
*6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after
the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the
freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C)
1st trip freeze frame data will be
the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The
stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

*8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.

Driving Pattern B
Refer to EC-47, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern».
Driving Pattern C

EC-45

N

O

P

Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire ”, “Fuel Injection System”

Revision: April 2013

M

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Refer to EC-47, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern».
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 – 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 – 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than
70°C (158°F)

Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire ”, “Fuel Injection System”

JMBIA1418GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-46

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL
will light up.

*2: MIL will turn OFF after vehicle is driv- *3: When the same malfunction is deen 3 times (pattern B) without any
tected in two consecutive trips, the
malfunctions.
DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.

A

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data
will not be displayed any longer after
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A)
without the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.)

*5: When a malfunction is detected for
*6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehithe first time, the 1st trip DTC and the
cle is driven once (pattern B) without
1st trip freeze frame data will be
the same malfunction.
stored in ECM.

EC

*7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared.

C

D

Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire ”, “Fuel Injection
System”
Driving Pattern A
Refer to EC-47, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern».
Driving Pattern B
Refer to EC-47, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern».

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern

E

F
INFOID:0000000009022467

G

DRIVING PATTERN A
Driving pattern A means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
• Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more.
• Engine coolant temperature rises by 20°C (36°F) or more after starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more.
• The ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern
A.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern A.

DRIVING PATTERN B
Driving pattern B means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
• Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more.
• Engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more.
• Vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (44 – 75 MPH) is maintained for 60 seconds or more under the control of
closed loop.
• Vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) is maintained for 10 seconds or more under the control of
closed loop.
• Under the closed loop control condition, the following state reaches 12 seconds or more in total: Vehicle
speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less with idling condition.
• The state of driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more reaches 10 minutes or more in total.
• A lapse of 22 minutes or more after engine start.
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle at a constant velocity.
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern
B.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern B.

DRIVING PATTERN C
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as per the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature condition:

Revision: April 2013

EC-47

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), engine coolant temperature should be lower
than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), engine coolant temperature should
be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).
NOTE:
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of the above vehicle conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern C.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern C.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness Test (SRT) Code

INFOID:0000000009022468

System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.

SRT SET TIMING
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result
All OK

Case 1

Case 2

Revision: April 2013

Diagnosis

← ON →

OFF

Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF

← ON →

P0400

OK (1)

— (1)

OK (2)

— (2)

P0402

OK (1)

— (1)

— (1)

OK (2)

P1402

OK (1)

OK (2)

— (2)

— (2)

SRT of EGR

“CMPLT”

“CMPLT”

“CMPLT”

“CMPLT”

P0400

OK (1)

— (1)

— (1)

— (1)

P0402

— (0)

— (0)

OK (1)

— (1)

P1402

OK (1)

OK (2)

— (2)

— (2)

SRT of EGR

“INCMP”

“INCMP”

“CMPLT”

“CMPLT”

EC-48

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Example
Self-diagnosis result
NG exists

Diagnosis

Case 3

Ignition cycle
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →

A
OFF ← ON →

P0400

OK

OK

—

—

P0402

—

—

—

—

P1402

NG

—

NG

NG
(Consecutive NG)

(1st trip)
DTC

1st trip DTC

—

1st trip DTC

DTC
(= MIL ON)

SRT of EGR

“INCMP”

“INCMP”

“INCMP”

“CMPLT”

EC

C

D

OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.

When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1)
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT and the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from the ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

INFOID:0000000009022470

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Revision: April 2013

EC-49

F

G

H

I

J

INFOID:0000000009022469

• When detecting a DTC that affects exhaust gas, the exhaust emission-related control module transmits a malfunction indicator lamp
signal to ECM via CAN communication line.
ECM prioritizes (MIL: ON/blink) the signal received from the
exhaust emission-related control module and the ECM-stored DTC
that affects exhaust gas and transmits a malfunction indicator lamp
signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line.
The combination meter turns ON or blinks the MIL, according to
the signal transmitted from ECM, and alerts the driver of malfunction detection.
• Control modules that a DTC of MIL ON/Blink is stored (Control
JSBIA1315ZZ
module varies among DTCs.):
— ECM
— TCM
1. The MIL illuminates when ignition switch is turned ON (engine is not running).
NOTE:
Check the MIL circuit if MIL does not illuminate. Refer to EC-324, «Component Function Check».
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
NOTE:
If MIL remains ON or continues blinking, a DTC(s) that affects exhaust gas is detected. In this case, Self
diagnosis is required for performing inspection and repair.

On Board Diagnosis Function

E

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The on board diagnostic system has the following functions.
Diagnostic test mode

Function

Bulb check

MIL can be checked.

SRT status

ECM can read if SRT codes are set.

Malfunction warning

If ECM detects a malfunction, it illuminates or blinks MIL to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected.

Self-diagnostic results

DTCs or 1st trip DTCs stored in ECM can be read.

Accelerator pedal released position learning

ECM can learn the accelerator pedal released position. Refer to EC-113, «Description».

Throttle valve closed position learning

ECM can learn the throttle valve closed position. Refer to EC-114, «Description».

Idle air volume learning

ECM can learn the idle air volume. Refer to EC-115, «Description».

Mixture ratio self-learning value clear

Mixture ratio self-learning value can be erased. Refer to EC-117, «Description».

BULB CHECK MODE
Description
This function allows damage inspection in the MIL bulb (blown, open circuit, etc.).
Operation Procedure

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
The MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON.
If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-324, «Component Function Check».

SRT STATUS MODE
Description
This function allows to read if ECM has completed the self-diagnoses of major emission control systems and
components. For SRT, refer to EC-48, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness Test (SRT) Code».
Operation Procedure

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
SRT status is indicated as shown blow.
• ECM continues to illuminate MIL if all SRT codes are set.
• ECM blinks MIL for about 10 seconds if all SRT codes are not set.

JMBIA1515GB

MALFUNCTION WARNING MODE
Description
In this function ECM turns on or blinks MIL when it detects a malfunction in the emission control system components and/or the powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions) to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
Operation Procedure

Revision: April 2013

EC-50

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
A
2. Check that MIL illuminates.
If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-324, «Component Function Check».
3. Start engine and let it idle.
• For two trip detection logic diagnoses, ECM turns on MIL when it detects the same malfunction twice in EC
the two consecutive driving cycles.
• For 1st trip detection logic diagnoses, ECM turns on MIL when it detects a malfunction in one driving
cycle.
C
• ECM blinks MIL when it detects a malfunction that may damage the three way catalyst (misfire).

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE
Description
This function allows to indicate DTCs or 1st trip DTCs stored in ECM according to the number of times MIL is
blinking.

D

How to Set Self-diagnostic Results Mode
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction.
• After ignition switch is turned off, ECM is always released from the “self-diagnostic results” mode.
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
• Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
• Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until the
MIL starts blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL starts blinking during this period. This blinking
is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to “Self-diagnostic results” mode.
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M
PBIB0092E

How to Read Self-diagnostic Results
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in “malfunction warning” mode, it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-51

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by
using the CONSULT or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.

PBIB3005E

A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes per the following.
Number

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

Flashes

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-seconds) — OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results
By performing this procedure, ECM memory is erased and the following diagnostic information is erased as
well.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
NOTE:
Also, if a battery terminal is disconnected, ECM memory is erased and the diagnostic information as listed
above is erased. (The amount of time required for erasing may vary from a few seconds to several hours.)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-52

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Set ECM in “self-diagnostic results” mode.
6. The diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
7. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.

CONSULT Function

[HR16DE]
A

EC
INFOID:0000000009022471

C

FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode

Function

D

Self Diagnostic Result

Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*

Data Monitor

Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.

Work support

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT unit.

Active Test

Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a specified range.

ECU Identification

ECM part number can be read.

DTC Work Support

The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.

E

*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values

F

G

H

I

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
J

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTCs and 1st trip DTCs related to the malfunction are displayed in “self-diag results”.
• When ECM detects a 1st trip DTC, “1t” is displayed for “TIME”.
• When ECM has detected a current DTC, “0” is displayed for “TIME”.
• If “TIME” is neither “0” nor “1t”, the DTC occurred in the past and ECM shows the number of times the vehicle has been driven since the last detection of the DTC.
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NOTE:
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
3. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)

Freeze frame data item*

FUEL SYS-B2

DTC RESULTS

Revision: April 2013

L

M

N

O

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

FUEL SYS-B1

K

Description
• “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop — using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop — has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX.
(Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».)

EC-53

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Freeze frame data item*

Description

CAL/LD VALUE [%]

The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F]

The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]

• “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule than short-term fuel trim.

L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%]
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%]

• “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base
fuel schedule.

ENGINE SPEED [rpm]

The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

VEHICL SPEED [km/h] or [mph]

The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

INT MANI PRES [kPa]

These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.

COMBUST CONDITION
ABSOL TH·P/S [%]

The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

B/FUEL SCHDL [msec]

The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F]

The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.

*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.

DATA MONITOR MODE
NOTE:
• The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• For reference values of the following items, refer to EC-62, «Reference Value».
Monitored Item
×: Applicable

Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

ENG SPEED

MAS A/F SE-B1

B/FUEL SCHDL

A/F ALPHA-B1

Revision: April 2013

Unit

rpm

V

ms

MAIN
SIGNALS

×

×

×

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

Remarks
Description

Indicates the engine speed
computed from the signal of
the crankshaft position sensor
(POS) and camshaft position
sensor (PHASE).

• Accuracy becomes poor if
engine speed drops below
the idle rpm.
• If the signal is interrupted
while the engine is running,
an abnormal value may be
indicated.

×

The signal voltage of the mass
air flow sensor is displayed.

• When the engine is
stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
• When engine is running,
specification range is indicated in “SPEC”.

×

“Base fuel schedule” indicates
the fuel injection pulse width
programmed into ECM, prior
to any learned on board correction.

When engine is running,
specification range is indicated in “SPEC”.

The mean value of the air-fuel
ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated.

• When the engine is
stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
• When engine is running,
specification range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• This data also includes the
data for the air-fuel ratio
learning control.

×

%

EC-54

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

COOLAN TEMP/S

Unit

°C or °F

MAIN
SIGNALS

×

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

×

Remarks
Description

The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal
voltage of the engine coolant
temperature sensor) is displayed.

A/F SEN1 (B1)

V

×

×

The A/F signal computed from
the input signal of the air fuel
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.

HO2S2 (B1)

V

×

×

The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed.

HO2S2 MNTR(B1)

VHCL SPEED SE

BATTERY VOLT

RICH/LEAN

km/h or mph

×

Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of
oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small.
LEAN: means the amount of
oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large.

×

The vehicle speed computed
from the vehicle speed signal
sent from combination meter
is displayed.

×

TP SEN 2-B1

START SIGNAL

CLSD THL POS

AIR COND SIG

PW/ST SIGNAL

Revision: April 2013

F
When the engine is stopped, a
certain value is indicated.

I

V

ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally.
Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

The throttle position sensor
signal voltage is displayed.

TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by ECM internally.
Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.

V

×

×

×

ON/OFF

Indicates start signal status
[ON/OFF] computed by the
ECM according to the signals
of engine speed and battery
voltage.

ON/OFF

×

Indicates idle position [ON/
OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator
pedal position sensor signal.

×

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of the air conditioner switch as
determined by the air conditioner signal.

×

[ON/OFF] condition of the
power steering system (determined by the signal sent from
EPS control unit) is indicated.

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

×

×

×

EC-55

G

H

The accelerator pedal position
sensor signal voltage is displayed.
×

C

E

V

TP SEN 1-B1

EC

D

The power supply voltage of
ECM is displayed.

ACCEL SEN 1
ACCEL SEN 2

When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or
short-circuited, ECM enters
fail-safe mode. The engine
coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed.

A

After starting the engine,
[OFF] is displayed regardless
of the starter signal.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

Unit

MAIN
SIGNALS

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

Remarks
Description

LOAD SIGNAL

ON/OFF

×

×

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of the electrical lode signal.
ON: Rear window defogger
switch is ON and/or lighting
switch is 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and lighting switch
are OFF.

IGNITION SW

ON/OFF

×

×

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from ignition switch signal.

HEATER FAN SW

ON/OFF

×

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from the heater fan switch signal.

BRAKE SW

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from the stop lamp switch signal.

INJ PULSE-B1

msec

Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated
by ECM according to the input
signals.

When the engine is stopped, a
certain computed value is indicated.

IGN TIMING

BTDC

Indicates the ignition timing
computed by ECM according
to the input signals.

When the engine is stopped, a
certain value is indicated.

%

“Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current
air flow divided by peak air
flow.

g/s

Indicates the mass air flow
computed by ECM according
to the signal voltage of the
mass air flow sensor.

%

• Indicates the EVAP canister
purge volume control solenoid valve control value
computed by the ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value increases.

INT/V TIM(B1)

°CA

Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance angle.

EXH/V TIM B1

°CA

Indicates [°CA] of exhaust
camshaft retard angle.

CAL/LD VALUE

MASS AIRFLOW

PURG VOL C/V

INT/V SOL(B1)

AIR COND RLY

Revision: April 2013

• The control value of the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases.

%

The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by
ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.

ON/OFF

EC-56

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

FUEL PUMP RLY

THRTL RELAY

COOLING FAN

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

ALT DUTY SIG

VEHICLE SPEED

IDL A/V LEARN

TRVL AFTER MIL

ENG OIL TEMP

A/F S1 HTR(B1)

ALT DUTY

Revision: April 2013

Unit

MAIN
SIGNALS

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

Remarks
Description

ON/OFF

Indicates the fuel pump relay
control condition determined
by ECM according to the input
signals.

ON/OFF

Indicates the throttle control
motor relay control condition
determined by the ECM according to the input signals.

HI/LOW/OFF

Indicates the condition of the
cooling fan (determined by
ECM according to the input
signals).
HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of heated oxygen sensor 2
heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals.

ON/OFF

The control condition of the
power generation voltage
variable control (determined
by ECM according to the input
signals) is indicated.
ON: Power generation voltage
variable control is active.
OFF: Power generation voltage variable control is inactive.

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

km/h or mph

The vehicle speed computed
from the vehicle speed signal
sent from TCM is displayed.

K

YET/CMPLT

Displays the condition of Idle
Air Volume Learning
YET: Idle air volume learning
has not been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learning has already been performed successfully.

km or mile

Distance traveled while MIL is
activated.

M

°C or °F

The engine oil temperature
(determined by the signal voltage of the engine oil temperature sensor) is indicated.

%

• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control value computed by ECM according to
the input signals.
• The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the
value increases.

L

N

O

P

Indicates the duty ratio of the
power generation command
value. The ratio is calculated
by ECM based on the battery
current sensor signal.

%

EC-57

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

BAT CUR SEN

VHCL SPEED SE

A/F ADJ-B1

P/N POSI SW

Unit

MAIN
SIGNALS

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

Remarks
Description

mV

The signal voltage of battery
current sensor is displayed.

km/h or mph

The vehicle speed computed
from the vehicle speed signal
sent from combination meter
is displayed.

×

×

Indicates the correction of a
factor stored in ECM.
The factor is calculated from
the difference between the
target air-fuel ratio stored in
ECM and the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 signal.

—

ON/OFF

INT/A TEMP SE

°C or °F

AC PRESS SEN

V

SET VHCL SPD

km/h or mph

×

×

×

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from the park/neutral position
(PNP) signal.

×

The intake air temperature
(determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated.
The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is
displayed.
The preset vehicle speed is
displayed.

MAIN SW

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from MAIN switch signal.

CANCEL SW

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from CANCEL switch signal.

RESUME/ACC SW

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal.

SET SW

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from SET/COAST switch signal.

BRAKE SW1

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
from brake pedal position
switch signal.

BRAKE SW2

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of stop lamp switch signal.

NON/CUT

Indicates the vehicle cruise
condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low
compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is
cut off.

VHCL SPD CUT

Revision: April 2013

EC-58

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item Selection
Monitored item

LO SPEED CUT

Unit

MAIN
SIGNALS

ECU INPUT
SIGNALS

Remarks
Description
Indicates the vehicle cruise
condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low,
and ASCD operation is cut off.

NON/CUT

A

EC

C

AT OD MONITOR

ON/OFF

Indicates [On/Off] condition of
CVT O/D according to the input signal from the TCM.

D

AT OD CANCEL

ON/OFF

Indicates [On/Off] condition of
CVT O/D cancel request signal.

E

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of CRUISE lamp determined
by the ECM according to the
input signals.

F

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of SET lamp determined by
the ECM according to the input signals.

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of kickdown determined by
the ECM according to the input signals.

ON/OFF

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
clutch pedal position switch
signals.

VTC DTY EX B1

%

• The control value of the exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated.
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases.

THRTL STK CNT B1

—

Not used.

EOP SENSOR

mV

The signal voltage of EOP
sensor is displayed.

CRUISE LAMP

SET LAMP

KICKDOWN POS

CLUTCH P/P SW

HO2 S2 DIAG2(B1)

A/F SEN1 DIAG2(B1)

INCMP/CMPLT

NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not
used.

INCMP/CMPLT

NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not
used.

G

H

I
Models other than M/T models always display OFF.

J

K

L

M

N

NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.

WORK SUPPORT MODE

P

Work Item

Revision: April 2013

O

EC-59

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
WORK ITEM

CONDITION

USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

Fuel pump will stop by touching “START” during idling.
Crank a few times after engine stalls.

When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line

IDLE AIR VOL LEARN

The idle air volume that keeps the engine within the
specified range is memorized in ECM.

When learning the idle air volume

SELF-LEARNING CONT

The coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient.

When clearing mixture ratio self-learning
value

TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ*

Idle condition

When setting target idle speed

TARGET IGN TIM ADJ*

Idle condition

When adjusting target ignition timing

CLSD THL POS LEARN

Ignition on and engine stopped.

When learning throttle valve closed position

*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.

ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM

CONDITION

JUDGMENT

CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

ENG COOLANT
TEMP

• Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
• Change the engine coolant temperature
using CONSULT.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

• Harness and connectors
• Engine coolant temperature
sensor
• Fuel injector

FUEL INJECTION

• Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
• Change the amount of fuel injection using
CONSULT.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

• Harness and connectors
• Fuel injector
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

PURG VOL CONT/V

• Engine: After warming up, run engine at
1,500 rpm.
• Change the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT.

Engine speed changes according to the opening percent.

• Harness and connectors
• Solenoid valve

FUEL PUMP RELAY

• Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF”
using CONSULT and listen to operating
sound.

Fuel pump relay makes the
operating sound.

• Harness and connectors
• Fuel pump relay

COOLING FAN*

• Ignition switch: ON
• Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” and “OFF”
CONSULT.

Cooling fan moves and stops.

• Harness and connectors
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
• Cooling fan motor

IGNITION TIMING

• Engine: Return to the original trouble condition
• Timing light: Set
• Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT.

If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM.

Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.

Engine runs rough or dies.

•
•
•
•
•
•

POWER BALANCE

•
•
•
•

Engine: After warming up, idle the engine.
A/C switch OFF
Shift lever: Neutral
Cut off each fuel injector signal one at a
time using CONSULT.

Harness and connectors
Compression
Fuel injector
Power transistor
Spark plug
Ignition coil

INT V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE

• Engine: Return to the original non-standard condition
• Change intake valve timing using CONSULT.

If malfunctioning symptom
disappears, see CHECK
ITEM.

• Harness and connectors
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

EXH V/T ASSIGN
ANGLE

• Engine: Return to the original non-standard condition
• Change exhaust valve timing using CONSULT.

If malfunctioning symptom
disappears, see CHECK
ITEM.

• Harness and connectors
• Exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve

*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Revision: April 2013

EC-60

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test Item

A
Test mode

HO2S2

A/F SEN1

Test item

Corresponding DTC No.

Reference page

HO2S2 (B1) P1146

P0138

EC-188, «DTC Logic»

HO2S2 (B1) P1147

P0137

EC-183, «DTC Logic»

HO2S2 (B1) P0139

P0139

EC-196, «DTC Logic»

A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279

P0133

EC-179, «DTC Logic»

A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276

P0130

EC-170, «DTC Logic»

SRT & P-DTC MODE
SRT STATUS Mode
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-61

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
ECM
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009022472

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
NOTE:
• The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• Numerical values in the following table are reference values.
• These values are input/output values that ECM receives/transmits and may differ from actual operations.
Example: The ignition timing shown by the timing light may differ from the ignition timing displayed on the
data monitor.
This occurs because the timing light shows a value calculated by ECM according to signals received from
the camshaft position sensor and other sensors related to ignition timing.
• For outlines of following items, refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».
Monitor Item

Condition

ENG SPEED

• Run engine and compare CONSULT value with the tachometer indication.

MAS A/F SE-B1

See EC-129, «Description».

B/FUEL SCHDL

See EC-129, «Description».

A/F ALPHA-B1

See EC-129, «Description».

COOLAN TEMP/S

• Engine: After warming up

A/F SEN1 (B1)

• Engine: After warming up

Values/Status
Almost the same speed as
the tachometer indication.

More than 70°C (158F)
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm

Fluctuates around 2.2 V

• Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met.
— Engine: After warming up
— After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load

0 — 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0 V

VHCL SPEED SE

• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT value with the speedometer indication.

Almost the same speed as
speedometer indication

BATTERY VOLT

• Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)

11 — 14 V

ACCEL SEN 1

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

4.0 — 4.8 V

ACCEL SEN 2

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

3.9 — 4.8 V

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: 1st

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36 V

TP SEN 1-B1

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)
• Shift lever:1st

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36 V

TP SEN 2-B1

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

START SIGNAL

• Ignition switch: ON → START → ON

CLSD THL POS

• Ignition switch: ON
(Engine stopped)

AIR COND SIG

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine

PW/ST SIGNAL

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine

HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)

Revision: April 2013

LEAN ←→ RICH

OFF → ON → OFF

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

ON

Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)

ON

Steering wheel: Not being turned

OFF

Steering wheel: Being turned

ON

EC-62

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item

LOAD SIGNAL

IGNITION SW

Condition

• Ignition switch: ON

Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or
Lighting switch: 2nd position

ON

Rear window defogger switch and lighting
switch: OFF

OFF

• Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON

HEATER FAN SW

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine

BRAKE SW

• Ignition switch: ON

INJ PULSE-B1

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

IGN TIMING

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

Values/Status

EC

ON → OFF → ON
Heater fan switch: ON

ON

Heater fan switch: OFF

OFF

Brake pedal: Fully released

OFF

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ON

Idle

2.0 — 3.0 msec

C

D

E
2,000 rpm

1.9 — 2.9 msec

Idle

11°BTDC (CVT)
10°BTDC (M/T)

2,000 rpm

25° — 45°BTDC

Idle

10% — 35%

CAL/LD VALUE

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

2,500 rpm

10% — 35%

Idle

0.8 — 4.0 g/s

MASS AIRFLOW

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

2,500 rpm

2.0 — 10.0 g/s

Idle

0%

PURG VOL C/V

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

2,000 rpm

0% — 50%

Idle

−5° — 5°CA

INT/V TIM(B1)

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
Quickly

Approx. 0° — 40°CA

Idle

−5° — 5°CA

EXH/V TIM B1

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
Quickly

Approx. 0° — 40°CA

Idle

0% — 2%

INT/V SOL(B1)

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
Quickly

Approx. 0% — 90%

Air conditioner switch: OFF

OFF

Air conditioner switch: ON
(Compressor operates.)

ON

AIR COND RLY

FUEL PUMP RLY

• Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine

F

G

H

ON

• Except above

OFF

EC-63

I

J

K

L

M

• For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON
• Engine running or cranking

Revision: April 2013

A

N

O

P

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
THRTL RELAY

COOLING FAN

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

ALT DUTY SIG
VEHICLE SPEED

IDL A/V LEARN

Condition
• Ignition switch: ON

• Engine: After warning up, idle the
engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF

Values/Status
ON

Engine coolant temperature is 98°C
(208°F) or less

OFF

Engine coolant temperature is between
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)

LOW

Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
(212°F) or more

HIGH

• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
— Engine: After warming up
— Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load

ON

• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating

ON

• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating

OFF

• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT value with the speedometer indication.

Almost the same speed as
speedometer indication

• Engine: running

Idle air volume learning has not been performed yet.

YET

Idle air volume learning has already been
performed successfully.

CMPLT

Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned
ON.

0 — 65,535 km
(0 — 40,723 miles)

TRVL AFTER MIL

• Ignition switch: ON

ENG OIL TEMP

• Engine: After warming up

More than 70°C (158F)

A/F S1 HTR (B1)

• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)

4 — 100%

ALT DUTY

• Engine: Idle

0 — 80%

• Engine speed: Idle
BAT CUR SEN

•
•
•
•

Battery: Fully charged*
Selector lever position: P or N (CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
Air conditioner switch: OFF
No load

Approx 2,500 — 3,500 mV

VHCL SPEED SE

• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT value with the speedometer indication.

Almost the same speed as
speedometer indication

A/F ADJ-B1

• Engine running

−0.330 — 0.330

P/N POSI SW

• Ignition switch: ON

Selector lever position: P or N (CVT) or
Neutral (M/T)

ON

Shift lever: Except above

OFF

INT/A TEMP SE

• Ignition switch: ON

Indicates intake air temperature

AC PRESS SEN

• Engine: Idle
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates.)

1.0 — 4.0 V

SET VHCL SPD

• Engine: Running

ASCD: Operating

The preset vehicle speed is
displayed

MAIN SW

• Ignition switch: ON

MAIN switch: Pressed

ON

MAIN switch: Released

OFF

CANCEL SW

• Ignition switch: ON

CANCEL switch: Pressed

ON

CANCEL switch: Released

OFF

RESUME/ACC SW

• Ignition switch: ON

SET SW

• Ignition switch: ON

Revision: April 2013

ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed

ON

ACCEL/RES switch: Released

OFF

COAST/SET switch: Pressed

ON

COAST/SET switch: Released

OFF

EC-64

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item

Condition

Values/Status

BRAKE SW1
(Brake pedal position switch)

• Brake pedal: Fully released

ON

• Ignition switch: ON

• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

OFF

BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch)

• Ignition switch: ON

Brake pedal: Fully released

OFF

Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

ON

VHCL SPD CUT

• Ignition switch: ON

NON

LO SPEED CUT

• Ignition switch: ON

NON

AT OD MONITOR

• Ignition switch: ON

OFF

AT OD CANCEL

• Ignition switch: ON

OFF

CRUISE LAMP

• Ignition switch: ON

A

EC

C

D

MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at
the 2nd time

ON → OFF

ASCD: Operating

ON

SET LAMP

• MAIN switch: ON
• When vehicle speed: Between
30 km/h (19 MPH) and 170 km/h
(105 MPH)

ASCD: Not operating

OFF

Idle

0 — 2%

VTC DTY EX B1

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever: P or N (CVT) or
Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

2,000 rpm

Approx 0- 90%

KICKDOWN POS

• Ignition switch: ON

Accelerator pedal: Fully released

OFF

Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

ON

CLUTCH P/P SW

• Ignition switch: ON

Clutch pedal: Fully released

OFF

Clutch pedal: Fully depressed

ON

THRTL STK CNT B1

Not used.

—

HO2 S2 DIAG2(B1)

NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not used.

—

EOP SENSOR

• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever position: P or N
(CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

A/F SEN1
DIAG2(B1)

NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not used.

E

F

G

H

I

J

Idle

Approx 1,000 — 2,000 mV

2,000 rpm

Approx 1,500 — 3,500 mV

—

K

L

*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal.
M

TERMINAL LAYOUT

N

O

P

PBIA9221J

PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery.

Revision: April 2013

EC-65

2014 Note

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
• When disconnecting ECM harness connector , loosen
levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.

[HR16DE]
it with

: ECM
: Fasten

• Connect a break-out box and harness adapter between the ECM
and ECM harness connector.
— Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
— Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
• Specification data are reference values and are measured
between each terminals.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT.

Terminal No.
+

JMBIA0029ZZ

Description

–

Signal name

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

Input/
Output

2.6 V

1
(L)

108
(B)

Throttle control motor
(Open)

Output

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
JMBIA0213GB

2
(L/W)

108
(B)

Throttle control motor power
supply

Input

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)
2.9 — 8.8 V

3
(G/W)

108
(B)

A/F sensor 1 heater

Output

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
JSBIA0714GB

1.8 V

4
(P)

108
(B)

Throttle control motor
(Close)

Output

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
JMBIA0215GB

5
(BR/
W)

59
(L/Y)

Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater

Output

[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met
— Engine: after warming up
— Keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no
load
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

Revision: April 2013

EC-66

10 V

JMBIA0214GB

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
+

Description

–

Signal name

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

Input/
Output

A

BATTERY VOLTAGE

EC

(11 — 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed

9
(SB)

108
(B)

EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve

C

JMBIA0039GB

Output

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

E

[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm
(More than 100 seconds after starting engine.)

F

JMBIA0216GB

10
(B)

—

ECM ground

—

—

—

11
(B/Y)

—

ECM ground

—

—

—

12
(L/W)

Fuel injector No. 3 (Rear)

20
(O/W)

Fuel injector No. 2 (Rear)

24
(R)
25
(R)

H

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
on rpm at idle

(11 — 14 V)

I

J

Fuel injector No. 4 (Rear)
108
(B)

JMBIA0221GB

Output

Fuel injector No. 3 (Front)

30
(O)

Fuel injector No. 2 (Front)

31
(L)

Fuel injector No. 1 (Front)

K

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Fuel injector No. 4 (Front)

29
(G)

15
(G/W)

G

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Fuel injector No. 1 (Rear)

16
(G)

D

(11 — 14 V)

L

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

M
JMBIA0222GB

108
(B)

Throttle control motor relay

Output

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

[Ignition switch: ON]

0 — 1.0 V

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-67

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
+

Description

–

Signal name

17
(V)

Ignition signal No. 1

18
(Y/B)

Ignition signal No. 2

21
(W)

108
(B)

22
(BR)

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

Input/
Output

0 — 0.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
on rpm at idle
JMBIA0219GB

Output
0.2 — 0.5 V

Ignition signal No. 4
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm

Ignition signal No. 3

JMBIA0220GB

23
(GR)

32
(P)

33
(W)

34
(B)

108
(B)

108
(B)

36
(R)

36
(R)

Fuel pump relay

ECM relay
(Self shut-off)

Throttle position sensor 1

Throttle position sensor 2

Output

Output

Input

Input

[Ignition switch: ON]
• For 1 second after turning ignition
switch ON
[Engine is running]

0 — 1.0 V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
• A few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF

0 — 1.0 V

[Ignition switch: OFF]
• More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released

More than 0.36 V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released

Less than 4.75 V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

More than 0.36 V

—

—

36
(R)

—

Sensor ground
(Throttle position sensor)

37
(W)

40
(L)

Knock sensor

Input

[Engine is running]
• Idle speed

2.5 V

38
(LG/B)

44
(P)

Engine coolant temperature
sensor

Input

[Engine is running]

0 — 4.8 V
Output voltage varies with battery
temperature.

40
(L)

—

Sensor ground
(Knock sensor shield circuit)

—

—

—

Revision: April 2013

—

EC-68

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.

Description

+

–

Signal name

Input/
Output

44
(P)

—

Sensor ground
(Engine coolant temperature
sensor)

—

45
(G/B)

46
(V)

47
(Y)

52
(L/G)

52
(LG)

60
(L)

Mass air flow sensor

Intake air temperature sensor

Engine oil pressure sensor

Input

Input

Input

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

A

EC

—

—

[Ignition switch ON]
• Engine stopped

0.4V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed

0.8 — 1.3 V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine is revving from idle to about
4,000 rpm

0.8 — 1.3 to 2.4 V
(Check for linear voltage rise in
response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.)

E

[Engine is running]

0 — 4.8 V
Output voltage varies with intake
air temperature.

F

C

D

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed

1.0 — 2.0 V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

1.5 — 3.5 V

G

H
4.3 V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
on rpm at idle
48
(W/R)

63
(W)

Exhaust valve timing control
position sensor

I

J
JSBIA0716GB

Input
4.3 V

K

[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

L
JSBIA0717GB

49
(G)

50
(L/R)

108
(B)

59
(L/Y)

52
(LG)

—

53
(L)

108
(B)

A/F sensor 1

Heated oxygen sensor 2

Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor/Intake
air temperature sensor)
A/F sensor 1

Revision: April 2013

Input

[Ignition switch: ON]

Input

[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000
rpm quickly after the following conditions are met
— Engine: after warming up
— Keeping the engine speed between
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no
load

0 — 1.0 V

—

—

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm

1.8 V
Output voltage varies with air fuel
ratio.

—

Input

EC-69

M

2.2 V

N

O

P

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.

Description

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

+

–

Signal name

Input/
Output

54
(BR)

—

Sensor ground
(Engine oil temperature sensor)

—

—

—

55
(G/L)

—

Sensor ground
(Intake air l temperature
sensor)

—

—

—

57
(P)

54
(BR)

[Engine is running]

0 — 4.8 V
Output voltage varies with engine
oil temperature.

59
(L/Y)

—

Sensor ground
(Heated oxygen sensor 2)

—

—

—

60
(L)

—

Sensor ground
(Engine oil pressure sensor)

—

—

—

Engine oil temperature sensor

Input

4.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
on rpm at idle
61
(L/O)

62
(G)

Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)

JMBIA2185GB

Input
4.0 V

[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm

JMBIA2186GB

62
(G)

63
(W)

—

Sensor ground
[Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)]

—

—

—

—

Sensor ground
[Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE), exhaust valve timing control position sensor]

—

—

—

4.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
on rpm at idle
65
(R/W)

63
(W)

Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE)

JSBIA0718GB

Input
4.3 V

[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm

JSBIA0719GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-70

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
+

69
(BR)

72
(G)

Description

–

108
(B)

36
(R)

Signal name

PNP signal

Sensor power supply
(Throttle position sensor)

Value
(Approx.)

A

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Shift lever: P or N (CVT), Neutral (M/
T)

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

EC

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Shift lever: Except above position

0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

Condition

Input/
Output

Input

—

C

D

E

7 — 10 V
73
(P)

108
(B)

Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve

Output

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• When revving engine up to
2,000rpm quickly

F

JSBIA0720GB

74
(O)

60
(W)

Sensor power supply
(Engine oil pressure sensor)

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

75
(O)

62
(G)

Sensor power supply
[Crankshaft position sensor
(POS)]

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

H

I

J

7 — 10 V
77
(P/W)

108
(B)

Exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve

Output

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• When revving engine up to
2,000rpm quickly

K

JSBIA0720GB

78
(BR)

63
(W)

Sensor power supply
[Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE), exhaust valve timing control position sensor]

81
(V)

108
(B)

Power supply for ECM
(Back-up)

83
(P)

—

CAN-L

84
(L)

—

CAN-H

85
(V)

98
(LG)

88
(GR)

—

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Data link connector

Revision: April 2013

G

L

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

Input

[Ignition switch: OFF]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

Input/
Output

—

—

Input/
Output

—

—

O

[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Both A/C switch and blower fan
switch: ON (Compressor operates)

1.0 — 4.0 V

P

—

—

Input

Input/
Output

EC-71

M

2014 Note

N

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
+

–

92
(R)

108
(B)

93
(L)

108
(B)

94
(Y)

Description

95
(B)

Signal name

Clutch pedal position switch

Ignition switch

ASCD steering switch

Input

Input

Input

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

Input/
Output

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Clutch pedal: Fully released

0V

[Ignition switch: OFF]

0V

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

[Ignition switch: ON]
• ASCD steering switch: OFF

4V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• MAIN switch: Pressed

0V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• CANCEL switch: Pressed

1V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• COAST/SET switch: Pressed

2V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed

3V

95
(B)

—

Sensor ground
(ASCD steering switch)

—

—

—

98
(LG)

—

Sensor ground
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)

—

—

—

99
(LG)

108
(B)

[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Fully released

0V

[Ignition switch: OFF]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

100
(G)

108
(B)

0V

Brake pedal position switch

Input

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
[Ignition switch: ON]
• Brake pedal: Fully released

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

101
(W)

98
(LG)

Sensor power supply
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

102
(BR)

104
(Y)

Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.3 — 0.6 V

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

1.95 — 2.4 V

—

—

Input

[Ignition switch: ON]

BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 — 14 V)

103
(GR)

104
(Y)

Stop lamp switch

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2

Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2)

Input

Input

104
(Y)

—

105
(G)

108
(B)

Power supply for ECM

106
(V)

111
(GR)

Sensor power supply
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)

—

[Ignition switch: ON]

5V

108
(B)

—

ECM ground

—

—

—

Revision: April 2013

—

EC-72

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
+

110
(SB)

Description

–

111
(P)

111
(P)

—

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1

Input

Sensor ground
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1)

—

Value
(Approx.)

Condition

Input/
Output

Signal name

A

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

EC

[Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed

3.9 — 4.7 V

C

—

—

D

: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)

Fail Safe

INFOID:0000000009022473

NON DTC RELATED ITEM
Detected
items

Engine operating condition
in fail-safe mode

Malfunction
indicator
lamp circuit

Engine speed will not rise
more than 2,500 rpm due
to the fuel cut

E

F
Remarks

Reference page

When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open
by means of operating fail safe function.
The fail safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.

G
EC-324, «Component Function
Check»

H

I

DTC RELATED ITEM
J
DTC No.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail safe mode

P0011

Intake valve timing control

The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.

P0014

Exhaust valve timing control

The signal is not energized to the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.

P0102
P0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit

Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.

L

P0117
P0118

Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit

Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following conditions.
CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.

M

Condition

Engine coolant temperature decided
(CONSULT display)

Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START

40°C (104°F)

Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting

80°C (176°F)

Except as shown above

40 — 80°C (104 — 176°F)
(Depends on the time)

K

N

O

When the fail safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122
P0123
P0222
P0223
P2135

Throttle position sensor

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

P0197
P0198

Engine oil temperature sensor

Exhaust valve timing control does not function.

P0500

Vehicle speed sensor

The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running.

Revision: April 2013

EC-73

2014 Note

P

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC No.

Detected items

Engine operating condition in fail safe mode

P0605

ECM

(When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P0643

Sensor power supply

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P1805

Brake switch

ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition

Driving condition

When engine is idling

Normal

When accelerating

Poor acceleration

P2100
P2103

Throttle control motor relay

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2101

Electric throttle control function

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2118

Throttle control motor

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

P2119

Electric throttle control actuator

(When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in the Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.

P2122
P2123
P2127
P2128
P2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor

The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

INFOID:0000000009022474

If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

Revision: April 2013

EC-74

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Priority

1

2

3

DTC

Detected items

U0101, U1001

CAN communication line

P0102, P0103

Mass air flow sensor

P0112, P0113

Intake air temperature sensor

P0117, P0118

Engine coolant temperature sensor

P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1225, P1226, P2135

Throttle position sensor

P0197, P0198

Engine oil temperature sensor

P0327, P0328

Knock sensor

P0335

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

P0340

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

P0500

Vehicle speed sensor

P0520

Engine oil pressure sensor

P0605, P0607

ECM

P0643

Sensor power supply

P0850

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

P1610 — P1615

NATS

P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2138

Accelerator pedal position sensor

P0031, P0032

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater

P0037, P0038

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

P0075

Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

P0078

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

P0130, P0131, P0132, P0133

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

P0137, P0138, P0139

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0444

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

P0603

ECM

P0710, P0715, P0720, P0740, P0744, P0745, P0746,
P0776, P0778, P0840, P1740, P1777, P1778

CVT related sensors, solenoid valves and switches

P1078

Exhaust camshaft position sensor

P1217

Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)

P1805

Brake switch

P2100, P2103

Throttle control motor relay

P2101

Electric throttle control function

P2118

Throttle control motor

P0011

Intake valve timing control

P0014

Exhaust valve timing control

P0171, P0172

Fuel injection system function

P0300 — P0304

Misfire

P0420

Three way catalyst function

P0524

Engine oil pressure

P1564

ASCD steering switch

P1572

ASCD brake switch

P1574

ASCD vehicle speed sensor

P1715

Input speed sensor

P1720

Vehicle speed sensor

P2119

Electric throttle control actuator

Revision: April 2013

EC-75

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009022475

×:Applicable —: Not applicable

DTC*1
CONSULT
GST*2

ECM*3

Items
(CONSULT screen terms)

SRT code

Trip

MIL

Reference page

LOST COMM (TCM)

—

1

×

EC-140

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

—

2

—

EC-141

U0101

0101

U1001

1001*4

P0000

0000

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.

—

—

—

—

P0011

0011

INT/V TIM CONT-B1

—

2

×

EC-142

P0014

0014

EXT/V TIM CONT-B1

—

2

×

EC-146

P0031

0031

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)

—

2

×

EC-149

P0032

0032

A/F SEN1 HTR (B1)

—

2

×

EC-149

P0037

0037

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

—

2

×

EC-151

P0038

0038

HO2S2 HTR (B1)

—

2

×

EC-151

P0075

0075

INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1

—

2

×

EC-153

P0078

0078

EX V/T ACT/CIRC-B1

—

2

×

EC-155

P0102

0102

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1

—

1

×

EC-158

P0103

0103

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1

—

1

×

EC-158

P0112

0112

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1

—

2

×

EC-163

P0113

0113

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1

—

2

×

EC-163

P0117

0117

ECT SEN/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-165

P0118

0118

ECT SEN/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-165

P0122

0122

TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1

—

1

×

EC-167

P0123

0123

TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1

—

1

×

EC-167

P0130

0130

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

×

2

×

EC-170

P0131

0131

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

—

2

×

EC-173

P0132

0132

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

—

2

×

EC-176

P0133

0133

A/F SENSOR1 (B1)

×

2

×

EC-179

P0137

0137

HO2S2 (B1)

×

2

×

EC-183

P0138

0138

HO2S2 (B1)

×

2

×

EC-188

P0139

0139

HO2S2 (B1)

×

2

×

EC-196

P0171

0171

FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1

—

2

×

EC-201

P0172

0172

FUEL SYS-RICH-B1

—

2

×

EC-205

P0196

0196

EOP SEN/CIR

—

2

×

EC-209

P0197

0197

EOP SEN/CIRC

—

2

×

EC-211

P0198

0198

EOP SEN/CIRC

—

2

×

EC-211

P0222

0222

TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1

—

1

×

EC-213

P0223

0223

TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1

—

1

×

EC-213

P0300

0300

MULTI CYL MISFIRE

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-216

P0301

0301

CYL 1 MISFIRE

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-216

P0302

0302

CYL 2 MISFIRE

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-216

P0303

0303

CYL 3 MISFIRE

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-216

P0304

0304

CYL 4 MISFIRE

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-216

P0327

0327

KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1

—

2

—

EC-222

Revision: April 2013

EC-76

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC*1
CONSULT
GST*2

Items
(CONSULT screen terms)

ECM*3

SRT code

Trip

MIL

Reference page

P0328

0328

KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1

—

2

—

EC-222

P0335

0335

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT

—

2

×

EC-224

P0340

0340

CMP SEN/CIRC-B1

—

2

×

EC-228

P0420

0420

TW CATALYST SYS-B1

×

2

×

EC-232

P0444

0444

PURG VOLUME CONT/V

—

2

×

EC-237

P0500

0500

VEHICLE SPEED SEN A*5

—

2

×

EC-240

P0520

0520

EOP SENSOR/SWITCH

—

2

—

EC-242

P0524

0524

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

—

1

—

EC-244

P0603

0603

ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*6

—

2

×

EC-247

P0605

0605

ECM

—

1 or 2

× or —

EC-249

P0607

0607

ECM

—

P0643

0643

SENSOR POWER/CIRC

P0850

0850

P1078

1*

7

×*

7

EC-251

2*8

—*8

—

1

×

EC-252

P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT

—

2

×

EC-254

1078

EXH TIM SEN/CIRC-B1

—

2

×

EC-257

P1217

1217

ENG OVER TEMP

—

1

×

EC-260

P1225

1225

CTP LEARNING-B1

—

2

—

EC-263

P1226

1226

CTP LEARNING-B1

—

2

—

EC-264

P1564

1564

ASCD SW

—

1

—

EC-265

P1572

1572

ASCD BRAKE SW

—

1

—

EC-268

P1574

1574

ASCD VHL SPD SEN

—

1

—

EC-273

P1610

1610

LOCK MODE

—

2

—

SEC-62

P1611

1611

ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM

—

2

—

SEC-63

P1612

1612

CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU

—

2

—

SEC-64

P1715

1715

IN PULY SPEED

—

2

—

EC-275

P1720

1720

V/SP SEN (A/T OUT)

—

2

—

EC-276

P1805

1805

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT

—

2

—

EC-278

P2100

2100

ETC MOT PWR-B1

—

1

×

EC-280

P2101

2101

ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1

—

1

×

EC-283

P2103

2103

ETC MOT PWR

—

1

×

EC-280

P2118

2118

ETC MOT-B1

—

1

×

EC-287

P2119

2119

ETC ACTR-B1

—

1

×

EC-289

P2122

2122

APP SEN 1/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-291

P2123

2123

APP SEN 1/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-291

P2127

2127

APP SEN 2/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-294

P2128

2128

APP SEN 2/CIRC

—

1

×

EC-294

P2135

2135

TP SENSOR-B1

—

1

×

EC-297

P2138

2138

APP SENSOR

—

1

×

EC-300

*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J1979/ ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

Revision: April 2013

EC-77

2014 Note

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

*6: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT screen.
*7: CVT models.
*8: M/T models.

Test Value and Test Limit

INFOID:0000000009421403

The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (e.g., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)

Revision: April 2013

EC-78

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

HO2S

OBDMID

01H

Self-diagnostic test item

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 1)

DTC

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

A
Description

TID

Unit and
Scaling
ID

P0131

83H

0BH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0131

84H

0BH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0130

85H

0BH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0130

86H

0BH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0133

87H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (lean
to rich)

P0133

88H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
lean)

P2A00 or P2096

89H

84H

The amount of shift in air fuel ratio (too
lean)

P2A00 or P2097

8AH

84H

The amount of shift in air fuel ratio (too
rich)

P0130

8BH

0BH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0133

8CH

83H

Response gain at the limited frequency

P014C

8DH

04H

O2 sensor slow response — Rich to
lean bank 1 sensor 1

P014C

8EH

04H

O2 sensor slow response — Rich to
lean bank 1 sensor 1

P014D

8FH

84H

O2 sensor slow response — Lean to rich
bank 1 sensor 1

P014D

90H

84H

O2 sensor slow response — Lean to rich
bank 1 sensor 1

P015A

91H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Rich to
lean bank 1 sensor 1

P015A

92H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Rich to
lean bank 1 sensor 1

P015B

93H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Lean to
rich bank 1 sensor 1

EC

P015B

94H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Lean to
rich bank 1 sensor 1

P0133

95H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (lean
to rich)

P0133

96H

84H

Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
lean)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-79

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

OBDMID

02H

03H

Self-diagnostic test item

Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 1)

Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank 1)

HO2S

05H

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)

Revision: April 2013

DTC

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

Description

TID

Unit and
Scaling
ID

P0138

07H

0CH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0137

08H

0CH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0138

80H

0CH

Sensor output voltage

P0139

81H

0CH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0139

82H

11H

Rear O2 sensor delay response diagnosis

P0143

07H

0CH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0144

08H

0CH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0146

80H

0CH

Sensor output voltage

P0145

81H

0CH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0151

83H

0BH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0151

84H

0BH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0150

85H

0BH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0150

86H

0BH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0153

87H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (lean
to rich)

P0153

88H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
lean)

P2A03 or P2098

89H

84H

The amount of shift in air fuel ratio (too
lean)

P2A03 or P2099

8AH

84H

The amount of shift in air fuel ratio (too
rich)

P0150

8BH

0BH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0153

8CH

83H

Response gain at the limited frequency

P014E

8DH

04H

O2 sensor slow response — Rich to
lean bank 2 sensor 1

P014E

8EH

04H

O2 sensor slow response — Rich to
lean bank 2 sensor 1

P014F

8FH

84H

O2 sensor slow response — Lean to rich
bank 2 sensor 1

P014F

90H

84H

O2 sensor slow response — Lean to rich
bank 2 sensor 1

P015C

91H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Rich to
lean bank 2 sensor 1

P015C

92H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Rich to
lean bank 2 sensor 1

P015D

93H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Lean to
rich bank 2 sensor 1

EC-80

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

OBDMID

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

P015D
05H

HO2S

06H

07H

21H

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Bank 2)

Heated oxygen sensor 2
(Bank 2)

Heated oxygen sensor 3
(Bank2)

Three way catalyst function
(Bank1)

CATALYST

22H

EGR
SYSTEM

31H

Three way catalyst function
(Bank2)

EGR function

Revision: April 2013

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

A
Description

TID

Unit and
Scaling
ID

94H

01H

O2 sensor delayed response — Lean to
rich bank 2 sensor 1

EC

P0153

95H

04H

Response rate: Response ratio (lean
to rich)

P0153

96H

84H

Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
lean)

P0158

07H

0CH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0157

08H

0CH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0158

80H

0CH

Sensor output voltage

P0159

81H

0CH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0159

82H

11H

Rear O2 sensor delay response diagnosis

P0163

07H

0CH

Minimum sensor output voltage for test
cycle

P0164

08H

0CH

Maximum sensor output voltage for
test cycle

P0166

80H

0CH

Sensor output voltage

P0165

81H

0CH

Difference in sensor output voltage

P0420

80H

01H

O2 storage index

P0420

82H

01H

Switching time lag engine exhaust index value

P2423

83H

0CH

Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output
voltage

P2423

84H

84H

O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

P0430

80H

01H

O2 storage index

P0430

82H

01H

Switching time lag engine exhaust index value

P2424

83H

0CH

Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output
voltage

P2424

84H

84H

O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

P0400

80H

96H

Low flow faults: EGR temp change rate
(short term)

P0400

81H

96H

Low flow faults: EGR temp change rate
(long term)

P0400

82H

96H

Low flow faults: Difference between
max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition

P0400

83H

96H

Low flow faults: Max EGR temp

P1402

84H

96H

High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
rate

EC-81

2014 Note

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

OBDMID

35H

Self-diagnostic test item

VVT Monitor (Bank1)

VVT
SYSTEM

36H

EVAP
SYSTEM

VVT Monitor (Bank2)

DTC

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

Description

TID

Unit and
Scaling
ID

P0011

80H

9DH

VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
alignment check diagnosis)

P0014

81H

9DH

VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
alignment check diagnosis)

P0011

82H

9DH

VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
drive failure diagnosis)

P0014

83H

9DH

VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
drive failure diagnosis)

P100A

84H

10H

VEL slow response diagnosis

P1090

85H

10H

VEL servo system diagnosis

P0011

86H

9DH

VTC intake intermediate lock function
diagnosis (VTC intermediate position
alignment check diagnosis)

Advanced: P052A
Retarded: P052B

87H

9DH

VTC intake intermediate lock system
diagnosis (VTC intermediate lock position check diagnosis)

P0021

80H

9DH

VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
alignment check diagnosis)

P0024

81H

9DH

VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
alignment check diagnosis)

P0021

82H

9DH

VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
drive failure diagnosis)

P0024

83H

9DH

VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
drive failure diagnosis)

P100B

84H

10H

VEL slow response diagnosis

P1093

85H

10H

VEL servo system diagnosis

P0021

86H

9DH

VTC intake intermediate lock function
diagnosis (VTC intermediate position
alignment check diagnosis)

Advanced: P052C
Retarded: P052D

87H

9DH

VTC intake intermediate lock system
diagnosis (VTC intermediate lock position check diagnosis)

39H

EVAP control system leak
(Cap Off)

P0455

80H

0CH

Difference in pressure sensor output
voltage before and after pull down

3BH

EVAP control system leak
(Small leak)

P0442

80H

05H

Leak area index (for more than 0.04
inch)

P0456

80H

05H

Leak area index (for more than 0.02
inch)

P0456

81H

FDH

Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
system during monitoring

P0456

82H

FDH

Internal pressure of EVAP system at
the end of monitoring

P0441

83H

0CH

Difference in pressure sensor output
voltage before and after vent control
valve close

3CH

3DH

EVAP control system leak
(Very small leak)

Purge flow system

Revision: April 2013

EC-82

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

O2 SENSOR
HEATER

SECONDARY AIR

OBDMID

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

A
Description

TID

Unit and
Scaling
ID

81H

0BH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

EC

41H

A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1)

Low Input: P0031
High Input: P0032

42H

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1)

Low Input: P0037
High Input: P0038

80H

0CH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

43H

Heated oxygen sensor 3 heater (Bank 1)

P0043

80H

0CH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

45H

A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2)

Low Input: P0051
High Input: P0052

81H

0BH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

46H

Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2)

Low Input: P0057
High Input: P0058

80H

0CH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

47H

Heated oxygen sensor 3 heater (Bank 2)

P0063

80H

0CH

Converted value of heater electric current to voltage

P0411

80H

01H

Secondary air injection system incorrect flow detected

Bank1: P0491
Bank2: P0492

81H

01H

Secondary air injection system insufficient flow

P2445

82H

01H

Secondary air injection system pump
stuck off

P2448

83H

01H

Secondary air injection system high
airflow

Bank1: P2440
Bank2: P2442

84H

01H

Secondary air injection system switching valve stuck open

P2440

85H

01H

Secondary air injection system switching valve stuck open

P2444

86H

01H

Secondary air injection system pump
stuck on

P0171 or P0172

80H

2FH

Long term fuel trim

P0171 or P0172

81H

24H

The number of lambda control
clamped

P117A

82H

03H

Cylinder A/F imbalance monitoring

P0174 or P0175

80H

2FH

Long term fuel trim

P0174 or P0175

81H

24H

The number of lambda control
clamped

P117B

82H

03H

Cylinder A/F imbalance monitoring

71H

81H

Secondary air system

Fuel injection system function
(Bank 1)

FUEL
SYSTEM
82H

Fuel injection system function
(Bank 2)

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-83

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

MISFIRE

OBDMID

A1H

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)
TID

P0301

80H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the first cylinder

P0302

81H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the second cylinder

P0303

82H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the third cylinder

P0304

83H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the fourth cylinder

P0305

84H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the fifth cylinder

P0306

85H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the sixth cylinder

P0307

86H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the seventh cylinder

P0308

87H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the eighth cylinder

P0300

88H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the multiple cylinders

P0301

89H

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the first cylinder

P0302

8AH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the second cylinder

P0303

8BH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the third cylinder

P0304

8CH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the fourth cylinder

P0305

8DH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the fifth cylinder

P0306

8EH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the sixth cylinder

P0307

8FH

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the seventh cylinder

P0308

90H

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the eighth cylinder

P0300

91H

24H

Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
the single cylinder

P0300

92H

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the single cylinder

P0300

93H

24H

Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of
the multiple cylinders

Multiple cylinder misfires

Revision: April 2013

Description

Unit and
Scaling
ID

EC-84

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Item

OBDMID

A2H

A3H

A4H

Self-diagnostic test item

DTC

A7H

A8H

A9H

Description

TID

P0301

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

P0301

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

No. 1 cylinder misfire

EC

P0302

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

P0302

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

P0303

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

P0303

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

No. 2 cylinder misfire

No. 3 cylinder misfire

0BH

No. 4 cylinder misfire

C

D

E

F

G

H

P0304

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

P0305

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

P0305

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

J

P0306

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

K

MISFIRE

A6H

A

Unit and
Scaling
ID

P0304
A5H

Test value and Test
limit
(GST display)

No. 5 cylinder misfire

No. 6 cylinder misfire

I

P0306

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

L

P0307

P0307

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

M

P0308

0BH

24H

EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
Average) misfire counts for last 10 driving cycles

P0308

0CH

24H

Misfire counts for last/current driving
cycles

No. 7 cylinder misfire

No. 8 cylinder misfire

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-85

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009022477

ABBWA1067GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-86

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBWA1068GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-87

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBWA1069GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-88

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBWA1070GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-89

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBWA1071GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-90

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBWA1072GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-91

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1659GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-92

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1660GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-93

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1661GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-94

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1662GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-95

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1663GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-96

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1664GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-97

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1665GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-98

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1666GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-99

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1667GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-100

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1668GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-101

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1669GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-102

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1670GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-103

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1671GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-104

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABBIA1709GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-105

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABBIA1710GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-106

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009022478

EC

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

JSBIA1228GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

EC-107

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-109, «Diagnostic Work
Sheet».)
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC
1.
2.
—

Check DTC.
Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT or GST.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-327, «Symptom Table».)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and is any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-333, «Description» and EC73, «Fail Safe».
Diagnostic Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-333, «Description» and EC73, «Fail Safe».
Diagnostic Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then make sure that DTC is
detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-74, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart» and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Check according to EC-76, «DTC Index».

6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION

Perform EC-118, «Work Procedure».
Do you have CONSULT?
Revision: April 2013

EC-108

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

A

7.PERFORM “SPEC” IN DATA MONITOR MODE

With CONSULT
EC
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Refer to EC-129, «Component Function Check».
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE

D

Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-130, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

E

9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE

Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-327, «Symptom Table» based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.

F

G

>> GO TO 10.

10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnosis Procedure. For details, refer to GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check the voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT. Refer to EC-62, «Reference Value».

11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

H

I

J

K

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.

L

M

>> GO TO 12.

12.FINAL CHECK

When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function
Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC in ECM. If the
completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific “DRIVING PATTERN” in EC-125,
«SRT Set Driving Pattern».

Diagnostic Work Sheet

INFOID:0000000009022479

DESCRIPTION
Revision: April 2013

EC-109

2014 Note

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the WORKSHEET SAMPLE
below in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.

SEF907L

WORKSHEET SAMPLE

MTBL0017

Revision: April 2013

EC-110

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009022480

When replacing ECM, perform additional service.
EC
NOTE:
After replacing with a blank ECM, programming is required to write ECM information. To perform the operation, always follow the work instructions. Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».
C

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022481

1.CHECK ECM PART NUMBER

D

Check ECM part number to see whether it is blank ECM or not.
NOTE:
• Part number of blank ECM is 23703 — ×××××.
• Check the part number when ordering ECM or with delivered package label.
Is the ECM a blank ECM?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

E

F

2.SAVE ECM PART NUMBER

Read out the part number from the old ECM and save the number, following the programming instructions.
Refer to “CONSULT Operation Manual”.
NOTE:
• The ECM part number is saved in CONSULT.
• Even when ECM part number is not saved in CONSULT, go to 3.
>> GO TO 3.

G

H

I

3.PERFORM ECM PROGRAMMING
After replacing ECM, perform the ECM programming. Refer to “CONSULT Operation Manual”.
NOTE:
• During programming, maintain the following conditions:
— Ignition switch: ON
— Electric load: OFF
— Brake pedal: Not depressed
— Battery voltage: 12 — 13.5 V (Be sure to check the value of battery voltage by selecting “BATTERY VOLT” in
“Data monitor” of CONSULT.)

J

K

L

>> GO TO 5.

4.REPLACE ECM

M

Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
N

>> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS IGNITION KEY IDS
O

Refer to SEC-61, «ECM : Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 6.

P

6.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
Refer to EC-113, «Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 7.

7.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

EC-111

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 8.

8.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-115, «Work Procedure».
>> END

Revision: April 2013

EC-112

2014 Note

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009022482

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully released position of the EC
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022483

C

1.START
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

D

Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

E

>> END

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-113

2014 Note

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Description

INFOID:0000000009022484

Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected or electric throttle control actuator inside is
cleaned.

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022485

1.START
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “CLSD THL POS LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Follow the instructions on the CONSULT display.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Without CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Engine coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) or less before engine starts.
2. Warm up the engine.
NOTE:
Raise engine coolant temperature until it reaches 65°C (149°F) or more.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
1.
2.
3.
4.

>> END

Revision: April 2013

EC-114

2014 Note

IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009022486

Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine idle speed EC
within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
C

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022487

1.PRECONDITIONING

D

Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 — 100°C (158 — 212°F)
• Selector lever: P or N (CVT), Neutral (M/T)
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
— For vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, perform one of the following procedures before
starting engine not to illuminate headlamps.
• Apply parking brake
• Set lighting switch to the 1st position
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) position
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
— CVT models
• With CONSULT: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “TRANSMISSION” system indicates less than 0.9 V.
• Without CONSULT: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
— M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

2.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

With CONSULT
Perform ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-113, «Work Procedure».
2. Perform THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
1.

3.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

Without CONSULT
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
1. Perform ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-113, «Work Procedure».
2. Perform THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Revision: April 2013

E

EC-115

2014 Note

P

IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
[HR16DE]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
5. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
6. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Fully release the accelerator pedal.
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
9. Start engine and let it idle.
10. Wait 20 seconds.

PBIB0665E

>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Idle Speed» and EC-339, «Ignition Timing».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
• Check PCV valve operation.
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of
the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-129, «Description».
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and
perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-116

2014 Note

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009022488

This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc- EC
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022489

C

1.START
With CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST to erase the DTC P0102.

D

1.
2.
3.

E

F

G

>> END

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-117

2014 Note

BASIC INSPECTION
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022490

1.INSPECTION START
1.
2.
3.
4.

Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
Open engine hood and check the following:
Harness connectors for improper connections
Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
Hoses and ducts for leaks
Air cleaner clogging
Gasket
Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
Headlamp switch is OFF.
Air conditioner switch is OFF.
Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.

SEF976U

5.

Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT or GST.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

SEF977U

2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3

3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1.

Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.

Revision: April 2013

EC-118

2014 Note

BASIC INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-334, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Idle Speed».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.

[HR16DE]
A

EC

C
PBIA8513J

D

Stop engine.
Perform EC-113, «Work Procedure».

E

>> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

F

Perform EC-114, «Work Procedure».
G

>> GO TO 6.

6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-115, «Work Procedure».
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Follow the instruction of IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING. Then GO TO 4.

H

1.
2.

J

I

7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-334, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Idle Speed».

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

L

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the Following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-228, «DTC Logic».
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-224, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.

M

N

9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.

O

Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to SEC-61, «ECM : Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 4.

10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.

Run engine at idle.

Revision: April 2013

EC-119

2014 Note

P

BASIC INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
For procedure, refer to EC-335, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Ignition Timing».

[HR16DE]

: Timing indicator

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO
>> GO TO 11.

11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1.
2.

MBIB1331E

Stop engine.
Perform EC-113, «Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 12.

12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-114, «Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 13.

13.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-115, «Work Procedure».
Is idle air volume learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO
>> Follow the instruction of IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING. Then GO TO 4.

14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN

1.
2.

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-334, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Idle Speed».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO
>> GO TO 17.

15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1.
2.

Run engine at idle.
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
For procedure, refer to EC-335, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Ignition Timing».
: Timing indicator

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO
>> GO TO 16.
MBIB1331E

16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO
>> Repair the timing chain installation. Then GO TO 4.
Revision: April 2013

EC-120

2014 Note

BASIC INSPECTION
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

A

Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-228, «DTC Logic».
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-224, «DTC Logic».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO
>> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.

EC

C

18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1.
2.

Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to SEC-61,
«ECM : Work Procedure».

D

E

>> GO TO 4.

19.INSPECTION END
If ECM is replaced during this BASIC INSPECTION procedure, perform EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> INSPECTION END

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-121

2014 Note

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022491

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1.FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
Start engine.
After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

>> INSPECTION END

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

1.FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
• Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C,
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because this models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check (B) and fuel tube
adapter [SST: KV10118400 or KV10120000] (D), then connect
fuel pressure gauge (A).
C

: Hose clamp
: To quick connector
: To fuel tube (engine side)

3.

CAUTION:
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine
NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
Remove fuel hose.
CAUTION:
Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

Revision: April 2013

EC-122

PBIB2982E

2014 Note

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
< BASIC INSPECTION >
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check
side) with clamp
as shown in the figure.

[HR16DE]
to fuel tube (engine
A

: No.2 spool
CAUTION:
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth
moistened with gasoline.
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel
tube
and No.1 spool .
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches
the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 — 2 mm (0.04 — 0.08 in).

EC

C
PBIB2983E

D

E

Tightening torque : 1 — 1.5 N·m (0.1 — 0.15 kg-m, 9 — 13 in-lb)
5.

F

• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector .
A : Fuel pressure gauge

6.
7.
8.
9.

G

After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off.
Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
ALBIA1073ZZ
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling

: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

H

I

J

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

L

2.CHECK FUEL HOSE AND FUEL TUBE
If result is unsatisfactory, check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-123

2014 Note

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
Description

INFOID:0000000009022492

OUTLINE
In order to set all SRTs, the self-diagnoses as in the “SRT ITEM” table must have been performed at least
once. Each diagnosis may require actual driving for a long period of time under various conditions.

SRT ITEM
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item*
(CONSULT indication)

Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”

Corresponding DTC No.

CATALYST

Three way catalyst function

P0420

HO2S

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

P0130, P0133

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0137

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0138

Heated oxygen sensor 2

P0139

*: Though displayed on the CONSULT screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.

SRT SERVICE PROCEDURE
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence, referring to the following flowchart.

Revision: April 2013

EC-124

2014 Note

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

JSBIA0399GB

SRT Set Driving Pattern

K

INFOID:0000000009022493

L

CAUTION:

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-125

2014 Note

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
[HR16DE]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Always drive the vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

JSBIA1318GB

NOTE:
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.

Revision: April 2013

EC-126

2014 Note

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
[HR16DE]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest.
A
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
EC
• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
C
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed.

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022494

1.CHECK DTC

D

E

Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair malfunction(s) and erase DTC. Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2.CHECK SRT STATUS

G

With CONSULT
Select “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
Perform “SRT status” mode with EC-49, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
With GST
Select Service $01 with GST.
Is SRT code(s) set?
YES >> END
NO-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 4.

H

I

J

3.DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Select “SRT WORK SUPPORT” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
For SRT(s) that is not set, perform the corresponding “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” according to
the “Performance Priority” in the “SRT ITEM” table. Refer to EC-48, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness Test (SRT) Code».
3. Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair malfunction(s) and erase DTC. Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 7.

4.PERFORM ROAD TEST

• Check the “Performance Priority” in the “SRT ITEM” table. Refer to EC-48, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION :
System Readiness Test (SRT) Code».
• Perform the most efficient SRT set driving pattern to set the SRT properly. Refer to EC-125, «SRT Set Driving Pattern».
In order to set all SRTs, the SRT set driving pattern must be performed at least once.

K

L

M

N

O

>> GO TO 5.

5.PATTERN 1

P

1. Check the vehicle condition;
Engine coolant temperature is −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F).
Fuel tank temperature is more than 0°C (32°F).
2. Start the engine.
3. Keep engine idling until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F)
NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

EC-127

2014 Note

HOW TO SET SRT CODE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
ECM terminal voltage is follows;
• Engine coolant temperature
— −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F): 3.0 — 4.3 V
— 70°(158°F): Less than 1.4 V
• Fuel tank temperature: Less than 4.1 V
Refer to EC-62, «Reference Value».
>> GO TO 6.

6.PATTERN 2
1.

Drive the vehicle. And depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then
release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again
NOTE:
• Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK SRT STATUS
With CONSULT
Select “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
Perform “SRT status” mode with EC-49, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
With GST
Select Service $01 with GST.
Is SRT(s) set?
YES >> END
NO
>> Call TECH LINE or take appropriate action.

Revision: April 2013

EC-128

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
Description

INFOID:0000000009022495

The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode of CONSULT during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC” of
“DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value
in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one
or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correction)
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022496

1.START
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 — 104.3 kPa (0.983 — 1.043 bar, 1.003 — 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 — 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 — 30°C (68 — 86°F)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 — 95°C (167 — 203°F)
• Transmission: Warmed-up
— CVT models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
— M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied
— Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE

L

With CONSULT
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-118, «Work Procedure».
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT.
3. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> END
NO
>> Go to EC-130, «Diagnosis Procedure».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-129

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022497

OVERALL SEQUENCE

PBIB2318E

Revision: April 2013

EC-130

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
PBIB3213E

DETAILED PROCEDURE

P

1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Start engine.
Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-129, «Component Function Check».
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.

Revision: April 2013

EC-131

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because it may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.

2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.

3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 6.
NO-2 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 25.

4.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”

1.
2.
3.
4.

Stop the engine.
Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL

1.
2.

Stop the engine.
Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving condition.
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace fuel filter and fuel pump assembly (Refer to FL-6, «Exploded
View»), and then GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuel filter and fuel pump assembly (Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View»), and then GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair or replace and then GO TO 8.
Revision: April 2013

EC-132

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

8.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”

A
Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
EC
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 9.
C
PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

1.
2.

9.

1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> GO TO 10.

D

E

10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
1. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-322, «Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)».)
2. Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-315, «Component Inspection».)
3. Intake air leakage
4. Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-13, «Inspection».)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuel injector (Refer to EM-40, «Removal and Installation»), and then GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 11.

G

1.
2.

I

F

H

11.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”

Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 12.

12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

J

K

Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-170, «DTC Logic».
• For DTC P0131, refer to EC-173, «DTC Logic».
• For DTC P0132, refer to EC-176, «DTC Logic».
• For DTC P0133, refer to EC-179, «DTC Logic».
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO
>> GO TO 13.

L

M

13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT

N

Perform DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE according to corresponding DTC.
O

>> GO TO 14.

14.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.

Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 15.

15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
Revision: April 2013

EC-133

2014 Note

P

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.

[HR16DE]

>> GO TO 16.

16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
1.
2.

Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-327, «Symptom Table».

17.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 18.
NO-2 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 25.

18.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

1.
2.
—

Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
Engine oil level is too high
Engine oil viscosity
Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
Noise from engine
Noise from transmission, etc.
Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
Valve clearance malfunction
Intake valve timing control function malfunction
Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.

20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value: GO TO 21.

21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Stop the engine.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again.

Revision: April 2013

EC-134

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
>> GO TO 22.

22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”

A

1.
2.

Start engine.
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
EC
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-158, «DTC
C
Logic». Then GO TO 29.
NO
>> GO TO 23.

23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”

D

Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO
>> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor (Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation»), and then GO TO 29.

E

1.
2.

G

24.REPLACE ECM

Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 29.

H

25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.

I

J

K

26.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27.

27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”

Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> GO TO 28.
NO
>> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor (Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation»), and then GO TO 30.

28.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

L

M

N

O

P

Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
Revision: April 2013

F

EC-135

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — SPECIFICATION VALUE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.

29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-327, «Symptom Table».

30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”

Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-327, «Symptom Table».

Revision: April 2013

EC-136

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009022498

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

EC

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

C

2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

D

Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

E

F

10

F10

11

E16

G

108

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

H

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

I

Check the following.
• Harness connectors E55, F55
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground

J

>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Reconnect ECM harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Connector

Terminal

E16

93

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

O

Check the following.
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
• Harness connectors E55, F55
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse

P

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-137

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Connector

Terminal

E16

105

Ground

Voltage

Ground

After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop to approximately 0 V.

[HR16DE]

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F43

50

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Exploded View».

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Connector

Terminal

F10

32

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> GO TO 10.

10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F43.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

32

F43

50

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> GO TO 11.

11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
Revision: April 2013

EC-138

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

[HR16DE]
A

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

12.CHECK 20 A FUSE

EC

1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO
>> Replace 20 A fuse.

C

13.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI

D

1.
2.
3.

E

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E44.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E16

105

E44

11

Continuity

F

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short power in harness or connectors.

G

H

14.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-139

2014 Note

U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Description

INFOID:0000000009418245

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms
(Trouble diagnosis content)

DTC No.
U0101

LOST COMM (TCM)
(Lost communication with TCM)

DTC detecting condition
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of
OBD (emission-related diagnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or more.

POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication line between TCM and ECM

FAIL-SAFE
Not applicable

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-140, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009418246

Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow
Chart».

Revision: April 2013

EC-140

2014 Note

U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009022499

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022500

D

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
U1001

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

CAN communication line

When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication
signal other than OBD (emission related diagnosis) for 2 seconds
or more.

Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line
is open or shorted)

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> EC-141, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

H

Diagnosis Procedure

I
INFOID:0000000009022501

Proceed to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-141

2014 Note

P0011 IVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0011 IVT CONTROL
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022502

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075. Refer to
EC-153, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

Intake valve timing control
performance

P0011

Detecting condition

There is a gap between angle of
target and phase-control angle
degree.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the
camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve
timing control

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.

ENG SPEED

1,200 — 2,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 60°C (140°F)

Shift lever

P or N position (CVT)
Neutral position (M/T)

4.
5.

Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-143, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
1.

With CONSULT
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-142

2014 Note

P0011 IVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ENG SPEED

1,200 — 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 60°C (140°F)

Shift lever

1st or 2nd position

Driving location uphill

Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

A

EC

C

CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-143, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

D

E

INFOID:0000000009022503

F

1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.

Start engine.
Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?
YES >> Proceed to LU-7, «Inspection».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

H

I

J

2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

PBIA8559J

Refer to EC-144, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

K

Refer to EC-226, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

M

Refer to EC-230, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

O

L

3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

N

4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

P

5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
Check the following.

Revision: April 2013

EC-143

2014 Note

P0011 IVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Removal
and Installation».

JSBIA0599ZZ

6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
NO
>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Perform “Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove”. Refer to EM-68, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Clean lubrication line.

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022504

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]

1 and 2

7.0 — 7.7 Ω

1 or 2 and ground

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1.
2.

Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Apply 12 V between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-144

JMBIA2108ZZ

2014 Note

P0011 IVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-145

2014 Note

P0014 EVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0014 EVT CONTROL
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022505

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0014 is displayed with DTC P0078, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0078. Refer to EC155, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P0014

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)

EXH/V TIM CONT-B1
(Exhaust valve timing control
performance)

DTC detecting condition

There is a gap between angle of
target and phase-control angle
degree.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of
the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for exhaust
valve timing control

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.

ENG SPEED

1,200 — 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 60°C (140°F)

Selector lever

P or N position (CVT)
Neutral position (M/T)

4.
5.

Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-147, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
1.
2.

With CONSULT
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-146

2014 Note

P0014 EVT CONTROL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ENG SPEED

1,700 — 2,950 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

Selector lever

1st or 2nd position

Driving location uphill

Driving vehicle uphill
(Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)

A

EC

C

CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-147, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

D

E

INFOID:0000000009022506

F

1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.

Start engine.
Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illuminated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated?
YES >> Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

H

I

J
PBIA8559J

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Check the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EC-148, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

K

Check the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EC-226, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

M

Check the exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EC-230, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

O

L

3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

N

4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXHAUST)
Check the following.

Revision: April 2013

EC-147

2014 Note

P

P0014 EVT CONTROL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Removal
and Installation».

[HR16DE]

JSBIA0600ZZ

6.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
NO
>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT

Refer to EM-68, «Inspection», “INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Clean lubrication line.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022507

1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
+

−

Resistance

2

7.0 — 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

Ground

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

Terminal
1
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1.
2.

Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Provide 12 V DC between exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in exhaust valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Revision: April 2013

EC-148

JMBIA2108ZZ

2014 Note

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022508

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

P0031

P0032

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control circuit low

The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater
circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.)

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1 heater

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control circuit high

The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater
circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.)

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1 heater

C

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.

G

H

I

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J

1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-149, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NG
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

K

INFOID:0000000009022509

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

M

1.
2.
3.

O

N

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.

P
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

EC-149

2014 Note

P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F12

3

F10

3

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022510

1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
Terminal

Resistance

3 and 4

1.80 — 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

3 and 1, 2

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

4 and 1, 2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-150

2014 Note

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022511

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)

DTC No.

P0037

P0038

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

HO2 HTR (B1)
(Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit low)

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

• Harness or connectors
(Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is open or shorted.)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

HO2 HTR (B1)
(Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater control circuit high)

The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2
heater circuit is out of the normal range.
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.)

• Harness or connectors
(Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
circuit is shorted.)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

D

E

F

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.

G

H

I

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-151, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022512

J

K

L

M

N

1.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
Connector

Terminal

E63

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

EC-151

2014 Note

P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

2.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

3

F10

5

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

Check the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater. Refer to EC-152, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022513

1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as per the following.
Heated oxygen sensor 2
+

−

Resistance

3

3.4 — 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

Terminal
2

2
1

3
4
1

4

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

2
3

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-152

2014 Note

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022514

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve circuit

P0075

DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
through intake valve timing control solenoid
valve.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H

1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-153, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009022515

J

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground.
IVT control solenoid valve
Connector

Terminal

F23

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

L

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

N

2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

O

Check the following.
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R

P

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

K

EC-153

2014 Note

P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.
IVT control solenoid valve

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F23

1

F11

73

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-154, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022516

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
+

−

Resistance

2

7.0 — 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

Ground

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

Terminal
1
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View»

2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1.
2.

Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Apply 12 V between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Revision: April 2013

EC-154

JMBIA2108ZZ

2014 Note

P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022517

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)

DTC No.

EX V/T ACT/CIRC-B1
(Exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve circuit)

P0078

DTC detecting condition
An improper voltage is sent to the
ECM through exhaust valve timing
control solenoid valve.

Possible cause

C

• Harness or connectors
(Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
circuit is open or shorted.)
• Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H

1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-155, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009022518

J

1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect exhaust valve timing (EVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground.
EVT control solenoid valve
Connector

Terminal

F32

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

K

L

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

N

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

O

1.
2.
3.

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Check the continuity between EVT control solenoid valve harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.

EVT control solenoid valve

4.

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F32

2

F42

39

Continuity
Existed

Also check harness for short to ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-155

2014 Note

P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

[HR16DE]

3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between EVT control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM harness connector.

EVT control solenoid valve

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F32

1

F11

77

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Check the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EC-156, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022519

1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
+

−

Resistance

2

7.0 — 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

Ground

∞Ω
(Continuity should not exist)

Terminal
1
1
2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II

1.
2.

Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Provide 12 V DC between exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in exhaust valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

EC-156

JMBIA2108ZZ

2014 Note

P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-157

2014 Note

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022520

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0102

Mass air flow sensor circuit
low input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake air leakage
• Mass air flow sensor

P0103

Mass air flow sensor circuit
high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Mass air flow sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102

1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-158, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-158, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II

1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-158, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022521

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Revision: April 2013

EC-158

2014 Note

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Reconnect the parts.

[HR16DE]
A

EC

3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

C

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

D

4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

E

1.
2.
3.

F

Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and ground.
MAF sensor
Connector

Terminal

F31

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

G

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

I

1.
2.
3.

J

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F31

3

F11

52

K

Continuity
Existed

L

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

M

6.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F31

4

F11

45

N

Continuity

O

Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

P

7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-159

2014 Note

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022522

1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.
Monitor item

Condition

MAS A/F SE-B1

MAS A/F SE-B1

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Connector

F11

Terminal

Condition

+

−

45
(MAF sensor
signal)

52

Voltage

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
Crushed air ducts
Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
Improper specification of intake air system parts
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
1.

With CONSULT
Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

Revision: April 2013

EC-160

2014 Note

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.
Monitor item

A

Condition

MAS A/F SE-B1

EC

MAS A/F SE-B1

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

C

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

Without CONSULT
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

D

E

ECM
Terminal

Connector

F11

Condition

Voltage

−

+
45
(MAF sensor
signal)

52

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.

I

4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.
Monitor item

Condition

MAS A/F SE-B1

G

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

F

J

K

MAS A/F SE-B1

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

L

M

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

N

O

ECM
Connector

F11

Terminal
+
45
(MAF sensor
signal)

Condition

Voltage

−

52

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.)

0.5 — 0.6 V

Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.)

0.7 — 1.3 V

Idle to about 4,000 rpm

0.7 — 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*

*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.

Revision: April 2013

EC-161

2014 Note

P

P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-162

[HR16DE]

2014 Note

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022523

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0112

Intake air temperature sensor
circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.

P0113

Intake air temperature sensor
circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Intake air temperature sensor

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-163, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009022524

J

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

K

L

2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ground.
MAF sensor
Connector

Terminal

F31

5

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

P

3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-163

N

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
1.
2.
3.

M

2014 Note

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
MAF sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F31

6

F11

55

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-164, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Refer to EM-26, «Removal and
Installation».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022525

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as follows.
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Temperature [°C (°F)]

Resistance
25 (77)

1.800 — 2.200 kΩ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Refer to EM-26, «Removal and
Installation».

Revision: April 2013

EC-164

2014 Note

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022526

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0117

Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.

P0118

Engine coolant temperature
sensor circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
H

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-165, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009022527

J

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

K

L

2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

M

Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and ground.
ECT sensor
Connector

Terminal

F6

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

N

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

P

3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-165

2014 Note

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECT sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F6

2

F11

44

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, «Exploded View».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022528

1.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, «Exploded View»
Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals

1 and 2

Condition

Temperature [°C (°F)]

Resistance
20 (68)

2.10 — 2.90 kΩ

50 (122)

0.68 — 1.00 kΩ

90 (194)

0.236 — 0.260 kΩ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to
CO-24, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-166

JMBIA0080ZZ

2014 Note

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022529

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0122

Throttle position sensor
2 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.

P0123

Throttle position sensor
2 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
2 is sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 2)

C

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-167, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

J

K
INFOID:0000000009022530

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

M

N

2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector

Terminal

F7

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: April 2013

H

I

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.
2.
3.

G

EC-167

2014 Note

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F7

4

F11

36

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.

Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F7

3

F11

34

Continuity
Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-168, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022531

1.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-114, «Work Procedure».
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-168

2014 Note

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Connector

Terminal
+

Condition
−
Fully released

33
(TP sensor 1 signal)
F11

36
34
(TP sensor 2 signal)

Voltage

Accelerator
pedal

EC

More than 0.36 V

Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

Fully released

Less than 4.75 V

Fully depressed

More than 0.36 V

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
F

>> INSPECTION END

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-169

2014 Note

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022532

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
To judge malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No.
P0130

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit

The A/F signal computed by ECM from
the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly
approx. 2.2 V.

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
Does the indication fluctuate around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-171, «Diagnosis Procedure».

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -I

1.
2.
3.
4.

Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
Touch “START”.
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT screen.

ENG SPEED

1,000 — 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 64 km/h (40 mph)

B/FUEL SCHDL

1.0 — 8.0 msec

Selector lever

D position (CVT models)
4th position (M/T models)

If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Is “TESTING” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check A/F sensor 1 function again. GO TO 2.

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -II

Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

EC-170

2014 Note

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
Which does “TESTING” change to?
COMPLETED>>GO TO 5.
OUT OF CONDITION>>Retry DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GO TO 3.

[HR16DE]
A

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -III

EC

Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Proceed to EC-171, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

6.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION

D

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-171, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-171, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

E

F

INFOID:0000000009022533

G

With GST
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
Shift the selector lever to D position (CVT) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully
until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
8. Restart engine.
9. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
10. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
11. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-171, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

H

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
1.
2.
3.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022534

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.

EC-171

K

L

M

N

P

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Revision: April 2013

J

O

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.
1.
2.
3.

I

2014 Note

P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

4.

ECM
Connector

49

F11

2

Terminal

53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

5. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

Revision: April 2013

EC-172

2014 Note

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022535

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately low.
DTC No.
P0131

C

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit low voltage

The A/F signal computed by ECM from
the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly
approx. 0 V.

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
Is the indication constantly approx. 0 V?
YES >> Proceed to EC-174, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

I

J

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

3.

K

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED

1,000 — 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 40 km/h (25 mph)

B/FUEL SCHDL

1.5 — 9.0 msec

Selector lever

Suitable position

L

M

N

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-174, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

G

H

2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION

1.
2.

F

EC-173

2014 Note

O

P

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022536

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

4.

ECM
Connector

49

F11

2

Terminal

53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

5. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-174

2014 Note

P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]
A

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-175

2014 Note

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022537

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit high voltage

P0132

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

The A/F signal computed by ECM from
the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly
approx. 5 V.

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
Is the indication constantly approx. 5 V?
YES >> Proceed to EC-177, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED

1,000 — 3,200 rpm

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 40 km/h (25 mph)

B/FUEL SCHDL

1.5 — 9.0 msec

Selector lever

Suitable position

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-177, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-176

2014 Note

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022538

A

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

EC

C

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.

D

E
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

G

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

H

I

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

J

1.
2.
3.

K

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

4.

ECM
Connector

49

F11

2

Terminal

53

Continuity

L

Existed

M

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector
and ground.
N
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

O

P
ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

5. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-177

2014 Note

P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

Revision: April 2013

EC-178

2014 Note

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022539

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
DTC No.

P0133

Trouble diagnosis name

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
circuit slow response

DTC detecting condition

Possible Cause

The response of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes
more than the specified time.

• Harness or connectors
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1
• A/F sensor 1 heater
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• PCV
• Mass air flow sensor

C

D

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

H

1.PRECONDITIONING

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I

With CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
6. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
7. Touch “START”.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II

Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Proceed to EC-180, «Diagnosis Procedure».
After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT screen.
Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.

EC-179

L

M

N

O

P

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II

Revision: April 2013

J

K

1.
2.
3.

1.
—

I

2014 Note

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-129, «Component Function Check».
2. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT
screen.
3. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-129, «Component Function Check».
4. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Proceed to EC-180, «Diagnosis Procedure».

5.CHECK AIR-FUEL RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE

With GST
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
• Mass air flow sensor

>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no
load.
3. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
4. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
5. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.
6. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-180, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022540

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

EC-180

2014 Note

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.

A

Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.

EC

C

D
PBIB1216E

Is exhaust gas leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

E

4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

F

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

G

5.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-201, «DTC Logic» or EC-205,
«DTC Logic».
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

H

I

J

K

L

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

N

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

O

P

>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

8.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-181

2014 Note

P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

4.

ECM
Connector

Terminal
49

F11

2

53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

5. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to EC-150, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 12.

10.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

Check both mass air flow sensor.
Refer to EC-160, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».

11.CHECK PCV VALVE

Refer to EC-337, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace PCV valve. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

Revision: April 2013

EC-182

2014 Note

P0137 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0137 HO2S2

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022541

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.

C

D

E
JSBIA0243GB

F
DTC No.

P0137

Trouble diagnosis name

Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit low voltage

DTC detecting condition

The maximum voltage from the sensor does not
reach the specified voltage.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks

G

H

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.INSPECTION START

I

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

J

2.PRECONDITIONING

K

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT.
NOTE:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

EC-183

M

N

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Revision: April 2013

L

2014 Note

O

P

P0137 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Proceed to EC-185, «Diagnosis Procedure».
CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
>> GO TO 3.

5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-184, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-185, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022542

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I
Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
1.
2.
3.

ECM
Connector
F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Voltage

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times

The voltage should be above 0.78 V
at least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector
F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V
at least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
Revision: April 2013

EC-184

2014 Note

P0137 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

A
ECM
Connector
F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Voltage

Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (CVT), 4th
gear position (M/T)

The voltage should be above 0.78 V
at least once during this procedure.

EC

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-185, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

C

D
INFOID:0000000009022543

1.HECK GROUND CONNECTION

E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

F

2.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE

G

1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-201, «DTC Logic».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

H

I

3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.

J

K
HO2S2

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

1

F11

59

Continuity

L

Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

M

4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2

2.

N

O

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

4

F11

50

Continuity
Existed

P

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector ground or ECM harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
Connector

Terminal

E63

4

Revision: April 2013

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

EC-185

2014 Note

P0137 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

50

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-186, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022544

1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

JSBIA1202GB

“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

Revision: April 2013

EC-186

2014 Note

P0137 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at
least 10 times

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

EC

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.

D

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

E

4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes

F

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

G

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III

I

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
J
ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Voltage

K
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T)

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-187

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0138 HO2S2
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022545

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer switching time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during various driving conditions such as fuel cut.

PBIB1848E

MALFUNCTION B
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during various driving conditions such as fuel cut.

JSBIA3141GB

DTC No.

P0138

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

A)

An excessively high voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2

B)

The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
reached to the specified voltage.

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit high voltage

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1.
2.

Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-188

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
A
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-191, «Diagnosis Procedure».
EC
NO-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 12.

3.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

C

“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
TESTING CONDITION:
• For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
• Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from PERFORM
PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II.

D

E

>> GO TO 4.

4.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-I

F

Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
G

>> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II
H

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 6.

I

6.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-III
1. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
2. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
3. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
4. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START”.
6. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds.
7. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm two or three times quickly under no load.
Is “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV

J

K

L

M

When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT screen.
Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”
N
ENG SPEED

More than 1,000 rpm

B/FUEL SCHDL

More than 1.0 msec

COOLAN TEMP/S

70 — 105°C

Selector lever

Suitable position

O

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Which displayed on CONSULT screen?
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 5.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 8.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: COMPLETED”>>GO TO 9.

P

8.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2
Revision: April 2013

EC-189

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the above condition (PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR
COND1-III) until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
approximately 4 seconds).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Which displayed on CONSULT screen?
“COND2: COMPLETED”, “COND3: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 9.
“COND2: COMPLETED”, “COND3: COMPLETED”>>GO TO 10.

9.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-I

Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on CONSULT screen has turned to “COMPLETED”
>> GO TO 10.

10.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-II
Touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Which displayed on CONSULT screen?
“OK” >> INSPECTION END.
“NG” >> Proceed to EC-191, «Diagnosis Procedure».
“CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED”>>GO TO 11.

11.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-III
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
Turn ignition switch ON and select ENGINE using CONSULT.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT.
When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
>> GO TO 6.

12.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-190, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-191, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022546

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM

Connector
F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at
least 10 times

EC-190

Voltage

The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

A

2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

EC

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector
F11

C

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Condition

Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes

Voltage

The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.

E

3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III

F

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

G

ECM
Connector
F11

D

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Condition

Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
(CVT), 4th gear position (M/T)

Voltage

The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-191, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I

INFOID:0000000009022547

J

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-188, «DTC Logic».
Which malfunction is detected?
A
>> GO TO 2.
B
>> GO TO 7.

K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

M

1.
2.
3.

O

L

2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

N

3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.

P
HO2S2

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

1

F11

59

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-191

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2

2.

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

4

F11

50

Continuity
Existed

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector and
ground.
HO2S2
Connector

Terminal

E63

4

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

50

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

6.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-193, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

7.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

8.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE

1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-205, «DTC Logic».
NO
>> GO TO 9.

9.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: April 2013

EC-192

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

1

F11

59

[HR16DE]
A

EC

Continuity
Existed

C

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D

10.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

HO2S2

2.

E

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

4

F11

50

Continuity

F

Existed

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
Connector

Terminal

E63

4

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

G

H

I
ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

50

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

J

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

K

11.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

L

Refer to EC-193, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

M

INFOID:0000000009582429

N

1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

O

P

2.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

EC-193

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
6. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
7. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.

JSBIA1202GB

“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM

Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at
least 10 times

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
Revision: April 2013

EC-194

2014 Note

P0138 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T)

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-195

2014 Note

P0139 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0139 HO2S2
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022549

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel cut.

SEF302U

DTC No.

P0139

Trouble diagnosis name

Heated oxygen sensor 2
circuit slow response

DTC detecting condition

It takes more time for the sensor to respond
between rich and lean than the specified time.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
• Intake air leaks

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.INSPECTION START

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

2.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
9. Open engine hood.
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Revision: April 2013

EC-196

2014 Note

P0139 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
11. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT display.
NOTE:
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

A

EC

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1.
2.

C

Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.

D

>> GO TO 3.

5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
E

With CONSULT
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “P0139” detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-198, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

F

6.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-197, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-198, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

ECM

F11

K

L

M

Terminal

Condition

+

−

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at
least 10 times

Voltage

A change of voltage should be more than
0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

N

O

2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

P

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.

Revision: April 2013

I

J

Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.

Connector

H

INFOID:0000000009022550

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

G

EC-197

2014 Note

P0139 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECM
Terminal

Connector
F11

Condition

+

−

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Keeping engine speed at idle for 10 minutes

Voltage

A change of voltage should be more than
0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.
ECM
Terminal

Connector
F11

Condition

+

−

50
(HO2S2 signal)

59

Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position
(CVT), 4th gear position (M/T)

Voltage

A change of voltage should be more than
0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-198, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022551

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE

1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-201, «DTC Logic» or EC-205,
«DTC Logic».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

1

F11

59

Continuity
Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Revision: April 2013

EC-198

2014 Note

P0139 HO2S2
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.

A
HO2S2

2.

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E63

4

F11

50

Continuity

EC

Existed

Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
C
HO2S2
Connector

Terminal

E63

4

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

50

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

D

Ground

Continuity

E

Ground

Not existed

F

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

G

5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

Refer to EC-199, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

H

I
INFOID:0000000009582430

1.INSPECTION START

J

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

K

2.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2

L

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON and select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

M

N

O

P

JSBIA1202GB

Revision: April 2013

EC-199

2014 Note

P0139 HO2S2
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Without CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM

Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at
least 10 times

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector

F11

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T)

Voltage

The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
least once during this procedure.
The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-200

2014 Note

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022553

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

A/F sensor 1

DTC No.

P0171

Input signal to ECM

Trouble diagnosis name

Fuel injection system too lean

ECM function

Actuator

Fuel injection control

D

Fuel injector

E

DTC detecting condition

• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)

C

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Intake air leaks
A/F sensor 1
Fuel injector
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Lack of fuel
Mass air flow sensor
Incorrect PCV hose connection

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

H

I

J

K

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

L

M

3.RESTART ENGINE

If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system may not start the engine.
Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
YES >> Proceed to EC-202, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Check exhaust and intake air leak visually.

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II

1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-202, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

EC-201

2014 Note

N

O

P

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE

50 — 120 km/h (31 — 75 MPH)

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-202, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022554

1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.

Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

Is exhaust gas leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
Intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector
F12

5.

ECM

Terminal
1
2

Connector
F11

Terminal
49
53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-202

2014 Note

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

EC

C

D

6. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

E

4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.

F

Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».

G

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

H

5. CHECK FUEL HOSES AND FUEL TUBES

I

Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace

J

6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

K

With CONSULT
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.

L

0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:
1.
2.

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

M

With GST
Install all removed parts.
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:

N

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

O

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-158, «DTC Logic».

7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.

Revision: April 2013

EC-203

2014 Note

P

P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR. Refer
to EC-314, «Component Function Check».

PBIB3332E

8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. Refer to EM40, «Exploded View».
PBIA9666J

9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-204

2014 Note

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022555

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

A/F sensor 1

DTC No.

P0172

Input signal to ECM

Trouble diagnosis name

Fuel injection system too rich

ECM function

Actuator

Fuel injection control

D

Fuel injector

E

DTC detecting condition
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.)

C

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•

A/F sensor 1
Fuel injector
Exhaust gas leaks
Incorrect fuel pressure
Mass air flow sensor

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

H

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

J

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-1

K

1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, «Work Procedure».
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

L

3.RESTART ENGINE

M

If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system may not start the engine.
Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
YES >> Proceed to EC-206, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-2

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-3

EC-205

N

O

P

1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-206, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 5.

Revision: April 2013

I

2014 Note

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Start engine.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE

50 — 120 km/h (31 — 75 MPH)

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-206, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022556

1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK
1.
2.

Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

Is exhaust gas leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

5.

ECM
Connector

49

F11

2

Terminal

53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal

F12

Revision: April 2013

1
2

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

EC-206

2014 Note

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

EC

6. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

C

4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
1.
2.

D

Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».

E

At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

F

5. CHECK FUEL HOSES AND FUEL TUBES

G

Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace

H

6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
1.
2.

With CONSULT
Install all removed parts.
Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:

1.
2.

I

J

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

K

With GST
Install all removed parts.
Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:

L

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

M

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-158, «DTC Logic».

7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR

O

With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.

Revision: April 2013

N

EC-207

P

2014 Note

P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR. Refer
to EC-314, «Component Function Check».

PBIB3332E

8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.

Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. Refer
to EM-40, «Exploded View».

9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-208

2014 Note

P0196 EOT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0196 EOT SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022557

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P0196 is displayed with P0197 or P0198, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0197 or
P0198. Refer to EC-211, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P0196

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Engine oil temperature sensor
range/performance

Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor
is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage
signals from engine coolant temperature
sensor and intake air temperature sensor.

• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Engine oil temperature sensor

C

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.

F

G

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I

I

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes and 10 seconds.
6. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> EC-210, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

J

K

L

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates above 60°C (140°F).
If it is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following steps.
If it is below 60°C (140°F), warm engine up until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
Then perform the following steps.
Turn ignition switch OFF and soak the vehicle in a cool place.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
NOTE:
Do not turn ignition switch OFF until step 10.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Check the following.

COOLAN TEMP/S

Below 40°C (104°F)

INT/A TEMP SE

Below 40°C (104°F)

Difference between “COOLAN TEMP/S” and “INT/A TEMP SE”

Within 0°C (32°F)

If they are within the specified range, perform the following steps.
Revision: April 2013

EC-209

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

P0196 EOT SENSOR
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
If they are out of the specified range, soak the vehicle to meet the above conditions. Then perform the following steps.
NOTE:
• Do not turn ignition switch OFF.
• If it is supposed to need a long period of time, do not deplete the battery.
9. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.
10. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> EC-210, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022558

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E78. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-210, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace engine oil temperature sensor.

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022559

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
Remove engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».
Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals

Condition

Resistance (kΩ)
20 (68)

1 and 2

Temperature [°C (°F)]

2.10 — 2.90

50 (122)

0.68 — 1.00

90 (194)

0.236 — 0.260

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92,
«Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-210

JMBIA0080ZZ

2014 Note

P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022560

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)

DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

P0197

EOT SEN/CIRC
(Engine oil temperature
sensor circuit low input)

An excessively low voltage from the engine
oil temperature sensor is sent to ECM.

P0198

EOT SEN/CIRC
(Engine oil temperature
sensor circuit high input)

An excessively high voltage from the engine
oil temperature sensor is sent to ECM.

Possible Cause

C

• Harness or connectors
(EOT sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Engine oil temperature sensor

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-211, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

J
INFOID:0000000009022561

K

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

G

H

>> GO TO 2.

Diagnosis Procedure

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between EOT sensor harness connector and ground.

L

M
EOT sensor
Connector

Terminal

F25

1

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5V

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

O

2.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EOT sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F25

1

F11

57

Revision: April 2013

Continuity
Existed

EC-211

2014 Note

P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Also check harness for short to ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

[HR16DE]

3.CHECK EOT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EOT sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F25

2

F11

54

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

4.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Check the engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EC-212, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022562

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
Remove engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».
Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.

Engine oil temperature sensor
−

+

Condition

Resistance (kΩ)

Terminal

1

2

Temperature
[°C (°F)]

20 (68)

2.10 — 2.90

50 (122)

0.68 — 1.00

90 (194)

0.236 — 0.260

JMBIA0080ZZ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-212

2014 Note

P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022563

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P0222 or P0223 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P0222

Throttle position sensor
1 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.

P0223

Throttle position sensor
1 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor
1 is sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1)

C

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

H

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-213, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022564

K

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

L

M

2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector

Terminal

F7

2

N

O
Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

G

EC-213

2014 Note

P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F7

4

F11

36

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F7

1

F11

33

Continuity
Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-214, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022565

1.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-114, «Work Procedure».
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-214

2014 Note

P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Terminal

Connector

+

Condition
−

33
(TP sensor 1 signal)
F11

36
34
(TP sensor 2 signal)

Voltage

Accelerator
pedal

Fully released

More than 0.36 V

Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

Fully released

Less than 4.75 V

Fully depressed

More than 0.36 V

EC

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
F

>> INSPECTION END

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-215

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022566

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

Input signal to ECM

ECM function

Engine speed

On board diagnosis of misfire

The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P0300

Multiple cylinder misfire detected

Multiple cylinder misfire.

P0301

No.1 cylinder misfire detected

No. 1 cylinder misfires.

P0302

No. 2 cylinder misfire detected

No. 2 cylinder misfires.

P0303

No. 3 cylinder misfire detected

No. 3 cylinder misfires.

P0304

No. 4 cylinder misfire detected

No. 4 cylinder misfires.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•

Improper spark plug
Insufficient compression
Incorrect fuel pressure
The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Fuel injector*
Intake air leak
The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
Lack of fuel
Signal plate
A/F sensor 1
Incorrect PCV hose connection

*: DTC is detected even where a malfunction occurs one side of the dual injector.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-217, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

EC-216

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
1.
2.

A

Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
EC
time. Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time.
C
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
D

Engine speed

Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm

Vehicle speed

Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)

Engine coolant temperature (T) condition

E

When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).

F

When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).

The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
G
Engine speed

Time

Around 1,000 rpm

Approximately 10 minutes

Around 2,000 rpm

Approximately 5 minutes

More than 3,000 rpm

Approximately 3.5 minutes

H

3. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-217, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009022567

1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

K

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Discover air leak location and repair.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

L

M

2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
N

Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace it.

O

3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST

P

With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
Revision: April 2013

EC-217

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

4.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.

Start engine and let engine idle.
Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR. Refer
to EC-314, «Component Function Check».

PBIB3332E

5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 — 17 mm (0.52 0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
JMBIA0066GB
within 50 cm (19.7 in). Be careful not to get an electrical
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge
voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.
Spark should be generated.

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-218

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-319, «Component Function
Check».

7.CHECK SPARK PLUG

A

EC

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-116, «Spark Plug».
NO
>> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.

C

D

E
SEF156I

8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.

Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.

F

G

Spark should be generated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-116, «Spark
Plug».

H

9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE

I

Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-13, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.

J

10.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Install all removed parts.
Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> GO TO 11.

11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

N

Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

O

12.CHECK IGNITION TIMING

P

Check the following items.
For procedure, refer to EC-335, «Inspection».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Ignition Timing».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> Follow the EC-118, «Work Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

EC-219

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

5.

ECM
Connector

Terminal
49

F11

2

53

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Connector

Terminal
1

F12

2

ECM
Connector

Terminal

F11

49
53

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

6. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER

Refer to EC-150, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO
>> Replace A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».

15.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

With CONSULT
Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
0.8 — 4.0 g/s:
2.0 — 10.0 g/s:

at idling
at 2,500 rpm

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO
>> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-158, «DTC Logic».

16.CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE

Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-327, «Symptom Table».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-220

2014 Note

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO
>> Repair or replace.

A

17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests.

EC

>> GO TO 18.

C

18.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

D

>> INSPECTION END
E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-221

2014 Note

P0327, P0328 KS
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0327, P0328 KS
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022568

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detected condition

P0327

Knock sensor circuit low
input

An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.

P0328

Knock sensor circuit
high input

An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• Knock sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-222, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022569

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F14

2

F11

40

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.

Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-222

2014 Note

P0327, P0328 KS
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Knock sensor

A

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F14

1

F11

37

Continuity
Existed

EC

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

C

4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

D

Refer to EC-223, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace knock sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

E

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

F

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

G

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022570

1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

H

1.
2.
3.

I

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
Check resistance between knock sensor terminals as follows.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Terminals

Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]

1 and 2

Approx. 532 — 588 kΩ

J

CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace knock sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-223

2014 Note

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022571

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

P0335

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Crankshaft position sensor
(POS) circuit

• The crankshaft position sensor
(POS) signal is not detected by the
ECM during the first few seconds of
engine cranking.
• The proper pulse signal from the
crankshaft position sensor (POS) is
not sent to ECM while the engine is
running.
• The crankshaft position sensor
(POS) signal is not in the normal
pattern during engine running.

• Harness or connectors
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open
or shorted.]
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit is
shorted.)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
• Signal plate

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with ignition switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.

Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-224, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022572

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-224

2014 Note

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

CKP sensor (POS)
Connector

Terminal

F15

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

EC

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

C

3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CKP sensor (POS)

E

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F15

1

F11

75

Continuity
Existed

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit.

G

4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM

H

Sensor

Connector

Terminal

F11

75

E16

D

Name

Connector

Terminal

CKP sensor (POS)

F15

1

101

Refrigerant pressure sensor

E17

3

102

Accelerator pedal position sensor 2

E12

5

I

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

K

5.CHECK COMPONENTS

L

Check the following.
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, «Component Function Check»).
• Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-292, «Component Inspection»).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning component.

M

6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CKP sensor (POS)

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F15

2

F11

62

Continuity

P

Existed

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Revision: April 2013

O

EC-225

2014 Note

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CKP sensor (POS)

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F15

3

F11

61

Continuity
Existed

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

Refer to EC-226, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

9.CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Replace the signal plate. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022573

1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM92, «Exploded View».

2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II

PBIA9210J

Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminals as follows.
Terminals (Polarity)

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) — 2 (−)
1 (+) — 3 (−)

Except 0 or ∞ Ω

2 (+) — 3 (−)

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-226

2014 Note

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

[HR16DE]
A

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-227

2014 Note

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022574

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0340 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P0340

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Camshaft position sensor
(PHASE) circuit

• The cylinder No. signal is not sent
to ECM for the first few seconds
during engine cranking.
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent
to ECM during engine running.
• The cylinder No. signal is not in
the normal pattern during engine
running.

• Harness or connectors
(Camshaft position sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• Camshaft position sensor
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
• Intake camshaft
• Exhaust camshaft
• Starter motor
• Starting system circuit
• Dead (Weak) battery

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with ignition switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1.

Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-228, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II

1. Keep engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-228, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022575

1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check starting system.

2.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
Revision: April 2013

EC-228

2014 Note

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

[HR16DE]
A

EC

3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ground.

D

CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust valve
timing control position sensor
Camshaft

Connector

Terminal

Intake

F21

1

Exhaust

F56

1

C

Ground

Voltage

E
Ground

Approx. 5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

F

4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

G

1.
2.
3.

H

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust
valve timing control position sensor
Camshaft

Connector

Terminal

Intake

F21

2

Exhaust

F56

2

ECM

I

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

F11

63

J

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

K

5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

L

Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
M

CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust
valve timing control position sensor
Camshaft

Connector

Terminal

Intake

F21

3

Exhaust

F56

3

ECM
Connector
F11

Continuity

Terminal
65
48

N
Existed

O

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

P

6.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EC-230, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
Revision: April 2013

EC-229

2014 Note

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
Check the following.
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60,
«Exploded View».

JSBIA0599ZZ

8.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)
Check the following.
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60,
«Exploded View».

JSBIA0600ZZ

9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022576

1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace camshaft position sensor. Refer to EM-48,
«Exploded View».

PBIA9210J

2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR-II
Check resistance camshaft position sensor terminals as follows.
Terminals (Polarity)

Revision: April 2013

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

EC-230

2014 Note

P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1 (+) — 2 (−)
1 (+) — 3 (−)

A

Except 0 or ∞ Ω

2 (+) — 3 (−)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace camshaft position sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-231

2014 Note

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022577

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YB

DTC No.

P0420

Trouble diagnosis name

Catalyst system efficiency
below threshold

DTC detecting condition

• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
properly.
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
enough oxygen storage capacity.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Three way catalyst (manifold)
Exhaust tube
Intake air leaks
Fuel injector
Fuel injector leaks
Spark plug
Improper ignition timing

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.INSPECTION START

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

2.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
Let engine idle for 1 minute.
Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Revision: April 2013

EC-232

2014 Note

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
10. Check the indication of “CATALYST”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
CMPLT >> GO TO 6.
INCMP >> GO TO 4.

A

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II

EC

1.
2.

Wait 5 seconds at idle.
Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
will take approximately 5 minutes).
Does the indication change to “CMPLT”?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

C

D

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1.
2.

E

Stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F).
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.

F

>> GO TO 3.

6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-234, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

G

H

7.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-233, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-234, «Diagnosis Procedure».
INFOID:0000000009022578

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

L

Without CONSULT
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
5. Open engine hood.
6. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

50
(HO2S2)

59

Condition

Voltage (V)

Keeping engine speed at 2500 rpm
constant under no load

The voltage fluctuation cycle takes more than 5 seconds.
• 1 cycle: 0.6 — 1.0 → 0 — 0.3 → 0.6 — 1.0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-234, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

M

N

O

ECM

F11

J

K

Component Function Check

Connector

I

EC-233

2014 Note

P

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022579

1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace.

2.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1.
2.

Start engine and run it at idle.
Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).

PBIB1216E

Is exhaust gas leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND IDLE SPEED

Check the following items. Refer to EC-118, «Work Procedure».
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Ignition Timing»
For specification, refer to EC-339, «Idle Speed».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Follow the EC-118, «Work Procedure».

5.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1.
2.

Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
Cylinder
No.

Front / Rear

ECM
Connector

1
2
3

−

30

Front

29
F10

1

3

+

Voltage

31

4

2

Terminal

Rear

4

Revision: April 2013

25
12

108

Battery voltage

20
16
24

EC-234

2014 Note

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Perform EC-314, «Diagnosis Procedure».

[HR16DE]
A

6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 — 17 mm (0.52 0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
JMBIA0066GB
within 50 cm (19.7 in). Be careful not to get an electrical
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge
voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

I

J

K

L

7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.

M

N

Spark should be generated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-319, «Diagnosis Procedure».

8.CHECK SPARK PLUG

Revision: April 2013

O

P

EC-235

2014 Note

P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. Refer to EM-21,
«Removal and Installation».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-116, «Spark Plug».
NO
>> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9

SEF156I

9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III
1.
2.

[HR16DE]

Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded portion.
Spark should be generated.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-116, «Spark
Plug».

10.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».

11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the trouble fixed?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace three way catalyst assembly. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-236

2014 Note

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
P0444

A

INFOID:0000000009022580

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve circuit
open

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

An excessively low voltage signal
is sent to ECM through the valve

• Harness or connectors
(The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
• EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

C

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.

E

1.CONDITIONING

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H

1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-237, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009022581

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ground.
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve
Connector

Terminal

F22

1

J

K

L

M
Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

O

2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connector E55, F55
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Revision: April 2013

EC-237

2014 Note

P

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve

ECM

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F22

2

F10

9

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 4.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Start engine.
Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

1.
2.
3.

5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to EC-238, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».

6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022582

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.

Revision: April 2013

EC-238

2014 Note

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.

[HR16DE]
A

EC

1.
2.
3.
4.

Condition
(PURG VOL C/V value)

Air passage continuity

100%

Existed

0%

Not existed

between

and

C

JSBIA0653ZZ
Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.

Condition
12 V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2
No supply

E

F

Air passage continuity
between

D

and

Existed

G

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
JSBIA0653ZZ
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-239

2014 Note

P0500 VSS
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0500 VSS
Description

INFOID:0000000009022583

The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022584

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-251, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P0500

Trouble diagnosis name

Vehicle speed sensor

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) of vehicle
speed signal is sent to ECM even
when vehicle is being driven.

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.INSPECTION START

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

2.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. The vehicle speed on CONSULT
should exceed 10 km/h (6 mph) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-241, «Diagnosis Procedure».

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.
2.
3.

Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

Revision: April 2013

EC-240

2014 Note

P0500 VSS
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ENG SPEED

A

1,300 — 6,000 rpm (CVT)
1,600 — 6,000 rpm (M/T)

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

7.5 — 31.8 msec

Shift lever

Except P or N position (CVT)
Except Neutral position (M/T)

PW/ST SIGNAL

OFF

EC

C

4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-241, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

D

5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

E

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-241, «Component Function Check».
Use component function check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-241, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

F

G

INFOID:0000000009022585

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

H

With GST
Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine.
Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-241, «Diagnosis Procedure».
1.
2.
3.

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J

K

INFOID:0000000009022586

L

1.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check DTC with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace.

M

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

N

Check DTC with combination meter. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
O

>> INSPECTION END

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-241

2014 Note

P0520 EOP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0520 EOP SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022587

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0520 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P0520

Trouble diagnosis
(Trouble diagnosis content)

Detecting condition

EOP SENSOR/SWITCH
[Engine oil pressure sensor
circuit]

ECM detects the following status continuously for
5 seconds or more:
• A voltage signal transmitted from the engine oil
pressure sensor is lower than 0.3 V.
• A voltage signal transmitted from the engine oil
pressure sensor is higher than 5.02 V.

Possible cause

• Harness or connectors
(Engine oil pressure sensor circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Engine oil pressure sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check engine oil leak. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-242, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022588

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector terminals.
Engine oil pressure sensor
Connector

Terminal

F38

1

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5V

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Revision: April 2013

EC-242

2014 Note

P0520 EOP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Engine oil pressure sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F38

3

F11

60

A

EC

Continuity
Existed

C

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

D

3.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Engine oil pressure sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F38

2

F11

47

Continuity

E

F

Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

G

H

4.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-243, «Component Inspection».
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection

I

J
INFOID:0000000009022589

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil pressure sensor harness connector.
Check resistance between engine oil pressure sensor connector terminals.

Engine oil pressure sensor
Terminal
1

2

3

Condition

2

Resistance (kΩ)
4 – 10

3

2–8

1

4 – 10

3

M

None

N

1–3

1

2–8

2

1–3

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-243

P

2014 Note

P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022590

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P0524 is displayed with DTC P0520 or P0075, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0520 or P0075
first. Refer to EC-242, «DTC Logic» or EC-153, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
(Engine oil pressure too low)

P0524

Detecting condition
An engine oil pressure sensor signal
voltage applied to ECM remains lower
than the specified value continuously for
10 seconds or more when the engine
speed is 1,000 rpm ore more.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•

Decrease in engine oil pressure
Decrease in engine oil level
Engine oil condition
Engine oil pressure sensor
Engine body

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
If “Diagnosis Procedure” is unfinished, be sure to perform Step 3 and 4.

1.PRECONDITIONING-I

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is 11 V or more at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PRECONDITIONING-II
Is “Diagnosis Procedure” of DTC P0524 finished?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-245, «Diagnosis Procedure»

4.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Start the engine and check that “EOP SENSOR” changes, according to engine speeds.
Monitor item

EOP SENSOR

Value
(Approx.)

Condition
• Engine oil temperature: 80°C (176°F)
• Selector lever: P or N position (CVT),
Neutral position (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

Engine speed:
600 rpm

1,053 mV
or more

Engine speed:
2,000 rpm

1,802 mV
or more

Without CONSULT
Revision: April 2013

EC-244

2014 Note

P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-245, «Diagnosis Procedure»

A

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

EC

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for about 10 consecutive seconds.

Selector lever

P or N position (CVT)
Neutral position (M/T)

Engine coolant temperature

70°C (158°F) or more

Engine speed

1,000 rpm or more

C

D

E

NOTE:
With engine speed set around 4,000 rpm, the phenomenon can be reproduced more easily.
3. Check DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-245, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009022591

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

I

2.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.

J

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Start the engine and check that “EOP SENSOR” changes, according to engine speeds.
Monitor item

EOP SENSOR

K

L

Value
(Approx.)

Condition
• Engine oil temperature: 80°C (176°F)
• Selector lever: P or N position (CVT),
Neutral position (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load

Engine speed:
600 rpm

1,053 mV
or more

Engine speed:
2,000 rpm

1,802 mV
or more

M

N

Without CONSULT
Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check oil pressure. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».

O

3.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

P

Check engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EC-243, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

4.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE

Check engine oil leakage. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Revision: April 2013

G

EC-245

2014 Note

P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

5.CHECK CAUSE OF ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
Check the following item.
Step

Inspection item

Equipment

Standard

Reference

1

PCV valve

EC-337, «Inspection»

2

Exhaust front tube

Visual

• No blocking
• No abnormal sounds

—

3

Oil pump

Visual

• No blocking
• No damage

—

• Piston
• Piston pin
• Piston ring

• Piston to piston pin oil clearance
EM-101, «Inspection»
• Piston ring side clearance
EM-101, «Inspection»
• Piston ring end gap
EM-101, «Inspection»

Cylinder block

• Cylinder block top surface distortion
EM-101, «Inspection»
• Piston to cylinder bore clearance
EM-101, «Inspection»

4

5

>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022592

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect engine oil pressure sensor harness connector.
Check the resistance between engine oil pressure sensor connector terminals.
Engine oil pressure sensor
+

−

Resistance (kΩ)

2

4 – 10

3

2–8

1

4 – 10

3

1–3

1

2–8

2

1–3

Terminal
1

2

3

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-246

2014 Note

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009022593

ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio
feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

EC

C

D

PBIA9222J

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022594

F

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
P0603

Trouble diagnosis name
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT
(ECM power supply circuit)

E

DTC detecting condition
ECM back-up RAM system
does not function properly.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
[ECM power supply (back up) circuit is open or shorted.]
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

H

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 minutes
3. Turn ignition switch ON, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-247, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

L

M

N
INFOID:0000000009022595

1.INSPECTION START

O

1.
2.

Erase DTC.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-247, «DTC Logic».
Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END

P

2.REPLACE ECM
1.

Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

J

K

>> GO TO 2.

Diagnosis Procedure

I

EC-247

2014 Note

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Perform EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-248

2014 Note

P0605 ECM
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0605 ECM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022596

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition
A)

P0605

Engine control module

Possible cause

ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.

B)

ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.

C)

ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

C

ECM

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
H

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-249, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

I

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B

J

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-249, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

K

L

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-249, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

M

N

INFOID:0000000009022597

1.INSPECTION START

P

1.
2.

Erase DTC.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-249, «DTC Logic».
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

EC-249

O

2014 Note

P0605 ECM
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.

Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-250

2014 Note

P0607 ECM
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0607 ECM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022598

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
P0607

EC

Trouble diagnosis name
(Trouble diagnosis content)
ECM
(CAN communication bus)

DTC detecting condition
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of
CAN controller of ECM.

Possible cause

C

ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-251, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Diagnosis Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009022599

1.INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to EC-251, «DTC Logic».
4. Check DTC.
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
YES >> Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-251

2014 Note

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022600

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

P0643

Trouble diagnosis name

Sensor power supply
circuit short

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

ECM detects a voltage of power source
for sensor is excessively low or high.

• Harness or connectors
(Accelerator pedal position 1 circuit is shorted.)
(Throttle position sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor circuit is shorted.]
(Exhaust valve timing control position sensor circuit
is shorted.)
(Engine oil pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Throttle position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
• Engine oil pressure sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-252, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022601

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-252

2014 Note

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECM
Connector

Terminal

A

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

72
F11

74
78

E16

EC
Ground

5V

C

106

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

D

3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM

Connector

Sensor

Terminal

Item

F
Connector

Terminal

72

Throttle position sensor 1

F7

2

74

Engine oil pressure sensor

F38

1

F11

E16

E

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

F21

78

Exhaust valve timing control position sensor

F56

106

Accelerator pedal position sensor 1

E12

G

1

H

4

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

I

4.CHECK COMPONENTS

J

Check the following.
• Throttle position sensor 1 (Refer to EC-214, «Component Inspection».)
• Engine oil pressure sensor (Refer to EC-243, «Component Inspection».)
• Camshaft position sensor (Refer to EC-230, «Component Inspection».)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor (Refer to EC-230, «Component Inspection».)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 (Refer to EC-292, «Component Inspection».)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning component.

K

L

M

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

N

>> INSPECTION END
O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-253

2014 Note

P0850 PNP SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0850 PNP SWITCH
Description

INFOID:0000000009022602

When the selector lever position is P or N (CVT), Neutral position (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) signal is
ON.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022603

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

P0850

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Park/neutral position signal

The park/neutral position (PNP) signal
is not changed in the process of engine
starting and driving.

• Harness or connectors
[The park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit is
open or shorted.]
• Transmission range switch (CVT models)
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T models)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.INSPECTION START

Do you have CONSULT?
Do you have CONSULT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

2.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL FUNCTION
1.
2.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Then check “P/N POSI SW” signal
under the following conditions.
Shift lever position

Known-good signal

N or P position (CVT)
Neutral position (M/T)

ON

Except above position

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-255, «Diagnosis Procedure».

4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.

Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

Revision: April 2013

EC-254

2014 Note

P0850 PNP SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ENG SPEED

1,500 — 6,375 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S

More than 70°C (158°F)

B/FUEL SCHDL

4 (CVT) or 2.75 (M/T) — 31.8 msec

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 64 km/h (40 mph)

Shift lever

Suitable position

EC

4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-255, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

C

Perform component function check. Refer to EC-255, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-255, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

D

5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK

Component Function Check

G

INFOID:0000000009022604

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
1.
2.

F

H

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
I
ECM
−

+
Connector

Terminal

F11

69
(PNP
signal)

Connector
E16

Condition

Voltage

J

Terminal
108

Shift
lever

P or N (CVT)
Neutral (M/T)

Battery voltage

Except above

Approx. 0 V

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-255, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

L
INFOID:0000000009022605

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT) OR PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH (M/T)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector and
ground.
Transmission range switch (CVT) /
PNP switch (M/T)
Connector

Terminal

F52 (CVT)

7

F24 (M/T)

2

N

O

P
Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

M

EC-255

2014 Note

P0850 PNP SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• Harness connectors E7, M69 (M/T)
• Harness connectors E55, F55
• IPDM E/R harness connector E45 (CVT)
• 10 A fuse (No. 3) (M/T)
• 10 A fuse (No. 49) (CVT)
• Harness for open or short between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) and fuse
Is the inspection result normal?
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector
and ECM harness connector.

Transmission range switch (CVT) /
PNP switch (M/T)
Connector

Terminal

F52 (CVT)

10

F24 (M/T)

3

ECM

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

F11

69

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT) OR PNP SWITCH (M/T)

Refer to TM-146, «Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)» (CVT) or TM-14, «PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection» (M/T).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T). Refer to TM-250, «Removal and
Installation» (CVT) or TM-23, «Removal and Installation» (M/T).

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-256

2014 Note

P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

A

DTC Description

INFOID:0000000009418247

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

CONSULT screen terms
(Trouble diagnosis content)

DTC No.

EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B1
(Exhaust valve timing control position sensor circuit)

P1078

DTC detecting condition

C

An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.

D

POSSIBLE CAUSE
•
•
•
•

Harness or connectors
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or shorted
Sensor power supply 1 circuit is shorted.
Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
One (or more) sensor in sensor power supply 1 circuit

E

F

FAIL-SAFE
Not applicable

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

H

I

J

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
K

1. Start engine and let it idle for 10 seconds.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-257, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

L

INFOID:0000000009418248

1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT — 1
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ground.
+
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
Connector

Terminal

F56

1

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5V

EC-257

N

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

M

2014 Note

P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 6.

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM
harness connector.
+

−

Exhaust valve timing control
position sensor

ECM

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F56

2

F11

63

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
+

−

Exhaust valve timing control
position sensor

ECM

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F56

3

F11

48

Existed

Also check harness for short to ground and to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR

Check exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EC-259, «Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve
Timing Control Position Sensor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)

Check the following.
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Removal
and Installation».

JSBIA0600ZZ

6.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT — 2
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-258

2014 Note

P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM
harness connector.
+

−

Exhaust valve timing control
position sensor

ECM

EC

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F56

1

F11

78

A

C

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

D

7.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1 CIRCUIT

E

Check sensor power supply 1 circuit. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

F

Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor)

INFOID:0000000009418249

G

1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR — 1
H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
3. Remove exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor.
Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

I

J

K

JMBIA0065ZZ

2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR — 2
Check resistance exhaust valve timing control position sensor terminals as follows.

M

Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
Condition

−

+

L

N

Resistance

Terminal
1

2

1

3

2

3

O
Temperature

25°C (77°F)

Except 0 or ∞ Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-259

2014 Note

P

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022606

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-251, «DTC Logic».
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
DTC No.

P1217

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Engine over temperature
(Overheat)

• Cooling fan does not operate properly
(Overheat).
• Cooling fan system does not operate
properly (Overheat).
• Engine coolant was not added to the
system using the proper filling method.
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
range.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays -1, -2 and -3)
• Cooling fan motor
• Radiator hose
• Radiator
• Radiator cap
• Reservoir tank
• Water pump
• Thermostat

CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, «Refilling». Also,
replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Refilling».
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, «Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio».
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-260, «Component Function Check».
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-261, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022607

1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

Revision: April 2013

EC-260

2014 Note

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
YES >> Proceed to EC-261, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 2

[HR16DE]
A

EC

C

2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II

SEF621W

D

Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.
Did customer fill the coolant?
YES >> Proceed to EC-261, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

E

3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III

F

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT
screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-261, «Diagnosis Procedure».
1.
2.

4.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-IV

With CONSULT
Touch “HI” on the CONSULT screen.
Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-261, «Diagnosis Procedure».

H

I

J

K

1.
2.

Diagnosis Procedure

G

L

M

N

INFOID:0000000009022608

O

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
Make sure that cooling fan motor operate at each speed (LOW/HI).
Without CONSULT
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PCS-9, «Diagnosis
Description».
2. Make sure that cooling fan motor operate at each speed (Low/High).

P

1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
1.
2.
3.

Revision: April 2013

EC-261

2014 Note

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-309, «Diagnosis Procedure».

[HR16DE]

2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-I

Check cooling system for leak. Refer to CO-8, «Inspection».
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-II

Check the following for leak.
• Hose (Refer to CO-25, «Removal and Installation».)
• Radiator (Refer to CO-14, «Removal and Installation».)
• Water pump (Refer to CO-19, «Removal and Installation».)
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-12, «RADIATOR CAP : Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace radiator cap. Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».

5.CHECK THERMOSTAT

Check thermostat. Refer to CO-21, «Removal and Installation».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Replace thermostat. Refer to CO-21, «Removal and Installation».

6.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-166, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, «Exploded View».

7.OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS

If the cause cannot be isolated, check CO-6, «Troubleshooting Chart».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-262

2014 Note

P1225 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1225 TP SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022609

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
P1225

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Closed throttle position learning
performance

Closed throttle position learning value is excessively
low.

Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

D

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.

E

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-263, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009022610

1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.

M

: Vehicle front

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside, and then perform throttle valve
closed position learning. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

N

O
PBIB2974E

P

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-263

2014 Note

P1226 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022611

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
P1226

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Closed throttle position learning
performance

Closed throttle position learning is not performed
successfully, repeatedly.

Possible cause
Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 32 times.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-264, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022612

1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
: Vehicle front

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside, and then perform throttle valve
closed position learning. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

PBIB2974E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-264

2014 Note

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009418250

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-249, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P1564

Trouble diagnosis name

ASCD steering switch

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

• An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM.
• ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
steering switch is out of the specified range.
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is
stuck ON.

• Harness or connectors
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
• ASCD steering switch
• ECM

C

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

G

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

I

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-265, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

J

K

L

INFOID:0000000009418251

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

M

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

N

2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

O

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check each item indication under the following conditions.

Revision: April 2013

EC-265

2014 Note

P

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Monitor item

Condition

MAIL SW

MAIN switch

CANCEL SW

CANCEL switch

RESUME/ACC SW

ACCEL/RES switch

SET SW

COAST/SET switch

1.
2.

Indication
Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Pressed

ON

Released

OFF

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
ECM

Connector

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

94
(ASCD steering switch signal)

E16

95

Condition

Voltage (V)

MAIN switch: Pressed

Approx. 0

CANCEL switch: Pressed

Approx. 1

COAST/SET switch: Pressed

Approx. 2

ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed

Approx. 3

All ASCD steering switches: Released

Approx. 4

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
Combination switch

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M88

16

E16

95

Continuity
Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-266

2014 Note

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Combination switch

A

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M88

13

E16

94

Continuity
Existed

EC

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

C

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

D

Check the following.
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch

E

>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

F

Refer to EC-267, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace ASCD steering switch.

G

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

H

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

I

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009418252

1.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

J

Check resistance between combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector terminals under the following
conditions.
Combination switch
Connector

Terminals

Condition

Resistance (Ω)

L
MAIN switch: Pressed

M88

13 and 16

K

Approx. 0

CANCEL switch: Pressed

Approx. 250

COAST/SET switch: Pressed

Approx. 660

ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed

Approx. 1,480

All ASCD steering switches: Released

Approx. 4,000

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace ASCD steering switch.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-267

2014 Note

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009418253

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-249, «DTC Logic».
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected
in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
DTC No.

P1572

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

A)

When the vehicle speed is above
30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals
from the stop lamp switch and the
brake pedal position switch are
sent to the ECM at the same time.

B)

Brake pedal position switch signal
is not sent to ECM for extremely
long time while the vehicle is being
driven.

ASCD brake switch

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(The brake pedal position switch circuit is shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch
• Brake pedal position switch
• Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
• Incorrect brake pedal position switch installation
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
NOTE:
The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B can
be detected.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Start engine (ESP switch OFF).
Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp illuminates.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 30 km/h (19 mph)

Selector lever

Suitable position

6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-269, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

EC-268

2014 Note

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
1.

A
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
EC
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
C

VHCL SPEED SE

More than 30 km/h (19 mph)

Selector lever

Suitable position

Driving location

Depress the brake pedal for more than 5 seconds so as
not to come off from the above-mentioned vehicle speed.

D

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-269, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

E

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009418254

1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I
1.
2.
3.
4.

G

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.

H

I
Monitor item
BRAKE SW1

1.
2.

Condition
Brake pedal

Indication

Slightly depressed

OFF

Fully released

ON

J

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals as follows.

K

ECM
–

Terminal

Terminal

100
(Brake pedal position switch signal)

108

Connector

E16

L

+

Condition

Brake
pedal

Slightly depressed
Fully released

Voltage (V)

M

Approx. 0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

N

2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II

O

With CONSULT
Select “BRAKE SW2” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item
BRAKE SW2

Condition
Brake pedal

P

Indication

Slightly depressed

ON

Fully released

OFF

Without CONSULT
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
Revision: April 2013

EC-269

2014 Note

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECM
+

–

Terminal

Terminal

99
(Stop lamp switch signal)

108

Connector

E16

Condition

Slightly depressed

Brake
pedal

Fully released

Voltage (V)

Battery voltage
Approx. 0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

3.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ground.
Brake pedal position switch
Connector

Terminal

E36

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Harness connectors E7, M69
• 10 A fuse (No. 5)
• Harness for open or short between brake pedal position switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Brake pedal position switch

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E36

2

E16

100

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to EC-271, «Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)»
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-270

2014 Note

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.

[HR16DE]
A

Stop lamp switch
Connector

Terminal

E13 (CVT)
E57 (M/T)

1

Ground

Voltage

EC
Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

C

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

D

Check the following.
• 10 A fuse (No. 30)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery

E

>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

F

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Stop lamp switch

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E13 (CVT)
E57 (M/T)

2

E16

99

Continuity

G

H

Existed

I

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

J

10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to EC-272, «Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

K

L

11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

M

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)

INFOID:0000000009418255

N

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.

O

P
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

Continuity
Existed
Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

EC-271

2014 Note

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II
1.
2.

Adjust brake pedal position switch installation. Refer to BR-20, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Continuity

Fully released

Existed

Slightly depressed

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)

INFOID:0000000009418256

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.

Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

Continuity
Not existed
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II

1.
2.

Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-20, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.

Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

Continuity
Not existed
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-272

2014 Note

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009418257

The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-34, «AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description» for ASCD
functions.
C

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009418258

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer
to EC-240, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-249, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-251, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P1574

Trouble diagnosis name

ASCD vehicle speed
sensor

DTC detecting condition

The difference between the two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified
range.

Possible cause

D

E

F

G

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM

H

I

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

J

K

L

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-273, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009418259

1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-273

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.

[HR16DE]

2.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check DTC with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace.

3.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

Check DTC with combination meter. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-274

2014 Note

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009022635

ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for EC
engine control.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022636

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0335, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335. Refer
to EC-224, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340. Refer
to EC-228, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-249, «DTC Logic».

D

E

F
DTC No.

P1715

Trouble diagnosis name

Input speed sensor
(TCM output)

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Input speed sensor signal is different
from the theoretical value calculated by
ECM from output speed sensor signal
and engine rpm signal.

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
• Harness or connectors
(Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted)
• TCM

G

H

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

I

J

K

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
L

1.

Start engine and drive the vehicle at more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-275, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

M

N
INFOID:0000000009022637

1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

O

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.

P

2.REPLACE TCM

Replace TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

EC-275

2014 Note

P1720 VSS
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1720 VSS
Description

INFOID:0000000009022638

ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is sent from “ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)” via combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module).
ECM uses these signals for engine control.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022639

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1720 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P1720 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer
to EC-249, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1720 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-251, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P1720

Trouble diagnosis name

Vehicle speed sensor
(TCM output)

DTC detecting condition

The difference between two vehicle
speed signals is out of the specified
range.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Wheel sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
• TCM
• Secondary speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Start engine.
Drive vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for at least 5 seconds without depressing the brake
pedal.
3. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-276, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022640

1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.

2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”

Check DTC with “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-276

2014 Note

P1720 VSS
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.

[HR16DE]
A

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION

Check combination meter function. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».

EC

>> INSPECTION END
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-277

2014 Note

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022641

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

P1805

Brake switch

DTC detecting condition
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM
for extremely long time while the vehicle is
driving.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase DTC.
4. Check 1st trip DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-278, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022642

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal

Stop lamp

Fully released

Not illuminated

Slightly depressed

Illuminated

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch
Connector

Terminal

E13 (CVT)
E57 (M/T)

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.

3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-278

2014 Note

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ECM

A

Stop lamp switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E16

99

E13 (CVT)
E57 (M/T)

2

Continuity

EC

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair error-detected parts.

C

4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

D

Refer to EC-279, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, «Removal and Installation».

E

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022643

F

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.

G

H
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

Continuity
Not existed

I

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

J

2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1.
2.

Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

K

L

Continuity
Not existed
Existed

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-19, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-279

2014 Note

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022644

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2100

Throttle control motor
relay circuit open

ECM detects a voltage of power source for
throttle control motor is excessively low.

• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is open)
• Throttle control motor relay

P2103

Throttle control motor
relay circuit short

ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is
stuck ON.

• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted)
• Throttle control motor relay

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected?
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-280, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-280, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022645

1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
−

+

Voltage

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

15

E16

108

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

EC-280

2014 Note

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.

A

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F42.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

15

F42

32

EC

Continuity

C

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

D

E

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• IPDM E/R connector F42
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

F

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

G

4.CHECK FUSE

1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse for blown.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace 20 A fuse.

H

I

5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1.

Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following conditions.

J

ECM
−

+
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

2

E16

108

Conditions

Voltage

Ignition switch: OFF

Approx. 0 V

Ignition switch: ON

Battery voltage

K

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

M

6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F42.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

2

F42

29

O

Continuity

P

Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
Revision: April 2013

EC-281

2014 Note

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
• IPDM E/R connector F42
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

EC-282

2014 Note

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022646

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
• If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2100, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2100. Refer
to EC-280, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P2101 is displayed with DTC P2119, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P2119. Refer
to EC-289, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name
Electric throttle control
performance

P2101

C

D

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Electric throttle control function does not
operate properly.

• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.

G

H

I

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

J

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-283, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

K

L

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022647

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

M

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

N

2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.

O

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

P

ECM
−

+
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

2

E16

108

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Voltage

Ignition switch OFF

Approx. 0 V

Ignition switch ON

Battery voltage

EC-283

2014 Note

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
−

+

Voltage

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

15

E16

108

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F42.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
IPDM E/R

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

32

F10

15

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• IPDM E/R connector F42
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK FUSE

1. Disconnect 20A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace 20A fuse.

7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F42.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
IPDM E/R

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

29

F10

2

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
Revision: April 2013

EC-284

2014 Note

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 8.

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

A

Check the following.
• IPDM E/R connector F42
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM

EC

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

C

9.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

D

10.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

E

1.
2.
3.
4.

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector

Terminal

ECM
Connector

5
F7

F10
6

Terminal

Continuity

H

1

Not existed

4

Existed

1

Existed

4

Not existed

I

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

K

11.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
1.
2.

Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.

L

: Vehicle front

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside, and then perform throttle valve
closed position learning. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».

12.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

N

PBIB2974E

Refer to EC-286, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> GO TO 14.

O

P

13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

G

EC-285

2014 Note

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

14.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Replace malfunction electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022648

1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

5 and 6

Approx. 1 — 15 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-286

2014 Note

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022649

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name
Throttle control motor
circuit short

P2118

EC
DTC detecting condition
ECM detects short in both circuits between
ECM and throttle control motor.

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

C

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-287, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022650

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

K

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

L

2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M

1.
2.
3.

N

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector

Terminal

ECM
Connector

5
F7

F10
6

Terminal

O

Continuity

1

Not existed

4

Existed

1

Existed

4

Not existed

P

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

EC-287

2014 Note

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-288, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022651

1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
1.
2.

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

5 and 6

Approx. 1 — 15 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-288

2014 Note

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022652

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

P2119

EC

Trouble diagnosis name

Electric throttle control actuator

DTC detecting condition
A)

Electric throttle control actuator does not function
properly due to the return spring malfunction.

B)

Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is
not in specified range.

C)

ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.

Possible cause

Electric throttle control actuator

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B

G

I

J

K

L

3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Set selector lever to P (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) position.
4. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-289, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

F

H

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds.
3. Set selector lever to P (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) position.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
6. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds.
7. Set selector lever to P (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) position.
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-289, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

M

N

O
INFOID:0000000009022653

1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

D

E

1.PRECONDITIONING

1.
2.

C

EC-289

2014 Note

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.

[HR16DE]

: Vehicle front

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside, and then perform throttle valve
closed position learning. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

PBIB2974E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-290

2014 Note

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022654

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

P2122

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the APP
sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

P2123

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the APP
sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

C

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
(APP sensor 1)

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-291, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

J

K
INFOID:0000000009022655

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

M

N

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
APP sensor
Connector

Terminal

E12

4

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5V

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
Revision: April 2013

H

I

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Diagnosis Procedure

G

EC-291

2014 Note

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

2

E16

111

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1.

Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

3

E16

110

Continuity
Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-292, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022656

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-292

2014 Note

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Terminal

Connector

+
110
(APP sensor 1 signal)

Condition
−
111
Accelerator
pedal

E16
103
(APP sensor 2 signal)

Voltage

104

Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

Fully depressed

3.9 — 4.7 V

Fully released

0.3 — 0.6 V

Fully depressed

1.95 — 2.4 V

EC

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

E

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
F

>> INSPECTION END

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-293

2014 Note

P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022657

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

P2127

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit low input

An excessively low voltage from the
APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

P2128

Accelerator pedal position
sensor 2 circuit high input

An excessively high voltage from the
APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM.

• Harness or connectors
(APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-294, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022658

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
APP sensor
Connector

Terminal

E12

5

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Revision: April 2013

EC-294

2014 Note

P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

5

E16

102

[HR16DE]
A

EC

Continuity
Existed

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

D

4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
E
ECM

Sensor

Connector

Terminal

F11

75

E16

Item

Connector

Terminal

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

F15

1

101

Refrigerant pressure sensor

E17

3

102

APP sensor

E12

5

F

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

H

5.CHECK COMPONENTS

Check the following.
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-226, «Component Inspection».)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, «Diagnosis Procedure».)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning component.

I

J

6.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

1

E16

104

Continuity

M

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

N

O

7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

6

E16

103

P

Continuity
Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-295

2014 Note

P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

8.CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-296, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022659

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Terminal

Connector

Condition

+

−

110
(APP sensor 1 signal)

111

103
(APP sensor 2 signal)

104

Accelerator
pedal

E16

Voltage

Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

Fully depressed

3.9 — 4.7 V

Fully released

0.3 — 0.6 V

Fully depressed

1.95 — 2.4 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-296

2014 Note

P2135 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2135 TP SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022660

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

EC

NOTE:
If DTC P2135 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P2135

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Throttle position sensor
circuit range/performance

Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
compared with the signals from TP sensor
1 and TP sensor 2.

• Harness or connector
(TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.

C

D

E

F

G

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

I

1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-297, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

J

K

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022661

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

M

2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

N

Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector

Terminal

F7

2

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Revision: April 2013

EC-297

2014 Note

P2135 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F7

4

F11

36

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator
Connector
F7

Terminal

ECM
Connector

1
3

F11

Terminal
33
34

Continuity

Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-298, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022662

1.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Perform EC-114, «Work Procedure».
Turn ignition switch ON.
Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-298

2014 Note

P2135 TP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

ECM
Connector

Terminal
+

Condition
−
Fully released

33
(TP sensor 1 signal)
F11

36
34
(TP sensor 2 signal)

Voltage

Accelerator
pedal

EC

More than 0.36 V

Fully depressed

Less than 4.75 V

Fully released

Less than 4.75 V

Fully depressed

More than 0.36 V

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
F

>> INSPECTION END

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-299

2014 Note

P2138 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009022663

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-252, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P2138

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Accelerator pedal position sensor
circuit range/performance

Rationally incorrect voltage
is sent to ECM compared
with the signals from APP
sensor 1 and APP sensor
2.

• Harness or connector
(APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1 and 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conducting the next test.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-300, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022664

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
APP sensor
Connector

Terminal

E12

4

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

EC-300

2014 Note

P2138 APP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

A

Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
EC
APP sensor
Connector

Terminal

E12

5

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

D

4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

E

F
APP sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E12

5

E16

102

Continuity

G

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.

H

5.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM

Sensor

Connector

Terminal

F11

75

E16

I

Item

Connector

Terminal

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

F15

1

101

Refrigerant pressure sensor

E17

3

102

APP sensor

E12

5

J

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

L

6.CHECK COMPONENTS

M

Check the following.
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-226, «Component Inspection».)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, «Diagnosis Procedure».)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning component.

N

O

7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.
APP sensor
Connector
E12

ECM

Terminal
1
2

Revision: April 2013

Connector
E16

Terminal
104
111

Continuity

Existed

EC-301

2014 Note

P

P2138 APP SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

8.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.
APP sensor
Connector

ECM

Terminal

Connector

3

E12

110

E16

6

Continuity

Terminal

Existed

103

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.

9.CHECK APP SENSOR

Refer to EC-302, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 10.

10.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
>> INSPECTION END

11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022665

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Terminal

Connector

Condition

+

−

110
(APP sensor 1 signal)

111

103
(APP sensor 2 signal)

104

Accelerator
pedal

E16

Voltage

Fully released

0.6 — 0.9 V

Fully depressed

3.9 — 4.7 V

Fully released

0.3 — 0.6 V

Fully depressed

1.95 — 2.4 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY

Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Exploded View».
Revision: April 2013

EC-302

2014 Note

P2138 APP SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

>> INSPECTION END

EC

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-303

2014 Note

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009642384

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item

BRAKE SW1

1.
2.

Condition
Brake pedal

Indication

Slightly depressed

OFF

Fully released

ON

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
ECM

Connector

E16

+

–

Terminal

Terminal

100
(Brake pedal position
switch signal)

108

Condition

Brake
pedal

Slightly depressed
Fully released

Voltage (V)

Approx. 0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to EC-304, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009642385

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ground.
Brake pedal position switch
Connector

Terminal

E36

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Harness connector E7, M69
• 10A fuse (No. 5)
• Harness for open or short between brake pedal position switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-304

2014 Note

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
[HR16DE]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Brake pedal position switch

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E36

2

E16

100

Continuity

A

EC

Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Harness for open or short between ECM and brake pedal position switch

C

D

4.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to EC-305, «Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)»
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View»

E

F

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

G

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)

INFOID:0000000009642609

H

1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.
Terminals
1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Slightly depressed

J

Continuity

Fully released

I

Existed

K

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

L

2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II
1.
2.

Adjust brake pedal position switch installation. Refer to BR-20, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.

M

Terminals

N

1 and 2

Condition
Brake pedal

Fully released
Slightly depressed

Continuity
Existed
Not existed

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-305

P

2014 Note

ASCD INDICATOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ASCD INDICATOR
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009642387

1.CHECK ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR

CONDITION
• MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time

CRUISE LAMP

• Ignition switch: ON

SET LAMP

• MAIN switch: ON
• When vehicle speed is between 30 km/h
(19 MPH) and 170 km/h (105 MPH)

SPECIFICATION
ON → OFF

• ASCD: Operating

ON

• ASCD: Not operating

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to EC-306, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009642388

1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.

2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER

Check DTC with combination meter. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace.

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

Revision: April 2013

EC-306

2014 Note

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009642392

1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

EC

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Select “CLUTCH P/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check “CLUTCH P/P SW” indication under the following conditions.

C

D
Monitor item
CLUTCH P/P SW

1.
2.

Condition
Clutch pedal

Indication

Fully released

OFF

Fully depressed

ON

E

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

F

ECM
+

–

Condition

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E16

92
(Clutch pedal position switch signal)

E16

108

Clutch pedal

Fully released
Fully depressed

Voltage

Approx. 0V

G

H

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to EC-307, «Diagnosis Procedure».

I

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009642393

J

1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

K

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch harness connector and ground.

L
Clutch pedal position switch
Connector

Terminal

E48

4

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

M

4. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

N

2.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Clutch pedal position switch

3.

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E48

3

E16

92

Continuity
Existed

Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Revision: April 2013

EC-307

2014 Note

O

P

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

[HR16DE]

3.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to EC-308, «Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace clutch pedal position switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position Switch)

INFOID:0000000009642394

1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.
Clutch pedal position switch
Connector

Terminals

E48

3 and 4

Condition
Clutch
pedal

Continuity

Fully released

Existed

Fully depressed

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II

1.
2.

Adjust clutch pedal position switch installation. Refer to CL-5, «Inspection and Adjustment».
Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.
Clutch pedal position switch
Connector

Terminals

E48

3 and 4

Condition
Clutch
pedal

Continuity

Fully released

Existed

Fully depressed

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace clutch pedal position switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-308

2014 Note

COOLING FAN
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

COOLING FAN

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022666

1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

EC

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
Touch “LOW” and “Hi” on the CONSULT screen.
Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.

C

Without CONSULT
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PCS-9, «Diagnosis
Description».
2. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to EC-309, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

CVT models

Connector

Cooling fan motor

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

7

E5

1

5

E32

3

E43

Continuity

Connector

Terminal

Connector

7

E43

3.

Cooling fan motor
Terminal
2

E31

5

1

H

I

Existed

J

M/T models

IPDM E/R

F

G

Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R

E

INFOID:0000000009587164

1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.

D

Continuity

K

Existed

Check the continuity between cooling fan relay harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
CVT models

L

M

Cooling fan relay

Cooling fan motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E62

5

E32

4

Continuity

N

Existed

M/T models

Cooling fan relay

4.

Cooling fan motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E62

5

E31

4

O

Continuity
Existed

P

Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
CVT models

Cooling fan motor
Connector

Terminal

E5

2

Revision: April 2013

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

EC-309

2014 Note

COOLING FAN
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
M/T models

Cooling fan motor
Connector

Terminal

E31

3

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

2.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect cooling fan relay harness connector.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan relay harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Connector

65

E46

4.

Cooling fan relay

Terminal

Terminal
1

E62

59

2

Continuity

Existed

Check the continuity between cooling fan relay harness connector and ground.
Cooling fan relay
Connector

Terminal

E62

3

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY

Refer to EC-311, «Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)».
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace cooling fan relay.

4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

Refer to EC-310, «Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)».
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace cooling fan motor. Refer to CO-17, «Exploded View».

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Perform GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
YES or NO
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)

INFOID:0000000009587165

1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

Revision: April 2013

EC-310

2014 Note

COOLING FAN
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT models

A

Cooling fan motor
Connector

−

+

Operation

terminals

E5

1

2

E32

3

4

EC
Cooling fan motor operates

C

M/T models

Cooling fan motor
Connector

E31

−

+

Operation

D

terminals
2

3

1

4

Cooling fan motor operates

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace cooling fan motor. Refer to CO-17, «Exploded View».

Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)

F
INFOID:0000000009587163

G

1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove cooling fan relay.
Check continuity between cooling fan relay terminals under the
following conditions.
Cooling fan relay
terminals
3

5

H

I
Conditions

Continuity

12 V direct current supply between
terminals 1 and 2

Existed

No current supply

J

Not existed

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace cooling fan relay.

JSBIA0671ZZ

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-311

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description

INFOID:0000000009022669

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred to
ECM through the CAN communication line.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022670

1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item

LOAD SIGNAL

Condition
Rear window defogger switch

Indication
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-312, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION

Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item
LOAD SIGNAL

Condition
Lighting switch

Indication

ON at 2nd position

ON

OFF

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-312, «Diagnosis Procedure».

3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION

Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item
HEATER FAN SW

Condition
Heater fan control switch

Indication
ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-312, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022671

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-312, «Component Function Check».
Which circuit is related to the incident?
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.

2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

Perform trouble diagnosis of rear window defogger system. Refer to DEF-13, «Work Flow».
Revision: April 2013

EC-312

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
>> INSPECTION END

3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM

A

Perform trouble diagnosis of headlamp system. Refer to EXL-70, «Work Flow».
EC

>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

C

Perform trouble diagnosis of air conditioning system. Refer to HAC-27, «Workflow».
>> INSPECTION END

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-313

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FUEL INJECTOR
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022672

1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-314, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION

With CONSULT
Start engine.
Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
1.
2.
3.

Clicking noise should be heard.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-314, «Diagnosis Procedure».

PBIB3332E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022673

1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and ground.
Fuel injector

Cylinder
1

2

3

4

Connector

Front / Rear

F17

Front

F53

Rear

F18

Front

F54

Rear

F19

Front

F29

Rear

F20

Front

F30

Rear

Terminal

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

1

1

1

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• IPDM E/R connector F42
Revision: April 2013

EC-314

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse

A

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

EC

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Fuel injector

Cylinder
1

2

3

4

Connector

Front / Rear

F17

Front

F53

Rear

F18

Front

F54

Rear

F19

Front

F29

Rear

F20

Front

F30

Rear

ECM
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

C

D

Continuity

31

2

E

12
30

2
F10
2

2

20
29

F

Existed

16

G

25
24

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

H

I

4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

Refer to EC-315, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View»

J

5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

K

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

L

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022674

1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR
1.
2.
3.

M

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as follows.

O
Terminals

Resistance

1 and 2

11.1 — 14.5 Ω [at 10 — 60°C (50 — 140°F)]

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-315

2014 Note

FUEL PUMP
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FUEL PUMP
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022675

1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Pinch fuel feed hose
with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed
hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> EC-316, «Diagnosis Procedure».

ALBIA1074ZZ

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022676

1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
−

+

Voltage

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F10

23

E16

108

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector.
IPDM E/R

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F43

43

F10

23

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EC-316

2014 Note

FUEL PUMP
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

Fuel level sensor unit
and fuel pump
Connector

Terminal

B44

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage should for exist 1 second
after ignition switch is turn ON.

EC

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

C

4.CHECK FUSE

D

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 48) from IPDM E/R.
3. Check 15 A fuse.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace 15 A fuse.

E

1.
2.
3.

G

F

5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
harness connector.

H
Fuel level sensor unit and
fuel pump

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E44

9

B44

1

Continuity

I
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

J

K

6.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector and ground.

Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
Connector

Terminal

B44

3

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

M

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

N

O

7.CHECK FUEL PUMP

Refer to EC-318, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».

P

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EC-317

L

2014 Note

FUEL PUMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Exploded View».
NO
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

Component Inspection

[HR16DE]

INFOID:0000000009022677

1.CHECK FUEL PUMP
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit (fuel pump)” harness connector.
Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit (fuel pump)” terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 3

0.2 — 5.0 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. Refer to FL-6, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-318

2014 Note

IGNITION SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IGNITION SIGNAL

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022678

1.INSPECTION START

EC

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Does the engine start?
YES-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 2.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 3.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-319, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

2.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION

D

With CONSULT
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-319, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

F

3.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION

G

Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.
2. Check the voltage signal between ECM harness connector and ground with an oscilloscope.

H
ECM
−

+
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Voltage signal

I

Terminal

17

J

18
F10

21

E16

108

K

22
JMBIA0219GB

L

NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-319, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

M

INFOID:0000000009022679

1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

O

ECM
Connector
E16

P
Terminal

Voltage

+

−

105

108

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Proceed to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

N

EC-319

2014 Note

IGNITION SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Connector

Terminal

F26

1

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F42.
Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R

Condenser

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

34

F26

1

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

5.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Connector

Terminal

F26

2

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK CONDENSER

Refer to EC-323, «Component Inspection (Condenser)»
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace condenser.

7.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-320

2014 Note

IGNITION SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil
Cylinder

Connector

Terminal

1

F34

3

2

F35

3

3

F36

3

4

F37

3

[HR16DE]
A

Ground

Voltage

EC

Ground

Battery voltage

C

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

E

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil

Cylinder

Connector

Terminal

1

F34

2

2

F35

2

3

F36

2

4

F37

2

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Existed

F

G

H

3. Also check harness for short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

I

J

9.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.

Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ignition coil harness connector.
Ignition coil

ECM

Cylinder

Connector

Terminal

1

F34

1

2

F35

1

3

F36

1

4

F37

1

Connector

Terminal

K

L

Continuity

17
F10

18
22

M

Existed

21

N

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

O

10.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EC-322, «Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Revision: April 2013

EC-321

2014 Note

P

IGNITION SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)

INFOID:0000000009022680

1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance

1 and 2

Except 0 or ∞ Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 3
2 and 3

Except 0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure.
4. Start engine.
5. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
6. Turn ignition switch OFF.
7. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
8. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
11. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 — 17 mm (0.52 0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
12. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
JMBIA0066GB
within 50 cm (19.7 in). Be careful not to get an electrical
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge
voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EC-322

2014 Note

IGNITION SIGNAL
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Component Inspection (Condenser)

INFOID:0000000009022681

A

1.CHECK CONDENSER
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect condenser harness connector.
Check resistance between condenser terminals as follows.
Terminals

Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2

Above 1 MΩ

EC

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace condenser.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-323

2014 Note

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009022682

1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Make sure that MIL lights up.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-324, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009022683

1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check DTC with combination meter. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform troubleshooting relevant to DTC indicated.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

EC-324

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Function Check

A
INFOID:0000000009022684

1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.

EC

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

C

ECM
Terminal

Connector
E16

+

−

101
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal)

98

Voltage

D

1.0 — 4.0V

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Proceed to EC-325, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

F
INFOID:0000000009022685

G

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, «Circuit Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace ground connection.

H

I

2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

J

Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ground.
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Connector

Terminal

E17

3

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

K

L

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

N

Check the following.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor

O

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector.
Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

EC-325

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[HR16DE]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Refrigerant pressure sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E17

1

E16

98

Continuity
Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.

Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.

Refrigerant pressure sensor

ECM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E17

2

E16

85

Continuity
Existed

2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

Check the following.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to HAC-49, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace.

Revision: April 2013

EC-326

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009022686

EC

SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
C

1

2

3

2

Fuel pressure regulator system

3

3

4

4

4

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

1

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

Fuel pump circuit

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

AE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

AD

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

AC

IDLING VIBRATION

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

AB

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

ENGINE STALL

AA

Warranty symptom code

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

SYMPTOM

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

AM

HA

2

2

4

4

D

Fuel

Fuel injector circuit

Evaporative emission system
Air

Positive crankcase ventilation system
Incorrect idle speed adjustment

Electric throttle control actuator

Ignition

1

3

1

3

2

4

4
3

1

3

4

4

4

2

4

4

2

4

4

3

4

2

4

4

2

2

3

3

Reference page

F

G

H
EC-316, «Component Function
Check»

4

EC-122, «Work Procedure»

2

EC-314, «Component Function
Check»

4

EC-36, «EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
SYSTEM : System
Description»
EC-337, «Inspection»

4

4

4

4

4

1

1

1

1

1

1

EC-118, «Work Procedure»

2

EC-283, «DTC Logic»
EC-287, «DTC Logic»
EC-289, «DTC Logic»

3

1

E

2

2

2

2

2

Incorrect ignition timing adjustment

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

EC-335, «Inspection»

Ignition signal circuit

1

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

EC-319, «Diagnosis
Procedure»

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

EC-137, «Diagnosis
Procedure»

Main power supply and ground circuit

Revision: April 2013

EC-327

2

2014 Note

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

ENGINE STALL

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

IDLING VIBRATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

Warranty symptom code

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

SYMPTOM

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

AM

HA

Mass air flow sensor circuit
Engine coolant temperature sensor
circuit

EC-158, «DTC Logic»

2
1
3

EC-165, «DTC Logic»

3

3
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit
1

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

Knock sensor circuit

2

Engine oil pressure sensor circuit

4

2

EC-170, «DTC Logic»
EC-173, «DTC Logic»
EC-176, «DTC Logic»
EC-179, «DTC Logic»
EC-167, «DTC Logic»
EC-213, «DTC Logic»
EC-263, «DTC Logic»
EC-264, «DTC Logic»
EC-297, «DTC Logic»

Throttle position sensor circuit

Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit

Reference page

2

EC-291, «DTC Logic»
EC-294, «DTC Logic»
EC-300, «DTC Logic»

1

2

3

EC-222, «DTC Logic»

3

EC-242, «DTC Logic»

Crankshaft position sensor circuit

2

2

EC-224, «DTC Logic»

Camshaft position sensor circuit

3

2

EC-228, «DTC Logic»

Vehicle speed signal circuit

ECM

Revision: April 2013

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

EC-328

3

3

3

3

3

EC-240, «DTC Logic»

3

EC-247, «DTC Logic»
EC-249, «DTC Logic»

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

IDLING VIBRATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

AM

HA

2

1

3

2

2

3

3

EC-142, «DTC Logic»

2

1

3

2

2

3

3

EC-146, «DTC Logic»

3

3

3

3

3

EC-254, «DTC Logic»

4

EC-325, «Diagnosis
Procedure»

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

AF

ENGINE STALL

AE

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

AD

AA

AB

AC

Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve circuit

3

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve circuit

3

Warranty symptom code

PNP signal circuit
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit

2

3

Electrical load signal circuit
Air conditioner circuit

A

3

2

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

3

3

3

3

3

Reference page

3

3

3

2

E

F

G

H

I

HAC-27, «Workflow»
BRC-34, «Work
Flow»

4

C

D

EC-312, «Diagnosis
Procedure»

3
2

EC

J

1 — 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next table)

K

SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-329

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Fuel

Fuel tank
Fuel piping

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

IDLING VIBRATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

A
M

HA

5

5

5

5

5

5

FL-5, «Inspection»
—

5

Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight
gasoline, Low octane)
Air

—
5

5

5

5

5

5

5

—

Air duct

EM-28, «Removal
and Installation»

Air cleaner

EM-28, «Removal
and Installation»

Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —
electric throttle control actuator)
Electric throttle control actuator

Cranking

Reference page

FL-13, «Inspection»

5

Vapor lock

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

SYMPTOM

5

5

5

5
5

5

5

5

EM-28, «Removal
and Installation»

5
5

EM-28, «Exploded
View»

Air leakage from intake
manifold/Collector/Gasket

EM-28, «Exploded
View»

Battery

PG-60, «How to Handle Battery»
1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Generator circuit

1

CHG-10, «Work Flow
(With EXP-800 NI or
GR8-1200 NI)»*,
CHG-13, «Work Flow
(Without EXP-800 NI
or GR8-1200 NI)»*

Starter circuit

3

STR-13, «Work Flow
(With GR8-1200
NI)»*, STR-16, «Work
Flow (Without GR81200 NI)»*

Signal plate

6

EM-101, «Inspection»

PNP signal

4

EC-255, «Diagnosis
Procedure»

Revision: April 2013

EC-330

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

5

5

5

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

A
M

5

5

4

5

3

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

5

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

5

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

AE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

AD

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

AC

IDLING VIBRATION

AB

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

AA

A

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

Cylinder head gasket

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

Cylinder head

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

Engine

ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

SYMPTOM

EC

C
Reference page

D

E

HA

F
EM-79, «Inspection»

G

Cylinder block
4

Piston
Piston ring
Connecting rod

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

EM-101, «Inspection»

H

Bearing

I

Crankshaft
Valve
mechanism

Timing chain

EM-51, «Removal
and Installation»

Camshaft

EM-68, «Inspection»

Intake valve timing control

EM-51, «Removal
and Installation»

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

Exhaust valve timing control

EM-51, «Removal
and Installation»

Intake valve

3

Exhaust valve
Exhaust

Exhaust manifold/Tube/
Muffler/Gasket

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

Three way catalyst
Lubrication

Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil
pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/
Oil cooler
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil

J

K

EM-79, «Inspection»

L

EM-31, «Removal
and Installation»
EX-4, «Inspection»

M

LU-7, «Inspection»

N

LU-7, «Inspection»

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-331

2014 Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION

HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING

IDLING VIBRATION

SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION

EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AJ

AK

AL

A
M

Cooling

Reference page

HA
CO-12, «RADIATOR :
Inspection»
CO-12, «RADIATOR
CAP : Inspection»

Radiator/Hose/Radiator
filler cap

Thermostat
Water pump

BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

ENGINE STALL

Warranty symptom code

HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)

SYMPTOM

CO-21, «Removal
and Installation»

5
5

5

5

5

5

5

5

4

5

CO-19, «Removal
and Installation»

Water gallery

CO-25, «Removal
and Installation»

Cooling fan

CO-18, «Disassembly
and Assembly»

5

Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant
NATS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System)

CO-8, «Inspection»
1

SEC-61, «ECM :
Work Procedure»

1

1 — 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
*: For details about type, refer to CHG-3, «Commercial Service Tool».

Revision: April 2013

EC-332

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009022687

FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)

EC

If the engine speed is above 2,400 rpm under no load (for example, the shift lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-30,
«MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-333

2014 Note

IDLE SPEED
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
IDLE SPEED
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022688

1.CHECK IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
With GST
Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
Without CONSULT
Check idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which installed between No.1 ignition coil and No.1 spark plug.
>> INSPECTION END

Revision: April 2013

EC-334

2014 Note

IGNITION TIMING
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

IGNITION TIMING

A

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009022689

1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1.

EC

Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
C

D

E
JSBIA0603ZZ

F

Loop wire
A.

Timing light

B.

Timing indicator

G

2.

Check ignition timing.
H

>> INSPECTION END

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-335

2014 Note

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.

INFOID:0000000009022690

Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Check EVAP canister as follows:
Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port .
Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port .
Visually inspect the fuel check valve for cracks, damage, loose
connections chafing and deterioration.

JMBIA0443ZZ

4.
a.
b.
c.

Check fuel check valve as follows:
Blow air through connector on the fuel tank side. A considerable
resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow should be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side. Air flow
should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
If fuel check valve is suspected or not properly functioning in
step 1 and 2 above, replace it.
JSBIA0080GB

5.
a.

Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc.
Wipe clean valve housing.

SEF989X

b.

Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
Vacuum:

c.

15.3 — 20.0 kPa (0.153 — 0.200 bar, 0.156 — 0.204 kg/
cm2, 2.22 — 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)

If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.

SEF943S

Revision: April 2013

EC-336

2014 Note

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Inspection

A
INFOID:0000000009022691

1.CHECK PCV VALVE

EC

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace PCV valve. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».

C

D

E
PBIB1589E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-337

2014 Note

ECM
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ECM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009022692

JPBIA4276ZZ

ECM bracket

ECM

: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009022693

CAUTION:
Perform ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM. Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove fusible link bracket. Keep a service area.
Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
Remove ECM mounting nuts, and then remove ECM.

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

EC-338

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed

INFOID:0000000009022694

Transmission

Condition

Specification

CVT

No load* (in P or N position)

700 ± 50 rpm

M/T

No load* (in Neutral position)

650 ± 50 rpm

EC

C

D

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)

E

• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Ignition Timing

INFOID:0000000009022695

F
Transmission

Condition

Specification

CVT

No load* (in P or N position)

11 ± 2°BTDC

M/T

No load* (in Neutral position)

10 ± 2°BTDC

G

*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF

H

• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position

Calculated Load Value

INFOID:0000000009022696

Condition

Specification (Using CONSULT or GST)

At idle

10 – 35%

At 2,500 rpm

10 – 35%

I

J

K

Mass Air Flow Sensor

INFOID:0000000009022697

Supply voltage

L

Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)

Output voltage at idle

0.8 – 1.3 V*
0.8 – 4.0 g/s at idle*
2.0 – 10.0 g/s at 2,500 rpm*

Mass air flow (Using CONSULT or GST)

M

*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EC-339

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

EM

ENGINE MECHANICAL

A

EM

C

D

E

CONTENTS
HR16DE
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover…… 3
Draining Engine Coolant ……………………………………. 3
Disconnecting Fuel Piping ………………………………….. 3
Removal and Disassembly …………………………………. 3
Inspection, Repair and Replacement …………………… 4
Assembly and Installation ………………………………….. 4
Parts Requiring Angle Tightening ……………………….. 4
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ………………………………. 4

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 6

Inspection ……………………………………………………….17
Adjustment ………………………………………………………17

AIR CLEANER FILTER ………………………………. 19
Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19

SPARK PLUG …………………………………………… 21

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 24
Exploded View …………………………………………………24
Removal and Installation …………………………………..24

AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ………………….. 26

Inspection ………………………………………………………. 13

INTAKE MANIFOLD ………………………………….. 28

L

Exploded View …………………………………………………28
Removal and Installation …………………………………..28

EXHAUST MANIFOLD ……………………………….. 31

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ……………………. 34

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….14

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ……………. 40
Exploded View …………………………………………………40
Removal and Installation …………………………………..40

NVH troubleshooting Chart ………………………………. 14

IGNITION COIL …………………………………………. 47
Exploded View …………………………………………………47
Removal and Installation …………………………………..47

DRIVE BELT ……………………………………………….16

Revision: April 2013

M

Exploded View …………………………………………………31
Removal and Installation …………………………………..31

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 14

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 16
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 16

J

K

Exploded View …………………………………………………34
Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan) ……………34
Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan) ……………37

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ……………………. 16

I

Exploded View …………………………………………………26
Removal and Installation …………………………………..26

Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………….. 10

COMPRESSION PRESSURE ……………………….13

H

DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY …………………….. 24

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 10
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE ……………….10

G

Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 6
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 6
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 7

F

ROCKER COVER ……………………………………… 48

EM-1

2014 Note

N

O

P

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 48
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 48

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 90

TIMING CHAIN ………………………………………….. 51
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 51
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 51

Setting …………………………………………………………… 90
Disassembly …………………………………………………… 91
Assembly ………………………………………………………. 91

CAMSHAFT ………………………………………………. 60

CYLINDER BLOCK ……………………………………. 92

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 60
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 60
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 68

ENGINE UNIT ……………………………………………. 90

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 92
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………… 93
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 101

OIL SEAL ………………………………………………….. 73

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING .. 110

VALVE OIL SEAL …………………………………………….. 73
VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ……… 73

Description …………………………………………………… 110
Connecting Rod Bearing ………………………………… 110
Main Bearing ……………………………………………….. 112

FRONT OIL SEAL …………………………………………….. 74
FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation …….. 74
REAR OIL SEAL ………………………………………………. 74
REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ………. 74

CYLINDER HEAD ………………………………………. 76
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 76
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 76
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 77
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………… 78
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 79

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ….. 85
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ………………………………….. 85

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………… 115
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………. 115
General Specification …………………………………….. 115
Drive Belt …………………………………………………….. 115
Spark Plug …………………………………………………… 116
Exhaust Manifold ………………………………………….. 116
Camshaft ……………………………………………………… 116
Cylinder head ……………………………………………….. 118
Cylinder Block ………………………………………………. 120
Main Bearing ………………………………………………… 123
Connecting Rod Bearing ………………………………… 124

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 85
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 86

Revision: April 2013

EM-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

EM

INFOID:0000000009444822

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009444823

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
K

L

M
PIIB3706J

Draining Engine Coolant

INFOID:0000000009444824

N

INFOID:0000000009444825

O

Drain engine coolant and engine oil when the engine is cooled.

Disconnecting Fuel Piping
• Before starting work, check no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
• Release fuel pressure before disconnecting and disassembly.
• After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage.

Removal and Disassembly

P
INFOID:0000000009444826

• When instructed to use SST, use specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations.
• Use care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.

Revision: April 2013

EM-3

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]
< PRECAUTION >
• Dowel pins are used for several parts alignment. When replacing and reassembling parts with dowel pins,
check that dowel pins are installed in the original position.
• Cover openings of engine system with a tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
• Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and reassembly.
• When loosening nuts and bolts, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so
on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used in the step.

Inspection, Repair and Replacement

INFOID:0000000009444827

Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and
replace if necessary.

Assembly and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444828

• Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.
• Tighten nuts and bolts in order exactly as specified in the procedure. If a tightening order or procedure is not
specified, tighten nuts and bolts equally in several different steps. Start with the nuts or bolts in the center
and then tighten diagonally starting with the inside and moving to the outside in a spiral pattern.
• Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
• Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check engine oil or engine coolant passages for
restrictions and blockages.
• Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Before assembling, completely remove foreign materials such
as cloth lint or dust, and oil the sliding surfaces.
• After refilling engine coolant, bleed the air from the cooling system.
• After repairing, start the engine and increase engine speed to check for engine coolant leaks, fuel leaks,
engine oil leaks, and exhaust gas leaks.

Parts Requiring Angle Tightening

INFOID:0000000009444829

• For the final tightening of the following engine parts use Tool:
Tool number

: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)

—

Camshaft sprocket (INT) bolt
Cylinder head bolts
Main bearing cap bolts
Connecting rod cap bolts
Crankshaft pulley bolt (Note an angle wrench is required as bolt flange is provided with notches for angle
tightening)
• Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
• The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
• Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.

Precaution for Liquid Gasket

INFOID:0000000009444830

REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and
remove the liquid gasket using Tool (A).
Tool Number

: KV10111100 (J-37228)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap (1) the cutter where the liquid gasket is applied. Use a
plastic hammer to slide (2) the cutter by tapping on the side.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.

AWBIA1249GB

LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE

Revision: April 2013

EM-4

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
1. Using suitable tool (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the
liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
JPBIA0053ZZ

3.
4.

D

Attach liquid gasket tube to the suitable tool.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
EM-4, «Precaution for Liquid Gasket».
Apply liquid gasket without gaps to the specified location according to the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for liquid gasket application, apply liquid
gasket to the groove.

E

F

G
EMA0622D

• As for bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Check to read the text of this manual.
(A)

H

I

: Groove
: Inside

• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
JPBIA0010ZZ
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in the procedures contained in this manual concerning liquid gasket application, observe them.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-5

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009444831

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter

Removing oil pan (lower and upper) etc.

S-NT046

KV10116200
(J-26336-B)
Valve spring compressor
1. KV10115900
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
2. KV10109220
( — )
Adapter

Disassembling and assembling valve mechanism
Part (1) is a component of KV10116200, but
Part (2) is not so.

PBIC1650E

KV10112100
(BT-8653-A)
Angle wrench

Tightening bolts for main bearing cap, cylinder
head, etc.

S-NT014

KV10117100
( — )
Heated oxygen sensor wrench

Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensor 1
For 22 mm (0.87 in) width hexagon nut

NT379

KV10107902
(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller

Removing valve oil seal

NT011

KV10115600
(J-PBIA0396ZZ)
Valve oil seal drift

Installing valve oil seal
Use side A.
a: 20 (0.79) dia. d: 8 (0.31) dia.
b: 13 (0.51) dia. e: 10.7 (0.421)
c: 10.3 (0.406) dia. f: 5 (0.20)
G: Side A H: Side B
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT603

Revision: April 2013

EM-6

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

EM03470000
(J-8037)
Piston ring compressor

Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore

A

EM

C
S-NT044

ST16610001
(J-23907)
Pulley puller

D

Removing pilot converter

E

F

S-NT045

KV11103000
( — )
Pulley puller

Removing crankshaft pulley

G

H
NT676

KV11105210
(J-44716)
Stopper plate

Holding drive plate and flywheel static

I

J

ZZA0009D

K

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009444832

L
Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

M

N
PIIB1407E

Quick connector release

Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room

O

P

PBIC0198E

Revision: April 2013

EM-7

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >
Tool name

Description

Spark plug wrench

Removing and installing spark plug
a: 14 mm (0.55 in)

JPBIA0399ZZ

Pulley holder

Crankshaft pulley removing and installing

NT035

Valve seat cutter set

Finishing valve seat dimensions

S-NT048

Piston ring expander

Removing and installing piston ring

S-NT030

Valve guide drift

Removing and installing valve guide

PBIC4012E

Valve guide reamer

(1): Reaming valve guide inner hole
(2): Reaming hole for oversize valve guide

PBIC4013E

(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner

JPBIA0238ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-8

Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor
(Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
A: [18 mm (0.71 in) dia.] for zirconia heated
oxygen sensor
B: [12 mm (0.47 in) dia.] for titania heated
oxygen sensor
C: Mating surface shave cylinder
D: Flutes

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >
Tool name

Description

Acoustic tension gauge

Checking drive belt tension

A

EM

C

PBIC3881E

Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)

Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads

D

E
AEM489

Manual lift table caddy

Removing and installing engine

F

G

H

ZZA1210D

1. Compression gauge
2. Adapter

Checking compression pressure

I

J
ZZA0008D

Tube presser

Pressing the tube of liquid gasket

K

L
S-NT052

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-9

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009444833

INSPECTION
Perform inspection as follows after removal, replacement or installation of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if
there are unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
1. Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, «Removal and Installation».
2. Measure the valve clearance with the following procedure:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
• Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) clockwise and align TDC mark (no
paint) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front cover.
(B)

: White paint mark (Not used for service)

PBIC3673E

• At the same time, check that both intake and exhaust cam
lobes of No. 1 cylinder face inside ( ) as shown.
(1)

: Camshaft (INT)

(2)

: Camshaft (EXH)
: Engine front

• If the lobes do not face inside, rotate the crankshaft pulley 360
degrees to align as shown.
JPBIA4738ZZ

b.

Using suitable tool (A) measure the clearance between the valve
lifter and camshaft.
Valve clearance

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».

JPBIA4116ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-10

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Measure the valve clearances at locations marked “×” [locations indicated with ( )] as shown using suitable tool.
(A)

: No. 1 cylinder

(B)

: No. 2 cylinder

(C)

: No. 3 cylinder

(D)

: No. 4 cylinder

A

EM

C
JPBIA4117ZZ

D
Measuring position

No. 1 CYL.

No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC

c.

EXH

×

INT

×

No. 2 CYL.

No. 3 CYL.

No. 4 CYL.

E

×
×

Set No. 4 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
• Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) one revolution (360 degrees) and
align TDC mark (no paint) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front
cover.
(B)

F

G

: White paint mark (Not use for service)

H

I
PBIC3673E

• Measure the valve clearances at locations marked “×” [locations indicated with ( )] as shown using suitable tool.
(A)

: No. 1 cylinder

(B)

: No. 2 cylinder

(C)

: No. 3 cylinder

(D)

: No. 4 cylinder

J

K

L

JPBIA4118ZZ

Measuring position
No. 4 cylinder at compression TDC

No. 1 CYL.

No. 2 CYL.

No. 3 CYL.

×

EXH

×
×

INT

No. 4 CYL.

M

N

×

O

3.

If out of the specifications, adjust as necessary. Refer to “ADJUSTMENT”.

ADJUSTMENT

P

NOTE:
Proper valve clearance is obtained by selecting the correct valve lifter head thickness.
1. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
2. Remove valve lifters from the locations that are out of the standard.

Revision: April 2013

EM-11

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
< BASIC INSPECTION >
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using
a suitable tool (A).

[HR16DE]

PBIC3195J

4.

Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation:
t = t1 + (C1 – C2)
t
= Valve lifter thickness to be replaced
= Removed valve lifter thickness
t1
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2 = Standard valve clearance at 20°C (68°F):
Intake
: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Exhaust
: 0.33 mm (0.013 in)
• Crown surface thickness of new valve lifter (B) can be identified by stamp mark (A) on the under side of the lifter.
NOTE:
Available thickness of valve lifter: 26 sizes range 3.00 to 3.50
mm (0.1181 to 0.1378 in) in increments of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
when manufactured at factory. Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
• Stamp mark “302” indicates 3.02 mm (0.1189 in) in thickness.

PBIC3196J

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Install the correct thickness valve lifter.
Install camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Install timing chain. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
Manually rotate crankshaft pulley a few rotations.
Check that valve clearances are within specification. Refer to “INSPECTION”.
Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Warm up the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.

Revision: April 2013

EM-12

2014 Note

COMPRESSION PRESSURE
[HR16DE]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

COMPRESSION PRESSURE

A

Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

INFOID:0000000009444834

Warm up engine to full operating temperature and then turn it off.
Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Remove ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT).
Install compression gauge (B) with an adapter (A) into spark
plug hole.

EM

C

D

E

F
JPBIA4119ZZ

G

• Use an adapter with a diameter (a) smaller than 20 mm (0.79
in). Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during
removal.
(a)

H

: Less than 20 mm (0.79 in)

I

J
JPBIA0171ZZ

6.

With accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn ignition switch to »»» for cranking. When the gauge pointer
stabilizes, read the compression pressure and the engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
Compression pressure

7.
8.
9.

: Refer to EM-115, «General Specification».

L

CAUTION:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain the specified engine speed.
• If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery. Check the engine speed again with a
fully charged battery.
• If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug
hole to recheck the compression.
— If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn or damaged. Check the
piston rings and replace if necessary.
— If the compression pressure remains low despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat as necessary.
• If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains
low even after the addition of engine oil the head gasket may be leaking, or valves in adjacent cylinders
may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
• If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After repairing, measure the compression pressure again.
After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
Start the engine, and ensure that the engine runs smoothly.
Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-107, «Work Flow».

Revision: April 2013

EM-13

K

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009444835

JPBIA4739GB

1.
2.
3.

Locate the area where noise occurs.
Confirm the type of noise.
Specify the operating condition of engine.

Revision: April 2013

EM-14

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[HR16DE]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

A

Operating condition of engine
Location
of noise

Type of
noise

Top of engine rocker cover
cylinder
head

Front of
engine
front cover

Front of
engine

Reference page

EM

After
warmup

When
starting

When
idling

When
racing

While
driving

Ticking or
clicking

C

A

—

A

B

—

Tappet
noise

Valve clearance

EM-10

C

Rattle

C

A

—

A

B

C

Camshaft
bearing
noise

Camshaft journal oil
clearance
Camshaft runout

EM-116

D

—

Piston pin
noise

Piston to piston pin oil
clearance
Connecting rod bushing
oil clearance

EM-120

E

Piston
slap noise

Piston to cylinder bore
clearance
Piston ring side clearance
Piston ring end gap
Connecting rod bend
and torsion

EM-120

Connecting rod bushing
oil clearance
Connecting rod bearing
oil clearance

EM-120
EM-124

H

I

Slap or
knock

Crankshaft pulley
cylinder
block (side
of engine)
oil pan

Source of
noise

Before
warmup

—

Slap or
rap

A

A

—

—

—

B

B

B

B

A

Check item

F

G

Knock

A

B

C

B

B

B

Connecting rod
bearing
noise

Knock

A

B

—

A

B

C

Main bearing noise

Main bearing oil clearance
Crankshaft runout

EM-123
EM-120

B

Timing
chain and
chain tensioner
noise

Timing chain cracks
and wear
Timing chain tensioner
operation

EM-51
EM-51

C

Drive belt
(Sticking
or slipping)

Drive belt deflection

Tapping or
ticking

A

A

—

B

B

K

Squeaking or fizzing

A

Creaking

A

B

A

B

A

B

Drive belt
(Slipping)

Idler pulley bearing operation

Squall
Creak

A

B

—

B

A

B

Water
pump
noise

Water pump operation

A: Closely related B: Related

B

—

C: Sometimes related

B

—

J

EM-115

L

M
CO-19

N

—: Not related

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-15

2014 Note

DRIVE BELT
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
DRIVE BELT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444836

ALBIA1157ZZ

1.

Generator

2.

Water pump

3.

Crankshaft pulley

4.

A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

5.

Tensioner idler pulley

6.

Drive belt

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444837

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove engine undercover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Remove wheel and tire (RH) using a power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Partially remove the fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Loosen the lock nut and then release the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt.
Remove the drive belt.

INSTALLATION
1.

Pull the idler pulley in the loosening direction, and then temporarily tighten the lock nut to the following
torque.
Lock nut
(Temporary tightening)

2.

3.

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)

NOTE:
Do not move the lock nut from the temporary tightened position. Go to step 2.
Install the drive belt on each pulley.
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no engine oil, grease, or engine coolant, etc. in pulley grooves.
• Check that the belt seats securely inside the groove on each pulley.
Adjust drive belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to EM-17, «Adjustment».
CAUTION:
• Perform the belt tension adjustment with the lock nut temporarily tightened to the torque specification listed in step 1 which prevents the idler pulley from tilting.
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.

Revision: April 2013

EM-16

2014 Note

DRIVE BELT
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.

A

Lock nut (Final tightening)
5.

: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

Check that belt tension is within the specification using suitable tool. Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».

Inspection

EM

INFOID:0000000009444838

• Inspection should be done only when engine is cold or over 30
minutes after the engine is stopped.
(1)

: Generator

(2)

: Water pump

C

D

(3)

: Crankshaft pulley

(4)

: A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

(5)

: Idler pulley

(6)

: Drive belt

E

PBIC3642E

• Visually check belt for wear, damage, and cracks on inside and
edges.
• Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise twice, and check that the tension on all pulleys equalizes before testing.
• When measuring deflection, apply 98.1 N (10 kg, 22 lb) at the ( ) marked point.
• Measure the belt tension and frequency using suitable tool at the ( ) marked point.
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after turning
crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between
pulleys.
Belt deflection/belt tension and frequency

INFOID:0000000009444839

Location

Location of adjuster and tightening method

Drive belt

Adjusting bolt on idler pulley

CAUTION:
• When belt is replaced with new one, adjust belt tension to the value for “New belt,” because new belt
will not fully seat in the pulley groove.
• When tension of the belt being used exceeds “Limit,” adjust it to the value for “After adjusted.”
• When installing a belt, check it is correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
• Do not allow engine oil or engine coolant to get on the belt.
• Do not twist or bend the belt strongly.
1. Partially remove the fender protector (RH) front side clip. Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
2. Loosen lock nut (A) and temporarily set to the following torque.
Lock nut (A)
(Temporary tightening)

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)

(1)

: Generator

(2)

: Water pump

(3)

: Crankshaft pulley

(4)

: A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

(5)

: Idler pulley

(6)

: Drive belt

(B)

: Adjusting bolt

Revision: April 2013

G

H

I

: Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».

Adjustment

F

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

PBIC3643E

EM-17

2014 Note

DRIVE BELT
[HR16DE]
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Adjust the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
• When the tension adjustment is performed, the lock nut should be in the condition at Step 2. If
the tension adjustment is performed when the lock nut is loosened more than the temporary
tightening, the idler pulley tilts and the correct tension adjustment cannot be performed.
4. Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.
Lock nut (Final tightening)

Revision: April 2013

: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

EM-18

2014 Note

AIR CLEANER FILTER
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

AIR CLEANER FILTER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444840

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWBIA1598ZZ

1.

Air cleaner cover

2.

Mass air flow sensor

3.

Clamp

4.

Air duct

5.

Clamp

6.

Hose

7.

Clamp

8.

Grommet

9.

Grommet insert

10. Grommet

11. Grommet insert

12. Air duct inlet

13. Air cleaner body

14. Air cleaner filter

A.

B.

J

K

To electric throttle control actuator

To rocker cover

L

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444841

REMOVAL
1.

M

Unhook clips (A) and pull the air cleaner cover (1) upward.

N

O

P
JSBIA1092ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-19

2014 Note

AIR CLEANER FILTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Remove the air cleaner filter (1) from the air cleaner body.

[HR16DE]

JSBIA1093ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Check that the air cleaner filter is securely placed in the air cleaner body.

Revision: April 2013

EM-20

2014 Note

SPARK PLUG
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

SPARK PLUG

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444842

EM

C

D

E

F

G
AWBIA1599ZZ

1.

Ignition coil

2.

Spark plug

3.

Rocker cover

H

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444843

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-48, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock ignition coil.
Remove spark plug using a suitable tool.
Diameter (a)

J

K

: 14 mm (0.55 in)

CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock spark plug.

L

M

JPBIA0030ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

N

• If the spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time

O

: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
: Less than 20 seconds

P

CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

EM-21

2014 Note

SPARK PLUG
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.

SMA773C

• Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between
change intervals. Do not adjust the gap; replace the spark plug as
necessary if out of specification.

SMA806CA

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock the spark plug.
Make

NGK

Standard type*

PLZKAR6A-11

Gap (nominal)

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

CAUTION:
Always tighten the spark plug to specified torque to align the orientation of electrodes. The ground
electrode of a genuine spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability by tightening to the
specified torque. When replacing spark plugs, use genuine spark plugs of which the ground electrode
is adjusted.
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

EM-22

2014 Note

SPARK PLUG
[HR16DE]
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
The ground electrode of the spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability to improve combustion
eficiency in the cylinder, reduce CO2 (carbon dioxide) emission and improve fuel economy.

A

EM

C

D

E

F
JPBIA5996GB

1.

Ground electrode of spark plug

C.

Poor ignitability region

A.

Top view

B.

Air-fuel mixture flow

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-23

2014 Note

DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444844

AWBIA1618ZZ

1.

Generator bracket

2.

Plate

3.

Tensioner idler pulley

4.

Washer

5.

Spacer

6.

Center shaft

7.

Adjusting bolt

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444845

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the air duct inlet assembly. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the lock nut, and then remove the plate, tensioner idler pulley, and washer.
Remove the center shaft together with the spacer and the adjusting bolt.

INSTALLATION

Revision: April 2013

EM-24

2014 Note

DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Insert the center shaft (1) into the slide groove of the spacer (2).
Fully screw in the adjusting bolt (3) in the belt loosening direction ( ).
• At that time, place the flange (a) of the adjusting bolt and the
seat (b) of the center shaft on the spacer.
2. Place each surface (c/d) of the spacer on the generator bracket.
Install the washer, tensioner idler pulley, and plate, and then
temporarily tighten the lock nut.
Lock nut
(Temporary tightening)

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)
D

E

F

G
PBIC3885E

3.

Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-25

2014 Note

AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444846

AWBIA1598ZZ

1.

Air cleaner cover

2.

Mass air flow sensor

3.

Clamp

4.

Air duct

5.

Clamp

6.

Hose

7.

Clamp

8.

Grommet

9.

Grommet insert

10. Grommet

11. Grommet insert

12. Air duct inlet

13. Air cleaner body

A.

B.

To electric throttle control actuator

Removal and Installation

To rocker cover
INFOID:0000000009444847

REMOVAL
NOTE:
Mass air flow sensor is removable as an assembly with the air cleaner cover.
1. Remove air duct (inlet) from the air cleaner body.
2. Disconnect PCV hose from the air duct.
3. Remove the air duct (between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator).
• Add matching marks if necessary for easier installation.
4. Remove air cleaner assembly with the following steps:
a. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor harness connector.
b. Remove the air cleaner body bolts.
c. Pull up on the air cleaner assembly to disengage it from the grommet and remove the air cleaner assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not shock the mass air flow sensor.
• Do not disassemble the mass air flow sensor.
• Do not touch the sensor of the mass air flow sensor.

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect air duct (inlet) and air duct for cracks, tears, or breaks.
Revision: April 2013

EM-26

2014 Note

AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Replace air duct (inlet) and air duct if any problems are found.

[HR16DE]
A

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Align marks, attach each joint and screw clamps firmly.

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-27

2014 Note

INTAKE MANIFOLD
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INTAKE MANIFOLD
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444848

AWBIA1612ZZ

1.

EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve

2.

Hose clamp

3.

Vacuum hose

4.

PCV hose

5.

Hose clamp

6.

Intake manifold gasket

7.

Intake manifold

8.

Electric throttle control actuator

9.

Electric throttle control actuator
gasket

C.

A.

To air duct

B.

To centralized under-floor piping

D.

To booster

E.

To PCV valve in rocker cover

Removal and Installation

To air duct
Engine front
INFOID:0000000009444849

REMOVAL
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Remove air duct (inlet), air duct and air cleaner. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
2. Disconnect water hoses from the electric throttle actuator (if necessary).
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.
3. Remove electric throttle control actuator and position aside.
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid any shock to electric throttle control actuator.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
4. Disconnect EVAP purge control solenoid valve harness connector and vacuum hose from EVAP purge
control solenoid valve.
CAUTION:
Handle EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve carefully and avoid impacts.
Revision: April 2013

EM-28

2014 Note

INTAKE MANIFOLD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Disconnect vacuum hose for brake booster from intake manifold.
6. Remove intake manifold bolts (A) at the rocker cover.

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C

AWBIA1620ZZ

7.

Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
CAUTION:
Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.

D

E

F

G
AWBIA1576ZZ

8.
9.

H

Remove intake manifold and intake manifold gasket.
Remove EVAP purge control solenoid valve from intake manifold (if necessary).
CAUTION:
Handle EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve carefully and avoid impacts.

I

INSTALLATION

J

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Manifold

1.

Install the new intake manifold gasket to the intake manifold.
• Align the protrusions used for checking gasket installation condition with the clearance grooves (A) of the intake manifold
groove.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the intake manifold gasket.
NOTE:
New gasket for electric throttle control actuator can be installed
when the electric throttle control actuator is installed.

K

L

M

N
JSBIA1220ZZ

2.

Place the intake manifold into position.
CAUTION:
Check that the oil level gauge guide is not detached from the securing clip of the water inlet due to
interference of intake manifold.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-29

2014 Note

INTAKE MANIFOLD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Tighten the bolts to specification in the numerical order as
shown.

[HR16DE]

AWBIA1576ZZ

4.

Tighten the intake manifold bolts (A) to specification at the
rocker cover.
Intake manifold bolts (A)

25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m, 18 in-lb)

AWBIA1620ZZ

Electric Throttle Control Actuator
1. Install electric throttle control actuator gasket to intake manifold.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse electric throttle control actuator gasket.
2. Tighten bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps.
NOTE:
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows:
• Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after repair when removing harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EC-114, «Work Procedure».
• Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” and “Idle Air Volume Learning” after repair when replacing
electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EC-115, «Work Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

EM-30

2014 Note

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444850

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
AWBIA1603ZZ

1.

Exhaust manifold cover (upper)

2.

Harness bracket

3.

Air-fuel ratio sensor 1

4.

Exhaust manifold stay

5.

Heat insulator

6.

Exhaust manifold

7.

Exhaust manifold cover (lower)

8.

Exhaust maifold gasket

Engine front

N

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444851

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

O

Remove air duct (inlet), air duct and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».
Remove harness bracket from the cylinder head on the right rear side.
Remove exhaust manifold upper and lower covers.
Disconnect air fuel ratio sensor 1 harness connector.
Remove exhaust manifold side bolt of exhaust manifold stay.

Revision: April 2013

M

EM-31

P

2014 Note

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Use Tool (A) to remove the air-fuel ratio sensor 1 with exhaust
manifold installed on vehicle (if necessary).
Tool number

: KV10117100 ( — )

CAUTION:
• Handle air-fuel ratio sensor 1 carefully and avoid impacts.
• Before installing a new air-fuel ratio sensor 1, clean the
exhaust tube threads using suitable tool and approved
anti-seize lubricant.
• If air-fuel ratio sensor is dropped onto a hard surface,
such as a concrete floor, from a height of 0.5 m or more,
discard the sensor and use a new one.
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
8.

[HR16DE]

:
:

—
—

JPBIA4126ZZ

(J-43897-12)
(J-43897-18)

Remove exhaust manifold.
• Loosen nuts in reverse order as shown.

JPBIA4127ZZ

9. Remove exhaust manifold gasket.
10. Remove stud bolt using suitable tool from cylinder head (if necessary).

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Mounting Surface Distortion
• Using suitable tools (A) and (B), check the surface distortion of the
exhaust manifold mating surface as shown.

Limit

: Refer to EM-116, «Exhaust Manifold».

• Replace exhaust manifold if it exceeds the limit.

PBIC3530J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Exhaust manifold

1.

Install new exhaust manifold gasket.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

EM-32

2014 Note

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Do not reuse exhaust manifold gasket.

A

EM

C
JPBIA4127ZZ

2.

D

Tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.

E

F

G
JPBIA4127ZZ

3.

Tighten nuts in numerical order to the specified torque again.

H

Air-fuel ratio sensor 1
• Use Tool (A) to install the air-fuel ratio sensor 1 (if removed).

Tool number

I

: KV10117100 ( — )

CAUTION:
• Handle it carefully and avoid impacts.
• Before installing a new air-fuel ratio sensor 1, clean the
exhaust tube threads using suitable tool and approved antiseize lubricant.
• Do not over-tighten the air-fuel ratio sensor 1. Doing so may
damage the air-fuel ratio sensor 1, resulting in the MIL coming on.
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner

:
:

—
—

J

K

JPBIA4126ZZ

(J-43897-12)
(J-43897-18)

L

M

Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

N

Inspection
• Start engine and raise engine speed to check for exhaust leaks.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-33

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670757

AWBIA1595ZZ

1.

Rear oil seal

2.

O-ring

3.

Oil pan (upper)

4.

Oil pump chain tensioner (for oil
pump drive chain)

5.

Oil pump drive chain

6.

Crankshaft key

7.

Crankshaft sprocket

8.

Oil pump sprocket

9.

Oil pump

10. O-ring

11. O-ring

13. Drain plug washer

14. Oil pan (lower)

15. Oil filter

16. Connector bolt

17. Oil cooler

18. O-ring

19. Relief valve

A.

B.

C.

12. Oil pan drain plug

Refer to EM-37, «Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)»

Refer to LU-10, «Removal and Installation»

Oil pan (lower) side

Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan)

INFOID:0000000009670758

REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as
possible.
1.

Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».

Revision: April 2013

EM-34

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.

A
: Engine front

EM

C
JSBIA1126ZZ

3.

Tool number

4.
5.

D

Insert Tool (A) between oil pan (upper) and oil pan (lower).
: KV10111100 (J-37228)

CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surfaces.
• Do not insert a screwdriver. This damages the mating surfaces.
Slide the Tool (A) by tapping on the side of tool with a suitable
tool to loosen the oil pan (lower).
Remove oil pan (lower).

E

F

G
JPBIA0276ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean debris from oil pan (lower) and from the strainer.

H

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers.
1. Remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces using suitable
tool (A).
• Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan
(upper).
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.

I

J

K

L
JSBIA1127ZZ

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-35

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket (A) with a tube presser
as shown.
(1)

: Oil pan (lower)

(a)

: 7.5 — 9.5 mm (0.295 — 0.374 in)

(b)

: 4.0 — 5.0 mm (0.157 — 0.197 in) diameter

[HR16DE]

: Engine outside

Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer
toGI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants»
CAUTION:
• Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
• Do not fill the engine with oil for at least 30 minutes after
the components are installed to allow the sealant to cure.

JSBIA1128ZZ

3.

Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
: Engine front

JSBIA1126ZZ

4.

5.

Install oil pan drain plug.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse drain plug washer.
• Refer to exploded view installation direction of drain plug washer. Refer to EM-34.
Refill the engine with engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Refilling».

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
Revision: April 2013

EM-36

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Summary of the inspection items:

A
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leakage

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leakage

Level

CVT Models

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Leakage

M/T Models

Level/Leakage

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Level

Leakage

Level

Leakage

Leakage

Leakage

—

Leakage

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid
Other oils and fluids*
Fuel
Exhaust gas

EM

C

D

*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)

INFOID:0000000009671305

NOTE:
The oil strainer is included in the oil pan (upper) and cannot be removed.

F

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
a.

E

Remove the oil pan (lower). Refer to EM-34, «Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan)».
Remove oil pump sprocket and crankshaft sprocket together with oil pump drive chain. Refer to EM-37,
«Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)».
Remove oil pan (upper).
Loosen oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse of the order as
shown.
: Engine front

G

H

I

J

JPBIA4199ZZ

b.

Insert a suitable tool into the position ( ) as shown and open up
a crack between the oil pan (upper) cylinder block.

K

L

: Engine front

c.

Tool number

4.

M

Insert the Tool between the oil pan (upper) and cylinder block.
Slide Tool by tapping on the side of Tool with a hammer.

N

: KV10111100 (J-37228)

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
• The liquid gasket used at the factory is very strong. Pry only in the areas shown.
• Do not remove oil pump and oil strainer from oil pan (upper).
Remove rear oil seal from crankshaft.

JPBIA4200ZZ

O

P

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers.
1. Install the oil pan (upper):
a. Remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces using a suitable tool.
• Remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block.
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.
Revision: April 2013

EM-37

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off liquid gasket.
b. Install O-ring to the cylinder block.
c. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to areas as shown
using a suitable tool.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
(1)

: Cylinder block

(2)

: Oil pan (upper)

[HR16DE]

(A) : 2 mm (0.07 in) protruded to outside
(B) : 2 mm (0.07 in) protruded to rear oil seal mounting side
(d)

: 5.5 — 7.5 mm (0.217 — 0.295 in)

(e)

: 4.0 — 5.0 mm (0.157 — 0.197 in) diameter
: Engine front

CAUTION:
• Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
• Allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before adding oil to the engine.

JSBIA1301ZZ

d.

Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.
: Engine front

CAUTION:
Install avoiding misalignment of both oil pan gasket and Oring.
• The bolts are different according to the installation position.
Refer to the numbers as shown.
M8×180 mm
(7.09 in) bolts
M8×25 mm
(0.98 in) bolts
M8×90 mm
(3.54 in) bolts
2.

a.
b.

: No. 9, 10
: No. 4, 7, 8
: No. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6

25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
18 ft-lb)
25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
18 ft-lb)
25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
18 ft-lb)

JPBIA4199ZZ

Install rear oil seal:
CAUTION:
• Installation of rear oil seal should be completed within 5 minutes after installing oil pan (upper).
• Do not reuse rear oil seal.
• Do not touch oil seal lip.
Wipe off any liquid gasket protruding to the rear oil seal mounting part of oil pan (upper) and cylinder block
using a suitable tool.
Apply the liquid gasket lightly to entire outside area of new rear oil seal.
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants».

Revision: April 2013

EM-38

2014 Note

OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
c. Press-fit the rear oil seal using a suitable drift (A) with outer
diameter 113 mm (4.45 in) and inner diameter 90 mm (3.54 in).

A

EM

C
PBIC3660E

D

• Press-fit to the specified dimensions as shown.
(1)

E

: Rear oil seal

(A) : Rear end surface of cylinder block

d.
3.

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the grease applied to the oil seal lip.
• Be careful not to damage the rear oil seal mounting part
of oil pan (upper) and cylinder block or the crankshaft.
• Press-fit straight and check that oil seal does not curl or
tilt.
After press-fitting the rear oil seal, completely wipe off any liquid
gasket protruding to rear end surface side.
Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

F

G
PBIC3149J

H

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:

I

J

K

L

M

N
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leakage

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leakage

Level

A/T and CVT Models

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Leakage

M/T Models

Level/Leakage

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Level

Leakage

Level

Leakage

Leakage

Leakage

—

Leakage

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid
Other oils and fluids*
Fuel
Exhaust gas

*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

EM-39

2014 Note

O

P

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444854

AWBIA1579ZZ

1.

Stud bolt

2.

O-ring (green)

3.

Fuel injector (front)

4.

Clip

5.

Fuel injector (rear)

6.

O-ring (black)

7.

Fuel tube protector

8.

Fuel tube

9.

Clamp

10. Quick connector cap (engine side)

11. Fuel feed hose

12. Quick connector cap (floor piping-side)

13. Fuel connector protector

14. Fuel pipe

A.

To centralized under-floor piping

Front

CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed.

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444855

WARNING:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop.
• Be sure to work in a well-ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

EM-40

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Disconnect fuel feed hose from fuel tube. Disconnect quick connector:
(1)

[HR16DE]
A

: Quick connector cap (engine side)

NOTE:
There is no fuel return path.

EM

C
JPBIA4130ZZ

D

a.
b.

Remove quick connector cap (engine side) (1) from quick connector connection.
Disconnect fuel feed hose from hose clamp.

E

F

G
JPBIA4131ZZ

c.
d.

e.

With the sleeve (B) side of quick connector release (A) facing
quick connector (2), install quick connector release (A) onto fuel
tube (1) as shown.
Insert quick connector release (A) into quick connector (2) until
sleeve (B) contacts and goes no further. Hold quick connector
release (A) in that position (D).
CAUTION:
Inserting quick connector release hard will not disconnect
quick connector. Hold quick connector release where it
contacts and goes no further.
JPBIA2255ZZ
Draw and pull out quick connector (E) straight up from fuel tube
(1).
CAUTION:
• Pull quick connector up (E) from holding position (C) as shown.
• Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
• Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
• Discard O-ring, do not reuse.
• Avoid fire and sparks.
• Keep parts away from heat source. Be especially careful when welding is performed.
• Do not expose parts to battery electrolyte or other acids.
• Do not bend or twist connection between quick connector and fuel feed tube during installation
or removal.
• Be sure to cover openings of disconnected fuel feed hose
(A) and fuel tube (C) with plug or plastic bag (B) to avoid
fuel leaks and entry of foreign material.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

JSBIA1295ZZ

4.

Disconnect fuel feed hose from fuel pipe as follows:

Revision: April 2013

EM-41

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
NOTE:
There is no fuel return path.
a. Remove quick connector cap (floor piping side) (1) from quick
connector connection.

[HR16DE]

JSBIA1291ZZ

b.

Disconnect fuel feed hose from hose clamp (1).

JSBIA1292ZZ

c.

Hold the quick connector (1) while pushing in tabs (F), and pull
out the hard tube (A).
(2)

: Retainer

(B)

: Connection (cross-section)

(C)

: Resin tube

(D)

: To under floor fuel line

(E)

: To fuel tank

(G)

: Disconnection

CAUTION:
• Inserting quick connector release hard will not disconnect
quick connector. Hold quick connector release where it
contacts and goes no further.
• The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
• Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
• Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
• Prevent acid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting
on the resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and
removal.
• Remove the remaining retainer only when the tube is
replaced.
• When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer.

Revision: April 2013

EM-42

JPBIA0130ZZ

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with
plug or plastic bag (B) to avoid fuel leaks and entry of foreign material.

[HR16DE]
A

(A) :Fuel feed hose

EM

(C) :Fuel tube

C
JSBIA1295ZZ

5.
6.
7.

D

Disconnect harness connectors from fuel injectors.
Disconnect harness connectors from intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.
Remove fuel tube protector.
• Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.

E

: Engine front

F

G

H
JPBIA4132ZZ

8.

Remove fuel injector and fuel tube assembly:

I

: Engine front

Loosen two nuts in reverse order as shown.
Pull the fuel tube straight out until injector lower O-rings are
clear.
c. Remove the nuts and the fuel tube.
CAUTION:
• When removing, be careful to avoid interference with fuel
injectors.
• Use a shop cloth to absorb any fuel leaks from fuel tube.

J

a.
b.

9.
a.
b.

K

JPBIA4133ZZ

M

Remove fuel injector from fuel tube:
Open and remove clip (1).
Remove fuel injectors (3) and (4) from fuel tube (2) by pulling straight out.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak from fuel tube.
• Be careful not to damage fuel injector nozzle during removal.
• Do not bump or drop fuel injector.
• Do not disassemble fuel injector.
• Do not reuse O-rings.

N

O

P

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
1. Install O-rings on the fuel injector.
CAUTION:
• Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to interchange them.

Revision: April 2013

L

EM-43

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Fuel tube side
Nozzle side

: Black
: Green

•
•
•
•
•
•
2.
a.

b.

c.

Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
Check that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it.
Do not twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, allow it to
retract before inserting it into fuel tube.
• Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
Install fuel injector (4) to fuel tube (1):
Insert new clip (2) into clip groove (G) on fuel injector (4).
• Insert new clip (2) so that protrusion (F) of fuel injector
matches cut-out (D) of clip.
(3)

: O-ring (black)

(5)

: O-ring (green)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
• Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If
interference occurs, replace O-ring.
Insert fuel injector (4) into fuel tube (1) with clip (2) attached.
• Insert fuel injector (4) while matching it to the axial center.
• Insert fuel injector (4) so that protrusion (B) of fuel tube
matches cut-out (C) of clip (2).
• Check that fuel tube flange (A) is securely located in flange
groove (E) on clip (2).
Check that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector
(4) does not rotate or come off.

JPBIA4530ZZ

3.

Set fuel tube and fuel injector assembly in position for installation on cylinder head.
CAUTION:
For installation, be careful not to interfere with fuel injector nozzle.
• Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
: Engine front

JPBIA4133ZZ

4.

Install fuel tube protector.

Revision: April 2013

EM-44

2014 Note

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.

A
: Engine front

EM

C
JPBIA4132ZZ

5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
c.

d.
e.

f.
8.
a.
b.

D

Connect harness connectors to fuel injectors.
Connect harness connectors to intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.
Connect fuel feed tube (engine side):
Check for damage or foreign material on the fuel tube and quick connector.
Apply new engine oil lightly to area around the top of fuel tube.
Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube.
• Insert quick connector (1) to fuel tube until the top spool (C) on
fuel tube is inserted completely and the 2nd level spool (D) is
positioned slightly below quick connector bottom end.
(B)

: Upright insertion

(E)

: Correctly connected

E

F

G

CAUTION:
• Hold in position (A) as shown when inserting fuel tube
into quick connector.
• Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to preJPBIA2256ZZ
vent damage to O-ring inside quick connector.
• Insert until you hear a “click” sound and actually feel
the engagement.
To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, pull quick connector hard by hand. Check it
is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube.
Install quick connector cap (engine side) (1) to quick connector
connection.
• Install quick connector cap (engine side) (1) with the side
arrow facing quick connector side (fuel feed tube side) as
shown.
CAUTION:
• Check that the quick connector and fuel tube are
securely engaged with the quick connector cap (engine
side) groove.
• If the quick connector cap (engine side) cannot be
installed easily the quick connector may not be conJPBIA4131ZZ
nected correctly. Remove and reconnect.
Install fuel feed hose to hose clamp.
Connect fuel feed tube (floor piping side):
Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Align the quick connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the centralized under floor
piping until a click is heard.

Revision: April 2013

EM-45

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
c. After connecting, check that the connection is secure:
• Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
connector.
• With the fuel feed hose not fixed to the clamp, pull quick connector (A) hard by hand to check that the quick connector (A)
is not disconnected from the centralized underfloor piping (1)
and that the quick connector (1) is securely connected.
9. Install remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.

[HR16DE]

PBIC3795E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check on Fuel Leaks

1.

2.

Turn ignition switch “ON” (with the engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check there
are no fuel leaks at connection points. Refer to.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking points out of clear sight.
Start the engine. With engine speed increased, check again that there are no fuel leaks at connection
points.
• Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC114, «Work Procedure».
• If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-115, «Work Procedure».
CAUTION:
Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as the engine becomes extremely hot.

Revision: April 2013

EM-46

2014 Note

IGNITION COIL
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

IGNITION COIL

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671308

EM

C

D

E

F

G
AWBIA1599ZZ

1.

Ignition coil

2.

Spark plug

3.

Rocker cover

H

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009671309

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, «Removal and Installation».
Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION:
• Do not drop or shock ignition coil.
• Do not disassemble ignition coil.

J

K

INSTALLATION
1.

L

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-47

2014 Note

ROCKER COVER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ROCKER COVER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444856

AWBIA1474ZZ

1.

Exhaust camshaft position sensor

2.

Clip

3.

Rocker cover

4.

Clamp

5.

Hose

6.

PCV valve

7.

O-ring

8.

Rocker cover gasket

9.

Oil filler cap

10.

O-ring

11.

Intake camshaft position sensor

12.

O-ring

A.

To intake manifold

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444857

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-47, «Removal and Installation».
Remove fuel tube protector. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
Remove PCV hose from rocker cover.
Remove PCV valve (if necessary).
Remove rocker cover.

Revision: April 2013

EM-48

2014 Note

ROCKER COVER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.

A
: Engine front

EM

C
JPBIA4135ZZ

6.
7.

D

Remove rocker cover gasket from rocker cover.
Remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and front cover using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.

E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
1. Install the rocker cover:
a. Press gasket onto the bosses for the rocker cover bolt holes as
shown to prevent the gasket from dropping off.

F

G

: Engine front

H

I

JPBIA4136ZZ

b.

Apply liquid gasket to the cylinder head (1) and front cover (2) as
shown.
(a)

J

K

: 2.5 — 3.5 mm diameter

Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
CAUTION:
• The components must be installed within 5 minutes of the
liquid gasket application.
• Then allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before
putting oil in the engine.

L

M
JPBIA4137ZZ

N

c.

Install rocker cover to cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Check that the gasket has not slipped out of position.
• Tighten bolts in numerical order in at least three separate
stages as shown.

O

P

: Engine front

JPBIA4135ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-49

2014 Note

ROCKER COVER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2.

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

EM-50

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

TIMING CHAIN

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444858

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
AWBIA1609ZZ

1.

Timing chain slack guide

2.

Timing chain tensioner

3.

Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

4.

Camshaft sprocket (INT)

5.

Plug

6.

Front oil seal

7.

Crankshaft pulley

8.

Crankshaft pulley bolt

9.

Front cover

10. Crankshaft sprocket

11. Crankshaft sprocket key

12. Oil pump sprocket

13. Oil pump drive chain

14. Oil pump drive chain tensioner

15. Timing chain

16. Timing chain tension guide

A.

M

N

Refer to INSTALLATION

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444859

CAUTION:
The rotation direction indicated in the text is as viewed from the engine front.
NOTE:
• When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from
spilling.
• When removing the camshafts, the oil pump drive chain does not need to be removed.

REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

EM-51

2014 Note

O

P

TIMING CHAIN
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove front wheel and tire (RH). Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
2. Remove front fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
3. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine oil on drive belt.
4. Drain coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
5. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
6. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, «Removal and Installation».
7. Remove the water pump pulley. Refer to CO-19, «Removal and Installation».
8. Support the bottom surface of engine (1) using a transmission jack (2), and then remove engine mounting
insulator (RH). Refer to EM-85, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Position a suitable jack under the engine and transaxle assembly as shown.
• Do not damage the front exhaust tube or transaxle oil pan
with the jack.
9. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke:

a.

Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) clockwise and align TDC mark
(without paint mark) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front cover.
(B)

ALBIA0894GB
PBIC3673E

: White paint mark (Not use for service)

PBIC3673E

b.

Check the matching marks on each camshaft sprocket are positioned as shown.
(1)

: Timing chain

(2)

: Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

(3)

: Camshaft sprocket (INT)

(A) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(B) : Pink link
(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)

• If not, rotate crankshaft pulley one more turn to align matching
marks to the positions.

JPBIA4138ZZ

10. Remove crankshaft pulley:

Revision: April 2013

EM-52

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Secure crankshaft pulley (1) using suitable tool (A) and loosen
crankshaft pulley bolt.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the crankshaft pulley bolt as it will be used
as a supporting point for the pulley puller.

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
PBIC3710E

b.

D

Attach Tool (A) in the M 6 thread hole on crankshaft pulley, and
remove crankshaft pulley.

E

(B) : M6 bolt

Tool number

: KV11123000 (

—

)

F

G
PBIC3711E

11. Remove front cover:
a. Loosen bolts in the reverse order as shown.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

JPBIA4139ZZ

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-53

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b.

Cut liquid gasket by prying the position (
remove the front cover.

) as shown, and then

JPBIA4140ZZ

12. Remove front oil seal from front cover using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the front cover.
13. Remove chain tensioner (1):
a. Fully push down the chain tensioner lever (A), and then push the
plunger (C) into the inside of tensioner.
• The tab (B) is released by fully pushing the lever down. Then
the plunger can be moved.
b. Pull up the lever to align its hole position with the body hole position.
• When the lever hole is aligned with the body hole position, the
plunger is secured.
• When the protrusion parts of the plunger ratchet and the tab
PBIC3713E
face each other, both hole positions are not aligned. At that
time, correctly engage them and align these hole positions by
slightly moving the plunger.
c. Insert the stopper pin (D) into the body hole through the lever hole, and then secure the lever at the upper
position.
NOTE:
A hexagonal wrench of 2.5 mm (0.098 in) is used as a stopper pin (D).
d. Remove chain tensioner.
14. Remove the timing chain tension guide (2) and the timing chain
slack guide (1).

JPBIA4141ZZ

15. Remove the timing chain (2).
• Pull the timing chain slack toward the camshaft sprocket
(EXH) (1), and then remove the timing chain and start the
removal from camshaft sprocket (EXH) side.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft or camshaft while timing chain is
removed. It causes interference between valve and piston.

JPBIA4142ZZ

16. Remove the crankshaft sprocket and the oil pump drive:
Revision: April 2013

EM-54

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Remove oil pump drive chain tensioner (1).
• Pull out from the shaft (B) and spring attaching holes (A).

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
JPBIA4143ZZ

b.
c.

D

Hold the top of the oil pump shaft using the socket (size: E8),
and then loosen the oil pump sprocket nut and remove it.
Remove the crankshaft sprocket (1), the oil pump drive chain
(2), and the oil pump sprocket (3) at the same time.

E

F

G
JPBIA4230ZZ

INSTALLATION

H

CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
NOTE:
For installation follow the relationship between the matching mark on
each timing chain and that of the corresponding sprocket, with the
components installed.
(1)

: Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

(2)

: Timing chain

(3)

: Timing chain slack guide

(4)

:Timing chain tensioner

(5)

: Crankshaft sprocket

(6)

: Oil pump drive chain

(7)

: Oil pump sprocket

(8)

: Timing chain tension guide

(9)

: Camshaft sprocket (INT)

I

J

K

L

M

(A) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(B) : Pink link

N

(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(D) : Orange link
(E) : Matching mark (stamp)

O

(F) : Crankshaft key (point straight up)
JPBIA4223ZZ

P

1.

Install the crankshaft sprocket and the oil pump drive related parts:

Revision: April 2013

EM-55

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Install the crankshaft sprocket (1), the oil pump drive chain (2),
and the oil pump sprocket (3) at the same time.

[HR16DE]

: Engine front

• Install the crankshaft sprocket so that its invalid gear area (A)
is toward the back of the engine.
• Install the oil pump sprocket so that its protrusion faces the
front of engine.
NOTE:
There is no matching mark in the oil pump drive related parts.
JPBIA5248ZZ

b.

Hold the top of the oil pump shaft using the socket (size: E8),
and then tighten the oil pump sprocket nut.
(1)

: Crankshaft sprocket

(2)

: Oil pump drive chain

(3)

: Oil pump sprocket

JPBIA4230ZZ

c.

Install oil pump drive chain tensioner (1).
• Insert the body into the shaft (B) while inserting the spring into
the attaching hole (A) of cylinder block front surface.
• Check that the tension is applied to the oil pump drive chain
after installing.

JPBIA4143ZZ

2.

Install timing chain:
(A) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(B) : Pink link
(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(D) : Orange link
(E) : Matching mark (stamp)
(F) : Crankshaft key (point straight up)

• Install by aligning matching marks on each sprocket and timing chain.
• If these matching marks are not aligned, rotate the camshaft
slightly to correct the position.
CAUTION:
• After the matching marks are aligned, keep them aligned
by holding them.
• To avoid skipped teeth, do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft until front cover is installed.

JPBIA4144ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-56

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Install timing chain tension guide (2) and timing chain slack
guide (1).

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
JPBIA4141ZZ

4.

D

Install chain tensioner (1).
• Secure the plunger at the most compressed position using a
stopper pin (A), and then install it.
• Pull out the stopper pin after installing the chain tensioner.

E

F

G
PBIC3722E

5.
6.
7.
a.

Check matching mark position of timing chain and each sprocket again.
Install the front oil seal to the front cover. Refer to EM-74, «FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation».
Install front cover with the following procedure:
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to the engine block joint locations (A) as shown.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants»
CAUTION:
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed.
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed.
• Then allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before
adding oil to the engine.
(1)

: Cylinder head

(2)

: Cylinder block

(3)

: Oil pan (upper)

H

I

J

K

L

(A) : Liquid gasket application area [3.0 — 4.0 mm (0.12 — 0.16 in) diameter]

M

N

O

P

JPBIA4145ZZ

b.

Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to front cover as shown using suitable tool.

Revision: April 2013

EM-57

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants».
CAUTION:
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed.
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed.
• Then allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before
adding oil to the engine.
(1)

: Front cover edge

(A) : Liquid gasket application area
(b)

: 4.0 — 5.6 mm

(c)

: Liquid gasket application area [3.0 — 4.0 mm (0.12 — 0.16 in) diameter]

JPBIA4146ZZ

c.

d.

Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.
NOTE:
Refer to the following for the installation position of bolts.
M6 bolt

: No. 1

M10 bolts

: No. 11, 12, 13

M10 bolts

: No. 14, 15

M8 bolts

: Except above

6.6 N·m (0.67 kg-m,
58 in-lb)
55.0 N·m (5.6 kg-m,
41 ft-lb)
55.0 N·m (5.6 kg-m,
41 ft-lb)
25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
18 ft-lb)

After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to specified torque in
numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking to
surface.

JPBIA4139ZZ

8.

Insert crankshaft pulley by aligning with crankshaft key.
• When inserting crankshaft pulley with a plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference).

Revision: April 2013

EM-58

2014 Note

TIMING CHAIN
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Do not damage front oil seal lip section.
9. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt:
• Secure crankshaft pulley with a suitable tool and tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
a. Apply new engine oil to thread and seat surfaces of crankshaft pulley bolt.
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
Crankshaft pulley bolt
c.
d.

A

EM

C

: 35.0 N·m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

Put a paint mark (B) on crankshaft pulley, mating with any one of
six easy to recognize angle marks (A) on crankshaft bolt flange
(1).
Turn another 60 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
• Check the tightening angle with movement of one angle mark.

D

E

F
PBIC3726E

10. Check that crankshaft turns smoothly by rotating by hand clockwise using suitable tool.
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

G

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

H

• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

EM-59

2014 Note

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CAMSHAFT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444860

AWBIA1606ZZ

1.

Camshaft bracket (No. 2 to 5)

2.

Camshaft bracket (No. 1)

3.

Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

4.

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

5.

O-ring

6.

Camshaft sprocket (INT)

7.

Plug (EXH)

8.

Washer (EXH)

9.

Oil filter (for exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve)

10. Cylinder head

11. Oil filter (for intake valve timing
control solenoid valve)

12. Washer (INT)

13. Plug (INT)

14. O-ring

15. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve

16. Bracket

17. Valve lifter (INT)

18. Valve lifter (EXH)

19. Camshaft (INT)

20. Camshaft (EXH)

A.

Refer to INSTALLATION

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444861

CAUTION:
The rotation direction indicated in the procedure is as viewed from the engine front.

REMOVAL
1.

Remove timing chain. Refer to EM-51, «Removal and Installation»

Revision: April 2013

EM-60

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove camshaft sprocket (EXH) (1).
CAUTION:
A
• Hold the camshaft hexagonal part (A), and then secure the
camshaft.
• Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately, so as
EM
not to contact valve with piston.
NOTE:
The timing chain with the front cover installed is not disengaged
from the crankshaft sprocket and it is not dropped into the front
C
cover. Therefore, the timing chain tension holding device is not
necessary.
JPBIA4160ZZ
3. Turn the camshaft sprocket (INT) to the most advanced position.
D
CAUTION:
Installation and removal of the camshaft sprocket (INT) must be done in the most advanced position. Make sure to follow the procedure exactly.
E
• The sprocket (C) and vane (camshaft coupling) (B) are
designed to spin and move within the range of a certain
angle.
• With the engine stopped and the vane in the most
F
retarded angle, it will not spin because it is locked to the
sprocket side by the internal lock pin (A).
• If the camshaft sprocket bolts are turned in the situation
G
described above, the lock pin will become damaged and
cause malfunctions because of the increased horizontal
load (cutting force) on the lock pin.
H

PBIC3679E

a.

• Put the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the most advanced position:
Remove camshaft bracket (No. 1) (1).
NOTE:
Timing chain is present only for illustration purposes. Timing
chain is to be removed during removal procedure.

I

J

: Engine front

K

• Loosen the bolts in several steps, and then remove them.

L

PBIC3680E

b.

M

Apply the following air pressure to the No. 1 journal oil hole (A)
of camshaft (INT) (1) shown using an air gun.
Air pressure

N

: 300 kPa (3.1 kg/cm2, 44 psi) or more

O

: Engine front

• Apply the air pressure into the oil hole on the second groove
from the front of camshaft thrust (B).
• Proceed all the way through step “e” with the air pressure on.
• Attach the rubber nozzle narrowed to the top of the air gun to
prevent air leaks from the oil hole (A). Securely apply the air
pressure to the oil hole.
WARNING:
Eye protection should be worn as needed.
CAUTION:
• There are other oil holes in the side grooves. Do not use the incorrect oil holes.
Revision: April 2013

EM-61

P
JPBIA4150ZZ

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Be sure not to damage the oil path with the tip of the air gun.
• Wipe all the oil off the air gun to prevent oil from being blown all over along with the air, and the
area around the air gun should be wiped with a rag when applying air pressure.
NOTE:
The air pressure is used to move the lock pin into the disengage position.
c.

Hold the camshaft sprocket (INT) with hands, and then apply the power counterclockwise/clockwise alternately.
(A) : Air gun
(B) : Rubber nozzle

• Finally rotate the sprocket of the camshaft sprocket (INT)
counterclockwise [the direction shown by the arrow ( )].
• Perform the work while continuously applying the air pressure
to the oil hole.

JPBIA4151ZZ

• If the lock pin is not released, tap the camshaft sprocket (INT)
lightly with a plastic hammer (A) using suitable tool.
• If the camshaft sprocket (INT) is not rotated counterclockwise
even if the above procedures are performed, check the air
pressure and the oil hole position.

JPBIA4152ZZ

d.

While doing the above, once you hear a click (the sound of the
internal lock pin disengaging) from inside the camshaft sprocket
(INT), start turning the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the counterclockwise direction in the most advanced angle position.
(A/B) : Lock pin recess

e.
f.

(C)

: Lock pin engaged

(D)

: Most advanced angle

• Keep the air pressure on.
• If there is no click, as soon as the vane side (camshaft side)
PBIC3684E
starts moving independently of the sprocket, the lock pin has
become disengaged.
• Check that it is in the most advanced angle position by seeing if the stopper pin groove (A) and the stopper pin hole (B) are matched up as shown.
Stop applying air pressure and release the camshaft (INT).
Insert the stopper pin (A) into the stopper pin holes in the camshaft sprocket (INT) and lock in the most advanced angle position.
CAUTION:
No load is exerted on the stopper pin (spring reaction, etc.).
Since it comes out easily, secure it with tape (B) to prevent
it from falling out.
NOTE:
The stopper pin shows one example of a hexagonal wrench for
2.5 mm (0.098 in) [length of inserted section: approximately15
mm (0.59 in)].
JPBIA4153ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-62

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4.
a.

Remove the camshaft sprocket (INT):
Keeping the camshaft hexagonal part (A) in place using suitable
tool, loosen the bolts for the camshaft sprocket (INT) (2).
(1)

A

EM

Camshaft (INT)

C

D
JPBIA4154ZZ

CAUTION:
• Do not drop stopper pin.
• Tape (C) the stopper pin (B) so it does not come out.
• Do not subject it to impact by dropping.
• Do not disassemble. [Do not loosen the three bolts (A)].
NOTE:
While removing the camshaft sprocket (INT), if you have taken
out the stopper pin and the lock pin has been rejoined in the
most retarded angle, do the following to restore it.
i. Install the camshaft (INT) and tighten the bolts enough to prevent air from leaking out.
CAUTION:
The internal lock pin will get damaged, so keep the torque
PBIC3691E
on the bolts to the minimum required to prevent air from
escaping.
ii. Apply the air pressure, disengage the lock pin, and turn the vane to the most advanced angle position.
iii. Insert the stopper pin.
iv. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT) from the camshaft.
5.

Remove camshaft brackets (No. 2 to 5).
• Loosen bolts in several steps in the reverse order as shown.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

(A) : EXH side

L

(B) : INT side
: Engine front

NOTE:
The camshaft bracket (No. 1) has been already removed.

M

PBIC3686E

6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove camshaft (EXH).
Remove camshaft (INT).
Remove valve lifter (if necessary).
• Identify installation positions, and store lifters without mixing them up.
Remove the alternator and bracket. Refer to CHG-23, «Exploded View»

Revision: April 2013

EM-63

N

O

P

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) and
the plug (2) securing the oil filter for intake valve timing control
solenoid valve.
11. Remove the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve.
12. Remove the plug on the exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve.
13. Remove the oil filter for exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve.
14. For component inspection after removal, refer to EM-68,
«Inspection».

[HR16DE]

PBIC3692E

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers.
1. Install oil filter (1) for intake and exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valves.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse washers.
NOTE:
The intake side is shown as an example.
• The oil filter (1) and washer (2) are assembled to the plug (3),
and then install them in to the cylinder head. Refer to EM-60,
«Exploded View».
AWBIA1146GB

2.

Install intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.
• Insert it straight into the cylinder head.
• Tighten bolts.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.

3.

Install valve lifters.
• If they are reused, install them in the original positions.
Put a matching mark for positioning the camshaft (INT) and the camshaft sprocket (INT):
NOTE:
This helps prevent the knock pin from engaging with the incorrect pin hole after installing the camshaft
(INT) and the camshaft sprocket (INT).
Put the matching marks (A) on a line extending from the knock
pin position of camshaft (INT) (1) front surface.
• Put the marks on the visible position with the camshaft
sprocket installed as shown.
Put the matching marks on a line extending from the knock pin
hole (B) position of camshaft sprocket (INT) (2) as shown.
• Put the marks on the visible position with it installed to the
camshaft.

4.

a.

b.

PBIC3696E

5.

Put a matching mark for positioning the camshaft (EXH) and the camshaft sprocket (EXH):
NOTE:
This helps prevent the knock pin from engaging with the incorrect pin hole after installing the camshaft
(INT) and the camshaft sprocket (EXH).

Revision: April 2013

EM-64

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Put the matching marks (A) on a line extending from the knock
pin position of camshaft (EXH) (1) front surface.
• Put the marks on the visible position with the camshaft
sprocket installed as shown.
b. Put the matching marks on a line extending from the knock pin
hole (B) position of camshaft sprocket (EXH) (2) as shown.
• Put the marks on the visible position with it installed to the
camshaft.

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
JPBIA4155ZZ

6.

D

Install camshaft.
(1)

: Camshaft (EXH)

(2)

: Camshaft (INT)

E

(A) : Identification mark
Indentification Color

M1 (A)

Camshaft (EXH)

Yellow — Green x 2

Camshaft (INT)

White

F

G

• Note that the camshafts (INT and EXH) have different shapes
at the rear.

JPBIA4156ZZ

H

• Install camshafts to the cylinder head so that knock pins (A) on
front end are positioned as shown.
(1)

: Camshaft (EXH)

(2)

: Camshaft (INT)

I

J

: Upper side

NOTE:
Though camshaft does not stop at the portion as shown for the
placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is
placed for the same direction as shown.
7.

K

JPBIA4157ZZ

L

Install camshaft brackets (2 to 5) and (A to D).
M

(A) : EXH side (2 to 5)
(B) : INT side (A to D)
: Engine front

N

O
PBIC3703E

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-65

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
8. Tighten bolts of camshaft brackets in the following steps, in
numerical order as shown.

[HR16DE]

(A) : EXH side
(B) : INT side
: Engine front

a.

Tighten No. 9 to 11 in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts

b.

: 5.88 N·m (0.60 kg-m, 52 in-lb)

Tighten all bolts in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts

9.
a.

: 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)

Tighten all bolts in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts

d.

PBIC3686E

Tighten No. 1 to 8 in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts

c.

: 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)

: 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)

Install the camshaft sprocket (INT/EXH) to the camshaft (INT/EXH):
Refer to the matching mark (A) added in step 4. Securely align
the knock pin and the pin hole, and then install them.
NOTE:
The intake side is shown as an example.

PBIC3700E

10. Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt (INT/EXH).
(1)

: Camshaft sprocket (INT)

CAUTION:
Hold the camshaft hexagonal part (A), using a suitable tool
to secure the camshaft.

JPBIA4158ZZ

11. Align the matching mark (peripheral groove) (A/C) and the pink
link (B) on the timing chain.
(1)

: Timing chain

(2)

: Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

(3)

: Camshaft sprocket (INT)

• If the positions of knock pin and pin groove are not aligned,
move the camshaft (EXH) slightly to correct these positions.
JPBIA4159ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EM-66

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
12. Pull out the stopper pin (A), and then apply the tension to the
timing chain by rotating the crankshaft pulley clockwise slightly.
(1)

: Plunger

(2)

: Chain tensioner

[HR16DE]
A

EM

(B) : Lever
(C) : Lever hole
(D) : Front cover has been removed for clarity.

C
PBIC3772E

13.
14.
15.
a.

D

Pull out the stopper pin of chain tensioner.
Install front cover.
Return the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the most retarded position:
Remove the stopper pin (A) from the camshaft sprocket (INT).

E

(B) : Tape

F

G

H
PBIC3685E

b.

Turn the crankshaft pulley (1) slowly clockwise (A) and return
the camshaft sprocket (INT) to the most retarded angle position.

I

J

K

PBIC3704E

• When first turning the crankshaft, the camshaft sprocket (INT)
will turn. Once it is turned more, and the vane (camshaft) also
turns, then it has reached the most retarded angle position.

L

M

(B) : Stopper pin hole

N

(C) : Most advanced angle
(D) : Lock pin engaged

• The most retarded angle position can be checked by seeing if
the stopper pin groove (A) is shifted clockwise.
• After spinning the crankshaft slightly in the counterclockwise
direction, you can check the lock pin has joined by seeing if
the vane (camshaft) and the sprocket move together.

O
PBIC3705E

P

16. Install the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) to the rear end of cylinder head.
• Tighten bolts with it completely inserted.
17. Check and adjust valve clearance. Refer to EM-10, «Inspection and Adjustment».
18. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

EM-67

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009444862

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Filter
• Check that there is no foreign material on the oil filter (1) and check
it for clogging.
• Check the oil filter for damage.
• If there is some damage, replace the oil filter, the plug, and the
washer as a set.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the washer.

PBIC3693E

Camshaft Runout

1.

2.
3.

Put V-block on a precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 5 journals of camshaft.
CAUTION:
Do not support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft
sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other
four locations.
Set a suitable tool vertically to No. 3 journal.
Turn camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft
runout using suitable tool. (Total indicator reading)
PBIC2499E

Revision: April 2013

EM-68

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

A

Standard and Limit
: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
4.

If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.

EM

Camshaft Cam Height

1.

Measure the camshaft cam height using suitable tool (A).
C

Standard and Limit
Intake
: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
Exhaust
Cam wear limit:
: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
2.

D

E

If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
PBIC3178J

F

Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal using suitable tool
(A).

Standard:

G

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
H

I

PBIC3179J

CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER
• Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque. Refer to «INSTALLATION» for the tightening procedure.
• Measure inner diameter (b) of camshaft bracket using suitable tool
(A).
Standard

J

K

L

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».

M

N
JPBIA4192ZZ

O

CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE
• (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) – (Camshaft journal diameter)
Standard and Limit

P

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».

• If it exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE:
Camshaft brackets cannot be replaced as single parts, because they are machined together with cylinder
head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play

Revision: April 2013

EM-69

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Install camshaft in cylinder head. Refer to EM-60, «Removal and Installation» for tightening procedure.
2. Install a suitable tool (A) in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure the camshaft end play using suitable tool when
camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction of axis).
Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».

PBIC3694E

• Measure the following parts if out of the standard.
— Dimension “A” for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing
Standard

: 4.000 — 4.030 mm (0.1574 — 0.1586 in)

— Dimension “B” for camshaft thrust
Standard

: 3.877 — 3.925 mm (0.1526 — 0.1545 in)

• Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/
or cylinder head.
KBIA3345J

Camshaft Sprocket Runout

1.

2.

Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 5 journals of camshaft.
CAUTION:
Do not support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter
from the other four locations.
Measure the camshaft sprocket runout using suitable tool (A).
(Total indicator reading)
Limit

: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

• If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.

JPBIA4193ZZ

Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks.
• If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to EM-116,
«Camshaft».

KBIA0182E

Valve Lifter Clearance
VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER

Revision: April 2013

EM-70

2014 Note

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Measure the outer diameter of valve lifter using suitable tool (A).

[HR16DE]
A

Standard

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
EM

C
PBIC3185J

D

VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER
Measure the diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head using suitable tool (A).
Standard

E

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».
F

G
PBIC3184J

H

VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE
• (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) – (Valve lifter outer diameter)
Standard

I

: Refer to EM-116, «Camshaft».

• If out of the standard, referring to the each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and valve lifter hole diameter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head.

J

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket Oil Groove
CAUTION:
• Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0014 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-143, «Diagnosis
Procedure» (P0011) or EC-147, «Diagnosis Procedure» (P0014).
• Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from the splashing engine oil.
NOTE:
This section provides the inspection method of oil passage of cam sprocket on the intake side. For oil passage
on the exhaust side, the inspection procedure must be changed as instructed below:

1.
2.
a.
b.

· Step 3

: Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».

· Step 4

: Crank engine, and then check that engine oil comes out from exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve hole (A). End crank after checking.

·Step 5

Perform the following inspection if engine oil does not come out from exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve oil hole of the cylinder head.
• Remove oil filter, and then clean it. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to
EM-60, «Exploded View».

·Step 6

: Remove components between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket
(EXH), and then check each oil groove for clogging.

Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EM-71

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

CAMSHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
c. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
4. Crank engine, and then check that engine oil comes out from
intake valve timing control solenoid valve hole (A). End crank
after checking.
(1)

[HR16DE]

: Plug
:Engine front

5.

6.
7.

WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.).
CAUTION:
JPBIA4194ZZ
• Prevent splashing by using a shop cloth to prevent injury
from splashing engine oil and so as to prevent engine oil contamination.
• Use a shop cloth to prevent engine oil from being splashed to engine and vehicle. Especially be
careful not to spill engine oil to rubber parts of drive belts, engine mounting insulator, etc. Wipe
engine oil off immediately if it is splashed.
Perform the following inspection if engine oil does not come out from intake valve timing control solenoid
valve oil hole of the cylinder head.
• Remove oil filter, and then clean it. Refer to LU-10, «Removal and Installation».
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60,
«Exploded View».
Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT),
and then check each oil groove for clogging.
• Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
After inspection, installation of components is in the reverse order of removal

Revision: April 2013

EM-72

2014 Note

OIL SEAL
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OIL SEAL

A

VALVE OIL SEAL
VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444863

EM

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Remove camshafts. Refer to EM-60, «Removal and Installation».
Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-60, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate crankshaft, and set piston with valve oil seal to be removed to TDC. This will prevent the valve
from dropping into cylinder.
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring front cover with timing chain.
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer, and valve spring
using Tools.
Tool number (A)
Tool number (B)
Tool number (C)

: KV1016200 (J-26336-A)
: KV10109220 ( — )
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

C

D

E

F

G

JPBIA1365ZZ

CAUTION:
• Do not damage valve lifter holes.
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to
press it.
(1)

: Valve spring retainer

(A)

: Attachment

Tool number

I

J

: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

K

AWBIA1422ZZ

5.
6.

Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat. Refer to EM-78, «Disassembly and
Assembly».
Remove valve oil seal with Tool (A).
Tool number

H

: KV10107902 (J-38959)

L

M

N

O

P
PBIC3728E

INSTALLATION
1.

Apply new engine oil to valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.

Revision: April 2013

EM-73

2014 Note

OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Press in valve oil seal to the height “H” shown with Tool (A).
Height “H”

: 13.2 — 13.8 mm (0.520 — 0.543 in)

Tool number

: KV10115600 (J-38958)

[HR16DE]

PBIC3211J

3.

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444864

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove front fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
Remove crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-51, «Removal and Installation».
Remove front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front cover and crankshaft.

5.

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Apply new engine oil to new front oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
Install front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
(A)

: Dust seal lip

(B)

: Oil seal lip
: Engine outside
: Engine inside

PBIC3485J

• Press-fit front oil seal using a suitable drift.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage front cover and crankshaft.
• Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
3.

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

REAR OIL SEAL
REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444865

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-86, «Removal and Installation» (M/T models) and
EM-86, «Removal and Installation» (CVT models).
Remove clutch cover and clutch disk (M/T models). Refer to CL-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (CVT models). Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».

Revision: April 2013

EM-74

2014 Note

OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.

[HR16DE]
A

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Apply the liquid gasket lightly to entire outside area of new rear oil seal.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
(A)

: Dust seal lip

(B)

: Oil seal lip

EM

C

D

: Engine outside
: Engine inside

E

PBIC3485J

• Press-fit rear oil seal with a suitable drift (A) outer diameter
113 mm (4.45 in) and inner diameter 90 mm (3.54 in).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
• Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
• Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip.

F

G

H

I
PBIC3660E

J

• Press in rear oil seal (1) to the position as shown.
(A)

: Rear end surface of cylinder block

(b)

: 0 — 0.5 mm (0 — 0.020 in)

K

L

M
PBIC3149J

3.

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-75

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CYLINDER HEAD
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670525

Cylinder Head Bolts

JPBIA4097ZZ

1.

Cylinder head assembly

2.

Cylinder head bolt

4.

Cylinder head gasket

A.

INSTALLATION

Removal and Installation

3.

Washer

INFOID:0000000009670526

REMOVAL
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
2. Remove the following components and related parts.
• Air duct. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
• Fuel tube and fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, «Removal and Installation».
• Water outlet. Refer to CO-25, «Removal and Installation».
• Exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
• Front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
• Camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
3. Remove cylinder head loosening bolts in reverse order as
shown.
(A) : EXH side
(B) : INT side
: Engine front

PBIC3732E

4.

Remove cylinder head gasket.

INSTALLATION
1.

Install new cylinder head gasket.

Revision: April 2013

EM-76

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Install cylinder head, and tighten cylinder head bolts in order as shown using Tool (A).
• Clean threads and seating surfaces of bolts.
A
• Apply new engine oil to threads and seating surface of bolts.
CAUTION:
• If cylinder head bolts are reused, check their outer diameters before installation. Refer to EM-79,
EM
«Inspection».
• Check and confirm the tightening angle by using Tool. Do
not judge by visual inspection without the tool.
C

Tool number

: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
D

E
AWBIA1426ZZ

F

Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6

: 40.0 N·m (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)
: 100° clockwise in order
: 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb)
: 40.0 N·m (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)
: 100° clockwise in order
: 100° clockwise in order

G

H

: Engine front

3.

AWBIA1425ZZ

I

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670527

J

Valve Components
K

L

M

N

O

P

JPBIA4098GB

Revision: April 2013

EM-77

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.

Spark plug

2.

Valve collet

3.

Valve spring retainer

4.

Valve spring

5.

Valve spring seat

6.

Valve oil seal

7.

Valve guide (INT)

8.

Valve guide (EXH)

9.

Valve seat (EXH)

10. Valve (EXH)
A.

11. Valve (INT)

12. Valve seat (INT)

ASSEMBLY

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009670528

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
Remove valve lifter.
• Identify installation positions, and store lifters without mixing them up.
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer, and valve spring
using Tools.
Tool number (A)
Tool number (B)
Tool number (C)

: KV1016200 (J-26336-A)
: KV10109220 ( — )
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

JPBIA1365ZZ

CAUTION:
• Do not damage valve lifter holes.
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to
press it.
(1)

: Valve spring retainer

(A)

: Attachment

Tool number

: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

AWBIA1422ZZ

4.
5.
6.

Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring.
Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve.
• Identify installation positions, and store without mixing them up.
Remove valve oil seal using Tool (A).
Tool number

: KV10107902 (J-38959)

PBIC3728E

7.
8.
9.

Remove valve spring seat.
When valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-79, «Inspection» for removal.
When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-79, «Inspection» for removal.

Revision: April 2013

EM-78

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ASSEMBLY
1. Install valve guide if removed. Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».
2. Install valve seat if removed. Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».
3. Install valve oil seal.
• Install with Tool (A) to match dimension as shown.
Height “H”

: 13.2 — 13.8 mm (0.520 — 0.543 in)

Tool number

: KV10115600 (J-38958)

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C

D

PBIC3211J

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Install valve spring seat.
Install valve.
• Install larger diameter to intake side.
Install valve spring.
NOTE:
It can be installed in either direction.
Install valve spring retainer.
Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer, and valve spring
using Tools.
Tool number (A)
Tool number (B)
Tool number (C)

E

F

G

H

: KV1016200 (J-26336-A)
: KV10109220 ( — )
: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

I

J
JPBIA1365ZZ

K

CAUTION:
• Do not damage valve lifter holes.
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to
press it.
(1)

: Valve spring retainer

(A)

: Attachment

Tool number

L

M

: KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

N

AWBIA1422ZZ

9. Install valve lifter.
10. Install spark plug with a suitable tool.

P

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670529

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter

Revision: April 2013

O

EM-79

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening
method. Whenever the size difference between “d1” and “d2”
exceeds the limit, replace them with a new one.

[HR16DE]

Limit (“d1”–“d2”): 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
• If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than “d2”,
use it as “d2” point.

PBIC3717E

Cylinder Head Distortion
NOTE:
When performing this inspection, cylinder block distortion should be also checking. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
1. Wipe off engine oil and remove water scale (like deposit), gasket, sealant, carbon, etc. using scraper.
CAUTION:
Use utmost care not to allow gasket debris to enter passages for engine oil or engine coolant.
2. At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head,
measure the distortion in six directions using suitable tools (A/
B).

Limit

: Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».

• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder head.

PBIC3207J

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
VALVE DIMENSIONS
• Check the dimensions of each valve. For the dimensions, refer to EM-79, «Inspection».
• If dimensions are out of the standard, replace valve and check valve seat contact. Refer to “VALVE SEAT
CONTACT”.
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
Valve Stem Diameter

• Measure the diameter of valve stem using suitable tool (A).
Standard

: Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».

Valve Guide Inner Diameter

• Measure the inner diameter of valve guide using suitable tool (A).
Standard

: Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».

Valve Guide Clearance

• (Valve guide clearance) = (Valve guide inner diameter) – (Valve
stem diameter)
Standard and Limit

PBIC3213J

: Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace valve and/or valve guide. Refer to EM-78, «Disassembly
and Assembly».
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide.

Revision: April 2013

EM-80

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230
to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil.

[HR16DE]
A

EM

C
SEM008A

2.

D

Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.2 US
ton, 2.0 lmp ton) force] or suitable tool.
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.

E

F

G
SEM931C

3.

Ream cylinder head valve guide hole with a suitable tool.

H

Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts):
Intake and exhaust
: 9.175 — 9.201 mm (0.3612 — 0.3622 in)

I

J

SEM932C

4.

K

Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil.
L

M

N
SEM008A

5.

Using a suitable tool, press valve guide (1) from camshaft side
of cylinder head (2) to dimensions as shown.
Projection “H”:

O

: 11.4 — 11.8 mm (0.448 — 0.464 in)

P

WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.

PBIC3217J

Revision: April 2013

EM-81

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Apply reamer finish to valve guide with a suitable tool.

[HR16DE]

Standard
5.000 — 5.018 mm (0.1968 — 0.1975 in)

SEM932C

VALVE SEAT CONTACT
• After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within the specifications, perform this
procedure.
• Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve
contact on the surface.
• Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference.
(A)

: OK

• If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting
surface still has “NG” conditions (B) even after the recheck,
replace valve seat. Refer to EM-79, «Inspection».

JPBIA0187ZZ

VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT
When valve seat is removed, replace with oversized [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] valve seat.
1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess
in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this.
CAUTION:
Prevent scoring cylinder head by excessive boring.
2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat.

Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)]
Intake
: 32.500 — 32.527 mm (1.2795 — 1.2805 in)
Exhaust : 26.400 — 26.427 mm (1.0393 — 1.0404 in)
• Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.

SEM795A

3.

Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil.

SEM008A

4.

Provide valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Press-fit valve seats into cylinder head.

Revision: April 2013

EM-82

2014 Note

CYLINDER HEAD
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned.
CAUTION:
Avoid directly touching cold valve seats.
5.

A

EM

Using a suitable tool finish valve seat to the specified dimensions. For dimensions, refer to EM-118, «Cylinder head».
CAUTION:
When using a valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle
with both hands. Then, press the contacting surface evenly
around the valve seat to cut in a single attempt. Improper
pressure or cutting several times may result in wavy valve
seat.

C

D

E
SEM934C

6.
7.

Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting.
Check again for normal contact. Refer to «VALVE SEAT CONTACT».

F

VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
• Set a tri-square (A) along the side of valve spring and rotate spring.
Measure the maximum clearance between the top of spring and
tri-square.
(B)

Limit

G

H

: Contact

: Refer to EM-118, «Cylinder head».
I

• If it exceeds the limit, replace valve spring.
PBIC3219J

VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
• Check valve spring pressure with valve spring seat installed at the
specified spring height.
CAUTION:
Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring.

Standard

J

K

L

: Refer to EM-118, «Cylinder head».

• If the installation load or load with valve open is out of the standard, replace valve spring (with valve spring seat).

M
SEM113

N

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
Revision: April 2013

EM-83

2014 Note

O

P

CYLINDER HEAD
[HR16DE]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

EM-84

2014 Note

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[HR16DE]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444870

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWBIA1586ZZ

1.

Engine mounting (RH) stay

2.

Engine mount (RH) stay

3.

Engine mounting insulator (RH)

4.

Rear engine mounting bracket

5.

Rear torque rod

6.

Engine mounting bracket (LH)

7.

Engine mounting bracket (LH)

8.

Engine mounting insulator (LH)

9.

Mass damper

A.

Front mark

B.

Transaxle (lower)

C.

CVT models

CAUTION:
Check that the stud bolt (*2) is tight at the specified torque before tightening the nut (*1) shown. [Stud
bolt (*2) may be loosened after loosening the nut (*1)]

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-85

2014 Note

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[HR16DE]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AWBIA1587ZZ

1.

Engine mounting (RH) stay

2.

Engine mount (RH) stay

3.

Engine mounting insulator (RH)

4.

Rear engine mounting bracket

5.

Rear torque rod

6.

Engine mounting bracket (LH)

7.

Mass damper

8.

Engine mounting insulator (LH)

9.

Engine mounting bracket (LH)

10. Engine mount bracket (LH)

A.

Front mark

B.

Transaxle (upper)

C.

D.

M/T models

Transaxle (lower)

CAUTION:
Check that the stud bolt (*2) is tight at the specified torque before tightening the nut (*1) shown. [Stud
bolt (*2) may be loosened after loosening the nut (*1)]

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444871

WARNING:
• Position the vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
• Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
• Attach proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG if engine is not already equipped.
CAUTION:
• Always be careful to work safely.
• Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool enough.
• If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, refer to the applicable sections.
• Always use the support point specified for lifting.
• Use either 2-pole lift type or separate type lift. If board-on type must be used, support the rear axle
jacking point with a transmission jack or similar tool before starting work, in preparation for the
backward shift of center of gravity.
• For supporting points for lifting and jacking point at rear axle, refer to GI-29, «2-Pole Lift».
NOTE:
• When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from
spilling.

Revision: April 2013

EM-86

2014 Note

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[HR16DE]
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Remove the engine and the transaxle assembly from the vehicle downward. Separate the engine and the
transaxle.

A

REMOVAL
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.

Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
EM
Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
C
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts.
Front fender protector (RH/LH). Refer to EXT-24.
Drive belt: Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
D
Battery and battery tray. Refer to CHG-23.
Air duct (inlet), air duct, and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Radiator hose (upper and lower). Refer to CO-14.
E
Exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5.
Disconnect engine room harness connector at the ECM and CVT (if equipped).
CAUTION:
F
Protect connectors against foreign materials during the operation by wrapping in a plastic bag.
Disconnect heater hoses. Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Disconnect fuel feed hose at engine side. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
G
Disconnect control linkage cable from transaxle. Refer to TM-19, «Exploded View» (M/T models) and CL14, «Exploded View» (CVT models).
Disconnect clutch tube on transaxle side from clutch damper. Refer to CL-14, «Exploded View».
H
Remove alternator. Refer to CHG-23, «Exploded View».
Disconnect vacuum hose at engine side.
I
Remove EVAP hoses at engine side.
Remove a/c compressor from the engine with the piping connected. Temporarily position the a/c compressor on the vehicle side with a rope without placing a heavy load on the piping.
J
Remove ground cable at transaxle side.
Remove drive shafts (RH/LH). Refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation».
Remove rear torque rod (1).
K
(2)

: Rear engine mounting bracket
: Front

L

M

JSBIA0643ZZ

21. When engine can be hoisted, install engine slinger to cylinder
head front left side (A) and rear right side (B) and support the
engine position with a suitable tool.

N

O

: Engine front

Slinger (A) bolts
Slinger (B) bolts

P

: 65 N·m (6.6 kg-m, 48 ft-lb)
: 25 N·m (2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
AWBIA1134GB

Revision: April 2013

EM-87

2014 Note

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
22. Use a suitable jack (A) to securely support the bottom of the
engine and the transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Put a piece of wood or an equivalent as the supporting surface and secure in a stable condition.

[HR16DE]

PBIC3223J

23. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH) (1).
(2)

: Engine mounting insulator (LH)

(A)

: Engine front side

(B)

: Transaxle side

24. Remove engine through bolt-securing nut (C).

JSBIA1223ZZ

25. Carefully lower suitable jack, or raise lift to remove the engine and the transaxle assembly. Observe the
following cautions:
CAUTION:
• Check that no part interferes with the vehicle side.
• Before and during lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
• During removal, always be careful to prevent the vehicle from falling off the lift due to changes in
the center of gravity.
• If necessary, support the vehicle by setting jack or suitable tool at the rear.
26. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-23, «Exploded View».
27. Lift with a hoist and separate the engine from the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, «Exploded View»
(M/T models) and TM-250, «Exploded View» (CVT models).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow engine oil to get on engine mounting insulator. Be careful not to damage engine mounting insulator.
• Check that each mounting insulator is seated properly, and tighten nuts and bolts.
• When installation directions are specified, install parts according to the direction marks on them,
referring to the figure of components. Refer to EM-85, «Exploded View».
Engine Mounting Insulator (RH)
• Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.
: Front

JPBIA2809ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Revision: April 2013

EM-88

2014 Note

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
[HR16DE]
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
A
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
EM
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide C
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including D
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specE
ified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas

F

G

H

I

*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-89

2014 Note

ENGINE UNIT
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
ENGINE UNIT
Setting

INFOID:0000000009444872

NOTE:
The following procedures explain how to disassemble the engine with the engine stand fastened to the bell
housing. Some steps may be different if using a different type of engine stand.
1. Install engine to engine stand:
a. On (M/T models), remove flywheel.
• Secure flywheel (1) using suitable tool (A) and remove bolts.
Tool number

: KV11105210 (J-44716)

CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble flywheel.
• Do not place flywheel with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from
becoming magnetized.
b.

On (CVT models), remove driveplate.
• Secure driveplate (1) using suitable tool (A) and remove bolts.
Tool number

: KV11105210 (J-44716)

CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble flywheel.
• Do not place flywheel or drive plate with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from
becoming magnetized.
c.

MBIB1382E

MBIB1382E

Lift the engine with a hoist to install it onto a widely used engine stand.
CAUTION:
• Use the engine stand that has a load capacity approximately 150 kg (331 lb) or more large
enough for supporting the engine weight.
• If the load capacity of stand is not adequate, remove the following parts beforehand to reduce the potential risk of overturning stand.
— Intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
— Exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, «Removal and Installation».
— Rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
NOTE:
The figure shows an example of widely used engine stand (A)
that can support the mating surface of transaxle with flywheel
removed.
CAUTION:
Before removing the hanging chains, check the engine
stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning.

PBIC3227J

2.

Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

EM-90

2014 Note

ENGINE UNIT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer.
• Do not reuse drain plug washer.
3. Drain engine coolant by removing water drain plug (1) from
inside of the engine.

[HR16DE]
A

EM
: Engine front

Water drain plug
tightening torque

C

: Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».

D
AWBIA1607ZZ

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

INFOID:0000000009444873

Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, «Exploded View».
Remove exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, «Exploded View».
Remove oil pan (lower). Refer to EM-34, «Exploded View».
Remove ignition coil, spark plug, and rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, «Exploded View».
Remove fuel injector and fuel tube. Refer to EM-40, «Exploded View».
Remove front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-51, «Exploded View».
Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-60, «Exploded View».
Remove cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, «Exploded View».

Assembly

E

F

G

H
INFOID:0000000009444874

I

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-91

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

CYLINDER BLOCK
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444877

AWBIA1621ZZ

1.

Crankshaft position sensor cover

2.

Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

3.

O-ring

4.

Drain plug

5.

Cylinder block

6.

Oil level gauge

7.

Oil level gauge guide

8.

O-ring

9.

Knock sensor

Revision: April 2013

EM-92

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
10. Oil temperature sensor

11.

13. Top ring

14. Second ring

Oil pressure sensor

12. Oil jet

A

15. Oil ringS

16. Piston

17. Piston pin

18. Connecting rod

19. Connecting rod bearing (upper)

20. Main bearing (upper)

21. Thrust bearing

22. Crankshaft key

23. Connecting rod bolt

24. Connecting rod cap

25. Connecting rod bearing (lower)

26. Main bearing (lower)

27. Crankshaft

28. Pilot converter (CVT models)

29. Signal plate

30. Rear oil seal

31. Drive plate (CVT models)

32. Reinforce plate (CVT models)

33. Flywheel (M/T models)

34. Main bearing cap

35. Main bearing cap bolt

A.

B.

Chamfered

EM

C

Refer to ASSEMBLY

Crankshaft side

Disassembly and Assembly

D
INFOID:0000000009444878

E

DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The following procedures explain how to disassemble the engine with the engine stand fastened to the bell
housing. Some steps may be different if using a different type of engine stand.
1. Remove cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, «Exploded View».
2. Remove knock sensor.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle knock sensor avoiding shocks.
3. Remove the crankshaft position sensor cover (3), and then
crankshaft position sensor (POS) (2).
(1)

O-ring

(4)

Cylinder block

a.
b.
c.

G

H

I

: Engine front

4.
5.

F

CAUTION:
• Avoid impacts such as a dropping.
• Do not disassemble.
• Keep sensor away from metal particles.
JPBIA4202ZZ
• Do not place the sensor in a location where it is exposed
to magnetism.
• Do not reuse O-ring.
Remove oil pan (upper and lower). Refer to EM-34.
Remove piston and connecting rod assembly:
• Before removing piston and connecting rod assembly, check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to
EM-101, «Inspection».
Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
Remove connecting rod cap.
Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push piston and connecting rod assembly out through the cylinder head side.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surface with connecting rod cap.
• Do not damage the cylinder wall or crankshaft pin.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

KBIA3365J

6.

Remove connecting rod bearings.
CAUTION:
Identify original positions for installation, and store the bearings without mixing them up.

Revision: April 2013

EM-93

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
7. Remove piston rings from piston.
• Before removing piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
• Use a suitable tool (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• When removing piston rings, be careful not to damage
the piston.
• Do not damage piston rings by expanding them excessively.

PBIC3233J

8.
a.

Remove piston from connecting rod using the following procedure:
Remove snap rings using snap ring pliers (A).

AWBIA1429ZZ

b.

Heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) with a heat gun (A).

AWBIA1430ZZ

c.

Push out piston pin using a punch of outer diameter approximately 18 mm (0.71 in).

PBIC0262E

9.

Remove the main bearing cap.
• Measure crankshaft end play before loosening main bearing cap bolts. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

EM-94

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
a. Loosen and remove bolts in several steps in reverse of the
numerical order as shown.

A

: Engine front

EM

NOTE:
When removing or installing signal plate, use socket (size T40).

C
JPBIA4203ZZ

b.

Remove the main bearing cap from the cylinder block while tapping lightly with a plastic hammer.

10. Remove crankshaft (2).
CAUTION:
• Do not damage or deform signal plate (1) mounted on
crankshaft.
• When setting crankshaft on a flat floor surface, use a
block of wood to avoid interference between signal plate
and the floor surface.
• Do not remove signal plate unless it is necessary to do
so.
NOTE:
When removing or installing signal plate, use socket (size T40).
JPBIA4531ZZ
11. Pull rear oil seal out from rear end of crankshaft.
12. Remove main bearing (upper/lower) and thrust bearings from cylinder block and main bearing caps.
CAUTION:
Identify original installation positions, and store the bearings without mixing them up.
13. Remove oil jets.
CAUTION:
Insert the dowel pin of oil jet into the cylinder block dowel pin hole to loosen the bolt.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
1. Fully air-blow engine coolant and engine oil passages in cylinder block, cylinder bore and crankcase to
remove any foreign material.
WARNING:
Use goggles to protect your eyes.
2. Install cylinder block plugs.
• Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (3).
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
(2)

: O-ring

L

M

N

O

: Engine front
AWBIA1607ZZ

• Tighten each plug as specified below.
Part

Washer

Tightening torque

(1)

Yes

54.0 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb)

(3)

No

9.8 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 87 in-lb)

Revision: April 2013

K

EM-95

2014 Note

P

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
3. Install oil jets.
4. Install main bearings and thrust bearings:
a. Remove dust, dirt, and engine oil on the bearing mating surfaces of cylinder block.
b. Install thrust bearings to the both sides of the No. 3 journal housing (B) on cylinder block.

[HR16DE]

: Engine front

• Install thrust bearings with the oil groove (A) facing crankshaft
arm (outside).

PBIC3258J

c.

Install the main bearings paying attention to the direction.
• Before installing main bearings, apply new engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not apply
engine oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it.
• When installing, align main bearing to the center position of cylinder block and main bearing cap.
• Ensure the oil holes on cylinder block and oil holes (A) on the
main bearings (1) are aligned.
NOTE:
For assembly, the center position can be visually identified.
• To install the main bearing, obtain a proper fit. Do not allow the
main bearing to lie off the cylinder block chamfer.
• To install the main bearing, obtain a proper fit. Do not allow the
main bearing to lie off bearing cap chamfer.

PBIC3746E

5.
a.

Install signal plate to crankshaft if removed.
Set the signal plate (1) with the flange facing toward the counterweight side (engine front side) to the crankshaft rear surface.
(A) : Dowel pin hole

b.

c.
6.

7.

After positioning crankshaft and signal plate with positioning
dowel pin, tighten bolt.
NOTE:
Dowel pin of crankshaft and signal plate is provided as a set for
each.
Remove dowel pin.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove dowel pin.
Install crankshaft to cylinder block.
• While turning crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly.
CAUTION:
Do not install rear oil seal at this time.
Install main bearing caps.

Revision: April 2013

EM-96

JPBIA4231ZZ

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Install the main bearing cap while referring to the front mark
(B) and the journal number stamp (A).

[HR16DE]
A

: Engine front

EM

NOTE:
Main bearing cap cannot be replaced as a single part,
because it is machined together with cylinder block.

C
JPBIA4204ZZ

8.

D

Tighten main bearing cap bolts in numerical order as shown with
the following steps:

E

: Engine front

a.
b.

Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts.
Tighten main bearing cap bolts in numerical order.
Step 1
Step 2

F

: 32.4 N·m (3.3 kg-m, 24 ft-lb)
: 60° clockwise

G
JPBIA4203ZZ

c.

Turn main bearing cap bolts 60 degrees clockwise (angle tightening) in numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
Check and confirm the tightening angle by using the Tool
(A) or protractor. Do not judge by visual inspection without
the tool.
Tool number

H

I

: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)

J

PBIC3750E

• After installing the main bearing cap bolts, check that crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand.
• Check crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
9. Install piston to connecting rod with the following procedure:
a. Using a heat gun, heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force
[approximately 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F)]. From the front to the rear, insert piston pin into piston and connecting rod.
b. Set so that the front mark (A) on the piston head and the cylinder number (C) are in the position as shown.

K

L

M

N
(B) : Oil hole
(D) : Connecting rod big end grade

NOTE:
The symbols without notes are for manufacturing.
CAUTION:
Press-fit the piston so as not to damage it.
NOTE:
The joint between the connecting rod and the piston pin is a
press fit.

Revision: April 2013

EM-97

O

P
PBIC3766E

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Press-fit the piston pin (2) from piston surface (A) to the depth
of 2.35 mm (0.092 in) (b).
(1)

[HR16DE]

: Connecting rod
: Press-fit direction

• After finishing work, check that the piston (3) moves freely.

JPBIA2058ZZ

10. Using suitable tool (A), install piston rings.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage piston.
• Do not damage piston rings by expanding them excessively.

PBIC3233J

• Position each ring with the gap as shown referring to the piston front mark (B).
(A)

: Oil ring upper or lower rail gap (either of them)

(C)

: Second ring and oil ring spacer gap

(D)

: Top ring gap

• Install second ring with the stamped mark (E) facing upward.
Stamped mark:
Top ring
Second ring

: 1R
: 2R

PBIC3752E

11. Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and connecting rod cap.
• When installing connecting rod bearings, apply new engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not
apply engine oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it.
• Install the bearing in the center position.
NOTE:
There is no stopper tab.
• Check that the oil holes on connecting rod and connecting rod bearing are aligned.
• Install the connecting rod in the dimension (A) as shown.
(1)

: Connecting rod

(2)

: Connecting rod bearing (upper)

(3)

: Connecting rod bearing (lower)

(4)

: Connecting rod cap

(A)

: 1.7 — 2.1 mm (0.067 — 0.083 in)
: Engine front

NOTE:
Install the connecting rod bearing in the center position with
the dimension as shown. For service operation, the center
position can be checked visually.

Revision: April 2013

EM-98

PBIC4169E

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
12. Install piston and connecting rod assembly to crankshaft.
• Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center.
A
• Apply new engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston and crankshaft pin.
• Match the cylinder position with the cylinder number on connecting rod to install.
• Using Tool (A) or suitable tool, install piston with the front mark
EM
on the piston head facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surface with connecting rod cap.
• Do not damage the cylinder wall or crankshaft pin.
C
Tool number

: EM03470000 (J-8037)
D

PBIC3765E

13. Install connecting rod cap.
• Match the stamped cylinder number marks (C) on connecting
rod with those on connecting rod cap to install.

E

F

(A) : Front mark
(B) : Oil hole

G

(D) : Connecting rod big end grade

H
PBIC3766E

I

14. Inspect outer diameter of connecting rod bolts. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
15. Tighten connecting rod bolt:
a. Apply new engine oil to the threads and seats of connecting rod bolts.
b. Install connecting rod bolts in several steps.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
c.

Tighten to
Completely loosen
Tighten to

J

K

: 27.4 N·m (2.8 kg-m, 20 ft-lb)
: 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb)
: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)

L

Then turn all connecting rod bolts 60 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
CAUTION:
Check and confirm the tightening angle by using the Tool (A) or protractor. Avoid judgement by
visual inspection without the Tool.
Tool number

: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)

M

N

O

P
PBIC3753E

• After tightening connecting rod bolt, check that crankshaft rotates smoothly.
• Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
16. Install oil pan (upper). Refer to EM-37, «Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)».
NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

EM-99

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Install the rear oil seal after installing the oil pan (upper).
17. Install rear oil seal. Refer to EM-74, «REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation».
18. Install flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (CVT models).

[HR16DE]

M/T models

• Secure crankshaft with a stopper plate (A) and tighten bolts
crosswise over several times.
(1)

Tool number

:Flywheel

: KV11105210 (J-44716)

MBIB1382E

CVT models

• Secure crankshaft with a stopper plate (A) and tighten bolts
crosswise over several times.
(1)

Tool number

:Drive plate

: KV11105210 (J-44716)

PBIC3226J

CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch and contact surface for clutch disc of flywheel.
19. Install knock sensor (1).
: Engine front

• Install connectors so that they are positioned toward the rear
of the engine.
CAUTION:
• Do not tighten bolt while holding the connector.
• If any impact by dropping is applied to knock sensor,
replace it with a new one.
NOTE:
• Check that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block
mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor.
• Check that knock sensor does not interfere with other parts.
20. Install crankshaft position sensor (POS) (2) and O-ring (1) and
then install the crankshaft position sensor cover (3) on the cylinder block (4).
• Tighten bolts with sensor inserted completely.

PBIC3754E

: Engine front

CAUTION:
• Avoid impacts such as a dropping.
• Do not disassemble.
• Keep sensor away from metal particles.
• Do not place the sensor in a location where it is exposed
to magnetism.
• Do not reuse O-ring.
Revision: April 2013

EM-100

JPBIA4202ZZ

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

A

21. For the oil level gauge guide (1), secure in position (B) shown to
the water inlet clip (A) after inserting to the cylinder block side.

EM

C

D
PBIC3755E

22. Assembly of the remaining components is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Inspection

E
INFOID:0000000009444879

CRANKSHAFT END PLAY

F

• Measure the clearance between thrust bearings and crankshaft
arm when crankshaft is moved fully forward or backward using
suitable tool (A).

G

Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

H

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace thrust bearings,
and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft
also.

I
PBIC3762E

CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE

J

• Measure the side clearance between connecting rod and crankshaft arm using suitable tool (A).
Standard and Limit

K

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod,
and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft
also.

L

M
PBIC3763E

PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE
N

Piston Pin Hole Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool (A).

Standard

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

O

P

PBIC3265J

Piston Pin Outer Diameter

Revision: April 2013

EM-101

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin using suitable tool (A).
Standard

[HR16DE]

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

PBIC3266J

Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance
(Piston to piston pin oil clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) – (Piston pin outer diameter)

Standard

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If oil clearance is out of the standard, replace piston and piston pin assembly.
• When replacing piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
NOTE:
• Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly.
• Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the factory. For service parts, no
grades can be selected. Only grade “0” is available.

PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
• Measure the side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove
with a suitable tool (A).
Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace piston also.

PBIC3280J

PISTON RING END GAP
• Check that cylinder bore inner diameter is within specification. Refer to “PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE
CLEARANCE”.
• Lubricate piston (1) and piston ring (2) with new engine oil and
then insert (A) piston ring until middle of cylinder (B) with piston,
and measure piston ring end gap using feeler gauge (C).
Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.
PBIC3267J

CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION

Revision: April 2013

EM-102

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Check using connecting rod aligner.

A
(A)

: Bend

(B)

: Torsion

(C)

: Feeler gauge

Limit

EM

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».
C

• If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.

D

E

F

G
PBIC3268J

CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER
• Install connecting rod cap (1) without connecting rod bearing
installed, and tightening connecting rod cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».
(2)

H

I

: Connecting rod

(A)

: Example

(B)

: Measuring direction of inner diameter

J

• Measure the inner diameter (B) of connecting rod big end using
suitable tool.
Standard

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

PBIC3269J

K

• If out of the standard, replace connecting rod assembly.

CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE

L

Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter
Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bushing using suitable
tool (A).

M

Inner diameter
(Standard)

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

N

O

JPBIA0223ZZ

Piston Pin Outer Diameter

Revision: April 2013

EM-103

2014 Note

P

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin using micrometer (A).
Outer diameter
(Standard)

[HR16DE]

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

JPBIA0218ZZ

Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance
(Connecting rod bushing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bushing inner diameter) – (Piston pin outer diameter)

Oil clearance
(Standard and Limit)

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If the measured value is out of the standard range, replace connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly.
• If replacing piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».
• If replacing connecting rod assembly. Refer to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing».

CYLINDER BLOCK TOP SURFACE DISTORTION
• Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface, and also remove engine oil, scale, carbon, or
other contamination.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow gasket particles to enter engine oil or engine coolant passages.
• Measure the distortion on the cylinder block upper face at different
points in six directions using suitable tool (A / B).
Limit

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.

JPBIA0224ZZ

MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER
• Install main bearing cap without main bearings installed, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
• Measure the inner diameter of main bearing housing using suitable tool.
• Measure the position shown [5 mm (0.20 in)] backward from main
bearing housing front side in the 2 directions as shown. The
smaller one is the measured value.
(1)

: Cylinder block

(2)

: Main bearing cap
: Engine front

Standard

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

PBIC4005E
• If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and main bearing
caps assembly.
NOTE:
Main bearing caps cannot be replaced individually, because they are machined together with cylinder block.

PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
Revision: April 2013

EM-104

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter
• Using a suitable tool, measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-ofround and taper at six different points on each cylinder. [(A) and (B)
directions at (C), (D), and (E)] [(A) is in longitudinal direction of
engine]
(f)

: 10 mm (0.39 in)

(g)

: 60 mm (2.36 in)

(h)

: 124 mm (4.88 in)

A

EM

C

NOTE:
When determining cylinder bore grade, measure the cylinder bore
(B) direction at (D) position.

JPBIA2059ZZ

Standard:
Cylinder bore inner diameter
: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

E

F

Limit:
Out-of-round [Difference between (A) and (B)]
Taper [Difference between (C) and (E)]
: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

G

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall,
replace cylinder block.
NOTE:
Oversize piston is not available.

H

I

Piston Skirt Diameter
Measure the outer diameter of piston skirt using suitable tool (A).

Standard

D

J

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

K

L
PBIC3272J

M

Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance
Calculate by piston skirt diameter and cylinder bore inner diameter
[direction (B), position (D)].

N
(A)

: Direction A

(C)

: Position C

(E)

: Position E

(f)

: 10 mm (0.39 in)

(g)

: 60 mm (2.36 in)

(h)

: 124 mm (4.88 in)

O

P

(Clearance) = (Cylinder bore inner diameter) – (Piston skirt diameter)
Standard and Limit

JPBIA2059ZZ

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If it exceeds the limit, replace piston and piston pin assembly and/or cylinder block. Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».
Revision: April 2013

EM-105

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft main journals using suitable tool (A).
Standard

[HR16DE]

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If out of the standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance.
Then use undersize bearing. Refer to EM-123, «Main Bearing».

PBIC3457J

CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft pin journal using suitable tool.
Standard

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

• If out of the standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer
to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing».

OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
• Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown on each
main journal and pin journal using suitable tool.
• Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in dimensions between
(a) and (b) at (c) and (d).
• Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between (c) and
(d) at (a) and (b).
Limit:
Out-of-round [Difference between (a) and (b)]
Taper [Difference between (c) and (d)]
: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder Block».

JPBIA0229ZZ

• If the measured value exceeds the limit, correct or replace crankshaft.
• If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected main journal and/or pin journal. Then select
main bearing and/or connecting rod bearing. Refer to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing» and/or EM-123,
«Main Bearing».

CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
• Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft.
• Place a suitable tool (A) straight up on the No. 3 journal.
• While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the
suitable tool. (Total indicator reading)
Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-120, «Cylinder
Block».

• If it exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft.

PBIC3458J

CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method by Calculation

Revision: April 2013

EM-106

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Install connecting rod bearings (2) to connecting rod (3) and connecting rod cap (1), and tighten connecting rod cap bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
(A)

: Example

(B)

: Inner diameter measuring direction

[HR16DE]
A

EM

• Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing using suitable tool.
(Bearing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bearing inner diameter)
– (Crankshaft pin journal diameter)

C
PBIC3275J

Standard and Limit

D

: Refer to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing».

• If clearance exceeds the limit, select proper connecting rod bearing according to connecting rod big end
diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to EM-124,
«Connecting Rod Bearing».
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod cap bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft.
• Remove connecting rod cap and bearing, and using the scale (A)
on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”.

E

F

G

H

I

J

PBIC3276J

K

MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method by Calculation
• Install main bearings (3) to cylinder block (1) and main bearing cap
(2), and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».
(A)

: Example

(B)

: Inner diameter measuring direction

L

M

N

• Measure the inner diameter (B) of main bearing (3) using suitable
tool.
(Bearing oil clearance) = (Main bearing inner diameter) – (Crankshaft main journal diameter)

O
PBIC3277J

Standard and Limit

: Refer to EM-123, «Main Bearing».

• If clearance exceeds the limit, select proper main bearing according to main bearing inner diameter and
crankshaft main journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to EM-123, «Main Bearing».
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft main journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install main bearings to cylinder block and main bearing cap, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and Assembly».

Revision: April 2013

EM-107

2014 Note

P

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft.
• Remove main bearing cap and bearings, and using the scale (A)
on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”.

[HR16DE]

PBIC3278J

MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT
• When main bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings (1) installed, the tip end of
bearing must protrude (B). Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly and
Assembly».
(A)

: Example

Standard

: There must be crush height.

• If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
PBIC3279J

CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT
• When connecting rod cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with connecting rod bearings (1) installed, the tip
end of bearing must protrude (B). Refer to EM-93, «Disassembly
and Assembly».
(A)

: Example

Standard

: There must be crush height.

• If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
PBIC3279J

MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameters (d1) and (d2) at two positions as
shown.
(A)

: (d1) measuring position

(B)

: (d2) measuring position

• If reduction appears in places other than (B) range, regard it as
(d2).
Limit [(d1) – (d2)]: 0.2 mm (0.0078 in)
• If it exceeds the limit (a large difference in dimensions), replace
main bearing cap bolt with a new one.

PBIC4015E

CONNECTING ROD CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER

Revision: April 2013

EM-108

2014 Note

CYLINDER BLOCK
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Measure the outer diameter (d) at position as shown.
• If reduction appears in a position other than (d), regard it as (d).

[HR16DE]
A

Limit: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)
EM

• When (d) is less than the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace
connecting rod cap bolt with a new one.

C
PBIC4016E

D

FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T models)
• Measure the deflection of flywheel contact surface to torque with a
suitable tool (A).
• Measure the deflection at 210 mm (8.27 in) diameter.
Limit

E

: 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less.

• If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel.
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the surface, clean it
with sandpaper.
CAUTION:
When measuring, keep magnetic fields (such as dial indicator
stand) away from signal plate of the rear end of crankshaft.

F

G
PBIC4006E

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-109

2014 Note

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
Description

INFOID:0000000009444880

Selection points

Selection parts

Between cylinder block and
crankshaft

Between crankshaft and connecting rod

Selection items

Selection methods

Main bearing

Main bearing grade (bearing
thickness)

Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing
grade (inner diameter of housing) and crankshaft journal
grade (outer diameter of journal)

Connecting rod bearing

Connecting rod bearing grade
(bearing thickness)

Combining service grades for
connecting rod big end diameter and crankshaft pin outer diameter determine connecting
rod bearing selection.

• The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition.
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
• For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the
measurement with the values of each selection table.
• For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards and the selection method of the
selective fitting parts, refer to the text for the appropriate part.

Connecting Rod Bearing

INFOID:0000000009444881

WHEN NEW CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE USED
1.

Apply connecting rod big end diameter grade stamped (C) on
connecting rod side face to the row in the “Connecting Rod
Bearing Selection Table”.
(A)

: Oil hole

(B)

: Cylinder number

(D)

: Front mark

PBIC3756E

2.

Apply crankshaft pin journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front side to the column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing
Selection Table”.
(A) : Main journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 5 from left)
(B) : Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 4 from left)

PBIC3757E

3.
4.

Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table”.
Apply the symbol obtained to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table” to select connecting rod bearing.

WHEN CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE REUSED
1.

Measure the dimensions of the connecting rod big end diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter individually. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

EM-110

2014 Note

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
[HR16DE]
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
2. Apply the measured dimension to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”.
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table”.
4. Apply the symbol obtained to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table” to select connecting rod bearing.

A

EM

Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

JPBIA4823GB

N

: Refer to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing».

O

Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table

Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table

Undersize Bearings Usage Guide
• When the specified connecting rod bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod
bearings, use undersize (US) bearings.
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the connecting rod bearing inner diameter with bearing
installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the connecting rod bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

EM-111

2014 Note

P

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
In grinding crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the
fillet R (A) [0.8 — 1.2 mm (0.031 — 0.047 in)].

[HR16DE]

Bearing undersize table:
Refer to EM-124, «Connecting Rod Bearing».

PBIC3263J

Main Bearing

INFOID:0000000009444882

HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Used

1.

“Main Bearing Selection Table” rows correspond to main bearing
housing grade on left side of cylinder block.
(A) : Basic stamp mark
: Engine front

• If there is a corrected stamp mark (B) on cylinder block, use it
as a correct reference.

PBIC3760E

2.

Apply main journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front
side to column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
(A) : Main journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 5 from left)
(B) : Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 4 from left)

PBIC3757E

3.
4.

Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
Apply the symbol obtained to the “Main Bearing Grade Table” to select main bearing.
NOTE:
Service part is available as a set of both upper and lower.

When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Reused

1.
2.
3.
4.

Measure the dimensions of the cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter and crankshaft main
journal diameter individually. Refer to EM-101, «Inspection».
Apply the measured dimension to the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
Apply the symbol obtained to the “Main Bearing Grade Table” to select main bearing.

Revision: April 2013

EM-112

2014 Note

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
[HR16DE]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Main Bearing Selection Table

A

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
PBIC3759E

Main Bearing Grade Table

Main Bearing Grade Table

M

: Refer to EM-123, «Main Bearing».

Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide
• When the specified main bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size main bearings, use undersize (US) bearing.
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the main bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and
grind main journal so that the main bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard.
CAUTION:

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-113

2014 Note

HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
In grinding crankshaft main journal to use undersize bearings,
keep fillet (A) [0.8 — 1.2 mm (0.031 — 0.047 in)].
Bearing undersize table:

[HR16DE]

Refer to EM-123, «Main Bearing».

PBIC3263J

Revision: April 2013

EM-114

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification

INFOID:0000000009444883

EM

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine type

HR16DE

Cylinder arrangement

In-line 4
cm3 (cu in)

Displacement
Bore and stroke

D

1,598 (97.51)
78.0× 83.6 (3.071 ×3.291)

mm (in)

Valve arrangement

DOHC

Firing order

1-3-4-2

Number of piston rings

C

Compression

2

Oil

1

Compression ratio

E

F

9.8:1

Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) / 200 rpm

Standard

1,510 (15.4, 219)

Minimum

1,270 (12.95, 184)

Differential limit between cylinders

G

100 (1.0, 14.5)

H

Valve Timing
Unit: degree

I

J
Valve timing
: Intake valve

K

: Exhaust valve

L

JPBIA4228ZZ

(

a

b

c

d

e

f

216

228

11 (−27)
ATDC

59 (-21)
ABDC

-1 (49)
ATDC

37 (-13)
BBDC

M

INFOID:0000000009444884

N

): Valve timing control “ON”

Drive Belt
DRIVE BELT

O

Belt Deflection

Deflection adjustment *
Location

Drive belt

Used belt

Unit: mm (in)
New belt

Limit

After adjusted

With A/C

10.0 (0.39)

4.9 — 5.2 (0.19 — 0.20)

4.1 — 4.4 (0.16 — 0.17)

Without A/C

9.1 (0.36)

4.3 — 4.7 (0.17 — 0.19)

3.7 — 3.9 (0.146 — 0.154)

Applied pushing force

98.1 N (10.0 kg-f, 22.0 lb-f)

*: When engine is cold.

Revision: April 2013

EM-115

2014 Note

P

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Belt Tension and Frequency

Tension adjustment *
Location

Unit: N (kg-f,
lb-f)

Used belt
Limit

With A/C
Drive belt

350 (35.7, 78.7)
Without A/C

New belt

After adjusted

Frequency adjustment *

Unit: Hz

Used belt
Limit

After adjusted

New belt

881 — 951
(89.9 — 97.0,
198.0 — 213.8)

1070 — 1138
(109.1 — 116.1,
240.5 — 255.8)

145.5

230.5 — 239.5

254 — 262

876 — 964
(89.4 — 98.3,
196.9 — 216.7)

1064 — 1152
(108.5 — 117.5,
239.2 — 259.0)

162

256.5 — 268.5

282.5 — 293.5

*: When engine is cold.

Spark Plug

INFOID:0000000009444885

SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Make

NGK

Standard type*

PLZKAR6A-11

Gap (nominal)

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Exhaust Manifold

INFOID:0000000009444886

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)

Items

Limit

Surface distortion

0.3 (0.012)

Camshaft

INFOID:0000000009444887

CAMSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)

Items
Camshaft runout [TIR*]

Standard

Limit

0.02 (0.0008)

0.1 (0.0039)

SEM671

Camshaft cam height “A”

Camshaft journal outer diameter

Camshaft bracket inner diameter

Revision: April 2013

Intake

41.705 — 41.895 (1.6419 — 1.6494)

41.505 (1.6341)

Exhaust

40.915 — 41.105 (1.6108 — 1.6183)

40.715 (1.6029)

No. 1

27.935 — 27.955 (1.0998 — 1.1006)

—

No. 2, 3, 4, 5

24.950 — 24.970 (0.9822 — 0.9830)

—

No. 1

28.000 — 28.021 (1.1024 — 1.1032)

—

No. 2, 3, 4, 5

25.000 — 25.021 (0.9842 — 0.9850)

—

EM-116

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Items
Camshaft journal oil clearance

Standard

Limit

No. 1

0.045 — 0.086 (0.0018 — 0.0034)

—

No. 2, 3, 4, 5

0.030 — 0.071 (0.0011 — 0.0027)

—

0.075 — 0.153 (0.0029 — 0.0060)

0.2 (0.0078)

—

0.1 (0.0039)

Camshaft end play
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*]

A

EM

*: Total indicator reading

C

VALVE LIFTER
Unit: mm (in)

Items

Standard

Valve lifter outer diameter

29.977 — 29.987 (1.1802 — 1.1806)

Valve lifter hole diameter

28 — 28.4 (1.024 — 1.1181)

Valve lifter clearance

D

E

0.013 — 0.044 (0.0005 — 0.0017)

VALVE CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)

Cold1

Hot 2

Intake

0.26 — 0.34 (0.010 — 0.013)

0.304 — 0.416 (0.012 — 0.016)

Exhaust

0.29 — 0.37 (0.011 — 0.015)

0.308 — 0.432 (0.012 — 0.017)

1:Approximately

20°C (68°F)

2:Approximately

80°C (176°F)

F

G

H

AVAILABLE VALVE LIFTER
Unit: mm (in)

Identification mark (A)

I

Thickness (B)

J

K

L

JPBIA0170ZZ

Revision: April 2013

300

3.00 (0.1181)

302

3.02 (0.1189)

304

3.04 (0.1197)

306

3.06 (0.1205)

308

3.08 (0.1213)

310

3.10 (0.1220)

312

3.12 (0.1228)

314

3.14 (0.1236)

316

3.16 (0.1244)

318

3.18 (0.1252)

320

3.20 (0.1260)

322

3.22 (0.1268)

324

3.24 (0.1276)

EM-117

M

N

O

P

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Identification mark (A)

Thickness (B)

326

3.26 (0.1283)

328

3.28 (0.1291)

330

3.30 (0.1299)

332

3.32 (0.1307)

334

3.34 (0.1315)

336

3.36 (0.1323)

338

3.38 (0.1331)

340

3.40 (0.1339)

342

3.42 (0.1346)

344

3.44 (0.1354)

346

3.46 (0.1362)

348

3.48 (0.1370)

350

3.50 (0.1378)

Cylinder head

INFOID:0000000009444888

CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)

Items

Limit

Head surface distortion

0.1 (0.004)

VALVE DIMENSIONS
Unit: mm (in)

PBIC3878E

Valve head diameter “D”

Valve length “a”

“b”

“c”

“c′”

“d ”

Valve seat angle “α”

Revision: April 2013

Intake

31.6 — 31.9 (1.244 — 1.256)

Exhaust

25.3 — 25.6 (0.996 — 1.007)

Intake

101.73 (4.01)

Exhaust

102.49 (4.04)

Intake

1.0 (0.0393)

Exhaust

1.0 (0.0393)

Intake

2.1 — 2.8 (0.0826 — 0.1102)

Exhaust

2.3 — 3.0 (0.0905 — 0.1181)

Intake

3.0 (0.1181)

Exhaust

–

Intake

4.965 — 4.980 (0.1954 — 0.1960)

Exhaust

4.955 — 4.970 (0.1950 — 0.1956)

Intake

45°15′ — 45°45′

Exhaust

EM-118

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
VALVE GUIDE

Unit: mm (in)

A

EM

C

D
PBIC0184E

Items
Outer diameter

Valve guide

Standard part

Service part

9.023 — 9.034 (0.3552 — 0.3556)

9.223 — 9.234 (0.3631 — 0.3635)

Inner diameter (Finished size)

Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter

5.000 — 5.018 (0.1968 — 0.1975)
8.975 — 9.001 (0.3533 — 0.3544)

Interference fit of valve guide

F

0.022 — 0.059 (0.0009 — 0.0023)

Items
Valve guide clearance

9.175 — 9.201 (0.3612 — 0.3622)

E

G

Standard

Limit

Intake

0.020 — 0.053 (0.0008 — 0.0021)

0.1 (0.004)

Exhaust

0.030 — 0.063 (0.0012 — 0.0025)

0.1 (0.004)

Projection length “L”

H

11.4 — 11.8 (0.448 — 0.464)

VALVE SEAT
Unit: mm (in)

I

J

K

L
PBIC2745E

Items
Cylinder head seat recess diameter “D”

Valve seat outer diameter “d”

Valve seat interference fit
Diameter “d1”*1
Diameter “d2”*2
Angle “α1”

Revision: April 2013

Standard

Oversize [0.5 (0.02)] (Service)

29.75 — 30.25 (1.1713 — 1.1909)

30.43 — 30.73 (1.1980 — 1.2098)

Exhaust

25.991 — 26.007 (1.0233 — 1.0239)

26.491 — 26.507 (1.0430 — 1.0436)

Intake

32.108 — 32.124 (1.2641 — 1.2647)

32.608 — 32.624 (1.2838 — 1.2844)

23.65 — 24.15 (.9311 — .9508)

23.69 — 26.007 (.9327 — 1.0239)

Intake

Exhaust
Intake

0.081 — 0.124 (0.0032 — 0.0049)

Exhaust

0.064 — 0.107 (0.0025 — 0.0042)

Intake

21.7 — 22.1 (.8543 — .8701)

Intake

31.2 — 31.4 (1.228 — 1.236)

Exhaust

24.9 — 25.1 (0.980 — 0.988)

Intake

60°

Exhaust

45°

EM-119

N

O

27.8 — 28.2 (1.0945 — 1.1102)

Exhaust

M

P

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Angle “α2”

Angle “α3”

Intake

88°45′ — 90°15′

Exhaust

88°45′ — 90°15′

Intake

120°

Exhaust

120°

Intake

Contacting width “W”*3
Height “h”

Depth “H”

1.44 — 2.1 (0.0567 — .0827)

Exhaust

1.1 — 1.9 (.0433 — .0748) or 0.9 — 2.1 (.0354 — .0827)

Intake

4.7 (0.185)

4.15 (0.163)

Exhaust

6.0 (0.236)

5.43 (0.213)

Intake

4.7 (0.185)

Exhaust

6.0 (0.236)

*1: Diameter made by intersection point of conic angles α1 and α2
*2: Diameter made by intersection point of conic angles α2 and α3
*3: Machining data

VALVE SPRING
Free height

46.73 mm (1.8398 in)

Installation height

32.40 mm (1.2756 in)

Installation load

136 — 154 N (13.9 — 15.7 kg, 30.6 — 34.6 lb)

Height during valve open

23.96 mm (0.9433 in)

Load with valve open

242 — 272 N (24.7 — 27.7 kg, 54.4 — 61.1 lb)

Cylinder Block

INFOID:0000000009444889

CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)

PBIC3924E

Surface distortion
Cylinder bore

Limit
Inner diameter

Out-of-round (Difference between “X” and “Y”)
Taper (Difference between “A” and “C”)

Revision: April 2013

0.1 (0.004)

Standard

78.000 — 78.015 (3.0709 — 3.0715)

Wear limit

—
0.015 (0.0006)

Limit

0.010 (0.0004)

EM-120

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter grade*

Difference in inner diameter between cylinders

51.997 — 51.998 (2.0471 — 2.0472)
51.998 — 51.999 (2.0472 — 2.0472)
51.999 — 52.000 (2.0472 — 2.0472)
52.000 — 52.001 (2.0472 — 2.0473)
52.001 — 52.002 (2.0473 — 2.0473)
52.002 — 52.003 (2.0473 — 2.0474)
52.003 — 52.004 (2.0474 — 2.0474)
52.004 — 52.005 (2.0474 — 2.0474)
52.005 — 52.006 (2.0474 — 2.0475)
52.006 — 52.007 (2.0475 — 2.0475)
52.007 — 52.008 (2.0475 — 2.0475)
52.008 — 52.009 (2.0476 — 2.0476)
52.009 — 52.010 (2.0476 — 2.0476)
52.010 — 52.011 (2.0476 — 2.0477)
52.011 — 52.012 (2.0477 — 2.0477)
52.012 — 52.013 (2.0477 — 2.0478)
52.013 — 52.014 (2.0478 — 2.0478)
52.014 — 52.015 (2.0478 — 2.0478)
52.015 — 52.016 (2.0478 — 2.0479)
52.016 — 52.017 (2.0479 — 2.0479)

Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W

Standard

Less than 0.03 (0.0012)

A

EM

C

D

E

F

* : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

G

AVAILABLE PISTON
Unit: mm (in)

H

I

J

K

PBIC0188E

Piston skirt diameter “A”

77.965 — 77.980 (3.0694 — 3.0700)

Piston height “H” dimension

37.1 (1.460)

Piston pin hole diameter

19.006 — 19.012 (0.7482 — 0.7485)

Piston to cylinder bore clearance

L

0.020 — 0.050 (0.0008 — 0.0020)

M

PISTON RING
Unit: mm (in)

Items

Side clearance

Standard

Limit

Top

0.04 — 0.08 (0.0016 — 0.0031)

0.11 (0.0043)

2nd

0.03 — 0.07 (0.0012 — 0.0028)

0.10 (0.0039)

0.045 — 0.125 (0.0018 — 0.0049)

—

Top

0.20 — 0.30 (0.0079 — 0.0118)

—

2nd

0.35 — 0.50 (0.0138 — 0.0197)

—

Oil (rail ring)

0.20 — 0.45 (0.0079 — 0.0177)

—

Oil (rail ring)

End gap

N

O

P

PISTON PIN
Unit: mm (in)

Piston pin outer diameter

18.999 — 19.002 (0.7480 — 0.7481)

Piston to piston pin oil clearance

Standard

0.010 — 0.014 (0.0004 — 0.0006)

Connecting rod bushing oil clearance

Standard

–0.018 to –0.044 (–0.0007 to –0.0017)

Revision: April 2013

EM-121

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
CONNECTING ROD

Unit: mm (in)

Center distance

129.84 — 129.94 (5.1118 — 5.1157)

Bend [per 100 (3.94)]

Limit

0.15 (0.0059)

Torsion [per 100 (3.94)]

Limit

0.30 (0.0118)

Connecting rod bushing inner diameter*1

18.958 — 18.978 (0.7463 — 0.7471)

Side clearance

Standard

Connecting rod big end diameter grade*2

Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N

0.200 — 0.352 (0.0079 — 0.0138)
43.000 — 43.001 (1.6929 — 1.6929)
43.001 — 43.002 (1.6929 — 1.6930)
43.002 — 43.003 (1.6930 — 1.6930)
43.003 — 43.004 (1 6930 — 1.6931)
43.004 — 43.005 (1.6931 — 1.6931)
43.005 — 43.006 (1.6931 — 1.6931)
43.006 — 43.007 (1.6931 — 1.6932)
43.007 — 43.008 (1.6932 — 1.6932)
43.008 — 43.009 (1.6932 — 1.6933)
43.009 — 43.010 (1.6933 — 1.6933)
43.010 — 43.011 (1.6933 — 1.6933)
43.011 — 43.012 (1.6933 — 1.6934)
43.012 — 43.013 (1.6934 — 1.6934)

*1 : After installing in connecting rod
*2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

CRANKSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)

PBIC3459J
SEM645

Center distance “r”

41.68 — 41.76 (1.6409 — 1.6441)

Out-of-round

Limit

0.003 (0.0001)

Taper

Limit

0.004 (0.0002)

Runout [TIR*1]

Limit

0.10 (0.0039)

Crankshaft end play

Revision: April 2013

Standard

0.098 — 0.260 (0.0039 — 0.0102)

Limit

0.35 (0.0138)

EM-122

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade.*2“Dp”*3

Crankshaft main journal diameter grade.*2
“Dm”*4

Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U

39.970 — 39.971 (1.5736 — 1.5737)
39.969 — 39.970 (1.5736 — 1.5736)
39.968 — 39.969 (1.5735 — 1.5736)
39.967 — 39.968 (1.5735 — 1.5735)
39.966 — 39.967 (1.5735 — 1.5735)
39.965 — 39.966 (1.5734 — 1.5735)
39.964 — 39.965 (1.5734 — 1.5734)
39.963 — 39.964 (1.5733 — 1.5734)
39.962 — 39.963 (1.5733 — 1.5733)
39.961 — 39.962 (1.5733 — 1.5733)
39.960 — 39.961 (1.5732 — 1.5733)
39.959 — 39.960 (1.5732 — 1.5732)
39.958 — 39.959 (1.5731 — 1.5732)
39.957 — 39.958 (1.5731 — 1.5731)
39.956 — 39.957 (1.5731 — 1.5731)
39.955 — 39.956 (1.5730 — 1.5731)
39.954 — 39.955 (1.5730 — 1.5730)
39.953 — 39.954 (1.5729 — 1.5730)

Grade No. A
Grade No. B
Grade No. C
Grade No. D
Grade No. E
Grade No. F
Grade No. G
Grade No. H
Grade No. J
Grade No. K
Grade No. L
Grade No. M
Grade No. N
Grade No. P
Grade No. R
Grade No. S
Grade No. T
Grade No. U
Grade No. V
Grade No. W

47.978 — 47.979 (1.8889 — 1.8889)
47.977 — 47.978 (1.8889 — 1.8889)
47.976 — 47.977 (1.8888 — 1.8889)
47.975 — 47.976 (1.8888 — 1.8888)
47.974 — 47.975 (1.8887 — 1.8888)
47.973 — 47.974 (1.8887 — 1.8887)
47.972 — 47.973 (1.8887 — 1.8887)
47.971 — 47.972 (1.8886 — 1.8886)
47.970 — 47.971 (1.8886 — 1.8886)
47.969 — 47.970 (1.8885 — 1.8886)
47.968 — 47.969 (1.8885 — 1.8885)
47.967 — 47.968 (1.8885 — 1.8885)
47.966 — 47.967 (1.8884 — 1.8885)
47.965 — 47.966 (1.8884 — 1.8884)
47.964 — 47.965 (1.8883 — 1.8884)
47.963 — 47.964 (1.8883 — 1.8883)
47.962 — 47.963 (1.8883 — 1.8883)
47.961 — 47.962 (1.8882 — 1.8883)
47.960 — 47.961 (1.8882 — 1.8882)
47.959 — 47.960 (1.8881 — 1.8882)

A

EM

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

*1: Total indicator reading
*2: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
*3: Grade No. B through U reflects less than maximum specification.

L

*4: Grade No. B through W reflects less than maximum specification.

Main Bearing

INFOID:0000000009444890

M

MAIN BEARING

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-123

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Unit: mm (in)

SEM685D

Grade number*

Thickness

Identification color

0

1.996 — 1.999 (0.0786 — 0.0787)

Black

1

1.999 — 2.002 (0.0787 — 0.0788)

Brown

2

2.002 — 2.005 (0.0788 — 0.0789)

Green

3

2.005 — 2.008 (0.0789 — 0.0791)

Yellow

4

2.008 — 2.011 (0.0791 — 0.0792)

Blue

5

2.011 — 2.014 (0.0792 — 0.0793)

Pink

1.996 — 1.999 (0.0786 — 0.0787)

Black

UPR

01

12

23

34

45

LWR

1.999 — 2.002 (0.0787 — 0.0788)

Brown

UPR

1.999 — 2.002 (0.0787 — 0.0788)

Brown

LWR

2.002 — 2.005 (0.0788 — 0.0789)

Green

UPR

2.002 — 2.005 (0.0788 — 0.0789)

Green

LWR

2.005 — 2.008 (0.0789 — 0.0791)

Yellow

UPR

2.005 — 2.008 (0.0789 — 0.0791)

Yellow

LWR

2.008 — 2.011 (0.0791 — 0.0792)

Blue

UPR

2.008 — 2.011 (0.0791 — 0.0792)

Blue

LWR

2.011 — 2.014 (0.0792 — 0.0793)

Pink

Remarks

Grade and color are the same
for upper and lower bearings.

Grade and color are different
for upper and lower bearings.

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)

Items

Thickness

Main journal diameter

US 0.25 (0.0098)

2.126 — 2.134 (0.0837 — 0.0840)

Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.

Standard

0.024 — 0.034 (0.0009 — 0.0013)

Bearing Oil Clearance
Unit: mm (in)

Main bearing oil clearance

Connecting Rod Bearing

INFOID:0000000009444891

CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Unit: mm (in)

Grade number*

Thickness

Identification color

1

1.501 — 1.504 (0.0591 — 0.0592)

Brown

2

1.504 — 1.507 (0.0592 — 0.0593)

Green

3

1.507 — 1.510 (0.0593 — 0.0594)

Yellow

4

1.510 — 1.513 (0.0594 — 0.0596)

Blue

5

1.513 — 1.516 (0.0596 — 0.0597)

Pink

Revision: April 2013

EM-124

Remarks

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
12

23

34

56

UPR

1.501 — 1.504 (0.0591 — 0.0592)

Brown

LWR

1.504 — 1.507 (0.0592 — 0.0593)

Green

UPR

1.504 — 1.507 (0.0592 — 0.0593)

Green

LWR

1.507 — 1.510 (0.0593 — 0.0594)

Yellow

UPR

1.507 — 1.510 (0.0593 — 0.0594)

Yellow

LWR

1.510 — 1.513 (0.0594 — 0.0596)

Blue

UPR

1.513 — 1.516 (0.0596 — 0.0597)

Pink

LWR

1.516 — 1.519 (0.0597 — 0.0598)

Purple

A
Grade and color are different
between upper and lower bearings.

EM

C

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

D

Undersize
Unit: mm (in)

E

Items

Thickness

Crankshaft pin journal diameter

US 0.25 (0.0098)

1.627 — 1.635 (0.0640 — 0.0644)

Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.

Bearing Oil Clearance
Unit: mm (in)

Connecting rod bearing oil clearance

Standard

F

0.020 — 0.030 (0.0008 — 0.0012)

Limit

G

0.10 (0.0039)

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EM-125

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

EX

EXHAUST SYSTEM

A

EX

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Commercial Service Tool ………………………………….. 3

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ……………………. 4

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

EXHAUST SYSTEM ……………………………………. 4

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 5

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

EXHAUST SYSTEM ……………………………………. 5

F

G

Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 4

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 5

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EX-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009405630

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

EX-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009405631

EX

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV10114400
(J-38365-N1)
Heated oxygen sensor wrench

Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors:
a: 22 mm (0.87 in)

C

D

E
S-NT636

F

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009405632

G

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-43897-18)
(J-43897-12)
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner

Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use
with anti-seize lubricant shown below):
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia oxygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxygen sensor
AEM488

Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR
or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907)

Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
tool when reconditioning exhaust system
threads

H

I

J

K

L
AEM489

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

M

N
PIIB1407E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EX-3

2014 Note

EXHAUST SYSTEM
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009405633

Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.

SMA211A

Revision: April 2013

EX-4

2014 Note

EXHAUST SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015345

EX

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

JPBIA6358GB

1.

Seal bearing

2.

Spring

3.

Heated oxygen sensor 2

4.

Front Exhaust tube

5.

Seal bearing

6.

Mounting rubber

7.

Center muffler

8.

Ring gasket

9.

Main muffler

A.

To Exhaust manifold

K

WARNING:
• Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down to avoid injury from the hot
exhaust system.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge.
CAUTION:
Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.

REMOVAL
• Disconnect each joint and mounting.
• Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (1) using Tool (A).
Tool number

M

N

O

: KV10114400 (J-38365-N1)
P

: Front

ALBIA1136ZZ

Revision: April 2013

L

EX-5

2014 Note

EXHAUST SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse gasket.
• Do not reuse seal bearing.
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Use a new one.
• Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using a suitable tool
and apply anti-seize lubricant.
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner

: J-43897-12
: J-43897-18

• Do not over tighten heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to the heated oxygen sensor 2, resulting in the “MIL” coming on.
• Prevent rust preventives from adhering to the sensor body.
• If heat insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the heat
insulator, remove them.
• When installing heat insulator avoid large gaps or interference between heat insulator and each
exhaust pipe.
• Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid
exhaust gas leaks.
• When installing each mounting rubber, use silicon oil to avoid twisting.
• Temporarily tighten nuts and bolts. Check each part for unusual interference and mounting rubber
interference, and then tighten them to the specified torque.
• When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or unusual extension in up/down, front/rear
and right/left directions.
Exhaust Manifold to Exhaust Front Tube

1.

Place a piece of wood (A) on seal bearing (2) and securely
insert the seal bearing on the exhaust manifold (1) side, using a
plastic hammer (B).
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the seal bearing surface during insertion.
• If seal bearing is inserted by hammering directly without
using a piece of wood, the seal bearing is deformed and
exhaust gas leaks. To insert seal bearing, always use a
piece of wood and insert straight.
JPBIA6288ZZ

2.

Check that seal bearing (1) is in absolute contact (C) with the
flange (A). If there is clearance (B), insert seal bearing straight
by hand to bring the seal bearing into absolute contact with the
flange.
CAUTION:
• Do not use a tool for insertion.
• Do not insert seal bearing by tightening exhaust front
tube.

JPBIA6289ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EX-6

2014 Note

EXHAUST SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. With spring (3), tighten nut (4).
CAUTION:
• Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not
sitting on locator dimple (A).
• Be careful that stud bolt does not interfere with mounting
hole of exhaust front tube ( ).

4.

(1)

: Spring

(2)

: Seal bearing

(5)

: Bolt

(6)

: Front exhaust tube

A

EX

C
AWBIA1528ZZ

D

After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of exhaust front tube.

Exhaust Front Tube to Center Muffler

1.

2.

3.

E

Securely insert seal bearing (2) into exhaust front tube (1).
(3)

: Spring

(4)

: Bolt

(5)

: Center muffler

F

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage seal bearing surface when installing.
With spring, tighten bolt.
CAUTION:
• Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not
sitting on locator dimple (A).
• Be careful that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler.
After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler.

G

AWBIA1529ZZ

H

I

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises.
• Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EX-7

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

EXL

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 4
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 4
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 4

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 5
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 5
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 5

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 6

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER
AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description ….10
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER
AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe …………………11
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM ……………………………..11
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………………12
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe …………….12
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM …….12
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………..13

F

G

H

I

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………… 14

J

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 6
Daytime Running Light Relay ……………………………… 7
Hazard Switch ………………………………………………….. 7

COMMON ITEM …………………………………………………14
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ……………………………………………..14

K

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 8

HEADLAMP ………………………………………………………14
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — HEAD
LAMP) …………………………………………………………….15

EXL

FLASHER ………………………………………………………….15
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM — FLASHER) ………………………………………………………………..15

M

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 6

HEADLAMP SYSTEM …………………………………………. 8
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description …………. 8
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe ………………………… 8
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) ……………. 9
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Diagram …………………………………………………….. 9
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Description ………………………………………………… 9
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM …………………… 9
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System
Description ………………………………………………………. 9
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM ………………………………………………………….. 10
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description …………………………. 10
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM ………………………………………… 10

Revision: April 2013

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ………………. 17
Diagnosis Description ……………………………………….17
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) ………………………..18

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 21

N

O

BCM, IPDM E/R …………………………………………. 21
List of ECU Reference ………………………………………21

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 22
HEADLAMP ……………………………………………… 22
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..22

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM …………………………. 27
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..27

EXL-1

2014 Note

P

FRONT FOG LAMP ……………………………………. 32

FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT ……………………… 89

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 32

Component Function Check …………………………….. 89
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 89
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 91

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
LAMPS ……………………………………………………… 37
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 37

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL
LAMPS ……………………………………………………… 43
Wiring Diagram-With Daytime Light System ……….. 43
Wiring Diagram-Without Daytime Light System …… 50

STOP LAMP ……………………………………………… 57
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 57

BACK-UP LAMP ………………………………………… 61
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 61

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) …… 65
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 65

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 70
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ……… 70
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 70

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 73
HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT ………………………….. 73
Component Function Check …………………………….. 73
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 73

HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT …………………………. 75
Component Function Check …………………………….. 75
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 75

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) …… 77
Description …………………………………………………….. 77
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 77

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT
… 79
Component Function Check …………………………….. 79
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 79
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 80

PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT ………………………….. 81
Component Function Check …………………………….. 81
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 81

TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT ………………………………….. 83

HAZARD SWITCH ……………………………………… 92
Component Function Check …………………………….. 92
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 92

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 94
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS… 94
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM … 94
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
: Symptom Table …………………………………………….. 94
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ……….. 95
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Symptom Table ………………………………………………. 95

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT
TURNED ON ……………………………………………… 98
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ……….. 98
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description …………………………………………………………. 98
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………….. 98
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM … 98
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
: Description …………………………………………………… 98
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
: Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 98

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT
TURNED ON …………………………………………….. 100
Description …………………………………………………… 100
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 100

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER
AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON …. 101
Description …………………………………………………… 101
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 101

BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT
TURNED ON …………………………………………….. 102
Description …………………………………………………… 102
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 102

Component Function Check …………………………….. 83
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 83

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………. 103

LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT ……………….. 85

Inspection …………………………………………………….. 103
Aiming Adjustment Procedure ………………………… 104

Component Function Check …………………………….. 85
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 85

TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT …………………… 86
Component Function Check …………………………….. 86
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 86

Revision: April 2013

HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT ………….. 103

FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT .. 106
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 106
Aiming Adjustment Procedure ………………………… 106

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 108

EXL-2

2014 Note

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP …………………… 108
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 108
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 108
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………. 108

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 117
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………. 117

A

LICENSE PLATE LAMP …………………………… 118
B

Exploded View ……………………………………………… 110
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 110
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………. 110

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 118
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 118
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………. 118

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 119

C

COMBINATION SWITCH …………………………… 112

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP …………………. 119

FRONT FOG LAMP …………………………………… 110

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 112

HAZARD SWITCH …………………………………….. 113
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 113
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 113

HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH …………………… 114
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 114
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 114

REAR COMBINATION LAMP …………………….. 115
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 115
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 115
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………. 115

HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP …………………… 117

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 119
Disassembly and Assembly …………………………….. 119

D

REAR COMBINATION LAMP ……………………. 121
Exploded View — Non LED ………………………………. 121
Disassembly and Assembly — Non LED …………….. 121
Exploded View — LED ……………………………………… 122
Disassembly and Assembly — LED …………………… 122

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 123
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………… 123
Bulb specification …………………………………………… 123

E

F

G

H

Exploded View ……………………………………………… 117
I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-3

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009606279

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009606280

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-4

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009445896

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
TrimTool Set

Removing trim components

C

D

E
AWJIA0483ZZ

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-5

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009472848

ALLIA1287ZZ

No.

Part

Function

1.

Hazard switch

Refer to EXL-10, «TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description».

2.

Combination meter

Refer to MWI-7, «METER SYSTEM : System Description».

3.

Combination switch
(Lighting & turn signal switch)

Refer to EXL-10, «TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description».

4.

Headlamp aiming switch

Refer to EXL-9, «HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Description».

5.

BCM

Refer to BCS-5, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

6.

7.

Part

IPDM E/R

Stop lamp switch

Function
• Controls the integrated relay, and supplies voltage to the load according to the request from BCM (via CAN communication).
• Refer to PCS-5, «RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description» for detailed
installation location.

A

B

Refer to EXL-10, «PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description».

C

Daytime Running Light Relay

INFOID:0000000009472850

Daytime running light relay ground circuit is switched according to request from IPDM E/R.

Hazard Switch

D
INFOID:0000000009472851

Inputs the hazard switch ON/OFF signal to BCM.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-7

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
HEADLAMP SYSTEM
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009472853

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JPLIA0167GB

OUTLINE
Headlamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and headlamp control function of BCM, and
relay control function of IPDM E/R.

HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition with the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits the low beam request signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication according to the headlamp (LO) ON condition.
Headlamp (LO) ON condition

•

Lighting switch 2ND
Lighting switch AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON
Lighting switch PASS
IPDM E/R turns the integrated headlamp low relay ON, and turns the headlamp ON according to the low
beam request signal.

HEADLAMP (HI) OPERATION
• BCM transmits the high beam request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter with CAN communication according to the headlamp (HI) ON condition.
Headlamp (HI) ON condition

•
•

Lighting switch HI with the lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
Lighting switch PASS
Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON, the ignition switch ON and lighting switch HI
Combination meter turns the high beam indicator lamp ON according to the high beam request signal.
IPDM E/R turns the integrated headlamp high relay ON, and turns the headlamp ON according to the high
beam request signal.

HEADLAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009472855

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

Revision: April 2013

EXL-8

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control part
Headlamp

Fail-safe operation

A

• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF

B

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009549365

C

D

E

AWLIA0023GB

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Description

F

INFOID:0000000009549366

The headlamp aiming system (manual) controls the headlamp light axis height according to input from the
headlamp aiming switch. The variable internal resistance of the headlamp aiming switch controls the signal
ground of the headlamp aiming motors located on the front combination lamp LH and RH. The headlamp aiming system operates when the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is in the 2nd position.

G

H

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009472860

I

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
J

K

EXL

M

N
AWLIA2141GB

OUTLINE
• Daytime running lamp is controlled by daytime running lamp control function and combination switch reading
function of BCM, and relay control function of IPDM E/R.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM detects the engine condition according to push-button ignition switch
• BCM detects the parking brake condition by the parking brake switch signal received from combination
meter using CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the daytime running lamp request signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication according
to the daytime running lamp ON condition.
Daytime running light ON condition

Revision: April 2013

EXL-9

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
— Engine running
— Lighting switch OFF or 1ST
— Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function OFF judgment
— Parking brake switch OFF
• IPDM E/R controls the daytime running lamp relay (ground-side) to turn ON according to the daytime running lamp request signal.
• Power is supplied from the daytime running lamp to the daytime running lamps.

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000009472862

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWLIA1721GB

OUTLINE
Turn signal and the hazard warning lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function, flasher control
function and auto hazard function of BCM.

TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM supplies voltage to the right (left) turn signal lamp circuit when the ignition switch is turned ON and the
turn signal switch is in the right (left) position. BCM blinks the turn signal lamp.

HAZARD WARNING LAMP OPERATION
BCM supplies voltage to both turn signal lamp circuit when the hazard switch is turned ON. BCM blinks the
hazard warning lamp.

HIGH FLASHER OPERATION
• BCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status from the current value.
• BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn signal lamp operating.
NOTE:
The blinking speed is normal while operating the hazard warning lamp.

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System De-

Revision: April 2013

EXL-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

scription

INFOID:0000000009472864

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

D

E

JMLIA1349GB

F

OUTLINE
Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps are controlled by combination switch reading function and
headlamp control function of BCM, and relay control function of IPDM E/R.

G

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter via CAN communication according to the ON/OFF condition of the parking, license plate, side marker (Without Daytime running lamps) and tail lamps.

H

I

Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps ON condition

•

Lighting switch 1ST
Lighting switch 2ND
Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function ON judgment.
Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON
IPDM E/R turns the integrated tail lamp relay ON and turns the parking, license plate, side marker (without
daytime running lamps) and tail lamps ON according to the position light request signal.
• Combination meter turns the tail lamp indicator lamp ON according to the position light request signal.

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000009472866

J

K

EXL

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

N

Control part
•
•
•
•
•

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Illumination
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp (Without daytime running lamps)

Fail-safe operation

O
• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF

P

FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

M

EXL-11

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009472867

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JMLIA1154GB

OUTLINE
Front fog lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function, front fog lamp control function of BCM,
and relay control function of IPDM E/R.

FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the front
fog lamp ON condition.
Front fog lamp ON condition

— Front fog lamp switch ON, and any of the following condition is satisfied. (except for the high beam ON)
• Lighting switch 2ND
• Lighting switch AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
IPDM E/R turns the integrated front fog lamp relay ON, and turns the front fog lamp ON according to the front
fog light request signal.

FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009472869

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
Control part
Front fog lamp

Fail-safe operation
Front fog lamp relay OFF

EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

EXL-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009472870

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

D

E

JPLIA1037GB

F

OUTLINE
• Exterior lamp battery saver system is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R.

G

Control by BCM

— Combination switch reading function
— Headlamp control function
— Exterior lamp battery saver function

H

Control by IPDM E/R

— Relay control function
• BCM turns the exterior lamps* OFF after a period of time to prevent the battery from over-discharge when
the ignition switch is turned OFF with the exterior lamps ON.
*: Headlamp (LO/HI), parking lamp, tail lamp, side marker lamp, license plate lamp and front fog lamp

EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER ACTIVATION

I

J

BCM activates the timer and turns the exterior lamp OFF 5 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from ON
→ OFF with the exterior lamps ON.
K
NOTE:
• Headlamp control function turns the exterior lamps ON normally when the ignition switch is turned ACC or
ON (both before and after the exterior lamp battery saver is turned OFF).
• The timer starts at the time that the lighting switch is turned from OFF → 1ST or 2ND with the exterior lamps EXL
OFF.
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009578842

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

HEADLAMP

Revision: April 2013

EXL-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — HEAD LAMP)

INFOID:0000000009578843

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

B

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run]

Indicates engine status received from ECM on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

C

TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]

D

TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]
HI BEAM SW [On/Off]
HEAD LAMP SW 1 [On/Off]

E

Indicates condition of combination switch.

HEAD LAMP SW 2 [On/Off]
PASSING SW [On/Off]

F

FR FOG SW [On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

G

H

ACTIVE TEST

I

Test Item

Description

FR FOG LAMP

This test is able to check front fog lamp operation [On/Off].

HEAD LAMP

This test is able to check head lamp operation [Hi/Low/Off].

ILL DIM SIGNAL

This test is able to check head lamp illumination dimming operation [On/Off].

TAIL LAMP

This test is able to check tail lamp operation [On/Off].

J

K

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
BATTERY SAVER SET

ILL DELAY SET

Setting

EXL

Description

On*

Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.

Off

Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.

MODE 8

180 sec.

MODE 7

150 sec.

MODE 6

120 sec.

MODE 4

60 sec.

MODE 5

90 sec.

MODE 3

30 sec.

MODE 2

OFF

MODE 1*

45 sec.

M

N
Sets delay timer function operation time
(All doors closed).

O

P

*: Initial setting

FLASHER
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM — FLASHER)

INFOID:0000000009578844

DATA MONITOR
Revision: April 2013

EXL-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]

Indicates condition of turn signal function of combination switch.

HAZARD SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of hazard switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
FLASHER

Description
This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [Off/LH/RH].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item

Setting

Description

Lock/Unlock*

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked with
Intelligent Key.

Unlock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent
Key.

Lock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent
Key.

Off

No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked
with Intelligent Key.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

* : Initial setting

Revision: April 2013

EXL-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)

A

Diagnosis Description

INFOID:0000000009578845

AUTO ACTIVE TEST

B

Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following conditions.
• Passenger door is open
• CONSULT is connected
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the driver door switch 10 times. Then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-84,
«Component Function Check».
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following operation sequence is repeated 3 times.
Operation sequence

Inspection location

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

Operation

M

1

Front wiper

LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds

2

•
•
•
•

10 seconds

3

Headlamp

LO for 10 seconds →HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

4

A/C compressor (magnet clutch)

ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

5

Cooling fan

LO for 5 seconds → MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp

C

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Concept of Auto Active Test

JMMIA0812GB

• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.
Diagnosis Chart in Auto Active Test
Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•

Inspection contents

Any of the following components do not operate
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp
Headlamp (HI, LO)
Front wiper (HI, LO)

Perform auto active test.
Does the applicable system operate?

Possible cause
YES

BCM signal input circuit

NO

• Lamp or motor
• Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and applicable system
• IPDM E/R

YES

• BCM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R

YES

• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Cooling fan motor
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R

Perform auto active test.
Does the magnet clutch operate?

A/C compressor does not operate

Perform auto active test.
Does the cooling fan operate?

Cooling fan does not operate

CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)

INFOID:0000000009578846

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Ecu Identification

The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The IPDM E/R self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The IPDM E/R input/output data is displayed in real time.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Active Test

The IPDM E/R activates outputs to test components.

CAN Diag Support Mntr

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

A

ECU IDENTIFICATION

B

The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

C

Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
D

Main
Signals

Description

MOTOR FAN REQ [%]

×

Indicates cooling fan speed signal received from ECM on CAN communication
line

AC COMP REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates A/C compressor request signal received from ECM on CAN communication line

TAIL&CLR REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates position light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HL LO REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates low beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

HL HI REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates high beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

FR FOG REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates front fog light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]

×

Indicates front wiper request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper auto stop signal

WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper fail-safe operation

Monitor Item [Unit]

Indicates ignition switch ON signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IGN RLY1 -REQ [On/Off]
IGN RLY [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of ignition relay
Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch

INTER/NP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift position

ST RLY CONT [On/Off]

Indicates starter relay status signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IHBT RLY -REQ [On/Off]

Indicates starter control relay signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI]

Indicates condition of starter relay and starter control relay

DETENT SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift selector (park position switch)

DTRL REQ [Off]

Indicates daytime light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HOOD SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of hood switch

THFT HRN REQ [On/Off]

Indicates theft warning horn request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HORN CHIRP [On/Off]

Indicates horn reminder signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

ACTIVE TEST
Description

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

FRONT WIPER

This test is able to check wiper motor operation [Hi/Lo/Off].

Revision: April 2013

EXL-19

F

G

H

I

J

K

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Test item

E

2014 Note

EXL

M

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item

Description

MOTOR FAN

This test is able to check cooling fan operation [4/3/2/1].

EXTERNAL LAMPS

This test is able to check external lamp operation [Fog/Hi/Lo/TAIL/Off].

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-12, «CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-20

2014 Note

BCM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

BCM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009472877

ECU

Reference

C

BCS-28, «Reference Value»
BCM

B

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»

D

BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»
PCS-13, «Reference Value»

IPDM E/R

E

PCS-18, «Fail-safe»
PCS-20, «DTC Index»

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-21

2014 Note

HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009472996

AALWA0624GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-22

2014 Note

HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1369GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-23

2014 Note

HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1370GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-24

2014 Note

HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1371GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-25

2014 Note

HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1372GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-26

2014 Note

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM

A

Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009472998

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

AALWA0643GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-27

2014 Note

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1408GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-28

2014 Note

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1409GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-29

2014 Note

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1410GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-30

2014 Note

DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1411GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-31

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009473000

AALWA0631GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-32

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1381GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-33

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1382GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-34

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1383GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-35

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1384GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-36

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram

A
INFOID:0000000009473001

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0634GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-37

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1391GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-38

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1392GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-39

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1393GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-40

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1394GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-41

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1395GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-42

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram-With Daytime Light System

A
INFOID:0000000009473002

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0636GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-43

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1402GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-44

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1403GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-45

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1404GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-46

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1405GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-47

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1406GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-48

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1407GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-49

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

Wiring Diagram-Without Daytime Light System

INFOID:0000000009473007

AALWA0635GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-50

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1396GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-51

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1397GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-52

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1398GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-53

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1399GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-54

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1400GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-55

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1401GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-56

2014 Note

STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

STOP LAMP

A

Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009473003

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0630GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-57

2014 Note

STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1379GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-58

2014 Note

STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1380GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-59

2014 Note

STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABLIA4894GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-60

2014 Note

BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

BACK-UP LAMP

A

Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009473004

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0622GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-61

2014 Note

BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1364GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-62

2014 Note

BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1365GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-63

2014 Note

BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1452GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-64

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
Wiring Diagram

A
INFOID:0000000009473370

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0629GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-65

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1375GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-66

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1376GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-67

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1377GB

Revision: April 2013

EXL-68

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O
AALIA1378GB

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-69

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009472882

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

EXL-70

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.

Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.

A

B

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

C

1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.

D

E

F

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

G

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

H

>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

I

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

J

>> GO TO 6.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected K
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DTC INSPECTION PRIORITY CHART, and determine trouble diagnosis order.
EXL
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRN
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
O
NO
>> Check according to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: April 2013

EXL-71

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check according to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-72

2014 Note

HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472883

B

1.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OPERATION
C

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
2. With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (HI) is turned ON.
Hi
Off

D

: Headlamp (HI) ON
: Headlamp (HI) OFF

E

NOTE:
ON/OFF is repeated 1 second each.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Headlamp (HI) circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-73, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472884

G

1.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp high connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

H

I

J

(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector

(−)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Test item

Terminal

RH

Hi

25
E45

Ground

LH

EXTERNAL
LAMPS

27

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Hi

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

K

EXL

M

2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OPEN CIRCUIT

N

1.
2.
3.

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and headlamp high harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Headlamp high
Terminal

Connector

27

E26 (without
DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)

25

E25 (without
DTRL)
E74 (with DTRL)

E45
LH

Terminal

1

Continuity

P

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

EXL-73

2014 Note

HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuses are not fusing.
Unit

Location

Headlamp HI (RH)

Fuse No.
#34

IPDM E/R

Headlamp HI (LH)

Capacity
10 A

#35

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Terminal
E45

LH

27

Continuity
Ground
No

25

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is fusing again.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.

5.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp high connector.
Check continuity between headlamp high harness connector and ground.
Headlamp high
Connector
RH

E26 (with DTRL)
E73 (without DTRL)

LH

E25 (without DTRL)
E74 (with DTRL)

Continuity

Terminal
Ground
2

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace headlamp (HI) bulb. (Bulb socket is abnormal.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-74

2014 Note

HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472887

1.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION
1.
2.

B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (LO) is turned ON.
Lo
Off

C

: Headlamp (LO) ON
: Headlamp (LO) OFF

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Headlamp (LO) is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-75, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472888

F

1.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp low connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector

(−)

G

H

Voltage
(Approx.)

I

Lo

Battery voltage

J

Off

0V

Lo

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Test item

Terminal

RH

16
E44

Ground

LH

EXTERNAL
LAMPS

14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

K

EXL

2.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and headlamp low harness connector.

M

N
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Headlamp low
Terminal

Connector

16

E26 (without
DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)

14

E25 (without
DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)

E44
LH

Terminal

Continuity

O
3

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) FUSE
Revision: April 2013

EXL-75

2014 Note

P

HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit

Lotion

Headlamp LO (RH)

Fuse No.
#40

IPDM E/R

Headlamp LO (LH)

Capacity
15 A

#41

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Terminal
E44

LH

16

Continuity
Ground
No

14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is blown again.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.

5.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect headlamp low connector.
Check continuity between headlamp low harness connector and ground.
Headlamp low
Connector
RH

E26 (without DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)

LH

E25 (without DTRL)
E74 (with DTRL)

Continuity

Terminal
Ground
2

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace headlamp (LO) bulb. (Bulb socket is abnormal.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-76

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009667167

The manual headlamp aiming system uses a headlamp aiming switch to adjust the axis of the headlamp aiming motor. The headlamp aiming switch has four settings, each with a different resistance value. The headlamp aiming motor adjusts to the proper axis based off the position of the headlamp aiming switch.

B

Diagnosis Procedure

C

INFOID:0000000009667168

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to EXL-65, «Wiring Diagram».

D

1.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

E

1.
2.
3.

F

Disconnect headlamp aiming motor harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor harness connectors and ground.
Headlamp aiming motor
Connector

Terminal

E65 (RH)

3

E66 (LH)

Voltage

—

G

(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

H

Is the inspection normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Check the following:
• 10A fuse No. 5 located in the fuse block (J/B).
• Harness for open or short between headlamp aiming motor and fuse block (JB).

I

2.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH SIGNAL FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Headlamp aiming switch
Connector

Front combination lamp

Terminal

M105

3.

J

Disconnect headlamp aiming switch connector M140.
Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch harness connector and headlamp aiming motor
harness connector.

Connector

3

Terminal

LH

E66

RH

E65

2

Continuity

EXL

Yes

M

Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch harness connector and ground.
Headlamp aiming switch
Connector

Terminal

M105

3

—

Continuity

Ground

No

N

O

Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.

3.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT

P

Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor and ground.
Front combination lamp
Connector

Revision: April 2013

Terminal

K

—

Continuity

EXL-77

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LH

E66

RH

E65

1

Ground

Yes

Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.

4.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH

Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch terminals 1 and 2 in each switch position.
Component

Headlamp
aiming switch

Terminal

1

3

Switch Position

Continuity

0

604 ohms

1

324 ohms

2

191 ohms

3

130 ohms

Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 5
NO
>> Replace the headlamp aiming switch.

5.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between headlamp aiming switch harness connector and ground.
Connector

Terminal

—

Continuity

M105

2

Ground

Yes

Is continuity present?
YES >> Inspect headlamp aiming motors.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-78

2014 Note

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472889

1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OPERATION
1.
2.

B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT” of BCM (HEADLAMP) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that daytime running light operation.
On
Off

C

: Daytime running light ON
: Daytime running light OFF

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Daytime running light relay circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-79, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472890

F

1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Unit
Daytime running light relay

G
Fuse No.

Capacity

#37

10 A

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the fuse after repairing the applicable circuit.

I

2.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.

Remove daytime running light relay.
Check voltage between daytime running light relay harness connector and ground.

J

(+)
Daytime running light relay
Connector

K

(−)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Terminal

E67

2
5

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

M

3.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY

N

Check daytime running light relay. Refer to EXL-80, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace daytime running light relay.

O

4.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL OUTPUT
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Install daytime running light relay.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT” of BCM (HEADLAMP) active test item.
4. With operating the test item, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EXL

EXL-79

2014 Note

P

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
IPDM E/R

(−)

Connector

Terminal

E45

69

Voltage
(Approx.)

Test item
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT

Ground

On

0V

Off

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Daytime running light relay circuit is OK.
NO-1 (Fixed at 0 V)>>GO TO 5.
NO-2 (Fixed at battery voltage) >>Replace IPDM E/R.

5.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove daytime running light relay.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and daytime running light relay harness connector.
IPDM E/R

Daytime running light relay

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

69

E67

1

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

69

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009472891

1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove daytime running light relay.
Apply battery voltage to daytime running light relay- between terminals 1 and 2.
Check continuity between daytime running light relay terminals.
Daytime running lamp relay
Connector
E67

Condition

Terminal
3
5

Voltage

Continuity
Apply

Yes

Not Apply

No

he inspection result normal?
YES >> Daytime running light relay is normal.
NO
>> Replace daytime running light relay.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-80

2014 Note

PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472892

1.CHECK PARKING LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.

B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the parking lamp is turned ON.
TAIL
Off

C

: Parking lamp ON
: Parking lamp OFF

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Parking lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-81, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472893

F

1.CHECK PARKING LAMP FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Unit
• Parking lamp
• Front side marker lamp

G

Location
IPDM E/R

Fuse No.

Capacity

#37

10 A

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

I

2.CHECK PARKING LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.

J

Disconnect the following connectors.
IPDM E/R
Front combination lamp
Front side marker lamp
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

23

Ground

K

Continuity
No

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if fuse is blown again.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.

N

3.CHECK PARKING LAMP BULB
Check applicable lamp bulb.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace bulb.

O

4.CHECK PARKING LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.

P

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Disconnect front combination lamp connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EXL

EXL-81

2014 Note

PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector

(−)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Test item

Terminal
TAIL

RH
E45

23

EXTERNAL
LAMPS

Ground

LH

Off

Battery voltage
0V

TAIL
Off

Battery voltage
0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R.

5.CHECK PARKING LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Front combination lamp
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

RH

E28 (Without
DTRL)

7

LH

E27 (Without
DTRL)

7

E30 (Without
DTRL)

5

LH

E29 (Without
DTRL)

5

RH

E77 (With DTRL)

6

LH

E78 (With DTRL)

6

RH

E45

23

Continuity

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK PARKING LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Front combination lamp
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

RH

E28 (Without DTRL)

8

LH

E27 (Without DTRL)

8

RH

E30 (Without DTRL)

6

LH

E29 (Without DTRL)

6

RH

E77 (With DTRL)

7

LH

E78 (With DTRL)

7

Ground
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check corresponding bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-82

2014 Note

TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472896

1.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.

B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the tail lamp is turned ON.
TAIL
Off

C

: Tail Lamp ON
: Tail lamp OFF

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Tail lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-83, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472897

F

1.CHECK TAIL LAMP FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Unit

G

Location

• Tail lamp
• license plate lamp

IPDM E/R

Fuse No.

Capacity

#37

10 A

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

I

2.CHECK TAIL LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector, licence plate lamp connector and rear combination lamp connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

K

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

23

Ground

Continuity
No

EXL

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is blown again.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.

M

3.CHECK TAIL LAMP BULB

Check applicable lamp bulb.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace bulb.

N

O

4.CHECK TAIL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Disconnect rear combination lamp connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

J

EXL-83

2014 Note

P

TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
IPDM E/R

(−)

Connector

Terminal

E45

23

Voltage
(Approx.)

Test item

EXTERNAL
LAMPS

Ground

TAIL

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R.

5.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and rear combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Rear combination lamp
Terminal

E45

LH

Connector

Terminal

B27

23

1

B25

Continuity

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK TAIL LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Rear combination lamp
Connector

Terminal

RH

B27

LH

B25

Continuity
Ground

6

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check corresponding bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-84

2014 Note

LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472898

1.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPERATION

B

Check that the tail lamp is turned ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check tail lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-83, «Component Function Check».

C

2.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.

D

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the lighting switch, check that the license plate lamp is turned ON.
TAIL
Off

E

: License plate lamp ON
: License plate lamp OFF

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> License plate lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-85, «Diagnosis Procedure».

G

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472899

1.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB

H

Check the applicable lamp bulb.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace bulb.

I

2.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT

J

1.
2.
3.

K

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and license plate lamp connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Terminal
E45

LH

License plate lamp
Connector

Terminal

D508

23

1

D507

Continuity

Yes

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

N

3.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between license plate lamp harness connector and ground.
License plate lamp
Connector
RH

D508

LH

D507

Terminal

O
Continuity

Ground

2

P
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check corresponding bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-85

EXL

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472900

1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP
1.
2.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “FLASHER” of BCM (FLASHER) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the turn signal lamps is turned ON.
LH
RH
Off

: Turn signal lamps (LH) ON
: Turn signal lamps (RH) ON
: Turn signal lamps OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Turn signal lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-86, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472901

1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP
1.
2.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “FLASHER” of BCM (FLASHER) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the turn signal lamps is turned ON.
LH
RH
Off

: Turn signal lamps (LH) ON
: Turn signal lamps (RH) ON
: Turn signal lamps OFF

Which turn signal lamp does not turn ON?
Side turn signal lamp>>GO TO 3.
Other than side turn signal lamp>>GO TO 2.

2.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Check the applicable lamp bulb.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace bulb.

3.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front combination lamp connector, side turn signal lamp connector and rear combination lamp
connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
With operating the turn signal switch, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-86

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

A

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

LH

B

C

LH

60

PKID0926E

M99

Turn signal
switch

Ground

RH

OFF

0V

E

RH

61

F

PKID0926E

OFF

G

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

H

4.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front combination lamp, door mirror or rear combination lamp harness connector.

I

J

Front turn signal lamp

BCM
Connector
RH
LH

M99

RH
LH

Front combination lamp
Terminal

Connector

61

E30 (Without DTRL)

60

E29 (Without DTRL)

61

E76 (With DTRL)

60

E75 (With DTRL)

Terminal

4

Continuity

Yes

Connector
RH
LH

M99

Rear combination lamp
Terminal

Connector

61

B27

60

B25

Terminal
4

Continuity

N
Yes

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

5.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT

P

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

EXL

M

Rear turn signal lamp

BCM

K

EXL-87

2014 Note

TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
RH

Terminal
61

M99

LH

Continuity
Ground
No

60

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> (When lamp other than side turn signal lamp does not turn ON) Check each bulb socket for internal short circuit, and if check result is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and
Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front combination lamp, door mirror or rear combination lamp and ground.
Front turn signal lamp

Front combination lamp
Connector
RH

E30 (Without DTRL)

LH

E29 (Without DTRL)

RH

E76 (With DTRL)

LH

E75 (With DTRL)

Continuity

Terminal
6

Ground
Yes

5

Rear turn signal lamp

Rear combination lamp
Connector
RH

B27

LH

B25

Terminal

Continuity
Ground

6

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check corresponding bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-88

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009486641

1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION

B

WITHOUT CONSULT
Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-9, «Diagnosis Description».
Check that the front fog lamp is turned ON.
CONSULT
1. Select EXTERNAL LAMPS of IPDM E/R active test item.
2. While operating the test items, check that the front fog lamp is turned ON.
1.
2.

FOG
OFF

C

D

: Front fog lamp ON
: Front fog lamp OFF

E

Is the front fog lamp turned ON?
YES >> Front fog lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-89, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009486642

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to EXL-32, «Wiring Diagram».
H

1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.

I

Unit

Fuse No.

Capacity

31

15 A

Front fog lamp

J

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

K

2.CHECK FOG LAMP BULB

Check the applicable fog lamp bulb to be sure the proper bulb standard is in use and the bulb is not open.
Is the bulb OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the bulb.

EXL

M

3.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front fog lamp connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select EXTERNAL LAMPS of IPDM E/R active test item.
While operating the fog lamps, check voltage between front fog lamp harness connector and ground.

Front fog lamp

Revision: April 2013

O

P

(+)

Connector

N

(−)

Test item

Voltage
(Approx.)

Terminal

EXL-89

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
RH

E54
1

LH

Ground

EXTERNAL LAMPS

E53

Fog

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Fog

Battery voltage

Off

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front fog lamp harness connector and ground.
Front fog lamp
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

RH

E54

LH

E53

Ground

2

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning lamp.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

5.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY TO FRONT FOG LAMPS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1.
2.

Disconnect front fog lamp relay connector E58.
Check continuity between the front fog lamp relay harness connector E58 and the front fog lamp connectors E53 and E54.
Connector

Terminal

E58

3

Connector

Terminal

E53

1

E54

1

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

6.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check the voltage between the front fog lamp relay connector E58 and ground.
(+)
Connector

Terminal
2

E58

5

(−)

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

7.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E46.
Check continuity between the front fog lamp relay harness connector E58 and the IPDM E/R connector
E46.
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

Continuity

E58

1

E46

71

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check the front fog lamp relay. Refer to EXL-91, «Component Inspection».
Revision: April 2013

EXL-90

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.
A

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009486643

1. CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove front fog lamp relay.
Check the continuity between front fog lamp relay terminals 3 and 5 when voltage is supplied between terminals 1 and 2.
Terminals
3 and 5

Condition

Continuity

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

B

C

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front fog lamp relay.

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-91

2014 Note

HAZARD SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

HAZARD SWITCH
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009472906

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL BY CONSULT
1.
2.
3.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “HAZARD SW” of BCM (FLASHER) data monitor item.
With operating the hazard switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item

Condition

HAZARD SW

Monitor status

Hazard switch

ON

On

OFF

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard switch circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-92, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472907

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect hazard switch connector.
Check voltage between hazard switch connector and ground.
(+)
Hazard switch
Connector

Terminal

M55

2

(−)

Voltage (Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Hazard switch

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M55

2

M18

29

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and ground.
Hazard switch
Connector

Terminal

M55

2

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-92

2014 Note

HAZARD SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

4.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT

A

Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and ground.
Hazard switch
Connector

Terminal

M55

3

Ground

Continuity

B

Yes

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace hazard switch.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-93

2014 Note

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009472912

CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected.
Symptom

Possible cause

Inspection item

One side

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (HI)
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and headlamp (HI)
• Harness between headlamp
(HI) and ground
• IPDM E/R

Both sides

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-98, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure».

Headlamp (HI) is not
turned ON.

Headlamp (HI) circuit
Refer to EXL-73, «Component
Function Check».

Combination meter

• Combination meter
Data monitor “HI-BEAM IND”
• BCM (HEAD LAMP)
Active test “HEADLAMP”

One side

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (LO)
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and headlamp lamp (LO)
• Harness between headlamp
(LO) and ground
• IPDM E/R

Headlamp (LO) circuit
Refer to EXL-75, «Component
Function Check».

Both sides

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-100, «Diagnosis Procedure».

High beam indicator lamp is not turned ON.
[Headlamp (HI) is turned ON.]

Headlamp (LO) is not
turned ON.

Parking lamp is not turned ON.

• Fuse
• Parking lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front combination lamp
• Harness between front combination lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R

Parking lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-81, «Component
Function Check».

Front side marker lamp is not turned ON.

• Front side marker lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front side marker lamp
• Harness between front side
marker lamp and ground

Front side marker lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-81, «Component
Function Check».

Tail lamp is not turned ON.

• Fuse
• Tail lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and rear combination lamp
• Harness between rear combination lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R

Tail lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-83, «Component
Function Check».

License plate lamp is not turned ON.

• License plate lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and license plate lamp
• Harness between license plate
lamp and ground

License plate lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-85, «Component
Function Check».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-94

2014 Note

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Parking lamp, side marker lamp, tail lamp and license plate lamp are not turned ON.

Tail lamp indicator is not turned ON.
(Exterior lamps are turned ON.)

Indicator lamp is normal.
(Applicable side performs high flasher activation.)

Possible cause

Symptom diagnosis
“PARKING, SIDE MARKER, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE
NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-101, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Combination meter

Turn signal indicator lamp
does not blink.
(Turn signal lamp is normal.)

• Combination meter
Data monitor “LIGHT IND”
• BCM (HEADLAMP)
Active test “TAIL LAMP”

• Turn signal lamp bulb
• Door mirror
• Harness between BCM and
each turn signal lamp
• Harness between each turn signal lamp and ground

Turn signal lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-86, «Component
Function Check».

• Combination switch
• Harness between combination
switch and BCM
• BCM

Combination meter
Power supply and ground circuit
Refer to EXL-94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Symptom Table»(without DRL) or
EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table»(with DRL).

Turn signal lamp does not
blink.
Indicator lamp is included.

Inspection item

One side

Combination meter

Both sides
(Always)

• Turn signal indicator lamp signal
• BCM
• Combination meter

• Combination meter
Data monitor “TURN IND”
• BCM (FLASHER)
Active test “FLASHER”

• Combination meter power supply and ground circuit
• Combination meter

Combination meter
Power supply and ground circuit
Refer to EXL-94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Symptom Table»(without DRL) or
EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table»(with DRL).

Both sides
(Only when activating
hazard warning lamp
with ignition switch
OFF)

• Hazard warning lamp does not activate.
• Hazard warning lamp continues activating.
(Turn signal is normal.)

One side
Front fog lamp is not
turned ON.
Both sides

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

—

• Hazard switch
• Harness between hazard
switch and BCM
• Harness between hazard
switch and ground
• BCM

Hazard switch circuit
Refer to EXL-92, «Component
Function Check».

• Front fog lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front fog lamp
• Harness between front fog lamp
and ground
• IPDM E/R

Front fog lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-89, «Component
Function Check».

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-102, «Description».

N

O

WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table

P
INFOID:0000000009472913

CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-95

2014 Note

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Possible cause

Inspection item

One side

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (HI)
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and headlamp (HI)
• Harness between headlamp
(HI) and ground
• IPDM E/R

Both sides

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-98, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure».

Headlamp (HI) is not
turned ON.

High beam indicator lamp is not turned ON.
[Headlamp (HI) is turned ON.]

Headlamp (HI) circuit
Refer to EXL-73, «Component
Function Check».

Combination meter

• Combination meter
Data monitor “HI-BEAM IND”

One side

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (LO)
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and headlamp lamp (LO)
• Harness between headlamp
(LO) and ground
• IPDM E/R

Headlamp (LO) circuit
Refer to EXL-79, «Component
Function Check».

Both sides

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-100, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Headlamp (LO) is not
turned ON.

Daytime running light is not turned ON.

• Fuse
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and daytime running light relay
• Daytime running light relay
• IPDM E/R
• BCM
• ECM
• Combination meter

• Daytime running light relay circuit
Refer to EXL-79, «Component
Function Check».
• Combination meter
Data monitor “PKB SW”
• BCM
Active test “DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHT”

Parking lamp is not turned ON.

• Fuse
• Parking lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front combination lamp
• IPDM E/R

Parking lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-81, «Component
Function Check».

Front side marker lamp is not turned ON.

• Front side marker lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front side marker lamp
• Harness between front side
marker lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R

Front side marker lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-81, «Component
Function Check».

Tail lamp (Rear side marker lamp) is not turned ON.

• Fuse
• Tail lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and rear combination lamp
• Harness between and rear
combination lamp and ground

Tail lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-83, «Component
Function Check».

License plate lamp is not turned ON.

• License plate lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and license plate lamp
• Harness between license plate
lamp and ground

License plate lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-85, «Component
Function Check».

Parking lamp, side marker lamp, tail lamp and license plate lamp are not turned ON.

Symptom diagnosis
“PARKING, SIDE MARKER, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE
NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-101, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-96

2014 Note

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Tail lamp indicator is not turned ON.
(Exterior lamps are turned ON.)

Possible cause

Combination meter

• Combination meter
Data monitor “LIGHT IND”
• BCM (HEADLAMP)
Active test “TAIL LAMP”

• Turn signal lamp bulb
• Door mirror
• Harness between BCM and
each turn signal lamp
• Harness between each turn signal lamp and ground

Turn signal lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-86, «Component
Function Check».

Indicator lamp is included.

• Combination switch
• Harness between combination
switch and BCM
• BCM

Combination meter
Power supply and ground circuit
Refer to EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Symptom Table» (with DRL) or EXL94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table» (without DRL).

One side

Combination meter

Both sides
(Always)

• Turn signal indicator lamp signal
• BCM
• Combination meter

• Combination meter
Data monitor “TURN IND”
• BCM (FLASHER)
Active test “FLASHER”

• Combination meter power supply and ground circuit
• Combination meter

Combination meter
Power supply and ground circuit
Refer to EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Symptom Table» (with DRL) or EXL94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table» (without DRL).

Indicator lamp is normal.
(Applicable side performs high flasher activation.)
Turn signal lamp does not
blink.

Turn signal indicator lamp
does not blink.
(Turn signal lamp is normal.)

Inspection item

Both sides
(Only when activating
hazard warning lamp
with ignition switch
OFF)

• Hazard warning lamp does not activate.
• Hazard warning lamp continues activating.
(Turn signal is normal.)

One side
Front fog lamp is not
turned ON.
Both sides

A

B

C

D

E

F

—

G

H

I

J

• Hazard switch
• Harness between hazard
switch and BCM
• Harness between hazard
switch and ground
• BCM

Hazard switch circuit
Refer to EXL-92, «Component
Function Check».

• Front fog lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R
and front fog lamp
• Harness between front fog lamp
and ground
• IPDM E/R

Front fog lamp circuit
Refer to EXL-89, «Component
Function Check».

K

EXL

M

Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-102, «Diagnosis Procedure».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-97

2014 Note

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description

INFOID:0000000009472915

Both side headlamps (HI) are not turned ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS.

WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472916

1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “HL HI REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
HL HI REQ

Condition
Lighting switch
(2ND)

Monitor status

HI or PASS

On

LO

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

3.HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check headlamp (HI) circuit. Refer to EXL-98, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description

INFOID:0000000009472917

Both side headlamps (HI) are not turned ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS.

WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472918

1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “HL HI REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
HL HI REQ

Revision: April 2013

Condition
Lighting switch
(2ND)

Monitor status

HI or PASS

On

LO

Off

EXL-98

2014 Note

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

A

3.HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT INSPECTION

B

Check headlamp (HI) circuit. Refer to EXL-73, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-99

2014 Note

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON
Description

INFOID:0000000009472919

Both side headlamps (LO) are not turned ON in any condition.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472920

1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-95, «WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table»
(with DRL) or EXL-94, «WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table» (without DRL).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

2.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “HL LO REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
HL LO REQ

Condition
Lighting switch

Monitor status

2ND

On

OFF

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

3.HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check headlamp (LO) circuit. Refer to EXL-75, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-100

2014 Note

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT
TURNED ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT
TURNED ON
Description

INFOID:0000000009472921

A

B

The parking, license plate, side marker, tail lamps and each illumination are not turned ON in any condition.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472922

C

1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-101, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the combination switch normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

D

E

2.CHECK TAIL LAMP RELAY REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “TAIL & CLR REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
TAIL & CLR REQ

Condition
Lighting switch

F

Monitor status

1ST

On

OFF

Off

G

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-101

2014 Note

BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON
Description

INFOID:0000000009472923

The front fog lamps are not turned ON in any condition.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009472924

1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Unit

Front fog lamp

Fuse No.

Capacity

#31

15 A

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect front fog connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
RH

Terminal
E46

LH

Continuity
Ground

71

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is blown again.)
NO
>> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.

3.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION

Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-102, «Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

4.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “FR FOG REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
With operating the front fog lamp switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
FR FOG REQ

Condition
Front fog lamp switch
(With lighting switch 2ND)

Monitor status

ON

On

OFF

Off

Is the item status normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

5.FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check the front fog lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-89, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-102

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009445897

B

PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following:
• Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
• Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
• Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).
• Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
• Remove cargo and/or luggage to maintain an unloaded vehicle condition.
• Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
• Carefully wipe off any dirt from headlamp lens.
CAUTION:
Do not use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.)
• Place a driver or equivalent weight of 68.5 kg (150 lb) on the driver seat.
• By hand, bounce the front and rear of the vehicle to settle the suspension and eliminate any static load.
• Place the front tires in the straight ahead position.
• Confirm headlamp aiming switch is set to «0» (zero) position.
• Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen.
NOTE:
• For headlamp aiming details, refer to regulations in your area.
• By regulation, no means for horizontal aim adjustment is provided from the factory; only vertical aim is
adjustable.
• Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Perform headlamp aiming if:
— The vehicle front body has been repaired.
— The front combination lamp has been removed or replaced.
— Any outfitting has been installed.
— The vehicle’s standard load condition has been substantially increased.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW
K

EXL

M

N

AWLIA2171ZZ

A.

Headlamp (LH) (UP/DOWN)
adjustment screw

B.

Headlamp (RH) (UP/DOWN)
adjustment screw

P

AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW

Revision: April 2013

EXL-103

O

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

AWLIA2170ZZ

1.

Front combination lamp

A.

Suitable tool (for aiming adjustment)

Aiming Adjustment Procedure
1.

B.

Adjusting screw
INFOID:0000000009445898

Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the screen, so
that it is within the aiming adjustment area.
Low beam distribution on the screen
A.

: 150 mm (5.91 in)

B.

: 100 mm (3.94 in)

C.

: 100 mm (3.94 in)

JSLIA0028ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EXL-104

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
A

B

C

D

E
JSLIA0029ZZ

C.

Vertical center line of headlamp H.

Horizontal center line of headlamp L.

X.

Aiming adjustment area
(lateral)

Aiming adjustment area
(vertical)

Y.

Distance from headlamp center to screen (L)

Distance from headlamp center to screen

F

G

: 10 m (33 ft)
Unit: mm (in)

H

Aiming adjustment area
Vertical direction (Y)
(Lower side from headlamp center height)
Highest light axis

100 (3.94)

Target light axis

100 (3.94)

Lowest light axis

150 (5.91)

Lateral direction (X)
(Left side from headlamp center line)

I
0 — 100 (3.94)

J

LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
NOTE:
• Basic illuminating area for evaluation and/or adjustment should be within range shown on aiming chart.
K
1. Use adjustment screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Ensure fog lamps (if equipped) are turned off.
2. Block the opposite headlamp from projecting a beam pattern onto the adjustment screen, using a suitable EXL
object. Aim each headlamp individually.
CAUTION:
Do not cover the lens surface with tape etc. The lens is made of resin.
M
3. Place the screen on the same level and flat surface as the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Surface should be free of any debris that would cause a difference between the headlamp center and
N
the adjustment screen.
4. Face the front of the vehicle to the screen and measure distance between the headlamp center and the
screen surface.
O
Distance (D) between the headlamp center and the screen
5.
6.
7.
8.

: 10 m (33 ft)

Start the engine and turn the headlamp on.
Determine the preferred vertical aim range dimensions, using the aiming chart.
Measure the projected beam within the aim evaluation segment on the screen.
Adjust the beam pattern of each headlamp until the aim evaluation segment (the area relative to both the
highest and lowest cutoff line height) is positioned within the vertical aim range dimensions shown on the
aiming chart.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-105

2014 Note

P

FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009445899

PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING
Before performing aiming adjustment procedure, check the following:
• Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
• Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
• Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).
• Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
• Remove cargo and/or luggage to maintain an unloaded vehicle condition.
• Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
• Carefully wipe off any dirt from fog lamp lens.
CAUTION:
Do not use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.)
• Place a driver or equivalent weight of 68.5 kg (150 lb) on the driver seat.
• By hand, bounce the front and rear of the vehicle to settle the suspension and eliminate any static load.
• Place the front tires in the straight ahead position.
• Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen.
NOTE:
• For headlamp aiming details, refer to regulations in your area.
• By regulation, no means for horizontal aim adjustment is provided from the factory; only vertical aim is
adjustable.
• Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Perform headlamp aiming if:
— The vehicle front body has been repaired.
— The front combination lamp has been removed or replaced.
— Any outfitting has been installed.
— The vehicle’s standard load condition has been substantially increased.

AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW
• Turn the aiming adjusting screw using a suitable tool to aim the fog
lamp.
A: UP
B: DOWN

JMLIA2040ZZ

Aiming Adjustment Procedure
1.

2.

INFOID:0000000009445909

Screen placement.
NOTE:
• Place the screen perpendicular to the level road.
• Position the vehicle facing the screen with 10 m (33 ft) between the front fog lamp center and the
screen.
Start the engine. Illuminate the front fog lamp.
CAUTION:
Do not cover the lens surface with a tape etc. The lens are made of resin.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-106

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Adjust the cutoff line height (A) with the aiming adjustment
screw so that the distance (X) between the horizontal center line
of front fog lamp (H) and (A) becomes 200 mm (7.87 in).
Front fog lamp light distribution on the screen
• A :Cutoff line
• B :High illuminance
• H :Horizontal center line of front fog lamp
• V :Vertical center line of front fog lamp
• X :Cutoff line height

A

B

C
JPLIA0008ZZ

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-107

2014 Note

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015732

JMLIA3217GB

1.

Front fender

2.

Radiator core upper support

3.

Front combination lamp

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015733

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-16, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the front combination lamp bolts.
Pull front combination lamp forward.
Disconnect the harness connectors from front combination lamp and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation, perform headlamp aiming adjustment procedure. Refer to EXL-104, «Aiming Adjustment Procedure».

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015734

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.

HEADLAMP BULB
Revision: April 2013

EXL-108

2014 Note

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Removal

1.
2.

A

Remove plastic cover.
Remove bulb from the front combination lamp.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.

B

C

SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB
Removal

1.
2.

D

Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove the bulb from bulb socket.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.

E

F

FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP BULB
Removal

1.
2.

G

Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove the bulb from bulb socket.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-109

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT FOG LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009445901

AWLIA2178ZZ

1.

Front fog lamp

2.

Front bumper fascia

A.

Front fog lamp bracket

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445902

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Partially remove front fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, «Exploded View».
Disconnect the harness connector from front fog lamp.
Remove screws and front fog lamp.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation, perform fog lamp aiming adjustment procedure. Refer to EXL-104, «Aiming Adjustment Procedure».

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009445910

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.

REMOVAL
1.

Partially remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-110

2014 Note

FRONT FOG LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Disconnect harness connector (1) from front fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb (2) counterclockwise and remove.

A

B

C
SKIB8304J

D

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-111

2014 Note

COMBINATION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COMBINATION SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606282

CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not use air or electric tools when removing or installing the combination switch.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove the steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate steering wheel clockwise to access first combination
switch screw (A) and remove.

ALMIA0648ZZ

4.
5.

Rotate steering wheel counter-clockwise to access second combination switch screw (A) and remove.
Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the combination
switch (1) and remove.

ALMIA0649ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
• In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset with the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory with CONSULT.
• If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to EXL-70, «Work Flow».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-112

2014 Note

HAZARD SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HAZARD SWITCH

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015739

B

C

D

E

F
AWLIA2163ZZ

1.

Cluster lid C

2.

Hazard switch

Removal and Installation

G

Pawl
INFOID:0000000009445907

H

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Release pawls and remove hazard switch.

I

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

J

K

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-113

2014 Note

HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015743

AWLIA2172ZZ

1.

Instrument lower panel LH

2.

Headlamp aiming switch

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009641646

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
While pressing pawls, push the headlamp aiming switch to remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-114

2014 Note

REAR COMBINATION LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR COMBINATION LAMP

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015744

B

C

D

E

F
AWLIA2167ZZ

1.

Rear combination lamp

A.

Grommet

B.

G

Clip

Locating pin

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015745

REMOVAL
1.
2.

H

I

Remove rear combination lamp bolts.
Release the locating pin (A) of the rear combination lamp using
a suitable tool (B) as shown.

J

K

EXL
AWLIA2169ZZ

3.

M

Disconnect the harness connector from the rear combination lamp and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

N

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015746

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb with bare hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.

STOP/TAIL LAMP BULB
Removal

1.

Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

EXL-115

2014 Note

O

P

REAR COMBINATION LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Rotate stop/tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove stop/tail lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install bulb socket securely for watertightness.

REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Removal

1.
2.
3.

Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install bulb socket securely for watertightness.

BACK-UP LAMP BULB
Removal

1.
2.
3.

Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install bulb socket securely for watertightness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-116

2014 Note

HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015747

B

C

D

E

F
AWLIA2164ZZ

1.

High-mounted stop lamp

2.

High-mounted stop lamp LED

G

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015748

H

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Release high-mounted stop lamp pawls using a suitable tool.
Disconnect the harness connector from high-mounted stop lamp and remove.

I

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

J

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015749

K

HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP BULB
The high-mounted stop lamp bulb is a LED and is integrated into the high-mounted stop lamp and is serviced
as an assembly. Refer to EXL-117, «Removal and Installation».

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-117

2014 Note

LICENSE PLATE LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015750

AWLIA2173ZZ

1.

License plate lamp bulb socket

4.

License plate lamp

2.

License plate lamp bulb

3.

Seal

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015751

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect harness connector from license plate lamp.
Release license plate lamp pawl and remove license plate lamp.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015752

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb with your hand while it is on or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove license plate lamp. Refer to EXL-118, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate license plate lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove license plate lamp bulb from bulb socket.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-118

2014 Note

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

A

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670495

B

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP — WITHOUT AIMING MOTOR
C

D

E

F

G
AWLIA2165ZZ

1.

Front combination lamp

2.

Side marker lamp bulb

3.

Side marker lamp socket

4.

Headlamp bulb

5.

Lock ring

6.

Front turn signal/Parking
lamp bulb socket

7.

Front turn signal/Parking lamp bulb

H

I

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP — WITH AIMING MOTOR
J

K

EXL

M

N
JMLIA3219ZZ

1.

Front combination lamp

2.

Side marker lamp bulb

3. Side marker lamp bulb socket

4.

Lock ring

5.

Front turn signal/parking lamp
bulb socket

6. Front turn signal/parking lamp
bulb

7.

Headlamp Bulb

8.

Retaining spring

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009670496

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

EXL-119

2014 Note

O

P

FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent
damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of the lamp.

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-108, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate lock ring counterclockwise and remove.
Remove headlamp bulb.
Rotate side marker bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove the side marker lamp bulb from the side marker bulb socket.
Rotate turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
Remove turn signal/parking lamp bulb from turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket.

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
• After installing the headlamp bulb, be sure to install lock ring securely to ensure watertightness.
• After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-120

2014 Note

REAR COMBINATION LAMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

REAR COMBINATION LAMP

A

Exploded View — Non LED

INFOID:0000000009670499

REAR COMBINATION LAMP — NON LED

B

C

D

E

F
AWLIA2166ZZ

1.
4.

Rear combination lamp
Rear turn signal lamp bulb

2.

Rear tail lamp bulb

5.

Rear combination lamp harness connector

3.

G

Rear back-up lamp bulb

Disassembly and Assembly — Non LED

H
INFOID:0000000009670500

REAR COMBINATION LAMP

I

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent
damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of the lamp.

J

K

Disassembly

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Rotate stop/tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the stop/tail lamp bulb from bulb socket.

Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-121

2014 Note

REAR COMBINATION LAMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

Exploded View — LED

INFOID:0000000009670501

REAR COMBINATION LAMP — LED

JMLIA3231ZZ

1.

Rear combination lamp

2.

Rear tail lamp bulb

4.

Rear back-up lamp bulb

5.

Rear turn signal lamp bulb

3. Rear LED lamp harness connector

Disassembly and Assembly — LED

INFOID:0000000009670502

REAR COMBINATION LAMP
WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent
damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of the lamp.
Disassembly

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».
Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Disconnect the harness connector from the LED lamp.
Rotate side marker lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
Remove the side marker lamp bulb from bulb socket.

Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

Revision: April 2013

EXL-122

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Bulb specification

INFOID:0000000009015753

B

ARGENTINA MODELS ONLY
Item

Wattage (W)*
Headlamp (HI/LO)

Front combination

60/55

Front turn signal lamp

21

Side marker lamp

5

Fog lamp (if equipped)

55

Daytime running lamp built-in fog lamp

19

Rear combination

Stop lamp

LED

Tail lamp

5

Rear turn signal lamp

21

Back-up lamp

21

License plate lamp

5

High-mounted stop lamp

C

Normal glass

LED

Privacy glass

LED

D

E

F

G

H

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info.

NON ARGENTINA MODELS

I
Item

Front combination

Wattage (W)*
Headlamp (HI/LO)

65/55

Front turn signal/Parking lamp

27/8

Side marker lamp
Fog lamp (if equipped)

55
Stop/Tail lamp

Rear combination

K

21/5

Rear turn signal lamp

21

Back-up lamp

21

License plate lamp
High-mounted stop lamp

5

J

5
Normal glass

LED

Privacy glass

LED

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info.

EXL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXL-123

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

EXT

EXTERIOR

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

COWL TOP ………………………………………………. 22

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

Exploded View …………………………………………………22
Removal and Installation …………………………………..23

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ………………….. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tools ………………………………………. 4
Commercial Service Tools ………………………………… 4

CLIP LIST …………………………………………………… 5
Descriptions for Clips ………………………………………… 5

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 9
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ………………………………………………………. 9
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 9
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………. 10
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………… 13

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 15
FRONT BUMPER ………………………………………..15
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 15
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 16

REAR BUMPER ………………………………………….18
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 18
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 18

FRONT GRILLE ………………………………………….21
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 21
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 21

Revision: April 2013

FENDER PROTECTOR ……………………………… 24
Exploded View …………………………………………………24
Removal and Installation …………………………………..24

F

G

H

UNDER COVER ………………………………………… 25
FRONT UNDER COVER ……………………………………..25
FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View …………..25
FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………………25
Exploded View …………………………………………………26
FLOOR UNDER COVER …………………………………….26
FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………………26
REAR WIND DEFLECTOR ………………………………….27
REAR WIND DEFLECTOR : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………………27

ROOF SIDE MOLDING ………………………………. 28

I

J

EXT

L

Exploded View …………………………………………………28
Removal and Installation …………………………………..28

M

DOOR SASH TAPE …………………………………… 30

N

Exploded View …………………………………………………30
Removal and Installation …………………………………..31

DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ……………………….. 32

O

Exploded View …………………………………………………32
Removal and Installation …………………………………..33

BACK DOOR FINISHER …………………………….. 34
Exploded View …………………………………………………34
Removal and Installation …………………………………..34

EXT-1

2014 Note

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009446816

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009444681

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. to prevent damage to
the windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009443525

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
Revision: April 2013

EXT-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009671259

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit

Repairing the cause of noise

ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009671260

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0995E

( — )
Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

EXT-4

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

CLIP LIST

A

Descriptions for Clips

INFOID:0000000009442998

Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

P

SIIA0315E

Revision: April 2013

EXT-5

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

SIIA0316E

Revision: April 2013

EXT-6

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O
SIIA0317E

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-7

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

ALJIA0564GB

Revision: April 2013

EXT-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671261

B

C

D

E

F

G
SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW

H
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to EXT-13, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
I
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is J
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
EXT
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
L
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
N
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
O
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
P
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

EXT-9

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to EXT-10, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671262

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

EXT-10

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

C

CENTER CONSOLE

F

Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

A

B

D

E

G

H

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
I
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
J
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
EXT
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

EXT-11

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: April 2013

EXT-12

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671263

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

EXT-13

P

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

LAIA0071E

Revision: April 2013

EXT-14

2014 Note

FRONT BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

FRONT BUMPER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015848

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N
AWKIA2583ZZ

1.

Front bumper fascia side bracket 2.
(RH)

Front bumper reinforcement

4.

Front fascia side deflector (RH)

5.

Front fog lamp (RH) (if equipped) 6.

Tow cover

7.

Front license plate bracket

8.

Front bumper fascia

9.

Front fog lamp (LH) (if equipped)

10. Front fascia side deflector (LH)

11.

Front under cover

12. Front bumper fascia side bracket
(LH)

13. Front bumper reinforcement
bracket (RH)

14. Front bumper reinforcement
bracket (LH)

B.

Front fog lamp bracket

Revision: April 2013

3.

A.

Front energy absorber

O

J nut

Pawl

EXT-15

2014 Note

P

FRONT BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015849

CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Use care when handling to prevent damage. Avoid contact with oily
substances.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the four front bumper fascia upper clips.
Remove the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Partially remove front fender protectors (LH/RH) at the front edge to access front bumper fascia bolts.
Refer to EXT-24, «Exploded View».
Remove front bumper fascia bolts (A) (LH/RH).

JMKIA8017ZZ

6.

Remove the front bumper fascia from the front bumper fascia
side brackets (LH/RH) by releasing the pawls as shown.
: Pawl
CAUTION:
When removing front bumper fascia, two people are
required to avoid damaging.

AWKIA1890ZZ

7.
8.
9.

Disconnect the harness connectors from the front fog lamps (LH/RH) (if equipped).
Remove front bumper fascia.
Remove the following parts after removing front bumper fascia (if necessary).
• Tow cover
• Front fog lamps (LH/RH) (if equipped). Refer to EXL-110, «Removal and Installation».
• Front license plate bracket
10. Remove the front energy absorber (if necessary).
11. Remove nuts and front bumper reinforcement (if necessary).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten the front bumper reinforcement nuts to specification (if removed). Refer to EXT-15, «Exploded View».
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation specifications.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.

Revision: April 2013

EXT-16

2014 Note

FRONT BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

AWKIA2515ZZ

Section

Measurement

Minimum

Target Value

Maximum

A-A

Clearance

0.0 (0.00)

2.0 (0.08)

4.0 (0.16)

B-B

Clearance

2.4 (0.09)

4.4 (0.17)

6.4 (0.25)

B-B

Surface height

-1.5 (-0.06)

0.5 (0.02)

1.99 (0.08)

C-C

Clearance

0.0 (0.00)

2.0 (0.08)

4.0 (0.16)

D-D

Clearance

0.0 (0.00)

1.5 (0.06)

3.0 (0.12)

D-D

Surface height

0.0 (0.00)

1.5 (0.06)

3.0 (0.12)

E-E

Clearance

0.01 (0.00)

2.0 (0.08)

4.0 (0.16)

F-F

Clearance

0.1 (0.00)

0.3 (0.01)

1.0 (0.04)

F-F

Surface height

-0.1 (0.00)

0.7 (0.03)

1.7 (0.07)

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-17

2014 Note

REAR BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR BUMPER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015850

AWKIA2520ZZ

1.

Rear bumper fascia side
bracket (LH)

2.

Rear bumper reinforcement support 3.
(LH)

Rear bumper closing (LH)

4.

Rear bumper fascia

5.

Rear bumper finisher

6.

Rear bumper fascia spacer

7.

Rear bumper reinforcement

8.

Rear bumper closing (RH)

9.

Rear bumper reinforcement
support (RH)

A.

J nut

10. Rear bumper fascia side
bracket (RH)

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015851

CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Use care when handling to prevent damage. Avoid contact with oily
substances.

REMOVAL
1.

Remove rear combination lamps (LH/RH). Refer to EXL-115, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

EXT-18

2014 Note

REAR BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove screws (A) and clip (B) from rear bumper closings (1)
(LH/RH).

A

B

C
ALKIA2525ZZ

3.

D

Remove the rear bumper fascia upper bolt (A) (LH/RH) from
each side of the rear bumper fascia (1).

E

F

G
AWKIA2526ZZ

4.
5.

Remove rear bumper fascia lower clips.
Remove the rear bumper fascia from the rear bumper fascia
side brackets (LH/RH) by releasing the pawls as shown.
: Pawl
CAUTION:
When removing rear bumper fascia, two people are
required to avoid damaging.

H

I

J

EXT
AWKIA2523ZZ

6.

7.
8.

Remove the following parts after removing rear bumper fascia (if necessary).
• Two clips each and rear bumper closings (LH/RH)
• Two screws and rear bumper finisher
• Rear bumper fascia spacers
• Two bolts each and rear bumper side brackets (LH/RH)
Remove rear bumper reinforcement nuts and rear bumper reinforcement (if necessary).
Remove rear bumper reinforcement support nuts from each and the rear bumper reinforcement supports
(LH/RH) (if necessary).

L

M

N

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation specifications.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-19

2014 Note

REAR BUMPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ALKIA3207ZZ

Section

Measurement

Minimum

Target Value

Maximum

A-A

Clearance

0.1 (0.00)

0.3 (0.01)

1.0 (0.04)

B-B

Clearance

0.0 (0.00)

1.5 (0.06)

3.5 (0.14)

B-B

Surface height

-1.5 (-0.06)

0.5 (0.02)

2.5 (0.10)

C-C

Clearance

3.0 (0.12)

5.0 (0.20)

7.0 (0.28)

C-C

Surface height

-2.0 (-0.08)

-1.5 (-0.06)

3.5 (0.14)

D-D

Clearance

5.0 (0.20)

7.0 (0.28)

9.0 (0.35)

Revision: April 2013

EXT-20

2014 Note

FRONT GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT GRILLE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015852

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2553ZZ

1.

Front grille finisher
Pawl

2.

Front grille

3.

Front emblem

J

Clip

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015853

EXT

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front grille finisher clips.
Release pawls using a suitable tool and remove the front grille finisher.
Release the clips using a suitable tool, then pull the front grille away from vehicle to release pawls and
remove.
Release pawls and remove front emblem from front grille (if necessary).

INSTALLATION

L

M

N

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-21

2014 Note

COWL TOP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COWL TOP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015856

AWKIA2518ZZ

1.

Cowl top side cover (RH)

2.

Front fender seal (RH)

3.

Cowl top extension

4.

EPT seal [t: 5.0 mm (0.197 in)]

5.

Cowl top cover seal

6.

Front fender seal (LH)

7.

One-way valve

8.

Cowl top cover

9.

Cowl top cover cap

10. Cowl top side cover (LH)
Front

Revision: April 2013

11. EPT seal [t: 3.0 mm (0.118 in)] 12. EPT seal [t: 15.0 mm (0.591 in)]
Clip

Pawl

EXT-22

2014 Note

COWL TOP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015857

A

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove front wiper arms (LH/RH). Refer to WW-58, «Removal and Installation».
Remove cowl top side covers (LH/RH).
Remove cowl top cover clips.
Pull forward to release cowl top cover from windshield.
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top
cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
to prevent damage to the windshield.

B

C

D

E

JMKIA8047ZZ

5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the washer tube connector and harness clips.
Remove cowl top cover.
Remove the following parts after removing cowl top cover (if necessary).
• EPT seals
• Cowl top cover seal
• Washer tube
• Washer nozzles (LH/RH). Refer to WW-55, «WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation».

F

G

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Always replace EPT seals with new ones when reusing the cowl top cover.
• When installing EPT seal (2) of portion (A) on cowl top cover (1), install EPT seal by aligning to the
line of (B) and setting portion (C) in cowl top cover.

I

J

EXT

L

M
JMKIB0738ZZ

• After installing cowl top cover (2), check that side surface of EPT seal (1) makes contact with windshield glass (3).

N

O

P

JMKIB0739ZZ

Revision: April 2013

EXT-23

2014 Note

FENDER PROTECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FENDER PROTECTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015858

AWKIA2513ZZ

1.

Front fender protector

A.

J nut

Removal and Installation

Front
INFOID:0000000009444684

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove fender protector screws and clips.
Remove fender protector.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

EXT-24

2014 Note

UNDER COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNDER COVER

A

FRONT UNDER COVER
FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009444682

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

AWKIA2555ZZ

1.

M

Front under cover

FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444683

N

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-16, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the front under cover clips and nuts.
Slide the front under cover forward slightly to release pawls and to allow clearance of studs, then remove
the front under cover.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

EXT-25

2014 Note

O

P

UNDER COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009645124

JMKIB0581ZZ

1.

Rear floor under cover (RH)

4.

Rear wind deflector

2.

Rear floor under cover (LH)

3.

Grommet

Front

FLOOR UNDER COVER
FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645125

REMOVAL
Remove the rear floor under cover nuts and the rear floor under cover.
Revision: April 2013

EXT-26

2014 Note

UNDER COVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

A

REAR WIND DEFLECTOR

REAR WIND DEFLECTOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645126

B

REMOVAL
Remove the rear wind deflector screws and the rear wind deflector.

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-27

2014 Note

ROOF SIDE MOLDING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ROOF SIDE MOLDING
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015860

AWKIA2556ZZ

1.

Roof side molding

2.

Roof side molding clip

3.

Roof panel

4.

Body side outer panel

5.

Double-sided tape
[t: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)]

6.

Double-sided tape
[t: 4.0 mm (0.157 in)]

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015861

ROOF SIDE MOLDING
Revision: April 2013

EXT-28

2014 Note

ROOF SIDE MOLDING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Removal
Lift using a suitable tool (A), then pull the roof side molding from the
roof panel, starting from the front of vehicle and moving toward the
rear.
: Clip

A

B

C

AWKIA2560ZZ

D

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the double-sided tape on the back surface with new double-sided tape when reusing the roof
side molding.

E

ROOF SIDE MOLDING CLIP

F

Removal

1.
2.

Remove roof side molding.
Heat double sided tape using a suitable tool, then remove roof side molding clips using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage the body paint.

G

H

Installation

1.
2.

Clean tape removed surface with a shop cloth soaked in white gasoline or IPA.
Use two-part epoxy adhesive.
Adhesive

3.

J

: Approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 in)

EXT

Position clip to the proper location, then sufficiently press-fit until the adhesive protrudes to tape side.
Press-fit limit

5.

: 3M-weld DP–100 or equivalent

Apply adhesive evenly to clip tape surface.
Thickness

4.

I

: 19.6 N (2.0 Kg — 4.41 lb) × 2 seconds

L

Tape clips after press fit to temporarily hold for specified time based on the following conditions.
M

5 to 10 °C (41 to 50 °F)
: 1 hour or more
11 to 23 °C (52 to 73 °F)
: 30 minutes or more
24 °C or more (75 °F or more) : 15 minutes or more

N

6. Install roof side molding from rear of vehicle to front after removing the temporary hold tape.
CAUTION:
• When installing roof side molding, check that the molding is securely inserted into the clips.
• Do not wash the vehicle within 24 hours so as to keep adhesive dry.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-29

2014 Note

DOOR SASH TAPE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR SASH TAPE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015862

JMKIB0613ZZ

1.

Front door sash front tape

2.

Front door sash rear tape

4.

Rear door sash rear tape

5.

Center pillar tape

Revision: April 2013

EXT-30

3.

Rear door sash front tape

2014 Note

DOOR SASH TAPE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645128

A

REMOVAL
Heat door sash tape surface using a suitable tool and remove door sash tape.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage body paint.

B

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Degrease door assembly surface for sash tape.
• Grit or dust on surface of sash tape may spoil exterior appearance if not removed. Clean the surface
and check that no grit or dust remains before starting the operation.
• Do not reuse blackout tape.
1. Affix door sash tape (2) to door panel (3) by applying pressure using a squeegee (A) while peeling off
release coated paper (1).
NOTE:
• Peel release coated paper at distance of 10 – 20 mm (0.4 – 0.8 in) ahead (B) of squeegee and affix
blackout paper.
• To prevent any bubbles from forming, slightly lift the portion not yet affixed using a squeegee, so that
portion dose not contact with panel surface. Apply pressure and affix at a low and constant speed using
squeegee tilted at 40 – 50° angle (pushing direction) (C) 30 – 45° angle (pulling direction) (D).

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

EXT
JMKIA4862GB

2.

L

For small radius portion of hemming part, gradually apply pressure and affix door sash tape (1) using squeegee (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle with in 24 hours so as to keep
adhesive dry.

M

N

O
JMKIA4655ZZ

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-31

2014 Note

DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015864

AWKIA2517ZZ

1.

Front door outside molding

Revision: April 2013

2.

Rear door outside molding

EXT-32

3.

Front door panel

2014 Note

DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4.

Rear door panel

5.

Rear door glass

6.

Front door glass

A

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444686

B

FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal

1.
2.

Lower front door glass fully.
Release the pawls using a suitable tool, then rotate front door outside molding toward the outside of the
vehicle and lift up to remove.

C

D

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
E

REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal

1.
2.

Lower rear door glass fully.
Release the pawl using a suitable tool, then rotate rear door outside molding toward the outside of the
vehicle and lift up to remove.

F

G

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

H

I

J

EXT

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

EXT-33

2014 Note

BACK DOOR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR FINISHER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015865

AWKIA2514ZZ

1.

Rear camera (if equipped)

2.

Back door outer finisher

3.

Back door request switch

Clip

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015866

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from back door request switch.
Remove back door outer finisher nuts.
Release clips and remove the back door outer finisher.
Remove back door request switch from the back door outer finisher (if necessary).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing back door finisher, check that clips are securely placed into body panel holes.

Revision: April 2013

EXT-34

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SECTION

FAX

FRONT AXLE

A

B

C

FAX

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Drive Shaft ………………………………….. 2
Precautions for Wheel Hub and Knuckle ……………… 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 4

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 6
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 6
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 6

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 7
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ………….. 7
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 7

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 9
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 9
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….11
Inspection ……………………………………………………….13

F

G

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT …………………….. 14
Exploded View …………………………………………………14

H

WHEEL SIDE …………………………………………………….14
WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation …………….15
TRANSAXLE SIDE …………………………………………….18
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation …….18
Inspection ……………………………………………………….18

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ………………………………. 19
Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19

I

J

K

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 21
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ………………………………. 21
Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….22

L

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 27

M

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 9

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 27

N

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ………….. 9

Wheel Bearing …………………………………………………27
Drive Shaft ………………………………………………………27

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT …………………………………. 8
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 8

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FAX-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009541306

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Drive Shaft

INFOID:0000000009541307

Observe the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft.
• Do not disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts.
• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
• Clean the parts, before disassembling and assembling.
• Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location.
• Reassemble disassembled parts carefully in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be
placed over parts.
• Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
• Clean disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with
air or wiping with paper waste.

Precautions for Wheel Hub and Knuckle

INFOID:0000000009541308

Observe the following precautions when assembling wheel hub and knuckle.
• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
• Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
• If any of wheel hub, steering knuckle, wheel bearing, and wheel hub lock nut is dropped, it must not be used.
• Always check that the tools used for press-fit work of wheel hub and wheel bearing have no wear and deformation so that a pressure can be applied vertically.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009541309

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV40104000
(
—
)
Hub lock nut wrench

Removing and Installing wheel hub lock nut
a: 85 mm (3.35 in)
b: 65 mm (2.56 in)

C

FAX

E
ZZA0802D

ST33710000
(
—
)
Drift

F

Removing wheel hub
a: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
b: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.

G

H
ZZA1233D

ST30031000
(
—
)
Puller

Removing wheel bearing inner race (outer)

I

J
ZZA0700D

ST35321000
(
—
)
Drift

• Removing wheel bearing
• Installing wheel hub
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.

K

L

M

ZZA1051D

ST35271000
(
—
)
Drift

Installing wheel bearing
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.

N

O
ZZA0837D

ST33061000
(
—
)
Drift

Installing wheel hub
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.

P

ZZA1051D

Revision: April 2013

FAX-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV40107300
(
—
)
Boot band crimping tool

Installing boot band

ZZA1229D

KV40107500
(
—
)
Drive shaft attachment

Removing drive shaft

ZZA1230D

KV38107900
(
—
)
Differential side oil seal protector

Installing drive shaft
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.

PDIA1183J

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009541310

Tool name

Description

Drive shaft puller

Removing drive shaft joint sub-assembly

JPDIG0152ZZ

Sliding hammer

Removing drive shaft

ZZA0023D

Ball joint remover

Removing wheel stud

NT146

Revision: April 2013

FAX-4

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name

Description

Drift

• Installing wheel bearing
• Installing splash guard
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.

A

B

C

ZZA0898D

Drift

Installing splash guard
a: 95 mm (3.74 in) dia.

FAX

E
JPDIC0679ZZ

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

F

G

H

PIIB1407E

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FAX-5

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009541311

FRONT
AXLE

WT-5

WT-4

—

BR-7

ST-7

FRONT AXLE

TIRE

ROAD WHEEL

DRIVE SHAFT

BRAKE

STEERING

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

—

FSU-6

×

FRONT SUSPENSION

×

FAX-7

Symptom

—

×

Parts interference

Shake

FAX-7

×

Wheel bearing damage

DRIVE
SHAFT

Improper installation, looseness

×

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

—

FSU-20
Joint sliding resistance

Noise

Reference

Imbalance

—
Excessive joint angle

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

Noise

×

Shake

×

×

×

×

×

Vibration

×

×

×

×

×

Shimmy

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Shudder

×

×

×

×

×

×

Poor quality ride or handling

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×: Applicable

Revision: April 2013

FAX-6

2014 Note

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541312

B

COMPONENT PART
• Check that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
• Check the axle and suspension parts for excessive play, weary or damage.
• Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.

C

FAX

E

F

SMA525A

FRONT WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Move the wheel bearing in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness in the wheel bearing.
Axial end play

G

H

: Refer to FAX-27.

• Rotate the wheel bearing and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are
any irregular conditions, replace wheel bearing.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FAX-7

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541313

Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage.
CAUTION:
Replace entire drive shaft when noise or vibration occurs from drive shaft.
• Check boot for cracks and other damage.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-8

2014 Note

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009541314

B

C

FAX

E

F

G

H

I

AWDIA1108ZZ

1.

Steering knuckle

2.

Splash guard

3.

Wheel bearing

4.

Snap ring

5.

Wheel stud

6.

Wheel hub

7.

Disc brake rotor

8.

Wheel hub lock nut

9.

Cotter pin

Removal and Installation

J

K
INFOID:0000000009541315

L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation».
Remove brake caliper using power tool, leaving brake hose connected. Reposition brake caliper aside
with wire. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
NOTE:
Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Put matching marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub, then remove disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
• Use paint for matching parts. Do not damage the disc brake rotor or wheel hub.
• Do not drop disc rotor.
Remove and discard cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number

6.

: KV40104000 (

—

)

Separate the drive shaft from the wheel hub by lightly tapping the end of the drive shaft using a suitable
tool and a wood block.
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

FAX-9

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Use suitable puller if wheel hub and drive shaft cannot be separated after performing the above procedure.
7. Remove wheel hub lock nut.
8. Remove the nut and separate the steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-14, «Exploded
View».
9. Remove the nuts and bolts, then separate the steering knuckle from strut. Refer to FSU-9, «Exploded
View».
10. Suspend the drive shaft with suitable wire.
CAUTION:
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Do not allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the
other parts.
11. Remove transverse link outer nut and bolt. Remove steering knuckle from transverse link.
12. If necessary, remove wheel studs (1) from wheel hub using the
suitable tool (A).
CAUTION:
• Remove stud only when necessary.
• Do not hammer the wheel stud or damage to the wheel
bearing may occur.
• Press the wheel stud straight out to avoid damaging the
stud.

JPDIF0299ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the transverse link outer nut.
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing.
• Do not allow paint to adhere to the wheel bearing seal.
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter, clean
the mounting surface.
• Position the stud (1) to the wheel hub flange. Place a washer (A)
and nut (B) on the opposite end of the stud. Tighten to press the
stud into the wheel hub flange.
CAUTION:
• Check that no clearance exists between wheel hub and
wheel stud after installation.
• Do not reuse wheel stud.

JPDIF0300ZZ

• Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION:
Do not apply lubricating oil to the mating surface of the wheel hub lock nut and the wheel hub.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-10

2014 Note

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Clean the mating surfaces of drive shaft, wheel hub, and wheel
bearing. Apply Molykote M77 to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover entire flat surface of joint subassembly.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

A

B

C

Molykote M77 quantity

: FAX-27, «Drive Shaft»
JSDIA2844ZZ

FAX

• When reusing disc rotor, align the matching marks during removal.
• When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the cotter pin to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse cotter pin.

Disassembly and Assembly

E
INFOID:0000000009541316

F

DISASSEMBLY
1.

Remove wheel hub using Tool.
Tool number

2.

: ST33710000 (

G

—

)

Remove splash guard from steering knuckle.

H

I

SDIA0758J

3.

J

Remove wheel bearing inner race (outer side) from wheel hub
using Tools.
K

Tool number
Tool number

: ST33710000 (
: ST30031000 (

—
—

)
)
L

M
SDIA0759J

4.
5.

Remove snap ring from steering knuckle using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage steering knuckle.
Remove wheel bearing from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number

: ST35321000 (

—

N

O

)
P

SDIA0760J

Revision: April 2013

FAX-11

2014 Note

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ASSEMBLY
1. Install wheel bearing to steering knuckle using the Tool (A) and a
suitable tool (B).
Tool number

: ST35271000 (

—

)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse wheel bearing.
• Do not apply a cleaning agent or anticorrosive to the
mounting surfaces of the wheel bearing and steering
knuckle.
• Install wheel bearing with the wheel sensor rotor rubber
JPDIF0306ZZ
part (C) faced to the steering knuckle inner side.
• The wheel sensor rotor of the wheel bearing must be kept
free of foreign matter.
• The press-fit load must be applied to the wheel bearing outer race and the steering knuckle.
• Do not apply press-fit load to the wheel bearing inner race, the seal (C) on the rubber surface
side (wheel sensor rotor side), and the seal (D) on the metallic surface side. If a press-fit load is
applied, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.
Wheel bearing
press-fit load

: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel
Bearing»

2.

Install snap ring to steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal.
• The snap ring must be installed evenly into the groove.

3.

Press splash guard (1) into the steering knuckle using suitable
tools (A and B).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse splash guard.

JSDIA2728ZZ

4.

Install wheel hub using Tools.
Tool number (A)
Tool number (B)

: ST33061000 (
: ST35321000 (

—
—

)
)

CAUTION:
• Do not apply lubricating oil to the press-fit surface of the
wheel hub bearing.
• Set wheel hub and wheel bearing horizontally and insert
them vertically.
• The press-fit load must be applied to the wheel hub and
JPDIF0284ZZ
the wheel bearing inner race.
• Do not apply press-fit load to the steering knuckle and the wheel bearing, the seal. If a press-fit
load is applied, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.
• Apply a press-fit load and maintain the loaded state for 30 seconds.
• If the inserted wheel hub is removed again, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.
Wheel bearing
press-fit load

Revision: April 2013

: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel
Bearing»

FAX-12

2014 Note

FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541317

A

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage.
• Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing
torque. Refer to FSU-20, «Ball Joint» and FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing».

B

C

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Wheel Hub
• Check wheel hub for cracks (with magnetic exploration or dye testing). Replace if necessary.
Steering Knuckle
• Check steering knuckle for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Replace if any non-standard conditions
are found.

FAX

E

Snap Rings
• Check snap ring for wear or cracks. Replace if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY

F

Check wheel bearing rotating torque as per the following instructions.
NOTE:
The adequacy of turning torque can be judged from a measurement value by a spring balancer.
1. For a proper fit of the bearing, turn the wheel hub clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, 10 times
or more with a press-fit load applied.

G

H

Wheel bearing
press-fit load
2.

: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel
Bearing»
I

Set a spring balance on strut mounting hole (upper). Measure
rotating torque at an rpm of 8 — 12 rpm.
Rotating torque
Spring balance
measurement

• If the turning torque cannot be obtained by the above method,
measure the torque, according to the instructions below.
— Install drive shaft and tighten the hub lock nut to the specified
torque. Rotate the wheel hub to fit properly.
— Set a spring balancer to the hub bolt and measure turning torque
at turning speeds of 8 to 12 rpm.
Rotating torque
Spring balance
measurement

J

: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing».
: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing».

K

SDIA0762J

L

M

: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing»
: Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing»

N

INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
Check wheel sensor rotor for foreign matter. Clean the rotor, if necessary.

O

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Check wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View».
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

FAX-13

2014 Note

P

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009541318

(LH)

JPDIF0266ZZ

1.

Circular clip

2.

Dust shield

3.

Slide joint housing

4.

Snap ring

5.

Spider assembly

6.

Boot band

7.

Boot

8.

Shaft

9.

Damper band

10.

Dynamic damper

11.

Circular clip

12.

Joint sub-assembly

Wheel side

(RH)

JPDIF0269ZZ

1.

Circular clip

2.

Dust shield

3.

Slide joint housing

4.

Snap ring

5.

Spider assembly

6.

Boot band

7.

Boot

8.

Shaft

9.

Damper Band

10.

Dynamic damper

11.

Circular clip

12.

Joint sub-assembly

Wheel side

WHEEL SIDE
Revision: April 2013

FAX-14

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009541319

A

REMOVAL
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
B
Remove the brake caliper torque member bolts, leaving the brake hose attached. Position the brake caliper aside with wire. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
CAUTION:
C
Do not depress the brake pedal while the brake caliper is removed.
Put alignment marks on the disc brake rotor and on the wheel hub. Remove the disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop the disc brake rotor.
FAX
Remove the wheel sensor bolt. Position the wheel sensor and the wheel sensor harness aside. Refer to
BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation».
E
Remove the cotter pin from the drive shaft.
Hold the wheel hub using Tool. Loosen the wheel hub lock nut.
Tool number

7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

: KV4010104000 (

—

F

)

Using a piece of wood and a suitable tool, tap on the wheel hub lock nut to disengage the drive shaft from
the wheel hub.
CAUTION:
• Do not place the drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide
joint.
• Do not allow the drive shaft to hang down without support.
NOTE:
Use a suitable puller if the drive shaft cannot be separated from the wheel hub even after performing the
above procedure.
Remove the wheel hub lock nut.
Remove the nut and bolt from the lower ball joint. Disconnect the steering knuckle from the transverse
link.
Remove the drive shaft from the wheel hub.
Remove the boot bands.
Separate the boot from the joint sub-assembly.
Screw a suitable tool (A) into the joint sub-assembly screw part
to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support the drive shaft
with one hand and pull out the joint sub-assembly from the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align the suitable tool and the drive shaft. Remove the
joint sub-assembly by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If the joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after
removing the drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to FAX22, «Disassembly and Assembly».

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N
JPDIF0258ZZ

14. Remove the circular clip (1) from the shaft.
15. Remove the outer boot from the shaft.

O

P

JPDIF0007ZZ

Revision: April 2013

FAX-15

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper waste.
2. Fill the serration slot on the joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN
genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball
groove become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying the grease, use paper waste to wipe off the
grease that has oozed out.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts
information.
3. Install the outer boot and the boot bands to the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape to protect the
boot from damage.
• Do not reuse the boot.
• Do not reuse the boot bands.
4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft.
5.

6.

JPDIF0008ZZ

Position the circular clip (1) on the groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip.
NOTE:
A drive joint inserter is recommended when installing the circular
clip.
Align the shaft and the joint sub-assembly. Assemble the shaft
with the joint sub-assembly while holding the circular clip.

JPDIF0007ZZ

7.

Install the joint sub-assembly (1) to the shaft using a suitable
tool.
CAUTION:
• Make sure the circular clip is properly positioned on the
groove of the joint sub-assembly.
• Confirm that the joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating the drive shaft.

JPDIF0011ZZ

8.

Apply the specified amount of grease to the inside of the large diameter side of the boot.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Grease amount

Revision: April 2013

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

FAX-16

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
9. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
as shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or the joint sub-assembly, the
boot may come off. Remove all grease from the boot
mounting surfaces.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into
the inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot
and discharging the inside air.

A

B

C
JSDIA2261ZZ

FAX

Boot installation length (L) : Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».
CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of the suitable tool.
11. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the boot bands.
Tool number : KV40107300 (

–

E

F

)

G

H
JPDIF0012ZZ

I

12. Secure the boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification.
Dimension (A)

J

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

13. Attempt to rotate the boot to check whether or not the boot
bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove
the boot bands, reposition the boot, and install new boot bands.

K

L
JPDIF0268ZZ

14. Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION:
Do not apply lubricating oil to these mating surfaces.
15. Clean the mating surfaces of the drive shaft, wheel hub, and
wheel bearing. Apply Molykote M77 lubricant to the surface (A)
of the joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover the entire flat mating surface
of the joint sub-assembly.
Molykote M77 quantity

M

N

O

Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts
JSDIA2844ZZ
information.
16. Install the drive shaft to the wheel hub. Temporarily install, but do not tighten, the wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing.
• Do not allow paint to adhere to the wheel bearing seal.
Revision: April 2013

FAX-17

2014 Note

P

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter,
clean the mating surface.
17. Install the transverse link to the steering knuckle with the nut and bolt. Refer to FSU-10, «Exploded View».
18. Hold the wheel hub using a Tool. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub
lock nut. Do not use a power tool.
• Too much torque causes axle noise. Too little torque causes wheel bearing looseness. Tighten
the wheel hub lock nut to the specification.
Tool number

: KV4010104000 (

—

)

19. Install the cotter pin. Securely bend the cotter pin to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the cotter pin.
20. Install the wheel sensor, the wheel sensor bolt, and the wheel sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation».
21. Align the matching marks on the disc brake rotor and on the wheel hub. Install the disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop the disc brake rotor.
22. Remove the wire from the brake caliper. Install the brake caliper and the brake caliper torque member
bolts. Refer to BR-36, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Do not twist the brake hose.
23. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
24. Complete the inspection. Refer to FAX-18, «Inspection».

TRANSAXLE SIDE
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009541320

Remove boot after drive shaft is removed from the vehicle.
• For drive shaft removal and installation, refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation».
• For drive shaft disassembly and assembly, refer to FAX-22, «Disassembly and Assembly».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541321

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

FAX-18

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009541322

B

C

FAX

AWDIA0951GB

1.

Drive shaft

2.

Cotter pin

A.

Removal and Installation

E

Apply Molykote M77
INFOID:0000000009541323

NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes, lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

F

G

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, «FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation».
Remove brake lock plate from strut.
Remove brake caliper using power tool, leaving brake hose connected. Reposition brake caliper aside
with wire. Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
NOTE:
Do not depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Put matching marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub, then remove disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
• Put matching marks on the wheel hub and the disc brake rotor before removing the disc brake
rotor.
• Do not drop disc brake rotor.
Remove and discard cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number

: KV40104000 (

—

)

H

I

J

K

L

M

7.

Separate the drive shaft from the wheel hub by lightly tapping the end of the drive shaft using a suitable
tool and a wood block.
CAUTION:
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Do not allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the
other parts.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller if wheel hub and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut.
9. Remove the nuts and bolts, then separate the steering knuckle from strut. Refer to FSU-9, «Exploded
View».
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-19

2014 Note

N

O

P

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
11. Insert the Tool (A) between the drive shaft and the transaxle.
Insert the suitable tool (B) to the Tool (A). Remove the drive
shaft from the transaxle.
Tool number

: KV40107500 (

—

)

CAUTION:
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when
removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend
slide joint.
• Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft.
12. Remove the differential side oil seal. Refer to TM-17, «Removal
and Installation» (5MT:RS5F91R), or TM-243, «Removal and Installation» (CVT:RE0F11A).

JPDIF0004ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Transaxle Side
• Install a new differential side oil seal. Refer to TM-17, «Removal and Installation» (5MT:RS5F91R), or TM243, «Removal and Installation» (CVT:RE0F11A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the differential side oil seal.
• Place the Tool (A) onto transaxle to prevent damage to the oil seal
while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap
with a hammer to install securely.

Tool number

: KV38107900 (

—

)

CAUTION:
• Check that circular clip is completely engaged.
• Check the transaxle fluid level. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection» (5MT), or TM-224, «Inspection» (CVT).
JPDIF0023ZZ

Wheel Hub Side
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing with a new
one.
• Do not allow paint to adhere to the wheel bearing seal.
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter, clean
the mating surface.
• Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION:
Do not apply lubricating oil to the mating surface of the wheel hub lock nut and the wheel hub.
• Clean the mating surfaces of drive shaft, wheel hub, and wheel
bearing. Apply Molykote M77 to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover entire flat surface of joint subassembly.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Molykote M77 quantity

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive
Shaft».

JSDIA2844ZZ

When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the cotter pin to prevent
rattles.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse cotter pin.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-20

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

A

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009541324

B

(LH)
C

FAX

E

F

G

JPDIF0266ZZ

1.

Circular clip

2.

Dust shield

3.

Slide joint housing

4.

Snap ring

5.

Spider assembly

6.

Boot band

7.

Boot

8.

Shaft

9.

Damper band

10.

Dynamic damper

11.

Circular clip

12.

Joint sub-assembly

H

I

Wheel side

J

(RH)
K

L

M

N

O
JPDIF0269ZZ

1.

Circular clip

2.

Dust shield

3.

Slide joint housing

4.

Snap ring

5.

Spider assembly

6.

Boot band

7.

Boot

8.

Shaft

9.

Damper Band

10.

Dynamic damper

11.

Circular clip

12.

Joint sub-assembly

P

Wheel side

Revision: April 2013

FAX-21

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009541325

DISASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE)
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, always use aluminum or copper plates between the vise
and the drive shaft.
Remove the boot bands and slide the boot back.
Screw a suitable tool (A) into the joint sub-assembly screw part
to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support the drive shaft
with one hand and pull out the joint sub-assembly from the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align the suitable tool and the drive shaft. Remove the
joint sub-assembly by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more attempts, replace the shaft and the joint sub-assembly as a set.
Remove the circular clip from the shaft.
JPDIG0151ZZ
Remove the outer boot from the shaft.
Inspect the components. Refer to FAX-8, «Inspection».

DISASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE)
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, always use aluminum or copper plates between the vise
and the drive shaft.
Remove the boot bands and slide the boot back.
Put matching marks on the slide joint housing and on the shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Do not scratch the surfaces.
Remove the slide joint housing from the shaft.
Put matching marks (A) on the spider assembly and on the
shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Do not
scratch the surfaces.

JPDIF0006ZZ

6.
7.
8.

Remove the snap ring (1).
Remove the spider assembly from the shaft.
Remove the inner boot from the shaft.

JPDIF0014ZZ

9.

Remove the dust shield from the slide joint housing.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-22

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
10. Remove the circular clip from the slide joint housing.
11. Clean the old grease from the slide joint housing with paper waste.
12. Remove the damper bands.
13. Remove the dynamic damper from the shaft.
14. Inspect the components. Refer to FAX-8, «Inspection».

A

B

ASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE)
1.
2.

Clean the old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper waste.
Fill the serration slot on the joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN
genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball
groove become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying the grease, use paper waste to wipe off the
grease that has oozed out.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts
information.

C

FAX

E

F
JPDIF0008ZZ

3.

4.

Install the outer boot and the boot bands to the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape (A) to protect the
boot from damage.
• Do not reuse the boot.
• Do not reuse the boot bands.
Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft.

G

H

I

JPDIF0009ZZ

5.

6.

Position the circular clip (1) on the groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip.
NOTE:
A drive joint inserter is recommended when installing the circular
clip.
Align the shaft and the joint sub-assembly. Assemble the shaft
with the joint sub-assembly while holding the circular clip.

J

K

L

M
JPDIF0305ZZ

7.

N

Install the joint sub-assembly to the shaft using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Make sure the circular clip is properly positioned on the
groove of the joint sub-assembly.
• Confirm that the joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating the drive shaft.

O

P

RAC0049D

8.

Apply the specified amount of grease to the inside of the large diameter side of the boot.
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

FAX-23

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Grease amount

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

9.

Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
as shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or the joint sub-assembly, the
boot may come off. Remove all grease from the boot
mounting surfaces.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into
the inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot
and discharging the inside air.
Boot installation length (L)

JSDIA2261ZZ

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of the suitable tool.
11. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the boot bands.
Tool number

: KV40107300 (

–

)

JPDIF0012ZZ

12. Secure the boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification.
Dimension (A) : Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».
13. Attempt to rotate the boot to check whether or not the boot
bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove
the boot bands, reposition the boot, and install new boot bands.

JPDIF0268ZZ

ASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE)
1.
a.

Install the dynamic damper using the following procedure:
Install the dynamic damper to the shaft.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-24

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
b. Secure the dynamic damper in the correct position with new
damper bands.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the damper bands.
Dimension (A)

A

B

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

C
JPDIF0178ZZ

2.

3.

FAX

Install the inner boot and the boot bands to the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape (A) to protect the
boot from damage.
• Do not reuse the boot.
• Do not reuse the boot bands.
Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft.

E

F

G
JPDIF0009ZZ

4.

Align the matching mark (A) on the spider assembly (1) with the
matching mark on the shaft (2). Install the spider assembly to
the shaft with the chamfer (B) facing the shaft.

H

I

J

JPDIF0017ZZ

5.
6.

7.

Secure the spider assembly onto the shaft with the snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the snap ring.
Apply the appropriate amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN
Grease or equivalent) to the spider assembly and to the sliding
surface.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts
information.
Install the slide joint housing onto the spider assembly and pack
the balance of the specified amount grease (Genuine NISSAN
Grease or equivalent) into the slide joint housing.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Grease amount

8.

L

M

N
JPDIF0014ZZ

O

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

P

Align the matching marks on the slide joint housing and on the shaft.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-25

K

2014 Note

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
9. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
as shown.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or the joint sub-assembly, the
boot may come off. Remove all grease from the boot
mounting surfaces.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into
the inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot
and discharging the inside air.
Boot installation length (L)

JSDIA2063ZZ

: Refer to FAX-27, «Drive Shaft».

CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of the suitable tool.
11. Install the boot bands securely.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the boot bands.
a. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes for temporary installation.
NOTE:
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at
first.
b. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band.

JPDIF0157ZZ

c.

Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked with
dotted circle) as shown.
12. Attempt to rotate the boot to check whether or not the boot
bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove
the boot bands, reposition the boot, and install new boot bands.

JPDIF0158ZZ

13. Install the dust shield to the slide joint housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the dust shield.
14. Install the circular clip to the slide joint housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip.

Revision: April 2013

FAX-26

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing

INFOID:0000000009541326

Item

Standard

C

Axial end play

0.0 mm (0.0 in)

Rotating torque

1.9 N·m (0.19 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less

Spring balance measurement

13.7 N (1.40 kg-f, 3.08 lb-f) or less

Wheel bearing press-fit load

49 kN (4,998.0 kg-f, 11,015.2 lb-f)

Drive Shaft

B

FAX

INFOID:0000000009541327

E

Drive Shaft Specifications
F

G

H

I
ALDIA0269ZZ

Application
Joint type

M/T
Wheel side
(RH)

(LH)

90 — 100 g
(3.17 — 3.53 oz)

Boot installed length (L)

J

Transaxle side

(LH)

Grease quantity*

(RH)
141.1- 157.1 g
(4.98 — 5.54 oz)

135.5 mm (5.33 in)

Molykote M77*

K

154 mm (6.06 in)
1.0 — 3.0 g (0.04 — 0.10 oz)

Application
Joint type

ALDIA0268ZZ

L

CVT
Wheel side

Transaxle side

(LH)

Grease quantity*
Boot installed length (L)
Molykote M77*

(RH)

(LH)

(RH)

90 — 100 g
(3.17 — 3.53 oz)

132.7 — 148.7 g
(4.68 — 5.25 oz)

136.8 mm (5.39 in)

145.5 mm (5.73 in)

M

N

1.0 — 3.0 g (0.04 — 0.10 oz)

*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

O

Dynamic Damper Specifications
P

Revision: April 2013

FAX-27

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Unit: mm (in)

ALDIA0270ZZ

M/T

Application
Dimension (A)

CVT

(LH)

(RH)

(LH)

(RH)

240 ± 3 (9.45 ± 0.1)

457 ± 3 (17.99 ± 0.1)

242.9 ± 3 (9.56 ± 0.1)

457 ± 3 (17.99 ± 0.1)

Dimension (B)

70 (2.76)

Boot Band Specification
Unit: mm (in)

JPDIF0268ZZ

Dimension (A) — maximum

Revision: April 2013

7.0 (0.28)

FAX-28

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

FL

FUEL SYSTEM

A

FL

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

Removal and Installation …………………………………… 6
Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 9

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
General Precaution …………………………………………… 2

FUEL TANK ……………………………………………… 10

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4

EVAP CANISTER ………………………………………. 14

Exploded View …………………………………………………10
Removal and Installation …………………………………..10
Inspection ……………………………………………………….13
Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14
Inspection ……………………………………………………….15

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 5
FUEL SYSTEM ……………………………………………. 5
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 5
Quick Connector ………………………………………………. 5

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ………….. 16
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT ……………………… 16
Exploded View …………………………………………………16
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….16

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 6

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 18

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER
AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY …………………….. 6

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 18

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 6

Fuel Tank ………………………………………………………..18

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009405641

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

General Precaution

INFOID:0000000009405642

WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following.
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area.
• Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
— Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
— Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
— Disconnect the battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones.
• Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed.
• Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp end
is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end.
Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber
hose clamps.
Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts.

MMA104A

Revision: April 2013

FL-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure
the quick connectors are secure.
Check that the connector and resin tube do not contact any
adjacent parts.
— a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel system by turning the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then check for
fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections.
— b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel
leaks at the fuel tube connections.
• After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel
leaks at the connections.
• Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If
an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
• For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to
EC-336, «Inspection».

A

FL

C

D

E

F

G
PBIC0199E

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009445831

The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV10119900
(J-45722)
Lock ring wrench

Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring

JPBIA3555ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009445832

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

FL-4

2014 Note

FUEL SYSTEM
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

FUEL SYSTEM
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009405643

Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap, and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
(A)

: Engine

(B)

: Fuel line

(C)

: Fuel tank

FL

C

D

If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.

E
JPBIA0129ZZ

Quick Connector

INFOID:0000000009405644

CAUTION:
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs (F)
are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than necessary.
(B)

G

H

: Connection (cross-section)

(D)

: To under floor fuel line

(E)

: To fuel tank

(G)

: Disconnection

F

I

• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
• Keep resin tube (C) away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the resin tube.
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from getting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and disconnection.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or the
equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is replaced.
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is replaced,
also replace retainer with new one.

J

K

L

M
JPBIA0130ZZ

N

• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage
and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic
bags (A) or something similar.

O

P

JPBIA0135ZZ

Revision: April 2013

FL-5

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009445833

ALBIA1129ZZ

1. Lock ring

2.

Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly 3.

O-ring

4. Fuel tank

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445834

WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, «General Precaution».
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Open fuel filler lid.
Open fuel filler cap and release the pressure inside fuel tank.
Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
Remove the inspection hole cover.
NOTE:
Inspection hole cover is held down by an adhesive.
Disconnect the harness connector (B), fuel feed tube (C) and
EVAP tube (A).
: Front

ALBIA1150ZZ

Revision: April 2013

FL-6

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Remove the quick connector as follows:
• Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs (B) and pull (A)
out the tube.
• If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.

A

FL

C
JPBIA0134ZZ

D

CAUTION:
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs
(F) are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than
necessary.
(B)

: Connection (cross-section)

(D)

: To under floor fuel line

(E)

: To fuel tank

(G)

: Disconnection

E

F

G

• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
• Keep resin tube (C) away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the resin tube.
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
getting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and disconnection.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or
the equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is
replaced.
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is
replaced, also replace retainer with new one.

H

I

J

K
JPBIA0130ZZ

• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags (A) or something similar.

L

M

N

JPBIA0135ZZ

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-7

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
8. Remove lock ring for fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel
pump assembly using Tool (A) by turning counterclockwise.
Tool number

: KV10119900 (J-45722)

ALBIA1059ZZ

9.

Remove fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not bend float arm during removal.
• Do not allow contaminants to fall inside of the fuel tank.
• Do not cause impacts such by dropping when handling components.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with
the fuel feed tube (C) facing the front of the vehicle as shown. Use
a new O-ring.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
: Front
(A)

: EVAP tube

(B)

: Harness connector
ALBIA1150ZZ

• Connect the quick connector as follows:
— Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
— Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight
into the tube until a click is heard.
• After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by
performing the following checks:
— Pull (A) the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.

JPBIA0140ZZ

Revision: April 2013

FL-8

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
— Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs (F) are connected to the
quick connector (1).
(B)

: Connection (cross-section)

(C)

: Resin tube

(D)

: To under floor fuel line

(E)

: To fuel tank

(G)

: Disconnection

A

FL

C

D

E

F

G
JPBIA0130ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009445835

H

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying
fuel pressure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-9

2014 Note

FUEL TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FUEL TANK
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009445836

AWBIA1594ZZ

1.

Fuel tank

2.

Fuel tank mounting band (RH)

3.

Fuel tank mounting band (LH)

4.

Clamp

5.

Fuel filler hose

6.

Fuel filler tube

7.

Grommet

8.

Fuel filler cap

9.

Clamp

11.

EVAP vent line

10. Vent hose

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445837

WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, «General Precaution».
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.

a.
b.

2.

Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel
gauge indicates more than the level as shown (1/2 full), drain
the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at
or below as shown (1/2 full).
• In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure.
Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube.
Insert fuel tubing of less than 20 mm (0.79 in) diameter into the
fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the
fuel filler tube.
• As a guide, if the fuel tank is full the fuel level reaches or is
less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approximately 20-1/2
(5-3/8 US gal, 4-1/2 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank.
Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, «Work Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

FL-10

ALBIA1130ZZ

2014 Note

FUEL TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Open fuel filler lid.
4. Open fuel filler cap and release the pressure inside fuel tank.
5. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
6. Remove the inspection hole cover.
NOTE:
Inspection hole cover is held by an adhesive.
7. Disconnect the harness connector (B), fuel feed tube (C) and
EVAP tube (A).

A

FL

C

: Front

D

E

ALBIA1150ZZ

Remove the quick connector as follows:
• Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs (B) and pull (A)
out the tube.
• If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.

F

G

H

I
JPBIA0134ZZ

J

CAUTION:
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs
(F) are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than
necessary.
(B)

: Connection (cross-section)

(D)

: To under floor fuel line

(E)

: To fuel tank

(G)

: Disconnection

K

L

• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
• Keep resin tube (C) away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the resin tube.
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
getting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and disconnection.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or
the equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is
replaced.
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is
replaced, also replace retainer with new one.
Retainer color

Revision: April 2013

: Blue

M

N

O

P

JPBIA0130ZZ

FL-11

2014 Note

FUEL TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags (A) or something similar.

JPBIA0135ZZ

8.
9.

Remove center muffler. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».
Remove nut (A) and remove center floor insulators.

ALBIA1147ZZ

10. Disconnect the rear park brake cable brackets (LH). Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
11. Disconnect fuel filler hose (2) at fuel filler tube (1) side.
12. Disconnect vent hose (3) from fuel tank side.

JPBIA3423ZZ

13. Support the center part of fuel tank (1) using a suitable jack (A).

JPBIA3424ZZ

14. Remove fuel tank mounting bands (LH/RH).
15. Lower suitable jack carefully to remove fuel tank while holding it by hand.
CAUTION:
Fuel tank may be in an unstable condition because of the shape of fuel tank bottom. Be sure to
hold tank securely.
16. If replacing the fuel tank, remove the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly to transfer to
the new fuel tank.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

FL-12

2014 Note

FUEL TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Do not reuse O-ring.
A

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Fuel Filler Hose
• Insert fuel filler hose to the length below.

Fuel filler hose
The other hose

FL

: 35 mm (1.38 in)
: 25 mm (0.98 in)

C

• Be sure hose clamp is not placed on swelled area of fuel filler tube.
• Install fuel filler hose to fuel tank, paying attention to install mark.

D

EVAP Hose

1.
2.

Check connections for damage or foreign material.
Align the matching side connection part with the center of shaft, and insert connector straight until a «click»
sound is heard.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009445838

E

F

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying
fuel pressure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-13

2014 Note

EVAP CANISTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

EVAP CANISTER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009445839

ALBIA0765ZZ

1.

EVAP breather valve

2.

EVAP canister drain hose

3.

EVAP canister hose

4.

EVAP hose

5.

EVAP canister assembly

A.

To EVAP control hose

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445840

NOTE:
The EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP canister system pressure sensor can be removed without
removing the EVAP canister.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove battery. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove the TCM (if equipped). Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the battery tray.
Remove IPDM E/R bracket, IPDM E/R and position aside. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Remove EVAP canister cover.
Disconnect EVAP canister purge hose, EVAP canister hose and Evap hose from the EVAP canister.

Revision: April 2013

FL-14

2014 Note

EVAP CANISTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Remove the EVAP canister.
A

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.

INFOID:0000000009634426

Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Check EVAP canister as follows:
Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port .
Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port .
Visually inspect the fuel check valve for cracks, damage, loose
connections chafing and deterioration.

FL

C

D

E

F
JMBIA0443ZZ

4.
a.
b.
c.

Check fuel check valve as follows:
Blow air through connector on the fuel tank side. A considerable
resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow should be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side. Air flow
should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
If fuel check valve is suspected or not properly functioning in
step 1 and 2 above, replace it.

G

H

I

JSBIA0080GB

5.
a.

Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc.
Wipe clean valve housing.

J

K

L

M
SEF989X

b.

Pressure:
Vacuum:

c.

N

Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
15.3 — 20.0 kPa (0.153 — 0.200 bar, 0.156 — 0.204 kg/

O

cm2, 2.22 — 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)

P

If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.

SEF943S

Revision: April 2013

FL-15

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009486654

Fuel Level Sensor Unit

ALBIA1152ZZ

1. Fuel filter and pump assembly

2. Float arm assembly 3. Fuel level sensor unit

4. Fuel level sensor unit sensor harness connector

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009486655

DISASSEMBLY
1.

Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector (1).
NOTE:
Hold connector with your fingers, because there is no tab for
releasing stopper. Pull it out straight downward.

ALBIA1153ZZ

Revision: April 2013

FL-16

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
2.

Using a suitable tool push tab (A) in the driection ( ) shown
and remove fuel level sensor unit (2) from fuel filter and fuel
pump assembly (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor unit.
• Do not disassemble fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.

A

FL

C
ALBIA1154ZZ

D

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

Check for damage of fuel level sensor unit installation position on the side of fuel filter and pump assembly.
Slide fuel level sensor unit until it aligns to installation groove, then insert it until it stops.
• After inserting, apply force in reverse direction (removal direction) to ensure it cannot be pulled out.
Connect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.

E

F

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying
fuel pressure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FL-17

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Tank

INFOID:0000000009445850

Standard and Limit
Unit:

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 41.0

Fuel recommendation

Revision: April 2013

(US gal, lmp gal)

(10-7/8 US gal, 9.0 Imp gal)
Refer to MA-12

FL-18

2014 Note

SUSPENSION

SECTION

FSU

FRONT SUSPENSION

A

B

C

D

FSU

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

TRANSVERSE LINK ………………………………….. 10

F

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

Exploded View …………………………………………………10
Removal and Installation …………………………………..10
Inspection ……………………………………………………….10

G

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover…… 2
Precaution for Suspension …………………………………. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 3

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 5
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 5

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 6
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ………………. 6
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 6

WHEEL ALIGNMENT …………………………………… 7
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 7
Adjustment ………………………………………………………. 8

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 9
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ……………… 9
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 9
Removal and Installation ……………………………………. 9

FRONT STABILIZER …………………………………. 12
Exploded View …………………………………………………12
Removal and Installation …………………………………..12
Inspection ……………………………………………………….13

H

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …… 14

I

FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ………………… 14
Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14
Inspection ……………………………………………………….15

J

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 16

K

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ……………. 16
Exploded View …………………………………………………16
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….16
Inspection ……………………………………………………….18
Disposal ………………………………………………………….19

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 20
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 20
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ……………………………20
Ball Joint …………………………………………………………20
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) …………………………….21

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009578923

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009578924

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precaution for Suspension

INFOID:0000000009578925

• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
— Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,
tighten as they are.
• When jacking up the vehicle with a floor jack, do not hang the jack on the torque rod.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009578926

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

–
(J-44372)
Pull Gauge

Measuring ball joint swinging force

C

D

FSU
LST024

ST35652000
(
—
)
Strut attachment

Disassembling and assembling strut

F

G

H
ZZA0807D

KV10106700
(
—
)
Drift

Disassembling and assembling strut
mount bearing
a: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
b: 18.5 mm (0.728 in) dia.

I

J
ZZA0534D

—
(J-49286)
Drift and pull gauge

Measuring drift and pull

K

L

M

AWEIA0156ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009578927

N
Tool name

Description

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Spring compressor

Removing and installing coil spring

S-NT717

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

FSU-4

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009578928

B

Bushing or mount deterioration

Parts interference

×

×

×

×

Shake

×

×

×

×

Vibration

×

×

×

×

Shimmy

×

×

×

×

Shudder

×

×

×

Poor quality ride or
handling

×

×

×

ST-7

BR-7

FAX-6

WT-4

WT-5

FAX-6

FSU-13

FSU-7

FSU-7, FSU-13, FSU-15, FSU-18

FSU-18

C

D

FSU

F

G

FRONT AXLE

TIRE

ROAD WHEEL

DRIVE SHAFT

BRAKE

STEERING

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Stabilizer bar fatigue

Suspension looseness

×

Incorrect wheel alignment

H

Spring fatigue

FRONT SUSPENSION

—

Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection

Noise

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Symptom

—

Improper installation, looseness

Reference

FSU-18

FSU-6, FSU-7, FSU-15, FSU-18

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

×
×

×

×

×

I

×

×

×: Applicable

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-5

2014 Note

FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009578929

COMPONENT PART
Check the mount conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component. Verify the component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
Ball Joint Axial End Play

1.
2.

Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position.
Hold the axle side of the transverse link, and check the axial end
play by move the transverse link up and down.
Axial end play

: Refer to FSU-20, «Ball Joint».

CAUTION:
• Do not depress the brake pedal when measuring.
• Do not perform this inspection with the tires on the
ground.
• Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Do not damage
the components by applying excessive force.
JSEIA0444ZZ

STRUT ASSEMBLY
Check for oil leaks or damage. Replace the parts if necessary.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-6

2014 Note

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

WHEEL ALIGNMENT

A

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009578930

PRELIMINARY INSPECTION

B

WARNING:
Always adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE:
C
If the wheel alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts
before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. “Unladen conditions” D
means that the fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in
designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear.
FSU
3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to WT-4, «Inspection».
4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-27, «Wheel Bearing».
5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage.
F
6. Check each mount point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage.
7. Check each link, arm, and the suspension member for any damage.
G
8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to FSU-21, «Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)».

GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1.

2.

A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
• This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
• The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel
is centered.
• The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
• The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
• Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
• Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.

I

J

K

ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to FSU-21,
«Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)».
• When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators.
— The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may
not be correct.
— This may result in an ERROR.
• Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with «Rolling Compensation» method and optional
«Jacking Compensation» method to «compensate» the alignment targets or head units.
«Rolling Compensation» is the preferred method.
— If using the «Rolling Compensation» method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull
on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body.
— If using the «Jacking Compensation» method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn in either direction.
NOTE:
Do not use the «Rolling Compensation» method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment.
• Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you’re using for more information.

CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES INSPECTION
• Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted.
• Before inspection, set the front wheels onto a turning radius gauge. Set the rear wheels onto a pad that has
the same height so the vehicle will remain horizontal.

TOTAL TOE-IN INSPECTION
Measure the total toe-in using the following procedure.
Revision: April 2013

H

FSU-7

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push on the rear wheel to move the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of each tire at the
same height of hub center. These are measuring points.

AFA050

4.
5.

6.

Measure the distance (A) from the rear side.
Push on the rear wheel to move the vehicle slowly ahead and to
rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn),
try the above procedure again from the beginning. Do not
push vehicle backward.
Measure the distance (B) from the front side.

SFA234AC

7.

Use the formula below to calculate total toe-in.
Total toe-in
Total toe-in specification

:A-B
: Refer to FSU-20, «Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)».

• If the total toe-in is outside the specification, adjust the total toe-in. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009578931

TOTAL TOE-IN
Loosen the steering outer socket. Adjust the length using the steering inner socket.
Toe-in

: Refer to FSU-20, «Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)».

CAUTION:
• Always evenly adjust toe-in alternately and adjust the difference between the left and right to the
standard.
• Always hold the steering inner socket when tightening the steering outer socket.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-8

2014 Note

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009578932

B

C

D

FSU

F

G
JPEIA0261GB

1.

Strut

2.

Coil spring

3.

4.

Spring upper seat

7.

Strut mount insulator

5.

Strut mount bearing

6.

Piston rod lock nut

8.

Stopper insulator

9.

Stopper insulator lock nut

H

Bound bumper

Removal and Installation

I

INFOID:0000000009578933

J

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove brake hose lock plate from strut.
Disconnect stabilizer connecting rod from strut. Refer to FSU-12, «Exploded View».
Remove strut bolts and nuts from steering knuckle.
Remove stopper insulator lock nut and stopper insulator.
Remove strut.

K

L

M

N

WEIA0179E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Secure the head of strut piston rod to keep it from rotating, then tighten the stopper insulator lock nut to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse stopper insulator lock nut.
• Do not reuse the nuts that secure the strut to the steering knuckle.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-18, «Inspection».
• After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the strut. Refer to FSU-19, «Disposal».
Revision: April 2013

FSU-9

2014 Note

O

P

TRANSVERSE LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

TRANSVERSE LINK
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009578934

AWEIA0210GB

1.

Front suspension member

2.

Transverse link

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645134

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove transverse link from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-10, «Exploded View».
Remove the bolts and nut, then remove the transverse link from front suspension member.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the transverse link nuts.
Perform the final tightening of the nuts and bolts under unladen conditions with tires on level ground.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009645135

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items and replace the components as necessary.
Transverse link
• Check the transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.
• Check the ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage.
Swing Torque

1.

Move the ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement with no binding.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-10

2014 Note

TRANSVERSE LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Hook the Tool (A) on the ball joint (B). Confirm the measurement
value is within specifications when the ball stud begins moving.
Tool number

:

—

A

(J-44372)
B

Swing torque
Rotating torque

: Refer to FSU-20, «Ball Joint».
: Refer to FSU-20, «Ball Joint».
C

If swing torque or rotating torque exceeds the specified range,
replace transverse link.
JPEIA0138ZZ

D

Axial End Play

1.
2.

Move the ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement with no binding.
Move the tip of the ball joint in the axial direction to check for looseness.
Axial end play

FSU

: Refer to FSU-20, «Ball Joint».

If the axial end play exceeds the specified range, replace transverse link.

F

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».
G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-11

2014 Note

FRONT STABILIZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT STABILIZER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009578936

JPEIA0272GB

1.

Stabilizer bar

2.

Stabilizer clamp

3.

Stabilizer bushing

4.

Stabilizer connecting rod

5.

Strut

6.

Front suspension member

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645136

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the nuts, then separate the stabilizer connecting rod from the stabilizer bar.
Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-14, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the stabilizer clamp bolts, stabilizer clamps and stabilizer bushings from front suspension member.
Remove stabilizer bar.

WEIA0182E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-12

2014 Note

FRONT STABILIZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Install the stabilizer bushing with the slit (A) facing the rear of the
vehicle.
: Rear

A

B

C
JPEIA0273ZZ

D

• To install stabilizer clamp bolt, temporarily tighten them in numerical order as shown, then tighten them to the specified torque.
Refer to FSU-12, «Exploded View».
: Front

FSU

F

G
JPEIA0274ZZ

H

• To connect the stabilizer connecting rod (1), tighten the nut while
holding the hexagonal part (A) on the stabilizer connecting rod.

I

J

K
JPEIA0252ZZ

• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts with the vehicle under unladen conditions with tires on level
ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-13, «Inspection».

Inspection

L

INFOID:0000000009645137

M

Check the stabilizer bar, the stabilizer connecting rod, the stabilizer bushing, and the stabilizer clamp for deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace components if necessary.

N

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-13

2014 Note

FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009645138

AWEIA0210GB

1.

Front suspension member

2.

Transverse link

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645139

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect steering outer sockets from steering knuckles. Refer to ST-14, «Exploded View».
Disconnect transverse links from steering knuckle. Refer toFSU-10, «Exploded View».
Disconnect stabilizer connecting rods from stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-12, «Exploded View».
Disconnect the lower joint from the steering gear. Refer to ST-12, «Exploded View».
Set suitable jack under front suspension member.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front suspension member with suitable jack.
Remove the engine rear torque rod. Refer to EM-85, «Exploded View».
Remove suspension member bolts.
Gradually lower the jack to remove front suspension member from vehicle body.
If necessary, remove steering gear from front suspension member. Refer to ST-14, «Removal and Installation».
If necessary, remove transverse links. Refer to FSU-10, «Exploded View».
If necessary, remove stabilizer bar, stabilizer bar clamps, and stabilizer bushings. Refer to FSU-12,
«Exploded View».
Inspect the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, «Inspection».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-14

2014 Note

FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Install the member stay bolts, the upper link bolts, and the front
suspension member bolts in the order of 1-6 as shown.
: Front

A

B

C
AWEIA0211ZZ

D

• After installation, perform the final tightening of each part under unladen conditions with tires on level
ground.
• Complete the inspection. FSU-15, «Inspection»
FSU

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009645140

F

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the front suspension member for cracks, wear or damage. Replace components if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.

G

Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».
H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-15

2014 Note

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009578941

JPEIA0261GB

1.

Strut

2.

Coil spring

3.

Bound bumper

4.
7.

Spring upper seat

5.

Strut mount bearing

6.

Piston rod lock nut

Strut mount insulator

8.

Stopper insulator

9.

Stopper insulator lock nut

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009578942

DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not damage strut piston rod when removing components from strut.
1. Remove strut mount insulator.
2. Install Tool (A) to the front coil spring and strut.
CAUTION:
When installing Tool (A), wrap a shop cloth around the front
coil spring and strut to protect the parts from damage.
Tool number
3.

: ST35652000 (

—

)

Secure Tool (A) in a vise.

JPEIA0006ZZ

4.

Slightly loosen the piston rod lock nut.
WARNING:
Do not remove the piston rod lock nut completely. If the piston rod lock nut is removed completely, the coil spring can jump out and may cause serious damage or injury.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-16

2014 Note

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
5. Compress coil spring using a suitable tool (A).
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the suitable tool are firmly
hooked on the coil spring. The suitable tool must be tightened alternately so as to not tilt the coil spring.

A

B

C
JPEIA0007ZZ

D
Make sure the coil spring is free between the spring upper seat and the strut.
Hold the piston rod and remove the piston rod lock nut.
FSU
Remove strut mount bearing, spring upper seat, and bound bumper as a set.
Remove bound bumper from spring upper seat.
Gradually release the suitable tool and remove the coil spring.
F
CAUTION:
Release the suitable tool while making sure the position of the suitable tool on the coil spring
does not move.
11. Remove the Tool from strut.
G

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Tool number

: ST35652000 (

—

)
H

12. If necessary, remove strut mount bearing (1) from spring upper
seat (2), using a Tool (A).
Tool number

: KV10106700 (

—

)

I

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the strut mount bearing unless damage
exists.
13. Inspect the components. Refer to FSU-18, «Inspection».

J

JPEIA0228ZZ

K

ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not damage the piston rod when removing components from the front coil spring and strut.
1. Install Tool (A) to the front coil spring and strut.
CAUTION:
When installing Tool (A), wrap a shop cloth around the front
coil spring and strut to protect the parts from damage.
Tool number
2.

L

M

N

: ST35652000

Secure Tool (A) in a vise.
O
JPEIA0006ZZ

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-17

2014 Note

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
3. Compress coil spring using a suitable tool (A).
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the suitable tool are firmly
hooked on the coil spring. The suitable tool must be tightened alternately so as to not tilt the coil spring.

JPEIA0007ZZ

CAUTION:
Face tube side of coil spring (1) downward. Align the lower
end to lower seat (2).
Maximum gap (A)

:5 mm (0.2 in)

JPEIA0095ZZ

4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

9.

Apply soapy water to bound bumper.
CAUTION:
Do not use machine oil.
Insert bound bumper into spring upper seat.
Install strut mount bearing, spring upper seat, and bound bumper as a set.
CAUTION:
Do not apply oil, such as grease, when installing the strut mount bearing.
Secure piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, then install piston rod lock nut and tighten to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston rod lock nut.
Gradually release the suitable tool, and remove the suitable tool from the coil spring.
CAUTION:
Release the suitable tool while making sure the position of the suitable tool on the coil spring
does not move.
Remove the Tool (A) from the vise.
Tool number

: ST35652000 (

—

)

10. Remove Tool (A) from the front coil spring and strut.
11. Install strut mount insulator.
12. After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to
discard the old strut. Refer to FSU-19, «Disposal».

JPEIA0006ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009645141

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items and replace the parts if necessary.
Strut
• Check the strut for oil leaks, deformation, cracks, or damage.

Revision: April 2013

FSU-18

2014 Note

FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Check the piston rod for damage, uneven wear, or distortion.
A

Strut Mount Insulator and bound bumper
Check the strut mount insulator and the bound bumper for cracks, wear, or damage.
Coil Spring
Check the coil spring for cracks, wear, or damage.

B

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Disposal

INFOID:0000000009578944

1.

Set the strut horizontally with the piston rod fully extended.

2.

Drill a 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top
as shown to release gas gradually.
CAUTION:
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.
• Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas.
NOTE:
• Drill vertically in this direction ( ).
• Drill directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets.
• The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless.
(A)

3.

C

Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».

D

FSU

F

G

JPEIA0160ZZ

H

: 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in)

Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times.
CAUTION:
Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-19

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)

Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

INFOID:0000000009578945

Minimum

−0° 50′ (−0.83°)

Nominal

−0° 05′ (−0.08°)

Maximum

0° 40′ (0.67°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2

Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum

3° 00′ (3.00°)

Nominal

3° 45′ (3.75°)

Maximum

4° 30′ (4.50°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

–0° 45′ (–0.75°) — 0° 45′ (0.75°)

–0° 45′ (–0.75°) — 0° 45′ (0.75°)

Minimum

11° 00′ (11.00°)

Nominal

11° 45′ (11.75°)

Maximum

12° 30′ (12.50°)

SFA234AC

Minimum
Distance (A — B)
Total toe-in
Angle (LH and RH)
Degree minute
(Decimal degree)

0 mm (0.00 in)

Nominal

In 1 mm (In 0.04 in)

Maximum

In 2 mm (In 0.08 in)

Minimum

0° 00′ 00″ (0.00°)

Nominal

In 0° 03′ 00″ (In 0.05°)

Maximum

In 0° 06′ 00″ (In 0.10°)

*1: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
*2: The difference when assuming the (LH) side is the standard.

Ball Joint
Swing torque

INFOID:0000000009578946

0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.05 – 0.35 kg-m, 4 – 30 in-lb)

Rotating torque

15.4 – 104.7 N (1.6 – 10.7 kg-f, 3.5 – 23.5 lb-f)

Axial end play

.01 mm (0.004 in)

Revision: April 2013

FSU-20

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)

INFOID:0000000009578947

A
Unit: mm (in)

B

C

D
LEIA0085E

Tire size

185/65R15

195/55R16

Front (Hf)

690 (27.17)

687 (27.05)

Rear (Hr)

679 (26.73)

678 (26.69)

*: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.

FSU

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

FSU-21

2014 Note

Edition: April 2013
Revision: April 2013
Pub. No. SM14E00E12X0

QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
A GENERAL INFORMATION
A
B ENGINE

GI
EM
LU
CO
EC
FL
EX
STR
ACC

General Information
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication System
Engine Cooling System
Engine Control System
Fuel System
Exhaust System
Starting System
Accelerator Control System

CL
TM
DLN
FAX
RAX
FSU
RSU
SCS
WT
BR
PB
BRC
ST
STC
SB
SBC
SRS
SRC
VTL
HA
HAC
INT
IP
SE
ADP
DLK
SEC
GW
PWC
RF
EXT
BRM
MIR
EXL
INL
WW
DEF
HRN
PWO
BCS
LAN
PCS
CHG
PG
MWI
WCS
SN
AV
CCS
MA

Clutch
Transaxle & Transmission
Driveline
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
Suspension Control System
Road Wheels & Tires
Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Control System
Steering System
Steering Control System
Seat Belt
Seat Belt Control System
SRS Airbag
SRS Airbag Control System
Ventilation System
Heater & Air Conditioning System
Heater & Air Conditioning Control System
Interior
Instrument Panel
Seat
Automatic Drive Positioner
Door & Lock
Security Control System
Glass & Window System
Power Window Control System
Roof
Exterior
Body Repair Manual
Mirrors
Exterior Lighting System
Interior Lighting System
Wiper & Washer
Defogger
Horn
Power Outlet
Body Control System
LAN System
Power Control System
Charging System
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
Meter, Warning Lamp & Indicator
Warning Chime System
Sonar System
Audio, Visual & Navigation System
Cruise Control System
Maintenance

C

D
D TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

E SUSPENSION

F BRAKES

G STEERING
H RESTRAINTS

I

VENTILATION, HEATER &
AIR CONDITIONER

J BODY INTERIOR

K BODY EXTERIOR,
DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE
SECURITY

L DRIVER CONTROLS

All rights reserved. No part M ELECTRICAL & POWER
CONTROL
of this Service Manual may
be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechani- N DRIVER INFORMATION &
MULTIMEDIA
cal, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of
O CRUISE CONTROL
Nissan Mexicana S.A de C.V.
P MAINTENANCE

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P

FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2014
NISSAN NOTE.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.

PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
NISSAN MEXICANA, S.A. DE C.V.
Technical Publications
[email protected]
FAX: (52) (55) 56-28-27-26
SERVICE MANUAL: Model:

Year:

PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ):
Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail:

Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.

Page number(s)

Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer)

YES

NO

Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.

If no, what page number(s)?

Please describe the issue or problem in detail:

Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer)

YES

NO

Please comment:

What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?

DATE:
DEALER:
CITY:

YOUR NAME:
DEALER NO.:
STATE/COUNTRY:

POSITION:
ADDRESS:
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
2014

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
Engine Tune-up Data

INFOID:0000000009725684

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine type

HR16DE

Cylinder arrangement

In-line 4
cm3 (cu in)

Displacement
Bore and stroke

1,598 (97.51)
78.0× 83.6 (3.071 ×3.291)

mm (in)

Valve arrangement

DOHC

Firing order

1-3-4-2

Number of piston rings

Compression

2

Oil

1

Compression ratio

9.8:1

Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) / 200 rpm

Standard

1,510 (15.4, 219)

Minimum

1,270 (12.95, 184)

Differential limit between cylinders

100 (1.0, 14.5)

Valve Timing
Unit: degree

Valve timing
: Intake valve
: Exhaust valve

JPBIA4228ZZ

(

a

b

c

d

e

f

216

228

11 (−27)
ATDC

59 (-21)
ABDC

-1 (49)
ATDC

37 (-13)
BBDC

): Valve timing control “ON”

Drive Belt

INFOID:0000000009725685

DRIVE BELT
Belt Deflection

Deflection adjustment *
Location

Drive belt

Unit: mm (in)
New belt

Limit

After adjusted

With A/C

10.0 (0.39)

4.9 — 5.2 (0.19 — 0.20)

4.1 — 4.4 (0.16 — 0.17)

Without A/C

9.1 (0.36)

4.3 — 4.7 (0.17 — 0.19)

3.7 — 3.9 (0.146 — 0.154)

Applied pushing force
*: When engine is cold.

Used belt

98.1 N (10.0 kg-f, 22.0 lb-f)

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
2014
Belt Tension and Frequency

Tension adjustment *
Location

Used belt
Limit

350 (35.7, 78.7)
Without A/C

New belt

After adjusted

With A/C
Drive belt

Unit: N (kg-f,
lb-f)

Frequency adjustment *
Used belt
Limit

After adjusted

Unit: Hz
New belt

881 — 951
(89.9 — 97.0,
198.0 — 213.8)

1070 — 1138
(109.1 — 116.1,
240.5 — 255.8)

145.5

230.5 — 239.5

254 — 262

876 — 964
(89.4 — 98.3,
196.9 — 216.7)

1064 — 1152
(108.5 — 117.5,
239.2 — 259.0)

162

256.5 — 268.5

282.5 — 293.5

*: When engine is cold.

Spark Plug

INFOID:0000000009725686

SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Make

NGK

Standard type*

PLZKAR6A-11

Gap (nominal)

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)

Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

INFOID:0000000009725683

Minimum

−0° 50′ (−0.83°)

Nominal

−0° 05′ (−0.08°)

Maximum

0° 40′ (0.67°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2

Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum

3° 00′ (3.00°)

Nominal

3° 45′ (3.75°)

Maximum

4° 30′ (4.50°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

–0° 45′ (–0.75°) — 0° 45′ (0.75°)

–0° 45′ (–0.75°) — 0° 45′ (0.75°)

Minimum

11° 00′ (11.00°)

Nominal

11° 45′ (11.75°)

Maximum

12° 30′ (12.50°)

SFA234AC

Distance (A — B)
Total toe-in
Angle (LH and RH)
Degree minute
(Decimal degree)

Minimum

0 mm (0.00 in)

Nominal

In 1 mm (In 0.04 in)

Maximum

In 2 mm (In 0.08 in)

Minimum

0° 00′ 00″ (0.00°)

Nominal

In 0° 03′ 00″ (In 0.05°)

Maximum

In 0° 06′ 00″ (In 0.10°)

*1: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
2014
*2: The difference when assuming the (LH) side is the standard.

Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)

Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

INFOID:0000000009725681

Minimum

−1° 55′ (−1.92°)

Nominal

−1° 25′ (−1.42°)

Maximum

−0° 55′ (−0.92°)

SFA234AC

Distance (A — B)
Total toe-in
Angle (LH and RH)*2
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum

Out 2.0 mm (Out 0.079 in)

Nominal

In 2.0 mm (In 0.079 in)

Maximum

In 6.0 mm (In 0.236 in)

Minimum

Out 0° 45′ (Out 0.75°)

Nominal

In 0° 10′ (In 0.17°)

Maximum

In 0° 35′ (In 0.58°)

*1: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.
*2: Since an adjustment mechanism is not included, the value of the left and right wheels must be used as the standard value.

Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)

INFOID:0000000009725682

Unit: mm (in)

LEIA0085E

Tire size

185/65R15

195/55R16

Front (Hf)

690 (27.17)

687 (27.05)

Rear (Hr)

679 (26.73)

678 (26.69)

*: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.

Brake Specifications

INFOID:0000000009725679

Unit: mm (in)

Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake

Pad length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Cylinder bore diameter

Rear brake

Lining length × width × thickness
Drum inner diameter — new

54.025 (2.13)
115.0 × 42.0 × 9.0 (4.53 × 1.654 × 0.354)
260 × 22.0 (10.24 × 0.87)
19.05 (3/4)
Trailing: 172 × 37 × 4.8 (6.77 × 1.46 × 0.19)
Leading: 155 × 37 × 4.8 (6.10 ×1.46 × 0.19)
203.2 (8.00)

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
2014
Master cylinder

Cylinder bore diameter

Control valve

Valve type

Brake booster

Diaphragm diameter

22.23 (0.875)
Electric brake force distribution
255 (10)

Brake Pedal

INFOID:0000000009725680

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard
158 ±5 (6.22 ±0.20)

Brake pedal height
Clearance between brake pedal lever and the stop lamp switch threaded end

0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)

Brake pedal full stroke

128 (5.04)

Front Disc Brake

INFOID:0000000009725677

Unit: mm (in)

Item
Brake pad

Disc rotor

Limit

Wear thickness

2.0 (0.08)

Wear thickness

20.0 (0.787)

Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions)

0.013 (0.001)

Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)

0.055 (0.002)

Rear Drum Brake

INFOID:0000000009725678

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Limit

Brake lining

Wear thickness

1.0 (0.04)

Brake drum

Wear inner diameter- maximum

204.2 (8.04)

Fluids and Lubricants

INFOID:0000000009725676

Capacity
(Approximate)

Description
Liter

US measure

Imp measure

41.0

10-7/8 gal

9.0 gal

With oil filter change

3.5

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

Without oil filter change

3.2

3-3/8 qt

2-7/8 qt

3.5

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

CVT

7.3

7-3/4 qt

6-3/8 qt

M/T

6.7

7-1/8 qt

5-7/8 qt

0.7

3/4 qt

5/8 qt

With oil cooler

7.1

7-1/2 qt

6-1/4 qt

Without oil cooler

6.9

7-1/4 qt

6-1/8 qt

2.67

5-5/8 pt

4-3/4 pt

Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Dry engine (Overhaul)
Cooling system (with reservoir)
Reservoir tank
CVT fluid

Manual transaxle fluid gear oil
Brake and clutch fluid

—

—

—

Multi-purpose grease

—

—

—

Windshield washer fluid

2.5

2-5/8 qt

2-1/4 qt

Air conditioner system refrigerant

0.4

0.88 lb

0.88 lb

110 — 130

3.9 — 4.6 fl oz

3.9 — 4.6 fl oz

Air conditioner system oil

GENERAL INFORMATION

SECTION

GI

GENERAL INFORMATION

GI

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………. 3

Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) ………….23
General Precautions …………………………………………24
Three Way Catalyst ………………………………………….25
Fuel (Regular Unleaded Gasoline Recommended) HR16DE ……………………………………………………25
Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control
System ……………………………………………………………26
Hoses …………………………………………………………….26
Engine Oils ……………………………………………………..27
Air Conditioning ……………………………………………….27

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ………………………. 3
Description ………………………………………………………. 3
Terms ……………………………………………………………… 3
Units ……………………………………………………………….. 3
Contents ………………………………………………………….. 3
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions …… 4
Components …………………………………………………….. 4

HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ….. 6
Description ………………………………………………………. 6
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis…… 6
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures …………………………………………………………… 7

Special Service Tool …………………………………………28
Garage Jack and Safety Stand …………………………..28
2-Pole Lift ……………………………………………………….29
Board-on Lift ……………………………………………………30
Tow Truck Towing ……………………………………………31
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) ………..31

Abbreviation List ……………………………………………… 14

VEHICLE INFORMATION ……………………… 33

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD
BOLTS ……………………………………………………….19

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ……………….. 33
Model Variation ………………………………………………..33
Identification Number ………………………………………..34
Engine Serial Number ………………………………………35
CVT Number ……………………………………………………35
Manual Transaxle Number ………………………………..35
Dimensions ……………………………………………………..36
Wheels & Tires ………………………………………………..36

Description …………………………………………………….. 19
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) ………………………………………………………………… 19

RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS
AND SEALANTS …………………………………………22

PRECAUTION ………………………………………. 23
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………..23
Description …………………………………………………….. 23
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ……………………………………………………….. 23
Procedures without Cowl Top Cover ………………….. 23

Revision: April 2013

H

I

J

K

TOW TRUCK TOWING ………………………………. 31

ABBREVIATIONS ……………………………………….14

Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants…. 22

G

LIFTING POINT …………………………………………. 28

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS ……………. 9
Connector Symbols …………………………………………… 9
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- ……………………. 10
Connector Information ……………………………………… 12

F

L

M

N

O

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 37
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL
INCIDENT …………………………………………………. 37

GI-1

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….37
Control Units and Electrical Parts ……………………….37
How to Check Terminal …………………………………….38
Intermittent Incident ………………………………………….41
Circuit Inspection ……………………………………………..44

2014 Note

P

CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM ………….. 49
Description …………………………………………………….. 49
Function and System Application ……………………… 49

Revision: April 2013

GI-2

CONSULT Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ……. 49
Wiring Diagram — CONSULT/GST CHECKING
SYSTEM ……………………………………………………….. 51

2014 Note

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

GI

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Description

INFOID:0000000009464384

This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.

Terms

B

C

INFOID:0000000009464385

• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment.

Units

D

E

F

INFOID:0000000009464386

• The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and
alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the
standard tightening torque.

G

H

“Example”
Range
Outer Socket Lock Nut

I

: 59 — 78 N·m (6.0 — 8.0 kg-m, 43 — 58 ft-lb)

Standard
Drive Shaft Installation Bolt

J

: 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
K

Contents

INFOID:0000000009464387

• A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the
first page of each section by matching it to the section’s black tab.
• THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
• THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
• THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section
and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
• THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of
work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-3

2014 Note

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions

INFOID:0000000009464388

The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.

SAIA0519E

Components

INFOID:0000000009464389

• THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG.
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is
used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.

Revision: April 2013

GI-4

2014 Note

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
GI

B

C

D

E

JPFIA0511GB

1.

Cap

2.

Bleeder valve

3.

4.

Piston seal

5.

Piston

6.

Piston boot

7.

Sliding pin

8.

Sliding pin boot

9.

Bushing

F

Cylinder body

G

10. Torque member
: Apply rubber grease.

H

: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

I

: Always replace after every disassembly

SYMBOLS
J

K

L

M

N
SAIA0749E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-5

2014 Note

HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Description

INFOID:0000000009464390

NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
• Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section.
• After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
• Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for
identification/location of components and harness connectors.
• When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
• Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors.
• Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
• After accomplishing the Diagnosis Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all
harness connectors are reconnected as they were.

How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009464391

JPAIA0021GB

1.
2.
3.
4.

Test group number and test group title
• Test group number and test group title are shown in the upper portion of each test group.
Work and diagnosis procedure
• Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
Questions and results
• Questions and required results are indicated in test group.
Action
• Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question.

Revision: April 2013

GI-6

2014 Note

HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures

INFOID:0000000009464392

GI

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
JPAIA0982GB

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-7

2014 Note

HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

JSAIA1461GB

Revision: April 2013

GI-8

2014 Note

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector Symbols

GI
INFOID:0000000009472879

Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.
• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a double line and followed by the direction mark.
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
SAIA0257E

I

• Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.

J

K

L

M

N

O

SGI363

Revision: April 2013

GI-9

2014 Note

P

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-

INFOID:0000000009472880

Each section includes wiring diagrams.

JCAWA0150GB

Description

Number

Item

Description

1

Power supply

• This means the power supply of fusible link or fuse.

2

Fuse

• “/” means the fuse.

3

Current rating of fusible
link/fuse

• This means the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.

4

Number of fusible link/
fuse

• This means the number of fusible link or fuse location.

5

Fusible link

• “X” means the fusible link.

6

Connector number

• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.

7

Switch

• This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.

8

Circuit (Wiring)

• This means the wiring.

Revision: April 2013

GI-10

2014 Note

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Number

Item

Description

GI

9

Shielded line

• The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.

10

Connectors

• This means that a transmission line bypasses two connectors or more.

11

Option abbreviation

• This means the vehicle specifications which layouts the circuit between “

12

Relay

• This shows an internal representation of the relay.

13

Optional splice

• The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.

14

Splice

• The shaded circle “

15

System branch

• This shows that the circuit is branched to other systems.

16

Page crossing

• This circuit continues to an adjacent page.

17

Component name

• This shows the name of a component.

18

Terminal number

• This means the terminal number of a connector.

19

Ground (GND)

• This shows the ground connection.

20

Explanation of option
description

• This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.

B

”.

” means the splice.

C

D

E

F

SWITCH POSITIONS
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
• ignition switch is “OFF”
• doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed
• pedals are not depressed
• parking brake is released

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

SGI860

MULTIPLE SWITCH
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
• The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-11

2014 Note

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
• The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.

JSAIA0017GB

Connector Information

INFOID:0000000009472881

HOW TO USE CONNECTOR INFORMATION

JCAWA0152GB

Description

Number

Item

Description

1

Connector number

• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.

2

Connector type

• This means the connector number.

3

Terminal number

• This means the terminal number of a connector.

Revision: April 2013

GI-12

2014 Note

HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Number

Item

Description

GI

• This shows a code for the color of the wire.

4

Wire color

BR = Brown
OR or O = Orange
P = Pink
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
GY or GR = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green

B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
BG = Beige

B

C

• When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as
shown below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
5

Connector

• This means the connector information.
• This unit-side is described by the connector symbols.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-13

2014 Note

ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List

INFOID:0000000009464393

The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
A

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

A/C

Air conditioner

A/C

Air conditioning

A/F sensor

Air fuel ratio sensor

A/T

Automatic transaxle/transmission

ABS

Anti-lock braking system

ACCS
ACL
AP

Advance climate control system
Air cleaner
Accelerator pedal

APP

Accelerator pedal position

ATF

Automatic transmission fluid

AV

Audio visual

AWD

All wheel drive

B

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

BARO

Barometric pressure

BCM

Body control module

BLSD

Brake limited slip differential

BPP

Brake pedal position

BSW

Blind spot warning

C

ABBREVIATION
CKP
CL

DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position
Closed loop

CMP

Camshaft position

CPP

Clutch pedal position

CTP

Closed throttle position

CVT

Continuously variable transaxle/transmission

D

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

D1

Drive range first gear

D2

Drive range second gear

D3

Drive range third gear

D4

Drive range fourth gear

DCA

Distance control assist

DDS

Downhill drive support

DFI

Direct fuel injection system

DLC

Data link connector

DTC

Diagnostic trouble code

Revision: April 2013

GI-14

2014 Note

ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
E

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

E/T

Exhaust temperature

EBD

Electric brake force distribution

EC

Engine control

ECL

Engine coolant level

ECM

Engine control module

ECT

Engine coolant temperature

ECV

Electrical control valve

EEPROM

B

C

Engine fuel temperature

EGR

Exhaust gas recirculation

EGRT

Exhaust gas recirculation temperature

EGT

Exhaust gas temperature

EOP

Engine oil pressure

E

F

Exhaust pressure

EPR

Exhaust pressure regulator

EPS

Electronically controlled power steering

ESP

Electronic stability program system

EVAP canister
EVSE
EXC

D

Electrically erasable programmable read only memory

EFT

EP

GI

G

H

Evaporative emission canister
Electric vehicle supply equipment
Exhaust control

I

F

ABBREVIATION
FC
FCW

DESCRIPTION
Fan control

J

Forward collision warning

FIC

Fuel injector control

FP

Fuel pump

FR

Front

FRP

Fuel rail pressure

FRT

Fuel rail temperature

FTP

Fuel tank pressure

FTT

Fuel tank temperature

K

L

M

G

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

GND

Ground

GPS

Global positioning system

GST

Generic scan tool

N

O

H

ABBREVIATION
HBMC

DESCRIPTION

HDD

Hard disk drive

HO2S

Heated oxygen sensor

HOC

Heated oxidation catalyst

HPCM

Revision: April 2013

P

Hydraulic body-motion control system

Hybrid power train control module

GI-15

2014 Note

ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
I

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

I/M

Inspection and maintenance

IA

Intake air

IAC

Idle air control

IAT

Intake air temperature

IBA

Intelligent brake assist

IC

Ignition control

ICC

Intelligent cruise control

ICM

Ignition control module

IPDM E/R

Intelligent power distribution module engine room

ISC

Idle speed control

ISS

Input shaft speed

K

ABBREVIATION
KS

DESCRIPTION
Knock sensor

L

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

LBC

Li-ion battery controller

LCD

Liquid crystal display

LCU

Local control unit

LDP

Lane departure prevention

LDW

Lane departure warning

LED

Light emitting diode

LH

Left-hand

LIN

Local interconnect network

M

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

M/T

Manual transaxle/transmission

MAF

Mass airflow

MAP

Manifold absolute pressure

MDU

Multi display unit

MI

Malfunction indicator

MIL

Malfunction indicator lamp

N

ABBREVIATION
NOX

DESCRIPTION
Nitrogen oxides

O

ABBREVIATION
O2

DESCRIPTION
Oxygen

O2S

Oxygen sensor

OBD

On board diagnostic

OC

Oxidation catalytic converter

OD

Overdrive

OL

Open loop

OSS

Revision: April 2013

Output shaft speed

GI-16

2014 Note

ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
P

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

P/S

Power steering

PBR

Potentio balance resistor

PCV

Positive crankcase ventilation

PNP

Park/Neutral position

PSP

Power steering pressure

PTC

Positive temperature coefficient

PTO

Power takeoff

PWM

Pulse width modulation

GI

B

C

D

R

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

RAM

Random access memory

RAS

Rear active steer

RH

F

Right-hand

ROM

Read only memory

RPM

Engine speed

RR

E

G

Rear

S

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

SAE

Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.

SCK

Serial clock

SDS

Service Data and Specifications

SRT

System readiness test

SST

Special Service Tools

H

I

J

T

ABBREVIATION
TC

DESCRIPTION

Transmission control module

TCS

Traction control system

TCU

Telematics communication unit

TP
TPMS

K

Turbocharger

TCM

L

Throttle position
Tire pressure monitoring system

TSS

Turbine shaft speed

TWC

Three way catalytic converter

M

N

U

ABBREVIATION
USS

DESCRIPTION
Uphill start support

O

V

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

VCM

Vehicle control module

VDC

Vehicle dynamics control system

VIN

Vehicle identification number

VSS

Vehicle speed sensor

Revision: April 2013

P

GI-17

2014 Note

ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
W

ABBREVIATION
WOT

DESCRIPTION
Wide open throttle

1

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

11

1st range first gear

12

1st range second gear

1GR

First gear

2

ABBREVIATION

DESCRIPTION

21

2nd range first gear

22

2nd range second gear

2GR

Second gear

2WD

2-wheel drive

3

ABBREVIATION
3GR

DESCRIPTION
Third gear

4

ABBREVIATION
4GR

DESCRIPTION
Fourth gear

4WAS

Four wheel active steer

4WD

Four wheel drive

5

ABBREVIATION
5GR

DESCRIPTION
Fifth gear

6

ABBREVIATION
6GR

DESCRIPTION
Sixth gear

7

ABBREVIATION
7GR

Revision: April 2013

DESCRIPTION
Seventh gear

GI-18

2014 Note

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS

GI

Description

INFOID:0000000009464394

This vehicle has both new standard based on ISO* and previous standard bolts/nuts. There are some differences between these two types of bolts/ nuts; shape of the head, grade of strength, hexagonal width across
flats and the standard tightening torque.
• For guidance in discriminating, refer to GI-19, «Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)».
• If the tightening torque is not described in the description or figure, refer to GI-19, «Tightening Torque Table
(New Standard Included)».
*ISO: International Organization for Standardization

Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)

INFOID:0000000009464395

CAUTION:
• The special parts are excluded.
• The bolts/nuts in these tables have a strength (discrimination) number/symbol assigned to the head
or the like. As to the relation between the strength grade in these tables and the strength (discrimination) number/symbol, refer to “DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS”.

B

C

D

E

F

PREVIOUS STANDARD
Grade
(Strength
grade)

4T

7T

9T

Bolt diameter
mm

Hexagonal
width
across flats
mm

Pitch
mm

M6

6.0

10

M8

8.0

12

M10

10.0

14

Bolt
size

G

Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Hexagon head bolt

Hexagon flange bolt

N·m

kg-m

ft-lb

in-lb

N·m

kg-m

ft-lb

in-lb

1.0

5.5

0.56

4

49

7

0.71

5

62

1.25

13.5

1.4

10

—

17

1.7

13

—

1.0

13.5

1.4

10

—

17

1.7

13

—

1.5

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.25

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.75

45

4.6

33

—

55

5.6

41

—

1.25

45

4.6

33

—

65

6.6

48

—

M12

12.0

17

M14

14.0

19

1.5

80

8.2

59

—

100

10

74

—

M6

6.0

10

1.0

9

0.92

7

80

11

1.1

8

97

M8

8.0

12

1.25

22

2.2

16

—

28

2.9

21

—

1.0

22

2.2

16

—

28

2.9

21

—

M10

10.0

14

M12

12.0

17

M14

14.0

M6
M8

1.5

45

4.6

33

—

55

5.6

41

—

1.25

45

4.6

33

—

55

5.6

41

—

1.75

80

8.2

59

—

100

10

74

—

1.25

80

8.2

59

—

100

10

74

—

19

1.5

130

13

96

—

170

17

125

—

6.0

10

1.0

11

1.1

8

—

13.5

1.4

10

—

8.0

12

1.25

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.0

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.5

55

5.6

41

—

80

8.2

59

—

1.25

55

5.6

41

—

80

8.2

59

—

1.75

100

10

74

—

130

13

96

—

1.25

100

10

74

—

130

13

96

—

1.5

170

17

125

—

210

21

155

—

M10

10.0

14

M12

12.0

17

M14

14.0

19

CAUTION:
The parts with aluminum or the cast iron washer surface/thread surface are excluded.
Revision: April 2013

GI-19

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
NEW STANDARD BASED ON ISO
Grade
(Strength
grade)

4.8
(Without
lubricant)

4.8
(With lubricant)

8.8
(With lubricant)

10.9
(With lubricant)

Bolt diameter
mm

Hexagonal
width
across flats
mm

Pitch
mm

M6

6.0

10

1.0

M8

8.0

13

M10

10.0

16

M12

12.0

18

M14

14.0

M6

Bolt
size

Tightening torque
Hexagon head bolt

Hexagon flange bolt

N·m

kg-m

ft-lb

in-lb

N·m

kg-m

ft-lb

in-lb

5.5

0.56

4

49

7

0.71

5

62

1.25

13.5

1.4

10

—

17

1.7

13

—

1.0

13.5

1.4

10

—

17

1.7

13

—

1.5

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.25

28

2.9

21

—

35

3.6

26

—

1.75

45

4.6

33

—

55

5.6

41

—

1.25

45

4.6

33

—

65

6.6

48

—

21

1.5

80

8.2

59

—

100

10

74

—

6.0

10

1.0

4

0.41

3

35

5.5

0.56

4

49

M8

8.0

13

1.25

11

1.1

8

—

13.5

1.4

10

—

1.0

11

1.1

8

—

13.5

1.4

10

—

M10

10.0

16

1.5

22

2.2

16

—

28

2.9

21

—

1.25

22

2.2

16

—

28

2.9

21

—

M12

12.0

18

1.75

35

3.6

26

—

45

4.6

33

—

1.25

35

3.6

26

—

45

4.6

33

—

M14

14.0

21

1.5

65

6.6

48

—

80

8.2

59

—

M6

6.0

10

M8

8.0

13

M10

10.0

16

M12

12.0

18

M14

14.0

21

M6

6.0

10

M8

8.0

13

M10

10.0

16

M12

12.0

18

M14

14.0

21

1.0

8

0.82

6

71

10

1.0

7

89

1.25

21

2.1

15

—

25

2.6

18

—

1.0

21

2.1

15

—

25

2.6

18

—

1.5

40

4.1

30

—

50

5.1

37

—

1.25

40

4.1

30

—

50

5.1

37

—

1.75

70

7.1

52

—

85

8.7

63

—

1.25

70

7.1

52

—

85

8.7

63

—

1.5

120

12

89

—

140

14

103

—

1.0

10

1.0

7

89

12

1.2

9

106

1.25

27

2.8

20

—

32

3.3

24

—

1.0

27

2.8

20

—

32

3.3

24

—

1.5

55

5.6

41

—

65

6.6

48

—

1.25

55

5.6

41

—

65

6.6

48

—

1.75

95

9.7

70

—

110

11

81

—

1.25

95

9.7

70

—

110

11

81

—

1.5

160

16

118

—

180

18

133

—

CAUTION:
1. Use tightening torque with lubricant for the new standard bolts/nuts in principle. Friction coefficient stabilizer is applied to the new standard bolts/nuts.
2. However, use tightening torque without lubricant for the following cases. Friction coefficient stabilizer is not applied to the following bolts/nuts.
Grade 4.8, M6 size bolt, Conical spring washer installed
Paint removing nut (Size M6 and M8) for fixing with weld bolt

Revision: April 2013

GI-20

2014 Note

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS
GI

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N
SAIA0453E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-21

2014 Note

RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants

INFOID:0000000009464396

Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.

1

2

3

4

5

6

NISSAN North America
Part No. (USA)

NISSAN Canada Part
No. (Canada)

Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos.

Product Description

Purpose

Rear View Mirror Adhesive

Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to
windows.

999MP-AM000P

99998-50505

Permatex 81844

Anaerobic Liquid Gasket

For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015
inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications.

999MP-AM001P

99998-50503

Permatex 51813 and
51817

High Performance
Thread Sealant

Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
parallel threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
• Do not use on plastic.

999MP-AM002P

999MP-AM002P

Permatex 56521

99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)

Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
1207,1215, 1216,
1217F, 1217G and
1217H
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007

999MP-AM004P

Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335,
1335B, 1363B,
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
Loctite 648

999MP-AM005P

Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374

Silicone RTV

High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)

Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)

Revision: April 2013

Gasket Maker

Threadlocker

Threadlocker (service tool
removable)

999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)

999MP-AM004P

999MP-AM005P

GI-22

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

GI

PRECAUTIONS
Description

INFOID:0000000009464411

Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

C

INFOID:0000000009464412

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

D

E

F

G

H

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

Procedures without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009464413

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.

I

J

K

L

M

N
PIIB3706J

Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
Unit)

O

INFOID:0000000009015320

CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

GI-23

2014 Note

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

General Precautions

INFOID:0000000009464414

• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without
proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas,
etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.

SGI285

• Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at
the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
• When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
SGI231

• Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
• If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.

SEF289H

• To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
• Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an
appropriate manner.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
• Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
• Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
• Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
• Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
• Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
• After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
• Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
• Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
Revision: April 2013

GI-24

SGI233

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended
special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
• When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.

GI

B

C
JPAIA0335ZZ

D

• Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.

E

F

G
SGI234

WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and TM sections.

Three Way Catalyst

INFOID:0000000009464415

If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
• Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
• When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary.
• Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the
catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.

Fuel (Regular Unleaded Gasoline Recommended) HR16DE

INFOID:0000000009464416

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) may only be used in vehicles specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle — FFV models).
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85
fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically designed for E-85 fuel
(i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle — FFV models). Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity.

Revision: April 2013

GI-25

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System

INFOID:0000000009464418

• Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the
multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
• Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
• Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow
sensor.
SGI787

Hoses

INFOID:0000000009464419

HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
• To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with
tapered tool or screwdriver.

SMA019D

• To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion
length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose
stopper.)

SMA020D

HOSE CLAMPING
• If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace
of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at
that position.
• Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.

SMA021D

Revision: April 2013

GI-26

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of
the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.

GI

B

C
SMA022D

D

Engine Oils

INFOID:0000000009464420

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.

E

F

G

H

I

J

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.

Air Conditioning

K

L

INFOID:0000000009464421

Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
HA-17, «Description».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-27

2014 Note

LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >

LIFTING POINT
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009464405

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

LM4086-0200
( — )
Board on attachment

S-NT001

LM4519-0000
( — )
Safety stand attachment

S-NT002

CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
• Since the vehicle’s center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent.
• Since the vehicle’s center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or
equivalent.
• Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.

Garage Jack and Safety Stand

INFOID:0000000009464406

WARNING:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
• Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.

Revision: April 2013

GI-28

2014 Note

LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
• Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels.
GI

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
ALAIA0040GB

I

Vehicle front
1.

Front garage jack points

2. Safety stand points

3.

Rear garage jack point

J

2-Pole Lift

INFOID:0000000009464407

WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the
vehicle are well balanced.

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-29

2014 Note

LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.

ALAIA0039ZZ

Vehicle front
1.

Sill

2. Lift pad

Board-on Lift

INFOID:0000000009464408

CAUTION:
Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
• The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at front end of
vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front
door opening.
• Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.

AGI016

Revision: April 2013

GI-30

2014 Note

TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >

TOW TRUCK TOWING

GI

Tow Truck Towing

INFOID:0000000009464409

CAUTION:
• Never tow a CVT model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
• Never tow a CVT model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving
(front) wheels off the ground.
CAUTION:
• Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle
with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the
ground.
• When towing manual transaxle models with the front wheels
on the ground (if a towing dolly is not used), turn the ignition
key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in the
straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device.
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
SGI986

Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)

INFOID:0000000009464410

K

FRONT
WARNING:
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
• Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury.
Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
CAUTION:
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle recovery hooks or main structural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
• Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks.
• Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
• Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or
cooling systems.
• Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or
recovery.

CVT

M

N

O

P

To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacture’s recommendations when using their product.
If the vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
Revision: April 2013

L

GI-31

2014 Note

TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D.
Do not spin the tires above 35 m.p.h. (55 km/h).
4. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

Revision: April 2013

GI-32

2014 Note

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >

VEHICLE INFORMATION

GI

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation

INFOID:0000000009464398

B

Model Codes

Body

Engine

Grade

Transmission

Base (Sense)
Hatchback

HR16DE
Mid (Advance)

Destination
Mexico/LAM

Argentina

5 M/T

TDTALDF-EJA

TDTALDF-ELA

CVT

TDTALDZ-EJA

TDTALDZ-ELA

5 M/T

TDTALEF-EJA

TDTALEF-ELA

CVT

TDTALEZ-EJA

TDTALEZ-ELA

C

D

E

Prefix and Suffix Designations

Position

Character

1

T

2
3

DT

Qualifier

Definition

Body type

T: Hatchback

Engine

DT: HR16DE

4

A

Axle

A: 2WD

5

L

Drive

L: LH

6

D

Grade

7

F

Transmission

F

G

H

D: Base (Sense)
E: Mid (Advance)
F: 5 M/T

I

Z: CVT

8
9

E12

Model

E12: Note

E

Intake

E: EGI

J

10
11

K

J: Mexico/LAM

12

J

Zone

13

A

Equipment

A: Standard

Option Codes

Option Codes

L: Argentina

L

14
15
16

XXXXX

M

17

N

18

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GI-33

2014 Note

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >

Identification Number

INFOID:0000000009464399

ALAIA0093ZZ

1. Air conditioner specification label

2. Vehicle identification number chassis number (right side of bulkhead)

3. Emission control information label (if
equipped)

4. Tire placard
Vehicle Identification Number Arrangement

Position

Character

Qualifier

Definition

1
2

3N1

Manufacturer

3N1: NISSAN Passenger Car [Nismex]

C

Engine type

C: HR16DE

E2

Model series

E2: NISSAN Note model code E12

7

C

Body type

C: 4 door hatchback

8

D

Restraint system

D: Driver and Passenger Air Bags and 3-point manual seat belts

9

*

Check digit

(0 to 9 or X) The code for the check digit is determined by a mathematical computation

10

E

Model year

11

L

Manufacturing plant

3
4
5
6

Revision: April 2013

E: 2014
Z: General exportation
L: Aguascalientes, Mexico
K: Civac, Mexico

GI-34

2014 Note

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
Position

Character

Qualifier

XXXXXX

Vehicle serial number

Definition

GI

12
13
14
15

B

Chassis number

16

C

17

Engine Serial Number

INFOID:0000000009464400

D

HR16DE

E

F

G
STI0429

: Vehicle front
H

CVT Number

INFOID:0000000009464401

I

J

K
LAIA0074E

L

Manual Transaxle Number

INFOID:0000000009464402

M

N

O
PCIB1612E

P

: Vehicle front

Revision: April 2013

GI-35

2014 Note

IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >

Dimensions

INFOID:0000000009464403

Unit:mm (in)

Overall length

4,141 (163)

Overall width

1,645 (64.8)

Overall height

1,537 (60.5)

Front tread

15 inch wheel: 1,480 (58.3)
16 inch wheel: 1,470 (57.9)

Rear tread

15 inch wheel: 1,485 (58.5)
16 inch wheel: 1,475 (58.1)

Wheelbase

2,600 (102.4)

Wheels & Tires

INFOID:0000000009464404

Conventional
Road wheel/offset mm (in)

Tire size

Revision: April 2013

15 X 5.5J Aluminum/40 (1.57)
16 X 6.0J Aluminum/45 (1.77)
P185/65R15
P195/55R16

GI-36

Spare

T125/70D15

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

GI

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009464422

B

WORK FLOW
C

D

E

F

G

H

SGI838

STEP

DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:

STEP 1

WHAT

Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).

WHEN

Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.

WHERE

Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.

HOW

System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.

I

J

K

STEP 2

Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.

STEP 3

Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
• Power Supply Routing
• System Operation Descriptions
• Applicable Service Manual Sections
• Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.

STEP 4

Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts.

STEP 5

Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.

STEP 6

Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.

Control Units and Electrical Parts

INFOID:0000000009464423

PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•

Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts.
Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.

Revision: April 2013

GI-37

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
• Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid
temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water
is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle.
• Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
• Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
• Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper
and lower covers.
SAIA0255E

• When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from
damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
• When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the
specified check adapter.

SEF348N

How to Check Terminal

INFOID:0000000009464424

CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
• Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
• The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.

Revision: April 2013

GI-38

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
(J42992-2000UPD)
OBD-II Connector Kit Update

GI

Description

B

C

D

E
WAIA0004E

WAIA0005E

F

HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
• Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks.
• The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the
connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
• If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector,
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
• Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to
the seal between wire and connector may result.

G

H

I

J

K
SGI841

L

Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL

• There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.

M

N

O

SEL265V

Revision: April 2013

GI-39

2014 Note

P

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing.

SEL266V

MALE TERMINAL

• Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T”
pin.
CAUTION:
Dot not bend terminal.

SEL267V

How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
• An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
• If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
NOTE:
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.

SEL270V

3.

While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
CAUTION:
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.

SEL271V

Revision: April 2013

GI-40

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.

GI

B

C
SEL272V

D

• If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
E

F

G
SEL273V

Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.

H

RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION

I

• Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
• The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected.
Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal
is properly installed on either side of male or female connector.

J

K

WIRE SEAL INSPECTION

• The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a
waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly.

L
SEL275V

Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector.
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.

M

N

O

SEL330V

Intermittent Incident

INFOID:0000000009464425

DESCRIPTION
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The fol-

Revision: April 2013

GI-41

2014 Note

P

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
lowing section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:

• Vehicle vibration
• Heat sensitive
• Freezing
• Water intrusion
• Electrical load
• Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem.

VEHICLE VIBRATION
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration.
Connector & Harness
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
Hint
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
Sensor & Relay
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.

SGI839

Engine Compartment
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
• Connectors not fully seated.
• Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
• Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
• Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
• Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
Behind the Instrument Panel
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
Under Seating Areas

Revision: April 2013

GI-42

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or GI
pinching.

HEAT SENSITIVE

B

• The customer’s concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
• To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
CAUTION:
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F).
• If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly
insulate the component.

C

D

SGI842

E

FREEZING
• The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
• There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis
of those electrical components which could be affected.
• The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
replace the component.

F

G

H

SGI843

I

WATER INTRUSION
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
CAUTION:
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.

J

K

L

SGI844

ELECTRICAL LOAD
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on.

M

N

O

P
SGI845

COLD OR HOT START UP
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
Revision: April 2013

GI-43

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

Circuit Inspection

INFOID:0000000009464426

DESCRIPTION
• In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
• You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring
harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN

A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
There are two types of shorts.

SHORT

• SHORT CIRCUIT

When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
change.

• SHORT TO GROUND

When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.

NOTE:
Refer to GI-38, «How to Check Terminal» to probe or check terminal.

TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.

SGI846-A

Continuity Check Method
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
• Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
• Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit
has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
• Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Voltage Check Method
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
• Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
• With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.

Revision: April 2013

GI-44

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
• Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
• Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.

GI

B

C

TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.

D

E

F
SGI847-A

Resistance Check Method
• Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
• Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground.
• With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground.
Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a
known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Voltage Check Method
• Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground).
• With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for
voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.

GROUND INSPECTION
• Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
• Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can
drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit.
Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
Revision: April 2013

GI-45

2014 Note

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
— Remove the ground bolt or screw.
— Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
— Clean as required to assure good contact.
— Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
— Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
— If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
• For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.

SGI853

VOLTAGE DROP TESTS
• Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
• Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire
will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand
of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will
be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
• Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
— Undersized wiring (single strand example)
— Corrosion on switch contacts
— Loose wire connections or splices.
• If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method
• Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
• Operate the circuit.
• The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.

Revision: April 2013

GI-46

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
GI

B

C

D

E

F

SGI974

Measuring Voltage Drop — Step-by-Step
• The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those
in “Computer Controlled Systems”).
• Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
• The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire
gauge or corrosion.
• The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M
SAIA0258E

N

CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST
System Description
• When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.

O

CASE 1

P

MGI034A

Revision: April 2013

GI-47

2014 Note

SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

Terminal No.
+

1

2

−

Description
Signal name

Body
ground

Switch

Body
ground

Lamp

Value (Approx.)

In case of high resistance such as single
strand (V) *

Switch ON

Battery voltage

Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)

Switch OFF

0V

Switch ON

Battery voltage

Switch OFF

0V

Condition

Input/
Output
Input

Output

Approx. 0
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
Approx. 0

• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.

CASE 2

MGI035A

INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

Terminal No.
+

−

Description
Signal name

Condition

Input/
Output

1

Body
ground

Lamp

Output

2

Body
ground

Switch

Input

Value (Approx.)

In case of high resistance such as single
strand (V) *

Switch ON

0V

Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)

Switch OFF

Battery voltage

Switch ON

0V

Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)

Switch OFF

5V

Approx. 5

Battery voltage

• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the
lamp.

Revision: April 2013

GI-48

2014 Note

CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
< BASIC INSPECTION >

CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM

GI

Description

INFOID:0000000009464427

NOTE:
This vehicle is diagnosed using the CONSULT-III plus.
• When CONSULT is connected with a data link connector equipped
on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit
equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
1

: Hood release handle

2

: Data link connector

B

C

D

• Refer to “CONSULT-III plus Operation Manual” for more information.

E
ALAIA0095ZZ

Function and System Application

ENGINE

ABS

METER/M&A

BCM

AIR BAG

TRANSMISSION1

EPS

IPDM E/R

MULTI AV

INFOID:0000000009464428

Self Diagnostic Result

The ECU self diagnostic results are displayed.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Data Monitor

The ECU input/output data is displayed in real time.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Work support

The settings for ECU functions can be changed.

x

x

x

x

—

x

—

—

—

Active Test

The ECU activates outputs to test components.

x

x

—

x

—

—

—

x

—

ECU identification

The ECU part number is displayed.

x

x

—

x

x

x

x

x

x

DTC Work Support

The status of system monitoring tests and the self diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.

x

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Warning History

Displays the history of the combination meter warning
lamp indicators.

—

—

x

—

—

—

—

—

—

TROUBLE DIAG RECORD

Self diagnostic history and trouble diagnosis records in
ECU are displayed.

—

—

—

—

x

—

—

—

—

CAN Diag

This mode displays network diagnostic results of CAN
communication using a diagram.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing
ECU.

—

—

—

x

—

—

—

—

—

CALIB DATA

The calibration values of the ECU are displayed.

—

—

—

—

—

x

—

—

—

SRT & P-DTC Confirmation

The status of system monitoring tests and the self diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.

x

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Diagnosis (All Systems)

Description

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

x: Applicable
1: With continuously variable transmission

CONSULT Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit

INFOID:0000000009464429

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
Revision: April 2013

F

GI-49

2014 Note

CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Symptom

Check item

CONSULT cannot access any
system.

• CONSULT DLC power supply circuit (Terminal and ground circuit (Terminal 4)

CONSULT cannot access individual system. (Other systems
can be accessed.)

• Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

NOTE:
The DDL2 circuits and CAN communication lines from DLC pins 6, 7 and 14 may be connected to more than
one system. A short in a DDL circuit or CAN lines connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT access to other systems. For a complete DDL circuit layout, refer to GI-51, «Wiring Diagram — CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM». For a complete CAN line layout, refer to LAN-31, «Wiring Diagram».

Revision: April 2013

GI-50

2014 Note

CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
< BASIC INSPECTION >

Wiring Diagram — CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM

INFOID:0000000009464430

GI

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

AAAWA0059GB

Revision: April 2013

GI-51

2014 Note

P

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

GW

GLASS & WINDOW SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Removal and Installation …………………………………..12

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

OPERA WINDOW ……………………………………… 14

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 4

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 5
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ………………………………………………………. 5
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 5
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………… 6
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………….. 9

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 11
WINDSHIELD GLASS ………………………………….11
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 11

Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14

F

G

SIDE WINDOW GLASS ……………………………… 16
Exploded View …………………………………………………16
Removal and Installation …………………………………..17

BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS …………………. 19

H

Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19

I

FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ….. 21

J

Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR …………….. 24 GW
Removal and Installation …………………………………..24

REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ……. 25
Exploded View …………………………………………………25
Removal and Installation …………………………………..25

REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR ………………. 28

L

M

Removal and Installation …………………………………..28
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009509403

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Handling for Adhesive and Primer

INFOID:0000000009509404

• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
• Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found,
do not use it.
• If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with
soap.
• When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009509405

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
Revision: April 2013

GW-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009509406

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit

Repairing the cause of noise

ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009509407

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0995E

( — )
Suction Lifter

Holding door glass

LIIA1991E

Revision: April 2013

GW-4

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671273

B

C

D

E

F

G
SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW

H
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to GW-9, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
I
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is J
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
GW
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
L
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
N
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
O
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
P
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

GW-5

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to GW-6, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671274

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

GW-6

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

C

CENTER CONSOLE

F

Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

A

B

D

E

G

H

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
I
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
J
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
GW
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

GW-7

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: April 2013

GW-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671275

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

GW-9

P

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

LAIA0071E

Revision: April 2013

GW-10

2014 Note

WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

WINDSHIELD GLASS
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509408

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

P

AWKIA2557ZZ

Revision: April 2013

GW-11

2014 Note

WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.

Windshield glass molding

2.

Windshield glass

3.

Spacer

4.

Spacer

5.

Roof

6.

Dam rubber

7.

Headlining

8.

Adhesive

9.

Cowl top cover

10. Front pillar finisher

11. Body side outer

12. Body primer

13. Primer

D.

3.8 mm (0.15 in)

E.

5.0 mm (0.20 in)

F.

8.0 mm (0.31 in)

G.

6.2 mm (0.24 in)

H.

12.0 — 14.0 mm (0.47 — 0.55 in)

J.

7.0 — 9.0 mm (0.28 — 0.35 in)

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009509409

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove front pillar finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-19, «FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Partially remove the headlining (front edge).
Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-23, «Removal and Installation».
Remove inside mirror. Refer to MIR-14, «Removal and Installation».
Remove windshield glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag (B).

PIIB5779E

• Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
• If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with matching marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Be careful not to set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
• Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• Adhesive shall be continuously applied to assure watertightness. Glass installation shall be finished within
five minutes after applying the adhesive.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

GW-12

2014 Note

WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidity.

A

B

C

REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR WINDSHIELD GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling windshield glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the
leak.
• This can be done by applying water to the windshield glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and urethane adhesive to the leak point.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-13

2014 Note

OPERA WINDOW
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OPERA WINDOW
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509410

AWKIA2460ZZ

1.

Opera window glass

2.

Adhesive

3.

Front pillar finisher

4.

Body side outer

5.

Body primer

6.

Primer

7.

Front fender

E.

12.0 mm (0.47 in)

F.

11.0 mm (0.43 in)

G.

20.0 mm (0.79 in)

Clip

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009509411

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-19, «FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-125, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the opera window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag
(B).

PIIB5779E

WARNING:
Revision: April 2013

GW-14

2014 Note

OPERA WINDOW
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
When cutting glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
• Apply protective tape around the opera window glass to protect the painted surface from damage.

INSTALLATION
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• Adhesive shall be continuously applied to assure watertightness. Glass installation shall be finished within
five minutes after applying the adhesive.
• The start and finisher of the urethane adhesive application should be located at the bottom to assure watertightness.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive is completely cured may affect the performance of
the opera window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive is completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time increases under
lower temperature and lower humidity.

REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR OPERA WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling opera window glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the
leak.
• This can be done by applying water to the opera window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-15

2014 Note

SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509412

AWKIA2558ZZ

1.

Spacer

2.

Side window glass

3.

Adhesive

4.

Luggage side upper finisher

5.

Primer

6.

Body primer

7.

Body side outer

D.

15.0 mm (0.59 in)

E.

22.4 mm (0.88 in)

Revision: April 2013

GW-16

2014 Note

SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
F.

24.0 mm (0.94 in)

G.

12.0 mm (0.47 in)

H.

7.0 mm (0.28 in)

A

Clip

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009509413

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
Remove the side window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag (B).

C

D

E

F
PIIB5779E

WARNING:
When cutting glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
• Apply protective tape around the side window glass to protect the painted surface from damage.

INSTALLATION

G

H

I
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• Adhesive shall be continuously applied to assure watertightness. Glass installation shall be finished within
J
five minutes after applying the adhesive.
• The start and finisher of the urethane adhesive application should be located at the bottom to assure watertightness.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out GW
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
L
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
M
contact with skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive is completely cured may affect the performance of N
the side window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed O
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
P
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive is completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time increases under
lower temperature and lower humidity.

REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR SIDE WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling side window glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the
leak.
Revision: April 2013

GW-17

2014 Note

SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• This can be done by applying water to the side window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.

Revision: April 2013

GW-18

2014 Note

BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509414

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2559ZZ

1.

Back door window glass weatherstrip

4.

Back door window glass

2.

Back door window glass locator

Removal and Installation

3.

Back door window glass spacer

INFOID:0000000009509415

J

GW

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to EXL-117, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation».
Remove back door window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag
(B).

L

M

N

O

P
PIIB5779E

• Mark the body and the glass with matching marks if the back door window glass is reused.
• Apply protective tape around the back door window glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

GW-19

2014 Note

BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
• Apply protective tape around the back door window glass to protect the painted surface from
damage.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
• Adhesive shall be continuously applied to assure watertightness. Glass installation shall be finished within
five minutes after applying the adhesive.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the back door window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidity.

REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling back door window glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the
leak.
• This can be done by applying water to the back door window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and urethane adhesive to the leak point.

Revision: April 2013

GW-20

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509416

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2561ZZ

1.

Front door panel

2.

Vapor barrier

3.

Front door glass front run

4.

Front door glass rear run

5.

Front door glass

6.

Front door glass rubber run

7.

Front door regulator

8.

Front power window motor

9.

Front door glass handle grommet

10. Front door glass handle

A.

With power window

B.

Without power window

Removal and Installation

J

GW
INFOID:0000000009509417

L

FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal.
Disconnect the harness connector from the door mirror.
Temporarily reconnect both battery terminals and the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (LH
door) or power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH door) to raise/lower the front door glass until the
bolts can be seen through the access holes (with power window).
Temporarily reinstall the front door glass handle and raise/lower the front door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window).

Revision: April 2013

GW-21

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove front door glass bolts (A).

ALKIA3164ZZ

7.

While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and
pull it out of the front door glass front rear toward the outside of
the door to remove.

JMKIA8064ZZ

8.
9.

Remove the front door glass front run bolts and remove (if necessary).
Remove the front door glass rear run bolts and remove (if necessary).

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the front door glass run groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator bolts, door sash bolts and glass bolts to correct the glass position if the
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.

FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal.
Disconnect the harness connector from the door mirror.
Temporarily reconnect both battery terminals and the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (LH
door) or power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH door) to raise/lower the front door glass until the
bolts can be seen through the access holes (with power window).
Temporarily reinstall the front door glass handle and raise/lower the front door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window).

Revision: April 2013

GW-22

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove front door glass bolts (A).
A

B

C
ALKIA3164ZZ

7.
8.
9.

Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with a suitable tool or approximately two inches of masking
tape.
Remove bolts and front door regulator.
Remove front power window motor from front door regulator (if necessary). Refer to GW-24, «Removal
and Installation».

D

E

F

Inspection After Removal
Check the front door glass regulator for the following items:
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
• Grease condition for each sliding part
If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
The arrows in the figure show the application points of a suitable
multi-purpose grease (if necessary).

G

H

I

J

JMKIA4453ZZ

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten front door regulator bolts to specification. Refer to GW-21, «Exploded View».

GW

L

Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator bolts, door sash bolts and glass bolts to correct the glass position if the
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-23

2014 Note

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009654180

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front door glass regulator. Refer to GW-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove bolts and front power window motor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

GW-24

2014 Note

REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009509418

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2562ZZ

1.

Rear door panel

2.

Vapor barrier

3.

Rear door glass front run

4.

Rear door glass

5.

Rear door glass rear run

6.

Rear door glass rubber run

7.

Rear door corner finisher

8.

Rear door glass regulator

9.

Rear power window motor

A.

With power window

10. Rear door glass handle grommet
B.

Without power window

11. Rear door glass handle

J

GW

Clip

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009509419

L

REAR DOOR GLASS
M

Removal

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal.
Temporarily reconnect the rear power window switch to raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can
be seen through the access holes (with power window).
Temporarily reinstall the rear door glass handle and raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window).

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-25

2014 Note

REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove rear door glass bolts (A) and rear door glass (1).

ALKIA3166ZZ

6.
7.

Remove rear door glass front run bolts and remove (if necessary).
Remove rear door glass rear run bolts and remove (if necessary).

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to GW-25, «Exploded View».
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the rear door glass run groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator bolts, door sash bolts and glass bolts to correct the glass position if the
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.

REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal.
Temporarily reconnect the rear power window switch to raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can
be seen through the access holes (with power window).
Temporarily reinstall the rear door glass handle and raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window).
Remove rear door glass bolts (A).
1: Rear door glass

ALKIA3166ZZ

6.
7.
8.

Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with a suitable tool or approximately two inches of masking
tape.
Remove bolts and rear door glass regulator.
Remove rear power window motor from rear door glass regulator (if necessary). Refer to GW-28,
«Removal and Installation».

Inspection After Removal
Check the rear door glass regulator for the following items:
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
• Grease condition for each sliding part

Revision: April 2013

GW-26

2014 Note

REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
The arrows in the figure show the application points of a suitable
multi-purpose grease (if necessary).

A

B

C

JMKIA7739ZZ

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten rear door regulator bolts to specification. Refer to GW-25, «Exploded View».

D

E

Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator bolts, door sash bolts and glass bolts to correct the glass position if the
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.

F

G

H

I

J

GW

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

GW-27

2014 Note

REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009654181

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove rear door glass regulator. Refer to GW-25, «Removal and Installation».
Remove bolts and rear power window motor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

GW-28

2014 Note

VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

SECTION

HA

HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

OIL …………………………………………………………… 21
Description ………………………………………………………21
Inspection ……………………………………………………….21
Perform Oil Return Operation …………………………….21
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor ………………………………….21
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Compressor Replacement ……………………………………………………………….22

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover…… 3
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service ………… 3
Service Equipment ……………………………………………. 6

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 8
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 8
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 8
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 8
Sealant and/or Oil …………………………………………… 10

F

G

H

PERFORMANCE TEST ……………………………… 23
Inspection ……………………………………………………….23

HA

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 25
COMPRESSOR …………………………………………. 25

J

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 11

Exploded View …………………………………………………25
Removal and Installation …………………………………..25
Inspection ……………………………………………………….25

K

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………11

COOLER PIPE AND HOSE ………………………… 27

Component Parts Location ……………………………….. 11

Exploded View …………………………………………………27

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 12

LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE …………………….27
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..27

M

HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE ……………………28
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..28

N

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ………12
Workflow ……………………………………………………….. 12

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 14
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ………14
Trouble Diagnosis For Unusual Pressure …………… 14
Symptom Table ………………………………………………. 14

NOISE ………………………………………………………..16
Symptom Table ………………………………………………. 16

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ……………………. 17

HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE ……………………………………..28
HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………………28

O

CONDENSER ……………………………………………. 29
Exploded View …………………………………………………29

REFRIGERANT …………………………………………..17

CONDENSER …………………………………………………….29
CONDENSER : Removal and Installation ……………29

Description …………………………………………………….. 17
Leak Test ………………………………………………………. 17
Recycle Refrigerant …………………………………………. 19
Charge Refrigerant ………………………………………….. 19

LIQUID TANK ……………………………………………………30
LIQUID TANK : Removal and Installation of Liquid
Tank ……………………………………………………………….30

Revision: April 2013

L

HA-1

2014 Note

P

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ……………….. 30
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………. 30

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY… 31
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 31
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ………. 32
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY :
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 32
HEATER CORE ………………………………………………… 33
HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation ……….. 33

Revision: April 2013

EVAPORATOR …………………………………………………. 33
EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation …………. 33
EXPANSION VALVE …………………………………………. 33
EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation … 33

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 35
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 35
Compressor …………………………………………………… 35
Oil …………………………………………………………………. 35
Refrigerant …………………………………………………….. 35

HA-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009452293

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

C

D

E

F

G

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the HA
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009014853

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

J

K

L

M
PIIB3706J

Precautions For Refrigerant System Service

INFOID:0000000009667164

N

WORKING WITH HFC-134a (R-134a)
CAUTION:
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if the refrigerants are mixed, refer to “CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT”
below. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant recovery/recycling recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier.
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components.
Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if oil other than that specified is used.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
— Cap (seal) the component immediately to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle.

Revision: April 2013

HA-3

2014 Note

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
— Do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrigerant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system.
— Use only the specified oil from a sealed container. Reseal containers of oil immediately. Oil becomes
moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
— Do not allow oil to come in contact with styrene foam parts. Damage may result.

GENERAL REFRIGERANT PRECAUTION
WARNING:
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system, using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J-2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J-2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment]. Ventilate work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling recharging equipment to
capture the refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; Place the bottom of the container in a warm
pail of water if container warming is required.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Do not refrigerant away from open flames; poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen; therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation.
• Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have
been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or
property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.

REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A new type of refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations:
• Expansion valve to evaporator
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.
• Store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle when the compressor is removed. Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low-pressure chamber.
• Always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle.
Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Remove moisture thoroughly from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration when connecting tube. Be careful not to apply
oil to threaded portion.
• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube.
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly.

Revision: April 2013

HA-4

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Perform leak test and make sure that there are no leaks from connections after connecting line. Disconnect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leaking point is found. Then tighten
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.

A

B

C

D

E

F
RHA861F

CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT

G
Take appropriate steps shown below if a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in
a vehicle:
• Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into H
the atmosphere.
• Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage service equipment and refrigerant supply.
• Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may HA
have occurred.
• In case of repairing, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not
recover contaminated refrigerant into the existing service equipment. Contact a local refrigerant prod- J
uct retailer for available service if the facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment. This refrigerant
must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all
refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
• The air conditioner warranty is void if the vehicle is within the warranty period. Please contact Nissan Cus- K
tomer Affairs for further assistance.

COMPRESSOR
CAUTION:
• Cap or plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• Store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed.
• Follow “Maintenance of Oil Level” exactly when replacing or repairing compressor. Refer to HA-21,
«Description».
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with thinner if the surface is contaminated with oil.
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service
operation. This distributes oil equally inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate the
compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• Apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation after replacing the compressor magnet
clutch.

LEAK DETECTION DYE
CAUTION:
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electrical leak detector (SST: J-41995).
The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electrical leak detector
(SST: J-41995) to pin-point refrigerant leaks.
Revision: April 2013

HA-5

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electrical leak detector (SST:
J-41995).
• Always remove any remaining dye from the leak area after repairs are completed to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle [1/4 ounce (7.4 cc)] per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunction occurs.
NOTE:
Identification
• Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
• Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.

Service Equipment

INFOID:0000000009667162

RECOVERY/RECYCLING RECHARGING EQUIPMENT
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Do not
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.

ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.

VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure. Vacuum
pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is
possible when the pump is switched OFF after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hoseto-pump connection, as per the following.
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.

RHA270DA

MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

Revision: April 2013

HA-6

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils.

A

B

C
SHA533D

D

SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must be equipped with
positive shut-off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of
the hoses opposite to the manifold gauge.

E

F

G
RHA272D

SERVICE COUPLERS

H

Do not attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
the CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
do not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation

A/C service valve

Clockwise

Open

Counterclockwise

Close

HA

J

K
RHA273D

REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

L

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must be 1/
2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.

M

N

RHA274D

O

CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.

Revision: April 2013

HA-7

2014 Note

P

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009457703

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-41425-NIS)
Aluminum tube repair kit

Repairing leaks in A/C tubes

ALIIA0390ZZ

(J-38873-A)
Drive plate installer

Installing pulley

WJIA0367E

(J-46534)
Trim tool set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009457704

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-41810-NI)
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a)

For checking refrigerant purity and
system contamination

RJIA0197E

( — )
Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

HA-8

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-48710)
NISSAN ACR2009 RRR Unit

Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging

A

B

C
WJIA0293E

(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector

Power supply:
• DC 12V (battery terminal)

D

E

F

AHA281A

Power supply:
• DC 12V (battery terminal)

(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
Fluorescent leak detection dye
(box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner

G

H

HA

J
ZHA200H

(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses and
couplers)

Identification:
• The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

K

L

M

RJIA0196E

Hose color:
• Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
• High side hose: Red with black
stripe
• Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME

Service hoses:
• High side hose
(J-39500-72B)
• Low side hose
(J-39500-72R)
• Utility hose
(J-39500-72Y)
S-NT201

Revision: April 2013

HA-9

2014 Note

N

O

P

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

Service couplers
• High side coupler
(J-39500-20A)
• Low side coupler
(J-39500-24A)

Hose fitting to service hose:
• M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.

S-NT202

(J-39699)
Refrigerant weight scale

For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT200

(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)

Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM
• Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT203

Sealant and/or Oil

INFOID:0000000009457705

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

( — )
HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant

Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT196

( — )
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DHPR (Type R)

Type: Poly alkylene glycol (PAG), type
DH-PR (Type R)
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) Vanerotary compressors
Capacity: 110 — 130 m (3.7 — 4.4 US fl
oz, 3.9 — 4.6 Imp fl oz)
JMIIA1759ZZ

Revision: April 2013

HA-10

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009014859

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HA

J

AWIIA1694ZZ

Component

K

Function

L

1.

Compressor

Intakes, compresses, discharges and circulates refrigerant.

2.

Condenser

Cools the high-temperature high-pressure refrigerant discharged from the compressor to
change it into a liquid.

3.

Liquid tank

Filters and stores a reserve of liquid refrigerant.

4.

Pressure sensor

Senses refrigerant pressure for proper A/C cycle operation.

5.

Evaporator

Evaporates refrigerant which removes heat from the air lowering its temperature.

6.

Expansion valve

Transforms high-pressure liquid refrigerant to low-pressure liquid refrigerant.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-11

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Workflow

INFOID:0000000009477967

OVERALL SEQUENCE

ALIIA0440GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW CUSTOMER
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
Revision: April 2013

HA-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
A

>> GO TO 2.

2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify symptoms.

B

>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK FOR DTCS

C

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

D

E

4.PERFORM DTC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Perform the diagnostic procedure for the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart».

F

G

>> GO TO 7.

5.OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, «Work Procedure».

H

>> GO TO 6.

6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

HA

Check the symptom diagnosis table. Refer to HA-14, «Symptom Table».
J

>> GO TO 8.

7.VERIFY REPAIR.

K

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

L

M

8.PERFORM FINAL OPERATION CHECK

Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, «Work Procedure».
Does it operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-13

2014 Note

REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Trouble Diagnosis For Unusual Pressure

INFOID:0000000009014871

Diagnose using a manifold gauge set whenever refrigerant pressures are unusual. The marker above the
gauge scale in the following table indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Refer to HA-23, «Inspection».

Symptom Table
Gauge indication

Both high and low-pressure sides
are too high.

INFOID:0000000009014872

Refrigerant cycle

Probable cause

The pressure returns to normal soon after sprinkling water on condenser.

Overfilled refrigerant.

Recover refrigerant, evacuate
system, and recharge with the
specified amount of refrigerant.
Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».

Air flow to condenser is insufficient.

Insufficient condenser cooling
performance.
• Poor cooling fan rotation.
• Missing and/or improper installation of air guides.
• Clogged or dirty condenser
fins.

• Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
• Clean and/or repair condenser fins.

Air mixed with refrigerant.

Recover refrigerant, evacuate
system, and recharge with the
specified amount of refrigerant.
Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».

• Low-pressure pipe is cooler
than the outlet of evaporator.
• Low-pressure pipe is frosted.

Expansion valve opened too
much (excessive flow of refrigerant).

Replace expansion valve. Refer
to HA-33, «EXPANSION VALVE
: Removal and Installation».

High-pressure pipe and upper
side of condenser become
hot, however, liquid tank does
not become so hot.

Clogged or crushed high-pressure pipe located between
compressor and condenser.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

• The readings of both sides
become equal soon after
compressor stops.
• There is no temperature difference between high and
low-pressure sides.

Malfunctioning compressor (insufficient compressor pressure
operation).
• Damaged or broken of internal components.
• Malfunctioning gaskets.

Replace compressor. Refer to
HA-25, «Removal and Installation».

When compressor stops,
high-pressure gauge quickly
drops by approximately 196
AC359A

Corrective action

kPa (2 kg/cm2, 28 psi), then
gradually decreases.

High-pressure side is excessively
high and low-pressure side is too
low.

AC360A

High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.

AC356A

Revision: April 2013

HA-14

2014 Note

REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Gauge indication

Both high and low-pressure sides
are too low.

Refrigerant cycle

Probable cause

Corrective action

• The area around evaporator outlet does not become
cold.
• The area around evaporator inlet becomes frosted.

Clogged expansion valve.
• Breakage of temperature
sensor.
• Clogging by foreign material.

Eliminate foreign material from
expansion valve, or replace it.

• There is a temperature difference between the areas
around outlet and inlet
pipes of liquid tank.
• Liquid tank becomes frosted.

Malfunction inside liquid tank
(clogged strainer).

Replace condenser (includes
liquid tank). Refer to HA-29,
«CONDENSER : Removal and
Installation».

Clogged or crushed low-pressure pipe.

Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Malfunctioning thermo amp.

Check thermo amp. system.
Refer to HAC-11, «Component
Parts Location».

• Low refrigerant charge.
• Leak or leaks in A/C system.

• Check for leaks. Refer to HA17, «Leak Test».
• Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge
with the specified amount of
refrigerant. Refer to HA-19,
«Recycle Refrigerant».

• Icing caused by moisture
mixed with refrigerant.
• Deteriorated dryer material
in liquid tank.

Recover refrigerant then replace condenser (includes liquid tank). Refer to HA-29,
«CONDENSER : Removal and
Installation». Evacuate system
and recharge with the specified
amount of refrigerant. Refer to
HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».

AC353A

Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative.

• Sometimes the area
around evaporator outlet
does not become cold.
• Sometimes the area
around evaporator inlet is
frosted.

B

C

D

Evaporator becomes frosted.

There is a small temperature
difference between the high
and low pressure pipes.

A

AC354A

E

F

G

H

HA

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-15

2014 Note

NOISE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NOISE
Symptom Table
Symptom

Unusual noise from compressor
when A/C is ON.

Unusual noise from cooler piping.

Unusual noise from expansion
valve when A/C is ON.

Unusual noise from belt.

Revision: April 2013

INFOID:0000000009014873

Noise source

Probable cause

Corrective action

Inside of compressor

Worn, broken, or clogged internal components.

Check compressor oil. Refer to HA-21, «Description».

Magnet clutch

Contact of clutch disc with pulley.

Check clearance between
clutch disc and pulley. Refer
to HA-25, «Inspection».

Compressor body

Loose compressor mounting bolts.

Check torque of mounting
bolts. Refer to HA-25, «Exploded View».

Cooler piping (pipe and
flexible hose)

Loose or improper installation of clip
and bracket.

Check installation of cooler
piping. Refer to HA-27, «Exploded View».

Low refrigerant charge.

• Check for leaks. Refer to
HA-17, «Leak Test».
• Recover refrigerant,
evacuate system, and recharge with the specified
amount of refrigerant.

Worn, broken, or clogged internal components.

Eliminate foreign material
from expansion valve, or replace it.

Loose belt

Check belt tension. Refer to
EM-17, «Adjustment».

Damaged or broken components inside compressor.

Replace compressor. Refer
to HA-25, «Removal and Installation».

Expansion valve

—

HA-16

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

REFRIGERANT
Description

INFOID:0000000009460333

B

CONNECTION OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
C

D

E

F

G

H
JSIIA0239ZZ

1.

Shut-off valve

2.

A/C service valve

3.

Recovery/recycling/recharging
equipment

4.

Refrigerant container (HFC-134a)

5.

Weight scale

6.

Vacuum pump

7.

Manifold gauge set

A.

Preferred (best) method

B.

Alternative method

C.

For charging

Leak Test

HA

J
INFOID:0000000009460334

K

CHECK REFRIGERANT LEAKS USING FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTION DYE

L

M

N

O

P
RJIA3815J

1.
2.
3.

Install a fender cover (1).
Wear UV safety goggles (2) provided with refrigerant dye leak detection kit.
Connect power cable (4) of UV lamp (6) to positive and negative terminals of the battery (3).

Revision: April 2013

HA-17

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Press UV lamp switch (5) and check A/C system for refrigerant leaks. (Where refrigerant leaks occur, fluorescent leak detection dye appears green in color.)
WARNING:
Do not look directly into UV lamp light source.
NOTE:
• For continuous operating time of UV lamp, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
• Illuminate pipe joints from different angles using UV lamp to check for leaks.
• Use a mirror in areas that are difficult to see to check for leaks.
• Refrigerant leaks from the evaporator can be detected by soaking a cotton swab or similar material with
drain hose water and illuminating it using the UV lamp.
• Dust, dirt, and packing material adhesives used for condenser, evaporator, and other components may
fluoresce. Be careful not to misidentify leaks.
5. Repair or replace parts where refrigerant leaks occur and wipe off fluorescent leak detection dye.
NOTE:
Completely wipe off fluorescent leak detection dye from gaps between parts, screw threads, and other
components using a cotton swab or similar material.
6. Use a UV lamp to check that no fluorescent leak detection dye remains after finishing work.
WARNING:
Do not look directly into UV lamp light source.
NOTE:
• For continuous operating time of UV lamp, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
• Dust, dirt, and packing material adhesives used for condenser, evaporator, and other components may
fluoresce. Be careful not to misidentify leaks.

CHECK REFRIGERANT LEAKS USING ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
WARNING:
Do not check for refrigerant leaks while the engine is running.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the following items so that inaccurate checks or misidentifications are avoided.
• Do not allow refrigerant vapor, shop chemical vapors, cigarette smoke or other contaminates around
the vehicle.
• Always check refrigerant leaks in a low air flow environment so that refrigerant may not disperse.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment or manifold gauge set to the A/C service valves.
3.

4.

5.
6.

Check that A/C refrigerant pressure is 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) or more when temperature is 16°C
(61°F) or more. When pressure is lower than the specified value, recycle refrigerant completely and
recharge refrigerant to the specified level.
NOTE:
Leaks may not be detected if A/C refrigerant pressure is 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) or less when temperature is less than 16°C (61°F).
Clean the area where the refrigerant leak check is performed and check for refrigerant leaks along all surfaces of pipe connections and A/C system components using electronic leak detector probe.
CAUTION:
• Continue checking once leaks are found. Always continue and complete checking along all pipe
connections and A/C system components for additional leaks.
• When leaks are detected, clean leak area using compressed air and re-check.
• When checking the evaporator for leaks, always clean inside of drain hose so that the probe surface may not be exposed to water or dirt.
NOTE:
• Always check for leaks starting from the high-pressure side and continue to the low-pressure side.
• When checking the evaporator for leaks, operate blower motor for 15 minutes or more at the maximum
speed while the engine is stopped. Insert electronic leak detector probe into drain hose and hold for 10
minutes or more.
• When disconnecting shut-off valve that is connected to A/C service valve, always evacuate remaining
refrigerant so that misidentification can be avoided.
Repair or replace parts where refrigerant leaks occur.
Start the engine and set A/C control in the following conditions.
• A/C switch: ON

Revision: April 2013

HA-18

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Air flow: VENT (ventilation)
• Intake door position: Recirculation
• Temperature setting: Full cold
• Blower speed: Maximum
7. Run the engine at approximately 1,500 rpm for two minutes or more.
8. Stop the engine. Check for refrigerant leaks. Go to step 4.
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned when the engine is hot.
NOTE:
• Start refrigerant leak check immediately after the engine is
stopped.
• When refrigerant circulation is stopped, pressure on the lowpressure side rises gradually and pressure on the high-pressure side falls gradually.
• The higher the pressure is, the easier it is to find refrigerant
leaks.

A

B

C

D

E

F
SHA839E

Recycle Refrigerant

INFOID:0000000009460335

G

WARNING:
• Always use HFC-134a for A/C refrigerant. If CFC-12 is accidentally charged, compressor damage H
may result due to insufficient lubrication.
• Always observe and follow precautions described on refrigerant container. Incorrect handling may
result in an explosion of refrigerant container, frostbite or the loss of eyesight.
HA
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, or throat.
• Do not allow HFC-134a to be exposed to an open flame. Poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant
burns. Keep workshop well ventilated.
1. Perform oil return operation. Refer to HA-21, «Perform Oil Return Operation». (If refrigerant or oil leaks are J
detected in a large amount, omit this step, and go to step 2.)
CAUTION:
Do not perform oil return operation if a large amount of refrigerant or oil has leaked.
K
2. Check pressure gauge readings of recovery/recycling/recharging equipment. When remaining pressure
exists, recycle refrigerant from high-pressure hose and low-pressure hose.
NOTE:
L
Follow manufacturer instructions for the handling or maintenance of the equipment. Do not fill the equipment with non-specified refrigerant.
3. Remove A/C service valve caps from the vehicle.
M
4. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment to A/C service valves.
5. Operate recovery/recycling/recharging equipment, and recycle refrigerant from the vehicle.
6. Evacuate air for 10 minutes or more to remove any remaining refrigerant integrated in the compressor oil, N
etc.
7. Refrigerant recycle operation is complete.

Charge Refrigerant

INFOID:0000000009460336

WARNING:
• Always use HFC-134a for A/C refrigerant. If CFC-12 is accidentally charged, compressor damage
may result due to insufficient lubrication.
• Always observe and follow precautions described on refrigerant container. Incorrect handling may
result in an explosion of refrigerant container, frostbite, or the loss of eyesight.
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure my irritate eyes, nose, or throat.
• Do not allow HFC-134a to be exposed to an open flame. Poisonous gas is produce if refrigerant
burns. Keep workshop well ventilated.
1. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment to the A/C service valves.
Revision: April 2013

HA-19

2014 Note

O

P

REFRIGERANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Operate recovery/recycling/recharging equipment, and evacuate air from A/C system for 25 minutes or
more.
CAUTION:
Evacuate air for 15 minutes or more if parts are replaced.
3. Check the airtightness of A/C system for 25 minutes or more. If pressure raises more than the specified
level, charge A/C system with approximately 200g of refrigerant and check that there are no refrigerant
leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».
CAUTION:
Check the airtightness for 15 minutes or more if parts are replaced.
4. If parts other than the compressor are replaced, fill compressor oil according to parts that are replaced.
Refer to HA-21, «Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor».
5. Charge the specified amount of refrigerant into A/C system.
6. Check that the A/C system operates normally.
7. Collect the refrigerant from the high-pressure hose and low-pressure hose of recovery/recycling/recharging equipment. Disconnect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment.
8. Install A/C service valve caps.
9. Refrigerant charge is complete.

Revision: April 2013

HA-20

2014 Note

OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

OIL

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009014865

MAINTENANCE OF OIL LEVEL

B

The compressor oil circulates in the system together with the refrigerant. It is necessary to add oil to the compressor when replacing A/C system components or when a large amount of refrigerant leaks from the system.
It is important to always maintain oil level within the specified level. Otherwise, the following conditions may
occur.
• Insufficient oil amount: Stuck compressor
• Excessive oil amount: Insufficient cooling (caused by insufficient heat exchange)

C

Name

D

A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009014866

E

If a compressor is malfunctioning (internal noise, insufficient cooling), check the compressor oil.

1.COMPRESSOR OIL JUDGMENT
1.
2.

F

Remove the compressor. Refer to HA-25, «Removal and Installation».
Sample the compressor oil and judge on the figure.
G

H

HA
JSIIA0927GB

J

Judgement result 1>>Replace compressor only.
Judgement result 2>>Replace compressor and condenser (includes liquid tank).

Perform Oil Return Operation

INFOID:0000000009014867

CAUTION:
If a large amount of refrigerant or oil leaks from the system, do not perform oil return operation.
1. Start the engine and set the front air control to the following conditions.
• Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
• A/C switch: ON
• Blower speed: Maximum
• Intake door position: Recirculation
• Temperature setting: Full cold
2. Perform oil return operation for approximately 10 minutes.
3. Stop the engine.
4. Oil return operation is complete.

K

L

M

N

O

Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
INFOID:0000000009014868

P

Add the amount of oil that is calculated according to the following conditions.
Example: Oil amount to be added when replacing evaporator [m (Imp fl oz.)] = 35 (1.2) + α
Oil amount to be added to A/C system
m (Imp fl oz.)

Conditions
Replace evaporator

35 (1.2)

Replace condenser (includes liquid tank)

20 (0.7)

Revision: April 2013

HA-21

2014 Note

OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Oil amount to be added to A/C system
m (Imp fl oz.)

Conditions
Refrigerant leak is detected

Large amount leakage

30 (1.1)

Small amount leakage

—

Oil amount that is recycled together with refrigerant during recycle operation

α

Oil Adjusting Procedure for Compressor Replacement
1.

INFOID:0000000009014869

Drain oil from removed compressor and measure amount drained.
• Drain oil from high-pressure port (A) and low-pressure port (B)
while rotating magnet clutch.
• Measure total amount of oil that is drained from removed compressor.

JMIIA0940ZZ

2.

Drain oil from a new compressor that is calculated according to
the following conditions.
Amount to be drained (A) [m (Imp fl oz.)] = F − (D
+ S + R + α)
F: Oil amount that a new compressor contains
[120 (4.2)]
D: Oil amount that is drained from removed compressor
S: Oil amount that remains inside of removed
compressor [20 (0.7)]
R: Oil amount to be added according to components that are removed except compressor
α: Oil amount that is recycled together with refrigerant during recycle operation
CAUTION:
If oil amount that is drained from removed compressor is less than 60 m
calculation by setting “D” as 40 m (1.4 Imp fl oz.).
Conditions

(2.1 Imp fl oz.), perform

Oil amount to be added to A/C system
m (Imp fl oz.)

Replace evaporator

35 (1.2)

Replace condenser (includes liquid tank)

20 (0.7)

3.

JPIIA1455GB

Example: Oil amount to be drained from a new compressor when replacing compressor [m
[D = 60 (2.1), α = 5 (0.2)]
120 (4.2) − [60 (2.1) + 20 (0.7) + 5 (0.2)] = 35 (1.1)
Install compressor and check the operation.

Revision: April 2013

HA-22

(Imp fl oz.)]

2014 Note

PERFORMANCE TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERFORMANCE TEST

A

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009014870

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

B

Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment (for HFC-134a) or manifold gauge set.
Start the engine, and set to the following condition.

C

Test condition

Surrounding condition

Vehicle condition

A/C condition (front/rear)

3.
4.
5.

In a well-ventilated place away from direct sunlight.
Doors

Closed

Door glass

Closed

Hood

Open

Engine speed

Idle speed

Temperature control

Full cold

A/C switch

ON

Air outlet

VENT (ventilation)

Intake door position

Recirculation

Blower speed

Maximum

D

E

F

G

Maintain test condition until A/C system becomes stable. (Approximately 10 minutes)
Check that test results of “recirculating-to-discharge air temperature” and “ambient air temperature-toH
operating pressure” are within the specified value.
When test results are within the specified value, inspection is complete.
If any test result is out of the specified value, perform diagnosis by manifold gauge set. Refer to HA-14,
HA
«Symptom Table».

RECIRCULATING-TO-DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE TABLE
FRONT

J

Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%

50 – 60

60 – 70

Discharge air temperature from center ventilator
°C (°F)

Air temperature
°C (°F)
20 (68)

4.7 — 6.7 (40 — 44)

25 (77)

8.6 — 11.1 (47 — 52)

30 (86)

12.6 — 15.6 (55 — 60)

35 (95)

19.0 — 22.5 (66 — 73)

20 (68)

6.7 — 8.7 (44 — 48)

25 (77)

11.1 — 13.6 (52 — 56)

30 (86)

15.6 — 18.6 (60 — 65)

35 (95)

22.5 — 26.0 (73 — 79)

K

L

M

N

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE-TO-OPERATING PRESSURE TABLE

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-23

2014 Note

PERFORMANCE TEST
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Fresh air
Relative humidity
%

High-pressure (Discharge side)

Low-pressure (Suction side)

kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

25 (77)

900 — 1,112
(9.2 — 11.3, 130.5 — 161.2)

159 — 194
(1.6 — 2.0, 23.1 — 28.1)

30 (86)

1,073 — 1,312
(10.9 — 13.4, 155.6 — 190.2)

211 — 259
(2.2 — 3.1, 30.6 — 37.6)

35 (95)

1,445 — 1,766
(14.7 — 18.0, 209.5 — 256.1)

247 — 300
(2.5 — 3.1, 35.8 — 43.5)

40 (104)

1,650 — 2,017
(16.8 — 20.6, 239.3 — 292.5)

290 — 355
(3.0 — 3.6, 42.1 — 51.5)

Air temperature
°C (°F)

50 – 70

Revision: April 2013

HA-24

2014 Note

COMPRESSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

COMPRESSOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014874

B

C

D

E

F

G

JMIIA1211GB

1.

High-pressure flexible hose

2.

O-ring

3.

Compressor

4.

Low-pressure flexible hose

A.

To condenser

B.

To evaporator

Removal and Installation

H

HA
INFOID:0000000009395299

REMOVAL

J

1.
2.
3.
4.

K

5.
6.
7.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hoses and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect magnet clutch harness connector.
Remove bolts and compressor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to the new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible
hose for installation.
• Perform oil adjusting procedure before installing new compressor. Refer to HA-22, «Oil Adjusting
Procedure for Compressor Replacement».
• Check drive belt tension after installing compressor. Refer to EM-17, «Adjustment».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009395300

CHECK DISC TO PULLEY CLEARANCE

Revision: April 2013

HA-25

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

COMPRESSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the clearance (B) between pulley assembly (1) and clutch
disc (2) along the entire periphery with a feeler gauge (A).
Clearance

: Refer to HA-35, «Compressor».

If specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting spacer and
readjust.

AWIIA1462ZZ

Revision: April 2013

HA-26

2014 Note

COOLER PIPE AND HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COOLER PIPE AND HOSE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014875

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HA

J
AWIIA1685GB

1.

Heating and cooling unit assembly

2.

O-ring

3.

High-pressure pipe

4.

Condenser

5.

High-pressure flexible hose

6.

Compressor

7.

Low-pressure flexible hose

K

L

LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395304

M

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Disconnect vacuum hose from intake manifold. Refer to BR-32, «Exploded View».
Remove ground wire from engine to radiator core support upper.
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove low-pressure flexible hose nut and bolt, then position lower dash insulator as necessary.
Remove bolt and low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl tape
to avoid the entry of air.
Remove bolt and low-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.

Revision: April 2013

HA-27

2014 Note

N

O

P

COOLER PIPE AND HOSE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of low-pressure flexible hose for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE

HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395305

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.
Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure flexible hose for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE

HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395306

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

7.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-27, «LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and
Installation».
Remove high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-28, «HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation».
Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove bolt and high-pressure pipe from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.
Release clips and remove high-pressure pipe from vehicle.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure pipe for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

Revision: April 2013

HA-28

2014 Note

CONDENSER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CONDENSER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014876

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HA
AWIIA1695ZZ

1.

Refrigerant pressure sensor

2.

Condenser with liquid tank

3.

O-ring

J

CONDENSER
CONDENSER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395310

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

7.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove air guides. Refer to DLK-122, «Exploded View».
Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.
Remove bolt and high-pressure pipe from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air.
Disconnect the harness connector from the refrigerant pressure sensor and remove condenser.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
Revision: April 2013

HA-29

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

CONDENSER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.
• Perform oil adjusting procedure before installing new condenser. Refer to HA-21, «Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor».
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

LIQUID TANK

LIQUID TANK : Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank

INFOID:0000000009395311

The liquid tank is only serviced as part of the condenser. Refer to HA-29, «CONDENSER : Removal and Installation».

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395312

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove upper air guide and air guide (LH). Refer to DLK-122, «Exploded View».
Clean refrigerant pressure sensor and surrounding area.
CAUTION:
Make sure to clean carefully.
Disconnect the harness connector from the refrigerant pressure
sensor.
Support liquid tank, then remove refrigerant pressure sensor (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage liquid tank.
• Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser.
• Cap or wrap the joint of the condenser and liquid tank
with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry
of air.
ALIIA0004ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

Revision: April 2013

HA-30

2014 Note

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014877

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HA

J

AWIIA1689ZZ

1.

Heating and cooling unit assembly

4.

Bracket

2.

Steering member

3.

K

Cap

Pawl

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-31

2014 Note

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AWIIA1696ZZ

1.

Intake case

2.

Thermo control amp.

3.

Evaporator

4.

O-ring

5.

Expansion valve

6.

O-ring

7.

Grommet

8.

Heater pipe flange

9.

Heater core

10. Front blower motor

11. Heating and cooling unit assembly

12. Seal

13. Seal

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395313

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, «LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl tape
to avoid the entry of air.
Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-28, «HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE :
Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.
Disconnect heater hoses from heater core.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect evaporator drain hose from heating and cooling unit assembly.

Revision: April 2013

HA-32

2014 Note

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
8. Disconnect harness connectors, grounds, retainers, etc., and remove bolts required to remove steering
member.
9. Remove steering member and heating and cooling unit assembly.
10. Remove heating and cooling unit assembly from steering member. Refer to HA-31, «Exploded View».

B

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».
NOTE:
When refilling engine coolant, refer to CO-9, «Refilling».

HEATER CORE

D

INFOID:0000000009395314

F

REMOVAL

2.
3.
4.
5.

C

E

HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation
1.

A

Remove the heating and cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-32, «HEATING AND COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Remove foot duct (LH). Refer to VTL-7, «FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Remove heater packing.
Remove heater pipe flange.
Remove heater core.

G

H

INSTALLATION
HA

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
When refilling engine coolant, refer to CO-9, «Refilling».

EVAPORATOR

J

EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395315

K

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove heating and cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-32, «HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Remove foot duct (RH). Refer to VTL-7, «FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Remove intake case. Refer to HA-31, «Exploded View».
Remove expansion valve. Refer to HA-33, «EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation».
Remove evaporator cover and evaporator assembly.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings for installation.
• Perform oil adjusting procedure after installing new evaporator. Refer to HA-21, «Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor».
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

EXPANSION VALVE

EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009395316

REMOVAL
1.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».

Revision: April 2013

HA-33

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, «LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation».
3. Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-28, «HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE :
Removal and Installation».
4. Remove bolts and expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the evaporator and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

Revision: April 2013

HA-34

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Compressor

INFOID:0000000009014878

Model

CALSONIC KANSEI CR08b

Type

Vane rotary

Displacement

83 cm3 (5.1cu in)/rev

Maximum

Direction of rotation

Clockwise (viewed from clutch)

Drive belt
Disc to pulley clearance

B

C

D

Poly V
Standard

0.25 – 0.55 mm (0.010 – 0.022 in)

Oil

E

INFOID:0000000009014879

F
Name

A/C System Oil Type DH-PR (Type R)
Total in system

Capacity

110 — 130 m

Replacement compressor charging
amount

(3.9 — 4.6 Imp fl oz)

G

Refer to HA-22, «Oil Adjusting Procedure for
Compressor Replacement».

H

Refrigerant

INFOID:0000000009014880

Type

HA

HFC-134a (R-134a)

Capacity

0.4 kg (0.9 lb)

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HA-35

2014 Note

VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

SECTION

HAC

HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 20

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R ………………………………… 20

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………20

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover…… 3
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 3
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service ………… 4
Service Equipment ……………………………………………. 6

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 21

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 8

Workflow …………………………………………………………27

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 8
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 8
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 8
Sealant and/or Oil …………………………………………… 10

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 11
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………11
Component Parts Location ……………………………….. 11

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….13
System Description …………………………………………. 13
Compressor Control ………………………………………… 13
Door Control …………………………………………………… 14

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ……… 21

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 27

OPERATION INSPECTION ………………………… 29

HAC

J

Work Procedure ……………………………………………….29

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 31

K

A/C ON SIGNAL ………………………………………… 31
Component Function Check ………………………………31
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..31
Component Inspection ………………………………………32

L

BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL ……………………….. 34

M

Component Function Check ………………………………34
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..34

A/C INDICATOR ………………………………………… 36

Switch Name and Function ………………………………. 17

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR …………………………. 37

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….18

Description ………………………………………………………37
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..37
Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor) ………..39
Component Inspection (Blower Relay) ………………..39
Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Resistor) ……………………………………………………………..39
Component Inspection (Fan Switch) …………………..39

Revision: April 2013

H

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 27

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..36

AIR CONDITIONER …………………………………………… 18
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) ……………………………………….. 19

G

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..21

OPERATION ……………………………………………….17

COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………… 18
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) …………………………………………….. 18

F

MAGNET CLUTCH ……………………………………. 41
Description ………………………………………………………41

HAC-1

2014 Note

N

O

P

Component Function Check …………………………….. 41
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 41

THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER ……………….. 48

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 43

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ………… 49

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ……… 43

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 48
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 49

Symptom Table ……………………………………………… 43

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR ………… 50

INSUFFICIENT COOLING …………………………… 44

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 50
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 50

Description …………………………………………………….. 44
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 44

INSUFFICIENT HEATING …………………………… 45
Description …………………………………………………….. 45
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 45

COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE ……….. 46
Description …………………………………………………….. 46
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 46

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 47
FRONT AIR CONTROL ………………………………. 47
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 47
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 47

Revision: April 2013

DOOR CABLE …………………………………………… 51
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 51
INTAKE DOOR CABLE …………………………………….. 51
INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation
… 51
INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment ………………… 51
MODE DOOR CABLE ……………………………………….. 52
MODE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation… 52
MODE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment …………………… 52
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE …………………………………….. 52
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation
… 52
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Adjustment ………………… 52

HAC-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009515769

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

C

D

E

F

G

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the HAC
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009515770

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

J

K

L

M
PIIB3706J

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009643769

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
Revision: April 2013

HAC-3

2014 Note

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< PRECAUTION >
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Precautions For Refrigerant System Service

INFOID:0000000009515771

GENERAL REFRIGERANT PRECAUTION
WARNING:
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant. Ventilate work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs. Additional health and
safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling recharging equipment to
capture the refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Wear always eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame. Place the bottom of the container in a pail of
warm water if container warming is required.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames. Poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation.
• Do not pressure test or leakage test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.

WORKING WITH HFC-134a (R-134a)
CAUTION:
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. These refrigerants
must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. Compressor malfunction is likely occur if the
refrigerants are mixed.
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components.
Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if oil other than that specified is used.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
— Cap (seal) immediately the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle.
— Do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrigerant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system.
— Use only the specified oil from a sealed container. Reseal immediately containers of oil. Oil becomes
moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
— Do not allow oil (A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR) to come in contact with styrene foam parts. Damage
may result.

REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following location.
• Expansion valve to evaporator
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-4

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< PRECAUTION >
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle.
Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low-pressure chamber.
• Use always a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Plug immediately all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle.
Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Remove thoroughly moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Replace always used O-rings.
• Apply oil to the O-rings shown in illustrations when connecting tubes. Be careful not to apply oil to
threaded portion.
Name

: A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR

• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube.
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly.
• Perform leak test and make sure there are no leaks from connections after connecting lines. Disconnect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leak point is found. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L
RHA861F

COMPRESSOR
CAUTION:
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle.
• Follow “MAINTENANCE OF OIL LEVEL” exactly when replacing or repairing compressor. Refer to
HA-21, «Description».
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe them off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with solvent if the surfaces are contaminated with oil.
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service
operation. This equally distributes oil inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate the
compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new clutch to check for normal
operation.

LEAK DETECTION DYE
CAUTION:
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-5

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< PRECAUTION >
• The fluorescent leak detection dye is not a replacement for an electronic leak detector. The fluorescent leak detection dye should be used in conjunction with an electronic leak detector to pin-point
refrigerant leaks.
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic leak detector.
• Always remove any remaining dye from the leak area after repairs are completed to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle [1/4 ounce (7.4 cc)] per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system, or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system, or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunction occurs.
NOTE:
Identification
• Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
• Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.

Service Equipment

INFOID:0000000009515772

RECOVERY/RECYCLING RECHARGING EQUIPMENT
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Do not
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.

ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.

VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure. Vacuum
pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is
possible when the pump is switched OFF after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hoseto-pump connection, as per the following.
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.

RHA270DA

MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

Revision: April 2013

HAC-6

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils.

[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
A

B

C
SHA533D

D

SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must be equipped with
positive shut-off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of
the hoses opposite to the manifold gauge.

E

F

G
RHA272D

SERVICE COUPLERS

H

Do not attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
the CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
do not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation

A/C service valve

Clockwise

Open

Counterclockwise

Close

HAC

J

K
RHA273D

REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

L

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must be 1/
2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.

M

N

RHA274D

O

CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-7

2014 Note

P

PREPARATION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009643776

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009667202

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-41810-NI)
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a)

For checking refrigerant purity and
system contamination

RJIA0197E

( — )
Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

(J-48710)
NISSAN ACR2009 RRR Unit

Refrigerant recovery, recycling and recharging

WJIA0293E

Revision: April 2013

HAC-8

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-41995)
Electronic refrigerant leak detector

Power supply:
• DC 12V (battery terminal)

A

B

C

D
AHA281A

Power supply:
• DC 12V (battery terminal)

(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
Fluorescent leak detection dye
(box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner

E

F

G

H

ZHA200H

(J-39183-C)
Manifold gauge set (with hoses and
couplers)

Identification:
• The gauge face indicates R-134a.
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

HAC

J

K
RJIA0196E

Hose color:
• Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
• High side hose: Red with black
stripe
• Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME

Service hoses:
• High side hose
(J-39500-72B)
• Low side hose
(J-39500-72R)
• Utility hose
(J-39500-72Y)
S-NT201

Service couplers
• High side coupler
(J-39500-20A)
• Low side coupler
(J-39500-24A)

Hose fitting to service hose:
• M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached.

L

M

N

O

P
S-NT202

Revision: April 2013

HAC-9

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39699)
Refrigerant weight scale

For measuring of refrigerant
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT200

(J-39649)
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)

Capacity:
• Air displacement: 4 CFM
• Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT203

Sealant and/or Oil

INFOID:0000000009643779

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

( — )
HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant

Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME

S-NT196

( — )
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DHPR

Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type DH-PR
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) Vanerotary compressors
Capacity: 110 — 130 m (3.7 — 4.4 US fl
oz, 3.9 — 4.6 Imp fl oz)
JMIIA1759ZZ

Revision: April 2013

HAC-10

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009477926

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

ALIIA0811ZZ

A.

RH front of engine compartment

B.

J

Behind LH side of front fascia

K
No.

Component

Description

1.

ECM

The ECM sends a compressor ON request to the IPDM E/R based on the status of engine
operation and load as well as refrigerant pressure information. If all the conditions are met for
A/C operation, the ECM transmits the compressor ON request to the IPDM E/R.

2.

IPDM E/R

A/C relay is integrated in IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R operates A/C relay when receiving A/C compressor request signal from ECM via CAN communication line.

3.

A/C compressor

Vaporized refrigerant is drawn into the A/C compressor from the evaporator, where it is compressed to a high pressure, high temperature vapor. The hot, compressed vapor is then discharged to the condenser.

4.

Refrigerant pressure sensor

Refer to EC-22, «Refrigerant Pressure Sensor».

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-11

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ALIIA0812ZZ

A.

LH side of instrument panel

No.

B.

Behind center of instrument panel

Component

C.

Center of instrument panel

Description

1.

BCM

The BCM receives the fan ON and A/C ON signals from the front air control and sends a compressor ON request to the ECM.

2.

Fuse Block (J/B)

Located in the passenger compartment, behind the left lower IP, the Fuse Block (J/B) contains the front blower motor relay and several fuses required for the air conditioner control
system.

3.

Front blower motor relay

The front blower motor relay controls the flow of current to fuse 20, 21 and 22 in the Fuse
Block (J/B). The relay is connected directly to ground, and is energized when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.

4.

Front blower motor

The front blower motor varies the speed at which the air flows through the ventilation system.

Front blower motor resistor

Ground for the blower is supplied through blower resistor and the blower speed switch. As
the switch is moved from position 1 through 4, more current is allowed to flow through the
motor, for a higher speed. This is because less resistors are in the path as the switch is
moved to a higher position. When the switch is on the highest position, all resistors are bypassed.

6.

Thermo control amp.

Thermo control amp. is composed of thermistor and amplifier. When the A/C switch signal is
received from the front air control, the thermo control amp. transmits the A/C ON signal to the
BCM according to evaporator fin temperature. When the thermistor detecting temperature of
the air that passes through evaporator is extremely low, the thermo control amp. sends the
A/C OFF signal to BCM, and stops the compressor.

7.

Front air control

The front air control controls the operation of the A/C and heating system.

5.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

System Description

INFOID:0000000009477929

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC
ALIIA0477GB

J

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The manual air conditioning system is controlled by a sequence of functions from the front air control, BCM,
ECM, and IPDM E/R.
• The fan speed of the front blower motor is changed by the combination of the fan control dial (fan switch)
operation and blower resistor control.
Module/Function

Door control

A/C request signal

Compressor control

Cooling fan control

HAC-14

—

HAC-13

—

BCM

—

BCS-5

—

—

ECM

—

—

HAC-13

EC-35

IPDM E/R

—

—

HAC-13

EC-35

Front air control

Compressor Control

INFOID:0000000009477930

DESCRIPTION
• When A/C switch signal is received from front air control, the thermo control amp. transmits A/C ON signal to
the BCM according to evaporator fin temperature.
• When the front blower motor is operated, the front air control transmits blower fan ON signal to the BCM.
• BCM transmits the A/C ON signal and blower fan ON signal to ECM via CAN communication line. Refer to
LAN-24, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description»
• ECM judges the conditions of each sensor (Refrigerant pressure sensor signal, accelerator position signal,
etc.), and transmits the A/C compressor request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication line.
• By receiving the A/C compressor request signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns the A/C relay to ON, and activates the compressor. Refer to PCS-5, «RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description»

CONTROL BY THERMO CONTROL AMP.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-13

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Low Temperature Protection Control
• When thermo control amp. detects that evaporator fin temperature
is 1.5°C (35°F) or less, thermo control amp. switches A/C ON signal to OFF and stops the compressor.
When the evaporator fin temperature returns to 3°C (37°F) or
more, the compressor is activated.

JMIIA1228GB

CONTROL BY ECM
Refrigerant Pressure Protection
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high- or low-pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the liquid tank on the condenser. The refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside
the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM. If the system pressure rises above or falls below
the following values, the ECM requests the IPDM E/R to de-energize the A/C relay and disengage the compressor.
• 3.12 MPa (31.82 kg/cm2, 452.4 psi) or more (When the engine speed is less than 1,500 rpm)
• 2.74 MPa (27.95 kg/cm2, 397.3 psi) or more (When the engine speed is 1,500 rpm or more)
• 0.14 MPa (1.43 kg/cm2, 20.3 psi) or less
Compressor Oil Circulation Control
When the engine starts while the engine coolant temperature is 56°C (133°F) or less, ECM activates the compressor for approximately 6 seconds and circulates the compressor oil once.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
When the engine is under a high load condition, the ECM transmits an A/C relay OFF request to IPDM E/R,
and stops the compressor. Refer to EC-33, «AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Description».

Door Control

INFOID:0000000009477931

SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Revision: April 2013

HAC-14

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
ALIIA0807ZZ

1.

Intake door

2.

Blower motor

3.

Evaporator

4.

Air mix door

5.

Heater core

6.

Foot door

7.

HAC

Ventilator and defroster door
Fresh air intake

Recirculation air

Defroster

Center ventilator

Side ventilator

Foot

J

K

B
MODE dial

Air mix door

A–B
—

A–B

N
—

A
Air intake lever

Temperature control dial

O

A
—
Full cold

—

B
—

Full hot

A
B

AIR DISTRIBUTION

Revision: April 2013

HAC-15

L

M

A

A–B
A

Intake door

Switch/Dial
position

Foot door

Ventilator and
defroster door

Door position

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Discharge air flow
Air outlet/distribution
Mode position indication

Revision: April 2013

Ventilator

Foot

Defroster

50%

—

—

30%

30%

40%

—

—

14%

66%

20%

—

14%

51%

35%

—

22%

—

78%

Center

Side

50%

HAC-16

2014 Note

OPERATION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

OPERATION

A

Switch Name and Function

INFOID:0000000009477932

CONTROLLER

B

C

D

E

F

G
JMIIA0933ZZ

1.

Fan control dial (fan switch)

2.

MODE dial

4.

Temperature control dial

5.

A/C switch

3.

H

Intake lever

HAC

SWITCH OPERATION
Fan control dial (fan
switch)

Fan speed can be adjusted within a range from 1st to 4th.

MODE dial

Mode position is selected to an optimal position by operating this dial.

Intake lever

The air inlet changes REC ⇔ FRE each time by operation this lever.

Temperature control dial

The setting temperature can be selected to an optimum temperature by operating this dial.

A/C switch

The compressor control (switch indicator) is turned ON ⇔ OFF each time by pressing this switch
while the blower motor is activated.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009567625

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

AIR CONDITIONER

Revision: April 2013

HAC-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM — AIR CONDITIONER)

INFOID:0000000009567627

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

B

Description

FAN ON SIG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of fan switch.

AIR COND SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of A/C switch.

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-19

2014 Note

BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009477937

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»
EC-62, «Reference Value»

ECM

EC-73, «Fail Safe»
EC-74, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
EC-76, «DTC Index»
PCS-13, «Reference Value»

IPDM E/R

PCS-18, «Fail-safe»
PCS-20, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

HAC-20

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009477938

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

AAIWA0144GB

Revision: April 2013

HAC-21

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAIIA0267GB

Revision: April 2013

HAC-22

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAIIA0268GB

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-23

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAIIA0269GB

Revision: April 2013

HAC-24

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAIIA0270GB

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-25

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAIIA0271GB

Revision: April 2013

HAC-26

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Workflow

INFOID:0000000009477940

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P
ALIIA0440GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW CUSTOMER
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-27

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 2.

2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify symptoms.
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK FOR DTCS
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.PERFORM DTC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

Perform the diagnostic procedure for the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart».
>> GO TO 7.

5.OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, «Work Procedure».
>> GO TO 6.

6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Check the symptom diagnosis table. Refer to HAC-43, «Symptom Table».
>> GO TO 8.

7.VERIFY REPAIR.

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Check DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

8.PERFORM FINAL OPERATION CHECK

Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, «Work Procedure».
Does it operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-28

2014 Note

OPERATION INSPECTION
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

OPERATION INSPECTION

A

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477941

The purpose of the operation inspection is to check that the individual system operates normally.
Check condition

B

: Engine running at normal operating temperature.

1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

C

1. Operate fan control dial.
2. Check that fan speed changes. Check operation for all fan speeds.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

D

E

2.CHECK DISCHARGE AIR
1.
2.
3.

Operate fan control dial to set the fan speed to maximum speed.
Operate MODE dial to each position.
Check that air outlets change according to each indicated air outlet by placing a hand in front of the air
outlets. Refer to VTL-4, «System Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

3.CHECK INTAKE AIR

G

H

1. Operate intake lever to each position.
2. Listen to intake sound and confirm air inlets change.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

HAC

J

4.CHECK COMPRESSOR

1. Turn fan control dial ON.
2. Press A/C switch. The A/C switch indicator is turns ON.
3. Check visually and by sound that the compressor operates.
4. Press A/C switch again. The A/C switch indicator is turns OFF.
5. Check that compressor stops.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

K

L

M

5.CHECK DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE

1. Operate temperature control dial.
2. Check that discharge air temperature changes.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

N

O

6.CHECK TEMPERATURE DECREASE

1. Operate compressor.
2. Turn temperature control dial to full cold position.
3. Check that cool air blows from the air outlets.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

P

7.CHECK TEMPERATURE INCREASE
Revision: April 2013

F

HAC-29

2014 Note

OPERATION INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1. Turn temperature control dial to full hot position.
2. Check that warm air blows from air outlets.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

8.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT

1. Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT.
2. Check that any DTC is detected.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC.
NO
>> Refer to HAC-43, «Symptom Table» and perform the appropriate diagnosis.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-30

2014 Note

A/C ON SIGNAL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

A/C ON SIGNAL
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477942

B

1.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Operate front blower motor.
3. Select “AIR CONDITIONER” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
4. Select “AIR COND SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check status under the following condition.
Monitor item

Condition

AIR COND SW

A/C switch

Status

ON

On

OFF

Off

F

G

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477943

H

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSE

HAC

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check 10A fuse (No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)].
NOTE:
Refer to PG-37, «Terminal Arrangement».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

J

K

2.CHECK THERMO CONTROL AMP. POWER SUPPLY

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect thermo control amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between thermo control amp. harness connector and ground.

M

+
Thermo control amp.
Connector

Terminal

M42

3

−

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

N

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector between thermo control amp. and fuse.

P

3.CHECK THERMO CONTROL AMP. GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to HAC-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».

1.
2.
3.
4.

C

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control connector.
Check continuity between thermo control amp. harness connector and front air control harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-31

2014 Note

A/C ON SIGNAL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Thermo control amp.

Front air control

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M42

1

M33

14

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

4.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check output waveform between thermo control amp. harness connector and ground with using oscilloscope.
+
−

Thermo control amp.
Connector

Terminal

M42

2

Output waveform

Ground

JPMIA0012GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

5.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check front air control. Refer to HAC-32, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace thermo control amp. Refer to HAC-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

6.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between thermo control amp. harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Thermo control amp.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M42

2

M18

27

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009477944

1.CHECK A/C CONTROL
Check continuity front air control terminals.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-32

2014 Note

A/C ON SIGNAL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Terminal
14

Condition
6

A/C switch: ON
Fan control dial: Except OFF position

A

Continuity
Yes

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-33

2014 Note

BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477945

1.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “AIR CONDITIONER” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Select “FAN ON SIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check status under the following condition.
Monitor item

Condition

FAN ON SIG

Fan control dial

Status

Except OFF position

On

OFF position

Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to HAC-34, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477946

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check output waveform between front air control and ground with using oscilloscope.
+
−

Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

5

Output waveform

Ground

PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity front air control harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Front air control

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M33

5

M18

28

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-34

2014 Note

BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT

A

Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground.
B
Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

5

—

Continuity

Ground

No

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

D

E

F

G

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-35

2014 Note

A/C INDICATOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A/C INDICATOR
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477947

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK A/C INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front air control harness connector and ground.
+
Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

15

−

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector between front air control and fuse.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-36

2014 Note

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009477948

The front blower motor utilizes a brush-less motor with a rotating magnet. Quietness is improved over previous
motors where the brush was the point of contact and the coil rotated.

Diagnosis Procedure

B

INFOID:0000000009477949

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, «Wiring Diagram».
D

1.CHECK SYMPTOM
E

Check symptom (A or B).
Symptom

F

A

Front blower motor does not operate at any dial position

B

Front blower motor does not operate at any dial position other than 4th,
or operation speed is not normal.

G

Which symptom is detected?
A
>> GO TO 2.
B
>> GO TO 7.

H

2.CHECK FUSE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check 15A fuses (Nos. 20 and 22, located in fuse block (J/B)].
NOTE:
Refer to PG-37, «Terminal Arrangement».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

HAC

J

3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Disconnect front blower motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector and ground.
+
Front blower motor
Connector

Terminal

M62

1

−

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

M

Ground

Battery voltage

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

O

4.CHECK BLOWER RELAY

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check blower relay. Refer to HAC-39, «Component Inspection (Blower Relay)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair harness or connector between front blower motor and fuse.
NO
>> Replace blower relay.

P

5.CHECK FAN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-37

2014 Note

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground.
Front air control
Connector

Terminal

M33

6

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

6.CHECK FAN SWITCH 4TH POSITION CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Check continuity between front air control harness connector and front blower motor harness connector.
Front air control

Front blower motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M33

1

M62

2

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.

7.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front blower motor resistor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front blower motor resistor harness connector and ground.
+
Front blower motor resistor
Connector

Terminal

M151

3

−

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector between front blower motor resistor and front blower motor.

8.CHECK FAN SWITCH 1ST, 2ND, AND 3RD POSITION CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front air control.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector and front blower motor resistor.
Front air control

Front blower motor resistor

Connector

Terminal

M33

3

Connector

2

Terminal

Continuity

1
M151

4

4

Yes

2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR

Check front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-39, «Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Resistor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
Revision: April 2013

HAC-38

2014 Note

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-50, «Removal and Installation».

10.CHECK FAN SWITCH

A

Check fan switch. Refer to HAC-39, «Component Inspection (Fan Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to VTL-8, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

B

Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor)

INFOID:0000000009477950

1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

D

1. Connect battery voltage to terminal 1 of front blower motor.
2. Connect ground to terminal 2 of front blower motor.
Does the front blower motor operate?
YES >> Intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace front blower motor. Refer to VTL-8, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection (Blower Relay)

C

E

INFOID:0000000009477951

F

1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY
1.
2.

Remove blower relay. Refer to PG-37, «Terminal Arrangement».
Check continuity between blower relay terminal 3 and 5 when
the voltage is supplied between terminal 1 and 2.

G

H
Terminal
3

5

Voltage

Continuity

ON

Yes

OFF

No

HAC

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace blower relay.

J
JSIIA1551ZZ

Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Resistor)

INFOID:0000000009477952

1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
1.
2.

Disconnect front blower motor resistor connector.
Check resistance between front blower motor resistor terminals. Refer to applicable table for the normal
value.

3

1

0.54

4

1.56

2

3.07

N

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-50, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection (Fan Switch)

INFOID:0000000009477953

1.CHECK FAN SWITCH
1.
2.

Remove front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».
Check continuity between front air control terminals.

Revision: April 2013

L

M

Resistance: Ω
(Approx.)

Terminal

K

HAC-39

2014 Note

P

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Condition
Terminal

6

Fan control dial (fan
switch) position
4

1st

3

2nd

2

3rd

1

4th

Continuity

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

HAC-40

2014 Note

MAGNET CLUTCH
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MAGNET CLUTCH

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009477954

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

B

When the blower speed dial is in one of the fan speed positions, the front air control outputs a fan ON signal to
the BCM. When the A/C switch is pressed, the A/C switch LED illuminates and the front air control outputs a
compressor ON signal to the BCM. Any mode control button can be selected. As long as the BCM receives a
compressor ON signal and a fan ON signal from the front air control, the conditions required for the BCM to
transmit a compressor ON request to the ECM have been met.

C

The BCM sends a compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line.

D

The ECM judges whether the compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges the compressor can be turned ON, it sends a compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.

E

Upon receipt of a compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns the A/C relay ON to operate the compressor.

F

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009477955

G

1.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION
Perform auto active test of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-10, «CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to HAC-41, «Diagnosis Procedure».

H

HAC

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477956

J

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSE

K

Check 10A fuse (No. 42, located in IPDM E/R).
NOTE:
Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

L

M

2.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect compressor connector.
3. Directly apply battery voltage to the magnet clutch. Check for operation visually and by sound.
Does it operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to HA-25, «Removal and Installation».

N

O

3.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.

P

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and compressor harness connector.
IPDM E/R

Compressor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

28

F3

1

Revision: April 2013

HAC-41

Continuity
Yes

2014 Note

MAGNET CLUTCH
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-42

2014 Note

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009477957

B

SYMPTOM TABLE
Symptom

C

Reference Page

A/C system does not come on.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.

HAC-29

A/C system cannot be controlled.

Go to Self-diagnosis Function.

HAC-27

Air outlet does not change.

Go to Adjustment Procedure for Mode Door.

HAC-52

Discharge air temperature does not change.

Go to Adjustment Procedure for Air Mix Door.

HAC-52

Intake door does not change.

Go to Adjustment Procedure for Intake Door.

HAC-51

Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor.

HAC-37

Magnet clutch does not engage.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.

HAC-41

Insufficient cooling.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.

HAC-44

Insufficient heating.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.

HAC-45

Noise.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.

A/C switch LED does not illuminate.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.

Both high- and low-pressure sides are too
high.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

High-pressure side is too high and low pressure side is too low.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

Both high- and low-pressure side sometimes
become negative.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

Low-pressure side becomes negative.

Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure.

HA-14

D

E

F

G

HA-16
HAC-36

H

HAC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-43

2014 Note

INSUFFICIENT COOLING
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Description

INFOID:0000000009477958

Symptom

• Insufficient cooling
• No cool air comes out. (Air flow volume is normal.)

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477959

NOTE:
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or DTC
is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.

1.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn fan control dial ON.
3. Press A/C switch.
4. Check that A/C indicator turns ON. Check visually and by sound that compressor operates.
5. Press A/C switch again.
6. Check that A/C indicator turns OFF. Check that compressor stops.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check compressor operation. Refer to HAC-46, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK DRIVE BELT

Check tension of drive belt. Refer to EM-17, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Adjust or replace drive belt depending on the inspection results.

3.CHECK REFRIGERANT CYCLE PRESSURE

Connect the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle and perform the pressure inspection
using gauge. Refer to HA-14, «Symptom Table».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results.

4.CHECK AIR LEAKAGE FROM EACH DUCT

Check duct and nozzle, etc. of the air conditioner system for leakage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check air mix door cable installation and air mix door operation.
NO
>> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-44

2014 Note

INSUFFICIENT HEATING
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

INSUFFICIENT HEATING

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009477960

B

Symptom

• Insufficient heating
• No warm air comes out. (Air flow volume is normal.)

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477961

NOTE:
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or DTC
is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.

1.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM

1. Check engine coolant level and check for leakage. Refer to CO-8, «Inspection».
2. Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-8, «Inspection».
3. Check water flow sounds of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-9, «Refilling».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refill engine coolant and repair or replace the parts depending on the inspection results.

2.CHECK HEATER HOSE

Check installation of heater hose by visually or touching.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results.

C

D

E

F

G

H

3.CHECK HEATER CORE

HAC

1.
2.

Check temperature of inlet hose and outlet hose of heater core.
Check that inlet side of heater core is hot and the outlet side is slightly lower than/almost equal to the inlet
side.
CAUTION:
Always perform the temperature inspection in a short period of time because the engine coolant
temperature is very hot.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace heater core. Refer to HA-33, «HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation».

4.CHECK AIR LEAKAGE FROM EACH DUCT

Check duct and nozzle, etc. of air conditioning system for air leakage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check air mix door cable installation and air mix door operation.
NO
>> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-45

2014 Note

COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE
Description

INFOID:0000000009477962

SYMPTOM
Compressor does not operate.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009477963

NOTE:
• Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or
DTC is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.
• Check that refrigerant system is fully charged. If the refrigerant charge is low, perform the inspection for
refrigerant leakage

1.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION

Check magnet clutch. Refer to HAC-41, «Component Function Check».
Does it operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Check refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to EC-325, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL

Check A/C ON signal. Refer to HAC-31, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL

Check blower fan ON signal. Refer to HAC-34, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts

5.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

With CONSULT
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ECM” using CONSULT.
Select “AIR COND SIG” and “HEATER FAN SW”, and check status under the following conditions.
Monitor item

Condition

AIR COND SIG

A/C switch

HEATER FAN SW

Blower motor

Status

OFF (A/C indicator: OFF)

Off

ON (A/C indicator: ON)

On

OFF

Off

ON

On

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

HAC-46

2014 Note

FRONT AIR CONTROL
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

FRONT AIR CONTROL
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009405613

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWIIA1693ZZ

1.

Front air control

2.

H

Intake door lever knob

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405614

HAC

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove front air control finisher. Refer to IP-23, «Removal and Installation».
Remove audio unit or AV control unit. Refer to AV-33, «Removal and Installation» (AUDIO UNIT), or AV-93,
«Removal and Installation» (DISPLAY AUDIO), or AV-178, «Removal and Installation» (NAVIGATION).
Remove air mix door cable, mode door cable, and intake door cable from the heating and cooling unit
assembly.
Remove screws and front air control.

J

K

L

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-47

2014 Note

THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009645133

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove evaporator. Refer to HA-33, «EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation».
Remove thermo control amplifier from evaporator.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-48

2014 Note

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation

A
INFOID:0000000009515775

CAUTION:
Perform lubricant return operation before each A/C system disassembly. However, if a large amount of
refrigerant or lubricant leaks from the system, do not perform lubricant return operation. Refer to HA21, «Perform Oil Return Operation».

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, «Recycle Refrigerant».
Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove upper air guide and air guide (LH). Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Clean refrigerant pressure sensor and surrounding area.
CAUTION:
Make sure to clean carefully.
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
Support liquid tank, then remove refrigerant pressure sensor (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage liquid tank.
• Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser.
• Cap or wrap the joint of the condenser and liquid tank
with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry
of air.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
ALIIA0004ZZ

HAC

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply compressor oil to new O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, «Leak Test».

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HAC-49

2014 Note

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009405616

AWIIA1465ZZ

1. Heating and cooling unit assembly

2. Front blower motor

Removal and Installation

3.

Front blower motor resistor
INFOID:0000000009405617

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Disconnect harness connector from front blower motor resistor.
Remove screws and front blower motor resistor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-50

2014 Note

DOOR CABLE
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR CABLE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009405618

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

HAC
JMIIA1742ZZ

1.

Heating and cooling unit assembly

2.

Plate

3.

Air mix door linkage 2

4.

Air mix door linkage 1

5.

Air mix door cable

6.

Intake door lever

7.

Intake door linkage

8.

Intake door cable

9.

Foot door lever

10. Mode door cable

11. Main linkage

J

12. Ventilator door rod

K

13. Ventilator door lever
A.

To front air control

L

INTAKE DOOR CABLE
INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405619

M

The intake door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.

INFOID:0000000009405620

Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect intake door cable (1) from clip (A).
Set intake door lever to REC position.
Push intake door link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully
pull outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.

O

P

JMIIA0617ZZ

Revision: April 2013

HAC-51

N

2014 Note

DOOR CABLE
[MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Operate intake door lever to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:
When clipping outer cable, do not move inner cable.

MODE DOOR CABLE
MODE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405621

The mode door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

MODE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.

INFOID:0000000009405622

Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect mode door cable (1) from clip (A).
Set mode dial to VENT position.
Push main link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully pull
outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.

JMIIA0618ZZ

5.

Operate mode dial to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:
When clipping outer cable, do not move inner cable.

AIR MIX DOOR CABLE
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405623

The air mix door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».

AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

INFOID:0000000009405624

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove foot duct (LH). Refer to VTL-7, «FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect air mix door cable (1) from clip (A).
Set temperature dial to full cold position.
Push air mix door link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully
pull outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.

JMIIA0619ZZ

6.

Operate temperature dial to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:
When clipping outer cable, do not move inner cable.

Revision: April 2013

HAC-52

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

HRN

HORN

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 3

HORN ……………………………………………………….. 3

F

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………… 3

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 6

G

HORN ……………………………………………………….. 6
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 6
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 6

H

I

J

K

HRN

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

HRN-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009486656

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

HRN-2

2014 Note

HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

HORN
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009015868

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

HRN

M

N

O

P

AALWA0621GB

Revision: April 2013

HRN-3

2014 Note

HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1362GB

Revision: April 2013

HRN-4

2014 Note

HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

HRN

M

N

O
AALIA1363GB

P

Revision: April 2013

HRN-5

2014 Note

HORN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HORN
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009499766

AWLIA2176ZZ

1. Horn

A. Connector

Removal and Installation

B. Nut
INFOID:0000000009499767

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the horn.
Remove horn nut and the horn.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

HRN-6

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

INL

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 3

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 5
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 5
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 5

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 7
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM ………. 7
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………… 7
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………. 8
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System
Description ………………………………………………………. 8

BCM …………………………………………………………. 12

F

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………12

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 13
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
… 13
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..13

G

H

ILLUMINATION …………………………………………. 19
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..19

I

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 26
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 26

J

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….26

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 28

K

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 28
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………………28
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………………………………….28

INL

BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ……………………………………………. 29

M

N

COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………….. 9
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ………………………………………………. 9

Description ………………………………………………………29
Component Function Check ………………………………29
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..29

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
… 31

O

INT LAMP ………………………………………………………….. 9
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — INT
LAMP) …………………………………………………………… 10

Description ………………………………………………………31
Component Function Check ………………………………31
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..31

P

BATTERY SAVER …………………………………………….. 10
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) …………………………………………. 10

CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT ……………. 33

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….. 9

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 12
Revision: April 2013

Description ………………………………………………………33
Component Function Check ………………………………33
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..33

INL-1

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT ………………………………………. 34
Description …………………………………………………….. 34
Component Function Check …………………………….. 34
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 34

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 39
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………… 39

CARGO ROOM LAMP ……………………………….. 40

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 36

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 40
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 40
Bulb Replacement …………………………………………… 40

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS … 36

SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP …………………………… 41

Symptom Table ……………………………………………… 36

Bulb Replacement …………………………………………… 41

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 37

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH …………… 42

MAP LAMP ……………………………………………….. 37
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 37
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 37
Bulb Replacement ………………………………………….. 37

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 42

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 43

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP …………………………….. 39

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 43

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 39

Bulb Specifications ………………………………………….. 43

Revision: April 2013

INL-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009541368

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009445821

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component K
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
INL
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
M
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
N
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
O
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
P

Revision: April 2013

INL-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009445822

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Revision: April 2013

INL-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009560561

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N
ALLIA1296ZZ

A. View right of steering column

B. Instrument panel view

C. B-pillar LH side (view with door open)

D. C-pillar LH side (view with door open)

No.

Part

Description

1.

Cargo lamp

Refer to INL-43, «Bulb Specifications».

2.

Interior room lamp

Refer to INL-43, «Bulb Specifications».

3.

Map lamp

Refer to INL-43, «Bulb Specifications».

4.

Push-button ignition switch

Refer to STR-4, «STARTING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location».

Revision: April 2013

O

INL-5

P

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Part

Description

5.

BCM

• Activates the interior room lamp timer depending on the vehicle condition to turn the
interior room lamps ON/OFF.
• Operates the interior room lamp battery saver depending on the vehicle condition to
cut the interior room lamp power supply.
• Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• Judges the illumination lamp ON/OFF status depending on the vehicle condition.
And then it transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination
meter (with CAN communication).
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for detailed
installation location.

6.

Front door switch LH (RH side similar)

Refer to EXL-6, «Component Parts Location».

7.

Rear door switch LH (RH side similar)

Refer to EXL-6, «Component Parts Location».

8.

Back door switch

Refer to EXL-6, «Component Parts Location».

Revision: April 2013

INL-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009671253

B

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

ALLIA1322GB

K

OUTLINE
• Interior room lamp is controlled by the interior room lamp timer control function of the BCM.
INL
• Cargo lamp is controlled by the cargo room lamp control function of the BCM.
The timer control functions of the BCM activate based on inputs from the key cylinder lock/unlock switch LH,
the door switches, the key switch and door lock/unlock switches.
M
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION
When the interior room lamp switch is in the DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, the BCM
begins timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp ON/OFF.
• When the front door LH is unlocked with key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power
window and door lock/unlock switch RH or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
• When a door opens → closes and the push-button ignition switch is not pressed (with Intelligent Key).
• When a door opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the ignition switch (without Intelligent Key).
Timer control is cancelled under the following conditions.
• When the front door LH is locked with key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
• A door is opened (door switch turns ON).
• Ignition switch is turned ON.
Interior lamp operational settings can be changed with the function setting of CONSULT.

INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
If an interior lamp is left ON and does not turn OFF even when the doors are closed, the BCM turns off power
to the interior lamps automatically to save the battery 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Revision: April 2013

INL-7

2014 Note

N

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The BCM controls power and ground to all interior lamps.
After the battery saver system turns the lamps OFF, the lamps will illuminate again when
• a signal is received from a key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH or when the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or
unlocked
• a door is opened or closed
• the key is removed from or inserted into the ignition switch (without intelligent key).
The interior lamp battery saver control time period can be changed with the function setting of CONSULT.

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009671255

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWLIA2182GB

OUTLINE
The illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting and turn
signal switch). When the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the parking lamps to illuminate. This input is
communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) via the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized,
this relay directs power to the parking and illumination lamps, which then illuminate.

BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is in the 1st or 2nd position and the ignition
switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition,
the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 15 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting and turn signal
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) position is changed, then
the illumination lamps are turned off after a 30 second delay. When the combination switch (lighting and turn
signal switch) is turned from OFF to 1st or 2nd position after illumination lamps have been turned off by the
battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again.

Revision: April 2013

INL-8

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)

A

COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009578847

B

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

C

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

D

E

F

SYSTEM APPLICATION

G

BCM can perform the following functions.

Active Test

Work support

×

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

ECU identification

Sub System

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Data Monitor

×

System

Configuration

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

I

J

K

INL

M

N
×

×

×
×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

×

×

INL-9

O

P

×

INT LAMP

Revision: April 2013

H

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — INT LAMP)

INFOID:0000000009578848

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]
REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Description
Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH -SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
INT LAMP

Description
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET

SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON

ROOM LAMP TIMER SET

Setting

Description

MODE 2

Interior room lamp timer activates with all doors.

MODE 1*

Interior room lamp timer activates with the driver door only.

On*

Interior room lamp timer function ON.

Off

Interior room lamp timer function OFF.

MODE 4

30 sec.

MODE 3*

15 sec.

MODE 2

7.5 sec.

Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time).

*: Initial setting

BATTERY SAVER
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BATTERY SAVER)

INFOID:0000000009578849

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

Revision: April 2013

INL-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

A

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

B

C

D

E

ACTIVE TEST
Test item
BATTERY SAVER

Description

F

This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
G
Support Item
BATTERY SAVER SET

ROOM LAMP TIMER SET

Setting

Description

ON*

Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.

OFF

Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.

MODE 3*

10 min.

MODE 2

60 min.

MODE 1

15 min.

H

Sets interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time.

I

*: Initial setting

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-11

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009560574

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»

Revision: April 2013

INL-12

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009560575

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P

AALWA0644GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-13

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1413GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-14

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O
AALIA1414GB

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-15

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1415GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-16

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O
AALIA1416GB

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-17

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1417GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-18

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ILLUMINATION

A

Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009560576

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P
AALWA0645GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-19

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALWA0646GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-20

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O
AALIA1418GB

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-21

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1419GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-22

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O
AALIA1420GB

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-23

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1421GB

Revision: April 2013

INL-24

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O
AALIA1422GB

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-25

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671214

OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWLIA1823GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
Interview the symptom to the customer.

Revision: April 2013

INL-26

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 2.

2.SYMPTOM CHECK

A

Check the symptom from the customer’s information.
B

>> GO TO 3.

3.BASIC INSPECTION
Check the operation of each part. Check that any symptom occurs other than the interviewed symptom.
>> GO TO 4.

C

D

4.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Check that any DTC is detected.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

E

5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC

F

Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Specify the malfunctioning part.
G

>> GO TO 9.

6.FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION CHECK

H

Check that the symptom is applied to the fail-safe activation.
Does the fail-safe activate?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

I

7.SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

Perform the system diagnosis for the system that the fail-safe activates. Specify the malfunctioning part.
>> GO TO 9.

J

K

8.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the symptom diagnosis. Specify the malfunctioning part.

INL

>> GO TO 9.

9.MALFUNCTION PART REPAIR

M

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
N

>> GO TO 10.

10.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT)
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Check that any DTC is not detected. Erase DTC if DTC is detected
before the repair. Check that DTC is not detected again.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 11.

11.REPAIR CHECK (OPERATION CHECK)
Check the operation of each part.
Does it operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

INL-27

2014 Note

O

P

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009671216

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.
12 (10A)

Battery power supply

70

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal
57

M99

70

Ground

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL-28

2014 Note

BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009671202

Provides the battery saver output/power supply. Also cuts the power supply when the interior lamp battery
saver is activated.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009671203

C

1.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn each interior lamp to the ON position.
Interior room lamp
Map lamp
Cargo lamp
Select BATTERY SAVER of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
While operating the test item, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.
OFF
ON

B

D

E

F

: Interior room lamp OFF
: Interior room lamp ON

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Battery saver output/power supply circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

H

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009671204

I

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to INL-13, «Wiring Diagram».
J

1.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.

CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select BATTERY SAVER of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
While operating the test item, check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

K

INL
(+)
Connector

Terminal

M99

56

Test item

(-)

BATTERY SAVER

Ground

Voltage

M

OFF

0V

ON

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to voltage. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

2.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following connectors.
BCM
Interior room lamp
Map lamp
Cargo lamp
Check continuity between BCM connector and each interior lamp connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL-29

N

O

P

2014 Note

BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector

M99

Each interior lamp
Terminal

56

Connector

Continuity

Terminal

Interior room lamp

R7

2

Map lamp

R2

4

Cargo lamp

B21

1

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

3.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Connector

Terminal

—

Continuity

M99

56

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that each interior room lamp has no internal short circuit.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL-30

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009671205

Controls each interior room lamp (ground side) by PWM signal.
NOTE:
PWM signal control period is approximately 250 Hz (in the gradual brightening/dimming).

Component Function Check

B

INFOID:0000000009671206

CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal.
• Interior room lamp power supply
• Map lamp bulb
• Room lamp bulb

D

1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

E

CONSULT
Switch the map lamp switch or interior room lamp switch to DOOR.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select INT LAMP of BCM (INT LAMP) ACTIVE TEST item.
While operating the test item, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.
On
Off

C

F

G

: Interior room lamp gradual brightening
: Interior room lamp gradual dimming

H

Does the interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming)?
YES >> Interior room lamp control circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».

I

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009671207

J

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to INL-13, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

K

CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove all the bulbs of map lamp and interior room lamp.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select INT LAMP of BCM (INT LAMP) ACTIVE TEST item.
While operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

63

Test item
Ground
INT LAMP

INL

M

Continuity
On

Yes

Off

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to voltage. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and map lamp connector or interior room lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and map lamp harness connector or interior room
lamp harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL-31

2014 Note

N

O

P

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
With map lamp

BCM

Map lamp

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M99

63

R2

2

BCM

Interior room lamp

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M99

63

R7

3

Continuity
Yes

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that map lamp or interior room lamp has no internal open circuit.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

63

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to voltage. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect interior room lamp connector or map lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

63

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that map lamp or interior room lamp has no internal short circuit.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL-32

2014 Note

CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009671208

Controls the cargo lamp (ground side) to turn the cargo lamp ON and OFF.

B

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009671209

CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.
• Battery saver output/power supply
• Cargo lamp bulb

C

D

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009671210

E

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to INL-13, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK CARGO LAMP OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the cargo bulb.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

49

G

Condition
Ground
Back door

Continuity
Open

Yes

Closed

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

K

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and cargo lamp harness connector.
Cargo lamp

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M100

49

B21

4

Continuity

M

3.CHECK CARGO LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT

N

Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

49

Ground

O
Continuity

P

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

INL

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace cargo lamp. Refer to INL-40, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connector.
1.
2.

I

J

2.CHECK CARGO ROOM LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
BCM

H

INL-33

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009671211

Provides the power supply and the ground to control the push-button ignition switch illumination.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009671212

1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION
1.
2.
3.

CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select ENGINE SW ILLUMI of BCM (INTELLGENT KEY) active test item.
While operating the test item, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF
ON
OFF

: Push-button ignition switch illumination ON
: Push-button ignition switch illumination OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-34, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009671213

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to INL-19, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION
1.
2.
3.

CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select ENGINE SW ILLUMI of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item.
While operating the test item, check voltage between push-button ignition switch connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)

(-)

Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

5

Test item
Voltage
(Approx.)
ENGINE SW ILLUMI

Ground

ON

5V

OFF

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector and push-button ignition switch connector.
BCM

Push-button ignition switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

90

M25

5

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.
Revision: April 2013

INL-34

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

90

Ground

Continuity
No

D

4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT
Turn the ignition switch OFF
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

6

Ground

B

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.

1.
2.
3.

A

E

Continuity
Yes

F

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-74, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repiar or replace harness.

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-35

2014 Note

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009560588

CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected.
Symptom

Possible cause

All the following lamps do not turn ON.
• Map lamp
• Interior room lamp
• Cargo lamp

• Harness between BCM and each
interior room lamp
• BCM

• Interior room lamp does not turn ON even
though the door is open.
(It turns ON when turning the interior room
lamp ON.)
• Interior room lamp does not turn OFF even
though the door is closed.

• Harness between BCM and each
door switch
• Harness between BCM and each
interior room lamp
• BCM

Inspection item
Interior room lamp power supply circuit
Refer to INL-31, «Component Function Check».
Door switch circuit
Refer to INL-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Interior room lamp control circuit
Refer to INL-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Check the interior room lamp setting.
Refer to INL-10, «INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM — INT LAMP)».

Interior room lamp timer does not activate.
(It turns ON/ OFF when the door opens/closes.)

—

Cargo lamp does not turn ON even though the
back door is open.

• Harness between BCM and back
door switch
• Harness between BCM and cargo
lamp
• BCM

Cargo lamp circuit
Refer to INL-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Push-button ignition switch illumination does not
illuminate.

• Harness between BCM and pushbutton ignition switch
• BCM

Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit
Refer to INL-31, «Component Function Check».

Interior room lamp battery saver does not activate.

BCM

Replace BCM.
Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

INL-36

2014 Note

MAP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

MAP LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015798

B

C

D

E

F

G

AWLIA2175ZZ

1.

Map lamp

2.

Bulb

3.

Lens

H

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015799

I

REMOVAL
1.

Release lens pawls using a suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Pawl

J

K

INL

AWLIA2150ZZ

2.
3.

Release map lamp pawl using suitable tool (A).
: Pawl
Disconnect the harness connector from map lamp and remove.

M

N

O

P
AWLIA2144ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015800

WARNING:
Revision: April 2013

INL-37

2014 Note

MAP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp.

REMOVAL
1.

Release lens pawls using suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Pawl

AWLIA2150ZZ

2.

Remove the bulb.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

INL-38

2014 Note

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015801

B

C

D

E

F
AWLIA2174ZZ

1.

Interior room lamp

2.

A.

Pawls to release first for lens removal B.

Bulb
Pawl to install first for lens installation

3.

G

Lens
Pawl

Metal clip

H

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015802

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Release interior room lamp metal clips using a suitable tool.
Disconnect the harness connector from room lamp and remove.

J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

K

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009015803

WARNING:
INL
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to preM
vent damage to bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp.
N

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Release interior room lamp lens pawls using a suitable tool and remove.
Remove bulb.

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Insert the lens hook end RH side first when installing lens.

Revision: April 2013

INL-39

P

2014 Note

CARGO ROOM LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CARGO ROOM LAMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009445827

AWLIA2148ZZ

1.

Cargo room lamp
Front

2.

Bulb

3.

Lens

Pawl

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445828

REMOVAL
1.

2.

Release cargo room lamp pawl with a suitable tool (A)
: Pawl
: Front
Disconnect harness connector from cargo room lamp and
remove.

AWLIA2149ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009445829

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Release cargo room lamp lens pawl using a suitable tool.
Remove the bulb.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: April 2013

INL-40

2014 Note

SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP

A

Bulb Replacement

INFOID:0000000009445826

WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to protect damage to bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove shift selector lamp bulb from bulb socket (1).
: Front

B

C

D

E

F

G

AWLIA2147ZZ

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-41

2014 Note

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009445830

The illumination control switch is part of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

INL-42

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Bulb Specifications

INFOID:0000000009541369

Item

Wattage (W)*

Map lamp (if equipped)

5

Interior room lamp

8

Cargo room lamp

5

Shift selector lamp

—

B

C

D

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

INL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INL-43

2014 Note

BODY INTERIOR

SECTION

INT

INTERIOR

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation ………..20

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

DASH SIDE FINISHER ……………………………………….22
DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation
….22

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 3

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 4
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 4

CLIP LIST …………………………………………………… 5
Descriptions for Clips ………………………………………… 5

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 9
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ………………………………………………………. 9
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 9
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………. 10
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………… 13

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 15
FRONT DOOR FINISHER …………………………….15
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 15
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 15

REAR DOOR FINISHER ………………………………17
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 17
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 17

BODY SIDE TRIM ……………………………………….19
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 19
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER ………………………………… 19
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation ……………………………………………………………… 19
KICKING PLATE ………………………………………………. 20

Revision: April 2013

F

G

BODY SIDE WELT ……………………………………………..22
BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation ……..22

H

CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER …………………..23
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..23

I

CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER ……………………23
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..23

INT

FLOOR TRIM ……………………………………………. 25
Exploded View …………………………………………………25
Removal and Installation …………………………………..25

HEADLINING ……………………………………………. 28
Exploded View …………………………………………………28
Removal and Installation …………………………………..29

LUGGAGE TRIM ……………………………………….. 31
Exploded View …………………………………………………31
LUGGAGE REAR PLATE …………………………………..31
LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………………32
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER ……………………32
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..32
LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER …………………….33
LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation ………………………………………………..33

BACK DOOR TRIM ……………………………………. 34
Exploded View …………………………………………………34
BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER ………………………….34

INT-1

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation …………………………………………………….. 34

Revision: April 2013

BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE ……………………………. 34
BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………… 34

INT-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009509330

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009509367

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

INT-3

2014 Note

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O

P

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009440059

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit

Repairing the cause of noise

ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009439746

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

SIIA0995E

( — )
Power tools

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

INT-4

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

CLIP LIST

A

Descriptions for Clips

INFOID:0000000009440060

Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O

P

SIIA0315E

Revision: April 2013

INT-5

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

SIIA0316E

Revision: April 2013

INT-6

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O
SIIA0317E

P

Revision: April 2013

INT-7

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

ALJIA0564GB

Revision: April 2013

INT-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671237

B

C

D

E

F

G
SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW

H
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to INT-13, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
I
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is INT
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
K
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
L
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
M
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
N
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
O
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
P
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

INT-9

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to INT-10, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671238

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

INT-10

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

C

CENTER CONSOLE

F

Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

A

B

D

E

G

H

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
I
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
INT
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
K
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

INT-11

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: April 2013

INT-12

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009440063

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

INT-13

P

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

LAIA0071E

Revision: April 2013

INT-14

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

FRONT DOOR FINISHER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016036

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

AWJIA1139ZZ

1.

Front door panel

2.

Front door finisher

3.

Front door inside seal

4.

Power window and door
lock/unlock switch (RH) finisher

5.

Door pull handle escutcheon

A.

Grommet

Clip

K

Pawl

L

NOTE:
RH side door shown; LH side door similar.

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016037

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

N

Remove door pull handle escutcheon using a suitable tool.
Remove screw (B) from power window and door lock/unlock
switch (RH) finisher.
Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) finisher (1) using a suitable tool (A).
: Pawl

O

P

AWKIA2505ZZ

4.

Disconnect the harness connector from the power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH).

Revision: April 2013

INT-15

M

2014 Note

FRONT DOOR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove front door finisher bolt (A).

JMJIA6023ZZ

6.

Release clips using a suitable tool (A) remove front door finisher
as shown.
: Clip

AWJIA1122ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing front door finisher, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into door panel
holes.

Revision: April 2013

INT-16

2014 Note

REAR DOOR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR DOOR FINISHER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016038

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWJIA1099ZZ

1.

Rear door panel

2.

Rear door finisher

4.

Rear door pull handle escutcheon

5.

Rear power window switch fin- A.
isher

Pawl

3.

Rear door corner finisher

INT

Grommet

Clip

K

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016039

L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Release rear door corner finisher clip using a suitable tool.
Remove rear door pull handle escutcheon using a suitable tool.
Remove screw (B) from power window and door lock/unlock
switch (RH) finisher.
Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) finisher (1) using a suitable tool (A).
: Pawl

M

N

O

P
AWKIA2505ZZ

5.

Disconnect the harness connector from the power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH).

Revision: April 2013

INT-17

2014 Note

REAR DOOR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove rear door finisher bolt (A).

JMJIA6028ZZ

7.

Release rear door finisher clips using a suitable tool (A) and
remove rear door finisher as shown.
: Clip

AWJIA1121ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing rear door finisher, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into door panel
holes.

Revision: April 2013

INT-18

2014 Note

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BODY SIDE TRIM

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016040

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M
AWJIA1141ZZ

N
1.

Center pillar upper finisher (RH)

2.

Front body side welt (RH)

3.

Front pillar finisher (RH)

4.

Dash side finisher (RH)

5.

Front kicking plate (RH)

6.

Center pillar lower finisher (RH)

7.

Rear kicking plate (RH)

8.

Rear body side welt (RH)

Clip

Front

O

Pawl

FRONT PILLAR FINISHER

P

FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016041

REMOVAL
1.

Remove front pillar portion of front body side welt.

Revision: April 2013

INT-19

2014 Note

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Pull front pillar finisher downward as shown to release the front
pillar finisher clip (bottom).
: Clip
: Pawl

AWJIA1124ZZ

3.
4.

Cut and discard front pillar finisher tether clips.
Remove the remaining piece of the tether clip (B) using a suitable tool (A).

AWJIA1111ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.

2.

Install new front pillar finisher tether clips (A) to the front pillar
finisher by inserting clip end and rotating 90 degrees to fit.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse tether clips. Replace with new part after
removal.
• Make sure to install tether clip to front pillar finisher
before installing front pillar finisher.
• When installing tether clip to front pillar finisher, be sure
to install by aligning to the cutout.
• Visually check the clip for deformation and damage during installation. Replace with new one if necessary.
• When installing front pillar finisher, check that clip and
tether clips are securely placed into body panel holes.
Install the front pillar finisher to the front pillar.

AWJIA1088ZZ

KICKING PLATE
KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016043

FRONT KICKING PLATE
Removal

Revision: April 2013

INT-20

2014 Note

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Release front kicking plate pawls and metal clip using a suitable
tool (A) and remove front kicking plate as shown.
: Pawl
: Metal clip

A

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWJIA1123ZZ

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing front kicking plate, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into body panel
holes.

REAR KICKING PLATE

I

INT

Removal

1.
2.

H

Remove rear seat cushion. Refer toSE-32, «Seat Cushion».
Lift rear end of rear kicking plate to release metal clip, then
rotate front end of rear kicking plate to release pawls and
remove.
: Pawl
: Metal clip

K

L

M

N

O

P

AWJIA1091ZZ

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

INT-21

2014 Note

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing rear kicking plate, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into body panel
holes.

DASH SIDE FINISHER

DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016044

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, «KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation».
Lift up rear end of dash side finisher to release pawls.
: Pawl

AWJIA1092ZZ

3.

Pull back dash side finisher to release dash side finisher from
stud and remove.

AWJIA1093ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing, check that finisher is aligned with stud bolt located on floor panel.
• When installing dash side finisher, check that pawls are securely placed into body panel holes.

BODY SIDE WELT

BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016045

FRONT BODY SIDE WELT
Removal

1.
2.

Remove the dash side finisher. Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove front body side welt.

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

REAR BODY SIDE WELT
Removal

1.
2.

Remove rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, «KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation».
Remove rear body side welt.

Revision: April 2013

INT-22

2014 Note

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

A

CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016046

B

Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, «KICKING PLATE : Removal and
Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finisher as shown.

C

REMOVAL
1.
2.

D

E

F
JMJIA6045ZZ

G

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the pawls and clips for deformation and damage during installation. Replace component if necessary.

CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER

H

I

CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016047

INT

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to apply excessive force when removing center pillar upper finisher. Otherwise, clip
may be damaged and fragments may drop in body panels.
1. Slide front seat to the full forward position.
2. Release pawls, using a suitable tool and remove the seat belt
height adjuster finisher (1).
: Pawl

K

L

M

N
AWHIA0539ZZ

3.

4.
5.
6.

Remove front D-ring anchor bolt.
CAUTION:
Before removing D-ring anchor bolt note the positions of washers and spacers for correct installation.
Remove front body side welt and rear body side welt. Refer to INT-22, «BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and
Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
Release center pillar upper finisher upper clip using a suitable tool as shown.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

INT-23

2014 Note

O

P

BODY SIDE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
When releasing molded in clip, follow the steps as shown to prevent finisher or clip damage.

PIIB2600J

7.

Release center pillar upper finisher lower clip using a suitable
tool (A) and remove.
: Clip
CAUTION:
Do not reuse center pillar upper finisher.

AWJIA1094ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse center pillar upper finisher. Replace with new part for installation.
• When installing center pillar upper finisher, check that clips are securely placed in body panel holes.

Revision: April 2013

INT-24

2014 Note

FLOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FLOOR TRIM

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009541591

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT
AWJIA1142ZZ

1.

Harness clip A

2.

Harness clip B

3.

Floor trim

4.

Carpet hook

5.

Front floor spacer (RH)

6.

Front floor spacer (LH)

7.

Rear floor spacer (LH)

8.

Rear floor spacer (RH)

K

Front

L

Clip

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016049

M

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Do not drop the seat belt retractor. Always handle it with care.
• Always point pretensioner cylinder away from body when handling.

N

REMOVAL

O

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove front seats. Refer to SE-14, «DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation» (Driver side) and SE-16,
«PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation» (Passenger side).
Remove rear seatback hinge. Refer to SE-20, «SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation».
Remove center console lower. Refer to IP-20, «Removal and Installation».
Remove dash side finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

INT-25

2014 Note

P

FLOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
WARNING:
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals then wait
at least three minutes.
7. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the seat belt retractor (1).
WARNING:
• Do not drop the seat belt retractor. Always handle it with
care.
• Always point pretensioner cylinder away from body when
handling.

ALHIA0316ZZ

CAUTION:
• For removing/installing the shoulder belt pre-tensioner
harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, then lift the lock and remove the harness connector as shown.
• Install the harness connector with the lock raised, and
push the lock into the harness connector as shown.
• After installing the harness connector, check that the lock
is pushed in securely.

PHIA0953J

8.

Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt lower anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.
9. Remove diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
10. Remove shift selector. Refer to (5MT) or TM-227, «Removal and Installation» (CVT)
11. Remove A/C unit assembly bolt (C) and bracket (1) from vehicle.
12. Remove instrument panel lower bracket bolt (B) and screw (A)
and reposition bracket as necessary to remove floor trim.

ALJIA0712ZZ

Revision: April 2013

INT-26

2014 Note

FLOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
13. Release carpet hook clips with a suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Clip

A

B

C
AWJIA0736ZZ

D

14. Release pawls using a suitable tool (A) and open the harness
clips.
: Pawl

E

F

G
AWJIA0737ZZ

15. Remove floor trim.

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace harness protector B with a new part after removal. Do not reuse harness protector B.

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INT-27

2014 Note

HEADLINING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

HEADLINING
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016050

AWJIA1143ZZ

1.

Headlining

4.

Microphone (if equipped)

7.

Map lamp (if equipped)

10. Interior room lamp

2.

Rear assist grip (RH)

3.

Front assist grip (RH)

5.

Sun visor holder (RH)

6.

Sun visor holder (LH)

8.

Sun visor (RH)

9.

Sun visor (LH)

11. Rear assist grip (LH)

A.

Headlining clip

Pawl

Revision: April 2013

INT-28

2014 Note

HEADLINING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016051

A

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove front pillar finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-19, «FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove sun visor screws and sun visorS (LH/RH).
Remove map lamp (if equipped). Refer to INL-37, «Removal and Installation».
Remove interior room lamp. Refer to INL-39, «Removal and Installation».
Remove microphone (if equipped). Refer to AV-101, «Removal and Installation».
Remove center pillar upper finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove luggage side upper finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Insert a suitable tool (A) at approximately a 30 degree angle into
the sun visor holder notch on the front of the sun visor holder (1)
and press in the locking tab (B) to release it. While holding in
lock tab (B), rotate the sun visor holder (1) 90 degrees to release
it from the headlining.
: Front
CAUTION:
Do not force the sun visor holder when removing as the
locking tab may be damaged if the suitable tool is not positioned correctly.
NOTE:
If the sun visor holder (1) does not fully rotate, make sure that
the suitable tool (A) is pressing in on the locking tab (B) and is
not positioned under locking tab (B). Reinsert the suitable tool
(A) as necessary to release the locking tab (B).

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K
ALJIA0537ZZ

Release assist grip pawls and remove bolt (A) using a suitable
tool and remove all assist grips.
:Pawl
10. Remove headlining clips.
11. Remove headlining through the back door.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse headlining.

L

9.

M

N

O
AWJIA1126ZZ

INSTALLATION

P

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Remove all remaining adhesive from roof panel.
• Do not reuse headlining. Replace with new part after removal.

Revision: April 2013

INT-29

2014 Note

HEADLINING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Apply adhesive as shown before installing headlining.

AWJIA1102ZZ

1. Headlining

A. Adhesive application location

B. Adhesive

C. 8 mm

D. 5 mm

• Do not bend headlining when installing.
• When installing headlining, start by installing both sun visor holders and headlining clips to hold
headlining in position.
• Be careful that the surface is not wrinkled when installing.

Revision: April 2013

INT-30

2014 Note

LUGGAGE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

LUGGAGE TRIM

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016052

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M
AWJIA1129ZZ

N
1.

Parcel shelf finisher

4.
7.

2.

3.

Luggage side upper finisher (LH)

Luggage side front reinforcement (LH) 5.

Luggage side rear reinforcement (LH) 6.

Luggage side lower finisher (LH)

Luggage rear plate

Luggage side lower finisher (RH)

Luggage side rear reinforcement (RH)

8.

Luggage floor board (if equipped)

9.

10. Luggage side front reinforcement
(RH)

11. Luggage side upper finisher (RH)

12. Luggage side front cover (RH)

13. Luggage side clip

14. Luggage side rear cover (RH)

15. Luggage floor box

16. Luggage side rear cover (LH)

17. Luggage side front cover (LH)

18. Luggage floor trim

Pawl

Metal clip

P

Clip

Front

LUGGAGE REAR PLATE
Revision: April 2013

INT-31

O

2014 Note

LUGGAGE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016053

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove luggage floor board (if equipped).
Remove luggage floor trim.
Remove luggage rear plate clips (A).

AWJIA1127ZZ

4.

Release luggage rear plate clips using a suitable tool (A) and
remove luggage rear plate as shown.
: Clip

AWJIA1128ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing luggage rear plate, check that clips are securely placed into body holes.

LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER

LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016054

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Partially remove rear body side welt. Refer to INT-22, «BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation».
Remove luggage floor board (if equipped).
Remove luggage floor trim.
Remove seat back hinge. Refer to SE-20, «SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation».
Release rear parcel shelf finisher clips using a suitable tool and remove rear parcel shelf finisher (if
equipped).
Remove luggage side lower finisher pawls using a suitable tool.

Revision: April 2013

I N

T

— 3 2

2014 Note

LUGGAGE TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
: Pawl

A

B

C
AWJIA1095ZZ

7.

Release the harness connector from cargo room lamp (RH only) and remove luggage side lower finisher.

INSTALLATION

D

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing luggage side clip, press luggage side clip so that upper side stamp mark faces
toward passenger room, and then completely engage luggage side clip pawls.

E

LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal and Installation

G

F

LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER

INFOID:0000000009016055

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-32, «LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.
Release luggage side upper finisher clips using a suitable tool
and remove luggage side upper finisher.
: Clip

H

I

INT

K

L
AWJIA1097ZZ

INSTALLATION
M

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing luggage side upper finisher, check that clips are placed in body holes.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INT-33

2014 Note

BACK DOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BACK DOOR TRIM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016056

AWJIA1103ZZ

1. Back door inner finisher

2. Back door panel

Clip

3. Back door pull handle

Pawl

BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER
BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016057

REMOVAL
1.

Release back door inner finisher clips using a suitable tool and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing back door inner finisher, check that locate pin and clips are placed in body panel
holes.

BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE

BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016058

REMOVAL
1.

Release pawls using a suitable tool and remove.

INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

INT-34

2014 Note

BACK DOOR TRIM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing, confirm upper and lower orientation of back door pull handle, then install it.
• When installing back door pull handle, check that pawls are placed in body panel holes.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

INT

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

INT-35

2014 Note

BODY INTERIOR

SECTION

IP

INSTRUMENT PANEL

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Removal and Installation …………………………………..15

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

STEERING COLUMN COVERS ………………….. 17

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

Removal and Installation …………………………………..17
Exploded View …………………………………………………18
Removal and Installation …………………………………..18

Special Service Tools ………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tools ………………………………… 3

CLUSTER LID A ……………………………………….. 21

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 8
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ………………………………………………………. 8
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………… 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………… 12

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 14
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ………………14

H

CENTER CONSOLE LOWER ……………………… 20
Removal and Installation …………………………………..20

Descriptions for Clips ………………………………………… 4

G

CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY ……………….. 18

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

CLIP LIST …………………………………………………… 4

F

I

Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

CLUSTER LID C ……………………………………….. 22

IP

Removal and Installation …………………………………..22

FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER ………………. 23

K

Removal and Installation …………………………………..23

INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH ……………… 24
Removal and Installation …………………………………..24

L

GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY ………………………….. 25
Removal and Installation …………………………………..25

M

UPPER GLOVE BOX …………………………………. 26

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 14

Removal and Installation …………………………………..26

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009472925

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009472926

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

IP-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009472927

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

C

D

E
SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit

F

Repairing the cause of noise

G

H
ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

I

IP
AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009472928

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

K

L

M

N
SIIA0995E

( — )
Power Tool

O

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

P

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

IP-3

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

CLIP LIST
Descriptions for Clips

INFOID:0000000009472929

Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation.

SIIA0315E

Revision: April 2013

IP-4

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

IP

K

L

M

N

O
SIIA0316E

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-5

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

SIIA0317E

Revision: April 2013

IP-6

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ALJIA0564GB

I

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-7

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671285

SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to IP-12, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

IP-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

A

B

C

D

E

F

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
G
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be H
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
I
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
IP
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to IP-9, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671286

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

IP-9

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

IP-10

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

A

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

B

C

D

E

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then F
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
G
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
H
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
I
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-11

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671287

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

IP-12

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

IP

K

L

M

N

O
LAIA0071E

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-13

2014 Note

INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567640

AWJIA1105ZZ

Revision: April 2013

IP-14

2014 Note

INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.

Instrument side finisher (RH)

2.

Passenger air bag module

3.

Instrument panel assembly

4.

Instrument side finisher (LH)

5.

Side ventilator grille (LH)

6.

Combination meter

7.

Cluster lid A

8.

Instrument lower panel LH

9.

Steering column upper cover

10. Steering column lower cover

11. Steering lock escutcheon

12. Center console lower

13. Front air control finisher

14. Front air control

15. Center ventilator grille (RH)

B

16. Center ventilator grille (LH)

17. Cluster lid C

18. Audio unit/AV control unit

19. Glove box lid

20. Glove box assembly

21. Glove box striker

22. Side ventilator grille (RH)

23. Upper glove box

Metal clip

A

C

Pawl

Clip

D

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567641

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch instrument panel pad or other parts.
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.

E

F

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69, G
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove front pillar finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-19, «FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
H
Remove dash side finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Partially remove front body side welts (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, «BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and
I
Installation».
Release the pawls using a suitable tool (A) and then remove
instrument side finisher (LH) as shown.
IP
: Pawl
K

L
AWJIA1130ZZ

6.

M

Release the pawls using a suitable tool (A) and then remove
instrument side finisher (RH) as shown.
: Pawl

N

O

P
AWJIA1131ZZ

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Remove center console lower. Refer to IP-20, «Removal and Installation».
Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove combination switch. Refer to EXL-112, «Removal and Installation».
Remove combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

IP-15

2014 Note

INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
12. Remove audio unit. Refer to AV-33, «Removal and Installation» (BASE AUDIO) or AV-93, «Removal and
Installation» (DISPLAY AUDIO).
13. Remove AV control unit (NAVIGATION). Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
14. Remove front air control. Refer to HAC-47, «Removal and Installation».
15. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».
16. Remove front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, «Removal and Installation».
17. Remove instrument panel assembly.
a. Remove instrument panel assembly screws (A).

ALJIA1252ZZ

b.
c.

Disconnect the harness connectors from the instrument panel assembly.
Remove instrument panel assembly through passenger door opening.
CAUTION:
• Cover shift selector assembly with a shop cloth to prevent damage to instrument panel assembly.
• When removing instrument panel assembly, two people are required to prevent from damage.
18. Removal of the following components is only necessary if replacing the instrument panel assembly.
• Side ventilator grille (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-6, «SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation».
• Center ventilator duct (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-6, «CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation».
• Side defroster duct (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-7, «SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
If replacing instrument panel, transfer all the necessary parts to the new instrument panel.

Revision: April 2013

IP-16

2014 Note

STEERING COLUMN COVERS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING COLUMN COVERS

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567642

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

B

Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove steering column cover screws (A).
NOTE:
Rotate steering wheel to access steering column cover screws.
Pull steering column upper cover (1) upward to disengage steering column upper cover pawls.
: Pawl
Remove steering column upper cover (1) and lower cover (2).

C

D

E

AWJIA0707ZZ

INSTALLATION

F

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

H

I

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-17

2014 Note

CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009567643

TYPE 1

AWJIA1134ZZ

1.

Shift selector boot (5MT: RS5F91R)

2.

Center console assembly

3.

USB connector (if equipped)

4.

Power socket

A.

Clip

B.

Screw

TYPE 2

AWJIA1135ZZ

1.

Shift selector boot (5MT: RS5F91R)

2.

Center console assembly

3.

Power socket

4.

USB connector (if equipped)

5.

Heated seat switch (RH) (if equipped)

6.

Heated seat switch (LH)
(if equipped)

A.

Clip

B.

Screw

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567644

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Move shift selector to “N” position (CVT: RE0F11A).
Remove shift selector handle (5MT: RS5F91R). Refer to TM-19, «Exploded View».
Raise parking brake lever.

Revision: April 2013

IP-18

2014 Note

CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove center console assembly clips (A).
A

B

C
JMJIA6093ZZ

D

5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove the center console assembly rear screws.
Slide driver side seat to the full rearward position and recline.
Slide passenger side seat to the full rearward position and recline.
Lift rear right corner of center console assembly, rotating slightly,
making sure to lift assembly upward over the parking brake handle.
9. Disconnect the harness connectors from the center console
assembly.
10. Remove center console assembly.

E

F

G

H
AWJIA0695ZZ

INSTALLATION
I

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-19

2014 Note

CENTER CONSOLE LOWER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CENTER CONSOLE LOWER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567645

REMOVAL
1.
2.
a.

Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove center console lower.
Remove center console lower clips (LH/RH) (A).

JMJIA6052ZZ

b.

Release center console lower pawls using a suitable tool and
remove.
: Pawl

AWJIA0706ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

IP-20

2014 Note

CLUSTER LID A
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CLUSTER LID A

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567646

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove cluster lid A.

C

D

E

AWJIA1075ZZ

Pawl

a.
b.
c.

F

Metal clip

Remove combination meter finisher and cluster lid A as an assembly by pulling rearward to release pawls
and metal clips.
Disconnect the harness connector and remove cluster lid A.
Separate cluster lid A (2) from combination meter finisher (1) by releasing the metal clips (If necessary).

G

H

INSTALLATION
I

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-21

2014 Note

CLUSTER LID C
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CLUSTER LID C
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567647

REMOVAL
1.

Release the cluster lid C (1) clips using a suitable tool.
: Metal clip

ALJIA1231ZZ

2.

Disconnect harness connectors from cluster lid C and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

IP-22

2014 Note

FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567648

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, «Removal and Installation».
Remove intake door lever knob (2).
Release the front air control finisher (1) clips using a suitable
tool and remove.
: Metal clip

C

D

E

ALJIA1234ZZ

F

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

G

H

I

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-23

2014 Note

INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567649

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove data link connector from instrument lower panel LH.
Remove bolts (A) and position hood lock/fuel filler door release
handle aside.

JMKIA7998ZZ

3.
a.
b.

Remove instrument lower panel LH.
Release instrument lower panel LH metal clips and pawls using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Release pawls and metal clips slowly so that they are not damaged.
Disconnect the harness connectors from instrument lower panel LH and remove.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

IP-24

2014 Note

GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567650

REMOVAL
1.
a.
b.

B

Remove glove box lid.
Open glove box lid.
Pull glove box lid rearward and glove box lid hinges down and
rearward to release, then remove the glove box lid.

C

D

E
JMJIA6060ZZ

2.
a.
b.

Remove glove box assembly.
Remove glove box assembly screws (A).
Pull glove box assembly rearward to release pawls and remove.
: Pawl

F

G

H

AWJIA0714ZZ

I

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

IP

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

IP-25

2014 Note

UPPER GLOVE BOX
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UPPER GLOVE BOX
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009667864

REMOVAL
1.

Remove upper glove box screws (A).

ALJIA1253ZZ

2.

Release the clips and pawls using a suitable tool and remove upper glove box.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

IP-26

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

LAN

LAN SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
CAN FUNDAMENTAL

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ……………………. 20

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………. 4

Information ………………………………………………………20
Abbreviation List ………………………………………………20

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ………………………. 4

PRECAUTION ………………………………………. 21

Information ………………………………………………………. 4

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 5

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………. 21

Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ………………………. 5
Precautions for Harness Repair ………………………….. 5

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ………………………………………………………..21
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ……………………..21
Precautions for Harness Repair …………………………21

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 23

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 6

COMPONENT PARTS ……………………………….. 23

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ……………………….. 6
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………… 6

Component Parts Location ………………………………..23

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 5

DIAG ON CAN ……………………………………………………. 6
DIAG ON CAN : System Description …………………… 6

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ……………………………….. 8
Component Description ……………………………………… 8
Condition of Error Detection ……………………………….. 8
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System …………………………………………………… 9
CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT ………………………… 11
Self-Diagnosis ………………………………………………… 12
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor ………………………. 12
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart …… 14

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 15
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ………15
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart …………………………… 15
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………. 15

CAN
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ………………… 20
Revision: April 2013

SYSTEM …………………………………………………… 24
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ……………………….24
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description ………………………………………………………….24
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Control Circuit …………………………………27
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN System
Specification Chart …………………………………………..28
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart ……………………………………29

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 31
CAN SYSTEM …………………………………………… 31

O

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..31

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 36
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 36
Interview Sheet ………………………………………………..36

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 37
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART …………………… 37

LAN-1

2014 Note

P

Main Line ………………………………………………………. 37
Branch Line …………………………………………………… 37
Short Circuit …………………………………………………… 37

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………… 57

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ……………………………………………………. 38

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 58

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 38

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 39
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 39

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 40
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 40

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………… 41
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 41

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 42
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 42

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………. 43
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 43

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………….. 44
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 44

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………… 45
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 45

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………… 46
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 46

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 47
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 47

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 48
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 48

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ……………….. 49
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 49

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 57

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 58
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 59
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 59

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ………………. 60
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 60

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS …………………… 62
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ……………………………………………………. 62
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 62

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 63
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 63

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 64
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 64

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………… 65
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 65

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………. 66
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 66

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………….. 67
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 67

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 68
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 68

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………… 69
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 69

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 70

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 51
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ……………………………………………………. 51
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 51

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 52
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 52

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 53
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 53

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………… 54
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 54

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………. 55
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 55

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………… 56
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 56

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 70

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 71
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 71

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ………………. 72
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 72

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS …………………… 74
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ……………………………………………………. 74
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 74

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 75
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 75

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 76
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 76

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………… 77
Revision: April 2013

LAN-2

2014 Note

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 77

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..87

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………………78

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 88

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 78

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..88

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………..79

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………… 89

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 79

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..89

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………………80

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 90

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 80

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..90

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………………81

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………. 91

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 81

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..91

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………..82

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………………. 92

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 82

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..92

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………..83

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 93

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 83

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..93

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ………………..84

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT …………………….. 94

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 84

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..94

CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………. 95

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 86

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..95

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT …………………………………………………….86

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ……………………. 96

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 86

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ………………. 97

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ………………………87

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..97

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..96

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-3

2014 Note

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Information

INFOID:0000000009014719

• “CAN FUNDAMENTAL” of LAN Section describes the basic knowledge of the CAN communication system
and the method of trouble diagnosis.
• For information peculiar to a vehicle and inspection procedure, refer to “CAN”.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-4

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009014720

CAUTION:
Follow the instructions listed below. Failure to do this may cause damage to parts:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.

Precautions for Harness Repair

B

C

D

INFOID:0000000009014721

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

E

F

G

SKIB8766E

• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.

H

I

J

K
SKIB8767E

L

• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line.
LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-5

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009014722

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DIAG ON CAN

DIAG ON CAN : System Description

INFOID:0000000009014723

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSMIA0526GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Name

Harness

Description

A

DDL1

Tx
Rx

For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)

DDL2

K-LINE

For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for controlling)

Diag on CAN

CAN-H
CAN-L

For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are also used for control and diagnoses.)

B

C

DESCRIPTION
“Diag on CAN” is a diagnosis method which uses the CAN communication line for the communication between
the control unit and the diagnostic tool.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-7

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Description

INFOID:0000000009014724

JSMIA0527GB

Component

Description

Main line

CAN communication line between splices

Branch line

CAN communication line between splice and a control unit

Splice

A point connecting a branch line with a main line

Termination circuit

Circuit connected across the CAN communication system. (Resistor)

Condition of Error Detection

INFOID:0000000009014725

DTC (e.g. U1000 and U1001) of CAN communication is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT if a
CAN communication signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR
• CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
• CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)
• Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line

WHEN DTC OF CAN COMMUNICATION IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM IS NORMAL
• Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit
and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be
detected.)
• Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.
• Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition
switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication,
malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.
NOTE:
CAN communication system is normal if DTC of CAN communication is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of
CONSULT under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each control unit.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-8

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System

INFOID:0000000009014726

A

In CAN communication system, multiple control units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each control unit
cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode.

B

ERROR EXAMPLE
NOTE:
Each vehicle differs in symptom of each control unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring.

C

Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit
D

E

F

G

H
JSMIA0442GB

Unit name

I

Major symptom

ECM

Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
• Reverse warning buzzer does not sound.
• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wiper switch being in the intermittent position.

J

BCM
EPS control unit

The steering effort increases.

K

Combination meter

• The shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.
• The speedometer is inoperative.
• The odo/trip meter stops.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Normal operation.

TCM

No impact on operation.

IPDM E/R

When the ignition switch is ON,
• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-9

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Example: TCM Branch Line Open Circuit

JSMIA0443GB

Unit name

Major symptom

ECM

Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.

BCM

Reverse warning buzzer does not sound.

EPS control unit

Normal operation.

Combination meter

• Shift position indicator and O/D OFF indicator turn OFF.
• Warning lamps turn ON.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Normal operation.

TCM

No impact on operation.

IPDM E/R

Normal operation.

NOTE:
The model (all control units on CAN communication system are Diag on CAN) cannot perform CAN diagnosis
with CONSULT if the following error occurs. The error is judged by the symptom.
Error

Difference of symptom

Data link connector branch line open circuit

Normal operation.

CAN-H, CAN-L harness short-circuit

Most of the control units which are connected to the CAN communication system enter fail-safe mode or are deactivated.

Example: Data Link Connector Branch Line Open Circuit

JSMIA0444GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-10

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Unit name

Major symptom

A

ECM
BCM

B

EPS control unit
Combination meter

Normal operation.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

C

TCM
IPDM E/R

NOTE:
When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals are
not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit.

D

E

Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit

F

G

H

I

J
JSMIA0445GB

Unit name

Major symptom

K

ECM

• Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
• Engine speed drops.

BCM

• Reverse warning buzzer does not sound.
• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front
wiper switch being in the intermittent position.
• The room lamp does not turn ON.
• The engine does not start (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the ignition switch OFF.)
• The steering lock does not release (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning
the ignition switch OFF.)

EPS control unit

The steering effort increases.

Combination meter

• The tachometer and the speedometer do not move.
• Warning lamps turn ON.
• Indicator lamps do not turn ON.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Normal operation.

TCM

No impact on operation.

IPDM E/R

When the ignition switch is ON,
• The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.

CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT

N

P

INFOID:0000000009014727

LAN-11

LAN

O

CAN diagnosis on CONSULT extracts the root cause by receiving the following information.
Revision: April 2013

L

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Response to the system call
• Control unit diagnosis information
• Self-diagnosis
• CAN diagnostic support monitor

Self-Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009014728

If communication signals cannot be transmitted or received among control units communicating via CAN communication line, CAN communication-related DTC is displayed on the CONSULT “Self Diagnostic Result”
screen.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples of CAN communication-related DTC. For other DTC, refer to the applicable sections.
Self-diagnosis item
(CONSULT indication)

DTC

U1000

DTC detection condition

ECM

When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal of OBD (emission-related diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.

Except
for ECM

When a control unit (except for ECM) is not
transmitting or receiving CAN communication
signal for 2 seconds or more.

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis)
for 2 seconds or more.

U1001

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

U1002

SYSTEM COMM

When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN
communication signal for 2 seconds or less.

U1010

CONTROL UNIT(CAN)

When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for
CAN controller of each control unit.

CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor

Inspection/Action

Start the inspection. Refer to the applicable section of the indicated
control unit.

Replace the control unit
indicating “U1010”.
INFOID:0000000009014729

MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT)
Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication

JSMIA0964GB

Without PAST
Item
Initial diagnosis

Revision: April 2013

PRESENT

Description

OK

Normal at present

NG

Control unit error (Except for some control units)

LAN-12

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item

PRESENT
OK

Transmission diagnosis

UNKWN
OK

Control unit name
(Reception diagnosis)

Description

A

Normal at present
Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more.
Diagnosis not performed

B

Normal at present
Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more.

UNKWN

C

Diagnosis not performed
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)

With PAST

D
Item

PRESENT

PAST
OK

Transmission diagnosis

OK

UNKWN

1 – 39
0
OK

OK
Control unit name
(Reception diagnosis)

1 – 39

UNKWN

0

Not diagnosed

–

Description
Normal at present and in the past

E

Normal at present, but unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more
in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
from OFF to ON.)

F

Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more at present.
Normal at present and in the past
Normal at present, but unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more
in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
from OFF to ON.)
Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more at present.

G

H

Diagnosis not performed.
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-13

2014 Note

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart

INFOID:0000000009014730

The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals transmitted/received among control units. It is useful for
detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit.

JSMIA0446GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart

INFOID:0000000009014731

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
JSMIA0528GB

Trouble Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014732

INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER

LAN

Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to
understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis.

N

Points in interview

O

•
•
•
•
•

What: Parts name, system name
When: Date, Frequency
Where: Road condition, Place
In what condition: Driving condition/environment
Result: Symptom

P

Notes for checking error symptoms:

• Check normal units as well as error symptoms.
— Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates
tachometer functions normally.
• When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into failsafe mode.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to
the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.

SKIB8717E

INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION
Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not.
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error may
temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.

CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)
Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment.
NOTE:
• This chart is used if CONSULT does not automatically recognize CAN system type.
• There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available system types, either style A or style B may be used.
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

LAN-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N
JSMIA0529GB

CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)
NOTE:

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.

JSMIA0530GB

CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET
Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview
sheet.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
Interview Sheet (Example)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
JSMIA0531GB

LAN

DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE
CAN diagnosis function of CONSULT detects the root cause.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-19

2014 Note

HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
[CAN]

< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Information

INFOID:0000000009014733

• “CAN” of LAN Section describes information peculiar to a vehicle and inspection procedures.
• For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart» of “CAN FUNDAMENTAL”.

Abbreviation List

INFOID:0000000009014734

Unit name abbreviations in CONSULT CAN diagnosis and in this section are as per the following list.
Abbreviation

Unit name

A-BAG

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

ABS

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

AV

AV control unit

BCM

BCM

DLC

Data link connector

ECM

ECM

EPS

EPS control unit

IPDM-E

IPDM E/R

M&A

Combination meter

TCM

TCM

Revision: April 2013

LAN-20

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009705471

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009014736

CAUTION:
Follow the instructions listed below. Failure to do this may cause damage to parts:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.

Precautions for Harness Repair

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

INFOID:0000000009014737

• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).

LAN

N

O

SKIB8766E

Revision: April 2013

LAN-21

2014 Note

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.

[CAN]

SKIB8767E

• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-22

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009014738

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

ALMIA0651ZZ

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

Combination meter

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

AV control unit

EPS control unit

Data link connector

TCM

IPDM E/R

ECM

BCM

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-23

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009014739

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSMIA1476GB

DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Generation
• Termination circuits (resistors) are connected across the CAN communication system. When transmitting a
CAN communication signal, each control unit passes a current to the CAN-H line and the current returns to
the CAN-L line.

JSMIA0450GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-24

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The current flows separately into the termination circuits connected
across the CAN communication system and the termination circuits drop voltage to generate a potential difference between the
CAN-H line and the CAN-L line.
NOTE:
A signal with no current passage is called “Recessive” and one
with current passage is called “Dominant”.

A

B

C
JSMIA0543GB

D

• The system produces digital signals for signal communications, by
using the potential difference.
E

F

G
JSMIA0544ZZ

The Construction of CAN Communication Signal (Message)

H

I

J

JSMIA0545ZZ

No.

Message name

Description

1

Start of frame (1 bit)

Start of message.

2

Arbitration of field (11 bit)

Priorities of message-sending are shown when there is a possibility that multiple messages are sent at the same time.

3

Control field (6 bit)

Signal quantity in data field is shown.

4

Data field (0-64 bit)

Actual signal is shown.

5

CRC field (16 bit)

• The transmitting control unit calculates sending data in advance and writes the calculated value in a message.
• The receiving control unit calculates received data and judges that the data reception is normal when the calculated value is the same as the value written in the sent data.

6

ACK field (2 bit)

The completion of normal reception is sent to the transmitting
unit.

7

End of frame (7 bit)

End of message.

L

LAN

N

O

P

CAN Communication Line

Revision: April 2013

K

LAN-25

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The CAN communication line is a twisted pair wire consisting of
strands of CAN-H (1) and CAN-L (2) and has noise immunity.

JSMIA0382ZZ

NOTE:
The CAN communication system has the characteristics of noise-resistant because this system produces digital signals by using the potential difference between the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line and has the twisted
pair wire structure.
Since the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line are always adjacent to
each other, the same degree of noise occurs, respectively, when a
noise (1) occurs. Although the noise changes the voltage, the potential difference (2) between the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line is
insensitive to noise. Therefore, noise-resistant signals can be
obtained.

JSMIA0383ZZ

CAN Signal Communications
Each control unit of the CAN communication system transmits signals through the CAN communication control circuit included in the control unit and receives only necessary signals from each control unit to perform
various kinds of control.
• Example: Transmitted signals

JSMIA0576GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-26

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Example: Received signals

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H
JSMIA0577GB

NOTE:
The above signal names and signal communications are provided for reference purposes. For CAN communications signals of this vehicle, refer to LAN-29, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication
Signal Chart».

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Control Circuit

INFOID:0000000009014740

I

J

CAN communication control circuit is incorporated into the control unit and transmits/receives CAN communication signals.
K

L

LAN

N

O

JSMIA0453GB

Component

System description

CAN controller

It controls CAN communication signal transmission and reception, error detection, etc.

Transceiver IC

It converts digital signal into CAN communication signal, and CAN communication signal into digital
signal.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-27

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Component

System description

Noise filter

It eliminates noise of CAN communication signal.

Termination circuit*
(Resistance of approx. 120 Ω)

Generates a potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L.

*: These are the only control units wired with both ends of CAN communication system.

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN System Specification Chart

INFOID:0000000009014741

Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart.
NOTE:
Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Procedure» for how to use CAN system specification chart.
Body type

Hatch back

Axle

2WD

Engine

HR16DE

Transmission

M/T

CVT

Brake control

ABS
×

Navigation system
CAN system type

503

504

×
505

506

CAN communication control unit
ECM

×

×

×

×

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

×

×

×

×

IPDM E/R

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

TCM
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

×

×
×

AV control unit

×

Data link connector

×

×

×

×

EPS control unit

×

×

×

×

Combination meter

×

×

×

×

BCM

×

×

×

×

×: Applicable

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
NOTE:
Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.

ALMIA0645ZZ

Revision: April 2013

LAN-28

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
NAVI switches

A

With navigation system

CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart

INFOID:0000000009014742

Refer to LAN-14, «How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart» for how to use CAN communication signal
chart.
NOTE:
• Refer to LAN-20, «Abbreviation List» for the abbreviations of the connecting units.
• The air bag diagnosis sensor unit and AV control unit uses CAN communication only for communicating with
the diagnostic tool (not with other connected control units).

T

Closed throttle position signal

T

Cooling fan speed request signal

T

ECO pedal guide signal

T

Engine and CVT integrated control signal

F

R

G

R

T

R

R

R
T

Engine speed signal

T

R

Engine status signal

T

R

Power generation command value signal

R

H

R

R

R

R
R

T

R

R

T

I

R

J

T

R

R

T

T

K

R

ABS malfunction signal

T

R

ABS operation signal

T

R

ABS warning lamp signal

T

R

VDC warning lamp signal

T

R

VDC OFF indicator lamp signal

T

R

Vehicle speed signal (ABS)

T

Brake warning lamp signal

T

R

R

R

L

LAN
R

R

Detention switch signal

T

R

Front wiper stop position signal

T

R

High beam status signal

R

Interlock/PNP switch signal
Low beam status signal

R

Push-button ignition switch status signal

O

R

T

T

R

R

T

T

T

LAN-29

N

R

T

Oil pressure switch signal

Revision: April 2013

T
T

Ignition switch ON signal

E

R

T

Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal

D

R
R

Engine coolant temperature signal

N idle instruction signal

C

R: Receive

BCM

A/C compressor request signal

M&A

R

EPS

T

TCM

ABS

Accelerator pedal position signal

Signal name

IPDM-E

ECM

T: Transmit

B

R
R

R

R

T

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM

Starter control relay signal

Starter relay status signal

Steering lock relay signal
Steering lock unit status signal

T

T

R

R

T

T

R

R

T

T

R

R

R

R

T

T

R

R

T
T

R

R

T
T

Target gear ratio signal

R

EPS operation signal

R

R

T

Shift position signal

R

R

T
T

EPS warning lamp signal

T

Odometer signal

R
T

Overdrive control switch signal
Vehicle speed signal (Meter)

M&A

EPS

R

OD OFF indicator signal
Output shaft revolution signal

TCM

R

T

Wake up signal
Input shaft revolution signal

T

T

Sleep-ready signal

Rear window defogger control signal

IPDM-E

ABS

ECM

Signal name

BCM

[CAN]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

R
R

T
R

Wake up signal

R

T

R

T

R

A/C ON signal

R

T

Blower fan ON signal

R

T

Buzzer output signal

R

T

Dimmer signal

R

T

R

T

R

T

Door switch signal

R

Engine start operation indicator lamp signal
Front wiper request signal

R

High beam request signal

R

T

Key warning lamp signal
Low beam request signal

R

Position light request signal

R

Shift P warning lamp signal
Sleep wake up signal

R

Stop lamp switch signal

R

Turn indicator signal

R

Revision: April 2013

LAN-30

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T

R

T
T

R

T

2014 Note

CAN SYSTEM
[CAN]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

CAN SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009014743

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

ABMWA1993GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-31

2014 Note

CAN SYSTEM
[CAN]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABMIA4638GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-32

2014 Note

CAN SYSTEM
[CAN]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O
ABMIA4639GB

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-33

2014 Note

CAN SYSTEM
[CAN]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABMIA4640GB

Revision: April 2013

LAN-34

2014 Note

CAN SYSTEM
[CAN]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O
ABMIA4641GB

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-35

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
[CAN]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Interview Sheet

INFOID:0000000009014744

NOTE:
Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Procedure» for how to use interview sheet.

SKIB8898E

Revision: April 2013

LAN-36

2014 Note

MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
Main Line

INFOID:0000000009014745

Malfunction area

Reference

Main line between IPDM E/R and data link connector

C

LAN-38, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Branch Line

INFOID:0000000009014746

Malfunction area

D

Reference

ECM branch line circuit

LAN-39, «Diagnosis Procedure»

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line circuit

LAN-40, «Diagnosis Procedure»

IPDM E/R branch line circuit

LAN-41, «Diagnosis Procedure»

TCM branch line circuit

LAN-42, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Air bag diognosis sensor unit branch line ciecuit

LAN-43, «Diagnosis Procedure»

AV control unit branch line circuit

LAN-44, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Data link connector branch line circuit

LAN-45, «Diagnosis Procedure»

EPS control unit branch line circuit

LAN-46, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Combination meter branch line circuit

LAN-47, «Diagnosis Procedure»

BCM branch line circuit

LAN-48, «Diagnosis Procedure»

Short Circuit

E

F

G

H

INFOID:0000000009014747

Malfunction area
CAN communication circuit

B

I

J

Reference
LAN-49, «Diagnosis Procedure»

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-37

2014 Note

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014748

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E7
Harness connector M69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Disconnect the following harness connectors.
IPDM E/R
Harness connectors E7 and M69
Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.
62

E46

61

Harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.

E7

Continuity

21A

Existed

20A

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector
Connector No.
M69

Data link connector

Terminal No.
21A
20A

Connector No.
M22

Terminal No.

Continuity

6

Existed

14

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-38

2014 Note

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014749

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

83

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ECM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-39

2014 Note

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014750

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E33

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
11

10

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal
and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-40

2014 Note

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014751

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E46

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
62

61

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-41

2014 Note

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014752

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
TCM
Harness connector F8
Harness connector E8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of TCM.
Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM harness connector
Connector No.
F44

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
33

23

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the TCM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to TM-211, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the TCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-42

2014 Note

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009553799

WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

B

C

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the main harness.

2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, «Work Flow».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO
>> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-43

2014 Note

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009553800

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of AV control unit.
Check the resistance between the AV control unit harness connector terminals.
AV control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M70

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
8

17

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the AV control unit branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AV control unit. Refer to AV-153, «AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AV control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-44

2014 Note

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014753

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

E

Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
6

D

14

F

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-45

2014 Note

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014754

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M53

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
2

1

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-46

2014 Note

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014755

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
1

2

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-47

2014 Note

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014757

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BCM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-48

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009014758

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

B

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

C

D

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

E

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

M22

6

14

F

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

G

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

H

Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
I

Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

Ground

6

M22

14

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

K

4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.

LAN

ECM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

3.

L

Remove the ECM and the BCM.
Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.

84

J

Not existed

83

N

Approx. 108 – 132

Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
O

BCM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

P

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-49

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-50

2014 Note

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644555

B

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E7
Harness connector M69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

C

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Connector No.

Terminal No.
62

E46

61

E

F

Disconnect the following harness connectors.
IPDM E/R
Harness connectors E7 and M69
Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector

D

Harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.

E7

G

Continuity

21A

Existed

20A

Existed

H

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.

J

Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.

K

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
Harness connector
Connector No.
M69

Data link connector

Terminal No.
21A
20A

Connector No.
M22

Terminal No.

Continuity

6

Existed

14

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-51

2014 Note

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554630

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

83

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ECM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-52

2014 Note

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554631

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E33

E

F

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
11

D

10

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal
and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-53

2014 Note

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554632

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E46

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
62

61

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-54

2014 Note

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554633

WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

B

C

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the main harness.

2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, «Work Flow».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO
>> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-55

2014 Note

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554634

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
6

14

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-56

2014 Note

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554635

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M53

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
2

1

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-57

2014 Note

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554636

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
1

2

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-58

2014 Note

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554637

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BCM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-59

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644558

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

M22

6

14

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

Ground

6

M22

14

Not existed
Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Remove the ECM and the BCM.
Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
ECM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

3.

83

Approx. 108 – 132

Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
BCM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-60

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

A

B

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-61

2014 Note

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644559

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E7
Harness connector M69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Disconnect the following harness connectors.
IPDM E/R
Harness connectors E7 and M69
Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.
62

E46

61

Harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.

E7

Continuity

21A

Existed

20A

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector
Connector No.
M69

Data link connector

Terminal No.
21A
20A

Connector No.
M22

Terminal No.

Continuity

6

Existed

14

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-62

2014 Note

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554770

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

83

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ECM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-63

2014 Note

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554771

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E33

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
11

10

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal
and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-64

2014 Note

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554772

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E46

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
62

61

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-65

2014 Note

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554773

WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the main harness.

2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, «Work Flow».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO
>> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-66

2014 Note

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554774

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of AV control unit.
Check the resistance between the AV control unit harness connector terminals.
AV control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M70

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
8

17

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the AV control unit branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AV control unit. Refer to AV-153, «AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AV control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-67

2014 Note

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554775

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
6

14

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-68

2014 Note

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554776

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M53

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
2

1

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-69

2014 Note

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554777

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
1

2

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-70

2014 Note

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554778

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BCM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-71

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644560

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

M22

6

14

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

Ground

6

M22

14

Not existed
Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Remove the ECM and the BCM.
Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
ECM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

3.

83

Approx. 108 – 132

Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
BCM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-72

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

A

B

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-73

2014 Note

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644561

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E7
Harness connector M69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Disconnect the following harness connectors.
IPDM E/R
Harness connectors E7 and M69
Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.
62

E46

61

Harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.

E7

Continuity

21A

Existed

20A

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector
Connector No.
M69

Data link connector

Terminal No.
21A
20A

Connector No.
M22

Terminal No.

Continuity

6

Existed

14

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-74

2014 Note

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554818

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

83

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ECM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-75

2014 Note

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554819

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E33

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
11

10

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal
and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-76

2014 Note

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554820

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E46

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
62

61

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-77

2014 Note

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554821

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
TCM
Harness connector F8
Harness connector E8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of TCM.
Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM harness connector
Connector No.
F44

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
33

23

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the TCM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to TM-211, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the TCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-78

2014 Note

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554822

WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

B

C

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the main harness.

2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, «Work Flow».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO
>> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-79

2014 Note

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554823

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
6

14

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-80

2014 Note

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554824

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M53

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
2

1

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-81

2014 Note

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009554825

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
1

2

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-82

2014 Note

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555071

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BCM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-83

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644562

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

M22

6

14

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

Ground

6

M22

14

Not existed
Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Remove the ECM and the BCM.
Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
ECM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

3.

83

Approx. 108 – 132

Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
BCM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-84

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

A

B

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-85

2014 Note

MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644564

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
Harness connector E7
Harness connector M69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Disconnect the following harness connectors.
IPDM E/R
Harness connectors E7 and M69
Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.
62

E46

61

Harness connector
Connector No.

Terminal No.

E7

Continuity

21A

Existed

20A

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)

Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector
Connector No.
M69

Data link connector

Terminal No.
21A
20A

Connector No.
M22

Terminal No.

Continuity

6

Existed

14

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO
>> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-86

2014 Note

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555072

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of ECM.
Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector
Connector No.
E16

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
84

83

D

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ECM branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-87

2014 Note

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555073

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector
Connector No.
E33

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
11

10

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, «Removal
and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-88

2014 Note

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555074

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side
and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
E46

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
62

61

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-89

2014 Note

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555075

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
TCM
Harness connector F8
Harness connector E8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of TCM.
Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM harness connector
Connector No.
F44

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
33

23

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the TCM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to TM-211, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the TCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-90

2014 Note

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555076

WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

B

C

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the main harness.

2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, «Work Flow».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO
>> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-91

2014 Note

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555077

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of AV control unit.
Check the resistance between the AV control unit harness connector terminals.
AV control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M70

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
8

17

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the AV control unit branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AV control unit. Refer to AV-153, «AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AV control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-92

2014 Note

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555078

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection
(connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

E

Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.
M22

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
6

D

14

F

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO
>> Repair the data link connector branch line.

G

H

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-93

2014 Note

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555079

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector
Connector No.
M53

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
2

1

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-94

2014 Note

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555080

1.CHECK CONNECTOR

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection
(unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.

E

Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
M24

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
1

2

D

Approx. 54 – 66

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the combination meter branch line.

F

G

H

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

I

J

K

L

LAN

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LAN-95

2014 Note

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009555081

1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect the connector of BCM.
Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector
Connector No.
M18

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BCM branch line.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NO
>> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-96

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009644565

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

B

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system.
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the terminal and connector.

C

D

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

E

Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

M22

6

14

F

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

G

3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)

H

Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
I

Data link connector
Connector No.

Continuity

Terminal No.

Ground

6

M22

14

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the harness and repair the root cause.

K

4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT
1.
2.

LAN

ECM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.

3.

L

Remove the ECM and the BCM.
Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.

84

J

Not existed

83

N

Approx. 108 – 132

Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
O

BCM

Resistance (Ω)

Terminal No.
39

40

Approx. 108 – 132

P

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.

5.CHECK SYMPTOM

Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.
Revision: April 2013

LAN-97

2014 Note

CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
[CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.

6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION

Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

Revision: April 2013

LAN-98

2014 Note

ENGINE

SECTION

LU

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

A

LU

C

D

E

CONTENTS
HR16DE
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

Draining ………………………………………………………….. 8
Refilling …………………………………………………………… 8

OIL FILTER ………………………………………………. 10
Removal and Installation …………………………………..10
Inspection ……………………………………………………….10

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Liquid Gasket …………………………………………………… 2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 11

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………11
Removal and Installation …………………………………..11

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 5
DESCRIPTION ……………………………………………. 5
Engine Lubrication System ………………………………… 5
Engine Lubrication System Schematic …………………. 6

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 7

F

G

H

OIL PUMP ………………………………………………… 11
I

OIL COOLER ……………………………………………. 13
Exploded View …………………………………………………13
Removal and Installation …………………………………..13

J

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 15

K

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 15

L

ENGINE OIL ……………………………………………….. 7

Periodical Maintenance Specification ………………….15
Engine Oil Pressure ………………………………………….15
M

Inspection ………………………………………………………… 7

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[HR16DE]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009561113

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Liquid Gasket

INFOID:0000000009654175

REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and
remove the liquid gasket using Tool (A).
Tool Number

: KV10111100 (J-37228)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap (1) the cutter where the liquid gasket is applied. Use a
plastic hammer to slide (2) the cutter by tapping on the side.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces.

AWBIA1249GB

LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.

2.

Using suitable tool (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the
liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.

JPBIA0053ZZ

Revision: April 2013

LU-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
3. Attach liquid gasket tube to the suitable tool.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
4. Apply liquid gasket without gaps to the specified location according to the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for liquid gasket application, apply liquid
gasket to the groove.

[HR16DE]
A

LU

C
EMA0622D

D

• As for bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside the
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Check to read the text of this manual.
(A)

E

: Groove
: Inside

F

• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
JPBIA0010ZZ
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in the procedures contained in this manual concerning liquid gasket application, observe them.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[HR16DE]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009444894

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seat cutter

Removing oil pan (lower) etc.

NT046

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009444895

Tool name

Description

Deep socket

Removing and installing oil pressure sensor
27 mm (1.06 in)

PBIC4066E

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Tube presser

Pressing the tube of liquid gasket

NT052

KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench

Removing oil filter
64.3 mm (2.531 in)

S-NT375

Revision: April 2013

LU-4

2014 Note

DESCRIPTION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

DESCRIPTION
Engine Lubrication System

INFOID:0000000009561116

LU

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

ALBIA1142ZZ

1.

Exhaust camshaft

Intake valve timing controller

3.

Exhaust valve timing controller

4.

Exhaust valve timing control solenoid 5.
valve

2.

Exhaust timing control oil filter

6.

Chain tensioner

7.

Chain oil jet

Oil strainer

9.

Oil pump

8.

J

K

10. Oil cooler

11. Oil filter

13. Piston oil jet

14. Intake valve timing control oil filter 15. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve

12. Main bearing

16. Intake camshaft

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-5

2014 Note

DESCRIPTION
[HR16DE]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Engine Lubrication System Schematic

INFOID:0000000009444897

AWBIA1597ZZ

Revision: April 2013

LU-6

2014 Note

ENGINE OIL
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

ENGINE OIL
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009444898

LU

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
Before starting engine, position the vehicle so that it is level and check the engine oil level. If engine is already
started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
2. Insert oil level gauge and check that the engine oil level is within
the range (A) as shown.
3. If it is out of range, adjust it.

C

D

E

F

G
JPBIA0554ZZ

ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
• Check engine oil for white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
• If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.

H

ENGINE OIL LEAKS

I

Check for engine oil leaks around the following areas:
• Oil pan (upper and lower)
• Oil pan drain plug
• Oil pressure sensor
• Oil filter
• Oil cooler
• Oil level sensor
• Engine oil temperature sensor
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
• Mating surface between front cover and rocker cover
• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
• Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear)
• Front cover

J

K

L

M

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• When checking engine oil pressure, shift selector should be in the «P» (Park) or «N» (Neutral) position, and apply parking brake securely.
1. Check engine oil level.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-7

2014 Note

ENGINE OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch. Remove
oil pressure switch using suitable tool and install suitable tools
(A/B).
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch.

[HR16DE]

JPBIA0074ZZ

3.
4.

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
NOTE:
• When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high.
• If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leaks.
Engine oil pressure

5.
a.
b.

After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine.
Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to specification.
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants».
Tightening torque

6.
7.

: Refer to LU-15, «Engine Oil Pressure».

: Refer to LU-11, «Exploded View».

Check engine oil level.
After warming up engine, check that there is no engine oil leaks with the running engine.

Draining

INFOID:0000000009444899

WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, as engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin
contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, park the vehicle on a level surface and check for engine oil leaks. Refer to LU-7,
«Inspection».
2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap.
4. Remove drain plug and then drain engine oil.

Refilling
1.

2.

INFOID:0000000009444900

Install drain plug with new copper sealing washer. Refer to EM-34, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Be sure to clean drain plug.
• Do not reuse copper sealing washer.
Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil capacity and viscosity

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

CAUTION:
• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in the engine.
Revision: April 2013

LU-8

2014 Note

ENGINE OIL
[HR16DE]
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leaks. Repair as necessary.
4. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
5. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».

A

LU

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-9

2014 Note

OIL FILTER
[HR16DE]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444901

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».
Remove oil filter using suitable tool (A).
: Front
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned; engine and engine oil may be
hot.
CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb engine oil
leaks and spills.
• Do not spill engine oil on drive belt.
• Completely wipe off any engine oil that spills on engine
and vehicle.
• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.

JSBIA0620ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
Apply new engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.

SMA010

3.

Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,
then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A), or tighten to specification.
Oil filter

: 17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

JPBIA0077ZZ

4.

Refill engine with new engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Refilling».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009444902

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.

Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

LU-10

2014 Note

OIL PUMP
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

OIL PUMP
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009643047

LU

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

AWBIA1595ZZ

1.

Rear oil seal

2.

O-ring

3.

Oil pan (upper)

4.

Oil pump chain tensioner (for oil
pump drive chain)

5.

Oil pump drive chain

6.

Crankshaft key

7.

Crankshaft sprocket

8.

Oil pump sprocket

9.

Oil pump

10. O-ring

11. O-ring

12. Oil pan drain plug

13. Drain plug washer

14. Oil pan (lower)

15. Oil filter

16. Connector bolt

17. Oil cooler

18. O-ring

19. Relief valve

A.

B.

C.

Refer to LU-11

K

L

M

Refer to LU-10

N

Oil pan (lower) side

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009444904

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».
Remove timing chain and oil pump drive chain. Refer to EM-51, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

LU-11

P

2014 Note

OIL PUMP
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Loosen the oil pump bolts in the reverse order as shown.
4. Remove oil pump and O-rings.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Do not disassemble oil pump.

AWBIA1122GB

INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Install new O-rings on the oil pan (upper) before installing the oil pump. Refer to EM-34, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Install the oil pump.
Tighten the oil pump bolts to specification in the order shown.
Install timing chain and oil pump drive chain. Refer to EM-51,
«Removal and Installation».
Refill engine with new engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Refilling».

AWBIA1122GB

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

LU-12

2014 Note

OIL COOLER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OIL COOLER

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009643048

LU

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
AWBIA1596ZZ

1.

Radiator hose (upper)

2.

Hose clamp

3.

Water hose

4.

Radiator hose (lower)

5.

Connector bolt

6.

Oil cooler

7.

O-ring

8.

Relief valve

9.

Water hose

A.

To radiator (upper side)

B.

To radiator (lower side)

Removal and Installation

K

L
INFOID:0000000009444906

M

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, «Draining».
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
3. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, «Removal and Installation».
4. Remove water hoses from the oil cooler.
5. Remove oil cooler and O-ring.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Revision: April 2013

LU-13

2014 Note

N

O

P

OIL COOLER
[HR16DE]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Oil Cooler
Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air through engine coolant
inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler.
Relief Valve
Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove
the valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve by tapping it in place.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Ensure that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler and oil pan (upper).
• Tighten connector bolt after aligning cutout (1) on oil cooler with
protrusion (2) on oil pan (upper) side.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Replace relief valve if removed.

AWBIA1139GB

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

LU-14

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[HR16DE]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification

INFOID:0000000009444907

LU

(US qt, lmp qt)

C

ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:

Drain and refill

With oil filter change

3.5 (3 3/4, 3 1/8)

Without oil filter change

3.2 (3 3/8, 2 7/8)

Dry engine (Overhaul)

3.5 (3 3/4, 3 1/8)

Engine Oil Pressure

D

INFOID:0000000009444908

E
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Approximate discharge pressure*

Engine Speed

M/T

600 rpm

F

CVT
More than 98 (1.0, 14.2)
More than 294 (3.0, 42.6)
More than 392 (4.0, 56.8)

2,000 rpm
6,000 rpm

G

*: Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F).

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

LU-15

2014 Note

MAINTENANCE

SECTION

MA

MAINTENANCE

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 5
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ………………………….. 5
General Maintenance ………………………………………… 5

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ………………………….. 7
FOR MEXICO …………………………………………………….. 7
FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance …………………. 7
EXCEPT FOR MEXICO ……………………………………….. 9
EXCEPT FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance …… 9

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ……………………………………………………….12
Fluids and Lubricants ………………………………………. 12
SAE Viscosity Number …………………………………….. 12
Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio …………………………… 13

ENGINE MAINTENANCE ……………………………..14
DRIVE BELT …………………………………………………….. 14
DRIVE BELT : Exploded View ………………………….. 14
DRIVE BELT : Removal and Installation …………….. 14
DRIVE BELT : Inspection …………………………………. 15
DRIVE BELT : Adjustment ……………………………….. 15
ENGINE COOLANT …………………………………………… 16
ENGINE COOLANT : Inspection ……………………….. 16
ENGINE COOLANT : Draining Engine Coolant …… 17

Revision: April 2013

ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling ……………………………17
ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing Cooling System ……19

F

FUEL LINES ………………………………………………………19
FUEL LINES : Inspection …………………………………..19

G

AIR CLEANER FILTER ………………………………………19
AIR CLEANER FILTER : Exploded View …………….20
AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation
….20

H

I

ENGINE OIL ………………………………………………………21
ENGINE OIL : Inspection …………………………………..21
ENGINE OIL : Draining ……………………………………..22
ENGINE OIL : Refilling ……………………………………..22

J

OIL FILTER ……………………………………………………….23
OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation ……………….23
OIL FILTER : Inspection ……………………………………24

K

SPARK PLUG ……………………………………………………24
SPARK PLUG : Exploded View ………………………….24
SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation ……………24
EVAP VAPOR LINES …………………………………………26
EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection ………………………26

L

M

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ……….. 27
EXHAUST SYSTEM ……………………………………………27
EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection ……………………….27
CVT FLUID ………………………………………………………..27
CVT FLUID : Inspection …………………………………….27
CVT FLUID : Replacement ………………………………..27
CVT FLUID : Adjustment …………………………………..29
CLUTCH FLUID …………………………………………………30
CLUTCH FLUID : Inspection ……………………………..30
CLUTCH FLUID : Draining ………………………………..30
CLUTCH FLUID : Refilling …………………………………31
CLUTCH FLUID : Air Bleeding …………………………..32
GEAR OIL …………………………………………………………33

MA-1

2014 Note

N

O

MA

GEAR OIL : Inspection ……………………………………. 33
GEAR OIL : Draining ………………………………………. 33
GEAR OIL : Refilling ……………………………………….. 34
ROAD WHEEL …………………………………………………. 34
ROAD WHEEL : Inspection ……………………………… 34
ROAD WHEEL : Adjustment ……………………………. 34
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS …………………… 36
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection … 36
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES ……………………………. 36
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection …………. 36
BRAKE FLUID …………………………………………………. 37
BRAKE FLUID : Inspection ………………………………. 37
BRAKE FLUID : Draining …………………………………. 37
BRAKE FLUID : Refilling …………………………………. 37
BRAKE FLUID : Bleeding Brake System ……………. 38
BRAKE PAD ……………………………………………………. 38
BRAKE PAD : Inspection …………………………………. 38
DISC ROTOR …………………………………………………… 38
DISC ROTOR : Inspection ……………………………….. 39
BRAKE LINING ………………………………………………… 39
BRAKE LINING : Inspection …………………………….. 39

Revision: April 2013

BRAKE DRUM …………………………………………………. 40
BRAKE DRUM : Inspection ………………………………. 40
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ……………………… 40
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection …… 40
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS ……………………… 41
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection ….. 41
DRIVE SHAFT ………………………………………………….. 41
DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection ………………………………. 41
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH ………………… 41
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded
View ……………………………………………………………… 42
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded
View ……………………………………………………………… 42
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded
View ……………………………………………………………… 43
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded
View ……………………………………………………………… 43
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS ……………………………….. 44
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection …………….. 44

MA-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009561082

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

MA

Revision: April 2013

MA-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009417622

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV991J0070
(J-45695)
Coolant Refill Tool

Refilling engine cooling system

LMA053

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009417623

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench

Removing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)

S-NT375

Spark plug wrench

Removing and installing spark plug
a: 14 mm (0.55 in)

JPBIA0399ZZ

Acoustic tension gauge

Checking drive belt tension

PBIC3881E

Revision: April 2013

MA-4

2014 Note

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance

INFOID:0000000009452294

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform the
checks and inspections themselves or they can have their NISSAN dealers do them.

B

C

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Item
Doors and engine hood

Lamps

Tires

Tire rotation

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components
(if equipped)

Reference page

Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back door,
trunk lid and hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive
materials, check lubrication frequently.

MA-42
MA-42
MA-43
MA-43

Clean the headlamps on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps,
tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed
securely. Also check the aim of the headlamps.

—

Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. Adjust
the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

WT-9

In the case that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) and front & rear tires are same size; Tires
should be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). Tires marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is completed.
In the case that Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) and front & rear tires are same size; Tires
should be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). Tires marked with directional indicators can only be rotated between front and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is completed.
In the case that front tires are different size from rear tires; Tires cannot be rotated.
However, the timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and the
road surface conditions.

D

E

F

G

H

WT-5

I

J

K

Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are
replaced due to wear or age.

—

Wheel alignment and
balance

If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If
the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may
be needed.

FSU-7
FSU-6
FSU-8

Windshield

Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.

—

Wiper blades

Check for cracks or wear if not functioning correctly.

—

L

M

N

INSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle,
etc.

Item

Reference page

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that the pedal does not catch or
require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

—

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure that it attains the proper distance
from the floor mat when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to
keep the floor mats away from the pedal.

BR-15

Check the parking brake operation regularly. Check that the lever (if equipped) or the
pedal (if equipped) has the proper travel. Also make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied.

PB-4

Parking brake

Revision: April 2013

MA-5

2014 Note

O

MA

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Item
Seat belts

Steering wheel

Warning lamps and
chimes
Windshield defogger
Windshield wiper and
washer

Reference page

Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

MA-44

Check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or
strange noises. Check that it has the specified play.
Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in)

—

Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly.

—

Check that the air comes out of the defogger outlets properly and in good quantity when
operating the heater or air conditioner.

—

Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

—

UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel.)

Item
Battery

Reference page

Except for maintenance free battery; Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “UPPER” and “LOWER” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

PG-60

Brake (and clutch) fluid
level(s)

For Manual Transmission (MT) model; Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels
are between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir(s).
Except for Manual Transmission (MT) model; Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir.

MA-36
MA-30

Engine coolant level

Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Make sure that the coolant level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir.

CO-8

Engine drive belt(s)

Make sure that drive belt(s) is/are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

EM-17

Engine oil level

Check the level after parking the vehicle (on a level ground) and turning off the engine.

LU-7

Fluid leaks

Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been
parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you
should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for cause and have it corrected immediately.

—

Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir tank.

—

Windshield washer fluid

Revision: April 2013

MA-6

2014 Note

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

FOR MEXICO
FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance

INFOID:0000000009452295

The following tables show the normal maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
Periodic maintenance beyond the last period shown on the tables requires similar maintenance.

B

C

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (HR16DE ENGINE)
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary,

R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

E = Check and correct the engine coolant mixture ratio.

D

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform either at number of kilometers (miles)
or months, whichever comes first.

km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

10
(6)
6

20
(12)
12

30
(18)
18

40
(24)
24

50
(30)
30

60
(36)
36

70
(42)
42

80
(48)
48

Reference
page

E

EM-10

F

Underhood and under vehicle
Intake & exhaust valve clearance

See NOTE (1)

Drive belts

See NOTE (2)

I

I

EM-17

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LU-8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LU-10

E

E

CO-8

Cooling system

I

I

CO-12
CO-12

Fuel lines

I

I

FL-5

Air cleaner filter (Viscous paper type)

R

R

EM-19

Engine oil (Use recommended oil.)
Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN engine
oil filter or equivalent)
Engine coolant

See NOTE (3)

Fuel filter (In-tank type)

See NOTE (4)

—

Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type)

Replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles)

EVAP vapor lines (With carbon canister)

I

H

I

J

EM-21
I

EC-336

NOTE:
• Maintenance items with “
tions”.

G

K

” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Condi-

L

• (1) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
• (2) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.
• (3) Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the
engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Check and correct the engine coolant mixture ratio every
40,000 km (24,000 miles) or 24 months. First replacement interval is 160,000 km (96,000 miles) or 96 months. After first replacement,
replace every 80,000 km (48,000 miles) or 48 months.
• (4) Maintenance-free item.

M

N

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (HR16DE ENGINE)
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform either at number of kilometers (miles)
or months, whichever comes first.

R = Replace.

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

10
(6)
6

20
(12)
12

30
(18)
18

40
(24)
24

50
(30)
30

60
(36)
36

70
(42)
42

80
(48)
48

Reference
page

Underhood and under vehicle
Brake and clutch fluid (For level & leaks)

I

I

I

I

BR-11
CL-6

Brake line & cable

I

I

I

I

MA-36

Clutch system

I

I

I

I

CL-19

Revision: April 2013

MA-7

2014 Note

O

MA

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform either at number of kilometers (miles)
or months, whichever comes first.

km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

10
(6)
6

20
(12)
12

30
(18)
18

40
(24)
24

50
(30)
30

60
(36)
36

70
(42)
42

80
(48)
48

Reference
page

Exhaust system

I

I

MA-27

Brake fluid

R

R

MA-36

CVT fluid (For leaks)

See NOTE (1)

Manual transaxle gear oil (For leaks)

I

I

I

I

TM-224

I

I

I

I

TM-16

I

MA-40
MA-41

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension

I

parts
I

Drive shafts

I

I

I

MA-41

Outside and inside
Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate & balance wheels)

I

I

I

I

FSU-6
FSU-7
FSU-8

Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings

I

I

I

I

MA-38
MA-39

Foot brake, parking brake & clutch
(For free play, stroke & operation)

I

I

I

I

MA-39
BR-8
CL-5

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “
tions”.

” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Condi-

(1) Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid. If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,
inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealers every 100,000 km (60,000 miles), then change the CVT fluid if necessary. And if the
inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 100,000 miles (60,000 miles). Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS (HR16DE ENGINE)
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is
mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
Severe driving conditions
A — Driving under dusty conditions
B — Driving repeatedly short distances
C — Towing a trailer or caravan
D — Extensive idling
E —Driving in extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either
extremely low or extremely high
F — Driving in high humidity or mountainous areas
G — Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive areas
H — Driving on rough and/or muddy roads or in the desert
I — Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Driving condition

Maintenance
operation

Maintenance item

Maintenance interval

Reference
page

A

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Air cleaner filter

Replace

More frequently

A

B

C D

.

.

.

.

.

Engine oil

Replace

Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
3 months

LU-8

A

B

C D

.

.

.

.

.

Engine oil filter

Replace

Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
3 months

LU-10

.

.

.

.

F

.

.

.

Brake fluid

Replace

Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles)
or 12 months

BR-11
BR-11

.

Revision: April 2013

MA-8

EM-19

2014 Note

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
.

.

.

.

.

.

G H

.

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

Inspect

Every 20,000 km (12,000 miles)
or 12 months

MA-41
MA-40

.

.

.

.

.

.

G H

.

Drive shafts

Inspect

Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
or 6 months

MA-41

A

.

C

.

.

.

G H

I

Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings

Inspect

Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
or 6 months

MA-38
MA-39

EXCEPT FOR MEXICO

A

B

C

EXCEPT FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance

INFOID:0000000009452296

The following tables show the normal maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
Periodic maintenance beyond the last period shown on the tables requires similar maintenance.

D

E

ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (HR16DE ENGINE)
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary,

R = Replace, E = Check and correct the engine coolant mixture ratio.

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

F

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

Perform either at number of kilometers
(miles) or months, whichever comes first.

km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

10
(6)
6

20
(12)
12

30
(18)
18

40
(24)
24

50
(30)
30

60
(36)
36

70
(42)
42

80
(48)
48

Reference
page

G

Underhood and under vehicle
Intake & exhaust valve clearance

See NOTE (1)

Drive belts

See NOTE (2)

Engine oil (Use recommended oil.)
Engine oil filter (Use Genuine NISSAN engine oil filter or equivalent.)
Engine coolant

EM-10
I

I

EM-17

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LU-8

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

LU-10

E

CO-8

I

CO-12
CO-12
CO-8

See NOTE (3)

E

Cooling system

I

I

I

Fuel lines

I

I

EX-4

Air cleaner filter (Viscous paper type)

R

R

EM-19

R
Fuel filter (In-tank type)

R

See NOTE (4)

Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type)

Replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles)
I

Maintenance items with “
ditions”.

K

M

EM-21
I

EC-336

N

NOTE:
•

J

EM-19
—

EVAP vapor lines (With carbon canister)

I

L

Clean every 5,000 km (3,000 miles)

Air cleaner filter (dry paper type)

H

” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Con-

O

• (1) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
• (2) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.
• (3) Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the
engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Check and correct the engine coolant mixture ratio every
40,000 km (24,000 miles) or 24 months. First replacement interval is 160,000 km (96,000 miles) or 96 months. After first replacement,
replace every 80,000 km (48,000 miles) or 48 months.
• (4) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (HR16DE ENGINE)

Revision: April 2013

MA-9

2014 Note

MA

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform either at number of kilometers
(miles) or months, whichever comes
first.

R = Replace,

L = Lubricate.

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

10
(6)
6

20
(12)
12

30
(18)
18

Reference
page

40
(24)
24

50
(30)
30

60
(36)
36

70
(42)
42

80
(48)
48

I

I

I

I

I

BR-11
CL-6

Underhood and under vehicle
Brake & clutch fluid (For level & leaks)

I

I

I

Brake fluid

R

R

BR-11
BR-11

Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve

I

I

BR-14

I

MA-36,
CL-19,
EX-4

Brake, clutch & exhaust systems
CVT fluid (For leaks)

I
See NOTE (1)

Manual transaxle gear oil (For leaks)

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

TM-224

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

TM-16

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspen-

I

sion parts & front drive shafts

I

I

I

MA-40
MA-41
MA-41

I

I

I

FSU-7
FSU-8
WT-4

I

BR-15
BR-15
BR-13
BR-8

I

BR-17
BR-17

L

MA-42
MA-42
MA-43
MA-43

I

MA-44

I

BR-8
PB-4
CL-5

Outside and inside
Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate &
balance wheels)
Brake pads, rotors & other brake components

I

I

Brake linings, drums & other brake

L

Seat belts, buckles, retractors, anchors
& adjusters
Foot brake, parking brake & clutch
(For free play, stroke & operation)

I

I

components

Lock, hinges & hood latch

I

L

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

L

I

I

I

L

L

I

I

I

I

NOTE:
• Maintenance items with “
tions”.

” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Condi-

(1) Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid. If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,
inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealers every 60,000 miles (100,000 km), then change the CVT fluid if necessary. And if the
inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (100,000 km). Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS (HR16DE ENGINE)
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is
mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
Severe driving conditions
A — Driving under dusty conditions
B — Driving repeatedly short distances
C — Towing a trailer or caravan
Revision: April 2013

MA-10

2014 Note

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
D — Extensive idling
E — Driving in extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either
extremely low or extremely high
F — Driving in high humidity or mountainous areas
G — Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive areas
H — Driving on rough and/or muddy roads or in the desert
I — Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas
J — Frequent driving in water
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Driving condition

Maintenance
operation

Maintenance item

Maintenance interval

A

B

C

Reference
page

.

.

.

.

.

.

Air cleaner filter

Replace

More frequently

EM-21

D

A B C D .

.

.

.

.

.

Engine oil & engine oil filter

Replace

Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles)
or 3 months

LU-8
LU-8
LU-10

E

.

.

.

.

.

F .

.

.

.

Brake fluid

Replace

Every 20,000 km (12,000
miles) or 12 months

BR-11
BR-11

.

.

.

.

.

G H .

.

Steering gear & linkage, axle &
suspension parts & front drive
shafts

Inspect

Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
or 6 months

MA-40
MA-41
MA-41

F

.

A .

C .

.

.

G H I

.

Brake pads, rotors & other brake
components

Inspect

Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles)
or 3 months

BR-15
BR-15

G

A .

C .

.

.

G H I

.

Brake linings, drums & other
brake components

Inspect

Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
or 6 months

BR-17
BR-17

Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles)
or 3 months

MA-42
MA-42
MA-43
MA-43

A .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

G .

.

.

Lock, hinges & hood latch

Lubricate

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

MA

Revision: April 2013

MA-11

2014 Note

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fluids and Lubricants

INFOID:0000000009452309

Capacity
(Approximate)

Description
Liter

Imp measure

41.0

10-7/8 gal

9.0 gal

Unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)

With oil filter change

3.5

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

For Mexico:

Without oil filter change

3.2

3-3/8 qt

2-7/8 qt

Fuel
Engine oil
Drain and refill

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

US measure

Genuine NISSAN engine oil*1
API grade SL, SM or SN*1
ILSAC grade GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5*1

Dry engine (Overhaul)

3.5

3-3/4 qt

3-1/8 qt

Viscosity SAE 10W-30*1
Except for Mexico:
Genuine NISSAN engine oil*1
API grade SL, SM or SN*1
ILSAC grade GF-3, GF-4 or GF-5*1

CVT

7.3

7-3/4 qt

6-3/8 qt

M/T

6.7

7-1/8 qt

5-7/8 qt

0.7

3/4 qt

5/8 qt

With oil cooler

7.1

7-1/2 qt

6-1/4 qt

Without oil cooler

6.9

7-1/4 qt

6-1/8 qt

2.67

5-5/8 pt

4-3/4 pt

Cooling system (with reservoir)
Reservoir tank
CVT fluid

Manual transaxle fluid gear oil

Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue)
or equivalent in its quality*2

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3*3
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission
Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or equivalent*4

Brake and clutch fluid

—

—

—

Multi-purpose grease

—

—

—

Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid, or equivalent DOT 3
(US FMVSS No. 116)
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Windshield washer fluid

2.5

2-5/8 qt

2-1/4 qt

Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer
Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or
equivalent

Air conditioner system refrigerant

0.4

0.88 lb

0.88 lb

HFC-134a (R-134a) *5

110 — 130

3.9 — 4.6 fl oz

3.9 — 4.6 fl oz

Air conditioner system oil

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PR
(Type R) or equivalent *5

*1: For additional information, see “SAE Viscosity Number”.
*2: Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the
engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant.
Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not be
covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period.
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the
CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
*4: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a
temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi as soon as it is available.
*5: For further information, see “Air conditioning specification label”.

SAE Viscosity Number

INFOID:0000000009452310

GASOLINE ENGINE
• 10W-30 is preferable.
Revision: April 2013

MA-12

2014 Note

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
If 10W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, from the chart, that
is suitable for outside temperature range.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G
JPPIA0003GB

Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio

INFOID:0000000009452311

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality,
year-round and extended life engine coolant. The high quality engine
coolant contains the specific solutions effective for the anti-corrosion
and the anti-freeze function. Therefore, additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
CAUTION:
• When adding or replacing engine coolant, be sure to use only
a Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality
with the proper mixture ratio. See the examples shown.
The use of other types of engine coolant may damage the
engine cooling system.
SMA089D
• When checking the engine coolant mixture ratio by the coolant
hydrometer, use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading (specific gravity) according to coolant
temperature.

H

I

J

K

L

Mixed coolant specific gravity
Unit: specific gravity

M

Coolant temperature °C (°F)

Engine coolant mixture
ratio

15 (59)

25 (77)

35 (95)

45 (113)

30%

1.046 — 1.050

1.042 — 1.046

1.038 — 1.042

1.033 — 1.038

50%

1.076 — 1.080

1.070 — 1.076

1.065 — 1.071

1.059 — 1.065

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.

Revision: April 2013

MA-13

2014 Note

N

O

MA

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670478

JSBIA1053ZZ

1.

Generator

2.

Water pump

3.

Crankshaft pulley

4.

A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

5.

Tensioner idler pulley

6.

Drive belt

DRIVE BELT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009670479

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove engine undercover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Remove wheel and tire (RH) using a power tool. Refer to WT-5, «Adjustment».
Partially remove the fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Exploded View».
Loosen the lock nut and then release the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt.
Remove the drive belt.

INSTALLATION
1.

Pull the idler pulley in the loosening direction, and then temporarily tighten the lock nut to the following
torque.
Lock nut
(Temporary tightening)

2.

3.

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)

NOTE:
Do not move the lock nut from the temporary tightened position. Go to step 2.
Install the drive belt on each pulley.
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no engine oil, grease, or engine coolant, etc. in pulley grooves.
• Check that the belt seats securely inside the groove on each pulley.
Adjust drive belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to MA-15, «DRIVE BELT : Adjustment».
CAUTION:
• Perform the belt tension adjustment with the lock nut temporarily tightened to the torque specification listed in step 1 which prevents the idler pulley from tilting.
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.

Revision: April 2013

MA-14

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.
A

Lock nut (Final tightening)
5.

: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

Check that belt tension is within the specification using suitable tool. Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».

DRIVE BELT : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670480

• Inspection should be done only when engine is cold or over 30
minutes after the engine is stopped.
(1)

: Generator

(2)

: Water pump

C

D

(3)

: Crankshaft pulley

(4)

: A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

(5)

: Idler pulley

(6)

: Drive belt

E

PBIC3642E

• Visually check belt for wear, damage, and cracks on inside and
edges.
• Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise twice, and check that the tension on all pulleys equalizes before testing.
• When measuring deflection, apply 98.1 N (10 kg, 22 lb) at the ( ) marked point.
• Measure the belt tension and frequency using suitable tool at the ( ) marked point.
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after turning
crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between
pulleys.
Belt deflection/belt tension and frequency

INFOID:0000000009670481

Location

Location of adjuster and tightening method

Drive belt

Adjusting bolt on idler pulley

CAUTION:
• When belt is replaced with new one, adjust belt tension to the value for “New belt,” because new belt
will not fully seat in the pulley groove.
• When tension of the belt being used exceeds “Limit,” adjust it to the value for “After adjusted.”
• When installing a belt, check it is correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
• Do not allow engine oil or engine coolant to get on the belt.
• Do not twist or bend the belt strongly.
1. Partially remove the fender protector (RH) front side clip. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER :
Removal and Installation».
2. Loosen lock nut (A) and temporarily set to the following torque.
Lock nut (A)
(Temporary tightening)
: Generator

(2)

: Water pump
: Crankshaft pulley

(4)

: A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)

(5)

: Idler pulley

Revision: April 2013

G

H

J

K

L

M

N

O

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)

(3)

F

I

: Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».

DRIVE BELT : Adjustment

(1)

B

MA

PBIC3643E

MA-15

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

3.

4.

(6)

: Drive belt

(B)

: Adjusting bolt

Adjust the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to EM-115, «Drive Belt».
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
• When the tension adjustment is performed, the lock nut should be in the condition at Step 2. If
the tension adjustment is performed when the lock nut is loosened more than the temporary
tightening, the idler pulley tilts and the correct tension adjustment cannot be performed.
Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.
Lock nut (Final tightening)

: 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670482

CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
Check hoses for the following:
• Improper attachment
• Leaks
• Cracks
• Damage
• Loose connections
• Chafing
• Deterioration

CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
• Check that the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the
MAX (A) to MIN (B) range when the engine is cool.
• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.
CAUTION:
Refill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant or
equivalent. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

JPBIA0102ZZ

CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.

Revision: April 2013

MA-16

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
To check for leaks, apply pressure to the cooling system using suitable tool (A) and Tool (B).
Tool number (B)

A

: EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
B

Testing pressure

: Refer to CO-26, «Standard
and Limit».
C
PBIC5121J

D

ENGINE COOLANT : Draining Engine Coolant

INFOID:0000000009670483

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
1. Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
2. Connect a suitable hose to the radiator drain plug.
• Use a suitable hose with the dimensions as shown.
Diameter (A)
Length (B)

E

F

G

H

: 0.8 mm (0.31 in)
: 300 mm (11.81 in)

I

J
JPBIA4770ZZ

3.

Open radiator drain plug (A) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
(A): Suitable hose
: Front
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.

K

L

M

ALBIA1140ZZ

4.
5.
6.

It is necessary to drain the cylinder block when draining all of engine coolant in the system. To drain the
cylinder block, open the water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».
Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing. O
Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».
Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated,
MA
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, «Flushing Cooling System».

ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling
1.

N

INFOID:0000000009670484

Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total
system drain or for engine removal or repair.
• The radiator must be completely empty of engine coolant and water.

Revision: April 2013

MA-17

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
Radiator drain plug
2.
3.
4.

If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.
Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number

5.

: Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

: KV991J0070 (J-45695)

Insert the refill hose into the engine coolant mixture container
that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the
closed position.
• Use recommended engine coolant or equivalent.
Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
Engine coolant capacity
(with reservoir tank)

6.

CAUTION:
Do not use any cooling system additives such as radiator
sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause
damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
Compressed air
supply pressure

7.

8.

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and
Lubricants».

: 549 — 824 kPa (5.6 — 8.4 kg/cm2,
80 — 119 psi)

LLIA0058E

CAUTION:
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Engine coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill
hose is full of engine coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches
of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, use the vacuum specifications based on the altitude
above sea level.
Altitude above sea level
0 — 100 m (328 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
500 m (1,641 ft)
1,000 m (3,281 ft)

Vacuum gauge reading
: 28 inches of vacuum
: 27 inches of vacuum
: 26 inches of vacuum
: 24 — 25 inches of vacuum

LLIA0057E

9.

When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 — 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the engine coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the engine coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

MA-18

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Do not allow the engine coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn
into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
13. Install the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».

ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing Cooling System
1.

3.
4.

B

C

Install radiator drain plug and reservoir tank, if removed.
Radiator drain plug

2.

INFOID:0000000009670485

A

D

: Refer to CO-14, «Exploded View».

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plugs on cylinder block were removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-92, «Exploded
View».
Remove air duct from between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-19,
«Removal and Installation».
Disconnect heater hose (1) at location ( ) as shown.
• Position heater hose as high as possible.
: Front

E

F

G

H

I
JSBIA0616ZZ

5.

Fill radiator until engine coolant flows out of the disconnected heater hose and then reconnect the heater
hose.
6. Finish filling the engine and reservoir tank with water and reinstall the radiator cap.
7. Install air duct in between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-19, «Removal
and Installation».
8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, «Draining Engine Coolant».
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.

J

K

L

M

FUEL LINES
N

FUEL LINES : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417638

Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap, and fuel tank for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
(A)

: Engine

(B)

: Fuel line

(C)

: Fuel tank

O

MA

If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
JPBIA0129ZZ

AIR CLEANER FILTER
Revision: April 2013

MA-19

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

AIR CLEANER FILTER : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670486

AWBIA1598ZZ

1.

Air cleaner cover

2.

Mass air flow sensor

3.

Clamp

4.

Air duct

5.

Clamp

6.

Hose

7.

Clamp

8.

Grommet

9.

Grommet insert

10. Grommet

11. Grommet insert

12. Air duct inlet

13. Air cleaner body

14. Air cleaner filter

A.

B.

To electric throttle control actuator

To rocker cover

AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009670487

REMOVAL
1.

Unhook clips (A) and pull the air cleaner cover (1) upward.

JSBIA1092ZZ

Revision: April 2013

MA-20

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Remove the air cleaner filter (1) from the air cleaner body.
A

B

C
JSBIA1093ZZ

D

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Check that the air cleaner filter is securely placed in the air cleaner body.

E

ENGINE OIL

ENGINE OIL : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670490

F

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
Before starting engine, position the vehicle so that it is level and check the engine oil level. If engine is already
started, stop it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
2. Insert oil level gauge and check that the engine oil level is within
the range (A) as shown.
3. If it is out of range, adjust it.

G

H

I

J

K
JPBIA0554ZZ

ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
• Check engine oil for white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
• If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.

L

ENGINE OIL LEAKS

M

Check for engine oil leaks around the following areas:
• Oil pan (upper and lower)
• Oil pan drain plug
• Oil pressure sensor
• Oil filter
• Oil cooler
• Oil level sensor
• Engine oil temperature sensor
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
• Mating surface between front cover and rocker cover
• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
• Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear)
• Front cover

N

O

MA

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CHECK
Revision: April 2013

MA-21

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
WARNING:
• Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• When checking engine oil pressure, shift selector should be in the «P» (Park) or «N» (Neutral) position, and apply parking brake securely.
1. Check engine oil level.
2. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch. Remove
oil pressure switch using suitable tool and install suitable tools
(A/B).
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch.

JPBIA0074ZZ

3.
4.

Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
NOTE:
• When engine oil temperature is low, engine oil pressure becomes high.
• If difference is extreme, check oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leaks.
Engine oil pressure

5.
a.
b.

After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine.
Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to specification.
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants».
Tightening torque

6.
7.

: Refer to LU-15, «Engine Oil Pressure».

: Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View».

Check engine oil level.
After warming up engine, check that there is no engine oil leaks with the running engine.

ENGINE OIL : Draining

INFOID:0000000009670491

WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, as engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin
contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, park the vehicle on a level surface and check for engine oil leaks. Refer to MA-21,
«ENGINE OIL : Inspection».
2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap.
4. Remove drain plug and then drain engine oil.

ENGINE OIL : Refilling
1.

2.

INFOID:0000000009670492

Install drain plug with new copper sealing washer. Refer to EM-34, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Be sure to clean drain plug.
• Do not reuse copper sealing washer.
Refill with new engine oil.

Revision: April 2013

MA-22

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Engine oil capacity and viscosity

3.
4.
5.

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

A

CAUTION:
• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in the engine.
Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leaks. Repair as necessary.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».

OIL FILTER
INFOID:0000000009670493

REMOVAL

E

Drain engine oil. Refer to MA-22, «ENGINE OIL : Draining».
Remove oil filter using suitable tool (A).
: Front
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned; engine and engine oil may be
hot.
CAUTION:
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb engine oil
leaks and spills.
• Do not spill engine oil on drive belt.
• Completely wipe off any engine oil that spills on engine
and vehicle.
• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.

F

G

H

JSBIA0620ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

C

D

OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation
1.
2.

B

I

J

Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
Apply new engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.

K

L

M
SMA010

3.

N

Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,
then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A), or tighten to specification.
Oil filter

O

: 17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

MA

JPBIA0077ZZ

4.

Refill engine with new engine oil. Refer to MA-22, «ENGINE OIL : Refilling».

Revision: April 2013

MA-23

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

OIL FILTER : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670494

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.

Check the engine oil level. Refer to MA-21, «ENGINE OIL : Inspection».

SPARK PLUG
SPARK PLUG : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009670488

AWBIA1599ZZ

1.

Ignition coil

2.

Spark plug

3.

Rocker cover

Front

SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009670489

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-48, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock ignition coil.
Remove spark plug using a suitable tool.
Diameter (a)

: 14 mm (0.55 in)

CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock spark plug.

JPBIA0030ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• If the spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Cleaner air pressure
Cleaning time

: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
: Less than 20 seconds

CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

MA-24

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
A

B

C
SMA773C

D

• Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between
change intervals. Do not adjust the gap; replace the spark plug as
necessary if out of specification.

E

F

G
SMA806CA

INSTALLATION

H

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock the spark plug.

I

Make

NGK

Standard type*

PLZKAR6A-11

Gap (nominal)

1.1 mm (0.043 in)

J

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

CAUTION:
Always tighten the spark plug to specified torque to align the orientation of electrodes. The ground
electrode of a genuine spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability by tightening to the
specified torque. When replacing spark plugs, use genuine spark plugs of which the ground electrode
is adjusted.
NOTE:

K

L

M

N

O

MA

Revision: April 2013

MA-25

2014 Note

ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
The ground electrode of the spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability to improve combustion
eficiency in the cylinder, reduce CO2 (carbon dioxide) emission and improve fuel economy.

JPBIA5996GB

1.

Ground electrode of spark plug

C.

Poor ignitability region

A.

Top view

B.

Air-fuel mixture flow

EVAP VAPOR LINES
EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection
1.
2.

INFOID:0000000009417648

Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc. Refer to EC-336, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

MA-26

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE

A

EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670503

Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.

B

C

D

E
SMA211A

CVT FLUID

F

CVT FLUID : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670504

FLUID LEAKAGE

G

• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.)for fluid
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust
CVT fluid level. Refer to MA-29, «CVT FLUID : Adjustment».

H

I

J
SMA146B

CVT FLUID : Replacement
CVT fluid
Fluid capacity

INFOID:0000000009670505

: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».
: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».

K

L

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN
CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the (NISSAN new vehicle limited) war- M
ranty.
• Always use shop paper. Never use shop cloth.
• Replace a drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
N
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
• After replacement, always perform CVT fluid leakage check.
1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
O
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” and confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
3. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
4. Lift up the vehicle.
MA
5. Remove the drain plug and overflow tube and drain the CVT fluid from the oil pan. TM-238, «Removal and
Installation».

Revision: April 2013

MA-27

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
6. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
7. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
8. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
9. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
JSDIA1876ZZ
the drain plug.
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
10. Lift down the vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
13. Check that the CONSULT “Data monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
14. Stop the engine.
15. Lift up the vehicle.
16. Remove the drain plug, and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
17. Repeat steps 6 to 16 (one time).
18. Install the overflow tube. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten to the specified torque. If it is not tightened to the specified torque, the tube may
be damaged.
19. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
20. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
21. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
22. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
JSDIA1876ZZ
the drain plug.
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
23. Lift down the vehicle.
24. Start the engine.
25. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
26. Check that the CONSULT “Data monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
27. Lift up the vehicle.
28. Remove the drain plug and confirm that the CVT fluid is drained from the overflow tube.
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
NOTE:
If the CVT fluid is not drained, refer to “Adjustment” and refill with the CVT fluid.

Revision: April 2013

MA-28

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
29. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. TM-238,
«Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
30. Lift down the vehicle.
31. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
32. Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”.
33. Select “Erase”.
34. Stop the engine.

CVT FLUID : Adjustment
CVT fluid
Fluid capacity

INFOID:0000000009670506

: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».
: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».

9.

10.
11.

12.
13.
14.
15.

Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
Fill approximately 0.5 liter (1/2 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
Remove the ATF changer hose from the charging pipe, and
check that the CVT fluid drains out from the charging pipe. If it
does not drain out, perform charging again.
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, remove the charging pipe from the oil pan.
Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
Lift down the vehicle.
Stop the engine.

Revision: April 2013

MA-29

B

C

D

E

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN
CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the (NISSAN new vehicle limited) warranty.
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check CONSULT so that the oil temperature may be maintained from 35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F).
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
1. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the CVT fluid temperature to be approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The CVT fluid is largely affected by temperature. Therefore be sure to use CONSULT and check the
“FLUID TEMP” under “TRANSMISSION” in “Data Monitor” while adjusting.
4. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
5. Lift up the vehicle.
6. Check that there is no CVT fluid leakage.
7. Remove the drain plug. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
8.

A

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
JSDIA1876ZZ

MA

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670507

CLUTCH FLUID LEAKS
• Check clutch line for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
• Check for clutch fluid leaks by fully depressing clutch pedal while engine is running.
CAUTION:
If leaks occur around connections, reinstall the lines or replace damaged parts, if necessary.

CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL
• Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the
specified range, between the MAX and MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any clutch fluid leaks around the reservoir tank.
• Check the clutch system for any leaks if the clutch fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).

JPFIA0007ZZ

CLUTCH FLUID : Draining

INFOID:0000000009670508

CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).

JPDIB0144ZZ

2.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.

PCIB1495E

Revision: April 2013

MA-30

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown.
(2)

A

: Bleeding connector

B

Dimension (A)

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

CAUTION:
Do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.

C
JPDIB0147ZZ

4.

Depress clutch pedal to gradually discharge clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
bleeding connector.

CLUTCH FLUID : Refilling

D

E

INFOID:0000000009670509

CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in reservoir tank and then fill with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).

F

G

H

I

J

JPDIB0144ZZ

3.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.

K

L

M

N
PCIB1495E

O

MA

Revision: April 2013

MA-31

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown.
(2)

: Bleeding connector

Dimension (A)

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

JPDIB0147ZZ

5.

6.
7.
8.

Slowly depress clutch pedal to the full stroke position and then release the pedal.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
bleeding connector.
Repeat step 5 at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new clutch fluid is discharged.
CAUTION:
Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions while clutch pedal is depressed.
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to MA-32, «CLUTCH FLUID : Air Bleeding».

CLUTCH FLUID : Air Bleeding

INFOID:0000000009670510

CAUTION:
• Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
• Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
1. Fill reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding connector (1).
3. Depress and release the clutch pedal slowly and fully 15 times
at an interval of 2 to 3 seconds and release the clutch pedal.

JPDIB0144ZZ

4.

Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and maintain the position.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.

PCIB1495E

Revision: April 2013

MA-32

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
5. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown and immediately depress the clutch
pedal and hold it, to bleed the air from the system.
(2)

: Bleeding connector

Dimension (A)

B

: 5 mm (0.20 in)

CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A

C
JPDIB0147ZZ

Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions.
Release clutch pedal and wait for 5 seconds.
Repeat steps 3 to 7 until no bubbles are observed in the clutch fluid.
Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer
to MA-30, «CLUTCH FLUID : Inspection».

GEAR OIL

D

E

F

GEAR OIL : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670511

G

GEAR OIL LEAKS
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it.

H

GEAR OIL LEVEL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transaxle case.
Check the gear oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking gear oil level.
Install a new gasket on filler plug and then install filler plug to
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25,
«Exploded View».

I

J

K
SCIA7119E

GEAR OIL : Draining
1.
2.
3.

4.

INFOID:0000000009670512

Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.
Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and gasket, using suitable
tool and then drain gear oil.
Install a new gasket on drain plug (1) and install drain plug to
clutch housing, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten drain plug (1) to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25,
«Exploded View».

M

N

O

PCIB1504E

Revision: April 2013

MA-33

L

2014 Note

MA

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

GEAR OIL : Refilling
1.
2.

Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transaxle case.
Fill with new gear oil until gear oil level reaches the specified
limit at filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking gear oil level.
Oil capacity
and viscosity

3.

4.

INFOID:0000000009670513

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

Install a new gasket on filler plug and then install filler plug to
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25, «Exploded View».

SCIA7119E

ROAD WHEEL
ROAD WHEEL : Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.

INFOID:0000000009670515

Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a balancer machine.
Set dial indicator as shown.
Check runout, if runout value exceeds the limit, replace wheel.
Limit
Axial Runout (A)
Radial Runout (B)

Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».
Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».

SEIA0737E

ROAD WHEEL : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009670514

BALANCING WHEELS (ADHESIVE WEIGHT TYPE)
Preparation Before Adjustment
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel and tire. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced
adhesive tape from the wheel and tire.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the wheel and tire during removal.
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean all traces of releasing agent from the wheel
and tire.
Wheel Balance Adjustment
CAUTION:
• DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or
universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel during servicing.
• If a balancer machine has an adhesive weight mode setting, select the adhesive weight mode setting and
skip Step 2 below. If a balancer machine only has the clip-on (rim flange) weight mode setting, follow Step 2
to calculate the correct size adhesive weight.
1. Set wheel and tire on balancer machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the balancer machine.

Revision: April 2013

MA-34

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. For balancer machines that only have a clip-on (rim flange) weight mode setting, follow this step to calculate the correct size adhesive weight to use. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the
balancer machine indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 5/3 (1.67) to determine balance weight that
should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value above and
install in to the designated outer position of or at the designated angle in relation to the wheel and tire.
a. Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 (1.67) = balance weight to be
installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 (1.67) = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 40 g (1.41 oz)
balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
NOTE:
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
Example:
37.4 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 ⇒ 40 g (1.41 oz)

A

B

C

D

E

SMA054D

3.

Install balance weight in the position shown.
CAUTION:
• Do not install the inner balance weight before installing
the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of the wheel and tire.
• When installing balance weight (1) to wheel and tire, set it into
the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the wheel and tire as
shown so that the balance weight center (B) is aligned with the
balancer machine indication position (angle) (C).
CAUTION:
• Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesive balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Do not install more than three sheets of balance
weights.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
JPEIC0040ZZ

4.

5.
6.

7.
8.

If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
Start balancer machine again.
Install balance weight on inner side of wheel and tire in the balancer machine indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start balancer machine. Make sure that inner and outer residual
imbalance values are 5 g (0.17 oz) each or below.
If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.17 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance

Maximum allowable imbalance

Revision: April 2013

Dynamic (At flange)

M

N

O

PEIA0033E

Static (At flange)

Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».

MA-35

2014 Note

MA

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
TIRE ROTATION
• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.
Refer to MA-7, «FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance» (FOR
MEXICO), or MA-9, «EXCEPT FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance» (EXCEPT FOR MEXICO).
• Rotate the wheel and tires front to back in the pattern as shown.
• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified
torque.
WARNING:
• After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven
for 1,000 km (600 mi) (also in case of a flat tire, etc.).
• Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires.

SMA829C

CAUTION:
• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to
prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
• Be careful not to tighten the wheel nuts to a torque exceeding specification to prevent strain on the
disc rotor.
• Use Genuine NISSAN wheel nuts.
Wheel nut tightening
torque

: WT-8, «Exploded View»

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417664

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified
range between the MAX – MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the reservoir
tank.
• Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp
remains illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
• Check the reservoir tank for foreign matter (e.g., dust) and oils
other than brake fluid.
JPFIA0007ZZ

BRAKE LINES AND CABLES
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417665

BRAKE LINES
1.
2.

Check brake lines (pipes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or
other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part
if any brake fluid leaks are present.

SBR389C

PARKING BRAKE CABLES
Check parking brake cables for improper attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, etc.
Revision: April 2013

MA-36

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

BRAKE FLUID

A

BRAKE FLUID : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670516

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

B

• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified
range between the MAX – MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any brake fluid leaks around the reservoir tank.
• Check the brake system for any leaks if the fluid level is extremely
low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leaks if the warning lamp remains
illuminated even after the parking brake is released.
• Check the reservoir tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust)
and oils other than brake fluid.

C

D

E
JPFIA0007ZZ

BRAKE LINE
1.
2.

F

Check brake tubes and hoses for cracks, deterioration or other
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part
if any brake fluid leaks are present.

G

H

I
SBR389C

BRAKE FLUID : Draining

INFOID:0000000009670517

CAUTION:
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing work.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradually discharge brake fluid.

J

K

L

M

N

BRA0007D

BRAKE FLUID : Refilling

O

INFOID:0000000009670518

CAUTION:
MA
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing work.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Monitor the brake fluid level in the reservoir while performing the air bleeding procedure.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
Revision: April 2013

MA-37

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and
refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the
full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at
intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged.
Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed.
Repeat the same work on each wheel.
3. Perform the air bleeding procedure. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding
Brake System».
PFIA0403J

BRAKE FLUID : Bleeding Brake System

INFOID:0000000009670519

CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake: Refer to BR-35, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View».
• Rear drum brake: Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 in the following order: Front (RH) brake → front (LH) brake → rear (RH) brake → rear
(LH) brake.
7. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR11, «Inspection».
8. Add brake fluid as necessary to keep the brake fluid level within the specified range. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
9. Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to
BR-8, «Inspection and Adjustment».

BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670521

INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-15, «BRAKE PAD : Inspection».

BRA0010D

DISC ROTOR
Revision: April 2013

MA-38

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

DISC ROTOR : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670522

A

INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc brake rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer
to BR-15, «DISC ROTOR : Inspection».
Runout

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

C

Secure the disc brake rotor to the wheel hub with wheel nuts (2
points at least).
Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to FAX-13, «Inspection».
Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
Runout

B

D

E

: Refer to BR-44, «Front Disc Brake».

Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc brake rotor-to-wheel hub installation position by one
BRA0013D
hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
Refinish or replace the disc brake rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above
operation.
CAUTION:
If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc brake rotor. Refer
to BR-36, «BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation».
Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-44, «Front Disc Brake».

F

G

H

I

Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc brake rotor using a micrometer.
Replace the disc brake rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Refer to BR-15, «DISC ROTOR : Inspection».

J

Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-44, «Front
Disc Brake».
Thickness variation (mea- : Refer to BR-44, «Front
sured at 8 positions)
Disc Brake».

K

L
SBR020B

M

BRAKE LINING
BRAKE LINING : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670523

N

INSPECTION
Brake Lining

1.

O

Remove plug from back plate. Refer to BR-40, «Exploded View».

MA

Revision: April 2013

MA-39

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Check brake lining wear thickness (A) from an inspection hole
on back plate. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness

: Refer to BR-45, «Rear Drum Brake».

JSFIA1039ZZ

BRAKE DRUM
BRAKE DRUM : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009670524

INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of brake drum for uneven wear, cracks and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to
BR-40, «Removal and Installation».
NOTE:
• Make sure the parking brake control is fully released prior to removal of the brake drum.
• The rear wheel hub is part of the brake drum.
Brake Drum Inner Diameter
Check inner diameter (B) of the brake drum.

Inner diameter : Refer to BR-45, «Rear Drum Brake».

JPFIA0113ZZ

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417671

STEERING GEAR

Revision: April 2013

MA-40

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease
leakage.
• Check connection with steering column for looseness.

A

B

C
JPPIA0013GB

D

STEERING LINKAGE
Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.

AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS

E

AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417672

Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear or other damage.
• Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.
• Check wheel bearings for smooth operation.
• Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
• Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage.
• Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust
cover for cracks or other damage.

F

G

H

SMA525A

I

J

K

L
SFA392B

DRIVE SHAFT

M

DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417673

N

Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease
leakage.

O

MA

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH
Revision: April 2013

MA-41

SFA108A

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671244

AWKIA2572ZZ

1.

Hood lock/fuel filler lid release handle

A.

Clip

2.

Hood lock assembly

3.

Hood lock release cable assembly

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671245

AWKIA2573ZZ

1.

Key cylinder (driver side)

2.

Outside handle bracket

3.

Outside handle escutcheon
(passenger side)

4.

Front gasket

5.

Outside handle

6.

Inside handle

7.

Door lock

8.

Key cylinder rod (driver side)

9.

Rear gasket

A.

Clip

B.

Bolt

Revision: April 2013

Pawl

MA-42

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671246

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

AWKIA2575ZZ

1.

Outside handle bracket

2.

Outside handle escutcheon

3.

Front gasket

4.

Outside handle

5.

Inside handle

6.

Door lock

7.

Door lock

A.

Clip

B.

Bolt

I

J

Pawl

LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009671247

K

L

M

N

O

MA

AWKIA2578ZZ

1.

Outside handle

2.

Back door lock cable

4.

Back door lock

5.

Door striker

Revision: April 2013

MA-43

3.

Back door lock actuator

2014 Note

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection
INFOID:0000000009417675

Check the seat belt buckles, webbing, retractors, anchors and adjusters. Replace any seat belt assembly as
necessary. Refer to MA-44, «SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS :
Inspection».
• Check the seat belt anchors for loose bolts, damage, or excessive wear.
• Check the seat belt webbing for any damage, cuts, fraying, or excessive wear.
• Check the retractor for smooth operation.
• Check the function of the buckles by inserting the seat belt tongue and checking for proper engagement of
the buckle and press the button on the buckle to check for proper release of the seat belt tongue.
CAUTION:
• After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached components, such as the guide rail set. NISSAN recommends replacing all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision, unless they are not damaged and are inspected to confirm they are operating
properly after a minor collision.
Also inspect all seat belt assemblies that are not in use during a collision, and replace any components if damaged or not operating properly. The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if
the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags have
been deployed.
• If any component of the seat belt assembly is suspected of being damaged or not operating properly, do not repair the component. Replace the components as an assembly.
• If the seat belt webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged then replace the seat belt assembly.
• Do not lubricate the seat belt buckle or tongue.
• When replacing any seat belt assembly always use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.

Revision: April 2013

MA-44

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

MIR

MIRRORS

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Component Inspection ………………………………………. 7

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 8

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ……………………………………………………… 8

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………… 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………….12

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 14

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tools ………………………………… 3

INSIDE MIRROR ……………………………………….. 14

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14

DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM …………………………….. 4

DOOR MIRROR ………………………………………… 15

OUTSIDE MIRROR ……………………………………………… 4
OUTSIDE MIRROR : Wiring Diagram ………………….. 4

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS …………………….. 7
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH/CHANGEOVER
SWITCH) …………………………………………………….. 7

Exploded View …………………………………………………15
Removal and Installation …………………………………..15

F

G

H

I

J

K

DOOR MIRROR REAR FINISHER ………………. 17
Removal and Installation …………………………………..17

DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH ……………………………………………………. 18
Removal and Installation …………………………………..18

MIR

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009579058

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009579057

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

MIR-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009444934

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis ear

Locating the noise

C

D

E
SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit

F

Repairing the cause of noise

G

H
ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

I

J
AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009444933

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

K

MIR

M

N
SIIA0995E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-3

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
OUTSIDE MIRROR
OUTSIDE MIRROR : Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009014892

AALWA0625GB

Revision: April 2013

MIR-4

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

MIR

M

N

O
AALIA1373GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-5

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1374GB

Revision: April 2013

MIR-6

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH/
CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH/
CHANGEOVER SWITCH)
Component Inspection

A

B

INFOID:0000000009549399

1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH & CHANGEOVER SWITCH

C

1.
2.
3.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector.
Check door mirror remote control switch.
Door mirror remote control switch

Condition
Change over
switch

Terminal

RH

LH

13

7

12

4

13

4

12

7

13

3

12

7

13

7

12

3

13

6

12

5

13

5

12

6

13

2

12

6

13

6

12

2

Mirror switch

Continuity

RIGHT

E

F

LEFT

G

RIGHT
UP

H

DOWN
Yes

I

RIGHT

LEFT

J

LEFT
UP

K
DOWN

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection end.
NO
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Refer to MIR-18, «Removal and Installation».

MIR

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-7

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671235

SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to MIR-12, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

MIR-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to MIR-9, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
MIR
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
M
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
N
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will O
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.
P

•
•
—

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671234

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

MIR-9

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

MIR-10

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

A

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

B

C

D

E

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

F

G

H

I

J

K

MIR

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-11

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671233

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

MIR-12

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

MIR

M

N

O
LAIA0071E

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-13

2014 Note

INSIDE MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INSIDE MIRROR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014893

AWLIA2177ZZ

1.

Windshield glass

2.

Mirror base

3.

Inside mirror

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009014894

REMOVAL
1.

Hold the inside mirror at the base and push upward, while using
a suitable tool to release the retainer and remove the inside mirror.
CAUTION:
Use care when removing inside mirror to avoid damaging.

ALLIA1034ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing the inside mirror, check that the retainer is secure on the mirror base.

Revision: April 2013

MIR-14

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR MIRROR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014895

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
AWLIA2160ZZ

1.

Door mirror rear finisher

2.

Door mirror

A.

Door mirror base finisher

B.

Door mirror glass

Removal and Installation

3.

K

Side camera (if equipped)
Pawl
INFOID:0000000009014896

MIR

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

M

Remove the door mirror rear finisher. Refer to MIR-17, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, «Removal and Installation».
Release door mirror harness connector clip from inside door and disconnect harness connector.
Partially remove the vapor barrier.
Remove door mirror inner bolt.
Release door mirror base finisher pawls using a suitable tool (A)
and remove.
: Pawl

N

O

P

AWLIA2183ZZ

Revision: April 2013

MIR-15

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Remove the door mirror outer bolts (A) and the door mirror (1).

AWLIA2181ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order or removal.
CAUTION:
Visually check door mirror base cover pawls for deformation and damage during installation.

Revision: April 2013

MIR-16

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR REAR FINISHER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR MIRROR REAR FINISHER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009671236

REMOVAL
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.

4.

B

Remove door mirror glass.
Tilt the door mirror glass upward.
Remove door mirror glass by placing a suitable tool in the recesses between door mirror glass and actuator and rotating (twisting) to releasing the pawls.
Disconnect the harness connector (if equipped) from the door mirror glass.
Remove actuator screws (A) using a suitable tool (B) and
remove actuator.
NOTE:
Actuator is removed only to access door mirror rear finisher
pawls. It is not a serviceable component.
Release pawls using a suitable tool (C) and remove door mirror
rear finisher (1) from the door mirror (2).
: Pawl

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J
AWLIA2179ZZ

K

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Visually check door mirror rear finisher pawls for deformation and damage during installation.

MIR

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MIR-17

2014 Note

DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009014900

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove door mirror remote control switch (1) from the instrument lower panel LH using a suitable tool.
: Pawl

AWLIA2157ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

MIR-18

2014 Note

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

SECTION

MWI

METER, WARNING LAMP & INDICATOR

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 5
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 5
METER SYSTEM ………………………………………………… 5
METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location …….. 5
METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter ……………….. 6

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 7
METER SYSTEM ………………………………………………… 7
METER SYSTEM : System Description ……………….. 7
METER SYSTEM : Fail-safe ………………………………. 8
SPEEDOMETER …………………………………………………. 9
SPEEDOMETER : System Description ………………… 9
TACHOMETER …………………………………………………… 9
TACHOMETER : System Description ………………….. 9
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR ……………………………… 9
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description ……………………………………………………………….. 10
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ……………………… 10
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description …………………………………………………………. 10
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL ……………………. 10
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description …………………………………………………………. 10

Revision: April 2013

INFORMATION DISPLAY ……………………………………11
INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description ….11

OPERATION …………………………………………….. 13
Switch Name and Function ………………………………..13

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION
METER) ……………………………………………………. 14

F

G

H

On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………….14
CONSULT Function ………………………………………….15

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 17

I

COMBINATION METER …………………………….. 17
Reference Value ………………………………………………17
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………….19
DTC Index ………………………………………………………20

J

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) …………….. 21

K

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………21

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 22

L

METER SYSTEM ………………………………………. 22
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..22

M

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 33
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 33 MWI
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….33

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 34
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………… 34
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….34
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….34

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ……………………. 35
Description ………………………………………………………35
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….35
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..35

B2205 VEHICLE SPEED ……………………………. 36

MWI-1

2014 Note

O

P

Description …………………………………………………….. 36
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 36
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 36

B2267 ENGINE SPEED ………………………………. 37
Description …………………………………………………….. 37
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 37
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 37

B2268 WATER TEMP …………………………………. 38
Description …………………………………………………….. 38
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 38
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 38

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ….. 39
COMBINATION METER ……………………………………. 39
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure … 39
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………………….. 39
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………………………………… 40

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT ……. 41

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 43

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN ON ………………………………… 44
Description …………………………………………………….. 44
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 44

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN OFF ………………………………. 45
Description …………………………………………………….. 45
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 45

THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES
DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ……… 46
Description …………………………………………………….. 46
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 46

THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING
CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT
DISPLAY …………………………………………………… 47
Description …………………………………………………….. 47
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 47

Description …………………………………………………….. 41
Component Function Check …………………………….. 41
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 41
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 42

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …. 48

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 43

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 49

THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT
OPERATE …………………………………………………. 43

COMBINATION METER ……………………………… 49

Description …………………………………………………….. 43

Revision: April 2013

COMBINATION METER ……………………………… 48
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 48

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 49
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………… 49

MWI-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009473005

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009482448

Tool name

Description

Power Tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

MWI-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
METER SYSTEM

B

METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009561107

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
AWNIA3079ZZ

A.
No.

Combination meter

B.

L

View with inspection hole cover removed.

Component

Function

M

1.

Parking brake switch

Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.

2.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BRC-6, «Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

3.

Engine oil pressure sensor

Transmits the engine oil pressure sensor signal to the ECM.
Refer to EM-92, «Exploded View» for detailed installation location.

TCM

Transmits the shift position signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to TM-59, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

ECM

Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• Engine speed signal
• Engine coolant temperature signal
• Fuel consumption monitor signal
• Engine oil pressure sensor signal
Refer to EC-11, «ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for
detailed installation location.

4.

5.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-5

2014 Note

MWI

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

6.

BCM

Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• Door switch signal
• Buzzer signal
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

7.

Combination meter

Refer to MWI-6, «METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter».

8.

Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump (fuel
level sensor)

Transmits the fuel level sensor signal to the combination meter.

METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter

INFOID:0000000009561108

The combination meter controls the following items according to the signals received from each unit via CAN
communication and the signals from switches and sensors.
• Measuring instruments
• Indicator lamps
• Warning lamps
• Meter illumination control
• Information display

ARRANGEMENT OF COMBINATION METER

AWNIA3078ZZ

Revision: April 2013

MWI-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

METER SYSTEM
METER SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009561109

B

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

AWNIA3080GB

J

COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)
Transmit unit
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
BCM
TCM

K

Signal name
Vehicle speed signal
Door switch signal

L

Buzzer signal
Shift position signal
Engine speed signal

M

Engine coolant temperature signal
ECM

Engine oil pressure signal

MWI

Fuel consumption signal
Loose fuel cap signal

DESCRIPTION

O

Combination Meter
• The combination meter receives necessary signals from each unit, switch, and sensor to control the following functions.
— Measuring instruments
— Warning lamps
— Indicator lamps
— Meter illumination control
— Information display
• The combination meter incorporates a buzzer function that sounds an audible alarm with the integrated
buzzer device. Refer to WCS-5, «WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description» for further details.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-7

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter includes an on board diagnosis function.
• The combination meter can be diagnosed with CONSULT.

METER CONTROL FUNCTION LIST
System

Description
Indicates vehicle speed.

MWI-9, «SPEEDOMETER : System Description»

Indicates engine speed.

MWI-9, «TACHOMETER :
System Description»

Indicates shift position.

MWI-10, «SHIFT
POSITION INDICATOR : System
Description»

The warning lamp turns ON or turns OFF,
according to engine hydraulic pressure.

MWI-10, «OIL
PRESSURE
WARNING LAMP
: System Description»

Meter illumination control function

Controls the back light of combination meter.

MWI-10, «METER
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL : System Description»

Odo/trip meter

Indicates mileage.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Indicates engine coolant temperature.

Fuel gauge

Indicates fuel level.

Loose fuel cap warning

Indicates loose fuel cap.

Low fuel warning

Indicates fuel level.

Speedometer
Measuring instruments
Tachometer

Shift position indicator

Warning lamp/indicator
lamp

Meter illumination control

Information display

Reference

Engine oil pressure warning lamp

Trip computer

Instant fuel consumption

Displays current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption

Displays average fuel consumption.

Distance to empty

Displays distance to empty.

Travel distance

Displays mileage.

METER SYSTEM : Fail-safe

MWI-11, «INFORMATION DISPLAY : System
Description»

INFOID:0000000009643043

The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function

Specifications

Speedometer

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Tachometer
Illumination control

When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode.

Shift position indicator

When suspending communication, not indicate.
Current fuel consumption
Trip computer

Information display

Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty

Buzzer

Revision: April 2013

• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last result calculated during normal condition is
indicated.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Odo/trip meter

An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.

MWI-8

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Function

Specifications

A

ABS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
EPS warning lamp

The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.

B

Brake warning lamp
High beam indicator lamp

C

Turn signal indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp

Door warning lamp
Light indicator lamp

D

Engine oil pressure warning lamp

The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.

Key warning lamp

E

O/D OFF indicator lamp
Shift P warning lamp
Engine start operation indicator lamp

F

SPEEDOMETER
SPEEDOMETER : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549333

G

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
H

I

J
AWNIA2379GB

DESCRIPTION

K

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) receives each wheel speed sensor signal and provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.

TACHOMETER

L

TACHOMETER : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549335

M

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

MWI

O

P
JSNIA2462GB

DESCRIPTION
The crank position sensor sends a crankshaft position signal to the ECM. The ECM provides an engine speed
signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
Revision: April 2013

MWI-9

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549337

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA3081GB

DESCRIPTION
The combination meter receives the shift position signal from TCM via CAN communication, and displays the
position of the shift indicator.

OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP

OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549339

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA2885GB

DESCRIPTION
The combination meter turns the engine oil pressure warning lamp ON when receiving a signal from the ECM
via CAN communication.

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL

METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549341

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSNIA2919GB

DESCRIPTION
• Combination meter controls meter illumination, based on the following signal.
— Position light request signal
• The combination meter turns ON meter illumination when the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition
Combination switch (Lighting switch)

Revision: April 2013

1st or 2nd position

MWI-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter turns OFF meter illumination when the following conditions are satisfied.
A
Condition
Combination switch (Lighting switch)

OFF

B

INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description

INFOID:0000000009549343

C

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D

E

F

G

H
AWNIA2439GB

DESRIPTION
• The combination meter receives signals from switches, sensors and modules for operating the following
functions on the information display.
— Odo/trip meter
— Engine coolant temperature gauge
— Fuel gauge
— Trip computer
— Interrupt indication
— Meter illumination level
— Low fuel warning
— Loose fuel cap warning

ODO/TRIP METER
The combination meter calculates mileage using the vehicle speed signal from the ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) and displays the mileage on the information display.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
The ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

FUEL GAUGE
Control Outline
The fuel level sensor unit sends a variable resistor signal to the combination meter. The fuel gauge indicates
the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
Refuel Control
The unit detects the driver is refueling the vehicle and accelerates the fuel gauge segment movement if the
fuel level changes by 9 (2-3/8 US, 2 lmp gal) or more.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-11

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Lighting segment-resistance relationship

AWNIA3088GB

INTERRUPT INDICATION
Low Fuel Warning
The low fuel warning turns ON when the fuel level in the fuel tank reaches approximately 7.3
1-5/8 Imp gal).

(1-7/8 US gal,

LOOSE FUEL CAP WARNING
The LOOSE FUEL CAP message will display in the information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened
correctly. The message will turn off as soon as the ECM detects the fuel-filler cap is properly tightened. The
ECM provides a loose fuel cap signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-12

2014 Note

OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

OPERATION

A

Switch Name and Function

INFOID:0000000009643045

B

C

D

JSNIA3909ZZ

Switch name

Operation

Illumination control switch (1)

Meter control switch (2)

Description
An illuminance level of the back light of the combination meter can be adjusted.

Press

•
•
•
•

The information display screen can be switched.
The trip meter can be switched between A and B.
Trip meter A/B can be reset by pressing and holding the meter control switch.
Time can be adjusted.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
On Board Diagnosis Function

INFOID:0000000009549344

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Information display, speedometer and tachometer can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.

STARTING COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
METHOD OF STARTING

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn ignition switch ON, and switch the trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”.
Turn ignition switch to OFF.
While pressing the meter control switch (1), turn the ignition
switch ON.
Make sure that the trip meter displays “0000.0”.
Press the meter control switch (1) at least 3 times. (Within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON).

JSNIA3904ZZ

6.

The combination meter is turned to self-diagnosis mode.
• All segments of the information display and shift position indicator (A) for CVT models are displayed.

JSNIA3900ZZ

NOTE:
• Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit when the self-diagnosis mode of the combination
meter does not start. replace combination meter if power supply and ground circuit are normal.
• If any of the segments are not displayed, replace combination meter.
7.

Each meter activates by pressing the meter control switch.

AWNIA2440ZZ

Revision: April 2013

MWI-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
NOTE:
• If any of the meters or gauges is not activated, replace combination meter.
• The figure is reference.

CONSULT Function

A
INFOID:0000000009549345

B

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown.
METER/M&A Diagnosis mode

C

Description

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

The combination meter self-diagnosis results.

Data Monitor

D

Displays combination meter input/output data in real time.

Warning History

Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.

SELF DIAG RESULT

E

Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR

F

Display Item List
X: Applicable

Display item [Unit]
SPEED METER
[km/h] or [mph]
SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h] or [mph]

MAIN
SIGNALS

G

Description

X

Displays the value of vehicle speed signal.

X

Displays the value of vehicle speed signal, which is transmitted to each unit with
CAN communication.

ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

H

Displays odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.

TACHO METER
[rpm]

X

Displays the value of engine speed signal, which is input from ECM.

FUEL METER
[L]

X

Displays the fuel level.

W TEMP METER
[°C] or [°F]

X

Displays the value of engine coolant temperature signal, which is input from ECM.

ABS W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of ABS warning indicator

BRAKE W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of brake warning indicator.

DOOR W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of door warning indicator.

HI-BEAM IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of high beam indicator.

TURN IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of turn indicator.

LIGHT IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of light indicator.

OIL W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of engine oil pressure warning indicator.

MIL
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of malfunction indicator.

CRUISE IND
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE indicator.

O/D OFF IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF indicator.

Revision: April 2013

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

MWI-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item [Unit]

MAIN
SIGNALS

Description

FUEL W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of low-fuel warning indicator.

O/D OFF SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF switch.

REAR DEF SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.

BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of brake switch.

EPS W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of EPS indicator.

CHAGE W/L
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of charge warning indicator.

SHIFT IND
[P, R, N, D, L]

Displays shift selector position.

FUEL CAP W/L
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of loose fuel cap warning message.

PKB SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of parking brake switch.

BUCKLE SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of seat belt buckle switch (LH).

BRAKE OIL SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of brake fluid level switch.

DISTANCE
[km] or [Mi]

Displays distance to empty.

BUZZER
[ON/OFF]

X

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of buzzer.

FR FOG IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of front fog lamp indicator.

KEY G/Y W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of Intelligent Key warning lamp.

NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.

WARNING HISTORY
Display item
W/L ON HISTORY

Description
Lighting history of warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.

W/L ON HISTORY
• Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
• “W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/ indicator lamp is turned on.
• The “TIME” above is:
— 0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine
and waiting for 30 seconds.
— 1 — 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition.
— NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp.
NOTE:
• W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts.
• Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets
low.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-16

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

COMBINATION METER
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009015874

B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item

C

Data monitor

Display content

Condition

Reference value in normal operation

SPEED METER
[km/h or mph]

Speed meter
operation

While driving

Vehicle speed matches speed meter

SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

Vehicle speed

While driving

The speed output signal value via CAN
communication is approx. value of vehicle speed.

ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

ODO meter operation

Driving

Distance driven

TACHO METER
[rpm]

Tacho meter
operation

Engine running

The tacho meter is approx. value of engine speed via CAN communication.

FUEL METER
[L]

Fuel level

Ignition ON

Fuel level is approx. value of fuel
gauge.

W TEMP METER
[°C] or [°F]

Engine coolant
temperature

Engine running

Input value of engine coolant temperature signal via CAN communication.

ABS W/L

ABS warning
lamp

When ABS warning lamp is ON

On

When ABS warning lamp is OFF

Off

BRAKE W/L

Brake warning
lamp

When Brake warning lamp is ON

On*

When Brake warning lamp is OFF

Off

DOOR W/L

Door open
warning lamp

When Door warning lamp is ON

On

When Door warning lamp is OFF

Off

HI-BEAM IND

HI-Beam indicator lamp

When High-beam indicator lamp is ON

On

When High-beam indicator lamp is OFF

Off

TURN IND

Turn signal indicator

When Turn signal indicator lamp is ON

On

When Turn signal indicator lamp is OFF

Off

LIGHT IND

Light indicator

When Tail lamp indicator lamp is ON

On

When Tail lamp indicator lamp is OFF

Off

FR FOG IND

Front fog lamp
indicator

Front fog lamp indicator lamp ON

On

Front fog lamp indicator lamp OFF

Off

When engine oil pressure warning lamp is
ON

On

OIL W/L

Engine oil pressure warning
light

When engine oil pressure warning lamp is
OFF

Off

When Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is
ON

On

When Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is
OFF

Off

Cruise indicator
lamp

When cruise indicator lamp is ON.

ON

When cruise indicator lamp is OFF.

Off

O/D OFF indicator

When O/D OFF indicator lamp is OFF.

Off

When O/D OFF indicator lamp is ON.

On

MIL

CRUISE IND
O/D OFF IND

Revision: April 2013

MIL warning
lamp

MWI-17

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item

Data monitor

Display content

O/D OFF SW

O/D OFF
switch
Rear defogger
switch

REAR DEF SW

Condition

Reference value in normal operation

When O/D OFF switch is pressed to OFF.

Off

When O/D OFF switch is pressed to ON.

On

When rear defogger switch is pressed to
ON

On

When rear defogger is pressed to Off

Off

When brake pedal is applied

On

When brake pedal is released

Off
On

BRAKE SW

Brake switch

FUEL W/L

Low fuel warning

When low fuel warning is ON
When low fuel warning is Off

Off

EPS W/L

EPS warning
lamp

EPS warning lamp ON

On

EPS warning lamp OFF

Off

CHAGE W/L

Charge warning lamp

Engine running

Off

SHIFT IND

Shift position
indicator

The position of the shift position selector.

FUEL CAP W/L

Loose fuel cap
warning

Loose fuel filler cap warning is On

On

Loose fuel filler cap warning is Off

Off

PKB SW

Parking brake
switch

When parking brake is active

On

When parking brake is inactive

Off

BUCKLE SW

Seat belt buckle switch LH

BRAKE OIL SW

Brake fluid level
switch

DISTANCE

Distance to
empty

BUZZER

Buzzer operation

[P, R, N, D, L]

When seat belt buckle is unfastened (LH).

On

When seat belt buckle is fastened (LH).

Off

When brake fluid level switch ON

On

When brake fluid level switch OFF

Off

While driving

[km/h or mph]

When Buzzer is ON

On

When Buzzer is OFF

Off

*: Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts, the parking brake switch
is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

JSNIA5390ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
No.

Wire
color

1

L

2

P

Condition
Ignition
switch

Operation or condition

Reference value (V)
(Approx.)

CAN-H

—

—

—

CAN-L

—

—

—

Item

Revision: April 2013

MWI-18

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
No.

Wire
color

3

SB

4

Condition
Ignition
switch

Operation or condition

Reference value (V)
(Approx.)

2P/R

—

—

—

LG

8P/R

—

—

—

6

W

Fuel level sensor signal (+)

—

—

7

V

Air bag

—

—

8

P

O/D OFF switch

ON

9

V

Seat belt buckle switch LH

ON

Item

10

SB

Parking Brake switch

ON

11

BR

Brake fluid level switch

ON

15

R

18

R/Y

21

B

22

B

23

B

24

B

Refer to MWI-42, «Component Inspection».
—

O/D OFF switch pressed

0

O/D OFF switch released

Battery voltage

Unfastened (ON)

0

Fastened (OFF)

Battery voltage

Parking brake is inactive
Parking brake is active

0

F

Battery voltage

Ignition switch ON or ACC

—

—

Battery voltage

—

—

—

Ground

—

—

0

GR

Fuel level sensor ground (-)

ON

—

0

27

R/W

Battery power supply

OFF

—

Battery voltage

28

GR

Ignition switch ON or START

ON

—

Battery voltage

Y

Generator

Generator voltage low

ON

Generator voltage normal

E

Battery voltage

Security

38

C

D

0

Brake fluid level low
Brake fluid level normal

A

G

H

I

0

J

Battery voltage

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009015875

K

The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function

L

Specifications

Speedometer

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Tachometer
Illumination control

When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode.

Shift position indicator

When suspending communication, not indicate.
Current fuel consumption
Trip computer

Information display

Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty

Buzzer

Revision: April 2013

• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last result calculated during normal condition is
indicated.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Odo/trip meter

An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.

MWI-19

2014 Note

M

MWI

O

P

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Function

Specifications

ABS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
EPS warning lamp

The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.

Brake warning lamp
High beam indicator lamp
Turn signal indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp

Door warning lamp
Light indicator lamp
Engine oil pressure warning lamp

The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.

Key warning lamp
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Shift P warning lamp
Engine start operation indicator lamp

DTC Index
Display contents of CONSULT

INFOID:0000000009015876

Diagnostic item is detected when…

Refer to

CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for
2 seconds or more.

MWI-34

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination
meter.

MWI-35

VEHICLE SPEED
[B2205]

The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-36

ENGINE SPEED
[B2267]

If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-37

WATER TEMP
[B2268]

If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or more.

MWI-38

Revision: April 2013

MWI-20

2014 Note

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)

A

List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009549346

B
ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

C

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-21

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
METER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009015878

AANWA0867GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-22

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O
AANWA0868GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-23

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANWA0869GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-24

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O
AANIA1737GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-25

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1738GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-26

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O
AANIA1739GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-27

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1740GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-28

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O
AANIA1741GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-29

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1742GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-30

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O
AANIA1743GB

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-31

2014 Note

METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1744GB

Revision: April 2013

MWI-32

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009549347

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

AWNIA2458GB

H

DETAILED FLOW

1.CONFIRM SYMPTOM

I

Confirm symptom or customer complaint.
>> GO TO 2.

J

2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF COMBINATION METER
Perform self-diagnosis of combination meter. Refer to MWI-14, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> If self-diagnosis will not start, check power supply and ground circuit of combination meter. Refer
to MWI-39, «COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure». If power supply and ground circuits
are OK, replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

K

L

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER WITH CONSULT

M
Select METER/M&A on CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis of combination meter. Refer to MWI-15, «CONSULT Function».
Is the inspection result normal?
MWI
YES >> Check symptom. GO TO 4.
NO
>> Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».

4.CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION

O

Check the combination meter to verify that the repair has been completed successfully.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 1.

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-33

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549371

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Display Item

Malfunction detected condition

Possible malfunction

U1000

CAN COMM CIRC
[U1000]

When combination meter is not receiving CAN communication
signals for 2 seconds or more.

Combination meter

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549372

1.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION
Select SELF-DIAG RESULTS mode for METER/M&A with CONSULT.
>> GO TO LAN system. Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-34

2014 Note

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009549373

Initial diagnosis of combination meter.

B

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549374

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1010

Display Item
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

Malfunction detected condition

Possible malfunction

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of
the CAN controller of combination meter.

Combination meter

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549375

D

E

1.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
When DTC U1010 is detected, replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
>> Inspection End.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-35

2014 Note

B2205 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2205 VEHICLE SPEED
Description

INFOID:0000000009549376

The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via
CAN communication lines.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549377

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2205

Display Item
VEHICLE SPEED CIRC
[B2205]

Malfunction detected condition
Malfunction is detected when an erroneous
speed signal is received for 2 seconds or
more.

Diagnosis Procedure

Possible malfunction
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

INFOID:0000000009549378

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Start engine and select METER/M&A on CONSULT.
Using SPEED METER on DATA MONITOR, compare the value of DATA MONITOR with speedometer
pointer of combination meter. Speedometer and DATA MONITOR indications should be close.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-19, «CONSULT
Function (ABS)».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-36

2014 Note

B2267 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2267 ENGINE SPEED

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009549379

The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549380

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2267

B

Display Item
TACHO METER
[B2267]

Malfunction detected condition
ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine
speed signals for 2 seconds or more

Possible malfunction
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• ECM

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549381

D

E

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of ECM, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

F

>> Refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-37

2014 Note

B2268 WATER TEMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2268 WATER TEMP
Description

INFOID:0000000009549382

The engine coolant temperature signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009549383

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2268

Display Item
WATER TEMP METER
[B2268]

Malfunction detected condition
ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant
temperature signals for 60 seconds or more

Possible malfunction
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• ECM

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549384

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of ECM, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
>> Refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-38

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

A

COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549348

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to MWI-22, «Wiring Diagram».

B

C

1.CHECK FUSE
D

Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Power source

Fuse No.

Battery

8

Ignition switch ON or START

3

Ignition switch ACC or ON

18

E

F

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

G

2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1.
2.

Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24, terminals 27, 28, 15 and ground.
Terminals

Ignition switch position

(+)
Connector

(–)

Terminal
27

M24

28

I

OFF

ACC

ON

START

Battery voltage

Battery voltage

Battery
voltage

Battery voltage

0V

0V

Battery
voltage

Battery voltage

0V

Battery voltage

Battery
voltage

0V

Ground

15

1.
2.
3.

J

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.GROUND

H

L

CIRCUIT CHECK

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24, terminals 21, 22, 23 and ground.

MWI

Terminals
(+)
Connector

(–)

Terminal

O

Continuity

21
M24

P

22

Ground

Yes

23

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
Revision: April 2013

MWI-39

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009643044

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.
Terminal No.

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.
12 (10A)

Battery power supply

70

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal
57

M99

70

Ground

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-40

2014 Note

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009549351

The fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump detects the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits the
fuel level signal to the combination meter.

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009549352

C

1.COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

B

Select METER/M&A on CONSULT.
Using FUEL METER of DATA MONITOR, compare the DATA MONITOR value with the fuel gauge position.
Fuel gauge indication position

Reference value of data monitor [L]

1

Approx. 39.7

3/4

Approx. 32.9

1/2

Approx. 22.7

1/4

Approx. 11.9

0

Approx. 2.7

D

E

F

G

Does monitor value match fuel gauge reading?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Diagnosis Procedure

H
INFOID:0000000009549353

I

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to MWI-22, «Wiring Diagram».
J

1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit terminals (meter-side and harness-side) for poor connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace terminals or connectors.

K

L

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CIRCUIT
1.
2.

3.

M
Disconnect combination meter harness connector M24 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness
connector B44.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 6 and fuel level sensor unit
MWI
and fuel pump harness connector B44 terminal 2.
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

Continuity

M24

6

B44

2

Yes

Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector B44 terminal 2 and
ground.
Connector

Terminal

B44

2

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: April 2013

MWI-41

2014 Note

O

P

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.

2.

Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 and fuel level sensor
unit and fuel pump harness connector B44 terminal 5.
Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

Continuity

M24

24

B44

5

Yes

Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector B44 terminal 5 and
ground.
Connector

Terminal

B44

5

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

4.CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION

Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and verify the float arm does not interfere or bind with the internal
components in the fuel tank.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Install the fuel level sensor unit properly.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009549354

1.REMOVE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Remove the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-6, «Removal and Installation».
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Check the resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump.
Terminals
Fuel level sensor unit
2

5

Condition

Resistance (Ω)
(Approx.)

Height [mm (in)]

Full* (A)

51

168.2 (6.62)

283

17.5 (0.69)

Empty*

(B)

*: When float rod is in contact with stopper.

Is inspection result OK?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Refer to
FL-6, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-42

JPNIA0841ZZ

2014 Note

THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE
Description

INFOID:0000000009549355

B

INFOID:0000000009549356

C

Fuel gauge will not indicate from a certain position.

Diagnosis Procedure

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Select METER/M&A on CONSULT.
Using DATA MONITOR, compare the monitor value with the fuel gauge reading on the combination meter.
Refer to MWI-41, «Component Function Check».
Does monitor value match fuel gauge reading?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

D

E

2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT

F

Check the fuel level sensor signal circuit. Refer to MWI-41, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

G

3.COMPONENT INSPECTION

H

Perform a component inspection on the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to MWI-42, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-6, «Removal and Installation».

I

4.CHECK FLOAT INTERFERENCE

J

Check that the float arm does not interfere or bind with components in the fuel tank.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-43

2014 Note

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Description

INFOID:0000000009549357

The engine oil pressure warning lamp stays off when the ignition switch is turned ON.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549358

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT
1.
2.

Select METER/M&A on CONSULT.
Observe OIL W/L DATA MONITOR while operating the ignition switch.
Component
Engine oil pressure warning light

Condition

CONSULT

Ignition ON

ON

Ignition OFF

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-44

2014 Note

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009549359

The engine oil pressure warning lamp remains on while the engine is running (normal oil pressure).

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549360

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

B

C

Start the engine and select METER/M&A on CONSULT.
Observe OIL W/L DATA MONITOR and the operation of the engine oil pressure warning lamp on the combination meter.
Component

Condition

CONSULT

Engine oil pressure warning light

Engine running

OFF

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-45

2014 Note

THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT
DISPLAY
Description

INFOID:0000000009549367

• The door ajar warning is displayed even though all of the doors are closed.
• The door ajar warning is not displayed even though a door is ajar.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549368

1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
Check the BCM input signal. Refer to DLK-84, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

Select the METER/M&A Data Monitor and check the DOOR W/L monitor value while opening and closing
doors.
Monitor item
DOOR W/L

Condition

Status

Door open

ON

Door closed

OFF

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-84, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check the door switch. Refer to DLK-85, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace applicable door switch. Refer to DLK-158, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

MWI-46

2014 Note

THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR
DOES NOT DISPLAY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING,
OR DOES NOT DISPLAY
Description

INFOID:0000000009549369

• The parking brake warning is displayed while driving the vehicle even though the parking brake is released.
• The parking brake warning is not displayed while driving the vehicle even though the parking brake is
applied.

Diagnosis Procedure

B

C

INFOID:0000000009549370

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.

A

D

Start engine.
Check the operation of the brake warning lamp while operating the parking brake.
Condition

Warning lamp status

Parking brake applied

ON

Parking brake released

OFF

E

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

H

Check the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-59, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-9, «Removal and Installation».

I

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

J

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to BRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

K

L

M

MWI

O

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-47

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
COMBINATION METER
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009482449

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-21, «Removal and Installation».
Remove combination meter screws (A).

ALNIA1519ZZ

4.

Pull the combination meter straight out to release clips.
NOTE:
Back side of the combination meter shown for clip position (
clarity.

)

JSNIA3895ZZ

5.

Disconnect the harness connector from the combination meter.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

MWI-48

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

A

COMBINATION METER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009482450

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

AWNIA3052ZZ

1.

Combination meter

2.

Combination meter lens

3.

J

Combination meter finisher

Pawl

K

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009482451

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the display, pointer, the inside of combination meter and the printed area of the dial
during the work.
• Keep away from magnetic sources.
• Do not damage the combination meter finisher.

L

M

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

MWI

Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
Release the pawls and remove combination meter finisher.
Remove screws, then release pawls and remove combination meter lens.

O

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

P

Revision: April 2013

MWI-49

2014 Note

BRAKES

SECTION

PB

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ……………………… 6 PB
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 6
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 6

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

PARKING BRAKE CABLE ………………………….. 7

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

PARKING BRAKE REAR CABLE ………………… 8

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 4
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM …………………………. 4
Inspection and Adjustment …………………………………. 4

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 6

G

Removal and Installation …………………………………… 7
H

Removal and Installation …………………………………… 8

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ………………………… 9
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 9

I

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 10

J

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 10

K

Parking Brake Control ………………………………………10

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PB-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009619502

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

PB-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009365037

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

B

C

D

E
PIIB1407E

PB

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PB-3

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009365038

INSPECTION
Parking Brake Control Stroke

1.

When parking brake control is operated with a force of 196 N
(20.0 kg-f, 44.1 lb-f), make sure parking brake control stroke is
within the specified number of notches. (Check by listening and
counting the number of ratchet clicks.)
Number of
notches

2.

: Refer to PB-10, «Parking Brake
Control».

Check that the parking brake lamp illuminates, after parking
brake has been operated to the specified number of notches.
Number of
notches

: Refer to PB-10, «Parking Brake
Control».

WFIA0508E

Inspect Components
• Check the parking brake components for bends, wear and or damage. Replace if any damage is noted.
• Check that the parking brake operates properly; be sure that it is not bound up or sticking.
• Check that the brake warning light illuminates after parking brake has been operated to the specified number
of notches. Refer to PB-10, «Parking Brake Control».
• Inspect and adjust the rear brakes if necessary. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection and Adjustment».

ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.

Pull parking brake control (1) until the access hole (2) is visible.
Use suitable tool to adjust nut (A).
Turn adjusting nut (A) using suitable tool to loosen the front
cable.

AWFIA1013ZZ

3.
4.

Depress the brake pedal with a force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 lb-f) about 10 times and adjust the brake
shoe clearance.
Adjust the cable with the following procedure.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

PB-4

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
To prevent damage to parts, do not bend the parking brake cables.
a. Adjust the parking brake lever stroke by turning the adjusting nut using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut if the nut is removed.
b. Operate the parking brake lever with a force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1lb-f). Check that the lever stroke is
within the specified number of notches. (Check by listening and counting the number of the ratchet clicks.)
Number of notches

: Refer to PB-10, «Parking Brake Control».

A

B

C

D

E

PB

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PB-5

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009365039

JPFIB0133GB

1.

Parking brake control

2.

Adjusting nut

3.

Parking brake switch

4.

Parking brake front cable

5.

Parking brake rear cable (LH)

6.

Parking brake rear cable (RH)

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009365040

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the adjusting nut.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut.
Separate the parking brake front cable from the parking brake rear cables (RH/LH).
Disconnect the harness connector from the parking brake switch.
Remove the screw and remove the parking brake switch.
Remove the nuts and remove the parking brake control.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.
CAUTION:
• Replace the parking brake control if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Replace the parking brake switch if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Do not reuse the adjusting nut.
Inspect and adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

PB-6

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619499

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

B

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the adjusting nut. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
Separate the parking brake front cable from parking brake rear cables (RH/LH). Refer to PB-6, «Exploded
View».
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, do not bend the parking brake cables.
Remove the parking brake front cable.

INSTALLATION

C

D

E

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut.
• Inspect and adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».

PB

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PB-7

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE REAR CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PARKING BRAKE REAR CABLE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619500

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Loosen the adjusting nut. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the parking brake front cable.
Separate the parking brake rear cables (RH/LH) from the parking brake front cable. Refer to PB-6,
«Exploded View».
Remove the rear wheels and tires using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Exploded View».
Remove rear wheel sensors. Refer to BRC-70, «REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation».
Remove the rear drum brake components. Refer to BR-40, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Do not separate the brake tube from the wheel cylinders.
Remove the center muffler. Refer to EX-5, «Exploded View».
Remove nuts (A) and remove center floor insulators.

ALBIA1147ZZ

9.

Remove the bolts and remove the parking brake rear brake cables (RH/LH).
CAUTION:
Do not excessively bend the parking brake cables.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the adjusting nut if the nut is removed.
• Inspect and adjust the rear brakes. Refer to BR-42, «Inspection and Adjustment».
• Inspect and adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

PB-8

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009619501

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
Disconnect the harness connector from parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
Remove the screw and remove the parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the parking brake switch if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Adjust the parking brake cable if necessary. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».

D

E

PB

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PB-9

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake Control

INFOID:0000000009365041

Item

Standard

Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 lb-f)]
Number of notches when brake warning light illuminates

Revision: April 2013

11 − 12 notches
1 notch maximum

PB-10

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

PCS

POWER CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS

F

IPDM E/R

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 26

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………… 26

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

Description ………………………………………………………26
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….26
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..26

G

B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK ………….. 27

H

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….27
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..27

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4

B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK ………… 28

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….28
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..28

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM ……………………………….. 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………………. 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ………………. 6
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ……… 7
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………… 7

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) …………………. 9
Diagnosis Description ……………………………………….. 9
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) ……………………….. 10

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 13
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ……………..13
Reference Value …………………………………………….. 13
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………… 18
DTC Index …………………………………………………….. 20

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..29

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 30

K

IPDM E/R ………………………………………………….. 30
Exploded View …………………………………………………30
Removal and Installation …………………………………..30

L

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PRECAUTION ………………………………………. 32
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………. 32
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ………………………………………………………..32

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 33

PCS

N

O

COMPONENT PARTS ……………………………….. 33
Component Parts Location ………………………………..33

SYSTEM …………………………………………………… 34

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ……………..21

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ……………………….34
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description ………………………………………………………….34

Revision: April 2013

J

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 29

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 21

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 21

I

PCS-1

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ………………………. 36
COMMON ITEM ……………………………………………….. 36
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ……………………………………………. 36
INTELLIGENT KEY …………………………………………… 36
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ……………………………………….. 37

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 40

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT ………………. 57
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 57
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 57
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 58

B2618 BCM ………………………………………………. 59
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 59
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 59

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ….. 61

BCM …………………………………………………………. 40

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 61
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 61

List of ECU Reference …………………………………….. 40

B26F1 IGNITION RELAY ……………………………. 63

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………. 41

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 63
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 63

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ………………. 41
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 41

B26F2 IGNITION RELAY ……………………………. 65

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 48

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 65
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 65

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW …….. 48

B26F6 BCM ………………………………………………. 67

Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 48

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 51
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ………………………. 51
Description …………………………………………………….. 51
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 51
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 51

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ……………………. 52
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 52
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 52

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT ……………………… 53

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 67
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 67

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH …………….. 69
Component Function Check ……………………………. 69
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 69
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 70

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 72
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES
NOT OPERATE …………………………………………. 72
Description …………………………………………………….. 72
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 72

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 53
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 53
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 54

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 73

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT ………………. 55

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 73

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 55
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 55
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 56

Revision: April 2013

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ……………… 73
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH …………….. 74
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 74

PCS-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[IPDM E/R]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009607429

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009567560

AWMIA1435ZZ

1.

IPDM E/R

A.

Engine compartment (LH)

Revision: April 2013

PCS-4

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567562

B

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

AWMIA1439GB

DESCRIPTION
IPDM E/R activates the internal control circuit to perform the relay ON-OFF control according to the input signals from various sensors and the request signals received from control units via CAN communication.
CAUTION:
IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Revision: April 2013

PCS-5

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control relay
• Headlamp low relay
• Headlamp high relay

Input/output
• Low beam request signal
• High beam request signal

Transmit unit
BCM (CAN)

Tail lamp relay

Position light request signal

BCM (CAN)

• Front wiper relay
• Front wiper high relay

Front wiper request signal

BCM (CAN)

Front wiper stop position signal

Front wiper motor

Starter control relay signal

BCM (CAN)

Transmission range switch signal (CVT models)

Transmission range
switch

Clutch interlock switch signal
(M/T models)

Clutch interlock switch

• Cooling fan low relay
• Cooling fan high relay

Cooling fan speed request signal

A/C relay

Starter control relay

Ignition relay

Control part

Reference page

• Headlamp LO
• Headlamp HI

EXL-8

• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp

EXL-10

Illuminations

INL-8

Front wiper motor

WW-8

Starter motor

STR-6

ECM (CAN)

Cooling fan

EC-35

A/C compressor request signal

ECM (CAN)

A/C compressor
(Magnet clutch)

Ignition switch ON signal

BCM (CAN)

Vehicle speed signal (Meter)

Combination meter
(CAN)

Push-button ignition switch signal

Push-button ignition
switch

Each control unit,
sensor, actuator and
relay (Ignition power
supply)

RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe

HAC-13

EC-32

INFOID:0000000009667165

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM
Control part

Fail-safe operation

Cooling fan

• The cooling fan relay turn ON when the ignition switch is turned ON (Cooling fan HI operation)
• The cooling fan relay turn OFF when the ignition switch is turned OFF

A/C compressor

A/C relay OFF

If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
Control part

Fail-safe operation

Headlamp

• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF

•
•
•
•

• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Illumination
Tail lamp

Front wiper motor

• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is
turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.
• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control
is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating.
• Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control
is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other position than stop
position.

Front fog lamp

Front fog lamp relay OFF

Revision: April 2013

PCS-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control part

Fail-safe operation

Horn

Horn OFF

Ignition relay

The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.

Starter motor

Starter control relay OFF

A

B

IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION
• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it.
• IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation
coil circuit.
• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to
alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
DTC

Ignition switch

Ignition relay

Tail lamp relay

—

ON

ON

—

—

C

D

E

OFF

OFF

—

B2098: IGN RELAY ON

OFF

ON

ON (10 minutes)

B2099: IGN RELAY OFF

ON

OFF

—

F

NOTE:
The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.

G

FRONT WIPER CONTROL
IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal.
When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
Ignition switch

Front wiper switch

Auto stop signal

OFF

Front wiper stop position signal cannot be
input 10 seconds.

ON

The signal does not change for 10 seconds.

ON

NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.

H

I

J

K

STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains
active for 90 seconds.

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567564

L

PCS

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
N

O

P

ALCIA0030GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-7

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DESCRIPTION

Outline
• IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status.
• IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up)

— CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
— Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep)

— Low power consumption control is active.
— CAN transmission is stopped.
Sleep Mode Activation
• IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the
conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication.
— Outputting signals to actuators
— Switches or relays operating
— Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
• IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep
wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
Wake-up Operation
• IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep
wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a
sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start.
— Ignition switch ON
— An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-8

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)

A

Diagnosis Description

INFOID:0000000009567565

AUTO ACTIVE TEST

B

Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following conditions.
• Passenger door is open
• CONSULT is connected
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the driver door switch 10 times. Then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-84,
«Component Function Check».
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following operation sequence is repeated 3 times.
Operation sequence

Inspection location

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

Operation

PCS

1

Front wiper

LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds

2

•
•
•
•

10 seconds

3

Headlamp

LO for 10 seconds →HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

4

A/C compressor (magnet clutch)

ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

5

Cooling fan

LO for 5 seconds → MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp

C

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-9

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Concept of Auto Active Test

JMMIA0812GB

• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.
Diagnosis Chart in Auto Active Test
Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•

Inspection contents

Any of the following components do not operate
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp
Headlamp (HI, LO)
Front wiper (HI, LO)

Perform auto active test.
Does the applicable system operate?

Possible cause
YES

BCM signal input circuit

NO

• Lamp or motor
• Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and applicable system
• IPDM E/R

YES

• BCM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R

YES

• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Cooling fan motor
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R

Perform auto active test.
Does the magnet clutch operate?

A/C compressor does not operate

Perform auto active test.
Does the cooling fan operate?

Cooling fan does not operate

CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)

INFOID:0000000009567566

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Ecu Identification

The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The IPDM E/R self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The IPDM E/R input/output data is displayed in real time.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Active Test

The IPDM E/R activates outputs to test components.

CAN Diag Support Mntr

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

A

ECU IDENTIFICATION

B

The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

C

Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
D

Main
Signals

Description

MOTOR FAN REQ [%]

×

Indicates cooling fan speed signal received from ECM on CAN communication
line

AC COMP REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates A/C compressor request signal received from ECM on CAN communication line

TAIL&CLR REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates position light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HL LO REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates low beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

HL HI REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates high beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

FR FOG REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates front fog light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]

×

Indicates front wiper request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper auto stop signal

WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper fail-safe operation

Monitor Item [Unit]

Indicates ignition switch ON signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IGN RLY1 -REQ [On/Off]
IGN RLY [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of ignition relay
Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch

INTER/NP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift position

ST RLY CONT [On/Off]

Indicates starter relay status signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IHBT RLY -REQ [On/Off]

Indicates starter control relay signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI]

Indicates condition of starter relay and starter control relay

DETENT SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift selector (park position switch)

DTRL REQ [Off]

Indicates daytime light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HOOD SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of hood switch

THFT HRN REQ [On/Off]

Indicates theft warning horn request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HORN CHIRP [On/Off]

Indicates horn reminder signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

ACTIVE TEST
Description

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

FRONT WIPER

This test is able to check wiper motor operation [Hi/Lo/Off].

Revision: April 2013

PCS-11

F

G

H

I

J

K

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Test item

E

2014 Note

L

PCS

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item

Description

MOTOR FAN

This test is able to check cooling fan operation [4/3/2/1].

EXTERNAL LAMPS

This test is able to check external lamp operation [Fog/Hi/Lo/TAIL/Off].

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-12, «CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-12

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)
Reference Value

Monitor Item
Engine idle speed

AC COMP REQ

Engine running

HL HI REQ

FR FOG REQ

FR WIP REQ

C
Condition

MOTOR FAN REQ

HL LO REQ

Changes depending on engine coolant temperature, air conditioner operation status, vehicle speed, etc.

Off

A/C switch ON
(Compressor is operating)

On

Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND

On

Lighting switch OFF

Off

Lighting switch 2ND

On

Lighting switch 2ND

Lighting switch 2ND

Ignition switch ON

WIP PROT

Ignition switch ON

Lighting switch other than HI and
PASS

Off

Lighting switch HI or PASS

On

Front fog lamp switch OFF

Off

Front fog lamp switch ON

On

Front wiper switch OFF

Stop

Front wiper switch INT

1LOW

Front wiper switch LO

Low

Front wiper switch HI

Hi

Any position other than front wiper
stop position
Front wiper operates normally.
Front wiper stops at fail-safe operation.

STOP P

Off

Ignition switch ON

On

Ignition switch OFF or ACC

Off

Ignition switch ON

On

Release the push-button ignition switch

Off

Press the push-button ignition switch

On

Revision: April 2013

On

Ignition switch ON

Off

At engine cranking

On

PCS-13

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Depress clutch pedal (M/T models)
ST RLY CONT

G

Off

Release clutch pedal (M/T models)
Selector lever in P or N position
(CVT models)

F

BLOCK
Off

Ignition switch ON

E

ACT P

Ignition switch OFF or ACC

Selector lever in any position other
than P or N (CVT models)
INTER/NP SW

1/2/3/4

A/C switch OFF

Front wiper stop position

PUSH SW

D

Off

Ignition switch ON

IGN RLY

Value/Status

Lighting switch OFF

WIP AUTO STOP

IGN RLY1 -REQ

B

INFOID:0000000009567567

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

TAIL&CLR REQ

A

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
IHBT RLY -REQ

ST/INHI RLY

DETENT SW

DTRL REQ

HOOD SW

THFT HRN REQ

HORN CHIRP

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Value/Status

Ignition switch ON

Off

At engine cranking

On

Ignition switch ON

Off

At engine cranking

INHI ON → ST ON

The status of starter relay or starter control relay cannot be recognized by
the battery voltage malfunction, etc. when the starter relay is ON and the
starter control relay is OFF.
• Press the selector button with selector lever in P position.
• Selector lever in any position other than P.

Ignition switch ON

UNKWN

Off

Release the selector button with selector lever in P position.

On

Daytime running lamps OFF

Off

Daytime running lamps ON

On

Hood closed

Off

Hood open

On

Not operation

Off

• Panic alarm is activated
• Theft warning alarm is activated

On

Not operated

Off

Door locking with keyfob (horn chirp mode)

On

PCS-14

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

ALMIA0600ZZ

K

PHYSICAL VALUES
L
Terminal

Wire
color

1

R

2

Y

3

SB

Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Condition

Value

Battery power supply

Input

OFF

—

9 – 16 V

Battery power supply

Input

OFF

—

9 – 16 V

Input

OFF
ACC
ON

—

0V

START

—

9 – 16 V

Circuit

Ignition switch power
supply (START)

Cooling fan OFF
5

6

Y

R

Cooling fan power supply (HIGH)

Starter motor power
supply

Revision: April 2013

Output

Output

ON or
START

N

O

0V

Cooling fan LO

4–8V

Cooling fan MID or HI

9 – 16 V

OFF
ACC
ON

—

0V

START

—

6 – 16 V

PCS-15

PCS

2014 Note

P

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal

Wire
color

Circuit

Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Condition
Cooling fan OFF

7

8

9

11

13

P

G

BR

G

R

14

L

15

LG

16

P

17

LG

18

GR

19

B

20

BR

21

R

Cooling fan power supply (LOW)

Battery power supply

Fuel pump power supply

ECM relay power supply

Clutch interlock switch
power supply
Headlamp LOW (LH)
power supply
Starter relay coil power
supply

Output

Input

Output

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
power supply

9 – 16 V

OFF

—

9 – 16 V

ON
RUN

Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition
switch ON

9 – 16 V

ON

Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition
switch ON

0-1V

OFF

More than a few seconds
after turning ignition switch
OFF

0–1V

ON
OFF

For a few seconds after
turning ignition switch OFF

6 – 16 V

Clutch pedal depressed

0–1V

Clutch pedal released

9 – 16 V

Lighting switch OFF

0–1V

Lighting switch 2ND

9 – 16 V

ON

0–1V
9 – 16 V

ON

Lighting switch OFF

0–1V

Lighting switch 2ND

9 – 16 V

Front wiper switch OFF

0–1V

Front wiper switch LO

9 – 16 V

Front wiper switch OFF

0–1V

Front wiper switch HI

9 – 16 V

ON

—

—

—

—

OFF

—

0V

ON or
START

—

9 – 16 V

Output

Transmission range
switch power supply

Output

P

Illumination power supply

Output

23

R

Combination lamp power supply

Output

24

W

Daytime light relay 1
power supply

Output

G

Headlamp HIGH (LH)
power supply

Revision: April 2013

Cooling fan HI

Output

22

25

4–8V

Input

Front wiper motor LOW
power supply

Ground

Cooling fan MID

ON or
START

Output

Output

Front wiper motor HIGH
power supply

9 – 16 V

Output

Headlamp LOW (RH)
power supply

0V

Cooling fan LO

Output

Input

Value

Output

OFF or
ACC

0–1V

ON

9 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF

0–1V

Lighting switch 1ST

9 – 16 V

Lighting switch OFF

0–1V

Lighting switch 1ST

9 – 16 V

Lighting switch OFF

0–1V

Lighting switch 1ST

9 – 16 V

Lighting switch other than
HI and PASS

0–1V

Lighting switch HI
Lighting switch PASS

9 – 16 V

PCS-16

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal

27

28

29

32

34

35

36

39

40

43

47

50

Wire
color

Y

V

L/W

G/W

Circuit

Headlamp HIGH (RH)
power supply

A/C compressor power
supply

Throttle control motor
relay power supply

Throttle control motor
relay control

Input/
Output

Ignition
switch

Output

Output

Value

A

Lighting switch other than
HI and PASS

0–1V

Lighting switch HI
Lighting switch PASS

9 – 16 V

A/C switch OFF

0–1V
9 – 16 V

OFF

More than a few seconds
after turning ignition switch
OFF

0–1V

ON
OFF

For a few seconds after
turning ignition switch OFF

9 – 16 V

RUN

D

ON →
OFF

0–1V
↓
9 – 16 V
↓
0–1V

ON

0–1V

OFF or
ACC

0–1V

ON

9 – 16 V

Output

BR

NATS antenna amp
power supply

Output

OFF

9 – 16 V

SB

Fuel injector power supply

Output

OFF or
ACC

0–1V

ON

9 – 16 V

L

BR

GR

R/W

P

Timing control solenoid
valve power
supply

Transmission range
switch power supply

Fuel pump relay control

ECM power supply

ECM relay control

Revision: April 2013

F

H

I

J

OFF

More than a few seconds
after turning ignition switch
OFF

0–1V

ON
OFF

For a few seconds after
turning ignition switch OFF

9 – 16 V

ON

Select lever in any position
other than P or N

0–1V

Select lever P or N

9 – 16 V

ON
RUN

Approximately 1 second after turning the ignition
switch ON

0–1V

PCS

ON

Approximately 1 second or
more after turning the ignition switch

9 – 16 V

N

OFF

More than a few seconds
after turning ignition switch
OFF

0–1V

O

ON
OFF

For a few seconds after
turning ignition switch OFF

9 – 16 V

OFF

More than a few seconds
after turning ignition switch
OFF

0–1V

ON
OFF

For a few seconds after
turning ignition switch OFF

9 – 16 V

Output

Input

E

G

Ignition coil power supply

Y

B

C

A/C switch ON
(A/C compressor is operating)

Output

Output

Condition

Output

Output

Output

PCS-17

K

L

P

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Wire
color

Terminal

59

Y

60

B

Input/
Output

Circuit

Cooling fan relay control

Ignition
switch

Output

Condition

Value

Cooling fan OFF or LO operated

9 – 16 V

Cooling fan MID or HI operated

0–1V

Ground

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

61

P

CAN-L

Input/
Output

62

L

CAN-H

Input/
Output

—

64

LG

Hood switch

Input

ON

65

BR

Cooling fan relay power
supply

Output

OFF or
ACC

0–1V

ON

9 – 16 V

GR

Daytime light relay 1
control

Output

71

W

Front fog lamp relay
control

Output

73

SB

Horn relay control

Output

74

V

Front wiper motor stop
position

Input

ON

80

R

PNP switch

Input

ON

SB

Push-button ignition
switch

89

B

Ground

90

L

Ignition relay power supply

Input

0–1V

Hood open

9 – 16 V

9 – 16 V

69

81

Hood closed

0–1V

ON

—

—

Input

ON

Front fog lamp switch OFF

9 – 16 V

Front fog lamp switch ON

0–1V

Horn is not activated

9 – 16 V

Horn is activated

0–1V

Front wiper stop position

0–1V

Any position other than front
wiper stop position

9 – 16 V

Selector Lever in P

0–1V

Selector lever in any position other than P

9 – 16 V

Press the push-button ignition switch

0–1V

Release the push button ignition switch

9 – 16 V

—

—

Ignition switch OFF or ACC

0–1V

Ignition switch ON

9 – 16 V

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009567568

CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM
Control part

Fail-safe operation

Cooling fan

• The cooling fan relay turn ON when the ignition switch is turned ON (Cooling fan HI operation)
• The cooling fan relay turn OFF when the ignition switch is turned OFF

A/C compressor

A/C relay OFF

If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

Revision: April 2013

PCS-18

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Control part

A

• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF

Headlamp
•
•
•
•

Fail-safe operation

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Illumination
Tail lamp

Front wiper motor

B

• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF

C

• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is
turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.
• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control
is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating.
• Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control
is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other position than stop
position.

Front fog lamp

Front fog lamp relay OFF

Horn

Horn OFF

Ignition relay

The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.

Starter motor

Starter control relay OFF

D

E

F

IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION

G

• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it.
• IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation
coil circuit.
• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes to
alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

H

DTC

Ignition switch

Ignition relay

Tail lamp relay

—

ON

ON

—

—

OFF

OFF

—

B2098: IGN RELAY ON

OFF

ON

ON (10 minutes)

B2099: IGN RELAY OFF

ON

OFF

—

I

J

K

NOTE:
The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.

FRONT WIPER CONTROL

L
IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop signal.
When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
PCS
Ignition switch

Front wiper switch

Auto stop signal

OFF

Front wiper stop position signal cannot be
input 10 seconds.

ON

The signal does not change for 10 seconds.

ON

N

NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.

O

STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION

P

IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains
active for 90 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-19

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009567569

TIMENOTE

CONSULT display

Fail-safe

Refer to

No DTC is detected. Further testing may be required.

—

—

—

—

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT

×

CRNT

1 – 39

PCS-26

B2098: IGN RELAY ON

×

CRNT

1 – 39

PCS-27

B2099: IGN RELAY OFF

—

CRNT

1 – 39

PCS-28

B210B: PNP RELAY ON stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-108

B210C: PNP RELAY OFF stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-109

B210D: STARTER relay ON stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-111

B210E: STARTER relay OFF stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-113

B210F: Interlock/NP switch ON stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-115

B2110: Interlock/NP switch OFF stuck failure

—

CRNT

1 – 39

SEC-117

NOTE:
The details of TIME display are as follows.
• CRNT: The malfunctions that are detected now
• 1 — 39: The number is indicated when it is normal at present and a malfunction was detected in the past. It
increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF → ON. It is
fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is
detected again in the process.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-20

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)
Wiring Diagram

A

B

INFOID:0000000009567570

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

AAMWA0770GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-21

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0771GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-22

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O
AAMIA1680GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-23

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1681GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-24

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
[IPDM E/R]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O
AAMIA1682GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-25

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[IPDM E/R]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009567571

Refer to LAN-6, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description».

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567572

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display

CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

When IPDM E/R cannot communicate with CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more

In CAN communication system, any item (or items) of
the following listed below is malfunctioning.
• Transmission
• Receiving (ECM)
• Receiving (BCM)
• Receiving (Combination meter)

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567573

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.
2. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of IPDM E/R.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-26

2014 Note

B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK
[IPDM E/R]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567575

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display
IGN RELAY ON
[B2098]

DTC Detection Condition
The ignition relay ON is detected for 1 second at
ignition switch OFF
(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it)

Possible Cause

C
IPDM E/R

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

E

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B2098 displayed?
YES >> Refer to PCS-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

F

G
INFOID:0000000009567576

H

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B2098 CRNT?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41.

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-27

2014 Note

B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK
[IPDM E/R]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567578

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
IGN RELAY OFF
[B2099]

DTC Detection Condition
The ignition relay OFF is detected for 1 second at
ignition switch ON
(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of the ignition relay inside it)

Possible Cause

IPDM E/R

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B2099 displayed?
YES >> Refer to PCS-28, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567579

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B2099 CRNT?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-28

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[IPDM E/R]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567580

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-21, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINKS
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuse or fusible links are not blown.

D
Terminal No.

Signal name

Fuse and fusible link Nos.

1

Battery

A (120A), E (80A)

2

Battery

B (60A)

E

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E42.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E42 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal
1

E42

2

G

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

H

—

Battery voltage

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

J

3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

K

Check continuity between IPDM E/R connectors and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

19

E46

60

E47

89

Ground

Continuity

L

—

Yes

PCS

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-29

2014 Note

IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
IPDM E/R
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009607430

AWMIA1423ZZ

1.

IPDM E/R

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009607431

CAUTION:
IPDM E/R integrated relays are not serviceable and must not be removed from unit.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Release pawls on IPDM E/R cover (1) and remove.
:Pawl

ALMIA0654ZZ

Revision: April 2013

PCS-30

2014 Note

IPDM E/R
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Release pawls, then lift IPDM E/R (1) as shown and position
aside.
:Pawl
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the IPDM E/R (1) and
remove.

[IPDM E/R]
A

B

C

D

E

F

G
ALMIA0655ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-31

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009607420

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-32

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009567585

B

C

D

E

F

AWMIA1438ZZ

No.

1.

Component

Accessory relay-2

Description
• Accessory relay-2 is controlled by BCM.
• Accessory relay-2 supplies accessory power supply or ignition switch ACC signal to each ECU
when ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON.
• BCM compares status of accessory relay-2 control signal, and ignition switch position judged
by BCM.

2.

BCM

• BCM controls power distribution system.
• BCM judges ignition switch position by push-button ignition switch (push switch) and vehicle
condition.
• BCM checks ignition switch position internally.

3.

Push-button ignition
switch

Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed, and transmits status signal to BCM and
IPDM E/R.

IPDM E/R

• IPDM E/R detects push-button ignition switch (push switch) status, and transmits push-button
ignition switch status signal (CAN) to BCM.
• IPDM E/R receives ignition relay-1 (IPDM E/R) control signal and ignition switch ON signal
(CAN) from BCM, and controls ignition relay-1 (built into IPDM E/R)

Blower relay (in fuse
block)

• Blower relay is controlled by BCM.
• Blower relay supplies ignition switch ON power supply or ignition switch ON signal to air conditioning system when ignition switch is turned ON.
• BCM compares status of blower relay control signal and ignition switch position judged by
BCM.

Accessory relay-1 (in
fuse block)

• Accessory relay-1 is controlled by BCM.
• Accessory relay-1 supplies accessory power supply or ignition switch ACC signal to each ECU
when ignition switch is turned ACC or ON.
• BCM compares status of accessory relay-1 control signal, and ignition switch position judged
by BCM.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Ignition relay-2 (in fuse
block)

Revision: April 2013

• Ignition relay-2 is controlled by BCM.
• Ignition relay-2 supplies ignition switch ON power supply or ignition switch ON signal to each
ECU and system when ignition switch is turned ON.
• BCM compares status of ignition relay-2 control signal and ignition switch position judged by
BCM.
• BCM monitors ignition relay-2 operating status by ignition relay feedback signal.

PCS-33

2014 Note

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009567588

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ALMIA0602GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) is the system that BCM controls with the operation of the pushbutton ignition switch and performs the power distribution to each power circuit. This system is used instead
of the mechanical power supply changing mechanism with the operation of the conventional key cylinder.
• The push-button ignition switch can be operated when Intelligent Key is in the following condition.
— Intelligent Key is in the detection area of the inside key antenna.
— Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch.
• The push-button ignition switch operation is input to BCM as a signal. BCM changes the power supply position according to the status and operates the following relays to supply power to each power circuit.
— Ignition relay-1
— Ignition relay-2
— Accessory relay-1
— Accessory relay-2
— Blower motor relay
NOTE:
The engine switch operation changes due to the conditions of brake pedal, selector lever and vehicle speed.
• The power supply position can be confirmed with the lighting of the indicators in the push-button ignition
switch.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for 30 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply
to prevent battery discharge.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position
• All doors are closed
• Selector lever is in the P (park) position
Reset Condition of Battery Saver System
In order to prevent the battery from discharging, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply when all
doors are closed, the selector lever is in P (park) position and the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position for 30 minutes. If any of the following conditions are met the battery saver system is released and the
steering will change automatically to lock position from OFF position.
• Opening any door
• Operating door request switch on door handle
• Operating Intelligent Key

POWER SUPPLY POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERARevision: April 2013

PCS-34

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TION
The power supply position changing operation can be performed with the following operations.
NOTE:
• When an Intelligent Key is within the detection area of inside key antenna and when Intelligent Key backside
is contacted to push-button ignition switch, it is equivalent to the operations below.
• When starting the engine, the BCM monitors under the engine start conditions:
— Brake pedal operating condition
— Selector lever position
— Vehicle speed

A

B

C

Vehicle speed: less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
Engine start/stop condition
Selector lever position

Brake pedal operation condition

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

OFF → ACC

—

Not depressed

1

OFF → ACC → ON

—

Not depressed

2

OFF → ACC → ON → OFF

—

Not depressed

3

P or N position

Depressed

1

—

—

1

Power supply position

OFF → START
ACC → START
ON → START
Engine is running → OFF

D

E

F

G

Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
Power supply position
Engine is running → ACC
Engine stall return operation
while driving

Engine start/stop condition
Selector lever position

Brake pedal operation condition

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

—

—

Emergency stop operation

N position

Not depressed

1

Emergency stop operation

H

I

J

• Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.
• Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times or more within 1.5 seconds.

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-35

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009654077

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

INTELLIGENT KEY

Revision: April 2013

PCS-36

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)

INFOID:0000000009654078

A

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

B

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Main

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of back door request switch.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

C

D

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

BRAKE SW 1 [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of brake switch.

CLUTCH SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of clutch interlock switch.

BRAKE SW 2 [On/Off]

E

Indicates condition of brake switch.

DETE/CANCL SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) position.

SFT PN/N SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

F

PUSH SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch received from IPDM E/R on
CAN communication line.

IGN RLY1 -F/B [On/Off]

Indicates condition of ignition relay 1 received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

DETE SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of detent switch received from TCM on CAN communication
line.

SFT PN -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT P -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT N -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of N (neutral) position from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Start/Crank/Run]

×

Indicates condition of engine state from ECM on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 1 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 2 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on
CAN communication line.

DOOR STAT -DR [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of driver side door status.

DOOR STAT -AS [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of passenger side door status.

ID OK FLAG [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of Intelligent Key ID.

PRMT ENG STRT [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of engine start possibility.
×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.

RKE OPE COUN2 [0-19]

×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.
Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-MODE CHG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of mode change signal from Intelligent Key.

PCS-37

I

J

K

L

N

O

P

ACTIVE TEST

Revision: April 2013

H

PCS

RKE OPE COUN1 [0-19]

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

G

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test Item

Description

INSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check combination meter warning chime operation [Take Out/Knob/Key/
Off].

LCD

This test is able to check combination meter display information [Off/LK WN/OUTKEY/NO
KY/BATT/INSRT/SFT P/ROTAT/ID NG/B&P I/B&P N].

BATTERY SAVER

This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].

ENGINE SW ILLUMI

This test is able to check push-button ignition switch START indicator operation [On/Off].

PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR

This test is able to check back door lock actuator operation [On/Off].

INT LAMP

This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].

INDICATOR

This test is able to check combination meter warning lamp operation [KEY ON/KEY IND/Off].

FLASHER

This test is able to check hazard lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

OUTSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation [On/Off].

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

P RANGE

This test is able to check CVT shift selector illumination operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY

ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI

ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK

ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK

HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK

Setting

Description

On*

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key ON.

Off

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key OFF.

On*

Anti lock out setting ON.

Off

Anti lock out setting OFF.

Off

No buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

On*

Buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

Horn Chirp

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Buzzer*

Buzzer reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

No reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

On*

No horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

Lock/Unlock*

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Unlock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Lock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Off

No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS

—

This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis.

CONFIRM KEY FOB ID

—

Intelligent Key ID code can be checked.
70 msec

SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT

Start

100 msec

Starter motor operation duration time setting.

200 msec
End

LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN

Revision: April 2013

—

On*

Intelligent Key low battery warning ON.

Off

Intelligent Key low battery warning OFF.

PCS-38

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Support Item

AUTO LOCK SET

Setting
MODE7

5 min

MODE6

4 min

MODE5

3 min

Description

A

B

MODE4

2 min

MODE3*

1 min

Auto door lock time setting.

MODE2

30 sec

MODE1

Off

C

*: Initial Setting

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-39

2014 Note

BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009567591

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

PCS-40

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567592

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

AAMWA0772GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-41

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0773GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-42

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O
AAMIA1683GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-43

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1684GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-44

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O
AAMIA1685GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-45

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1686GB

Revision: April 2013

PCS-46

2014 Note

POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O
AAMIA1687GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-47

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009567593

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

PCS-48

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.

Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the component or system that is malfunctioning.

A

B

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

C

1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT).
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.

D

E

F

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

G

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

H

>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

I

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
NOTE:
Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.

J

>> GO TO 6.

K

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
L
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart», and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
Is DTC detected?
PCS
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

N

Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Revision: April 2013

PCS-49

2014 Note

O

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-50

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009567594

B

INFOID:0000000009567595

C

Refer to LAN-6, «CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description».

DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
U1000 can be set if a module harness was disconnected and reconnected, perhaps during a repair. Confirm
that there are actual CAN diagnostic symptoms and a present DTC by performing the Self Diagnostic Result
procedure.
CONSULT Display

CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

DTC Detection Condition

When any listed module cannot communicate
with CAN communication signal continuously for
2 seconds or more with ignition switch ON

Diagnosis Procedure

D

E

Possible Cause
In CAN communication system, any item (or
items) of the following listed below is malfunctioning.
• Transmission
• Receiving (ECM)
• Receiving (VDC/TCS/ABS)
• Receiving (METER/M&A)
• Receiving (TCM)
• Receiving (IPDM E/R)

F

G

H

INFOID:0000000009567596

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

I

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.
2. Check “SELF- DIAG RESULTS”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Perform CAN Diagnosis as described in DIAGNOSIS section of CONSULT Operation Manual.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-51

2014 Note

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567597

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT Display
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

DTC Detection Condition
BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction.

Possible Cause
BCM

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567598

1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM.
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-52

2014 Note

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567599

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

An immediate operation of accessory relay-2 is
requested by BCM, but there is no response for
more than 1 second.

ACC RELAY REQ F/B
[B2614]

C

• Harness or connectors
• Accessory relay-2
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. Turn ignition switch to ACC, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Perform Self-diagnosis result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B2614 displayed?
YES >> Go to PCS-53, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567600

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

H

1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY-2 CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
2.

I

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

96

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and accessory relay-2 connector.
Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and accessory relay-2 connector M39.
BCM

4.

Accessory relay-2

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

96

M39

1

PCS

Continuity

O

BCM
Terminal

M98

96

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY-2
Revision: April 2013

PCS-53

N

Yes

Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and ground.

Connector

K

L

2.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY-2 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

J

2014 Note

P

B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Refer to PCS-54, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace accessory relay-2.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567601

1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY-2
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect accessory relay-2.
Check the continuity between accessory relay-2 terminals.

Terminals
3 and 5

Condition

Continuity

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace accessory relay-2.
PBIB0098E

Revision: April 2013

PCS-54

2014 Note

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567602

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
[B2615]

Possible Cause

An immediate operation of front blower motor relay is requested by BCM, but there is no response for more than 1 second.

•
•
•
•

C

Harness or connectors.
Blower relay.
Fuse block J/B.
BCM.

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

E

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Perform Self-diagnosis result with CONSULT.
Is DTC B2615 displayed?
YES >> Go to PCS-57, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567603

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

H

1. CHECK BLOWER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

I

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove blower relay.
Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between blower relay connector J-1 and BCM connector M98.
Blower relay

5.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

J-1

2

M98

106

J

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between Blower relay connector J-1 and ground.
Blower relay
Connector

Terminal

J-1

2

Ground

Continuity

—

No

K

L

PCS

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

2. CHECK BLOWER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

O

Check continuity between Blower relay connector J-1 terminal 1 and ground.
P
Blower relay
Connector

Terminal

J-1

1

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
Revision: April 2013

PCS-55

2014 Note

B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3. CHECK BLOWER RELAY
Perform the relay component inspection. Refer to PCS-56, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace blower relay.

4. CHECK BLOWER RELAY POWER SUPPLY (BCM)

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

106

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567604

1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY
1.
2.
3.

Turn blower switch OFF.
Remove blower relay.
Check continuity between blower relay terminals.

Terminals
3 and 5

Condition

Continuity

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace blower relay.
PBIB0098E

Revision: April 2013

PCS-56

2014 Note

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567605

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

An immediate operation of ignition relay-2 is requested by BCM, but there is no response for
more than 1 second.

IGN RELAY2 CIRCUIT
[B2616]

•
•
•
•

C

Harness or connectors.
Ignition relay-2.
Fuse block J/B.
BCM.

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

E

1. Turn ignition switch ON under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.
CVT selector lever is in the P (park) or N (neutral) position.
Release brake pedal
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B2616 displayed?
YES >> Refer to PCS-57, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

F

G
INFOID:0000000009567606

H

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».
I

1. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove ignition relay-2.
Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between ignition relay-2 connector J-3 and BCM connector M98.
Ignition relay-2

5.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

J-3

1

M98

99

J

K
Continuity

L
Yes

Check continuity between ignition relay-2 connector J-3 and ground.
Ignition relay-2
Connector

Terminal

J-3

1

PCS

Ground

Continuity

—

No

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

O

2. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-2 GROUND CIRCUIT

P

Check continuity between ignition relay-2 connector J-3 and ground.
Ignition relay-2
Connector

Terminal

J-3

2

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

PCS-57

2014 Note

B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-2

Perform the relay component inspection. Refer to PCS-58, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace ignition relay-2.

4. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-2 POWER SUPPLY (BCM)

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

99

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567607

1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove ignition relay-2.
Check the continuity between ignition relay-2 terminals.

Terminals
3 and 5

Condition

Continuity

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace ignition relay-2.
PBIB0098E

Revision: April 2013

PCS-58

2014 Note

B2618 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2618 BCM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567608

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B2618 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
PCS-51, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2618 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
PCS-52, «DTC Logic».

C

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition
An immediate operation of ignition relay-1 is requested by BCM, but there is no response for
more than 1 second

BCM
[B2618]

D

Possible Cause
• Harness or connectors
• BCM
• IPDM E/R

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.
CVT selector lever is in the P (park) or N (neutral) position.
Release brake pedal
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B2618 displayed?
YES >> Refer to PCS-59, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

G

H
INFOID:0000000009567609

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

I

J

1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
2.

K

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

98

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
BCM

4.

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

98

E47

90

O

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and ground.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-59

PCS

N

2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

L

2014 Note

P

B2618 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

98

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

3.CHECK VOLTAGE OF IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R SIDE)
1.
2.

Connect IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

90

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-60

2014 Note

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567610

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

C

BCM detects a difference of signal for 1 second
or more between the following information:
• Power supply position by push-button ignition
switch.
• Power supply position from IPDM E/R (CAN).

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH
[B261A]

• Harness or connectors
• Push-button ignition switch
• BCM

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

E

1. Press the push-button ignition switch under the following conditions, and wait for at least 1 second.
CVT selector lever is in the P (park) or N (neutral) position.
Release the brake pedal.
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B261A displayed?
YES >> Refer to PCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567611

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

G

H

I

1. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH)
1.
2.

F

Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch connector M25 and ground.

J

K

Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

8

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

L

PCS

2. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 terminal 81 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

81

N

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».

P

3. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E47 and BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E47 and push-button ignition switch connector M25.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-61

O

2014 Note

B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R

4.

Push-button ignition switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E47

81

M25

8

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

81

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (BCM)
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

76

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

5. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM)

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and push-button ignition switch connector M25.
BCM

4.

Push-button ignition switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

76

M25

8

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

76

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-62

2014 Note

B26F1 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F1 IGNITION RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567612

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM transmits the ignition relay-1 control signal,
but does not receive ignition switch ON signal
(CAN) from IPDM E/R.

IGN RELAY OFF
[B26F1]

C

• Harness or connectors
• BCM
• IPDM E/R

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform Self-diagnosis result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B26F1 displayed?
YES >> Go to PCS-63, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567613

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

H

1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
I

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

J

K

2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

98

L

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

0V

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.
3.

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
BCM

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

98

E47

90

P

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

PCS-63

PCS

2014 Note

B26F1 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-64

2014 Note

B26F2 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F2 IGNITION RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567614

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

CONSULT Display

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM transmits the ignition relay-1 control signal,
but does not receive ignition switch ON signal
(CAN) from IPDM E/R.

IGN RELAY ON
[B26F2]

C

• Harness or connectors
• BCM
• IPDM E/R

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Perform Self-diagnosis result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B26F2 displayed?
YES >> Go to PCS-65, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567615

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

H

1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
I

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

J

K

2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

90

L

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT — 1 (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.
3.

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector M98 and IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

90

Ground

P

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

PCS-65

PCS

2014 Note

B26F2 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT — 2 (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.

Connect IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

90

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-66

2014 Note

B26F6 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F6 BCM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567616

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
PCS-51, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
PCS-52, «DTC Logic».

C

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition
Ignition relay-1 ON signal is not transmitted from
IPDM E/R (CAN) when BCM turns ignition relay
ON.

BCM
[B26F6]

D

Possible Cause
BCM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 0.5 second or more.
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC B26F6 displayed?
YES >> Go to PCS-67, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

H

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567617

I

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».

1. CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR IPDM E/R

J

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R with CONSULT.
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2

K

2. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 POWER SUPPLY (IPDM E/R)

L

Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

90

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

Check voltage between BCM connector M98 and ground.

Connector

Terminal

M98

98

P
Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Revision: April 2013

PCS-67

N

O

3. CHECK IGNITION RELAY-1 POWER SUPPLY (BCM)
BCM

PCS

2014 Note

B26F6 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PCS-68

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009567618

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.

B

Select “PUSH SW” in “Data Monitor” of BCM with CONSULT.
Check the push-button ignition switch signal under the following conditions.
C
Test item

Condition

PUSH SW

Status

Push-button ignition switch is pressed

On

Push-button ignition switch is not pressed

Off

D

Is the indication normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go to PCS-69, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567619

F

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PCS-41, «Wiring Diagram».
G

1. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector and IPDM E/R connector E47.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch connector M25 terminal 8 and ground.

H

I
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

8

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

J

K

2. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM)
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and push-button ignition switch connector M25.
BCM

3.

Push-button ignition switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

76

M25

8

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM connector M98 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

76

Ground

Continuity

—

No

3. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.

PCS-69

PCS

N

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

L

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

81

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E47 and push-button ignition switch connector M25.
IPDM E/R

3.

Push-button ignition switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E47

81

M25

8

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E47 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E47

81

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between push-button ignition switch connector M25 and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

4

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

6.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Refer to PCS-70, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-74, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567620

1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch terminals.
Push-button ignition switch terminals
4–8

Condition

Continuity

Pressed

Yes

Not pressed

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
Revision: April 2013

PCS-70

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-74, «Removal and Installation».
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-71

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE
Description

INFOID:0000000009567621

Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and check
each symptom.
NOTE:
The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system, and NATS-IVIS/NVIS in the Intelligent
Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. The vehicle security function can operate only
when the door lock and power distribution system are operating normally.

Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)
• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT.
• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567622

1.PERFORM WORK SUPPORT
Perform INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS in Work Support of INTELLIGENT KEY.
Refer to PCS-37, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM.
Is any DTCs displayed?
YES >> Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Check push-button ignition switch.
Refer to PCS-69, «Component Function Check».
Is the operation normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> GO TO 1.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-72

2014 Note

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009607422

B

For removal and installation of the BCM (Body Control Module), refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PCS

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PCS-73

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009607424

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove NATS antenna amp. Refer to SEC-121, «Removal and Installation».
Release pawls and remove the push-button ignition switch (1).
: Pawl

ALKIA3180ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

PCS-74

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

PG

POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ……………….. 56
Electrical Units Location ……………………………………56

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 60

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ……………… 63

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4
Circuit Breaker …………………………………………………. 4
Battery …………………………………………………………….. 4
Harness Connector …………………………………………… 4
Standardized Relay …………………………………………… 7

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 10
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT …………..10
Wiring Diagram — Battery Power Supply — ……….. 10
Wiring Diagram — Accessory Power Supply — …. 18
Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply — ………. 22

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ……………………………..63
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement ……………………………………………..63

FUSE INSPECTION …………………………………… 64
How To Check …………………………………………………64
How To Check …………………………………………………68

FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B) ………….37

BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK … 71

L

N

O

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 72

P

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 72

HARNESS ………………………………………………….40

Battery ……………………………………………………………72

Harness Layout ………………………………………………. 40

Revision: April 2013

K

Exploded View …………………………………………………71
Removal and Installation …………………………………..71

Terminal Arrangement …………………………………….. 37

IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ……………………… 39

J

BATTERY …………………………………………………. 69 PG

Ground Distribution …………………………………………. 30

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ……………..39

I

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 69

GROUND ……………………………………………………30

Terminal Arrangement …………………………………….. 38

H

FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION ……………………… 68

Exploded View …………………………………………………69
Removal and Installation (Battery) ……………………..69
Removal and Installation (Battery Tray) ………………70

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX ………38

G

BATTERY …………………………………………………. 60
How to Handle Battery ………………………………………60
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….60

Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 3

F

PG-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009594986

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

PG-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009594987

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

C

Description

—
(—) Model GR8-1200 NI
Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station

B

D
Tests batteries, starting and charging systems and charges batteries.
For operating instructions, refer to diagnostic
station instruction manual.

E

AWIIA1239ZZ

F

—
(—) Model EXP-800 NI
Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer

Tests batteries and charging systems.
For operating instructions, refer to diagnostic
analyzer instruction manual.

G

H

JSMIA0806ZZ

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Circuit Breaker

INFOID:0000000009725280

The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The
temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with
current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the
electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance falls
accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume.

SEL109W

Battery

INFOID:0000000009725282

Type
5 hour rate minimum

Q-85
[V – Ah]

Cold cranking current A (For reference value)

A

12 – 36
470

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Harness Connector

INFOID:0000000009707860

HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
• The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
• The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the figure
below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.

Revision: April 2013

PG-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
[Example]
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L
SEL769DA

HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
• A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
• The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
• The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure
below.
CAUTION:
• Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
• Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-5

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
[Example]

SEL769V

HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE)
• Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM,
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
• Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors.
• Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

PG-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect
these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
LKIA0670E

1.

Control unit with single lever

2.

Control unit with dual lever

3.

J

SMJ connector

A. Fasten

A. Lever

A. Lever

B. Loosen

B. Fasten

B. Fasten

C. Lever

C. Loosen

C. Loosen

K

HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
• SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules L
and seat belt pre-tensioners.
• Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS components.
• Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS components. When locked, the
PG
black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
• Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors
from SRS components.
N

O

P
WHIA0103E

Standardized Relay

INFOID:0000000009707861

NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Revision: April 2013

PG-7

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.

SEL881H

TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
1M ···················· 1 Make

2M

1T ···················· 1 Transfer

1M·1B ···················· 1 Make 1 Break

···················· 2 Make

SEL882H

Revision: April 2013

PG-8

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
SEL188W

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-9

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram —Battery Power Supply —

INFOID:0000000009707852

AAMWA0801GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-10

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMWA0802GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-11

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0803GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-12

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMWA0804GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-13

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0805GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-14

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1740GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-15

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1741GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-16

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1742GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-17

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

Wiring Diagram —Accessory Power Supply —

INFOID:0000000009707853

AAMWA0806GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-18

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1743GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-19

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1744GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-20

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1745GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-21

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

Wiring Diagram —Ignition Power Supply —

INFOID:0000000009707854

AAMWA0807GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-22

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMWA0808GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-23

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMWA0809GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-24

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1746GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-25

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1747GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-26

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1748GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-27

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1749GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-28

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1750GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-29

2014 Note

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

GROUND
Ground Distribution

INFOID:0000000009707857

MAIN HARNESS

AAMIA1751GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-30

2014 Note

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1752GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-31

2014 Note

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1753GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-32

2014 Note

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1754GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-33

2014 Note

P

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1755GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-34

2014 Note

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1756GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-35

2014 Note

P

GROUND
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BODY HARNESS

AAMIA1757GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-36

2014 Note

FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

FUSE BLOCK — JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement

A
INFOID:0000000009707862

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P
AAMIA1762GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-37

2014 Note

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement

INFOID:0000000009707863

FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX

AAMIA1763GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-38

2014 Note

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE
ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement

INFOID:0000000009707864

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

AAMIA0161ZZ

Revision: April 2013

PG-39

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

HARNESS
Harness Layout

INFOID:0000000009707858

HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the drawings:
• Main Harness
• Engine Room Harness
• Engine Room Harness (Passenger Compartment)
• Engine Control Harness
• Body Harness
• Room Lamp Harness
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.

SEL252V

OUTLINE

AAMIA1764GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-40

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
MAIN HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA0162ZZ

B1

M1

W/8

: To R1

A2

M3

W/1

: Fuse block (J/B)

D3

M45

W/20

: Audio unit (With display audio system)

D1

M5

BR/20

: Joint connector-M03

D3

M51

GR/20

: Joint connector-M04

B3

M7

W/16

: Door mirror remote control switch

C2

M53

B/8

: EPS control unit

A3

M9

W/12

: To D1

D1

M55

W/4

: Hazard switch

Revision: April 2013

D2

PG-41

M44

G/5

: Audio unit (With display audio system)

2014 Note

P

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
D3

M10

L/20

: Joint connector–M01

B2

M57

—

: Body ground

B4

M11

W/2

: To B28

B1

M61

—

: Body ground

F3

M12

W/16

: To B29

C1

M62

W/2

: Front blower motor

B3

M14

L/4

: Rear window defogger relay

D5

M66

B/2

: Console power socket

B4

M15

W/16

: To B23

A4

M69

SMJ

: To E7

A4

M16

W/24

: To B24

E3

M70

W/20

: AV control unit

D5

M17

B/1

: Parking brake switch

D2

M71

W/24

: AV control unit

A2

M18

B/40

: BCM (Body control module)

E4

M72

L/5

: USB interface

C2

M21

W/4

: NATS antenna amp.

E1

M77

Y/2

: Front passenger air bag module

B3

M22

W/16

: Data link connector

A4

M78

B/2

: T0 E11

E4

M23

W/4

: AUX in jack

F1

M79

—

: Body ground

C1

M24

W/40

: Combination meter

F2

M81

W/12

: To D115

C3

M25

W/8

: Push–button ignition swtich

D5

M83

B/3

: G sensor

C3

M28

W/16

: Combination switch

F5

M89

L/2

: Inside key antenna (Console)

E3

M29

W/24

: To B1

F1

M90

B/4

: Remote keyless entry receiver

C3

M30

GR/8

: Combination switch (Spiral cable)

F2

M92

W/12

: To D116

C4

M31

Y/6

: Combination switch (Spiral cable)

A3

M93

W/24

: To D16

E3

M33

B/15

: Front air control

D3

M95

L/2

: Inside key antenna (Instrument center)

D4

M35

Y/28

: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

A2

M98

W/40

: BCM (Body control module)

E4

M38

W/8

: CVT shift selector

A2

M99

W/15

: BCM (Body control module)

A3

M39

L/4

: Accessory relay–2

A2

M100

B/15

: BCM (Body control module)

D2

M40

W/32

: Audio unit (With display audio system)

D2

M101

W/16

: Audio unit (With base audio system)

A3

M41

B/5

: Back door lock actuator relay

B3

M105

W/4

: Headlamp aiming switch

C3

M42

BR/4

: Thermo control amp.

C2

M151

BR/4

: Front blower motor resistor

D3

M43

W/20

: Audio unit (With base audio system)

Revision: April 2013

PG-42

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA0163ZZ

E1

E1

GR/5

: Front wiper motor

F2

E41

L/4

: Starter relay

A5

E2

W/2

: Front washer motor

E2

E42

B/2

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

D3

E4

Y/2

: Crash zone sensor

E2

E43

B/6

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

Revision: April 2013

PG-43

2014 Note

P

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
E4

E5

B/2

: Cooling fan motor

F2

E44

BR/8

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

C3

E6

B/2

: Hood switch

E1

E45

BR/12

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

E2

E8

W/24

: To F8

F2

E46

W/24

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

E3

E9

BR/2

: Fusible link box (Battery)

F2

E47

W/16

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

E3

E10

GR/2

: Fusible link box (Battery)

F3

E51

B/2

: Front wheel sensor LH

G2

E15

—

: Body ground

C4

E52

B/2

: Front wheel sensor RH

F3

E16

B/32

: ECM

G4

E53

B/2

: Front fog lamp LH

F4

E17

B/3

: Refrigerant pressure sensor

B5

E54

B/2

: Front fog lamp RH

C4

E18

BR/1

: Horn

E2

E55

GR/12

: To F55

E2

E19

W/6

: To F33

F4

E56

B/2

: Pre–wiring for front fog lamps

C4

E20

B/1

: Horn

G3

E62

B/4

: Cooling fan relay

A2

E24

—

: Body ground

C3

E63

GR/4

: Heated oxygen sensor 2

G3

E25

B/3

: Front combination lamp LH (Without
daytime light system)

F3

E65

B/3

: Front combination lamp RH (Headlamp
aiming motor)

A3

E26

B/3

: Front combination lamp RH (Without
daytime light system)

B2

E66

B/3

: Front combination lamp LH (Headlamp
aiming motor)

G2

E27

B/2

: Front combination lamp LH (Without
daytime light system)

A5

E68

GR/2

: Front combination lamp RH (With daytime
light system)

A2

E28

B/2

: Front combination lamp RH (Without
daytime light system)

E5

E69

GR/2

: Front combination lamp LH (With daytime
light system)

F4

E29

GR/3

: Front combination lamp LH (Without
daytime light system)

F5

E70

BR/3

: Intelligent Key warning buzzer

B3

E30

GR/3

: Front combination lamp RH (Without
daytime light system)

A3

E73

B/3

: Front combination lamp RH (With daytime
light system)

E3

E31

GR/4

: Cooling fan motor

G3

E74

B/3

: Front combination lamp LH (With daytime
light system)

E4

E32

W/2

: Cooling fan motor

F4

E75

GR/2

: Front combination lamp LH (With daytime
light system)

B2

E33

B/38

: ABS actuator and electric unit (Control
unit)

C3

E76

GR/2

: Front combination lamp RH (With daytime
light system)

E2

E39

W/3

: Horn relay

A3

E77

B/2

: Front combination lamp RH (With daytime
light system)

E2

E40

B/2

: Brake fluid level switch

G2

E78

B/2

: Front combination lamp LH (With daytime
light system)

Revision: April 2013

PG-44

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (PASSENGER COMPARTMENT)
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA0164ZZ

A3

E7

A4

E11

D4

E12

C3

E13

B3

E14

SMJ

: To M69

C3

B/2

: To M78

D2

E48

W/4

: Clutch position switch

B/6

: Accelerator pedal position sensor

C3

E57

B/2

: Stop lamp switch (With M/T)

W/4

: Stop lamp switch (With CVT)

B2

E58

L/4

: Front fog lamp relay

L/12

: Joint connector-E03

A3

E59

—

: Body ground

Revision: April 2013

PG-45

E36

BR/2

: Brake pedal position switch

2014 Note

P

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A4

E21

GR/16

: To B12

A2

E60

—

: Body ground

B2

E22

W/22

: Joint connector–E02

B3

E61

—

: Body ground

B3

E23

B/2

: EPS control unit

B1

E67

L/4

: Daytime light relay

C2

E34

BR/2

: Clutch interlock switch

ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS

AAMIA0165ZZ

Revision: April 2013

PG-46

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
B3

F1

B/3

: Generator

D3

F29

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 3 (Rear)

B3

F2

—

: Generator

D3

F30

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 4 (Rear)

B5

F3

B/1

: A/C compressor

C1

F31

B/6

: Mass air flow sensor

B4

F4

—

: Generator

E1

F32

GR/2

: Exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve

C4

F5

—

: Engine ground

F1

F33

W/6

: To E19

E2

F6

GR/2

: Engine coolant temperature sensor

B1

F34

GR/3

: Ignition coil No. 1 (With power
transistor)

D1

F7

B/6

: Electric throttle control actuator

C1

F35

GR/3

: Ignition coil No. 2 (With power
transistor)

E1

F8

W/24

: To E8

C1

F36

GR/3

: Ignition coil No. 3 (With power
transistor)

G2

F10

GR/32

: ECM

D2

F37

GR/3

: Ignition coil No. 4 (With power
transistor)

G1

F11

BR/48

: ECM

C4

F38

B/3

: Engine oil pressure sensor

D2

F12

BR/4

: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1

G3

F39

—

: Fusible link box (Battery)

C3

F14

B/2

: Knock sensor

G3

F40

—

: Fusible link box (Battery)

E2

F15

B/3

: Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

G4

F41

B/3

: Output speed sensor

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

D4

F16

—

: Engine ground

F2

F42

W/12

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

B3

F17

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 1 (Front)

F2

F43

W/12

: IPDM E/R (Intelligent power distribution
module engine room)

C3

F18

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 2 (Front)

F2

F44

B/48

: TCM (Transmission control module)

C3

F19

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 3 (Front)

F4

F46

GR/22

: CVT unit

D3

F20

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 4 (Front)

G4

F48

B/3

: Secondary speed sensor

D2

F21

B/3

: Intake camshaft position sensor

G4

F50

B/3

: Primary speed sensor

C1

F22

G/2

: EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve

F3

F52

B/10

: Transmission range switch

B3

F23

G/2

: Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve

B3

F53

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 1 (Rear)

E4

F24

G/3

: Park/neutral position (PNP) switch

C3

F54

B/2

: Fuel injector No. 2 (Rear)

C4

F25

GR/2

: Engine oil temperature sensor

G1

F55

GR/12

: To E55

C3

F26

W/2

: Condenser

D2

F56

B/3

: Exhaust camshaft position sensor

D3

F27

—

: Starter motor

D3

F59

—

: Engine ground

D4

F28

—

: Starter motor

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-47

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BODY HARNESS

AAMIA0166ZZ

G2

B1

W/24

: To M29

E1

B24

W/24

: To M16

F4

B4

W/10

: To D201

A3

B25

W/6

: Rear combination lamp LH

C2

B6

W/4

: Rear door switch LH

C4

B27

W/6

: Rear combination lamp RH

D4

B7

—

: Body ground

E1

B28

W/2

: To M11

D2

B8

W/4

: Front door switch LH

G2

B29

W/16

: To M12

Revision: April 2013

PG-48

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
E2

B9

Y/22

: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

D5

B33

W/32

: Bluetooth® control unit

E3

B11

W/10

: To D301

C5

B34

W/8

: Bluetooth® control unit

E1

B12

GR/16

: To E21

C4

B35

B/2

: Rear wheel sensor RH

E3

B13

W/3

: Seat belt buckle switch LH

F2

B37

Y/22

: Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

C2

B14

Y/2

: Front LH seat belt pre–tensioner

F4

B39

Y/2

: Front RH seat belt pre–tensioner

F3

B16

W/4

: Front door switch RH

B3

B42

B/1

: Condenser

E4

B17

W/4

: Rear door switch RH

D3

B44

GR/5

: Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump

B3

B18

B/2

: High–mounted stop lamp

C4

B48

B/2

: Inside key antenna (Trunk room)

A3

B19

—

: Body ground

B5

B49

B/2

: Outside key antenna (Rear bumper)

D4

B21

W/4

: Cargo lamp

B3

B52

W/4

: To D504

C3

B22

GR/2

: Rear wheel sensor LH

B4

B53

W/8

: To D503

F1

B23

W/16

: To M15

A4

B85

—

: Body ground

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-49

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ROOM LAMP HARNESS

AAMIA0167ZZ

D5

R1

W/8

: To M1

E1

R7

W/3

: Interior room lamp

C2

R2

W/6

: Map lamp

D2

R15

W/4

: Microphone

Revision: April 2013

PG-50

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
FRONT DOOR LH HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AAMIA0168ZZ

D1

W/12

: To M9

D9

B/2

: Front power window motor LH

D4

W/12

: Door mirror LH

D12

W/2

: Front door speaker LH

D6

GR/2

: Front outside handle LH (Outside key
antenna)

D14

GR/6

: Front door lock assembly LH

D7

W/16

: Main power window and door lock/unlock
switch

D16

W/24

: To M93

D8

W/3

: Main power window and door lock/unlock
switch

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-51

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
FRONT DOOR RH HARNESS

AAMIA0169ZZ

D104

B/2

: Front power window motor RH

D112

W/2

: Front door speaker RH

D105

W/12

: Power window and door lock/unlock switch
RH

D113

GR/2

: Front outside handle RH (Request switch)

D106

GR/2

: Front outside handle RH (Outside key
antenna)

D114

GR/6

: Front door lock actuator RH

D107

W/12

: Door mirror RH

D116

W/12

: To M92

Revision: April 2013

PG-52

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
REAR DOOR LH HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AAMIA0170ZZ

D201

W/10

: To B4

D205

GR/6

: Rear door lock actuator LH

D203

W/8

: Rear power window switch LH

D207

W/2

: Rear door speaker LH

D204

B/2

: Rear power window motor LH

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-53

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
REAR DOOR RH HARNESS

AAMIA0171ZZ

D301

W/10

: To B11

D305

GR/6

: Rear door lock actuator RH

D303

W/8

: Rear power window switch RH

D307

W/2

: Rear door speaker RH

D304

B/2

: Rear power window motor RH

Revision: April 2013

PG-54

2014 Note

HARNESS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BACK DOOR HARNESS
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA0172ZZ

D3

D501

B/6

: Rear view camera

C3

D506

BR/2

: Back door request switch

D3

D502

W/4

: Rear wiper motor

D3

D507

BR/2

: License plate lamp LH

E3

D503

W/8

: To B53

C4

D508

BR/2

: License plate lamp RH

E4

D504

W/4

: To B52

D5

D509

W/3

: Back door switch

D5

D505

W/2

: Back door lock actuator

Revision: April 2013

PG-55

2014 Note

P

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location

INFOID:0000000009707859

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

AAMIA1758GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-56

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1759GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-57

2014 Note

P

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAMIA1760GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-58

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O
AAMIA1761GB

Revision: April 2013

PG-59

2014 Note

P

BATTERY
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery

INFOID:0000000009643749

CAUTION:
• If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
• After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
• Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.

METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery.

• The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept
clean and dry.
• The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
• At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and
“maintenance-free”.

MEL040F

• When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of
time, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. (If
the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)

ELA0349D

Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009643750

BATTERY DIAGNOSIS WITH EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI
To diagnose and confirm the condition of the battery, use the following special service tools:
• EXP-800 NI Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer
• GR8-1200 NI Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station
NOTE:
Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for proper battery diagnosis procedures.

BATTERY DIAGNOSIS WITHOUT EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI
Checking Electrolyte Level

WARNING:
Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, never touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Failure to do this may cause personal injury or damage to clothing or the painted surfaces.

Revision: April 2013

PG-60

2014 Note

BATTERY
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
• Add distilled water up to the MAX level.

A

B

C
MEL043F

D
SULFATION

• A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulfation on the cell plates.
• To determine if a battery has been “sulfated”, note its voltage
and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulfated batteries.
• A sulfated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.

E

F

G
PKIA2353E

Specific Gravity Check
NOTE:
Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent
over-discharge.
1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature.

H

I

J

K

L
MEL042FA

Hydrometer Temperature Correction

Battery electrolyte temperature [°C (°F)]

Add to specific gravity reading

71 (160)

0.032

66 (150)

0.028

60 (140)

0.024

54 (130)

0.020

49 (120)

0.016

43 (110)

0.012

38 (100)

0.008

32 (90)

0.004

27 (80)

0

21 (70)

−0.004

16 (60)

−0.008

10 (50)

−0.012

Revision: April 2013

PG-61

PG

N

O

P

2014 Note

BATTERY
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Battery electrolyte temperature [°C (°F)]

Add to specific gravity reading

4 (40)

−0.016

−1 (30)

−0.020

−7 (20)

−0.024

−12 (10)

−0.028

−18 (0)

−0.032

Corrected specific gravity

Approximate charge condition

1.260 — 1.280

Fully charged

1.230 — 1.250

3/4 charged

1.200 — 1.220

1/2 charged

1.170 — 1.190

1/4 charged

1.140 — 1.160

Almost discharged

1.110 — 1.130

Completely discharged

Charging The Battery
CAUTION:
• Never “quick charge” a fully discharged battery.
• Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
• When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Never turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
• If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55 °C (131 °F), stop charging. Always charge battery at
a temperature below 55 °C (131 °F).
Charging Rates (Standard Charge)

Approximate charge condition

Charge current (A)

Charge time (h)

Fully charged

2

3/4 charged

2.5

1/2 charged
1/4 charged

7

5
7.5

Almost discharged

9

Completely discharged

10

Charging Rates (Quick Charge)

Approximate charge condition

Charge current (A)

Charge time (h)

Fully charged

—

—

3/4 charged

16

1/2 charged
1/4 charged

33

0.5

Almost discharged
Completely discharged

—

—

NOTE:
The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps
indicated above refer to initial charge rate.
• If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced.

Revision: April 2013

PG-62

2014 Note

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement

A

B

INFOID:0000000009643751

Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection

System
Engine Control System
Audio, Visual and Navigation System

Item
Idle Air Volume Learning

Reference

C

EC-115

Audio (Radio Preset)

Refer to Owner’s Manual.

Navigation System

Refer to Owner’s Manual.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-63

2014 Note

FUSE INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >

FUSE INSPECTION
How To Check

INFOID:0000000009725276

• If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse.
• Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified
rating.
• Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
• Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not
used for a long period of time.

CEL083

EXTENDED STORAGE FUSE SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
The following switch may be mounted on the fuse block (Junction Box) for transportation and storage.

JSMIA0793ZZ

1.

Extended storage fuse switch

A.

Type A

B.

Type B

C.

Type C

• Remove the extended storage fuse switch when replacing the fuse of extended storage fuse switch.
• Remove the extended storage fuse switch if it causes the interference when the fuse or the other fuses is
checked.
How To Extended Storage Fuse Switch ON/OFF
CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF when operating the extended storage fuse switch.
• Under normal conditions, keep the extended storage fuse switch in ON state. Never operate the
extended storage fuse switch except when necessary.

Revision: April 2013

PG-64

2014 Note

FUSE INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Type A
A

B

C

D

E
JSMIA0472ZZ

— To turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF, pull it up in (A) direction as shown in the figure.
— To turn the extended storage fuse switch ON, press it in (B) direction as shown in the figure.
• Type B

F

G

H

I

J

JSMIA0473ZZ

— To turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF, hold (A) of the switch and pull up in (B) direction as shown in
the figure.
— To turn the extended storage fuse switch ON, press it in (C) direction as shown in the figure.
• Type C

K

L

PG

N

O

P
JSMIA0794ZZ

— To turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF, pull it up in (A) direction as shown in the figure.
— To turn the extended storage fuse switch ON, press it in (B) direction as shown in the figure.
How To Remove Extended Storage Fuse Switch
Type A

Revision: April 2013

PG-65

2014 Note

FUSE INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF.
3. Press pawl (A) and tilt to disengage the extended storage fuse
switch. Press pawl (B) and tilt to remove the extended storage
fuse switch.

JSMIA0476ZZ

NOTE:
• Extended storage fuse switch and fuse are removed together. Remove fuse from extended storage fuse
switch, if necessary.
• Extended storage fuse switch is for transportation and storage. Reinstallation is not required after the
removal.
Type B

1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF.
Hold (A) and pull up the extended storage fuse switch hard in
(B) direction.

JSMIA0477ZZ

NOTE:
• Extended storage fuse switch and fuse may be removed together. Remove fuse from extended storage
fuse switch, if necessary.
• Extended storage fuse switch is for transportation and storage. Reinstallation is not required after the
removal.
Type C

1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Turn the extended storage fuse switch OFF.
Hold (A) and pull up the extended storage fuse switch hard in
(B) direction.

JSMIA0795ZZ

NOTE:
• Extended storage fuse switch and fuse are removed together. Remove fuse from extended storage fuse
switch, if necessary.
Revision: April 2013

PG-66

2014 Note

FUSE INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Extended storage fuse switch is for transportation and storage. Reinstallation is not required after the
removal.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PG

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PG-67

2014 Note

FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >

FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION
How To Check

INFOID:0000000009725277

A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by
feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
1

:Fusible link

CAUTION:
• If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In
such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunction.
• Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or
rubber parts.

Revision: April 2013

PG-68

JPMIA1291ZZ

2014 Note

BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

BATTERY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015555

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

AWGIA0296ZZ

1.

Battery cover

2.

Battery

4.

Battery tray

5.

Battery tray bracket

3.

Removal and Installation (Battery)

Battery wedge bracket
Front

K
INFOID:0000000009015556

CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal first.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

N

O

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the battery if it has been dropped or sustained and impact.
To install the battery, carefully read the following instructions:
• To prevent damage to the parts, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first.
• After connecting battery cables, to securely supply battery voltage, ensure that they are tightly
clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
• To securely supply battery voltage, check battery terminal for poor connection caused by corrosion.
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to PG-63, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement».

PG-69

L

PG

Remove the air duct inlet. Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal and set aside.
Disconnect the battery cable from the positive terminal and set aside.
Remove the remove the battery wedge bracket.
Remove the battery cover and the battery.

Revision: April 2013

J

2014 Note

P

BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)

INFOID:0000000009643002

CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal first.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove battery. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove the battery bracket. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
Remove the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the TCM and remove the TCM bracket. Refer toTM-235,
«Exploded View».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the battery tray and battery tray bracket.
Remove the nuts and bolts and remove the battery tray bracket and battery tray. Refer to PG-69,
«Exploded View».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace electrical components as necessary, if any have been dropped or sustained and impact.
To install the battery, carefully read the following instructions:
• To prevent damage to the parts, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first.
• After connecting battery cables, to securely supply battery voltage, ensure that they are tightly
clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
• To securely supply battery voltage, check battery terminal for poor connection caused by corrosion.
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to PG-63, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement».

Revision: April 2013

PG-70

2014 Note

BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

BATTERY TERMINAL WITH FUSIBLE LINK

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015557

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
AWGIA0297ZZ

1.

Battery

2.

Fusible link box (battery)

3.

J

Terminal connector

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015558

CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal first.

K

L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal and set aside. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
PG
Disconnect the battery cable with the fusible link box (battery) from positive terminal.
Open cover of the fusible link box (battery).
Remove harness nut from the fusible link box (battery) and separate the fusible link box (battery) from terN
minal connector.
Disconnect harness connectors and remove the fusible link box (battery).

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Replace the fusible link box (battery) if it has been dropped or sustained and impact.
To install the battery, carefully read the following instructions:
• To prevent damage to the parts, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first.
• After connecting battery cables, to securely supply battery voltage, ensure that they are tightly
clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
• To securely supply battery voltage, check battery terminal for poor connection caused by corrosion.
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to PG-63, «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Special Repair Requirement».
Revision: April 2013

PG-71

2014 Note

O

P

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery

INFOID:0000000009015560

Type
5 hour rate minimum
Cold cranking current A (For reference value)

Q-85
[V – Ah]
A

12 – 36
470

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Revision: April 2013

PG-72

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

PWC

POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 12

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ……………………….. 12

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 3

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..12

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 19

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….19

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 21

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 5
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 5
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 5
Power Window Main Switch ……………………………….. 6
Power Window Switch ……………………………………….. 6
Power Window Motor ………………………………………… 6

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 7
System Diagram ……………………………………………….. 7
System Description …………………………………………… 7

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….. 8
COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………….. 8
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ………………………………………………. 8
RETAINED PWR ………………………………………………… 8
RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM RETAINED PWR) …………………………………………….. 9

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 19

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ……………………….21
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure ……………………………………………………….21

PWC

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) ………………………………………………………..22
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………..22

L

M

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ………………………23
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure ……………………………………………………….23

N

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) …………………………………………. 25

O

BCM …………………………………………………………..10

Revision: April 2013

I

J

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ……………… 27

Reference Value …………………………………………….. 11

H

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………………21
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………………………………….21

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 10

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ………………..11

G

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 21

Component Function Check ………………………………25
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..25
Component Inspection ………………………………………26

List of ECU Reference …………………………………….. 10

F

Component Function Check ………………………………27
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..27
Component Inspection ………………………………………28

POWER WINDOW MOTOR ………………………

PWC-1

2014 Note

P

DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………… 29
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ……… 29
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ……………….. 29

WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure …………………… 38

PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………… 30
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
… 30
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ……….. 30

WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH IS
OPERATED ……………………………………………………… 38
WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH IS
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure …………………… 38

REAR LH …………………………………………………………. 31
REAR LH : Component Function Check ……………. 31
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ………………………. 31

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED ………………………………………………………….. 38
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………….. 39

REAR RH ………………………………………………………… 32
REAR RH : Component Function Check ……………. 32
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………… 32

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 34
POWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE
WITH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ……… 34
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 34

DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT
OPERATE …………………………………………………. 35
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 35

FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ………………………. 36
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED ……………………………………………………… 36
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ………………….. 36
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED ………………………….. 36
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure ……………………………………………………… 36

REAR RH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE …………………………………………. 40
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH ARE
OPERATED ……………………………………………………… 40
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure …………………… 40
WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH IS
OPERATED ……………………………………………………… 40
WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH IS
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure …………………… 40
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED ………………………………………………………….. 40
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………….. 41

POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
… 42
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 42

POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES
NOT FUNCTION ………………………………………… 43
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 43

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED ………………………………………………………….. 36
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………….. 37

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 44

REAR LH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE …………………………………………. 38

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 44

WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH ARE
OPERATED ……………………………………………………… 38

MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH ……………………………………… 44
POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH …………………………………….. 45
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 45

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH ……………… 46
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 46

Revision: April 2013

PWC-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009567634

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009567635

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component PWC
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
L
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
M
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
N
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
O
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009567636

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Revision: April 2013

PWC-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009015827

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N
ALKIA3202ZZ

A.

View with LH front door finisher removed

No.

B.

View with LH rear door finisher removed

Component parts

O

Function

1.

BCM

• Supplies power supply to power window switch.
• Controls retained power.
• Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location»
for detailed installation location.

2.

Power window main switch

Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Main Switch».

3.

Front power window motor (driver side)

Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Motor».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-5

2014 Note

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component parts

Function

4.

Front door switch (driver side)

• Inputs door open/close condition to BCM.
• Refer to DLK-16, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch» for detailed installation location.

5.

Rear power window switch LH

Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Switch».

6.

Rear power window motor LH

Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Switch».

Power Window Main Switch

INFOID:0000000009578748

• Power window main switch controls all power windows.
• Power window main switch integrates UP/DOWN switch, power
window lock switch, and door lock/unlock switch.
• Power window main switch controls the power window lock
function.

ALKIA3203ZZ

Power Window Switch

INFOID:0000000009578749

• Each power window switch transmits UP/DOWN signal to each
motor.
• Each power window switch transmits UP/DOWN signal from power
window main switch to each motor.

ALKIA3204ZZ

Power Window Motor

INFOID:0000000009578750

• Starts operation according to signals from power window main
switch (front driver side).
• Transmits front power window motor (driver side) rotation as a
pulse signal to power window main switch.
• Excepting power window motor for driver door, starts operation
according to signals from power window main switch or each
power window switches.

JMKIA6528ZZ

Revision: April 2013

PWC-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009578780

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ALKIA2285GB

System Description

I

INFOID:0000000009578781

J

BASIC OPERATION
•
•
•
•

Power window system is activated by power window switch when ignition switch turns ON.
Power window main switch opens/closes all door glass.
PWC
Front and rear power window switch opens/closes the corresponding door glass.
AUTO DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch is depressed to the second
detent.
L
• Power window lock switch can lock all power windows other than driver seat.

POWER WINDOW AUTO-OPERATION (FRONT DRIVER SIDE)
AUTO DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch is depressed to the second
detent.

M

POWER WINDOW LOCK
Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits
each power window switch operation except the power window main switch.

N

RETAINED POWER OPERATION
• Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to operate for an additional 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF.

O

RETAINED ACCESSORY POWER CANCEL CONDITIONS:
• Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF)→OPEN (door switch ON).
• When ignition switch is ON again.
• When timer expires. (45 seconds)

Revision: April 2013

PWC-7

P

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009578818

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

RETAINED PWR

Revision: April 2013

PWC-8

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM — RETAINED PWR)

INFOID:0000000009578834

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

B

Description

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-9

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009015829

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»
BCS-44, «Fail-safe»

BCM

BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

PWC-10

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

A

Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009015830

TERMINAL LAYOUT

B

C

D

JMKIA5358ZZ

E

PHYSICAL VALUES
F

Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description
Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

+

—

Signal name

Input/
Output

1
(BR)

Ground

Rear power window motor LH
UP signal

Output

When the rear LH switch
(power window main switch)
is pulled UP.

Battery Voltage

3
(G)

Ground

Rear power window motor LH
DOWN signal

Output

When the rear LH switch
(power window main switch)
is pressed DOWN.

Battery Voltage

5
(Y)

Ground

Rear power window motor RH
DOWN signal

Output

When the rear RH switch
(power window main switch)
is pressed DOWN.

Battery Voltage

Output

When the rear RH switch
(power window main switch)
is pulled UP.

Battery Voltage

Output

When the front LH switch
(power window main switch)
is pulled UP.

Battery Voltage

Ignition switch ON

Battery Voltage

Other than above

0

7
(V)

G

H

I

J

Ground

Rear power window motor RH
UP signal

8
(R)

Ground

Front power window motor
(driver side) UP signal

10
(L)

Ground

Ignition switch power supply

11
(LG)

Ground

Front power window motor
(driver side) DOWN
signal

Output

When the front LH switch
(power window main switch)
is pressed DOWN.

Battery Voltage

12
(SB)

Ground

Front power window motor
(passenger side) DOWN signal

Output

When the front RH switch
(power window main switch)
is pressed DOWN.

Battery Voltage

N

16
(W)

Ground

Front power window motor
(passenger side) UP signal

Output

When the front RH switch
(power window main switch)
is pulled UP.

Battery Voltage

O

17
(B)

Ground

Ground

—

—

0

Revision: April 2013

Input

PWC-11

PWC

L

M

P

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009015832

AAKWA0622GB

Revision: April 2013

PWC-12

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1252GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-13

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1253GB

Revision: April 2013

PWC-14

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1254GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-15

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1255GB

Revision: April 2013

PWC-16

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1256GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-17

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1257GB

Revision: April 2013

PWC-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009578841

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P
ALKIA1982GB

DETAILED FLOW

1. OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
Revision: April 2013

PWC-19

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 2.

2. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
>> GO TO 3.

3. IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Use Symptom diagnosis from the symptom inspection result in step 2 and then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 4.

4. PERFORM THE COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OF THE OF THE APPLICABLE SYSTEM
Perform the diagnosis with Component diagnosis of the applicable system.
>> GO TO 5.

5. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 6.

6. FINAL CHECK

Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2.
Are the malfunctions corrected?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-20

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM

B

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578884

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».
D

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.

E
Terminal No.

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.
12 (10A)

Battery power supply

70

F

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

G

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

H

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.

I

BCM
Connector

Terminal

Ground

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

57

M99

70

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

PWC

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

L

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

O

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578867

P

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: April 2013

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

1.

J

PWC-21

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector

Terminal

D7

10

(-)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Ground

Ignition switch

ON

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
BCM

4.

Power window main switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M99

68

D7

10

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

68

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector

Terminal

D8

17

Ground

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578868

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window switch RH harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-22

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
(-)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Front power window switch RH
Connector

Terminal

D105

8

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

A

B

C

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch RH harness connector.

D

E
BCM

4.

Front power window switch RH

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M99

68

D105

8

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
G

BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

68

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

H

I

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578869

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

J

PWC

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

F

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window switch harness connector and ground.

M

(+)
Rear power window switch
Connector

(-)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

N

Ground

Battery voltage

O

Terminal

LH

D203

RH

D303

4

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

P

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear power window switch harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-23

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM

4.

Rear power window switch

Connector

Terminal

M99

68

Connector

Terminal

LH

D203

RH

D303

Continuity

4

Yes

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

68

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-24

2014 Note

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578870

1. CHECK FUNCTION

B

Check front power window motor RH operation with front power window switch RH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578871

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

E

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window switch RH harness connector and ground.

G

(+)
Front power window switch RH
Connector

(-)

D

Condition

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

H

0

I

Terminal
NEUTRAL

11
D105

Ground
12

Power window main
switch
(front RH)

UP

Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
DOWN

0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

J

PWC

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window switch
RH harness connector.
Power window main switch
Connector

Connector

12

D7

4.

Front power window switch RH

Terminal

Terminal

N
Yes

12

O

Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
D7

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

12

No

16

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: April 2013

PWC-25

M

Continuity

11

D105

16

L

2014 Note

P

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check front power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Switch».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check Intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace front power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-45, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009578872

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch RH connector.
Check front power window switch RH terminals under the following conditions.
Front power window switch RH

Condition

Terminal
6

8

7

12

6

11

7

12

6

11

7

8

Continuity

UP

NEUTRAL

Yes

DOWN

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace front power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-45, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-26

2014 Note

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578873

1. CHECK FUNCTION

B

Check rear power window motor operation with rear power window switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-31, «REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure».

C

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578874

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

E

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window switch harness connector and ground.

G

(+)
Rear power window switch
Connector

(-)

Condition

NEUTRAL
Power window main
switch
(rear LH)

D203
8

7

H

0

I

8

Battery voltage

NEUTRAL

0
Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
Power window main
switch
(rear RH)

D303

DOWN

UP

Ground

RH

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Terminal
7

LH

DOWN
NEUTRAL
UP

Battery voltage

L

Power window main switch

D7

3
5

Connector
LH

Terminal
D203

RH

D303

Continuity

8
7
7

P
Yes

8

Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-27

N

O

Rear power window switch

Terminal

7

4.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and rear power window switch
harness connector.

1

PWC

0

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT

Connector

J

0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
3.

D

2014 Note

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Power window main switch
Connector

Continuity

Terminal
1

Ground

3

D7

No

5
7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

Check rear power window switch.
Refer to PWC-31, «REAR LH : Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace rear power window switch. Refer to PWC-46, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009578875

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch connector.
Check rear power window switch terminals under the following conditions.
Rear power window switch

Condition

Terminal
4

6

8

5

8

5

7

6

4

5

7

6

Continuity

UP

NEUTRAL

Yes

DOWN

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace rear power window switch. Refer to PWC-46, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-28

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

POWER WINDOW MOTOR

A

DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578876

1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor LH operation with power window main switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-31, «REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure».

B

C

D

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578877

E

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».
F

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor LH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor LH harness connector and ground.

G

H

(+)
Front power window motor LH
Connector

(-)

Condition

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Terminal

I
NEUTRAL

1
D9

Ground

Power window main
switch

2

DOWN

0
Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
UP

0

J

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

PWC

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT

L

1.
2.
3.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
LH harness connector.
Power window main switch
Connector

Terminal

Connector

8

D7

4.

Front power window motor LH
Terminal
2

D9

11

Continuity

Yes

1

N

O

Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
P

Power window main switch
Connector
D7

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

8

No

11

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

PWC-29

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

PASSENGER SIDE

PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578878

1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or front power window switch
RH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-30, «PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure».

PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578879

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window motor RH
Connector

(-)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
NEUTRAL

1
D104

Ground

Front power window
switch RH

2

DOWN

0
Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
UP

0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor RH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch RH connector.
Check continuity between front power window switch RH harness connector and front power window
motor RH harness connector.
Front power window switch RH
Connector

Terminal

Connector

6

D105

4.

Front power window motor RH
Terminal
1

D104

7

Continuity

Yes

2

Check continuity between front power window switch RH harness connector and ground.
Front power window switch RH
Connector
D105

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

6

No

7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-45, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

PWC-30

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

REAR LH

A

REAR LH : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578880

B

1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check rear power window motor LH operation with power window main switch or rear power window switch
LH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-31, «REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure».

REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure

C

D

INFOID:0000000009578881

E

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».
F

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window motor LH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window motor LH harness connector and ground.

G

H
(+)
Rear power window motor LH
Connector

(-)

Condition

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Terminal
NEUTRAL

1
D204

Ground

Rear power window switch LH

2

UP

0
Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
DOWN

Battery voltage

PWC

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT

Connector

Rear power window motor LH

Terminal

Connector

6

D203

4.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch LH connector.
Check continuity between rear power window switch LH harness connector and rear power window motor
LH harness connector.
Rear power window switch LH

Terminal
2

D204

5

J

0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear power window motor LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
1.
2.
3.

I

1

M

N
Continuity

Yes

O

Check continuity between rear power window switch LH connector and ground.
P

Rear power window switch LH
Connector
D203

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

6

No

5

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-46, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

PWC-31

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

REAR RH

REAR RH : Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578882

1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check rear power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or rear power window switch
RH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-32, «REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure».

REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578883

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to PWC-12, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window motor RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear power window motor RH
Connector

(-)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal
NEUTRAL

1
D304

Rear power window
switch RH

Ground
2

UP

0
Battery voltage

NEUTRAL
DOWN

0
Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear power window motor RH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear power window switch RH connector.
Check continuity between rear power window switch RH harness connector and rear power window motor
RH harness connector.
Rear power window switch RH
Connector

Terminal

Connector

6

D303

4.

Rear power window motor RH

2

D304

5

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

1

Check continuity between rear power window switch RH harness connector and ground.
Rear power window switch RH
Connector
D303

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

6

No

5

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-46, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

PWC-32

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-33

2014 Note

POWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE WITH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
POWER WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE WITH POWER WINDOW MAIN
SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578852

1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BCS-61, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-21, «POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-34

2014 Note

DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009578853

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE)

B

Check front power window motor (driver side).
Refer to PWC-29, «DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

C

2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

D

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-35

2014 Note

FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578854

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-22, «FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE)

Check front power window motor (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-30, «PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED :
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578855

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check front power window switch (passenger side) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)

Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to PWC-44, «Removal and Installation».

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: April 2013

PWC-36

2014 Note

FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578856

A

1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
B

Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

C

2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

D

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-37

2014 Note

REAR LH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

REAR LH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND REAR POWER WINDOW
SWITCH LH ARE OPERATED
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND REAR POWER WINDOW
SWITCH LH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578857

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check rear power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-23, «REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH

Check rear power window motor LH.
Refer to PWC-31, «REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH IS OPERATED
WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578858

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check rear power window switch LH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-23, «REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH

Check rear power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: April 2013

PWC-38

2014 Note

REAR LH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578859

A

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
B

Check rear power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

C

2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

D

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-39

2014 Note

REAR RH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

REAR RH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND REAR POWER WINDOW
SWITCH RH ARE OPERATED
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND REAR POWER WINDOW
SWITCH RH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578860

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check rear power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH

Check rear power window motor RH.
Refer to PWC-32, «REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH IS OPERATED
WHEN REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578861

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check rear power window switch RH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-23, «REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH

Check rear power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

3.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: April 2013

PWC-40

2014 Note

REAR RH SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000009578862

A

1.CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
B

Check rear power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

C

2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

D

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-41

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
PROPERLY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578863

1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch.
Refer to PWC-25, «Component Function Check».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.REPLACE BCM

• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-42

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009578864

1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

B

• Replace power window main switch.
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-43

2014 Note

MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567637

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove main power window and door lock/unlock switch finisher door handle pull escutcheon.
Remove screw (A) from main power window and door lock/
unlock switch finisher.
Remove main power window and door lock/unlock switch finisher (1) using a suitable tool (B).
: Pawl

AWKIA2536ZZ

4.
5.

Disconnect the harness connectors from the main power window and door lock/unlock switch.
Release pawls and remove main power window and door lock/
unlock switch (1) from main power window and door lock/unlock
switch finisher assembly (2) using a suitable tool.
: Pawl
CAUTION:
Do not bend back the pawls on the switch finisher too far or
damage may occur.

AWKIA2506ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is removed or replaced, it is necessary to perform
the initialization procedure. Refer to PWC-19, «Work Flow».

Revision: April 2013

PWC-44

2014 Note

POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH
Removal and Installation

A
INFOID:0000000009567638

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) finisher door handle pull escutcheon.
Remove screw (B) from power window and door lock/unlock
switch (RH) finisher.
Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) finisher (1) using a suitable tool (A).
: Pawl

C

D

E

AWKIA2505ZZ

4.
5.

Disconnect the harness connector from the power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH).
Release pawls and remove power window and door lock/unlock
switch (1) from power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH)
finisher (2) using a suitable tool.
: Pawl
CAUTION:
Do not bend back the pawls on the switch finisher too far or
damage may occur.

F

G

H

I
AWKIA2507ZZ

J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

PWC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWC-45

2014 Note

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009567639

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove rear power window switch door handle pull escutcheon.
Remove screw (A) from rear power window switch finisher.
Remove rear power window switch finisher (1) using a suitable
tool (B).
: Pawl

AWKIA2510ZZ

4.
5.

Disconnect the harness connector from the rear power window switch.
Release pawls and remove rear power window switch (1) from
rear power window switch finisher (2) using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not bend back the pawls on the switch finisher too far or
damage may occur.

AWKIA2511ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

PWC-46

2014 Note

ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL

SECTION

PWO

POWER OUTLET

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

POWER SOCKET ………………………………………. 4
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………… 4

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 6

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………. 7

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 4

F

G

CONSOLE POWER SOCKET ……………………… 6
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 6

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………… 7
Power Socket ………………………………………………….. 7

H

I

J

K

L

PWO

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWO-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009578837

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009642978

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

PWO-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009578838

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-42059)
Power Socket Removal Tool

Removing power sockets

C

D

E
AWMIA1148GB

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PWO

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWO-3

2014 Note

POWER SOCKET
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009015563

AAMWA0757GB

Revision: April 2013

PWO-4

2014 Note

POWER SOCKET
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PWO

N

O
AAMIA1654GB

P

Revision: April 2013

PWO-5

2014 Note

CONSOLE POWER SOCKET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
CONSOLE POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009578839

REMOVAL
NOTE:
If unable to use the tool because of power socket location or access to the harness connector, then further
removal of interior components may be required. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
1. Insert one side of Tool (A) into one of the square holes inside the
power socket.
Tool number:
2.
3.

—

(J-42059)

Lift up the handle of the Tool as shown ( ) until the other side
snaps into the other square hole in the power socket.
Pull the power socket straight out with the Tool.

AWMIA1182GB

4.
5.

Disconnect the harness connector from the power socket.
Remove the ring from the power socket while pressing the pawls
with a suitable tool.

WKIA1035E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Make sure to align the tabs with the square notched areas as shown
( ) during installation.

AWMIA1183GB

Revision: April 2013

PWO-6

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Power Socket

INFOID:0000000009578840

Rated voltage

DC 12 V

Maximum electric capacity

120 W or less (Total)

Maximum current

10 A or less (Total)

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

PWO

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

PWO-7

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SECTION

RAX

REAR AXLE

A

B

C

RAX

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ……………………. 5

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

REAR WHEEL HUB ……………………………………. 5

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precautions for Wheel Hub ………………………………… 2

Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 5

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

F

G

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 6
REAR WHEEL HUB ……………………………………. 6
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 6
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 6
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….. 7
Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 8

H

I

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 4

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 10

J

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 4

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 10

K

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 4

Wheel Bearing …………………………………………………10
Wheel Hub ………………………………………………………10

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RAX-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009499770

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precautions for Wheel Hub

INFOID:0000000009499771

Observe the following precautions when assembling wheel hub.
• Perform work in a location that is free from dust, dirt and debris.
• Use paper shop towels while performing repairs. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger
of lint adhering to parts.
• Do not drop any of the components such as the brake drum, wheel bearing, spindle, or wheel hub lock nut. If
any of these parts have been dropped, they must be replaced.
• Always check that the tools used to press-fit the wheel bearing to the brake drum have no wear and deformation. Damaged tools will not guarantee that pressure can be applied vertically and damage parts.

Revision: April 2013

RAX-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009499772

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

ST30720000
(
—
)
Drift

Installing hub cap
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia.

C

RAX

E
ZZA0701D

KV40104730
(
—
)
Drift

F

Installing wheel bearing
a: 53.7 mm (2.114 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
c: 15 mm (0.59 in).

G

H
ZZA1133D

ST33710000
(
—
)
Drift

Removing wheel bearing
a: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
b: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.

I

J
ZZA1234D

ST30032000
(
—
)
Drift

Installing sensor rotor
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.

K

L

M

ZZA0881D

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009499773

N
Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

O

P
PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

RAX-3

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009499774

RAX-5

RSU-4

WT-5

WT-4

BR-7

Wheel bearing damage

REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION

TIRE

ROAD WHEEL

BRAKE

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Shake

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Vibration

×

×

×

×

×

Shimmy

×

×

×

×

×

×

Shudder

×

×

×

×

×

Poor quality ride or handling

×

×

×

×

Reference page

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Symptom

—
Parts interference

Noise

RAX-6
Improper installation, looseness

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

×

×: Applicable

Revision: April 2013

RAX-4

2014 Note

REAR WHEEL HUB
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

REAR WHEEL HUB
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009499775

• Check the axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear, or damage.
• Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play as shown.

B

C

RAX

E

SMA525A

REAR WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION

F

• Move wheel in the axial direction by hand. Make sure the axial end play is within specification.
Axial end play

G

: Refer to RAX-10, «Wheel Bearing».

• Check that the wheel bearing operates smoothly.
• Replace the wheel bearing if the axial end play exceeds specification, or if the wheel bearing does not turn
smoothly. Refer to RAX-6, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
The wheel bearing does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted,
replace the wheel bearing.
• Growling noise is emitted from the wheel bearing during operation.
• Wheel bearing drags or turns roughly.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RAX-5

2014 Note

REAR WHEEL HUB
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REAR WHEEL HUB
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009499776

AWDIA1107ZZ

1.

Rear suspension beam

2.

Rear brake components

3.

Spindle

4.

Sensor rotor

5.

Snap ring

6.

Wheel bearing

7.

Wheel stud

8.

Brake drum

9.

Wheel hub lock nut

10. Hub cap

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009499777

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove hub cap from brake drum using a suitable tool.
Remove wheel hub lock nut and brake drum.
CAUTION:
• Do not depress brake pedal while rear drum is removed.
• Do not apply force to the brake drum to avoid damage to the wheel bearing. If the wheel bearing
inner race is separated due to force, replace the wheel bearing with a new one.
Remove spindle bolts. Separate back plate and spindle from rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
Do not remove rear brake components. Support the rear brake components using wire.
If required, remove the wheel studs from brake drum using a suitable press.
CAUTION:
• Do not hammer the wheel stud and avoid impact to the brake drum.
• Press the wheel stud straight out to avoid damage.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: April 2013

RAX-6

2014 Note

REAR WHEEL HUB
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
If required, position the wheel stud (1) to the brake drum. Place
Position the stud (1) to the brake drum. Place a washer (A) on the
opposite end of the stud and by use of a nut (B), tighten to press the
stud into the brake drum.
Wheel stud press-fit load

A

B

: Refer to RAX-10, «Wheel
Hub».

CAUTION:
• Check that no clearance exists between brake drum, and the
wheel stud after installation.
• Do not reuse wheel stud.

C

JPDIF0300ZZ

Insert brake drum in a straight line onto the spindle.
CAUTION:
• If the brake drum becomes stuck and must be pulled out, do not use tools. Replace the wheel bearing with a new one if the brake drum cannot be pulled out without use of tools.
• If the brake drum becomes stuck and the wheel bearing inner race is damaged, replace the wheel
bearing with a new one.
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damaged, replace wheel bearing with new one.
Using the Tool, install hub cap on brake drum as shown.

RAX

E

F

G

Tool number

: ST30720000 (

—

)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse hub cap.
• Do not reuse wheel hub lock nut.
• Tighten the wheel hub lock nut to the specified torque. Refer
to RAX-6, «Exploded View».

H

I
SDIA0766J

Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1.

J

INFOID:0000000009499778

K

Remove sensor rotor, using a suitable tool (A).
CAUTION:
Do not damage the brake drum.

L

M

N
JPDIG0097ZZ

2.

Remove snap ring (1).

O

P

JPDIG0092ZZ

Revision: April 2013

RAX-7

2014 Note

REAR WHEEL HUB
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove wheel bearing, using the Tool.
Tool number

: ST33710000 (

—

)

JPDIG0079ZZ

ASSEMBLY
1.

Install wheel bearing (1) to brake drum (2), using the Tool (A).
Tool number

: KV40104730 (

—

)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse wheel bearing.
• Do not apply lubricating oil to the press-fit surface of the
wheel hub bearing.
• Install wheel bearing with the seal rubber part (B) faced to
the brake drum side.
• Set brake drum and wheel bearing horizontally and insert
JPDIG0200ZZ
them vertically.
• The press-fit load must be applied to the wheel bearing
outer race and the brake drum.
• Do not apply press-fit load to the wheel bearing inner race, the seal (B) on the rubber surface
side, and the seal (C) on the metallic surface side. If a press-fit load is applied, the wheel bearing
must be replaced with a new one.
Wheel bearing
press-fit load
2.

3.

: Refer to RAX-10, «Wheel
Bearing»

Install snap ring to brake drum.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal.
• The snap ring must be installed evenly into the groove.
Install sensor rotor, using the Tool (A).
Tool number

: ST30032000 (

—

)

CAUTION:
Do not reuse sensor rotor.

JPDIG0191ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009499779

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the brake drum and spindle for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
• Check brake drum for wear, cracks, or any other damage. Replace if necessary.
• Check snap ring for wear or cracks. Replace if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.

Check wheel bearing rotating torque per the following instructions.

Revision: April 2013

RAX-8

2014 Note

REAR WHEEL HUB
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
NOTE:
The adequacy of turning torque can be judged from a measurement value by a suitable tool.
a. Check the contact surface of the brake drum and spindle for foreign matter. If there is any foreign matter,
clean the contact surface.
b. Check that the wheel hub lock nut is tightened to the specified torque.
c. Turn the brake drum 10 times or more both clockwise and counterclockwise for proper fit.
d. Set a suitable tool to the wheel nut and measure turning torque
at turning speeds of 8 to 12 rpm.
Wheel bearing rotating torque
2.

: Refer to RAX-10, «Wheel Bearing».

A

B

C

RAX

Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».

E

MDIA0060E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RAX-9

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing

INFOID:0000000009499780

Item

Standard

Axial end play

0.0 mm (0.00 in) or less

Rotating torque

1.71 N·m (0.17 kg-m, 15 in-lb) or less

Spring balance measurement

34.2 N (3.49 kg, 7.69 lb) or less

Wheel bearing press-fit load

44.1 — 53.9 kN (4,498.2 — 5,497.8 kg-f, 9,913.7 — 12,116.7 lb-f)

Wheel Hub

INFOID:0000000009499781

Item
Wheel stud press-fit load

Revision: April 2013

Standard
26.5 — 32.3 kN (2,703.0 — 3,294.6 kg-f, 5,957.2 — 7,261.0 lb-f)

RAX-10

2014 Note

SUSPENSION

SECTION

RSU

REAR SUSPENSION

A

B

C

D

RSU

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 8

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ………………………… 8

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Suspension …………………………………. 2

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 8
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 8
Inspection ……………………………………………………….. 9
Disposal ………………………………………………………….10

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

COIL SPRING …………………………………………… 11

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 3

Exploded View …………………………………………………11
Removal and Installation …………………………………..11
Inspection ……………………………………………………….12

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 4

REAR SUSPENSION BEAM ………………………. 13

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………13
Removal and Installation …………………………………..13
Inspection ……………………………………………………….14

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 4

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 5
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ………………… 5

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 15

Inspection ………………………………………………………… 5

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 15

WHEEL ALIGNMENT …………………………………… 6

Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ……………………………15
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) …………………………….15

Inspection ………………………………………………………… 6

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RSU-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009515807

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Suspension

INFOID:0000000009515808

• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
— Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,
tighten as they are.
• The tightening surface must be kept free of oil/grease.
• When jacking up the vehicle with a floor jack, never hang the jack on the suspension beam.

Revision: April 2013

RSU-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009515809

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

B

C

D

RSU
PIIB1407E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RSU-3

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009515810

Symptom

REAR SUSPENSION

×

×

Shimmy

×

×

×

×

Shudder

×

×

×

Poor quality ride or handling

×

×

×

×

BR-7

×

BRAKE

×

WT-4

Vibration

ROAD WHEEL

×

WT-5

×

TIRE

×

RAX-4

×

REAR AXLE

Shake

RSU-6

×

Incorrect wheel alignment

×

RSU-8, RSU-11, RSU-13

Parts interference

×

×

×

×

×

Suspension looseness

Bushing or mounting deterioration

×

RSU-12

—

Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection

Noise

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Spring fatigue

—

Improper installation, looseness

Reference

RSU-8

RSU-8, RSU-11, RSU-13

Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×
×
×

×

×: Applicable

Revision: April 2013

RSU-4

2014 Note

REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

A

REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515811

B

Check the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component. Verify the component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.

C

COMPONENT PART

SHOCK ABSORBER
Check the shock absorber for oil leaks or damage. Replace the components if necessary.

D

RSU

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RSU-5

2014 Note

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515812

DESCRIPTION
Measure the wheel alignment under unladen conditions.
NOTE:
“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.

PRELIMINARY
Check the following:
1. Tires for improper air pressure and wear.
2. Road wheels for runout. Refer to WT-4, «Inspection».
3. Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to RAX-5, «Inspection».
4. Shock absorber operation.
5. Each mounting part of suspension for looseness and deformation.
6. Rear suspension beam for cracks, deformation, and other damage.
7. Vehicle height (posture).

GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1.

2.

A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
• This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
• The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel
is centered.
• The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
• The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
• Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
• Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.

THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to RSU-15, «Wheel
Alignment (Unladen*1)».
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators.
• The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators
may not be correct.
• This may result in an ERROR.
2. Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with both «Rolling Compensation» method and
optional «Jacking Compensation» method to «compensate» the alignment targets or head units.
«Rolling Compensation» is the preferred method.
• If using the «Rolling Compensation» method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or
pull on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull the vehicle body.
• If using the «Jacking Compensation» method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise
the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
NOTE:
Do not use the «rolling compensation» if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment.
• Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you’re using for more information.

CAMBER INSPECTION
• Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge.
Camber

: Refer to RSU-15, «Wheel Alignment
(Unladen*1)».

• If it is out of the specification value, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts.
Revision: April 2013

RSU-6

2014 Note

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
TOTAL TOE-IN INSPECTION
Measure the total toe-in using following procedure. If it is out of the specification, inspect and replace any
damaged or worn rear suspension parts.
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the rear of the vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the rear wheel to move the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on the base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires
at the same height of hub center. These are measuring points.

A

B

C

D

RSU

F
SEIA0362E

4.
5.

6.

Measure the distance (A) from the rear side.
Push the rear wheel to move the vehicle slowly ahead and to
rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn),
try the above procedure again from the beginning. Do not
push the vehicle backward.
Measure the distance (B) from the front side.
Total toe-in

: Refer to RSU-15, «Wheel Alignment
(Unladen*1)».

G

H

I

SFA234AC

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

RSU-7

2014 Note

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009515813

AWEIA0322ZZ

1.

Cap

2.

Piston rod lock nut

3.

Washer

4.

Bushing

5.

Distance tube

6.

Bound bumper cover

7.

Bound bumper

8.

Shock absorber

9.

Rear suspension beam

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009515814

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Remove the rear shock absorber mask. Refer to INT-31, «Exploded View».
Remove the cap from the rear shock absorber.
Remove the piston rod lock nut (1).
NOTE:
To loosen the piston rod lock nut, hold the tip (A) of the piston
rod.
Remove the washer and the bushing.

JPEIB0241ZZ

5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

Set a suitable jack under the rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-28, «Garage Jack and Safety Stand».
• Do not damage the rear suspension beam with the jack.
• Make sure the rear suspension beam is stable when using the jack.
Remove the lower shock absorber bolt.
Remove the rear shock absorber.
Remove the bushing, the distance tube, the washer, the bound bumper cover, and the bound bumper
from the shock absorber.
Inspect the components. Refer to RSU-9, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

RSU-8

2014 Note

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• To install the bushings (1), securely insert the protrusion (A) into
the hole in the vehicle body.

A

B

C

D
JPEIB0240ZZ

RSU

• Install the washer (1) in the direction shown.
: Bushing side

F

G

JPEIB0248ZZ

• Perform the final tightening of the bolts and nuts under unladen conditions with the tires on level ground.
• Hold the tip (A) of the piston rod. Tighten the piston rod lock nut (1)
to the specification.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the piston rod lock nut.

H

I

J

K

JPEIB0241ZZ

• When installing the cap, securely engage the cap groove (A) with
the flange on the vehicle body.

L

M

N

O
JPEIB0244ZZ

P

• After replacing the shock absorber, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the old shock absorber.
Refer to RSU-10, «Disposal».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515815

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

RSU-9

2014 Note

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Shock Absorber
Check the following items and replace the parts if necessary.
• Check the shock absorber for oil leaks, deformation, cracks, and other damage.
• Check the piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion.
Bound Bumper, Bushing
Check for cracks and damage. Replace the parts if necessary.
Washer, Bound Bumper Cover, Distance Tube
• Check for cracks and damage. Replace the parts if necessary.

Disposal

INFOID:0000000009515816

1.

Set the shock absorber horizontally with the piston rod fully extended.

2.

Drill a 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from the
top as shown to release gas gradually.
CAUTION:
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.
• Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas.
NOTE:
• Drill vertically in this direction ( ).
• Drill directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets.
• The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless.
(A)

3.

JPEIA0161ZZ

: 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in)

Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times.
CAUTION:
Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations.

Revision: April 2013

RSU-10

2014 Note

COIL SPRING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

COIL SPRING

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009515817

B

C

D

RSU

F

G
JPEIB0162ZZ

1.

Upper rubber seat

4.

Rear suspension beam

2.

Coil spring

Removal and Installation

3.

Lower rubber seat

H
INFOID:0000000009515818

I

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.

4.

Set a suitable jack under the rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-28, «Garage Jack and Safety Stand».
• Do not damage the rear suspension beam with the jack.
Remove the lower shock absorber bolts. Refer to RSU-8, «Exploded View».
Slowly lower the suitable jack. Remove the upper rubber seat, the coil spring, and the lower rubber seat
from the rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
Make sure the rear suspension beam is stable when using the jack.
Inspect the components. Refer to RSU-12, «Inspection».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Identify the upper side of the coil spring.

J

K

L

M

N

: Upper side

NOTE:
The top of the coil spring has a flat shape.

O

P

JSEIA0430ZZ

Revision: April 2013

RSU-11

2014 Note

COIL SPRING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Install the lower rubber seat (A) to the rear suspension beam
mounting hole (B).
• Match up lower rubber seat indentions and rear suspension beam
grooves and attach.

JPEIB0223ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009515819

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the upper rubber seat, the lower rubber seat, and the coil spring for deformation, cracks, and damage.
Replace the parts if necessary.

Revision: April 2013

RSU-12

2014 Note

REAR SUSPENSION BEAM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR SUSPENSION BEAM

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009592946

B

C

D

RSU

F

G
AWEIA0323ZZ

1.

Rear suspension beam

H

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009592947

NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes, lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL

J

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the rear wheels and tires using power tools. Refer to WT-8, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the brake hoses from the rear suspension beam.
Remove the spindles and rear drum brake components. Refer to RAX-6, «Exploded View».
Remove the wheel sensors and position the wheel sensor harnesses aside. Refer to BRC-70, «REAR
WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View».
5. Disconnect the parking brake cables from the rear suspension beam and position the rear drum brake
back plates aside with wire. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».
6. Set a suitable jack under the rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-28, «Garage Jack and Safety Stand».
• Do not damage the rear suspension beam with the jack.
7. Remove the lower shock absorber bolts. Refer to RSU-8, «Exploded View».
8. Slowly lower the suitable jack. Remove the upper rubber seats, the coil springs, and the lower rubber
seats from the rear suspension beam.
CAUTION:
Make sure the rear suspension beam is stable when using the jack.
9. Remove the rear suspension beam bolts.
10. Slowly lower the suitable jack. Remove the rear suspension beam from the vehicle.
11. Inspect the components. Refer to RSU-14, «Inspection».

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the rear suspension beam nuts.
Revision: April 2013

I

RSU-13

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

REAR SUSPENSION BEAM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Perform the final tightening of the rear suspension beam nuts and bolts under unladen conditions with the
tires on level ground.
• Adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, «Inspection and Adjustment».
• Fill the hydraulic brake system. Refer to BR-11, «Refilling».
• Bleed the hydraulic brake system. Refer to BR-12, «Bleeding Brake System».
• Complete the inspection. Refer to RSU-14, «Inspection».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009592948

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the rear suspension beam for deformation, cracks or damage. Replace the parts if necessary.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

RSU-14

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)

Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

INFOID:0000000009515823

Minimum

−1° 55′ (−1.92°)

Nominal

−1° 25′ (−1.42°)

Maximum

−0° 55′ (−0.92°)

B

C

D

RSU

F

SFA234AC

Distance (A — B)
Total toe-in
Angle (LH and RH)*2
Degree minute (Decimal degree)

Minimum

Out 2.0 mm (Out 0.079 in)

Nominal

In 2.0 mm (In 0.079 in)

Maximum

In 6.0 mm (In 0.236 in)

Minimum

Out 0° 45′ (Out 0.75°)

Nominal

In 0° 10′ (In 0.17°)

Maximum

In 0° 35′ (In 0.58°)

G

H

*1: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.
*2: Since an adjustment mechanism is not included, the value of the left and right wheels must be used as the standard value.

Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)

I

INFOID:0000000009515824

J
Unit: mm (in)

K

L

M

N

LEIA0085E

Tire size

185/65R15

195/55R16

Front (Hf)

690 (27.17)

687 (27.05)

Rear (Hr)

679 (26.73)

678 (26.69)

O

*: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.

P

Revision: April 2013

RSU-15

2014 Note

RESTRAINTS

SECTION

SB

SEAT BELT

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Seat Belt Service …………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ………………………………….. 9
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………………. 9
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER ………………………..10
SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER : Removal and
Installation ………………………………………………………10

REAR SEAT BELT …………………………………….. 12

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………12

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4

REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE ………………………………12
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………12

Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 4

BASIC INSPECTION ……………………………… 5
COMPONENT INSPECTION …………………………. 5
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 5

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ………………………………….13
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………………13

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 8

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER
FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM …………………………. 15

FRONT SEAT BELT …………………………………….. 8

Removal and Installation …………………………………..15

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 8

F

G

SB

I

J

K

L

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ….. 16

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE ……………………………… 8
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………….. 8

Removal and Installation …………………………………..16

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009561083

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Seat Belt Service

INFOID:0000000009561084

CAUTION:
• Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both
battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. For approximately three minutes after the battery
terminals have been removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner to deploy.
Therefore, do not attempt work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least three minutes have
passed.
• After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner assembly connector, make sure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to SRC-9, «Description».
• Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
• Do not oil tongue or buckle.
• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
• If webbing is cut, frayed or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009561085

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
Revision: April 2013

S B -2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

SB

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009561086

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SB-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009561087

B

WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pretensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which
the air bags are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt was damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.

C

AFTER A COLLISION

3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
d.

6.

Check the seat belt warning lamp for proper operation per the following:
Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate.
Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF.
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT and air bag warning lamp.
Refer to SRC-9, «Description».
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Check that guide
swivels freely and that webbing lays flat and does not bind in guide. Check that height adjuster operates
properly and holds securely.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the
loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt D-ring anchor
1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
2. Hold the seat belt at the center pillar webbing opening with a clip or other device.
3. Pass a thin wire through the D-ring anchor webbing opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull it
tightly while moving it up and down several times along the webbing opening surface to remove dirt
stuck there.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
5. Apply tape at the point where the webbing contacts the D-ring anchor webbing opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no slack or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the webbing returns smoothly.
Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.

Revision: April 2013

E

F

G

SB

PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
b.
2.

D

SB-5

2014 Note

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

COMPONENT INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the
retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt
in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat
belt to fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check

1.
2.
3.
4.

Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts, indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it
does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.

ELR Function Moving Check

WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 mph). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.

FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.

Remove the front seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-9, «SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation».
Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the seat belt retractor forward from the mounted position without twisting the seat belt retractor as shown.
A : The webbing can be pulled out if the retractor is tilted 17°
degree or less.
B : The webbing can not be pulled out if the retractor is tilted 27°
degrees or more.
NOTE:
A and B show tilting angles.
: Front

JMHIA1056ZZ

3.

Replace the seat belt retractor if it does not operate within specifications.

Revision: April 2013

SB-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1. Remove the rear seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-13, «SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation».
2. Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the seat belt retractor forward from the mounted position without twisting the seat belt retractor as shown.
A : The webbing can be pulled out if the retractor is tilted 17°
degree or less.
B : The webbing can not be pulled out if the retractor is tilted 27°
degrees or more.
NOTE:
A and B show tilting angles.
: Front

A

B

C

D

E
JMHIA1056ZZ

3.

Replace the seat belt retractor if it does not operate within specifications.

F

G

SB

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-7

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BELT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009561088

AWHIA0542ZZ

1.

Seat belt height adjuster (LH/RH) 2.

Seat belt height adjuster finisher (LH/RH)

3. Seat belt retractor (RH)

4.

Seat belt buckle (RH)

Seat belt buckle (LH)

6. Seat belt retractor (LH)

5.

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009654081

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front seat. Refer to SE-14, «DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation» (Driver Side) or SE-16,
«PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation» (Passenger Side).
Unclip seat belt buckle harness from the seat frame (driver side only).

Revision: April 2013

SB-8

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove seat belt buckle anchor bolt and the seat belt buckle.
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt buckle anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.

A

INSTALLATION

B

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the seat belt buckle anchor bolt to specification. Refer to SB-8, «Exploded View».
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

C

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009561090

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Do not drop the seat belt retractor. Always handle it with care.
• Always point pretensioner cylinder away from body when handling.

D

E

F

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
G
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Slide front seat to the full forward position.
Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
SB
and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the seat belt retractor (1).
I

J

K
ALHIA0316ZZ

L

CAUTION:
• For removing/installing the shoulder belt pre-tensioner
harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, then lift the lock and remove the harness connector as shown.
• Install the harness connector with the lock raised, and
push the lock into the harness connector as shown.
• After installing the harness connector, check that the lock
is pushed in securely.

M

N

O
PHIA0953J

5.

Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt lower anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.

Revision: April 2013

SB-9

2014 Note

P

FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Release pawls, using a suitable tool and remove the seat belt
height adjuster finisher (1).
: Pawl

AWHIA0539ZZ

7.

8.

Remove D-ring anchor bolt.
CAUTION:
Before removing the D-ring anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for correct
installation.
Remove bolts (A) and the seat belt retractor (1).

ALHIA0317ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Make sure the seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
• Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
• Tighten the D-ring anchor bolt, seat belt lower anchor bolt, and the seat belt retractor bolts to specification.
Refer to SB-8, «Exploded View».
• Make sure both the D-ring anchors and seat belt height adjuster operate freely.
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER

SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009561091

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Slide front seat to the full forward position.
Release pawls, using a suitable tool and remove the seat belt
height adjuster finisher (1).
: Pawl

AWHIA0539ZZ

3.

Remove D-ring anchor bolt.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

SB-10

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Before removing the D-ring anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for correct
installation.
4. Remove center pillar upper finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
5. Remove seat belt height adjuster bolts and the seat belt height adjuster.
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt height adjuster bolts, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.

A

B

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Make sure that the seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
• Make sure both the D-ring anchor and seat belt height adjuster operate freely.
• Tighten the D-ring anchor bolt and seat belt height adjuster bolts to specification. Refer to SB-8, «Exploded
View».
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

D

E

F

G

SB

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-11

2014 Note

REAR SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR SEAT BELT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009561092

ALHIA0314ZZ

1.

Seat belt retractor (RH)

2.

Seat belt buckle (RH/center)

3.

Seat belt buckle (LH)

4.

Seat belt retractor (LH)

5.

Seat belt retractor (center)

6.

Seat belt guide finisher

7.

Seat belt guide

REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009561093

REMOVAL — Seat Belt Buckle (LH)
1.

Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

SB-12

2014 Note

REAR SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Release seat belt retractor (center) (1) from seat belt buckle
(LH) (2) using a suitable tool (A) as shown.

A

B

C
ALHIA0315ZZ

3.

Remove seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle (LH).
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt buckle anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.

D

E

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the seat belt buckle anchor bolt to specification. Refer to SB-12, «Exploded View».
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

REMOVAL — Seat Belt Buckle (RH)
1.
2.

F

G

Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
SB
Remove seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle (RH).
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt buckle anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.
I

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the seat belt buckle anchor bolt to specification. Refer to SB-12, «Exploded View».
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR

K

SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009561095

L

REMOVAL — Seat Belt Retractor (LH/RH)
1.

J

Remove luggage side upper finisher (LH/RH). Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-13

2014 Note

REAR SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. For seat belt retractor (LH) (1).
a. Remove D-ring anchor bolt (A).
: Front
CAUTION:
Before removing the D-ring anchor bolt, note the positions
of washers and spacers for correct installation.
b. Remove bolts (B) and the seat belt retractor (LH) (1).
(2): Seat belt retractor (center)
3. For seat belt retractor (RH) (3).
: Front
a. Remove D-ring anchor bolt (C).
CAUTION:
Before removing the D-ring anchor bolt, note the positions
of washers and spacers for correct installation.
b. Remove bolts (D) and seat belt retractor (RH) (3).

ALHIA0318ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
• Tighten the D-ring anchor bolt and the seat belt retractor bolts to specification. Refer to SB-12, «Exploded
View».
• Make sure the D-ring anchor operates freely.
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

REMOVAL — Seat Belt Retractor (center)
1.
2.

3.

Remove luggage side upper finisher (LH). Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove D-ring anchor bolt (A).
: Front
CAUTION:
Before removing the D-ring anchor bolt, note the positions
of washers and spacers for correct installation.
Remove bolts (B) and seat belt retractor (center) (1).
(2): Seat belt retractor (LH)

ALHIA0313ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the center seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
• Tighten the D-ring anchor bolt and the seat belt retractor bolts to specification. Refer to SB-12, «Exploded
View».
• Make sure the D-ring anchor operates freely.
• Always perform an inspection after repair to make sure the system is functioning within specifications. Refer
to SB-5, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

SB-14

2014 Note

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation

A

INFOID:0000000009561096

The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.

B

C

D

E

F

G

SB

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SB-15

2014 Note

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009561097

The Top Tether Strap Child Restraint system is not serviceable.

Revision: April 2013

SB-16

2014 Note

BODY INTERIOR

SECTION

SE

SEAT

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3

REAR SEAT ……………………………………………… 18
Exploded View …………………………………………………18
SEAT CUSHION ………………………………………………..19
SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation ………..19
SEATBACK ……………………………………………………….19
SEATBACK : Removal and Installation ……………….19

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

SEATBACK HINGE ……………………………………………20
SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation …….20

Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 3

SEATBACK STRIKER ………………………………………..20
SEATBACK STRIKER : Removal and Installation….20

CLIP LIST …………………………………………………… 4

SEAT CUSHION HOOK ………………………………………21
SEAT CUSHION HOOK : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………………21

Descriptions for Clips ………………………………………… 4

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 8
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ………………………………………………………. 8
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….. 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ………… 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ……………………………………… 12

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 14
FRONT SEAT ……………………………………………..14
DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………… 14
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View ………………………… 14
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation …………… 14
PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………… 15
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View …………………. 16
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation …… 16

Revision: April 2013

F

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 22
FRONT SEAT ……………………………………………. 22
DRIVER SIDE …………………………………………………….22
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View ………………………….22
DRIVER SIDE : Seatback ………………………………….22
DRIVER SIDE : Seat Cushion ……………………………24
PASSENGER SIDE …………………………………………….26
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View ………………….27
PASSENGER SIDE : Seatback ………………………….27
PASSENGER SIDE : Seat Cushion ……………………29

G

H

I

SE

K

L

M

N

REAR SEAT ……………………………………………… 31

O

Exploded View …………………………………………………31
Seat Cushion …………………………………………………..32
Seatback …………………………………………………………33

P

SE-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009643071

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009643073

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

SE-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009643068

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear

Locating the noise

C

D

E
SIIA0993E

—
(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit

F

Repairing the cause of noise

G

H
ALJIA1232ZZ

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

I

SE
AWJIA0483ZZ

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009643069

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-39565)
Engine Ear

Locating the noise

K

L

M

N
SIIA0995E

( — )
Hook and Pick Tool

O

Removes snap rings

P

JMJIA0490ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SE-3

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

CLIP LIST
Descriptions for Clips

INFOID:0000000009643070

Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation.

SIIA0315E

Revision: April 2013

SE-4

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O
SIIA0316E

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-5

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >

SIIA0317E

Revision: April 2013

SE-6

2014 Note

CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ALJIA0564GB

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-7

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009671302

SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer’s comments; refer to SE-12, «Diagnostic Worksheet». This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

SE-8

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.

CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.

LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
2.

A

B

C

D

E

F

Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic’s stethoscope).
G
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be H
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
I
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
SE
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to SE-9, «Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting».

REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
—

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
— SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
— SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
— DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.

CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting

INFOID:0000000009671303

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
Revision: April 2013

SE-9

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.

CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.

DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.

SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
In addition look for:
Revision: April 2013

SE-10

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.

A

SEATS
When isolating seat noise it’s important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.

B

C

D

E

UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then F
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
G
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator installation pins
H
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
I
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-11

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnostic Worksheet

INFOID:0000000009671304

LAIA0072E

Revision: April 2013

SE-12

2014 Note

SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O
LAIA0071E

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-13

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009643055

AWJIA1116ZZ

1.

Armrest

2.

Seatback trim

3.

Seatback pad

4.

Seat cushion trim

5.

Seat cushion pad

6.

Seat cushion frame

7.

Seat belt buckle

8.

Seat cushion outer finisher (RH)

9.

Seat cushion outer finisher (LH)

10. Lift lever

11. Lift lever finisher

12. Recline lever

13. Slide finisher rear (LH/RH)

14. Headrest holder (locked)

15. Headrest holder (free)

16. Seat frame

17. Headrest

DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643056

CAUTION:
Revision: April 2013

SE-14

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect components from damage.
A

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Slide the seat to the full forward position.
Remove the seat rear bolts.
Slide the seat to the full rearward position.
Remove the seat front bolts.
Tilt the seat rearward and disconnect the harness connector from the seat and remove.

B

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the seat harness or the floor trim is not damaged during installation.
When installing the driver side front seat, tighten the bolts in the
order shown.
Driver side front seat bolt
torque

D

E

: 40 Nm (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)
F

G
AWJIA0920ZZ

H

PASSENGER SIDE

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-15

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009643057

AWJIA1117ZZ

1.

Headrest

2.

Headrest holder (locked)

3.

Headrest holder (free)

4.

Slide finisher rear (LH/RH)

5.

Recline lever

6.

Seat cushion outer finisher (RH)

7.

Seat frame

8.

Seat cushion outer finisher (LH)

9.

Seat belt buckle

10. Seat cushion pad

11. Seat cushion trim

12. Seatback pad

13. Seatback trim

PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643058

CAUTION:
When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect components from damage.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Slide the seat to the full forward position.
Remove the seat rear bolts.
Slide the seat to the full rearward position.

Revision: April 2013

SE-16

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove the seat front bolts.
A

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the floor trim is not damaged during installation.
When installing the passenger side front seat, tighten the bolts in the
order shown.
Passenger side front seat
bolt torque

B

C

: 40 Nm (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)

D

E
AWJIA0921ZZ

F

G

H

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-17

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR SEAT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009643061

AWJIA1138ZZ

1.

Seatback hinge trim

2.

Seatback hinge

3.

Seatback striker

4.

Headrest

5.

Seatback (RH)

6.

Headrest holder (locked)

7.

Headrest holder (free)

8.

Seatback latch bracket (RH)

9.

Seatback latch (RH)

Revision: April 2013

SE-18

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Seatback frame (RH)

11. Seatback latch finisher (RH)

12. Seatback latch release knob

13. Seatback trim (RH)

14. Seatback pad (RH)

15. Seat cushion hook

A

16. Seat cushion

17. Seat cushion pad

18. Seat cushion trim

19. Cup holder

20. Armrest

21. Armrest hinge bracket

22. Armrest pivot bolt bushing

23. Armrest pivot bolt

24. Armrest hinge bracket finisher
(RH)

25. Bushing

26. Armrest hinge bracket finisher (LH) 27. Seatback pad (LH)

28. Seatback trim (LH)

29. Seatback latch finisher (LH)

30. Seatback frame (LH)

31. Seatback latch bracket (LH)

32. Seatback latch (LH)

33. Seatbelt guide finisher

34. Seat belt guide

35. Seatback (LH)

C

Pawl

D

SEAT CUSHION
SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation

B

INFOID:0000000009643062

E

REMOVAL
1.

Lift up the seat cushion assembly front edge (B) to release it from the seat cushion hooks (A) (LH/RH) and
remove.
: Front

F

G

H

I
JMJIA4835ZZ

SE

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

SEATBACK

K

SEATBACK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643063

REMOVAL

L

Seatback (LH)

1.

Release seat belt retractor (center) (1) from seat belt buckle
(LH) (2) using a suitable tool (A) as shown ( ).

M

N

O

ALHIA0315ZZ

2.

Place the seatback (LH) in the folded down position.

Revision: April 2013

SE-19

2014 Note

P

REAR SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Release hook fasteners (A).
4. Remove bolts (B) and the seatback (LH) (1).

ALJIA1242ZZ

Seatback (RH)

1.
2.
3.

Place the seatback (RH) in the folded down position.
Release hook fasteners (A).
Remove bolts (B) and the seatback (RH) (1).

ALJIA1243ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten the seatback assembly bolts to specification. Refer to SE-18, «Exploded View».

SEATBACK HINGE

SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643064

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove the seatbacks (LH/RH). Refer to SE-19, «SEATBACK : Removal and Installation».
Remove the seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation»
Remove bolts (A) and the seatback hinge (1).

ALJIA1244ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten the seatback hinge assembly bolts to specification. Refer to SE-18, «Exploded View».

SEATBACK STRIKER

SEATBACK STRIKER : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643065

REMOVAL
Revision: April 2013

SE-20

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove the luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
2. Remove bolts and the seatback strikers.

INSTALLATION

B

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten the seatback striker bolts to specification. Refer to SE-18, «Exploded View».

SEAT CUSHION HOOK

C

SEAT CUSHION HOOK : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009643066

REMOVAL
1.
2.

A

D

Remove the seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
Release the seat cushion hook pawls as shown and remove.
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat cushion hook, check its orientation (front/rear).

E

F

G

H
JMJIA6035ZZ

INSTALLATION

I

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-21

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
FRONT SEAT
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009645122

AWJIA1116ZZ

1.

Armrest

2.

Seatback trim

3.

Seatback pad

4.

Seat cushion trim

5.

Seat cushion pad

6.

Seat cushion frame

7.

Seat belt buckle

8.

Seat cushion outer finisher (RH)

9.

Seat cushion outer finisher (LH)

10. Lift lever

11. Lift lever finisher

12. Recline lever

13. Slide finisher rear (LH/RH)

14. Headrest holder (locked)

15. Headrest holder (free)

16. Seat frame

17. Headrest

DRIVER SIDE : Seatback

INFOID:0000000009643078

DISASSEMBLY
Revision: April 2013

SE-22

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
1. Remove the driver side front seat. Refer to SE-14, «DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation».
2. Remove the headrest.
3. Release trim strap (A) from the seat cushion frame.

A

B

C

D
JMJIA6015ZZ

4.
a.
b.

Remove the armrest (1).
Unzip the armrest to access armrest bolt (A).
Remove armrest bolt (A) and armrest (1).

E

F

G

ALJIA0994ZZ

5.

Release the J-hook retainer (C), unzip seatback zippers (A) and
release J-clips (B).

H

I

SE

K
AWJIA1114ZZ

6.

L

Release the headrest holder locks as shown and remove.
CAUTION:
Before removing the headrest holder, check its orientation
(front/rear and right/left).

M

N

O
JMJIA4073ZZ

7.

Lift the seatback trim and seatback pad from the seat frame.

Revision: April 2013

SE-23

P

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
8. Remove the hog rings and separate the seatback trim (1) from
the seatback pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ALJIA0988ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Install new hog rings on the seatback trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seatback trim and seatback pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkles during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

PIIB3356J

DRIVER SIDE : Seat Cushion

INFOID:0000000009643079

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
a.
b.

Remove the drive side front seat. Refer to SE-14, «DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation».
Remove the lift lever (2).
Release pawls and remove the lift lever finisher (1).
Remove screws and the lift lever.
: Pawl

AWJIA0932ZZ

3.

Remove snap ring (1) as shown (
the recline lever (2).

) using a suitable tool, then

JMJIA6005ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SE-24

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
4. Remove the seat cushion outer finisher (LH) (1).
a. Remove screw (A).
b. Pull to release metal clips as shown ( ) and remove.
: Metal clip

A

B

C
JMJIA6006ZZ

5.
6.
a.
b.
c.

Remove the seat belt buckle (LH). Refer to SB-8, «FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove the seat cushion outer finisher (RH) (1).
Remove screw (B).
Position seat cushion trim (A) aside.
Slide seat cushion outer finisher (RH) rearward, as shown (
to release pawl and remove.
: Pawl

D

E

F

),

G

AWJIA0933ZZ

7.
a.
b.

Remove the seat cushion from the seat frame.
Release the seatback trim J-clips (C) and seat cushion J-clips
(B) from the seat cushion frame.
Remove bolts (A) and the seat cushion.

H

I

SE

K

ALJIA0997ZZ

8.
a.
b.

Remove seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad from the seat
cushion frame.
Release string at locations (A) from seat cushion frame (1).
: Front
Loosen string then remove the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad.

L

M

N

O
JMJIA6008ZZ

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-25

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
9. Remove the hog rings and separate the seat cushion trim (1)
from the seat cushion pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ALJIA0990ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Install new hog rings on the seat cushion trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seat
cushion trim and seat cushion pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkles during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

PIIB3356J

PASSENGER SIDE

Revision: April 2013

SE-26

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009645123

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

SE

K

L

AWJIA1117ZZ

1.

Headrest

2.

Headrest holder (locked)

3.

Headrest holder (free)

4.

Slide finisher rear (LH/RH)

5.

Recline lever

6.

Seat cushion outer finisher (RH)

7.

Seat frame

8.

Seat cushion outer finisher (LH)

9.

Seat belt buckle

10. Seat cushion pad

11. Seat cushion trim

O

PASSENGER SIDE : Seatback

INFOID:0000000009643081

P

DISASSEMBLY
Remove the passenger side front seat. Refer to SE-16, «PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation».
Remove the headrest.

Revision: April 2013

N

12. Seatback pad

13. Seatback trim

1.
2.

M

SE-27

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
3. Release trim strap (A) from the seat frame.

AWJIA0913ZZ

4.

Release the J-hook retainer (C), unzip seatback zippers (A) and
release J-clips (B).

AWJIA1115ZZ

5.

Release the headrest holder locks as shown and remove.
CAUTION:
Before removing the headrest holder, check its orientation
(front/rear and right/left).

JMJIA4073ZZ

6.
7.

Lift the seatback trim and seatback pad from the seat frame.
Remove the hog rings and separate the seatback trim (1) from
the seatback pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ALJIA0988ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Revision: April 2013

SE-28

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Install new hog rings on the seatback trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seatback trim and seatback pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkles during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

A

B

C
PIIB3356J

D

PASSENGER SIDE : Seat Cushion

INFOID:0000000009643082

DISASSEMBLY
1.

Remove the passenger side front seat. Refer to SE-16, «PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation».

2.

Remove snap ring (1) as shown (
remove the recline lever (2).

E

) using a suitable tool, then
F

G

H
AWJIA0907ZZ

3.
a.

Remove the seat cushion outer finisher (RH) (1).
Remove the screw (A).

b.

Pull to release metal clips as shown (
: Metal clip

I

) and remove.

SE

K

L
AWJIA0917ZZ

4.
5.
a.
b.

Remove seat belt buckle (RH). Refer to SB-8, «FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation».
Remove the seat cushion outer finisher (LH) (2).
Remove seat cushion trim retainer (A).
Remove the screw (B).

c.

Slide seat cushion outer finisher (LH) rearward as shown (
release pawl and remove.
(1): Seat cushion trim
: Pawl

M

N

) to
O

P
AWJIA0918ZZ

6.

Remove the seat cushion trim and seat cushion pad from the seat frame.

Revision: April 2013

SE-29

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
a. Remove trim strap (A) and J-hook retainers (B).

AWJIA0919ZZ

b.

Remove the hog rings, then the seat cushion trim and seat
cushion pad from the seat frame.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

AWJIA0923ZZ

7.

Remove the hog rings and separate the seat cushion trim (1)
from the seat cushion pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ALJIA0990ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Install new hog rings on the seat cushion trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seat
cushion trim and seat cushion pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkles during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

PIIB3356J

Revision: April 2013

SE-30

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

REAR SEAT

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009645127

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

SE

K

L

M

N

O

P

ALJIA1240ZZ

1.

Seatback hinge trim

2.

Seatback hinge

3.

4.

Headrest

5.

Seatback (RH)

6.

Headrest holder (locked)

7.

Headrest holder (free)

8.

Seatback latch bracket (RH)

9.

Seatback latch (RH)

Revision: April 2013

SE-31

Seatback striker

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
10. Seatback frame (RH)

11. Seatback latch finisher (RH)

12. Seatback latch release knob

13. Seatback trim (RH)

14. Seatback pad (RH)

15. Seat cushion hook

16. Seat cushion

17. Seat cushion pad

18. Seat cushion trim

19. Cup holder

20. Armrest

21. Armrest hinge bracket

22. Armrest pivot bolt bushing

23. Armrest pivot bolt

24. Armrest hinge bracket finisher
(RH)

25. Bushing

26. Armrest hinge bracket finisher (LH) 27. Seatback pad (LH)

28. Seatback trim (LH)

29. Seatback latch finisher (LH)

30. Seatback frame (LH)

31. Seatback latch bracket (LH)

32. Seatback latch (LH)

33. Seatbelt guide finisher

34. Seat belt guide

35. Seatback (LH)

Pawl

Seat Cushion

INFOID:0000000009643084

SEAT CUSHION

ALJIA1251ZZ

1.

Seat cushion pad

2.

Seat cushion trim

Hog ring

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

Remove the seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, «SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation».
Remove the hog rings on the bottom side of seat cushion.
Remove the hog rings on the top side of seat cushion and separate the seat cushion trim from the seat
cushion pad.
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Revision: April 2013

SE-32

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Install new hog rings on the seat cushion trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seat
cushion trim and seat cushion pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkles during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

A

B

C
PIIB3356J

D

Seatback

INFOID:0000000009643085

E

DISASSEMBLY
Seatback (LH)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the seatback (LH). Refer to SE-19, «SEATBACK : Removal and Installation».
Remove the headrest.
Release clips and remove latch finisher.
Release pawls and remove the seat belt guide finisher.
Remove nut and the seat belt guide.
Rotate the seatback latch release knob counterclockwise as
shown ( ) and remove.

F

G

H

I

SE

JMJIA4374ZZ

7.
a.
b.

Remove the armrest (1).
Remove clip (A) using a suitable tool, then the armrest finisher
(RH) (2) as shown ( ).
Remove nuts (B), then the armrest.

K

L

M

N
ALJIA1247ZZ

8.
9.

Release hook fasteners (A), then J-hook retainer (B).
Unzip the seatback trim zipper (C), then release J-clip retainers
(D).

O

P

ALJIA1246ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SE-33

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
10. Release the headrest holder locks as shown and remove.
CAUTION:
Before removing the headrest holder, check its orientation
(front/rear and right/left).

JMJIA4073ZZ

11. Remove the seatback trim and seatback pad as an assembly from the seatback frame.
12. Remove bolts and the seatback latch assembly.
13. Remove the hog rings and separate the seatback trim (1) from
the seatback pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

ALJIA1248ZZ

Seatback (RH)

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the seatback (RH). Refer to SE-19, «SEATBACK : Removal and Installation».
Remove the headrest.
Release clips and remove latch finisher.
Rotate the seatback latch release knob counterclockwise as
shown ( ) and remove.

JMJIA4374ZZ

5.
6.

Release hook fasteners (A), then J-hook retainer (B).
Unzip the seatback trim zipper (C), then release J-clip retainers
(D).

ALJIA1250ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SE-34

2014 Note

REAR SEAT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
7. Release the headrest holder locks as shown and remove.
CAUTION:
Before removing the headrest holder, check its orientation
(front/rear and right/left).

A

B

C
JMJIA4073ZZ

D

8. Remove the seatback trim and seatback pad from the seatback frame.
9. Remove bolts and the seatback latch.
10. Remove the hog rings and separate the seatback trim (1) from
the seatback pad.
: Hog ring
NOTE:
Remove all pieces of hog rings and discard them.

E

F

G

ALJIA1249ZZ

H

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Install new hog rings on the seatback trim in original positions.
• Use only one hog ring in each designated location.
• Make sure hog rings are correctly fastened around both the seatback trim and seatback pad wires.
• Smooth out all wrinkle during assembly.
• Use NISSAN standard hog rings and tools to assemble.

I

SE

K

L
PIIB3356J

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SE-35

2014 Note

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION

SEC

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 4
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 4

THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM THEFT) …………………………………………………………..21

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 4
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 4

IMMU ………………………………………………………………..21
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM — IMMU) …………22

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 5

ECM, IPDM E/R, BCM ………………………………… 23

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 5

F

G

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 23
H

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………23

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 24

I

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 6

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE
START FUNCTION ……………………………………. 24

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 6

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..24

J

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 5

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 6

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………. 38

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….10

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..38

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START
FUNCTION ……………………………………………………….. 10
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START
FUNCTION : System Description ………………………. 10

NVIS ………………………………………………………… 49

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM ………………………….. 12
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Description …………………………………………………………. 13

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 58

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM …………………………… 15
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Description ……………………………………………………………….. 15

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….18
COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………… 18
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) …………………………………………….. 18
INTELLIGENT KEY …………………………………………… 18
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ………………………………………… 19
THEFT ALM ……………………………………………………… 21

Revision: April 2013

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..49

SEC

L

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 58
M

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….58

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT ………………………………………… 61

N

ECM ………………………………………………………………….61
ECM : Description …………………………………………….61
ECM : Work Procedure ……………………………………..61

O

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 62
P1610 LOCK MODE ………………………………….. 62
Description ………………………………………………………62
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….62
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..62

P1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM ………………… 63
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….63

SEC-1

2014 Note

P

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 63

B2608 STARTER RELAY …………………………… 91

P1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU ……………………… 64

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 91
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 91
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 92

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 64
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 64

B2192 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM …………………. 65

B260F ENGINE STATUS ……………………………. 93

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 65
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 65

Description …………………………………………………….. 93
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 93
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 93

B2193 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU ……………………… 66

B261F ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH …………………. 94

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 66
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 66

B2195 ANTI-SCANNING …………………………….. 67
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 67
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 67

B2198 NATS ANTENNA AMP. ……………………. 68
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 68
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 68

B2555 STOP LAMP ……………………………………. 71
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 71
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 71
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 72

B2556 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ….. 74
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 74
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 74
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 75

B2557 VEHICLE SPEED …………………………….. 76
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 76
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 76

B2601 SHIFT POSITION …………………………….. 77
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 77
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 77

B2602 SHIFT POSITION …………………………….. 79

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 94
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 94
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 96

B2620 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH… 97
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 97
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 97
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 99

B26E8 CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH ………. 100
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 100
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 100
Component Inspection (Clutch Interlock Switch) . 102

B26F3 STARTER CONTROL RELAY …………. 103
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 103
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 103

B26F4 STARTER CONTROL RELAY …………. 104
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 104
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 104

B26F7 BCM ……………………………………………… 105
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 105
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 105

B26FB CLUTCH SWITCH ………………………….. 106
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 106
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 106

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 79
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 79
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 81

B26FC KEY REGISTRATION …………………….. 107

B2603 SHIFT POSITION …………………………….. 82

B210B STARTER CONTROL RELAY …………. 108

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 82
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 82
Component Inspection (Transmission Range
Switch) ………………………………………………………….. 85
Component Inspection [CVT Shift Selector (Park
Position Switch)] …………………………………………….. 85

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 107
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 107
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 108
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 108

B210C STARTER CONTROL RELAY …………. 109
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 109
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 109

B2604 SHIFT POSITION …………………………….. 86

B210D STARTER RELAY ………………………….. 111

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 86
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 86
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 88

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 111
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 111

B2605 SHIFT POSITION …………………………….. 89
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 89
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 89

Revision: April 2013

B210E STARTER RELAY ………………………….. 113
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 113
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 113

SEC-2

2014 Note

B210F SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH …………………………………………. 115

SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT
TURN ON OR BLINK ……………………………….. 120

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 115
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 115

Description ……………………………………………………. 120
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 120

B2110 SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH …………………………………………. 117

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 121

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 117
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 117

NATS ANTENNA AMP. ……………………………. 121

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 119

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ………….. 122

ENGINE DOES NOT START WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS INSIDE OF VEHICLE ……………. 119
Description …………………………………………………… 119
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 119

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 121
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 122

A

B

C

D

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ……. 123
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 123
E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-3

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009541297

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009541299

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-4

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009541300

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

C

D

E
AWJIA0483ZZ

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-5

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009016098

ALKIA3206ZZ

A.

View right of steering column

Revision: April 2013

B.

View with glove box cover removed

SEC-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Component

Function

A

Combination meter transmits the vehicle
speed signal to BCM via CAN communication.
BCM also receives the vehicle speed signal
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) via CAN communication. BCM compares both signals to detect the vehicle
speed.
Security indicator lamp is located on combination meter.
Security indicator lamp blinks when ignition
switch is in any position other than ON to
warn that NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM-NATS [NVIS (NATS)] is on board.
Refer to MWI-6, «METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter».

Combination meter

Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and then transmits the signal to
the BCM.
Refer to DLK-12, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center)».

Inside key antenna (instrument center)

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
transmits the vehicle speed signal to BCM via
CAN communication.
BCM also receives the vehicle speed signal
from the combination meter via CAN communication. BCM compares both signals to detect the vehicle speed.
Refer to BRC-6, «Component Parts Location»
for detailed installation location.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside the vehicle, of operation
confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation and door request switch operation, or
of an inappropriate operation.
Refer to DLK-14, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer».

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

5.

Hood switch

Hood switch detects that brake hood is open
or closed, and then transmits that signal to
the IPDM E/R

6.

Transmission range switch

Transmission range switch detects the CVT
shift selector lever position.

IPDM E/R

Starter control relay is integrated in IPDM E/R
and used for the engine starting function.
Starter relay is controlled by BCM, and starter
control relay is controlled by IPDM E/R while
communicating with BCM. IPDM E/R sends
the starter control relay and starter relay status signal to BCM.

7.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-7

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

8.

BCM

BCM controls INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(ENGINE START FUNCTION), NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS [NVIS
(NATS)] and VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.
BCM performs the ID verification between
BCM and Intelligent Key when the Intelligent
Key is carried into the detection area of inside
key antenna, and push-button ignition switch
is pressed. If the ID verification result is OK,
ignition switch operation is available.
Then, when the ignition switch is turned ON,
BCM performs ID verification between BCM
and ECM. If the ID verification result is OK,
ECM can start engine.
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
: Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

9.

Clutch interlock switch

Clutch interlock switch detects that clutch
pedal is depressed, and then transmits ON/
OFF signal to the BCM

10.

Stop lamp switch

Stop lamp switch detects that brake pedal is
depressed, and then transmits ON/OFF signal to the BCM

Main power window and door lock/unlock switch

Door lock and unlock switch is integrated into
the power window main switch.
Door lock and unlock switch transmits door
lock/unlock operation signal to BCM.
Refer to PWC-6, «Power Window Main
Switch».

12.

CVT shift selector (park position switch)

Park position switch is integrated into the
CVT shift selector and detects that the selector lever is in the P (park) position, then transmits ON/OFF signal to the BCM and IPDM E/
R.

13.

Front door switch LH

Door switch detects door open/close condition and then transmits ON/OFF signal to
BCM.

14.

Rear door switch LH

Door switch detects door open/close condition and then transmits ON/OFF signal to
BCM.

Inside key antenna (trunk room)

Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects
whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
not, and then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room)».

Inside key antenna (console)

Inside key antenna (console) detects whether
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and
then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Inside Key Antenna (Console)».

Push button ignition switch

Push-button ignition switch has push switch
inside which detects that push-button ignition
switch is pressed, and then transmits ON/
OFF signal to BCM. BCM changes the ignition switch position with the operation of
push-button ignition switch. BCM maintains
the ignition switch position status while pushbutton ignition switch is not operated.

11.

15.

16.

17.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-8

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
18.

19.

Component

Function

NATS antenna amp.

ID verification is performed between the BCM
and the transponder integrated into the Intelligent Key via the NATS antenna amp.

Remote keyless entry receiver

Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signal and key ID signal of Intelligent Key, and them transmits them to the
BCM.
Refer to DLK-14, «DOOR LOCK SYSTEM :
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver».

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-9

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000009606330

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

ALKIA2976GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine start function of Intelligent Key system makes it possible to start and stop the engine without
using the key, based on the electronic ID verification. The electronic ID verification is performed between
BCM and Intelligent Key when the push-button ignition switch is pressed while the Intelligent Key is within
the detection area of inside key antenna.
NOTE:
The driver should carry the Intelligent Key at all times.
• Intelligent Key has 2 IDs (Intelligent Key ID and NATS ID). It can perform the door lock/unlock operation and
the push-button ignition switch operation when the registered Intelligent Key is carried.
• If the ID is successfully verified, when push-button ignition switch is pressed the engine can be started.
• Up to 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered (Including the standard Intelligent Key) upon request from the customer.
NOTE:
Refer to SEC-13, «NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Description» for any functions other than engine
start function of Intelligent Key system.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
PRECAUTIONS FOR INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
The transponder (the chip for NATS ID verification) is integrated into the Intelligent Key. (For the conventional models, it is integrated into the mechanical key.) Therefore, ID verification cannot be performed by mechanical key only.
In that case, NATS ID verification can be performed when Intelligent Key backside is contacted to
push-button ignition switch while brake pedal is depressed. If verification result is OK, engine can be
started.

OPERATION WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS CARRIED

A

B

C

1.

When the push-button ignition switch is pressed, the BCM activates the inside key antenna and transmits
the request signal to the Intelligent Key.
2. The Intelligent Key receives the request signal and transmits the Intelligent Key ID signal to the BCM.
3. BCM receives the Intelligent Key ID signal via remote keyless entry receiver and verifies it with the registered ID.
4. BCM turns ACC relay ON and transmits the ignition power supply ON signal to IPDM E/R.
5. IPDM E/R turns the ignition relay ON and starts the ignition power supply.
6. IPDM E/R turns the starter control relay ON for engine starting in advance.
7. BCM detects the selector lever position and brake pedal operation condition.
8. BCM transmits the starter request signal to IPDM E/R and turns the starter relay ON if BCM judges that
the engine start condition* is satisfied.
9. Power supply is supplied through the starter relay and the starter control relay to operate the starter motor.
CAUTION:
If a malfunction is detected in the Intelligent Key system, the “KEY” warning lamp on the combination meter illuminates. At that time, the engine cannot be started.
10. When BCM receives feedback signal from ECM indicating that the engine is started, the BCM transmits a
stop signal to IPDM E/R and stops cranking by turning OFF the starter motor relay. (If engine start is
unsuccessful, cranking stops automatically within 5 seconds.)
CAUTION:
When the Intelligent Key is carried outside of the vehicle (inside key antenna detection area) while
the power supply is in the ACC or ON position, even if the engine start condition* is satisfied, the
engine cannot be started.
*: For the engine start condition, refer to “IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION”.

OPERATION RANGE
Engine can be started when Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, sometimes engine may not start
when Intelligent Key is on instrument panel or in glove box.

ENGINE START OPERATION WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS CONTACTED TO PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

When Intelligent Key battery is discharged, NATS ID verification between transponder in Intelligent Key and
BCM is performed when Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while brake pedal
is depressed. If the verification result is OK, engine can be started.

M

IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION

N

The ignition switch position can be changed by the following operations.
NOTE:
• When an Intelligent Key is within the detection area of inside key antenna or when Intelligent Key backside is
contacted to push-button ignition switch, it is equivalent to the operations below.
• When starting the engine, the BCM monitors under the engine start conditions,
— Brake pedal operation condition
— Selector lever position
— Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed: less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)

Revision: April 2013

SEC-11

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Condition
Power supply position

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

Selector lever

Brake pedal operation
condition

OFF → ACC

—

Not depressed

1

OFF → ACC → ON

—

Not depressed

2

OFF → ACC → ON →
OFF

—

Not depressed

3

P or N position

Depressed

1

—

—

1

OFF → START
ACC → START
ON → START
Engine is running →
OFF

Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
Condition
Power supply position
Engine is running →
ACC
Engine stall return operation while driving

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

Selector lever

Brake pedal operation
condition

—

—

Emergency stop operation

N position

Not depressed

1

Emergency stop operation
• Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.
• Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times or more within 1.5 seconds.

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM

Revision: April 2013

SEC-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009606331

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

ALKIA3205GB

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Nissan Anti-Theft System (NATS) prevents the engine from being started by Intelligent Key whose ID is
not registered to the vehicle (BCM). It has higher protection against auto theft involving the duplication of
mechanical keys.
• The ignition key integrated in the Intelligent Key cannot start the engine. When the Intelligent Key battery is
discharged, the NATS ID verification is performed between the transponder integrated with Intelligent Key
and BCM via NATS antenna amp. when the Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition
switch while brake pedal is depressed. If the verification result is OK, the engine start operation can be performed by the push-button ignition switch operation.
• Locate the security indicator lamp and always blinks it when the ignition switch is in any position except ON
to warn that the vehicle is equipped with Nissan Anti-Theft System (NATS).
• Up to 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered (including the standard ignition key) upon request from the owner.
• When replacing ECM, BCM or Intelligent Key, the specified procedure (Initialization and registration) using
CONSULT is required.
• Possible symptom of NATS malfunction is “Engine can not start”. This symptom also occurs because of
other than NATS malfunction, so start the trouble diagnosis according to SEC-58, «Work Flow».
• If ECM other than genuine part is installed, the engine cannot be started.
For ECM replacement procedure, refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».

PRECAUTIONS FOR KEY REGISTRATION
Revision: April 2013

SEC-13

2014 Note

L

M

N

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The ID registration is a procedure that erases the current NATS ID once, and then registers a new ID. Therefore before starting the registration operation, collect all registered Intelligent Keys from the customer.
• When registering the Intelligent Key, perform only one procedure to simultaneously register both IDs (NATS
ID and Intelligent Key ID).

SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
• Security indicator lamp warns that the vehicle is equipped with NATS.
• Security indicator lamp always blinks when the ignition switch is in any position other than ON.
NOTE:
Because security indicator lamp is highly efficient, the battery is barely affected.

ENGINE START OPERATION WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS CONTACTED TO PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
1.

When brake pedal is depressed while selector lever is in the P position the BCM activates NATS antenna
amp. that is located behind push-button ignition switch.
2. When Intelligent Key (transponder built-in) backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch, BCM
starts NATS ID verification between BCM and Intelligent Key (transponder built-in) via NATS antenna
amp.
3. When NATS ID verification result is OK, buzzer in combination meter sounds and BCM transmits the
result to ECM.
4. BCM turns ACC relay ON and transmits ignition power supply ON signal to IPDM E/R.
5. IPDM E/R turns the ignition relay ON and starts the ignition power supply.
6. IPDM E/R turns the starter control relay ON for engine starting in advance.
7. BCM detects that the selector lever position and brake pedal operation condition.
8. BCM transmits starter request signal to IPDM E/R and turns the starter relay ON if BCM judges that the
engine start condition* is satisfied.
9. Power supply is supplied through the starter relay and the starter control relay to operate the starter motor.
10. When BCM receives feedback signal from ECM indicating that the engine is started, BCM transmits a
stop signal to IPDM E/R and stops cranking by turning off the starter motor relay. (If engine start is unsuccessful, cranking stops automatically within 5 seconds.)
*: For the engine start condition, refer to “IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION” below.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION
The ignition switch position can be changed by the following operations.
NOTE:
• When an Intelligent Key is within the detection area of inside key antenna or when Intelligent Key backside is
contacted to push-button ignition switch, it is equivalent to the operations below.
• When starting the engine, the BCM monitors under the engine start conditions,
— Brake pedal operation condition
— Selector lever position
— Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed: less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
Condition
Power supply position

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

Selector lever

Brake pedal operation
condition

OFF → ACC

—

Not depressed

1

OFF → ACC → ON

—

Not depressed

2

OFF → ACC → ON →
OFF

—

Not depressed

3

Revision: April 2013

SEC-14

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Condition
Power supply position
OFF → START
ACC → START
ON → START

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

A

Depressed

1

B

—

1

Selector lever

Brake pedal operation
condition

P or N position

—

Engine is running →
OFF

C

Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
D

Condition
Power supply position

Selector lever
—

—

Emergency stop operation

N position

Not depressed

1

Engine is running →
ACC
Engine stall return operation while driving

Push-button ignition switch
operation frequency

Brake pedal operation
condition

E

F

Emergency stop operation
• Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.

G

• Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times or more within 1.5 seconds.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
H

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009606332

THEFT WARNING ALARM
• The theft warning alarm function activates horns and headlamps intermittently when BCM detects that any
door is opened by unauthorized means while the system is in the ARMED state.
• Security indicator lamp on combination meter always blinks when power supply position is any position other
than ON. Security indicator lamp blinking warns that the vehicle is equipped with a vehicle security system.

I

J

Operation Flow
SEC

L

M

N

JMKIA5416GB

No.
1

2

System state

Switching condition

DISARMED to
PRE-ARMED

When all conditions of A and
one condition of B is satisfied.

PRE-ARMED
to ARMED

When all of the following
conditions are satisfied for
30 seconds.

Revision: April 2013

O

A
• Power supply position: OFF/LOCK
• All doors: Closed

P

B
All doors are locked by:
• Door key cylinder LOCK switch
• LOCK button of Intelligent Key
• Door request switch

• Power supply position: OFF/LOCK
• All doors: Locked

SEC-15

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
3

System state

Switching condition

ARMED to
ALARM

When one condition of A and
one condition of B are satisfied.

A

4

DISARMED to
PRE-RESET

No conditions

5

PRE-ARMED
to PRE-RESET

6

ARMED to
PRE-RESET

7

ALARM to
PRE-RESET

8

PRE-RESET to
DISARMED

9

PRE-RESET to
PRE-ARMED

10

PRE-ARMED
to DISARMED

When one of the following
conditions is satisfied.

•
•
•
•
•

Power supply position: ACC/ON/CRANKING/RUN
Door key cylinder UNLOCK switch: ON
UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key: ON
Door request switch: ON
Any door: Open

11

ARMED to
DISARMED

When one of the following
conditions is satisfied.

12

ALARM to
DISARMED

•
•
•
•

Power supply position: ACC/ON/CRANKING/RUN
Door key cylinder UNLOCK switch: ON
UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key: ON
Door request switch: ON

13

RE-ALARM

When one of the following
conditions is satisfied after
the ALARM operation is finished.

• Any door: Open

Intelligent Key: Not used

B
• Any door: Open

NOTE:
• BCM ignores the door key cylinder UNLOCK switch signal input for 1 second after the door key cylinder LOCK switch signal input.
• To lock/unlock all doors by operating remote controller button of Intelligent Key or door request switch, Intelligent Key must be within
the detection area of outside key antenna. For details, refer to SEC-10, «INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION :
System Description».

DISARMED Phase
The vehicle security system is not set in the DISARMED phase. The vehicle security system stays in this
phase while any door is open because it is assumed that the owner is inside or nearby the vehicle. Security
indicator lamp blinks every 2.4 seconds.
When the vehicle security system is reset, each phase switches to the DISARMED phase directly.
PRE-ARMED Phase
The PRE-ARMED phase is the transient state between the DISARMED phase and the ARMED phase. This
phase is maintained for 30 seconds so that the owner can reset the setting due to a mis-operation. This phase
switches to the ARMED phase when vehicle conditions are not changed for 30 seconds. Security indicator
lamp illuminates while being in this phase.
To reset the PRE-ARMED phase, refer to the switching condition of No. 10 in the table above.
ARMED Phase
The vehicle security system is set and BCM monitors all necessary inputs. If any door is opened without using
Intelligent Key, vehicle security system switches to the ALARM phase. Security indicator lamp blinks every 2.4
seconds.
To reset the ARMED phase, refer to the switching condition of No. 11 in the table above.
ALARM Phase
BCM transmits “Theft Warning Horn Request” signal and “High Beam Request” signal intermittently to IPDM
E/R via CAN communication. In this phase, horns and headlamps are activated intermittently for approximately 50 seconds to warn that the vehicle is accessed by unauthorized means. ON/OFF timing of horns and
headlamps are synchronized. After 50 seconds, the vehicle security system returns to the ARMED phase. At

Revision: April 2013

SEC-16

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
this time, if BCM still detects unauthorized access to the vehicle, the system is switched to the ALARM phase
again. This RE-ALARM operation is carried out a maximum of 2 times.
To cancel the ALARM operation, refer to the switching condition of No. 12 in the table above.
NOTE:
If a battery terminal is disconnected during the ALARM phase, theft warning alarm stops. But when the battery
terminal is reconnected, theft warning alarm is activated again.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009606333

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

INTELLIGENT KEY

Revision: April 2013

SEC-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)

INFOID:0000000009606334

A

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

B

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Main

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of back door request switch.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

C

D

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

BRAKE SW 1 [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of brake switch.

CLUTCH SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of clutch interlock switch.

BRAKE SW 2 [On/Off]

E

Indicates condition of brake switch.

DETE/CANCL SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) position.

SFT PN/N SW [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

F

PUSH SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch received from IPDM E/R on
CAN communication line.

IGN RLY1 -F/B [On/Off]

Indicates condition of ignition relay 1 received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

DETE SW -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of detent switch received from TCM on CAN communication
line.

SFT PN -IPDM [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT P -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of P (park) position from TCM on CAN communication line.

SFT N -MET [On/Off]

Indicates condition of N (neutral) position from IPDM E/R on CAN communication line.

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Start/Crank/Run]

×

Indicates condition of engine state from ECM on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 1 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

VEH SPEED 2 [mph/km/h]

×

Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on
CAN communication line.

DOOR STAT -DR [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of driver side door status.

DOOR STAT -AS [LOCK/READY/UNLK]

×

Indicates condition of passenger side door status.

ID OK FLAG [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of Intelligent Key ID.

PRMT ENG STRT [Set/Reset]

Indicates condition of engine start possibility.
×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.

RKE OPE COUN2 [0-19]

×

When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.
Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-MODE CHG [On/Off]

Indicates condition of mode change signal from Intelligent Key.

SEC-19

I

J

SEC

L

N

O

P

ACTIVE TEST

Revision: April 2013

H

M

RKE OPE COUN1 [0-19]

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

G

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test Item

Description

INSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check combination meter warning chime operation [Take Out/Knob/Key/
Off].

LCD

This test is able to check combination meter display information [Off/LK WN/OUTKEY/NO
KY/BATT/INSRT/SFT P/ROTAT/ID NG/B&P I/B&P N].

BATTERY SAVER

This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].

ENGINE SW ILLUMI

This test is able to check push-button ignition switch START indicator operation [On/Off].

PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR

This test is able to check back door lock actuator operation [On/Off].

INT LAMP

This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].

INDICATOR

This test is able to check combination meter warning lamp operation [KEY ON/KEY IND/Off].

FLASHER

This test is able to check hazard lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

OUTSIDE BUZZER

This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation [On/Off].

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

P RANGE

This test is able to check CVT shift selector illumination operation [On/Off].

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY

ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI

ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK

ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK

HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK

Setting

Description

On*

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key ON.

Off

Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key OFF.

On*

Anti lock out setting ON.

Off

Anti lock out setting OFF.

Off

No buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

On*

Buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.

Horn Chirp

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Buzzer*

Buzzer reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

No reminder when doors are locked with request switch.

Off

Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

On*

No horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.

Lock/Unlock*

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Unlock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Lock Only

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent Key or request switch.

Off

No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
with Intelligent Key or request switch.

HAZARD ANSWER BACK

INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS

—

This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis.

CONFIRM KEY FOB ID

—

Intelligent Key ID code can be checked.
70 msec

SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT

Start

100 msec

Starter motor operation duration time setting.

200 msec
End

LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN

Revision: April 2013

—

On*

Intelligent Key low battery warning ON.

Off

Intelligent Key low battery warning OFF.

SEC-20

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Support Item

Setting

AUTO LOCK SET

MODE7

5 min

MODE6

4 min

MODE5

3 min

Description

A

B

MODE4

2 min

MODE3*

1 min

Auto door lock time setting.

MODE2

30 sec

MODE1

Off

C

*: Initial Setting

D

THEFT ALM
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM — THEFT)

INFOID:0000000009606335

E

DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item

F

Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch LH.

REQ SW -AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door request switch.

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RL [On/Off]

Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.

DOOR SW-BK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of back door switch.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.

G

H

I

J

RKE-LOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.

RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off]

Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

SEC

L

ACTIVE TEST

M

Test Item

Description

VEHICLE SECURITY HORN

This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation [On].

FLASHER

This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

THEFT IND

This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation [On/Off].

HEADLAMP(HI)

This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation [On].

N

O

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item

Setting

THEFT ALM TRG
SECURITY ALARM SET

—

P

Description
Displays status of components that can trigger the theft alarm.

On

Security alarm ON.

Off

Security alarm OFF.

IMMU
Revision: April 2013

SEC-21

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM — IMMU)

INFOID:0000000009606336

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

CONFIRM ID ALL [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID4 [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID3 [Yet/DONE]

Switches to DONE when an Intelligent Key is registered.

CONFIRM ID2 [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID1 [Yet/DONE]
TP 4 [Yet/DONE]
TP 3 [Yet/DONE]
TP 2 [Yet/DONE]

DONE indicates the number of Intelligent Key ID which has been registered.

TP 1 [Yet/DONE]
PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
THEFT IND

Revision: April 2013

Description
This test is able to check security indicator operation [On/Off].

SEC-22

2014 Note

ECM, IPDM E/R, BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

ECM, IPDM E/R, BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009016101

ECU

Reference

C

PCS-13, «Reference Value»
IPDM E/R

B

PCS-18, «Fail-safe»

D

PCS-20, «DTC Index»
EC-62, «Reference Value»
ECM

EC-73, «Fail Safe»

E

EC-74, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
EC-76, «DTC Index»
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

F

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»

G

BCS-46, «DTC Index»

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-23

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009619367

AAKWA0632GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-24

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKWA0633GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-25

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKWA0634GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-26

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKWA0635GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-27

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1265GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-28

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1266GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-29

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1267GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-30

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1268GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-31

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1269GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-32

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1270GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-33

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1271GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-34

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1272GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-35

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1273GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-36

2014 Note

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1274GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-37

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009016102

AAKWA0640GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-38

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKWA0641GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-39

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKWA0642GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-40

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1286GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-41

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1287GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-42

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1288GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-43

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1289GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-44

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1290GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-45

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1291GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-46

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1292GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-47

2014 Note

SECURITY CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1293GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-48

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

NVIS

A

Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009619368

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P
AAKWA0624GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-49

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKWA0625GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-50

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1258GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-51

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1259GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-52

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1260GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-53

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1261GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-54

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1262GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-55

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAKIA1263GB

Revision: April 2013

SEC-56

2014 Note

NVIS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O
AAKIA1264GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-57

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009016103

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

SEC-58

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.

Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.

A

B

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC

C

1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.

D

E

F

3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

G

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

H

>> GO TO 5.

4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM

I

Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.

J

>> GO TO 6.

5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected SEC
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart» (BCM) or PCS-20,
«DTC Index» (IPDM E/R) and determine trouble diagnosis order.
L
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRN
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
O
NO
>> Check intermittent incident.

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: April 2013

SEC-59

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident.

8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.

Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.

9.FINAL CHECK

When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-60

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT

A

ECM
ECM : Description

INFOID:0000000009016104

Performing the following procedure can automatically activate re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only
when the ECM is replaced with a new one*.
*: New one means an ECM that has never been energized on-board.
(In this step, initialization procedure using CONSULT is not necessary)
NOTE:
• When the replaced ECM is not a brand new, the specified procedure (Initialization and registration)
using CONSULT is necessary.
• If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before beginning work.
• Distinguish keys with unregistered key IDs from those with registered IDs.

ECM : Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009016105

1.PERFORM ECM RE-COMMUNICATING FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Install ECM.
Contact backside of registered Intelligent key* to push-button ignition switch, then turn ignition switch ON.
*: To perform this step, use the key that is used before performing ECM replacement.
Maintain ignition switch in the ON position for at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Start the engine.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM

I

Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> Inspection End.

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-61

2014 Note

P1610 LOCK MODE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
P1610 LOCK MODE
Description

INFOID:0000000009567408

ECM forcibly switches to the mode that inhibits engine start, when engine start operation is performed 5 times
or more while communication between ECM and BCM is not normal.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567409

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC P1610 is displayed with other DTC (for BCM or ENGINE), first perform the trouble diagnosis for other
DTC.
DTC No.
P1610

Trouble diagnosis name
LOCK MODE

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

When ECM detects a communication malfunction between
ECM and BCM 5 times or more.

—

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of ENGINE using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-62, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567410

1.CHECK ENGINE START FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Check that DTC except for DTC P1610 is not detected.
If detected, erase the DTC after fixing.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Depress brake pedal and contact the registered Intelligent Key backside to push-button ignition switch,
then wait 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 5 seconds.
Repeat steps 3 and 5 twice (a total of 3 times).
Check that engine can start.
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-62

2014 Note

P1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567411

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

Trouble diagnosis name

P1611

ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM

B
DTC detecting condition
The ID verification results between BCM
and ECM are invalid.

Possible cause

C

• BCM
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of ENGINE using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-63, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

E

F
INFOID:0000000009567412

1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION

G

Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT
Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

1. Select Self Diagnostic Result mode of ENGINE using CONSULT.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC P1611. Refer to SEC-63, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End

3.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.

Replace ECM.
Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM”.
Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-63

2014 Note

P1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567413

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1612 is displayed with DTC U1000 (for BCM), first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000.
Refer to BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC P1612 is displayed with DTC U1010 (for BCM), first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010.
Refer to BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

P1612

Trouble diagnosis name

CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU

DTC detecting condition

Inactive communication between ECM
and BCM

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• BCM
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of ENGINE using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-64, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567414

1.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Does the engine start?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ECM

1.
2.

Replace ECM.
Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM”.
Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-64

2014 Note

B2192 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2192 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567415

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2192

Trouble diagnosis name
ID DISCORD BCM-ECM

B
DTC detecting condition
The ID verification results between
BCM and ECM are NG.

Possible cause

C

• BCM
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-65, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

E

F
INFOID:0000000009567416

1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION

G

Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT
Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT

1. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B2192. Refer to SEC-65, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End

3.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with registered Intelligent Key?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.

Replace ECM.
Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM”.
Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-65

2014 Note

B2193 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2193 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567417

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2193 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2193 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B2193

Trouble diagnosis name

CHAIN OF BCM-ECM

DTC detecting condition

Inactive communication between BCM
and ECM

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• BCM
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-66, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567418

1.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
Does the engine start?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.REPLACE ECM

1.
2.

Replace ECM.
Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM”.
Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-66

2014 Note

B2195 ANTI-SCANNING
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2195 ANTI-SCANNING

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567419

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2195

B

Trouble diagnosis name
ANTI-SCANNING

DTC detecting condition
ID verification between BCM and ECM that is
out of the specified specification is detected.

Possible cause
ID verification request out of the
specified specification

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SEC-67, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

C

E

F
INFOID:0000000009567420

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT 1

G

1. Select Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B2195. Refer to SEC-67, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

I

2.CHECK EQUIPMENT OF THE VEHICLE

J

Check that unspecified accessory part related to engine start is not installed.
Is unspecified accessory part related to engine start installed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

SEC

3.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT 2
1.

Obtain the customers approval to remove unspecified accessory part related to engine start, and then
remove it.
2. Select Self Diagnostic Result of BCM using CONSULT.
3. Erase DTC.
4. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B2195. Refer to SEC-67, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Inspection End.

L

M

N

4.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.

O

P

>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-67

2014 Note

B2198 NATS ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2198 NATS ANTENNA AMP.
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567424

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

B2198

Trouble diagnosis name

NATS ANTENNA AMP

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

Inactive communication between NATS
antenna amp. and BCM is detected when
BCM enters in the low power consumption
mode (BCM sleep condition)

• Harness or connectors
(NATS antenna amp. circuit is open or
shorted.)
• NATS antenna amp.
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.

Make the conditions that BCM enters in the low power consumption mode (BCM sleep condition).
Refer to BCS-13, «POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-68, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567425

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-49, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSE
1.
2.

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in IPDM E/R is not blown.
Signal name

Fuse No.

Battery power supply

53 (20 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.

2.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.

Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector.
Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground.
(+)
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

Terminal

M21

1

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and NATS antenna amp. connector.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-68

2014 Note

B2198 NATS ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R

NATS antenna amp.

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

35

M21

1

Continuity
Yes

A

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

C

4.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground.
D
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

Terminal

M21

4

Continuity

Ground

E

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

F

5.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1
Check voltage signal between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.

G

(+)
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

H

Terminal

I

M21

2

Intelligent Key: Intelligent
Key battery is removed

Ground

Brake pedal: Depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each time
when brake pedal is depressed

J

JMKIA6232JP

Brake pedal: Not depressed

12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

SEC

L

6.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.

NATS antenna amp.

3.

M

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and BCM connector.
BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M21

2

M18

21

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground.
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

Terminal

M21

2

Ground

No

7.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 2
SEC-69

O

P

Continuity

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

N

2014 Note

B2198 NATS ANTENNA AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check voltage signal between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Terminal

M21

3

Intelligent Key: Intelligent
Key battery is removed

Ground

Brake pedal: Depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each time
when brake pedal is depressed
JMKIA6233JP

Brake pedal: Not depressed

12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace NATS antenna amp. Refer to SEC-121, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 2
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and BCM connector.
NATS antenna amp.

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M21

3

M18

25

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector and ground.
NATS antenna amp.
Connector

Terminal

M21

3

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

9.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End

Revision: April 2013

SEC-70

2014 Note

B2555 STOP LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2555 STOP LAMP

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567426

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

B2555

B

Trouble diagnosis name

STOP LAMP CIRCUIT

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM makes a comparison between the
upper voltage and lower voltage of stop
lamp switch. It judges from their values to
detect the malfunctioning circuit.

• Harness or connectors
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Stop lamp switch
• Fuse
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

D

E

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Depress brake pedal and wait 1 second or more.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-71, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

F

G
INFOID:0000000009567427

H

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».
I

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

J

SEC

(+)
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

105

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

L

Is the inspection normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Check 10 A fuse [No. 30, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
NO-2 >> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse.

M

2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

N

Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.

O

(+)
Stop lamp switch
Connector
E13 (CVT)
E57 (MT)

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Terminal
1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-71

2014 Note

P

B2555 STOP LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL 2
1.
2.

Connect stop lamp switch connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M18

9

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

Ground

Brake pedal

Depressed

Battery voltage

Not depressed

0

Is the inspecting result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End.

5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Stop lamp switch
Connector
E13 (CVT)
E57 (MT)

3.

BCM
Terminal

Connector

Terminal

2

M18

9

Continuity

Yes

Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch
Connector
E13 (CVT)
E57 (MT)

Terminal

Continuity
Ground

2

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

Refer to SEC-72, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567428

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-72

2014 Note

B2555 STOP LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals.
Stop lamp switch

Condition

Terminal
1

A

2

Brake pedal

Continuity
Not depressed

No

Depressed

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, «Exploded View».

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-73

2014 Note

B2556 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2556 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567429

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

B2556

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Push-button ignition switch circuit is
shorted.)
• Push-button ignition switch
• BCM

BCM detects the push-button ignition switch
stuck at ON for 100 seconds or more.

ENG START SW

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press push-button ignition switch under the following condition.
Brake pedal: Not depressed
2. Release push-button ignition switch and wait 100 seconds or more.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-74, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567430

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

8

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Push-button ignition switch

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M25

8

M98

76

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

8

Revision: April 2013

Ground

Continuity
No

SEC-74

2014 Note

B2556 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

A

3.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.

B

C

>> Inspection End.

4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

D

Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector

Terminal

M25

4

Ground

Continuity
Yes

E

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

G

5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Refer to SEC-75, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to SEC-122, «Removal and Installation».

H

6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

I

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
J

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567431

1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch terminals.
Condition

Terminal
8

L

M

Push-button ignition switch

4

SEC

Push-button ignition
switch

Continuity
Pressed

Yes

Not pressed

No

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to SEC-122, «Removal and Installation».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-75

2014 Note

B2557 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2557 VEHICLE SPEED
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567432

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2557 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2557 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B2557

Trouble diagnosis name

VEHICLE SPEED

DTC detecting condition

Possible causes

BCM detects one of the following conditions for 10
seconds continuously.
• Vehicle speed signal from “combination meter”
is 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more and vehicle
speed signal from “ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)” is 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or less
• Vehicle speed signal from “combination meter”
is 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or less and vehicle speed
signal from “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” is 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start engine and wait 10 seconds or more.
2. Drive the vehicle at a vehicle speed of 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) or more for 10 seconds or more.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-76, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567433

1.CHECK DTC OF “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of ABS using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of METER/M&A using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-76

2014 Note

B2601 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2601 SHIFT POSITION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567434

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B2601 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2601 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B2601

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detecting condition

• Harness or connectors
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
[CVT shift selector (park position
switch) circuit is open or shorted.]
• IPDM E/R
• BCM

When there is a difference between P range
signal from CVT shift selector (park position
switch) and P position signal from IPDM E/R
(CAN).

SHIFT P SIGNAL

D

Possible cause

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

E

F

G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
3. Shift the selector lever to any position other than P and wait 2 seconds or more.
4. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-77, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

I

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567435

J

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR CIRCUIT (BCM)

L

1.
2.
3.
4.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector (park position switch) connector.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and BCM harness
connector.

N
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

5.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

8

M18

37

Continuity
Yes

O

Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
P

CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

8

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-77

2014 Note

B2601 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

8

E47

80

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B2601. Refer to SEC-77, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC B2601 detected again?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-78

2014 Note

B2602 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2602 SHIFT POSITION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567436

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B2602 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2602 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B2602

Trouble diagnosis name

SHIFT P DIAG

DTC detecting condition

BCM detects the following status for 10 seconds.
• Selector lever is in the P position
• Vehicle speed is 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
• Ignition switch is in the ON position

D

Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
[CVT shift selector (park position
switch) circuit is open or shorted.]
• CVT shift selector (park position
switch)
• Combination meter

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more for 10 seconds or more.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-79, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Diagnosis Procedure

I

INFOID:0000000009567437

J

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

L

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of ABS using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BRC-26, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

M

2.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER

N

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of METER/M&A using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector (park position switch) connector.
Check voltage between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-79

2014 Note

O

P

B2602 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

12

CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

7

M98

104

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

7

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

5.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End.

6.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

8

M18

37

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

8

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PARK POSITION SWITCH)

Refer to SEC-81, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

SEC-80

2014 Note

B2602 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».

A

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

B

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567438

1.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PARK POSITION SWITCH)
1.
2.
3.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) terminals.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Terminal

7

8

Condition

Selector lever: P position

Selector button: Released
Selector button: Pressed

Selector lever: Other than P position

C

E
Continuity

F

No
Yes

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-81

2014 Note

B2603 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2603 SHIFT POSITION
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567439

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2603 is displayed with DTC B2601, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC B2601. Refer to
SEC-77, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B2603

Trouble diagnosis name

SHIFT POSITION

DTC detecting condition

BCM detects the following status when ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• Transmission range switch signal: approx. 0 V
• CVT shift selector (park position switch) signal: approx. 0 V

Possible causes
• Harness or connector
[CVT shift selector (park position
switch) circuit is open or shorted.]
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switch circuit is
open or shorted.)
• CVT shift selector (park position
switch)
• Transmission range switch
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 1 second or more.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-82, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 2

1. Shift the selector lever to the position other than P and N, and wait 1 second or more.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-82, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567440

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.INSPECTION START
Perform inspection in accordance with procedure that confirms DTC.
Which procedure confirms DTC?
DTC confirmation procedure 1>>GO TO 2.
DTC confirmation procedure 2>>GO TO 8.

2.CHECK FUSE

1.
2.

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in IPDM E/R is not blown.
Signal name

Fuse No.

Ignition power supply

49 (10 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

SEC-82

2014 Note

B2603 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.

A

3.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector and ground.

B

C

(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Transmission range switch
Connector

Terminal

F52

7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

E

4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Transmission range switch

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F52

7

E45

21

Continuity

SEC

(+)
BCM

(–)

M98

102

Condition

Ground

Selector lever

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

P or N position

Battery voltage

Other than above

0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

M

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Transmission range switch

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F52

10

M98

102

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

L

N

6.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

H

J

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect transmission range switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

Terminal

G

I

5.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

Connector

F

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
1.
2.
3.
4.

D

SEC-83

2014 Note

P

B2603 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Refer to SEC-85, «Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Replace transmission range switch.

8.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector (park position switch) connector.
Check voltage between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
(+)
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

7

(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

12

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> GO TO 9.

9.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

7

M98

104

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

7

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

10.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)

3.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M38

8

M18

37

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) harness connector and ground.
CVT shift selector (park position switch)
Connector

Terminal

M38

8

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

SEC-84

2014 Note

B2603 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

A

11.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PARK POSITION SWITCH)
Refer to SEC-85, «Component Inspection [CVT Shift Selector (Park Position Switch)]».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».

B

C

12.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

D

>> Inspection End.

13.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

E

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.

F

>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)

INFOID:0000000009567441

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

H

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch terminals.
Transmission range switch
Terminal
7

10

I

Condition

Continuity

P or N position

Yes

Other than above

No

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace transmission range switch.

SEC

Component Inspection [CVT Shift Selector (Park Position Switch)]

INFOID:0000000009567442

1.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (DETENTION SWITCH)
1.
2.
3.

Terminal

7

8

Condition

Selector lever: P position

Selector button: Released
Selector button: Pressed

Selector lever: Other than P position

N
Continuity

O

No
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

SEC-85

L

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector (park position switch) terminals.
CVT shift selector (detention switch)

G

2014 Note

P

B2604 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2604 SHIFT POSITION
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567443

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B2604 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2604 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B2604

Trouble diagnosis name

SHIFT PN DIAG CAN

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

The following states are detected for 5 seconds
while ignition switch is ON.
• P/N position signal is sent from transmission
range switch but shift position signal input
(CAN) from TCM is other than P and N
• P/N position signal is not sent from transmission range switch but shift position signal input
(CAN) from TCM is P or N

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is
open or shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switch circuit
is open or shorted.)
• TCM
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 5 seconds or more.
3. Shift the selector lever to the N position and wait 5 seconds or more.
4. Shift the selector lever to any position other than P and N, and wait 5 seconds or more.
5. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-86, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567444

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF TCM
Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of TCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK FUSE

1.
2.

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in IPDM E/R is not blown.
Signal name

Fuse No.

Ignition power supply

49 (10 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.

3.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.

Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-86

2014 Note

B2604 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector and ground.
A
(+)
Transmission range switch

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

(–)

Connector

Terminal

F52

7

Ground

B

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

C

4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

D

1.
2.
3.

E

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Transmission range switch

IPDM E/R

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F52

7

E45

21

Continuity

F

Yes

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

5.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL

H

1.
2.
3.
4.

I

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Reconnect transmission range switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

J

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Terminal

M98

SEC

102

Ground

Selector lever

P or N position

Battery voltage

Other than above

0

L

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

M

1.
2.
3.
4.

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Transmission range switch

5.

O

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F52

10

M98

102

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector and ground.
Transmission range switch
Connector

Terminal

F52

10

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

SEC-87

2014 Note

P

B2604 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Refer to SEC-88, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace transmission range switch.

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End.

9.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567445

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch terminals.
Transmission range switch
Terminal
7

10

Condition

Continuity

P or N position

Yes

Other than above

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace transmission range switch.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-88

2014 Note

B2605 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2605 SHIFT POSITION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567446

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B2605 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2605 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B2605

Trouble diagnosis name

SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM

D

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

When ignition switch is ON, P/N position
signal input from transmission range switch
and P/N position signal (CAN) input from
IPDM E/R do not match.

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switch circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switch
• IPDM E/R
• BCM

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Shift the selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 1 second or more.
3. Shift the selector lever to the N position and wait 1 second or more.
4. Shift the selector lever to any position other than P and N, and wait 1 second or more.
5. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-89, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009567447

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».
L

1.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

M

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
(+)
IPDM E/R

(–)

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

Condition

Ground

Selector lever

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

P or N position

Battery voltage

Other than above

0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.

Revision: April 2013

O

P

2.CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

N

SEC-89

2014 Note

B2605 SHIFT POSITION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and transmission range switch harness connector.
IPDM E/R

5.

Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

F52

10

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F42

40

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
1.

Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M98

102

Condition

Ground

Selector lever

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

P or N position

Battery voltage

Other than above

0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and transmission range switch harness connector.
BCM

5.

Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M98

102

F52

10

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M98

102

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

5.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the
on-screen instructions.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for B2605. Refer to SEC-89, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC B2605 detected again?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Inspection End.
Revision: April 2013

S E C -9 0

2014 Note

B2608 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2608 STARTER RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567448

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B2608 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2608 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2608 is displayed with other DTC (BCM), first perform the trouble diagnosis for other DTC detected.

C

DTC No.

B2608

Trouble diagnosis name

STARTER RELAY

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM outputs starter relay OFF signal but
BCM receives starter relay ON signal from
IPDM E/R (CAN).

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(Starter relay circuit is open or shorted.)
• IPDM E/R
• Starter relay

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

E

F

G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press push-button ignition switch under the following conditions to start engine.
Selector lever: In the P position
Brake pedal: Depressed
2. Wait 1 second after engine started.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-91, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I

J
INFOID:0000000009567449

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».
L

1.CHECK DTC OF IPDM E/R
Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK STARTER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

M

N

O

(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M98

97

Ground

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Condition

CVT selector lever

N or P position
Other than above

Battery voltage
0

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-91

2014 Note

P

B2608 STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter relay.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between starter relay harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Starter relay

5.

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E41

1

M98

97

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between starter relay harness connector and ground.
Starter relay
Connector

Terminal

E41

1

Ground

Continuity
No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK STARTER RELAY

Refer to SEC-92, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace starter relay.

5.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for B2605. Refer to SEC-89, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC B2605 detected again?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009567450

1.CHECK STARTER RELAY
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter relay.
Check continuity between starter relay terminals.
Starter relay

Condition

Terminal
3

5

Continuity

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace starter relay.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-92

2014 Note

B260F ENGINE STATUS
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B260F ENGINE STATUS

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009567451

BCM receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication.

DTC Logic

B
INFOID:0000000009567452

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C

NOTE:
• If DTC B260F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B260F is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

D

DTC No.

B260F

Trouble diagnosis name

ECM CAN COMM

E

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM has not yet received the engine status
signal from ECM when ignition switch is in
the ON position.

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-93, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I
INFOID:0000000009567453

J

1.INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
3. Touch ERASE.
4. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B260F. Refer to SEC-93, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.REPLACE ECM
1.
2.

F

SEC

L

M

Replace ECM.
Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation».
Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM”.
Refer to EC-111, «Work Procedure».

N

>> Inspection End.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-93

2014 Note

B261F ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B261F ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009606317

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B261F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B261F is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B261F

CONSULT screen items
(Trouble diagnosis content)

ASCD CNCL/CLTCH SW
(ASCD clutch interlock
switch)

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM detects the following status for 10 seconds
3 times
• Clutch interlock switch input: 0 V
• Vehicle speed: 40 km/h (24.8 MPH) or more

• Harness or connectors.
(CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• Harness or connectors.
(Clutch interlock switch circuit is
open or shorted)
• Clutch interlock switch
• Combination meter
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 40 km/h (24.8 MPH) or more for 10 seconds.
3. Decrease the vehicle speed to below 40 km/h (24.8 MPH).
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of 3 times).
5. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-94, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009606318

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER
Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “METER/M&A” using CONSULT.
Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK FUSE

1.
2.

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in the fuse block (J/B) is not blown.
Signal name

Fuse No.

Ignition power supply

10 (10 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-94

2014 Note

B261F ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.

A

Disconnect clutch interlock switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between clutch interlock switch harness connector and ground.

B

(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Clutch interlock switch
Connector

Terminal

E34

1

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.

C

E

Connect clutch interlock switch connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

F

(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M98

101

Condition

Ground

Clutch pedal

Voltage

Released

6 – 16 V

Depressed

0 – 1.5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

G

H

I

5.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.

SEC

>> Inspection End

6.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

J

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between clutch interlock switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Clutch interlock switch

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E34

2

M98

101

L

M

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

N

O

7.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
P

Refer to SEC-96, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace clutch interlock switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Revision: April 2013

SEC-95

2014 Note

B261F ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
>> Inspection End

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009606319

1.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect clutch interlock switch connector.
Check continuity between clutch interlock switch terminals.
Clutch interlock switch

Condition

Terminal
1

2

Clutch pedal

Continuity
Not depressed

No

Depressed

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace clutch interlock switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

SEC-96

2014 Note

B2620 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2620 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009606320

NOTE:
• If DTC B2620 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B2620 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

B

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

B2620

D

CONSULT screen items
(Trouble diagnosis content)

NEUTRAL SW
(Neutral switch)

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM detects the following status for 10 seconds 3 times
• Park/neutral position switch input: Battery
voltage
• Vehicle speed: 40 km/h (24.8 MPH) or more

• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• Harness or connector
(Park/neutral position switch circuit
is open or shorted)
• Park/neutral position switch
• Combination meter
• BCM

E

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H

1. Start the engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 40 km/h (24.8 MPH) or more for 10 seconds.
3. Decrease the vehicle speed to below 40 km/h (24.8 MPH).
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of 3 times).
5. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-97, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009606321

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-49, «Wiring Diagram».

L

1.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER

M

Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “METER/M&A” using CONSULT.
Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

N

2.CHECK FUSE
1.
2.

O

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in the fuse block (J/B) is not blown.

P

Signal name

Fuse No.

Ignition power supply

3 (10 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-97

2014 Note

B2620 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between park/neutral position switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Park/neutral position switch
Connector

Terminal

F24

2

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect park/neutral position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM

(–)

Connector

Terminal

M98

102

Condition

Ground

Shift lever

Voltage

Neutral position

Battery voltage

Except neutral position

0 – 1.5 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

5.REPLACE BCM

1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End

6.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between park/neutral position switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Park/neutral position switch

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F24

3

M98

102

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Refer to SEC-99, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace park/neutral position switch. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

SEC-98

2014 Note

B2620 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

A

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End

B

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009606322

1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

C

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector.
Check continuity between park/neutral position switch terminals.
Park/neutral position switch

Condition

Terminal
2

3

Shift lever

D

Continuity

Neutral position

Yes

Except neutral position

No

E

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace park/neutral position switch. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and Installation».

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-99

2014 Note

B26E8 CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26E8 CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009606323

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.

B26E8

CONSULT screen items
(Trouble diagnosis content)

CLUTCH SW
(Clutch switch)

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM detects the following conditions for 2
seconds or more.
• Clutch pedal position switch: ON
(Clutch pedal is released)
• Clutch interlock switch: ON
(Clutch pedal is depressed)

• Harness or connector
(Clutch interlock switch circuit is
open or shorted)
• Harness or connector
(Clutch pedal position switch circuit
is open or shorted)
• Clutch interlock switch
• Clutch pedal position switch
• BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 1
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Wait 2 seconds or more under the following conditions.
Shift lever: In the neutral position.
Clutch pedal: Depressed
3. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-100, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE 2

1. Release clutch pedal and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-100, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009634425

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF COMBINATION METER
Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “METER/M&A” using CONSULT.
Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK FUSE

1.
2.

Turn power switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse in the fuse block (J/B) is not blown.
Signal name

Fuse No.

Ignition power supply

10 (10 A)

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

SEC-100

2014 Note

B26E8 CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the cause of blowing.

A

3.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect clutch interlock switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between clutch interlock switch harness connector and ground.

B

C

(+)
(–)

Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

Clutch interlock switch
Connector

Terminal

E34

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

E

4.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.

F

Connect clutch interlock switch connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

G

(+)
BCM
Connector

(–)

Condition

Voltage

Terminal

M98

101

Ground

Clutch pedal

Released

6 – 16 V

Depressed

0 – 1.5 V

5.REPLACE BCM

J

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSEC
SULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
>> Inspection End

L

6.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

H

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

1.
2.

D

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between clutch interlock switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Clutch interlock switch

BCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E34

2

M98

101

Continuity

N

Yes

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

7.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

P

Refer to SEC-96, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Replace clutch interlock switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Revision: April 2013

M

SEC-101

2014 Note

B26E8 CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End

Component Inspection (Clutch Interlock Switch)

INFOID:0000000009606325

1.CHECK CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect clutch interlock switch connector.
Check continuity between clutch interlock switch terminals.
Clutch interlock switch

Condition

Terminal
1

2

Clutch pedal

Continuity

Depressed

Yes

Not depressed

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End
NO
>> Replace clutch interlock switch. Refer to CL-10, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

SEC-102

2014 Note

B26F3 STARTER CONTROL RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F3 STARTER CONTROL RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567454

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B26F3 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B26F3 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B26F3

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

D

BCM requests IPDM E/R to turn starter
control relay OFF, but BCM cannot receive
starter control relay OFF state signal from
IPDM E/R (CAN).

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• IPDM E/R

E

Trouble diagnosis name

START CONT RLY ON

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Press push-button ignition switch under the following conditions to start engine.
Selector lever: In the P position
Brake pedal: Not depressed
2. Wait 2 seconds after engine started.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-103, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

G

H

I
INFOID:0000000009567455

1.CHECK DTC OF IPDM E/R

J

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the diagnosis procedure related to the detected DTC. Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

SEC

L

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
M

>> Inspection End.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-103

2014 Note

B26F4 STARTER CONTROL RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F4 STARTER CONTROL RELAY
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567456

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B26F4 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B26F4 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B26F4

Trouble diagnosis name

START CONT RLY OFF

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

BCM requests IPDM E/R to turn starter
control relay ON, but BCM cannot receive
starter control relay ON state signal from
IPDM E/R (CAN).

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• IPDM E/R

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.

Press push-button ignition switch under the following conditions to start engine, and wait 1 second or
more.
Selector lever: In the P position
Brake pedal: Not depressed
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-104, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567457

1.CHECK DTC OF IPDM E/R
Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the diagnosis procedure related to the detected DTC. Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-104

2014 Note

B26F7 BCM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26F7 BCM

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567458

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B26F7

B

Trouble diagnosis name
BCM

DTC detecting condition
Inside key antenna output circuit in BCM is malfunctioning.

Possible cause

C

BCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1. Press door request switch.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-105, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

E

F
INFOID:0000000009567459

1.INSPECTION START

G

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
3. Touch ERASE.
4. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B26F7. Refer to SEC-105, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC B26F7 detected again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

H

I

J

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
SEC
>> Inspection End.
L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-105

2014 Note

B26FB CLUTCH SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26FB CLUTCH SWITCH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009606327

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC B26FB is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B26FB is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, «DTC Logic».
DTC No.

B26FB

CONSULT screen items
(Trouble diagnosis content)
CLUTCH SWITCH
(Clutch switch)

DTC detecting condition
BCM receives the abnormal signal of clutch
pedal position switch from ECM via CAN
communication.

Possible cause
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is
open or shorted)
• ECM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-106, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009606328

1.INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select Self diagnostic result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
3. Touch ERASE.
4. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for DTC B26FB. Refer to SEC-106, «DTC Logic».
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End

2.REPLACE ECM

Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, «Removal and Installation»
>> Inspection End

Revision: April 2013

SEC-106

2014 Note

B26FC KEY REGISTRATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B26FC KEY REGISTRATION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567460

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B26FC

B

Trouble diagnosis name
KEY REGISTRATION

DTC detecting condition
Intelligent Key that does not match the vehicle is
registered.

Possible cause
• Improper registration operation
• Intelligent Key
• BCM

C

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

1.

Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-107, «Diagnosis Procedure»
NO
>> Inspection End.

E

Diagnosis Procedure

G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

INFOID:0000000009567461

1.REPLACE INTELLIGENT KEY
1.
2.

Prepare Intelligent Key that matches the vehicle.
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

F

H

I

J

2.REPLACE BCM
1.
2.

Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
SEC
Perform initialization of BCM and registration of all Intelligent Keys using CONSULT. Refer to the CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-screen instructions.
L

>> Inspection End.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-107

2014 Note

B210B STARTER CONTROL RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B210B STARTER CONTROL RELAY
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567462

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
If DTC B210B is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BCS57, «DTC Logic».
CONSULT Display

START CONT RLY ON
[B210B]

DTC Detection Condition
When comparing the following items, IPDM E/R
detects that starter control relay is stuck in the
ON position for 1 second or more.
• Starter control relay signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter control relay and starter relay status
signal (IPDM E/R input)
• Starter control relay control signal (IPDM E/R
output)
• Transmission range switch signal input

Possible Cause

IPDM E/R

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B210B displayed?
YES >> Refer to SEC-108, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567463

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B210B CRNT?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

Revision: April 2013

SEC-108

2014 Note

B210C STARTER CONTROL RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B210C STARTER CONTROL RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567464

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B210C is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• When IPDM E/R power supply voltage is low (Approx. 7 — 8 V for about 1 second), the DTC B210C may be
detected.

C

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

STR CONT RLY OFF CIRC
[B210C]

D

Possible Cause

When comparing the following items, IPDM E/R
detects that starter control relay is stuck in the
OFF position for 1 second or more.
• Starter control relay signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter control relay and starter relay status
signal (IPDM E/R input)
• Starter control relay control signal (IPDM E/R
output)

E
• IPDM E/R
• BCM
• Battery

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B210C displayed?
YES >> Refer to SEC-109, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567465

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».
L

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B210C CRNT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

M

2.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUITS VOLTAGE

N

Check voltage between IPDM E/R connectors and ground.
O

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E44 (WITH M/T)

13

F42 (WITH CVT)

40

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO (WITH M/T)>>GO TO 3.
NO (WITH CVT)>>GO TO 4.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-109

2014 Note

P

B210C STARTER CONTROL RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E44 and clutch interlock switch connector E34.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E44 and clutch interlock switch connector E34.
IPDM E/R

3.
4.

Clutch interlock switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E44

13

E34

2

Continuity
Yes

Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E44 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E44

13

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector F42 and transmission range switch connector F52.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector F42 and transmission range switch connector F52.
IPDM E/R

3.
4.

Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

F52

10

Continuity
Yes

Disconnect BCM connector M98.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector F42 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F42

40

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-110

2014 Note

B210D STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B210D STARTER RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567466

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
If DTC B210D is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BCS57, «DTC Logic».

C

CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

Possible Cause

When comparing the following items, IPDM E/R
detects that starter control relay is stuck in the
ON position for 5 second or more.
• Starter control relay signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter control relay and starter relay status
signal (IPDM E/R input)
• Starter control relay control signal (IPDM E/R
output)

STARTER RLY ON CIRC
[B210D]

D
• Harness or connectors (starter motor relay
control circuit open or short)
• IPDM E/R
• BCM

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

G

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B210D displayed?
YES >> Refer to SEC-111, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

H

I

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567467

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

J

SEC

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

L

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B210D CRNT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

M

2.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUITS VOLTAGE
Check voltage between IPDM E/R connectors and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E44

13

F42

40

N
Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO (WITH M/T)>>GO TO 3.
NO (WITH CVT)>>GO TO 4.

3.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors E44, BCM connector M98, clutch interlock switch connector E34.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-111

O

2014 Note

B210D STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E44 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E44

13

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to SEC-91, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors F42, BCM connector M98, transmission range switch connector F52.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector F42 and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F42

40

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to SEC-91, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-112

2014 Note

B210E STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B210E STARTER RELAY

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567469

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
• If DTC B210E is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, «DTC Logic».
• If DTC B210E is displayed with DTC B2605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC B2605. Refer to
SEC-89, «DTC Logic».
• When IPDM E/R power supply voltage is low (Approx. 7 — 8 V for about 1 second), the DTC B210F may be
detected.
CONSULT Display

DTC Detection Condition

D

Possible Cause

E

When comparing the following items, IPDM E/R
detects that starter control relay is stuck in the
OFF position for 5 second or more.
• Starter control relay signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) from BCM
• Starter control relay and starter relay status
signal (IPDM E/R input)
• Starter control relay control signal (IPDM E/R
output)

STARTER RELAY OFF
[B210E]

C

• IPDM E/R
• BCM
• Battery

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION

H

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait 1 second or more.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC B210E displayed?
YES >> Refer to SEC-113, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567470

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

L

1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

M

Perform Self Diagnostic Result of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is display history of DTC B210E CRNT?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

N

2.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUITS VOLTAGE

O

Check voltage between IPDM E/R connectors and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E44

13

F42

40

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

—

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO (WITH M/T)>>GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

SEC-113

2014 Note

P

B210E STARTER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO (WITH CVT)>>GO TO 4.

3.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E44 and clutch interlock switch connector E34.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E44 and clutch interlock switch connector E34.
IPDM E/R

Clutch interlock switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E44

13

E34

2

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK STARTER CONTROL RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector F42 and transmission range switch connector F52.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector F42 and transmission range switch connector F52.
IPDM E/R

Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

F52

10

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-114

2014 Note

B210F SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B210F SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567472

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
If DTC B210F is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BCS57, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B210F

Trouble diagnosis name

INTRLCK/PNP SW ON

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

IPDM E/R detects a difference between the
following signals
• P/N position signal from transmission
range switch and P/N position signal
(CAN) from BCM

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switch circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switch
• IPDM E/R
• BCM

D

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Shift selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 1 second or more.
3. Shift selector lever to the N position and wait 1 second or more.
4. Shift selector lever to the position other than P and N, and wait 1 second or more.
5. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-115, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I

INFOID:0000000009567473

J

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF BCM

L

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

M

2.CHECK IPDM E/R SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

IPDM E/R

5.

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and transmission range switch harness connector.
Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

F52

10

P
Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-115

O

2014 Note

B210F SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F42

40

(–)

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-116

2014 Note

B2110 SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B2110 SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009567474

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

B

NOTE:
If DTC B2110 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to BCS57, «DTC Logic».

C

DTC No.

B210F

Trouble diagnosis name

INTRLCK/PNP SW OFF

DTC detecting condition

Possible cause

IPDM E/R detects a difference between the
following signals
• P/N position signal from transmission
range switch and P/N position signal
(CAN) from BCM

• Harness or connectors
(The CAN communication line is open
or shorted.)
• Harness or connectors
(Transmission range switch circuit is
open or shorted.)
• Transmission range switch
• IPDM E/R
• BCM

D

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

1. Shift selector lever to the P position.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 1 second or more.
3. Shift selector lever to the N position and wait 1 second or more.
4. Shift selector lever to the position other than P and N, and wait 1 second or more.
5. Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of IPDM E/R using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to SEC-117, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I

INFOID:0000000009567475

J

SEC

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to SEC-24, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK DTC OF BCM

L

Check DTC in Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

M

2.CHECK IPDM E/R SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN AND SHORT
1.
2.
3.
4.

IPDM E/R

5.

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and transmission range switch harness connector.
Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F42

40

F52

10

P
Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-117

O

2014 Note

B2110 SHIFT POSITION/CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

F42

40

(–)

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-118

2014 Note

ENGINE DOES NOT START WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS INSIDE OF VEHICLE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE DOES NOT START WHEN INTELLIGENT KEY IS INSIDE OF VEHICLE
Description

A

B

INFOID:0000000009567487

Engine does not start when push-button ignition switch is pressed while carrying Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and
check each symptom.
• The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system, and NATS-IVIS/NVIS in the Intelligent Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. The vehicle security function can operate only when the door lock and power distribution system are operating normally.

C

Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)

E

• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” setting in “WORK SUPPORT” mode of “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” is ON.
• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.

Diagnosis Procedure

D

F

INFOID:0000000009567488

1.PERFORM WORK SUPPORT

G

Perform “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “Work Support” mode of “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Refer to BCS-21, «INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM — INTELLIGENT KEY)».

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT

I

Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM”, and check whether or not DTC of inside key antenna is
detected.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Check push-button ignition switch.
Refer to SEC-75, «Component Inspection».
Is the operation normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

J

SEC

L

M

4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> GO TO 1.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-119

2014 Note

SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON OR BLINK
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON OR BLINK
Description

INFOID:0000000009567489

Security indicator lamp does not blink when power supply position is other than the ON position.
NOTE:
• Before performing the diagnosis, perform “Work Flow”. Refer to SEC-58, «Work Flow».
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and
check each symptom.

Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)
Power supply position is other than the ON position.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009567490

1.CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
Check security indicator lamp.
Refer to SEC-15, «VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Description».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION

Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> GO TO 1.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-120

2014 Note

NATS ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

NATS ANTENNA AMP.
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009541301

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-21, «Removal and Installation».
Release pawls and remove NATS antenna amp. (1).
: Pawl

C

D

E

F
ALKIA3179ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and «SELFDIAG RESULTS» on CONSULT screen will show «LOCK MODE» or «CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY».
• Initialization is not necessary when only the NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one.

G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-121

2014 Note

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009541302

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove NATS antenna amp. Refer to SEC-121, «Removal and Installation».
Release pawls and remove push-button ignition switch (1).
: Pawl

ALKIA3180ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

SEC-122

2014 Note

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Removal and Installation

A
INFOID:0000000009541303

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

B

Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector (A) from remote keyless entry
receiver (1).
Remove screw (B) and remove remote keyless entry receiver.

C

D

E

ALKIA3178ZZ

INSTALLATION

F

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

H

I

J

SEC

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SEC-123

2014 Note

RESTRAINTS

SECTION

SR

SRS AIRBAG

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Removal and Installation …………………………………..12

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

SPIRAL CABLE ………………………………………… 15

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Service ……………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………15
Removal and Installation …………………………………..15

F

G

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE …… 17
Exploded View …………………………………………………17
Removal and Installation …………………………………..17

CRASH ZONE SENSOR …………………………….. 19

SR

I

Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 4

Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19

BASIC INSPECTION ……………………………… 5

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ……………………….. 21

J

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 4

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ……………………………… 5

Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

For Frontal Collision ………………………………………….. 5
For Side and Rollover Collision …………………………… 7

SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER …………………… 23

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 12

K

Removal and Installation …………………………………..23

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH ………. 24

DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE …………………………12

Removal and Installation …………………………………..24

L

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 12
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009486765

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Service

INFOID:0000000009486767

• Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least three
minutes.
For approximately three minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least three minutes
have passed.
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009486766

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
Revision: April 2013

SR-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

SR

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009486770

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Revision: April 2013

SR-4

2014 Note

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision

INFOID:0000000009486771

B

FOR FRONTAL COLLISION: When SRS is activated in a collision
C

CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
3. Remove the front air bag modules, crash zone sensor assembly, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner
assemblies.
4. Check the SRS components using the table below:
Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.)
5. Install new front air bag modules, crash zone sensor assembly, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner
assemblies.
6. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-9, «Description» for details.
Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
7. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part

Inspection

Driver air bag module

If the driver air bag has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.

Front passenger air bag module
(if equipped)

If the front passenger air bag has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.

Crash zone sensor

If any of the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners* have been activated:
REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.

Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
reel, lap outer)

If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated:
REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.

Diagnosis sensor unit

If any of the SRS components have been activated:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit.
Install with new fasteners.

Steering wheel

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

If the driver front air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the spiral cable.

Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Revision: April 2013

F

G

SR

J

K

L

M

Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.

SR-5

E

I

Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
If damaged—REPLACE.

Spiral cable

D

2014 Note

N

O

P

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part

Inspection

Harness and connectors

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any
SRS harness.

Instrument panel assembly

If the passenger front air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. (integrated type)

FOR FRONTAL COLLISION: When SRS is not activated in a collision
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
2. Check the SRS components using the table below:
Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.)
3. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-9, «Description» for details.
Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
4. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part

Inspection

Driver air bag module

If the driver air bag has NOT been activated:
1.
Remove driver air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals
for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install driver air bag modules with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

Front passenger air bag module
(if equipped)

If the front passenger air bag has NOT been activated:
1.
Remove front passenger air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage,
terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install front passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument
panel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install front passenger air bag modules with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

Crash zone sensor

If the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone sensor and
bracket.
3.
Install the crash zone sensor to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.

Revision: April 2013

SR-6

2014 Note

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
reel, lap outer)

Diagnosis sensor unit

Steering wheel

Inspection
If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for
binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
7.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

C

D

E

1.
2.

F

Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
If damaged—REPLACE.

If the driver front air bag has not deployed:
1.
Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2.
Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3.
Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE.

I

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.

Harness and connectors

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any
SRS harness.

J

K

If the passenger front air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check instrument panel for damage.
2.
If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel assembly.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel assembly.

For Side and Rollover Collision

G

SR

Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)

Instrument panel assembly

B

If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.

3.
4.
5.
6.
Spiral cable

A

L

M

INFOID:0000000009486772

N

FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION: When SRS is activated in a collision
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
2. Replace the following components:
Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated).
Door finisher (on the side on which door-mounted curtain air bag is activated).
Pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers.
Side air bag (satellite) sensor LH/RH (on the side on which side air bag is activated).
Diagnosis sensor unit.

Revision: April 2013

SR-7

2014 Note

O

P

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
3. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation, etc.).
4. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-9, «Description» for
details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly.
5. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Part

Inspection

Side curtain air bag module LH

If the side curtain air bag LH has deployed:
REPLACE the side curtain air bag module LH.
Install with new fasteners.

Side curtain air bag module RH

If the side curtain air bag RH has deployed:
REPLACE the side curtain air bag module RH.
Install with new fasteners.

Front side air bag module LH

If the front side air bag LH has deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly LH.

Front side air bag module RH

If the front side air bag RH has deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly RH.

Side air bag (satellite) sensor (LH
or RH)

If any of the SRS components have deployed:
REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners.

Door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH)

If any of the SRS components have deployed:
REPLACE the door (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners.

Diagnosis sensor unit

If any of the SRS components have deployed:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.

Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
reel, lap outer)

If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated:
REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.

Center inner pillar

1.
2.

Seat (if equipped with front side
air bag)

If either the front LH or front RH side air bag modules has been deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly on the deployed side.

Trim/headlining

1.
2.

Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar.

Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts.

Door-mounted curtain air bag
module LH

If the door-mounted curtain air bag module LH has been deployed:
REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module.
Install with new fasteners.

Door-mounted curtain air bag
module RH

If the door-mounted curtain air bag module RH has been deployed:
REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module.
Install with new fasteners.

Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Pop-up roll bar assemblies

If the pop-up roll bar has deployed:
REPLACE pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers.
Install with new fasteners.

Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.

FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION: When SRS is not activated in a collision
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
Revision: April 2013

SR-8

2014 Note

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
WORK PROCEDURE
1. Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
If the door finisher assembly is damaged, the door finisher assembly and door-mounted curtain air bag
module must be replaced.
3. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-9, «Description» for
details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly.
4. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

Side curtain air bag module LH

Side curtain air bag module RH

Front side air bag module LH

Front side air bag module RH

Side air bag (satellite) sensor (LH
or RH)

Revision: April 2013

B

C

D

SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Part

A

Inspection
If the side curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side.
2.
If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module LH.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module LH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
If the side curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side.
2.
If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module RH.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module RH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
If the front LH side air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision
side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly LH.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
If the front side air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision
side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly RH.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) on the collision side. Check harness
connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag (satellite)
sensor (LH or RH).
3.
Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.

SR-9

2014 Note

E

F

G

SR

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part

Inspection

Door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH)

If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Remove the door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the door (satellite) sensor
(LH or RH).
3.
Install the door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged—REPLACE the door (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.

Diagnosis sensor unit

If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.

Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
reel, lap outer)

If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for
binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
7.
If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

Seat (with front side air bag)

If the front LH or front RH side air bag modules have NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2.
Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities.
Harness, connectors and terminals
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat)
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4.
If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is
damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.

Center inner pillar

1.
2.

Trim/headlining

1.
2.

Door-mounted curtain air bag
module LH

Revision: April 2013

Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation,
etc.).
If damaged — REPAIR the center inner pillar.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the interior trim on the
collision side.
If damaged — REPLACE the damaged trim parts.

If the door-mounted curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the
collision side.
2.
If damaged — REPLACE the door finisher LH with new fasteners.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module
LH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher.
CAUTION:
When removing door mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse
door finisher.
6.
If damaged — REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module LH
with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

SR-10

2014 Note

COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part

Door-mounted curtain air bag
module RH

Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)

Pop-up roll bar

Inspection
If the door-mounted curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the
collision side.
2.
If damaged — REPLACE the door finisher RH with new fasteners.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module
RH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher.
CAUTION:
When removing door mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse
door finisher.
6.
If damaged — REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module RH
with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors for damage and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.

A

B

C

D

E

F

If the pop-up roll bar NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the pop-up roll bar.
2.
If damaged — REPLACE the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners.
3.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners.
5.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the seatback support
brace assembly.
6.
If damaged — REPAIR the seatback support brace assembly.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.

G

SR

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-11

2014 Note

DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015619

AWHIA0452ZZ

1.

Steering wheel

2.

Driver air bag module

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015620

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Always work from the side of driver air bag module. Do not work in front of it.
• If driver air bag module is being replaced due to deployment, the spiral cable must also be replaced.
Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».
• Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the driver air bag module.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the driver air bag module.
• Do not expose the driver air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the driver air bag module.

REMOVAL
1.

Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».

Revision: April 2013

SR-12

2014 Note

DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Locate the access holes on side of steering wheel rear finisher
(1) and insert ( ) a 5.0 mm (0.20 in) diameter suitable tool (A).
3. Push suitable tool inward ( ) and make sure the tool contacts
the spring (D). While pushing on spring (D), push on the driver
air bag module. The driver air bag module hook will release,
then pull to release from steering wheel. Repeat procedure on
springs (B) and (C).
NOTE:
Driver air bag module removed for clarity.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWHIA0528ZZ

4.

Lift driver air bag module away from the steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module harness connector (A) and the
horn harness connector (B). Then remove the wire harness from
hook (C).
NOTE:
Take note of harness routing for correct installation.

SR

I

J

AWHIA0532ZZ

CAUTION:
• For removing/installing the driver air bag module harness
connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into
the notch, then lift the lock and remove the harness connector as shown.
• Install the harness connector with the lock raised, and
push the lock into the connector as shown.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is
pushed in securely.

K

L

M

N

PHIA0953J

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-13

2014 Note

DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove the driver air bag module.
CAUTION:
• Always place the driver air bag module with pad side facing upward.
: Upward

JMHIA2077ZZ

• Replace the driver air bag module if it has been dropped
or sustained an impact.
• Do not strike the driver air bag module.

JMHIA0009ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
To install the driver air bag module onto the steering wheel, align the hooks over the springs and push to snap
into place.
CAUTION:
• Always route driver air bag module harness in original location.
• Be careful not to damage or pinch the harness while installing.
• After the work is completed, check the function of the horn and each steering switch.
• After the work is completed, perform diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

Revision: April 2013

SR-14

2014 Note

SPIRAL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SPIRAL CABLE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015621

B

C

D

E

F

G
AWHIA0533ZZ

1.

Combination switch

2. Spiral cable

Removal and Installation

Pawl

SR
INFOID:0000000009015622

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Do not disassemble the spiral cable.
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow oil, grease, detergent or water to come in contact with the spiral cable.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, «Removal and Installation».
Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from spiral cable.
Remove screws (A), then release pawls and remove spiral cable
(1).
: Pawl
CAUTION:
Do not turn the spiral cable quickly or beyond the limit
number of turns (approximately 2.5 turns from the neutral
position), this may cause the cable to snap.

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P
ALHIA0307ZZ

CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

SR-15

2014 Note

SPIRAL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not strike or drop the spiral cable.
• Replace the spiral cable if it has been dropped or sustained
an impact.

JMHIA0009ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• The turn signal lever must be in the neutral position for spiral cable installation.
• Set the spiral cable neutral position by carefully turning the spiral
cable (1) clockwise to the stop position. Turn the spiral cable counterclockwise 2.5 turns stopping when the locating pin (A) is at the
top most position, triangles (B) are aligned as shown and the window (C) appears white.
NOTE:
If a new service part is installed, the neutral position is already set
with a stopper clip in place and should not be adjusted after the
stopper clip is removed. Make sure the stopper clip is removed
before installing the steering wheel.
• During steering wheel (2) installation, make sure the locating pin
hole (D) is aligned with the locating pin (A) of the spiral cable.

AWHIA0534ZZ

CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the spiral cable is installed in an improper
position.
• Do not overturn the spiral cable or go beyond the maximum number of turns allowed. This will cause
the cable to snap.
• The turn signal lever must be in the neutral position for spiral cable installation.
• Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
• After the work is completed, perform diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

Revision: April 2013

SR-16

2014 Note

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015623

B

C

D

E

F

G

SR

I

J
AWHIA0529ZZ

1.

Front passenger air bag module

2.

Instrument panel assembly

Removal and Installation

K

Pawl
INFOID:0000000009015624

L

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work in front of it.
• Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
• Do not attempt to disassemble the front passenger air bag module.
• Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the front passenger air bag module.
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the front passenger air bag module.

M

N

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

SR-17

2014 Note

P

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from front passenger air
bag module.
4. Remove and discard the front passenger air bag module bolts
(B).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse front passenger air bag module bolts.

JMHIA2022ZZ

5.

Release pawls using a suitable tool and remove front passenger
air bag module (1).
: Pawl

AWHIA0527ZZ

CAUTION:
• Always place the front passenger air bag module with pad
side facing upward.
: Upward

JMHIA2461ZZ

• Do not strike the front passenger air bag module.
• Replace the front passenger air bag module if it has been
dropped or sustained an impact.

JMHIA0009ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the front passenger air bag module bolts.
• Do not damage the front passenger air bag module harness during installation.
• After the work is completed, perform diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

Revision: April 2013

SR-18

2014 Note

CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CRASH ZONE SENSOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009486784

B

C

D

E

F

G

SR

I

J
ALHIA0305ZZ

1. Crash zone sensor

2.

Removal and Installation

K

Bracket
INFOID:0000000009486785

WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Replace the crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Replace the crash zone sensor if either the driver air bag module, the front passenger air bag module, or a front seat belt pre-tensioner has been deployed.
• Do not strike the crash zone sensor.
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.

REMOVAL
1.

Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-19

2014 Note

CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove and discard crash zone sensor nut (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse crash zone sensor nut.
3. Remove bracket (1) and crash zone sensor (2).

ALHIA0306ZZ

4.

Disconnect the slide double locking type harness connector from the crash zone sensor, as shown.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Position the crash zone sensor using the locating pin before tightening the nut to specification.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the crash zone sensor nut.
• Do not damage the harness connector during installation.
• After the work is completed, perform diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».

Revision: April 2013

SR-20

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009015631

B

C

D

E

F

G

SR

I

J
AWHIA0553ZZ

1.

Bracket

2.

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

Removal and Installation

K

Front
INFOID:0000000009015632

L

REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes.
• Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit if any SRS air bag has been deployed or if any front seat
belt pre-tensioner has been deployed.
• Before disconnecting the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors, be sure to disconnect
each harness connector of the front seat belt pre-tensioners (LH/RH) to prevent accidental air bag
deployment by static electricity and seat belt pre-tensioner operation.
• Do not use the air tools or electric tools for servicing.
• When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, always check with the parts department for the latest parts information. Installing an incorrect air bag diagnosis sensor unit may or may not cause the
air bag warning lamp to illuminate and may cause incorrect deployment of the supplemental air bags
and seat belt pre-tensioners in a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death.
1. Always check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) or part
number using CONSULT.
2. Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
«Removal and Installation (Battery)».
3. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

SR-21

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the front seat belt pre-tensioners (LH/RH).
CAUTION:
• For removing/installing the front seat belt pre-tensioner
harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, then lift the lock and remove the harness connector as shown.
• Install the harness connector with the lock raised, and
push the lock into the harness connector as shown.
• After installing the harness connector, check that the lock
is pushed in securely.

PHIA0953J

5.
6.
7.

Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Remove and discard bolts (B), then remove bracket and diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse air bag diagnosis sensor unit bolts.
NOTE:
Shown with bracket removed for clarity.
: Front
JMHIA2027ZZ

CAUTION:
• Do not strike the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
• Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit if it has been
dropped or sustained an impact.

SGI787

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the air bag diagnosis sensor unit bolts.
• The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the label arrow mark » » pointing
toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation.
• Do not damage the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness or connectors during installation.
• After replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, confirm using CONSULT that the ECU discriminated number (identification number) or part number of the new replacement air bag diagnosis sensor unit matches the ECU discriminated number (identification number) or part number of the
replaced (old) air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
• After the work is completed, perform diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-9, «Description».
NOTE:
If the ECU discriminated number or part number of the new replacement air bag diagnosis sensor unit differs
from the ECU discriminated number or part number of the replaced air bag diagnosis sensor unit, reconfirm
the parts information and verify that the correct air bag diagnosis sensor unit was installed.

Revision: April 2013

SR-22

2014 Note

SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009015634

The front seat belt pre-tensioner is part of the front seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-9, «SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation».

B

C

D

E

F

G

SR

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SR-23

2014 Note

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009486764

The front seat belt buckle switch is part of the front seat belt buckle. Refer to SB-8, «FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE : Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

SR-24

2014 Note

RESTRAINTS

SECTION

SRC

SRS AIRBAG CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 21
Work Flow ……………………………………………………….21

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Service ……………………………………………………………. 3

INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ………………………… 24

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4

B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ……….. 25

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4
Driver Air Bag Module ……………………………………….. 5
Front Passenger Air Bag Module ………………………… 5
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ……………………………… 5
Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit ……………………………. 6
Crash Zone Sensor …………………………………………… 6
SRS Component Connectors ……………………………… 6

Inspection Procedure ……………………………………….24

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 25
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….25
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..25
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….27
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..27
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….29
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..29

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM ………………………………………. 8
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM : System Diagram ………….. 8
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM : System Description ……… 8

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….32
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..32

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 12
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT …………………………12
DTC Index …………………………………………………….. 12
Flash Code Index ……………………………………………. 13

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 15
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM ……………………………….15
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 15

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 21
Revision: April 2013

SRC

I

J

B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE ……………… 29

B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE ……………… 32

Description ………………………………………………………. 9
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………….. 9
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT …………………….. 11
CONSULT Function (AIR BAG) ………………………… 11

G

B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ………………….. 27

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 8

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) …………………. 9

F

B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE ……………… 34

K

L

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….34
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..34

M

B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE ……………… 36

N

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….36
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..36

B1065 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE …….. 38

O

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….38
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..38

B1066 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE …….. 40
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….40
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..40

B1067 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE …….. 42
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….42
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..42

SRC-1

2014 Note

P

B1068 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE …….. 44

B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ……. 58

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 44
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 44

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 58
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 58

B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ……. 46

B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ……. 60

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 46
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 46

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 60
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 60

B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ……. 48

B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION … 62

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 48
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 48

Description …………………………………………………….. 62
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 62
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 62

B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ……. 50
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 50
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 50

B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ……. 52
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 52
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 52

B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ……. 54
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 54
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 54

B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ……. 56
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 56
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 56

Revision: April 2013

B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT… 63
Description …………………………………………………….. 63
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 63
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 63

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 65
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN OFF ………………………………………………… 65
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 65

SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN ON ………………………………………………….. 66
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 66

SRC-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009560124

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

C

D

E

F

G

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- SRC
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
I
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Service

INFOID:0000000009015644

• Never use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes
or more.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pretensioner to deploy. Therefore, never work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have
passed.
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Never turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.
• Never solder the harness when making repairs. Check that harness is not pinched and that there is no contact with other components.
• Never allow harness to come in contact with oil, grease, waste oil, or water.
• Never insert foreign materials, such as a screwdriver, into the harness connector. (This is to prevent accidental activation caused by static electricity.)
• Always use CONSULT or SRS air bag warning lamp to perform the circuit diagnosis. (Never use an electric
tester such as a circuit tester.)

Revision: April 2013

SRC-3

2014 Note

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009015645

ALHIA0311ZZ

A.

Instrument panel

B.

View with center console removed

D.

Combination meter

E.

Radiator core support assembly

Revision: April 2013

SRC-4

C.

View with lower B-pillar finisher
removed

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

A

1.

Combination switch (spiral cable)

The spiral cable provides a rotating physical connection to the drivers
air bag module.

2.

Driver air bag module

Refer to SRC-5, «Driver Air Bag Module».

3.

Front passenger air bag module

Refer to SRC-5, «Front Passenger Air Bag Module».

4.

Seat belt buckle switch LH

The driver seat belt buckle switch provides the seat belt buckle signal
to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit and the combination meter.

5.

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit

Refer to SRC-6, «Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit».

6.

Front seat belt pre-tensioner LH (RH similar)

Refer to SRC-5, «Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner».

Combination meter (air bag warning lamp)

The combination meter displays the air bag warning lamp and the
seat belt warning lamp. The air bag warning lamp is used for diagnosis in User Mode and may be used to display diagnostic trouble
codes without the use of the CONSULT.

7.

8.

Crash zone sensor

B

C

D

E

Refer to SRC-6, «Crash Zone Sensor».

Driver Air Bag Module

INFOID:0000000009515825

The driver air bag module is single stage and located in the steering
wheel assembly. It operates with the SRS system in a frontal collision exceeding a specified level.

F

G

SRC

I
AWHIA0462ZZ

Front Passenger Air Bag Module

INFOID:0000000009515826

The front passenger air bag module is single stage and is located
behind the instrument panel assembly. It operates with the SRS system in a frontal collision exceeding a specified level.

J

K

L

M
AWHIA0411ZZ

Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner

INFOID:0000000009515827

The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for
both the driver’s seat and the front passenger’s seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal
collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level
occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the belt pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers
are securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt
web tension while maintaining force.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-5

N

O

P

AWHIA0535ZZ

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit

INFOID:0000000009515828

The air bag diagnosis sensor unit is located under the center console assembly. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit receives signals
from multiple SRS sensors and controls the deployment of the air
bags. The deployment of the air bags depends on the type and
severity of the collision. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit has selfdiagnosis capability through the use of the CONSULT as well as
flash codes displayed by the air bag warning lamp.

AWHIA0536ZZ

Crash Zone Sensor

INFOID:0000000009515829

The crash zone sensor is located in front of the radiator. The crash
zone sensor sends signals to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit during a frontal collision. This sensor may be identified by a yellow connector.

AWHIA0537ZZ

SRS Component Connectors

INFOID:0000000009641655

DIRECT CONNECT
The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors.
• Driver front air bag module
• Passenger front air bag module
• LH side curtain air bag module
• RH side curtain air bag module
• Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
• Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
Always pull up to release locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
Always push down to lock locking tab after installing connector to
SRS component. When locked, the locking tab is level with the connector housing.

WHIA0103E

SLIDE DOUBLE LOCKING
• A new style slide double locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to airbag control systems.
• The slide double locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
• The slide double locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure below.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

SRC-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
A

B

C

D

E
AAMIA0498GB

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-7

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM : System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009541304

AWHIA0500GB

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009541305

• The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
• The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS
systems. For example, the driver air bag module, front passenger air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioners are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision.
SRS Collision Modes
SRS configuration

Frontal collision

Left side collision

Right side collision

Driver air bag module

x

—

—

Front passenger air bag module

x

—

—

Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner

x

—

—

Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner

x

—

—

Revision: April 2013

SRC-8

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009518933

CAUTION:
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
• Never repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a
new one.
• Keep ground portion clean.

B

C

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

D

• The SRS self-diagnostic results can be read with air bag warning lamp and/or CONSULT.
• The user mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
malfunction through the operation of the air bag warning lamp.
• The diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
• The mode applications for the air bag warning lamp and CONSULT are as per the following items.

E

×: Application, —: Not application

Diagnosis tool

User mode

Diagnosis mode

Air bag warning lamp

×

×

CONSULT

–

×

On Board Diagnosis Function

F

G
INFOID:0000000009518934

SRC

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
There are two self diagnosis functions with air bag warning lamp per the following items.
• USER MODE
• DIAGNOSIS MODE

I

METHOD OF STARTING
• Diagnosis mode changes from user mode to diagnosis mode when changing operation is performed.
• In user mode, when SRS air bag warning lamp is not turning ON, changing to diagnosis mode by ignition
switch operation is not possible.
• In diagnosis mode, when repair is complete and system is normal, the mode changes to user mode when
ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON.
Procedure to Change Diagnosis Mode
1. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON.
2. SRS air bag lamp turns ON for 7 seconds and turns OFF, then turn ignition switch OFF within 2 seconds
after the lamp turns OFF.
NOTE:
When in Diagnosis Mode, the air bag warning lamp may illuminate for more than 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. If this is the case, the ignition switch must still be cycled OFF after 7 seconds.
3. After turning ignition switch OFF, wait for 3 seconds or more.
4. Repeat operation 1 to 3 for 2 times so that operation 1 to 3 is repeated for 3 times in total.
5. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON. Diagnosis mode changes.

J

K

L

M

N

USER MODE
In USER MODE, air bag warning lamp on combination meter turning ON when a malfunction is detected and
warns the customer (driver).

O

How to Read Air Bag Warning Lamp

1.
2.

P

Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp turns ON.
Compare the air bag warning lamp operation pattern with the examples.
Air Bag Warning Lamp Examples:

Revision: April 2013

SRC-9

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Air bag warning lamp flashing pattern (User Mode)

Warning lamp

SRS condition

Reference item

• No malfunction is detected.
• No further action is necessary.

—

The system is malfunctioning and
needs to be repaired.

Refer to SRC-11, «Trouble Diagnosis
with CONSULT» or SRC-9, «On
Board Diagnosis Function».

• Air bag is deployed.
• Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed.

Refer to SR-5, «For Frontal Collision»
or SR-7, «For Side and Rollover Collision».

• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
• Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
• SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is
malfunctioning.

Refer to SRC-65, «Diagnosis Procedure».

• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning.

Refer to SRC-66, «Diagnosis Procedure».

SHIA0011E

SHIA0012E

SHIA0013E

SHIA0014E

DIAGNOSIS MODE
NOTE:
Diagnosis Mode can not be entered if a malfunction is not detected in User Mode.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. After AIR BAG warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two more times (3 times total).
5. Turn ignition switch ON.
SRS is now in Diagnosis Mode. Refer to SRC-13, «Flash Code Index».

Revision: April 2013

SRC-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT
1.
2.

INFOID:0000000009518935

A

Connect CONSULT.
DTC is displayed on SELF-DIAG RESULTS.

NOTE:
If a malfunction is not detected on SELF-DIAG RESULTS [CURRENT], but a malfunction is detected during
SRS Operation Check, the following cases may exist:
• SELF-DIAG [PAST] memory might not be erased. Refer to SRC-11, «Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT».
• SRS system malfunctions intermittently. Refer to SRC-24, «Inspection Procedure».

B

C

DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

D
Connect CONSULT.
If no DTCs are detected on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step
4.
If any DTCs are detected on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS [CURRENT]”, the malfunction has not been repaired E
completely or another malfunction is being detected. Perform SRS Operation Check again. Refer to SRC9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
Touch “ERASE”.
F
NOTE:
Touching “ERASE” will clear the SRS memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”). If “SELFDIAG [PAST]” is not erased, User Mode may show the previous system malfunction even if the
G
malfunction has been repaired completely.
Check that no malfunction is detected in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”.
Exit Diagnosis Mode and disconnect the CONSULT.
Perform SRS Operation Check. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
SRC

SRS HISTORY CHECK
1.
2.

Check repair history of the SRS. If no repairs have been made, perform SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis
Function». If repairs have been made, GO TO step 2.
Erase ”SELF-DIAG [PAST]” after repair. Refer to SRC-11, «Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT».

CONSULT Function (AIR BAG)

INFOID:0000000009518939

I

J

CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic Test Mode

Self Diagnostic Result

Data Monitor

ECU Identification

Trouble Diagnostic Record

K

Diagnostic Item

Description

SELF-DIAG RESULT [CURRENT]

A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of
warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the
CONSULT screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part
requiring repairs.

DATA MONITOR

Displays air bag diagnosis sensor unit input/output data in real time.

ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) or part number is displayed. Air bag diagnosis sensor
unit has individual ECU discriminated number (identification number) or part number based on model and equipment.

TROUBLE DIAG RECORD [PAST]

With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously
erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT
screen.

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-11

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009015647

DTC

—

Diagnostic item

NO DTC IS DETECTED.

Explanation

When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp
in the user mode

Reference page

Low battery voltage (Less than 9 V)
or High battery voltage (more than
16 V)

—

Self-diagnostic result is not erased
after repair

—

Intermittent malfunction is detected
in the past

—

No malfunction is detected

—

B1033
B1034

CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]

Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning.

SRC-25, «DTC Logic»

B1035

CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]

Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning.

SRC-27, «DTC Logic»

B1049

DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]

Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral
cable).

SRC-29, «DTC Logic»

B1050

DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]

Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply
circuit (including the spiral cable).

SRC-32, «DTC Logic»

B1051

DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]

Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including
the spiral cable).

SRC-34, «DTC Logic»

B1052

DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]

Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
(including spiral cable).

SRC-36, «DTC Logic»

B1065

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]

Passenger air bag module circuit is open.

SRC-38, «DTC Logic»

B1066

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]

Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to power
supply circuit.

SRC-40, «DTC Logic»

B1067

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]

Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.

SRC-42, «DTC Logic»

B1068

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]

Passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each
other.

SRC-44, «DTC Logic»

B1081

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is open.

SRC-46, «DTC Logic»

B1082

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to power
supply circuit.

SRC-48, «DTC Logic»

B1083

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to ground.

SRC-50, «DTC Logic»

B1084

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are shorted to each
other.

SRC-52, «DTC Logic»

B1086

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is open.

SRC-54, «DTC Logic»

B1087

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to power
supply circuit.

SRC-56, «DTC Logic»

B1088

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to ground.

SRC-58, «DTC Logic»

B1089

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are shorted to each
other.

SRC-60, «DTC Logic»

Revision: April 2013

SRC-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC

Diagnostic item

Explanation

Reference page

B1209

FRONTAL COLLISION
DETECTION

Driver and/or front passenger air bag modules are
deployed.

SRC-62, «DTC Logic»

B1XXX

CONTROL UNIT

Air bag diagnosis sensor unit malfunctioning.

SRC-63, «DTC Logic»

Flash Code Index

A

B

INFOID:0000000009520718

C

WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is
eliminated using air bag warning lamp each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to
the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required.

D

E

F

G
AWHIA0300GB

SRC

I

J

AWHIA0306GB

K

L

M

N
WHIA0198E

O

P

AWHIA0307GB

Revision: April 2013

SRC-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

WHIA0200E

WHIA0263E

WHIA0262E

Revision: April 2013

SRC-14

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009015648

B

C

D

E

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

AAHWA0061GB

Revision: April 2013

SRC-15

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAHWA0062GB

Revision: April 2013

SRC-16

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAHIA0149GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-17

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAHIA0150GB

Revision: April 2013

SRC-18

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAHIA0151GB

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-19

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAHIA0152GB

Revision: April 2013

SRC-20

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009015649

B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

D

E

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

JMHIA1324GB

DETAILED FLOW
Revision: April 2013

SRC-21

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

1.INTERVIEW THE CUSTOMER FOR THE SYMPTOM
Interview the customer for the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurs).
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the symptom from the customer information.
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK WARNING LAMP OPERATION
Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode.
Are any malfunction detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK LOW VOLTAGE

Check low voltage with CONSULT.
Are any malfunction detected?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

5.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Check self diagnostic result with CONSULT or diagnosis mode.
If it is impossible to switch to diagnosis mode, follow the same procedure that DTC is not detected.
NOTE:
Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC (Print them out with CONSULT.)
• Erase self diagnostic result.
• Study the relationship between the malfunction that DTC or air bag warning lamp indicates and the symptom
that the customer describes.
• Check related service bulletins for information.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the DTC.
>> GO TO 8.

7.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS ACCORDING TO WARNING LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.

Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode.
Perform Diagnosis Procedure for the air bag warning lamp operation.
>> GO TO 9.

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the DTC.
>> GO TO 9.

9.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTION PART
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-22

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 10.

10.FINAL CHECK

A

Check self diagnostic result and air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode.
Is the malfunction repaired?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

B

C

D

E

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-23

2014 Note

INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >

INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Inspection Procedure

INFOID:0000000009518941

INTERMITTENT TROUBLE
An intermittent incident may have occurred in the past but is not being detected currently. This DTC will not be
detected on SELF-DIAG [CURRENT], but may be viewed on SELF-DIAG [PAST] if the DTC has not been
erased. Refer to SRC-11, «Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT».

Revision: April 2013

SRC-24

2014 Note

B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460184

B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1033
B1034

Display contents of
CONSULT

CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]

C
DTC detecting condition

Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the crash zone sensor.
Replace the related harness.

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

SRC

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».

I

J

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

K

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

L

M
INFOID:0000000009460185

N

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-25

2014 Note

O

P

B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

6.CRASH ZONE SENSOR

1. Replace the crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-19, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.
>> END

Revision: April 2013

SRC-26

2014 Note

B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460186

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1035

B

Display contents of
CONSULT

CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]

DTC detecting condition

Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning or
out of the specified specification.

Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the crash zone sensor.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

E

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

F

G

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

SRC

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».

I

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

J

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

D

K

L

INFOID:0000000009460187

M

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

Revision: April 2013

SRC-27

2014 Note

N

O

P

B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

6.CRASH ZONE SENSOR

1. Replace the crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-19, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.
>> END

Revision: April 2013

SRC-28

2014 Note

B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460188

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1049

B

Display contents of
CONSULT

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[OPEN]

DTC detecting condition

Driver air bag module circuit is open
(including the spiral cable).

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

C

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Inspect the spiral cable circuit.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the driver air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

G

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

SRC

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

I

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

J

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

K

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

Diagnosis Procedure

L

M
INFOID:0000000009460189

WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR

Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-29

2014 Note

N

O

P

B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector.
Driver air bag module
Connector

Terminal

Connector

10

M87

4.

Combination switch (spiral cable)

28

M31

11

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

30

Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver side air bag module
Connector
M87

Continuity

Terminal

Ground

10

No

11

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».

5.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

6.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
Revision: April 2013

SRC-30

2014 Note

B1049 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

A

7.DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

1. Replace the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

B

C

8.RELATED HARNESS

D

Replace the related harness.
E

>> END

F

G

SRC

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-31

2014 Note

B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460190

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1050

Display contents of
CONSULT

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[VB-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to
power supply circuit (including the spiral
cable).

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Inspect the spiral cable circuit.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the driver air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-32, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-32, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-32, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460191

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-32

2014 Note

B1050 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

2.CONFIRM DTC

A

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

B

C

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

D

E

F

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

G

SRC

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

I

J

6.DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

K

1. Replace the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

L

M

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

N

>> END
O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-33

2014 Note

B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460192

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1051

Display contents of
CONSULT

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[GND-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to
ground (including the spiral cable).

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Inspect the spiral cable circuit.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the driver air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-34, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-34, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-34, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460193

WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.

2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-34

2014 Note

B1051 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.

3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

A

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector.

B

C
Driver air bag module
Connector

Connector

10

M87

4.

Combination switch (spiral cable)

Terminal

D

28

M31

11

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

30

Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver side air bag module
Connector
M87

E
Continuity

Terminal

F

Ground

10

No

11

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

G

SRC

I

J

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

K

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

L

6.DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

M

1. Replace the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

N

O

7.RELATED HARNESS

P

Replace the related harness.
>> END

Revision: April 2013

SRC-35

2014 Note

B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460194

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1052

Display contents of
CONSULT

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Driver air bag module circuit are shorted to
each other (including the spiral cable).

Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Inspect the spiral cable circuit.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the driver air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-36, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-36, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-36, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460195

WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.

1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.

2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

SRC-36

2014 Note

B1052 DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.

3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

A

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector.

B

C
Driver air bag module
Connector

Connector

10

M87

4.

Combination switch (spiral cable)

Terminal

D

28

M31

11

Continuity

Terminal

Yes

30

Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver side air bag module
Connector
M87

E
Continuity

Terminal

F

Ground

10

No

11

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

G

SRC

I

J

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

K

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

L

6.DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

M

1. Replace the driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

N

O

7.RELATED HARNESS

P

Replace the related harness.
>> END

Revision: April 2013

SRC-37

2014 Note

B1065 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1065 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460196

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1065

Display contents of
CONSULT

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]

DTC detecting condition

Passenger air bag module circuit is
open.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front passenger air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-38, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-38, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-38, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460197

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

Revision: April 2013

SRC-38

2014 Note

B1065 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

B

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

C

D

E

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

SRC

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

I

J

6.FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

1. Replace the front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

M

Replace the related harness.
N

>> END

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-39

2014 Note

B1066 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1066 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460198

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1066

Display contents of CONSULT

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Passenger air bag module circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front passenger air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-40, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-40, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-40, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460199

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

Revision: April 2013

SRC-40

2014 Note

B1066 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

B

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

C

D

E

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

SRC

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

I

J

6.FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

1. Replace the front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

M

Replace the related harness.
N

>> END

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-41

2014 Note

B1067 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1067 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460200

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1067

Display contents of CONSULT

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Passenger air bag module circuit is
shorted to ground.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front passenger air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-42, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460201

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

Revision: April 2013

SRC-42

2014 Note

B1067 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

B

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

C

D

E

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

SRC

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

I

J

6.FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

1. Replace the front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

M

Replace the related harness.
N

>> END

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-43

2014 Note

B1068 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1068 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460202

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1068

Display contents of
CONSULT

ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Passenger air bag module circuits are
shorted to each other.

Possible cause
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front passenger air bag module.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-44, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-44, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-44, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460203

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis unit to the end component (including
any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

Revision: April 2013

SRC-44

2014 Note

B1068 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

B

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

C

D

E

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

SRC

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

I

J

6.FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

1. Replace the front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

M

Replace the related harness.
N

>> END

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-45

2014 Note

B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460204

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1081

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is
open.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-46, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-46, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-46, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460205

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-46

2014 Note

B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-47

2014 Note

B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460206

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1082

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-48, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-48, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-48, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460207

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-48

2014 Note

B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-49

2014 Note

B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460208

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1083

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is
shorted to ground.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-50, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-50, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-50, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460209

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-50

2014 Note

B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-51

2014 Note

B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460210

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1084

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are
shorted to each other.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-52, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-52, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-52, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460211

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-52

2014 Note

B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-53

2014 Note

B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460212

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1086

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is
open.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-54, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-54, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-54, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460213

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-54

2014 Note

B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-55

2014 Note

B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460214

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1087

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-56, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-56, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-56, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460215

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-56

2014 Note

B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-57

2014 Note

B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460216

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1088

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is
shorted to ground.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460217

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-58

2014 Note

B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-59

2014 Note

B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460218

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B1089

Display contents of
CONSULT

PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]

DTC detecting condition

Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are
shorted to each other.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner.
Replace the related harness.

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-60, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009460219

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1.
2.

Reconnect all harness connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

SRC-60

2014 Note

B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

A

3.WIRING HARNESS

B

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

C

D

E

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

F

G

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

SRC

I

6.SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH

J

1. Replace the seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-23, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

K

L

7.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.

M

>> END
N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-61

2014 Note

B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
Description

INFOID:0000000009461213

DTC B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
The air bag diagnosis sensor unit will set this DTC if it has detected a collision which has resulted in a deployment of one or more air bags or pre-tensioners. If this DTC is detected after a SRS repair, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit has not yet been replaced. This DTC can not be erased.

PART LOCATION
Refer to SRC-4, «Component Parts Location».

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009461214

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With CONSULT
CONSULT name

DTC

DTC detecting condition

FRONTAL COLLISION
DETECTION

B1209

Driver and/or front passenger air bag modules are deployed.

Repair order
Refer to SR-5, «For Frontal Collision».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
Check for the DTC on CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-62, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009461215

Refer to SR-5, «For Frontal Collision».

Revision: April 2013

SRC-62

2014 Note

B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009460138

DTC B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

B

The air bag diagnosis sensor unit will run self diagnostics when the ignition switch is turned ON. It has the
potential to set many diagnostic trouble codes which will conform to the B1XXX format, but will not match any
other SRS diagnostic trouble codes. Refer to SRC-11, «CONSULT Function (AIR BAG)».

C

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009460139

D

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
With CONSULT
DTC

B1XXX

E

Display contents of
CONSULT

CONTROL UNIT

DTC detecting condition
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.

Repair order
1.
2.
3.
4.

Visually check the wiring harness connection.
Replace the harness if it has visible damage.
Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
Replace the related harness.

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (With CONSULT)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

SRC

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES (Current DTC)>>Refer to SRC-63, «Diagnosis Procedure».
YES (Past DTC)>>GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspection End.

I

J

2.ERASE SELF-DIAG RESULT

Erase the DTC using CONSULT.
Can the DTC be erased?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to SRC-63, «Diagnosis Procedure».

K

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT)

L

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-9, «On Board Diagnosis Function».
NOTE:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-63, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

M

1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT

Diagnosis Procedure

N

O
INFOID:0000000009460140

1.HARNESS CONNECTOR

P

Visually inspect all applicable harness connectors for the following:
• Visible damage to connector or terminal
• Loose terminal
• Poor connection
NOTE:
All harness connectors should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Revision: April 2013

SRC-63

2014 Note

B1XXX AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform one of the following repairs:
• Visible damage: Replace the harness.
• Loose terminal: Secure the terminal.
• Poor connection: Secure the connection.

2.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

3.WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness for visible damage.
NOTE:
The entire wiring harness should be inspected from the air bag diagnosis sensor unit to the end component
(including any in-line connectors).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace the harness.

4.CONFIRM DTC

1. Reconnect all harness connectors.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».

5.AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

1. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check for DTC using CONSULT.
Is DTC still current?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Clear DTC. Inspection End.

6.RELATED HARNESS

Replace the related harness.
>> END

Revision: April 2013

SRC-64

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009519215

B

1.CHECK AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Check the deployment of air bag module.
Is air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace the malfunctioning parts.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

C

D

2.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE

Check 10 A fuse [No.7, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the fuse.

E

F

3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.

G

SRC

4.CHECK WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.

I

5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

J

1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

K

L

6.REPLACE COMBINATION METER

1. Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 1.

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

SRC-65

2014 Note

SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009519216

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check combination meter unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to MWI-39, «COMBINATION METER :
Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.

3.CHECK WIRING HARNESS

Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.

4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Does air bag warning lamp turn ON?
YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

SRC-66

2014 Note

STEERING

SECTION

ST

STEERING SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

Inspection ……………………………………………………….10

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

STEERING SHAFT ……………………………………. 12

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System
…… 2

Exploded View …………………………………………………12
Removal and Installation …………………………………..12
Inspection ……………………………………………………….13

ST

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ………………. 14

H

Exploded View …………………………………………………14
Removal and Installation …………………………………..14
Inspection ……………………………………………………….14

I

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3

F

Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 16
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ………………. 16

J

BASIC INSPECTION ……………………………… 5

Exploded View …………………………………………………16
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………….16
Inspection ……………………………………………………….18

K

STEERING WHEEL ……………………………………… 5
Inspection ………………………………………………………… 5

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS …………………………. 7

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 19

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….. 7

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 19

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………….. 7

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 8
STEERING WHEEL ……………………………………… 8
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 8
Removal and Installation ……………………………………. 8

STEERING COLUMN …………………………………… 9
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 9
Removal and Installation ……………………………………. 9

General Specifications ………………………………………19
Steering Wheel Axial End Play and Play ……………..19
Steering Wheel Turning Force ……………………………19
Steering Angle …………………………………………………19
Steering Column Operating Range …………………….19
Rack Stroke …………………………………………………….20
Ball Joint Swing Force ………………………………………20
Ball Joint Axial End Play ……………………………………20
Inner Socket Length …………………………………………20

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ST-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009541329

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System

INFOID:0000000009385580

• In case of removing the steering gear, make the final tightening with grounded and unloaded vehicle condition, and then check wheel alignment.
• Observe the following precautions when disassembling.
— Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
— Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming
contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
— For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
— Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with
their operation.
— Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
— Before assembling, apply the specified grease to the directed parts.

Revision: April 2013

ST-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009385581

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

C

ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge

Inspecting steering column rotating torque,
pinion rotating torque and ball joint rotating
torque

D

E
ZZA0806D

—
(J-44372)
Pull gauge

Measuring steering wheel turning force or rack
sliding force

F

ST

H
LST024

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009385582

I
Tool name

Description

Ball joint remover

Remove steering outer socket

J

K

L

S-NT146

Boot band crimping tool

Installing boot clamp (large diameter)

M

N
ZZA1229D

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ST-3

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name

Description

Steering wheel puller

Removing steering wheel

ZZA0819D

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

ST-4

2014 Note

STEERING WHEEL
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

STEERING WHEEL
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009385583

B

CONDITION OF INSTALLATION
• Check installation conditions of steering gear, front suspension, axle and steering column.
• Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial
direction.
Steering wheel axial end play

C

D

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering Wheel
Axial End Play and Play».

E

• Verify that the steering gear nuts are tightened to specification. Refer to ST-14, «Exploded View».

STEERING WHEEL PLAY
1.

Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position, start engine, then lightly turn steering wheel
to the left and right until the front wheels start to move. Measure steering wheel movement on the outer
circumference.
Steering wheel play on the
outer circumference

2.

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering Wheel Axial End Play and Play».

When the measurement value is outside the standard value, check backlash for each joint of steering column and installation condition of steering gear.

F

ST

H

STEERING WHEEL NEUTRAL POSITION
Check steering wheel neutral position using the following procedure:
1. Confirm that front wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».
2. Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position, check if steering wheel is in the neutral position.
3. If it is not in the neutral position, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly.
4. If the neutral position cannot be attained by repositioning the steering wheel two teeth or less on steering
stem, loosen the steering gear outer socket lock nuts, then adjust the inner sockets by the same amount
in the opposite direction.
5. Re-check the front wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».

STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
4.

Park vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake.
Tires need to be inflated normal pressure. Refer to WT-9, «Tire Air Pressure».
Start engine.
Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering
wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position.
Tool number

:

—

I

J

K

L

M

N

(J-44372)
O

Steering wheel turning
force
5.
6.

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering
Wheel Turning Force».

If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, inspect
steering column. Refer to ST-19, «Steering Wheel Turning
Force».
If steering column meets specification, inspect steering gear.
Refer to ST-14, «Inspection».

P
SGIA1523J

FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1.

Perform toe-in inspection. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

ST-5

2014 Note

STEERING WHEEL
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CAUTION:
Perform front wheel turning angle inspection, after toe-in inspection.
2. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges and rear wheels on
stands, so that vehicle can be level.
3. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for
(LH/ RH) wheels and tires.

FAA0016D

• With the engine at idle, turn steering wheel from full left stop to
full right stop and measure the turning angles.
Inner wheel (Angle: A)
Outer wheel (Angle: B)

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering
Angle».
: Refer to ST-19, «Steering
Angle».

SGIA0055E

• Check the following items when turning angle is out of the standard.
— Check rack stroke (L).
Rack stroke (L)

: Refer to ST-20, «Rack Stroke».

— Disassemble steering gear to check the cause that rack stroke
is outside of the standard.
• Steering angles are not adjustable. Check steering gear, steering column and front suspension components for wear or damage if any of the turning angles are different from the specified
value. Replace any of them, if any non-standard condition
exists.
JSGIA0272ZZ

Revision: April 2013

ST-6

2014 Note

Symptom

Revision: April 2013
×
×
×
×

Shudder

ST-7
×

Shake
×
×
×

Vibration
×
×
×

Shimmy
×
×

×
AXLE and SUSPENSION

TIRE
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKE

×

BR-7, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»

FAX-6, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»

WT-4, «Inspection»

NVH Troubleshooting Chart

WT-4, «Inspection»

FAX-6, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»
RAX-4, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»
FSU-5, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»
RSU-4, «NVH Troubleshooting Chart»

ST-14, «Inspection»

ST-10, «Inspection»

Improper installation or looseness of steering column

×
Steering linkage looseness

ST-10, «Inspection»

ST-10, «Inspection»

ST-10, «Inspection»

ST-5, «Inspection»

ST-5, «Inspection»

ST-18, «Inspection»

ST-18, «Inspection»

Steering column deformation or damage

Mounting looseness

Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever

Improper steering wheel

Steering wheel play

Noise
Outer/inner socket ball joint end play

Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Outer/inner socket ball joint rotating torque

ST-18, «Inspection»

Reference page

Outer/inner socket ball joint swinging torque

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
A

INFOID:0000000009385584

×
×
×
×
×

×
×
×
×
×

×
×

×
×
×
×
×
×

×
×
×
×
×
×

×: Applicable

2014 Note

B

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

C

D

E

F

ST

H

I

J

K

L

×

M

N

O

P

STEERING WHEEL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STEERING WHEEL
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385585

JSGIA0704GB

1.

Steering wheel

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009385586

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position.
Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-12, «Removal and Installation».
Remove steering wheel lock nut.
Remove steering wheel using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position.
Inspect steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. Replace as necessary.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Align spiral cable correctly before installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral
position. Refer to SR-15, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position.
• With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns.

Revision: April 2013

ST-8

2014 Note

STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING COLUMN

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385587

B

C

D

E

F

ST
AWGIA0294ZZ

1.

Steering column

2.

Clamp

H

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009385588

CAUTION:
• Any time the ignition switch has been disconnected, removed or installed; the vehicle keys must be
re-registered in the BCM. Refer to CONSULT operations manual.
• Care must be taken not to rotate the steering gear during the removal or installation of the steering
column.
• Care must be taken not to allow axial impact to the steering column during removal or installation.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position.
Set the steering column tilt to the lowest position.
CAUTION:
Securely lock the tilt lever.
3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
4. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, «Removal and Installation».
5. Remove combination switch. Refer to BCS-68, «Removal and Installation».
6. Remove the cluster lid A. Refer to IP-21, «Removal and Installation».
7. Disconnect the switch harness connectors.
8. Set the steering column tilt to the middle position.
CAUTION:
Do not change the position of the tilt mechanism until the steering column is reinstalled.
9. Loosen the steering shaft lower joint bolt.
10. Remove the steering intermediate shaft upper bolt and separate the steering intermediate shaft from the
steering column. Refer to ST-12, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both steering intermediate shaft and steering column before removing
the steering intermediate shaft.
• When removing steering intermediate shaft, do not insert any tool into the yoke groove to pull
out the steering intermediate shaft or damage could occur. Replace steering intermediate shaft if
damaged.
11. Disconnect EPS control unit harness connectors.
Revision: April 2013

ST-9

2014 Note

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
12. Remove steering column.
13. Remove EPS control unit from steering column if necessary. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
14. Remove clamp from steering column if necessary.
15. Inspect steering column after removal. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• During installation, finger-tighten all of the bracket and joint retaining bolts, then tighten them to
specification.
• When installing the steering column cover, check that the vehicle harness is not stuck in the cover.
• Replace the steering column if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For intermediate shaft bolt direction, refer to ST-12, «Exploded View».
• When connecting intermediate shaft upper side (1) and column
shaft, make sure the bolt is securely seated in groove (A) of column shaft before final tightening.
• After installing steering column, perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT to ensure correct operation. Refer to STC-6, «CONSULT
Function».
• Inspect steering column after installation. Refer to ST-10, «Inspection».

SGIA1295E

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009385589

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any
abnormal conditions.
• Measure steering column rotating torque using Tool (A). Replace
steering column if the rotating torque is outside specification
Tool number

:

—

(J-25765-A)

Rotating torque

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering Column Operating Range».

JPGIA0085ZZ

• Measure the steering column length (L) as shown, if vehicle has
been involved in a minor collision. Replace steering column if outside specification.
Steering column length (L)

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering
Column Operating Range».

JPGIA0111ZZ

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Rotate steering wheel to make sure it is centered and there is no binding, noise or excessive steering effort.
• Make sure that the number of turns are the same from the straight-ahead position to the left and right locks.
• Check each part of steering column for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any abnormal
conditions. Refer to ST-19, «Steering Column Operating Range».
Revision: April 2013

ST-10

2014 Note

STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».
• Check tilt mechanism operating range (T) as shown.
Tilt operating range (T)

: Refer to ST-19, «Steering Column Operating Range».

A

B

C

D
JPGIA0043ZZ

E

F

ST

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ST-11

2014 Note

STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING SHAFT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385590

JPGIA0112GB

1.

Lower joint

2.

Steering intermediate shaft

Removal and Installation

3.

Steering column
INFOID:0000000009385591

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column and steering gear. Be
sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
1. Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position.
2. Set the steering column tilt to the middle position.
CAUTION:
Securely lock the tilt lever.
3. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
4. Loosen lower joint upper bolt.
5. Remove lower joint lower bolt and separate lower joint from the steering gear lower shaft.
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both lower joint and steering gear lower shaft before removing lower
joint.
• When removing lower joint, do not insert any tool into the yoke groove to pull out the lower joint.
Replace the lower joint if damaged.
6. Remove lower joint from steering intermediate shaft.
7. Remove the steering intermediate shaft bolt, from steering column, and remove steering intermediate
shaft from steering column.
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both steering intermediate shaft and steering column before removing
steering intermediate shaft.
• When removing the steering intermediate shaft, do not insert any tool into the yoke groove to
pull out the steering intermediate shaft or damage could occur. Replace the steering intermediate shaft if damaged.

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
During installation, finger-tighten all of the bracket and joint retaining bolts; then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: April 2013

ST-12

2014 Note

STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Before installation, check that steering column tilt is in the middle position.
• For intermediate shaft bolt, and lower joint bolt direction, refer to ST-12, «Exploded View».
• To install align the steering gear guide protrusion (A) with the
groove of lower joint (1), make sure the bolt is securely seated in
groove (B) of steering gear before final tightening.
CAUTION:
If a guide protrusion is not included, align with the matching
mark placed at the removal step.
• When tightening lower joint bolt to the steering gear lower shaft,
temporarily tighten it and make sure there is no sticking or galling
before final tightening.

A

B

C

D
JPGIA0041ZZ

• When connecting intermediate shaft upper side (1) and column
shaft, make sure the bolt is securely seated in groove (A) of column shaft before final tightening.

E

F

ST

SGIA1295E

H

• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-13, «Inspection».
I

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009385592

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check each part of steering intermediate shaft, lower joint, and steering column for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any abnormal conditions.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Rotate steering wheel to make sure it is centered and there is no binding, noise or excessive steering effort.
• Make sure that the number of turns are the same from the straight-ahead position to the left and right locks.
• Check each part of steering intermediate shaft, lower joint, and steering column for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any abnormal conditions.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ST-13

2014 Note

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385593

AWGIA0236ZZ

1.

Guide

4.

Front suspension member

2.

Cowl seal

3.

Steering gear

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009385594

CAUTION:
• Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column and steering gear;
Always secure the steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
• Place a matching mark on both lower joint and steering gear before removing lower joint.
• When removing lower joint, do not place any tool into the yoke groove to pull out the lower joint.
Replace the lower joint if damaged.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Set the front wheels and tires in the straight-ahead position.
Set the steering column tilt to the middle position.
CAUTION:
Securely lock the tilt lever.
Remove front suspension member. Refer to FSU-14, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the steering gear bolts and nuts and separate the steering gear from the front suspension member.
Separate cowl seal from steering gear if necessary.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• During installation, finger-tighten all of the bracket and joint retaining bolts; then tighten them to
specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column.
• The guide protrusion is not required to be reinstalled.
• Before installation, check that the steering column tilt is in the middle position.
• Clean mating surface on the body side of cowl seal when installing steering gear assembly.
• Inspect steering gear after installation. Refer to ST-14, «Inspection».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009385595

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check each part of steering gear for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any abnormal conditions. Refer to ST-14, «Inspection».
Revision: April 2013

ST-14

2014 Note

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Rotate steering wheel to make sure it is centered and there is no binding, noise or excessive steering effort.
• Make sure that the number of turns are the same from the straight-ahead position to the left and right locks.
• Check each part of steering system for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if there are any abnormal
conditions.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning force, and front wheel
turning angle. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».
• Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».

A

B

C

D

E

F

ST

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

ST-15

2014 Note

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385596

ALGIA0098GB

1.

Joint cover

2.

Steering gear

3.

Inner socket

4.

Inner boot clamp

5.

Boot

6.

Outer boot clamp

7.

Outer socket

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009385597

DISASSEMBLY
1.

2.
3.

Remove outer socket lock nut and outer socket.
CAUTION:
When loosening outer socket lock nut, be sure to hold outer socket with a suitable tool to prevent
ball joint from contacting knuckle.
Remove inner boot clamp, outer boot clamp and remove boot.
CAUTION:
Do not damage inner socket or steering gear housing when removing boot.
Remove inner socket.

ASSEMBLY
1.

Apply (Autolex A or Dow Corning 111) or equivalent to inner socket and turn pinion fully to retract inner
socket into gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure there are no contaminants in the grease, on the inner socket, or inside the steering gear
housing.

Revision: April 2013

ST-16

2014 Note

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
2. Install large end (1) of boot (2) to gear housing assembly.
3. Install small end (3) of boot (2) to inner socket boot mounting
groove.

A

B

C
AWGIA0107ZZ

D

4.
5.

Install outer boot clamp to boot small end using suitable tool.
Install inner boot clamp to boot large end using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse boot clamps.

E

F

ST

H

I

J

AST139

6.
7.

Install outer socket.
Adjust inner socket to standard length (L) and then tighten lock
nut to the specified torque. Check length of inner socket (L)
again after tightening lock nut.
Inner socket length (L)

L

M

: Refer to ST-20, «Inner
Socket Length».

CAUTION:
The length achieved after toe-in adjustment is not necessarily the above value.

N

SGIA0167E

8.

Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, «Inspection».
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

ST-17

K

O

P

2014 Note

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
When tightening outer socket lock nut (1), be sure to hold
outer socket (2) using a suitable tool to prevent ball joint
from contacting knuckle.

JSGIA0538ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009385598

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot
• Check boot for cracks and replace it if damage exists.
Steering gear
• Check steering gear for damage and scratches to the inner wall. Replace if there are any abnormal conditions.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
Check the following items and replace the component if outside specification:
BALL JOINT SWINGING FORCE

• Hook a Tool at the point shown and pull the spring balance. Make
sure that the Tool reads the specified value when ball stud and
inner socket start to move. Replace outer socket (1) and inner
socket (2) if they are outside the standard.
Tool number

:

—

(J-44372)

Measuring point of outer
socket (1)
Measuring point of inner
socket (2)
Swinging force

: Ball stud upper side (A)
: Point (B)

JPGIA0188ZZ

: Refer to ST-20, «Ball Joint Swing
Force».

BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAY

• Apply an axial load of 490 N (50 kg-f, 110 lb-f) to ball stud. Using a
dial gauge, measure amount of stud movement and make sure
that the value is within the following specified range. Replace outer
socket (1) and inner socket (2) if the measured value is outside the
standard.
Axial end play

: Refer to ST-20, «Ball Joint Axial End
Play».

JSGIA0109ZZ

Revision: April 2013

ST-18

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

INFOID:0000000009385599

Steering gear model

R24K

B

C

Steering Wheel Axial End Play and Play

INFOID:0000000009385600

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard

Steering wheel axial end play

D

0 (0)

Steering wheel play on the outer circumference

E

0 — 35 (0 — 1.38)

Steering Wheel Turning Force

INFOID:0000000009385601

Unit: N (kg-f, lb-f)

Item

F

Standard

Steering wheel turning force

ST

36 (3.7, 8.09) or less

Steering Angle

INFOID:0000000009385602

Unit: Degree minute (Decimal degree)

H

I

J

K
SGIA0055E

Item

Inner wheel (Angle A)

Outer wheel (Angle B)

Minimum

34° 30′ (34.5°)

Nominal

37° 30′ (37.5°)

Maximum

38° 30′ (38.5°)

Nominal

32° 00′ (32.0°)

Steering Column Operating Range

M

INFOID:0000000009385603

Item
Tilt operating

L

Standard

Standard

range*

O

39.4 mm (1.551 in)

Rotating torque

1.4 – 2.1 N·m (0.14 – 0.21 kg-m, 12 – 19 in-lb)

Steering column length*

477.9 mm (18.81 in)

*: For measuring position, refer to ST-10, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

N

ST-19

2014 Note

P

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Rack Stroke

INFOID:0000000009385604

Unit: mm (in)

JSGIA0272ZZ

Item

Standard

Rack stroke neutral position (L)

64.6 (2.543)

Ball Joint Swing Force

INFOID:0000000009385605

Item

Standard

Outer socket

Spring balance measurement

*

6.0 – 58 N (0.61 – 5.9 kg-f, 1.35 – 13.03 lb-f)

Inner socket

Spring balance measurement*

3.5 – 34.7 N (0.36 – 3.5 kg-f, 0.79 – 7.8 lb-f)

*: For measuring position, refer to ST-14, «Inspection».

Ball Joint Axial End Play

INFOID:0000000009385606

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard

Outer socket

0.5 (0.020) or less

Inner socket

0.2 (0.008 in) or less

Inner Socket Length

INFOID:0000000009385607

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Standard

SGIA0167E

Inner socket length (L)

Revision: April 2013

67.4 (2.654)

ST-20

2014 Note

STEERING

SECTION

STC

STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..18

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

C1604 TORQUE SENSOR ………………………….. 21

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Service Notice and Precautions for EPS System …… 3

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….21
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..21

F

STC

C1606 EPS MOTOR …………………………………… 23
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….23
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..23
Component Inspection ………………………………………23

H

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4
EPS Control Unit ………………………………………………. 5
EPS Motor, Torque Sensor, Reduction Gear ………… 5

C1607, C1608 EPS CONTROL UNIT …………… 25

I

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (EPS CONTROL UNIT)
….. 6

C1609 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ……………….. 26

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4

CONSULT Function ………………………………………….. 6

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION …………… 8
EPS CONTROL UNIT …………………………………… 8
Reference Value ………………………………………………. 8
Fail-Safe ………………………………………………………….. 9
Protection Function …………………………………………. 10
DTC Inspection Priority Chart …………………………… 10
DTC Index ……………………………………………………… 10

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….25
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..25
Description ………………………………………………………26
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….26
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..26
Description ………………………………………………………27
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….27
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..27

L

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………… 28

M

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 11
EPS SYSTEM ……………………………………………..11

EPS WARNING LAMP ……………………………….. 29

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 15
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ………15
Work Flow ……………………………………………………… 15
Diagnostic Work Sheet …………………………………….. 16

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 18

Component Function Check ………………………………29
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..29

N

O

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 30
EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON… 30
Description ………………………………………………………30
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..30

C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY ……………..18

EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN
OFF ………………………………………………………….. 31

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………… 18

Description ………………………………………………………31

Revision: April 2013

K

C1610 ENGINE STATUS SIGNAL ………………. 27

Description ………………………………………………………28
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………….28
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..28

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………. 11

J

STC-1

2014 Note

P

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 31

STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS
HEAVY OR LIGHT ……………………………………… 32
Description …………………………………………………….. 32
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 32

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT
AND LEFT …………………………………………………. 34

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) ………………….. 35
Description …………………………………………………….. 35
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 35

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ………….. 37
EPS CONTROL UNIT …………………………………. 37
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 37
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 37

Description …………………………………………………….. 34
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 34

Revision: April 2013

STC-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009499764

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Service Notice and Precautions for EPS System

INFOID:0000000009016063

• Check the following item when performing the trouble diagnosis:
— Check for possible causes of the malfunction by interviewing the customer as to what conditions were
present when the symptom occurred.
— Check if the steering wheel and the EPS control unit are genuine parts.
— Check if the air pressure and size of each tire is correct.
— Check if the installation of the links and suspension components are correct.
— Check if the tires are worn evenly, indicating the wheel alignment is correct.
— Check if the installation of the steering column and the steering gear are correct. Check for loose bolts, damaged links, cracked boots and leaking grease, etc.
— Check for damage or modification to suspension or body resulting in increased weight or altered ground
clearance.
— Check if the battery voltage is proper.
— Check the EPS control unit harness to be sure the harness connectors are fully seated.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the EPS control unit harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and
disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Battery voltage is applied to the EPS control unit
even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.

C

D

E

F

STC

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009016064

ALGIA0166ZZ

A.

Steering column assembly

No.

1.

2.

3.

Component

Function

Combination meter
(EPS warning lamp)

• Transmits mainly the following signal to EPS control unit via
CAN communication.
— Vehicle speed signal (Meter)
• Turns ON the EPS warning lamp according to the signal
from EPS control unit via CAN communication.
• For detailed installation location, refer to MWI-5, «METER
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location».

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

• Transmits mainly the following signal to EPS control unit via
CAN communication.
— Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• For detailed installation location, refer to BRC-6, «Component Parts Location».

ECM

• Transmits mainly the following signals to EPS control unit
via CAN communication.
— Engine status signal
• For detailed installation location, refer to EC-11, «ENGINE
CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location».
• Receives mainly the following signal from EPS control unit
via CAN communication.
— EPS torque signal

Revision: April 2013

STC-4

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

EPS motor

Refer to STC-5, «EPS Motor, Torque Sensor, Reduction
Gear».

Reduction gear

Refer to STC-5, «EPS Motor, Torque Sensor, Reduction
Gear».

5.

EPS control unit

Refer to STC-5, «EPS Control Unit».

6.

Torque sensor

4.

Refer to STC-5, «EPS Motor, Torque Sensor, Reduction
Gear».

EPS Control Unit

A

B

C

INFOID:0000000009499783

D

• EPS control unit (1) is installed to steering column assembly.
• EPS control unit performs an arithmetical operation on data, such
as steering wheel turning force (sensor signal) from the torque
sensor, vehicle speed signal, etc. Then it generates an optimum
assist torque signal to the EPS motor according to the driving condition.
• EPS control unit decreases the output signal to EPS motor while
extremely using the power steering function (e.g., full steering)
consecutively for protecting EPS motor and EPS control unit
(Overload protection control).

E

F

STC
JSGIA0852ZZ

EPS Motor, Torque Sensor, Reduction Gear

INFOID:0000000009499784

H

EPS motor (1), torque sensor (2) and reduction gear (3) are installed
to steering column assembly.
I

J

K
JSGIA0853ZZ

EPS MOTOR

L

EPS motor provides the assist torque by the control signal from EPS control unit.

TORQUE SENSOR
Torque sensor detects the steering torque, and transmits the signal to EPS control unit.

M

REDUCTION GEAR
Reduction gear increases the assist torque provided from EPS motor with worm gears, and outputs to the column shaft.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-5

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (EPS CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (EPS CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function

INFOID:0000000009499768

FUNCTION
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic test mode

Function

ECU identification

The part number stored in the control unit can be read.

Self diagnostic result

Self-diagnostic results and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*

Data monitor

Input/Output data in the EPS control unit can be read.

*: The following diagnosis information is erased by erasing.
• DTC
• Freeze frame data (FFD)

ECU IDENTIFICATION
Displays the part number stored in the control unit.

SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Refer to STC-10, «DTC Index».
When “CRNT” is displayed on self-diagnosis result.

• The system is presently malfunctioning.

When “PAST” is displayed on self-diagnosis result.

• System malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.
Item name

Display item
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after the DTC is detected is displayed.
• When “0” is displayed: It indicates that the system is presently malfunctioning.
• When except “0” is displayed: It indicates that system malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal.
NOTE:
Each time when ignition switch is turned OFF to ON, numerical number increases in 1→2→3…38→39.
When the operation number of times exceeds 39, the number does not increase and “39” is displayed until selfdiagnosis is erased.

IGN COUNTER
(0-39)

DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitor item (Unit)

Remarks

BATTERY VOLT (V)

Displays the power supply voltage for EPS control unit.

TORQUE SENSOR (Nm)

Displays steering wheel turning force detected by torque sensor.

MOTOR CURRENT (A)

Displays the current value consumed by EPS motor.*1

MOTOR SIG (A)

Displays the current commanded value to EPS motor.

ASSIST TORQUE (Nm)

Displays assist torque being output by the electric power steering.

C/U TEMP (°C or °F )

Displays the temperature of the EPS control unit.

ASSIST LEVEL (%)

Normally displays 100%. In case of an excessive stationary steering, the assist
curvature gradually falls. However, it return to 100% when left standing.*2

VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or MPH)

Vehicle speed is displayed from vehicle speed signal via CAN communication.*3

WARNING LAMP (On/Off)

EPS warning lamp control status is displayed.

ENGINE STATUS (Stop/Run)

Engine speed is displayed from engine status signal via CAN communication.

*1: Almost in accordance with the value of “MOTOR SIG”. It is not a malfunction though these values are not
accorded when steering quickly.
Revision: April 2013

STC-6

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (EPS CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
*2: Normally displays 100%. In case of an excessive stationary steering, the assist curvature gradually falls.
However, it returns to 100% when left standing.
*3: It is not a malfunction, though it might not be corresponding just after ignition switch in turned ON.

A

B

C

D

E

F

STC

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-7

2014 Note

EPS CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
EPS CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009485778

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CAUTION:
The output signal indicates the EPS control unit calculation data. The normal values will be displayed
even in the event that the output circuit (harness) is open.
Data monitor

Monitor item
BATTERY VOLT

TORQUE SENSOR

MOTOR CURRENT

Condition
Ignition switch: ON

Engine running

Engine running

Battery voltage
Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)

Approx. 0 Nm

Steering wheel: Right turn

Positive value (Nm)

Steering wheel: Left turn

Negative value (Nm)

Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)

Approx. 0 A

Steering wheel: Right or left turn

MOTOR SIG

Engine running

Display value

Displays consumption current of
EPS motor (A)*1

Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)

Approx. 0 A

Steering wheel: Right turn

Positive value (A)

Steering wheel: Left turn

Negative value (A)

ASSIST TORQUE

Engine running

Approx. 0 Nm*2

C/U TEMP

Ignition switch ON or engine running

Displays temperature of inside of
EPS control unit (°C or °F)

ASSIST LEVEL

Engine running

100 %*3

Vehicle stopped

0 km/h or mph

VEHICLE SPEED

WARNING LAMP

ENGINE STATUS

Approximately equal to the indication
While driving

on speedometer*4
(inside of ±10%)

EPS warning lamp: ON

On

EPS warning lamp: OFF

Off

Engine not running

Stop

Engine running

Run

*1: Almost in accordance with the value of “MOTOR SIG”. It is not a malfunction though these values are not
accorded when steering quickly.
*2: A fixed value is indicated regardless of steering turning.
*3: Normally displays 100%. In case of an excessive stationary steering, the assist curvature gradually falls.
However, it returns to 100% when left standing.
*4: It is not a malfunction, though it might not be corresponding just after ignition switch in turned ON.

Revision: April 2013

STC-8

2014 Note

EPS CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A

B

C
ALGIA0167ZZ

D

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire Color)

Description

Condition

Value
(Approx.)

E

F

+

−

1
(P)

—

CAN-L

Input/Output

—

—

2
(L)

—

CAN-H

Input/Output

—

—

4
(Y)

Ground

Ignition power supply

Input

13
(R)

Ground

Torque sensor power
supply

Output

14
(Y)

15
(B)

Ground

Ground

Signal name

Torque sensor sub

Torque sensor ground

Input/Output

Ignition switch: ON

Battery voltage

Ignition switch: OFF

0V

Ignition switch: ON

5V

Ignition switch: OFF

0V
Steering wheel: Not
steering (There is no
steering force)

2.5 V

I

Engine running

Steering wheel: steering

1.6 V – 3.4 V
(The value is changed
according to steering
left or right)

J

0V

K

Always

Ignition switch: ON
16
(W)

Ground

Torque sensor main

Ground

Battery power supply

18
(B)

Ground

19
(−)
20
(B)

Steering wheel: Not
steering (There is no
steering force)

2.5 V

Steering wheel: steering

1.6 V – 3.4 V
(The value is changed
according to steering
left or right)

Input
Engine running

17
(R)

H

Ignition switch: ON
Input

Input

STC

Input

Always

Battery voltage

Ground

—

Always

0V

—

Motor

—

—

—

—

Motor

—

—

—

L

M

N

P

Fail-Safe

INFOID:0000000009485779

• If any malfunction occurs in the system and control unit detects the malfunction, EPS warning lamp on combination meter turns ON to indicate system malfunction.
• When EPS warning lamp is ON, the system enters into a manual steering state. (Steering wheel turning
force becomes heavy.)
• Under abnormal vehicle speed signal conditions, vehicle speed is judged as constant.
Revision: April 2013

O

STC-9

2014 Note

EPS CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

Protection Function

INFOID:0000000009485780

EPS control unit decreases the output signal to EPS motor while extremely using the power steering function
(e.g., full steering) consecutively for protecting EPS motor and EPS control unit (Overload protection control).
While activating overload protection control, the assist torque gradually decreases, and the steering wheel
turning force becomes heavy. The normal assist torque reactivates by no steering.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

INFOID:0000000009485781

When multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check one by one depending on the following priority list.
Priority

Priority order item (DTC)

1

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

2

C1609 CAN VHCL SPEED, C1610 CAN ENG RPM

3

C1601 BATTERY VOLT

4

Other than the above

DTC Index

INFOID:0000000009485782

DTC

Items (CONSULT screen terms)

Reference

C1601

BATTERY VOLT

STC-18, «DTC Logic»

C1604

TORQUE SENSOR

STC-21, «DTC Logic»

C1606

EPS MOTOR

STC-23, «DTC Logic»

C1607

EEPROM

STC-25, «DTC Logic»

C1608

CONTROL UNIT

STC-25, «DTC Logic»

C1609

CAN VHCL SPEED

STC-26, «DTC Logic»

C1610

CAN ENG RPM

STC-27, «DTC Logic»

U1000

CAN COMM CIRCUIT

STC-28, «DTC Logic»

Revision: April 2013

STC-10

2014 Note

EPS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

EPS SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009016071

B

C

D

E

F

STC

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

AAGWA0033GB

Revision: April 2013

STC-11

2014 Note

EPS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAGIA0066GB

Revision: April 2013

STC-12

2014 Note

EPS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

STC

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AAGIA0067GB

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-13

2014 Note

EPS SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AAGIA0068GB

Revision: April 2013

STC-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009485783

B

DETAILED FLOW

1.INTERVIEW FROM THE CUSTOMER

C

Clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, perform an interview utilizing STC-16, «Diagnostic
Work Sheet» and reproduce symptoms to understand them fully. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. Check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer, if necessary.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. Never make assumptions like “maybe the customer means that…,” or
“maybe the customer mentioned this symptom”.

D

E

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SYMPTOM

F

Reproduce the symptom that is indicated by the customer, based on the information from the customer
obtained by interview. Also check that the symptom is not caused by protection function. Refer to STC-10,
STC
«Protection Function».
CAUTION:
When the symptom is caused by normal operation, fully inspect each portion and obtain the understanding of customer that the symptom is not caused by a malfunction.
H
>> GO TO 3.

3.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

I

With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “EPS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print self-diagnosis results. GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

J

K

4.RECHECK SYMPTOM

With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedures for the malfunctioning system.
NOTE:
If some DTCs are detected at the same time, determine the order for performing the diagnosis based on STC10, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart».
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. Refer to GI-41,
«Intermittent Incident».

L

M

N

5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENT

O

• Repair or replace malfunctioning component.
• Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing.
• When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.

P

>> GO TO 7.

6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Estimate malfunctioning system based on symptom diagnosis and perform inspection.
Can the malfunctioning system be identified?
Revision: April 2013

STC-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview. Refer to GI-41,
«Intermittent Incident».

7.FINAL CHECK

With CONSULT
1. Check the reference value for EPS control unit.
2. Recheck the symptom and check that symptom is not reproduced on the same conditions.
Is the symptom reproduced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnostic Work Sheet

INFOID:0000000009485784

Description
• In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the
symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about his/her concerns carefully. To systemize all
the information for the diagnosis, prepare the interview sheet referring to the interview points.
• In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may cause a DTC to be detected.

Interview sheet sample
Interview sheet
Customer
name

MR/MS

Storage date

Registration
number

Initial year
registration

Vehicle type

VIN

Engine

Mileage

km (Mile)

†The steering wheel position (center) is in the wrong position.
†Warning lamp turns on.
Symptom

†Noise

†Vibration

†Others
(

)

First occurrence

†Recently

Frequency of occurrence

†Always

†Others (

)

†Under a certain conditions of

†Sometimes (time(s)/day)

†Irrelevant
Climate conditions

Weather

†Fine

Temperature

†Hot

Relative humidity

†High

†Cloud
†Warm

†Rain
†Cool

†Moderate

†Snow
†Cold

†Others (
†Temperature [Approx.

°C (°F)]

†Low

Road conditions

†Urban area
†Suburb area
†High way
†Mountain road (uphill or down hill)
†Rough road

Operation conditions, etc.

†Irrelevant
†When engine starts
†During idling
†During driving
†During acceleration
†At constant speed driving
†During deceleration
†During cornering (right curve or left curve)
†During steering

Revision: April 2013

)

STC-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Interview sheet
Customer
name
Storage date

MR/MS

Registration
number

Initial year
registration

Vehicle type

VIN

Engine

Mileage

A

km (Mile)

Other conditions

B

C

Memo

D

E

F

STC

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-17

2014 Note

C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578758

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1601

Display item

Malfunction detected condition
When a power supply voltage to the EPS control unit
is maintained at 17.5 V or more or at less than 9V
continuously for five second or more.

BATTERY VOLT

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
•

Harness or connector
EPS control unit
Fuse
Power supply system
Battery

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1601” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578759

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to STC-11, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EPS control unit harness connector.
Check continuity between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

E23

18

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

4. Connect EPS control unit harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

2.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (1)

1.

Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: April 2013

STC-18

2014 Note

C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A

EPS control unit

2.
3.

Connector

Terminal

M53

4

—

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 0 V

B

Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector and ground.
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

M53

4

—

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

C

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (2)

F

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the 10A fuse (No. 5).
STC
Check the harness for open or short between EPS control unit harness connector M53 terminal 4 and the
10A fuse (No. 5).
Is the inspection result normal?
H
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram
— Ignition Power Supply —».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.
I
CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (3)

4.
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
EPS control unit

3.
4.

Connector

Terminal

E23

17

—

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

J

K

Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector and ground.

L

M
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

E23

17

—

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

O

5.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (4)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the 60A fusible link (J).
Check the harness for open or short between EPS control unit harness connector E23 terminal 17 and the
60A fusible link (J).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit. Refer to PG-10, «Wiring Diagram — Battery Power Supply —».
Revision: April 2013

STC-19

2014 Note

P

C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.

6.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect torque sensor harness connector.
Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or
replace terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.

Revision: April 2013

STC-20

2014 Note

C1604 TORQUE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1604 TORQUE SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578760

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1604

B

Display item
TORQUE SENSOR

Malfunction detected condition
When torque sensor output signal is malfunctioning.

Possible cause
• Harness or connector
• Torque sensor
• EPS control unit

C

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

E

1.PRECONDITIONING

>> GO TO 2.

F

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1604” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

STC

H

INFOID:0000000009578761

I

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to STC-11, «Wiring Diagram».

J

1.CHECK TORQUE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

K

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF to ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Steering wheel in neutral position. (There is no steering force.)
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

M54

13

—

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 5 V

L

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform the trouble diagnosis for battery power supply circuit. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK TORQUE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

P

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Steering wheel in neutral position. (There is no steering force.)

Revision: April 2013

STC-21

O

2014 Note

C1604 TORQUE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

M54

15

—

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK TORQUE SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF to ON.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Steering wheel in neutral position. (There is no steering force.)
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal
16

M54

3.
4.

14

—

Voltage

Ground

Approx. 2.5 V

Start the engine.
Check voltage between EPS control unit harness connector terminal and ground while turning the steering wheel.
EPS control unit
Connector

Terminal

—

Voltage

Ground

1.6 V – 3.4 V
(The value is changed according to
steering left or right)

16
M54

14

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Torque sensor is malfunctioning. Replace steering column assembly. Refer to ST-9, «Removal
and Installation».

4.CHECK CONNECTOR

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EPS control unit harness connector.
Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or
replace terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.

Revision: April 2013

STC-22

2014 Note

C1606 EPS MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1606 EPS MOTOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578762

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1606

B

Display item

Malfunction detected condition
When the motor driver malfunction of EPS control
unit or EPS motor malfunction is detected.

EPS MOTOR

Possible cause
• Harness or connector
• EPS motor
• EPS control unit

C

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

D

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.

E

1.PRECONDITIONING

>> GO TO 2.

F

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1606” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-23, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

STC

H

INFOID:0000000009578763

I

1.CHECK EPS MOTOR
Check the EPS motor. Refer to STC-23, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> EPS motor is malfunction. Replace steering column assembly. Refer to ST-9, «Removal and
Installation».

2.CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EPS motor harness connector.
Check terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If any malfunction is found, repair or
replace terminal.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning component.

Component Inspection

EPS motor

M

N

P

Resistance (Approx.)

Terminal
20

0.1 Ω or less

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

L

O

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect EPS motor harness connector.
Check resistance between EPS motor connector terminals.

19

K

INFOID:0000000009578764

1.CHECK EPS MOTOR
1.
2.
3.

J

STC-23

2014 Note

C1606 EPS MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> EPS motor is malfunctioning. Replace steering column assembly. Refer to ST-9, «Removal and
Installation».

Revision: April 2013

STC-24

2014 Note

C1607, C1608 EPS CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1607, C1608 EPS CONTROL UNIT

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578765

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1607
C1608

B

Display item

Malfunction detected condition

EEPROM

When the memory (EEPROM) system malfunction is
detected in EPS control unit.

CONTROL UNIT

When the internal malfunction is detected in EPS
control unit.

Possible cause

C
EPS control unit

D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

E

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
F

>> GO TO 2.

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE

STC

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-25, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I
INFOID:0000000009578766

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

J

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Erase self-diagnosis results for “EPS”.
3. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Check EPS control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If
any item are damaged, repair or replace malfunctioning component.

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-25

2014 Note

C1609 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1609 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Description

INFOID:0000000009578767

EPS control unit receives the vehicle speed signal from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
communication line.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578768

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1609

Display item

CAN VHCL SPEED

Malfunction detected condition
• Malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal that
is output from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input
signal error is detected.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
—

Harness or connector
CAN communication line
EPS control unit
ABS malfunction
Vehicle speed signal error

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1609” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-26, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578769

1.PERFORM ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “ABS” self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

With CONSULT
Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1609” detected?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Check EPS control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If
any item are damaged, repair or replace malfunctioning component.

Revision: April 2013

STC-26

2014 Note

C1610 ENGINE STATUS SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

C1610 ENGINE STATUS SIGNAL

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009578770

EPS control unit receives the engine status signal from ECM via CAN communication line.

DTC Logic

B
INFOID:0000000009578771

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

C1610

Display item

CAN ENG RPM

Malfunction detected condition
• Malfunction is detected in engine status signal
that is output from ECM via CAN communication.
• ECM input signal error is detected.

Possible cause
•
•
•
•
—

Harness or connector
CAN communication line
EPS control unit
ECM
Engine status signal error

D

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

F

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
STC
>> GO TO 2.

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE

H

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1610” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-27, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009578772

K

1.PERFORM ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “ENGINE” self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-53, «CONSULT Function».
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to EC-76, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

L

M

2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

With CONSULT
Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1610” detected?
YES >> Replace EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Check EPS control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If
any item are damaged, repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Revision: April 2013

STC-27

2014 Note

N

O

P

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009578773

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit communicate data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009578774

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000

Display item
CAN COMM CIRCUIT

Malfunction detected condition
EPS control unit is not transmitting/receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or more.

Possible cause
• CAN communication error
• EPS control unit

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PRECONDITIONING

If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “U1000” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-28, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Inspection End.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578775

Proceed to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

Revision: April 2013

STC-28

2014 Note

EPS WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

EPS WARNING LAMP

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578776

1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE EPS WARNING LAMP

B

Check that the EPS warning lamp turns ON when ignition switch turns ON. Then, EPS warning lamp turns
OFF after the engine is started.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis. Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

Diagnosis Procedure

D

INFOID:0000000009578777

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

E

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-10, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

STC

2.CHECK EPS WARNING LAMP SIGNAL

With CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” of “EPS” and select “WARNING LAMP”.
3. Check that the EPS warning lamp is turned ON.
4. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
5. Check that the EPS warning lamp is turned OFF.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for combination meter power supply circuit. Refer to MWI-39,
«COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, «Removal and Installation».
1.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-29

2014 Note

EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Description

INFOID:0000000009485801

EPS warning lamp does not turn ON when turning ignition switch ON from OFF. (Check the illumination of the
EPS warning lamp.)

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009485802

1.CHECK EPS WARNING LAMP
Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS warning lamp. Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that there is no malfunction in each harness connector pin terminal or disconnection.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

Revision: April 2013

STC-30

2014 Note

EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

EPS WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009485803

EPS warning lamp does not turn OFF several seconds after engine started.

Diagnosis Procedure

B
INFOID:0000000009485804

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

C

With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-10, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

E

2.CHECK EPS WARNING LAMP

Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS warning lamp. Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

F

STC

3.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS control unit power supply and ground. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that there is no malfunction in each harness connector pin terminal or disconnection.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-31

2014 Note

STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
Description

INFOID:0000000009485805

Steering wheel turning force is heavy or light.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009485806

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform EPS self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-10, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE EPS WARNING LAMP
Check that the EPS warning lamp turns ON when ignition switch turns ON. Then, EPS warning lamp turns
OFF after the engine is started.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis of EPS warning lamp. Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

3.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (1)

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Select ASSIST LEVEL in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Dose the item in DATA MONITOR indicate 100%?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
1.

4.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (2)

With CONSULT
Select BATTERY VOLT in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Dose the item in DATA MONITOR indicate 10 V or more?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis of EPS control unit power supply and ground. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».

5.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (3)

With CONSULT
Select ASSIST LEVEL in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Stop the EPS system until the item in DATA MONITOR becomes 100%.
NOTE:
While stopping the EPS system, do not turn steering wheel.
3. Check that the symptom continues.
Dose the symptom continue?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> The assist torque decreases because of protection function. This is not malfunction. Inspection
End.
1.
2.

6.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (4)
1.

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

STC-32

2014 Note

STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn steering wheel from full left stop to full right stop.
3. Select TORQUE SENSOR in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Monitor item

TORQUE SENSOR

Condition

A

B

Display value

Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering
force)

Approx. 0 Nm

Steering wheel: Right turn

Positive value (Nm)

Steering wheel: Left turn

Negative value (Nm)

C

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

7.CHECK EPS MOTOR

E

Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS motor. Refer to STC-23, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

F

8.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE

STC

Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STC-33

2014 Note

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN
RIGHT AND LEFT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT
Description

INFOID:0000000009485807

Unbalance steering wheel turning force and return between right and left.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009485808

1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE EPS WARNING LAMP
Check the EPS warning lamp while engine is running.
Does the EPS warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

2.CHECK WHEEL ALIGNMENT

1. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».
2. Perform EPS self-diagnosis.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Adjustment of wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-8, «Adjustment».

3.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn steering wheel from full left stop to full right stop.
3. Select DATA MONITOR of EPS and select TORQUE SENSOR.
4. Perform the torque sensor inspection.
1.

Monitor item

TORQUE SENSOR

Condition

Display value

Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering
force)

Approx. 0 Nm

Steering wheel: Right turn

Positive value (Nm)

Steering wheel: Left turn

Negative value (Nm)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK EPS MOTOR

Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS motor. Refer to STC-23, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

5.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE

Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

STC-34

2014 Note

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
Description

INFOID:0000000009485809

A

B

Unbalance steering wheel turning force (torque variation).

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009485810

C

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform EPS self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-10, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

D

E

2.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE EPS WARNING LAMP

F

Check the EPS warning lamp while the engine is started.
Does the EPS warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to STC-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

STC

3.CHECK STEERING COLUMN AND STEERING GEAR

H

Check the steering column assembly and steering gear assembly.
• Steering column assembly. Refer to ST-9, «Exploded View».
• Steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-14, «Exploded View».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

I

J

4.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (1)

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn steering wheel from full left stop to full right stop.
3. Select ASSIST LEVEL in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Dose the item in DATA MONITOR maintain 100%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

K

1.

L

M

5.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (2)

With CONSULT
Select BATTERY VOLT in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Does the item in DATA MONITOR indicate 10 V or more?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis of EPS control unit power supply and ground. Refer to STC-18, «Diagnosis Procedure».

6.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (3)

With CONSULT
Select ASSIST LEVEL in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
Stop the EPS system until the item in DATA MONITOR becomes 100%.
NOTE:
While stopping the EPS system, do not turn steering wheel.
3. Check that the symptom continues.
1.
2.

Revision: April 2013

STC-35

2014 Note

N

O

P

UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Dose the symptom continue?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> The assist torque decreases because of protection function. This is not malfunction. Inspection
End.

7.CHECK EPS CONTROL UNIT SIGNAL (4)

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn steering wheel from full left stop to full right stop.
3. Select TORQUE SENSOR in DATA MONITOR in EPS.
4. Perform the torque sensor inspection.
1.

Monitor item

TORQUE SENSOR

Condition

Display value

Steering wheel: Not steering (There is no steering
force)

Approx. 0 Nm

Steering wheel: Right turn

Positive value (Nm)

Steering wheel: Left turn

Negative value (Nm)

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

8.CHECK EPS MOTOR

Perform the trouble diagnosis of EPS motor. Refer to STC-23, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace the specific malfunctioning part.

9.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE

Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-5, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

STC-36

2014 Note

EPS CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

EPS CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009016081

B

C

D

E

F

STC

AWGIA0295ZZ

1.

Steering column

2.

Bracket plate

3.

H

EPS control unit

Front

I

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009016082

CAUTION:
• Do not allow EPS control unit to get wet with water, moisture or any other liquid. Also, protect the
EPS control unit from extreme temperatures.
• Do not disassemble or remodel EPS control unit, EPS motor, torque sensor, harness and connectors.

J

K

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View»
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect harness connectors from EPS control unit.
CAUTION:
Hold and pull the connector housing, do not pull on harness when disconnecting connectors.
Also, do not grip, collapse or apply excessive force to the connector.
Remove screws and EPS control unit from steering column.
Remove bolts and bracket plate from steering column if necessary.

L

M

N

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that the harness connector, terminals and the EPS control unit are not visibly damaged before
installing the EPS control unit.
• Check that the harness connector, terminals and the EPS control unit are free of foreign materials
before installing.
• Replace the EPS control unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
After installing steering column, perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT to ensure correct operation. Refer to
STC-6, «CONSULT Function».

Revision: April 2013

STC-37

2014 Note

O

P

ENGINE

SECTION

STR

STARTING SYSTEM

A

STR

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 13

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2

Work Flow (With GR8-1200 NI) ………………………….13
Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI) ……………………..16

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tools …………………………………. 3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4
STARTING SYSTEM …………………………………………… 4
STARTING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
…… 4
STARTING SYSTEM : Component Description …… 5

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 6
System Description …………………………………………… 6

WIRING DIAGRAM ………………………………… 7
STARTING SYSTEM ……………………………………. 7
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………… 7

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 13

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 19
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ………………………………. 19
Description ………………………………………………………19
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..19

S CONNECTOR CIRCUIT …………………………… 21
Description ………………………………………………………21
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..21

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 22

F

G

H

I

J

STARTING SYSTEM ………………………………….. 22
Symptom Table ……………………………………………….22

K

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 23
STARTER MOTOR ……………………………………. 23
Exploded View …………………………………………………23
Removal and Installation …………………………………..23

L

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………… 24

M

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 24

N

Starter Motor ……………………………………………………24
O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009452287

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Revision: April 2013

STR-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009385556

STR

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(—) Model GR8-1200 NI
Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station

Tests batteries, starting and charging systems
and charges batteries.
Operating instructions, refer to diagnostic station instruction manual.

C

D

E
AWIIA1239ZZ

F

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009385557

G

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

H

I
PIIB1407E

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009385560

AWBIA1588ZZ

Vehicle front
A.

Engine front side

B.

Transmission LH side

D.

Instrument panel LH side (view with
the instrument panel removed)

E.

Pedal assemblies LH side

Revision: April 2013

STR-4

C.

Engine room LH side

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

STARTING SYSTEM : Component Description
No.

Component part

INFOID:0000000009385561

A
Description

Starter motor

The starter motor plunger closes and the motor is supplied with battery
power, which in turn cranks the engine, when the S terminal is supplied
with electric power.

STR

1.

2.

Transmission range switch (CVT Models)

Supplies power to the starter relay and starter control relay (inside
IPDM E/R) when the selector lever is shifted into the P or N position.

C

3.

IPDM E/R

CPU inside IPDM E/R operates the starter relay when the ignition
switch is in the start position.

4.

BCM

BCM controls the starter relay inside the IPDM E/R.

5.

Clutch interlock switch (M/T Models)

Clutch interlock switch supplies power to the coil side of the starter relay when the clutch pedal is depressed to crank the engine.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-5

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
System Description

INFOID:0000000009385565

System Diagram

ALBIA1145GB

The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates.

Revision: April 2013

STR-6

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009385566

STR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

AABWA0822GB

Revision: April 2013

STR-7

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AABIA1098GB

Revision: April 2013

STR-8

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

STR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AABIA1099GB

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-9

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AABIA1100GB

Revision: April 2013

STR-10

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

STR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
AABIA1101GB

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-11

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AABIA1102GB

Revision: April 2013

STR-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow (With GR8-1200 NI)

INFOID:0000000009446820

STR

STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS WITH GR8-1200 NI
To test the starting system, use the following special service tool:
• GR8-1200 NI Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station
NOTE:
Refer to the diagnostic station Instruction Manual for proper starting system diagnosis procedures.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
OVERALL SEQUENCE

AWBIA1200GB

DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter motor and generator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.

1.DIAGNOSIS WITH MULTITASKING BATTERY AND ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTIC STATION GR8-1200 NI
Revision: April 2013

STR-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Perform the starting system test with Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI. For
details and operating instructions, refer to diagnostic station Instruction Manual.
A
Test result
CRANKING NORMAL>>GO TO 2.
LOW VOLTAGE>>GO TO 5.
STR
CHARGE BATTERY>>Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12
hours.) Perform battery test again. Refer to diagnostic station instruction manual.
REPLACE BATTERY>>Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform
C
battery test again. Refer to diagnostic station instruction manual. If second test result is
“REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.

2.CRANKING CHECK

D

Check that the starter motor operates properly.
Does the engine crank normally?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

E

3.ENGINE START CHECK

Check that the engine starts.
Does the engine start?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or engine control system. Refer to EM and EC
sections. Once resolved, perform battery test again.

4.STARTER MOTOR ACTIVATION

F

G

H

Check that the starter motor operates.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES >> Check ring gear and starter motor drive pinion. Once resolved, perform battery test again.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

5.COMPARISON BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT AND CRANKING VOLTAGE

I

J

Compare the engine coolant temperature and verify the cranking voltage is within specifications.
Minimum Specification of Cranking Voltage Referencing Coolant Temperature

Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)]

Voltage [V]

−30 to −20 (−22 to −4)

8.6

−19 to −10 (−2 to 14)

9.1

−9 to 0 (16 to 32)

9.5

More than 1 (More than 34)

9.9

K

L

Is the voltage less than the specified value?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

M

6.STARTER OPERATION

N

Check the starter operation.
Does the starter motor turn smoothly?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

O

7.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

P

Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-19, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

8.“S” CONNECTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check “S” connector circuit. Refer to STR-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Revision: April 2013

STR-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Is “S” connector circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

9.ENGINE ROTATION STATUS
Check that the engine can be rotated by hand.
Does the engine turn freely by hand?
YES >> Replace starter motor.
NO
>> Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or powertrain mechanism. Once resolved, perform battery test again using Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI.
Refer to the diagnostic station Instruction Manual for proper testing procedures.

Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI)

INFOID:0000000009446821

OVERALL SEQUENCE
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

STR-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
If any malfunction is found, immediately disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
A

STR

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N
AWBIA1303GB

DETAILED FLOW

O

1.CHECK ENGINE START
Crank the engine and check that the engine starts.
Does the engine start?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

P

2.CHECK THAT THE STARTER MOTOR STOPS
Check that the starter motor stops after starting the engine.
Does the starter motor stop?
Revision: April 2013

STR-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace starter motor. Refer to STR-23, «Removal and Installation».

3.CHECK THAT THE ENGINE TURNS WHEN CRANKING
Check that the engine turns when cranking.
Does engine turn when cranking?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

4.CHECK THE ENGINE SPEED WHEN CRANKING

Check that the engine speed is not low when cranking.
Does engine turn normally?
YES >> Check ignition/fuel system.
NO
>> Check charge condition, corrosion and connection condition of the battery.

5.CHECK STARTER MOTOR ACTIVATION

Check that the starter motor runs at cranking.
Does starter motor turn?
YES >> Replace starter motor. Refer to STR-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 6.

6.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

Check the following conditions:
• Fuse and fusible link
• Charge condition, corrosion and connection of the battery.
Are these inspection results normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair as needed.

7.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM WIRING

Check the following:
• “B” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-19, «Diagnosis Procedure».
• “S” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-21, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Are the inspection results normal?
YES >> Replace starter motor. Refer to STR-23, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair as needed.

Revision: April 2013

STR-18

2014 Note

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Description

INFOID:0000000009446823

STR

INFOID:0000000009446824

C

Terminal “B” is constantly supplied with battery power.

Diagnosis Procedure
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to STR-7, «Wiring Diagram».

D

CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that the engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.

E

1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT

F

1.
2.
3.

G

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that starter motor ”B” terminal connection is clean and tight.
Check voltage between starter motor ”B” terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Starter motor “B” terminal

Terminal

F27

B

(-)

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

Battery voltage

H

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check harness between battery and starter motor for open circuit.

J

1.
2.

K

2.CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
Shift selector lever to ”P” (Park) or ”N” (Neutral) position.
Check voltage between battery positive terminal and starter motor ”B” terminal.
Terminals
(-)
(+)

Starter motor
“B“ terminal

Terminal

Battery positive terminal

F27

B

Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

When the ignition switch is in START position

Less than 0.5V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness between the battery and starter motor for continuity.

O

Shift selector lever to ”P” (Park) or ”N” (Neutral) position.
Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal.
Terminals
(+)

(-)

Starter motor case

Battery negative terminal

Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

When the ignition switch is in
START position

Less than 0.2V

Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: April 2013

STR-19

M

N

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1.
2.

L

2014 Note

P

B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-13, «Work Flow (With
GR8-1200 NI)» or STR-16, «Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> Check the starter motor case to engine mounting for high resistance.

Revision: April 2013

STR-20

2014 Note

S CONNECTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

S CONNECTOR CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009446825

The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition switch is turned to the START posi- STR
tion while the selector lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009446826

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to STR-7, «Wiring Diagram».
D

CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.

E

1.CHECK “S” CONNECTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

F

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor connector.
Shift selector lever to “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral) position.
Check voltage between starter motor harness connector and ground.
(+)

(-)

Connector

Terminal

F28

S

Ground

G

Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

When the ignition switch is in START position

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “S” circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-13, «Work Flow (With GR8-1200
NI)» or STR-16, «Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between starter motor harness connector and the IPDM E/R harness connector.
Starter motor harness connector

3.

IPDM E/R harness connector

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F28

S

E43

6

Continuity

H

I

J

K

L

Yes

Check continuity between starter motor terminal S and ground.

M

Connector

Terminal

—

Continuity

F28

S

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-13, «Work Flow (With GR8-1200 NI)» or STR-16,
«Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI)».
NO
>> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-21

2014 Note

STARTING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
STARTING SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009385574

Symptom
No normal cranking
Starter motor does not rotate

Revision: April 2013

Reference
Refer to STR-13, «Work Flow (With GR8-1200 NI)» or STR-16,
«Work Flow (Without GR8-1200 NI)».

STR-22

2014 Note

STARTER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

STARTER MOTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009385575

STR

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
C

D

E

F

G

H
AWGIA0291ZZ

1.

Cylinder block

2.

Starter motor

A.

Mounting hole for CVT

B.

Mounting hole for M/T

C.

“B” terminal harness

D.

“S” terminal harness

I

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009385576

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
Remove the radiator core support upper. DLK-122, «RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal
and Installation».
Remove “S” terminal nut and “S” terminal harness.
Remove “B” terminal nut and disconnect “B” terminal harness.
Remove the starter motor bolts.
Remove the starter motor.
CAUTION:
Be careful to not damage surrounding parts when removing starter motor from the vehicle.

INSTALLATION

J

K

L

M

N

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
O

P

Revision: April 2013

STR-23

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Starter Motor

INFOID:0000000009385578

Manufacturer

Mitsubishi

Model number*

M000T32175ZC

Type

Reduction gear type

System voltage

12V
Terminal voltage

No-load

11V

Current

Less than 95A

Revolution

More than 3,000 rpm

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Revision: April 2013

STR-24

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

SECTION

TM

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

A

B

C

TM

E

CONTENTS
5MT: RS5F91R

GEAR OIL ………………………………………………… 16

F

Inspection ……………………………………………………….16
Draining ………………………………………………………….16
Refilling …………………………………………………………..16

G

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 7
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 7
General Precautions …………………………………………. 7
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 7

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 17

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 9

POSITION SWITCH …………………………………… 18

SIDE OIL SEAL …………………………………………. 17

Removal and Installation …………………………………..18
Inspection ……………………………………………………….18

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 9
Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 9
Commercial Service Tools ……………………………….. 11

Sectional View ………………………………………………… 12
System Description …………………………………………. 12

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 14
POSITION SWITCH ……………………………………..14
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH …………………………………. 14
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection ……………………………………………………………….. 14
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ……….. 14
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH :
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 14

Exploded View …………………………………………………19
Removal and Installation …………………………………..19
Inspection ……………………………………………………….20

AIR BREATHER HOSE ……………………………… 21
Exploded View …………………………………………………21
Removal and Installation …………………………………..21

5TH MAIN GEAR ASSEMBLY ……………………. 22
Removal and Installation …………………………………..22
Inspection ……………………………………………………….22

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …… 23

J

K

L

M

N

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ………………………….. 23
Exploded View …………………………………………………23
Removal and Installation …………………………………..23
Inspection ……………………………………………………….24

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………… 15

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY … 25

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ……………………….15

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY ………………………….. 25

NVH Troubleshooting Chart ……………………………… 15

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ……………………. 16

Revision: April 2013

I

CONTROL LINKAGE …………………………………. 19

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ……………………….. 12
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION …………………..12

H

Removal and Installation …………………………………..17
Inspection ……………………………………………………….17

TM-1

Exploded View …………………………………………………25
Disassembly ……………………………………………………29
Assembly ………………………………………………………..35
Inspection ……………………………………………………….43

2014 Note

O

P

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR …………………………. 44
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 44
Disassembly ………………………………………………….. 44
Assembly ………………………………………………………. 44
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 44

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR ……………………………. 46
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 46
Disassembly ………………………………………………….. 46
Assembly ………………………………………………………. 48
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 49

FINAL DRIVE …………………………………………….. 51
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 51
Disassembly ………………………………………………….. 51
Assembly ………………………………………………………. 51
Inspection ……………………………………………………… 51

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………….. 53
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………… 53
General Specifications …………………………………….. 53

CVT: RE0F11A
PRECAUTION ……………………………………… 54
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………. 54
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» ……………………………………………………….. 54
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover… 54
Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement ……………………………………………………… 54
Precaution for G Sensor Removal/Installation or
Replacement …………………………………………………. 54
General Precautions ……………………………………….. 55
On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and
Engine ………………………………………………………….. 55
Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit
Connector ……………………………………………………… 56

PREPARATION ……………………………………. 58
PREPARATION …………………………………………. 58

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor ………………………………………………………………… 61
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed
Sensor …………………………………………………………… 61
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor… 62
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor ……………………………………………………. 62
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure
Sensor …………………………………………………………… 62
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve …………………………………………………… 63
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid
Valve …………………………………………………………….. 63
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve ……………………………… 63
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve ……………………………………… 63
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve ……………………………………………………… 64
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor ……………….. 64
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Overdrive Control
Switch …………………………………………………………… 64
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : OD OFF Indicator
Lamp …………………………………………………………….. 64
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator …………………………………………………………………. 65
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) …………………………………………………….. 66
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ………………………………………. 66
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ……………………………………………………………….. 66

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION …………………. 67
TRANSAXLE ……………………………………………………. 67
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View ………………… 67
TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism ……………….. 67
TRANSAXLE : Operation Status ……………………….. 69
TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System ………………….. 70
TRANSAXLE : Component Description ……………… 70
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM …….. 71
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM :
System Description …………………………………………. 71

Special Service Tools ……………………………………… 58
Commercial Service Tools ……………………………….. 58

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ………………………………………. 72
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description ……… 72

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………. 59

SYSTEM …………………………………………………… 73

COMPONENT PARTS ………………………………… 59

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ………………………………….. 73
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description … 73
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Schematic ………………. 76
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe …………………. 77
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control ……. 80

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ………………………………….. 59
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ……………………………………………………………. 59
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM ……………………… 60
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : ROM Assembly ………. 60
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range
Switch …………………………………………………………… 61

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL …………………………….. 80
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description ……………………………………………………………….. 81
SHIFT CONTROL ……………………………………………… 81

Revision: April 2013

TM-2

2014 Note

SHIFT CONTROL : System Description …………….. 82
SELECT CONTROL ………………………………………….. 83
SELECT CONTROL : System Description ………….. 84
LOCK-UP CONTROL ………………………………………… 84
LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description ………… 85

STALL TEST …………………………………………… 130
Work Procedure …………………………………………….. 130

LINE PRESSURE TEST ……………………………. 131
Work Procedure …………………………………………….. 131

Description …………………………………………………….. 89
Function of OBD ……………………………………………… 89

Inspection …………………………………………………….. 132
Adjustment ……………………………………………………. 132

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 99

U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF ……… 133 TM
Description ……………………………………………………. 133
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 133
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 133
Description ……………………………………………………. 134
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 134
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 134

F

U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM) …….. 135

G

Description ……………………………………………………. 135
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 135
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 135
Description ……………………………………………………. 136
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 136
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 136

U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC) ………. 137
Description ……………………………………………………. 137
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 137
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 137

U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA ………. 138
Description ……………………………………………………. 138
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 138
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 138

Wiring Diagram …………………………………………….. 113

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ………………………. 120
Wiring Diagram …………………………………………….. 120

H

U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A) …. 136

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………… 113
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ………………………….. 113

E

U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A) …. 134

TCM …………………………………………………………..99
Reference Value …………………………………………….. 99
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………. 107
Protection Control …………………………………………. 109
DTC Inspection Priority Chart …………………………. 110
DTC Index ……………………………………………………. 111

C

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ………………….. 133

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ………………………..90
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION ………………………………. 90
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Diagnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagnosis ……………… 90
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of
1st Trip ………………………………………………………….. 90
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ………………………………………………… 90
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System …… 90
CONSULT Function ………………………………………… 92

B

CVT POSITION ……………………………………….. 132

IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL ……………………………….. 85
IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL : System Description…. 86

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ……89

A

I

J

K

L

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ……………………. 139
M

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW …… 123

Description ……………………………………………………. 139
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 139
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 139

Flowchart of Trouble Diagnosis ……………………….. 123
Question sheet ……………………………………………… 124

U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS) …….. 140

N

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
TCM ………………………………………………………… 126

Description ……………………………………………………. 140
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 140
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 140

O

Description …………………………………………………… 126
Procedure …………………………………………………….. 126

P062F EEPROM ………………………………………. 141

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………… 123

Description ……………………………………………………. 141
DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 141
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 141

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY …………………………. 127
Description …………………………………………………… 127
Procedure …………………………………………………….. 127

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 142

CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR ………………….. 129
Description …………………………………………………… 129
Procedure …………………………………………………….. 129

Revision: April 2013

TM-3

DTC Logic …………………………………………………….. 142
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 142
Component Inspection (Transmission Range
Switch) …………………………………………………………. 146

2014 Note

P

P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A . 148
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..148
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………148
Component Inspection (Transmission Range
Switch) ………………………………………………………….150

P0711 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A …………………………………….. 151
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..151
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………151
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature
Sensor) …………………………………………………………152

P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A …………………………………….. 153

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 171
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 171

P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SEN/SW B ……………………………………………….. 173
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 173
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 173

P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SEN/SW B ……………………………………………….. 175
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 175
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 175

P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION ………………….. 177
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 177
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 177

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..153
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………153
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature
Sensor) …………………………………………………………153

P0890 TCM ………………………………………………. 178

P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A …………………………………….. 155

P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 180

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..155
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………155
Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature
Sensor) …………………………………………………………156

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ……………… 157
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..157
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………157

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ……………… 160
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..160
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………160

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ………………….. 163
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..163
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………164
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve) ……………………………………………..164

P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER ………………….. 165
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..165
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………166
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve) ……………………………………………..166

P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ………………….. 167
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..167
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………168
Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid Valve) ……………………………………………..168

P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A. 169
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………..169
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………170
Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve) …………………………………………………………..170

P0846 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
SEN/SW B ……………………………………………….. 171
Revision: April 2013

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 178
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 178
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 180
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 180
Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve) ………………………………………………………….. 180

P0963 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 182
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 182
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 182
Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve) ………………………………………………………….. 182

P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 184
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 184
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 184

P0966 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 185
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 185
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 185
Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve) …………………………………………………… 185

P0967 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 187
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 187
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 187
Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve) …………………………………………………… 187

P0998 SHIFT SOLENOID F ……………………….. 189
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 189
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 189
Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid
Valve) ………………………………………………………….. 189

P0999 SHIFT SOLENOID F ……………………….. 191
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 191
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 191
Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid
Valve) ………………………………………………………….. 191

P099B SHIFT SOLENOID G ………………………. 193

TM-4

2014 Note

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 193
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 193
Component Inspection (High Clutch & Reverse
Brake Solenoid Valve) ……………………………………. 193

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………. 219

P099C SHIFT SOLENOID G ………………………. 195

CVT FLUID ……………………………………………… 224

B

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 195
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 195
Component Inspection (High Clutch & Reverse
Brake Solenoid Valve) ……………………………………. 195

Inspection …………………………………………………….. 224
Replacement ………………………………………………… 224
Adjustment ……………………………………………………. 225

C

P1586 G SENSOR …………………………………….. 197
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 197
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 197

Symptom Table …………………………………………….. 219

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………. 224

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………. 227
CVT SHIFT SELECTOR ……………………………. 227 TM
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 227
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 227
Disassembly and Assembly …………………………….. 228
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 228

P1588 G SENSOR …………………………………….. 200
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 200
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 200

P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR …………… 202

CONTROL CABLE …………………………………… 230

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 202
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 202

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 230
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 230
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 232

P2857 CLUTCH A PRESSURE ………………….. 205

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ………………………… 233

DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 205
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 205

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 233
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 233
Inspection …………………………………………………….. 234

P2858 CLUTCH B PRESSURE ………………….. 206
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 206
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 206

P285A CLUTCH B PRESSURE ………………….. 209
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 209
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 210

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ………………………………………………………… 211
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 211

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ………………………………. 217

J

Removal and Installation ………………………………… 236

G SENSOR ……………………………………………… 237
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 237
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 237
Adjustment ……………………………………………………. 237

K

L

OIL PAN …………………………………………………. 238
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 238
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 238
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 239

PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR ……………………… 240
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 240
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 240
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 240

SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR ……………….. 241
Exploded View ………………………………………………. 241
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 241
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 241

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR ……………………….. 242

Component Function Check ……………………………. 217
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 217

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 242
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 242
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 242

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ………………………. 219

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL ……………….. 243

Revision: April 2013

H

AIR BREATHER HOSE ……………………………. 236

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ……… 216
Component Parts Function Inspection ……………… 216
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 216

G

I

OD OFF INDICATOR LAMP ………………………. 215
Component Function Check ……………………………. 215
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 215

F

Exploded View ………………………………………………. 235
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 235
Adjustment ……………………………………………………. 235

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH ………………. 213
Component Function Check ……………………………. 213
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 213
Component Inspection (Overdrive Control Switch)
.. 214

E

TCM ……………………………………………………….. 235

P2859 CLUTCH A PRESSURE ………………….. 207
DTC Logic ……………………………………………………. 207
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………… 208

A

TM-5

2014 Note

M

N

O

P

Exploded View ……………………………………………….243
Removal and Installation …………………………………243
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………243

WATER HOSE …………………………………………. 245
Exploded View ……………………………………………….245
Removal and Installation …………………………………245
Inspection ……………………………………………………..247

FLUID COOLER HOSE …………………………….. 248
Exploded View ……………………………………………….248
Removal and Installation …………………………………248
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………248

PLUG ……………………………………………………… 249
Description …………………………………………………….249
Exploded View ……………………………………………….249
Removal and Installation …………………………………249
Inspection and Adjustment ………………………………249

Revision: April 2013

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION … 250
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY …………………….. 250
Exploded View ……………………………………………… 250
Removal and Installation ………………………………… 250
Inspection and Adjustment ……………………………… 252

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………… 254
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………. 254
General Specification …………………………………….. 254
Shift Characteristics ………………………………………. 254
Stall Speed …………………………………………………… 254
Line Pressure ……………………………………………….. 255
Torque Converter ………………………………………….. 255
Heater Thermostat ………………………………………… 255

TM-6

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009578891

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
TM
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
G

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS

WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

General Precautions

INFOID:0000000009417578

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
when removing transaxle assembly. At this time, dust on the sliding parts may damage the seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-16, «Removal and Installation».
• Do not reuse transaxle gear oil, once it has been drained.
• Check oil level or replace gear oil with vehicle on level surface.
• During removal or installation, keep inside of transaxle clear of dust or dirt.
• Check for the correct installation alignment prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are
required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts marked.
• In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, use it.
• Do not damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009417579

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
Revision: April 2013

TM-7

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
[5MT: RS5F91R]
< PRECAUTION >
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

TM-8

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009417580

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

KV32500QAA
( — )
Drift set

Installing differential side oil seal
1.
—
Drift
a: 54.3 mm (2.138 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 26.6 mm (1.047 in) dia.
2.
—
Drift
d: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
e: 48.6 mm (1.913 in) dia.
f: 26.6 mm (1.047 in) dia

JPDIC0730ZZ

KV32300QAC
( — )
Puller

C

TM

E

F

Removing 5th main gear

G

H
SCIA1781J

KV32300QAD
( — )
Puller

I

Removing 5th main gear

J

K

SCIA1782J

ST35300000
( — )
Drift

• Removing and installing input shaft rear
bearing
• Removing and installing mainshaft rear
bearing
a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
b: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.

L

M

ZZA0969D

KV111011S0
( — )
Valve seat remover

Removing mainshaft front bearing

N

O

P

ZZA0872D

Revision: April 2013

TM-9

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< PREPARATION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

ST33400001
( — )
Drift

Installing mainshaft front bearing
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.

ZZA0814D

KV40100900
( — )
Drift

Installing input shaft front bearing
a: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.
b: 39.5 mm (1.555 in) dia.

NT084

KV32300QAE
( — )
Drift

Installing differential side bearing outer race
a: 61.5 mm (2.421 in) dia.

JPDIC0635ZZ

ST33052000
( — )
Drift

Removing differential side bearing
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
b: 28mm (1.10 in) dia.

ZZA0969D

KV40104920
( — )
Drift

Installing differential side bearing
a: 21.7 mm (0.854 in) dia.
b: 44.7 mm (1.760 in) dia.

ZZA0969D

—
(J-46534)
Trim tool set

Removing trim components

AWJIA0483ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-10

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< PREPARATION >

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009417581

A

Tool name

Description

Socket

Removing and installing drain plug
a: 8 mm (0.31 in)
b: 5 mm (0.20 in)

B

C

TM

PCIB1776E

Drift

Removing input shaft front bearing
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.

E

F
S-NT063

Drift

Installing bushing
a: 14.5 mm (0.571 in) dia.

G

H

S-NT063

Puller

• Removing 5th-reverse synchronizer hub
• Removing differential side bearing

I

J

K
NT077

Bearing remover

Removing bushing

L

M
S-NT134

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

N

O

P

PIIB1407E

Revision: April 2013

TM-11

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Sectional View

INFOID:0000000009417582

JPDIC0580ZZ

1.

Clutch housing

2.

1st-2nd synchronizer hub assembly

3.

3rd-4th synchronizer hub assembly

4.

5th input gear

5.

5th-reverse synchronizer hub assembly

6.

5th-reverse baulk ring

7.

5th main gear

8.

4th main gear

9.

3rd main gear

10. 2nd main gear

11. 2nd double-cone synchronizer

12. 1st double-cone synchronizer

13. 1st main gear

14. Differential side bearing

15. Differential

16. Final gear

17. Mainshaft

18. Input shaft

System Description

INFOID:0000000009417583

DOUBLE-CONE SYNCHRONIZER
Revision: April 2013

TM-12

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Double-cone synchronizers are adopted for 1st and 2nd gears to
reduce operating force of the shift selector.
(1)

: Outer baulk ring

(2)

: 2nd main gear

(3)

: Synchronizer cone

(4)

: Inner baulk ring

(5)

: 1st main gear

(6)

: 1st-2nd coupling sleeve

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

C
SCIA7117E

TM

REVERSE GEAR NOISE PREVENTION FUNCTION (REVERSE BRAKE)
Description
Soon after the clutch is disengaged, the input shaft is still rotating due to inertia. This may cause a gear noise
when the shift selector is moved to reverse position. The reverse gear noise prevention function stops the
rotation of the input shaft and enables smooth gear shifting when the reverse gear is selected.
Operation Principle
1. When the shift selector is moved to reverse position, 5th-reverse
coupling sleeve (1) slides in the reverse direction. ( )
(5)

2.
3.
4.

E

F

G

: 5th input gear

Synchronizer levers (2) with support point (A) at 5th-reverse
synchronizer hub (3) presses 5th-reverse baulk ring (4). ( )
Friction that is generated at 5-reverse baulk ring presses synchronizer lever on 5th-reverse coupling sleeve. ( )
5th-reverse coupling sleeve that is pressed by synchronizer
lever stops the rotation of input shaft.

H

I
JPDIC0415ZZ

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-13

2014 Note

POSITION SWITCH
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POSITION SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417584

1.CHECK BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.

Disconnect position switch connector. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and Installation».
Check continuity between position switch terminals.
Terminals
1

2

Condition

Continuity

Reverse gear position

Yes

Except reverse gear position

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and
Installation».

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection

MCIA0157E

INFOID:0000000009417585

1.CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
1.
2.

Disconnect position switch connector. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and Installation».
Check continuity between position switch terminals.
Terminals
2

3

Condition

Continuity

Neutral gear position

Yes

Except neutral gear position

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace position switch. Refer to TM-18, «Removal and
Installation».
JPDIC0092ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-14

2014 Note

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart

INFOID:0000000009417586

TM-25

TM-20

Reference page

TM-25

TM-16

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.

B

C

TM

E

3

1

Hard to shift or will not shift

1

1

Jumps out of gear

2

2

GEAR (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)

SHIFT FORK (Worn)

SHIFT CONTROL LINKAGE (Worn)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)

3

3

INSERT SPRING (Damaged)

Oil leakage

GASKET (Damaged)

2

OIL (Oil level is high)

1

BAULK RING (Worn or damaged)

Symptoms

OIL (Wrong oil)

Noise

OIL (Oil level is low)

SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)

OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)

F

3

3

G

H

I

J

2
2
1

2

K

2

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-15

2014 Note

GEAR OIL
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GEAR OIL
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417587

GEAR OIL LEAKS
Make sure that gear oil is not leaking from transaxle or around it.

GEAR OIL LEVEL
1.
2.
3.

4.

Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transaxle case.
Check the gear oil level from filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking gear oil level.
Install a new gasket on filler plug and then install filler plug to
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25,
«Exploded View».
SCIA7119E

Draining
1.
2.
3.

4.

INFOID:0000000009417588

Start engine and let it run to warm up transaxle.
Stop engine. Remove drain plug (1) and gasket, using suitable
tool and then drain gear oil.
Install a new gasket on drain plug (1) and install drain plug to
clutch housing, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten drain plug (1) to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25,
«Exploded View».

PCIB1504E

Refilling
1.
2.

Remove filler plug (1) and gasket from transaxle case.
Fill with new gear oil until gear oil level reaches the specified
limit at filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking gear oil level.
Oil capacity
and viscosity

3.

4.

INFOID:0000000009417589

: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

Install a new gasket on filler plug and then install filler plug to
transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
Tighten filler plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

TM-16

SCIA7119E

2014 Note

SIDE OIL SEAL
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

SIDE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417590

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front drive shaft from transaxle assembly. Refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation».
Remove differential side oil seal (1) using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case and clutch housing.

C

TM

E

F
JPDIC0118ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.

Dimension (L1)
Dimension (L2)
Tool number

2.

G

Install differential side oil seal (1) to transaxle case side (B) and
clutch housing side (C) using Tool.

H

: 5.7 – 6.3 mm (0.224 – 0.248 in)
: 2.4 – 3.0 mm (0.094 – 0.118 in)
: KV32500QAA (

—

I

)

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• Do not tilt differential side oil seal.
• Do not damage clutch housing and transaxle case.
Install the front drive shaft. Refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation».

Inspection

J
JPDIC0401ZZ

K
INFOID:0000000009417591

L

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the gear oil level and for gear oil leaks. Refer to TM-16, «Inspection».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-17

2014 Note

POSITION SWITCH
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417592

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Drain gear oil. Refer to TM-16, «Draining».
Disconnect the harness connector (A) from position switch.
Remove position switch from transaxle case.

JPDIC0733ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.

2.
3.
4.

Apply recommended sealant to threads of position switch.
CAUTION:
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants».
• Remove old sealant and gear oil adhering to threads.
Install position switch to transaxle case.
Tighten position switch to the specified torque. Refer to TM-25, «Exploded View».
Refill gear oil. Refer to TM-16, «Refilling».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417593

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check continuity between position switch terminals. Refer to TM-14, «BACK-UP LAMP SWITCH : Component Inspection» (Back-up lamp switch) and TM-14, «PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection» (PNP switch).
• Check the gear oil level and for gear oil leaks. Refer to TM-16, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

TM-18

2014 Note

CONTROL LINKAGE
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CONTROL LINKAGE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417594

B

C

TM

E

F

G
JPDIC0789GB

1.

Shifter lever A

2.

Selector lever

3.

Selector cable

4.

Shifter cable

5.

Cable mounting bracket

6.

Tapping bolt

7.

Bracket

8.

Grommet

9.

Shift selector assembly

10. Shift selector

H

11. Shift selector handle

Removal and Installation

I
INFOID:0000000009417595

REMOVAL

J

1.
2.
3.
4.

K

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Move the shift selector to the neutral position.
Remove the battery tray. Refer to PG-70, «Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)».
Pull out and disconnect cables from shifter lever A and selector lever, using a suitable tool.
While pressing the lock of the selector cable in the direction of
the arrows shown, remove the selector cable from the cable
mounting bracket.
While pressing the lock of the shifter cable in the direction of the
arrows shown, remove the shifter cable from the cable mounting
bracket.
Remove cable mounting bracket from clutch housing.
Pull the shift selector handle upward to remove.
Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and
Installation».
Pull out and disconnect each cable from the shift selector
assembly, using a suitable tool.

L

M

N
JPDIC0793ZZ

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-19

2014 Note

CONTROL LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. While pressing the lock of the selector cable in the direction of
the arrows shown, remove the selector cable from the shift
selector assembly.
b. While pressing the lock of the shifter cable in the direction of the
arrows shown, remove the shifter cable from the shift selector
assembly.
10. Remove the shift selector assembly.
11. Remove center muffler, exhaust front tube, and heat plate. Refer
to EX-5, «Exploded View».
12. Remove the bracket from the vehicle.
13. Remove the grommet and then remove the shifter cable and
selector cable from the vehicle.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

JPDIC0793ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Install each cable without causing interference with other parts. Do not allow cable to bend less than
120 mm (4.72 in), or exceed 180 degree twist.
• Install boot of each cable without causing interference with other parts. Do not exceed 90 degree
twist.
• Fit boot to center console assembly and the groove on shift selector handle.
• To install the shift selector handle, press it onto the shift selector.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse shift selector handle.
• Be careful with orientation of shift selector handle.
• Bolt hole is not threaded on new clutch housing. Self-tapping bolt is used to attach lock plate to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse self-tapping bolt.
• Insert each cable until it reaches the cable mounting bracket and shift selector assembly.
• Insert each cable until it reaches the shifter lever A and the selector lever.
• Move the shift selector to the neutral position.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417596

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Shift Selector Handle
Check that the shift selector handle is installed in the right position.
Shifter Cable and Selector Cable
• Pull each cable in the removal direction to check that it does not disconnect from the cable mounting
bracket.
• Pull each cable in the removal direction to check that it does not disconnect from the shift selector assembly.
• Pull grommet in the removal direction to check that it does not disconnect from the vehicle.
Shift Selector Assembly and Shift Selector
• Check that there is no unusual noise, binding, bending, looseness, and interference when the shift selector
is moved to each position. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
• Check that the shift selector smoothly returns to the neutral position after moving the shift selector from 1st
to 2nd gear and releasing it. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
• Check that the shift selector smoothly returns to the neutral position after moving the shift selector from 5th
to the reverse gear position and releasing it. If there is a malfunction, then repair or replace the malfunctioning part.

Revision: April 2013

TM-20

2014 Note

AIR BREATHER HOSE
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AIR BREATHER HOSE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417597

B

C

TM

E

F

G
JPDIC0788ZZ

1.

Cap

2.

Air breather hose

3.

2-way connector

Removal and Installation

H
INFOID:0000000009417598

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

I

Remove air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, «Removal and Installation».
Remove air breather hose from the 2-way connector.
CAUTION:
When removing air breather hose, be sure to hold 2-way connector securely.
Remove cap from air breather hose.

J

K

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Install air breather hose. Do not bend hose tightly, which may result in pinching or clogging.
• Insert the air breather hose to the base of the 2-way connector.

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-21

2014 Note

5TH MAIN GEAR ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

5TH MAIN GEAR ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009417599

REMOVAL
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Move the shift selector to the 3rd gear position.
Disconnect the shifter cable and the selector cable from shifter lever A and selector lever. Refer to TM-19,
«Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Do not move shifter lever A and selector lever to disconnect each cable.
Drain gear oil. Refer to TM-16, «Draining».
Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the harness clamp (A) from rear housing (1).

JPDIC0734ZZ

6.

7.

Remove rear housing and O-ring.
CAUTION:
Remove in direction of input shaft ( ) as shown. Rear
housing gear oil channel is inserted to input shaft center
hole.
Remove 5th main gear assembly. Refer to step 5 through 8 of
“Disassembly of TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY”. Refer to TM-29,
«Disassembly».

SCIA1709J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Shift into 3rd with shifter lever to install the 5th main gear assembly, referring to Step 36 to 39 of “Assembly
of TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY” Refer to TM-35, «Assembly».
• Install O-ring and the rear housing to the transaxle case and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to TM-25, «Exploded View».
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Do not pinch O-ring when installing rear housing.
• Refill gear oil. Refer to TM-16, «Refilling».

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417600

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the operation of the control linkage. Refer to TM-20, «Inspection».
• Check the gear oil level and for oil leaks. Refer to TM-16, «Inspection».

Revision: April 2013

TM-22

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417601

B

C

TM

E

F

G
JPDIC0478ZZ

1.

: Refer to «INSTALLATION» in TM-23, «Removal and Installation» for the locations and tightening torque.

Removal and Installation

I
INFOID:0000000009417602

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to
allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). The CSC slides back to the original position every time
the transaxle assembly is removed. This action may allow dust or contaminants to gather on the sliding parts and damage a seal of CSC causing clutch fluid leakage.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

H

Transaxle assembly

Remove the engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-86, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the reverse lamp switch harness connector.
Remove the bolts that fasten the transaxle assembly and engine assembly.
Remove transaxle assembly from the engine assembly.
Remove engine mounting bracket (LH). Refer to EM-85, «Exploded View».
Remove CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). Refer to CL-16, «Removal and Installation».

K

L

M

N

O

INSTALLATION

P

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Secure transaxle assembly to a suitable jack.
• The transaxle assembly must not interfere with the wire harnesses and clutch tube.
• When installing transaxle assembly, do not bring input shaft into contact with clutch cover.
• Bolt hole is not threaded on new clutch housing. Self-tapping bolt is used to attach lock plate to
clutch housing.
Revision: April 2013

J

TM-23

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not reuse self-tapping bolt.
• Tighten transaxle assembly bolts to the specified torque. The illustration is the view from the engine.
Bolt symbol

A

B

Transaxle to
engine

Insertion direction
Quantity

2

Bolt length
( ) mm (in)

C
Engine to transaxle

3
55 (2.17)

Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

D

2

1

49 (1.93)

69 (2.72)
JPDIC0813ZZ

48.0 (4.9, 35)

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417603

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the operation of the control linkage. Refer to TM-20, «Inspection».
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Item

Level

Leaks

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leaks

Level

CVT Models

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Leaks

M/T Models

Level/Leaks

Leaks

Level/Leaks

Other oils and fluids*

Level

Leaks

Level

Fuel

Leaks

Leaks

Leaks

—

Leaks

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid

Exhaust gas
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

Revision: April 2013

TM-24

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

A

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417604

B

CASE AND HOUSING
C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M
AWDIA0945GB

1.

Differential side oil seal

2.

Clutch housing

3.

Dowel pin

4.

Magnet

5.

Drain plug

6.

Gasket

7.

Oil channel

8.

Plug

9.

2-way connector

10. Oil gutter

11. Air breather inner tube

12. Filler plug

13. Transaxle case

14. O-ring

15. Rear housing

N

O

16. Position switch

P

: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR

Revision: April 2013

TM-25

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

JPDIC0820GB

1.

Input shaft front bearing

2.

Input shaft

3.

4.

Input shaft rear bearing

5.

Adapter plate

6.

Bushing

7.

5th input gear

8.

5th-reverse baulk ring

9.

Synchronizer lever

10. 5th-reverse synchronizer hub

11. 5th-reverse coupling sleeve

13. Retaining pin

14. Reverse gear

Snap ring

12. Lock washer

: Apply gear oil.
: Replace the parts as a set.

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR

Revision: April 2013

TM-26

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H
JPDIC0531GB

1.

Mainshaft front bearing

2.

Mainshaft

3.

1st main gear

4.

1st inner baulk ring

5.

1st synchronizer cone

6.

1st outer baulk ring

7.

1st-2nd synchronizer hub

8.

1st-2nd coupling sleeve

9.

Spring

10. Insert key

11. 2nd outer baulk ring

12. 2nd synchronizer cone

13. 2nd inner baulk ring

14. Snap ring

15. Thrust washer

16. 2nd main gear

17. 3rd main gear

18. 3rd baulk ring

19. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub

20. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve

21. 4th baulk ring

22. 4th main gear

23. Spacer

24. Mainshaft rear bearing

I

J

K

25. 5th main gear
: Apply gear oil.

L

: Replace the parts as a set.

SHIFT FORK AND FORK ROD

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-27

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

AWBIA1480ZZ

1.

Retaining pin

2.

1st-2nd shift fork

3.

Bushing

4.

1st-2nd fork rod

5.

Lock pin

6.

5th-reverse fork rod

7.

5th-reverse shift fork

8.

Check ball

9.

3rd-4th shift fork

10. 3rd-4th fork rod

11. Control shaft

12. O-ring

13. Selector

14. Check ball plug

15. Bushing

16. Spring

17. Gear catch

: Apply gear oil.
: Apply Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, «Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
: Replace the parts as a set.

FINAL DRIVE

Revision: April 2013

TM-28

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

JPDIC0481ZZ

1.

Differential side bearing outer race

2.

Differential side bearing

3.

Final drive

: Replace the parts as a set.

G

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.

INFOID:0000000009417605

H

Remove drain plug and gasket from clutch housing using suitable tool, and drain gear oil.
Remove filler plug and gasket from transaxle case.
Remove rear housing and O-ring.
CAUTION:
Remove in direction of input shaft ( ) as shown. Rear
housing oil channel is inserted to input shaft center hole.

I

J

K

SCIA1709J

4.

Move the shifter lever A (1) to the 3rd gear position.
NOTE:
• If it is not moved to the 3rd gear position, transaxle case cannot be removed from clutch housing.
• The 3rd gear position means that shifter lever A is fully rotated
clockwise and it is returned approximately 10 degrees.

L

M

N

O
PCIB1524E

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-29

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
5. Remove 5th-reverse shift fork (1) and 5th-reverse coupling
sleeve.
a. Remove retaining pin from 5th-reverse shift fork, using a suitable tool (A).
b. Press 5th-reverse shift fork, shift to 5th, and then engage it with
3rd gear.
c. Remove bolt (B).
d. Remove nut (C) and lock washer.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse nut.
JPDIC0532ZZ
• Do not use an impact wrench for removal. Gears may be
damaged.
e. Remove 5th-reverse shift fork and 5th-reverse coupling sleeve from 5th-reverse synchronizer hub.
6. Remove 5th-reverse synchronizer hub from input shaft, using a
suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Set claw of suitable tool to the wider side of the hub when
setting the suitable tool in 5th-reverse synchronizer hub.
7. Remove synchronizer levers, 5th-reverse baulk ring, 5th input
gear, bushing, and adapter plate from input shaft.

PCIB1526E

8.

Remove 5th main gear from mainshaft, using Tools.
Tool number

(A): KV32300QAC ( —
(B): KV32300QAD ( —

)
)

PCIB1527E

9.

Remove position switch from transaxle case.

PCIB1627E

Revision: April 2013

TM-30

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
10. Remove transaxle case bolts ( ).
11. Remove transaxle case from clutch housing.

A

B

C
JPDIC0610ZZ

TM

12. Remove spacer (1) and 4th main gear (2) from mainshaft.

E

F

G
PCIB1529E

13. Remove 5th-reverse fork rod (1).
a.
b.

H

Pull 5th-reverse fork rod up until it contacts claw ( ) of reverse
gear (2).
Press gear portion of reverse gear down, and then remove 5threverse fork rod from clutch housing.

I

J

PCIB1530E

14. Remove 3rd-4th fork rod assembly (1), 3rd-4th coupling sleeve
(2), and input shaft assembly (3).
a. Remove 4th baulk ring, insert keys, and springs from mainshaft.
b. Pull gear of reverse gear (4) up.
c. Pull 1st-2nd fork rod (5) up, and then maintain the neutral position.
d. Remove 3rd-4th fork rod assembly, 3rd-4th coupling sleeve, and
input shaft assembly from clutch housing at the same time.
15. Remove retaining pin from 3rd-4th shift fork, using a pin punch.
16. Remove 3rd-4th shift fork from 3rd-4th shift fork rod.
17. Remove lock pins (

K

L

M

N
PCIB1531E

) from clutch housing.

O

P

JPDIC0534ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-31

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
18. Remove 1st-2nd fork rod assembly (1) and mainshaft assembly
(2) from clutch housing at the same time.
19. Remove retaining pin from 1st-2nd shift fork, using suitable tool.
20. Remove 1st-2nd shift fork from 1st-2nd shift fork rod.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

PCIB1532E

21. Remove retaining pin from reverse gear, using suitable tool.
22. Remove reverse gear from clutch housing.

MCIB0033E

23. Remove final drive (1) from clutch housing.
24. Remove magnet and dowel pins (2) from clutch housing.

PCIB1533E

25. Remove plug (1) from clutch housing (2).
• (C): Plug
• (D): 15 mm (0.59 in)
• (E): 45 mm (1.77 in)
• (F): 95 mm (3.74 in) or more
• (G): 4 mm (0.16 in)
a. Install suitable tool (A) and (B) to the holes of clutch housing as
shown.
b. While pressing the suitable tool (A) and (B) in the direction of the
arrows shown, remove plug from clutch housing.

AWDIA0946ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-32

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
26. Remove input shaft front bearing from clutch housing, using suitable tool.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

C
MCIB0044E

TM

27. Cut oil channel tube at the base.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil channel.
NOTE:
Oil channel will be removed with the mainshaft front bearing.
28. Remove mainshaft front bearing and oil channel from clutch
housing, using Tool (A).
Tool number

: KV111011S0 (

—

E

F

)
G

H

PCIB1536E

I

29. Remove bushings (1) from clutch housing, using suitable tool.
J

K

L
PCIB1537E

30. Remove differential side oil seals (1) from clutch housing and
transaxle case, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case and clutch housing.

M

N

O

PCIB1534E

Revision: April 2013

TM-33

2014 Note

P

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
31. Remove differential side bearing outer races (1) from clutch
housing and transaxle case, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not damage transaxle case and clutch housing.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

JPDIC0484ZZ

32. Pull 2-way connector (1) straight out to remove it from air
breather inner tube (2).
33. Remove air breather inner tube from transaxle case.

PCIB1541E

34. Remove bushings (1) from transaxle case, using suitable tool.
35. Remove retaining pin ( ) from selector, using suitable tool.
36. Remove selector from control shaft.
37. Remove oil gutter from transaxle case.

PCIB1538E

38. Remove bolt ( ), and then remove bushing, spring, and gear
catch from transaxle case.
39. Remove check ball plug from transaxle case.

JPDIC0533ZZ

40. Remove bolts ( ), and then remove control shaft (1) from transaxle case.
41. Remove O-ring from control shaft.

PCIB1540E

Revision: April 2013

TM-34

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
42. Expand snap rings (1) and remove input shaft rear bearing and
mainshaft rear bearing from transaxle case, using Tool (A).
Tool number

: ST35300000 (

—

A

)

B

43. Remove snap rings from transaxle case.
44. Remove check balls (2) from transaxle case.

C

PCIB1535E

Assembly
1.

TM

INFOID:0000000009417606

E

Install snap rings (1) along transaxle case groove so that notch
mates with housing as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse snap rings.
• Check snap ring installation direction.
• Be sure to align notch with housing.

F

G

H
PCIB1547E

2.

Expand snap rings (1) and install input shaft rear bearing and
mainshaft rear bearing to transaxle case, using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Check that snap ring is correctly installed within bearing
groove.
Tool number

3.

: ST35300000 (

—

I

J

)

Install check balls (2) to transaxle case.

K
PCIB1548E

4.

5.

Install bushings (1) until they reach transaxle case, using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse bushings.
Apply gear oil to O-ring, and then install it to control shaft.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.

L

M

N

O
JPDIC0636ZZ

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-35

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
6.

Install control shaft (1) to transaxle case, and tighten bolts (
to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Replace control shaft and selector as a set.

)

PCIB1540E

7.

Install selector to control shaft, and then install retaining pin (
to selector, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of selector.
• Replace control shaft and selector as a set.
• Do not reuse retaining pin.

)

SCIA1726J

8.

9.

Install gear catch, spring, and bushing to transaxle case, and
then tighten bolt ( ) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Replace gear catch, spring, and bushing as a set.
Install oil gutter to transaxle case.

JPDIC0533ZZ

10. Install air breather inner tube (2) to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not damage air breather inner tube.
NOTE:
It is easier to install when air breather inner tube end is wrapped
and narrowed by tape. Remove tape after installation.
11. Insert 2-way connector (1) straight, and then install it to air
breather inner tube.
CAUTION:
Check air breather inner tube for twists after installing.
PCIB1541E

12. Install differential side oil seals (1) to clutch housing and transaxle case, using Tool.
(B)

: Transaxle case side

(C)

: Clutch housing side

Dimension (L1)
Dimension (L2)
Tool number
Revision: April 2013

: 5.7 – 6.3 mm (0.224 – 0.248 in)
: 2.4 – 3.0 mm (0.094 – 0.118 in)
: KV32500QAA (

—

)

JPDIC0401ZZ

TM-36

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• Do not tilt differential side oil seal.
• Do not damage clutch housing and transaxle case.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

13. Install differential side bearing outer races until they reach clutch
housing and transaxle case, using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing outer race and differential
side bearing as a set.
Tool number

: KV32300QAE (

—

C

)

TM

E
PCIB1549E

14. Install bushings (1) until they reach clutch housing, using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse bushings.
15. Install oil channel to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil channel.

F

G

H
JPDIC0637ZZ

I

16. Install mainshaft front bearing so that it becomes even with
clutch housing surface, using Tool (A).
Tool number

: ST33400001 (

—

J

)

K

L
PCIB1544E

17. Install input shaft front bearing so that it becomes even with
clutch housing surface, using Tool (A).
Tool number

: KV40100900 (

—

M

)
N

18. Install pinion gear, pinion shaft, and plug to clutch housing.

O
PCIB1545E

Revision: April 2013

TM-37

2014 Note

P

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
19. Install final drive (1) to clutch housing.
20. Install dowel pins (2) and magnet to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse dowel pins.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

PCIB1533E

21. Install reverse gear to clutch housing, and then install retaining
pin to clutch housing, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
22. Install 1st-2nd shift fork to 1st-2nd fork rod, and then install
retaining pin to 1st-2nd shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse retaining pin.
• Replace 1st-2nd fork rod and 1st-2nd shift fork as a set.
MCIB0033E

23. Set 1st-2nd fork rod assembly (1) onto mainshaft assembly (2),
and then install them to clutch housing.

PCIB1532E

24. Install lock pins ( ) to clutch housing.
25. Install 3rd-4th shift fork to 3rd-4th fork rod, and then install
retaining pin to 3rd-4th shift fork.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse retaining pin.
• Replace 3rd-4th fork rod and 3rd-4th shift fork as a set.

JPDIC0534ZZ

26. Install 3rd-4th fork rod assembly (1), 3rd-4th coupling sleeve (2),
and input shaft assembly (3) to clutch housing.
a. Pull 1st-2nd fork rod (4) up, and then maintain the neutral position.
b. Set 3rd-4th fork rod assembly onto 3rd-4th coupling sleeve, and
then install them together with input shaft assembly to clutch
housing.
CAUTION:
• Set lock pin (3rd-4th fork rod side) onto 1st-2nd fork rod
groove and then install 3rd-4th fork rod assembly.
PCIB1628E

Revision: April 2013

TM-38

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
(A)

: 4th main gear side

(B)

: 3rd main gear side

A

B

• Install 3rd input gear of input shaft assembly so that it is
set under reverse main gear of 3rd-4th coupling sleeve.
• Replace 3rd-4th coupling sleeve and 3rd-4th synchronizer
hub as a set.

C

PCIB1551E

c.
d.
e.

Install springs and insert keys to 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
Apply gear oil to 4th baulk ring.
Install 4th baulk ring.

TM

E

F

G
MCIB0061E

H

27. Install 5th-reverse fork rod (1) to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Replace 5th-reverse fork rod and 5th-reverse shift fork as a
set.
a. Pull gear of reverse gear (2) up.
b. Temporarily install 5th-reverse fork rod to clutch housing.

I

J

PCIB1629E

c.

Press gear of reverse gear (1) down and then install 5th-reverse
fork rod (2) to clutch housing.
CAUTION:
Set levers of 5th-reverse fork rod so as to align with reverse
gear groove ( ).

K

L

M

N
PCIB1552E

O

28. Install 4th main gear (2) and spacer (1) to mainshaft.
CAUTION:
Install spacer so that spacer protrusion faces rear side of
transaxle.
29. Press 3rd-4th shift fork down and then shift 3rd-4th coupling
sleeve to 3rd gear side.

P

PCIB1529E

Revision: April 2013

TM-39

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
30. Move the shifter lever A (1) to the 3rd gear position.
NOTE:
• If it is not moved to the 3rd gear position, transaxle case cannot be installed to clutch housing.
• The 3rd gear position means that shifter lever A is fully rotated
clockwise and it is returned approximately 10 degrees.
31. Apply recommended sealant to transaxle case mating surface of
clutch housing.
CAUTION:
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-22,
«Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
• Do not allow old Silicone RTV, moisture, oil, or foreign
matter to remain on mating surface.
• Check that mating surface is not damaged.
• Apply a continuous bead of Silicone RTV to the mating surface.

PCIB1524E

32. Install transaxle case to clutch housing. If it is difficult to install,
slightly rotate shifter lever A counterclockwise, and then install.
(1)

: Selector

(2)

: Shift fork

CAUTION:
• Do not damage Silicone RTV bead with transaxle case or
other objects during installation.
• Be careful to align the lever of 5th-reverse fork rod with
reverse gear groove.
PCIB1553E

33. Rotate input shaft so that bearing and shaft fit each other, and
then tighten transaxle bolts ( ) to the specified torque.
34. Apply recommended sealant to position switch thread and check
ball plug thread. Install to transaxle case and tighten to specified
torque.
CAUTION:
• Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-22,
«Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants».
• Do not allow old Silicone RTV, moisture, oil, or foreign
matter to remain on thread.
35. Apply gear oil to mainshaft spline.
36. Install 5th main gear (1) to mainshaft, using a suitable bolt (A)
[M10 x 1.0] and a suitable nut (B).

JPDIC0610ZZ

PCIB1554E

Revision: April 2013

TM-40

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
37. Install adapter plate (1), bushing (2), and 5th input gear (3) to
input shaft.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of adapter plate.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

: Transaxle case side

C
PCIB1555E

TM

38. Install 5th-reverse synchronizer hub, 5th-reverse coupling sleeve, and 5th-reverse shift fork.
a. Apply gear oil to 5th-reverse baulk ring.
b. Install 5th-reverse baulk ring (1) to 5th input gear.

E

: 5th-reverse synchronizer hub side

c.

d.

CAUTION:
Be careful with the orientation of 5th-reverse baulk ring.
Install synchronizer levers (2) to 5th-reverse synchronizer hub
(3).
CAUTION:
• Replace 5th-reverse synchronizer hub and 5th-reverse
coupling sleeve as a set.
• Be careful with the orientation of synchronizer lever.
Install 5th-reverse synchronizer hub assembly and lock washer to input shaft.
CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-reverse synchronizer hub.

F

G

JPDIC0421ZZ

H

I

J

: 5th input gear side

K

PCIB1556E

• Do not allow synchronizer lever (1) to overlap 5th-reverse
baulk ring protrusion (A).
(2)

: 5th-reverse baulk ring

(3)

: 5th-reverse synchronizer hub

L

M

N

O
JPDIC0408ZZ

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-41

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
e. Set 5th-reverse shift fork (1) to 5th-reverse coupling sleeve, and
then install them to 5th-reverse fork rod and input shaft.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse nut.
(A)

: Suitable tool

(B)

: Bolt

(C)

: Nut

[5MT: RS5F91R]

JPDIC0532ZZ

CAUTION:
• Be careful with the orientation of 5th-reverse coupling
sleeve.
: 5th input gear side

• Replace 5th-reverse synchronizer hub and 5th-reverse
coupling sleeve as a set.
• Replace 5th-reverse shift fork and 5th-reverse fork rod as
a set.
JPDIC0409ZZ

f.

Check that the shifter lever A is in the 3rd position. Press 5threverse shift fork (1) and move shifter lever A to 5th gear.
(A)

: Suitable tool

g.
h.

Tighten bolt (B) to the specified torque.
Tighten nut (C) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse nut.
i. Install retaining pin to 5th-reverse shift fork, using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse retaining pin.
39. Move shifter lever A (1) to the neutral position.
40. Install O-ring to rear housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.

JPDIC0532ZZ

SCIA7130E

Revision: April 2013

TM-42

2014 Note

TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
41. Install rear housing to transaxle case, and tighten bolts ( ) to
the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Do not pinch O-ring when installing rear housing.
42. Install drain plug.
a. Install gasket to drain plug.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
b. Install drain plug to clutch housing, using suitable tool.
c. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque.
43. Install filler plug.
a. Install gasket to filler plug, and then install filler plug to transaxle case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
b. Tighten filler plug to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Fill with gear oil before tightening filler plug to the specified torque.

Inspection

A

B

C
PCIB1558E

TM

E

F
INFOID:0000000009417607

G

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check contact surface and sliding surface of fork rod and shift fork
for excessive wear, uneven wear, and damage. Replace if necessary.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N
PCIB1571E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-43

2014 Note

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417608

JPDIC0820GB

1.

Input shaft front bearing

2.

Input shaft

3.

4.

Input shaft rear bearing

5.

Adapter plate

6.

Bushing

7.

5th input gear

8.

5th-reverse baulk ring

9.

Synchronizer lever

10. 5th-reverse synchronizer hub

11. 5th-reverse coupling sleeve

13. Retaining pin

14. Reverse gear

Snap ring

12. Lock washer

: Apply gear oil.
: Replace the parts as a set.

Disassembly

INFOID:0000000009417609

Refer to TM-29, «Disassembly» for disassembly procedure.

Assembly

INFOID:0000000009417610

Refer to TM-35, «Assembly» for assembly procedure.

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417611

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Input Shaft and Gear

Revision: April 2013

TM-44

2014 Note

INPUT SHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Damage, peeling, uneven wear, and distortion of shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, and peeling of gear.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

C
PCIB0987J

TM

Synchronizer
Check for the following and replace if necessary.
• Contact surface breakage, damage, and unusual wear of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, and synchronizer lever.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub move smoothly.

E

F

G
SCIA1753J

H

• Breakage, damage, and excessive wear of baulk ring cam surface
and synchronizer lever contact surface.

I

J

K
SCIA0608J

Bearing
Check bearing for damage and rough rotation. Replace if necessary.

L

M

N

MTF0041D

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-45

2014 Note

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417612

JPDIC0531GB

1.

Mainshaft front bearing

4.

1st inner baulk ring

5.

1st synchronizer cone

6.

1st outer baulk ring

7.

1st-2nd synchronizer hub

8.

1st-2nd coupling sleeve

9.

Spring

10. Insert key

2.

Mainshaft

3.

11. 2nd outer baulk ring

1st main gear

12. 2nd synchronizer cone

13. 2nd inner baulk ring

14. Snap ring

15. Thrust washer

16. 2nd main gear

17. 3rd main gear

18. 3rd baulk ring

19. 3rd-4th synchronizer hub

20. 3rd-4th coupling sleeve

21. 4th baulk ring

22. 4th main gear

23. Spacer

24. Mainshaft rear bearing

25. 5th main gear
: Apply gear oil.
: Replace the parts as a set.

Disassembly

INFOID:0000000009417613

CAUTION:
• Secure mainshaft in a vise using blocks of wood to prevent damage, and then remove gears and
snap rings.

Revision: April 2013

TM-46

2014 Note

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• For removal of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers at
both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with snap
ring pliers, remove snap ring with flat pliers.
• Mark gear component direction for assembly without damaging component contact locations.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

B

C
SCIA1755J

TM

1.
2.

Remove 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd baulk ring.
Remove snap ring (1) and thrust washer (2).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.

E

F

G

PCIB1559E

3.

H

Remove 3rd main gear (1) and thrust washer (2).
I

J

K
PCIB1560E

4.

Remove snap ring (1) and thrust washer (2).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse snap ring.

L

M

N

PCIB1561E

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-47

2014 Note

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
5. Remove 2nd main gear (1) and thrust washer (2).

[5MT: RS5F91R]

PCIB1562E

6.
7.
8.

Remove snap ring (1), and then remove 2nd inner baulk ring,
2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd outer baulk ring.
Remove 1st-2nd coupling sleeve, insert keys, springs, and 1st2nd synchronizer hub.
Remove 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, 1st inner
baulk ring, and 1st main gear (2).

JPDIC0541ZZ

Assembly

INFOID:0000000009417614

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse snap ring.
• For installation of snap ring, set snap ring pliers and flat pliers
at both sides of snap ring. While expanding snap ring with
snap ring pliers, remove snap ring with flat pliers.
• Check that snap ring is securely installed to the groove.
• Apply gear oil to 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone,
1st inner baulk ring, 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer
cone, 2nd inner baulk ring, and 3rd baulk ring.
• Replace 1st outer baulk ring, 1st synchronizer cone, and 1st
inner baulk ring as a set.
• Replace 2nd outer baulk ring, 2nd synchronizer cone, and 2nd
inner baulk ring as a set.

SCIA1755J

• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd synchronizer hub.
(A)

: 1st main gear side

(B)

: 2nd main gear side

• Replace 1st-2nd synchronizer hub and 1st-2nd coupling
sleeve as a set.

PCIB1566E

Revision: April 2013

TM-48

2014 Note

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Be careful with the orientation of 1st-2nd coupling sleeve.

[5MT: RS5F91R]
A

(A)

: 2nd main gear side

(B)

: 1st main gear side

B

C
PCIB1567E

TM

• Be careful with the orientation of 3rd-4th synchronizer hub.
(A)

: 4th main gear side

(B)

: 3rd main gear side

E

• Replace 3rd-4th synchronizer hub and 3rd-4th coupling
sleeve as a set.

F

G
PCIB1565E

H

• Be careful with the orientation of insert key (1) and spring (2).

I

J

PCIB1564E

Inspection

K

INFOID:0000000009417615

L

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Mainshaft and Gear
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Damage, peeling, uneven wear, and distortion of shaft.
• Excessive wear, damage, and peeling of gear.

M

N

O

P
SCIA1762J

Synchronizer
Check the following items and replace if necessary.

Revision: April 2013

TM-49

2014 Note

MAINSHAFT AND GEAR
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Contact surface breakage, damage, and unusual wear of coupling
sleeve, synchronizer hub, insert key, and spring.
• Coupling sleeve and synchronizer hub move smoothly.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

SCIA1753J

• Breakage, damage, and excessive wear of baulk ring cam surface
and insert contact surface.

SCIA0608J

Bearing
Check bearing for damage and rough rotation. Replace if necessary.

MTF0041D

Revision: April 2013

TM-50

2014 Note

FINAL DRIVE
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >

FINAL DRIVE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009417616

B

C

TM

E

F

G
JPDIC0481ZZ

1.

Differential side bearing outer race

2.

Differential side bearing

3.

Final drive

H

: Replace the parts as a set.

Disassembly

INFOID:0000000009417617

I

• Remove differential side bearings, using Tool (A) and suitable tool.
Tool number

: ST33052000 (

—

)

J

K

L
PCIB1568E

Assembly

INFOID:0000000009417618

• Install differential side bearings, using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Replace differential side bearing outer race and differential
side bearing as a set.
Tool number

: KV40104920 (

—

M

N

)

O

P
PCIB1570E

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009417619

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Gear and Final Drive

Revision: April 2013

TM-51

2014 Note

FINAL DRIVE
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Check the sliding surfaces for wear, crack, or damage. Replace if necessary.

[5MT: RS5F91R]

Bearing
Check bearing for damage and rough rotation. Replace if necessary.

SPD715

Revision: April 2013

TM-52

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[5MT: RS5F91R]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

INFOID:0000000009417620

Transaxle type

RS5F91R

Engine type

HR16DE

Model code number

C

3AM0C

Number of speed

3VB0B

TM

5

Synchromesh type

B

Warner

Shift pattern

E

F
SCIA0821E

Gear ratio

1st

3.7273

2nd

2.0476

3rd

1.3929

4th

1.0294

5th

0.8205

Reverse

3.5455

Final gear
Number of
teeth

Input gear

Main gear

4.0667

Final gear

11

2nd

21

3rd

28

4th

34

5th

39

Reverse

11

1st

41

2nd

43

3rd

39

4th

35

5th

32

Reverse

39

Final gear/Pinion

Gear oil capacity (Reference)

61/15

(US pt, Imp pt)

Reverse brake

J

K

L

M

N

59/14

Approx. 2.67 (5-5/8, 4-3/4)

P

Installed
1st and 2nd

Speedometer drive gear

Not installed

TM-53

O

13/9

Double-cone synchronizer

Revision: April 2013

I

26

Side gear/Pinion mate gear

Remarks

H

4.2143

1st

Reverse idler gear

G

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009578896

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009019825

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Precaution for TCM and Transaxle Assembly Replacement

INFOID:0000000009019826

CAUTION:
• To replace TCM, refer to TM-126, «Description».
• To replace transaxle assembly, refer to TM-127, «Description».

Precaution for G Sensor Removal/Installation or Replacement

INFOID:0000000009019827

CAUTION:
To remove/install or replace G sensor, refer to TM-129, «Description».

Revision: April 2013

TM-54

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< PRECAUTION >

General Precautions

INFOID:0000000009019828

A

• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnecting the CVT assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.

B

C

TM
SEF289H

E

• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, do not damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

F

G

AAT470A

• Perform TCM input/output signal inspection and check
whether TCM functions normally or not before replacing TCM.
Refer to TM-99, «Reference Value».

H

I

J

K
MEF040DA

• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE”.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.

L

M

N

O
JSBIA1315ZZ

• Always use the specified brand of CVT fluid. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. after replacing the CVT fluid.

On Board Diagnosis (OBD) System of CVT and Engine

INFOID:0000000009019829

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
Revision: April 2013

TM-55

2014 Note

P

PRECAUTIONS
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< PRECAUTION >
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid
valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Removal and Installation Procedure for CVT Unit Connector

INFOID:0000000009019830

REMOVAL
• Rotate bayonet ring (A) counterclockwise. Pull out CVT unit harness connector (B) upward and remove it.

JSDIA1162ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.
2.

Align marking (A) on CVT unit harness connector terminal with
marking (B) on bayonet ring. Insert CVT unit harness connector.
Rotate bayonet ring clockwise.

JPDIA0294ZZ

3.

Rotate bayonet ring clockwise until marking (A) on CVT unit harness connector terminal body is aligned with the slit (B) on bayonet ring as shown in the figure (correctly fitting condition).

JPDIA0295ZZ

CAUTION:

Revision: April 2013

TM-56

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Securely align marking (A) on CVT unit harness connector terminal body with bayonet ring slit (B). Then, be careful not to make a half fit condition as shown in the figure.
• Do not mistake the slit of bayonet ring for other dent portion.

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

B

C
JPDIA0296ZZ

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-57

2014 Note

PREPARATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009019831

Tool number
Tool name
1.
2.

Description

KV311039S0
Charging pipe set
KV31103920*
O-ring

CVT fluid changing and adjustment

JSDIA1844ZZ

KV38107900
Protector
a: φ 32 mm

Installing drive shaft

PDIA1183J

*: The O-ring as an unit part is set as a SST.

Commercial Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009019832

Tool number
Tool name

Description

31197EU50A
Drive plate location guide
a: φ 25 mm

Installing transaxle assembly

JPDIA0676ZZ

Drift
a: φ 56 mm
b: φ 50 mm

Installing differential side oil seal

NT115

Revision: April 2013

TM-58

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A

COMPONENT PARTS
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM

B

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009019833

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N
ALDIA0436ZZ

O
1.

ECM

2.

IPDM E/R

3.

TCM

4.

Transmission range switch

5.

Primary speed sensor

6.

CVT control unit

7.

Control valve

Secondary speed sensor

8.

Output speed sensor

9.

10. G sensor

11.

BCM

12. Sport mode switch

13. Combination meter

14. Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

16. Shift position indicator

17. ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)

P

15. Sport mode indicator lamp

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Revision: April 2013

TM-59

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Component

Function

IPDM E/R

The TCM receives the A/C compressor feedback signal via CAN communications from the IPDM E/R.

TCM

TM-60, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM»

Transmission range switch

TM-61, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch»

Primary speed sensor

TM-61, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor»

CVT unit

Control
valve

—

ROM assembly*

TM-60, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : ROM Assembly»

CVT fluid temperature sensor*

TM-62, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor»

Secondary pressure sensor*

TM-62, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor»

Primary pressure solenoid valve*

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve»

Low brake solenoid valve*

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve»

High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve*

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid
Valve»

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve*

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve»

Line pressure solenoid valve*

TM-64, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve»

Output speed sensor

TM-62, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor»

Secondary speed sensor

TM-61, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed Sensor»

G sensor

TM-64, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor»

Overdrive control switch

TM-64, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Overdrive Control Switch»

Combination meter

The TCM receives the overdrive cntrol switch signal via CAN communications
from the combination meter.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

The TCM receives the following signals via CAN communications from the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
• Vehicle speed signal
• VDC operation signal
• VDC malfunction signal

ECM

• For purposes including improving the feeling when shifting and preventing
drops in engine speed, control signals are exchanged between the ECM and
TCM, and real-time cooperative control is performed according to the vehicle
driving conditions. (Engine and CVT integrated control)
— Engine and CVT integrated control signal
• The TCM receives the following signals via CAN communications from the
ECM.
— Engine speed signal
— Accelerator pedal position signal
— Closed throttle position signal
• TCM sends and receives the following signals with ECM through CAN communication to perform D position N idle control.
— N idle instruction signal

BCM

The TCM receives the following signals via CAN communications from the
BCM.
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Turn indicator signal

*: These components are included in control valve assembly.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : TCM

INFOID:0000000009019834

• The vehicle driving status is judged based on the signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units,
and the optimal transaxle control is performed.
• For TCM control items, refer to TM-73, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description».

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : ROM Assembly

INFOID:0000000009019835

• The ROM assembly is installed to control valve.
Revision: April 2013

TM-60

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The ROM assembly stores the calibration data (characteristic value) of each solenoid valve. TCM enables
accurate hydraulic control by obtaining the calibration data.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Transmission Range Switch

INFOID:0000000009019836

B

• The transmission range switch is installed to upper part of transaxle case.
• The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Speed Sensor

A

INFOID:0000000009019837

C

• The primary speed sensor is installed to side cover of transaxle.
• The primary speed sensor detects primary pulley speed.
• The primary speed sensor generates the ON-OFF pulse (short waveform) in proportion to the rotating body TM
speed which is “The higher the rotating body speed is, the faster the change cycle is”. The TCM judges the
rotating speed from the changing cycle of this pulse signal.
E

F

G

H

I

JSDIA1824GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Speed Sensor

J

INFOID:0000000009019838

• The secondary speed sensor is installed to side cover of transaxle.
• The secondary speed sensor detects secondary pulley speed.
• The secondary speed sensor generates the ON-OFF pulse (short waveform) in proportion to the rotating
body speed which is “The higher the rotating body speed is, the faster the change cycle is”. The TCM judges
the rotating speed from the changing cycle of this pulse signal.

K

L

M

N

O

P

JSDIA1824GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-61

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Output Speed Sensor

INFOID:0000000009019839

• The output speed sensor is installed to the back side of transaxle case.
• The output speed sensor detects final gear speed. TCM evaluates the vehicle speed from the final gear revolution.
• The output speed sensor generates the ON-OFF pulse (short waveform) in proportion to the rotating body
speed which is “The higher the rotating body speed is, the faster the change cycle is”. The TCM judges the
rotating speed from the changing cycle of this pulse signal.

JSDIA1824GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor

INFOID:0000000009019840

• The CVT fluid temperature sensor is installed to control valve.
• The CVT fluid temperature sensor detects CVT fluid temperature in oil pan.
• The fluid temperature sensor uses a thermistor, and changes the signal voltage by converting changes in the
CVT fluid temperature to a resistance value. TCM evaluates the CVT fluid temperature from the signal voltage value.

JSDIA1825GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Secondary Pressure Sensor

INFOID:0000000009019841

• The secondary pressure sensor is installed to control valve.
• The secondary pressure sensor detects the pressure applied to the secondary pulley.

Revision: April 2013

TM-62

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• When pressure is applied to the ceramic device in the secondary pressure sensor, the ceramic device is
deformed, resulting in voltage change. TCM evaluates the secondary pressure from its voltage change. Voltage is increased along with pressure increase.

A

B

C

TM

E

JSDIA1831GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009019842

• The primary pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.
• The primary pressure solenoid valve controls the primary pressure control valve. For information about the
primary pressure control valve, refer to TM-70, «TRANSAXLE : Component Description».
• The primary pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009019843

• The low brake solenoid valve is installed to control valve.
• The low brake solenoid valve adjusts the tightening pressure of the low brake.
• The low brake solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009019844

• The high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve is installed to control valve.
• The high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve adjusts the tightening pressure of the high clutch and reverse
brake.
• The high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009019845

• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is installed to control valve.
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the torque converter clutch control valve. For information
about the torque converter clutch control valve, refer to TM-70, «TRANSAXLE : Component Description».
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve utilizes a linear solenoid valve [N/L (normal low) type].
NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

TM-63

F

2014 Note

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/L (normal low) type does not produce hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve

INFOID:0000000009019846

• The line pressure solenoid valve is installed to control valve.
• The line pressure solenoid valve controls the pressure regulator valve. For information about the pressure
regulator valve, refer to TM-70, «TRANSAXLE : Component Description».
• The line pressure solenoid valve uses the linear solenoid valve [N/H (normal high) type].
NOTE:
• The principle of the linear solenoid valve utilizes the fact that the force pressing on the valve spool installed
inside the coil increases nearly in proportion to the current. This allows it to produce a fluid pressure that is
proportional to this pressing force.
• The N/H (normal high) produces hydraulic control when the coil is not energized.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : G Sensor

INFOID:0000000009019847

• G sensor is installed to floor under instrument lower cover.
• G sensor detects front/rear G and inclination applied to the vehicle.
• G sensor converts front/rear G and inclination applied to the vehicle to voltage signal. TCM evaluates front/
rear G and inclination angle of the vehicle from the voltage signal.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Overdrive Control Switch

INFOID:0000000009019848

• The overdrive control switch is installed to the selector lever knob.
• When the OD OFF indicator lamp on the combination meter is OFF and the overdrive control switch is
pressed, the overdrive is cancelled and the OD OFF indicator lamp is ON.
• When the OD OFF indicator lamp on the combination meter is ON and the overdrive control switch is
pressed, the overdrive is active and the OD OFF indicator lamp is OFF.

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : OD OFF Indicator Lamp

INFOID:0000000009019849

DESIGN/PURPOSE
The O/D OFF indicator notifies the driver that the shift control of
transmaxle is in O/D OFF.

JPNIA1891ZZ

BULB CHECK
Approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch ON.

OPERATION AT COMBNATION METER CNA COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIGNAL
For actions on CAN communications blackout in the combnation meter, refer to MWI-19, «Fail-safe».

Revision: April 2013

TM-64

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

A

B

C
JSDIA3606GB

TM

SIGNAL PATH
• When a overdrive control switch signal is input to the combination meter, the combination meter transmits
the overdrive control switch signal to the TCM via CAN communication.
• When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the TCM transmits a O/D OFF indicator signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. The combination meter turns ON the O/D OFF indicator lamp on the
combination meter, according to the signal.
— TCM receives overdrive control switch signal via CAN communication from combination meter.
— Selector lever: D position

E

F

LIGHTING CONDITION
When all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch: ON
• Selector lever: D position
• Overdrive control switch is pressed when the O/D OFF indicator lamp is OFF.

G

H

SHUTOFF CONDITION
When any of the conditions listed below is satisfied.
• Ignition switch: Other than ON
• Overdrive control switch is pressed when the O/D OFF indicator lamp is ON.
• Selector lever is shifted to other than D position when the O/D OFF indicator lamp is ON.

I

TIMING CHART

J

K

L

M

N
JSDIA3607GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Shift Position Indicator

INFOID:0000000009019850

TCM transmits shift position signal to combination meter via CAN communication. The actual shift position is
displayed on combination meter according to the signal.

Revision: April 2013

TM-65

2014 Note

O

P

COMPONENT PARTS
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

INFOID:0000000009019851

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located on the combination
meter.
The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. If the MIL
remains illuminated, the on board diagnostic system has detected an
engine system malfunction.
For details, refer to EC-24, «WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS
: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)».
JSBIA1315ZZ

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009019852

ALDIA0267ZZ

1.

Stop lamp switch

4.

Shift lock solenoid

2.

Shift lock release lever

3.

Park position switch

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Component

Function

Stop lamp switch

Stop lamp switch turns ON when brake pedal is depressed.

Shift lock release lever

Manually releases the shift lock.

Park position switch

Detects that the selector lever is in “P” position.

Shift lock solenoid

Operates according to the signal from the stop lamp switch and moves the lock lever.

Revision: April 2013

TM-66

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION

A

TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE : Cross-Sectional View

INFOID:0000000009019853

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

JSDIA1777ZZ

1.

Converter housing

2.

Oil pump

3.

Counter drive gear

4.

Control valve

5.

Oil pan

6.

Primary pulley

7.

Steel belt

8.

Secondary pulley

9.

Planetary gear (auxiliary gearbox)

10.

Side cover

11.

Transaxle case

12.

Differential case

13.

Final gear

14.

Reduction gear

15.

Counter driven gear

16.

Drive sprocket

17.

Oil pump chain

18.

Torque converter

19.

Driven sprocket

TRANSAXLE : Transaxle Mechanism

O

P

INFOID:0000000009019854

BELT & PULLEY
Revision: April 2013

TM-67

N

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

Mechanism
It is composed of a pair of pulleys (the groove width is changed freely in the axial direction) and the steel belt
(the steel plates are placed continuously and the belt is guided with the multilayer steel rings on both sides).
The groove width changes according to wrapping radius of steel belt and pulley from low status to overdrive
status continuously with non-step. It is controlled with the oil pressures of primary pulley and secondary pulley.
Steel belt
It is composed of multiple steel plates (A) and two steel rings (B)
stacked to a several number. The feature of this steel belt transmits
power with compression of the steel plate in contrast with transmission of power in pulling with a rubber belt. Friction force is required
with the pulley slope to transmit power from the steel plate. The force
is generated with the following mechanism:
Oil pressure applies to the secondary pulley to nip the plate. ⇒The
plate is pushed and extended outward. ⇒The steel ring shows withstands. ⇒Pulling force is generated on the steel ring. ⇒The plate of
the primary pulley is nipped between the pulley. ⇒Friction force is
generated between the steel belt and the pulley.
JSDIA1966ZZ
Therefore, responsibilities are divided by the steel plate that transmits the power with compression and the steel ring that maintains necessary friction force. In this way, the
tension of the steel ring is distributed on the entire surface and stress variation is limited, resulting in good
durability.
Pulley
The primary pulley (input shaft side) and the secondary pulley (output shaft side) have the shaft with slope
(fixed cone surface), movable sheave (movable cone surface that can move in the axial direction) and oil pressure chamber at the back of the movable sheave.

JSDIA1779GB

Pulley gear shifting operation

• Pulley gear shifting operation
The movable sheave slides on the shaft to change the groove width of the pulley. Input signals of engine
load (accelerator pedal opening), engine revolution and gear ratio (vehicle speed) change the operation
pressures of the primary pulley and the secondary pulley, and controls the pulley groove width. Along with
change of the pulley groove width, the belt contact radius is changed. This allows continuous and stepless

Revision: April 2013

TM-68

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
gear shifting from low to overdrive. “The contact radius ratio of each pulley in contact with the belt x auxiliary
gearbox gear ratio” is the gear ratio.

A

B

C

TM

E

F
JSDIA2573GB

AUXILIARY GEARBOX MECHANISM

G

1st, 2nd and reverse gears are changed with the planetary gear mechanism.

TRANSAXLE : Operation Status

INFOID:0000000009019855

×: Engaged or applied.

Slector lever position

Parking
mechanism

Counter
gear set

P

×

×

Low brake

High clutch

Reverse
brake

×

Primary
pulley

Secondary
pulley

Steel belt

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Reduction
gear set

R

×

×

N

×

D

×

× (1GR)

× (2GR)

×

×

×

×

L

×

× (1GR)

× (2GR)

×

×

×

×

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-69

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

TRANSAXLE : Oil Pressure System

INFOID:0000000009019856

Oil pressure required for operation of the transaxle transmission mechanism is generated by oil pump, oil
pressure control valve, solenoid valve, etc.

JSDIA1826GB

TRANSAXLE : Component Description

INFOID:0000000009019857

Part name

Function

Torque converter

It is composed of the cover converter, turbine assembly, stator, pump impeller assembly, etc. It increases the engine torque and transmits the power to the transaxle.

Oil pump

Through the oil pump drive chain, it uses the vane oil pump driven by the engine. It generates necessary oil pressure to circulate fluid and to operate the clutch and brake.

Counter gear set

The power from the torque converter is transmitted to the primary pulley through the
counter drive gear and the counter driven gear.

Belt & pulley (Continuously variable transmission)

It is composed of the primary pulley, secondary pulley, steel belt, etc. and the mechanism performs shifting, changes the gear ratio and transmits the power with oil pressure
from the control valve.

Auxiliary gearbox (stepped transmission)

It is composed of the planetary gear, multi-disc clutch, multi-disc brake, etc. and the
mechanism performs shifting (1-2 gear shifting and reverse) with oil pressure from the
control valve.

Reduction gear set

Conveys power from the transmission mechanism to the reduction gear and the final
gear.

Parking mechanism

When the shift lever is changed to P position, the mechanism fixes the parking gear (integrated with the reduction gear) and the fixes the output shaft.

Control valve

Controls oil pressure from the oil pump to the pressure suitable for the line pressure
control system, shift control system, lock-up control system and lubrication system.

Pressure regulator valve

Adjusts the discharge pressure from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) corresponding to the driving condition.

Torque converter regulator valve

Adjusts the feed pressure to the torque converter to the optimum pressure corresponding to the driving condition.

Pilot valve

Adjusts line pressure and produces a constant pressure (pilot pressure) necessary for
activating each solenoid valve.

Revision: April 2013

TM-70

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Part name

Function

Manual valve

Distributes the clutch and brake operation pressures (pilot pressure) corresponding to
each shift position.

High clutch/reverse brake switching valve

Switches the circuit for the high clutch and the reverse brake.

Torque converter clutch control valve

It is operated with the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and it adjusts the tightening pressure and non-tightening pressure of the torque converter clutch piston of the
torque converter.

Primary pressure control valve

It is operated with the primary pressure solenoid valve and adjusts the feed pressure to
the primary pulley.

Primary pressure solenoid valve

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve»

Low brake solenoid valve

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Low Brake Solenoid Valve»

High clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve

A

B

C

TM

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve»

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

TM-63, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve»

Line pressure solenoid valve

E

TM-64, «CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Line Pressure Solenoid Valve»

FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER & FLUID WARMER SYSTEM : System Description

F
INFOID:0000000009019858

CVT FLUID COOLER SCHEMATIC

G

CVT fluid cooler air-cooling type
H

I

J

K

L
JSDIA4497GB

CVT fluid cooler water-cooling type
M

N

O

P

JSDIA2943GB

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
CVT Oil Warmer

Revision: April 2013

TM-71

2014 Note

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The CVT oil warmer (1) is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly.
• When engine is started while engine and CVT are cold, engine
coolant temperature rises more quickly than CVT fluid temperature. CVT oil warmer is provided with two circuits for CVT and
engine coolant respectively so that warmed engine coolant warms
CVT quickly. This helps shorten CVT warming up time, improving
fuel economy.
• A cooling effect is obtained when CVT fluid temperature is high.

[CVT: RE0F11A]

JSDIA2586ZZ

CVT Fluid Cooler (Water-cooling)
• The CVT fluid cooler (water-cooling) is installed in the radiator side tank (right side).
• CVT fluid is cooled by engine coolant.
CVT Fluid Cooler (Air-cooling)
• The CVT fluid cooler (air-cooling) is installed to vehicle front.
• The CVT fluid cooler (air-cooling) prevents CVT fluid temperature from an abnormal increase while driving
the vehicle. When flowing into the CVT fluid cooler (air-cooling), CVT fluid is cooled by driving blast while
driving the vehicle.
Heater Thermostat
• The heater thermostat (1) is installed on the front part of transaxle
assembly.
• The heater thermostat open and close with set temperature.

JSDIA2585ZZ

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019868

The selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” position to any other position unless the ignition switch is in the
ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

Revision: April 2013

TM-72

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019859

B

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

JSDIA2803GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-73

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL TABLE
Sensor (or signal)
• Engine and CVT integrated control
signal
• Engine speed signal
• Accelerator pedal position signal
• Closed throttle position signal
• Stop lamp switch signal
• Secondary pressure sensor
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
• Primary speed sensor
• Secondary speed sensor
• Output speed sensor
• Transmission range switch signal
• Overdrive control switch signal
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• ABS operation signal
• A/C compressor feedback signal
• G sensor
• N idle instruction signal
• Turn indicator signal

⇒

TCM function

Actuator

• Line pressure control (TM-81, «LINE
PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description»)
• Shift control (TM-82, «SHIFT CONTROL :
System Description»)
• Select control (TM-84, «SELECT CONTROL : System Description»)
• Lock-up control (TM-85, «LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description»)
• Idle neutral control (TM-86, «IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL : System Description»)
• Fail-safe mode (TM-107, «Fail-safe»)
• Self-diagnosis function (TM-92, «CONSULT Function»)
• Communication function with CONSULT
(TM-92, «CONSULT Function»)
• CAN communication control (TM-139,
«Description»)

• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Primary pressure solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
• High clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid valve
• OD OFF indicator lamp
• Shift position indicator

⇒

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• CVT detects the vehicle driving status from switches, sensors and signals, and controls the vehicle so that
the optimum shift position and shift timing may always be achieved. It also controls the vehicle to reduce
shift and lockup shock, etc.
• Receives input signals from switches and sensors.
• Sends the output signal necessary for operation of solenoid valves, and evaluates the line pressure, shift
timing, lockup operation, engine brake performance, etc.
• If a malfunction occurs on the electric system, activate the fail-safe mode only to drive the vehicle.

LIST OF CONTROL ITEMS AND INPUT/OUTPUT
Shift control

Line pressure
control

Select control

Lock-up control

Fail-safe function *

Engine torque signal
(CAN communication)

×

×

×

×

×

Engine speed signal
(CAN communication)

×

×

×

×

×

Accelerator pedal position signal
(CAN communication)

×

×

×

×

×

Closed throttle position signal
(CAN communication)

×

×

Stop lamp switch signal
(CAN communication)

×

×

×

Secondary pressure sensor

×

×

×

×

×

Primary speed sensor

×

×

Secondary speed sensor

×

×

Output speed sensor

×

Transmission range switch

×

Overdrive control switch
(CAN communication)

×

Control Item

Input

CVT fluid temperature sensor

Revision: April 2013

TM-74

×
×
×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Shift control

Line pressure
control

Select control

Line pressure solenoid valve

×

×

×

Primary pressure solenoid valve

×

Control Item

Fail-safe function *

×
×

×

×

Low brake solenoid valve

×

×

×

OD OFF indicator lamp
(CAN communication)

B

×

High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve

Shift position indicator
(CAN communication)

A

×
×

Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Output

Lock-up control

C

TM

×
×

E

·*: If these input/output signals show errors, TCM activates the fail-safe function.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-75

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Schematic

INFOID:0000000009019860

JSDIA2911GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-76

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

JSDIA2912GB

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe

K

INFOID:0000000009019861

TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
If the vehicle shows following behaviors including “poor acceleration”, a malfunction of the applicable system
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures.

L

M

Fail-safe function
DTC

Vehicle behavior

P062F

Not changed from normal driving

P0705

• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not displayed.
• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not displayed.
• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P0706

Revision: April 2013

N

Conditions of vehicle
—

TM-77

O

P

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC

P0711

P0712

P0713

Vehicle behavior

Conditions of vehicle

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

P0715

•
•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0720

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0740

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0743

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0744

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0746

•
•
•
•
•

—

P0846

• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow

—

P0847

Acceleration is slow

—

P0848

• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow

—

P0863

Not changed from normal driving

—

P0890

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0962

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0963

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

Revision: April 2013

TM-78

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC

Vehicle behavior

Conditions of vehicle

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0967

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0998

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P0965

P0966

P0999

P099B

P099C

B

C

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

Wire disconnection

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

Voltage shorting

Start is slow

TM

E

F
—

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

Wire disconnection

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

Voltage shorting

G

H

P1586

Idle neutral control is not performed

—

P1588

Idle neutral control is not performed

—

P2765

•
•
•
•
•

—

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

I

J

P2857

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P2858

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

—

K

P2859

Vehicle speed is not increased

—

P285A

Start is slow

—

U0073

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

U0100

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

U0140

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0141

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0155

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0300

•
•
•
•

—

U1000

Not changed from normal driving

—

U1114

Not changed from normal driving

—

U1117

Not changed from normal driving

—

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

Revision: April 2013

A

TM-79

L

M

N

O

P

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Protection Control

INFOID:0000000009019862

The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.

CONTROL FOR WHEEL SPIN
Control

When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
At the 1GR, the clutch pressure is increased.

Vehicle behavior in
control

If the accelerator is kept depressing during wheel spin, the engine revolution and vehicle speed are limited to
a certain degree. From the 1GR, upshift to a certain gear ratio is only allowed.

Normal return condition

Wheel spin convergence returns the control to the normal control.

CONTROL WHEN FLUID TEMPERATURE IS HIGH
Control

When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the gear shift permission maximum revolution and the maximum
torque are reduced than usual to prevent increase of the oil temperature.

Vehicle behavior in
control

Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control.

Normal return condition

The control returns to the normal control when CVT fluid temperature is lowered.

TORQUE IS REDUCED WHEN DRIVING WITH THE REVERSE GEAR
Control

Engine output is controlled according to a vehicle speed while reversing the vehicle.

Vehicle behavior in
control

Power performance may be lowered while reversing the vehicle.

Normal return condition

Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position.

REVERSE PROHIBIT CONTROL
Control

The reverse brake is controlled to avoid becoming engaged when the selector lever is set in “R” position while
driving in forward direction at more than the specified speed.

Vehicle behavior in
control

If the selector lever is put at “R” position when driving with the forward gear, the gear becomes neutral, not
reverse.

Normal return condition

The control returns to normal control when the vehicle is driven at low speeds. (The reverse brake becomes
engaged.)

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL

Revision: April 2013

TM-80

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019863

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

JSDIA1864GB

J

DESCRIPTION
Highly accurate line pressure control (secondary pressure control) reduces friction for improvement of fuel
economy.

K

Normal Oil Pressure Control
Appropriate line pressure and secondary pressure suitable for driving condition are determined based on the
accelerator pedal position, engine speed, primary pulley (input) speed, secondary pulley (output) speed, vehicle speed, input torque, stop lamp switch signal, transmission range switch signal, lock-up signal, power voltage, target shift ratio, oil temperature and oil pressure.

L

Secondary Pressure Feedback Control
In normal oil pressure control and oil pressure control in shifting, highly accurate secondary pressure is determined by detecting the secondary pressure using a oil pressure sensor and by feedback control.

SHIFT CONTROL

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-81

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SHIFT CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019864

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA2632GB

DESCRIPTION
To select the gear ratio that can give the driving force to meet driver’s intent or vehicle situation, the vehicle
driving condition such as vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position is detected and the most appropriate
gear ratio is selected and the shifting method before reaching the speed is determined. The information is
output to the primary pressure solenoid valve to control the line pressure input/output to the primary pulley, to
determine the primary pulley (movable pulley) position and to control the gear position.
D Position (Normal)

Revision: April 2013

TM-82

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Gear shifting is performed in all shifting ranges from the lowest to the
highest gear ratio.

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

B

C
SCIA1953E

TM

D Position (OD OFF)
The gear ratio is generally high by limiting the shifting range on the
high side, and this always generates a large driving power.

E

F

G
SCIA8229E

L Position
By limiting the shifting range only to the lowest of the gear ratio, a
large driving force and engine brake are obtained.

H

I

J

K
SCIA8240E

Hill Climbing And Descending Control
If a downhill is detected with the accelerator pedal is released, the system performs downshift to increase the
engine brake force so that vehicle may not be accelerated more than necessary. If a climbing hill is detected,
the system improves the acceleration performance in re-acceleration by limiting the gear shift range on the
high side.
NOTE:
For engine brake control on a downhill, the control can be stopped with CONSULT.

L

M

N

O

P
JSDIA2060GB

Control In Acceleration
From change of the vehicle speed or accelerator pedal position, the acceleration request level of the driver or
driving scene is evaluated. In start or acceleration during driving, the gear shift characteristics with linearity of
revolution increase and vehicle speed increase are gained to improve the acceleration feel.

SELECT CONTROL
Revision: April 2013

TM-83

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SELECT CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019865

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA1862GB

DESCRIPTION
Based on accelerator pedal angle, engine speed, primary pulley speed, and the secondary pulley speed, the
optimum operating pressure is set to reduce impact of a selector lever operation while shifting from “N” (“P”) to
“D” (“R”) position.

LOCK-UP CONTROL

Revision: April 2013

TM-84

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

LOCK-UP CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019866

A

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

JSDIA1865GB

J

DESCRIPTION
• Controls for improvement of the transmission efficiency by engaging the torque converter clutch in the
torque converter and eliminating slip of the converter. Achieves comfortable driving with slip control of the
torque converter clutch.
• The oil pressure feed circuit for the torque converter clutch piston chamber is connected to the torque converter clutch control valve. The torque converter clutch control valve is switched by the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve with the signal from TCM. This controls the oil pressure circuit, which is supplied to the
torque converter clutch piston chamber, to the release side or engagement side.
• If the CVT fluid temperature is low or the vehicle is in fail-safe mode due to malfunction, lock-up control is
prohibited.
Lock-up engagement
In lock-up engagement, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control
valve locked up to generate the lock-up apply pressure. This pushes the torque converter clutch piston for
engagement.
Lock-up release condition
In lock-up release, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve makes the torque converter clutch control valve
non-locked up to drain the lock-up apply pressure. This does not engage the torque converter clutch piston.

IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL

Revision: April 2013

K

L

M

N

O

P

TM-85

2014 Note

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

IDLE NEUTRAL CONTROL : System Description

INFOID:0000000009019867

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

JSDIA2535GB

DESCRIPTION
If a driver has no intention of starting the vehicle in D position, TCM operates the low brake solenoid valve and
controls the oil pressure of the low brake to be low pressure. Therefore, the low brake is in the release (slip)
status and the power transmission route of transaxle is the same status as the N position. In this way, the transaxle is in idling status and load to the engine can be reduced to improve fuel economy.
NOTE:

Revision: April 2013

TM-86

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Provides idle neutral control when stop/start operation is not performed.

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

JPDIA1215GB

Idle Neutral Control Start Condition
Idle neutral control is started when all of the following conditions are fulfilled. However, during idle neutral control, idle neutral control is stopped when any of the following conditions is not met or idle neutral control continues 30 seconds.
Driving environment

: Flat road or road with mild gradient

Selector lever position

: “D” position

Vehicle speed

: 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.0/8

Brake pedal

: Depressed

L

M

N

Engine speed

: Idle speed

Turn signal lamp/hazard signal lamp

: Not activated

O

NOTE:
Stops or prohibits the idle neutral control when the TCM and ECM detect that the vehicle is in one of the following conditions.
• Engine coolant temperature and CVT fluid temperature are the specified temperature or more, or the specified temperature or less.
• When a transaxle malfunction occurs.
• When the vehicle detects DTC and is in the fail-safe mode.
Idle Neutral Control Resume Condition

Revision: April 2013

K

TM-87

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When the idle neutral control finishes, if the vehicle is driven at more than the specified speed and the idle
neutral control start conditions are satisfied, the idle neutral control starts again. If the vehicle has a malfunction, the idle neutral control does not start.

Revision: April 2013

TM-88

2014 Note

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009019870

This is an on board diagnosis system which records diagnosis information related to the exhaust gases. It
detects malfunctions related to sensors and actuators. The malfunctions are indicated by means of the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) and are stored as DTC in the ECU memory. The diagnosis information can be
checked using a diagnosis tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).

Function of OBD

B

C

INFOID:0000000009019871

The GST is connected to the diagnosis connector on the vehicle and communicates with the on-board control
units to perform diagnosis. The diagnosis connector is the same as for CONSULT. Refer to GI-49, «Descrip- TM
tion».
E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-89

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1 Trip Detection Diagnosis and 2 Trip Detection Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009019872

NOTE:
“Start the engine and turn OFF the ignition switch after warm-up.” This is defined as 1 trip.

1 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC. In these diagnoses, some illuminate MIL and
some do not. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».

2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS
When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage. <1
trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again in next driving, TCM memorizes DTC. When DTC is memorized, MIL
lights. <2 trip>
“Trip” of the “2 trip detection diagnosis” indicates the driving mode that executes self-diagnosis during driving.
×: Check possible

DTC at the 1st trip
Item

DTC

—: Check not possible

MIL

Display at the
1st trip

Display at the
2nd trip

Display at the
1st trip

Display at the
2nd trip

Illumination at
the 1st trip

Illumination at
the 2nd trip

1 trip detection diagnosis
(Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index»)

—

—

×

—

×

—

2 trip detection diagnosis
(Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index»)

×

—

—

×

—

×

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and DTC of 1st Trip

INFOID:0000000009019873

2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL
• The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.
• When a malfunction is detected at the 1st trip, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this
stage. If the same malfunction is not detected at the 2nd trip (conforming to necessary driving conditions),
DTC at the 1st trip is erased from TCM. If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes
DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
• The DTC of the 1st trip is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. Since detection of DTC at the
1st trip does not illuminate MIL, warning for a problem is not given to a driver.
• For procedure to delete DTC and 1st trip DTC from TCM, refer to TM-92, «CONSULT Function».
• If DTC of the 1st trip is detected, it is necessary to check the cause according to the “Diagnosis flow”. Refer
to TM-123, «Flowchart of Trouble Diagnosis».

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

INFOID:0000000009019874

• TCM not only detects DTC, but also sends the MIL signal to ECM through CAN communication. ECM sends
the MIL signal to the combination meter through CAN communication according to the signal, and illuminates MIL.
• For malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) description, refer to EC-24, «WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS :
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)».

DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System

INFOID:0000000009019875

RELATION BETWEEN DTC AT 1ST TRIP/DTC/MIL AND DRIVING CONDITIONS (FOR 2 TRIP DETECTION DIAGNOSIS THAT ILLUMINATES MIL)
•
•
•
•

When initial malfunction is detected, TCM memorizes DTC of the 1st trip. MIL does not light at this stage.
If the same malfunction is detected at the 2nd trip, TCM memorizes DTC and MIL lights at the same time.
Then, MIL goes after driving the vehicle for 3 trips under “Driving condition B” without malfunction.
DTC is displayed until 40 trips of “Driving condition A” are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction.
DTC is erased when 40 trips are satisfied.
Revision: April 2013

TM-90

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• When the self-diagnosis result is acceptable at the 2nd trip (conforming to driving condition B), DTC of the
1st trip is erased.

A

COUNTER SYSTEM LIST
Item

Driving condition

Trip

MIL (OFF)

B

3

DTC (clear)

A

40

DTC at 1st trip (clear)

B

1

B

C

DRIVING CONDITION

TM

Driving condition A
Driving condition A is the driving condition that provides warm-up.
In specific, count-up is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
• After start of the engine, the water temperature increased by 20 °C (36 °F) or more.
• Water temperature was 70 °C (158 °F) or more.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the A counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the A counter.
• When MIL goes off due to the malfunction and the A counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.

E

F

G

Driving condition B
Driving condition B is the driving condition that performs all diagnoses once.
In specific, count-up is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Engine speed is 400 rpm or more.
• Water temperature was 70 °C (158 °F) or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (43 – 75 MPH) continued for 60 seconds or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) continued for 10 seconds or more.
• In closed loop control, vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less and idle determination ON continued for 12
seconds or more.
• After start of the engine, 22 minutes or more have passed.
• The condition that the vehicle speed is 10km/h (6 MPH) or more continued for 10 seconds or more in total.
• The ignition switch was changed from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
• If the same malfunction is detected regardless of the driving condition, reset the B counter.
• When the above is satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, count up the B counter.
• When the B counter reaches 3 without malfunction, MIL goes off.
• When the B counter is counted once without detecting the same malfunction after TCM memorizes DTC of
the 1st trip, DTC of the 1st trip is erased.

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-91

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TIME CHART

JSDIA1868GB

CONSULT Function

INFOID:0000000009019876

APPLICATION ITEMS
Conditions

Function

Work Support

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.

Self Diagnostic Results

Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.

Data Monitor

Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.

CAN Diagnosis

This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.

Revision: April 2013

TM-92

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Conditions

Function

A

CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor

It monitors the status of CAN communication.

ECU Identification

Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.

CALIB DATA

The calibration data status of TCM can be checked.

B

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
C

Display Item List
Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».

DTC at 1st trip and method to read DTC
TM
• DTC (P0705, P0711, P0720, etc.) is specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
• DTC and DTC at 1st trip are displayed on “Self Diagnostic results” of CONSULT.
When DTC is currently detected, “CRNT” is displayed. If “PAST” is displayed, it shows a malfunction
occurred in the past.The trip number of drive without malfunction of concerned DTC can be confirmed with E
“IGN counter” inside “FFD”.
• When the DTC at the 1st trip is detected, the “timing” is displayed as “1t”.
F
DTC deletion method
NOTE:
• If the battery terminal is disconnected, the TCM memory is erased. (The disconnection time varies from several seconds to several hours.
G
• If the ignition switch is left ON after repair, turn OFF the ignition switch and wait for 10 seconds or more.
Then, turn the ignition ON again. (Engine stop)
1. Touch “TRANSMISSION” of CONSULT.
H
2. Touch “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Touch “Erase”. (DTC memorized in TCM is erased.)
IGN counter
The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD” and the number of times of satisfied “Driving condition A” is displayed after normal recovery of DTC. Refer to TM-90, «DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System».
• If malfunction (DTC) is currently detected, “0” is displayed.
• After normal recovery, every time “Driving condition A” is satisfied, the display value increases from 1 → 2 →
3…38 → 39.
• When MIL turns OFF due to the malfunction and the counter reaches 40, the DTC is erased.
NOTE:
The counter display of “40” cannot be checked.

I

J

K

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
×: Application

: Optional selection

L

M

Monitor item selection
Monitored item

VSP SENSOR

(Unit)

(km/h or mph)

MAIN SIGNALS

ECU INPUT SIGNALS

Remarks

N

×

Displays the vehicle speed calculated from the CVT output shaft speed.

ESTM VSP SIG

(km/h or mph)

×

Displays the vehicle speed signal (ABS) received
through CAN communication.

PRI SPEED SEN

(rpm)

×

Displays the primary pulley speed calculated from the
pulse signal of the primary speed sensor.

SEC REV SENSOR

(rpm)

×

Displays the secondary pulley speed calculated from the
pulse signal of the secondary speed sensor.

VHCL/S SE (REV)

(rpm)

×

Displays the CVT output shaft speed calculated from the
pulse signal of the output speed sensor.

ENG SPEED SIG

(rpm)

×

Displays the engine speed received through CAN communication.

Revision: April 2013

TM-93

2014 Note

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item selection
Monitored item

(Unit)

MAIN SIGNALS

ECU INPUT SIGNALS

Remarks

LINE PRESSURE SEN

(V)

×

Displays the signal voltage of the line pressure sensor.

ATF TEMP SEN

(V)

×

Displays the signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature
sensor.

G SENSOR

(V)

×

Displays the signal voltage of the G sensor.

VIGN SEN

(V)

×

Displays the battery voltage applied to TCM.

VEHICLE SPEED

(km/h or mph)

INPUT REV

(rpm)

PRI SPEED

(rpm)

SEC SPEED

(rpm)

Displays the secondary pulley speed recognized by
TCM.

OUTPUT REV

(rpm)

Displays the output shaft speed of CVT recognized by
TCM.

ENG SPEED

(rpm)

×

Displays the engine speed recognized by TCM.

SLIP REV

(rpm)

×

Displays the speed difference between the input shaft
speed of CVT and the engine speed.

TOTAL GEAR RATIO

×

Displays the total CVT gear ratio calculated from input
shaft speed/output shaft speed of CVT.

PULLEY GEAR RATIO

×

Displays the pulley gear ratio calculated from primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley speed.

×

Displays the vehicle speed recognized by TCM.
Displays the input shaft speed of CVT recognized by
TCM.

×

Displays the primary pulley speed recognized by TCM.

Displays the gear position of the auxiliary gearbox recognized by TCM.

AUX GEARBOX

Displays the acceleration and deceleration speed of the
vehicle calculated from vehicle speed change.

G SPEED

(G)

ACCEL POSI SEN 1

(deg)

×

VENG TRQ

(Nm)

×

PRI TRQ

(Nm)

×

Displays the estimated throttle position received through
CAN communication.
Display the engine torque recognized by TCM.
Display the input shaft torque of CVT.

TRQ RTO

Display the torque ratio of torque converter.

LINE PRESSURE

(MPa)

×

Displays the secondary pressure (line pressure) calculated from the signal voltage of the secondary pressure
sensor.

FLUID TEMP

(°C or °F)

×

Displays the CVT fluid temperature calculated from the
signal voltage of the CVT fluid temperature sensor.

DSR REV

(rpm)

Displays the target primary pulley speed calculated from
processing of gear shift control.

TRGT GEAR RATIO

Displays the target gear ratio from the input shaft to the
output shaft of CVT calculated from processing of gear
shift control.

TGT PLLY GR RATIO

Displays the target gear ratio of the pulley from processing of gear shift control.

TRGT AUX GEARBOX

Displays the target gear of the auxiliary gearbox calculated from processing of gear shift control.

LU PRS

Revision: April 2013

Displays the target oil pressure of the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure processing of gear shift control.

(MPa)

TM-94

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item selection
Monitored item

(Unit)

MAIN SIGNALS

ECU INPUT SIGNALS

A

Remarks

B

LINE PRS

(MPa)

Displays the target oil pressure of the line pressure solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure processing of
gear shift control.

TRGT PRI PRESSURE

(MPa)

Displays the target oil pressure of the primary pressure
solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure processing of
gear shift control.

C

TRGT HC/RB PRESS

(MPa)

Displays the target oil pressure of the high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve calculated from oil pressure
processing of gear shift control.

TM

TRGT LB PRESSURE

(MPa)

Displays the target oil pressure of the low brake solenoid
valve calculated from oil pressure processing of gear
shift control.

ISOLT1

(A)

×

Displays the command current from TCM to the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve.

ISOLT2

(A)

×

Displays the command current from TCM to the line
pressure solenoid valve.

PRI SOLENOID

(A)

×

Displays the command current from TCM to the primary
pressure solenoid valve.

HC/RB SOLENOID

(A)

×

Displays the command current from TCM to the high
clutch& reverse brake solenoid valve.
Displays the command current from TCM to the low
brake solenoid valve.

E

F

G

H

L/B SOLENOID

(A)

×

(A)

×

×

Monitors the command current from TCM to the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve and displays the monitored value.

I

SOLMON1

SOLMON2

(A)

×

×

Monitors the command current from TCM to the line
pressure solenoid valve and displays the monitored value.

J

PRI SOL MON

(A)

×

×

Monitors the command current from TCM to the primary
pressure solenoid valve and displays the monitored value.

HC/RB SOL MON

(A)

×

×

Monitors the command current from TCM to the high
clutch& reverse brake solenoid valve and displays the
monitored value.

L/B SOL MON

(A)

×

×

Monitors the current command from TCM to the low
brake solenoid valve and displays the monitored value.

D POSITION SW

(On/Off)

×

Displays the operation status of the transmission range
switch (D position).

N POSITION SW

(On/Off)

×

Displays the operation status of the transmission range
switch (N position).

R POSITION SW

(On/Off)

×

Displays the operation status of the transmission range
switch (R position).

×

Displays the operation status of the transmission range
switch (P position).

×

Displays the reception status of the stop lamp switch signal received through CAN communication.

×

Displays the operation status of the transmission range
switch (L position).

P POSITION SW

(On/Off)

BRAKESW

(On/Off)

L POSITION SW

(On/Off)

IDLE SW

(On/Off)

×

×

Displays the reception status of the closed throttle position signal received through CAN communication.

SPORT MODE SW

(On/Off)

×

×

Displays the reception status of the overdrive control
switch signal received through CAN communication.

Revision: April 2013

×

TM-95

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item selection
Monitored item

(Unit)

MAIN SIGNALS

ECU INPUT SIGNALS

Remarks

STRDWNSW

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter
(down switch).
• It is displayed although not equipped.

STRUPSW

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the operation status of the paddle shifter (up
switch).
• It is displayed although not equipped.

DOWNLVR

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the operation status of the selector lever
(down switch).
• It is displayed although not equipped.

UPLVR

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the operation status of the selector lever (up
switch).
• It is displayed although not equipped.

NONMMODE

(On/Off)

×

• Displays if the selector lever position is not at the manual shift gate.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

MMODE

(On/Off)

×

• Displays if the selector lever position is at the manual
shift gate.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

INDLRNG

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the shift position (L
position) signal transmitted through CAN communication.

INDDRNG

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the shift position (D
position) signal transmitted through CAN communication.

INGNRNG

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the shift position (N
position) signal transmitted through CAN communication.

INGRRNG

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the shift position (R
position) signal transmitted through CAN communication.

INGPRNG

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the shift position (P
position) signal transmitted through CAN communication.

CVT LAMP

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the OD OFF indicator
lamp signal transmitted through CAN communication.

SPORT MODE IND

(On/Off)

Displays the transmission status of the OD OFF indicator
lamp signal transmitted through CAN communication.

MMODE IND

(On/Off)

• Displays the transmission status of the manual mode
signal transmitted through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

VDC ON

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the reception status of the VDC (ESP) operation signal received through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

TCS ON

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the reception status of the TCS operation signal received through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

ABS FAIL SIGNAL

(On/Off)

×

Displays the reception status of the ABS malfunction signal received through CAN communication.

ABS ON

(On/Off)

×

Displays the reception status of the ABS operation signal
received through CAN communication.

4WD FAIL SIGNAL

(On/Off)

×

• Displays the reception status of the 4WD malfunction
signal received through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

Revision: April 2013

TM-96

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item selection
Monitored item

(Unit)

4WD OPERATION SIG

4WD-TCS SIGNAL

MAIN SIGNALS

(On/Off)

(On/Off)

ECU INPUT SIGNALS

A

Remarks

B

×

• Displays the reception status of the 4WD operation
signal received through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

C

×

• Displays the reception status of the engine torque
down request signal received through CAN communication.
• It is displayed although not equipped.

RANGE

×

Displays the gear position recognized by TCM.

M GEAR POS

×

Display the target gear of manual mode

G SEN SLOPE

(%)

Displays the gradient angle calculated from the G sensor
signal voltage.

ENGBRKLVL

(On/Off)

Displays the setting of “ENGINE BRAKE ADJ” in “Work
Support”.

PVIGN VOLT

(V)

×

E

F

Displays the backup voltage of TCM.
Displays the target gear ratio of the auxiliary gearbox calculated from processing of gear shift control.

TRGT AUX GR RATIO

TM

G SEN CALIBRATION

(YET/DONE)

Displays the status of “G SENSOR CALIBRATION” in
“Work Support”.

N IDLE STATUS

(On/Off)

Displays idle neutral status.

CVT-B

• Displays CVT fluid temperature count.
• This monitor item does not use.

CVT-A

• Displays CVT fluid temperature count.
• This monitor item does not use.

G

H

I

J

WORK SUPPORT
Item name

Description

ENGINE BRAKE ADJ.

Although there is no malfunction on the transaxle and the CVT system, if a customer
make a complaint like “I do not feel comfortable with automatic operation of the engine
brake on downhill”, the engine brake may be cancelled with “engine brake adjustment”.

CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN

Check the degradation level of the CVT fluid under severe conditions.

G SENSOR CALIBRATION

Compensate the G sensor.

ERASE CALIBRATION DATA

Erase the calibration data memorized by TCM.

ERASE LEARNING VALUE

Erase the learning value memorized by TCM.

ERASE MEMORY DATA

Perform “erasing of the calibration data” and “erasing of the learned value” at the same
time.

CLUTCH POINT LEARNING*

Allow learning of the clutch engagement point of the auxiliary gearbox for TCM.

K

L

M

*: “Clutch point learning” can be selected, but do not use it.

N

O

Engine brake adjustment
ENGINE BRAKE LEVEL
ON

: Turn ON the engine brake control.

OFF

: Turn OFF the engine brake control.

P

Check the degradation level of the CVT fluid.
CVTF degradation level data

Revision: April 2013

TM-97

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
210,000 or more

: Replacement of the CVT fluid is required.

Less than 210,000

: Replacement of the CVT fluid is not required.

Revision: April 2013

TM-98

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

A

TCM
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009019877

B

CONSULT DATA MONITOR STANDARD VALUE
• In CONSULT, electric shift timing or lock-up timing, i.e. operation timing of each solenoid valve, is displayed. C
Therefore, if there is an obvious difference between the shift timing estimated from a shift shock (or engine
speed variations) and that shown on the CONSULT, the mechanism parts (including the hydraulic circuit)
excluding the solenoids and sensors may be malfunctioning. In this case, check the mechanical parts followTM
ing the appropriate diagnosis procedure.
• Shift point (gear position) displayed on CONSULT slightly differs from shift pattern described in Service Manual. This is due to the following reasons.
— Actual shift pattern may vary slightly within specified tolerances.
E
— While shift pattern described in Service Manual indicates start of each shift, CONSULT shows gear position
at end of shift.
— The solenoid display (ON/OFF) on CONSULT is changed at the start of gear shifting. In contrast, the gear
F
position display is changed at the time when gear shifting calculated in the control unit is completed.
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
G
Monitor item

Condition

Value/Status (Approx.)

VSP SENSOR

While driving

Almost same as the speedometer display.

ESTM VSP SIG

While driving

Almost same as the speedometer display.

PRI SPEED SEN

In driving (lock-up ON)

A value obtained from dividing engine
speed by counter gear ratio

Auxiliary gearbox: 1GR

Approximately twice the “VHCL/S SE
(REV)”

Auxiliary gearbox: 2GR

Almost same as the “VHCL/S SE (REV)”

Auxiliary gearbox: 1GR

Approximately half of the “SEC REV SENSOR”

Auxiliary gearbox: 2GR

Almost same as the “SEC REV SENSOR”

ENG SPEED SIG

Engine running

Almost same reading as tachometer

LINE PRESSURE SEN

• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

0.88 – 0.92 V

CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C (68°F)

2.01 – 2.05 V

CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C (122°F)

1.45 – 1.50 V

CVT fluid: Approx. 80°C (176°F)

0.90 – 0.94 V

SEC REV SENSOR

VHCL/S SE (REV)

ATF TEMP SEN

Vehicle is level
Ignition switch: ON

VEHICLE SPEED

While driving

Almost same as the speedometer display.

INPUT REV

In driving (lock-up ON)

Almost same as the engine speed.

PRI SPEED

In driving (lock-up ON)

A value obtained from dividing engine
speed by counter gear ratio

K

2.5 V

N

10 – 16 V

Auxiliary gearbox: 1GR

Approximately twice the “OUTPUT REV”

Auxiliary gearbox: 2GR

Almost same as “OUTPUT REV”

Auxiliary gearbox: 1GR

Approximately half of “SEC SPEED”

Auxiliary gearbox: 2GR

Almost same as “SEC SPEED”

ENG SPEED

Engine running

Almost same reading as tachometer

SLIP REV

While driving

Engine speed − Input speed

Revision: April 2013

J

M

G SENSOR

OUTPUT REV

I

L

VIGN SEN

SEC SPEED

H

TM-99

2014 Note

O

P

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor item
TOTAL GEAR RATIO

PULLEY GEAR RATIO

AUX GEARBOX

Condition
Auxiliary gearbox: 1GR

Counter gear ratio ×Pulley ratio Auxiliary
gearbox gear ratio

Auxiliary gearbox: 2GR

Counter gear ratio ×Pulley ratio

In driving (forward)

2.20 − 0.55

In driving (reverse)

2.20

Vehicle started with selector lever in “L” position

1st

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

2nd

In gear shifting of auxiliary gearbox
Vehicle stopped
G SPEED

ACCEL POSI SEN 1

Value/Status (Approx.)

1st ⇔ 2nd
0.00 G

During acceleration

The value changes to the positive side
along with acceleration.

During deceleration

The value changes to the positive side
along with deceleration.

Accelerator pedal released

0.00 deg

Accelerator pedal fully depressed

80.00 deg

VENG TRQ

While driving

The value changes along with acceleration/
deceleration.

PRI TRQ

While driving

The value changes along with acceleration/
deceleration.

TRQ RTO

While driving

The value changes along with acceleration/
deceleration.

LINE PRESSURE

Selector lever: “P” position

FLUID TEMP

Ignition switch ON.

Displays the CVT fluid temperature.

DSR REV

While driving

It varies along with the driving condition.

TRGT GEAR RATIO

While driving

It varies along with the driving condition.

TGT PLLY GR RATIO

TRGT AUX GEARBOX

In driving (forward)

2.20 − 0.55

In driving (reverse)

2.20

Vehicle started with selector lever in “L” position

1st

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

2nd

In gear shifting of auxiliary gearbox

LU PRS

LINE PRS

TRGT PRI PRESSURE

Revision: April 2013

0.575 MPa

Display gear position after gear shifting

• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped.

−0.500 MPa

• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

0.450 MPa

• After engine warm up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

0.500 MPa

• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully

4.930 – 5.430 MPa

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.325 MPa

TM-100

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor item

Condition
• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

TRGT HC/RB PRESS

TRGT LB PRESSURE

ISOLT1

ISOLT2

PRI SOLENOID

HC/RB SOLENOID

L/B SOLENOID

SOLMON1

SOLMON2

PRI SOL MON

Revision: April 2013

Value/Status (Approx.)

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

0.400 MPa

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.325 MPa

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

B

C

TM
0.000 MPa

E

• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped.

0.000 A

• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

0.500 A

F

• After engine warm up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

0.800 – 0.900 A

• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully

0.350 – 0.400 A

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.850 – 0.900 A

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

1.000 A

G

H

I

J

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

0.800 – 0.850 A

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.200 – 0.250 A

K

L

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

0.000 A

• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped.

0.000 A

• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

0.500 A

M

N

O

• After engine warm up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

0.800 – 0.900 A

• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully

0.350 – 0.400 A

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.850 – 0.900 A

TM-101

A

0.000 MPa

P

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor item

Condition
• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

HC/RB SOL MON

L/B SOL MON

D POSITION SW

N POSITION SW

R POSITION SW

P POSITION SW

BRAKESW

L POSITION SW

IDLE SW

SPORT MODE SW

Value/Status (Approx.)
1.000 A

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more

0.800 – 0.850 A

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

0.200 – 0.250 A

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more
Selector lever: “D” position

0.000 A

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “N” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “R” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “P” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Brake pedal is depressed

On

Brake pedal is released

Off

Selector lever: “L” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Accelerator pedal is released

On

Accelerator pedal is fully depressed

Off

Press the overdrive control switch

On

Release the overdrive control switch

Off

STRDWNSW

Always

Off

STRUPSW

Always

Off

DOWNLVR

Always

Off

UPLVR

Always

Off

NONMMODE

Always

Off

MMODE

Always

Off

Selector lever: “L” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “D” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “N” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “R” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “P” position

On

INDLRNG

INDDRNG

INDNRNG

INDRRNG

INDPRNG

CVT LAMP

Revision: April 2013

Other than the above

Off

In overdrive OFF

On

Other than the above

Off

TM-102

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor item
SPORT MODE IND
MMODE IND

Condition

Value/Status (Approx.)

In overdrive OFF

On

Other than the above

Off

Always

Off

VDC ON

Always

Off

TCS ON

Always

Off

When ABS malfunction signal is received

On

Other than the above

Off

ABS is activated

On

Other than the above

Off

4WD FAIL SIGNAL

Always

Off

4WD OPERATION SIG

Always

Off

4WD-TCS SIGNAL

Always

Off

Selector lever: “P” and “N” positions

N/P

ABS FAIL SIGNAL

ABS ON

RANGE

M GEAR POS

Selector lever: “R” position

R

Selector lever: “D” position (OD OFF indicator
lamp OFF)

D

Selector lever: “D” position (OD OFF indicator
lamp ON)

S

Selector lever: “L” position

L

Always

1

Flat road

PVIGN VOLT

G SEN CALIBRATION

N IDLE STATUS

C

TM

E

F

G

H

Uphill gradient

The value changes to the positive side
along with uphill gradient. (Maximum
40.45%)

Downhill gradient

The value changes to the negative side
along with downhill gradient. (Minimum −
40.45%)

When the engine brake level of “ENGINE
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is ON

On

When the engine brake level of “ENGINE
BRAKE ADJ”. in “Work Support” is OFF

Off

Ignition switch: ON

Release the accelerator pedal after the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or more
When G sensor calibration is completed
When G sensor calibration is not completed

L

M
1.00

N
DONE
YET

When idle neutral control is operated

On

When idle neutral control is not operated

Off

—

—

CVT-A*

—

—

O

P

*: These monitor items do not use.

TERMINAL LAYOUT

TM-103

J

1.80

CVT-B*

Revision: April 2013

I

K

10 – 16 V

Vehicle started with selector lever in “L” position
TRGT AUX GR RATIO

B

0%

G SEN SLOPE

ENGBRKLVL

A

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

JSDIA2713ZZ

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARD
Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description

+

−

2
(R/B)

Ground

L range switch

Input

4
(W/B)

Ground

D range switch

Input

Signal

5
(L/B)

Ground

N range switch

Input

6
(O)

Ground

R range switch

Input

7
(Y)

Ground

P range switch

Input

11
(LG)

Ground

Sensor ground

Input

Ground

CVT fluid temperature sensor

12
(G/W)

Condition

Input/
Output

Output

Selector lever: “L” position
Other than the above
Selector lever: “D” position
Other than the above
Ignition
switch
ON

Selector lever: “N” position
Other than the above
Selector lever: “R” position
Other than the above
Selector lever: “P” position
Other than the above
Always

Ignition
switch
ON
Ignition
switch
ON

Value (Approx.)

10 − 16 V
0V
10 − 16 V
0V
10 − 16 V
0V
10 − 16 V
0V
10 − 16 V
0V
0V

CVT fluid: Approx. 20°C

2.01 – 2.05 V

CVT fluid: Approx. 50°C

1.45 – 1.50 V

CVT fluid: Approx. 80°C

0.90 – 0.94 V

14
(G/R)

Ground

15*
(V)

—

16
(L/R)

Ground

Secondary pressure sensor

Input

21
(R/W)

—

ROM ASSY
(CHIP SELECT)

—

—

—

22
(V)

—

ROM ASSY
(DATA I/O)

—

—

—

23
(P/L)

—

CAN-L

Input/
Output

—

—

G sensor

—

Input

When the vehicle stops on
a flat road

—

—
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

2.5 V

—
0.88 – 0.92 V

200 Hz

24
(BR)

Ground

Output speed sensor

Input

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

JSDIA1904GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-104

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description

+

−

Signal

Input/
Output

26
(O/W)

Ground

Sensor power supply

Output

Condition

Value (Approx.)

Ignition switch: ON

5.0 V

Ignition switch: OFF

0V

A

B

C
• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

30
(BR/B)

Ground

Line pressure solenoid valve

TM

JSDIA1897GB

Output

• After engine warming up
• Selector lever: “N” position
• Depress the accelerator pedal fully

E

F

G
JSDIA1898GB

31
(L/W)
33
(L/G)

—
—

ROM ASSY
(CLOCK)
CAN-H

—

—

—

Input/
Output

—

—

H

700 Hz

34
(W)

Ground

Secondary speed
sensor

Input

I

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

J

JSDIA1905GB

K

1,100 Hz

35
(LG/R)

Ground

Primary speed sensor

Input

L

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

M
JSDIA1906GB

N
In driving at “L” position

O
37
(BR/W)

Ground

High clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve

JSDIA1897GB

Output

P
Release the accelerator pedal after
the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or
more
JSDIA1899GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-105

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+

Description

−

Signal

Input/
Output

Condition

Value (Approx.)

• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or
more
38
(G)

Ground

Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve

JSDIA1900GB

Output

• Engine started
• Vehicle is stopped

JSDIA1901GB

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

39
(G/B)

Ground

Low brake solenoid
valve

JSDIA1902GB

Output
Release the accelerator pedal after
the following conditions are satisfied
• Selector lever: “D” position
• Accelerator pedal position: 1/8 or
less
• Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (31 MPH) or
more

JSDIA1903GB

40
(Y/B)

Ground

Primary pressure
solenoid valve

Output

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

JSDIA1897GB

41
(B)

Ground

Ground

Output

Always

0V

42
(B)

Ground

Ground

Output

Always

0V

45
(LG)

Ground

Battery power supply (memory backup)

Input

Always

10 − 16 V

46
(LG)

Ground

Battery power supply (memory backup)

Input

Always

10 − 16 V

47
(R/W)

Ground

Ignition power supply

Input

Revision: April 2013

Ignition switch: ON

10 − 16 V

Ignition switch: OFF

0V

TM-106

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)

Description

+

−

Signal

Input/
Output

48
(R)

Ground

Ignition power supply

Input

Condition

Value (Approx.)

Ignition switch: ON

10 − 16 V

Ignition switch: OFF

0V

A

B

*: This harness is not used.

C

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009019878

TCM has a fail-safe mode. The mode functions so that operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of TM
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
If the vehicle shows following behaviors including “poor acceleration”, a malfunction of the applicable system
is detected by TCM and the vehicle may be in a fail-safe mode. At this time, check the DTC code and perform
E
inspection and repair according to the malfunction diagnosis procedures.

Fail-safe function
DTC

Vehicle behavior

P062F

Not changed from normal driving

P0705

• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not displayed.
• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

• Shift position indicator on combination meter is not displayed.
• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P0706

P0711

P0712

P0713

P0715

F

Conditions of vehicle
—

G

H

I

J

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

Acceleration is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. ≥
10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: −35°C (−
31°F) ≤Temp. < 10°C (50°F)

• Selector shock is large
• Start is slow

Engine coolant temperature when engine start: Temp. < −
35°C (−31°F)

•
•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

Revision: April 2013

—

TM-107

2014 Note

K

L

M

N

O

P

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC

Vehicle behavior

Conditions of vehicle

P0720

•
•
•
•

P0740

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0743

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0744

Lock-up is not performed

—

P0746

•
•
•
•
•

—

P0846

• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow

—

P0847

Acceleration is slow

—

P0848

• Start is slow
• Acceleration is slow

—

P0863

Not changed from normal driving

—

P0890

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0962

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0963

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0965

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0966

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0967

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

P0998

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P0999

P099B

P099C

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

Wire disconnection

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

Voltage shorting

Start is slow

—

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

Wire disconnection

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

Voltage shorting

P1586

Idle neutral control is not performed

—

P1588

Idle neutral control is not performed

—

Revision: April 2013

TM-108

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC

P2765

Vehicle behavior
•
•
•
•
•

Conditions of vehicle

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Vehicle speed is not increased
Lock-up is not performed

A

—

B

P2857

• Start is slow
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P2858

• Vehicle speed is not increased
• Lock-up is not performed

—

P2859

Vehicle speed is not increased

—

P285A

Start is slow

—

U0073

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

U0100

•
•
•
•

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

—

U0140

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0141

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0155

Not changed from normal driving

—

U0300

•
•
•
•

—

C

Selector shock is large
Start is slow
Acceleration is slow
Lock-up is not performed

TM

E

F

G

H

I

U1000

Not changed from normal driving

—

U1114

Not changed from normal driving

—

U1117

Not changed from normal driving

—

Protection Control

J
INFOID:0000000009019879

The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.

CONTROL FOR WHEEL SPIN
Control

When a wheel spin is detected, the engine output and gear ratio are limited and the line pressure is increased.
At the 1GR, the clutch pressure is increased.

Vehicle behavior in
control

If the accelerator is kept depressing during wheel spin, the engine revolution and vehicle speed are limited to
a certain degree. From the 1GR, upshift to a certain gear ratio is only allowed.

Normal return condition

Wheel spin convergence returns the control to the normal control.

CONTROL WHEN FLUID TEMPERATURE IS HIGH
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the gear shift permission maximum revolution and the maximum
torque are reduced than usual to prevent increase of the oil temperature.

Vehicle behavior in
control

Power performance may be lowered, compared to normal control.

Normal return condition

The control returns to the normal control when CVT fluid temperature is lowered.

TORQUE IS REDUCED WHEN DRIVING WITH THE REVERSE GEAR

TM-109

L

M

N

O

Control

Revision: April 2013

K

2014 Note

P

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Control

Engine output is controlled according to a vehicle speed while reversing the vehicle.

Vehicle behavior in
control

Power performance may be lowered while reversing the vehicle.

Normal return condition

Torque returns to normal by positioning the selector lever in a range other than “R” position.

REVERSE PROHIBIT CONTROL
Control

The reverse brake is controlled to avoid becoming engaged when the selector lever is set in “R” position while
driving in forward direction at more than the specified speed.

Vehicle behavior in
control

If the selector lever is put at “R” position when driving with the forward gear, the gear becomes neutral, not
reverse.

Normal return condition

The control returns to normal control when the vehicle is driven at low speeds. (The reverse brake becomes
engaged.)

DTC Inspection Priority Chart

INFOID:0000000009019880

If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the DTC check priority list below.
Priority

1

2

3

Revision: April 2013

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)

Reference

P0863 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

TM-177

U0073 COMM BUS A OFF

TM-133

U0100 LOST COMM (ECM A)

TM-134

U0140 LOST COMM (BCM)

TM-135

U0141 LOST COMM (BCM A)

TM-136

U0155 LOST COMM (IPC)

TM-137

U0300 CAN COMM DATA

TM-138

U1000 CAN COMM CIRC

TM-139

U1117 LOST COMM (ABS)

TM-140

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER

TM-163

P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER

TM-165

P0962 PC SOLENOID A

TM-180

P0963 PC SOLENOID A

TM-182

P0966 PC SOLENOID B

TM-185

P0967 PC SOLENOID B

TM-187

P0998 SHIFT SOLENOID F

TM-189

P0999 SHIFT SOLENOID F

TM-191

P099B SHIFT SOLENOID G

TM-193

P099C SHIFT SOLENOID G

TM-195

P0890 TCM

TM-178

TM-110

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Priority

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)

4

5

6

7

Reference

P062F EEPROM

TM-141

P0705 T/M RANGE SENSOR A

TM-142

P0706 T/M RANGE SENSOR A

TM-148

P0711 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

TM-151

P0712 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

TM-153

P0713 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

TM-155

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A

TM-157

P0847 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

TM-173

P0848 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

TM-175

P1586 G SENSOR

TM-197

P1588 G SENSOR

TM-200

P2765 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR

TM-202

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR

TM-160

P0746 PC SOLENOID A

TM-169

P2857 CLUTCH B PRESSURE

TM-205

P2858 CLUTCH A PRESSURE

TM-206

P2859 CLUTCH A PRESSURE

TM-207

P285A CLUTCH B PRESSURE

TM-209

P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER

TM-167

P0846 FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

TM-171

P0965 PC SOLENOID B

TM-184

DTC Index

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I
INFOID:0000000009019881

NOTE:
• If multiple malfunction codes are detected at the same time, check each code according to the “DTC check
priority list”. TM-110, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart».
• The ignition counter is displayed in “FFD”. Refer to TM-92, «CONSULT Function».
DTC*1, *2

Items
(CONSULT screen terms)

Trip

MIL

Reference

EEPROM

1

ON

TM-141

P0705

T/M RANGE SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-142

P0706

P0706

T/M RANGE SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-148

P0711

P0711

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-151

P0712

P0712

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-153

P0713

P0713

FLUID TEMP SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-155

P0715

P0715

INPUT SPEED SENSOR A

2

ON

TM-157

P0720

P0720

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR

2

ON

TM-160

P0740

P0740

TORQUE CONVERTER

2

ON

TM-163

P0743

P0743

TORQUE CONVERTER

2

ON

TM-165

P0744

P0744

TORQUE CONVERTER

2

ON

TM-167

P0746

P0746

PC SOLENOID A

2

ON

TM-169

P0846

P0846

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

2

ON

TM-171

P0847

P0847

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

2

ON

TM-173

P0848

P0848

FLUID PRESS SEN/SW B

2

ON

TM-175

GST

CONSULT
(TRANSMISSION)

P062F

P062F

P0705

Revision: April 2013

TM-111

2014 Note

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC*1, *2

Items
(CONSULT screen terms)

Trip

MIL

Reference

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)

1

ON

TM-177

P0890

TCM

1

ON

TM-178

P0962

P0962

PC SOLENOID A

2

ON

TM-180

P0963

P0963

PC SOLENOID A

2

ON

TM-182

P0965

P0965

PC SOLENOID B

2

ON

TM-184

P0966

P0966

PC SOLENOID B

2

ON

TM-185

P0967

P0967

PC SOLENOID B

2

ON

TM-187

P0998

P0998

SHIFT SOLENOID F

2

ON

TM-189

P0999

P0999

SHIFT SOLENOID F

2

ON

TM-191

P099B

P099B

SHIFT SOLENOID G

2

ON

TM-193

P099C

P099C

SHIFT SOLENOID G

2

ON

TM-195

—

P1586

G SENSOR

1

—

TM-197

—

P1588

G SENSOR

1

—

TM-200

P2765

P2765

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR

2

ON

TM-202

P2857

P2857

CLUTCH A PRESSURE

2

ON

TM-205

P2858

P2858

CLUTCH B PRESSURE

2

ON

TM-206

P2859

P2859

CLUTCH A PRESSURE

2

ON

TM-207

P285A

P285A

CLUTCH B PRESSURE

2

ON

TM-209

U0073

U0073

COMM BUS A OFF

1

ON

TM-133

U0100

U0100

LOST COMM (ECM A)

1

ON

TM-134

—

U0140

LOST COMM (BCM)

1

—

TM-135

—

U0141

LOST COMM (BCM A)

1

—

TM-136

—

U0155

LOST COMM (IPC)

1

—

TM-137

—

U0300

CAN COMM DATA

1

—

TM-138

—

U1000

CAN COMM CIRC

1

—

TM-139

—

U1117

LOST COMM (ABS)

1

—

TM-140

GST

CONSULT
(TRANSMISSION)

P0863

P0863

P0890

*1: These numbers are specified by SAE J2012/ISO 15031-6.
*2: The DTC number of the 1st trip is the same as the DTC number.

Revision: April 2013

TM-112

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009019882

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

ABDWA0678GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-113

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABDWA0679GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-114

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABDIA1055GB

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-115

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABDIA1056GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-116

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABDIA1057GB

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-117

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABDIA1058GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-118

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABDIA1059GB

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-119

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009019883

ABDWA0680GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-120

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O
ABDIA1060GB

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-121

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< WIRING DIAGRAM >

ABDIA1061GB

Revision: April 2013

TM-122

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION

A

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Flowchart of Trouble Diagnosis

INFOID:0000000009019884

NOTE:
“DTC” includes DTC at the 1st trip.

B

C

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Refer to TM-124, «Question sheet» and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in the TM
vehicle.
>> GO TO 2.

E

2.CHECK DTC
1.
2.
—

Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
Records the DTCs. (Print out using CONSULT and affix to the Work Order Sheet.)
Erase DTCs.
Check the relation between the cause found by DTC and the malfunction information from customer. TM219, «Symptom Table» can be used effectively.
3. Check the relevant information including STI, etc.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exist.>>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists but no DTC.>>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists.>>GO TO 5.

3.REPRODUCE MALFUCTION SYSTEM

Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer toTM-107, «Fail-safe».
Interview sheet can be used effectively when reproduce malfunction conditions. Refer to TM-124, «Question
sheet».
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs.
>> GO TO 5.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

4.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
Check if the behavior is fail safe or normal operation. Refer toTM-107, «Fail-safe».
Interview sheet can be used effectively when reproduce malfunction conditions.TM-124, «Question sheet».
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the customer occurs.

M

N

>> GO TO 6.

5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”

O

Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-110, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart» when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Follow GI-41, «Intermittent Incident» to check.

6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM”
Revision: April 2013

TM-123

2014 Note

P

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Use TM-219, «Symptom Table» from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 8.

7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
>> GO TO 8.

8.FINAL CHECK

Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 (DTC is reproduced.)>>GO TO 5.
YES-2 (Malfunction is reproduced.)>>GO TO 6.
NO
>> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.

Question sheet

INFOID:0000000009019885

DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions properly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, perception of a problem varies depending on individuals.
Ask the customer about his/her concerns carefully. It is important to
understand the phenomenon or status. To systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the question sheet referring to the
question points.
In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may
cause a DTC to be detected.
SEF907L

Worksheet Sample
Question sheet
Customer’s
name
Storage date
Symptom

MR/MS
Year

Month
day

Registration
number

Initial year
registration

Vehicle type

Chassis No.

Engine

Mileage

† Vehicle does not start. († R position
† Upshifting does not occur.

† D position

Year

Month
day

km
† L position

† M position)

† Downshifting does not occur.

† Lock-up malfunction
† Shift point is too high.
† Shift shock († N⇒D
† Slip († N⇒D
† Noise

† Shift point is too low.
† Lock-up

† Lock-up

† R, D, L and M position)

† R, D, L and M position)

† Vibration

When selector lever position is shifted, shift pattern does not change.
† Other
(

)

First occurrence

† Recently (as from month

Frequency of occurrence

† Always

Revision: April 2013

of year

)

† Under certain conditions

TM-124

† Sometimes (

time(s)/day)

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
Question sheet
Customer’s
name

MR/MS
Year

Storage date
Climate conditions

Month
day

Registration
number

Initial year
registration

Vehicle type

Chassis No.

Engine

Mileage

Year

Month
day

B
km

Irrelevant
Weather

† Clear

Temperature

† Hot

Relative humidity

† High

Transaxle condition

Road conditions
Operating condition, etc.

A

C
† Cloud
† Warm

† Rain
† Cool † Cold

† Moderate

† In cold-start
†Engine speed:

† Snow

† Others

† Temperature (Approx.

)
°C)

TM

† Low

† During warm-up (approx.
rpm

°C)

† After warm-up

E

† Urban area
† Suburb area
† Highway
† Mountainous road (uphill or downhill)
Irrelevant
† When engine starts
† During idling
† During driving
† During acceleration
† At constant speed driving
† During deceleration
† During cornering (RH curve or LH curve)

F

G

Other conditions

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-125

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM
Description

INFOID:0000000009019886

When replacing the TCM, perform the following work.
CHECK LOADING OF CALIBRATION DATA

• The TCM acquires calibration data (individual characteristic value) of each solenoid that is stored in the
ROM assembly (in the control valve). This enables the TCM to perform accurate control. After the TCM is
replaced, check that the TCM has correctly loaded the calibration data.
CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR

• TCM stores calibration data (inherent characteristic value) of G sensor to provide accurate control. Therefore, it is required to perform calibration of G sensor after the replacement of TCM.
CAUTION:
When replacing TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, replace transaxle assembly first and then
replace TCM.
If the TCM is replaced in advance, perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE
ASSEMBLY” after “G sensor calibration”.

Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019887

1.CHECK WORK CONTENTS
Replacing only the TCM>>GO TO 2.
Replacing the TCM after the transaxle assembly is replaced>>GO TO 2.
Replacing the transaxle assembly after the TCM is replaced>>GO TO 5.

2.LOADING OF CALIBRATION DATA
1.
2.
3.

Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check that “P” is displayed on shift position indicator on combination meter.
NOTE:
Displayed approximately 4 – 5 seconds after the selector lever is moved to the “P” position.
Does the shift position indicator display “P”?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

3.PERFORM G SENSOR CALIBRATION

Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».
>> WORK END

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
• Harness between the TCM and the ROM assembly inside the transaxle assembly is open or shorted.
• Disconnected, loose, bent, collapsed, or otherwise abnormal connector housing terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.PERFORM G SENSOR CALIBRATION

Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».
>> Perform “ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY” after “CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR”. Refer to TM-127, «Procedure».

Revision: April 2013

TM-126

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
Description

A

INFOID:0000000009019888

When replacing the transaxle, perform the following work.

B

ERASING THE CALIBRATION DATA

• The TCM acquires calibration data (individual characteristic value) of each solenoid that is stored in the
ROM assembly (in the control valve). This enables the TCM to perform accurate control. For this reason,
after the transaxle assembly is replaced, it is necessary to erase the calibration data that is stored in the
TCM and load new calibration data.

C

TM

ERASING THE LEARNED VALUE DATA

• TCM learns indicated pressure for appropriate control of the transaxle assembly and records the learned
values. For this reason, the leaned values stored in TCM must be erased after replacing a transaxle assembly.

E

ERASING CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA

• TCM records the degradation level of the CVT fluid calculated from the vehicle driving status. Therefore, if
the transaxle assembly is replaced, it is necessary to erase the CVT fluid degradation level data recorded by
TCM.

Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009019889

G

1.INITIALIZE TCM
With CONSULT
1. Set parking brake.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Select “ERASE MEMORY DATA”.
5. While maintaining the conditions below, touch “Start”.
Vehicle stop status
With engine stopped
Selector lever: “R” position
Accelerator pedal: Depressed
NOTE:
Select “Start” and complete within approximately 20 seconds.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for a minimum of 10 seconds then perform the work again.

H

I

J

K

L

2.CHECK AFTER TCM IS INITIALIZED

With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF with the selector lever in “R” position and wait for 10 seconds or more.
Turn ignition switch ON with the selector lever in “R” position.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
3. Select “Special function” in “TRANSMISSION”.
4. Select “CALIB DATA”.
5. Check that indicated value of “CALIB DATA” is equal to the value shown in the following table.
1.
2.

Item name

Display value

Item name

00

MAP NO HC/RB

00

UNIT CLB ID2

00

MAP NO L/B

00

UNIT CLB ID3

00

OFFSET2 LU

0

UNIT CLB ID4

00

OFFSET2 PL

0

UNIT CLB ID5

00

OFFSET2 PRI

0

UNIT CLB ID6

00

OFFSET2 H/R

0

TM-127

N

O

Display value

UNIT CLB ID1

Revision: April 2013

M

P

2014 Note

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >
Item name

Display value

Item name

Display value

UNIT CLB ID7

00

OFFSET2 L/B

0

UNIT CLB ID8

00

INIT OFFSET H/R A

0

UNIT CLB ID9

00

INIT OFFSET H/R B

0

UNIT CLB ID10

00

INIT OFFSET H/R C

0

UNIT CLB ID11

00

INIT OFFSET H/R D

0

GAIN LU

256

INIT OFFSET H/R E

0

GAIN PL

256

INIT OFFSET H/R F

0

GAIN PRI

256

INIT OFSET LB A

0

GAIN HC/RB

256

INIT OFSET LB B

0

GAIN L/B

256

INIT OFSET LB C

0

0

INIT OFSET LB D

0

OFFSET LU
OFFSET PL

0

INIT OFSET LB E

0

OFFSET PRI

0

INIT OFSET LB F

0

OFFSET HC/RB

0

LB INITIALIZE LEARN

−1

OFFSET L/B

0

HC INITIALIZE LEARN

−1

MAP NO LU

00

LB INITIALIZE TEMP

FF

MAP NO PL

00

LB INITIALIZE TEMP

FF

MAP NO PRI

00

Is the indicated value of “CALIB DATA” equal to the value shown in the table?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 1.

3.LOADING OF CALIBRATION DATA
1.
2.

Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
Check that “P” is displayed on shift position indicator on combination meter.
NOTE:
Displayed approximately 4 – 5 seconds after the selector lever is moved to the “P” position.
Does shift position indicator display “P”?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Harness between the TCM and the ROM assembly inside the transaxle assembly is open or shorted.
• Disconnected, loose, bent, collapsed, or otherwise abnormal connector housing terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.

5.ERASE THE CVT FLUID DEGRADATION LEVEL DATA
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Select “WORK SUPPORT” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”.
Touch “Clear”.
>> WORK END

Revision: April 2013

TM-128

2014 Note

CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

CALIBRATION OF G SENSOR

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009019890

TCM stores calibration data (inherent characteristic value) of G sensor to provide accurate control. Therefore,
it is required to perform calibration of G sensor after the following work is performed.
• Removal/installation or replacement of G sensor
• Replacement of TCM

Procedure

C

INFOID:0000000009019891

1.PREPARATION BEFORE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

B

TM

Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Adjust air pressure of all tires to the specified pressure. WT-9, «Tire Air Pressure».
E

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM CALIBRATION

F

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start engine.
2. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “G SENSOR CALIBRATION”.
4. Touch “Start”.
CAUTION:
Never swing the vehicle during “G sensor calibration”.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Perform steps 1 and 2 again.

G

H

I

3.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

J

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait for 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “P1586” or “P1588” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-111, «DTC Index».
NO
>> Calibration end

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-129

2014 Note

STALL TEST
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

STALL TEST
Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019894

INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Check the engine oil level. Replenish if necessary.
Check for leak of the CVT fluid. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
Be sure to apply the parking brake and block the tires.
Start the engine, depress the brake pedal and put the selector lever to the D position.
While depressing the brake pedal, depress the accelerator pedal gradually.
Read the stall speed quickly. Then, release your foot from the accelerator pedal quickly.
CAUTION:
Do not depress the accelerator pedal for 5 seconds or more during the test.
Stall speed

: Refer to TM-254, «Stall Speed».

8.
9.

Place the selector lever in the N position.
Cool the CVT fluid.
CAUTION:
Run the engine with the idle speed for at least 1 minute.
10. Put the selector lever to the R position and perform Step 6 to Step 9 again.

NARROWING-DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Selector lever position

Stall speed

Possible cause

D

R

H

O

• Low brake

O

H

• Reverse brake

L

L

• Engine
• Torque converter one way clutch

H

•
•
•
•

H

Line pressure is low.
Primary pulley
Secondary pulley
Steel belt

O: Within the stall speed standard value
H: Stall speed is higher than the standard value.
L: Stall speed is lower than the standard value.

Revision: April 2013

TM-130

2014 Note

LINE PRESSURE TEST
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

LINE PRESSURE TEST

A

Work Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019895

INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

B

Check the engine oil level. Replenish if necessary. Refer to LU-7, «Inspection».
Check for CVT fluid leaks. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».
Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the CVT fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to C
176°F).
Stop the vehicle, apply the parking brake and block the tires.
TM
Start the engine.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “LINE PRESSURE”.
E
Measure the line pressure at both idle and the stall speed.
CAUTION:
Keep brake pedal pressed all the way down during measurement.
F
Line pressure

: TM-255, «Line Pressure»
G

NARROWING-DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Judgment

Idle speed

Possible cause

Low for all positions
(“P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “L”)

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output.
For example:
• Oil pump wear
• Damage of chain and sprocket
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue
• Oil strainer ⇒ oil pump ⇒ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak
• Engine idle speed too low

Only low for a specific
position

Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.

High

Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment
function.
For example:
• Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction
• CVT fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in OFF state, filter clog, cut line)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

Line pressure does not
rise higher than the line
pressure for idle.

Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example:
• TCM malfunction
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in ON state)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

The pressure rises, but
does not enter the
standard position.

Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pressure adjustment function.
For example:
• Oil pump wear
• Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog)
• Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

Only low for a specific
position

Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after
the pressure is distributed by the manual valve.

Stall speed

Revision: April 2013

TM-131

2014 Note

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

CVT POSITION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< BASIC INSPECTION >

CVT POSITION
Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.

INFOID:0000000009020197

Turn ON the ignition switch with the shift selector in the «P» position.
Press the shift selector handle button with the brake pedal depressed, and confirm that the shift selector
can be moved from the «P» position. Also confirm that shift selector will not move from the «P» position
without depressing the brake pedal.
Move the shift selector and check for “excessive effort,” “sticking,” “noise” or “rattle”.
Confirm that shift selector stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all
the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the shift selector is in matches the position shown
by the transaxle body.
The method of operating the shift selector to individual positions
correctly should be as shown.
• (A): Press shift selector button to operate shift selector, while
depressing the brake pedal.
• (B): Press shift selector button to operate shift selector.
• (C): Shift selector can be operated without pressing shift
selector button.
When the shift selector handle button is pressed without applying forward/backward force to the shift selector at “P”, “R”, “N”
and “D” positions, there should be no “sticking” of the button.
WCIA0620E
Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when shift selector is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps do not illuminate when the shift selector is pushed toward the “R” position side when shift selector is in the “P” or “N”
position.
Check that the engine can be started only when the shift selector is in the “P” and “N” positions.
Check that the transaxle is locked when the shift selector is in the «P» position.

Adjustment
1.
2.
3.

INFOID:0000000009020198

Move the shift selector to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Rotate the wheels at least a quarter turn and be certain the transaxle is locked in the «P» position.
Remove nut (A) and set manual lever (B) to the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Do not apply force to the manual lever.
Tighten nuts to the specified torque. Refer to TM-230, «Exploded
View».
CAUTION:
Do not move the manual lever when tightening.

JSDIA1875ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-132

2014 Note

U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

A

U0073 COMMUNICATION BUS A OFF
Description

INFOID:0000000009019896

B

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links C
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TM

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019897

E

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

U0073

Control Module Communication Bus A Off

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

TCM communication blockage lasts for 2 secHarness or connector
onds or more when turning ON the ignition
(CAN communication line is error)
switch. (Communication not established.)

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

I

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0073” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-133, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

J

K
INFOID:0000000009019898

L

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-133

2014 Note

U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0100 LOST COMMUNICATION (ECM A)
Description

INFOID:0000000009019899

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019900

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

U0100

Trouble diagnosis name
Lost Communication With
ECM/PCM A

DTC detection condition
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable to receive the CAN communications
signal from ECM continuously for 2 seconds or more.

Possible causes
• ECM
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0100” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-134, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019901

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

Revision: April 2013

TM-134

2014 Note

U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0140 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009019902

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019903

B

C

TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

U0140

Trouble diagnosis name
Lost Communication With
Body Control Module

DTC detection condition
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
to receive the CAN communications signal
from BCM continuously for 2 seconds or more.

Possible causes
• BCM
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

E

F

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

I

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0140” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-135, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

H

J

K
INFOID:0000000009019904

L

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-135

2014 Note

U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0141 LOST COMMUNICATION (BCM A)
Description

INFOID:0000000009019905

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019906

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

U0141

Trouble diagnosis name
Lost Communication With
Body Control Module A

DTC detection condition
When the ignition switch is turned ON, TCM
continues no reception of the CAN communication signal from IPDM E/R for 2 seconds or
more.

Possible causes
• IPDM E/R
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0141” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-133, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019907

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

Revision: April 2013

TM-136

2014 Note

U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0155 LOST COMMUNICATION (IPC)

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009019908

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019909

B

C

TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

U0155

Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
to receive the CAN communications signal
from the combination meter continuously for 2
seconds or more.

Possible causes
• Combination meter
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

E

F

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

I

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0155” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-137, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

H

J

K
INFOID:0000000009019910

L

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».
M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-137

2014 Note

U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U0300 CAN COMMUNICATION DATA
Description

INFOID:0000000009019911

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019912

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

U0300

Internal Control Module Software Incompatibility

When the ignition switch is ON, the data
length transmitted from each control unit is
shorter than the specified length and the status continues for 2 seconds or more.

Possible causes

Control unit other than TCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U0300” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-138, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019913

1.CONTROL UNIT CHECK
Check the number of control units replaced before “U0300” is detected.
Is one control unit replaced?
YES >> The specification of the control unit replaced may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CONTROL UNIT CHECK

With CONSULT
1. Remove one of the control unit replaced.
2. Assemble the old control unit before replacement.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is “U0300”detected?
YES >> Turn OFF the ignition switch and check other control units in the same manner.
NO
>> The specification of the control unit removed may be incorrect. Check the part number and the
specification.

Revision: April 2013

TM-138

2014 Note

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009019914

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019915

B

C

TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000

Trouble diagnosis name
CAN Communication Line

DTC detection condition
When the ignition switch is ON, TCM cannot
send the CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or more.

Possible causes
Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

G

If another “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

I

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 5 seconds.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-139, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

J

K
INFOID:0000000009019916

L

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-139

2014 Note

U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

U1117 LOST COMMUNICATION (ABS)
Description

INFOID:0000000009019917

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019918

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

U1117

Trouble diagnosis name

Lost Communication With
ABS

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

When the ignition switch is ON, TCM is unable
to receive the CAN communications signal
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) continuously for 2 seconds or more.

• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
• Harness or connector
(CAN communication line is open or
shorted)

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “U1117” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-133, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019919

For the diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, «Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart».

Revision: April 2013

TM-140

2014 Note

P062F EEPROM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P062F EEPROM

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009019920

TCM compares the calculated value stored in the flash ROM with the value stored in TCM. If the calculated
value does not agree with the stored value, TCM judges this as a malfunction.

DTC Logic

B

INFOID:0000000009019921

C

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P062F

Trouble diagnosis name
Internal Control Module EEPROM Error

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

Flash ROM error is detected when turning ON
the ignition switch.

• TCM (flash ROM)
• Harness or connector
[TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted]

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

H

1. Start the engine.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “P062F” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-141, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009019922

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT

K

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-141

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019923

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

P0705

Transmission Range Sensor
A Circuit (PRNDL Input)

DTC detection condition
Two or more range signals simultaneously
stay ON continuously for 5 seconds under the
following diagnosis condition 1 and 2:
• Diagnosis condition 1 (continued for 5 seconds or more)
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Diagnosis condition 2 (continued for 2 seconds or more)
— Vehicle speed: Less than 3 km/h (2 MPH)
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.6/8 or less
— Idle switch: ON
— Stop lamp switch: ON

Possible causes

• Harness or connector
(Short circuit between transmission
range switch and TCM)
• Transmission range switch

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.

Start the engine.
Maintain the following conditions.
Accelerator pedal position

: 0.0/8

Brake pedal

: Depressed

Vehicle speed

: 0 km/h (0 MPH)

3.

Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “L”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for
10 seconds or more.)
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0705” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-142, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019924

1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “D POSITION SW”, “N POSITION SW”, “R POSITION SW”, “P POSITION SW” and “L POSITION
SW”.
4. Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “L” and check ON/OFF of each monitor item.

1.
2.
3.

Monitor item
D POSITION SW

Test condition

Condition

Selector lever: “D” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Revision: April 2013

TM-142

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Monitor item

Test condition

N POSITION SW

R POSITION SW

P POSITION SW

L POSITION SW

1.
2.
3.
4.

Condition

Selector lever: “N” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “R” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “P” position

On

Other than the above

Off

Selector lever: “L” position

On

Other than the above

Off

A

B

C

TM

Without CONSULT
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Shift the selector lever from “P” to “L” and check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and
ground.

E

F

+
−

TCM
Connector

Voltage

G

Terminal
Selector lever: “ L” position

2

Other than the above
Selector lever: “D” position

4

F44

Condition

5

6

7

Other than the above
Ground

Selector lever: “N” position
Other than the above
Selector lever: “R” position
Other than the above
Selector lever: “P” position
Other than the above

Battery voltage

H

Approx. 0 V
Battery voltage
Approx. 0 V

I

Battery voltage
Approx. 0 V

J

Battery voltage
Approx. 0 V
Battery voltage

K

Approx. 0 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO-1 [“D POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “D” position. (Or connector terminal 4
voltage.)]>>GO TO 2.
NO-2 [“N POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “N” position. (Or connector terminal 5
voltage.)]>>GO TO 4.
NO-3 [“R POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “R” position. (Or connector terminal 6
voltage.)]>>GO TO 6.
NO-4 [“P POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “P” position. (Or connector terminal 7
voltage.)]>>GO TO 8.
NO-5 [“L POSITION SW” is “ON” when selector is not in “L” position. (Or connector terminal 2
voltage.)]>>GO TO 10.

is at power
is at power

is at power

TM-143

N

is at power
O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.

Revision: April 2013

M

is at power

2.CHECK D POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

L

P

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
TCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal
2

F44

5

4

Not existed

6
7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK D POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transmission position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

4

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK N POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM

Connector

Continuity

Terminal
2

F44

4

5

Not existed

6
7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

5.CHECK N POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transmission position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

5

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: April 2013

TM-144

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

6.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

A

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM

Connector

B

Continuity

Terminal

C

2
F44

4

7

Not existed

5

TM

6

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

E

7.CHECK P POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)

F

1.
2.
3.

G

Disconnect transmission position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

7

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

H

Ground

0V

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

J

8.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART1)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.

L

TCM
Connector

K

Continuity

Terminal
2

F44

6

4
5

M
Not existed

N

7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

O

9.CHECK R POSITION SW CIRCUIT (PART 2)
1.
2.
3.

P

Disconnect transmission position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: April 2013

TM-145

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

6

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

10.CHECK L POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM

Connector

Continuity

Terminal
4

F44

5

2

Not existed

6
7

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

11.CHECK L POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (PART 2)
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transmission position switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

2

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

12.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-146, «Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)».
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)

INFOID:0000000009019925

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals.
Transmission range switch
Terminal
7 – 10

Revision: April 2013

Condition

Continuity

Manual lever: “P” and “N” positions
Other than the above

Existed
Not existed

TM-146

2014 Note

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Transmission range switch
Terminal
4–5

4–8

4–9

4–2

4–6

Condition

Continuity

Manual lever: “P” position

A

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “R” position

B

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “N position

C

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “D” position

Existed

Other than the above

TM

Not existed

Manual lever: “L” position

Existed

Other than the above

E

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of transmission range switch. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-147

2014 Note

P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019926

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0706

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Transmission Range Sensor
A Circuit Range/Performance

All range signals stay OFF continuously for 30
seconds under the following diagnosis condition 1 and 2:
• Diagnosis condition 1 (continued for 30 seconds or more)
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Diagnosis condition 2 (continued for 2 seconds or more)
— Vehicle speed: Less than 3 km/h (2 MPH)
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.6/8 or less
— Idle switch: ON
— Stop lamp switch: ON

Possible causes

• Harness or connector
(Open circuit between ignition switch
and transmission range switch/open
circuit between transmission range
switch and TCM)
• Transmission range switch
• Control cable

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Start the engine.
Maintain the following conditions.
Accelerator pedal position

: 0.0/8

Brake pedal

: Depressed

Vehicle speed

: 0 km/h (0 MPH)

3.

Shift the selector lever through entire positions from “P” to “L”. (Hold the selector lever at each position for
35 seconds or more.)
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0706” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-148, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019927

1.ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROL CABLE
Adjust control cable. Refer to TM-228, «Inspection».
>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “Erase”.
4. Perform «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE». Refer to TM-148, «DTC Logic».
Is “P0706” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

TM-148

2014 Note

P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

3.CHECK POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

A

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect transmission range switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between transmission range switch harness connector terminal and ground.

B

+
Transmission range switch
Connector

Terminal

F52

4

−

Voltage

Ground

10 – 16 V

C

TM

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 7.

E

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND TCM (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and TCM harness connector terminals.

Transmission range switch
Connector

F52

Terminal

TCM
Connector

Terminal

2

4

5

7

6

F44

Continuity

6

8

6

9

5

I

Existed

J

K

5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH AND TCM (PART 2)
Check continuity between transmission range switch harness connector terminals and ground.

Connector

Terminal

—

G

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Transmission range switch

F

L

Continuity

M

2
5
F52

6

Ground

N

Not existed

8
9

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

P

6.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Check transmission range switch. Refer to TM-150, «Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: April 2013

TM-149

2014 Note

P0706 TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

7.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and transmission range switch.
IPDM E/R

Transmission range switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

21

F52

4

Continuity
Existed

Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —».
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 21 and transmission range switch
harness connector terminal 4.
• 10A fuse (No. 49, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)

INFOID:0000000009019928

1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
Check continuity between transmission range switch connector terminals.
Transmission range switch
Terminal
7 – 10

4–5

4–8

4–9

4–2

4–6

Condition

Continuity

Manual lever: “P” and “N” positions

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “P” position

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “R” position

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “N position

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “D” position

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Manual lever: “L” position

Existed

Other than the above

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of transmission range switch. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-150

2014 Note

P0711 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0711 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019929

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0711

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit Range/
Performance

Under the following diagnosis conditions, CVT
fluid temperature recognized by TCM does not
change for 10 minutes or more in a temperature range.
• Diagnosis condition
— Selector lever: “D” position
— Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
— Engine speed: 450 rpm or more
— Accelerator pedal position: 1.0/8 or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
— CVT fluid temperature: Less than 10°C
NOTE:
Every time the CVT fluid temperature increases, reset the detection time and start the diagnosis again.

Possible causes

C

TM

CVT fluid temperature sensor

E

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

I

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for a total of 10 minutes or more.
Selector lever

J

K

: “D” position

Accelerator pedal position

: 1.0/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

L

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0711” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-166, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

M

INFOID:0000000009019930

1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT unit connector.
Check CVT fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-152, «Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature
Sensor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-151

2014 Note

N

O

P

P0711 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor)

INFOID:0000000009019931

1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit

Condition

Terminal

12 – 18

Resistance
(Approx.)

CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°C)

6.5 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°C)

2.2 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°C)

0.87 kΩ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-152

2014 Note

P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019932

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0712

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit Low

Possible causes

The CVT fluid temperature identified by the
TCM is 180°C (356°F) or more continuously
• Harness or connector
for 5 seconds or more under the following di(CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
agnosis conditions:
shorted to ground)
• Diagnosis conditions
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
— Ignition switch: ON
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

C

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

F

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and wait for 10 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0712” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-153, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

H

I
INFOID:0000000009019933

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.

J

K

L

TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

12

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

N

2.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check CVT fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-153, «Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor)

INFOID:0000000009019934

1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.

Revision: April 2013

TM-153

2014 Note

O

P

P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT unit

Condition

Terminal

12 – 18

Resistance
(Approx.)

CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°C)

6.5 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°C)

2.2 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°C)

0.87 kΩ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-154

2014 Note

P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019935

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P0713

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

The CVT fluid temperature identified by the
TCM is −40°C (−40°F) or less continuously for
5 seconds or more under the following diagno- • Harness or connector
sis conditions:
(CVT fluid temperature sensor circuit is
• Diagnosis conditions
open or shorted to power supply)
— Ignition switch: ON
• CVT fluid temperature sensor
— Vehicle speed: More than 10 km/h (7 MPH)
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor A Circuit High

C

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
G

>> GO TO 2.

2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.

H

Start the engine.
Maintain the following condition for 10 seconds or more.
Vehicle speed

I

: 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more

3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0713” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-153, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

J

K

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019936

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 1)

L

1.
2.
3.

M

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and CVT unit harness connector terminals.
TCM
Connector
F44

CVT unit
Terminal
12
11

Connector
F46

Continuity

Terminal
12

N

Existed

18

O

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

P

2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 2)
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: April 2013

TM-155

2014 Note

P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

12

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

3.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check CVT fluid temperature sensor. Refer to TM-156, «Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (CVT Fluid Temperature Sensor)

INFOID:0000000009019937

1.CHECK CVT FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminals.
CVT unit

Condition

Terminal

12 – 18

Resistance
(Approx.)

CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°C)

6.5 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°C)

2.2 kΩ

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°C)

0.87 kΩ

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of CVT fluid temperature sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-156

2014 Note

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019938

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition
The primary speed sensor value is less than
150 rpm continuously for 5 seconds or more
under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Secondary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A
Circuit

P0715

The primary speed sensor value is 240 rpm or
less continuously for 500 msec or more under
the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— 10-msec-ago primary pulley speed: 1,000
rpm or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

C

• Harness or connector
(Primary speed sensor circuit is open
or shorted)
• Primary speed sensor

TM

E

F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

G

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

H

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
I

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

J

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “L” POSITION

Vehicle speed

: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

K

L

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0715” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-157, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

M

INFOID:0000000009019939

N

1.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect primary speed sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.

P

+
Primary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F50

3

−

Voltage

Ground

10 – 16 V

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-157

2014 Note

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

2.CHECK PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Primary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F50

1

—

Continuity

Ground

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Primary speed sensor

TCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F50

2

F44

35

Continuity
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)

Check continuity between primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Primary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F50

2

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

5.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect all of disconnected connectors.
Lift the vehicle.
Start the engine.
Check frequency of primary speed sensor.
+
−

TCM
Connector

Condition

Frequency
(Approx.)

Terminal
1,100 Hz

F44

35

Ground

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

JSDIA1906GB

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-158

2014 Note

P0715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace primary speed sensor. TM-240, «Removal and Installation».

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and primary speed sensor harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R

Primary speed sensor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

21

F50

3

B

C
Continuity
Existed

TM

Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

E

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —».
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 21 and primary speed sensor harness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.49, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-159

2014 Note

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019940

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

P0720

Output Speed Sensor Circuit

DTC detection condition
The output speed sensor value is less than
150 rpm continuously for 10 seconds or more
under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: “D”, “L” or “R” position
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— When the “D” position switch, “L” position
switch or “R” position switch is ON, the output speed has not experienced 250 rpm or
more.
— After shifting the selector lever, the input
speed has experienced less than 300 rpm.
— Secondary pulley speed: 1,500 rpm or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

• Harness or connector
(Output speed sensor circuit is open or
shorted)
• Output speed sensor

The output speed sensor value is 90 rpm or
less continuously for 500 msec or more under
the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— 10-msec-ago output speed: 730 rpm or
more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

Vehicle speed

: 55 km/h (34 MPH) or more

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0720” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-160, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019941

1.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect output speed sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.

Revision: April 2013

TM-160

2014 Note

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

A

+
−

Voltage

Ground

10 – 16 V

Output speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F41

3

B

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

C

2.CHECK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT

TM

Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Output speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F41

1

—

Continuity

Ground

Existed

E

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)

G

1.
2.
3.

H

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector
terminal.
Output speed sensor

I

TCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F41

2

F44

24

Continuity
Existed

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

K

Check continuity between output speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.

L

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)
Output speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F41

2

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

N

5.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS
1.
2.
3.
4.

O

Connect all of disconnected connectors.
Lift the vehicle.
Start the engine.
Check frequency of output speed sensor.

Revision: April 2013

P

TM-161

2014 Note

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
+
−

TCM
Connector

Condition

Frequency
(Approx.)

Terminal
200 Hz

F44

24

Ground

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

JSDIA1904GB

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace output speed sensor. Refer to TM-242, «Removal and Installation».

6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and output speed sensor harness connector terminal.
IPDM E/R

Output speed sensor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

21

F41

3

Continuity
Existed

Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —».
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 21 and output speed sensor harness
connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.49, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-162

2014 Note

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019942

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P0740

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit/Open

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

The TCM torque converter clutch solenoid
valve current monitor reading is 200 mA or
less continuously for 5 seconds or more under
• Harness or connector
the following diagnosis conditions:
(Torque converter clutch solenoid
• Diagnosis conditions
valve circuit is open or shorted to pow- Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
er supply)
more
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid valve
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

TM

E

F

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1)

G

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2)

I

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “FLUID TEMP”.
4. Confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is in the following range.
FLUID TEMP

J

K

: 10°C (50°F) or more

With GST
Start the engine.
Set the CVT fluid to 10°C (50°F) or more.
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes.
Is the CVT fluid 10°C (50°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> 1. Warm the transaxle.
2. GO TO 3.

1.
2.

3.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.

M

N

O

Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.

P

Selector lever

: “D” position

Vehicle speed

: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0740” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-164, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

L

TM-163

2014 Note

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019943

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM

CVT unit

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

38

F46

8

Continuity
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-164, «Component Inspection (Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019944

1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

8

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

6.1 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.9 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

7.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-164

2014 Note

P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019945

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P0743

Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

The TCM torque converter clutch solenoid
valve current monitor reading is 200 mA or
less continuously for 480 msec or more under
• Harness or connector
the following diagnosis conditions:
(Torque converter clutch solenoid
• Diagnosis conditions
valve circuit is shorted to ground)
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
more
— GND short circuit diagnosis occurs in the
solenoid valve drive circuit.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

C

TM

E

F

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 1)

G

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

>> GO TO 2.

2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION (PART 2)

I

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “FLUID TEMP”.
4. Confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is in the following range.
FLUID TEMP

J

K

: 10°C (50°F) or more

With GST
Start the engine.
Set the CVT fluid to 10°C (58°F) or more.
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes.
Is the CVT fluid 10°C (58°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> 1. Warm the transaxle.
2. GO TO 3.

1.
2.

3.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.

M

N

O

Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

P

Selector lever

: “D” position

Vehicle speed

: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0743” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-166, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: April 2013

L

TM-165

2014 Note

P0743 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019946

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM

Connector

Terminal

F44

38

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-166, «Component Inspection (Torque Converter
Clutch Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019947

1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

8

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

6.1 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.9 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

7.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-166

2014 Note

P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019948

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P0744

DTC detection condition

Torque converter clutch circuit
intermittent

Possible causes

The torque converter slip speed is at or above
a set value (40 rpm + (Vehicle speed / 2) continuously for 30 seconds or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: “D” position
• Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
— Accelerator pedal position: 1.0/8 or more
• Control valve assembly
— Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
• Torque converter
— Engine speed: 450 rpm or more
— CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F) ≤ CVT
fluid temperature ≤ 180°C (356°F)
— Lockup command is being given (except for
slip lockup).
— LU PRS: More than 0.2 MPa
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

C

TM

E

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

H

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

I

1.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION 1

>> GO TO 2.

J

2.PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION 2
1.
2.
3.
4.

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “FLUID TEMP”.
Confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is in the range below.
FLUID TEMP

K

L

: 20°C (68°F) or more

With GST
Start the engine.
Set the CVT fluid to 20°C (68°F) or more.
NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), the CVT fluid usually increases to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F) with driving in an urban area for approximately 10 minutes.
Is the CVT fluid 20°C (68°F) or more?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> 1. Warm the transaxle.
2. GO TO 3.

1.
2.

3.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.

N

O

P

Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 40 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

Accelerator pedal position

: 1.0/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

Revision: April 2013

M

TM-167

2014 Note

P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0744” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-168, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019949

1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to TM-131, «Work Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction items.

2.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT unit connector.
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to TM-168, «Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction items.

3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction items.

Component Inspection (Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019950

1.CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

8

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

6.1 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.9 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

7.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly.
Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-168

2014 Note

P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019951

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0746

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Pressure Control Solenoid A
Performance/Stuck Off

The detecting condition A or detection condition B is detected twice or more (1 second or
more later after detection of the first) in the
same DC under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— After the ignition switch is ON, 500 msec or
more have passed.
— Selector lever: Other than “P” and “N” positions
— Idle is not being detected.
— Engine speed: 600 rpm or more
— Primary pulley speed: 500 rpm or more
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— Acceleration/deceleration speed: −0.05 G
or more
— The primary pulley speed experienced 306
rpm or more and the secondary pulley
speed experienced 230 rpm or more at
least once.
— The output speed is 107 rpm or less or the
secondary pulley speed exceeds 61 rpm.
• Detection condition A
— Status with the shifting ratio of the primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley ratio exceeding 2.55 is 200 msec or more continuously.
• Detection condition B
— Status with the shifting ratio of the primary
pulley speed/secondary pulley ratio exceeding 3.35 is 100 msec or more continuously.

Possible causes

C

TM

E

F

• Line pressure solenoid valve
• Control valve assembly

G

H

I

J

K

NOTE:
DC stands for «DRIVING CYCLE» and indicates a series of driving cycle of «Ignition switch OFF → ON → driving → OFF».

L

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

M

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

N

O

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

P

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.1/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

Revision: April 2013

TM-169

2014 Note

P0746 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0746”detected?
YES >> Go to TM-170, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019952

1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT unit connector.
Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-170, «Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve)»
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test. Refer to TM-131, «Work Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019953

1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

1

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-170

2014 Note

P0846 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0846 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019954

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0846

B

Trouble diagnosis name

Transmission Fluid Pressure
Sensor/Switch B Circuit
Range/Performance

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

The detection conditions continuously for 5
seconds or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: “D” position
— The primary pulley speed experienced 306
rpm or more and the secondary pulley
speed experienced 230 rpm or more at
least once.
— Wheel spin is not being detected.
— The rate of change in pulley ratio: Between
−0.09 and +0.09 inclusive
• Secondary pressure sensor
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
• Control valve assembly
more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid valve
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Detection conditions
— After the value of “Actual secondary pressure − Target secondary pressure” exceeds
0.675 MPa:
• The rate of change in vehicle speed [km/h
(MPH)]: Between −49 (−30) and +49 (+30)
inclusive
• The rate of change in accelerator pedal angle: Between −1.3/8 and +1.3/8 inclusive

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

K

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

L

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

M

1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Shift the selector lever to “D” position.
Drive the vehicle at a constant velocity of 40 km/h (25 MPH) at lease for 10 seconds.
CAUTION:
At the same time, the accelerator pedal angle must be maintained constant.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0846”detected?
YES >> Go to TM-171, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

N

O

P
INFOID:0000000009019955

1.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Start the engine.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminal and ground.

Revision: April 2013

TM-171

2014 Note

P0846 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
+
−

TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

16

Ground

Condition

• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

Voltage

0.88 – 0.92 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> There is a malfunction of secondary pressure sensor value. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-172

2014 Note

P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019956

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

Transmission Fluid Pressure
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low

P0847

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

The secondary pressure sensor voltage is
0.09 V or less continuously for 5 seconds or
• Harness or connector
more under the following diagnosis condi(Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
tions:
open or shorted to ground)
• Diagnosis conditions
• Secondary pressure sensor
— CVT fluid temperature: −20°C (−4°F) or
• Control valve assembly
more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

C

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
G

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

H

With CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
2. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Select “FLUID TEMP”.
4. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
FLUID TEMP

I

J

: −19°C (−2.2°F) or more

5.

Check the first trip DTC.
With GST
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 10 seconds.
CAUTION:
When the ambient temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or less and the engine is cold, warm up the engine
for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0847”detected?
YES >> Go to TM-173, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

Connector

CVT unit
Terminal

Connector

11
F44

16

Terminal

F46

14

Existed

22

Is the inspection result normal?

TM-173

O

P

Continuity

18

26

Revision: April 2013

M

N

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and CVT unit harness connector terminals.
TCM

L

INFOID:0000000009019957

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

K

2014 Note

P0847 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal
16

F44

26

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS

1.
2.
3.

Connect all connectors removed.
Start the engine.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
−

TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

16

Ground

Condition

• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

Voltage

0.88 – 0.92 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> There is malfunction of secondary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-174

2014 Note

P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019958

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P0848

DTC detection condition

Transmission Fluid Pressure
Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low

Possible causes

The secondary pressure sensor voltage is 4.7
V or more continuously for 5 seconds or more
• Harness or connector
under the following diagnosis conditions:
(Secondary pressure sensor circuit is
• Diagnosis conditions
shorted to power supply)
— CVT fluid temperature: −20°C (−4°F) or
• Secondary pressure sensor
more
— Secondary pressure target value: 5.7 MPa • Control valve assembly
or less
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

C

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, the ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

H

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “FLUID TEMP”.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.

I

J

: −19°C (−2.2°F) or more

FLUID TEMP

5.

Check the first trip DTC.
With GST
1. Start the engine and wait for at least 10 seconds.
CAUTION:
When the ambient temperature is −20°C (−4°F) or less and the engine is cold, warm up the engine
for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0848”detected?
YES >> Go to TM-175, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019959

K

L

M

N

1.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

O

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between CVT unit harness connector terminal and ground.

P

+
−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5.0 V

CVT unit
Connector

Terminal

F46

22

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-175

2014 Note

P0848 TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SEN/SW B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK SECONDARY PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM
Connector

Continuity

Terminal

F46

22

Other than 22

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS

1.
2.
3.

Connect all connectors removed.
Start the engine.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
+
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F46

22

−

Condition

Voltage

Ground

• Selector lever: “N” position
• At idle

0.88 – 0.92 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> There is a malfunction of secondary pressure sensor. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-176

2014 Note

P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0863 TCM COMMUNICATION

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019960

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
P0863

B

Trouble diagnosis name
TCM Communication Circuit

DTC detection condition
An error is detected at the initial CAN diagnosis of TCM.

Possible causes

C

TCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

TM

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

E

F

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “P0863” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-177, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

G

H
INFOID:0000000009019961

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDNT

I

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-177

2014 Note

P0890 TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0890 TCM
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019962

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0890

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

Transmission control module
power relay sense circuit low

The battery voltage supplied to the TCM is
less than 8.4 V continuously for 200 msec or
more under the following diagnosis condition:
• Diagnosis condition
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

• Harness or connector
(TCM power supply (back-up) circuit is
open or shorted.)
• TCM

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the DTC.
Is “P0890” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-178, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019963

1.CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY (BACK-UP) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
TCM
Connector
F44

−

Voltage

Ground

10 – 16 V

Terminal
45
46

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TCM. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connectors terminals 45,
and 46.
• 10A fuse (No.25, fuse and fusible link block). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-178

2014 Note

P0890 TCM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-179

2014 Note

P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019964

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0962

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

Pressure Control Solenoid A
Control Circuit Low

The line pressure solenoid valve current is
200 mA or less continuously for 200 msec or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid output current: 750 mA or more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid drive
circuit is satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

• Harness or connector
(Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
shorted to ground)
• Line pressure solenoid valve

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0962” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-180, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019965

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

30

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-180, «Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019966

1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
Revision: April 2013

TM-180

2014 Note

P0962 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT unit
Terminal

1

—

Ground

A

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

B

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».
TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-181

2014 Note

P0963 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0963 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019967

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0963

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

Pressure Control Solenoid A
Control Circuit High

The line pressure solenoid valve current is
200 mA or less continuously for 200 msec or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid output current: 750 mA or more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid drive
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

• Harness or connector
(Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted to power supply)
• Line pressure solenoid valve

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0963” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-182, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019968

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM

CVT unit

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

30

F46

1

Continuity
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Check line pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-182, «Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Line Pressure Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019969

1.CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
Revision: April 2013

TM-182

2014 Note

P0963 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT unit
Terminal

1

—

Ground

A

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

B

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of line pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM250, «Removal and Installation».
TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-183

2014 Note

P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0965 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019970

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

P0965

DTC detection condition
The detection conditions continuously for 5
seconds or more under the following diagnosis
conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P” and “N” positions
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— Engine speed: More than 500 rpm
• Detection condition A
— Actual primary pulley ratio: 2.0 – 2.4
— Target primary pulley ratio: Less than 1.2
• Detection condition B
— Actual primary pulley ratio: 0.35 – 0.75
— Target primary pulley ratio: More than 1.55

Pressure control solenoid B
control circuit range performance

Possible causes

Primary pressure solenoid valve

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “TM-184, «Diagnosis Procedure»” and then perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before the repairs. Doing so may result in a secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 20 seconds or more.
Vehicle speed

: 20 km/h (13 MPH) or more

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0965”detected?
YES >> Go to TM-184, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019971

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-184

2014 Note

P0966 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0966 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019972

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0966

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition
The primary pressure solenoid valve current is
200 mA or less continuously for 480 msec or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short circuit diagnosis occurs in the
solenoid valve drive circuit.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Pressure control solenoid B
control circuit low

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(Primary pressure solenoid valve circuit shorted to ground)
• Primary pressure solenoid valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

H

1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0966” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-185, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

Diagnosis Procedure

J
INFOID:0000000009019973

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

40

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

N

2.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

O

Check primary pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-185, «Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid
Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019974

1.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
Revision: April 2013

TM-185

2014 Note

P

P0966 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT unit
Terminal

2

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of primary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-186

2014 Note

P0967 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0967 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
DTC Logic

A
INFOID:0000000009019975

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0967

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition
The primary pressure solenoid valve current is
200 mA or less continuously for 200 msec or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid valve
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Pressure control solenoid B
control circuit high

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(Primary pressure solenoid valve circuit open or shorted to power supply)
• Primary pressure solenoid valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

H

1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0967” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-187, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019976

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM

CVT unit

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

40

F46

2

Continuity

M

Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

N

2.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

O

Check primary pressure solenoid valve. Refer to TM-187, «Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid
Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Primary Pressure Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019977

1.CHECK PRIMARY PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
Revision: April 2013

TM-187

2014 Note

P

P0967 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CVT unit
Terminal

2

—

Ground

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of primary pressure solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to
TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-188

2014 Note

P0998 SHIFT SOLENOID F
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0998 SHIFT SOLENOID F

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019978

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0998

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Shift solenoid F control circuit
low

The TCM low brake solenoid valve current
monitor reading is 200 mA or less continuously for 480 msec or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short circuit diagnosis occurs in the
solenoid valve drive circuit.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(Low brake solenoid valve circuit shorted to ground)
• Low brake solenoid valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine.
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 5 seconds or more.
3. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0998” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-189, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J

INFOID:0000000009019979

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.

K

L

M

TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

39

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

O

2.CHECK LOW BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Check low brake solenoid valve. Refer to TM-189, «Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019980

1.CHECK LOW BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Revision: April 2013

TM-189

2014 Note

P

P0998 SHIFT SOLENOID F
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

6

—

Ground

[CVT: RE0F11A]

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250,
«Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-190

2014 Note

P0999 SHIFT SOLENOID F
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P0999 SHIFT SOLENOID F

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019981

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P0999

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Shift solenoid F control circuit
high

The TCM low brake solenoid valve current
monitor reading is 200 mA or less continuously for 200 msec or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid valve
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(Low brake solenoid valve circuit is
open or shorted to power supply)
• Low brake solenoid valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine.
2. Shift the selector lever to “D” position and wait for 5 seconds or more.
3. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P0999” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-191, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J

INFOID:0000000009019982

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM

L

M

CVT unit

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

39

F46

6

Continuity
Existed

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

O

2.CHECK LOW BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

Check low brake solenoid valve. Refer to TM-191, «Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (Low Brake Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019983

1.CHECK LOW BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Revision: April 2013

K

TM-191

2014 Note

P

P0999 SHIFT SOLENOID F
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

6

—

Ground

[CVT: RE0F11A]

Resistance
(Approx.)

Condition
CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250,
«Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-192

2014 Note

P099B SHIFT SOLENOID G
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P099B SHIFT SOLENOID G

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019984

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P099B

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Shift solenoid G control circuit
low

The TCM high clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve current monitor reading is 200 mA or
less continuously for 200 msec or more under
the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short circuit diagnosis occurs in the
solenoid valve drive circuit.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(High& clutch reverse brake solenoid
valve circuit shorted to ground)
• High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more.
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P099B” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-193, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

I

J
INFOID:0000000009019985

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

37

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK HIGH CLUTCH & REVERSE BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

O

Check high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve. Refer to TM-193, «Component Inspection (High Clutch &
Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019986

1.CHECK HIGH CLUTCH & REVERSE BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Revision: April 2013

TM-193

2014 Note

P

P099B SHIFT SOLENOID G
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

7

—

Ground

Condition

Resistance
(Approx.)

CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

[CVT: RE0F11A]

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of high & reverse brake solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer
to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-194

2014 Note

P099C SHIFT SOLENOID G
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P099C SHIFT SOLENOID G

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019987

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P099C

B

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

Shift solenoid G control circuit
high

The TCM high clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve current monitor reading is 200 mA or
less continuously for 200 msec or more under
the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Solenoid valve output current: 750 mA or
more
— GND short diagnosis of the solenoid valve
circuit is not satisfied.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

C
• Harness or connector
(High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve circuit is open or shorted to power supply)
• High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve

TM

E

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

F

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

G

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1. Start the engine and wait for 5 seconds or more
2. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P099C” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-195, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

I

J

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019988

1.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND CVT UNIT

K

1.
2.
3.

L

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector and CVT unit connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and CVT unit harness connector terminal.
TCM

CVT unit

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

37

F46

7

M

Continuity
Existed

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

2.CHECK HIGH CLUTCH & REVERSE BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE

O

Check high clutch & reverse brake solenoid valve. Refer to TM-195, «Component Inspection (High Clutch &
Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Component Inspection (High Clutch & Reverse Brake Solenoid Valve)

INFOID:0000000009019989

1.CHECK HIGH CLUTCH & REVERSE BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE
Revision: April 2013

TM-195

2014 Note

P

P099C SHIFT SOLENOID G
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check resistance between CVT unit connector terminal and ground.
CVT unit
Terminal

7

—

Ground

Condition

Resistance
(Approx.)

CVT fluid temperature: 20°C (68°F)

5.3 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 50°C (122°F)

6.0 Ω

CVT fluid temperature: 80°C (176°F)

6.7 Ω

[CVT: RE0F11A]

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> There is a malfunction of high & reverse brake solenoid valve. Replace transaxle assembly. Refer
to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

TM-196

2014 Note

P1586 G SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1586 G SENSOR

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019990

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P1586

B

Trouble diagnosis name

G Sensor Circuit Electrical

DTC detection condition

Possible causes

C

When the following diagnosis conditions are
satisfied and the detection conditions are satisfied twice in the same DC:
• Diagnosis conditions
— While driving
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Detection condition
— The G sensor detection voltage is 0.7 V or
• Harness or connector
less continuously for 5 seconds or more.
(G sensor circuit)
When the following diagnosis conditions are
• G sensor
satisfied and the detection conditions are satisfied twice in the same DC:
• Diagnosis conditions
— While driving
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Detection condition
— The G sensor detection voltage is 3.2 V or
more continuously for 5 seconds or more.

TM

E

F

G

NOTE:
DC stands for «DRIVING CYCLE» and indicates a series of driving cycle of «Ignition switch OFF → ON → driving → OFF».

H

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

I

CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

J

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

K

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION

L

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle for 10 seconds or more.
Stop the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never stop the engine.
4. Repeat step 2 through 3.
5. Check the DTC.
Is “P1586” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-197, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
3.

Diagnosis Procedure

M

N

O

INFOID:0000000009019991

1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.

Revision: April 2013

TM-197

2014 Note

P

P1586 G SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4. Select “G SEN SLOPE”.
5. Swing the vehicle and check if value varies between −40.45% and 40.45%.
Monitor item

Condition

Standard

Flat road
G SEN SLOPE

[CVT: RE0F11A]

0%

Uphill

Positive value (Maximum 40.45%)
Negative value (Minimum −40.45%)

Downhill

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

2.G SENSOR CALIBRATION (PART 1)
1.
2.

With CONSULT
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Touch “Erase”.
>> Perform «G SENSOR CALIBRATION». Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».

3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect G sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between G sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
G sensor
Connector

Terminal

M83

3

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

Ground

5.0 V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 8.

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND G SENSOR (PART 1)

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and G sensor harness connector terminals.
TCM
Connector

G sensor
Terminal

Connector

11

F44

14

M83

Terminal
2

Continuity

Existed

1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN TCM AND G SENSOR (PART 2)

Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

14

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-198

2014 Note

P1586 G SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

A

6.CHECK G SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove G sensor. TM-237, «Removal and Installation».
Connect the all connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and
ground.

B

C

: Direction of gravitational force

TM
+
−

TCM
Connector

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

E

Terminal

F44

14

Ground

Vertical (−1G) (A)

1.17 V

Horizontal (B)

2.5 V

Vertical (1G) (C)

3.83 V

SCIA8343J

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace G sensor.TM-237, «Removal and Installation».

G

7.G SENSOR CALIBRATION (PART 2)
1.
2.
3.

H

With CONSULT
Install G sensor. TM-237, «Removal and Installation».
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Touch “Erase”.

I

>> Perform «G SENSOR CALIBRATION». Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».

J

8.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and G sensor harness connector terminal.
TCM

L

G sensor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F44

26

M83

3

Continuity
Existed

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

N

9.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (PART 2)
Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminal and ground.
TCM
Connector

Terminal

F44

26

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

O

P

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

K

TM-199

2014 Note

P1588 G SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P1588 G SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019992

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P1588

Trouble diagnosis name

DTC detection condition

G Sensor Circuit Range/Performance

When the following diagnosis conditions are
satisfied and the detection conditions are satisfied twice in the same DC:
• Diagnosis condition (1 second or more)
— The rate of change in G sensor detection
value (mV): Between −15 and +15 inclusive
• Detection condition
— The rate of change in acceleration/deceleration stays +0.0273 G or more/−0.0273 or
less at least for 5 seconds or more.

Possible causes

G sensor

NOTE:
DC stands for «DRIVING CYCLE» and indicates a series of driving cycle of «Ignition switch OFF → ON → driving → OFF».

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

With CONSULT
Start the engine.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “G SPEED”.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

G SPEED

: 0.05 G or more

6.

Stop the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never stop the engine.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8. Check the DTC.
Is “P1588” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-200, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019993

1.CHECK G SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

With CONSULT
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “G SEN SLOPE”.

Revision: April 2013

TM-200

2014 Note

P1588 G SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
5. Swing the vehicle and check if value varies between −40.45% and 40.45%.

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

Monitor item

Condition

Standard

Flat road
G SEN SLOPE

0%

Uphill

B

Positive value (Maximum 40.45%)
Negative value (Minimum −40.45%)

Downhill

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

C

2.G SENSOR CALIBRATION (PART 1)
1.
2.

TM

With CONSULT
Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Touch “Erase”.

E

>> Perform «G SENSOR CALIBRATION». Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».

F

3.CHECK G SENSOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove G sensor. TM-237, «Removal and Installation».
Connect the all connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminal and
ground.

G

H

: Direction of gravitational force

I
+
−

TCM
Connector

F44

Voltage
(Approx.)

Condition

J

Terminal

14

Ground

Vertical (−1G) (A)

1.17 V

Horizontal (B)

2.5 V

Vertical (1G) (C)

3.83 V

SCIA8343J

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace G sensor.TM-237, «Removal and Installation».

L

4.G SENSOR CALIBRATION (PART 2)

M

With CONSULT
1. Install G sensor. TM-237, «Removal and Installation».
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Touch “Erase”.

N

>> Perform «G SENSOR CALIBRATION». Refer to TM-129, «Procedure».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-201

2014 Note

P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019994

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

P2765

Input/Turbine Speed Sensor B
Circuit

DTC detection condition
The secondary speed sensor value is less
than 150 rpm continuously for 5 seconds or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Primary pulley speed: 1,000 rpm or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
The secondary pulley speed sensor value is
240 rpm or less continuously for 500 msec or
more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis condition
— 10-msec-ago secondary pulley speed:
1,000 rpm or more
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Possible causes

• Harness or connector
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is
open or shorted)
• Secondary speed sensor

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK
If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

Vehicle speed

: 55 km/h (34 MPH) or more

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P2765” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-202, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019995

1.CHECK SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR POWER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect secondary speed sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
+
−

Voltage

Ground

10 – 16 V

Secondary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F48

3

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-202

2014 Note

P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 6.

A

2.CHECK SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between of primary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
Secondary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F48

1

—

Continuity

Ground

Existed

B

C

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

TM

3.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 1)
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check continuity between secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector terminal.
Secondary speed sensor

TCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

F48

2

F44

34

E

F

G

Continuity
Existed

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR AND TCM (PART 2)

I

Check continuity between secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal and ground.
J
Secondary speed sensor
Connector

Terminal

F48

2

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

K

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

L

5.CHECK TCM INPUT SIGNALS
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect all of disconnected connectors.
Lift the vehicle.
Start the engine.
Check frequency of secondary speed sensor.

M

N

+
−

TCM
Connector

Condition

Frequency
(Approx.)

O

Terminal
700 Hz

F44

34

Ground

P

• Selector lever: “L” position
• Vehicle speed: 20 km/h (12 MPH)

JSDIA1905GB

Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: April 2013

TM-203

2014 Note

P2765 CLUTCH B SPEED SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace secondary speed sensor. TM-241, «Removal and Installation».

[CVT: RE0F11A]

6.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR
1.
2.

Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and secondary speed sensor harness
connector terminal.
IPDM E/R

Secondary speed sensor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

21

F48

3

Continuity
Existed

Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —».
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 21 and secondary speed sensor harness connector terminal 3.
• 10A fuse (No.49, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-204

2014 Note

P2857 CLUTCH A PRESSURE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2857 CLUTCH A PRESSURE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019996

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

B

Trouble diagnosis name

P2857

DTC detection condition
The auxiliary gearbox gear ratio is 2.232 or
more for the auxiliary gearbox 1GR ratio continuously for 5 seconds or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.7/8 or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— Command for the 1GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Clutch A pressure engagement performance

Possible causes

C

TM

• Low brake solenoid valve
• Control valve assembly

E

F

G

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “TM-205, «Diagnosis Procedure»” and then perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» before the repairs. Doing so may result in a secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

H

I

J

K

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

L

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.

M

Selector lever

: “L” POSITION

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.7/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

N

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P2857” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-205, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

O

INFOID:0000000009019997

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: April 2013

TM-205

2014 Note

P

P2858 CLUTCH B PRESSURE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2858 CLUTCH B PRESSURE
DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009019998

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

Trouble diagnosis name

P2858

DTC detection condition
The auxiliary gearbox gear ratio is 2.232 or
more for the auxiliary gearbox 2GR ratio continuously for 5 seconds or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.7/8 or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— Command for the 2GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

Clutch B pressure engagement performance

Possible causes

• High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve
• Control valve assembly

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “TM-206, «Diagnosis Procedure»” and then perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» before the repairs. Doing so may result in a secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” POSITION

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.7/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 45 km/h (28 MPH) or more

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P2858” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-206, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009019999

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: April 2013

TM-206

2014 Note

P2859 CLUTCH A PRESSURE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P2859 CLUTCH A PRESSURE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009020000

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P2859

B

Trouble diagnosis name

Clutch A pressuren disengagement performance

DTC detection condition
The detection conditions continuously for 200
msec or more under the following diagnosis
conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— A lapse of 500 msec or more after the stop
lamp switch is turned from ON to OFF.
— Command for the 2GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Detection conditions
— Acceleration/deceleration: Less than −0.05
G
— Actual auxiliary gearbox gear ratio − Auxiliary gearbox 2GR ratio ≥ 50%

Possible causes

C

TM

E

F

G
• Low brake solenoid valve
• Control valve assembly

H

The auxiliary gearbox gear ratio is ±10% or
less for the auxiliary gearbox 1GR ratio continuously for 500 msec or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.7/8 or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Command for the 2GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

I

J

K

L

M

DTC COFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform «TM-208, «Diagnosis Procedure»» and then perform «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE».
• Never perform «TC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» before the repairs. Doing so may result in a secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.

N

O

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
1.

Start the engine.

Revision: April 2013

TM-207

2014 Note

P

P2859 CLUTCH A PRESSURE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Drive the vehicle.
3. Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.
Selector lever

: “D” position

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.7/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 45 km/h (28 MPH) or more

[CVT: RE0F11A]

4. Stop the vehicle
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P2859” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-208, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009020001

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-208

2014 Note

P285A CLUTCH B PRESSURE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

P285A CLUTCH B PRESSURE

A

DTC Logic

INFOID:0000000009020002

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC

P285A

B

Trouble diagnosis name

Clutch B pressure disengagement performance

DTC detection condition
The detection conditions continuously for 200
msec or more under the following diagnosis
conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— Command for the 1GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V
• Detection conditions
— Acceleration/deceleration: Less than −0.05
G
— Actual auxiliary gearbox gear ratio − Auxiliary gearbox 1GR ratio ≥ 50%

Possible causes

C

TM

E

F

G
• High clutch & reverse brake solenoid
valve
• Control valve assembly

The auxiliary gearbox gear ratio is ±10% or
less for the auxiliary gearbox 2GR ratio continuously for 500 msec or more under the following diagnosis conditions:
• Diagnosis conditions
— Selector lever: Other than “P”, “R” and “N”
positions
— Accelerator pedal position: 0.7/8 or more
— Engine speed: More than 550 rpm
— Secondary pulley speed: More than 300
rpm
— Output speed: More than 300 rpm
— Command for the 1GR of auxiliary gearbox
is in progress.
— Auxiliary gearbox shifting is not in progress.
— TCM power supply voltage: More than 11 V

I

J

K

L

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “TM-210, «Diagnosis Procedure»” and then perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Never perform «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» before the repairs. Doing so may result in a secondary malfunction.
• Be careful of the driving speed.

1.PREPARATION BEFORE WORK

>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle.
Maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more.

Revision: April 2013

M

N

O

If another «DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE» occurs just before, turn ignition switch OFF and wait for at
least 10 seconds, then perform the next test.

1.
2.
3.

H

TM-209

2014 Note

P

P285A CLUTCH B PRESSURE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Selector lever

: “L” POSITION

Accelerator pedal position

: 0.7/8 or more

Vehicle speed

: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Check the first trip DTC.
Is “P285A” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-210, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> INSPECTION END

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009020003

1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-210

2014 Note

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

A
INFOID:0000000009020004

1.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT (PART 1)

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect TCM connector.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+
−

Voltage

TM

Ground

10 – 16 V

E

TCM
Connector

Terminal
45

F44

46

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

F

2.CHECK TCM POWER CIRCUIT (PART 2)

G

Check voltage between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
+

H
−

TCM
Connector

Condition

Voltage

Terminal
47

F44

Ground
48

Ignition switch ON

10 – 16 V

Ignition switch OFF

Approx. 0 V

Ignition switch ON

10 – 16 V

Ignition switch OFF

Approx. 0 V

I

J

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

K

3.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

L

Check continuity between TCM harness connector terminals and ground.
TCM
Connector
F44

Terminal
41
42

—

Continuity

Ground

Existed

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

O

4.DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS (PART 1)

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between battery positive terminal and TCM connectors terminals 45,
and 46.
• 10A fuse (No.33, fuse and fusible link block). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: April 2013

TM-211

2014 Note

P

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND TCM
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and TCM harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R

TCM

Connector

Terminal

Connector

E45

21

F44

Terminal
47

Continuity

Existed

48

Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEMS (PART 2)

Check the following items:
• Open circuit or short circuit in harness between ignition switch and IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-22, «Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —».
• Short circuit in harness between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal 21 and TCM harness connector terminal 47, and 48.
• 10A fuse (No.49, IPDM E/R). Refer to PG-39, «IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement».
• IPDM E/R
Is the check result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: April 2013

TM-212

2014 Note

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009020005

1.CHECK OD OFF INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION

B

Check OD OFF indicator lamp turns ON for approx. 2 seconds when ignition switch turns ON.
Is the inspection results normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to TM-215, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

2.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION

TM

1. Shift the selector lever to “D” position.
2. Check that OD OFF indicator lamp turns ON/OFF when overdrive control switch is operated.
Is the inspection results normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to TM-213, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009020006

1.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.

G

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between CVT shift selector harness connector terminals.

H

CVT shift selector
Connector
M38

+

−

Voltage
(Approx.)

I

2

5V

J

Terminal
1

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

K

2.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
Check overdrive control switch. Refer to TM-214, «Component Inspection (Overdrive Control Switch)».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between CVT shift selector harness connector terminal and ground.
CVT shift selector
Connector

Terminal

M38

2

—

Continuity

Ground

Existed

O

P

4.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 1)
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and CVT shift selector harness
connector terminal.

Revision: April 2013

TM-213

M

N

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
1.
2.
3.

L

2014 Note

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Combination meter

CVT shift selector

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M24

8

M38

1

Continuity
Existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

5.CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND CVT SHIFT SELECTOR (PART 2)
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground.
Combination meter
Connector

Terminal

M24

8

—

Continuity

Ground

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

6.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Connect all of disconnected connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”.
Select “O/D OFF SW”.
Check that “O/D OFF SW” turns ON/OFF when overdrive control switch is operated. Refer to MWI-17,
«Reference Value».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, «Intermittent Incident».
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».

Component Inspection (Overdrive Control Switch)

INFOID:0000000009020007

1.CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
Check continuity between wires of selector lever knob (1)
Condition

Continuity

Overdrive control switch is depressed

Existed

Overdrive control switch is depressed

Not existed

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace
selector lever knob. Refer to TM-227,
«Removal and Installation».
JSDIA1969ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-214

2014 Note

OD OFF INDICATOR LAMP
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

OD OFF INDICATOR LAMP

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009020008

1.CHECK OD OFF INDICATOR LAMP FUNCTION

B

Check OD OFF indicator lamp turns ON for approx. 2 seconds when ignition switch turns ON.
Is the inspection results normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to TM-215, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009020009

TM

1.CHECK DTC (TCM)
E

With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-111, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2.CHECK DTC (COMBINATION METER)

G

With CONSULT
Check “Self Diagnostic Results” in “METER/M&A”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

H

I

3.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
Shift the selector lever to “D” position.
Select “Data Monitor” in “METER/M&A”.
Select “O/D OFF IND”.
Check that “O/D OFF IND” turns ON/OFF when overdrive control switch is operated. Refer to MWI-17,
«Reference Value».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 4.
1.
2.
3.
4.

J

K

L

4.CHECK TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT
1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
2. Select “SPORT MODE SW”.
3. Check that “SPORT MODE SW” turns ON/OFF when overdrive control switch is operated. Refer to TM99, «Reference Value».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Check overdrive control switch. Refer to TM-213, «Diagnosis Procedure».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-215

2014 Note

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Component Parts Function Inspection

INFOID:0000000009020010

1.CHECK SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
1.
2.
3.

Start the engine.
Shift selector lever.
Check that the selector lever position and the shift position indicator on the combination meter are identical.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Go to TM-216, «Diagnosis Procedure».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009020011

1.CHECK TCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT
Start the engine.
Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
Select “RANGE”.
Shift selector lever.
Check that selector lever position, “RANGE” on CONSULT screen, and shift position indicator display on
combination meter are identical.
Is the check result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO-1 (“RANGE” is changed but is not displayed on shift position indicator.>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result”
in “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-2 (“RANGE” and shift position indicator are different.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in “TRANSMISSION”.
NO-3 (Specific“RANGE” is not displayed on shift position indicator.)>>Check “Self Diagnostic Result” in
“METER/M&A”.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Revision: April 2013

TM-216

2014 Note

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009020012

1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (BRAKE PEDAL RELEASED)

B

1. Ignition switch ON.
2. Attempt to shift selector lever to any position other than “P” position with brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted?
YES >> Go to TM-217, «Diagnosis Procedure».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

C

2.CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (BRAKE PEDAL APPLIED)

TM

Attempt to shift the selector lever to any position other than “P” position with brake pedal applied.
Can the selector lever be shifted?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Go to TM-217, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

F

INFOID:0000000009020013

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
1.
2.

G

Ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between stop lamp switch connector E13 terminal 4 and ground.

H

Stop lamp switch
Connector

Terminal

E13

4

Ground

Brake pedal

Voltage

Applied

Battery voltage

Released

0V

Ground

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.

J

2.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR

K

Check voltage between CVT shift selector connector M38 terminal 6 and ground.
CVT shift selector
Connector

Terminal

M38

6

I

Ground

Brake pedal

Ground

Applied

Shift selector

Voltage

Park

Battery voltage

Others

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

L

M

N

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

O

Ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect CVT shift selector connector.
Check continuity between CVT shift selector connector M38 terminal 6 and ground.

P
CVT shift selector
Connector

Terminal

M38

6

Ground

Continuity

Ground

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace ground circuit.
Revision: April 2013

TM-217

2014 Note

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT
Check voltage between stop lamp switch connector E13 terminal 3 and ground.
Stop lamp switch
Connector

Terminal

E13

3

Ground

Voltage

Ground

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace stop lamp switch.
NO
>> Repair or replace power circuit.

5.CHECK CVT SHIFT SELECTOR POWER CIRCUIT

Check voltage between CVT shift selector connector M38 terminal 5 and ground.
CVT shift selector
Connector

Terminal

M38

5

Ground

Brake pedal

Voltage

Ground

Applied

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace CVT shift selector. Refer to TM-227, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace power circuit.

Revision: April 2013

TM-218

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS

A

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009020014

B

The diagnosis item number indicates the order of check. Start checking in the order from 1.
Symptom diagnosis chart 1-1

C

Check under on board condition (repair
and part replacement)

Replace the transaxle assembly.

Engine stall occurs in “D”, “L”,
or “R” position and the vehicle
does not start.
Driving is
not possible.

Acceleration at start is not sufficient in “D”, “L”, or “R” position.

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CVT fluid temperature sensor (P0711, P0712, P0713)

Low brake solenoid valve
(P173A, P173B, P17B4, P17B5)

High clutch &reverse brake solenoid valve
(P1739, P173C, P17B7, P17B8)

Lock-up solenoid valve
(P0740, P0743, P0744)

Line pressure solenoid valve (P0746, P0962, P0963)

E

F

G

H

I

J

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

K

L
1

2

1

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

M

The engine speed increases
suddenly in “D”, “L”, or “R” position during driving.
Engine brake is suddenly applied in “D” or “R” position during driving.

TM

TM-111

1

Primary pressure solenoid valve (P17BA, P17BB)

Overdrive control switch
TM-213

1

Secondary pressure sensor (P0846, P0847, P0848)

TCM
TM-99

1

Transmission position switch (P0705, P0706)

Control cable
TM-228

1

Output speed sensor (P0720)

Line pressure is out of the standard value.
TM-130

The engine speed increases in
“D”, “L”, or “R” position, but the
vehicle cannot start.

Secondary speed sensor (P2765)

Incorrect adjustment of CVT fluid level
TM-225

1

Symptom

Primary speed sensor (P0715)

Engine system
EC-107

Electric system

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

N
1

1

1

1

1

1

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-219

2014 Note

The engine races when the
auxiliary gearbox is shifted
from 1GR ⇔ 2GR.

Engine braking is not effective
in “L” position.

Shifting is
not possible.
Shifting does not occur with
OD OFF.

During driving in “D” position,
slippage occurs in lockup or
lockup is not possible.

Revision: April 2013
2

1
1
1

1
1

1

TM-220

Line pressure is out of the standard value.
Control cable
TCM
Overdrive control switch

TM-130
TM-228
TM-99
TM-213

1

1
1

1
1

Engine stall occurs immediately before stop at deceleration in
“D” or “L” position.

1
1

1
1
2

1

1

1
2
1

1
1
1

1

1

1

1

1

1
1

CVT fluid temperature sensor (P0711, P0712, P0713)

Low brake solenoid valve
(P173A, P173B, P17B4, P17B5)

Lock-up solenoid valve
(P0740, P0743, P0744)

Line pressure solenoid valve (P0746, P0962, P0963)

Primary pressure solenoid valve (P17BA, P17BB)

Check under on board condition (repair
and part replacement)

Secondary pressure sensor (P0846, P0847, P0848)

Transmission position switch (P0705, P0706)

Output speed sensor (P0720)

Secondary speed sensor (P2765)

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

High clutch &reverse brake solenoid valve
(P1739, P173C, P17B7, P17B8)

TM-111

Incorrect adjustment of CVT fluid level

TM-225

Primary speed sensor (P0715)

Engine system

Symptom

EC-107

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

Replace the transaxle assembly.

Electric system

1

1

1

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom diagnosis chart 1-2

Replace the transaxle assembly.

A

Power transmission

Driving is
not possible.

Shifting is
not possible.

The engine speed increases in
“D”, “L”, or “R” position, but the
vehicle cannot start.

1

Engine stall occurs in “D”, “L”,
or “R” position and the vehicle
does not start.

1

Acceleration at start is not sufficient in “D”, “L”, or “R” position.

1

The engine speed increases
suddenly in “D”, “L”, or “R” position during driving.

1

Engine brake is suddenly applied in “D” or “R” position during driving.

1

The engine races when the
auxiliary gearbox is shifted
from 1GR ⇔ 2GR.

1

1

Engine braking is not effective
in “L” position.

1

2

1

1

Parking mechanism

Final gear, differential gear

Reduction gear

Planetary gear

Counter gear

Bearings

Reverse brake

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “R”)

1
1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1

1

TM

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

F

1

G

1
(In “R”)

H

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “R”)

I

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “R”)

J

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

C

E

TM-250

High clutch

Low brake

Pulley, steel belt

B

Torque converter

Oil pump

Symptom

Valve body, control valve

Oil pressure control

K

L

Shifting does not occur with
OD OFF.
Engine stall occurs immediately before stop at deceleration in “D” or “L” position.

1

1

M

During driving in “D” position,
slippage occurs in lockup or
lockup is not possible.

1

1

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-221

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom diagnosis chart 2-1

Check under on board condition (repair
and part replacement)

Replace the transaxle assembly.

2

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CVT fluid temperature sensor (P0711, P0712, P0713)

1

Lock-up solenoid valve
(P0740, P0743, P0744)

Line pressure solenoid valve (P0746, P0962, P0963)

Primary pressure solenoid valve (P17BA, P17BB)

1

2

1

2

1

1

1

TM-111

Overdrive control switch
TM-213

1

Low brake solenoid valve
(P173A, P173B, P17B4, P17B5)

Shock is large when the lever
is shifted from “N” → “D” and
“N” → “R” positions.

Secondary pressure sensor (P0846, P0847, P0848)

TCM
TM-99

2

Shock in lockup is large during driving in “D” or “L” position.
Shock vibration
Noise

Transmission position switch (P0705, P0706)

Control cable
TM-228

1

2

High clutch &reverse brake solenoid valve
(P1739, P173C, P17B7, P17B8)

Shock is large when the auxiliary gearbox is shifted from
1GR → 2GR.

Output speed sensor (P0720)

Line pressure is out of the standard value.
TM-130

Shock at start is large in “D”,
“L”, or “R” position.

Secondary speed sensor (P2765)

Incorrect adjustment of CVT fluid level
TM-225

Symptom

Primary speed sensor (P0715)

Engine system
EC-107

Electric system

1

1

1

1

1

1

Shock is large when the lever
is shifted from “D” → “L” position.
Vibration occurs in “D”, “L”, or
“R” position during driving.

1

Noise occurs during driving.
Noise occurs in idling.

Other

1

1

2

1
1

1

Starter operates in “D”, “L”, or
“R” position.

1

1

1

Starter does not operate in
“P” or “N” position.

1

1

1

Engine stall occurs in “D”, “L”,
or “R” position during stop.

1

1

1

1

Engine stall occurs in “P” or
“N” position during stop.

1

1

1

1

Parking lock does not operate in “P” position.

1

1

Parking lock cannot be cancelled when the selector lever is shifted from “P” position
to other position.

1

1

Revision: April 2013

TM-222

2014 Note

CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom diagnosis chart 2-2

Replace the transaxle assembly.

A

Power transmission

Shock vibration
Noise

Parking mechanism

Final gear, differential gear

Reduction gear

Planetary gear

Counter gear

Bearings

Reverse brake

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

Shock at start is large in “D”,
“L”, or “R” position.

1

Shock is large when the auxiliary gearbox is shifted from
1GR → 2GR.

1

Shock in lockup is large during driving in “D” or “L” position.

1

Shock is large when the lever
is shifted from “N” → “D” and
“N” → “R” positions.

1

1
(“N” →
“D”)

Shock is large when the lever
is shifted from “D” → “L” position.

1

1

1

Vibration occurs in “D”, “L”, or
“R” position during driving.

1

1

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

1
(In “D” or
“L”)

Noise occurs during driving.

1

1

Noise occurs in idling.

1

1

1

1

1
(In “R”)

2

2

2

TM

F

2

G

1

H

1

1

C

E

TM-250

High clutch

Low brake

Pulley, steel belt

B

Torque converter

Oil pump

Symptom

Valve body, control valve

Oil pressure control

1

1
(“N” →
“D”)

I

J
1
(In “R”)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

K

L

Starter operates in “D”, “L”, or
“R” position.
Starter does not operate in “P”
or “N” position.
Engine stall occurs in “D”, “L”,
or “R” position during stop.
Other

M
1

1

N

Engine stall occurs in “P” or
“N” position during stop.
Parking lock does not operate
in “P” position.

1

O

Parking lock cannot be cancelled when the selector lever
is shifted from “P” position to
other position.

1

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-223

2014 Note

CVT FLUID
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
CVT FLUID
Inspection

INFOID:0000000009020015

FLUID LEAKAGE
• Check transaxle surrounding area (oil seal and plug etc.)for fluid
leakage.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts and adjust
CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

SMA146B

Replacement
CVT fluid
Fluid capacity

INFOID:0000000009019892

: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».
: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN
CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the (NISSAN new vehicle limited) warranty.
• Always use shop paper. Never use shop cloth.
• Replace a drain plug gasket with new ones at the final stage of the operation when installing.
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
• After replacement, always perform CVT fluid leakage check.
1. Select “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLUID TEMP” and confirm that the CVT fluid temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
3. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
4. Lift up the vehicle.
5. Remove the drain plug and overflow tube and drain the CVT fluid from the oil pan. TM-238, «Removal and
Installation».
6. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
7. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
8. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
9. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
JSDIA1876ZZ
the drain plug.
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
10. Lift down the vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Revision: April 2013

TM-224

2014 Note

CVT FLUID
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
A
13. Check that the CONSULT “Data monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
14. Stop the engine.
15. Lift up the vehicle.
B
16. Remove the drain plug, and then drain CVT fluid from oil pan.
17. Repeat steps 6 to 16 (one time).
18. Install the overflow tube. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
C
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten to the specified torque. If it is not tightened to the specified torque, the tube may
be damaged.
TM
19. Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
E
20. Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
F
pipe until it stops.
21. Fill approximately 3 liter (2-5/8 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
22. Remove the ATF changer hose and charging pipe, then install
G
JSDIA1876ZZ
the drain plug.
NOTE:
Perform this work quickly because CVT fluid leaks.
H
23. Lift down the vehicle.
24. Start the engine.
25. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
I
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
J
26. Check that the CONSULT “Data monitor” in “FLUID TEMP” is 35°C (95°F) to 45°C (113°F).
27. Lift up the vehicle.
28. Remove the drain plug and confirm that the CVT fluid is drained from the overflow tube.
K
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
NOTE:
L
If the CVT fluid is not drained, refer to “Adjustment” and refill with the CVT fluid.
29. When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. TM-238,
«Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
M
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
30. Lift down the vehicle.
31. Select “Work Support” in “TRANSMISSION” using CONSULT.
N
32. Select “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN”.
33. Select “Erase”.
O
34. Stop the engine.

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009019893

P

CVT fluid
Fluid capacity

: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».
: Refer to TM-254, «General Specification».

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN
CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the (NISSAN new vehicle limited) warranty.
Revision: April 2013

TM-225

2014 Note

CVT FLUID
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• During adjustment of the CVT fluid level, check CONSULT so that the oil temperature may be maintained from 35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F).
• Use caution when looking into the drain hole as there is a risk of dripping fluid entering the eye.
1. Check that the selector lever is in the “P” position, then completely engage the parking brake.
2. Start the engine.
3. Adjust the CVT fluid temperature to be approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The CVT fluid is largely affected by temperature. Therefore be sure to use CONSULT and check the
“FLUID TEMP” under “TRANSMISSION” in “Data Monitor” while adjusting.
4. While depressing the brake pedal, shift the selector lever to the entire position from “P” to “L”, and shift it
to the “P” position.
NOTE:
Hold the lever at each position for 5 seconds.
5. Lift up the vehicle.
6. Check that there is no CVT fluid leakage.
7. Remove the drain plug. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
8.

9.

10.
11.

12.
13.
14.
15.

Install the charging pipe set (KV311039S0) (A) into the drain
plug hole.
CAUTION:
Tighten the charging pipe by hand.
Install the ATF changer hose (B) to the charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Press the ATF changer hose all the way onto the charging
pipe until it stops.
Fill approximately 0.5 liter (1/2 lmp qt) of the CVT fluid.
Remove the ATF changer hose from the charging pipe, and
check that the CVT fluid drains out from the charging pipe. If it
does not drain out, perform charging again.
CAUTION:
Perform this work with the vehicle idling.
When the flow of CVT fluid slows to a drip, remove the charging pipe from the oil pan.
Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to TM-238, «Removal and Installation».
CAUTION:
Never reuse drain plug gasket.
Lift down the vehicle.
Stop the engine.

Revision: April 2013

TM-226

JSDIA1876ZZ

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020016

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

ALDIA0263GB

1.

Shift selector handle

2.

Lock pin

4.

Position indication panel

5.

Shift selector assembly

3.

Shift selector handle cover

Removal and Installation

K
INFOID:0000000009020017

CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.

L

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Move the shift selector to the “N” position.
Remove the shift selector handle. Refer to TM-228, «Disassembly and Assembly».
Remove the center console. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from shift selector.
Move the shift selector to the “P” position.
Remove the key interlock cable from the shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-233, «Exploded View».
Remove the control cable from the shift selector assembly. Refer to TM-230, «Exploded View».
Remove the shift selector assembly.

M

N

O

P

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

J

TM-227

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• When connecting the control cable (1) to the shift selector assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and insert the
control cable until it stops.

[CVT: RE0F11A]

JSDIA1624ZZ

Disassembly and Assembly

INFOID:0000000009020018

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.

Slide the shift selector handle cover (1) down.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the shift selector handle cover.
Pull out the lock pin (2).
Pull the shift selector handle (3) and shift selector handle cover
upward to remove.
Remove the position lamp.

JSDIA1796ZZ

5.

Disengage the hooks (A) (4 locations), and lift up the position
indication panel (1) to separate it from the shift selector assembly (2).
CAUTION:
Do not damage the shift selector assembly.

ALDIA0264ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Follow the procedure below to install the shift selector handle.
1. Install the lock pin (2) onto the shift selector handle (3).
2. Install the shift selector handle cover (1) onto the shift selector
handle.
3. Press the shift selector handle onto the shift selector until it
clicks.
CAUTION:
• When pressing the shift selector handle onto the shift
selector, do not press the shift selector handle button.
• Do not strike the shift selector handle to install it.
JSDIA1796ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009020019

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

TM-228

2014 Note

CVT SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check CVT position. Refer to TM-132, «Inspection».

[CVT: RE0F11A]
A

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-229

2014 Note

CONTROL CABLE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

CONTROL CABLE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020020

JSDIA1921GB

1.

Bracket B

2.

Lock plate

3.

Transaxle assembly

4.

Bracket A

5.

Control cable

6.

CVT shift selector assembly

A:

Manual lever

B:

Grommet

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020021

CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
Remove the TCM and bracket. Refer to TM-235, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the battery tray and bracket.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the center console. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the control cable from the shift selector assembly.
Disengage the pawls (B) of the grommet (A), and pull downward
to remove.
Remove the control cable nut from the manual lever.

JSDIA1809ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-230

2014 Note

CONTROL CABLE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Remove the lock plate (1).

A

B

C
JSDIA1812ZZ

TM

11. Lift up the heat plate.
12. Remove the control cable (1) from the bracket (2).

E
Front

F

G
JPDIA0107ZZ

13. Remove the control cable from the vehicle.
14. Remove bracket.

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• From below the vehicle, press the grommet (A) into place until the
pawls (B) make a click sound.
CAUTION:
Check that pulling down on the grommet does not disconnect
it.

I

J

K

L
JSDIA1809ZZ

• Pay attention to the following when connecting the control cable to the shift selector.
1. When connecting the control cable (1) to the shift selector
assembly (2), face the grooved surface of the rib (A) up and
insert the control cable until it stops.

M

N

O

P
JSDIA1624ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-231

2014 Note

CONTROL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Install the socket (A) onto the shift selector assembly.
CAUTION:
• Insert the socket into the shift selector assembly, then
push it firmly in place.
• Check that pulling on the socket does not disconnect it.

[CVT: RE0F11A]

JSDIA1810ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020022

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check CVT position. Refer to TM-132, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust CVT position. Refer to TM-132, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

TM-232

2014 Note

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020023

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I
ALDIA0262ZZ

1.

Shift selector assembly

2.

Key interlock cable

B:

Lock plate

C:

Clip

A:

Key cylinder

Removal and Installation

J

INFOID:0000000009020024

K

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Always apply the parking brake before performing removal and installation.
1. Move the shift selector to the “N” position.
2. Remove the shift selector handle. Refer to TM-228, «Disassembly and Assembly».
3. Remove the instrumental lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
4. Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, «Removal and Installation».
5. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
6. Move the shift selector to the “P” position.
7. Press the pawls (B) of the key interlock cable slider (A) while
sliding it in the direction of the casing cap (C), and separate the
adjusting holder (D) and slider.
(E)

L

M

N

O

:Key interlock rod

P

JSDIA1797ZZ

8.

Remove the key interlock cable from the shift selector assembly.

Revision: April 2013

TM-233

2014 Note

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
9.

Lift lock plate (A) in the direction of the arrow (
in the direction of the arrow ( D).
(1)

:Key interlock cable

(B)

:Key cylinder

C) and remove

10. Remove the key interlock cable from the key cylinder.
11. Disengage the clips and remove the key interlock cable from the
vehicle.
JSDIA1798ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Temporarily install the adjust holder (A) to the key interlock rod (B).
• Install the casing cap (C) to the cable bracket (D) on the shift
selector assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not bend or twist key interlock cable excessively when
installing.
• After installing key interlock cable to cable bracket (D) on
shift selector assembly, make sure casing caps (C) is firmly
secured in cable bracket (D) on shift selector assembly.
• If casing cap (C) is loose [less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb)
removing force], replace key interlock cable.

JSDIA1799ZZ

• Slide the slider (A) toward the key interlock rod (D) while pressing
the pull lock (B) down to securely connect the adjust holder (C)
with the key interlock rod (D).
CAUTION:
• Do not press tabs when holding slider (A).
• Do not apply any side to side force to key interlock rod (D)
when sliding slider (A).

JSDIA1800ZZ

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009020025

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check the CVT operation. If a malfunction is found, adjust the CVT position. Refer to TM-228, «Inspection».
• Make sure the key can be removed only when the shift selector is in the “P” position.
• Make sure the ignition switch will not turn to LOCK position when the shift selector is not in the “P” position.

Revision: April 2013

TM-234

2014 Note

TCM
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

TCM

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020026

B

C

TM

E

F

G
AWBIA1482ZZ

1.

TCM

2.

Bracket

3.

Clip

H

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020027

I

CAUTION:
When replacing TCM, note the “CVTF DETERIORATION DATE” value displayed on CONSULT “CONFORM CVTF DETERIORTN” in MAINTENANCE BOOKLET, before starting the operation.
NOTE:
When replacing the TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, replace the transaxle assembly first and then
replace the TCM. Refer to TM-126, «Description».

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the battery. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Disconnect the harness connector from the TCM.
Remove the TCM and bracket as an assembly.
Remove the TCM from the bracket (if necessary).

J

K

L

M

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020028

N

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCM». Refer to TM-126, «Description».

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-235

2014 Note

AIR BREATHER HOSE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

AIR BREATHER HOSE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020029

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, «Exploded View».
Remove air breather hose from transaxle assembly.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that air breather hose is not collapsed or blocked due to folding or bending when installed.
• Be sure to insert air breather hose (1) fully until it reaches the
base of the transaxle tube (A).

JSDIA1978ZZ

Revision: April 2013

TM-236

2014 Note

G SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

G SENSOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020030

B

C

TM

JSDIA1922GB

1.

G sensor

E

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020031

CAUTION:
• Do not drop or strike G sensor, because it may be damaged by impact.
• Do not use a power tool.

F

G

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

H

Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Exploded View».
Remove center console. Refer to IP-18, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from G sensor.
Remove G sensor.

I

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

J

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020032

K

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform “G SENSOR CALIBRATION”. Refer to TM-129, «Description».

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-237

2014 Note

OIL PAN
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OIL PAN
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020033

JSDIA1879GB

1.

Transaxle assembly

2.

Oil pan gasket

3.

Magnet

4.

Oil pan

5.

Overflow tube

6.

Drain plug gasket

7.

Drain plug

8.

Oil pan fitting bolt

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020034

REMOVAL
1.

2.
3.

Remove the drain plug and overflow tube, and then drain the CVT fluid.
WARNING:
CVT fluid can splash when draining, use safety glasses to protect eyes.
Remove the drain plug gasket from the drain plug.
Remove the oil pan bolts (
oil pan gasket.

), and then remove the oil pan and

: Front

4.

Remove the magnets from the oil pan.

JSDIA1874ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse oil pan gasket and drain plug gasket.
Revision: April 2013

TM-238

2014 Note

OIL PAN
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from the oil pan gasket mating surface of
transaxle case and oil pan.
• When installing the overflow tube, be sure to tighten to the specified torque. If it is not tightened to
the specified torque, the tube may be damaged.
• When the oil pan is installed, temporarily tighten oil pan bolts, then
tighten the oil pan bolts to specification in the order shown.

A

B

C

: Front

TM

E
JSDIA1884ZZ

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020035

F

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check oil pan for foreign material.
• If a large amount of worn material is found, clutch plate may be worn.
• If iron powder is found, bearings, gears, or clutch plates may be worn.
• If aluminum powder is found, bushing may be worn, or chips or burrs of aluminum casting parts may enter.
Check points where wear is found in all cases.

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

G

H

Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».
I

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-239

2014 Note

PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020036

JSDIA1880GB

1.

Transaxle assembly
Front

2.

O-ring

3.

Primary speed sensor

: Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020037

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Partially remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from primary speed sensor.
Remove the primary speed sensor.
Remove the O-ring from the primary speed sensor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to the O-ring.

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020038

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

TM-240

2014 Note

SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SECONDARY SPEED SENSOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020039

B

C

TM

E

F

G
JSDIA1881GB

1.

Transaxle assembly
Front

2.

O-ring

3.

Secondary speed sensor

H

: Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020040

I

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-70, «Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)».
Remove IPDM/ER. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from secondary speed sensor.
Remove the secondary speed sensor.
Remove the O-ring from the secondary speed sensor.

J

K

INSTALLATION

L

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to the O-ring.

Inspection and Adjustment

M
INFOID:0000000009020041

N

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

O

Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-241

2014 Note

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020042

JSDIA1882GB

1.

Transaxle assembly
Front

2.

Output speed sensor

3.

O-ring

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020043

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the harness connector from output speed sensor.
NOTE:
Lift up the vehicle and perform the work from rear of the transaxle assembly.
Remove the output speed sensor.
Remove the O-ring from the output speed sensor.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-ring.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to the O-ring.

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020044

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

TM-242

2014 Note

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020045

B

C

TM

E

F
JSDIA1888ZZ

1.

Transaxle assembly

2.

Front

Differential side oil seal (left side)

3.

Differential side oil seal (right side)

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

H

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020046

NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the front drive shaft from the transaxle assembly. Refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation»
Remove the differential side oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
When removing the differential side oil seal, be careful not to scratch the oil seal mating surfaces
of the transaxle case and converter housing.

INSTALLATION
Drive the differential side oil seal into the transaxle case side (A)
and converter housing side (B) using suitable tool to the specified dimension.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the lip of the differential side oil seal
when press-fitting it.
• Do not reuse differential side oil seal.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to the differential side
oil seal lip and around the oil seal.

2.

: 1.8 ± 0.5 mm (0.071 ± 0.020 in).
: 1.8 ± 0.5 mm (0.071 ± 0.020 in).

O
JSDIA1836ZZ

P
INFOID:0000000009020047

Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

TM-243

K

N

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Revision: April 2013

J

M

Install the front drive shaft. Refer to FAX-19, «Removal and Installation».

Inspection and Adjustment

I

L

1.

Dimension (C)
Dimension (D)

G

2014 Note

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE OIL SEAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

TM-244

[CVT: RE0F11A]

2014 Note

WATER HOSE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WATER HOSE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020048

B

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I
JSDIA4111GB

1.

Hose clamp

2.

Water hose A

3.

Clip

4.

Bracket A

5.

Bracket B

6.

CVT oil warner

7.

Water hose B

8.

Water bypass pipe

9.

Hose clamp

10. Water hose C
A.

J

11. Water outlet

K

To heater core
: Always replace after every disassembly.

L

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020049

M

REMOVAL
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
Perform these steps after the engine coolant temperature has cooled sufficiently.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
1. Remove the hose clamp and pull out the water hose A.
2. Remove the hose clamp and pull out the water hose B.
3. Remove the hose clamp and pull out the water hose C.
4. Pull out the heater hose and remove the water bypass pipe.
5. Remove the heater thermostat assembly.
Revision: April 2013

TM-245

2014 Note

N

O

P

WATER HOSE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove the bracket.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse hose clamps.
• Do not reuse clips.
• When installing bracket A to the transaxle assembly.
— Face arrow (A) of bracket A toward the front of the vehicle.
: Front

— Set baffle (B) of bracket A to rib (C) of transaxle.

JSDIA4112ZZ

• When installing the bracket B to the transaxle assembly.
— Face arrow (A) of bracket A towards the top of vehicle.
: Front

— Insert baffle (B) into the boss hole (C) of transaxle.

JSDIA4113ZZ

• Refer to the following when installing water hoses.
Water hose (1)
Water hose A

Water hose B

Water hose C

Installation side
tube (2)

Direction of paint
mark

Water outlet

Upward

CVT oil warmer

Frontward

CVT oil warmer

Frontward

Water bypass pipe

Rightward (Align
with the mark of
the water bypass pipe side)

Water bypass pipe

—

Water outlet

Hose insertion depth
(L)

(A): 27 mm (1.06 in)
(End reaches the 2stage bulge.)
JSDIA2459ZZ

Upward

• Refer to the following when installing hose clamp.
CAUTION:
Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.

Revision: April 2013

TM-246

2014 Note

WATER HOSE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Water hose (1)

Water hose A

Water hose B

Installation side
tube (2)

Dieection of tab

Water outlet

Upward

CVT oil warmer

Frontward

CVT oil warmer

Leftward

Water bypass pipe

Rightward

Water bypass pipe

Upward and 45°
frontward

Water outlet

Upward and 45°
frontward

Water hose C

A

Hose clamp (3)
Clamping position

B

5 — 7 mm (0.20 — 0.28
in) (A) from hose end

C
JSDIA2424ZZ

TM

Inspection

INFOID:0000000009020050

E

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Start the engine and check visually that there is no leakage of engine coolant.

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-247

2014 Note

FLUID COOLER HOSE
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FLUID COOLER HOSE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009300274

ALDIA0228ZZ

1.

CVT oil cooler

2.

Hoses

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009300275

NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-16, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect oil cooler hoses.
Remove oil cooler bolts.
Remove oil cooler assembly.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
After installation be sure to check the CVT fluid and add the specified CVT fluid as necessary. Refer to TM224, «Inspection».
CAUTION:
Do not reuse hose clamps.

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009300276

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».
Revision: April 2013

TM-248

2014 Note

PLUG
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

PLUG

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009020051

Replace the O-ring if oil leakage or exudes from the plug.

B

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020052

C

TM

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
JSDIA1889GB

1.

Plug

4.

Plug

2.

O-ring

3.

L

O-ring

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020053

REMOVAL

M

N

Remove the plugs and O-rings.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to O-rings.

O

P

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020054

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check for CVT fluid leakage. Refer to TM-224, «Inspection».

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust the CVT fluid level. Refer to TM-225, «Adjustment».
Revision: April 2013

TM-249

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009020055

JSDIA1890ZZ

1.
A

Transaxle assembly
: For the tightening torque, refer to TM-250, «Removal and Installation».

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009020056

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
• Perform these steps after the coolant temperature has cooled sufficiently.
NOTE:
• When removing components such as hoses, tubes/line, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spilling.
• When replacing the TCM and transaxle assembly as a set, replace the transaxle assembly first and then
replace the TCM. Refer to TM-126, «Description».

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove the engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-86, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors and harnesses.
• For CVT unit harness connector.
• Transmission position switch harness connector

Revision: April 2013

TM-250

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Primary speed sensor harness connector
• Secondary speed sensor harness connector
• Output speed sensor harness connector
• Ground
3. Rotate the crankshaft and remove the nuts that secure the drive plate to the torque converter from the stator motor mount.
CAUTION:
When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
4.

A

B

C

Remove the bolts (engine to transaxle) that fasten the transaxle
assembly and engine assembly.
TM

E

F
JSDIA1839ZZ

Bolt position
Direction of insertion
Quantity
Nominal length [mm (in)]

A

B

Transaxle assembly ⇒
Engine assembly

D

G

Engine assembly ⇒ Transaxle assembly

2

2

1

3

40 (1.57)

44 (1.73)

69 (2.72)

49 (1.93)

Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

5.

C

48.0 (4.9, 35)

H

I

Remove transaxle assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure transaxle assembly to a suitable jack.

J

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Apply Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 to the O-rings.
• When installing the transaxle assembly onto the engine assembly,
check the engagement of the dowel pins ( ).

K

L

M

N

JSDIA1184ZZ

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-251

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• When using suitable tool (A) for alignment, install it to the alignment stud bolt used to align the torque converter to the drive plate.

JPDIA0683ZZ

• Rotate the crankshaft so that the alignment hole (A) of drive plate
aligns with the position of the torque converter alignment stud bolt.
CAUTION:
• Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the front of
the engine).
• Be careful that torque converter stud bolts are aligned to the
drive plate holes. Otherwise the stud bolts contact the drive
plate.
• Insert the alignment stud bolt of torque converter into the alignment hole of the drive plate, aligning the drive plate holes with the
torque converter stud bolts.
JPDIA0684ZZ
CAUTION:
Be careful not to strike the drive plate with the torque converter stud bolts.
• When installing the torque converter nuts, temporarily tighten the nuts. Then, after installing the engine and
transaxle assembly bolts tighten the nuts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque

: 51 N·m (5.2 kg-m, 38 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
• Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (as viewed from the front of the engine).
• Check the tightening torque for the crankshaft pulley bolts after the bolts fastening the drive plate
and torque converter have been tightened and the crankshaft pulley bolts have been secured.
Refer to EM-51, «Removal and Installation».
• Install the transaxle assembly and engine assembly bolts according to the following standards.

JSDIA1839ZZ

Bolt position
Direction of insertion
Quantity
Nominal length [mm (in)]

A

B

Transaxle assembly ⇒
Engine assembly

C

D

Engine assembly ⇒ Transaxle assembly

2

2

1

3

40 (1.57)

44 (1.73)

69 (2.72)

49 (1.93)

Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

48.0 (4.9, 35)

Inspection and Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009020057

INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

TM-252

2014 Note

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the distance (A) between the converter housing and torque
converter.
(B)

: Scale

(C)

: Straightedge

Dimension (A)

A

B

: TM-255, «Torque Converter»
C
JSDIA1840ZZ

TM

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items:
• For CVT position, refer to TM-228, «Inspection».
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item

Before starting engine

Engine running

After engine stopped

Engine coolant

Level

Leakage

Level

Engine oil

Level

Leakage

Level

A/T and CVT Models

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Leakage

M/T Models

Level/Leakage

Leakage

Level/Leakage

Level

Leakage

Level

Leakage

Leakage

Leakage

—

Leakage

—

Transmission/
transaxle fluid
Other oils and fluids*
Fuel
Exhaust gas

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Adjust the CVT fluid level. TM-225, «Adjustment».
• Perform «ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY». Refer to TM-127,
«Description».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-253

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification

INFOID:0000000009020058

Engine model

HR16DE

Drive type

2WD
Transaxle model

RE0F11A

Stall torque ratio

1.91 : 1

Pulley ratio

Transaxle

Auxiliary gearbox gear
ratio

Forward

2.200 – 0.550

Reverse

2.200

1GR

1.821

2GR

1.000

Reverse

1.714

Counter gear

0.967

Final drive

3.882
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3*1

Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity (Approx.)
Remarks

6.9 liter (6-1/8 Imp qt)*2

7.1 liter (6-1/4 Imp qt)*2

Not applicable

Applicable

CVT fluid cooler (air-cooling)

CAUTION:
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Do not mix with other fluid.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage
the CVT, which is not covered by the (NISSAN new vehicle limited) warranty.
*1: Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».
*2: The CVT fluid capacity is the reference value.

Shift Characteristics

INFOID:0000000009020059

Unit: rpm

Throttle position

2/8

8/8

Engine speed

Shift pattern

At 40 km/h (25 MPH)

At 60 km/h (37 MPH)

“D” position (Overdrive control OFF)

1,400 – 2,700

1,500 – 3,100

“D” position (Overdrive control ON)

1,500 – 2,700

2,400 – 3,200

“L” position

3,000 – 3,800

3,800 – 4,600

“D” position (Overdrive control OFF)

3,900 – 4,700

4,500 – 5,300

“D” position (Overdrive control ON)

3,600 – 4,400

4,300 – 5,100

“L” position

3,600 – 4,400

4,300 – 5,100

CAUTION:
Lock-up is engaged at the vehicle speed of approximately 10 km/h (11 MPH) to 90 km/h (56 MPH).

Stall Speed

INFOID:0000000009020060

Unit: rpm

Stall speed

Revision: April 2013

2,420 – 2,870

TM-254

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[CVT: RE0F11A]

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Line Pressure

INFOID:0000000009020061

A
Unit: MPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

Shift selector position
“P” and “N”
“R” and “D”

Engine speed

Line pressure

B

At idle

0.40 (4, 4.1, 58)

At idle

0.40 (4, 4.1, 58) – 1.39 (13.9, 14.2, 201.6)

At stall

4.20 (42, 42.8, 609) – 4.70 (47, 47.9, 681.5)

Torque Converter

C

INFOID:0000000009020062

TM
Distance (A) between the converter housing and torque converter

16.2 mm

Heater Thermostat

INFOID:0000000009020063

E

Standard

Valve lift

More than 5.0 mm (0.197 in)

F

Reference value

Valve opening temperature

71°C (160°F)

Minimum valve lift

G

5.0 mm/85°C (0.197 in/203°F)

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

TM-255

2014 Note

VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER

SECTION

VTL

VENTILATION SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Special Service Tool …………………………………………. 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE ……………………………….. 5
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………. 6
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE ………………………………… 6
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………. 6
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT …………………………….. 6
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………. 6

F

G

H

VTL

CENTER DEFROSTER DUCT ……………………………… 6
CENTER DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation …………………………………………………………. 6

J

SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT …………………………………… 7
SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation ………………………………………………………………. 7

K

DUCT AND GRILLE …………………………………….. 5

FOOT DUCT ………………………………………………………. 7
FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation ……………… 7

L

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 5

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR ………………………….. 8

CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE ………………………….. 5
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and
Installation ……………………………………………………….. 5

Exploded View …………………………………………………. 8
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 8

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4
VENTILATION SYSTEM ………………………………. 4
System Description …………………………………………… 4

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 5

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

VTL-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009643745

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009435052

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

VTL-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009429691

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

C

D

E
AWJIA0483ZZ

F

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009429692

G

(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

( — )
Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

H

VTL

PIIB1407E

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

VTL-3

2014 Note

VENTILATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
VENTILATION SYSTEM
System Description

INFOID:0000000009429695

OUTLINE
The ventilation system is controlled by the front air control.

AIR FLOW
Front

AWIIA1690ZZ

×: Applicable

AIR OUTLET
MODE/DEF setting

Revision: April 2013

Ventilator

Foot (3)

Defroster (4)

×

—

—

×

×

×

—

—

×

×

×

—

×

×

×

—

×

—

×

Center (1)

Side (2)

×

VTL-4

2014 Note

DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A

DUCT AND GRILLE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014885

B

FRONT
C

D

E

F

G

H

VTL

J

K
AWIIA1679ZZ

L

1.

Center defroster duct

2.

Side defroster duct (LH)

3.

Center ventilator duct

4.

Side ventilator grille (LH)

5.

Side defroster grille LH

6.

Heating and cooling unit assembly

7.

Foot duct (LH)

8.

Foot duct (RH)

9.

Center ventilator grille (LH)

10.

Cluster lid C

11.

Center ventilator grille (RH)

12.

Side defroster grille RH

13.

Instrument panel assembly

14.

Side ventilator grille (RH)

15.

Side defroster duct (RH)

M

CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE

N

CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405603

O

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-14, «Exploded View».
Release pawls and remove the center ventilator grille from cluster lid C.

P

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE

Revision: April 2013

VTL-5

2014 Note

DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405604

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove center ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-6, «CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Remove screw and the side ventilator grille.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE

SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405606

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-19, «FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Release side defroster grille pawls using a suitable tool and
remove.
: Pawl

AWJIA1098ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Visually check the pawls for deformation and damage during installation. Replace with a new component if necessary.
• When installing side defroster grille, check that all pawls are securely placed into instrument panel
assembly.

CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT

CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405607

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove side defroster ducts. Refer to VTL-7, «SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Remove center defroster duct. Refer to VTL-6, «CENTER DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation».
Remove screw and center ventilator duct from instrument panel assembly.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

CENTER DEFROSTER DUCT

CENTER DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405608

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove screws and center defroster duct from instrument panel assembly.

INSTALLATION
Revision: April 2013

VTL-6

2014 Note

DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT

A

SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405609

B

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove screws and side defroster duct from instrument panel assembly.

C

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

D

FOOT DUCT

FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009405610

E

FOOT DUCT
Removal

1.
2.

F

Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, «Removal and Installation».
Remove screws and foot duct (LH/RH) from heating and cooling unit assembly.

G

Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

H

VTL

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

VTL-7

2014 Note

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009014886

AWIIA1465ZZ

1.

Heating and cooling unit assembly

2.

Front blower motor

Removal and Installation

3.

Front blower motor resistor
INFOID:0000000009405612

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-69, «Removal and Installation (Battery)».
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove knee bolster. Refer to IP-14, «Exploded View».
Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, «Removal and Installation».
Remove the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-19, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connectors from the front blower motor.
Disconnect the harness connector from the thermo control amp.
Remove the front blower motor screw (A).
Press the flange holding hook, turn the front blower motor counterclockwise and remove.

JMIIA1741ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

VTL-8

2014 Note

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

SECTION

WCS

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS

F

PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3

BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BUZZER)….13

PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 14

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3

COMBINATION METER …………………………….. 14

G

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 4

Reference Value ………………………………………………14
Fail-safe ………………………………………………………….16
DTC Index ………………………………………………………17

H

COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 4

BCM …………………………………………………………. 18

Component Parts Location …………………………………. 4
Combination Meter ……………………………………………. 4

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 5
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ………………………………… 5
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description
…… 5
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-safe ……………….. 6
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME ………………….. 6
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Light Reminder Warning ………………………………………………… 6
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME …… 7
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME
: Parking Brake Release Warning Chime ……………… 7
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ……………………………. 8
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Seat belt Warning ………………………………………………………………….. 8

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION
METER) ……………………………………………………… 9
On Board Diagnosis Function …………………………….. 9
CONSULT Function ………………………………………… 10

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………18

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 19
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ……………………….. 19
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..19

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 24

K

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….24

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 26

L

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT …. 26
COMBINATION METER ……………………………………..26
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure ….26

M

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM …………………………………27
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………………………………….27

WCS

METER BUZZER CIRCUIT …………………………. 28

O

Component Function Check ………………………………28
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….28

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….12
COMMON ITEM ………………………………………………… 12
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) …………………………………………….. 12

Description ………………………………………………………29
Component Function Check …………………………….29
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….29
Component Inspection ………………………………………30

Revision: April 2013

J

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ……. 24

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ………………………………………………………… 29

BUZZER …………………………………………………………… 12

I

WCS-1

2014 Note

P

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT …………………………………………………………. 31
Component Function Check …………………………….. 31
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 31
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 32

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 33
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING
CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT
SOUND …………………………………………………….. 33
Description …………………………………………………….. 33

Revision: April 2013

Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 33

THE SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING
CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT
SOUND …………………………………………………….. 34
Description …………………………………………………….. 34
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 34

THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES
NOT SOUND ……………………………………………… 35
Description …………………………………………………….. 35
Diagnosis Procedure ……………………………………….. 35

WCS-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009541255

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-3

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009541191

AWNIA3060ZZ

No.

Component

Function

1.

Parking brake switch

Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.

2.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BRC-6, «Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

BCM

Based on the signals received from various units and switches, transmits the buzzer output signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BCS-4, «BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location» for detailed installation location.

4.

Combination meter

• Receives a buzzer output signal from the BCM with CAN communication line and
sounds the buzzer.
• Controls the following with the vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication and the signals from
switches.
— Seat belt reminder warning chime
— Parking brake release warning chime
— Light reminder warning

5.

Seat belt buckle switch LH

Transmits a seat belt buckle switch signal LH to the combination meter.

3.

Combination Meter

INFOID:0000000009541192

The combination meter has a built-in buzzer 1 and sounds the following warnings, according to signals from each switch and unit.
• Light reminder warning
• Parking brake release warning chime
• Seat belt warning

AWNIA3061ZZ

Revision: April 2013

WCS-4

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM

A

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009541193

B

System Diagram
C

D

E

F

AWNIA2651GB

G

COMBINATION METER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)
H

Input signal
Signal name

Transmit unit

Vehicle speed signal

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Buzzer output signal

BCM

I

J

Output signal
Signal name
Vehicle speed signal

Reception unit

K

BCM

BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)

L

Input signal
Signal name
Vehicle speed signal

Transmit unit

M

Combination meter

Output signal
Signal name
Buzzer output signal

WCS
Reception unit
Combination meter

O

DESCRIPTION
Combination Meter
The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer installed in the combination meter when receiving the buzzer
output signal transmitted from each unit.
BCM
BCM receives signals from various units and transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter via
CAN communication if it judges that the warning buzzer should be activated.

WARNING CHIME FUNCTION LIST
Revision: April 2013

WCS-5

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Warning functions

Refer to

Light reminder warning

WCS-6, «LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Light Reminder Warning»

Parking brake release warning chime

WCS-7, «PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME :
Parking Brake Release Warning Chime»

Seat belt warning

WCS-8, «SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Seat belt Warning»

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009641654

The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function

Specifications

Buzzer

The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.

LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Light Reminder Warning

INFOID:0000000009541199

AWNIA2539GB

WARNING CHIME OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch

OFF or ACC position

Combination switch (Lighting switch)

1st or 2nd position

Driver side door

Open [front door switch LH ON]

WARNING CHIME CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch

ON

Combination switch (Lighting switch)

OFF or AUTO position

Driver side door

Close [front door switch LH OFF]

SIGNAL PATH
1.

BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges light reminder warning chime is
necessary from signals below.
Signal name

Ignition switch signal

Revision: April 2013

Signal source
—

WCS-6

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name

Signal source

Combination switch signal

Combination switch (Lighting switch)

Driver door switch signal

Front door switch LH

2.

A
BCM

B

BCM

Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM.
Signal name

C

Signal source

Buzzer output signal

BCM

D

Combination meter

PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME : Parking Brake Release Warning
Chime

E

INFOID:0000000009541201

F

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

G

H

I
JSNIA2422GB

WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS

J

If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions

K

Ignition switch

ON

Parking brake

During the operation (parking brake switch ON)

Vehicle speed

Approximately 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more

L

WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions are fulfilled.

M

Operation conditions
Ignition switch

OFF

Parking brake

Release condition (parking brake switch OFF)

Vehicle speed

Approximately 3 km/h (1.9 MPH) or less

WCS

O

SIGNAL PATH
Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer when it judges that parking brake release warning chime is necessary from signals below.
Signal name
Ignition switch signal

Revision: April 2013

Signal source
—

WCS-7

2014 Note

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name

Signal source

Parking brake switch signal

Parking brake switch

Vehicle speed signal

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

Combination meter
Combination meter

SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Seat belt Warning

INFOID:0000000009541203

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA2652GB

WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch

ON

Driver seat belt

Unfastened [seat belt buckle switch LH ON]

WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch

OFF

Driver seat belt

Fastened (seat belt buckle switch LH OFF)

6 seconds after the start of warning sound

SIGNAL PATH
1.

BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges seat belt warning chime is necessary from signals below.
Signal name

Signal source

Ignition switch signal
Seat belt buckle switch signal LH

2.

—
Seat belt buckle switch LH

Combination meter

BCM

Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM.
Signal name

Buzzer output signal

Revision: April 2013

Signal source
BCM

Combination meter

WCS-8

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
On Board Diagnosis Function

A
INFOID:0000000009641732

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM

B

Information display, speedometer and tachometer can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.

STARTING COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE

C

METHOD OF STARTING

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn ignition switch ON, and switch the trip meter to “trip A” or “trip B”.
Turn ignition switch to OFF.
While pressing the meter control switch (1), turn the ignition
switch ON.
Make sure that the trip meter displays “0000.0”.
Press the meter control switch (1) at least 3 times. (Within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON).

D

E

F

G
JSNIA3904ZZ

H

6.

The combination meter is turned to self-diagnosis mode.
• All segments of the information display and shift position indicator (A) for CVT models are displayed.

I

J

K
JSNIA3900ZZ

NOTE:
• Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit when the self-diagnosis mode of the combination
meter does not start. replace combination meter if power supply and ground circuit are normal.
• If any of the segments are not displayed, replace combination meter.
7.

L

M

Each meter activates by pressing the meter control switch.
WCS

O

P

AWNIA2440ZZ

Revision: April 2013

WCS-9

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
NOTE:
• If any of the meters or gauges is not activated, replace combination meter.
• The figure is reference.

CONSULT Function

INFOID:0000000009641733

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown.
METER/M&A Diagnosis mode

Description

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT

The combination meter self-diagnosis results.

Data Monitor

Displays combination meter input/output data in real time.

Warning History

Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.

SELF DIAG RESULT
Refer to MWI-20, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
X: Applicable

Display item [Unit]

MAIN
SIGNALS

Description

SPEED METER
[km/h] or [mph]

X

Displays the value of vehicle speed signal.

SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h] or [mph]

X

Displays the value of vehicle speed signal, which is transmitted to each unit with
CAN communication.

ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

Displays odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.

TACHO METER
[rpm]

X

Displays the value of engine speed signal, which is input from ECM.

FUEL METER
[L]

X

Displays the fuel level.

W TEMP METER
[°C] or [°F]

X

Displays the value of engine coolant temperature signal, which is input from ECM.

ABS W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of ABS warning indicator

BRAKE W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of brake warning indicator.

DOOR W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of door warning indicator.

HI-BEAM IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of high beam indicator.

TURN IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of turn indicator.

LIGHT IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of light indicator.

OIL W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of engine oil pressure warning indicator.

MIL
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of malfunction indicator.

CRUISE IND
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE indicator.

O/D OFF IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF indicator.

Revision: April 2013

WCS-10

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item [Unit]

MAIN
SIGNALS

Description

FUEL W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of low-fuel warning indicator.

O/D OFF SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of O/D OFF switch.

REAR DEF SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.

BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of brake switch.

EPS W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of EPS indicator.

CHAGE W/L
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of charge warning indicator.

SHIFT IND
[P, R, N, D, L]

Displays shift selector position.

FUEL CAP W/L
[Off]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of loose fuel cap warning message.

PKB SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of parking brake switch.

BUCKLE SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of seat belt buckle switch (LH).

BRAKE OIL SW
[ON/OFF]

Status of brake fluid level switch.

DISTANCE
[km] or [Mi]

Displays distance to empty.

BUZZER
[ON/OFF]

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
X

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of buzzer.

FR FOG IND
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of front fog lamp indicator.

KEY G/Y W/L
[ON/OFF]

Displays [ON/OFF] condition of Intelligent Key warning lamp.

J

K

NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.

L

WARNING HISTORY
Display item
W/L ON HISTORY

Description

M

Lighting history of warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.

W/L ON HISTORY
• Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
WCS
• “W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/ indicator lamp is turned on.
• The “TIME” above is:
— 0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine
O
and waiting for 30 seconds.
— 1 — 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition.
— NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp.
NOTE:
P
• W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts.
• Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets
low.

Revision: April 2013

WCS-11

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009641652

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

BUZZER

Revision: April 2013

WCS-12

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM — BUZZER)

INFOID:0000000009641653

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]
PUSH -SW [On/Off]

B

Description
Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of combination switch.

FR FOG SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front fog lamp switch.

DOOR SW-DR [On/Off]

Indicates condition of front door switch LH.

CDL LOCK SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.

C

D

E

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
LIGHT WARN ALM

Description

F

This test is able to check light warning chime operation [On/Off].

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-13

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
COMBINATION METER
Reference Value

INFOID:0000000009641717

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item

Data monitor

Display content

Condition

Reference value in normal operation

SPEED METER
[km/h or mph]

Speed meter
operation

While driving

Vehicle speed matches speed meter

SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

Vehicle speed

While driving

The speed output signal value via CAN
communication is approx. value of vehicle speed.

ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]

ODO meter operation

Driving

Distance driven

TACHO METER
[rpm]

Tacho meter
operation

Engine running

The tacho meter is approx. value of engine speed via CAN communication.

FUEL METER
[L]

Fuel level

Ignition ON

Fuel level is approx. value of fuel
gauge.

W TEMP METER
[°C] or [°F]

Engine coolant
temperature

Engine running

Input value of engine coolant temperature signal via CAN communication.

ABS W/L

ABS warning
lamp

When ABS warning lamp is ON

On

When ABS warning lamp is OFF

Off

BRAKE W/L

Brake warning
lamp

When Brake warning lamp is ON

On*

When Brake warning lamp is OFF

Off

DOOR W/L

Door open
warning lamp

When Door warning lamp is ON

On

When Door warning lamp is OFF

Off

HI-BEAM IND

HI-Beam indicator lamp

When High-beam indicator lamp is ON

On

When High-beam indicator lamp is OFF

Off

TURN IND

Turn signal indicator

When Turn signal indicator lamp is ON

On

When Turn signal indicator lamp is OFF

Off

LIGHT IND

Light indicator

When Tail lamp indicator lamp is ON

On

When Tail lamp indicator lamp is OFF

Off

FR FOG IND

Front fog lamp
indicator

Front fog lamp indicator lamp ON

On

Front fog lamp indicator lamp OFF

Off

When engine oil pressure warning lamp is
ON

On

OIL W/L

Engine oil pressure warning
light

When engine oil pressure warning lamp is
OFF

Off

When Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is
ON

On

When Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is
OFF

Off

Cruise indicator
lamp

When cruise indicator lamp is ON.

ON

When cruise indicator lamp is OFF.

Off

O/D OFF indicator

When O/D OFF indicator lamp is OFF.

Off

When O/D OFF indicator lamp is ON.

On

MIL

CRUISE IND
O/D OFF IND

Revision: April 2013

MIL warning
lamp

WCS-14

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item

Data monitor

Display content

O/D OFF SW

O/D OFF
switch
Rear defogger
switch

REAR DEF SW

Condition

Reference value in normal operation

When O/D OFF switch is pressed to OFF.

Off

When O/D OFF switch is pressed to ON.

On

When rear defogger switch is pressed to
ON

On

When rear defogger is pressed to Off

Off

When brake pedal is applied

On

When brake pedal is released

Off
On

BRAKE SW

Brake switch

FUEL W/L

Low fuel warning

When low fuel warning is ON
When low fuel warning is Off

Off

EPS W/L

EPS warning
lamp

EPS warning lamp ON

On

EPS warning lamp OFF

Off

CHAGE W/L

Charge warning lamp

Engine running

Off

SHIFT IND

Shift position
indicator

The position of the shift position selector.

FUEL CAP W/L

Loose fuel cap
warning

Loose fuel filler cap warning is On

On

Loose fuel filler cap warning is Off

Off

PKB SW

Parking brake
switch

When parking brake is active

On

When parking brake is inactive

Off

BUCKLE SW

Seat belt buckle switch LH

When seat belt buckle is unfastened (LH).

On

When seat belt buckle is fastened (LH).

Off

BRAKE OIL SW

Brake fluid level
switch

When brake fluid level switch ON

On

When brake fluid level switch OFF

Off

DISTANCE

Distance to
empty

BUZZER

Buzzer operation

While driving

A

B

C

D

E

F

[P, R, N, D, L]

G

H

I

J

[km/h or mph]

When Buzzer is ON

On

When Buzzer is OFF

Off

K

*: Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts, the parking brake switch
is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON.

L

TERMINAL LAYOUT
M

WCS

O
JSNIA5390ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
No.

Wire
color

1

L

2

P

P
Condition
Ignition
switch

Operation or condition

Reference value (V)
(Approx.)

CAN-H

—

—

—

CAN-L

—

—

—

Item

Revision: April 2013

WCS-15

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal
No.

Wire
color

3

SB

4

Condition
Ignition
switch

Operation or condition

Reference value (V)
(Approx.)

2P/R

—

—

—

LG

8P/R

—

—

—

6

W

Fuel level sensor signal (+)

—

—

7

V

Air bag

—

—

8

P

O/D OFF switch

ON

9

V

Seat belt buckle switch LH

ON

10

SB

Parking Brake switch

ON

11

BR

Brake fluid level switch

ON

15

R

18

R/Y

21

B

22

B

23

B

24

Item

Refer to MWI-42, «Component Inspection».
—

O/D OFF switch pressed

0

O/D OFF switch released

Battery voltage

Unfastened (ON)

0

Fastened (OFF)

Battery voltage

Parking brake is inactive
Parking brake is active

0
Battery voltage

Brake fluid level low
Brake fluid level normal

0
Battery voltage

Ignition switch ON or ACC

—

—

Battery voltage

Security

—

—

—

Ground

—

—

0

GR

Fuel level sensor ground (-)

ON

—

0

27

R/W

Battery power supply

OFF

—

Battery voltage

28

GR

Ignition switch ON or START

ON

—

Battery voltage

38

Y

Generator

Generator voltage low

ON

Generator voltage normal

0
Battery voltage

Fail-safe

INFOID:0000000009641718

The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function

Specifications

Speedometer

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Tachometer
Illumination control

When suspending communication, changes to nighttime mode.

Shift position indicator

When suspending communication, not indicate.
Current fuel consumption
Trip computer

Information display

Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty

Buzzer

Revision: April 2013

• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last result calculated during normal condition is
indicated.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Reset to zero by suspending communication.

Odo/trip meter

An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.

WCS-16

2014 Note

COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Function

Specifications

A

ABS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
EPS warning lamp

The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.

B

Brake warning lamp
High beam indicator lamp

C

Turn signal indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp

Door warning lamp
Light indicator lamp

D

Engine oil pressure warning lamp

The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.

Key warning lamp

E

O/D OFF indicator lamp
Shift P warning lamp
Engine start operation indicator lamp

DTC Index

F
INFOID:0000000009641719

G
Display contents of CONSULT

Diagnostic item is detected when…

Refer to

CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]

When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal for
2 seconds or more.

MWI-34

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]

When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination
meter.

MWI-35

VEHICLE SPEED
[B2205]

The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-36

ENGINE SPEED
[B2267]

If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or more.

MWI-37

WATER TEMP
[B2268]

If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or more.

MWI-38

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-17

2014 Note

BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

BCM
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009014787

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

WCS-18

2014 Note

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009014788

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

AANWA0863GB

Revision: April 2013

WCS-19

2014 Note

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1730GB

Revision: April 2013

WCS-20

2014 Note

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O
AANIA1731GB

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-21

2014 Note

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AANIA1732GB

Revision: April 2013

WCS-22

2014 Note

WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O
ABNIA4579GB

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-23

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009014789

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSNIA4485GB

DETAILED FLOW

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SYMPTOM
• Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Check if any other malfunctions are present.
>> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK CONSULT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1.

Connect CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to WCS-17, «DTC Index».

Revision: April 2013

WCS-24

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Are self-diagnosis results normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.

A

B

4.NARROW DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts.

C

>> GO TO 5.

5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS

D

Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repairing or replacing malfunctioning parts.

E

>> GO TO 6.

6.FINAL CHECK

F

Check that the warning buzzer in the combination meter operates normally.
Does it operate normally?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 1.

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-25

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009549388

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to MWI-22, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Power source

Fuse No.

Battery

8

Ignition switch ON or START

3

Ignition switch ACC or ON

18

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.

2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.

Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24, terminals 27, 28, 15 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector

Terminal

Ignition switch position
(–)

27
M24

28

OFF

ACC

ON

START

Battery voltage

Battery voltage

Battery
voltage

Battery voltage

0V

0V

Battery
voltage

Battery voltage

0V

Battery voltage

Battery
voltage

0V

Ground

15

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.GROUND

1.
2.
3.

CIRCUIT CHECK

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24, terminals 21, 22, 23 and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector

Terminal

(–)

Continuity

21
M24

22

Ground

Yes

23

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
Revision: April 2013

WCS-26

2014 Note

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM

A

BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009725669

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.
Terminal No.

D

Signal name

57

Fuses and fusible link No.

70

E

12 (10A)

Battery power supply

G (40A)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.

G

Disconnect BCM connector M99.
Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.
H
BCM
Connector

Terminal

Voltage

—

Battery voltage

I

57

M99

Ground

70

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

J

3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

K

Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
L

BCM
Connector

Terminal

M99

67

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-27

2014 Note

METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009541214

1.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER
1. Select BUZZER of BCM(BUZZER) on CONSULT.
2. Perform LIGHT WARN ALM of Active Test.
Does meter buzzer beep?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

Select the DATA MONITOR for the METER/MA and check the BUZZER monitor value.
BUZZER
Under the condition of buzzer input

: On

Except above

: Off

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541215

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WCS-19, «Wiring Diagram».

1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF COMBINATION METER
Check power supply of combination meter. Refer to WCS-26, «COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Repair power supply circuit of combination meter.

Revision: April 2013

WCS-28

2014 Note

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009541216

Transmits a seat belt buckle switch LH signal to the combination meter.

B

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009541217

1. CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

C

Select DATA MONITOR for METER/M&A and check the SEAT BELT W/L monitor value.
Monitor Item
BUCKLE SW

Condition

Status

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is fastened

OFF

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is unfastened

ON

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Refer to WCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541218

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WCS-19, «Wiring Diagram».
H

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 9 and ground.
Combination meter
Connector

Terminal

M24

9

Condition

Voltage
(Approx.)

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is fastened

12 V

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is unfastened

0V

Ground

—

I

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
M
Disconnect combination meter harness connector M24 and seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat) harness connector B16.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 9 and seat belt buckle
WCS
switch LH (driver seat) harness connector B13 terminal 1.
Combination meter

4.

K

L

2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.

J

Seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat)

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M24

9

B13

1

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 9 and ground.
Combination meter
Connector

Terminal

M24

9

P

Ground

Continuity

—

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
Revision: April 2013

WCS-29

O

2014 Note

SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat) harness connector B13 terminal 2 and
ground.
Seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat)
Connector

Terminal

B13

2

Ground

Continuity

—

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check the seat belt buckle switch LH. Refer to SR-24, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541219

1. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat).
Check continuity between the seat belt buckle switch LH (driver seat) terminals 1 and 2.
Terminal
1

Condition
2

Continuity

When seat belt is fastened

No

When seat belt is unfastened

Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH. Refer to SR-24, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WCS-30

2014 Note

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009643757

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION

B

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when parking brake is actuated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to WCS-31, «Diagnosis Procedure».

C

Diagnosis Procedure

D

INFOID:0000000009643758

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WCS-19, «Wiring Diagram».

E

1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION

F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
3. Check connectors and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Repair or replace as necessary.

G

H

2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Check parking brake switch. Refer to WCS-32, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

I

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

J

With CONSULT.
Connect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
In DATA MONITOR select PARK BRAKE SW and check parking brake switch signal.
Condition

DATA MONITOR

Actuate parking brake

On

Release parking brake

Off

K

L

M

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to WCS-24, «Work Flow».
NO
>> GO TO 4.

WCS

4.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 terminal 10 and parking brake switch connector M17 terminal 1.
Combination meter

4.

Parking brake switch

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M24

10

M17

1

Continuity
Yes

Check continuity between combination meter connector and ground.

Revision: April 2013

WCS-31

2014 Note

O

P

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Combination meter
Connector

Terminal

M24

10

—

Continuity

Ground

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009643759

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect parking brake switch connector.
Check continuity between parking brake switch terminal 1 and ground.

Parking brake switch terminal

—

1

Ground

Condition

Continuity

Parking brake actuated

Yes

Parking brake released

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

Revision: April 2013

WCS-32

2014 Note

THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR
DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR
DOES NOT SOUND
Description

B

INFOID:0000000009541244

• The parking brake warning buzzer sounds continuously during vehicle travel though the parking brake is
released.
• The parking brake warning buzzer does not sound at all even though driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied.

Diagnosis Procedure

C

D

INFOID:0000000009541245

1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.

A

E

Start the engine.
Check the operation of the brake warning lamp by operating the parking brake.
F
Combination meter
Brake warning lamp

Condition

Status

When parking brake is applied

ON

When parking brake is released

OFF

G

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

H

2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

I

Check the parking brake switch. Refer to WCS-32, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, «Exploded View».

J

3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to BRC-58, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-33

2014 Note

THE SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES
NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR
DOES NOT SOUND
Description

INFOID:0000000009541246

• Seat belt reminder warning does not sound.
• Seat belt reminder warning sounds continuously.

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541247

1.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check operation of seat belt warning lamp in combination meter.
Combination meter
Seat belt warning lamp

Condition

Status

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is fastened

OFF

When seat belt LH (driver seat) is unfastened

ON

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the seat belt buckle switch LH signal circuit. Refer to WCS-29, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.

3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH LH

Check seat belt buckle switch LH. Refer to WCS-30, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace seat belt buckle LH. Refer to SR-24, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WCS-34

2014 Note

THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Description

A
INFOID:0000000009541248

Light reminder warning chime does not sound even though headlamps are illuminated.

Diagnosis Procedure

B
INFOID:0000000009541249

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL

C

Select the Data Monitor for the METER/M&A and check the BUZZER monitor value.
Monitor Item
BUZZER

Condition

Status

Under the condition of buzzer input

ON

Except above

OFF

D

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 2.

F

2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Check the driver side door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-84, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.

G

H

3.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check the driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-85, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Replace driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-158, «Removal and Installation».

I

J

K

L

M

WCS

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WCS-35

2014 Note

SUSPENSION

SECTION

WT

ROAD WHEELS & TIRES

A

B

C

D

WT

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 2
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 2
Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel …… 2

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 3
PREPARATION …………………………………………… 3
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 3

WHEEL AND TIRE ……………………………………… 5
Adjustment ………………………………………………………. 5

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ……………. 8

G

WHEEL AND TIRE ……………………………………… 8
Exploded View …………………………………………………. 8
Removal and Installation …………………………………… 8

H

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………. 9

I

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE …………………….. 4

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ………………………………………………………… 9

WHEEL ………………………………………………………. 4

Wheel …………………………………………………………….. 9
Tire Air Pressure ………………………………………………. 9

Inspection ………………………………………………………… 4

F

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WT-1

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

INFOID:0000000009445894

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel

INFOID:0000000009443478

• Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel is designed for each type of vehicle. Use it on the specified vehicle only.
• Use Genuine NISSAN parts for the road wheels, valve caps and wheel nuts.
• Always use them after adjusting the wheel balance. For the balance weights, use Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel weights.
• Use caution when handling the aluminum wheels, because they can be easily scratched. When removing
dirt, do not use any abrasives, a wire brush, or other items that may scratch the coating. Use a neutral detergent if a detergent is needed.
• After driving on roads scattered with anti-icing salts, wash off the wheels completely.
• When installing road wheels onto the vehicle, always wipe off any dirt or foreign substances to prevent them
from being trapped between the contact surfaces of wheel.
• Do not apply oil to nut and bolt threads.
• When tightening the valve cap there is a risk of damaging the valve cap if a tool is used. Tighten by hand.

Revision: April 2013

WT-2

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009443480

Tool name

Description

Power tool

Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

B

C

D

WT
PIIB1407E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WT-3

2014 Note

WHEEL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
WHEEL
Inspection
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.

INFOID:0000000009641735

Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a balancer machine.
Set dial indicator as shown.
Check runout, if runout value exceeds the limit, replace wheel.
Limit
Axial Runout (A)
Radial Runout (B)

Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».
Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».

SEIA0737E

Revision: April 2013

WT-4

2014 Note

WHEEL AND TIRE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >

WHEEL AND TIRE

A

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009641736

BALANCING WHEELS (ADHESIVE WEIGHT TYPE)

B

Preparation Before Adjustment
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel and tire. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced
adhesive tape from the wheel and tire.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the wheel and tire during removal.
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean all traces of releasing agent from the wheel
and tire.

C

D

Wheel Balance Adjustment
CAUTION:
WT
• DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may result. Use only rim-type or
universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel during servicing.
• If a balancer machine has an adhesive weight mode setting, select the adhesive weight mode setting and F
skip Step 2 below. If a balancer machine only has the clip-on (rim flange) weight mode setting, follow Step 2
to calculate the correct size adhesive weight.
G
1. Set wheel and tire on balancer machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the balancer machine.
2. For balancer machines that only have a clip-on (rim flange) weight mode setting, follow this step to calculate the correct size adhesive weight to use. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the
balancer machine indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 5/3 (1.67) to determine balance weight that H
should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value above and
install in to the designated outer position of or at the designated angle in relation to the wheel and tire.
a. Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 (1.67) = balance weight to be
I
installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 (1.67) = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 40 g (1.41 oz)
J
balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
NOTE:
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
K
Example:
37.4 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 ⇒ 40 g (1.41 oz)
L
SMA054D

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WT-5

2014 Note

WHEEL AND TIRE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Install balance weight in the position shown.
CAUTION:
• Do not install the inner balance weight before installing
the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of the wheel and tire.
• When installing balance weight (1) to wheel and tire, set it into
the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the wheel and tire as
shown so that the balance weight center (B) is aligned with the
balancer machine indication position (angle) (C).
CAUTION:
• Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesive balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Do not install more than three sheets of balance
weights.

JPEIC0040ZZ

4.

5.
6.

7.
8.

If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
Start balancer machine again.
Install balance weight on inner side of wheel and tire in the balancer machine indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start balancer machine. Make sure that inner and outer residual
imbalance values are 5 g (0.17 oz) each or below.
If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.17 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance

Maximum allowable imbalance

Dynamic (At flange)

PEIA0033E

Static (At flange)

Refer to WT-9, «Wheel».

TIRE ROTATION
• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.
Refer to MA-7, «FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance» (FOR
MEXICO), or MA-9, «EXCEPT FOR MEXICO : Periodic Maintenance» (EXCEPT FOR MEXICO).
• Rotate the wheel and tires front to back in the pattern as shown.
• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified
torque.
WARNING:
• After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven
for 1,000 km (600 mi) (also in case of a flat tire, etc.).
• Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires.

SMA829C

CAUTION:
• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to
prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Revision: April 2013

WT-6

2014 Note

WHEEL AND TIRE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Be careful not to tighten the wheel nuts to a torque exceeding specification to prevent strain on the
disc rotor.
• Use Genuine NISSAN wheel nuts.
Wheel nut tightening
torque

: WT-8, «Exploded View»

A

B

C

D

WT

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WT-7

2014 Note

WHEEL AND TIRE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WHEEL AND TIRE
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009446829

JSGIA0969GB

1.

Wheel and tire

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009446830

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove wheel nuts using power tool.
Remove wheel and tire.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

WT-8

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel

INFOID:0000000009443523

B

ALUMINUM WHEEL
Item
Axial runout

Runout

Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)

Radial runout

Allowable imbalance

C

Limit

Dynamic (At flange)

D

Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)

Static (At flange)

Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)

Tire Air Pressure

WT
INFOID:0000000009443524

Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Tire size
P195/55R16 86H
P185/65R15 88H
T125/70D15

F

Cold tire pressure
Front

Rear

Spare

230 (2.3, 33)

230 (2.3, 33)

—

—

—

420 (4.2, 60)

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WT-9

2014 Note

DRIVER CONTROLS

SECTION

WW

WIPER & WASHER

A

B

C

D

E

CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ……………………………………….. 3
PRECAUTIONS …………………………………………… 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER» …………………………………………………………. 3
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ………………….. 3
Precaution for Work ………………………………………….. 3

COMMON ITEM …………………………………………………14
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ……………………………………………..14
WIPER ………………………………………………………………14
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM — WIPER) …….15

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ………………. 16

PREPARATION …………………………………….. 5

Diagnosis Description ……………………………………….16
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) ………………………..17

PREPARATION …………………………………………… 5

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ………….. 20

Special Service Tools ………………………………………… 5
Commercial Service Tool …………………………………… 5

BCM, IPDM E/R …………………………………………. 20

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ………………………… 6
COMPONENT PARTS …………………………………. 6
Component Parts Location …………………………………. 6
Component Description …………………………………….. 6

SYSTEM …………………………………………………….. 8
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ………………. 8
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Diagram …………………………………………………….. 8
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description ………………………………………………… 8
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit
Diagram …………………………………………………………. 10
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : FailSafe ………………………………………………………………. 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ………………. 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Diagram …………………………………………………………. 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Description …………………………………………………….. 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit
Diagram …………………………………………………………. 13

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ……………………….14
Revision: April 2013

List of ECU Reference ………………………………………20

F

G

H

I

J

WIRING DIAGRAM ……………………………….. 21
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM …….. 21

K

Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..21

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ………. 25 WW
Wiring Diagram ………………………………………………..25

BASIC INSPECTION …………………………….. 30
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW …….. 30

M

Work Flow ……………………………………………………….30

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ……………………. 32

N

WIPER AND WASHER FUSE ……………………… 32
Description ………………………………………………………32
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..32

FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT ………….. 33
Component Function Check ………………………………33
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..33

FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT …………… 35
Component Function Check ………………………………35
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………..35

WW-1

2014 Note

O

P

FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT …………………………………………………………. 37
Component Function Check …………………………….. 37
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 37

FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT … 39
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 39

WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment ………………………. 56
WASHER TUBE ……………………………………………….. 56
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation ……….. 56
WASHER TUBE : Inspection ……………………………. 57

FRONT WIPER ARM ………………………………….. 58

Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 40

Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 58
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 58
Adjustment …………………………………………………….. 59

WASHER SWITCH …………………………………….. 41

FRONT WIPER BLADE ………………………………. 60

WASHER MOTOR CIRCUIT ……………………….. 40

Description …………………………………………………….. 41
Component Inspection …………………………………….. 41

REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT …………………. 43
Component Function Check …………………………….. 43
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 43

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 60

FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY …………….. 61
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 61
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 61
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 62
Disassembly and Assembly ……………………………… 62

REAR WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
… 45

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH …………………. 63

Component Function Check …………………………….. 45
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 45

REAR WIPER ARM ……………………………………. 64

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ……………………….. 46
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
… 46
Symptom Table ……………………………………………… 46

FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ………… 49
Description …………………………………………………….. 49
Diagnosis Procedure ………………………………………. 49

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ……………. 51
Description …………………………………………………….. 51

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION …………… 52
WASHER TANK ………………………………………… 52
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 52
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 52

FRONT WASHER MOTOR ………………………….. 54
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 54
Removal and Installation …………………………………. 54

FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE ……….. 55
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 55
WASHER NOZZLE …………………………………………… 55
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation …… 55

Revision: April 2013

Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 63
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 64
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 64
Adjustment …………………………………………………….. 65

REAR WIPER BLADE ………………………………… 66
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 66

REAR WIPER MOTOR ……………………………….. 67
Exploded View ……………………………………………….. 67
Removal and Installation ………………………………….. 67

REAR WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE …………. 68
Component Parts Location ………………………………. 68
WASHER NOZZLE ……………………………………………. 68
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ……. 68
WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment ………………………. 68
WASHER TUBE ……………………………………………….. 69
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation ……….. 69

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) …………………………………………………. 71
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ……………………………………………………….. 71
Specifications …………………………………………………. 71

WW-2

2014 Note

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >

PRECAUTION

A

PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) «AIR BAG» and «SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER»

B

INFOID:0000000009578755

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

Procedure without Cowl Top Cover

INFOID:0000000009578757

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. to prevent damage to
the windshield.

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M
PIIB3706J

Precaution for Work

INFOID:0000000009578756

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
— Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Oily dirt:
Revision: April 2013

WW-3

2014 Note

N

O

P

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
— Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
— For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: April 2013

WW-4

2014 Note

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >

PREPARATION

A

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

INFOID:0000000009578779

B

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

—
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set

Removing trim components

C

D

E
AWJIA0483ZZ

F

Commercial Service Tool

INFOID:0000000009645416

Tool name

Description

Washer nozzle adjuster

Adjusting washer nozzle

G

H

I
JSLIA0149ZZ

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-5

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009541130

AWLIA2151ZZ

A.

Front and rear washer motor B.
(view with RF fender protector removed)

D.

Rear wiper motor

Front wiper motor
(view with cowl top removed)

Component Description

Revision: April 2013

C.

Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)

INFOID:0000000009541131

WW-6

2014 Note

COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.

Component

Function

A

1.

BCM

• Monitors combination switch status by performing the combination switch reading function.
• Sends front wiper relay and front wiper high relay ON signals to IPDM E/R.

2.

IPDM E/R

• Controls front wiper relay and front wiper high relay.
• Performs the auto stop control of the front wiper.

B

3.

Front and rear washer motor

• Washer fluid sprayed according to washer switch states.
• Combination switch operates front washer or rear washer by changing voltage polarity to be supplied to washer pump.

C

4.

Front wiper motor

• Drives windshield wipers in HI or LO mode.
• Sends wiper stop signal to IPDM E/R.

Combination switch
(Wiper and washer switch)

• Provides input for wiper and washer control to BCM.
• Refer to WW-8, «FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description» for more information.

D

5.

6.

Rear wiper motor

• BCM controls rear wiper operation.
• Sends wiper stop signal to BCM.

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-7

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Diagram

INFOID:0000000009541132

AWLIA2154GB

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description

INFOID:0000000009541133

FRONT WIPER CONTROL (BASIC)
1.
2.
3.
4.

BCM detects the combination switch position by the combination switch reading function.
BCM transmits the front wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
IPDM E/R controls the integrated front wiper relay and front wiper high relay based on the status of the
front wiper request signal.
IPDM E/R provides power to operate the front wiper motor.

LOW SPEED OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Ignition switch ON.
Front wiper switch in LO or MIST position.
BCM reads the combination switch position and transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R
using CAN communication.
IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay.

HIGH SPEED OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Ignition switch ON.
Front wiper switch in HI.
BCM reads the combination switch position and transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R
using CAN communication.
IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay.

INTERMITTENT OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Ignition switch ON.
Front wiper switch INT.
BCM reads the combination switch position. BCM calculates the delay interval based on the table below
and then transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay only once.
BCM detects stop position of the front wiper motor based on the front wiper stop position signal received
from the IPDM E/R.
BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) again after the delay interval.

Revision: April 2013

WW-8

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A

B

C
JPLIA0094GB

D
Intermittent switch position

Length of delay

Delay interval (s)

7

0.4

6

1

5

Short
↑

2

4
3

E

3
↓
Long

F

5

2

10

1

16

G

AUTO STOP OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Front wiper switch is turned OFF.
BCM monitors wiper switch position by combination switch reading position function.
BCM stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R.
IPDM E/R detects the front wiper auto stop signal from the position of the front wiper motor (stop position/
except stop position).
When the front wiper request signal is stopped, IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay until the front
wiper motor returns to the stop position.
IPDM E/R turns the front wiper relay OFF when the front wiper motor has reached the stop position.

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

JPLIA0095GB

MIST OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Ignition switch ON.
Front washer switch in OFF position.
Front wiper switch in MIST position.
BCM reads the combination switch position and transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R
using CAN communication.
IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay.
The front wiper operates once after the front washer operation.

WIPER/WASHER OPERATION
1.

Ignition switch ON.

Revision: April 2013

WW-9

2014 Note

O

P

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
2. Front washer switch ON.
3. The front washer switch provides ground for the front and rear washer motor.
4. BCM reads the combination switch position and transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R
using CAN communication.
5. BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R using CAN communication.
6. IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay.
7. The front wiper operates.
NOTE:
BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) so that the front wiper operates approximately 3 times after
front washer switch OFF is detected.

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567476

ALLIA1298GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-10

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe

INFOID:0000000009541134

A

FAIL−SAFE OPERATION
IPDM E/R performs the fail-safe function when the front wiper auto stop circuit is malfunctioning. Refer to
PCS-18, «Fail-safe».

B

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Diagram

C

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM

INFOID:0000000009567483

D

E

F

G
AWLIA2158GB

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description

H
INFOID:0000000009567484

OUTLINE

I

The rear wiper is controlled by each function of BCM.
Control by BCM

J

• Combination switch reading function
• Rear wiper control function

REAR WIPER BASIC OPERATION

K

• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM controls the rear wiper to start or stop.

REAR WIPER ON OPERATION

WW

• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the rear wiper ON operating condition.
Rear wiper ON operating condition

— Ignition switch ON
— Rear wiper switch ON

M

REAR WIPER INT OPERATION

N

• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the INT operating condition.
Rear wiper INT operating condition

•
•

Ignition switch ON
Rear wiper switch INT
BCM controls the rear wiper to operate once.
BCM detects the rear wiper motor stopping position.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-11

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor after an intermittent from the stop of the rear wiper motor.

JPLIA0165GB

REAR WIPER AUTO STOP OPERATION
• BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper switch is turned OFF.
• BCM reads an auto stop signal from the rear wiper motor to detect a rear wiper motor position.
• When the rear wiper motor is at other than the stopping position, BCM continues to supply power to the rear
wiper motor until it returns to the stopping position.

JPLIA0166GB

NOTE:
BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

REAR WIPER OPERATION LINKED WITH WASHER
• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the washer linked operating condition of rear
wiper. When the rear washer switch is turned OFF, BCM controls rear wiper to operate approximately three
times.
Washer linked operating condition of rear wiper

— Ignition switch ON
— Rear washer switch ON (0.4 second or more)
• Front and rear washer motor becomes grounded through the combination switch (wiper and washer switch)
when the rear washer switch is turned ON.

REAR WIPER DROP WIPE OPERATION
• BCM controls the rear wiper to operate once according to the rear wiper drop wipe operating condition.
Rear wiper drop wipe operating condition

•

Ignition switch ON
Rear wiper switch OFF
Rear washer switch OFF
BCM controls the rear wiper so that it operates once time approximately three seconds later after the washer
interlocking operation of the rear wiper.

REAR WIPER FAIL−SAFE OPERATION
BCM performs the fail-safe function when the rear wiper auto stop circuit is malfunctioning. Refer to BCS-44,
«Fail-safe».

Revision: April 2013

WW-12

2014 Note

SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram

INFOID:0000000009567486

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
ALLIA1300GB

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-13

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM — COMMON ITEM)

INFOID:0000000009567679

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

ECU identification

The BCM part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.

Active Test

The BCM activates outputs to test components.

Work support

The settings for BCM functions can be changed.

Configuration

• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.

Work support

×

×

REAR DEFOGGER

×

×

BUZZER

×

×

Interior room lamp timer

INT LAMP

×

×

×

Exterior lamp

HEAD LAMP

×

×

×

Wiper and washer

WIPER

×

×

×

Turn signal and hazard warning lamps

FLASHER

×

×

Air conditioner

AIR CONDITIONER

×

Intelligent Key system

INTELLIGENT KEY

Combination switch

COMB SW

BCM

BCM

Immobilizer

IMMU

Interior room lamp battery saver

BATTERY SAVER

Vehicle security system

Door lock

DOOR LOCK

Rear window defogger
Warning chime

×

×

×

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

Active Test

×

Sub System

Configuration

Data Monitor

×

System

ECU identification

Self Diagnostic Result

Direct Diagnostic Mode

×

×

×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

THEFT ALM

×

×

×

RAP system

RETAINED PWR

×

Signal buffer system

SIGNAL BUFFER

×

×

WIPER

Revision: April 2013

WW-14

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM — WIPER)

INFOID:0000000009567680

A

DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit]

B

Description

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.

VEH SPEED 1 [km/h]

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.

FR WIPER HI [On/Off]
FR WIPER LOW [On/Off]
FR WASHER SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of wiper operation of combination switch.

C

D

FR WIPER INT [On/Off]
FR WIPER STOP [On/Off]

Indicates front wiper auto stop signal received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication
line.

INT VOLUME [1 − 7]

Indicates condition of intermittent wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WIPER ON [On/Off]
RR WIPER INT [On/Off]

E

F

Indicates condition of rear wiper operation of combination switch.

RR WASHER SW [On/Off]
RR WIPER STOP [On/Off]

G

Indicates rear wiper motor auto stop input from rear wiper motor.

ACTIVE TEST
Test Item

H

Description

FR WIPER

This test is able to check front wiper operation [INT/Lo/Hi/Off].

RR WIPER

This test is able to check rear wiper operation [On/Off].

I

WORK SUPPORT
Support Item
WIPER SPEED SETTING

Setting

J

Description

On

Front wiper intermittent time linked with vehicle speed and wiper dial position.

Off*

Front wiper intermittent time linked with wiper dial position.

K

* : Initial setting

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-15

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description

INFOID:0000000009567681

AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following conditions.
• Passenger door is open
• CONSULT is connected
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the driver door switch 10 times. Then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-84,
«Component Function Check».
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following operation sequence is repeated 3 times.
Operation sequence

Inspection location

Operation

1

Front wiper

LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds

2

•
•
•
•

10 seconds

3

Headlamp

LO for 10 seconds →HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

4

A/C compressor (magnet clutch)

ON ⇔ OFF 5 times

5

Cooling fan

LO for 5 seconds → MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds

Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp

Revision: April 2013

WW-16

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Concept of Auto Active Test
A

B

C

D

E

JMMIA0812GB

• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.

F

G

Diagnosis Chart in Auto Active Test
Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•

Inspection contents

Any of the following components do not operate
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Front fog lamp
Headlamp (HI, LO)
Front wiper (HI, LO)

Perform auto active test.
Does the applicable system operate?

Possible cause
YES

BCM signal input circuit

NO

• Lamp or motor
• Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and applicable system
• IPDM E/R

YES

• BCM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R

YES

• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R

NO

• Cooling fan motor
• Harness or connector between
IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R

Perform auto active test.
Does the magnet clutch operate?

A/C compressor does not operate

Perform auto active test.
Does the cooling fan operate?

Cooling fan does not operate

CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

INFOID:0000000009567682

P

APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Ecu Identification

The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

Self Diagnostic Result

The IPDM E/R self diagnostic results are displayed.

Data Monitor

The IPDM E/R input/output data is displayed in real time.

Revision: April 2013

H

WW-17

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Description

Active Test

The IPDM E/R activates outputs to test components.

CAN Diag Support Mntr

The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to PCS-20, «DTC Index».

DATA MONITOR
Main
Signals

Description

MOTOR FAN REQ [%]

×

Indicates cooling fan speed signal received from ECM on CAN communication
line

AC COMP REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates A/C compressor request signal received from ECM on CAN communication line

TAIL&CLR REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates position light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HL LO REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates low beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

HL HI REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates high beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

FR FOG REQ [On/Off]

×

Indicates front fog light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]

×

Indicates front wiper request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper auto stop signal

WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK]

×

Indicates condition of front wiper fail-safe operation

Monitor Item [Unit]

Indicates ignition switch ON signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IGN RLY1 -REQ [On/Off]
IGN RLY [On/Off]

×

Indicates condition of ignition relay

PUSH SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch

INTER/NP SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift position

ST RLY CONT [On/Off]

Indicates starter relay status signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

IHBT RLY -REQ [On/Off]

Indicates starter control relay signal received from BCM on CAN communication
line

ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI]

Indicates condition of starter relay and starter control relay

DETENT SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of CVT shift selector (park position switch)

DTRL REQ [Off]

Indicates daytime light request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HOOD SW [On/Off]

Indicates condition of hood switch

THFT HRN REQ [On/Off]

Indicates theft warning horn request signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

HORN CHIRP [On/Off]

Indicates horn reminder signal received from BCM on CAN communication line

ACTIVE TEST
Test item

Description

HORN

This test is able to check horn operation [On].

FRONT WIPER

This test is able to check wiper motor operation [Hi/Lo/Off].

Revision: April 2013

WW-18

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item

Description

MOTOR FAN

This test is able to check cooling fan operation [4/3/2/1].

EXTERNAL LAMPS

This test is able to check external lamp operation [Fog/Hi/Lo/TAIL/Off].

A

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR

B

Refer to LAN-12, «CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor».
C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-19

2014 Note

BCM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference

INFOID:0000000009541143

ECU

Reference
BCS-28, «Reference Value»

BCM

BCS-44, «Fail-safe»
BCS-46, «DTC Inspection Priority Chart»
BCS-46, «DTC Index»
PCS-13, «Reference Value»

IPDM E/R

PCS-18, «Fail-safe»
PCS-20, «DTC Index»

Revision: April 2013

WW-20

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

WIRING DIAGRAM

A

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

INFOID:0000000009541144

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

AALWA0632GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-21

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1385GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-22

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O
AALIA1386GB

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-23

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1387GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-24

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram

A
INFOID:0000000009578851

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P
AALWA0633GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-25

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1388GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-26

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O
AALIA1389GB

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-27

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >

AALIA1390GB

Revision: April 2013

WW-28

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O
ABLIA4881GB

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-29

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow

INFOID:0000000009541145

WORK FLOW

AWLIA1887GB

DETAILED FLOW

1. REVIEW CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
Review customer complaint. Try to obtain detailed information about the conditions when the symptom occurs.
>> GO TO 2

2. VERIFY THE SYMPTOM
Verify the symptom by performing an operational check. Refer to WW-8, «FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
SYSTEM : System Description».
>> GO TO 3

3.PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM
Diagnose the vehicle by performing the appropriate trouble diagnosis. Refer to WW-46, «Symptom Table».
>> GO TO 4

4. REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specific parts.
>> GO TO 5

5. FINAL CHECK

Revision: April 2013

WW-30

2014 Note

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Perform a final inspection of the system.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-31

2014 Note

WIPER AND WASHER FUSE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
WIPER AND WASHER FUSE
Description
Component

INFOID:0000000009541146

Capacity

Fuse No.

Location

Front wiper motor

30 A

39

IPDM E/R

Front and rear washer motor

10 A

6

Fuse block (J/B)

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541147

1. CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Component

Capacity

Fuse No.

Location

Front wiper motor

30 A

39

IPDM E/R

Front and rear washer motor

10 A

6

Fuse block (J/B)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> Inspection End.

Revision: April 2013

WW-32

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009541148

1.CHECK FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION

B

IPDM E/R AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-9, «Diagnosis Description».
Check that the front wiper operates on LO operation.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select FR WIPER of BCM (WIPER) active test item.
2. Check front wiper operation.
1.
2.

LO
OFF

C

D

: Front wiper (LO) operation
: Front wiper OFF

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front wiper motor LO circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-33, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541149

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram».
H

1. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR FUSE
1.
2.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.

I

Component

Capacity

Fuse No.

Location

Front wiper motor

30 A

39

IPDM E/R

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2

J

K

2. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select FR WIPER of BCM (WIPER) active test item.
While performing the active test, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

WW

M
Terminals
(+)

(-)

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

17

Ground

FRONT WIPER

Voltage (Approx.)

LO

Battery voltage

OFF

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

WW-33

O

P

3. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

N

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R

Front wiper motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

17

E1

3

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

WW-34

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009541150

1.CHECK FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION

B

IPDM E/R AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-9, «Diagnosis Description».
Check that the front wiper operates on HI operation.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select FR WIPER of BCM (WIPER) active test item.
2. Check front wiper operation.
1.
2.

HI
OFF

C

D

: Front wiper (HI) operation
: Front wiper OFF

E

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front wiper motor HI circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-35, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541151

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram».
H

1. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR FUSE
1.
2.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.

I

Component

Capacity

Fuse No.

Location

Front wiper motor

30 A

39

IPDM E/R

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2

J

K

2. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select FR WIPER of BCM (WIPER) active test item.
While performing the active test, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

WW

M
Terminals
(+)

(-)

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E45

18

Ground

FRONT WIPER

Voltage (Approx.)

HI

Battery voltage

OFF

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

WW-35

O

P

3. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

N

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R

Front wiper motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E45

18

E1

5

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

WW-36

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009541152

1. CHECK FRONT WIPER (AUTO STOP) SIGNAL

B

1.
2.
3.

C

Select FR WIPER STOP of BCM (WIPER) data monitor item.
Operate the front wiper.
Check that FR WIPER STOP changes from ON to OFF according to the wiper position.
Data monitor

Condition

FR WIPER STOP

Front wiper motor

Status

Stop position

ON

Except stop position

OFF

D

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front wiper auto stop signal circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-37, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541153

F

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram».

G

1. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (AUTO STOP) OUTPUT VOLTAGE

H

1.
2.

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
I

Terminals
(+)

(-)

IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E46

74

Ground

FRONT WIPER

Voltage (Approx.)

Except stop position

Battery voltage

Stop position

0V

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for intermittent failure.
NO
>> GO TO 2

J

K

WW

2. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (AUTO STOP) SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

M

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R and front wiper motor.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

N
IPDM E/R
Connector

Terminal

E46

74

Ground

Continuity

O

No

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair or replace harness.
NO
>> GO TO 3.

P

3. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (AUTO STOP) CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

WW-37

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
IPDM E/R

Front wiper motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

E46

74

E1

4

Continuity
Yes

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: April 2013

WW-38

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT

A

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541154

B

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram».
C

1. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front wiper motor.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
Front wiper motor
Connector

Terminal

E1

2

Ground

D

Continuity

E

Yes

F

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front wiper motor ground circuit is normal.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-39

2014 Note

WASHER MOTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

WASHER MOTOR CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541155

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram», WW-25, «Wiring Diagram».

1. CHECK FRONT AND REAR WASHER MOTOR FUSE
1.
2.

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Component

Capacity

Fuse No.

Location

Front and rear washer motor

10A

6

Fuse block (J/B)

Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK FRONT AND REAR WASHER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect front and rear washer motor.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front and rear washer motor harness connector and ground.

Front washer operation

Terminals
(+)

(-)

Front and rear washer motor
Connector

Terminal

E2

1

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

Washer switch

OFF

0

ON

Battery voltage

Rear washer operation

Terminals
(+)

(-)

Front and rear washer motor
Connector

Terminal

E2

2

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)

Washer switch

OFF

0

ON

Battery voltage

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front and rear washer motor. Refer to WW-54, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK WASHER SWITCH

Check washer switch. Refer to WW-41, «Component Inspection».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair harness between front and rear washer motor and washer switch.
NO
>> Replace washer switch. Refer to WW-63, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WW-40

2014 Note

WASHER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

WASHER SWITCH

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009541156

• Washer switch is integrated with the combination switch.
• Combination switch (wiper and washer switch) switches polarity between front washer operating and rear
washer operating to supply power and ground to the front and rear washer motor.

B

C

D

E

F

ALLIA0350GB

Component Inspection

INFOID:0000000009541157

H

1. CHECK FRONT WASHER SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

G

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch (wiper and washer switch).
Check continuity between the combination switch (wiper and washer switch) terminals.

I

A: Terminal 4

J

B: Terminal 6
C: Terminal 3

K
D: Terminal 1

WW

JPLIA0164GB

Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)

Condition

Continuity

Front washer switch ON

Yes

M

Terminal
1

6

3

4

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (wiper and washer switch). Refer to WW-63, «Removal and Installation».

2. CHECK REAR WASHER SWITCH
1.

O

P

Check continuity between the combination switch (wiper and washer switch) terminals.

Revision: April 2013

N

WW-41

2014 Note

WASHER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A: Terminal 4
B: Terminal 6
C: Terminal 3

D: Terminal 1
JPLIA0164GB

Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)

Condition

Continuity

Rear washer switch ON

Yes

Terminal
1

4

6

3

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Wiper and washer switch is normal.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (wiper and washer switch). Refer to WW-63, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WW-42

2014 Note

REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578887

1. CHECK REAR WIPER ON OPERATION
1.
2.

B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select «RR WIPER» of BCM active test item.
While operating the test item, check rear wiper operation.
ON
OFF

C

: Rear wiper ON operation
: Stop the rear wiper.

D

Is rear wiper operation normal?
YES >> Rear wiper motor circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-43, «Diagnosis Procedure».

E

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578888

F

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-25, «Wiring Diagram».
G

1. CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

H

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear wiper motor.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select «RR WIPER» of BCM active test item.
While operating the test item, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

J

Terminals

Test item

(+)
BCM

(−)

Connector

Terminal

M100

54

I

Ground

Voltage
(Approx.)
REAR WIPER
ON

Battery voltage

OFF

0V

Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> GO TO 3

K

WW

M

2. CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.

N

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground.
Rear wiper motor
Connector

Terminal

D502

4

Ground

Continuity
Yes

P

Does continuity exist?
YES >> Replace rear wiper motor. Refer to WW-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

3. CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1.

Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear wiper motor harness connector.

Revision: April 2013

WW-43

O

2014 Note

REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM

Rear wiper motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M100

54

D502

2

Continuity
Yes

Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

4. CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

54

Ground

Continuity
No

Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair or replace harness.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WW-44

2014 Note

REAR WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >

REAR WIPER AUTO STOP SIGNAL CIRCUIT

A

Component Function Check

INFOID:0000000009578889

1. CHECK REAR WIPER (AUTO STOP) OPERATION
1.
2.
3.

B

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select «WIPER» of BCM data monitor item.
Operate the rear wiper.
Check that «RR WIPER STOP» changes to «ON» and «OFF» linked with the wiper operation.
Monitor item

Condition

RR WIPER STOP

Rear wiper motor

C

Monitor status

Stop position

ON

Except stop position

OFF

D

E

Is the status of item normal?
YES >> Rear wiper auto stop signal circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-45, «Diagnosis Procedure».

F

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009578890

G

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-25, «Wiring Diagram».
H

1. CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR AUTO STOP CIRCUITS FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and rear wiper motor.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminals and rear wiper motor harness connector terminals.

I

J
BCM

Rear wiper motor

Connector

Terminal

Connector

Terminal

M100

44

D502

3

Continuity
Yes

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

K

WW

2. CHECK AUTO STOP CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
M

Check continuity between BCM harness connector terminals and ground.
BCM
Connector

Terminal

M100

44

Ground

Continuity

N

No

Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-45

2014 Note

WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table

INFOID:0000000009541158

CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing the diagnosis by symptom. Perform the
diagnosis by DTC if DTC is detected.
Symptom

HI only

Possible malfunction

Reference

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor

Front wiper motor (HI) circuit
Refer to WW-35, «Component
Function Check».

Front wiper request signal (IPDM E/R)

Front wiper does not operate in…

LO and INT

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor

Front wiper motor (LO) circuit
Refer to WW-33, «Component
Function Check».

Front wiper request signal (IPDM E/R)

INT only

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Front wiper request signal (IPDM E/R)

Any mode

—
Front wiper auto stop signal (IPDM E/R)

Front wiper does not
stop in…

Revision: April 2013

Any mode

Check FR WIP REQ in DATA
MONITOR of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-10, «CONSULT
Function (IPDM E/R)».

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• BCM

WW-46

Check FR WIP REQ in DATA
MONITOR of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-10, «CONSULT
Function (IPDM E/R)».
Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».
Check FR WIP REQ in DATA
MONITOR of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-10, «CONSULT
Function (IPDM E/R)».
Refer to WW-49, «Diagnosis
Procedure».
Refer to WW-37, «Component
Function Check».
Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

2014 Note

WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Front wiper operates abnormally because…

Possible malfunction

Reference

Intermittent adjustments cannot be made.

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

Wiper/washer will not
operate together.

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor

Front wiper auto stop signal
circuit
Refer to WW-37, «Component
Function Check».

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• BCM
• Harness between rear wiper motor and
BCM
• Harness between rear wiper motor and
ground
• Rear wiper motor

Rear wiper motor circuit
Refer to WW-43, «Diagnosis
Procedure».

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• BCM

Rear wiper motor circuit
Refer to WW-43, «Diagnosis
Procedure».

WW

ON only

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

M

INT only

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• BCM
• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between rear wiper motor and
BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

Wipers will not return to
stop position (repeatedly operates for 10
seconds and then
stops for 20 seconds.
Wipers then stop operating).

ON only

INT only
Rear wiper does not operate.

ON and INT

Rear wiper does not
stop.

Wiper is not linked to
the washer operation.

BCM
Rear wiper does not operate normally.

Rear wiper does not return to the Stop position
(Stops after a five-second operation).
Rear wiper stops after
operating for five seconds when ignition
switch is turned ON.

Revision: April 2013

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

N

O

—

P
• BCM
• Harness between rear wiper motor and
BCM
• Rear wiper motor

WW-47

Rear wiper auto stop signal
circuit
Refer to WW-45, «Diagnosis
Procedure».

2014 Note

WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom

Front and rear washer
motor does not operate.

Revision: April 2013

Front and rear washer
motor does not operate
when the washing
windshield.

Possible malfunction

Reference

• Combination switch (wiper and washer
switch)
• Harness between combination switch (wiper and washer switch) and BCM
• BCM

Combination switch (wiper
and washer switch)
Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom
Table».

• Harness between rear combination switch
(wiper and washer switch) and front and
rear washer motor.
• Front and rear washer motor

Front and rear washer motor
circuit
Refer to WW-40, «Diagnosis
Procedure».

WW-48

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009541159

The front wiper does not operate under any operation conditions.

B

Diagnosis Procedure

INFOID:0000000009541160

C

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to WW-21, «Wiring Diagram».
D

1. CHECK WIPER RELAY OPERATION
IPDM E/R AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-10, «CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)».
Check that the front wiper operates on LO and HI operation.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select FR WIPER of BCM (WIPER) active test item.
2. Check front wiper operation.

E

1.
2.

LO
HI
OFF

F

: Front wiper LO operation
: Front wiper HI operation
: Front wiper stop

G

H

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5
NO
>> GO TO 2

2. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR FUSE

I

Refer to WW-32, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 3

J

3. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT

K

Refer to WW-39, «Diagnosis Procedure».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.

WW

4. CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE

M

1.
2.
3.

N

Turn the ignition switch ON.
With CONSULT, select FRONT WIPER of IPDM E/R ACTIVE TEST item.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground while wipers are operating.
Terminals
(+)

(−)

IPDM E/R
Connector

FRONT WIPER

Voltage (Approx.)

LO

Battery voltage

OFF

0V

HI

Battery voltage

OFF

0V

Terminal
17

Ground

E45
18

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».
Revision: April 2013

WW-49

2014 Note

O

P

FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».

5. CHECK FRONT WIPER REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT, select FR WIP REQ in DATA MONITOR of IPDM E/R.
Switch the front wiper switch to HI and LO.
Check the status of FR WIP REQ while operating the switch.
Data monitor

FR WIP REQ

Condition

Status

Front wiper switch OFF

STOP

Front wiper switch LO

LOW

Front wiper switch HI

HI

Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> GO TO 6

6. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH)

Check combination switch (wiper and washer switch). Refer to BCS-66, «Symptom Table».
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, «Removal and Installation».
NO
>> Repair or replace the applicable parts.

Revision: April 2013

WW-50

2014 Note

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION

A

Description

INFOID:0000000009541161

FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION

B

IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.
When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop.

C

Ignition switch
ON

Front wiper switch

Front wiper stop position signal

OFF

The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.

ON

The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.

NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.

REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
• BCM may stop rear wiper to protect the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper is stopped for 5 seconds or
more due to a snowfall.
• Rear wiper operates normally one minute after the obstacles are removed with rear wiper OFF.

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-51

2014 Note

WASHER TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WASHER TANK
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009578899

ALLIA1318ZZ

1.

Washer tank cap

A.

Front washer motor seal

2.

Washer tank

3.

Front washer motor

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009578900

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove washer tank clip (A) using a suitable tool.

ALKIA3175ZZ

Revision: April 2013

WW-52

2014 Note

WASHER TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Release the front washer tube (2) and rear washer tube (1) from
washer tank (3).
5. Release the harness (4) from the washer tank (3).

A

B

C
ALLIA1305ZZ

6.
7.

D

Disconnect the harness connector from the washer pump.
Remove bolts (A) and washer tank (1).

E

F

G
ALLIA1303ZZ

H

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, add water to the top of the washer tank inlet to check that no leaks exist.
• Fill washer tank with specified amount of fluid. Refer to WW-71, «Specifications».

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-53

2014 Note

FRONT WASHER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT WASHER MOTOR
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606283

ALLIA1318ZZ

1.

Washer tank cap

A.

Front washer motor seal

2.

Washer tank

3.

Front washer motor

Front

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606284

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the front washer motor.
Remove front washer tube and rear washer tube from front washer motor.
Remove front washer motor from washer tank.
Remove front washer motor seal from washer tank.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate or damage the front washer motor seal when installing the front washer motor.

Revision: April 2013

WW-54

2014 Note

FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606306

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
ALLIA1306ZZ

1.

Front washer nozzle (RH)

2.

Front washer tube

3.

Front washer motor

4.

Washer tank

5.

Front washer nozzle (LH)

A.

To rear washer

B.

Washer pump seal

J

Clip

K

WASHER NOZZLE
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606285

WW

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-23, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect front washer tube from front washer nozzle (1).
Place cowl top cover (2) up side down and release front washer
nozzle pawl (A) using a suitable tool to remove.

M

N

O

P
AWLIA2161ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, adjust the nozzle spray pattern. Refer to WW-56, «WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment».
Revision: April 2013

WW-55

2014 Note

FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009606286

ALLIA1307ZZ

1.

Windshield glass

2.

Black printed area line

3.

Front washer nozzle (LH/RH)
215.7 mm (8.49 in)

A.

Center line

B.

509.7 mm (20.07 in)

C.

D.

614.5 mm (24.19 in)

E.

329.1 mm (12.96 in)

F.

41.0 mm (1.61 in)

G.

379.6 mm (14.94 in)

H.

161.1 mm (6.34 in)

J.

58.6 mm (2.31 in)

K.

58.0 mm (2.28 in)

M.

142.0 mm (5.59 in)

N.

365.9 mm (14.41 in)

O.

54.7 mm (2.15 in)

P.

492.5 mm (19.39 in)

Q.

652.2 mm (25.68 in)

R.

174.3 mm (6.86 in)

S.

520.7 mm (20.50 in)

If washer nozzle (1) spray pattern is not within specification, adjust
using a suitable tool (A).

JMLIA1327ZZ

WASHER TUBE
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606287

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Remove front washer tube from washer pump.
Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-23, «Removal and Installation».
Release the clips that retain the front washer tube to the vehicle body using a suitable tool and remove.

Revision: April 2013

WW-56

2014 Note

FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

A

WASHER TUBE : Inspection

INFOID:0000000009606329

B

INSPECTION
Check that air can pass through the nozzle (1) by blowing into the
nozzle and that air cannot flow in the opposite direction.
O: Air can flow
X: Air cannot flow

C

D

E
JMLIA1326ZZ

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-57

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT WIPER ARM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606288

ALLIA1310ZZ

1.

Wiper arm cap (LH/RH)

2.

Wiper arm (LH)

3.

Wiper blade (LH)

4.

Wiper arm (RH)

5.

Wiper blade (RH)

6.

Front wiper drive

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606289

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open hood.
Operate wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
Remove wiper arm cap.
Remove wiper arm nut and wiper arm.

INSTALLATION
1.

Clean wiper arm mount as shown. This will reduce the possibility
of wiper arm looseness.

ELH0717D

2.
3.

Operate wiper motor to move the wiper to the auto stop position.
Adjust the front wiper blade position. Refer to WW-59, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

WW-58

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Install front wiper arm and front wiper arm nut.
CAUTION:
Tighten front wiper arm nut to specification. Refer to WW-58, «Exploded View».
5. Install front wiper arm cap.
6. Check that wiper blades stop at the specified position. Refer to WW-59, «Adjustment».

Adjustment

A

B
INFOID:0000000009606290

C

WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K
ALLIA1309ZZ

WW
1.

Wiper blade (RH)

2.

Front fender (RH)

3.

Windshield glass

4.

Cowl top cover

5.

Wiper blade (LH)

C.

28.0 ± 7.5 mm (1.10 ± 0.30 in)

D.

60.7 ± 7.5 mm (2.39 ± 0.30 in)

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-59

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER BLADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT WIPER BLADE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606291

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Lift up wiper arm and set to the position where wiper arm can be locked back.
Push the release tab (A) of the front wiper blade (1), then move
the front wiper blade down the front wiper arm (2) to remove.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the wiper arm onto the windshield
glass.

JMLIA1044ZZ

INSTALLATION
Insert the front wiper blade onto the front wiper arm until it clicks into place.

Revision: April 2013

WW-60

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606292

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
ALLIA1310ZZ

1.

Wiper arm cap (LH/RH)

2.

Wiper arm (LH)

3.

Wiper blade (LH)

4.

Wiper arm (RH)

5.

Wiper blade (RH)

6.

Front wiper drive assembly

Removal and Installation

J

INFOID:0000000009606293

K

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-23, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from front wiper motor.
Remove bolts and front wiper drive assembly.

WW

INSTALLATION

M

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten front wiper drive assembly bolts to specification. Refer to WW-61, «Exploded View».

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-61

2014 Note

FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606294

ALLIA1311ZZ

1.

Wiper linkage 2

4.

Front wiper drive

2.

Wiper linkage 1

Disassembly and Assembly

3.

Front wiper motor

INFOID:0000000009606295

DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.

3.

Remove front wiper drive assembly. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».
Remove wiper linkage 1 and 2 from the front wiper drive.
CAUTION:
Do not bend the linkage or damage the plastic part of the ball joint when removing the wiper linkage.
Remove screws and wiper motor from front wiper drive.

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.

3.
4.

Install wiper motor screws and wiper motor to front wiper drive.
Install wiper linkage 2 to the front wiper drive.
CAUTION:
• Do not drop wiper motor or cause it to come into contact with other parts.
• Be careful of the grease condition at the wiper motor and wiper linkage joint (retainer). Apply a
suitable multi−purpose grease if necessary.
Install wiper linkage 1 to the wiper motor and the front wiper drive.
Install front wiper drive assembly. Refer to WW-61, «Removal and Installation».

Revision: April 2013

WW-62

2014 Note

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

A

Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009578916

The wiper and washer switch is part of the combination switch. Refer to EXL-112, «Removal and Installation».

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-63

2014 Note

REAR WIPER ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR WIPER ARM
Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606296

ALLIA1312ZZ

1.

Rear wiper motor

2.

Rear wiper arm seal

4.

Rear wiper arm

5.

Rear wiper blade

Removal and Installation

3.

Rear wiper arm cover

INFOID:0000000009606297

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Operate the rear wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
Remove rear wiper arm cover.
Remove nut and rear wiper arm.

INSTALLATION
1.

Clean the rear wiper arm as shown. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness.

SKIA0082J

2.
3.
4.
5.

Adjust the rear wiper blade position. Refer to WW-65, «Adjustment».
Install the rear wiper arm and nut.
Install the rear wiper arm cover.
Check that the rear wiper blade stops at the specified position. Refer to WW-65, «Adjustment».

Revision: April 2013

WW-64

2014 Note

REAR WIPER ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009606298

A

WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
B

C

D

E

F

ALLIA1313ZZ

1.

Back door window glass

A.

30.7 ± 7.5 mm (1.21 ± 0.30 in)

2.

Back door

3.

G

Rear wiper blade

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-65

2014 Note

REAR WIPER BLADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR WIPER BLADE
Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606299

REMOVAL
1.
2.

Lift the rear wiper arm and blade assembly away from the back window glass.
Push the release tab (A) of the rear wiper blade (1), then move
the rear wiper blade down the rear wiper arm (2) to remove.

JMLIA1044ZZ

INSTALLATION
1.

Insert the rear wiper blade onto the rear wiper arm until it clicks into place.

Revision: April 2013

WW-66

2014 Note

REAR WIPER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR WIPER MOTOR

A

Exploded View

INFOID:0000000009606300

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I
ALLIA1312ZZ

1.

Rear wiper motor

2.

Rear wiper arm seal

4.

Rear wiper arm

5.

Rear wiper blade

Removal and Installation

3.

Rear wiper arm cover

J

INFOID:0000000009606301

K

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-64, «Removal and Installation».
WW
Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, «BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the harness connector from the rear wiper motor.
M
Remove bolts and rear wiper motor.

INSTALLATION

N

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-67

2014 Note

REAR WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >

REAR WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
Component Parts Location

INFOID:0000000009606337

ALLIA1321ZZ

1.

Grommet

2.

Rear washer nozzle

4.

Front washer motor

5.

Washer tank

3.

Rear washer tube
Clip

WASHER NOZZLE
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation

INFOID:0000000009606302

REMOVAL
1.

Disconnect the rear washer tube grommet (1) from the back
door.

ALKIA3188ZZ

2.
3.

Disconnect the rear washer tube from the rear washer nozzle.
Remove the rear washer nozzle.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Adjust the rear washer nozzle spray pattern. Refer to WW-68, «WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment».

WASHER NOZZLE : Adjustment

INFOID:0000000009606303

WASHER NOZZLE SPRAY PATTERN

Revision: April 2013

WW-68

2014 Note

REAR WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A

B

C

D

E

F

ALLIA1314ZZ

1.

Rear washer nozzle

2.

Back door window glass

3.

Black printed area line

A.

30.8 mm (1.21 in)

B.

23.6 mm (0.93 in)

C.

21.1 mm (0.83 in)

G

If washer nozzle (1) spray pattern is not within specification, adjust
using a suitable tool (A).
H

I

J
JMLIA1327ZZ

WASHER TUBE
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation

K
INFOID:0000000009606304

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

WW

Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, «FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation».
Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, «Removal and Installation».
Disconnect the rear washer tube from the washer pump.
Remove dash side finisher (RH). Refer to INT-22, «DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation».
Remove front and rear kicking plate (RH). Refer to INT-20, «KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation».
Remove center pillar lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-23, «CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».
Remove rear seat back (RH). Refer to SE-19, «SEATBACK : Removal and Installation».
Remove luggage side upper finisher (RH). Refer to INT-33, «LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation».

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-69

2014 Note

REAR WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
9. Disconnect the rear washer tube grommet (1) from the back
door.

ALKIA3188ZZ

10. Disconnect the rear washer tube from the rear washer nozzle.
11. Release the clips using a suitable tool and remove the rear washer tube.

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: April 2013

WW-70

2014 Note

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

A

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Specifications

INFOID:0000000009578817

B

WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
C

Windshield washer fluid capacity

2.5

Windshield washer fluid specification

(2 5/8 US qt, 2 1/4 Imp qt)

Refer to MA-12, «Fluids and Lubricants».

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

WW

M

N

O

P

Revision: April 2013

WW-71

2014 Note